GRUNDRISS DER INDO-ARISCHEN PHILOLOGIE UND ALTERTUMSKUNDE

(ENCYCLOPEDU OF INDO-ARYAN RESEARCH)

BEGRÜNDET VON G. BÜHLER, FORTGESETZT VON F. KIELHORN,
HERAUSGEGEBEN VON H. LÜDERS UND J. WACKERNAGEL.

X. BAND, 4 . HEFT.

VEDIC GRAMMAR

BY

A. A. MACDON E L L

STRASSBURG
VERLAG VON K A R L J. TRÜBNER
1910.
The printing was commenced in May, 1907, and
afterwards delayed by the death of the editor
Prof. Kielhorn.
GRUNDRISS DER INDO-ARISCHEN PHILOLOGIE UND ALTERTUMSKUNDE
(ENCYCLOPEDIA OF INDO-ARYAN RESEARCH)

B E G R Ü N D E T V O N G. B Ü H L E R , F O R T G E S E T Z T V O N F. K I E L H O R N .

I. BAND, 4. HEFT.

VEDIC GRAMMAR
BY

A. A. M A C D O N E L L .

INTRODUCTION.
i. General Scope of this Work.—Vedic grammar has never till now
been treated separately and as a whole. Both in India and in the West
the subject has hitherto been handled only in connexion with Classical
Sanskrit Hundreds of Pariini's Sutras deal with the language of the Vedas;
but the account they give of it is anything but comprehensive. In the West,
BENFEY was the first, more than half a century ago (1852), to combine a
description of the linguistic peculiarities of the Vedas with an account of the
traditional matter of Panini; but as Vedic studies were at that time still in
their infancy, only the Samaveda 1 and about one-fourth of the Rgveda 2
having as yet been published, the Vedic material utilized in his large grammar 3
was necessarily very limited in extent In WHITNEY'S work* the language of
the Vedas, which is much more fully represented, is treated in its historical
connexion with Classical Sanskrit. Partly for this reason, his work does not
supply a definite account of the grammar of the Samhitas as compared
with that of the later phases of the language; thus what is peculiar to the
Brahmagas or to a particular Samhita is often not apparent Professor
WACKERNAGEL'S grammars, which when finished will present the ancient language
of India more completely than any other work on the subject, deals with
the combined Vedic and post-Vedic material from the point of view of
Comparative Philology. Different sections or individual points of Vedic
grammar have been the subject of separately published treatises or of special
articles scattered in various Oriental and philological journals or other works
of a miscellaneous character. It is advisable that all this as well as additional
material6 should now be brought together so as to afford a general survey
of the subject.
In view of the prominent position occupied by the Indo-Aryan branch
in Comparative Philology and of the fact that the language of the Vedas

' Edited by BENFEY, with German trans-. WACKERNAGEL, I. Lautlehre, Gottingen 1896;
lation and glossary, L e i p z i g 1848. II, 1. Einleitung zur Wortlehre. Nominal-
* Vol. I edited by WAX MULLER, London komposition, 1905. (Cp. BARTHOLOMAE, Bei-
1849, vol. v i 1 8 7 5 ; 2nd ed. L o n d o n 1 8 9 0 — j t r a g e zur altindischen Grammatik, Z D M G .
92; edited by AUFRECHT, Berlin 1861 and 50, 6 7 4 - 7 3 5 ) .
1863 (vols. VI and VII of Indische Studien), 6 Such additional material is supplied in
ed. Bonn 1877. this work from collections made for me by
3 Vollständige Grammatik der Sanskrit- my pupils Prof. H . C. NORMAN (Benares)
sprache, L e i p z i g 1852. from the Vajasaneyi Samhita, and Mr. A . B .
4 A Sanskrit G r a m m a r , L e i p z i g 1879; y d KEITH from the Taittirlya Samhita, the
ed. 1896. Mantras in the A i t a r e y a A r a n y a k a , and the
5 Altindische Grammatik von JACOB Khilas of the R g v e d a .
Indo-ariichc Philologie. I. 4. j
2

represents the foundation of the subsequent strata, it seems important for the
sake of clearness and definiteness that the earliest phase should be treated as
a whole independently of later developments. The present work will therefore
deal with the grammar of only the Mantra portions of the Samhitas; that is
to say, it will embrace the whole of the Rgveda, the A t h a r v a v e d a t h e
Samaveda 2 , and the Vajasaneyi S a m h i t a b u t will exclude those portions of
the Taittiriya Samhita 4 , the Maitrayani Samhita 5 and the Kathaka 6 which
have the character of Brahmanas 7 . Reference will also be made to Mantra
material not found in the canonical texts of the Samhitas, that is, to the
Khilas 8 of the Rgveda and the occasional Mantras of this type occurring
in the Brahmanas 9 and Sutras. As the linguistic material of the Rgveda is
more ancient, extensive and authentic than that of the other Samhitas, all
of which borrow largely from that text 10 , it is taken as the basis of the
present work. Hence all forms stated without comment belong to the Rgveda,
though they may occur in other Samhitas as well. From the other Vedas,
such matter only is added as occurs in their independent parts or, if borrowed
from the Rgveda, appears in an altered form, the source being in such cases
indicated by an abbreviation in parentheses (as VS., TS., AV.). The addition,
of the abbreviation 'RV.' means that the form in question occurs in the
Rgveda only.
2. Verbal Authenticity of the T e x t s 1 1 . — In dealing with the linguistic
material of the Samhitas the question of the authenticity of the forms which
it embraces is of great importance. What guarantees then do we possess
that the original form of the texts handed down by tradition has not in the
course of ages undergone modification and modernization in respect to
vocabulary, phonetics, and grammatical forms? This question must first be
applied to the Rgveda, the oldest of the Samhitas, which forms the very
foundation of Vedic tradition. The evidence of the SarvanukramanI", which
states the number of stanzas, the metre, and the deity for every hymn of
the RV., shows that in general extent, form, and matter, this Samhita was
in the Sutra period the same as now. The Pratisakhya ,J demonstrates that
its phonetic character was also the same. Yaska's commentary 14 proves that,

I Edited (Samhita text only) by ROTH and ! Mass., 1904); SCHEFTELOWITZ, D i e A p o k r y -

WHITNEY, Berlin 1 8 5 6 (Index Verborum in j phen des R g v e d a e d i t i o n of the Khilas),
J A O S . , vol. XII); translated by WHITNEY Breslau 1906 (cp. OLDENBERG, Göttingische
(Books I—xtx), with a critical and exegetical 1 Gelehrte Anzeigen 1 9 0 7 , 2 1 0 — 4 1 ) .
commentary, C a m b r i d g e , Mass., 1 9 0 5 (vols, 9 C p . OLDENBERG, op. c i t . , 3 5 9 f f . ; AUF-
v i i and v i u of the H a r v a r d Oriental Series); RECHT, D a s A i t a r e y a B r i h m a n a , B o n n 1 8 7 9 ,
also edited by SHANKAR P. PANDIT (both p. 4 2 0 f.
10
Samhita and P a d a text), B o m b a y 1 8 9 5 — 9 9 . Cp. OLDENBERG, op. cit., chapter m ;
* Besides BENFEY'S edition also that of MACDONELL, History of Sanskrit Literature,
SATYAVRATA SÄMASRAMI, 5 vols., Calcutta 1 8 1 and 186.
1 8 7 4 — 7 8 (Bibliotheca Indica). « Cp. OLDENBERG, op. cit., chapter ui
3 Edited b y WEBER, with the commentary ( 2 7 1 — 3 6 9 ) D e r R i k t e x t und der T e x t der
of Mahldhara, L o n d o n and Berlin 1 8 5 2 . ¡ j ü n g e r e n Samhitäs und d e r Brähmapas;
4 E d i t e d by WEBER (vols, x i and x u of | LUDWIG, U e b e r die K r i t i k des R g v e d a -
Indische Studien), Berlin 1 8 7 1 — 7 2 . I T e x t e s , A b h a n d l u n g e n d. k . b ö h m . Gesell-
5 Edited by L . v . SCHROEDER, L e i p z i g ! schaft der W i s s e n s c h a f t e n , P r a g 1 8 8 9 .
1881—86. ! 1 2 E d i t e d b y A . A . MACDONELL, O x f o r d
6 Edited by L . v . SCHROEDER, vol. 1 1886.
(books 1—xviil), L e i p z i g 1900. 13 T h e R g v e d a PrätiSäkhya, edited with
7 Cp. OLDENBERG, D i e H y m n e n d e s R i g v e d a , G e r m a n translation b y MAX MÜLLER, L e i p z i g
B a n d I (Prolegomena), Berlin 1888, p. 294fr. 1 8 5 6 — 6 9 ; edited with UVATA'S commentary,
8 S e e AUFRECHT, D i e H y m n e n des R i g v e d a » , Benares Sanskrit Series 1894.
vol. n , 6 7 2 — 8 8 ; MAX MÜLLER, R g v e d a » , M Y a s k a ' s Nirukta, edited by ROTH, Göt-
vol. i v , 5 1 9 — 4 1 ; cp. MACDONELL, BJ-had- tingen 1 8 5 2 ; edited b y SATYAVRATA SAMA-
devatä, vol. I, introduction, $ 1 5 (Cambridge, ¿RAMI, 4 vols, (U—iv with the commentary
 INTRODUCTION. 3
as regards the limited number of stanzas explained by him, his text was
verbally identical with ours. The frequent statements of the Brahma^as
concerning the number of verses contained in a hymn or liturgical group
agree with the extant text of the Rgveda. The explanatory discussions of the
Brahmanas further indicate that the text of the Rgveda must have been
regarded as immutably fixed by that time. Thus the Satapatha Brahma$a,
while speaking of the possibility of varying some of the formulas of the
Yajurveda, rejects as impossible the notion of changing the text of a certain
verse of the Rgveda as proposed by some teachers 1 .
Probably soon after the completion of the actual Brahmanas the hymns
of the Rgveda were fixed in the phonetic form of the Samhita text; and
after no long interval, in order to guard that text from the possibility of any
change or loss, the Pada text was constituted by Sakalya, whom the Araijyakas
or appendixes to the Brahmanas, the Nirukta, and the Rgveda Pratisakhya
presuppose 1 . By this analysis of the Samhita text, its every word, stated in
a separate form as unaffected by the rules of euphonic combination, has
come down to us without change for about 2,500 years.
The Sainhita text itself, however, only represented the close of a long
period in which the hymns, as originally composed by the seers, were handed
down by oral tradition. For the condition of the text even in this earlier
period we possess a large body of evidence corresponding to that of Mss.
for other literary monuments. It was then that the text of the other Vedas,
each of which borrowed extensively from the Rgveda, was constituted. With
each of them came into being a new and separate tradition in which the
borrowed matter furnishes a body of various readings for the Rgveda. The
comparison of these variants, about 1200 in number, has shown that the text
of the Rgveda already existed, with comparatively few exceptions, in its present
form when the text of the other Vedas was established. The number of
instances is infinitely small in which the Rgveda exhibits corruptions not
appearing in the others. We have thus good reason for believing that the
fixity of the text and the verbal integrity of the Rgveda go several centuries
further back than the date at which the Samhita text came into existence.
As handed down exclusively by oral tradition, the text could hardly have
been preserved in perfecdy authentic form from the time of the composers
themselves; and research has shown that there are some undeniable corruptions
in detail attributable to this earliest period. But apart from these, the Samhita
text, when the original metre has been restored by the removal of phonetic
combinations which did not prevail in the time of the poets themselves, nearly
always contains the very words, as represented by the Pada text, actually
used by the seers. The modernization of the ancient text appearing in the
Sainhita form is only partial and is inconsistently applied. It has preserved
the smallest minutiae of detail most liable to corruption and the slightest
differences in the matter of accent and alternative forms which might have
been removed with the greatest ease. We are thus justified in assuming that
the accents and grammatical forms of the Rgveda, when divested of the
euphonic rules applied in the Samhita text, have come down to us, in the
vast majority of cases, as they were uttered by the poets themselves.
Though the tradition of nearly all the later Samhitas has in a general
way been guarded by Anukramanls, Pratisakhyas, and Pada texts, its value
is clearly inferior to that of the Rgveda. This is only natural in the case

of DURGA), Calcutta 1882—91 (Bibliotheca I 1 See OLDENBERG, op. cit., 352.

lndica). | * See OLDENBERG, op. cit., 380 f.
1*
4 I. ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. V E D I C GRAMMAR.

of collections in which the matter was largely borrowed and arbitrarily cut
up into groups of verses or into single verses solely with a view to meet
new liturgical wants. Representing a later linguistic stage, these collections
start from a modernized text in the material borrowed from the Rgveda, as
is unmistakable when that material is compared with the original passages.
T h e text of the Samaveda is almost entirely secondary, containing only
seventy-five stanzas not derived from the Rgveda. Its variants are due in
part to inferiority of tradition and in part to arbitrary alterations made for
the purpose of adapting verses removed from their context to new ritual uses
A n indication that the tradition of the Yajur and Atharva Vedas is less trust-
worthy than that of the Rgveda is the great metrical irregularity which is
characteristic of those texts 2 . Of all these the Vajasaneyi Samhita is the best
preserved, being not only guarded by an AnukramanI, a Pratisakhya, and a
Pada text, but partially incorporated in the Satapatha Brahmana, where the
first 18 books are quoted word for word besides being commented on. The
Taittiriya Samhita has also been carefully handed down, being protected by
an Anukramaiji, a Pratisakhya, and a good Pada text 3 . The MaitrayanT Samhita
is not so well authenticated, having no Pratisakhya and only an inferior
Pada text, of which but a single somewhat incorrect Ms. is known 4 . Least
trustworthy of all is the tradition of the Kafhaka which lacks both a Pratisakhya
and a Pada text. Moreover only one complete Ms. of this Samhita is known®.
As that Ms. is unaccented, it has only been possible to mark the accent
in small portions of that part of the text which has as yet been published
(Books I-XVIII). As, however, the texts of the Black Yajurveda often agree
even verbally, and the MaitrayanI Samhita is closely connected with the
Kathaka, the readings of the latter can to some extent be checked by those
of the cognate Samhitas.
T h e inferiority of tradition in the Atharvaveda was increased by the
lateness of its recognition as a canonical t e x t It contains many corrupt
and uncertain forms, especially in Book x i x , which is a later addition 6 .
T h e text is guarded by Anukramanis, a Pratisakhya, and a Padapatha?. T h e
latter, however, contains serious errors both in regard to accentuation and
the division of compound verbal forms, as well as in other respects. The
Padapatha of Book x i x , which is different in origin from that of the earlier
books 8 , is full of grave blunders 9 . T h e critical and exegetical notes contained
in WHITNEY'S Translation of the Atharvaveda accordingly furnish important aid
in estimating the value of the readings in the Saunaklya recension of the
Atharvaveda. T h e Paippalada recension is known in only a single corrupt
Ms., which has been reproduced in facsimile by Professors GARBE and
BLOOM FIELD10. About one-eighth or one-ninth of this recension is original,
being found neither in the Saunaklya text of the Atharvaveda nor in any other
known collection of Mantras". The various readings of this recension, in the

1 O n the Padapätha of the Sämaveda see 6 See I.ANMAN'S Introduction to Book x i x

BENKEY'S edition o f t h a t Samhitä, p. Lvu—LXIV.
* See WHITNEY'S Introduction to the
A t h a r v a v e d a , p. c x x v u ; BLOOMFIELD, T h e
A t h a r v a v e d a , Grundriss II, I B , J I .
3 C p . WEBER'S edition p. v m f . , and
Indische Studien 13, 1 — 1 1 4 (Ueber den
Padapätha der Taittirlya-Samhita).
4 See L . v . SCHROEDER'S edition, Intro-
duction, p. x x x v i f.
s C p . L . v . SCHKOEDER'S Introduction to
his edition, S 1.
in WHITNEY'S Translation of the Atharva-
veda.
7 See LANMAN'S Introduction to WHITNEY'S
Translation, p. LXIX—LXXIV.
8 T h e I'adapitha of the A t h a r v a v e d a has
been edited in full by SHANKAK P. PANDIT
in his Atharvaveda.
9 Cp. BLOOMFIELD, T h e A t h a r v a v e d a p. 16.
'o T h e Kashmirian Atharva-Veda, Balti-
1 more 1901.
| " BLOOMFIELD, T h e A t h a r v a v e d a p. 15;
 I. PHONOLOGY. PRONUNCIATION. SOUNDS. 5

material common to both recensions, are given in the critical notes of WHITNEY'S
Translation. The variations range from slight differences to complete change
of sense, and exact textual agreement between parallel stanzas is comparatively
rare'. The text of this recension has not yet been critically edited except
Book I 1 .

I. PHONOLOGY.
Rgveda Pratiiakhya, ed. with German translation by MAX MÖLLER, Leipzig 1856—69;
with UVATA'I Commentary, Benares Sanskrit Series, 1894. — Atharvaveda Prätiääkhya, ed.
WHITNEY," JAOS. vols, VII and x. — Taittirtya PrätiSäkhya, ed. WHITNEY, JA OS. vol. ix,
1871. — Väjasaneyi Pratiiakhya, ed. WEBER, IS. vol. IV, 1858; with UVATA'S Commentary,
Benares Sanskrit Series, 1888. — Riktantravyakaraga ( = Prätiiäkhya of the SV.), ed. and
transl. by BURNELL, Mangalore 1879.
BENFEY, Vollständige Grammatik p. 1 — 7 0 . —WHITNEY, Sanskrit Grammar p. 1 — 87. —
WACKERNAGEL, Altindische Grammatik. I. Lautlehre (very full bibliography).
3. Ancient Pronunciation. — Evidence throwing light on the phonetic
character of the language of the Saiphitäs is furnished not only by the
pronunciation of its sounds by the Brahmans of to-day, who still recite those
texts, but also by the transcription of Sanskrit words in foreign languages,
particularly Greek, in ancient times; by the summary information contained in
the works of the old Sanskrit grammarians, Pacini and his successors^ and
more especially by the detailed statements of the Prätisäkhyas and the Sik?as.
From these sources we derive a sufficiently exact knowledge of the pronunciation
prevailing about 500 B. C. This pronunciation, however, need not necessarily
have coincided in every particular with that of the Saiphitäs, which date from
many centuries earlier. Nevertheless, judging by the internal evidence supplied
by the phonetic changes and analogical formations occurring in the language
of the texts themselves and by the external evidence of comparative philology,
we are justified in concluding that the pronunciation, with the possible exception
of a very few doubtful points, was practically the same.
4. The Sounds of the Vedic Language. — There are altogether
52 sounds, 13 of which are vocalic and 39 consonantal. They are the following:

A. Vocalic sounds.
1. Nine simple vowels: aäiXuürf /.
2. Four diphthongs: e 0* ai au

B. Consonantal sounds.
1. Twenty-two mutes, divided into five classes, each of which has its
class nasal, making a group of twenty-seven:
a) five gutturals: k kh g gh ri,
b) five palatals: c ch j jh ti,
c) seven cerebrals: t th d and Is dh and Ih 5 n,
d) five dentals: t th d dh n,
e) five labials: p ph b bh m.

cp. WHITNEY'S Translation of the Atharva-
veda p. 1013—23.
< On the readings of the Paippalada re-
cension, see LANMAN'S Introduction P.LXXIX—
LXXXIX.
1 The Kashmirian AtharvaVeda, Book One.
Edited with critical notes by LEROY CARR
BARRET, in J A O S . 26, 197—295.
3 These are really simple long vowels,
being diphthongs only in origin ( = ai, 3u).
4 Pronounced ai, au (see WHITNEY on
APr. L 40 and TPr. 11. 29), but derived
from diphthongs with a long first element.
5 These sounds take the place of d dh
respectively between vowels; e. g. tie (but
tdya), milhufc (but midhvan).
6 I . A L L G E M E I N E S UND S P R A C H E . 4. VEDIC GRAMMAR.

2.
Four semivowels: y r I v.
3.
Three sibilants: s (palatal), s (cerebral), s (dental).
4.
One aspiration: h.
5.
One pure nasal: in {in) called Anusvara ('after-sound').
6.
Three voiceless spirants: // (Visarjanlya), h (Jihvamullya), h (Upa-
dhmaniya).
5. Losses, changes, additions. — In order that the phonetic status of
the Vedic language may be understood historically, the losses, changes, and
additions which have taken place in it as compared with earlier linguistic
stages, must be pointed out.
a. It has lost the IE. 1) short vowels i 0 and 2) long vowels e 0;
3) diphthongs ei oi, eu ou\ ai ei oi, au iu ow, 4) sonant nasals; 5) voiced
spirant 2.
b. It has replaced a number of IE. sounds by others: 1) the short vowels
I 0 by a, 3 by /; 2) the long vowels Id by a\ 3) the diphthongs ei oi by
¿u ou by 0; also az ez oz by eo; 4) f by ir (fir), I by r; 5) ai ei Si by ai,
au iu ou by au; 6) r, when followed by a nasal, has become f ; 7) gutturals
(velars) have, under certain conditions, become palatals 1 ; 8) a palatal mute
has become the palatal spirant s 2 .
c. It has added the whole series of eight cerebrals (including the
spirant s).
The above innovations are specifically Indian, excepting (1) the loss of
the vowels e 0 3, together with the diphthongs formed with them; (2) the loss
of the sonant nasals; and (3) the addition of the spirants s and s. These
the Avesta shares with the Vedas.

1. T h e simple vowels.
6. T h e vowel a.—This is by far the commonest vowel, being much
more than twice as frequent as a ; while these two «-vowels combined occur
as often as all the rest (including diphthongs) taken together3. According to
the modern Indian pronunciation, a has the sound of a very short close
neutral vowel like the English u in but. That such was its character as early
as the time of Panini appears from his last Sutra, according to which a is
not the short sound corresponding to 3. To the same effect are the statements
of the Pratisakhyas which describe a as a 'close' (samvrta) sound. This
pronunciation is borne out by the reproduction of Indian words in Greek,
where the vowel, though usually represented by a, appears as i or 0 also;
on the other hand, the frequent reproduction of the Greek a by the Indian
a indicates that, to the Indian ear, that vowel was both longer and had more
distinctively the sound of a. Similarly, Hindus of the present day make the
observation that the English pronunciation of a in Sanskrit words sounds long
idlrgha) to them. As the ancient Iranian languages have the normal a
throughout, the close pronunciation must be an Indian innovation. But whether
it already prevailed in the period when the Samhitas were composed is
uncertain. The fact, however, that in the RV. the metre hardly ever admits
of the a being elided after e or 0, though the written text drops it in about
75 per cent of its occurrences, seems to indicate that when the hymns of
the R V . were composed, the pronunciation of a was still open, but that at

1 ä
Cp. BRUGMANN, Kurze vergleichende Op. cit. 2 3 3 .
Grammatik der indogermanischen Sprachen 3 Cp. WHITNEY, 22 and 75.
1902, I, 244. 4 APr. I. 3 6 ; VPr. 1. 72.
 7

the time when the Saiphita text was constituted, the close pronunciation was
already becoming general
a. Though a ordinarily represents IE. a e os, it also often replaces an original
sonant nasal 1 representing the reduced form of the unaccented Vedic syllables a -{-nasal:
i) an in derivative and inflexional syllables; e. g. sai-a beside the stem sanl- 'being'; jukv-ati
'they sacrifice'(suffix otherwise -anti); 2) a + n a s a l in radical syllables; e.g. ta-ta- 'stretched':
]//an-; ¿-«-/¿-'gone': \gam-; das-ma- 'wondrous': \'dams-; stem palhi- 'path', beside panlhi-\
3) in words as shown by comparative philology; e. g. sata-m 'hundred' (Lat. centum),
ddsa 'ten' (Lat. decern) 3.
Very rarely a is a Prakritic representative of r, as in vi-kata-4 'monstrous', beside
vt-krta- 'deformed'.
7. The vowel a. — This sound represents both a simple long vowel 5
and a contraction; e. g. a-stha-t 'he has stood'; Asam 'I was' ( = d-as-atn),
bharati 'may he bear" ( = bhara-a-ti).
a. Like a, the long vowel a frequently corresponds to or is derived from
a syllable containing a nasal; e. g. kha-ta- 'dug': Ykhan-; S-tman- 'soul' : an-
'breathe'. In very rare instances the nasal is retained in the RV.: jighamsati
'desires to strike': Yhan-\ sranta- 'wearied': Ysram-\ dhvStitd- 'dark': ydhvan-;
there are six or eight more instances in the later Saiphitas6. Here the
reappearance of the nasal in a weak radical syllable is an innovation due to
the influence of other forms with nasals 7 .
8. The vowel /. — This sound in the first place is an original vowel;
e. g. div-i 'in heaven'. It also frequently represents the low grade of e and ya
both in roots 8 and suffixes; e. g. vid-ma 'we know', beside ved-a 'I know";
nav-istha- 'newest', beside nav-yas- 'newer*. It further appears as the low
grade of a in roots containing that vowel: e. g. sidhyati 'succeeds', beside
sildhati\ sista- 'taught', beside sasti 'teaches'; especially when the vowel is
final, as in sthi-ta- 'stood': sthi-. From the latter use it came to assume the
function of a 'connecting' vowel; e. g. jan-i-tr- 'begetter*: YJan--, after heavy
syllables also in the ending -ire of 3 pi. pf. mid. vavand-ire (beside nunudr/).
In sithira- 'loose' i would be a Prakritic representative of r, if the word is
derived from Ysrath
9. The vowel 7. — This sound is an original vowel, e. g. in jlva- 'living' I0 .
It also often represents the low grade of ya both in roots and suffixes;
e. g. jl-td- (AV.), 'overcome': Yjya-\ as-t-mahi 'we would attain', beside ai-yam
'I would attain'. It further seems to represent the low grade of both radical
and suffixal a ; but this can probably in all instances be explained as either a
low grade of ai or a later substitution for i; e. g. gi-tha- (AV.) beside ga-thd-
'song', is from the root gat-; adi-mahi (VS.) and di-sva (VS.), from Y 2 ^ '
and Y3 occur beside forms in i from the three roots da- which have i only
in the RV.; hina- 'forsaken', from Yhi-, occurs once in RV. x beside forms with
i only in RV. I-IX. A similar explanation probably applies to the -nx- of the
ninth class of verbs beside -na-, e. g. grbhni-\grbhna

1
work in its conventional sense (cp. B R U G -
C p . BRUGMANN, K G . 9 2 , 1 0 4 , 1 1 6 .
' Cp. BRUGMANN 1 8 4 . MANN, KG. 365), and 'roots' will be
quoted in the usually low grade form in
J S e e W A C K E R N A G E L i, 7 ( p . 7 — 1 0 ) .
4 C p . WACKERNAGEL I, 1 4 6 . which they appear in Sanskrit grammar.
a e ox
5 It represents IE. The term 'base' will be used to designate
cp. BRUGMANN,
KG. 98, n o , 122. It also appears for IE. the phonetic unit which is the starting point
¡S before single consonants: cp. W A C K E R - of vowel gradation (cp. BRUGMANN, KG.
NAGEL 1, 1 0 . 211). Thus bhava- or bhavi- is a'base', bhu-
6
See below, past passive participles 574, is a 'root'.
2 a. 9 Cp. W A C K E R N A G E L 1, 1 6 (p. 1 9 , note).
7 S e e WACKERNAGEL I, 13. »" C p . BRUGMANN, K G . 7 3 .
8 This term will be retained in the present " S e e W A C K E R N A G E L I, 1 8 .
8 I. ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4. VEDIC GRAMMAR.

10. T h e v o w e l u. — This sound is an original vowel; e . g . upa 'up to';

duhitr- 'daughter'; madhu- 'sweetness*. It also represents the low grade of
0 or va both in roots and suffixes; e. g. yuga- m. n. 'yoke', beside yoga- m.
'yoking'; suptd- (AV.) 'asleep': svdpna- m. 'sleep'; krnu-: krno- present base
of kr- 'make'.
n . T h e v o w e l u. — This sound is an original vowel; e. g. bhra- "brow";
stira- 'hero'. It is also the low grade for avt, au, vd\ e. g. bha-t 'has
b e c o m e ' : bhavi-sjdti 'will become'; dhutd-'shaken' : dhautarT-, f. 'shaking';
sad- 'sweeten': svsd- 'enjoy'.
13. T h e v o w e l r . — T h e vowel r* is at the present day usually pronounced
as ri\ and that this pronunciation is old is shown by the confusion of the
two sounds in inscriptions and Mss., as well as by the reproduction of r by
ri in the Tibetan script 2 . But r was originally pronounced as vocalic r. The
Pratisakhyas of the RV., VS., AV.3 describe it as containing an r, which
according to the RPr. is in the middle. According to the commentator
on the VPr. this medial r constitutes one-half of the sound, the first and
last quarter being a 4 . This agrees with m , the equivalent of r in the Avesta.
Except in the acc. and gen. plur. of r-stems (where f is written), the
long vowel is in the R V . represented by the sign for r : always in forms of
the verb mrd-5 'be gracious', in the past participles trlha- 'crushed', drfha-
'firm', in the gen. nrnam, and in the one occurrence of the gen. tisrnftm6.
In the later Saiphitas, the vowel in these instances was pronounced short 7 ;
and it was doubtless for this reason that r came to be erroneously written for
f in the text of the R V .
13. T h e v o w e l r 8 . — T h i s long vowel, according to RPr. and APr.9,
contains an r in its first half only. It appears only in the acc. and gen.
plur. masc. fem. of r-stems; e. g. pitrn, mStrs\ pitfndm, svdsfnSm. Thus the f
was written only where a- i- »-stems showed analogous forms with a 1 a;
and prosodical evidence proves that, in the RV., f is required even in the
two genitives in which r is written (1nrnam and tisrn&m) In the TS., how-
ever, all these genitives plur. have r" (that is, pitrnAm as well as nrnam,
tisrnam).
14. T h e v o w e l /.—This sound, though pronounced as Iri at the present
day, was originally a vocalic /. Its description in the Pratisakhyas " is analogous
to that of r. It is found only in a few forms or derivatives of the verb
kip- 'be in order': cilklpri, 3 pi. perf.; ciklpati, 3 sing. aor. subj.; klpti- (VS.)
'arrangement*. In the R V . r appears beside it in krp- 'form' 1 !.

a. T h e diphthongs.
15. T h e d i p h t h o n g s e a n d 0.— A t the present day these sounds are
pronounced in India as long monophthongs like i and S in most European

1 8
In several instances r appears to re- The f of the gen. pi. is an Indian inno-
present an IE. I sound. C p . WACKERNAGEL vation; cp. 5, b 6 and 17. On the other
1, P- 33- hand, IE. r- is represented by ir and (after
* S e e WACKEKNAGEL I, 28. labials) iir; e. g. from kr- 'commemorate',
3 R P r . VXIL 1 4 ; V P r . IV. 1 4 5 ; A P r . l . 3 7 , 7 1 . kir-ti- 'fame'; pr- 'fill'-.pür-ta-, n. 'reward'; as
4 Cp.BENFEY, Vedica und Verwandtes I, 18. low grade of ri in dtrgh-a- 'long', beside
5 Except possibly RV. vIL 56<7 where the dragh-lyas- 'longer*. Cp. WACKERNAGEL I, 22.
vowel is metrically short; cp. op. cit. I, 6; 9 RPr. XUL 14; APr. L 38.
ARNOLD, V e d i c M e t r e , p . 1 4 3 . 'o See above, S, b 6.
6 RV. v. 69». »« C p . BENFEY, V e d i c a u n d V e r w a n d t e s
7 In the AV. the vowel is still metrically I. 3-
long in some of these instances: OLDEN- " RPr. XUL 14; VPr. IV. 1 4 5 .
BERG, Prolegomena 4 7 7 . «3 C p . WACKERNAGEL I, 3 1 .
 I . PHONOLOGY. SIMPLE VOWELS. DIPHTHONGS. 9

languages. That they already had this character at the time of the Pratisakhyas 1
and of Pacini's successors Katyayana 2 and Patanjali J, appears from the accounts
given by those authorities, who at the same time recognize these two sounds
to be in many instances the result of the euphonic combination (samdhi', Sandhi)
of a + t and a + u respectively. This evidence is borne out by the reproduction
of Indian words by the Greeks • and of Greek words by the Indians 1 from
about 300 B. c. onwards.
a. These two sounds as a rule represent earlier diphthongs of which the second
element was i or u respectively. 1. T h i s i s most evidently so when they are produced
in Sandhi by the coalescence of S with » and u. As the result of such a combination
they are explicable only on the assnmption of an earlier pronunciation of these sounds
as the genuine diphthongs ai and cut. — 2. They are further based on prehistoric con-
tractions within words in declension and conjugation; e. g. loc. sing, of aJva- 'horse' :
dive (cp. nav-i- 'in the ship'); nom. acc. du. neut. of pada- 'step' : padi (cp. vacas-J 'two
words'); 3. sing. pot. mid. bhaveta 'should become'(cp. as-ita 'would sit'); maghon- weak
stem ( = magha-uti) of maghavan- 'bountiful'; a-voc-at 3. sing. aor. of vac- 'speak' ( = a-va-
uc-aty>. — 3. These two sounds also represent the high grade corresponding to the weak
grade vowels i and u; e. g. sicati'pours', beside sik-td- 'poured'; bhoj-am, beside bhuj-am,
aor. of bhuj- 'enjoy' 7.
b. 1. In a small number of words e10 represents Indo-Iranian az (still preserved in
the Avesta) before d dh and h (= dh)-. dehi 'give', and dhehi 'set' (Av. dazdi); e-dhi 'be',
beside as-ti-, ned-Jyas- 'very near', n/d-iffha• 'nearest' (Av. ttazdyo, nazdisia-)-, medha- 'insight'
(Av. mazdai); miyldha- 'meat-juice' (Av. myazda-); veJhas- 'adorer' (Av. vazdanh-); sed-%
weak perf. of sad- 'sit' (Av. hazd- for Indo-Iranian sazd-) 9. — a. Similarly o10 represents
az in stems ending in -as before the bh of case-endings, e. g. from dvlf-as- n. 'hatred',
inst. pi. dvifo-bhis; and before secondary suffixes beginning with y or v. amho-yu-
'distressing' (but apas-yu- 'active'); duvo-yu- 'wishing to give' (beside duvas-yu-); saho-vatt-
(AV.) 'mighty', beside sahas-vant• (RV.). In derivatives of fay 'six', and of vah- 'carry',
o represents az before d or dh, which it cerebralizes: }6-dasa (VS.) 'sixteen'; fo-qiha 'six-
fold'; vi-4hum 'to carry'.
16. The diphthongs 0/ and au. — These sounds are pronounced at
the present day in India as diphthongs in which the first element is short. Even
at the time of the Pratisakhyas they had the value of at and au11. But that
they are the etymological representatives of si and au is shown by their
becoming sy and 3v respectively before vowels both in Sandhi" and within
words; e. g. gSv-as 'kine', beside gdu-s 'cow'*J. That such was their original
value is also indicated by the fact that in Sandhi a contracts with <r*4 to ai,
and with 0 to a« 1 5 .
17. Lengthening of vowels. — 1. Before n, vowels are lengthened only
(except r in the gen. pi.) in the acc. pi. in -an, -In, -an, -rn,6, where the long
vowel is doubtless pre-Indian l i.
2. Before suffixal y, i and u are phonetically lengthened: a) as finals
of roots; e. g. ksT-yate 'is destroyed' (Y/isi-); su-ydte 'is pressed' (V s u ~)i
srB-yis 'may he hear' ( \ f s r i t - ) ; b) as finals of nouns in denominatives formed
with -yd and their derivatives; e. g. janl-ydnt- 'desiring a wife' (jdni-); valgn-

1 S e e W H I T N E Y o n A P r . 1. 4 0 . I pronunciation from the monophthongs re-

» Varttika on Pacini VIII. 2, 106. | presenting the diphthongs ai and au.
1 Comment on V&rttika I and 3 on Pacini " S e e W H I T N E Y o n A P r . 1. 4 0 a n d T P r .
L' I , 48. IL 29.
4 Thus Kckaya-, name of a people, becomes " See below 73.
ÁT/Knt; Ganda- name of a people, ToviaXo/. »3 C p . W A C K E R N A G E L I , 3 6 .
5 Thus K¿/ir¡\«í becomes kramcla-ka-; úpa '4 That is, originally a -f- {t = ) St be-
becomes hora. came ai.
6 C p . WACKERNAGEL I, 3 3 b. '5 That is, originally a + (a = ) au be-
7 Op. cit. 1, 3 3 c, d, e. came au.
8 On this base see below on the Per- 16 For original a i u r - f ns.
fect, 483 a, 2. »7 As the s which caused the length by
9 C p . W A C K E R N A G E L I, 3 4 a . position had already for the most part dis-
10 These t and o are not distinguished in appeared in the Vedic language.
10 I. A L L G E M E I N E S UND S P R A C H E . 4. V E D I C GRAMMAR.

yati 'treats kindly' (va/git-); gata-ydti 'desires free course' (gstu-; but also g3tu-
yati) \ The A V . 2 has a few exceptions: arati-ydti 'is hostile'; jani-yati as
well as janx-ydti*; c ) i in the suffix -i-ya and in the comparative suffix -lyas.
3. Before r, if radical, i and u seem to be lengthened when a consonant
follows; e. g. glr-bhis beside gir-as (glr- 'song of praise'); par-su beside pur-as
(pur- 'fort'), but Xr and Ur here represent IE. f*. In a few instances this is
extended by analogy to words in which the r is not radical: asir 'blessing'
(asls-)\ sajftr 'together' (Yjus-)^>.
4. Before v, the vowels a i u are lengthened: a ) in some instances the
augment: avidhyat 'he wounded' (jfvyadh-) b \ b ) once before the primary
suffix -viims of the perfect participle: jigX-vdms- 'having conquered' ( V j * ' )
c) often before the secondary suffixes -van, -vana, -varit, -vaia, -vin\ e. g.
rtti-van- 'observing order'; kirsX-vana- (AV.) 'ploughman'; yd-vant- 'how
great'; svasX-vant- (RV 1 .) 'snorting' ( \ZAas-); -krsi-vala- 'ploughman'; dvaya-vin-
'dishonest'; d) often before the second member of a compound; e. g. gUrtd-
vasu- 'whose treasures are welcome' 7 .
5. Before llr. z and z, when followed by one or more consonants, vowels
are lengthened by way of compensation for the loss of the ? or a) a
( = a?) in tadhi 'hew' ( y/aAs-); badha- 'firm' ( Ybamh-); sddhr- 'conquering',
d-sad/ia- 'invincible' (Y^saA-); b ) T = iz in id- 'adore' ( J f y a j - 'sacrifice', or ]//';-
'wish'); nidd- 'nest'; pid- 'press'; muiha- 'reward'; mTdhvfims- 'bounteous';
rldhd- 'licked' (Yri/i-)-, vidit- 'swift'; sidati (= sizdati) 'sits'; hid- 'be angry'
(cp. Aims- 'injure'), c) u = uz in Udhd- 'borne' (Yva/i-); gQdhd- 'concealed'

6. Vowels also appear lengthened under conditions other than those

enumerated above (1 — 5).
a. Final a i u are very frequently lengthened in the Samhitas before a
single consonant owing to rhythmical predilections; from this use the lengthening
of the vowels is extended to syllables which are reduplicative or precede
suffixes
b . For metrical reasons the length is in a few words shifted to another
syllable. Thus didlhi often appears instead of the regular dxdihi\ and in
virS-sdf 'ruling men', vtra-1' stands for vxra-. A similar explanation perhaps
applies to cardtha- 'moving', beside cardtha-; and mdhXna- 'gladsome', beside
mihifia-.
c. The long vowel beside the short in the same stem appears in some
instances to be due to vowel gradation; as in tvdt-pituras (TS.) 'having thee
as a father', beside pitaras\ prthu-jclghana- 'broad-hipped', beside jaghana-

1
Before this -yd, the final of a-stems is (for dus-) e. g. in dur-ga• 'hard to tra-
sometimes lengthened, but probably not verse'.
6
phonetically; see below 6 d. The lengthening of the augment in
2
S e e WHITNEY o n A P r . ill. 18. j ayunak, ayukta (^yj-) and arinak, araik
3 No lengthening takes place in the j (y/ric-\ follows this analogy.
optative present of verbs of the 5TH or 8,H 7 The lengthening here probably started
class, e. g. srnu-yanta (sru- 'hear'); nor from in that in Sandhi: cp. WACKERNAGEL
adverbs formed with -yd from »-stems; e.g. 1, 4 2 .
asu-ya 'swiftly'; amu-ya 'thus'. 8 This appears to be the only kind of
4 See above on r, p. 8, note 8 . compensatory lengthening in the Vedic
5 Cp. WACKERNAGEL I, 23. When ir stands language. Cp. 17, I.
for suffixal -is, it remains unchanged; e. g. 9 On e and 0 for az az, see above, 15, a, b,
havirbhis 'with oblations' (hav-is-), krwir-dat-i
a n d c p . WACKERNAGEL 1, 4 0 .
'saw-toothed'; -ur, with genuine u, remains 10 S e e WACKERNAGEL I, 4 3 .
short in urvara- 'field', urvi- 'wide', urviyai ' Metrical shortening of a long syllable
'widely' (uru- 'wide'), urv-dst- 'desire', dur-
 L PHONOLOGY. LENGTHENING AND L O S S OF V O W E L S . CONTRACTION. I I

'hip'; Snu-sdk 'in continuous order", beside anu- 'along' as first m e m b e r o f a

compound.
d. T h e lengthening of the vowel in a certain number o f instances appears
t o be due to analogy; thus the denominatives in -Sya beside -ay a from
a-stems (e. g. rtayd- 'observe order*, beside rtaya-y, seem to follow the
model of those in -lyati and -uyati, which would account for the fluctuation
in quantity. Tlksna- 'sharp' (beside tigma-: tij- 'be sharp') and hallksna- (TS.)
beside hallksna- (VS.), a kind of animal, appear to owe their f to the influence
o f desideratives which in several instances have T (partly for older i) before ks.
T h e reason for the a in tusnim 'silently' (tus- ' b e c o m e quiet'), and in
samnd- (VS.), otherwise sumrid- 'favour', is, however, obscure.
18. L o s s of v o w e l s . — V o w e l s are very rarely d r o p p e d in the language
o f the Samhitas. Medial loss is almost entirely restricted 2 to the isolated
disappearance of u before v and m. T h a t vowel is d r o p p e d at the end of
the first member of a c o m p o u n d in anvartitA ( R V 1 . ) 'wooer' ( = anu-vartitd);
dnvartisye ( A V . ) 'I shall follow'J; cHr-vadana- ( A V . Paipp.) 'of lovely aspect'
(—» caru-vadana-) and c3r-vdc- ( A V . Paipp.) 'speaking pleasantly' 4 . T h e only
example of the loss of a in this position seems to be til-pinja- ( A V 1 . ) a kind
of plant, beside tila-pinji- ( A V 1 . ) . T h e v o w e l u is further d r o p p e d before the
m of the i pers. pi. pres. ending of the 5 t h (-««-) class, when the u is p r e c e d e d
by only one consonant, in krn-mahe and krn-mdsi ( A V . ) ' 'we do'.
I n i t i a l vowels also occasionally disappear. T h e only vowel that is
lost with any frequency is a, which is dropped in Sandhi after e and 0,
according to the evidence of metre, in about one per cent of its occurrences
in the R V . and about twenty per cent in the A V . and the metrical portions
o f the Y V . 6 In a few words its disappearance is prehistoric: in vi- 'bird' 7
(Lat. avi-), possibly in ni- 'in' (Greek evi)8, in phi- 'press' 9 , bhi-sdj-'° 'healer*.
a is lost in tman-, beside a-tman-, but the reason has not been satisfactorily
explained 1 1 . In va 'like', beside iva, the loss of i is probably only apparent:
cp. va 'like' (Lat. vl ' o r ' ) " . Initial » seems to be lost, if the reading is n o t
corrupt, i n imasi ( R V . 11. 3 1 6 ) beside us'masi 'we desire' (\fvas-).
19. Contraction. — L o n g vowels and diphthongs are often the result o f
contraction in S a n d h i ' 3 . T h e y have frequently a similar origin in the interior
of words'4.
a. Contractions of a with a vowel or diphthong are the following:
1. a often stands for a + a, a + a, or a + a; e. g. Aj-at, augmented
i m p e r f e c t ( — a-aj-at); <id-a, r e d . p e r f . ( = a-ad-a); bharati, p r e s . subj. ( = bhara-
afi); ukthA'5, instsing. ( = uktha-a)-, divas 'mares', n o m . p i . ( = asvS-as); diiti,
aor. subj. ( = dA-ati); devftm, g e n . pi. (— devd-3m).
2. e stands for a + t and S+t; e. g . asve, loc. sing. ( = dsva-t); padi,

(at the end of a tri$tubh-line), without inter-
c h a n g e o f quantity, appears in sirasu, loc.
plur. of stra- 'stream'.
< S e e b e l o w , D e n o m i n a t i v e s , 563, a.
2 A p a r t from the syncopation of ä in low
grade syllables: cp. 25, A I.
.1 C p . BÖHTLINGK, Z D M G . 39, 5 3 3 ; 44,
BERG, Z D M G . 44, 321 ff. ( D e r A b h i n i h i t a
Sandhi im R g v e d a l .
7 Cp. 25, A I ; WACKERNAGEL I, 7 1 .
» Cp. SCHMIDT, K Z . 26, 2 4 ; WACKER-
NAGEL 2«, p. 73.
9 Op. cit. 2 1 , p. 71 (bottom).
1 0 Op. cit. 2 ' , p. 72 (bottom).

492F.; cp. OLDENBERG 324. 1 1 Op. cit. 1, p. 61 (top).

4 S e e BÖHTLINGK'S L e x i c o n s. v. Per- 1 2 Cp. op. cit. 1, 53 c, n o t e ; ARNOLD,

haps also in jämbila- (MS.) 'knee-pan', if V e d i c Metre, 129 (p. 78).
= jänU'Vila-. '3 S e e b e l o w 69, 70.
S C p . DELBRÜCK, A I V . 1 7 4 ; v . NEGELEIN, M See a b o v e 15, a 2.
Zur S p r a c h g e s c h i c h t e des V e d a 60 (r- •5 T h e original inst. e n d i n g -a under the
Wurzeln). influence of this contracted form b e c a m e - a ;
6 Cp. WACKERNAGEL I, p. 324; OLDEN- cp. WACKERNAGEL I, p. 102, mid.
12 I. ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4. VEDIC GRAMMAR.

nom. acc. du. n e u t ( = padd-f); bhdves, opt. pres. ( = bhdva-Ts)-, yamé 'twin
sisters', nom. acc. du. fern. ( = yamá-i).
3. o stands for a + u\ e. g. óvocam, aor. of vac- 'speak* ( = dva-uc-am).
4. ai stands for á + e and, in augmented forms, a + t; e. g. tásmai 'to
him', dat. sing. mase. ( = tasma-e); devydi, dat. sing. fem. ( = devyá-e); dicchat,
3. sing, i m p f ( = d-icchat); dirata, 3. pi. impf. ( = a-Trata) 'set in motion'.
5 . au stands for a + ü in augmented forms; e. g. ducchat, 3. sing. impf.
of vas- 'shine' ( = d-ucchat); auhat, 3. sing. impf. of üh- 'remove' ( = a-üA-at).
b. Contractions of / with i or a are the following:
1. T stands for i+i in the nom. acc. pi. n e u t o f »'-stems; e. g. tri 'three'
(= tri-i).
2. t stands for i+i in weak forms o f the perfect, when the reduplicative
vowel is immediately followed b y i (either original or reduced from ya);
e. g. is-i'tr ( = i-is-i'tr from is- 'speed'); tj-é (= i-ij-¿ from yaj- 'sacrifice').
3. f stands for i + a in the inst. sing. fem. and the nom. acc. du. masc. fem.
o f stems in -i; e. g. mati (= mat!-3.) 'by thought'; pdtl 'the two lords' (•= pdti-H,
cp. rlvij-a), sue-du. fem. 'the two bright ones' ( = iuci-a).
4. f stands for i + S in compounds of dvi- 'two', ni 'down', prdti 'against',
with the low grade of dp- 'water': dvip-d- 'island'; nlp-d- 'low-lying* ( K . ) * ;
pratTpdm 'against the stream' 2 .
5. 1 stands for i + a when reduplicative i is followed by the low grade
form o f a root beginning with a : ipsa-ti ( A V . ) , desiderative o f ap- 'obtain'
(= t-ip-sa-)K A similar contraction takes place when initial radical a is long
by position, in iks-ate 'sees' (cp. dks-i 'eye') and Iñkh-dyati 'swings' (cp. pari-
ahkhdyate 'may he embrace'). In ij-ate 'drives', beside dj-ati 'drives', the
contraction to t of i+d is perhaps due to analogy 4 .
c. Contractions of u with u or a are the following:
1. a stands for u + u in weak forms of the perfect when the reduplicative
v o w e l is immediately followed by u (either original or reduced from va);
e. g. Bc-e, 3 sing. mid. ( = u-uc-e) from uc- 'like'; Bc-úr (= u-uc-úr) from vac-
'speak'.
2. a stands for u + a in the compound formed with dnu 'along* and the
low grade of dp- 'water': anüp-d-4 'pond'.
3. B stands for u + a in the nom. acc. du. masc. fem. o f «-stems; e. g. buhé
'the two arms' ( = bshú-a).
4. B seems to stand for u + i in the nom. acc. pi. neuter o f »-stems;
e. g. vdsB (= vdsu-i), from vdsu- ' g o o d ' ; but the v o w e l may possibly be
lengthened by a n a l o g y 5 , for the P a d a text always has ».
20. H i a t u s . — a. In the written text of the Sarphitás, hiatus is, as a
rule, tolerated in diphthongs only, vowels being otherwise separated by
consonants. It nevertheless appears:
1. in Sandhi, when a final s y or v has been d r o p p e d before a following
v o w e l ; when final » ü e of dual endings are followed b y v o w e l s ; when a
remains after final e and 0; and in some other instances 6 ;
2. in compounds, when the final s of the first member has disappeared
before a v o w e l ; e. g. dyo-agra- 'iron-pointed' (ayas- 'iron'); pura-etr- 'leader*
(puras 'before'); and when, b y a Prakritism, y is lost in prd-uga- 'fore-part
o f the shaft' ( = prd-yuga-)-,

» Cp. nif-ya- (VS.), 'lying at the bottom'. | 4 Cp. WACKERNAGEL I, 90 c, p. 104.

* Cp. ahika- and pralika- 'face'. | 5 That is, of the a and i stems; e. g.
3 Cp. Samprasirana » and it for ya and bhadrh, in.
va. | 6 See below, Sandhi 69—73.
 I . PHONOLOGY. CONTRACTION. HIATUS. SVARABHAKTI. 13

3. in the simple word í/taü-1 'sieve* (probably from tams- 'shake'), by

a loss of s, due most likely to borrowing from an Iranian dialect (where
medial s would have become h, which then disappeared).
b. 1. Though not written, hiatus is common elsewhere also in the
Saiphitas The evidence of metre shows that_j» and v must often be pronounced
as i and u, and that a long vowel or a diphthong has frequently the value
of two vowels. When the long vowel or diphthong is the result of contraction,
the two original vowels must often be restored, within a word as well as in
SandhL Thus pinti 'they protect", may have to be read as pa-anti (=- pá-anti) 3,
áñjan 'they anointed' as á-añjan\ jyéstha- 'mightiest' as jyá-istha- (= jyd-istha-
from jyi- 'be mighty'); áicchas as d-icchas 'thou didst wish'; aurnos as a-ürnos
'thou didst open' 4 .
2. Hiatus is further produced by distraction of long vowels 5 which, as
the metre shows, are in the Rgveda often to be pronounced as two short
vowels. This distraction was doubtless originally due partly to a slurred
accentuation which practically divided a syllable into two halves, and partly
to the resolution of etymological contraction. From such instances distraction
spread to long vowels in which it was not historically justified. It appears
most often in a, especially in the gen. pi. in -am, also in the abl. sing, in
-¿it, the nom. acc. pi. in -as, -asas of «-stems, in the acc. sing, in -elm of such
words as abjdm. 'bom in the water'; and in many individual words 6 . Distraction
is further found in the diphthongs of words in which it is not etymologically
justified; as in the genitives vés 'of a bird', gos 'of a cow 1 , in tredhci 'threefold',
nétr- 'leader', réknas- 'property*, sréni- 'row*; and in other words 7 .
31. S v a r a b h a k t i . — When a consonant is in conjunction with r or a
nasal, a very short vocalic sound tends to be developed between them, and
the evidence of metre shows that a vowel must often be pronounced between
them. It is the general view of the Prátisakhyas 8 that when an r precedes
another consonant a vowel is sounded after it; according to some of them
this also takes place after I or even after any voiced consonant. They call
it svarabhakti or 'vowel-part', which they describe as equal to '/a, '/«» or l/2
mora in length and generally as equivalent to a or e (probably = e) in sound.
a. The metre of the R V . shows that an additional syllable is frequently
required in words in which r either precedes or follows» another consonant;
e. g. dars'atd- 'worthy to be seen' (quadrisyllabic); hidra-™, name of a god
(very often trisyllabic); prá 'forth' (dissyllabic)".

1 Cp. WACKERNAGEL I, 37 b, note. appearance of slurred accentuation: WACKJJR-

» See OLDENBERG, Prolegomena 434FF.: I NAGEL 1, 4 7 .
'Hiatus and Contraction'; ARNOLD, Vedic 8 RPr. vi. 13Í., VPr. iv. 1 6 ; T P r . XXI.
Metre, chapter IV, p. 70 ff. (Sandhi), chapter v , 15 f.; APr. I. 101 ff.
p. 81 ff. (Syllabic Restoration). | 9 T h e v o w e l w h i c h has to be restored in
J A s a rule, one v o w e l (including e and a) ' the g e n . l o c . du. termination -tros, which must
is shortened before another: see OLDEN- always be read as a dissyllable, is not to
BERG, op. cit., 465 ff.; 447 ff. > be explained as Svarabhakti, since -¡tiros is
4 WACKERNAGEL 1, 46 b. the original ending.
5 See OLDENBERG, o p . c i t . , 1 6 3 ff. ( V o c a l e 10 Cp. OLDENBERG, Z D M G . 60,711—745
mit zweisilbiger Geltung). (Die Messung von tndra, rudrá u. a.).
6 See WACKERNAGEL I, 44. T h i s is a very • ' T h e r e seem to be a few instances of a
old phenomenon, as it is found in the A v e s t a Svarabhakti v o w e l b e i n g actually written:
in the g e n . p l . and in other f o r m s : O L D E N - íarásattfi, beside tras- ' t r e m b l e ' ; the secon-
BERG 1 8 1 ; W A C K E R N A G E L I, p. 50. dary derivative ivaitárTm, beside bvitrá- (AV.)
7 WACKERNAGEL I, 46. T h i s distraction w h i t e ' ; purufa- and purusa- 'man', probably
of diphthongs is also pre-Vedic, parallels for *pursa- ( W A C K E R N A G E L I, 51, cp. 52).
being found in the Avesta. Its use gradually T h e initial v o w e l of uloka-, which is commoner
decreases in the R V . and is l a c k i n g in the than ¡oka- 'world', has not yet been satis-
later Samhitas, doubtless owing to the dis- factorily explained; cp. op. cit. I, 52 d.
14 I. ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. VEDIC GRAMMAR.

b . When a consonant is followed by «, n, or m, the same parasitic vowel

often appears; e. g. yajha- (= yafna-) 'sacrifice'; gtui- (= g"nti-) 'woman'. It
is, however, here frequent only as representing the second syllable after the
caesura in tristubh and jagati verses; it rarely occurs at the beginning of such
verses, and never at the end 1 .

VOWEL GRADATION.

I. T h e Guna series: e o ar.

22. A . L o w g r a d e : i u r . — I n the same root or stem the simple vowels
i u r I are found to interchange 2 with the respective high grade forms e o ar al*
called Guna ('secondary form'?) by the native grammarians, according to the
conditions under which the formative elements are attached. Beside these
appear, but much less frequently, the long grade forms at au ar called Vfddhi
('increase') by the same authorities. The latter regarded the simple vowels
as the fundamental grade, which, from the Indian,point of view, these vowels
often evidently represent: thus from Qrnav&bhi- (SB.) 'spider', we have the
derivative formation aurnavabha- 'sprung from a spider' 4 . Comparative grammar
has, however, shown that in such forms we have only a secondary application
of an old habit of gradation derived from the IE. period, and that Guija 5
represents the normal stage from which the low grade form, with reduced
or altogether lacking vowel 6 , arose in less accented syllables. This theory
alone can satisfactorily explain the parallel treatment of Gu$a gradation
(e o ar beside i u r) and Samprasarana gradation (ya va ra beside i u r),
as in dis-tddi-d/s-a (dis- 'point out') and is-ta-, iyaj-a (ya/- 'sacrifice').
In other words, i u r can easily be explained as reduced forms of both
Guna and Samprasarana syllables (as ending or beginning with i u r), while
the divergent 'strengthening' of i u r, under the same conditions, to e o ar
or ya va ra cannot be accounted for 7 .
The interchange of Guna and simple vowel is generally accompanied
by a shift of accent: Guna appears in the syllable which bears the accent,
but is replaced by the simple vowel when the accent is transferred to the
following syllable. This shows itself most clearly in inflexional forms; e. g. ¿-mi
'I go', but i-mas 'we go'; ap-no-mi (AV.) 'I obtain', but ap-nu-tnas 'we obtain';
vardhaya, but vrdhaya 'to further*. Hence it is highly probable that change
of accent was the cause of the gradation 8 .
a. Long grade or Vrddhi: ai, au, ar. — Vfddhi is far more restricted
in use than Gupa, and as it nearly always appears where Guna is to be
expected, it may be regarded as a lengthened variety of it 9 dating back to
the IE. period.

1 See O L D E N B E R G , Prolegomena, 3 7 4 , normal stage in the gradation of the a-

note. vowels in many roots: see 2 4 ; W A C K E R -
2 This interchange was already noticed N A G E L I, 55 b.
by Yaska; see Nirukta x. 17. j 6 The vowel sometimes disappears in the
3 The only root in which the gradation low grade of the u-series ('Schwundstufe')
al-.l is found is kip-, cp. 14. It is employed see 2 4 .
in word-formation much in the same way 7 C p . W A C K E R N A G E L I, 5 5 .
as in verbal and nominal inflexion. 8 Occasional exceptions, such as vfka-
4 See below a, 3 and cp. 2 5 B 2 ; W A C K E R - ' w o i r , are capable of explanation: cp.
N A G E L I, 5 5 , p. 6 2 , note (top). W A C K E R N A G E L I, 5 7 .
5 Both a and a represent the Gupa or 9 'Dehnstufe'; cp. W A C K E R N A G E L I, 6 1 .
 i5

It is to be found i ) in strong forms of a few monosyllabic substantives,

in the nom. sing, of sakhi- 'friend' and of stems in -r, and in the loc. sing,
of stems in i and u: su-hitrd- 'good-hearted' (from hfd- 'heart'), dyau-s 'heaven'
(from dyu-), gau-s ' c o w ' (from go-)', sdkhapita*-, agnd* (from agni- 'fire'J,
aktdu (from aktu- 'night'); 2) before the primary nominal suffixes -a, -i, -ti,
-tna, -man, -vana; e . g . sparh-a- 'desirable' ( Ysprh-); hfird-i- 'heart' (from hfd-);
kdrs-i- (VS.) 'drawing" ( Y k r s - ) - , iraus-fi 'obedient' ( yjrus-); cyau-tna- 'stimulating'
(Ycyu-); bhdrman- 'board' ( / M r - ) ; krirs-T-vana- (AV.) 'ploughman'; 3) in
secondary nominal derivation, generally to form patronymics or adjectives
expressive of connexion or relation 4 ; e. g. gairiksita- 'descended from giri-ksif \
ausija- 'son o f U i i f \ srautrd- 'relating to the ear" ( s ' r J t r a - ) ; hair any a- ' g o l d e n '
(,hiranya- 'gold'); 4) in the singular pres. of a few verbs of the second class
and in the active j-aorist of roots ending in vowels: ksnau-mi 'I sharpen'
( Yksnu-)\ mars-ti5 'he wipes' ( Y m T J : ) i yau-mi ( A V . ) 'I unite' ( Y } ' u ~ ) i a-jai-sam
'I have conquered' ( ]//;'-); yau-s, 2 sing, 'ward off' ( Yy u~) > a-bhar-sam 'I have
borne' ( Ybhr-).
B. L o w g r a d e : T u tr.—The same Gupa and Vj-ddhi forms as a rule
correspond to these long vowels as to their short forms i u r. Thus bht- 'fear':
bi-bhay-a and bi-bhsy-a; hu- ' c a l l ' : ju-htiv-a\ tf- 'cross' : ia-tSr-a, beside
tir-ate and -tlr-na- (just like sri- 'resort' : si-s'ray-a; sru- 'hear' : su-srhv-a;
kr- ' d o ' : ca-khr-a). Before consonants the roots prX- 'love', vl- 'desire', vT-
'impel', si- lie', ni- 'lead', bhx- 'fear', have Guija forms in e, the last two also
Vfddhi forms in ai; but roots in a and f have avi b and ari as Gupa, Hvi
and ari as Vj-ddhi, respectively; e. g. pa- 'purify', aor. pavi-sta and apavisur\
kf- 'scatter", aor. subj. kari-sat 1.
a. I and a instead of Gun a. In a few verbs and some other words
X and a are the old weak grade vowels (almost invariably medial) of e and 0,
the length of which has been preserved by the accent shifting to them (while
when not thus protected they have been shortened to t and u), and which
as thus accented, sometimes appear instead of the Guija vowels. Thus i is
found in ris-ant- 'injuring' ( — *rts-ant-), beside resa-, the low grade form of
the radical syllable otherwise becoming ris- s. Similary gflhati 'hides' appears
beside goh-a- 'hiding-place', the root being also shortened in guh-yate, etc.;
dtts-ayati 'spoils', beside dos-a- and dosds- (AV.) 'evening', also dus-ti- (AV.)
'destruction'; fih-ati 'removes', beside oh-a- 'gift'; mi 'now', na-tana- 'new',
nB-nam 'now', beside nava- 'new', also nu 'now' (never at the beginning of a
sentence); mas- 'mouse', beside mosatha 'ye rob', also musita- 'stolen'; yopa-
'post', beside yuyopa 'has infringed', also yupitd- (AV.) 'smoothed'; stii-pa- 'tuft',
beside sto-ka- 'drop', also stu-pd- (VS.) 'tuft' 9 .
b. In a few roots ending in v l°, the radical vowel I represents the low

» W i t h loss of the final element, which 6 T h e y have 0 in the intensive redupli-

h o w e v e r , remains in datives like tasmai, cation only; e. g. sosu- : \'su-.
probably because the diphthong was here 7 C p . W A C K E R N A G E L I, 7 6 .
pronounced with a slurred accent: cp. 8 T h e accentuation of i, the low grade of
W A C K E R N A G E L 1, 9 3 . ya, is probably to be explained similarly in
1 With loss of r, the preceding v o w e l feminines like napti-s (masc ,napal-)\ shortened
having compensatory IE. lengthening (cp. to nafii in voc.; cp. 19 b 3 and 29.
WACKERNAGEL I, 61 c). In a few instances, 9 T h e accentuation of u, the low grade o f
the V f d d h i of the nom. sing, spread to other v& is probably to b e explained similarly in
cases (cp. 25 B b 1); e. g. tar-as, nom. pi., feminines like kadru-s (TS. B.) ' b r o w n ' (masc.
from old nom. sing. *stir (beside slr-bhis). iadru-m, TS. B.); shortened to u in voc.,
3 A l s o agnau, like the »-stems. e. g. babhru; cp. WACKERNAGEL 1, 82.
4 See below 191. 10 T h a t is, the original form would h a v e
5 F r o m the present the ar spread to ii been ¡¡f- or tit- a c c o r d i n g as a v o w e l or a
other forms, e. g. perf. mamarja (AV.). | | consonant followed.
16 I . ALLGEMEINES UND S P R A C H E . V E D I C GRAMMAR.

grade, but early began to supplant e; thus from div- 'play', beside didiva ( A V . ) ,
dev-ana- 'game of dice', occur div-yati, div-e and div-i dat. and loc. of div-
'game of dice'; from srlv- 'fail', beside SrevayatU-, srlvayati (AV.); but from
mTv- 'push', only miv-ati etc.; from slv- 'sew*, only siv-yati etc. It is a peculiarity
of these roots that Iv appears before vowels and y only, becoming yu or B
before other consonants; thus dyu-ta- (AV.) 'play'; -mU-ta- 'impelled', mU-ra-
'dull', md-tra- (AV. VS.) 'urine'; syU-td- 'fastened', sa-ci- 'needle', stt-tra- (AV.)
'thread'; sra- 'lead ball".

II. The Samprasarana' series.

a. Gradation of ya va ra.
23. L o w grade: / u r\—In place of the accented syllables ya va ra
(corresponding to the Guna vowels e 0 ar) appear the low grade vowels
i u r* when the accent shifts to the following syllable in some fourteen
roots, viz. yaj- 'sacrifice', vyac- 'extend', vyadh- 'pierce', vac- 'speak', vad-
'speak', vap- 'strew', vas- 'be eager', vas- 'dwell', vas- 'shine', vah- 'carry';
svap- ' s l e e p \ g r a b h - a n d g r a h - 'seize', pracch- (properly pras-) 'ask', vrasc- 'hew';
e. g. is-td- : yas-tave; us-masi : vds-ti; susup-vdtjts- : susvapa.
a. Besides these, a good many other roots, in occasional verbal forms
or nominal derivatives, show the same gradation in the radical syllable.
1. /' appears in mimiksur: mimyaksa perf. of Yrnyaks--, vithi'tra- 'wavering',
vithuryiti 'wavers', beside vyath-ate 'wavers'.
2. u in uksant- 'growing': vavaksa 'has grown'; sus-ant-: svas-iti 'breathes';
ju-hur-as : kvar-ati 'is crooked'; ur-u- 'broad': comp. vdr-iyas-, superl. var-istha-;
dur-: dvir- 'door'; dhurt-i- 'resounding': dhvan-i- (AV.) 'sound'.
3. r in krpate 'laments': aor. akrapista-, grnalti ( A V . ) : g r a t h - i t a - 'tied';
-srth-ita-: srath-nati 'becomes loose'; rj-u- 'straight': raj-istha- 'stxaightest'; rbh-u-
'adroit': rabh-ate 'grasps'; drh-ya 'be firm' (impv.): drah-ydt 'firmly'; prth-u-
'broad': prath-ati 'spreads out'; bhrm-d- 'error': bhram-d- 'whirling flame';
a-ni-bhrs-ta- 'undefeated': bhras-at aor., bhras-td- (AV.) 'fallen'; mrd-u- 'soft':
mrada 'soften' (impv.), nrtia-mradas- 'soft as wool'; srk-van-: srdk-va- 'corner
of the mouth'.
b. This gradation also appears in the stems of a few nouns and in certain
nominal suffixes: dyu-bhis: dyav-i loc., dydu-s nom. 'heaven'; sun-\iva-, svdn-
Mog'; yftn- (•=yu-un-) \yuva-, yuvSn- 'youth'; catur-: catvftr• 'four'; the superlative
and comparative suffixes -is-tha and -yas; the perf. part, suffix -us : -vat,
-vamss.
b. Gradation of ya va ra.
24. L o w grade: / u Yr. — Corresponding to the reduction of the short
syllables ya va ra to the short vowels i u r , the long syllables ya va ra
appear as 1 a ir ( = IE. r).
1 T h e e t y m o l o g y o f this w o r d is, h o w - to suppose that e v e r y i a n d u has a similar
ever, doubtful. C p . W A C K E R N A G E L I, 8 1 . origin. O n t h e c o n t r a r y , it is m o r e l i k e l y
' In the terminology o f the native gramma- that I E . i and u have b e e n preserved by
rians Samprasarana ('distraction') designates the side of the reduced vowels and that the
the c h a n g e o f the semi-vowel only to the Guna grade has in m a n y instances been
c o r r e s p o n d i n g v o w e l ( b u t s e e a l s o P a c i n i VI. subsequently added to original i and ».
1 , 1 0 8 ) . H e r e w e use the word to express C p . PEDERSEN, I F . 2, 3 2 3 , n o t e .
t h e r e d u c t i o n o f t h e e n t i r e s y l l a b l e s ya va ra 4 T h i s reduction goes b a c k to the I E . pre-
t o t h e c o r r e s p o n d i n g v o w e l s i u r. t o n i c s y n c o p e o(eo: c p . WACKERNAGEL 1 , 6 2
3 Though r seems invariably to have (p. 6 9 , mid.). — O n t h e t w o f o r m s o f t h e r o o t s
resulted from the reduction of Gupa or c p . a l s o N i r u k t a l l . 2 a n d M a h a b h a s y a 1, 1 1 2 .
S a m p r a s a r a n a syllables, t h e r e is n o r e a s o n 5 See WACKERNAGEL I, 63.
 I . PHONOLOGY. SAMPRASÄRANA SERIES, ä-SERIES. 17

a . r is found thus both in radical and suffixal syllables: 1. in jx-ta- (AV.)

jx-yate (AV.) and ji-yate: -jyi- 'might', jyi-yas- 'stronger', ji-jya-sant- 'desiring
to overcome'; 2. in the fem. suffix -I: kan-i-n2m (for kanX-nim) from kan-yh-
'girl'; in nom. acc., e. g. devi, devim, devis, beside -yS- in dat. abl. gen. loc. sing.
devyai (= devyd-e), devyds (= devyd-as), dcvydm (-= devyi-am); 3. in the optative,
either before or after the accented syllable, beside -yj-; e. g. bruv-x-ta and
bharet (= bhara-X-t), but i-ya-t.
b . U is found: 1. in forms of sad- 'put in order" ( = 'make palatable'),
e. g. su-sOd-ati, sud-dyati, sam-sBd-a- (TS.) 'gum', beside forms and derivatives
of svlld- 'enjoy', 'taste', e. g. svUda-tc, svitta-, svad-u- 'sweef; 2. in fem.
nouns in -0 beside -v3 in d a t abL gen. loc. sing.; e. g. svas'rd- 'mother-in-law',
d a t svasr-vai (AV., = svasr-vi-e), gen. svasfvtis (AV., = svasr-vfi-as), loc.
¡vair-vim (= svasr-vi-am).
c. Xr (= f ) is found in dxrgh-a- 'long', beside drigh-Xyas- longer', drftgh-
istha- 'longest', dragh-man- 'length'.

III. T h e a-series,
a. Gradation of a.
25. A . L o w grade: a or — Many roots and formatives have a in
the Guija or normal stage. The reduction of r from ar or ra indicates
that in low grade syllables this a would normally disappear. As a rule,
however, it remains', doubtless because its loss would in most cases have
led to unpronounceable or obscure forms 2 . At the same time, the syncope
takes place in a considerable number of instances:
1. in v e r b a l f o r m s : ad- 'eat': d-ant- ( = old pres. p a r t ) 'tooth'; as- 'be':
s-dnti, s-yfit, s-ant-, beside as-ti 'is'; gam- ' g o ' : ja-gm-i'ir; ghas- 'eat': a-ks-art,
3. pi. impf., g-dha (= ghs-ta), 3. sing. impf. mid., ja-ks-Xyat, perf. o p t , beside
ghas-a-t 'may he eat'; pat- 'fall': pa-pt-ima, pa-pt-ur, pa-pt-ivims-, perf., a-pa-pt-at,
aor., besidepat-anti-, pad- 'go':pi-bd-a-mana-, red. pres. p a r t , pi-bd-and- 'standing
firm', beside pad-yate 'goes'; bhas- 'chew': ba-ps-ati, 3 pi. pres., ba-ps-at-, pres.
part., beside bhas-a-t 'may he chew'; sac- 'follow': sa-sc-ati, 3. pL red. pres.,
sa-sc-ata, 3. pi. impf. mid., sa-s'c-tr/, 3. pL perf. mid., beside sac-ante 'they
accompany'; sad- 'sit": sid-ati (= st-zd-ati), 3. sing, pres., sed-ur (= sa-zd-tlr),
3. pi. perf., beside a-sad-at 'he sat'; han- strike':ghn-anti, 3. pi. pres., beside
han-ti 3. sing.
2. in nominal derivatives: ghas- ' e a t ' : a-g-dhad- (TS.) 'eating what is
uneaten' ( = a-ghs-ta-ad'-), sa-g-dhi (VS.) 'joint meal' ( = sa-ghs-ti-); bhas-
'chew': a-ps-u- 'foodless'; pad- 'walk': upa-bd-a-, upa-bd-i- 'noise' (lit. 'tread');
tur-iya- 'fourth' ( = *ktur-iya-) : catur- 'four 1 ; napt-i- 'granddaughter' : ndpit-
'grandson'.
3. in s u f f i x e s : -s- for -as- in bhx-s-A, inst sing.: bhiy-ds-3 'through fear';
sXr-s-an-: sir-as- 'head'; -s for -as in the abL gen. sing, ending of stems in i u o\
e. g. agni-s, vlsrto-s, go-s.
B . Long g r a d e : a.—The Vrddhi corresponding to the a which represents
the Gupa stage is 3. It appears:
a. in the root:
1. in primary nominal derivation: thus psd- 'foot 1 : pad-, bd- 'walk'; r&j-
1
See WACKERNAGEL I, 70. ' g o ' : ga-ta-; dyu-mänt-, inst sing, dyu-mal-ä;
2 When a is followed by n or m, the nä-man-, inst. pi. nama-bhis. The a in such
syllables an and am, if preceded by a con- low grade syllables is generally regarded as
sonant, usually lose the nasal before mutes; historically representing the sonant nasal n :
e. g. han- strike' : ha-thas 2. du. pres.; gam-
cp. WACKEJLNAGEL I, 66.
Indo-arische Philologie. I. 4. 2
 18 I. ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4. VEDIC GRAMMAR.

'king': raj-, rj- 'direct'; vac- 'voice': vac-, uc- 'speak'; kstis, nom., ksiim, acc.,
'earth' : ksam-, ism--, nabh- 'well' : ndbh-as, abh-rd- (abh- = nbh-) 'cloud'.
Also before primary suffixes: dp-as: dp-as 'work'; vfis-as 'garment': vas-, us-
'wear 1 ; vdh-as 'offering 1 : vah-, uh- 'convey'; vds-tu 'abode' : vas-, us- 'dweli'.
Perhaps also piith-as 'place*: path- 'path''.
2. in secondary nominal derivation; e. g. kanvd- 'descended from Kanva';
vapus-a- 'marvellous': vap-us- 'marvel*.
3. in the active of the j-aorist: thus a-cchant-s-ur: chand-, chad- (= chnd-)
'appear'; a-yam-s-am, 1. sing, \yam-, ya- (= ym-) 'stretch'; sak-s-ama, also mid.
sak-s-i, sak-s-ate: sah- 'overcome'
b. in the suffix of nominal stems:
1. in the nom. sing. masc. of stems in -matit and -vant, and throughout
the strong cases of stems in -an, of mahat- 'great', and of ndpat- 'grandson':
thus dyu-miin 'brilliant' \ dyu-mdnt-, dyu-mdt- (= -mnt-); re-vdn 'rich': re-vdnt-,
re-vat- (= vnt-)ij rflj-a, acc. rJj-an-arn 'king': r/ij-an-, rJj-ii-, rdj-a- («= raj-n-/,
mah-an, acc. mah-Ant-am; ndpat, acc. ndpat-am.
1. in the nom. acc. pi. neuter of stems in -an and -as and of one in
-ant-, thus mi ma4 'names': liftman, niima- (= ndmn-)-, mdnams-i 'minds': mdn-as;
sfitit-i: s-dnt- 'being'.
c. in anu- as first member of a compound in anu-sdk and anukatn
'continuously': otherwise anu-.

b. Gradation of a.
26. L o w g r a d e : i.— The vowel a is not always the long grade vowel:
in a number of roots it represents Guna. The low grade of this a is
normally /'; it sometimes, however, appears as f, owing to analogy 5 , and,
especially with a secondary accent, as a. Thus sthi-td- : stha-s 'thou hast
stood'; dhi-ta-: dd-dha-ti 'places'; pu-ni-hi\pu-nA-ti, from pu- 'purify'; gdh-ana-
'depth', gdh-vara- (AV.) 'hiding-place' -.gdh ate 'plunges'.
a. The low grade vowel disappears: 1. in roots ending in a before
vowel terminations; in the weak forms of the reduplicated present base of
da- 'give' and dha- 'put', before all terminations;' and in the weak form of
the suffix -na- in the ninth class before vowel terminations; thus in the perf.
of da-: dad-dthur, dad-atur-, dad-d, dad-ur\ dad-/; in the pres. of dha-: dadh-
mdsi; beside pu-nfi-ti 'he purifies', pu-n-anti 'they purify*. Similarly from ha-
'forsake' occurs, in the opt. pres., the form jah-yat (AV.).
2. in the final member of compounds formed with the perf. part,
passive of da- 'give', and da- 'cut', or with a substantive in -ti- from da- 'give':
devd-tta-, a name ('given by the gods'); ava-tta- (VS.) 'cut off'; pdri-tta- (VS.)
'given up'; d-prati-tta- (AV.) 'not given back'; bhdga-tti- 'gift of fortune';
maghd-tti- 'gift of presents'; vdsu-tti- 'gift of wealth' (beside vdsu-dhiti- 'bestowal
of wealth': dhi-). Also in agni-dh'fire-placer*, a kind of priest7.

» Cp. AUVRECHT, BB. 14, 33; WACKER- 5 That is, under the influence of « as
NAGEL I, 72 (p. 79, bottom). low grade of ai which before consonants
2
Op. cit. I, 72 b i (p. 80). appears as a, as in gî-tâ- beside gà-thâ ,
3 The long vowel in these nominatives from gai- 'sing', pres. gay-a/i; cp. 27 a.
is to be accounted for by IE. compensatory : 6 Cp. agtu-dhâna- 'fire-place' ; in VS.
lengthening (-matt = mant-s, etc.); in the 1 agttiilh- appears instead, as if 'fire-kindler'
following examples it has spread from the ' (from idh- 'kindle').
nominative to other cases. I 7 For a few other examples (which are
4 Such neuter plurals were in origin prob- i doubtful) of the loss of the low grade vowel
ably feminine singular collectives: cp. BRUG- in the final member of compounds, see
MANN, KG. 481 ; WACKERNAGEL I, 73 and 95. WACKERNAGEL I, p. 82 (mid.).
 I . PHONOLOGY, a SERIES, ai AND au SERIES. i9

I V . T h e ai and au series.
a. Gradation of ai.
27. L o w grade: /. — As the final of roots and in suffixes X is graded
with ai (as with ya'), which appears as ay- before vowels and as 3- before
consonants 2 . T h e roots in which this gradation is found are stated by the
Indian grammarians in five different forms. They are:
a. 1. roots given with -ai- (because their present base appears as -ay-a):
gai- ' s i n g ' \gX-td-, gx-ya-mana-, b e s i d e gdy-ati ' s i n g s ' , -gdy-as 'song', and ga-s-i,
1. sing. aor. mid., ga-thd- 'song'; pyai- 'swell' :pt-na-, beside pydy-ate-, srai- 'boil':
srT-nd-ti, s'rl-ta-, b e s i d e srdy-ati, s'rS-ia-. — 2 . w i t h -ay--, cay- ' o b s e r v e ' : cikx-hi
( A V . ) , beside cdy-amana-, ciy-u- ' r e s p e c t f u l ' . — 3 . with -e-\ dhe- ' s u c k ' : dhx-ta-,
beside dhdy-as 'drink', dhay-u- 'thirsty', and dha-tave 'to suck', dha-n't- (AV.)
'sucking'. — 4. w i t h - J - : pa- ' d r i n k ' : px-ta-, pi-ti- 'drink', b e s i d e pay-ayati, caus.,
pay-ana- 'causing to drink', and a-pa-t, aor., pd-tave; ra- 'give': ra-rX-thas,
2. sing, injv., beside ray-d 'with wealth', and rd-sva, impv., rd-m, a c c . — 5 . with -T-:
nX- ' l e a d ' : nX-ta-, beside nSy-a- 'leader', and -na-tha- ( A V . ) ' h e l p ' ; pT- 'revile':
J>i-yati, px-ya-tmi- a n d px-y-u- 'reviler', beside pay-u- ( V S . ) 'anus'; prT- l o v e ' :
prX-nd-ti, prX-ta-, b e s i d e prdy-as-e3; si-4 ' l i e ' ; -si-van- 'lying*, b e s i d e a-say-aia,
3. sing. 5
b. This gradation also occurs in the final of dissyllabic bases: thus
grabhx-sta, a-grabhx-t, grbhX-td-, b e s i d e grbhay-ati ' s e i z e s ' 6 ; a n d in t h e b a s e of
t h e ninth class: grbhnX-ta, 2. pi., beside grbhnd-ti.
c . It is also f o u n d in the s u f f i x e s -ethe -ete and -ethUm -etam of the
2. 3. du. mid. of the «-conjugation, which can only be explained as containing
itJie Jte and tfhatn Uam, with w e a k grade X corresponding to the a c c e n t e d
a o f dthe dte and dtham Atam of the non-thematic conjugation (and parallel
to the -I- o f the optative beside -ya-7).

b. Gradation of au.
a 8 . L o w grade: 0. — As the final of roots a is graded with au (parallel
with z/iZ8), much in the same way as »with ai, appearing as av before vowels,
a before consonants'; but the certain examples are few. Thus dha-nS-ti
'shakes', dhii-ti- 'shaker', dha-ma- 'smoke', beside dhdv-ati 'runs', dhd-rH-
'stream'; dhu-ta- 'washed', beside dhdv-ati 'washes'. But here au appears
before consonants as well as a; thus dhau-tarX- 'shaking', beside dha- 'shake';
a n d dhau-ti- 'spring', dhau-ta- (SV.), beside dhdv-ati 'washes'. Similarly gd-tn

1 See above 24. to this e that ay- sometimes appears instead

2 ai appears only in the s-aor., as nai-s-ta, of ay- in some of the above v e r b s ; as
2. pi., m- 'lead', owing to the analogy of pray-as- 'enjoyment', from \pri-; ray-i- 'wealth',
forms like a-jai-s-ma, from ji- 'conquer'. from \/rd-; idy e, 3. sing., from ii- 'lie'.
3 Occurs R V . IV. 2 1 7 (Pp. pra ayase (and is 6 Cp. WACKERNAGEL I, 79 b (p. 89).

explained by BOHTLINGK (pw.) as = prayase. 7 Op. cit. 1, 79 c (p. 89).

4 Perhaps also in iT- 'fall' : iiyate (AV.), 8 See above 24 b.

beside sata-yati 'cuts o f f ' , which may be a
denominative from *sa-ta- 'fallen'. Cp.
WHITNEY, Roots, under \!at- and yl Ji-;
WACKERNAGEL 1, 79 a i (p. 88).
5 In some of the above roots e appears
instead of a before consonants; e. g. ce-ru-
'devout', beside cay-it--, pe-ru- 'causing to
drink', beside pay-ana-; dhe-nu- 'milch cow',
dhi-na- i d . ; sf-se, beside a-say-ata-, nt-tf-.
beside nay-a-; sle-na- 'thief', beside slay-u-
(VS.) id., and stay-dnt- (AV.) 'furtive'; sena-
missile', beside say-aka•. It is, perhaps, due
9 Similarly in the R V . the -au of duals and
of asfau 'eight' normally appears as av before
vowels and a before consonants in Sandhi.
T h e nominatives in a of -r stems and -an
stems, e. g. mala, sva 'dog', are probably
due originally to the loss of the final r and
« before consonants in the sentence, then
becoming the regular form everywhere.
Conversely aj/du has b e c o m e the only in-
j dependent form in the A V . , afta- appearing
only as first member of a compound. Cp.
WACKERNAGEL I, 94, 95.
2*
20 I. ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4. VEDIC GRAMMAR.

and gii-s, acc., beside gdv-as, n o m . pi., but gau-s, nom. sing., ' c o w ' ; and dya-m,
a c c . sing., beside dy&v-as, nom. pi., but dydu-s, nom. sing., 'heaven'.

V . Secondary shortening of 1 u r.

29. L o w g r a d e : / u r. — Owing to the shift of the accent from its

normal position in a word to its beginning, the low grade vowels 1 a tr ur (=/)
are often further shortened to i u r in compounds and reduplicated forms.
A pre-tonic syllable thus acquires a post-tonic position, where the force of the
accent is w e a k e s t It is the same cause which shortens final weak grade I
and u in the vocative singular; e. g. dfai, nom. devi; svasru, nom. svasrns1.
This shortening often appears in:
a. compounds 2 :
1. those in which the final member is derived with -ta- and -/»-,
the accent being regularly thrown back on the first m e m b e r 3 : thus a-ni-si-ta-
'restless', tii-si-ta- ( T S . B.) 'night', from si 'lie'; prd-si-ti- 'onset', beside sfiy-aka-
'missile' 4 ; su-su-ti- 'easy birth', beside sati-ki- ( A V . ) 'lying-in woman'; a-str-ta-
'unconquered', d-ni-str-ta- 'not overthrown', beside stir-na-, from sir- 'strew' 5 ;
A-huti- 'invocation', otherwise -ha-ti- in sd-hati- 'joint invocation', deva-hoti-
'invocation of the gods', and other compounds.
2. those in which the final member is a root in t 6 or u with or
without the suffix -/; e. g. dhi-ju- 'thought inspiring', beside ja- 'hastening*,
ja-td- 'impelled'; very often -bku-, beside bku-, as in d-pra-bhu- 'powerless',
vi-bhu- 'mighty"; ni-yu-t- 'team', beside yu- 'unite' (as in ya-thd- 'herd').
3. those in which the final member is formed with other suffixes;
thus madhyan-di-na- 'midday', su-di-na- 'bright", beside di- 'shine"; su-su-mdni-
'very stimulating", beside sB-td- 'impelled'; also in tuii-gr-a- and tuvi-gr-i-
'much devouring', beside sarn-gir-a- (AV.) 'devouring', as r here = r1.
4. some Bahuvrlhis (in which the first member is normally a c c e n t e d ) 8 ;
thus brhad-ri- 9 'possessing much wealth' (rat-); try-udh-ati- 'having three udders',
beside adh-an- 'udder'.
b. reduplicated forms 1 0 in which accentuation of the reduplicative
syllable, especially in the third class and one form of the aorist, counteracts
the normal accent of the verb; thus from di- 'shine', are formed dl-di-hi,
2.sing.impv., di-di-vtims-, perf. part., di-di-vi- 'shining", beside di-paya- (causative)

* Cp. 23. j 5 The secondarily shortened form of the

2 The application of this shortening pro- t past part, slr-ta- is not found as an in-

cess becomes obscured, on the one hand j dependent word in theRV.; it first appears
because the phonetically shortened vowel in later texts.
6 An example of the shortening of I is
has found its way into accented final
members of compounds as being character- perhaps adhi-kfi-t• 'ruler', ksl- being according
istic of the end of a compound; while, on the to J. SCHMIDT, Pluralbildung4i9, the original
other hand, i u tr ¡¡r ( = r ) for the most part weak form of the root; cp. WACKEKNAGEL
have remained unchanged, even when the 1, 8 3 b.
accent has shifted, because of the influence of 7 Cp. KRETSCHMEK, K Z . 3 1 , 3 9 7 ; WACKEI-
the uncompounded word; e. g. su-suta- 'well- N A G E L I , 8 3 C .
begotten', pra-sula- 'impelled'; a-iu/i- 'inten- 8 See accentuation of compounds, 90.

tion'; rta-dhiti- 'truly adored'; pra-turti- 9 Occurring only in the dat. sing. l>rhad-
'onset'. raye, beside ray-i, dat. of rai- "wealth'.
3 That this is the cause of the shortening 1 0 On the shortening of the radical syllable

is shown by the fact that the < of the inst in some verbs of the fifth and the ninth
sing, of derivatives in -ti appears as i only classes, ji-no-fi, beside ji-ra- 'lively', du-no-ti
when such words are componnded: e. g. 'bums', beside du-na- (AV.); ju-na-ti'impels',
pra-yukti 'with the team'. Cp. WACKZRNAGEL besidtju-ta-\ pu-na-ti 'purifies', besidepu-ia-,
I, 8 4 . see WACKEKNAGEL I, 85, note (bottom).
4 Cp. 27, note 5.
 I. PHONOLOGY. SECONDARY SHORTENING OF t a f . CONSONANTS. 21

•kindle'; from dhT- 'think', di-dhi-ma, 1. pL perf., di-dhi-H- 'devotion', beside

dhl-ti- 'thought'; from kf- 'commemorate', car-kr-se, intv., car-kr-tl- 'praise',
b e s i d e iXr-ti- ' p r a i s e ' ; frompf- fill', pi-pr-tam, 3. du., b e s i d e pur-na- a n d pOr-ta-.
Such shortening often occurs in red. aor., e. g. bx-bhis-a-thSs, 2. sing. mi<L,
beside vi-bhis-ana- 'terrifying'. It is also found in a few nouns; e. g. si-si-ra-
( A V . ) ' c o o l n e s s ' , b e s i d e sX-ta- ' c o l d ' ; tu-tu-ma- b e s i d e ta-ya- 'strong'

T h e Consonants.

30. Doubling of consonants. — All consonants, except r h I, Anusvara,

and Visarjanlya, can be doubled, and the distinction between double and
single consonants is known to the Pratisakhyas as well as to Panini. Aspirates
are, however, nearly always written double by giving the first in the unaspirated
form. A double consonant 2 is pronounced by the organs of speech dwelling
longer on it than on the single sound. Within words 3 a double consonant
appears:
r. as the result of the contact of the same consonants or the assimilation*
o f different o n e s ; e. g. cit-td- ' p e r c e i v e d ' ( = cit-ta-)-, uc-ca- 'high' ( = ud-ca-);
bhet-tr- ' b r e a k e r ' ( = bhed-ir-); an-na- ' f o o d ' ( = ad-na-).
a. in a few onomatopoetic words: akhkhalx-krtya 'shouting'; ciccika- a kind
o f b i r d ; kukkutd- ( V S . ) ' c o c k ' ; tittiri- ( V S . ) a n d tittiri- ( T S . B . ) ' q u a i l ' ; pippaka-
(VS.) a kind of bird.
3. in the case of the palatal aspirate, which regularly appears as cch
between vowels (though often written as ch in the Mss.), for it always
makes the preceding vowel long by position and is derived from an original
conjunct consonant 5 . Some forms of khid- 'press down', are doubled after a
v o w e l in the T S . {akkhidat, d-kkhidra-\ a-kkhidatd, pari-kkhidatt). I n the T S . 6
bh appears doubled in pari bbhuja. In a school of the White Yajurveda
initial v was regularly doubled'.
4. when final n is doubled after a short vowel if followed by any vowel
sound 8 .
a. In the Mss., w h e n double consonants are preceded or followed b y another con-
s o n a n t ^ one of t h e m is frequently dropped, because in such consonantal groups t h e r e
was no difference in pronunciation between single and double consonants. H e n c e t h e
VPr. (VI. 27) prescribes a single t in k;attra- 'dominion' ( = ifad-tra-), and in sattra-
'sacrificial session' ( = sad-tra-). Such shortening is further presupposed by t h e analysis
of t h e P a d a texts in hr(dydyotah (AV. I. 22 1 ) and hT\dydy6iattah fAV. v. 20IA) as hr-dyotah
and hr-dy6tanah\ in ta(d)dydm (AV. iv. 196) as tat yam (instead of tat dyam)\ and in
upastha-, which appears in t h e RV. P a d a as ufa-stha• instead of ufas-stha-, if GRASSMANN'S
suggestion is r i g h t 1 0 . In some instances this reduction is IE., as in sa/ra- (IE. setlo-)*'.

1
On variations in c o g n a t e forms between as in aviisat (AV.) — *dvis-}at, aor. of dvis-
i u r and T u r in s o m e other words see ' h a t e ' , is also an I n d i a n innovation.
W A C K E R N A C E L "I, 8 6 . 3 On double consonants in Sandhi, see
* Sometimes a single s represents the below 77.
double sound, as in a si ' t h o u art' (— as-si); 4 T h e evidence of the Avestan formvfriltka-
apasu (RV. VIII. 4M), loc. pi. of apas- 'active';shows that the double consonant in vrkka-
amhasit (AV.), loc. pi. of amhas- 'distress'; (AV. VS.) 'kidney' is due to assimilation.
jo-fi 'thou shalt taste' (Jus-); probably also in 5 See below 40; WACKERNAGEL I, 133.
gAJ-fUfrom ¿ /iuf- 'sound'j, in uf-as, gen sing., 6 See TPr. xiv. 8.
r

acc. pi. of u{-, weak stem of u/-as- ' d a w n ' 7 See WEBER, Abh. d. Berliner Ak. d.
(for *ufpas), possibly in usr- ' d a w n ' (for Wiss. I871, p. 83 f.
*uss-r-). As the single s in such f o r m s is • 8
See below 46; cp. WACKERNAGEL I,
shown by c o g n a t e l a n g u a g e s also, it seems 2 7 9 a.
here to be pre-Vedic, and t h e double ss in 9 C p . R O T H i n Z D M G . 4 8 , 1 0 2 f.
forms like rajas-sti, loc. pi., is probably an 1 0 See his Lexicon, s. v. upastha-.
Indian innovation. T h e change of /f to if, " See WACKERNAGEL I, 98 b, note.
22 I. ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4 . Y E D I C GRAMMAR.

Mutes.
31. M o d e s of articulation. — T h e r e are 20 mutes (or 22 counting I l k
among the cerebrals), which comprise a tenuis, an aspirate tenuis, a media,
and an aspirate media in each of the five groups o f gutturals, palatals, cerebrals,
dentals, and labials (4). T h e s e four modes of articulation are initially and
medially liable to but little variation except w h e n they c o m e into contact
with other mutes or with following sibilants.
1. T h e tenues regularly represent IE. tenues; e. g. cakra- 'wheel', G k .
K'jKho-s-, pitr- 'father', Gk. naTTjp, Lat. pater.
2. T h e mediae regularly represent IE. m e d i a e ; e. g. gdcchati, Gk. faaKsi;
rhj- 'king', Lat. rig--, mad-ati 'is drunk', Lat. mad-et. T h e r e are a few
instances in which a media appears in place of an older tenuis: gulphd- ( A V . ) :
kulpha- 'ancle'; arbhaga- 'youthful': arbhakd- 'little'; tuj-: tuc-, tokd- 'offspring';
dn-ava-prgna- 'undivided': pre- 'mix'; girikd- (MS.) : kirika- (VS.) 1 a kind of
demon. T h e s e examples may be due to popular dialects, in which tenues
largely b e c a m e mediae 2 . In a few derivatives the media g appears instead
of k before the tt m v of suffixes owing to the influence of Sandhi: e. g. vag-nu-
'sound', from vac- 'speak', but rck-nas- 'wealth', from ric-; s'ag-md- 'helpful',
from sak-, but ruk-md- 'gold', from rue- 'shine 1 ; vag-vin- ( A V . ) 'eloquent', from
vak 'speech', but tak-va- 'swift 1 , from tak- 'hasten'.
3. T h e evidence of cognate languages shows that the V e d i c aspirate
tenuis in a large number of instances is original, and it is highly probable
that it is the regular representative of IE. aspirate tenuis. T h e following are
examples in which mutes of this character are inherited J :
a. khan- 'dig'; kha- 'spring'; khdd-ati 'chews'; nakha- 'nail'; makha- 'lively';
mukha- 'mouth'; sankhd- ( A V . ) 'shell'; sakhi- 'companion'.
b. ch — IE. skh, e . g . in chid- 'split'; = IE. sk in inchoative gdcchati 'goes',
ucchati 'shines'.
C. th = th in sas-thd- ( V S . A V . ) 'sixth'; sthtv-ati ( A V . ) 'spits'.
d. th* in dtha 'then'; athari- 'tip'; atharvan- 'fire-priest'; artha- 'use';
granth- 'knot';path- 'way';prth-1'1- 'broad';prdth-as 'breadth'; prothat- 'snorting';
math- 'stir'; mith- 'alternate'; ya-thi 'as'; ratha- 'car'; vyathate 'wavers'; snath-
'pierce'. Further in the various suffixes -tha\ forming primary nouns; e. g.
uk-tha- 'praise', ga-tha- f. ga-tha- 'song'; as -atha in svas-dtha- 'hissing';
forming ordinals: catur-tha- ( A V . ) 'fourth'; sapta-tha- 'seventh'; forming 2. sing,
perf.: dada-tha 'thou gavest', vit-tha 'thou knowest'; forming 2. pi. pres.: bhava-
tha 'ye are'; also in -thas o f 2. sing, mid., e. g. a-sthi-thas 'thou hast stood'.
e. ph in phala- 'fruit'; phAla- 'ploughshare'; sphar- and sphur- 'jerk';
spha(j)- 'grow fat'.
4. T h e aspirate media, which represents the same IE. sound, is a
media combined with h. This is proved by the express statements of the
Pratisakhyas 5 ; by the fact that Ih — dh is written with the separate letters
/ and h\ and by the change of h following a media to an aspirate media
(as tad dhi for tad hi).
a. In two or three words an aspirate media interchanges with an aspirate tenuis:
nadhamana- 'praying', nadhita- 'distressed', beside nithiia- 'distressed' (where th is probably
due to the influence of -tiatha• 'help'); adha and atha 'then' 6 ; uifangadhi- (VS.) and
nifanga/hi- (TS.) 'scabbard'.
1 For some doubtful instances of media sprachliche tenuis aspirata dentalis im ari-
representing IE. tenuis, see WACKERNAGEL schen, griechischen und lateinischen' by
I, 100 b, p. 117, note. ! L c . ZUBATY in K Z . 31, I — 9 .
3 Op. cit. lox. 5 RPr. xiu. 2. 5 ; TPr. II. 9.
4 A complete list of Vedic and Sanskrit 6 There seem to have been a few IE.
words containing th in his article 'Die ur- doublets of this k i n d : seeWACKERNAGEL 1,103.
 I. PHONOLOGY. MUTES. M O D E S OF ARTICULATION. L O S S OF ASPIRATION. 23

32. Loss of aspiration. — Aspiration is lost when there is another

aspirate in the same syllable or at the beginning of the next in roots \ Hence
a. initial aspiration is lost: 1. in the reduplicative syllable: e. g. ja-
ghtln-a (han-,ghan- 'strike'); ca-cchand-a (chand- 'please'); da-dha-ti (dha- 'put');
par-phar-at (phar- 'scatter'?). But when the reduplication consists of two
syllables, the rule does not apply; e. g. ghani-ghan-at, intv. part of han-
(beside jdn-ghn-at), ghanii-ghan-d- 'fond of striking"; bhari-bhr-at, intv. part,
of bhr- 'bear'. Loss of aspiration, however, began, even in the RV. 2 , to
spread from monosyllabic to dissyllabic reduplication; thus a-paril-phan-at,
intv. part, of phan- 'bound*. — 2. in the following words, according to the
evidence of cognate languages: kumbha- 'pot' 3 ; gadh- 'attach'; gabhas-ti- 'arm';
guh- 'conceal'; grdh- 'be greedy*; grha- 'house'; grabh- 'seize'; jamhas 'gait';
jangha- 'leg'; jaghdna- 'buttock'; dabh- 'harm'; dak- 'burn'; dih- 'besmear*;
duh- 'milk'; duhitf- 'daughter'; drahyat 'strongly'; druh- 'injure'; bandh- 'bind';
babhrti- 'brown'; badh- 'distress'; bihu- 'arm'; budh- 'awake'; budhna- 'bottom';
brh- 'be great'. It is probable also in dagh- 'reach': bamh- Tje firm'; badhira-
'deaf'; ba/iri-, bahula- 'much'; bradhnd- 'pale red'; brahman- 'devotion'.
b. Final aspiration is often lost4. 1. When this occurs before suffixal s,
orignal initial aspiration is lost in some cases; thus from guh- 'hide', desid-
3. du. ju-guk-sa-tas; grdh- 'be eager': grtsd- 'dexterous'; dabh- 'harm': desid.
dip-sa-ti, dip-su- 'intending to hurt'; dah- 'bum': impv. dak-si, aor. part, daksat-,
daksu- and daksus- 'flaming'; duh- 'milk': aor. a-duksat, duksas, etc., des. part
duduksan*; bhas- 'chew': bap-sati, part bdps-at-; gkas- 'eat' \jak-siyit, perf.opt.;
has- 'laugh': part jdks-at-; also in the word drap-sa- 'drop' 6 .
But in some of the above and in analogous forms with s, the original
initial aspirate remains; thus from guh-, aor. aghuksat; dah- : dhaksi, part.
dhdksat-, fut. part, dhaisydn; duh- : aor. adhuksat, dhuksan, etc. 2. impv.
dhuk-sva\ badh- 'distress': bx-bhat-su- 'loathing'; budh- 'awake': aor. a-bhut-s-i.
2. When the loss of final radical aspiration is due to any other
cause than suffixal s, the original initial aspirate regularly remains; thus from
dah-, aor. a-dhak-, budh- 'waken': nom. -b/iut 'waking'; dha- 'put': dhat1,
3. sing., dhat-thas, a-dhat-tam, etc.; and in the latter verb always before s
also: dhat-se, dhat-sva, desid. dhit-sati.
c. On the other hand, there is no loss of aspiration in the root if an
aspirate follows which belongs to a suffix or second member of a compound;
e. g. vibhu-bhis 'with the Vibhus'; proth-atha- 'snorting'; dh/fstha- 'giving most'
(dhft-istha-); ahi-han- 'serpent-slaying'; garbha-dhi- 'breeding-place'. The only
exceptions 8 are the two imperatives bo-dhi 'be' (for *bho-dhi» instead of *bha-
dhi) and ja-h! (for *jha-hi) from hart- 'strike' 10 .

1 E x c e p t when the second aspirate belongs 6 IE. dhrebh- 'coagulate'.

to a suffix or second member of a com- 7 For dhadh-t.
pound, see below c. 8 Forms like bud-dha• for budh-ta can
2 Later this became the rule. hardly b e regarded as exceptions since
J Initial aspiration has perhaps been lost the aspiration is assumed b y the suffix
also in iakh<i- 'branch', and in the rootsinstead of reappearing in the initial of the
stigh- 'mount', and stambh- 'make firm'. root.
C p . W A C K E R N A G E L 1, 1 0 5 a . 9 Here bho- is a Prakritic contraction for
4 T h i s may also be the case in the roots bhava-.
bhuj- 'bend', chid- 'split', chad• 'cover', dhraj- 1 0 A l s o vidatha- 'feast', if correctly derived

'sweep': op. cit I, 105 b, note. from vidk- 'worship'; on this word see M A X
5 T h e s e forms from dah- and duh- almost M O L L E R , S B E . 3 2 , 3 5 0 ; F O Y , K Z . 3 4 ,
always appear in the Pada text with dh, 2 2 6 ; BLOOMFIELD, J A O S . 19, 2 , 1 2 ff.;
doubtless because from the time of the G E L D N E R , Z D M G . 5 2 , 7 3 0 — 6 1 ; WACKER-
BrShmanas this initial aspiration had become NAGEL 1, 108. A few more uncertain exam-
the r u l e ; cp. BENFEY, G G A , 1873, p. i 8 f . ples might be exceptions: garda-bha- 'ass'
24

d. There are a few cognate words in which an aspirate is found beside

the corresponding media or tenuis: mdj-man- 'greatness': mah- 'great'; vi-
spulinga-ka- 'scattering sparks': sphur-dti 'darts'
e. In a few isolated words a media seems, according to the evidence
of cognate languages, to stand for an IE. aspirate: gmd- 'earth', gen. grnas-,
jma- 'earth', gen. jmas, inst jmi; dvar-, dur- * 'door"; majjan- marrow'.
33. Aspirates in contact with other m u t e s . — Of two mutes in
juxtaposition (of which both must be voiced or both voiceless •S), the second
only can be aspirated. In such case either
1. the second represents an original aspirate, the first an aspirate or not:
e. g. dhat-thas = *dhadh-thas (dha- 'put1); ran(d)-dhi = *randh-dhi (randh-
'make subject'), uk-tha- 'song' = uk-tha- (vac- 'speak'); vtt-tha = d-tha
(vid- 'know'); sag-dhi 'help' = *sak-dhi (sak- 'be strong'); or
2. the first represents an aspirate media 4 , the second a dental tenuis s
which assumes the mode of articulation of the first; e. g. dag-dhr- 'one who
bums' (acc.) = *dagh-tr- (dah- 'bum'); -vid-dha- 'pierced' «= *vidh-ta- (vyadh-);
-lab-dha- 'taken' = *labh-ta- (labh-). An intervening sibilant (z = s) did not
prevent the same result: jag-dha-, jag-dhvtiya, jag-dhva (AV.), a-g-dha (TS.)
from ghas- 'eat', gdh representing gzdh- for gzh-t- from gh(a)s-t-.
a. When the first is A representing an old palatal aspirate («= $h, IE. gh)6,
it disappears after cerebralizing the dental and lengthening the preceding vowel;
e. g. Udha- = *u$-dha- for u$h-ta- from vah-td-i.
b. In a few instances the / does not become dh owing to the influence
of cognate forms: thus dhaktam (instead ot *dagdhatn = *dhagh-tdm) according
to 2. 3. sing, dhak (= *dhagh-t) from dagk- 'reach'; dhat-tam etc. (instead of
"dad-dham for *dhadh-tam) according to 3. sing. dhat(= *dhadh-t), 2. sing. mid.
dhdt-se, etc. ( = *dAadA-se)s.

T h e Five Classes of Mutes.

34. T h e gutturals. — These mutes, by the Indian phoneticians called
kanthya ('produced from the throat'), are minutely described in the Pratisakhyas
as formed at the 'root of the tongue' (jihvd-muld) and at the 'root of the
jaw' (hanu-mUla)9. They are therefore velar 10 sounds and, as the evidence

(if from grdh• ' b e greedy'), barjaha- 'udder' 5 T h e r e seems to be no example of any
(if from brh- 'be great'), sabar-dugha-, sabar-other tenuis in contact with a preceding
dhusabar-dhuk, epithet of cows (if sabar- aspirate media within a word, but the result
= Gk. a$ap: BARTHOLOMAE, B B . 15, 1 8 ) : would probably have been the same. T h e r e
cp. WACKERNAGEL I, 108, note, 2 1 7 b ; Z D M G . is no example of th becoming voiced in
43, 667 f.; 46, 292 (barjaha-). this combination; it remains in dhat-thas
< A few doubtful examples discussed by j(= *dadh-thas).
WACKERNAGEL I, p. 129 bottom. j 6 S e e below 58.
2 Op. cit. 1,109, note (mid.); according to 7 According to this rule uf-tra- 'buffalo',
BLOOMFIELD, Album Kern, p. 193 f., the media is could not be derived from vah- 'carry' (as
due to the influence of the numeral dva- 'two'. in that case it would have b e c o m e udhra-)-.
J T h i s was often due to assimilation, the cp. WACKERNAGEL I, H I b, note.
mode o f t h e articulation o f the second 8 Before sibilants, all aspirates as well as

generally prevailing; e. g. at-ti = *ad-ti (ad- mediae become tenues; but according to
'eat'); vit-tha = *vid-tha\ iag-dhi = *sai- TPr. xiv. 12, APr. II. 6 (cp. RPr. vi. 1 5 )
dhi\ the articulation of the first prevails a tenuis in such a position may be pro-
in 33. 2- nounced as an aspirate; see WACKERNAGEL
4 An aspirate tenuis loses its aspiration 1, 1 1 3 . .
in these circumstances; thus grnatti (AV.) 9 See APr. 1. 20 and WHITNEY'S note.
for *grnath-ti, i f this form is derived from That is, pronounced with the velum or
grath- "'tie'. soft palate.
 I . PHONOLOGY. T H E FIVE CLASSES OF MUTES. GUTTURALS. PALATALS. 25

of cognate languages shows, derived from IE. velars 1 . Gutturals are found
interchanging to some extent with sounds of the four other classes.
1. Under certain conditions they interchange with the new palatals
(c j h) which are derived from them 1 ; with the old palatal s'* (also old j and h)
only when followed by s (which then becomes J) 4 . Between this ks = s-s
and ks = k-s it is possible to distinguish by the aid of Iranian, where the two
are represented by different sounds 5 ; and the original value of the k can
thus be determined even in words in which no form without the sibilant
occurs. This evidence shows that, in the following words, ks represents6.
a. s'-s: aksi- 'eye'; rksa-'bear'; kaksa- 'armpit'; kuksi- 'belly'; ksi- 'dwell';
ksudh- "hunger'; caks- 'see'; taks- 'fashion'; daksina- 'right'; pdksman- (VS.)
'eyelash'; maksd 'quickly*; raks- (AV.) 'injure'; raks-as- 'injury';
b. k-s-. ksaira- 'dominion'; ksap- 'night'; ksi- 'rule'; ksip- 'throw'; ksTra-
'milk'; ksud- 'shake', ksod-as- 'rush of water', ksudra- 'small' (VS.), n. 'minute
particle'; ksubh- 'swift motion'; tvaks- "be strong'; vrksa- 'tree*.
2. In a few instances k stands for a medial t: in vrkkau (AV.) 'kidneys',
for *vrtkau7; prksu (SV.) = pftsu 'in battles'. In these two forms the sub-
stitution is due to Prakritic influence; this is probably also the case in skambh-
beside stambh- 'prop' 8 . The guttural only seems to stand for a dental in
asiknX- beside asita- 'black', paliknT- beside palita- 'grey', and hariknika- (AV.)
beside harita- 'yellow*, as there is no etymological connexion between -kril-
and -ta-9.
3. In a few words a guttural interchanges with a labial medially:
kakardu- beside kaparda- 'braid of hair'; kulika (VS.): pulika (MS.) a kind
of bird; kutlkdya- (TS.) -.pullkdya- (MS.), kulipdya- (VS.) : purlkaya10 (AV.)
a kind of aquatic animal; rticunkuna- (TS.) : tiictfmpuna- 'flood'; and
in the TS. (B.) tristugbhis and anustvgbhyas occur beside tristub-bhis and
anustubbhyas ".
4. In a few verbal forms from three roots k stands for s before suffixal J " ,
though this k never made its way into the loc. pi. (where only -s-su- or -h-su,
-t-su occur). The only example in the RV. is pinak (for pinak-s) 2. sing,
impf. of pinas-ti (pis- 'crush'). In the AV. occur dvik-s-at, dvik-s-ata, aor.
of dvis- 'hate'; sisliksate, -sisliksu-, desid. of s'/is- 'embrace'. Other possible
examples from the RV. are -rksara- 'thorn' (if from rs- 'prick'); rlriksa-ti
and ririksu-, desid. (if from ris- 'injure'); viveksi (if from vis- 'work')' 3 .
35. T h e palatals.—These are pronounced in India at the present
day as a close combination of a /-sound followed by a palatal spirant s.
The evidence of the Greek reproduction of Indian words14 points in the same

» That is, the ^-sounds; some, however, 7 See above 30, note 4.
are derived from IE. labio-velars or ^'-sounds; 8 Cp. WACKERNAGEL I, p. 1 3 6 , note (top).
see BRUGMANN, KG. 1, 244 and 2 5 4 ; 9 Cp. J . SCHMIDT, Pluralbildung 398.
WACKERNAGEL 1, 1 1 5 . See ZDMG. 33, 193.
' See BRUGMANN, op. cit. 244. » See WEBER, IS. 8, 40. 5 4 ; 1 3 , 109.
1 2 This probably started from the paralle-
3 Op. cit. 233.
4 See below 56. lism of the 3. sing, of roots in f and s:
5 That is, s-s by s and k-s by As; thus j thus dvef-ti from \dvif-, and vaf-fi from \vas-;
vaifi, from vai- = vasi\ vaifya-mi, from ! then the 2. sing, dvek-fi for dves-si, followed
vat- (for vac-) = vahsya. vak-fi.
6 The two components of i f cannot yet »3 The relation of the k in dadhfk 'firmly',
have coalesced when s dropped out between to dadhrsa-, dadhryvani- 'bold', is uncertain.
two mutes in abhakta, for ai/iai-f-ta (aor. of Cp. WACKERNAGEL 1, 1 1 8 , note (end).
ihaj-), and aiasta for aiai-f-ta- from takf- '4 Thus riaviavov «= candana- 'sandal-
(Av. /as-) 'fashion'; otherwise the two differ- wood' ; Tiaa-oviji = catfana-, N.; IlaiaXai =
ent original sounds could not have been pancala-, N. of a people; XailpwvKiQZ =
kept apart in these two forms. candragupta-, N.; '0Xiffl ' ujjayinl- (Prakrit
26 I. ALLGEMEINES U N D S P R A C H E . 4. VEDIC GRAMMAR.

direction. It is therefore likely that they were thus pronounced in V e d i c

times 1 . Prosodically, however, they have the value of a single consonant
(excepting cA 2 ). T h e y date from the Indo-Iranian period only; but in order
to understand their place in the Vedic language, especially in relation to the
gutturals, we must go back to their ultimate origin. T h e evidence of com-
parative grammar shows that t w o distinct series of palatals, the later and
the earlier, must be distinguished. This evidence alone can explain how
the same V e d i c palatal sound ( j or h) is, under certain conditions, treated
differently.
36. T h e n e w palatals {c,j, h) are derived from gutturals (velars), being
interchangeable, in most roots and formatives, with gutturals, and being in
most cognate languages represented by the same sounds as represent original
gutturals. Thus from the root sue- 'shine' c o m e verbal forms such as socati,
beside the nominal derivatives soka-, s/ikvan-, sttkrA-, suklA- ( A V . ) ; from yuj-
'yoke', yuje 1. sing, mid., etc., besidz yugd-, y.ga-, yukta-, yugvan--, from druh-
'injure', dudroha, 3. sing, perf., etc., beside druhyu-, a name, and drogha-
'deceitful'.
T h e (Indo-Iranian) change from gutturals to palatals was regularly
p r o d u c e d before the palatal sounds i ty}; e. g. cittA- 'noticed', beside kdta-
'will', from cit- 'perceive'; ojlyas- 'stronger', beside ugrd- 'strong'; druhyi't-
beside drogha-. This change invariably takes place in Iranian, while the
exceptions in Vedic appear only before vowels which were not originally
palatal.
a. Gutturals thus appear instead of palatals before ir (;7) and ir
( = IE. rr- and r)4, which were not yet pronounced with an /-sound in the
Indo-Iranian p e r i o d 5 : ' t h u s Angiras-, a name; girl-6 'mountain'; kirAti, 3. sing.,
kirana- 'dust', from kr- 'scatter"; carkirama, carkiran, kirti- 'fame', from kr-
'commemorate'; gir- 'lauding', from gr- 'praise'; girdti ( A V . ) , 3. sing., -gila- ( A V . )
'devouring', from gf- 'swallow'. Before i ( = IE. 1)7 k appears in ok-i-vftms-,
part, from uc- 'be pleased', and g in tigitd-s 'sharp', beside tejate, tijas-
'brilliance', and other derivatives, from tij- 'be sharp'.
Otherwise a guttural followed by a palatal vowel is due to the influence
of cognate forms. This is the case
1. in the initial of roots a) in gT-, the weak stem of gai- 'sing', beside
gay-, gj-; /?) in reduplicated forms with cik-, jig-, due to forms like cikfiya,
jigAya- (where the guttural is in accordance with phonetic law) and to the
frequency of palatal reduplication of guttural initial; thus perf. ciky-ur, p a r t
c!ky-at-, desid. cikisate, impv. ciklhi ( A V . ) , from ci- 'perceive'; intv. cekit-, cikit-,
desid. cikits-, from cit- 'perceive'; perf. jigy-ur, desid. jigisate, jigyu- 'victorious',

ujjent), N. of a city; Aia/touva = yamnna-, I, 121 (p. 140, top). The palatal aspirate
N. of a river. Cp. WACKERNAGEL I, 119. , in fact never represents a guttural aspirate,
1
Cp. WHITNEY on APr. 1. 21. but only an IE. palatal, or sibilant and
1
Cp. above 30, 3; 31, 3 b ; and below 40. palatal.
3 T h e s p h e r e of t h e palatals h a s b e e n 4 Cp. WACKERNAGEL I, 24. 25.
e x t e n d e d b y analogy at t h e e x p e n s e of t h e 5 Cp. WACKERNAGEL 1, 123 a a.
6
gutturals and vice versa. The aspirate guttural In Av. gairi-.
kh appears where the other gutturals are 7 This sound had probably not yet become
replaced by palatals; thus before the y in a pure palatal in Ilr.
s
khya- 'see' (but jy'-) 'overpower'; before Otherwise the palatal regularly appears
the thematic a of the present: rikhati before this i in perfect forms; e. g. salciri
'sits* (but dahati)\ before the -ayati of the (sac- 'accompany'); bhejiri (Ma;- 'divide');
Causative: ihkhayati 'swings' (but arcdyati)-, iwocitha, iicise (uc- 'be pleased'); duddhitha
and notably in sakhi- 'friend': AsX. sakkye,' (dith- 'milk'),
pi. sakhibyas (Ilr. sachi-): cp. W A C K E R N A G E L |
 I. PHONOLOGY. PALATALS. 27

from ji- 'conquer'; y) in the pronominal forms kis, kirn, kim, kiyat, kivant-,
ktdrs-, beside the enclitic rid, because owing to the influence of the frequent
forms kd-s, ka-d, etc., k appeared to be characteristic of the interrogative
pronoun\
2. in the final of roots in which guttural forms predominate, before
the y of the optative and the gerund; thus dagh-yas, from dagh- 'reach';
sak-yam, from sak- 'be able'; sagh-yasam (TS.), from sagh- 'be equal to'. It
also appears very often before the suffixes -i, -T, -in, -ya forming derivatives
from nouns the last consonant of which is a guttural: e. g. playogi- 'descendant
of Playoga'; vrk-i- 'she-wolf (vrka-)-, sak-r'n- 'powerful* (saka-); srng-in- 'horned'
(srnga-); upa-vak-ya- 'to be praised' (beside upavAcya-) from upavaka- 'praise'.
Similarly drAgh-iyas- 'longer', drAgh-istha- 'longest* (beside dlrgha- 'long',
dragh-mdn- 'length'); sphig-i- 'buttock', with g from the nom. sp/iik of sphij-,
which occurs in the post-Vedic language only.
3. in a certain number of abnormal words, almost invariably at the
beginning:
a ) words which may be suspected of foreign origin owing to meaning
or phonetic form: kimsuka-, kiyAmbu- plant names; kimldin-, kikata-, kirata-
(VS.), sva-kisktn- (AV.) names of foreigners or demons; kija- a kind of
utensil; ktlbisa- 'guilt' (contains the rare letter b), kista- 'singer' (si instead
of st); /?) onomatopoetic words: kikidivi- 'blue jay'; kikirA-kr- 'tear to tatters';
kikkitA (TS.) an interjection; 7) some words of doubtful origin: kikasa-
'vertebra'; kinAra- 'ploughman'(?); kinAs'a- 'ploughman'; kilAla- 'sweet draught';
kirmira- (VS.) 'variegated'; kis'ora- (AV.) 'foal'; klsmtla- ( A V . Paipp.) a kind
of disease.
37. N e w palatals as radical initials. — a. Before a, a, and diphthongs,
both palatals and gutturals are very frequent in Vedic and Iranian. Comparative
grammar shows that the palatals occur before a vowel or diphthong
representing IE. a 9 or a diphthong beginning with i i 2 ; but gutturals before
IE. a 0 or sonant nasal. According to this evidence the palatal has come
into being in the following words: ca 'and'; cakrd- 'wheel'; catvsras 'four*;
caramd- 'last'; can't- 'pot'; cAru- 'agreeable'; pdnca 'five'; jathara- 'belly*;
/dnT-, -jatii- 'woman'; jami- 'akin'; haras- 'flame'.
On the other hand, the original guttural has remained in kakud- 'peak';
kdksa- 'armpit'; kari't- 'poet'; keta- 'will'; gdus 'cow'; gharmd- 'hot'; ghora-
'terrible'; and in the roots kas- (AV.) 'cough'; gadh• 'clasp'; ga- 'go'; gih-
'plunge'; gai- 'sing'J.
b. Among the roots with u r / as low grade vowels, the only one in
which the regular phonetic interchange of palatal and guttural takes place,
is jar- :gr- 'call'; g appearing before r ir ar ( = IE. or), j before ar ( = IE. ¿r)
preceding the thematic -a- of the present or the suffix -ir-) thus gr-nAti, gir-,
-gard- (VS.), beside jarate, jarddhyai, jaritr-. In other roots either the guttural
or the palatal appears throughout; mostly the guttural, because the forms
with u f I and o ar al ( = IE. ou or ol), which required the guttural, were
more numerous than those with 0 ar al ( = IE. cu ir el)-, thus from kr- 'do',
dkar aor. 'has done', kartr- 'agent*, kdrmati- 'action', retain the guttural, though
the palatal would be phonetic (as ar here = IE. er), through the influence
of forms with kr- and of kdrana- 'deed' (where ar = IE. or).

1
Cp. WACKERNAGEL I, 128 a (p. 150, [ 3 In the IE. vowel gradation of these
1
bottom). roots only a and o appear. In other roots
2
Cp. Italian and the Balto-Slavic languages in the IE. vowel gradation of which e is
which palatalize before e as well as i. found, an initial palatal would be expected
28 L ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4. VEDIC GRAMMAR.

On the other hand, the palatal appears in cud-1, codati 'impel'; scut-,
scotati 'drip', because here forms with u, which required a guttural, were rare;
in car-, carati 'move', where the palatal is almost invariably phonetic in RV.
(but AV. has cacara); in crt- 'bind', the palatal has fixed itself in spite of
many forms with r ; while beside harsate 'rejoices', harsant-, part, both
h and gh occur in weak forms: hrsita-, ghfpi- 'lively', ghrsvi- 'gladdening'.
c. Among roots in -an and am, survivals of the regular interchange are
found in kan- 'be pleased', and han- 'strike'. The former has the palatal
( = IE. ke-) in the aor. canistam, in the superl. canistha-, and in cartas- 'favour',
but otherwise the guttural. In hart-, h appears before an ( = IE. en) and,
by analogy, also before an = nn and a •= «; but gh before n and a = IE. 0;
thus hdn-ti, inf. hdn-tave\ han-mas, han-ydma-, ha-thas, -ha-ta, and with j in
impv. jahi (= *jhahi), but perf. jaghana, and ghana- 'striker', ghanaghand-
'found of striking'. In the intv. janghan-, gh stands for h before a = IE. c
owing to the influence of the weak stem jatighn-. In gam- 'go', ga- = gm-
(e. g. in gacchati, ga-ta-) has led to the use of gam- = */am-, as in
gam-anti'.
d. In the remaining verbs, that is, those with a (25) or 0 (22) as
high grade vowel, there appears chiefly the palatal throughout; thus caks-:
cacdksa (for *cakdksa). The phonetic guttural is, however, preserved in some
forms of the three verbs ci- 'observe' (perf. cikaya); cit- 'observe' (perf. cikeia\
kita- 'will'; ketu- -5 'appearance'); and ji- 'conquer' (perf. jigfiya-, gay a- 'house-
hold'). A guttural not phonetically justified appears before a ( = IE. e)
only in ghas- 'eat* (aor. aghas, subj. ghas-a-t) and in gal- 'drop' (gal-
gallti VS.).
e. In reduplicative syllables containing a of roots having initial
guttural or palatal, the palatal always appears in the perfect, pluperfect, or
reduplicated aorist; thus kr- 'make* : cakdra; khad- 'chew' : cakhada\ gam-
'go': jagtima-, ghas- 'eat*: jaghAsa; caks- 'see': cacdksa-, pluperf. of kr-: acakrat-,
red. aor. of jas- 'be exhausted' : jajas-tam. The palatal is here historically
phonetic, as the IE. reduplicative vowel was ¿.
In the intensive, however, the palatal is invariable only when the
reduplication is monosyllabic 4 ; e. g. kram- 'stride': can-kramata\ gr- •ja-gr-
'awake'; han- 'strike': jan-ghanti. But when the reduplication is dissyllabic,
the guttural 5 predominates; thus kr-, pait.kdri-kr-ai-; krand- 'roar': kdni-kra(ti)d-;
gam- 'go' \gani-gan-, gant-gm-; han- 'strike': ghatii-ghti- (cp. ghanaghana-); skand-
'leap': both kdni-skand- and cani-skadat subj.
38. N e w palatals as radical finals, a. Verbal forms.— Before the
thematic verbal endings (including those of the a-aorist and the reduplicated
aorist) the final of roots regularly appears as a palatal which, though phonetic 6
only in about the same degree as the guttural, has prevailed. Gutturals are

in certain f o r m s ; but fewtraces of this remain, 3 Beside ceru- 'devout', ketu- appears in
as the forms of each verb have been nor-! the compound mahi-keru• 'very d e v o u t ' ; cp.
malized. ; WACKERNAGEL 2 ' , p . 101 (43 b ) .
1 If kutsa- N. is derived from aid-, and 4 In the post-Vedic language, the palatal
carjani- 'active', from kr-, t h e initial conso- is invariable even in dissyllabic redupli-
n a n t has not been affected by the norma- cation.
lizing influence of the roots, because these 5 But if the initial of the root is a palatal,
words h a v e been isolated. the reduplicative consonant is of course al-
' T h e correct phonetic interchange appears 1 ways a palatal; thus cand- ' s h i n e ' : cdttiscad-;
in jahgahe 'kicks', and jamhas- 'course', if | car- 'move' : cardcara-; cal- 'move' : calacala-
these forms are connected, as BR. think. 1 'ever moving'. Cp. 32 a.
W H I T N E Y , Roots, however, considers the
6
Phonetically w e should h a v e *pdkdmi
former an intensive of gah- 'plunge'. , (IE. 0), pac-asi and pac-ati (IE. e).
 L PHONOLOGY. PALATALS. 29

rare at the end of the root, appearing only 1 in sak- 'be able'; 2. sing. sak-as)
sagh- 'be equal to': 3. sing, sagh-at\ dagh- 'reach': dagh-at (TS.); in these roots
the guttural prevails throughout owing to the influence of the present stem
sak-nu-, sagh-nu-2. Even in the non-thematic presents and in the perfect
the palatal carried the day, though phonetic in still fewer forms; thus the
guttural alone would be historically justified in the forms yunaja, yuttj'e; yuyoja 3.
The palatal further regularly appears before the causative4 suffix -aya-, where
it is phonetic ( = IE. /te); e. g. arc-aya-ii from arc- 'praise'5.
b. As shown by the appearance, in cognate forms, of a guttural before
other consonants than s, the final of the following verbs is a new palatal:
anj- 'anoint'; ej- 'stir1; tij- 'sharpen'; tuj- 'beat'; tyaj- 'forsake'; ttij- 'wash';
bhaj- 'divide'; bhahj- 'break'; bhuj- 'bend'; yuj- 'yoke'; ranj- 'colour'; ruj-
'break'; vij- 'shoot up'; vrj- 'turn'; s'inj- 'sound'; sahj- 'attach'; svahj- 'embrace';
also in the noun srdj- 'garland'.
C. Apart from being the result of the Sandhi of d+ j , j j is shown by
the evidence of cognate languages to be derived from a sibilant + guttural
(—» IE. zg) and thus to belong to the series of new palatals in majjdn- 'marrow';
rdjju- 'rope'; bhrjjdti 'roasts'; majjati 'dives', from which is derived madgu-
(VS.) 'diver' (a bird).
d. Nominal derivatives. 1. Before the suffix -a, the final of the root
is mostly guttural, because the a in nearly all the cases of the noun represents
I K d. The rule in the RV. is that the guttural appears before both unaccented
-a and accented -d, but the palatal before accented -d only 6 ; e. g. abhi-
drok-a-, druh-A- 'injury': drogh-a- 'injuring'; bhoj-d- 'liberal': bhog-a- 'enjoyment';
a-yuj-a- 'companionless'; yog-a- 'yoking'; ruj-a- 'breaking': rog-a- (AV.) 'disease';
vcvij-d- 'swift': veg-a- (AV.) 'speed'; suc-a- 'bright': sok-a- 'flame'; ruc-a- (VS.)
and roc-a- (AV.) 'shining*: rok-a- and rok-d- light' 7.
2. Before the suffix -as, the palatal generally appears, as it is for the
most part phonetically required; e. g. oj-as- 'force' : ug-rd- 'mighty'. The
guttural, however, prevailed in ank-as- 'bend'; tig-as- 'offence'; -ny-ogh-as-
'streaming'; bharg-as- 'brilliance'; as there were no corresponding verbs with
palatal beside these words; it also prevailed in ok-as- 'ease' and ny-okas-
'comfortable', as well as -s'ok-as- 'flaming', though there are such verbs (uc-
'be pleased', and sue- 'shine').
3. Before other suffixes beginning with a, the final of the root is generally
palatal; thus before -ana ( = IE. -mo-), vac-and- 'speaking'; t(j-ana- 'act of
sharpening'; mamh-dna- 'gift' 8 ; before -ant, -ana (under the influence of

1 Apart from roots ending in /•/;, see35, note 3. ! 6 The fluctuation of words in -a- probably
2 In ni-mlgha-matta- 'drenching oneself, j arose from some cases in oxytones having
the gh seems to be phonetic (as •amana = I had IE. e, others 0; hence in some words
•omeni). In valgale (AV.) 'springs', the guttural the palatal prevailed throughout, in others
is perhaps due to the preceding /, as neither the guttural. The agent-nouns, being mostly
Ij nor Ic is ever found to occur. oxytone, show a preference for the palatal,
3 This normalization of the palatal is which originally appeared in oxytones only.
probably Indo-Iranian, see J. SCHMIDT, K Z . C p . W A C K E R N A G E I . 1, 1 2 8 a ( p . 1 5 0 , n o t e ,
25. 104. end).
4 The denominatives in -ayd- (IE. tie and 7 A palatal before an unaccented -a
o f f ) follow the noun from which they are first appears in dih-a- (RV. x . 12X), other-
derived; e. g. from aghd- 'evil', aghayali wise digha- 'milking'; mSh-a- (AV.) 'delusion',
'wishes to injure'. beside migh-a- 'vain'; krunc-a- (VS.) 'cur-
5 The causative ingayaii of ijati 'stirs' is lew*, is probably only an extension of ¿rune-
probably due to an old present base *inag-, (VS.)
ing- formed according to the 7th class; the 8 The gh ofjaghdna- 'buttock', is phonetic
phonetic form -tiijayati is found in the BAU. (Gk. «ox® "!)•
VI. 4 . 23-
3°

verbal forms), e. g. duh-ana- and duduh-and1; before -ata (— IE. -¿to), e. g .

pac-ata- ' c o o k e d ' 2 ; before -an in majj-dn- 'marrow'
4. Nouns formed without suffix (including infinitives and gerunds) have
the palatal of the corresponding verb; e. g. prc-as, nom. pi. ' f o o d ' ; a-prc-as
and a-prc-e 'to satisfy'; tuj-dye 'to procreate'. A guttural of course appears
where the verb has a guttural only; e. g. pra-tdiik-am ( A V . ) 'gliding' (tak- run').
5. T h e s u f f i x -ka is treated analogously to the final guttural of roots*.
T h e guttural regularly appears except when the suffix, being attached to
unaccented prepositions, is itself accented; thus asmS-ka- 'our'; yusmd-ka- 'your';
dpa-ka- 'coming from afar'; abhi-ka- 'collision'; and even with the suffix
accented in locatives such as upa-ki, upa-kdyos 'in the vicinity* and in the abl.
para-hit 'from a distance'; but uc-cA and uc-cdis ' a b o v e ' ; para-cdis 'aside';
pas-cd and pas-ciit 'behind'; pra-cdis 'forwards'.
39. I r r e g u l a r p a l a t a l i z a t i o n . — B e f o r e u r and consonants (except _y),
the gutturals were not originally palatalized. H e n c e roots which regularly have
palatals before a and diphthongs, usually retain the guttural before u r and
consonants. Thus from ric- 'leave', are formed, r<!k-u- 'empty', rik-n-as- 'property',
perf. p a r t ririk-vims-\ 3. sing. pres. rindk-ti, 2. sing. perf. mid. ririk-se (but opt.
riric-yat); ug-ra- 'mighty', beside oj-as- 'strength'; ghn- beside han- 'strike').
Nevertheless palatals appear by analogy before u, r, n, m, r, v.
a . i n i t i a l l y : 1. in the roots scut- 'drip', crt- 'bind', hrs- 'rejoice', in which
the unphonetic palatal before the low grade vowels is due to the phonetic
palatal before the high grade vowels 0 ( = IE. eu) and ar ( = IE. er).
2. in the reduplicative syllables cu-b and ju- of the perfect and aorist
(in R V . occurring only in cyu- 'shake', gup- 'guard', gur- 'praise') for older
*ca- *ja- (a = I, the IE. reduplicative vowel).
b . f i n a l l y : 1. in verbal inflexion, the palatal which appears before a
and diphthongs always appears also before u, and nearly always before m
and r (instead of the phonetic guttural); thus sisic-ur beside sisic-atur, sisic-e,
from sic- 'pour'; bubhuj-mdhe beside bhunaj-amahe, from bhuj- 'enjoy'; anj-mas
beside ahj-dnti, andj-an from atij- 'anoint'; riric-r<* beside riric-J, from ric-
'leave'; a-yuj-ran, yuyuj-ri beside yuyuj-i, from yuj- 'yoke'; duh-ri, duh-rate,
duduh-rt, duh-nim and duh-ratam ( A V . ) beside duh-t, from duh- 'milk'.
T h e guttural, however, regularly remains before the -nu of the 5th class:
sak-nu- 'be able', sagh-nu- 'be equal to', spreading thence to other forms 7 .
Phonetic k remains before m in vivak-mi from vac- 'speak'; and before r in
vavak-re beside vac-yate, vdtic-ati ( A V . VS.) from vatic- 'move crookedly'.
2. in nominal derivation the guttural as a rule remains 8 : e. g. rug-nd-
'broken', from ruj- 'break'; ruk-ma- 'brilliant', from rue- 'shine'; Suk-rasuk-la-
( A V . ) 'bright', from sue- 'shine'; pak-va- 'ripe', from pac- 'cook'. T h e perf.
part, for the most part follows this rule: e. g. ru-ruk-vthnsfrom rue- 'shine';

1
Strictly phonetic (but rarer) is du^h- on the other hand the palatal appears un-
ana- 'milking'; also vigh at- (IE. -«/-) 'insti- phonetically before u in the intv. part, car-
tutor of a sacrifice'. curyd-mana- from car• 'move'.
2 6
The k in sik-ala- (AV. VS.) 'sand', is Otherwise cu- occurs only in the ono-
phonetic (IE. -nla-). \ matopoetic ni-cumpuna- 'swell' — and in .1
3Beside_>'a/6-i-/(AV.)'liver',andio'ii-^/'dung', ( few words suggestive of foreign origin:
the k is found in the stemsyak-ati-, sak-an-, ; cumuriN. of a d e m o n ; cu-punika-, N. of a
but only in weak forms before n or a krttika (TS.).
(= n): yak-nas, yak-na (VS.); iak-na (VS.); I 7 Also dagh-nu- «reach', in a Brahmana
iak-ttas (AV.); iaka-bhis (TS.) ' passage of the Kathaka, and sligh-nu-
4 S e e a b o v e 38 d, I ; WACKERNAGKL 1 , 1 2 9 . ! ' m o u n t ' , in a s i m i l a r o n e o f t h e T S .
5 T h e p h o n e t i c guttural, however, appears | 8 COLLITZ, B B . 3, 230 f . ; J. SCHMIDT,
in ghrs-tt- 'lively', giffvi- 'gladdening'; while | KZ. 25, 70 f.
 3i

vi-vik-vdms-, from vie- 'divide'; ok-i-vtims- (36 a), from uc- 'find pleasure* (but
dat sing. Uc-us-e).
The following are, however, exceptions: oj-mart- 'might' 1 ; bhuj-man-
'fruitful'; muh-ur 'suddenly'; druh-u- (AV.) 'injure?; yac-hyd- (AV.) 'request'.
40. The old palatals (ch, j, s, A). — The aspirate ch. This sound
is, in pronunciation, the aspirate of c 2 and is therefore represented in
reduplication by c. But in origin ch has nothing to do with c. The fact
that after a mute it takes the place of s in Sandhi shows that it is allied
to s. In fact, unlike j and h, it belongs exclusively to the old series of
palatals; for it does not interchange with a guttural JtAK In the Avesta ch
is regularly represented by s and in cognate European languages by a conjunct
consonant beginning with s and standing for IE. skk (that is, s + palatal mute
aspirate); e. g. chid- 'cut off', Gk. This in Indo-Iranian probably became
s'sh, which differentiated into Avestic s and Vedic ch. In the inchoative suffix
-cha (gacchati, Gk. §a.akx) this palatal aspirate seems to represent IE. si,
a conclusion which is supported by the old inchoative verb rapsate 'is full'
= rap(s)s'ate, where after the s has been dropped between two consonants4,
s = IE. k remained. Thus ch represents a double sound and metrically lengthens
a preceding short vowel. Hence the RPr. (vi. 1) prescribes the doubling
of ch (that is c-ch) between vowels. Though the Vedic Mss. almost invariably
write ch5 and A U F R E C H T ' S edition of the RV. and v. S C H R O E D E R ' S edition
of the MS.6 follow this practice, the spelling cch is to be preferred.
a. In sakha- 'branch', the initial s probably stands for ch owing to the law by
which two aspirates in the same syllable are avoided 7.
b. In a few instances ch is a Prakritic representative of ks and ps: -rcchara- (AV.)
beside rksala- (VS.)8, part of an animal's leg; krcchra- 'distress', perhaps for *krpsra-, and
allied to krpale 'laments', and krpana- 'misery'9.
41. The old palatal / . — T h i s j is the media of s (while as a new
palatal it is the media of c). It is recognizable as an old palatal by the
following indications:
1. when there are parallel forms with s before t, th, or a cerebral appears
either as final or before mutes; e. g. beside yaj-ati 'sacrifices', yds-tr- 'sacrificer',
is-Id- 'sacrificed', a-yat 'has sacrificed'; similarly in the roots bhraj- 'shine';
tnrj- 'wipe off'; raj- 'rule'; rej- 'tremble'(P); vraj- 'wander'; srj- 'send forth';
possibly also in bhrajj- 'roast' 10 .
1. when in the form in question or in cognate forms, sounds follow
which do not palatalize gutturals11, that is, u r n m r v; such are: aj-ra-
'plain'; dj-ma(ti)- 'course'; dr/'una- 'white', rj-rd- 'reddish'; rj-u- 'straight', rj-iyas-

1
Under the influence of oj-iyas- 'stronger' j in Sandhi and ducchutia• for *di/s-sitnl~ *mis-
and dj-isfha- 'strongest', such, nouns in -man-1 fortune'.
being often closely connected with compara-' 5 Except those of the Kathaka, which
tives and superlatives. J write sch (cp. note 2).
6
' In the Kathaka ch is spelt ich, which is Also ROTH'S ed. of the Nirukta and
probably only a provincial assibilation, and MACDONELL'S ed. of the BrhaddevatS; cp.
not the survival of an older sound; cp. AUFRECHT, RV 2 , p. vi.
J. SCHMIDT, K Z . 27, 332. i 7 Cp. 32.
J miirkha- 'dull', occurring in a B. passage j 8 On AV. Ms. spelling ch for ks in two
of the TS., is probably a new formation [ or three words, see WHITNEY, JAOS. 12,
analogous to soka- (AV.) from Jocali. Some 92. 175.
scholars hold that there is an etymological 9 On the origin of ch, cp. BRUGMANN, KG.
connection between chand- 'appear', chaud-as- \ 2 4 0 ; on the sound as a whole, W A C K E R -
'song', and skatidali 'leaps'; between chid- NAGEL I, 1 3 3 f.
'cut off' and khid- 'press'; between chi- (AV.) 10 But cp. 3 8 c, and W A C K E R N A G E L I, 1 3 9 .
'cut off' and kha- [khan-) 'dig'. Cp. W A C K E R - | " Apart of course from the exceptions
NAGEL I, 131, note, bottom. due to analogy: see 39.
4 Cp. above p. 25 note 6; cp. here cch=t+s
32 L ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4 . VEDIC GRAMMAR.

'straighter', ráj—istha- 'straightest'; játiu- 'knee' beside jñu-\ jrmbh- 'yawn";

jñs- 'know'; jmá-, gen. jm-is 'earth'; jri- 'go'; -jvSrá- 'suffering'; paj-rá- 'fat*;
maj-mán- 'greatness'; váj-ra- 'thunderbolt'; juráti, járyati, jujur-váms-, jür-ná-,
from jr- 'grow old'.
3. when in inflexional forms, in which roots with a new palatal show
a guttural, the j remains; e. g. jajána from jan- 'beget'; jajasa (AV.) from
jas- 'be exhausted'; jujósa from jus- 'like'; jujur-váms-, jajára (AV.), from
j f - 'grow old' 2 .
4. when j is the reduplication of an old palatal j or h\ e. g. jajána,
jajára (AV.), juhóti.
5. when it is shown to be an old palatal by the evidence of the
cognate languages; thus in ajá- 'he-goat', ajá-'goat'; aji?ia- (AV.) 'skin'; ürj-
'nourishment'; jarnhas- 'course'; jáñgha- 'leg'; jatnbh- 'chew up'; jámStr- 'son-
in-law'; dhraj- 'sweep'; bhisaj- 'heal'; rajatá- 'silvery'; vája- 'swiftness'; rjipyA-
'going straight'.
a. It is uncertain whether j represents an old or a new palatal in the
following words:
1. because the comparative evidence is conflicting: vi-jáman- 'related';
ja- 'hasten'; jy3-, jináti 'overpower' 3 .
2. because the Vedic and comparative evidence is insufficient: ubj-'coerce';
küj- (AV.) 'hum'; jáñjaí-T-, pres. part, of uncertain meaning (á. X.); j árate
'approaches'; jéhamana- 'panting'; jihmá- 'transverse'; dhváj-, dhvajá- 'banner';
paj- 'be rigid' (in apa ...pápaje'started back'); -pujana- 'honouring'; bajá- a kind
of plant; bija- 'seed'; múñja- 'sedge'.
b. Irregular j.—1. As the two kinds of / were indistinguishable in pro-
nunciation, a guttural sometimes intruded among the old palatals owing
to the analogy of the new palatals; thus from bhisaj- 'heal', bhisák-tama-, spv.,
bhisák-ti, 3. sing, pres., a-bhisnak, 3. sing. impf. (like anak-ti from añj- 'anoint');
from mrj- 'wipe': td-mrg-ra- 'attached', apa-margá- (AV.) a kind of plant,
vi-mrg-varT- (AV.) 'cleanly'; from srj- 'discharge', asrg-ram, asrgran, ásasrgram,
sasrgmáhe (SV.) beside sasrjmáhe-, from j f - 'grow old', jagara (AV.) beside
iajára (AV.).
2. The guttural beside the palatal may be due to IE. dialectic variety
in gná- 'woman' beside jan- 'beget'; gm-ás beside jm-ás 'of the earth'; bhárgas-
'splendour', bhrgu- a name, beside bhraj- 'shine'.
3. In jyótis- 'light', jy seems, by an old Prakritism, to represent dy, as
the word is probably derived from dyut- 'shine'.
4. The media aspirate jh* occurs only in one form, jájhjhat-T- (RV. 1 ),
a pres. part, probably meaning 'laughing' as an epithet of lightning (a metaphor
connected with lightning elsewhere also in the RV.); it appears to be derived,
by an old Prakritism, from has- 'laugh': jhjh probably for jjhs here = TE.gzh,
which otherwise would become ks-, as in jáks-at-, part., 'laughing'.
42. T h e cerebrals.—The designation given to these sounds by the
native phoneticians 6 , mürdhanya 'produced in the head', indicates that they
were pronounced at the highest point in the mouth nearest the (upper part

1 In w h i c h only forms with r o c c u r ; 4 T h e other two old palatals s and h will

cp., h o w e v e r , HUBSCHMANN, K Z . 23, 393. be dealt with below in their alphabetical
9 The only instance of a new palatal o r d e r : 54, 58.
(c j h = k g gK) before ur ( = IE. r) is 5 T h e K a s h m i r Ms. of the R V . reads
carcurya-viana- ( R V . x). F o r some more or jajjhatJr for jajhjhaflr (v. 526): SCHKFTE-
less doubtful examples of old palatal j, see LOWITZ, W Z K M . 2 1 , 86.
WACKERNAC.EL 1, 137 b note. 6 See RPr. I. 1 9 ; APr. I. 32; TPr.
3 Op. cit. 1, 137 e, n o t e . 37 •
 I. PHONOLOGY. CEREBRALS. 33

of the) head. They are described by the Pratisakhyas as pronounced by

turning the tip of the tongue up to the roof of the mouth and bending it
backwards. They were therefore pronounced farther back in the mouth
than the palatals. This is also their pronunciation at the present day in
India. An indication that it was such even in Vedic times is the fact that
4 is sometimes found in the later Samhitas interchanging, between vowels,
with Z1 (which itself interchanges with r), and that in the RV. itself d 4h
become I Ih between vowels. It is also to be noted that the Greeks reproduced
d not only with o, but also with p2. The cerebrals, however, were a specifically
Indian product, being unknown in the Indo-Iranian period 3 . They are still
rare in the RV., where they occur medially and finally only. According to
most scholars, they are due to aboriginal, especially Dravidian, influence4.
As a rule, they have arisen immediately after s or an r sound from dentals.
But before consonants and finally they may represent the old palatals j / h.
a. The voiceless cerebrals t th take the place of the dentals t th a f t e r s
(— s, / or / ) ; e. g. vrs-ti- 'rain' (suffix -it); dus-tara- 'invincible' ( = dus-tara-);
ndkts te (= ndkis te)-, vds-fi 'wishes' ( = vas-ti); mrs-ta- 'cleansed' ( = mrj-ta-)K
Similarly the voiced cerebrals d dh take the place of the dentals d dh
a f t e r *z ( = s or old palatal j, h), which has disappeared 6 ; e. g. mda- 'nest'
( = IE. nisdo-); da-dhi- 'ill-disposed' ( = dus-dhi-); id-<! T worship' (*is-d- = ij-d-
for ya/-d-); drdha- 'firm' ( = drh-td-). The preceding voiced sibilant *? ( = s
and s) has (instead of disappearing) itself become d in didid-dhi (from dii-
'show') and vivid-dhi (from vis- 'be active')7.
a . When the dental here was immediately followed by an r sound, the cerebralization
seems originally to have been stopped. Hence dfdhra- (= dfh-tra•), beside dfdha-
(= drh-ta-) 'firm'; and though s/r occurs several times in t h e R V . 8 , the r seems to have
been dropped in pronunciation, as the only stems ending in -ftra- which show a case-
form with n, do not cerebralize it: usfranam and rasfranam, as if no r preceded. In
TS. I. 2. 5', r is actually dropped after ft in tvasfimati- 'accompanied by Tvajtrl'.
b. In several instances a cerebral appears by an evident P r a k r i t i s m ,
in place of a dental originally preceded by an r (or /) sound; thus vi-kata-
'monstrous', beside kr-td- 'made'; katd- 'depth', beside karta-9 'pit'; avata-
(SV. VS.) 'pit', beside avdr10 'down'"; and as shown by comparative evidence,
katuka- 'sharp'; kadayati 'singes'; khafa- ^xH-Jddhu- 'dull'; katd- (AV.TS.) 'horn-
less'. In the following words, though cognate languages show / " , the cerebral
is similarly based on Indian r or r ^ + dental: kata- 'frontal bone'; jathdra-
'belly'; tadit- 'contiguous', trida- (AV.) 'blow'; pinda- lump'; kanda- (AV.) 'piece" 4 .
c. Cerebrals have in some instances supplanted dentals owing to the

1
Cp. VPr. iv. 143; v. BRADKE, KZ. ! if from kf-i- 'cut'; but see BAKTHOLOMAE,
28, 298. | IF. 3 , 180 f.
* See WACKEKNAGEL 1, 1 4 3 , note. 1 1 2 IE. I by rhotacism became r in Ilr.
3 Op. cit. 1, 1 4 4 . »3 MS. N. 47 has the reading jitiva ravat
4 Ibid., note. for that of TS. U. 4. 71 jitrvdr avft and
5 Cp. above 4 1 , 1. K. XI. 9 jinva rival. Cp. below p. 70, note 4.
6
Cp. above 17, 5. •4 The cerebral could be similarly accounted
1
7 See WACKEKNAGEL 1, 1 4 5 a, note (end). for in kufa- (RV .) "house'(?), if it is related
Cp. 4 2 d (p. 34) end. to kuia-{pa-) family', and kulaya- (AV.) 'nest'.
8
In räsfra- 'dominion', ¿}fra- 'buffalo 1 , In danda- 'staff' if identical with Gk. ittipov
desfri- 'Directress'; ddmf/ra- 'tooth'; f / f - in (J. SCHMIDT, KZ. 25, 52, note *) we seem
a-ni-f/fla- 'not shaken off', tvastf-mant- to have an instance of a cerebral for a
'accompanied by Tvaflf'; n4f in kundf- dental -{- following r, but such a change
naä- 'house-lizard' (?). seems not to be in accordance with the
9 WACKEKNAGEL I, 1 4 6 a . phonetic laws of either Vedic (cp. dfdhra-,
»0 C p . BAKTHOLOMAE, I F . 3 , 1 7 9 . above a, a) or Prakrit. On two other
" Perhaps also renüka-käta- 'stirring dust', examples of this supposed change, dntjli-
Indo-arische Philologie. I. 4. 8
 34 L A L L G E M E I N E S TOD S P R A C H E . 4. V E D I C GRAMMAR.

analogy of similar words with phonetic cerebral. In padbhis 'with feet', and
perhaps pád-grbhi-, N., it is due to padbhis, inst. pL of both pas- 'look', and
of pas- 'cord', and to pddbiia-, pddvUa (VS.) 'fetter', which is derived from
pa/- 'cord". Vdsat and Srdusat, sacrificial calls, probably for vdksat and
*¿rósat (3. sing. aor. subj. of vah- 'convey', and iru- 'hear'), seem to owe their
cerebral to the influence of the sacrificial call vät (VS.), vat (TS.), 3. sing. aor.
of Y vah-. The d oípurodás- 'sacrificial cake' (from dai- 'worship'), is perhaps
due to dü-dái• 'impious' (for du%-das-)
d. In a few instances a cerebral t or 0 appears in place of the cerebral
sibilant s. The phonetic representative of the latter before bh would be d
(parallel to d for IE. z before bh)$, where it appears in vipritd-bhis (VS.)
'with drops'. From here the cerebral spread to the nom. sing., where it appears
in vi-prúí (AV.) 'drop', from prus- 'sprinkle', and in edhamana-dvit 'hating the
arrogant' (from dvis- 'hate').
The cerebral d also appears before the -dhi of the 2. sing. impv. for s in
aviddhi («=• avi-s-dhi) aor. of av- 'favour', and in vividdhi (— vivis-dhi), red.
aor. of vis- 'be active*. The phonetic form here would be *Tdh (= i?-dh)*,
instead of which iddh appears under the influence, perhaps, of the cognate
verbal forms with the short vowel (avistu, avistdm etc.).
43. Cerebrals in many instances represent the old palatals j s h.
They are found thus:
a. as final: 1. in nom. sing. m. f.: bhrät 'lustre' (bhräj-); rät 'ruler' (räj-);
viput, N. of a river (vtpäs-); vit 'settlement* (vis'-), spät 'spying' (spas'-); sät
'overcoming* (sah-); -vat 'conducting* (-väh-), pasthavät (VS.), -vät (TS.). The
guttural k would have been phonetic in this case, as the nom. sing, originally
ended in s5, and even the old palatals became k before s; the cerebral
must here therefore be due to the influence of forms in which it was
phonetic.
2. in nom. acc. sdf, from sds- 'six'. As k might have been expected
(IE. sveks), the cerebral is doubtless due to forms containing sas-, as sasti-
'sixty', sasthá- (AV. VS.) 'sixth*.
3. in the first member of a compound, where the final of the nom. sing,
appears, in sat- 'six', and pad- (from pas'- 'cord*, in pdd-bisa-).
4. in 2. 3. sing. aor. for the radical palatal after the endings have been
dropped: thus d-bhrät (bhräj- 'shine'); yät (yaj- 'sacrifice'); rät (raj- 'shine');
nat, a-nat (nas-'reach'); a-prät(pras- 'ask' in pras-nd- 'question'); d-vät (vah-
'convey*). Here / is phonetic in the 3. pers. only, standing for s-t (= IE. k-t).
It has been transferred to the 2. sing., where k would be phonetic (standing

'egg', and mawfuka- 'frog', see W A C K E R - /•tvik 'sacrificer' (\'yaj-)\ urk (VS.) 'nourish-
NAGEL I, 1 4 7 , note. ment' (urj-)\ dik (AV.) 'region' (dii-). For
1
Op. cit. I, 1 4 8 a (p. 1 7 2 , top). •dfk, the later Samhitls have -dfh also. In
» The form vy-avaf in MS. IIL 49 (B.) the n. nom. the m. f. form appears: -dfk,
beside vy-avat, AV. vm. 1«, from vi-vas- •spfk\ but as there was no J here, it
'shine forth', is probably due to the influence must be assumed that the cerebral was
of a-vat, aor. of \vah-; but cp. BARTHOLOMAE, originally used in these neuter forms. In
Studien I, 24, note. On the cerebral in avata- bhifij• 'healer', the k has spread from the
(SV. VS.), beside avoid-, nada- 'reed', beside nom. to other cases, where it is not phonetic
nada-, and in il/a- (AV.), mariafa- (VS.) cp. ( c p . WACKERNAGEL I, 138). The original
WACKERNAGEL 1, 1 4 8 b, note. value of the palatal in ustj- 'desiring', ufnih-
3 See below 44 a, 3. (AV. VS.), a kind of metre, which have k
4 Cp. above 17, 5. in the nom. is uncertain. The k in the nom.
5 This phonetic t for an old palatal is n a i 'night' is probably not based on an old
preserved in the nominatives -dfk 'seeing' palatal J (cp. WACKERNAGEL I, 1 4 9 a a,
(dj-i-\ -spfk 'touching' (spri-\ spfk 'desiring' note).
(spfh-), an-ak 'eyeless' (-akf-: as- "penetrate');
 35

for h-s = IE. ks). The reverse transference of k to the 3. sing, has taken
place in prd nak beside a-nat (nas- 'reach') and in a-srSk (from srj- 'discharge').
b. before consonant suffixes:
1. the phonetic cerebral appears before case-endings beginning with bh
in pai-bhis, from pas- 'look' and 'cord'; vid-bhis from vis- 'settlement1; sarad-
bhyas 'for the bees' (probably from *sarah-); sad-bhis \ In anadud-bhyas (AV.),
from anad-vSh- 'bull', d appears for d by dissimilation; while the guttural of
the nom. instead of the phonetic d appears in susamdrg-bhis (from dri- 'see')
'fair to see' and in dig-bhyas (AV.) from dis- 'region'.
a. before the -su of the loc. pi. k is phonetic, and appears in vik-su,
from vis'-, in spite of the unphonetic t of the nom. vit. But owing to the
influence of the other cases the unphonetic cerebral (in the form of /
dissimilated for t) appears in anadut-su.
3. before the dhi of the a. sing. impv. the cerebral is phonetic in dididdhi,
from dis-1; also in z ( = s), which after cerebralizing the dh is dropped,
leaving a compensating length, in tatfhi from taks- 'hew' ( = IE. tegzdhi); also
in so-dha. 'sixfold' (for sas-dha : as-, like as-, becoming o before a voiced mute) 3 .
c. The cerebrals in the following words have not been satisfactorily
explained: aghati- and a-ghata-{AV.) 'striker*, beside -d-ghata- (VS.); Undd-
'egg'; itdnt- (x. 171 1 ) 'wandering'(?), kuta- 'house'(?); kata- 'frontal bone';
kfpita- 'fuel'(P); mandaka- 'frog'; ita- (AV.) 'reed'; rardta- (VS.), lalata- (AV.)
'forehead'. Some others, mostly containing b, may be suspected of non-Aryan
origin: bat, bada, interjections; baturin- 'broad'(?), birita- 'troop'(?); bekan&ta-
'usurer'; ¿dambara- (VS). 'drum'; khadgd- (VS. MS.) 'rhinoceros'; candald- (VS.)
'outcast'; markdta- (VS.) 'ape'.
44. T h e dentals.—The dentals are at the present day pronounced as
interdentals in India, but according to the Pratisakhyas* they were post-dental,
being produced at the root of the teeth (dantamula). They represent IE.
dentals, corresponding to similar sounds in the cognate languages. When
two IE. dentals met, there seems to have been a tendency to change the
first to a sibilant5. A survival of this appears in some Vedic combinations
of d or dh with dh, which point to an earlier xdh, viz. in de-hi, beside dad-
dhi 'give'; dhe-hi (for *dhadh-dhi) 'put'; kiye-dha 'containing much', in all of
which examples e is based on Ilr. az6.
a. Change of s to t. The dental sibilant as the final of roots or nominal
stems becomes t1:
1. before the s of verbal suffixes (future, aorist, desiderative) in the three
verbs vas- 'dwell', vas- 'shine', and ghas- 'eat' 8 : thus avatsTs (AV.) 'thou hast
dwelt'; vat-syati (MS.) 'will shine'; jighat-sati (AV.) 'desires to eat', and
jighat-su- (AV.) 'hungry'.

1 From this phoDetic change o f f to 4 corresponding forms). T h i s sibilant, Indian /,

before bh is to be explained the stem ¡4-
•refreshment', beside if- (which occurs before
vowel endings only): id-ihis etc. would have
led to the formation of id-a, etc. (inst.sing.),
which then gave rise to id-a- as an extension
o f id-; cp. also iddyata ( R V . I. 1 9 1 6 MM.,
ilayata, AUFRECHT) : ildyati ( A V . ) ' b e quiet'.
3 I t is not phonetic in aviddhi and vividdhi
(see above, 42 d). Cp. WACKERNAGEL 1 , 1 4 9 c
(end).
3 T h e cerebral which in this paragraph
represents (except before s) the old pala-
tals, is based on an Ilr. sh• sound s z (as
shown by the Avesta having s i in the
first b e c a m e the cerebral mute d before the
M-suffixes (as dental s became dental d) when
it first spread to the nom., and lastly to the
loc. pi.
• S e e R P r . I. 1 9 ; T P r . II. 3 8 .
5 F o r example, Gk. J~o7a6a, Av. voista,
beside vlt-tha 'thou knowest'. C p . WACKER-
N A G E L 1, 1 5 2 b.
6 L o c . cit., also note.
7 S e e discussion o f attempted explanations
in WACKERNAGEL I, 153, note.
8 All the other roots in s add the suffix
with c o n n e c t i n g vowel «'.
3*
36
2. before the t of the 3. sing, of a past tense: thus vy-aviit (AV.) 'has
shone forth', from vi-vas-. This is, however, probably not a phonetic change,
but is rather due to the influence of the 3. sing, of other preterites with -/;
*d-vas-t having thus, instead of *d-vas, become á-vat
3. before case-terminations beginning with bh, and when final (in nom.
acc. sing, neut), in the perf. part and in four other words: thus jagr-vdd-bhis,
inst pi., 'having awakened', tatan-vát, acc. n., 'having stretched'; usdd-bhis,
from usas- 'dawn'; mad-bhls, mad-bhyás (AV.), from más- 'month'; svd-tavad-
bhyas (VS.), from svá-tavas- 'self-strong'. The change of s to t began before
the bh endings (like that of s to t or if)2 and was extended to the nom. acc.
sing. neut. in the R V . , but not till later before the -su of the loc. pi.3
a. Allied to the change of final s of roots and stems to t, is the apparent
change of the medial dental sibilant to d in madgú- (VS.) 'diver', from majj• 'dive'

T h e substitution of dentals for other mutes is extremely rare. In consequence

of dissimilation, a dental replaces a cerebral in aiiadiUsii and anadúdbhyas (AV.), from
anadvah- 'bull'; in dfdhrn- 'firm', beside dfdhá- 5; in pasthavat (TS.) 'four year old bull',
beside pasthavaf (VS.).
A dental seems to take the place of a labial in ad-bhis, ad-bhyós, beside ap-
'water': but this is probably due to the analogy of *nadbhís, nadbhyás, beside nápat-
•grandson' 6 .
45. T h e labials.-—These sounds as a rule represent IE. labials; e. g.
pitf-, Gk. itctTyjp; bhára 'bear', Gk. fa'pe. But owing to the great rarity of IE. b,
there are very few Vedic examples of inherited i; e.g. rambate 'hangs down',
Lat. labl 'glide'
a. The number of words containing b has been greatly increased b y
new formations. I. Thus b replaces p or bh before other voiced mutes:
e. g. pi-bd-aná- 'firm', beside pad-á- 'place'; rab-dhá-, beside rabhante 'they
take'. — 2. It is the regular substitute for bh in reduplicative syllables or when
initial aspiration is lost owing to a following aspirate; e. g. ba-bhAva from
bha- 'be', bshú- 'arm', bandh• 'bind' 8 .— 3. In a few examples it takes the
place of or interchanges with » 9 ; thus pddbiia- (RV.), beside pddvTsa- (VS.);
band- beside vana- 'arrow'; -balsa- (AV.) beside -valsa- 'twig'; band- (AV.)
'music' beside vana--, -Mina- (AV.) 'crushed', beside vlína- (B.) 10 . — 4. It further
occurs in some new onomatopoetic words; budbudd- 'bubble'; bdl (AV.) inteij.
'dash!'; bata inteij. 'alas!' and batd- 'weakling'.— 5. In one instance b seems
to stand for m before r, in brü- 'speak', for *tnra-1originally appearing most
likely after a pause or after a final consonant 12 .
b. In many words the origin of I is obscure. Most of these probably
come from a foreign source: 1. owing to their meaning: arbudd- and drbuda-,
balbüthd-, sdmbara-, sfbinda-, names of foes of Indra and of the Aryans; brbú-,
a proper name; bajá- (AV.), bdlbaja- (AV.), bilvd- (AV.), names of plants;
bdkura- and bakurd-, a musical instrument — 2. owing to their phonetic
form: kllbisa- 'sin'; bisa- 'root-fibre'; busa- 'vapour'; bdt and batid, interjections;

1 Cp. WACKERNAGEL 1, 154. different scholars, see WACKERNAGEL I, 158 b,

» See 42 d (p. 34). note.
3 Cp. WACKEKNAGEL I, 155 a, note. 8 See above 32 a, I , 2.

4 Op. c i t 1, 155 b , note. 9 There is some confusion between forms

5 See 42 a a (p. 33). of byh- 'be great', and vfh- 'tear*.
' T h e name tn-d-ra and nattatt-df- 'hus- 1 0 On some doubtful or wrong explanations
band's sister', are explained b y some scho- of b for v (ni-bfh• 'crush', bala-, bdlbajabat,
lars as containing a Prakritic d. See WACKEK- Jabala-, iamba-), seeWACKERNAGELl, 161, note.
NAGEL 1, 1 5 7 , note. 1 1 Cp. Gk. fipvtif for *ppoT0(.

7 O n some words (sabar-, batabalabal- " S e e WACKERNAGEL I, 159.

butka-) in which b is regarded as IE. b y
 37

bandd-(AV.) 'crippled'; barsva- (VS.) 'socket'; baskaya- 'yearling'; baskiha- (VS.)

'decrepit'; b'tla- 'cave', bilrna- 'chip'; birita- 'troop'(?); bekanfita- 'usurer'.—3. for
both reasons: illblsa- and bfsaya-, names of demons; alabu- (AV.) 'bottle
g o u r d ' . — 4 . Other words which if not of foreign origin, are as yet insufficiently
explained: barjaha- 'udder*; bastd- 'he-goat'; bdsri 'quickly'; -bara- 'aperture';
bija- 'seed'; bunda- 'arrow'; brbad-uktha-, an epithet of Indra; chubuka- 'chin';
sabala- 'brindled'; samba-, a weapon of Indra; balAsa- (VS. AV.), a disease;
bleska- (K.) 'noose'. 1
46. T h e n a s a l s . — There are five nasals corresponding, in regard
to place of articulation, to the five classes of mutes. Each of them can
only appear before a mute of its own class 2 . Before sibilants and h the
nasals do not appear^; before I only m is found; n does not appear finally
any more than the palatal mutes.
a. The g u t t u r a l nasal n regularly appears before gutturals: e. g. anka-
'hook'; ankhaya- 'embrace'; anga- 'limb'; jangha- 'leg'. Before other consonants
or as a final, it appears only when a following k or g has been dropped,
as in stems ending with -nc- or -»/- and in those compounded with -df-s-;
e. g. pratyah, nom. sing, of pratyafic- 'facing*; yundhi (—yunj-dhi), 2. sing. impv.
of yuj- 'join'; kl-dfn, nom. sing, of kx-dfi- 'of what kind?'.
b. The palatal nasal n is found only before and after c or /, and
before ch\ e. g. vancaii (AV.) 'wavers'; yajhd- 'sacrifice'; vafichantu 'let them
desire'.
C. The labial nasal m as a rule represents IE. m\ e. g. matf- 'mother',
L a t mSter\ ndman- 'name', Lat. nSmen. It is by far the most common labial
sound 4 , its frequency being greater than that of the four labial mutes taken
together®. By some scholars m is regarded as representing an original n or v
in certain instances 6 .
d. The d e n t a l nasal n as a rule represents IE. «; e. g. nd 'not', Lat. -«/;
manas- 'mind', Gk. /¿exof. It is the commonest of the nasals, being more
frequent than m, and about three times as frequent as the other three taken
together 7 . The dental nasal also appears instead of dental mutes and of
the labial nasal
o. It appears in p l a c e o f d before the nominal suffix -na, and of t,
as well as d, before the m of secondary suffixes; e. g. an-na- 'food' (ad- 'eat');
chin-na- 'cut off' (chid-)-, vidyuti-mant- 'gleaming' (vidyiit- 'lightning'); mrn-maya-
'earthen' (mfd- VS. 'earth'). This substitution is in imitation of Sandhi, as
dn tm dm otherwise occur within words; e. g. udnii (from uddn'water*),
dtman- 'breath', vid-md 'we know'.
dental n regularly appears in p l a c e of m \ 1. before /; e. g. from yam-
'restrain': yan-tur- and yan-tf- 'guide', yan-trd- 'rein'; from sram- 'exert oneself':
sranta- 'wearied'; 2. before suffixal m or v\ e. g. from gam- ' g o ' : a-gan-ma,
gan-vahi, jagan-atfims-8; 3. when radically final, originally followed by suffixal
s or /; e. g. from gam- 'go', d-gan, 2. 3. sing. aor. ( = d-gam-s, d-gam-t)\ from
yam-'restrain', a-yiln, 3.sing.[aor.(= a-yam-s-t); from ¿«»»-'house', gen.(pdtir) dan9

1 Op. cit. I, 162. 8 This change of m to n may be due

4 Excepting in a few instances when a to the influence of the cognate forms in
mate has been dropped, as in yundhi = which m phonetically becomes « when final
yuhgdhi (see a). \ (below 3).
3 Excepting in a few instances h or n 9 On this explanation of dan (denied
before the -su of the loc. pi. by Pischel, VS. 2, 307 ff.) see especially
4 Excluding the semivowel v. j Bartholomae, IF. 8, in 'Arica' 2 2 9 — 2 4 9 ;
5 Cp. Whitney jo and 75. | also Richter, KZ. 36, 111—123, on dam-
6 Cp. Wackernagel 1, 177, note. pati-.
7 Whitney 75. j
38

'of the house' (-= dams). Here the change of m to « was evidently due
(as in i) to the dental s or t which originally followed1.
47. The cerebral n.— This nasal, like the cerebral mutes, is an
Indian innovation. It is for the most part the result of a regular phonetic
development, but is also in a number of words due to Prakritic influence.
A. Besides regularly appearing before cerebral mutes, e. g. in danda-
'stafP, the cerebral n phonetically takes the place of dental n after r r s',
either immediately preceding, e. g. nrttdm 'of men', vdrna- 'colour', usna-
'hot"; or when only vowels3, guttural or labial mutes4 or nasals, y v or h,
intervene; e. g. krpana- 'misery'; kramana- 'step'; ksobhana- 'exciting". This
rule is followed throughout within a word even when a s which it contains
is produced by Sandhi»; thus not only trpnoti (trp- 'be satisfied') and grbhnati
(grbh- 'seize'), but also u suvanah (for suvanah, IX. 1 0 7 8 ) . In su-sumna-
'very gracious' (where the s is produced by internal Sandhi), the dental n
remains probably owing to the influence of the simple word sumna-.
a. The cerebralization of dental n takes place almost as regularly
in verbs compounded with the prepositions prd 'before', para 'away*, pari
•round', nir (for rtis) 'out'; as well as in nominal derivatives of these com-
binations. But the r does not cerebralize n when there is tmesis or any other
preposition but a intervenes6. The cerebralization takes place:
1. in the initial of roots; e. g. pranak (nas- 'reach'); paranude (nud-
'thrust); pra-netr- 'guide' (nt- 'lead'). But n remains if r or ks follows; hence
prSnrtyat (AV.) from nrt- 'dance', and pari naksati 'encompasses' (tiaks- 'reach').
The cerebralization is also absent, without this dissimilating cause 7 , in abhi
prd nonu- (SV.) beside abhi pra nonu- 'shout towards', and in pra-nabh- (AV.)
4

'burst'.
2. medially or finally in the roots hnu- 'hide', an- 'breathe', han-
'strike' (though not in forms with ghn); thus pdri-hnuta (AY.) 'denied'; pr&niti
'breathes'; nir hanyat (AV.), but abhi-pra-ghndnti.
3. in suffixal n the cerebralization fluctuates: it always takes place in the
n of the 1. sing, subj., e. g. nir gamSni; not always in the pres. base of hi-
'impel'; e. g. prd hinomi, etc., but pari-hinomi9; never in that of miniti
'diminishes' or of minSti 'establishes'; it is also absent in yaju skannam
(x. 1 8 1 1 0 ; but -trnna- (VS.), from trd- 'pierce'.
b. In nominal compounds cerebralization takes place less regularly
when there is r r or j in the first member, and n in the second:
1. an initial n is here nearly always cerebralized in the RV.: e. g.
dur-ndman- 'ill-named'; pra-napst- 'great-grandson'; also dur-nasa- (AV.) Hin-

1
T h e dental n may stand for I in carma- 4 In some instances w h e r e t h e mute
mna- 'tanner' (cp. carmani mlatani)-. B R . immediately precedes t h e n, t h e cerebrali-
According to B e n f b y , it is used to fill t h e zation does not take p l a c e ; e. g. vftra-ghni;
hiatus in declension, e. g. kavi-n-d-, and inkfepnu• 'springing'.
t h e perf. red. syllable an-, e. g. in anrcitr; 5 In one curious instance, sam ... pindk
cp. W a c k e r n a g e l 1, 175 c, note. (beside pinasti, from pis- 'crush'), t h e cerebral
' T h e cerebral mutes and nasal n o t only lost at the end of a syllable has transferred
d o not cerebralize a n s e p a r a t e d f r o m t h e m its cerebral character to the beginning of
b y a vowel, but even stop t h e influence of t h e syllable.
a preceding r r f; thus in reduplication 6
T h e preposition ni following a n o t h e r
only t h e first n is cerebralized; e. g. pra- containing r is mostly cerebralized.
ninaya (m- ' l e a d ' ) ; c p . manina i n s t . o f tnani- 7 Cp. above 42 a, a.
•pearl' (B. b.). This arises from a disinclination 8 Cp. tri-nabhi- 'three-naved', and vf}a-
to pronounce cerebral mutes and nasals in nabhi- 'strong-naved'.
successive syllables. 9 Cp. VPr. 1U. 87; APr. IU. 8 8 ; IV. 95; T P r .
3 On t h e absence of cerebralization in XIII. 12.
uftranam a n d rasiranam, s e e a b o v e 4 2 a , a. »0 Cp. W a c k e r n a g e l 1, 167 b «.
 L PHONOLOGY. T H E CEREBRAL N. 39

attainable', dur-nihita- (AV.) 'ill-preserved'; but (because a r r or s follows) not

in -nrmna- 'manhood', -msthA- 'eminent*; -nissidh- 'gift'; -nirnij- 'adornment'; nor
(owing to the intervening gh and m) in dlrgha-riltha-, N., yusmit-nlta- 'led by
you'. The cerebralization is further absent, without any preventing cause, in
aksa-nah- 'tied to the axle' (beside parT-nah- 'enclosure'); tri-naka- 'third
heaven'; tri-ndbhi- 'three-naved', and vfsa-nabhi- 'great-naved'; punar-nava-
'renewing itself (but A V . punar-nava-)-, dur-niyantu- 'hard to restrain'.
2. it is less frequent medially; e. g.parvahna- forenoon'; aparnhna- (AV.)
'afternoon'; nr-vahana- 'conveying men'; pra-vdhana- (VS.) 'carrying o f f ; purTsa-
vdhana- (VS.) beside purTsa-vdhana- (TS. K.) 'removing rubbish'; nr-manas-
'kind to men', vj-sa-manas- 'manly-spirited', but fsi-manas- 'of far-seeing mind';
drv-ghand- 'wooden club', but vrtra-ghtU, dat, 'Vftra-slaymg'; su-sumna-1 'very
gracious'; su-pra-pana- 'good drinking place'; nr-pdna- 'giving drink to men';
but pari-pdna- 'drink', pari-pdna- (AV.) 'protection'; pary-uhyamana- (VS.)
beside pary-uhyamHna-{ Yvah-).
c. Even in a closely connected following word cerebralization may
take place after r r s in the preceding one.
1. This is frequently the case with initial «, most usually in nas 'us',
rarely in other monosyllables such as mi 'now', nd 'like' 2 ; e. g. sahS su nah
(vm. 7 32 ). Initial n occasionally appears thus in other words also; e. g.
pari rtitii.. visat (ix. 103 4 ); srnga-vrso napat (SV., napit, RV.); asthSri nau
(VS., no RV. TS.); (gomad)'U su'nHsatya (VS.) prd nimdni (TS.); punar
nayamasi (AV.); stth&r nah (MS.) = suhard nah; var nima (TS. v. 6. i 3 ).
2. Medial n also occurs thus, most often in the enclitic pronoun ena-
'this'; e. g. indra enam. It occasionally appears in accented words also after
final r: gJr ohina (1. 180*); nir ¿rtasah (AV.); nf-bhir yemanah (SV., yemanah,
RV.); pantbhir vTyamanah (TS.) 3 . A final n is treated as medial and cere-
bralized thus in tin imdn (MS.) and aksdn ava (MS.).
B . In a number of words n has a Prakritic origin.
a. It is due to a preceding r or r which has been replaced by a iu
or has disappeared through assimilation. This is indicated to be the case
by the appearance beside them of cognate words containing r or I sounds:
1. in Vedic itself: thus ani- 'pin of the axle'; hand- 'one-eyed', beside karnd
'crop-eared' (MS.); kdna- (AV.) 'particle': kali- 'small part"; janjana-bhavan
'glittering" \jarni- 'glow' {-jan- probably = jrn- from old pres. *Jrn3ti); punya-
'auspicious':pf- 'fill'; phan- 'bound' («= *phrn-, *pharn-) cp. parpharat 'may
he scatter'; dhanika- 'cunnus': dh&raka- (VS.), id.—2. in allied languages:
gand- 'crowd'; pan- (VS.) 'purchase'; vanij- 'merchant' 5 ; anu- 'minute'; kunilru-
'having a withered arm'; parti- 'hand'; sthanti- 'stump'6.
b. Owing to the predilection for cerebrals in Prakrit, which substituted
n for n throughout between vowels, even without the influence of neigh-
bouring cerebrals, one or two words with such n seem to have made their
way into Vedic: mani- 'pearl' (Lat. monile)-, amna/t (MS.) 'at once': amnah
(AV.), id.
c. The exact explanation of the n in the following words (some of
which may be of foreign origin) is uncertain: kanva-, N.; kalySna- 'fair*;

1 haps be manor uhana. Cp. LANMAN, Sanskrit

1 See above 47 A (end).
2 Cp. BENFEY, Gottinger Abhandlungen Reader, note on this passage.
20, 14. 4 See WACKERNAGEL I, 172 a (p. 192, mid.),
3 agttir ¿vena (L 128 s), Pp. agnlh | avena, s See FR6HDE, BB. 16, 209.
is probably wrong for agnih \ raven a. On 6 Cp. WACKERNAGEL 1,172 d, note, 173, note.
the other hand, for mono ruhana (L 32s), 7 O n a few doubtful instances, op. c i t 1,
Pp. manah | ruhanah, the reading should per- 173, note.
4O I. ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4. VEDIC GRAMMAR.

kanuka-, of doubtful meaning; nicumpund-, of doubtful meaning; ninlk 'secretly',

ninyd-1 'inner'; pani-, a kind of d e m o n ; band- 'arrow'; vand- 'udder 1 , 'arrow',
'music'; vim- 'music'; vdnla-, a kind of musical instrument; sona- 'red'; ugana-
( S V . VS.), of doubtful meaning; kunapa- ( A V . ) 'corpse'; gund- 'division' ( A V . ) ;
cupunika- (TS.), N.; nicankuna- (TS.) and tiicunkund- (TS.), of doubtful meaning;
veni- ( A V . ) 'reed'; sdnu- ( A V . ) ' h e m p " .
48. T h e s e m i v o w e l s . — T h e semivowels y, r, I, v have the peculiarity
that each has a vowel corresponding to it, viz. i r I u respectively. They
are called anta{/i)stha in the P r a t i s a k h y a s t h e term doubtless meaning
'intermediate', that is, standing midway between vowels and consonants.
a. / and v regularly represent the final i and u of diphthongs before
vowels, e and at becoming ay and ay, 0 and au av and av. But while y and v
are regularly written for i and u before vowels, they were often pronounced
as iy and uv. This is shown by the fact that:
1. iy and uv are frequently written, beside y and v, in the inflexion of
t- and fi-stems. Thus from dhi- 'thought 1 , there are several compounds, in
some of which the stem is written with iy before vowels, as itthadhiy- 'very
devout', in others with y, as ad/iy- 'longing'. Similarly -ja- 'hastening', regularly
appears as -juv-; but -pu- 'purifying*, -su- 'swelling', -su- 'bringing forth', always
as -pv-, -sv-, -sv-*. In the same way, the suffix -ya is often written -iya;
e. g . dgr-iya- 'first', b e s i d e dgr-ya- ( V S . ) ; ftv-iya- a n d ftv-ya- 'regular'; urv-iyil
and urv-yd (VS. TS.) 'widely'. This spelling is characteristic of the T S . Here
iy is generally written where more than one consonant precede, almost
invariably so in the inflexion of stems in i and I; e. g. indrHgniy-os 'of Indra
and Agni', laksmiya 'by Lak$m!'; very often also in the suffix -ya; e. g. dsv-
iya- beside as'v-ya- (RV.) 'relating to horses' 5 . Similarly uv appears here for
v in si'tvar- a n d suvarga- 'heaven', beside svar (RV.) a n d svargd- (RV.); in
t h e inflexion of tanti- 'body', in some forms of vayt'i- 'wind', bahu- 'arm', Qru-
'thigh' 6 . In the S V . and MS. 7 there are two or three other examples of iy
a n d uv for y and v*.
a. according to metrical evidence, y and v (though written as pronounced
in classical Sanskrit) have a syllabic value in a large number of examples in
the V e d i c hymns 9 . This was recognized to be the case by the Pratisakhyas I O ,
3. r appears instead of r before the suffix -ya; e. g. in pitr-ya- 'paternal',
from pitf- 'father'.
4. ay ay ey appear before the suffix -ya " ; e. g. saha-sey-yaya, d a t , 'for
lying together'. Here yy is always to be read as y-iy in the R V . (except in
B o o k x and daksdyya- in 1. 1 2 9 * ) , 2 .

1 Perhaps from *ftirnaya-, see BENFEY, the present suffix -ya; the comp. suffix -yas;
G G A . 1858, p. 1627. the gen. ending -sya, and the fut. suffix -ya;
* On these words see WACKERNAGEL I, the initial v of suffixes; the >tv- of the 5th class;
174 b and 173 d, note. in aiva- 'horse' and tvasfr-, N. On the otherhand
3 RPr. 1. 2 ; VPR. IV. 1 0 1 ; also Nirukta the syllabic pronunciation is sometimes used
11. 2. C p . WHITNEY o n A P r . 1. 30. artificially by the poets, as is apparent from
4 Cp. WACKERNAGEL I, 181 a, note. the isolation of such occurrences. In some
5 Several other examples, loc. cit. individual words the written iy and uv have
6 C p . WHITNEY on T P r . 11. 25. to be pronounced as consonantal y and v:
7 See WACKERNAGEL I, 181 a, note (p. 201, always in suvana-. pres. part, of su- "press';
mid.). occasionally in bhiyas- 'fear*, hiyana- 'im-
8 On the other hand there are some iso- pelled'. Cp. WACKERNAGEL I, T8I b, note,
lated instances of y and v in the Veda* as bottom.
compared with iy and uv in classical Sans- R P r . VIIL 2 2 ; XVII. 1 4 .
k r i t ; see WACKERNAGEL I, p. 201, bottom. 11 See GRASSMANN, W b . 1 7 1 1 , columns
9 In certain words and formatives y and v 4 and 5.
are regularly consonantal: in the relative yd-; " WACKERNAGEL 1, 181 c 7.
 I. PHONOLOGY. SEMIVOWELS.

That this syllabic pronunciation was not simply i and u (with hiatus),
but iy and uv, is rendered probable not only by the spelling iy uv b e s i d e s v,
but by the consideration that y and v are respectively the natural transition
from i and u to a following dissimilar vowel.
b. In the R V . y and * are pronounced with a syllabic value under
the following conditions:
1. almost invariably after a group of consonants and generally after a
single consonant if preceded by a long vowel. Thus the ending -bhyas and
the suffix -tya are regularly pronounced as dissyllables after a long vowel,
but as monosyllables after a short vowel. Hence, too, v is pronounced as
well as written in the forms davidhv-dt, susv-ati, susv-and-, juhv-e, juhv-ati1.
2. after a single initial consonant at the beginning of a verse, or, within
a verse, if the preceding syllable is heavy, in some half dozen words. Thus
tyd- 'that', and tvarn 'thou' are nearly always pronounced as they are written
after a short vowel, but tiyd- and tuvdm at the beginning of a Pada or after
a long vowel. The y is pronounced as iy in jy<i- and jyaka- 'bowstring'
only at the beginning of a verse or after a long vowel, in jydyas-
'mightier' only after a long vowel. Finally tva- 'many', must generally be
read as tuva- after a long vowel, but almost invariably tva- after a short
vowel.
3. in the inflexion of the nouns in T (nom. sing. -T-s) and a2, where the
stem has (with only six exceptions) to be pronounced with iy and uv.3
Thus the transition from iy and uv to y and v began in the R V . , the
traditional text writing for the iy and uv which was pronounced by the poets
of that Veda, sometimes iy and uv, sometimes y and v.
49. T h e semivowel / . — This semivowel, when not derived from i
before other vowels (48 a) within Vedic itself, is based either on IE. i ( = Gk.
spiritus asper) or voiced palatal spirant (*= Gk. i ) 4 i e - g. yds 'who' (<>->);
yaj- 'sacrifice' (¿7-/0?); yud/i- 'fight' {j<j-(iivrj); but ydva- 'com' (fe'a); yas-
'boil' (£em); yuj- 'yoke' (W7-); yasdti- 'broth' {Q-ji-rj). It is probably due to
this difference of origin that yas- 'boil' and yam- 'restrain', reduplicate with
ya- in the perfect, but yaj- 'sacrifice', with i-.
a. This semivowel sometimes appears without etymological justi-
fication: 1. after roots in -3 before vowel suffixes; e. g. da-y-i, 3. sing. aor.
{da- 'give'), d-dha-y-i {dha- 'put'), d-jtia-y-i (jiis- 'know'); upa-stha-y-am, abs.
'approaching'; rsabha-da-y-in- (AV.) 'bestowing bulls'. This is probably due
to the influence of roots in -at (27 a), which have a- before consonants, but
ay- before vowels; e. g. pai- 'drink': pd-tave, a-pay-i, pay-ana-.—2. owing to
the influence of closely allied words or formations, in: yB-y-dm 'you' (for
*yUsam, A v . yUzern, cp. yus-md-, stem of other cases) 5 because of vay-am
'we'; bha-y-istha- 'most' because of bha-yas- 'more'; bhave-y-am, 1. sing. opt.
(for *b/idvayam) because of bhdves, bhdvet, etc.
b. very rarely in the later Samhitas after palatals: tirascye (AV. xv. 3*)
var. lect. for tirasce, dat., 'transverse'; snyaptra- (TS. 1. 2. 13^) '.snupira- (VS.)
'corner of the mouth'.
c. interchanging (after the manner of Prakrit) occasionally with v 6 in

1 On vyurtiv-dn
% ly-i/rriz'-atf-beside apornui'- 6 J n khya- 'tell', y seems at first sight to
antas, see WACKERNAGEL I, 182 a a, note. ' b e interchanged with the i of isa-, which
2 S e e b e l o w 375, 382 a. | o c c u r s in the K . and the MS. (cp. v. SCHROE-
3 F o r various explanations of this see ! DER'S ed., 1, p. XLIII, 7); but the two verbs,
WACKERNAGEL I. 182 a 7, note (p. 205). though synonymous, have probably a different
4 See BRUGMANN, K G . 1, 302. | origin. Cp. WACKERNAGEL I, 188 c, note.
5 Cp. WACKERNAGEL I, 86 C; 1S7, note.
42 I . ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4 . V E D I C GRAMMAR.

the Samhitás of the YV.; e. g. Utatayin- (VS.) beside Statavin- (TS.) Tiaving
one's bow drawn' 1 .
50. T h e semivowel v.— This sound was, at the time of the Prati-
sákhyas 2 , a voiced labio-dental spirant like the English v or the German w.
Within Vedic it is very frequently derived from u 3 . It seems otherwise
always to be based on IE. ¡t¡ there is no evidence that it is ever derived
from an IE. spirant v which was not interchangeable with u 4 .
a. This semivowel is sometimes found interchanging with bwith y6,
and according to some scholars, with mi.
b. In two roots in which v is followed by r, an interchange of sonantal
and consonantal pronunciation, together with metathesis takes place, vr
becoming ru\ hence from dhvr- 'bend' are derived both -dhvr-t- and -dhrít-,
dhru-t-, dhru-ti-\ from hvr- 'go crooked 1 , -hvr-t-, -hvr-ia-hvr-ti- and hru-
ná-ti, 3. sing., hrú-t-, -hru-ta-. The root rudh- 'grow1, may be a similar variation
of vrdh- 'grow' 8 .
51. T h e semivowel r. — The liquid sound r must originally have
been a cerebral, as is shown by its phonetic effect on a following dental n
(47 A). By the time of the Pratisákhyas 9 , it was, however, pronounced in
other phonetic positions also. Being the consonantal sound corresponding to
r before vowels (like y v to i u), it is in that position correspondingly
graded with ar; e. g. á-kr-ati, á-kr-ata, beside á-kr-thas: d-kar-am, aor. of
kr- 'do'; dr-ú-: dár-u- 'wood'.
a. r generally corresponds to r in the cognate languages, but not
infrequently to I also; and where these languages agree in having /, the latter
may in these instances be assumed to be the original sound. As old Iranian
here invariably has r, there seems to have been a tendency to rhotacism in
the Indo-Iranian period io . Words in which Vedic r thus represents I E . /
are the following:
1. initially: raks- 'protect 1 ; ragh-u- 'swift'; ramhate 'speeds'; rabh- 'grasp';
rami- 'hang down'; ra- 'bark'; ric- 'leave', rip- 'smear'; rih- 'lick'; rue- 'shine',
ruj- 'break'; rudh- and ruh- 'grow'.
2. medially: ángüra- 'coal'; ajirá- 'agile'; aratni- 'elbow 1 ; arh• 'be
worthy'; iydrti 'sets in motion'; Tr- 'set in motion'; ürni- 'wool'; ürmi- 'wave';
garútmant-, a celestial bird; gardabhá- 'ass'; gárbha- 'womb'; cakrá-
'wheel'; car- 'move'; carama- last'; eirá- 'long*; ehardis- 'protection'; dhirú-
(AV.) 'sucking*; parasú- 'axe'; piparti 'fills'; pür- 'fort'; purú- 'much'; prath-
'spread out'; -prú-t- 'swimming', -pruta- part, 'floating', pravate 'waves';
márdhati 'neglects'; -marsana- (AV.) 'touching'; mürdhán- 'head'; vará-
'suitor', and various forms of vr- 'choose'; vareas- 'light'; sarand- 'pro-
tecting'; sarman- 'protection'; sárkara- 'gravel'; sisira- (AV.) 'cold season';
s'ri- 'lean'; sru- 'hear'; sróni- 'buttock'; sar- in forms of sr- 'run', and
sarird- (VS.) 'flood'; sarpis- 'clarified butter'; sahdsra- 'thousand'; svar-
'heaven'; súrya- 'sun'; harit- and hdrita- 'yellow'; kiranya- 'gold'; hrlldúni-
'hail'".

1
C p . BENFEY, G G A . 1 8 5 2 , 1 1 4 F.; WEBER, 9 S e e WHITNEY o n A P r . 1. 20, 28.
10
I S . 2 , 2 8 ; WACKERNAGEL I, 1 8 8 c. It seems as if the Vedic relation of r
1
S e e WHITNEY o n A P r . 1. 26. to / could only be accounted for by assum-
:
3 See above 48 a. ing a mixture
of dialects; one dialect
4 Cp. WACKERNAGEL I, 196; BRUGMANN, I having preserved the IE. distinction of r
KG. I, 148 and 155. J and /; in another IE. I becoming r (the
5 See 45 a, 3. Vedic dialect); in a third r becoming /
6 49 c. 1 46 c. throughout (the later Mdgadhi). See BRUG-
8 For some other possible instances see MANN, K G . I, 1 7 5 , n o t e .
WACKERNAGEL I, 1 8 J b, note. « S e e WACKERNAGEL I, 189.
 L PHONOLOGY. SEMIVOWELS. 43
1
b. r appears in place of phonetic d ( = Ilr. z) as final of stems
in -is and -us, before endings which begin with bh-\ e. g. havir-bhis and
vapur-bhis. This substitution is due to the influence of Sandhi, where is, us
would become ir, ur. r also takes the place of d in ira- beside t'da- 'refreshing
draught'. In urubja- 'wide open' r apparently takes the place of dental d
{•= *ud-ubjd-), perhaps under the influence of the numerous compounds
beginning with uru- 'wide', e. g. uru-jri- 'wide-striding".
c. Metathesis of r takes place when ar would be followed by s or
h + consonant Under these conditions it appears to be phonetic, being
due to the Svarabhakti after r being twice as great before h and sibilants
as before other consonants 3 : when a vowel followed the sibilant or h (e. g.
darsatd-)*, the Svarabhakti was pronounced; but if a consonant followed,
ra took the place of ar + double Svarabhakti. This metathesis appears in
forms of drs- 'see' and srj- 'send forth': drastum (AV.), drastf- (AV.) 'one
who sees'; sam-srastr- 'one who engages in battle', 2. sing. aor. srSs (=•= *sr3k)s\
also in pras-ti- 'side-horse', beside pars'-u- and prsti- 'rib'; moreover in brahman-
'priest', brdhman- 'devotion', beside barhis- 'sacrificial litter* (from brh- or
bar A- 'make big'); perhaps also drahyat 'strongly* {drh- 'be firm'). The
same metathesis occurs, being, however, very rare and fluctuating, before ks-\
thus tuvi-mraksd- 'injuring gready', mraksa-kj-tvan- 'rubbing to pieces' (from
mrj- 'wipe', or mrs- 'stroke'), but tirksya-, N. 6 .
52. The semivowel /. — The liquid sound / is the semivowel corre-
sponding to the vowel I (which however occurs only in some half dozen
perfect and aorist forms of the root kip- 'be adapted'). It is pronounced at
the present day in India as an interdental; but it must have had a post-
dental sound at the time of the Pratisakhyas7, by which it is described as
being pronounced in the same position as the dentals 8 .
a. It represents IE. /» and, in a few instances, IE. r. It is rarer in
Vedic than in any cognate language except old Iranian (where it does not
occur at all) 10 . It is much rarer than r, which is seven times as frequent".
The gradual increase of /, chiefly at the cost of r, but partly also owing
to the appearance of new words, is unmistakable. Thus in the tenth Book
of the RV. appear the verbs mluc- and labh-, and the nouns loman-, lohitd-,
but in the earlier books only mruc- 'sink', rabh- 'seize', roman- 'hair', rohita-
'red'; similarly dasdngula- 'length of ten fingers', hlidaka- and hladikn-vant-
'refreshing', beside sv-anguri- 'fair-fingered', hrada- 'pond'. Moreover, while
in the oldest parts of the RV. I occurs" in a few words only, it is eight
times as common in the latest parts. Again, in the AV. it is seven times
as common as in the RV. , 3; thus for rap- 'chatter', rikh- 'scratch', a-srlra-
'ugly', appear in the AV. lap-, likh- (also VS.), asltla-. The various texts
1
1
Cp. above p. 35, note 3. I sraj- 'wreath', ra- does not stand for ar,
On a supposed parasitic r in chardis- j WACKERNAGEL I , 1 9 0 d, note,
•fence', yajatra- 'adorable', vibhrtra- 'to be i 7 Cp. PISCHEL, B B . 3 , 2 6 4 . An indication
borne hither and thither*, see WACKERNAGEL ! that it was not a cerebral is the fact that
1, 189, note 7. Is never occurs (while rf is common).
3 According to the APr. 1. 101. 8 See 4 4 .
4 Cp. above 21 a. 9 Which, however, is largely represented
5 Cp. v. NEGELEIN, Zur S p r a c h g e s c h i c h t e by r also: cp. 51 a.
10
des Veda 83, note 7. Loc. cit.
6
On the interchange of ri and ar in " See WHITNEY, JAOS. 1 1 , p. XLFT.
raj- 'colour', rajatd- 'silvery', raj- 'shine', and " See ARNOLD, ' L in the R i g v e d a ' , in
arjuna- 'bright'; bhraj- 'shine', and bhargas- Festgruss an Rudolf von Roth, 1893, p. 145
'brilliance'; bhratf- 'brother", and bhartf- 'hus- — 1 4 8 ; Historical Vedic Grammar, J A O S .
band'; see WACKERNAGEL I , 1 9 0 e, note 18, 2, p. 258f.; Vedic Metre p. 37, 3.
(end). In vraja- 'fold', vrala- 'ordinance', 13 C p . WACKERNAGEL I, 1 9 1 c .
44

of the YV. also show an increased number of words with / as compared

with the RV.; thus babhlusa- (VS.) 'brownish' beside babhru- 'brown'; kulala-
(VS.) 'potter' beside earn- 'pot'. The MS. has a special predilection for /*;
thus pulitat 'pericardium' beside puritdt (AV. VS.). The SV. has parnsuld-
'dusty', for pamsurd- in the corresponding passage of the RV.
In a certain number of words r interchanges with / in the same
period: thus pun'i- and pulu- 'much'; misrd- and -misla- 'mixed'; jargur- and
jalgul-, intv. of gf- 'swallow'; in the AV.: -gird- and -gild- 'swallowing', ksudrd-
and ksullakd- (= *ksudla-ka) 'small', tirya- and tila- 'sesamum*.
The above considerations render it probable that the Vedic dialect was
descended from an Indo-Iranian one in which rhotacism had removed every /.
But since the oldest parts of the RV. contain some words with IE. /, and
in its later parts as well as in the other Samhitas / predominantly inter-
changes with r representing IE. I, there must have been another Vedic
dialect in which IE. r and I were kept distinct; from the latter / must have
found its way into the literary language to an increasing extent8.
b. In the oldest parts of the R V . there are no verbal forms which
preserve IE. /, and only a few nouns, viz. (n)!okd- 'free space', sloka- 'call',
and -misla- 'mixed*. A few other words containing I have no IE. cognates
and may therefore be of foreign origin: nila- 'dark-coloured',jdlasa- 'healing',
tilvila- 'fertile', and the denominative tilvilaydte.
In the latest parts of the R V . / represents IE. / in: I. verbal forms
and primary derivatives: lebhire, lebhsnd-, labdhd-, from labh- 'grasp', layantam,
from ll- 'cling'; alipsata, aor. of lip- 'anoint'; lobhdyantT- part, from lubh- 'desire';
cala-cala-, -cacali- 'swaying' (alsoputns-cali- 'whore', AV. VS.), from cal- 'move';
plavate, plava- "boat', from plu- 'swim'.
2. the following nouns: logd- 'clod'; uluka- 'owl'; ulka- 'meteor'; ulba-
'membrane'; kalasa- 'jar'; kahi- 'small portion'; ktila- 'time'; kalyana- 'fair'; kula-
'family'; galda- 'trickling' (VS. gal- 'drop'); palita- 'grey'; pulu- (in compounds)
'much'; phalgva- 'weakly'; bdla- 'strength'^; ball- 'tax'; mala- 'dirty garment";
salild- 'surging'; hlfidaka- and Miidikavatit- 'refreshing'; also words with the suffix
-la especially with diminutive sense; e. g. vrsa-la- litde man', sisn-la- 'little child'5.
0. In the later Samhitas I represents IE. I in the following words:
-kulva- (VS.) 'bald'; kloman- (AV. VS.) 'lung'; gldhana- (AV.) 'dicing'; gldu-
(AV. VS.) 'excrescence'; tula- (VS.) 'balance'; paldva- (AV.) 'chaff'; pula-sti-
(VS.) 'smooth-haired'; plxhdn- (AV. VS.) 'spleen'; phalgu- (VS.) 'reddish';
laghu- (AV.) 'light'; lap- (AV.) 'prate' ( = rap- RV.).
c. On the other hand, / to some extent represents IE. r also 6 .
1. In the R V . this value of / is rare and occurs only in the neigh-
bourhood of labial sounds (u, o, p, m, v): tdrtkhala- 'mortar' beside uru-
'broad'; jalgul-, intv. of gf- 'swallow'; plthi-, a kind of insect, beside prus-
'squirt'; klos'a- 'call' beside krosant- 'calling', kros'and- 'crying'; -lohita- 'red',
lodha-, a kind of red animal, beside rohit-, rohitd- 'red'; lopasa- 'jackal',
lup- (AV.) 'break', beside rup- 'break'; iipala- 'upper millstone' beside updri
'above'; jdlpi- 'muttering'; pippala- 'berry'; mid- 'fade' beside mr- 'die'; vald-
'cave' beside vdrate 'encloses'.
2. In the later Samhitas the use of this / = IE. r extends further than
in the RV.; thus alam (AV.) 'enough': dram-, lis- (VS.) 'tear': ris-\ -luncd- (VS.)

« L. v. SCIIROEDER, ZDMG. 33, 196. | 4 See ARNOLD, Festgruss an Roth 147.

* See WACKERNAGEL I, 1 9 2 b, and cp. | 5 S e e W A C K E R N A G E L I, p . 218.
above p. 42, note i o . 6 Cp. above 51 a.
3 Cp. above p. 36, note io.
 I. PHONOLOGY. SEMIVOWELS. SIBILANTS. 45

'tearing out'; babhlusd- (VS.) 'brownish': babkru- 'brown'; sthuld- (AV. VS.)
'gross': sthura-
3. In a few instances / represents IE. r by dissimilation; thus alarsi
dlarti, intv. of r- 'go' ( = arar-)\ pra tilarni (VS.) = prd tirami 'I promote' 2 .
d. In the later Samhitas / occasionally appears in place of phonetic d*
between vowels; and that this change could easily arise, is shown by the
fact that / regularly appears instead of d between vowels 4 . This substitution
is regularly found in the Kanva recension of the V S . ; e. g. ile = Lie (RV. ilt)\
dsalha = asSdha (RV. dsalha). Other instances are ildyati (AV.) 'stands
still', for *iddyati (RV. ilayati)5 from id- 'refreshment'; tla- (MS.) 'refreshment',
byform of hid- (RV. ila-); mil- (AV.) 'close the eyes' 6 , connected with mis-
'wink'.
In the later Samhitas / is also found for 4 between vowels when the
final of a word (like / in RV.): thus turSsal ayuktasah (VS.) for turasat 'over-
powering quickly'; phal iti (AV.) for phat (AV.); probably also in sal iti (AV.)
and bdl iti ( A V . TS.), cp. R V . bdl iti Ad.
e. In at least one word I stands for dental d: ksulla-kd- (AV.) 'small',
for *ksudld-, byform of ksudrd- (,VS.) 'small'.
f. Sometimes / has an independent Indian origin in onomatopoetic words;
thus alala-bhavant- 'sounding cheerfully'.
g. On the other hand there are many words in which a foreign origin
may be suspected; such are, besides those already mentioned in 45 b, the
following: kaulitara-, N.; dlina- and bhalandsnames of tribes; libitja- 'creeper*;
lavand- (AV.) 'salt'.
53. T h e sibilants.—The three sibilants, the palatal s, the cerebral s,
and the dental s, are all voiceless. Even apart from the regular phonetic
change of / or s to s, and of s to s, both the palatal and the dental are
further liable, in many words and forms, to be substituted for each of the
other two.
a. Assimilation of s is liable to occur
1. initially, when / or s appear at the end of the same or the beginning
of the next syllable. This is the case in svdsura- 'father-in-law'; svasra-
'mother-in-law'; smdsru- and -smasaru- 'beard'; sdsvant- 'ever-recurring'; in
sds- 'six' (Lat. sex), and its various derivatives, sas-ti• 'sixty', sodha {— *sa%-
dha) 'sixfold', and others 7 .
2. initially s in the R V . almost invariably becomes s in sah-
'overcoming', when the final h ( = Ilr. s), with or without a following dental,
becomes cerebral: nom. sing, sat 'victorious', and the compounds JanS-sdt, tvrS-
sdt, pura-sdt, prtans-sdt, vira-sdt, vrtha-sdt, rta-sdt (VS.), vis'va-sdt (TS. A V . ) ;
also d-sadha- 'invincible'. The only exceptions are sd4ha, nom. sing, of sddhr-
'conqueror', and the perf. part. pass, sadhd- (AV.) 8 . The s of the nom. has
been transferred to forms with -sdh-, when compounded with prtana-, though

2
< In B. passages of the TS. and MS. are See W A C K E R N A G E L I, 193 b, note.
found intv. forms of ti "sway": alelayat, pf. 3 See above 51 b.
Iclaya, also the adv. lelayi 'quiveringly'. In 4 See above p. 5, note 5.
similar passages the prepositions pra and 5 According to B6HTLINGK, ildyati is
para are affected: plehkha- (TS.) = prcnkha- wrong for ilayati. Cp. above p. 35, note ».
2
swing'j fliksarayan (MS. in. lo ) 'they caused 6 A form with the original <1 is found in
toflow"(\k;ar-\pala-y-ata (TS.) 'fled' (para-i-).
mufam (K.) 'in a low tone'.
Some uncertain or wrong explanations of 7 Cp. W A C K E R N A G E L i, 197 a, note.
alatfna- 'miserly', uloka- 'wide space', gal-8 A B. passage of the MS. has sadhyai
'drop', with I = IE. r, are discussed by (.. 83>
WACKERNAGEL 1, p . 221, t o p .
46

there is no phonetic justification for the cerebral (as the s is preceded b y a):
thus prtana-saham, gen. prtana-sahas, prtanS-sdhya- 'victory in battle', but
prtana-sdham (SV.). When compounded with dyumnS-, dhanva-, ratha-, vibhvi-,
sads-, the phonetic form -sdh- r e m a i n s ' .
3. Medial 1 has been assimilated to initial s in sasa- 'hare* (IE. kasS-2).
b. W i t h o u t assimilation 3 , s or s has been changed to a, mostly
under the influence of allied words, in the following: kisa- 'hair': khara-
( A V . V S . ) ; sakrt4 'excrement'; iubh- ' a d o m ' (probably owing to sudh- 'purify');
suska- 'dry* (Ilr. suika-), stisyati 'dries'; sru- 'flow', iravas- 'stream': sru-, sravas--t
svas-, /««-'breathe'; svitra-, svatrya-'dainty': svad-'taste'5; pyaiisTmaki ( A V . ) ;
py&sisimahi (VS.), aor. (534) ofpya- 'swell'; oiistha-han- ( V S . T S . ) 'striking very
swiftly' beside osistha-ddvan- (TS.) 'giving very rapidly' (from osdm 'quickly',
lit. 'burningly'), owing to diistha- 'very swift'; koia- 'receptacle' (in the later
language often also kosa-)\ kaitnd- (VS.) beside kasmd- (MS.), a kind o f
d e m o n ; ruiati- ( A V . ) 'angry', beside rus- T}e angry', probably owing t o
ruiant- 'shining'.
a. On the other hand, s occasionally appears in the later SamhitSs, chiefly AV.,
for J: thus asyate (AV. v. 192) : ai- 'eat'; vast- (AV.) 'pointed knife': vail--, saru- (AV.)
•arrow': iaru-\ arus-srdna- (AV.), a kind of wound preparation: ira- 'boil'; saspinjara- (TS.)
•ruddy like young grass', owing to sasa• 'grass', for sas-pitij ara- (VS. MS.) = Jaf[pa]-
fniijara-6.
54. T h e palatal s.—This sibilant is a palatal both in origin ( = I l r . / ) ,
as indicated b y cognate languages, and in employment, as its combination
with other consonants shows. Thus it represents an old palatal in satam
' a hundred', diva- 'horse', ivan- 'dog', iru- 'hear' 7 . In external Sandhi it
regularly appears before voiceless palatal mutes, e. g. indrai ca. A t the present
day the pronunciation of i in India varies between a sh sound (not always
distinguished from s) and a s sound followed by y. It is to some extent
confused with the other two sibilants even in the Samhitas, but it is to be
noted that here it interchanges much oftener with J than with s%.
T h e aspirate of s is its media is represented b y j and when aspirated
b y h. _ T h e s e four form the old palatals (Ilr. i, ih, z, zA), representing
I E . k kh g gh. T h e exact phonetic character of the latter is doubtful, but
it is probable that they were dialectically pronounced in two ways, either as
mutes (guttural 1 0 or palatal) or as spirants, the centum languages later following
the former, the satem languages the latter 1 1 .
a. In external Sandhi i regularly appears for s before the palatals
c, ch, i". It also stands for s internally inpaicdt andpaicdtat 'behind' I ; ! , and
in vricati 'hews' beside -vraskd- lopping'.
b. B e f o r e s the palatal sibilant when medial is regularly replaced
b y k, and sometimes also when final; e. g. dj-k-sase and -drk, from dri- 'see'.
Otherwise i very rarely interchanges with k ox c; thus ruiant- 'brilliant', beside
rue- 'shine'; perhaps kdrna- ' e a r ' : iru- 'hear' 1 4 . There are also a few words

1 WACKERNAGEL I, 197 b . 9 Cp. above 40.

10
' See, however, op. cit. 1, 197 c, note. The fact that i before s regularly be-
3 For s and s are strictly distinguished in comes t and sometimes also when final,
the RV.; cp. op. cit. I, 197 d a, note (end). seems to favour the assumption of the
4 Cp., however, op. cit. j, 197 d a. guttural pronunciation.
5 Op. cit. p. 226, top. 1 1 Cp. WACKERNAGEL 1, 200 b .
6
See op. cit., p. 226 fi; and below 64, 1 a. « See below, Sandhi, 78.
7 On the relation of J to the corresponding »3 Cp. Av. postal and pasca.
sounds in cognate languages, see WACKER- H For some words in which such an
NAGEL I, 200 a ; BRUGMANN, K G . I, 233. assumption is doubtful or wrong, see WACKER-
8
See above 53, 3. NAGEL 1, 201 a .
 47

with / to which k corresponds in the satem languages; such are krus- 'cry';
dsman- 'stone' 1 .
55. The dental s. — This sound as a rule represents IE. dental s;
e. g. sa 'he', Gothic sa; divas 'horse', Lat. equo-s; asti, Gk. £<XT/. In the
combinations is and ps, when they stand for etymological dhs and bhs, the s
represents IE. »4; as in gftsa- 'adroit* (from grdh- 'be eager') and dlpsa-,
'wish to injure' (from dabh- 'injure'), where the final aspirate of the root
would have been thrown forward on the suffix, as in bud-dha- from Ybudh-,
and -rab-dha-, from Yrabh-2.
The dental s is in Sandhi frequently changed to the palatal s'1, and still
more frequently to the cerebral J4.
56. The cerebral s. — The cerebral sibilant is altogether of a
secondary nature, since it always represents either an original palatal or an
original dental sibilant.
The cerebral s stands for a palatal before cerebral tenues (themselves
produced by this s from dental tenues) in the following two ways:
a. for the palatal s ( = Ilr. s) and j ( = Ilr. z); e. g. nas-ta-, from nas-
'be lost'; mrs-(a, 3. sing.mid., from mrj- 'wipe'; pfs-td- 'asked', prds-tum 'to ask',
from pras- 'ask' in prai-nd- 'question' (present stem prcchd- s with inchoative
suffix -cha). In some instances it is shown by the evidence of cognate words
to represent /; thus astau 'eight' beside aslti- 'eighty'; prsti- 'rib', prasfi-
'side-horse', beside parsu- 'rib'; asirS- 'goad', beside asani- 'thunderbolt";
possibly also ap3stha-b 'barb', beside dsman- 'bolt'.
b. for the combination ks, which in origin is / + i 7 ; e.g. cds~te, a-casta,
from caks-8 'see'; a-tas-ta, tas-ta-, tds-tr-v, beside taks- 'hew'; nir-as-ta-
'emasculated' beside nir-aks-nu-hi (AV.) 'emasculate'; also aorist forms like
a-yas-ta, 3. sing. mid. from yaj- 'sacrifice', beside 3. sing. subj. yaks-at\ d-srs-ta,
3. sing, mid., beside a-srks-ata, 3. pi. mid. from srj- 'emit'. As in all these
instances ks = / + s or j ( = 2) + sIO, loss of s before t must here be assumed,
the remaining s or j combining with the following t as usual to si A similar
origin of s is indicated by the evidence of cognate languages in sas-tha- (AV.)
'sixth', where the final s has been dropped (as in Gk. '¿K-toq), while retained
in Lat. sex-tus; also in sas-ti- 'sixty', sodha 'sixfold', sodas'a- (AV.) 'sixteenth'.
It has possibly the same origin in asthivant- 'knee' 12 .
57. The cerebral s stands for dental s after vowels other than.
a or a, and after the consonants k, r, s.
1. Medially this change regularly1^ takes place, both when the s is
radical — e. g. ti-sthati, from stha- 'stand'; su-sup-ur, 3. pi. perf. from svap-

1 This s e e m s t o p o i n t t o fluctuation in j s p i r a n t t e n u i s (]>) o r m e d i a ( M ) . I n a f e w

t h e I E . p r o n u n c i a t i o n ; c p . WACKERNAGEL I, I w o r d s , kfip-, ksu-, ifubhifurä-, the sibilant
201 b . ] c o m e s first in t h e c o g n a t e l a n g u a g e s : s e e
' S e e WACKERNAGEL I, 2 1 0 . WACKERNAGBL I, 209.
3 C p . a b o v e 5 4 a, a n d b e l o w 78, 2. 11 S i m i l a r l y , w h e n is = guttural + 1 i s
4 S e e b e l o w 56. f o l l o w e d b y / , t h e s d i s a p p e a r s and t h e guttural
5 Cp. 40. c o m b i n e s with t h e t h u s f r o m ghas- 'eat',
6 Cp. WACKERNAGEL I, 202 b ; a n d b e l o w -gdha- ( = ghz-ta-)-, f r o m jai'f- 'eat', jagdha-
p. 48, n o t e y. (— jaghz-(a-), jagdhvaya (— jaghz-lvaya)\
7 Cp. op. cit. I, 1 1 6 b . f r o m bhaj- ' s h a r e ' , aor. a-bhak-ta ( = abhaj-s-ta)y
8 Cp. Av. caiman-. beside a-bhai-f-i.
9 O n t h e o r i g i n o f tvastf - = *ivarf/y-, see 12 C p . BARTHOLOMAE, S t u d i e n zur i n d o -
WACKERNAGEL T, 202 c , n o t e . g e r m a n i s c h e n S p r a c h g e s c h i c h t e 2, 103.
10 Though if is regularly based on a T h e c h a n g e d o e s n o t t a k e p l a c e in
palatal or a g u t t u r a l i n t h e V e d i c l a n g u a g e , s o m e f o r m s o f t h e p e r f e c t o f sic- ' p o u r ' :
t h e r e a r e s o m e w o r d s o f I E . origin in w h i c h sisicf ( m . 3 2 ' 5 ) , sisicur (11. 24»), b e s i d e sificatur.
t h e } appears t o r e p r e s e n t not s but a d e n t a l
48 I . ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4. VEDIC GRAMMAR.

'sleep'; us-ana-, part, from vas- 'wear'; rsa-bhd- 'bull'; uksdn- 'ox'; varsd-
'rain' — and when the s is suffixal; as in the superlative suffix -¿Ma; in the
loc. pi. suffix -su, e. g. agni-stt, aktu-su, tif-su, vik-su, gir-su, havis-su; in the
i-suffix of the aorist, e. g. yak-s-at, from yaj- 'sacrifice'.
The change is phonetic even when Anusvara intervenes between
t u f and s; e. g. pimsanti from pis- 'crush'; haviinsi 'offerings' from havis-;
cdksQmsi 'eyes' from caksus-. The s, however, remains in forms of hims-
'injure', trims- 'kiss', and puins- 'man', being probably transferred from the
strong forms hinasti, pumamsam, etc.
a. T h e s, h o w e v e r , r e m a i n s when immediately f o l l o w e d b y r or r, owing to a
distaste for a s u c c e s s i o n of c e r e b r a l s ' ; e. g. tisras, tisfbhis, tisfnam, f. of Iri- ' t h r e e ' ;
usras g e n , usr'i and usram, loc. (beside usar, voc.), usra- 'matutinal'; usia- 'bull'; sarisypa-
'creeping'. O w i n g to the influence of forms with sr, the J- further remains in the syllable
sar, instead of sar, as in sisarsi, sisarti (beside sisrate, sisrat-, sarsri etc.). In kisara- (AV.
VS.) 'hair', the retention may be due to the r having originally f o l l o w e d the s i m m e -
d i a t e l y 2 . T h e s also remains u n c h a n g e d in the combinations stir, stiir, spar, s p f , sphUr-,
e. g. tistire, from stf- 'strew'; pispfias, from sprs- 'touch'J. It remains in the s e c o n d of
three s u c c e s s i v e syllables in w h i c h s-s-s would be e x p e c t e d ; thus yasisTs/has, b e s i d e
ayasifam. from ya- ' g o ' ; sisaksi, beside sisakti, from sac- 'follow'.
W o r d s in w h i c h s o t h e r w i s e f o l l o w s > or any v o w e l but a, must be of f o r e i g n
o r i g i n ; such as bisa- 'root fibre'; bus a- 'vapour'; bfsaya-, a d e m o n ; fbisa- 'cleft'; tisto-
' p r a i s e r ' ; barsva- (VS.) 'socket'; insula- (AV.), a kind of d e m o n ; mitsala- (AV.) 'pestle'
(for musra-i); stsa- (AV. VS.) 'lead'4.
y. T h e cerebral s is s o m e t i m e s found e v e n after a, representing an early Prakritic
c h a n g e in w h i c h as, is b a s e d o n / v and as on arss. Instances of this are kasati (AV.)
•scratches'; pasthavah- (VS. TS.) 'young bull' (lit. 'carrying on the back') and paf/haukt-6
'young cow', b e s i d e prtfha- 'back'; pasya-1 'stone'; bhasd- 8 (VS.) 'barking'9. T h e r e are
b e s i d e s several unexplained instances, doubtless due to foreign influence or origin; such
are a^atara- ' m o r e a c c e s s i b l e ' ; iavasa-, N . ; fa/a- 'blue jay'; cabala- 'knob'; jalaja- 'remedy*;
bajkaya- 'yearling'; bafktha- (VS.) 'decrepit'; mrisa• 'bean' (AV. VS.); saspa- (VS.) 'young
grass' i°.
2. Initially 11 the change regularly takes place, in the RV.:
a. in verbal compounds after prepositions ending in i or u, and in
nominal derivatives from such compound verbs; also after the preposition
fits 'out1; e. g. tii slda (x. 984); dnu stuvanti (vm. 3 s ); nih-sdhamanafr
(I. 1 2 7 3 ) .
a. But (as w h e n it is medial) the s r e m a i n s u n c h a n g e d w h e n f o l l o w e d b y r
(even w h e n t ox p intervenes) or r (even though a intervene, with an additional m or v
in the roots smar- and svar-); e. g. vi srja 'let flow', vi-sfs/i- 'creation'; vi stfnltam 'let
him e x t e n d ' ; ni-spfse 'to caress' (but a-ni-s.tr/a- 'unchecked'); pari-sruta• 'flowed round';
vi-sarga- 'end', vi-sarjana- 'extension' (owing to the influence of t h e forms with sr from
s f j - ) \ vi-sarman• 'dissolving', vi-sira- 'extent', and e v e n vi sasre (owing to the influence
of forms with sr from sr- 'flow'); prati smaretham 'may y e t w o remember' [ysmr-];
abhi-svaranti 'praise', abhi-svar- 'invocation', abhi-svari, loc., 'behind', abhi-svartf- 'invoker'.
But st sp sph are c h a n g e d according to the general rule, w h e n ar ir ur follow; e. g.
prati fphitra 'repel'. In roots which contain no r, the initial s rarely remains; thus in
forms of as- 'be': abhi santi, pari santu, pari santi (beside pari fanti), ab/ii syama (beside
abhi-syama)-, and o w i n g to dislike of repeated amt-scstdhat (sidk- 'drive off'); dwt-spaf/a-
' n o t i c e d ' (spas- 'see'); pari sani-nanat (svatt- 'sound').

1 6
Cp. a b o v e 42 a, a and p. 38, note
* S e e W A C K E R N A G E L I, 50.
3 T h e c o m b i n a t i o n sr is found only where
sr w o u l d b e quite isolated amid cognate KZ. 32, 387.
f o r m s with thus ajuf-ran, from j u f - 'be
satisfied', s i n c e all the other very numerous
forms of this verb h a v e ?.
4 S e e WACKERNAGEL I, 203 e, note.
5 S o m e t i m e s representing also IE. is and
is; c p . W A C K E R N A G E L I, 2 0 8 b a.
Cp. BARTHOLOMAE, KZ. 29, 579;
WLNDLSCH, K Z . 2 7 , 169.
7 C p . FORTUNATOV, B B . 6, 2 1 7 ; J. SCHMIDT,
8 FORTUNATOV, 1. c .
9 On doubtful instances like kafthi•
'goal', affhivantau 'knees', apif/ha- 'barb', cp.
WACKERNAGEL I, 208 b a, n o t e ; b p, note.
«0 C p . W A C K E R N A G E L I, 2 0 8 b p.
>> Finally, f stands for s in t h e first
 49

j). In t h e l a t e r S a m h i t l s initial s is s i m i l a r l y c h a n g e d to j ; b u t its r e t e n t i o n is in

s o m e i n s t a n c e s s o m e w h a t l e s s r e s t r i c t e d ; thus abhi sphurjati ( A V . ) ' s o u n d s t o w a r d s ' ;
¿dhi standa ( A V . ) a n d abhi-skdndambeside pari-skandd- ( A V . , V S . ) , f r o m stand- 'leap';
prati-spasana- ( A V . ) ' l y i n g in w a i t ' , prati-spasa- ( T S . ) ' s p y i n g ' ; arm sthana ( T S . V. 6. 1
f r o m as- ' b e ' ; o w i n g t o t h e f o l l o w i n g s a l s o in abhi sisyade ( A V . ) f r o m syand- ' r u n ' .
y . T h e d i v e r g e n c e b e t w e e n t h e l a t e r S a m h i t a s a n d t h e R V . is m u c h g r e a t e r w h e n
t h e a u g m e n t i n t e r v e n e s b e t w e e n a p r e p o s i t i o n e n d i n g in i a n d t h e initial s o f a r o o t .
I n t h e R V . t h e s r e g u l a r l y r e m a i n s u n c h a n g e d (as ny-asldat, vy-asthat, etc.) e x c e p t in
pary dsasvajai ' e m b r a c e d ' ( u n d e r t h e i n f l u e n c e o f pari sasvaje). In the other SamhitSs,
h o w e v e r , the s h e r e r e g u l a r l y b e c o m e s ; ; thus abhy-asihcan ( T S . ) , abhy-asicyanta (AV.)
f r o m sic- ' s p r i n k l e ' ; vy-asahanta ( A V . ) 2 , f r o m sah- ' o v e r c o m e ' ; adhy-a;tham ( A V . ) , adhy-
af/hiil ( A V . ) , abhy-asfhim ( A V . ) f r o m stha- ' s t a n d ' . In the r o o t fthev- 'spit', w h i c h first
o c c u r s in t h e A V . , t h e initial s has b e e n d i s p l a c e d b y s t h r o u g h o u t T h e f o r m prraly
asthrvan i n d i c a t e s t h e t r a n s i t i o n w h i c h l e d to t h e c h a n g e .
Similarly w h e n a reduplicative syllable containing a intervenes between a preposition
e n d i n g in i a n d an i n i t i a l r a d i c a l s, the latter a l w a y s r e m a i n s u n c h a n g e d in t h e R V . ;
t h u s pari sasvaje; ni-sasattha (VIIL 489); ati-tasthau ( x . 6 o l ) ; b u t t h e A V . h a s vi-taffhire,
vi /as/he ( o w i n g to vi tisfhait, vi-sfhita-), but a l s o adhi tasthur.
b. Initially in the second member of other than verbal compounds
s is more common than s when preceded by vowels other than a. But
s even in the R V . the is not infrequently retained; not only when r or r
follows as in hrdi-spf-s- 'touching the heart', su-sartu-, N., rsi-svara- 'sung
by seers', but also when there is no such cause to prevent the change;
thus go-sakhi- beside go-sakhi- 'possessing cattle'; go-sdni- ( A V . VS.) beside
go-sdni• 'winning cattle'; rayi-sthAna- beside rayi-sth&na- (AV.) 'possessing
wealth'; tri-sapta- beside tri-sapta- (AV.) 'twenty-one'; su-samiddha- beside
su-samiddha- (SV.) Svell-kindled'; apake-stha- (AV.) 'standing in the oven'
beside -stha- in other compounds after -e-\ prthivl-sad- (VS.) beside prthivi-
sad- (AV.) 'seated on the earth'; su-samrddha- (AV.) 'quite perfect'. After
r the s becomes s in svar-sd- 'light-winning', svar-sati- 'obtainment of light';
after k, probably only in fk-sama- (TS.) 'resembling a rc\ beside fk-sama- (VS.).
a. In Avyaylbhavas s seems to appear in the R V . only; thus anu-
svadhdm 'according to wish'; anu-satydm 'according to truth'; anu-svdpam
'sleepily'.
p. In some compounds s appears where it is not phonetically justifiable,
owing to the influence of cognate words; thus upa-stut, adv., 'at one's call'
(because of the frequency of stu- after i and u), beside upa-stut- 'invocation';
sa-stubh- (TS.), a metre, owing to anu-stubhtri-stubh-\ savya-sfhd- (AV.), owing
to compounds in -e-stha-.
y. In Amredita compounds, however, the s regularly remains unchanged
because of the desire to leave the repeated word unaltered; thus sutt-sute
and somfsome 'at every Soma draught'; also in stuhi stuh'i 'praise on'
3. Initially in external Sandhi s frequently becomes s after a final
i and u in the R V . This change chiefly takes place in monosyllabic pronouns
and particles, such as sd(s), s<f, syd(s), sim, sma, svid, and particularly sit.
It also a p p e a r s in v e r b a l forms like stha sthas sthana, santu, syilm, syHrna
( f r o m as- ' b e ' ) ; sidati, satsat, satsi (from sad- 'sit'); sincay sincata ( f r o m sic-
'pour'); stavama, stave, stuhi (from stu- 'praise'); in participles like sdnt sat as
(from as- 'be'); sidati (from sad 'sit'); swanas (su- 'press'); sitAm (si- 'bind');
stutas (stu- 'praise'); skannam (skand- 'leap'). In other words the change

m e m b e r o f t h e c o m p o u n d and o f t e n in 3 T h i s is n o t t r e a t e d as a n A m r e d i t a
e x t e r n a l S a n d h i ; s e e b e l o w 78. compound in t h e P a d a p S t h a ( v i u . 13°):
1 C p . APR. II. 104.
stuhi\stuhi\it\\ b u t piba-piba (ll. I I " ) is
' Cp. WHITNEY'S T r a n s l a t i o n o f t h e A V . a n a l y z e d as piba-piba \ it |.
I, p. LXIV (mid.).
Indo-aritche Philologie I. 4. *
SO I. ALLGEMEINES UND S P R A C H E . 4. VEDIC GRAMMAR.

rarely takes place; e. g. dnti rajati stup (ix. 96 1 8 ); trl sadhdsthil (HI. 56');
nih sadhasthat1 (v. 31 9 ); mi sthirdm (1. 64"'); adhi snuna (ix. 97' 6 ).
The s usually follows short words such as u, tu, nu, su, hi, and occurs
where there is a close syntactical connection of two words; e. g. rdjahsu sidatt
(VII. 34 l 6 ); vdmsu stdati (ix. 57 3 ); divi sdn (vi. 26); divi santu (v. 2 1 0 );
rcchanti sma (x. 1026). In no word, however, even when these conditions
are fulfilled, is the change of initial i to j invariably made.
a. In the later Samhitas, apart from passages adopted from the R V . this
form of external Sandhi is very rare except in the combination ft su. Examples
are fid u siendm (AV. rv. 3*); ma hi sad dyumdn namah (TS. 111. 2. 8 s ) 2 .
58. T h e breathing h.—The sound h is, at the present day, pro-
nounced as a breathing in India, and this was its character at the period
when Greek and Indian words were interchanged, as is shown e. g. by copa.
being reproduced by hora. It is already recognised as a breathing by the
TPr. (11. 9), which identifies it with the second element of voiced aspirates
(g-h, d-h, b-h). This is borne out by the spelling 55g l-h (= dh) beside /
(= d)- The TPr. further (11. 47) assigns to it, on the authority of some, the
same place of articulation as the following vowel, this being still characteristic
of the pronunciation of h at the present day in I n d i a T h e breathing is,
moreover, stated by the Pratisakhyas 4 to have been voiced. This pronunciation
is proved by the evidence of the Samhitas themselves; for h is here often
derived from a voiced aspirate, e. g. hitd- from dha- 'put'; it is occasionally
replaced by a voiced aspirate, e. g. jaghdna from han- 'strike'; and in Sandhi
initial h after a final mute regularly becomes a voiced aspirate, e. g. tad dhi
for tad hi. It is in fact clear that whatever its origin (even when = Ilr. i/i)s,
h was always pronounced as a voiced breathing in the Samhitas.
As h cannot be final owing to its phonetic character 6 , it is represented
in that position by sounds connected with its origin 7 . It appears in combination
with voiced sounds only; being preceded only by vowels, Anusvara, or the
semivowels r and / 8 (in Sandhi also by the nasals n and «), and followed
only by vowels, the nasals n, n, m, or the semivowels y, r, I, v.
The breathing h as a rule represents a voiced aspirate, regularly a
palatal aspirate, occasionally the dental dh and the labial bh. It usually
represents a new palatal ( = Ilr. jht A v. / 9 ), appearing beside gh, e. g. druhyn-:
drdgha-, as j beside g, e. g. ojlyas: ugrd-. But in many words it also stands
(like j for s) for the old palatal zh, the voiced aspirate of /, being recognizable
as such in the same way as
1 a. A represents the palatalization (=-- Ilr. jh) of gh when, in cognate
forms, gh (or g) is found before other sounds than J; e. g. hdn-ti 'strikes':
ghn-anti, jaghdna; drhati 'is worthy': argha- 'price'; rh-ant- 'weak': ragh-u-
'light'; jamh-as- 'gait': jdftgha- 'leg'; dahati 'bums' •. dag-dhd- 'burnt'; ddhate
'milks': dughsna- 'milking', dug-dhd• 'milked'; dudroha 'have injured': drug-dhd-
'injured', dr.'gha- 'injurious'; mamhate 'presents' : maghd- 'gift'; mlh- 'mist':

1 ih and uh produce the same effect a s ! 8 The combination Ih is rare; it is found

simple i and «, as they were originally ; in upa-valh- (VS.) 'test by riddles'; vihalha-
pronounced as if and uf (cp. Sandhi, p. 71, (AV. 1 , of unknown meaning; and in the
e 2); e. g. agnt{f) stave-, yaju[s) skannam. \ Känva recension of the VS. as represen-
' Cp. WACKERNAGEL I. 207 b. ! ting dh.
i Cp. WHITNEY on APr. 1. 13 and TPr. I 9 Cp. 36. This h being related to gh
1L 47. as j is to g, it must represent IE. gh. This
4 See RPr. 1. 12; x n . 2 ; APr. L 13. survives, with loss of the aspiration, in ja hi
5 See below I b. ( = llt.jha-dhi), 2. sing. impv. of han- 'strike'.
6 See below, Sandhi, 66. Cp. 41.
7 Ibid, b 6, i .
 I. PHONOLOGY. T H E BREATHING h. 5i

meghá- 'cloud'; múhyati 'is perplexed': mugdhd- 'gone astray', mógha- 'vain';
rdmfd- 'speed': raghu- 'swift'; haras- and gharmd- 'heat'; harmye-sthá- and
gharmyc-stha- 'dwelling in the house'; hrsitd- 'glad': ghfsu- 'joyful', ghj-svi-
'gladdening'. In dhi- 'serpent* and duhitr- 'daughter' the guttural origin of
h is shown by cognate languages'.
b. h represents the old palatal aspirate ( = Ilr. sh):
a. when, either as a final or before /, it is replaced by a cerebral (like
the old palatals / and / = Ilr. z); e. g. vah- 'carry': d-vat, 3. sing. aor.
guh- 'conceal':güdhá- 2 'concealed'; trhdti 'crushes': trdhd-3; dj-mhati 'makes;
firm', drhyati 'is firm': drdhd- 'firm'; bahü- 'abundant': badhd- 'aloud'; mih-
'make water': médhra- (AV.) 'penis'; rihdti 'licks': r¿4hi 'licks', ridha- 'licked';
vdhati 'carries': vódhum 'to cany", Bdhd- 'carried'; sdhate 'overcomes': sádhr-
'victor*.
when it is followed by sounds which do not palatalize gutturals4,
before which dh and bh do not become h, and before which the other old
palatals s and j (= z) appear; thus dmhas- and amhati- 'distress' because
of amhú- 'narrow'; dhan- 'day', because of dhnSm, g. pi., and pBrvahnd-
'forenoon' (not ghn as in ghnanti from han-)-, jéhamina-5 'panting', because
of jikmd- 'oblique'; b&hii- 'arm'; brdhman- n. 'devotion', brahman- 'one who
prays'; rahú- (AV.), demon of eclipse; yakvá-, yahvdnt- 'ever young', because
of yahá-, id. This applies to all words beginning with ha-, hr-, hn-, hr-,
hv-; e. g. hu- 'pour'; hrd- and hfdaya- 'heart'; -hraya- 'ashamed'; -hva-, hü-
'caíl'; hvr- 'be crooked'.
y. when the 'satem' languages have a corresponding voiced spirant
(z or z)6; thus aham 'I'; ehd- (AV.) 'desirous'; garhate 'complains of'; dih-
'besmear'; pllhdn- (AV. VS.) 'spleen'; barhis- 'sacrificial straw'; mah- 'great';
varahd- 'boar'; sahdsra- 'thousand'; simhd- 'lion'; sprh- 'desire'; hamsd- 'goose';
hdnu- 'jaw'; hi- 'impel'; hemdn- 'zeal', heti- 'weapon'; haya- 'steed'; hdri- and
hdrita- 'tawny*; hdryati 'likes'; hasta- 'hand'; ha- 'forsake'; hayami- (AV.)
'year'; hi 'for'; himd- 'cold'; hiranya- 'gold'; hirá- (AV. VS.) 'vein'; hitns-
'injure'; he'sas- 'wound'; hr- 'take'; hyds 'yesterday 1 '.
8. h according to the evidence of cognate languages, represents other
palatals in some words. Thus in hj-d- 'heart', s = IE. k would be expected; and
j = IE. g in ahdrn 'I', mahÁnt- 'great', hdnu- 'jaw', hasta- 'hand', hva-, ha-
'call'. These irregularities are probably due to IE. dialectic variations8.
2. h also represents dh and bh not infrequently, and dh at least once,
a. It takes the place of dh in four or five roots (with nominal derivatives)
and in a few nominal and verbal suffixes. Thus it appears initially in hita-,
-hiti-, beside -dhita-, dhiti-, from dha- 'put'. Medially it is found in gihate
'plunges' (with the derivatives gahd- 'depth', gdhana- 'deep', dur-gdha-
'impassable place') beside gadhd- 'ford'; rohati 'rises', 'grows' (with the
derivatives ruh- 'growth', róhana- 'means of ascending', róhas- 'elevation')
beside rodhati 'grows' (with the derivatives ví-rúdh- 'creeper', -rodha- 'growing',
rodhas- 'bank', a-rodhana- 'ascent'); derivatives of *rudh- 'be red': rohit-, róhita-,

1 C p . W A C K E R N A G E L 1, 2 1 4 b. 1 Perhaps also in has• 'laugh' and ha-

* That is for *guzdha (through guzh-ta-'go' f as these verbs have no forms with gh;
for gugh-ld'), the cerebral z disappearing but also nah• 'bind'- in spite of nad-dha-. In
leaving the vowel long. several words the origin of the h is un-
3 Cp. 12 and 17, 5. certain, e. g. jahgahe 'struggles', as the
4 See above 41, 2. evidence is doubtful.
5 See WHITNEY, Roots, under jth\ and 8 S e e W A C K E R N A G E L I, 216 b ; f o r a f e w
cp. 41 a, 2. doubtful examples, ibid. 2rti a, note.
6 This includes several examples given

under a and ft.

4*
52
-lohita- 'red', beside lodhd- 'reddish animal', rudhira- (AV.) 'red'; also rauhina-
beside rudhikrfi-, names of demons; the evidence of cognate languages further
shows that h represents dh in grha- 'house'
h moreover represents dh in the adverbial suffix -ha in visva-ha beside
visvd-dha 'always'; in sahd 'together', beside sadha- in compounds; in ihd
'here', as shown by the Prakrit idha; and doubtless also in sama-ha 'somehow',
though there is no direct evidence. The evidence of cognate languages, more-
over, shows that in the endings of the i . du. -vahe, -vahi, -vahai and the
i . pi. -mahe, -mahi, -mahai h represents dh (cp. Gk. -/J-sba, etc.)2.
b. h takes the place of bh in the verb grah-, grh- 'seize' (with its
derivatives grdha- 'ladleful', grahi- 'demoness', grahyj- 'to be grasped', grha-
'servant', hasta-grhya 'having take the hand') beside grabh-, grbh- (with the
derivatives grabha- 'taking possession of', grabha- 'handful'); and in the
nouns kakuha- 'high', beside kak'ibh- 'height', kakubha- (VS. TS.) 'high', m. (AV.)
a kind of demon; bali-hrt- 'paying tax' (beside bhr- 'bear',/; probably bdrjaha-
'udder'(?), if formed with suffix -ha = -bha (in rsa-bha-, etc.) 3.
C. h takes the place of dh in barbrhi, 2. sing. impv. of the intv. barbrh-
of the root brh- 'make strong', for *barbrdhi (= *barbrzdhi, with the cerebral
dropped after lengthening the preceding r in pronunciation)4.
d. The rule is that h appears for dh, dh, bh, only between vowels 5 ,
the first of which is unaccented; e. g. ihd, kakuha-, grha- bdrjaha-, bali-hrt-
rauhind-, sahd. Similarly in grabh- 'seize', h alone appears after unaccented r
in R V . I - I X 6 ; while on the other hand, in the 2. sing. impv. of graded roots, -dhi
regularly appears after strong and therefore originally accented vowels; e. g.
bodhi (from bha- 'be'), yidhi (from yu- 'yoke'), yuyodhi (from yu- 'separate');
s'isadhi, but sisi hi (s'a- 'sharpen'). Again, in rudh- 'rise', the unaccented form
of the root is regularly ruh-, while when it is accented, forms such as rjdhati
appear beside rjhati, and in nominal derivatives dh predominates in accented
radical syllables, the R V . having rjdha- and ci-rodhana- only, but the AV.
rSha- and arShana-1.
a. At the same time dh and bh remain in a good many instances after an un-
accented vowel; thus in the 2. sing. impv. kfdhi, xadhi, srttdht, srnttdhi; in adhas 'below',
adhama- 'lowest', abhi 'towards'; f-bhu- 'deft'; m'.dha- 'reward'; medha- 'wisdom'; vidhati
'adores'; vidhu- 'solitary'; vidhavi- 'widow'; vadhn- 'bride'; sidht't- 'right'; rudhira- (AV.)
' r e d ' ; derivatives formed with -dhi-, -bha-, etc. 6 The retention of the dh and bh here
is partly to be explained as an archaism, and partly as due to borrowing from a dialect
in which these aspirates did not become k, and the existence of which is indicated by
the Prakrit form idha beside the Vedic ihd 'here'. T h e guttural aspirate media is
probably to be similarly explained in ntegha- 'cloud' and a;ha- 'sinful'.

• Cp. WACKERNAGEL l, 2 1 7 a. appears, though a vowel does not follow,

2
The h in the perf. aha, ahur, may in gfhnatu (iv. 57) and hasta-gfhya, is due
represent dh\not, however, in nahyati 'binds', to other forms of grabh- in which A is
in spite of naddha--, nah- rather stands for followed by a vowel.
6
Ilr. tiazh- (cp. I.at. tiedo) • the pp. instead of In RV. x, however, graha- and grahi-
1
*nidha-, became naddha- through the in- occur; cp. above, 2 b.
fluence of baddha- from bandh- 'bind'. Cp. 7 Exceptions like rohita-, visvaha and
W A C K E R N A G E L I, 217 a, note, where several inflected forms such as gahate, are due to
other wrong explanations of h — dh are normalization.
discussed. 8 Where the RV. fluctuates between h and
i Some erroneous etymologies in which dh bh (above 2, a, b), h appears throughout
h is explained as =» bh are discussed in in the later Sarnhitas; thus always -hi, after
W A C K E R N A G E L I, 217 b, note. vowels in imperatives except edhi 'be'; thus
4 Cp. 12 and 17, 5. for srnudhi (RV. vm. 843), SV. has ¡rnuht.
5 It appears initially in hita- = -dhita-. But a new h of this kind hardly occurs,
but originally it was doutbless preceded in Cp. WACKERNAGEL I, 219 a.
this position by a final vowel. That h
 1 . PHONOLOGY. T H E CEREBRAL /. ANUSVARA AND ANUNÄSIKA. 53

3. The various origins of h led to some confusion in the groups of

forms belonging to roots which contain h.
a. roots in which h represents an original guttural (Ilr. jh) show some
forms which would presuppose an old palatal (Ilr. zh). Thus from muh- 'be
confused', phonetic derivatives of which are mugdha-, mcgha-, are formed
mQdha- (AV.) 'bewildered' and mithur 'suddenly'.
b. roots in which h represents an old palatal (Ilr. zh) show forms
with a guttural before vowels and dentals; thus from dih- 'besmear*
is formed digdhd- (AV.) 'owing to the influence of dah- 'burn', and duh- 'milk'.
Similarly, from *sara/i- 'bee', beside saradbhyas, is formed saragha- (AV. VS.)
'derived from the b e e " .
c. the root ruh-, though = rudh- 'ascend', is treated as if the h represented
(as in vah-) an old palatal (Ilr. b4); hence aor. aruksat, des. riiruksati,
pp. -rQdha- (AV.), ger. radhva. (AV.).
59. The cerebral /.—This sound, as distinguished from the ordinary
dental /, is a cerebral /*. It appears in our (Sakald) recension of the RV.
as a substitute, between vowels, for the cerebral d and, with the appended
sign for h, for the cerebral aspirate dhs; e. g. I In- 'refreshment'; d-salha-
'invincible'; It also appears in Sandhi when final before an initial vowel;
e. g. turSsiil abhibhatyojah (m. 434). In the written Samhita text, however,
it does not appear if followed by a semivowel which must be pronounced as
a vowel; e. g. vidv-anga- 'firm-limbed', to be pronounced as vllu-anga- and
analysed thus by the Padapatha. In one passage of the RV. the readings
fluctuate between / and / in nilavat or nilavat (VII. 9 7 6 ) 4 .
60. Anus vara and Anunasika.— Anusvara, 'after-sound', is a pure
nasal sound which differs from the five class nasals; for it appears after
vowels only, and its proper use is not before mutes, but before sibilants or h
(which have no class nasal). But it resembled the class nasals in being
pronounced, according to the Pratisakhyas of the RV. and the VS.5, after
the vowel. The vowel itself might, however, be nasalized, forming a single
combined sound. The Pratisakhya of the AV.6, recognizes this nasal vowel,
called Anunasika, 'accompanied by a nasal', alone, ignoring Anusvara,
which with the preceding vowel represents two distinct successive sounds.
WHITNEY7, however, denies the existence of any distinction between Anunasika
and Anusvara. In any case, the Vedic Mss. have only the one sign 4 (placed
either above or after the vowel) for both", employing the simple dot ^ where
neither Anusvara nor Anunasika is allowable. The latter sign is used in the
TS. for final m before y v, and in both the TS. and MS. before mutes
instead of the class nasal 9 , a practice arising from carelessness or the desire
to save trouble. There is thus no ground for the prevalent opinion that 4
represents Anunasika and * Anusvara'". Throughout the present work m with
a dot (m) will be used for both, except if they appear before a vowel,
when m with the older sign (»/) will be employed.

1
T h e root sagh- ' t a k e upon o n e s e l f ' , ' 4 Cp. BENFEY, Gött. Abhandl. 19, 138,
has no connexion with sai• ' o v e r c o m e ' ; ! ite. See also WHITNEY on APr. 1. 29.
nor vaghát• -institutor of a sacrifice', with \ 5 See RPr. x m . 13; VS. L 74f., 147 f.
vah- 'convey'. The relation of gó-nyoghas- 6 See WHITNEY on APr. 1. 11.
'streaming among milk', to vah- is un- 7 On TPr. 11. 30; JAOS. 10, Lxxxvif.
certain; cp. WACKERNAGEL I, 220 b, 8 Cp. WHITNEY on Tl'r. 11. 30.
note, 9 In the MS. also when -am is written for
a Cp. above 42. •an.
J This practice is followed by the Mss. 10
See WHITNEY, JAOS. 7, 92, note.
of secondary texts of the RV.
54

Anusvara and Anunasika are commonest when final. As in that position

they belong to the sphere of Sandhi, the conditions under which they then
appear, will be stated below 1 . Medially Anusvara and Anunasika are found
under the following conditions:
a. regularly before sibilants and //; e. g. vamid- 'reed'; havimsi 'offerings';
mamsa- 'flesh'; simhi- 'lion'. This is generally recognized as the sphere of
Anusvara, except by the A P r . b u t mSmscati- 'light yellow', is stated 3 to
have Anunasika, while pumscali- (AV. VS.) is said to have both Anunasika
and Anusvara 4 . T h e Anusvara usually appears before s, and all forms
with rns are shown to be based on original ns or ms by the evidence of
cognate forms corroborated by that of allied languages 5 ; thus mamsate, 3. sing,
subj. aor. of man- 'think'; jighjmsati, des. from hart- 'strike'; pimsanti beside
pindsli, from pis- 'crush'; the neuter plurals in -amsi, -imsi, -umsi from stems
in -as, -is, -us, with nasal after the analogy of -anti, nom. acc. pi. from
neuters in -nt\ stems in -yams, -vams beside nom. sing, in -yan, -vln; kramsyate
(AV.) from kram- 'stride'. When Anusvara appears before s and h derived
from an IE. palatal or guttural, it represents the corresponding class nasal.
T h e reduction of these old nasals to Anusvara is probably ILr. after long
vowels (am, -Jmr, -umr); probably later after short vowels, for it does not
appear in forms like a/ian (for dhans), though s was not dropped after an
in the Ilr. period; but the s must have been dropped early in the Indian
period, before -ans became -ams 6 . Anusvara before h ( = Av. vj) must
have arisen in the Indian period.
b. before any consonant in the intensive reduplicative syllable, the final
of which is treated like that of the prior member of a compound; e. g. ndmnarn-
Tti (v. 83s)" from nam- 'bend'.
c. before any consonant which is the initial of secondary suffixes; thus
from sam- 'blessing', is formed sam-yu- 'beneficent'; sdm-tati- or sdntiti-
'blessing'.
61. Voiceless Spirants.— a. The sound called Visarjaniya 8 in the
Pratisakhyas 9 , must in their time have been pronounced as a voiceless
breathing, since they describe it as an Usman, the common term for breathings
and sibilants. This conclusion is borne out by the fact that, in the RPr.,
Jihvamullya and Upadhmanlya, the sounds which are most nearly related
to and may be replaced by Visaijaniya, are regarded as forming the second
half of the voiceless aspirates kh and ph respectively, just as h forms the
second half of the voiced aspirates gh, bh, etc. At the present day Visarjaniya
is still pronounced in India as a voiceless breathing, which is, however, followed
by a weak echo of the preceding vowel. According to the TPr. 10 , Visarjaniya
has the same place of articulation as the end of the preceding vowel. The
proper function of this sound is to represent final s and r in pausa; it may,
however, also appear before certain voiceless initial sounds, viz. k, kh, p, ph,
and the sibilants (occasionally also in compounds) I I .
b. Beside and instead of Visarjaniya, the Pratisakhyas recognise two
voiceless breathings as appropriate before initial voiceless gutturals {k, kh)1'

' See below, Sandhi, 75. ! 8 The term visarga is not found in the
2 APr. 1. 67; 11. 33 f. : PrStislkhyas (nor in Panini).
3 Cp. RPr. iv. 35. 1 9 RPr. 1. s etc., VPr. 1. 41 etc.; APr. L 5
4 Cp. VPr. iv. 7f. etc.; TPr. 1. 12 etc.
5 Cp. W a c k e r n a g e l i, 224 a. 10 See W h i t n e y on TPr. 11. 48.
6 Loc. cit.; cp. Brugmann, KG. 354, 17. • " See below, Sandhi, 78, 79.
7 In A u f r e c h t ' s edition printed »anna- I " S e e RPr. I. 8; VPr. III. 11 etc.
mVi.
 I. PHONOLOGY. VOICELESS SPIRANTS. L e s s OF CONSONANTS. 55
x
and labials ( / , ph) respectively. T h e former (//) called Jihvamuliya, or
sound 'formed at the root of the tongue', is the guttural spirant -/; the latter ($),
called Upadhmaniya, or 'on-breathing', is the bilabial spirant f 1 . In Mss.
they are regularly employed in the Kasmirian Sarada character.
62. L o s s of C o n s o n a n t s . — Consonants have been lost almost exclusively
when they have been in conjunction with others. T h e loss of a single
consonant which is not in conjunction with another is restricted to the dis-
appearance of v before if, and much more rarely of / before /'. T h e v
thus disappears finally in the Sandhi of av before u in the R V . and VS. 3
Initially, v is lost before fir derived from a r v o w e l ; thus in urana- and
ura- 'sheep'; uras- 'breast 1 ; ur-ana-, mid. p a r t {vr- 'choose'); iirj- 'vigour'; drni-
'wool'; Unwti 'covers' {vr- ' c o v e r ' ) ; Urdhva- 'high'; Br mi- 'wave*. Such loss
of v before fir also occurs after an initial consonant in turta- 'quick' ( = Ilr.
tvrtd-); dh&rvati, ddhUrsata, dharti-, from dhvr- 'cause to fall'; hlirya-, juhUr-
t/ias; juhur, from hvr- 'go c r o o k e d l y ' 1 . Before simple u the v has disappeared
at the beginning of the reduplicative syllable u- ( = *vu- for original va-),
in u-vac-a from vac- 'speak'; u-vdsa from vas- 'shine'; u-vd/i-a from vah-
'convey*.
Similarly initial y has disappeared from the reduplicative syllable i- = *yi-
in the desiderative i-yak-sati, i-yak-samina-, from yaj- 'sacrifice' 5 .
1. W h e n a group of consonants is final, the last element or elements
are regularly lost (the first only, as a rule, remaining) in pausa and in
Sandhi 6 .
2. W h e n a group of consonants is initial, the first element is frequently
lost. T h e only certain example o f an initial mute having disappeared seems
to b e tur-iya- 'fourth', from *ktur-, the low grade form of catur- 'four', because
the V e d i c language did not tolerate initial conjunct mutes 7 . A n initial
sibilant is, however, often lost before a mute or nasal. This loss was
originally 8 doubtless caused by the group being p r e c e d e d by a final consonant.
There are a few survivals of this in the V e d a s ; thus cit kambhanena (x. 1 1 1 s ) ,
otherwise skdmbhana- 'support'; and the roots stambh- 'support', and stha-
'stand', lose there s after ud-\ e. g. ut-thita-, ut-tabhita-. O n the other hand
the sibilant is preserved after a final vowel, in compounds or in Sandhi, in
a-skrdhoyu- 'uncurtailed', beside krdhu- 'shortened'; scandrd- 'brilliant', in asva-
scandra- 'brilliant with horses'®, adhi scandrdm (VIII. 6 5 " ) , also in the intens.
pres. p a r t cdni-scad-at 'shining brightly', otherwise candra- 'shining', and only
candra-mas- 'moon*. In derivatives from four other roots, forms with a n d
without the sibilant 1 0 are used indiscriminately, without regard to the preceding

' See VPr. 1. 41. 7 There are some words in which an

2
Cp. EBEL, KZ. 13, 277 f.
3 See below, Sandhi, 73.
4 The v has either remained or been
restored before such itr and ur in hotf-vurya-1
'election of the invoker'; in the opt. vurTia,
from vf- 'choose'; and in the 3. pi. perfect
babhu-vur, jtihu-vur, sum-vur, iusfu-vitr.
5 The evidence of cognate languages seems
to point to the loss of initial d in asm- 'tear'
(Lat. dacruma, Gk. iaxpu). It is, however,
probable that there were two different but
synonymous IE. words akru and da&ru. On
tome doubtful etymologies based on loss of
initial consonants, seeWACKERNAGEL 1, 228 c,
note.
6
See below, Sandhi, 65.
initial mute seems to have been lost in the
, IE. period; thus t in satdm 'hundred' ( = IE.
| fkntoni)\ d perhaps in vimiati- 'twenty' and
vi- 'between'; / perhaps i n y a i f t - 'liver'. An
; initial mute seems to have been lost before
I a sibilant (originally perhaps after a final
consonant) in slatia- 'breast', svid- 'sweat';
sas- 'six' (KZ. 31, 415 ff.).
8 Dissimilation may also have played
| some part in the loss of the sibilant in the
reduplicative syllable of roots with initial si(h)
' s/(A), sp(h), as caskanda, lis/hami, pasparsa.
9 See GRASSMANK'S Worterbuch sub verbo
scandrd-.
The verb k f - 'do', after pari and sam,
shows an initial i ; e. g. pariffynvanti, pari•
56 I. ALLGEMEINES UND S P R A C H E . 4 . VEDIC GRAMMAR.

sound; from start- 'thunder', stanayitnu-, beside tanayitnu- 'thunder', tanyatu-

(also AV.) 'thunder', tanyu- 'thundering', tanyati 'resounds'; stend- 'thief',
stay-ant- (AV.) 'stealing', stayu- (VS.) 'thief', steya- 'theft', beside tJy.u- 'thief';
stf-, beside tr- 'star1; spas'- 'spy' and spas- 'see' in verbal forms d-spas-ta aor.,
pa spas'- perf., spHsdyati caus., -spasta- part., 'seen', beside pasyati 'sees' 1 .
The loss of initial s may be inferred in the following words from the
evidence of cognate languages in which it has been preserved: tij- 'sharpen';
tuj- 'strike'; tud- 'beat'; narma- (VS.) 'jest'; nrt- 'dance'; parna- 'wing'; pika-
(VS.) 'Indian cuckoo'; pllhan- (VS. AV.) 'spleen'; phetia- 'foam'; mrd- 'crush',
mrdu- (VS.) 'soft'; vip- 'tremble'; supti- 'shoulder'.
A few examples occur of the loss of the semivowels / or v 2 as
the last element of an initial consonant group. Thus y disappears in derivatives
of roots in iv formed with suffixes beginning with consonats: -muta- 'moved',
mu-ra- 'impetuous', m'i-tra- (AV. VS.) 'urine', from mXr- 'push'; sUci- 'needle',
su-nti- 'plaited basket', sn-tra- (AV.) 'thread', beside syii-man- 'thong', sya-td-
'sewn', from stv- 'sew'. Loss of v seems to have taken place in siti- 'white'
(only at the beginning of compounds), beside svit- 'be bright', svity-diic-
'brilliant', svitra- (AV.) 'white', svitrya-, perhaps 'white'; and, on the evidence
of the Avesta, in ksip- 'throw' (Av. hsiw), sas- (Av. /¿s'vas).
3. When the group is medial, the loss usually taken takes place between
single consonants, a. The sibilants s and s thus regularly disappear between
mutes; e. g. d-bhak-ta, 3. sing, aor., for *dbhak-s-ta beside d-bhak-s-i, from bhaj-,
'share'; cas-te for caks-te ( = original *cas-s-te)">. Similarly a-gdha- (TS.) 'un-
eaten', for *a-ghs-ta-, from ghas- 'eat' 4 .
b. The dental t has disappeared between a sibilant and c in pas-cd and
pas-cat 'behind' ( = IE. post-qe, post-qit)-, and between p and s in *nap-su
which must have]been the loc.pl. (AV. na/su), from *napt-, 'weak stem of napat-,
beside the dat ndd-bhyas 'to the grandsons', for napt-bhyas, where on the
other hand the p has been dropped.
c. A mute may disappear between a nasal and a mute; e. g.pant!- for
pankti-, yundhi for yungdhi. This spelling is common in Vedic Mss.; it is
prescribed in APr. 11. 20, and, as regards the mediae, in VPr. vi. 30.
4. The only example of the loss of an initial 5 mute in a medial
group of consonants seems to be that of b before dbh ! in nadbhyas
for *nabdb/tyas from napt- for napat-. The semivowel r seems to be
lost before a consonant when another r follows in cakr-dt (Pp. cakrati) and
cakr-iyas6 for *carkr- beside carkar-mi, from kr- 'commemorate'; and, on
the evidence of the Avesta, in tvastr- (cp. pwar?s 'cut', pioarsta- 'created'),

fkfta-, sam-skfta-; also after nis in nir asifta 3 See above 56, b.
(Pp. atf-la), perhaps owing to Sandhi forms 4 On apnas- 'property', dampati- 'lord of
with sk such as nifhtru (AV.). There can ! the house', see WACKERNAGEL 1, 233 c, note.
be little doubt that the s here was not ori- 5 The guttural mute only seems to be
ginal but was due to analogy; cp.WACKER- lost when ks + 1 becomes sf. see above,
N'AGF.I. I, 2 3 0 a , P, note. 56, 6. The loss of m in the inst. sing. -«<« of
« WACKERNAGEL i, 230 a y, note, discusses nouns in -man is only a seeming one ; for dina,
several uncertain or erroneous etymologies prä/hhiä, prenä, bhitni, mahinä, varinä (TS.)
based on loss of initial s (including maryas appear beside the stems d&tnan- etc., because
interpreted as 2. sing. opt. of smr-). The evi- some of them had a stem in -n without m,
dence of Prak|it seems to point to the loss so that - n l seemed an alternative from of
of initial s in it pa- 'tail', krid- 'leap', krui- • m n a : s e e BENFEY, G G A . 1846, 702. 880;
'cry', faraiii- 'axe', pantfa- 'knotty'; cp. Göttinger Abhandlungen 19, 234; BLOOM-
W A C K E R N A G E L I, 2 3 0 b . FIELD, JAOS. 17, 3; cp. IF. 8, Anzeiger,
' On the possible loss of r in bhanj- p. 1 7 .
(Lat. frango) and of k in savya- (Lat. scaevtts), 6 But see G E L D N E R , V S . 1, 2 7 9 .
s e e W A C K E R N A G E L I, 2 3 2 c , note.
 I. PHONOLOGY. LOSS OF CONSONANTS.

probably starting from forms like tvastra ( A V . ) in which the r immediately

followed1
But the loss of a spirant (Ilr. s, z, i , zh) at the beginning of a medial
group is common.
a. T h e sibilant s 1 has thus been lost before k followed by a consonant
in vavrktam, vrkna-, vrktvi, rrksi (TS.), from vraic- 'lop' (cp. -vraskd-).
b. T h e voiced form (Ilr. i ) of dental s has disappeared J before v o i c e d
dentals, without leaving any trace, in the roots as- 'sit', and sas- 'order"; thus
a-dhvam, saia-dhi. But when a preceded the s, the disappearance of the
sibilant is indicated by e taking the place of as before d, dh, h (= d f t ) \
thus e-dhi, from as- 'be'; sed-*, perfect stem of sad- 'sit* (for sazd-, like saic-
from sac-). This e also replaces as with loss o f the sibilant in de-hi 'give';
dhe-hi 'put'; kiye-dha- 'containing much'; ned-iyas- and ned-istha- 'very m u c h ' ;
ped-A-s N . ; medati 'is fat'; medhd.- and medhas- 'wisdom'; medha- 'juice' 6 .
c . When a vowel other than a preceded, the z was cerebralized (like s
before a voiceless dental) and disappeared after cerebralizing the following
dental and lengthening the preceding vowel; thus a-sto-dhvam1 (= a-sto$-dhvam
for a-stos-dhvam) 2. pi. aor., beside a-sto-s-ta, 3. sing., from stu- 'praise'. T h u s
also are to be explained n l j d - 'nest' ( = nt$Ja- for ni-sd-a-); pid- 'press'
(«— pi$d- for pi-sd- or pis-d-); tnTdha- 'reward' (Gk. ¡mivQos); vTd-u- 'strong',
vXddyati 'is strong* (from vis- : work' + -d)"; h i d ' b e angry', and its Guria
forms, e. g. hid-as- 'anger'; mrddti 'be gracious', mrdlka- 'gracious' (for
mrsj-d- from mrs- 'forget') with vowel pronounced long (12), a-red-ant- (TS.)
'not deceiving' ( = a-rezd-ant-), from ris- 'injure'.
d. Similarly the old voiced palatal spirant (Ilr. i ) disappeared after
cerebralizing a following d o* dh and lengthening the preceding vowel; thus
ta-iihi ^for *tai-dhi (= tak-s-dhi) from taks- 'fashion'; so-dM for *sas-dhA
(= sak-s-dha), beside sas-tha- ( A V . ) 'sixth'. A similar loss is to be assumed
in Id- 'praise' ( = iz-d for y a j - + d)IO,
e . This loss is specially frequent in the case of the old voiced palatal
aspirated spirant (llr.zA) represented by h, which was dropped after cerebralizing
and aspirating a followed t and lengthening the preceding vowel; thus badha-

1 In a few forms of the AV. the semi-1 suffixes beginning with m,y orv, the sibilant
vowel y seems to be lost at the end of the is lost (instead of becoming d in the former
medial group i s y : mtifami, yokse, viiihakiàrt, 1 circumstances, or remaining in the latter)
s a i f f . But these forms may be due to errors owing to the influence of Sandhi ; e. g.
in the MSS. _ j dvho-bha from dvls-as- 'hate'. An original
1 In = s i i , the original s was lost [ sibilant has perhaps been lost in mahifà-,
in a pre-Indian period. srìhvams-^jàhusà, hraduni-, /as- 'be exhausted' ;
3 Before voiced mutes other than dentals, j cp. WACKERNAGEL I, 237 a /S, note.
3 became d, as in madipi- (44, 3 a) ' d i v e r ' ; ] 7 The origin of kroda- (AV. VS.) 'breast'
similarly z became d, as in padbhis, from I (Av. hraoidra- 'hard') and of many words
pas- 'look' or 'cord'; and in vi-prud-bhis • with d or dh preceded by a long vowel, and
from viprus- 'drop'. with no collateral forms containing a sibi-
4 The loss of the voiced sibilant (2) must lant, is obscure.
be older than the original text of the RV., 8 Cp. HUBSCHMANN, KZ. 24, 408. In
as the e of sed- has been transferred to 1 sTda- (= sizda-) from sad- 'sit', the d has
other stems which contain no sibilant, as in been retained owing to the influence of
bhrj-irè, from bhaj- 'divide'. Similarly the ! other forms of the verb sad-. See, however,
vowel of hid-, though derived from iz, is ROZWAPOWSKI, BB. 21, 147, and cp. ZDMG.
regarded as a primitive Tin the form ajihidal 48, 5'9-
( A V . ) : c p . W A C K E R N A G E L I, p . 2 7 2 ( m i d . ) . 9 Pintfa- perhaps stands for *pbtzda-, from
5 C p . BARTHOLOMAE, K Z . 27, 361. O n pis- ' c r u s h ; c p . WACKERNAGEL I, 146, d .
edh- 'thrive', miyedha- 'broth', vedhas- 'virtuous', 10 On krtd-, cp. W A C K E R N A G E L I, 2 3 8 b,
see WACKERNAGEL I, 2 3 7 c. note; PISCHEL, B B . 23, 253 ff. O n id-, cp.
6In stems in -as before case terminations OLDENBERG, S B E . 30, 2.
beginning with bh, and before secondary
58 I. ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4 . VEDIC GRAMMAR.

'strong', ni-bjdha- 'dense' ( = ba$dha- for bah-ta-) from bamh- 'be strong';
siidhr- 'conqueror', d-sadha- 'invincible', from safi-; ridha- ( = risd/id-), from
rih- 'lick'; Udha- ( = uzdhd-) from vah- 'carry'; gudha- 'concealed', from guh-
'hide'; trdha-, trdhva (AV.), from trh- 'crush'; drdhd- 'firm', from drh- 'be
strong'. Here e also appears for a; in trnidhu ( A V . ) from trh- ( = trna:-
dhu)-, and 0 in vodham (=•= vazdham), 2. du. aor. of vah- 'carry'. W e also
find e as Guna of i in medhra- (AV.), from mih- 'mingere' ( = mezdhra-).

63. Metathesis. — Apart from the few examples of ra before s and h

(51 c), there are probably no certain instances of metathesis in the R V . 1 .
In the later Sarnhitas, however, a few other forms of metathesis are to be found.
Thus -valh- seems to be a transposition of hval- 'go deviously' in upa-valh-
(VS.) 'propound a riddle to' 2 . In valmika- (VS.) 'anthill', m appears trans-
posed beside vamri- and vamrd- 'ant', vamra-kd- 'little ant'. Metathesis of
quantity occurs in as-thas for *as-thas, 2. sing. mid. aor. of as- 'throw'. This is
analogous to the shortening, in the R V . , of the radical vowel of da- 'give',
in the forms /idam, ridas, tidat, where the verb is compounded with the verbal
prefix a\ while otherwise the forms dam, dis, dat alone appear.
64. Syllable. — The notion of the syllable is already known to the late
hymns of the Rgveda, though the word (a-ksdra-) is there generally used as
an adjective meaning 'imperishable'. Thus aksdrena mimate sapta v f i n i h means
'with the syllable they measure the seven metres'. The vowel being according
to the Pratisakhyas* the essential element of the syllable, the word aksara-s
is used by them in the sense of 'vowel' also. Initially, a vowel, or a con-
sonant and the following vowel form a syllable. Medially, a simple consonant
begins a syllable, e. g. ta-pas; when there is a group of consonants, the last
begins the syllable, e. g. tap-ta-, and if the last is a sibilant or semivowel,
the penultimate also belongs to the following syllable 6 , e. g. astam-psTt, an-
tya-. A final consonant in pausa belongs to the preceding vowel, e. g.
i-dam.

By the process called haplology one of two identical or similar syllables

in juxtaposition is dropped. Syllable is here to be taken in the sense not
only of a consonant with a following vowel, but of a vowel with a following
consonant.
1. T h e first of the two syllables is dropped within a word in tuvi-ra\va\van
'roaring mightily' ' , beside tuvl-rdva-; madh\ya\yA 'in the middle', from mddhya-
(like Ssa-ya, nakta-yfi)\ vj\ta\th3 'at will', from vrta- 'willed' (like rtu-thA
'according tor/«-'); svapatyai for svapat[y<i]yai, dat.sing.f. of sv-apatyd- 'having
good offspring'; perhaps also yos, beside ydyos, gen. loc. du. of y d - 8 . Examples
of a vowel with following consonant being dropped are: ir\ad/i\adhyai, inf.
oiiradh- 'seek to win'; cak\an\anta, r[a//]a»/a, v[ari\anta'> •, perhaps sad[as]as-pati-
beside sddasas-pati- 'lord of the seat' 10 .
a. T h e final syllable of the first member of a compound is sometimes dropped
in this way; thus se\va\-v3ra- 'treasury'; ¿¿\va\vrdha- 'dear'; madugha- (AV.),

1 Perhaps s/oka- 'drop', may stand f o r
*skold-, from iatt- 'drip-, under the influence
of stuki- 'tuft'.
1 Cp. WACKERNAGEL 1, 212 b, note, and
239 b .
3 T h e s e forms are not resolved in the
Pada text, i. e. they are treated as if they
did not contain the verbal prefix d.
4 RPr. XVIII. 1 7 ; VPr. 1, 99.
5 T h o u g h known to K i t y S y a n a and Patan-
jali as w e l l as to the PratUakhyas, akfara-
as the designation of syllable is not found
in Psnini.
6 See TPr. x x i . 7, 9. O n the division of
syllables cp. further RPr. I. 1 5 ; VPr. 1. ioofT.;
APr. 1. 55 ff.; T P r . x x i . I ff.; and WHITNEY
on TPr. XXL 5.
7 Cp. BARTHOLOMAE, K Z . 29, 527, 562.
8 Cp., however, ett-os for ena-yos.
9 See K Z . 20, 70 f.
« See BLOOMFIELD, J A O S . 16, XXXV.
 I I . E U P H O N I C COMBINATION ( S A N D H I ) .

N. of a plant yielding honey, beside madhu-ditgha- 'shedding sweetness';

sas\j>a]-p!njara- (VS.) 'tawny like young grass' 1 .
2.The second syllable is dropped in the datives pdumsyä[ya\, ratnadhfyl\ya\
saMyti[ya], and abhikhyä beside abhikhyäya-, also in vrkdt\at\i- 'destruction',
beside vrkdtut- and devd-tati-\ and at the beginning of the second member of
a compound in sirsa-[sa]kti- (AV.) 'headache' 2 .
a. A following syllable is sometimes dropped in spite of a different one
intervening; thus in the dative maryadä[ya] 'boundary'; and somewhat
peculiarly in <ivariv[ar\ur, 3. pi. impf, beside the 3. sing, d varlvar and 3, sing,
pres. <i varTvarti.

II. EUPHONIC COMBINATION (SANDHI).

BENFEY, V o l l s t ä n d i g e G r a m m a t i k p. 2 1 — 7 0 . — WHITNEY, S a n s k r i t G r a m m a r p. 3 4 —
87. — WACKERNAGEL, A l t i n d i s c h e G r a m m a t i k 1, 3 0 1 — 3 4 3 . — ARNOLD, V e d i c M e t r e
p. 70—80.
65. T h e nature of Vedic Sandhi.—The sentence is naturally the
unit of speech which forms an unbroken chain of syllables euphonically
combined. It is, however, strictly so only in the prose portion of the AV.3
and the prose Mantras of the Y V . As the great bulk of the Vedas is
metrical, the R V . and the SV. being entirely so, the editors of the Sarnhitä
text treat the hemistich (consisting generally of two Pädas or verses) 4 as the
euphonic unit, applying the rules of Sandhi with special stringency between
the Pädas or metrical units which form the hemistich. The evidence of
metre, however, shows that, in the original form of the text, Sandhi at the
end of an internal Päda is all but unknown 5 . The verse, therefore, is the
true euphonic unit 6 . The final of a word appears either at the end of this
unit in pausä (avasäne)7, or within it as modified by contact with a following
initial. The form which the final of a word assumes in pausä, being regarded
as the normal ending, is generally the basis of the modification appearing
within the verse. It will therefore conduce to clearness if the rules relating
to absolute finals are first stated.
66. Finals in pausä. — a. V o w e l s 8 in this position undergo no change
other than occasional nasalization.
1. In all the Samhitäs a t u'> are frequently nasalized when prolated;
e. g. vindatUm \ — vindati (x. 146'); babhüvmm | = babhüva ( A V . x. 2 S8 );
vivesäim I = viresa (VS. xxm. 49); mamaim ] = tnamd (TS. vir. 4 20 ).
2. In the Sarphitä text of the R V . there survive, at the end of a verse
within a hemistich, from the period when such end also was accounted a
pause, several instances of n a s a l i z e d a, preserved to avoid hiatus and con-

1 T h i s e x p l a n a t i o n is doubtful in uloka•; s T h e only p r o b a b l e e x c e p t i o n is R V . i x .

for u\lu\bka- (cp. BRUGMANN, G r u n d r i s s 1, 1 1 3 , 7 c d ; cp. ARNOLD, V e d i c M e t r e 1 1 9 .
624, p. 471); sitsmaya- (TS.) for htsma- 6 The sentence within a Päd a, as well as
maya-\ bhtmali- ( V S . ) 'terrible', f o r bhlma- the P ä d a itself, is the unit o f a c c e n t ; cp.
mala•; i m p r o b a b l e in mjänäs f o r ru/änä-näs, b e l o w , 83.
'with b r o k e n n o s e ' (BLOOMFIELD, J A O S . 16, 7 Cp. R P r . L 3 ; v i . 5 ; x . 5 ; XI. 30.
xxxiv). 8 Final r n e v e r occurs in the R V . , its
2 C p . WHITNEY, T r a n s l a t i o n of A V . 1 , 1 2 3 . p l a c e b e i n g supplied b y 10 as n o m . a c c . s. n.
3 S e e BLOOMFIELD, T h e A t h a r v a v e d a , in e. g . sthiiur ' s t a n d i n g ' (cp. WACKERNAGEL,
this E n c y c l o p e d i a , S I (beginning) and n o t e K Z . 25, 287 f.); but the T S . a l r e a d y h a s
4 In t h e G ä y a t r l m e t r e , in w h i c h there janayitf and bhar/f (B?), WACKERNAGEL I,
are three P ä d a s , t h e third a l o n e constitutes 1 259 a, note.
the s e c o n d h e m i s t i c h ; in the P a n k t i , w h i c h 9 T h e v o w e l s / a n d », w h e n dual termina-
h a s five P ä d a s , the last three constitute the ; tions ( p r a g f h y a ) , c a n n o t b e n a s a l i z e d ,
second hemistich.
6o I . ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4. VEDIC GRAMMAR.

traction. Thus à appears as am before e and 0; e. g. ghanénantèkas ( 1. 334);

à appears am before e 0 r ; e. g. yaiVrnaincay? (v. 3 0 1 4 ) ; while the prepositions
ti 'near', and sdca 'together', are nasalized before any vowel; e. g. sdcàm'udyan.
The vowel a once appears as am before r in vipanydmWtasya (iv. i " ) ,
following the regular rule that unnasalized S is shortened before r in the R V .
b. Consonants are liable to change of mode of articulation and, to
some extent, of place of articulation.
1. Final mutes, whether tenuis, media, or aspirate, are without distinction
represented b y the corresponding tenuis; e. g. durili (111.59 3 ) = dnnid 'from
a f a r ' ; usar-bhùt (1. 6 5 s ) = usar-bud/i ' w a k i n g at dawn'.
2. The palatals c and j revert to the original guttural, becoming k\
thus aridi (1. n 8 J ) = arvàc ' c o m i n g hither'; su-yùk = su-yùj 'well yoked'.
The old palatal _/, however, b e c o m e s / , e.g. rrit ( 1. i 2 i J ) , m. f.'king','queen',
•= raj; in rtink, however, it becomes the guttural, = rtvij 'priest' (from yaj-
'sacrifice') 5 .
3 . The ritual exclamations vasal (x. 1 1 5 9 ) and srdusat (1. 139*), which
are probably modified forms of the 3. sing. aor. subj. of vah- 'carry', and s'ru-
'hear' 4 , have t f o r t owing to the analogy of the exclamations vàt (VS.), vdt
(TS.), 3. sing. aor. of YvaA-*.
4. The n a s a l s occurring as finals, rì, n, m 6 , remain u n c h a n g e d . Of
these, n and m are very common; but ti is found very rarely and only
secondarily after the loss of a following k (representing an original palatal;
e. g. pràn f o r *pr<mk, f r o m prdiu-). P r o b a b l y n o i n s t a n c e o f final n c a n be
found in Vedic Mantras. The palatal n never occurs, since final palatals
become guttural (b, 2).
a. Jn the rare instances in which a radical m becomes final after
dropping a following -t or -s, it appears as n owing to the influence of the
dental; thus dan (= *dam-s) ' o f the h o u s e ' (dam-)7; a-kran (= *d-kram-t),
3 . sing. a o r . o f krarn- ' s t r i d e ' ; d-gan (= *a-gam-s, *a-gam-t), 2. 3 . sing, a o r . ,
a-jagan (= *ajagam t), 3 . sing, p l u p . , agatiTgan ( V S . ) , 3 . sing. intv. o f gam- ' g o ' ;
d-yàti ( = *a-yam-s t), 3 . sing. a o r . o f yam- 'reach'8.
5. The semivowels y v l*> do not occur as finals, r is represented by
Visarga; thus punar 'again', is written pi'ma/t10.
6. The sibilants and A are all changed when final.
a. The dental s, which is by far the commonest of final sibilants,
b e c o m e s V i s a r g a ; e. g . keti'ts is written kttuh (m. 6 i J ) .
p. The cerebral s, which is very rare as a final, becomes cerebral /
in sdì 'six', f o r sds; -dvi't 'hating', for -dv/s; vi-prùt (AV.) 'sprinkling',

1
T h e ritual interjection dm (VS.) may be I 7 In the K. also occurs the form a-nan
due to the nasalization of an original 0 \ = *-nSm-s-t, f r o m nam- ' b e n d ' . T h e SB.
prolated (cp. RPr. XV. 3). T h u s t h e JUB. | has prasau 'painless', = *pra-!am-s.
I. 24. 3 ff., mentions the pronunciations 0 as 8 See 46 d,
well as om, both of which it rejects in favour | 9 Final / is spoken of as occurring rarely
of om. 1 (WACKERNAGEL I, 260 c \ or as very rare
1
Cp. RPr. 1. 1 3 ; WHITNEY on APr. 1.43 | (WHITNEY 144), but I have been unable
3 Cp. WACKERNAGEL I, 149 a a. ¡ t o find a single example in the Vedas (or
* Cp. above 42 c (p. 34). ] even in post-Vedic Sanskrit). But though no
5 Loc. cit. etymologically final / seems to occur either
6
Final m is often incorrectly written as { i n pausa or in S a n d h i , it is found as a sub-
AnusvSra in Mss. (as conversely in Prakrit stitu'.e for d in two or three words in the
Mss. m is often written as m under Sanskrit \ later Samhitis (see above 52 d, p. 45).
10
influence: cp.PlscHEL.Crammatik d e r P r a k r i t - W h e n h s t a n d s for etymological r, this
Sprachen, in this Encyclopedia, 339, 348), j is indicated b y an a d d e d iti in t h e Pada-
and their example is sometimes followed in ! p a t h a ; e. g. punar iti (x. 8518).
printed editions.
 I I . EUPHONIC COMBINATION. FINALS. RULES OF SANDHI. 61

for vi-prus. These are the only examples occurring in the RV. and AV. In
the only two examples in which s occurs in the RV. as a final in the com-
pound form ks, it is dropped: anak 'eyeless', from an-dks-\ a-myak, 3. sing. aor.
of myaks- 'be situated'(?).
y. The palatal s becomes either k or t'; e. g. -drk for drs- (m. 6 i ' ) ;
vipst, N. of a river, for vipis'-.
8. According as it is guttural or palatal in origin, A become k or t\
thus a-dhok, 3. sing. impf. of duh- 'milk'; but a-vdt, 3. sing. aor. of vah- 'carry'.
c. T h ° rule is, that only a single consonant may be final. Hence all
but the first of a group of consonants are dropped; e. g. abhavati for
*abhavant; tdrt for *tiins\ tuddn for tudants-, prah for *prdnks (= *prdries);
acchUn for *achantst, 3. sing. aor. of chand- 'be pleasing'.
a. k t or /, when they follow an r and belong to the root, are allowed to r e m a i n ;
e. g. vark, 2. 3. sing. aor. of vfj- 'bend'; urk,(VS ), nom. o f urj- 'strength'; a-mirf, 3. sing,
impf. o f mrj- 'wipe'; a-vart, 3. sing, aor of vrt- 'turn'; suhart (AV.), nom. o f suhard-
•friend'. T h e only instance o f a suffix remaining after r is dar-l, 3 sing. aor. o f df-
'cleave', used also for 2. sing, beside a-dah = a-dar (for *a-dars).
ft. Some half-dozen instances have been noted, in the Sarphitls, in which a suffixal
$ or t seems to have been retained instead o f the preceding consonant; but they are
probably all to be explained as due to analogical influence. They a r e :
1. the nominatives sadha-mas (beside sadha-mad) 'companion of the feast'; ava-yas
'sacrificial share', and puro-dhs (acc. furoiasam) 'sacrificial cake'. Sadha-mas may b e due
to the influence of nom. with phonetic s like -mSs 'moon', beside inst. pi. mid-bhis
(44 a 3). Ava-yas, in the only passage in which it occurs in the RV., has to be read as
quadrisyllable (also in AV.), i. e. as ava-yajah, and is probably to be explained as a con-
traction which retains the living -x of the nom. (and not the prehistoric s o f *-yaj-s).
Puro-Jds (from dai- 'worship'), occurring only twice in the RV., may lie due to the in-
fluence of a frequent nom. like dravino-d'ts 'wealth-giver'. That the prehistoric nom. -s
should in these three forms have survived in the linguistic consciousness o f the Vedic
poets, and as such have ousted the preceding consonant, which in all other analogous
nominatives alone remains, is hardly conceivable'. T h e only reasonable explanation is
to assume the analogical influence of the nom. -s which was in living use after
vowels.
a. T h e four verbal preterite forms {a-yas (for *a-ylj-s) beside a-yaf, 2. sing. aor. o f yaj-
'sacrifice'; sras (AV.) = *a-sraj-s, 2. sing. aor. of irfj- 'emit'; a-bhanas (AV.) = *a-bhanak-s,
2. sing. impf. of bhanj- 'break'; and a-srat (VS.) = *a-sras-/, 3. sing. aor. of sras- 'fall')
are the beginnings of the tendency (of which there are several other examples
in the Br&hma^asp, to normalize the terminations, so as to have -s in 2. sing, and - / i n
3. sing. This tendency is extended in the RV. from the s and I of 2. 3. sing, even to I. sing,
in the forms a-kramim (beside a-kramifam) owing to a-kram-ts, a-kram-it\ and vam (for
iar-am) owing to 2. sing. vah. (for var), aor. of vf- 'cover'.
67. R u l e s of Sandhi.—The body of euphonic rules by which final
consonants are assimilated to following initials and hiatus is avoided between
final and initial vowels is called Sandhi in the Pratisakhyas4. The editors of
the Sarphita of the RV. have greatly obscured the true condition of the text
with which they dealt by applying to it rules of euphonic combination which
did not prevail at the time when the text was composed. Thus though the
Sandhi between the verses of a hemistich is (excepting a few survivals from
the older form of the text)5 applied with greater stringency than elsewhere,
the metre clearly shows that the end of the first verse of a hemistich con-
stitutes a pause as much as the end of the last. Within the verse, moreover,
Sandhi is, according to metrical evidence, not applied where the caesura
occurs; na, when it means 'like' (as opposed to nd 'not'), is never contracted
with any following vowel, nor (id 'then' with a preceding a6; t and u before

I Cp. 4 3 a. j 1 RPr. 11. 2. 7. 1 3 ; VII. 1; VPr. I I L 2;

' C p . W H I T N E Y 1 4 6 a ; BI.OOMFIELD, A J P . | A P r . l v . 4 1 4 .
3, 28 fr.; B A R T H O L O M A E , K Z . 29, 578 fr. I 5 E . g. matitfa \ agnih (1. 70').
3 Cp. WHITNEY 5 5 5 a. | 6 In these instances there is a pause in
62 I. ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4. VEDIC GRAMMAR.

dissimilar initial vowels are hardly ever changed to the corresponding semi-
vowels', and often remain uncontracted even before similar vowels 2 ; the
elision of a after e o is rare 3 ; contraction is commonly avoided by the final
vowel of monosyllabic words, and by an initial vowel followed by conjunct
consonants 4 . Nevertheless, it may be said in a general way that the poets
of the RV. show a tendency to avoid the meeting of vowels5. The divergences
between the apparent and the real Sandhi which appear in the RV., decrease
in the later Vedas, while the application of particular rules of Sandhi becomes
more uniform 6 .
a. External Sandhi, or that which applies between words in the sentence,
is to a considerable extent identical with internal Sandhi, or that which applies
within words. The most striking difference is, that in the latter consonants
remain unchanged before verbal and nominal terminations beginning with
vowels, semivowels, or nasals 7 . External Sandhi is on the whole followed in
the formation of compounds, the divergences from it in the latter being
merely survivals of an earlier stage of external Sandhi due to the closer
connexion between members of a compound that renders them less liable
than separate words to be affected by modifications of phonetic laws.
External Sandhi is to a considerable extent affected by the law of finals
in pausa. Under that influence it avoids final aspirates and palatals. There
are, however, in the treatment of final n r, and s, certain survivals which do
not agree with the corresponding forms in pausa.
b. There are certain duplicate forms which were originally doe to
divergent euphonic conditions. Thus the tendency was to employ the dual
ending a before consonants, but au before vowels. Similarly, the word sddx
'always', was used before consonants, but sddam before vowels8.
68. Lengthening of final vowels.—Final vowels as a rule remain
unchanged before consonants. But a i u are very frequently lengthened 9
before a single initial consonant 10 both in the metrical portion of the Sarphitas
and in the prose formulas of the Yajurveda; e. g. srudhi havarn 'hear (our)
call'. This practice includes examples in which the consonant is followed by
a written y or v, to be pronounced, however, as i or u; e. g. ddhil hy agne
(iv. io 2 a ) - ddha hi agne-, abhi sv arya/i (x. 59^) = abhi su aryah. The
lengthening here appears to have arisen from an ancient rhythmic tendency
of the language to pronounce long, between two short syllables, a final short
vowel which was liable to be lengthened elsewhere as well"; this tendency
being utilized by the poets of the Samhitas where metrical exigencies required
a long syllable. Thus ddha 'then', appears as ddha when a short syllable
follows. Similarly tu 'but' generally becomes t/i before a short syllable; and
su 'well' nearly always becomes sd between short syllables12.

the sense; cp. OLDENBERG, Prolegomena 443, 8 C p . WACKERNAGEL I, 3 0 9 , bottom.

n o t e 2 ; ARNOLD 1 2 2 . 9 T h e Padapatha in these instances regu-
!
« ARNOLD 1 2 5 . larly gives the original unlengthened vowel.
10
* Op. cit. 124. Except in compounds, this lengthening
3 Op. cit. 127. disappears in the later language; there are,
4 Thus mapsavah (iv. 4" d ) must be read however, several survivals in the Brahmanas;
ma apsavah, but maduvah (for ma aduvah) see AUFRECHT, Aitareya Brahma$a 427; and
remains (ibid.). c p . WACKERNAGEL I, 2 6 4 b .
11
5 C p . OLDENBERG 4 3 4 f. This tendency survived in the post-
6
C p . BARTHOLOMAE in K Z . 29, 3 7 , Vedic language in compounds, in words
P- S ' l f - (which followed the analogy of compounds)
7 Thus sakal, a-saknuvan, salra-, sakvati- before suffixes beginning with consonants,
(from sat- ' b e able'), in all which forms g and in reduplicative syllables.
would be required by external Sandhi. « C p . WACKERNAGEL 1, 2 6 6 b .
 IL EUPHONIC COMBINATION. VOWELS. 63

a. The short vowel regularly remains unchanged at the end of a verse 1

(even within a hemistich); and often before the caesura of a Tri${ubh or
JagatI Pada (even in terminations otherwise liable to be lengthened)
b. The final vowel is not lengthened in 1 . vocatives (except vrsabha
,s
VIII. 4 5 J 8 , and hariyojana. 1. 6 i ) ; 2. datives in -ay a; 3 . nom.plur. neuter in-»;
4. verbal forms ending in -i and -u (excepting imperatives in -dhi and the
3.sing, rdksati n. 26') J; 5. the prepositions ¿ / a 4 and apa (except apa vrdhi
VII. 27').
c. In some instances final vowels appear to be lengthened before
vowels 5 or two consonants 6 .
69. Contraction of similar vowels. — When a final a i or is
followed by corresponding initial a i or u, contraction resulting in the long
form of the respective vowel regularly takes place; e. g. ihdsti = iha asti;
indrA = Indra A; tvagne — tvd agne-, vidam (vi. 9q) = vi iddm;
a. The contraction of 3 + a and of u + u occasionally does not take
place even in the written text of the R V . both at the end of and within a
Pada; thus manisA | agnih (1.70 1 ); manTsA abhi ( 1 . 1 0 1 7 ) ; pasA dsurah (v.51"),
pasii abhi- (vi. 50 s ), pttsd avistu (x. 2 6 l d ) ; villi utd (1. 39'); su ardhvd(h)
(vi. 24®); su Qtibhih (1. i i 2 , - J 3 ) ; the compound sutttayah (vm. 4 7 , — l 8 ) 8 .
b. On the other hand, in many instances where the contraction is written,
the original vowels have to be restored in pronunciation with hiatus9. The restored
initial in these instances is long by nature or position, and the preceding final if
long must be shortened in pronunciation IO ; e. g. cSsat (1. 2 7 J) ca asAt\ cHrcata
(1. 1 5 5 ' ) = ca areata; mapih = ma apJh; mipsavah = ma. apsavah; mrlattdj-ie
(iv. 5 7 1 ) = mrlati Jdf-s'e; ydntindavah (iv.47 2 ) = ydnti indavah; bhavantuksanah
(vi. 16 4 7 ) — bhavantu uksdnah. After monosyllables, the hiatus is regular in the
case of the written contractions T and B, especially when the monosyllables are
vi and hi\ e . g . vXndra (x. 32*) = vi indra; filndra (1. 1 0 2 5 ) hi indra11.
c. Duals in a / u are regularly uncombined. Such 1 and u are usually
written with hiatus in the Samhita text; the dual 3 always appears before u'2,
but at the end of internal Padas invariably coalesces in the written text.
70. Contraction of a with dissimilar v o w e l s . — 1 . When final a is
followed by t u, contraction takes place resulting in < i ' l respectively; e . g .
pith'a = pitd iva; ¿m = <i Tm; ebhA = A tibhd. When a is followed by r,
contraction is never written in the R V . and VS. ' 4 , but the metre shows that
the combination is sometimes pronounced as ar, as is the case in the compound
saptarsdyah. 'the seven seers" 5 .

1 A p p a r e n t exceptions are due to e r r o n e o u s | 8 Cp. BENFEY, S V . XXXIIF.; ROTH, Litte-

metrical division of Pädas by the e d i t o r s o f ; ratur 67 f.
the S a m h i t i s , o r to mechanical repetition of j 9 na 'like', is n e v e r c o m b i n e d in pro-
formulas originally used in a different posi- nunciation, see a b o v e 67; cp. ARNOLD 1 2 0 .
tion in the v e r s e . Thus srudhl | havam (1. 2 5 ' 9 ) J 1 0 L o n g v o w e l s being regularly shortened

appears in imitation of srudhi havam w h i c h j b e f o r e v o w e l s ; see OLDENBERG 465 f.

is frequent at the beginning of a v e r s e I 1 1 Cp. ARNOLD 124.
(IL 1 I I , etc.). Cp. OLDENBERG 42OF. | 1 2 Op. cit. 120. B e f o r e o t h e r v o w e l s , äv,
2 S e e ZUBATY, D e r Quantitätswechsel im the Sandhi form of an, the a l t e r n a t i v e dual
Auslaute v e d i « c h c r W ö r t e r , V i e n n a O r . ending, appears.
J o u r n a l 2, 3 1 5 . * J Because the long m o n o p h t h o n g s e and 0
3 S e e ZUBATY, op. cit. 3 , 89. represent IE. äi and äu.
4 S e e OLDENBERG 399. *4 T h e M S . d o e s not contract either, but
s Op. cit. 60. on the c o n t r a r y o f t e n lengthens ä to <J, e v e n
6 Cp. WACKERNAGEL L 265 b, note. w h e r e the m e t r e requires c o n t r a c t i o n . Cp.
7 T h e r e is no e x a m p l e of contracted f in t h e WACKERNAGEL 1, 267 a a, note.
Samhitäs, as f f n e v e r m e e t ; and in t h e R V . •5 S e e GRASSMANN, W ö r t e r b u c h p. v u .
final f n e v e r occurs (cp. a b o v e , p. 59, n o t e 8 ).
64

a. In the RV. a-\-i is once contracted to ai- in praisayur (i. 120 5 ) = pro isayuh (Pp.) 1 ;
in the SV. 5 + / is once contracted to ai- in aindra = a indra (1. 2. I. 45); and in t h e
AV. and VS. the preposition a contracts with f to ar in arti- — d-fti- 'suffering', and
archatu = a-rcchatuThe last three instances are perhaps survivals of an older con-
traction. That a is not otherwise contracted with 1 u r to ai au ar, is doubtless to b e
accounted for by the previous shortening of a in hiatus 3.
b. Occasionally a followed by i remains uncontracted in the written text of t h e
R V . ; t h u s jya iyam (VI. 753); piba imam (vm. 17'); rartaya iha (VIII. 3 4 " K When a
is followed by /-, it is either shortened5 or nasalized; e. g. tatha r-tuh for tatha r-;
tadam rtacid ( v . 39) = kada r-; vibhvam rbhur ( i v . 3 3 3 ) 6 = vibkua r-; vipanyaml \ rtasya
(IV. I ' * ) = vipanya. rtasya.
c. On the other hand, in many instances where the contraction e or 0 is written,
t h e original simple vowels must be restored with hiatus; e. g. indragni (I. Io84) = a
indragttJ-, subhagosak (L. 487) = subhaga usdA
2. Final a contracts with a following e or at to ai; and with 0 or au to au;
e. g. dibhih for a ebhih. But though the contraction is written, the original
vowels must sometimes be restored; e. g. disu (1. 6 1 1 6 ) must be read a esu.
a. Final a, instead of being contracted with e and o, is in a few instances elided
before those diphthongs; thus tatar' eved (VII. 333) = tatara rvrd; in' it ayah (x. 911) =
nrt etayah\ asvin ci'ct (VII. 99) = ah'inj \ evct\ ya/h'ohise ( v i l l . 53) \ nih 1 oh se\ up' csatH
= tipa esatu9. An example of a compound with this elision seems to be dasoni- 10 =
dasa-oni- 'having ten aids'.
b. Final S, instead of being contracted with e is, in a few instances, nasalized
before that diphthong; thus aminantam fvaih 1 ' (1. 7 9 f o r -a /-; sasadanam hi (I. 12 j 1 °)
f o r -a e \ upastham \ eta (I. 3 5 6 ) f o r -a e-.
3 . When a remains after a final ^ or i has been dropped, it does not
as a rule contract with the following vowel. Nevertheless such contraction is
not infrequent in the Samhitas. I11 some instances it is actually written; thus
sartavAjdu (ill. 3 2 s ) = Pp. sartavai ajau; vtisdu (v. 1 7 J j = Pp. vai asdu;
and the compound rd/esitam (vnr. 4 6 2 8 ) = Pp. rajah-isitam; in the later Sam-
hitas are f o u n d krtyeti ( A V . x . 1 '5) = Pp. krtyah iti; phopavasananam (VS.
xxi. 43) = Pp. pivah-upavasananatti 12.
In other instances the contraction, though not written, is required by the
metre; thus ta indra (vii. 2 i 9 j, Pp. te indra, must be read as tendra; prthivyA
antdriksat ( A V . i x . I 9 ) , P p . prthivyah, a s prthivydntarikslt'3; gostha upa (AV.
IX. 4 ^ ) , P p . gostht' upa, a s gosth ipa.
a. T h e r e appear to be several other instances of such written contraction, which
are however otherwise explained by the I'adapatha; thus rjyita (x. 93 10 ) -» raye utd,

1
Several instances of this contraction 6 vibhvam occurs thus three times; see
occur in B and later. LANMAN 5 2 9 .
2
The TS. extends this contraction to pre- 7 In opposition to the Mss. MAX MULLER,
p o s i t i o n s e n d i n g in a: uparchati, avarchati; ! RV 2 . reads vipanyam rtasya because SSyana
s e e W H I T N E Y , A P r . ill. 4 7 f., T P r . 111. 9F. appears to favour that reading.
In the post-Vedic language this contraction 1 See ARNOLD, Vedic Metre 123.
was^ extended to all prepositions ending 9 This is a precursor of the post-Vedic
in a. rule by which the 5 of a preposition before
3 Cp. BENFEY, G G A . 1846, p. 822. initial e and 0 of verbs (except eti etc. and
4 The Pp. e x p l a i n s piba and ranayi a s tdhale etc.) is elided.
imperatives (piba, ranaya)-, but the a here Though the AV. has pancaudana- =
may represent -as of the subjunctive (cp. pahca odana- t h e e l i s i o n o f a b e f o r e -odana-
WACKERNAGEL 1, p. 311 mid.). Occasionally often takes place in the Sutras and later.
5 remain uncontracted because the editors «' The old hiatus is here treated as it
regarded them as representing a i-e, or ah, as would be at the end of an internal Pida.
i n rania itya (VH. 3631jmayd alra (VLL. 3 9 3). C p . The TS. (ill. I, 115) retains the hiatus in
R P r . N. 2 8 f . ; B E N F E Y , S V . x x x f . ; WACKER- the same verse without nasalization; cp.
NAGEL 1, 2 6 7 a (3. OLDENBERG 4 6 9 FF.
5 See p. 63, note 1 0 ; J is shortened » S e e WACKERNAGEL I, 2 6 8 b.
before /• in the A B . ; see AUFRECHT'S ed. >3 In the Paippalsda recension this con-
427. traction is actually written.
 65
Pp. rayi uta; bhuntyopdri (x. 753) = bhumyah »pari, Pp. bhumya itpari'. In a few of
these the contraction must be removed as contrary to metre; thus Ufa yati (ill. 61 4 ),
Pp. ttsak yati, which means 'Dawn goes', should be read as usd a y i/t, as the sense
requires 'Dawn comes', and the metre requires an additional syllable; abhisfipdsi (11. 20 s ),
Pp. -pi asi, should be read as tibAisfipa(i) asi\ vrsabhfva (VI. 46*), Pp. vrsabhi ivaas
•¿•rsabkdh) iva.
b. In a very few instances a final m is dropped after a, which then combines with
a following vowel. This contraction is actually written in durgdhaitat (IV. 18») for
durgaham ctat (but Pp. diirgahi elai)i, and savanedam (TS. I. 4. 44 1 ) for savanam iddm
(Pp. sdvatii iddm). Occasionally this contraction though not written is required by the
metre; thus ristram iha (AV.) must be read rasfriha.
7 1 . F i n a l / a n d u b e f o r e d i s s i m i l a r v o w e l s . — i . T h e final vowels t
a n d » 4 before dissimilar initial vowels a n d b e f o r e diphthongs a r e in the
Samhitas r e g u l a r l y w r i t t e n a s / a n d respectively; e. g. praty ayam
(1. 1 i 6 ) = prdti ayam-, a tv ¿t3 (1. 5 ' ) = d tu ¿ta\ janitry ajljanat (x. 1 3 4 ' )
= janitrl ajljanat. T h e evidence of the metre, h o w e v e r , shows that this y
or v nearly always has the syllabic v a l u e of i or u6; e. g . vy usdh (i. 9 2 4 )
must be r e a d as vi usdh: vidathesv an/an (i. 92 s ) as vidathesu anjdn.
a. The final of disyllabic prepositions must, however, frequently be pronounced as
a semivowel, especially before augmented forms; e. g. adhydsthah (I. 49'); dnv acarifam
(I. 23'}); also dnv ihi (x. S 3 6 ) 7 .
b. In all the Samhitls the particle » following a consonant is written as v and
pronounced as u before a vowel; e. g. avid v indra (I. 28')8; but the long form of the
same particle occasionally remains unchanged in the RV. even after a consonant; e. g.
itd u ayam (VI. 7 1 s ) ; tam u atf-nvan (X. 88'°).
c. In RV. I—IX there are other instances of monosyllabic and disyllabic words at
the end of which y and v are pronounced; but the on'.y example of a trisyllabic word
in which this occurs is sevyatu in sfvyatv apah (11.32*). In RV. x there are a few further
examples; e . g . devfsv adhi (x. I2I 8 )9.
d. The semivowel is regular in the compounds rtv-ij-, givy-uti- >°, sv-aha, and sv-id
2. U n c h a n g e a b l e / a n d u. a . T h e d u a l i a n d U never change to
y or nor is the f o r m e r ever prosodically shortened, though the latter some-
times is; e. g. hdrl (y - ) rtasya; but ssdha (_ -) asmai (n. 2 7 ' s ) . T h e dual T m a y
remain even b e f o r e /; e . g . hari iva, harJ indra, aksi iva; but the contraction
is written in upad/iiva, pradhiva, dampativa, vispatlva, nrpativa ( A V . ) , rodaslme
(VII. 9 o J ) = rodasT imi 'these two worlds'. T h e r e are also several passages
in which the contraction, though not written, must b e r e a d " .
b. T h e rare l o c a t i v e s in t and S 1 3 (from stems in i a n d 0) are regularly
written unchanged in the Samhita text of the R V . , except vidy asydm (H.3 4 ),

i C p . WACKERNAGEL i , 2 6 8 a . iy and uv are sometimes written for i and u;

1
In instances in which contraction with e. g. suv-itd- — su-itd• 'accessible'; hence
iva seems to take place, the existence of a the pronunciation may have been<>'>KZ'; cp.
byform va has to be taken into consider- W A C K E R N A G E L I, 2 7 0 c , 2 7 1 a .
ation; cp. GRASSMANN, Wörteibuch, column 9 See ARNOLD, Vedic Metre 125.
10
2 2 1 j WACKERNAGEL I, 2 6 8 a , n o t e . If the analysis of BR., gavi-uli-, is correct;
1 C p . DELBRÜCK, V e r b u m 6 7 , e n d . the Pp. divides go- yuti-.
4 In the RV. f is never final, and I doubt " See ARNOLD, Vedic Metre 125.
whether any example can be quoted from " Cp. WACKERNAGEL I, 270 b, note. Here
the other Samhitas in which it is followed we have probably not contracted forms with
by an initial vowel. iva, but the dual I + va, the byform of iva.
5 The Sandhi which changes a vowel to >3 T h e vowels which regularly remain
the semivowel is called ksaipra 'gliding', unchanged are called pragyhya, 'separated',
in the PrätiSäkhyas; cp. RPr. II. 8 ; III. 7; by the native phoneiicians; see RPr. I. 16
VII. 5. etc.; VPr. I. 92 etc.; APr. I. 73 etc. They
6
The long vowel being regularly short- are indicated as such in the Pp. by an
e n e d ; c p . OLDENBERG 4 6 5 . appended iti. The particle u is indicated
7 WACKERNAGEL I, 2 7 1 b ; OLDENBERG 4 3 8 , as pragrhya in the Pp..of RV. and AV. by
note, ZDMG. 44, 326 note; ARNOLD, Vedic its nasalized form um (nasalization being
Metre 125. employed to avoid hiatus: see above 66, I).
8
The TS. has uv for v. Elsewhere also
Indo-arische Philologie. I. 4.
66

where, however, the vowel must be pronounced (_ « — ) . T h e vowels here

(unlike the dual I) seem always to be treated as prosodically short".
c. T h e final ; of other cases also occasionally remains unchanged;
thus the nominatives prthivi, prthujrayi, samriijni and the instrumental susdtnT
sometimes retain their z, and the inst. Uti frequently does so 2 .
72. Final e and 0 . — r . a. Before a. T h e diphthongs e and 0 remain
unchanged before an initial a. This a is often not written in the Samhitas
being dropped in about three-fourths of its occurrences in the R V . and in about
two-thirds in the A Y . 4 ; but the evidence of metre shows that, in 99 instances
out of 100 in the R V . , and in about 80 in the A V . and the metrical parts of
the Y V . , it is, whether written or not, to be read, and at the same time
shortens the preceding diphthong to i or 1/5. In vlsve devdso apturah (1. 3 s )
the a is both written and pronounced; in sunavd | 'gne (1. i«) it must be
restored: sutiave | dgne6. T h e exceptional treatment of e in stotava ambyam
(viii. 72 s ), for stotave ambyam, indicates that the Sandhi of e and o before a
was originally the same as before other vowels 7 . But their unchanged form,
as before consonants, gained the day, because the short close a, when coming
immediately after them in their character of monophthongs, would have a
natural tendency to disappear and thus leave a consonant to follow.
b. Before other v o w e l s . T h e diphthongs e and 0 before any vowels
but a would naturally b e c o m e ay and av, as being originally = ai and du,
and as having the form of ay and av within a word. But ay regularly drops
the y; e. g. agna iha. (1. 22 1 0 ); av on the other hand generally retains the v,
dropping it before ¿ 8 ; e. g. vdyav a yahi (1. 2 1 ) ; but v/iya ukthibhir (1. 2 2 ).
2. U n c h a n g e a b l e e. a. T h e e of the dual nom. acc. f. n. of a-stems,
e. g. ubhe 'both', is regularly uncontracted (pragrhya), because it consists ol
a + the dual
b. Under the influence of this nominal dual <?, the verbal dual e10 of
the 2. 3. present and perfect middle, e. g. vahethc 'ye two bring', bruvate
'they two speak', ai-athe 'ye two have obtained', c o m e to be uncontractable,
though the e is nearly always prosodically shortened; e. g. yutijathe apah,
( 1 . 1 5 1 4 ) ; but parimamnathl asm/in ( V I I . 93 0 ).
c. T h e e of the locative tvJ 'in thee', is uncontractable. Under its
influence the other pronominal forms asme 'us', and yusmi 'you', are also
always treated as pragrhya by the Samhita as well as the Padapatha; it is,

1 Cp. O L D E N B E R G 456, note; WACKER- 8 There are a few survivals of aj-; e. g.

NAC.EL 1, 2 7 0 b . tay d (MS. I. 1') = id a (TS.); cp. TPr. X.
* Cp. op. cit. 1, 270 b, note. Such forms, 2 3 ; O L D E N B E R G 4 4 7 ff. In the MS., t h e K.,
in which the absence of contraction is only and Mantras occurring in the M&navasatras,
occasional, are not indicated by iti in unaccented a for e before an accented initial
the Pp. vowel is lengthened; e. g. it dadha iti.
J This form of Sandhi is in the Prati- 9 See above 71, 2. A dual e once
iikhyas called ahhinihi/a 'elided'; RPr. II. appears contracted in dhisnyemi (vii. 72^),
13 etc.; VPr. I. 114, 125; APr. ill. 54; TPr. which, however, should probably be read
11. 8. uncontracted as dhistiye ¡mi. The -cva which
4 S e e W H I T N E V 135 c. occurs several times (1. 1864 etc.) and looks
5 C p . OLDENBERG 4 3 5 f., 4 5 3 FF., Z D M G . like a contraction of the dual e with iva, in
4 4 . 331 if.; WACKERNAGEL I, p. 324. reality probably stands for the dual e + va,
6
The few instances (70 out of 4500) of t h e b y f o r m of iva; c p . WACKERNAGEL I, p . 317,
the elision of a in the RV. are the fore- I note, top.
10
runners of the invariable practice of post- There was originally no difference be-
Vedic Sandhi. tween this dual t and any other e in middle
7 Internally the original Sandhi of the forms, such as that of the dual -vaht, the
compound gi-agra- must have been gav-agra-; singular -te, and the plural -ante.
c p . WACKERNAGEL 1, p . 325, n o t e .
 67

however, doubtful whether they were so treated in the original text of

the R V . ' .
3. Unchangeable 0. a. When o is the result of combining the final a
o f particles w i t h « (which itself is often unchangeable) 1 , it is pragrhya; thus
0 (= d u), dtho (= dtha u), uto (= uta u), mo (= md u).
b. Following this analogy, the v o c a t i v e in 0 of «-stems is sometimes
treated as pragrhya in the Samhita of the T S . ; e. g. pito d (TS. v. 7.2 4 ). It is
regularly so treated in the Padapafhas of the R V . , A V . , VS., T S . (but not SV.).
T h u s in vdyav d (1. 2'), vdya ukthebhir (1. 2 2 ), vdyo tdva (1. 2 J ) the vocative
is equally given in the Padapafha as vdyo iti.
73. T h e d i p h t h o n g s ai and au. — T h e diphthongs ai and au are treated
throughout in the same way as e and 0 before vowels other than a. T h u s
ai is regularly written a (having d r o p p e d the y of ay); e . g . tasma aksi
(r. 1 1 6 1 6 ) ; tasma indraya (1. 4 9 ). O n the other hand, au is generally written
av, but always a before u in the R V . and V S . ; e . g . tdv d (1. 2 s ) ; tdv
indragni (1.108J); but sujihvd upa (1. 13 8 ). In the A V . a appears before u
in pdda ucyete ( A V . x i x . 6 s ). In the MS. a appears before other vowels also
74. Euphonic combination of consonants. — T h e Sandhi of final
consonants, generally speaking, starts from the form which they assume in
pausa. T h u s an aspirate first loses its aspiration; the palatal c becomes k;
j s h b e c o m e ¿ o r t*; and of a group of consonants the first alone remains.
Final n is, however, to a great extent differently treated from what it is in
pausa; and the Sandhi of s and r is, for the most part, based not on h,
their form in pausa, but on the original letter.
A final consonant is assimilated 5 in quality 6 to the following initial,
becoming voiceless before a voiceless consonant, and voiced before a v o i c e d
s o u n d 7 ; e. g. tat satyam (1. i ' ) for tad; yat tvd (1. 15 1 0 ) foryad; havyavdd
juhvhsyah (1. 12 6 ), through -vdt for -vdh; gamad vdjebhih (1. 5-5) for gdmat;
arvdg rddhah (1. 9 s ) for arvdc through arvik.
a. A final media before a nasal may become the nasal of its own class. There
seems to be no certain instance of this in the RV.; cakran na (x. 95"- "3), however,
probably stands for cakrat na, though the Pp. has cakran nd. This assimilation is regular
in some compounds; e. g. san-navati- '96* for sdt-navati-. From here it penetrated into
internal Sandhi; e. g. san-n&m.
b. Assimilation not only in quality, but also largely in the place of articulation
occurs in the Sandhi of final m, of the final dentals 8 Ins, and of final r (under the
influence of J-).
75. Euphonic combination of final m. — i. Before vowels, final m
remains unchanged; e. g. agnlm Tie (1. 1'). In a very few instances, however,
the m is dropped, and the vowels then contract. This Sandhi is mostly
indicated b y the metre only: it is v e r y rarely written 9 , as in durgahaitdt

1 C p . OLDENBERG 455, n o t e . 7 Some scholars think that the 3. sing, imp v.,
* Cp. above 71, 1 b. e. g. bhdvatu represents bhavat« for original
3 SeeGARBE, G G A . 1882, 117 f.; WACKER- bhavad u, the t being retained owing to the
NACEL I , 2 7 4 ; O L D E N B E R G , Z D M G . 6 0 , 7 5 5 influence of the innumerable forms of the
—758 (Duale auf -a und -au). 3. sing, with -t, -ti, -te, etc. (cp. WACKER-
4 Some compounds, however, preserve NAGEL I, 276 b); but this is doubtful; DEL-
survivals of an earlier phase of Sandhi; e . g . BRÜCK, Altindische Syntax 517 fr., thinks it
vii-pali- 'lord of the house'; vispali- N., not may originally have been bhdva+ttt(particle);
vtt-; nabh-raj- (MS.)'cloud-king', not nai-raj-. cp. IF. 18, 71.
C p . L . v . SCHROEDER, e d . o f M S . I , p . X V I . II 8 An example of a final guttural becoming
5 Final t before vowels becomes / in the a dental before a dental occurs in TS. I.
RV., not d as later; e. g. bdl itthi, for bat. 2. 7 1 , where samydt te stands for samydi te.
6 Within a word a voiced consonant is There are a few other examples in B. passages
not necessary before vowels, semivowels, o f t h e T S . ; s e e W A C K E R N A G E L I, 2 7 7 b .
and nasals. 9 See above 70, 3 b.
5*
68 I. ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4. VEDIC GRAMMAR.

(IV. I8 J ) for durgdham etat, and it is never analysed by the Padapafha in

this way. It may perhaps have started from the analogy of the doublet
t'tbhya beside tubhyam 'to thee' 1 .
2. Before mutes, final m is regularly a s s i m i l a t e d b e c o m i n g the
corresponding nasal, and before n similarly becoming n. T h e Mss. and
printed texts, however, represent this assimilated m by the Anusvara sign;
e. g. bhadrdm karisyasi (1. I 6 ) f o r bhadrdh karisydsi\ bhadrdm no ( x . 2 0 1 ) for
bhadran no. This actual change of m to 11 before dentals led to some errors
in the P a d a text; e. g. ydn ni-pdsi (iv. n 6 ) , analysed as ydt instead of yam-,
avi-venan tdm ( i v . 2 4 6 ) , a n a l y s e d a s avi-venan i n s t e a d o f dvi-venam ( c p . iv. 2 5 3).
3. B e f o r e r S s s and h\ final m becomes Anusvara (/«); e. g. hotaram
ratnadhstamam (1. 1 ' ) ; vardhamanam svJ (1. 1 9 ) ; mitram huve (1. 21). From
its original use before sibilants and h, Anusvara came to be employed b e f o r e
the semivowel a l s o 4 . A compound like sam-rdf- 'overlord' shows that m
originally remained unchanged in Sandhi before r. .
4. Before / / v, final m is assimilated as nasalized y I v. T h e TPr.' J ,
however, allows Anusvara beside these, while the APr. even requires Anunasika
b e f o r e ^ and v, and the printed texts regularly use Anusvara; e. g. sdm yud/ti
(1. 8 3 ); yajhdm vastu (1. 30 10 ). Forms like yamydmana- 'extended' and apa-
mlukta- 'concealed' show that final m originally remained unchanged in Sandhi
before y and / 5 ; and forms like jaganviin, from gam- 'go', point to its having
at one time b e c o m e n before v in Sandhi.
76. Euphonic combination of final t. — 1. Before /, final t5 b e c o m e s
f u l l y a s s i m i l a t e d a s /; e. g. ahgal lornnah ( x . 1 6 3 6 ) f o r ai)gat lomnah.
1. Before palatals (including /j7 final t1 becomes palatal 8 ; e. g. tac
caksuh (VII. 6 6 ' 5 ) f o r tad cdksuh; rohic chyava (1. i o o 1 6 ) for roh.it sy&vd-, and
in a c o m p o u n d yataydj-jana- 'marshalling men', for yataydt-jana-.
77. Euphonic combination of final /». — 1. Before vowels. Final m 9 ,
a. if preceded by a short vowel, is d o u b l e d 1 0 ; e. g. ahann ahirn (11. 11 s ) for
ahan. T h e final n is here chiefly based on original ns or 111. T h o u g h it is
always written d o u b l e 1 1 , the evidence of metre shows that this rule was only
partially applied in the R V . I J .
b. If preceded by a long vowel, it becomes within a P a d a in the R V .
m a f t e r a ' 4 , b u t mr a f t e r T u f15; e. g. sdrgam iva, for sdrgan-, paridhiihr dti, f o r
paridhin-, abhisUmr iva, for abhisun; nfirir abhi, f o r nrn. This Sandhi was
c a u s e d by the n having originally been followed b y j 1 6 ; e . g . vj-kan originally

1 11
Cp. WACKERNAGEL I, 283 a, n o t e . F o r v a r i o u s e x p l a n a t i o n s of this d o u b l i n g ,
2
O p . c i t . 1, 283, b a. j s e e WACKERNAGEL I, 2 7 9 a ( p . 330).
12
3 O p . c i t . 1, 283 d . j C p . OLDENBERG 424 f., 4 2 9 FF.
4 In the post-Vedic language Anusvara ! 'J At the end of a Pada, -art -in -tin remain
came to be allowed before mutes and nasals | unchanged (as being in pausa) before a
also. vowel. For passages in which -an is un-
5 Cp. WACKERNAGEL I, 283 c. c h a n g e d within a Pada, see below and
6 1
R e p r e s e n t i n g th d dh also, if t h e y occur. OLDENBERG 428.
7 In the MS. t anomalously becomes «, i '4 In the MS. and K., -am is shortened
i n s t e a d o f c, b e f o r e s; s e e L . v . ScHROEDER, ! t o -ant; e. g . asmam asttolu f o r asman. Cp.
Z D M G . 3 3 , 1 8 5 ; e d . o f M S . 1, p . xxix. O n v . SCHROEDER, e d . o f t h e M S . 1, p . x x i x .
the aspiration of i in this Sandhi, see •5 fn becomes fmr only once (V. 54'5),
below 80 a. remaining unchanged elsewhere because two
® Final dentals never come into contact r sounds are avoided in the same syllable
with initial cerebrals in the Samhitas. (see below 79).
16
9 This rule applies to final guttural » For examples of this Sandhi applied to
a l s o ; e. g . kidftth i- ( x . IO83), c p . LANMAN n o m i n a t i v e s i n -an, s e e LANMAN 5 0 6 A ,
4 9 0 ; hihn akfttül (i. 1 Ö 4 2 8 ) f o r kin a-. n o t e (mahan), 5 1 2 (-vin), 5 1 4 {-yan\ 5 1 7
10 The compound vffan-asva• ' h a v i n g (•man); f o r a c c u s a t i v e s , 346.
stallions as steeds', forms an exception.
 69

"vrkans1; mahAn for *mah Ants; d-yan, 3.sing.aor. for *ii-yan-st (l. sing, a-yamsam) 2.
T h e n b e c a m e Anusvara (or Anunasika) before this s, which was treated in
exactly the same way as when it followed an unnasalized vowel (as becoming
a, but is, us, fs becoming tr, Br, fr).
a. The an of the 3. pi. subjunctive (originally im/\ however, remains unchanged
before vowels within a Pail a, obviously owing to the -/ which at one time followed.
There happen to be only five occurrences of this form under the conditions required:
d vahan asti (I. 84I8J; ghosan uttari (ILL. 33S); sphiirtn rjipyam (VI. 67"); gacchan id
(VIII. 795); gacehan uttara (X. 10">)3.
2. Before consonants. Final n remains unchanged before all gutturals
and labials (including m), as well as before v o i c e d dentals (including «). It
is, however, liable to be changed before the following sounds:
a. Before/», f i n a l « , when etymologically = ns, sometimes becomes »«>4;
thus nfmh pahi ( V I I I . 8 4 3 ) 4 ; nrmh pAtram (1. 1 2 1 1 ) .
b. B e f o r e all palatals that occur it b e c o m e s palatal it; e. g. Brdhvdn
cardthaya (1.36 1 4 ) for UrdhvAn-, tAh jusetham (v. 5 1 6 ) for/«'//; vajrin chnathihi
( 1. 63 s ) for vajrin snathihis; devAii chlokah (x. 12 s ) for devAn slokah.
Before c, however, the palatal sibilant is sometimes inserted 6 in the
R V . , the n then becoming Anusvara. This insertion occurs only w h e n the
sibilant is etymologically justified (that is, in the nom. sing, and acc. pi.
masc.) almost exclusively (though not invariably) before ca and cid; thus
anuyajAms ca (x. 51 8 ), amendms cid (v. 3 1 J ) 7 . In the other Samhitas the
inserted sibilant b e c o m e s commoner, occurring even where it is not etymo-
logically justified (that is, in the 3. pi. impf., and the voc. and loc. of n-
stems) 8 .
c. B e f o r e dental t9, final ft usually remains; but the dental sibilant is
sometimes inserted in the R V . , the ft then becoming Anusvara. This insertion,
however, occurs in the R V . only when it is etymologically justified; it is
commoner in the other S a m h i t a s w h e r e it appears even when not etymolog-
ically justified.
d. Before y r v h, final 11 as a rule remains u n c h a n g e d ; but -an, -in,
-un sometimes b e c o m e -am11, -Trnr, -amr, as before vowels; e . g . -annum
rayivrdha/i (vn. 91-5) for -annan\ dadvAm va (x. 132 J ) for dadvAn-, panimr
hatam (1. 184 2 ) for panin\ ddsyUthr yonau (1. 63.1) for ddsyun..
c . B e f o r e /, final n always becomes nasalized Il2; e.g. jigivAllaksam(11.12*).
f. Before the dental sibilant, final n remains; but a transitional t'3
may be inserted; e. g. ahant sdhasa (1. 80 10 ) 'he slew with might'; tAn tarn
may also be written tAnt sdrn'4. In the former example the t is organic;
from such survivals it spread to cases where it was not justified. A similar
insertion may take place before /; that is, vajrin snathihi may b e c o m e vajrin
snathihi or vajrin chnathihi (through vajritic snathihi for vajrint snathihi) *5.

• Cp. Cretic Xwiovi. post-Vedic language a sibilant is invariably

2
In all the other Samhitas the pause inserted after n before all voiceless palatals,
forms -J« -In -un -fn predominate. In the cerebrals, and dentals.
post-Vedic language they became the only 9 Neither th nor / jh occur in the Sam-
allowable forms. hitSs after final n.
10
i Cp. Ol.DENHERG 4 2 8 . Cp. I.ANMAN 5 1 6 A, note.
< The MS. (11. 13") has n/'tiif pahi. n For ttad/iamrtmyakof the RV. (IX. 107»)
5 For examples of nominatives with this and SV-, the VS. (xtx. 2) has dadhanvS, yah.
Sandhi, see LAMUAN 506A, note, 512 (topV " As m does before /; see above 75, 4.
517. "J Before s a transitional k may similarly
6
Op. cit., 506 A, note, and 514. be inserted after a final >r, e. g. pratyah sd
7 Op. cit., 512. may also be written pratyuhk sa.
8
There are no examples of the inserted i( See LANMAN 506 A, note, and 346.
sibilant before ck in the Samhitas. In the , 15 Cp. WACKERNAGEI. I, 282, note.
70

78. Euphonic combination of ñnal s. — i. Before voiced sounds.

a. Final J after all vowels except a, assumes its voiced form r before all
vowels and voiced consonants 1 ; e . g . fsibhir i d y o (i. i 2 ) for rsib his; agnir
4
hots (i. 15) for agnis; paribhfir asi (i. i ) for paribhás; mitanair uta (i. i 2 )
for nátanais.
The s doubtless became r through an older transitional voiced cerebral
z2, as is shown by the Avesta, e. g. in duzita- = dur-ita
b. Final s a f t e r a must originally have become z before voiced
sounds. But as drops the sibilant before vowels and voiced consonants,
while az drops it before vowels except a4, but becomes o s before voiced con-
sonants 6 and a; thus sutá imé fi. 3 ' ) for sutás-, vlsvl vi (1. 3 1 2 ; , for visvas;
khya d for khyas (1. 4 3 ); no áti (1.4 3 ) for nas; indavo vam (1.2>) for indavas.
2. B e f o r e v o i c e l e s s c o n s o n a n t s , a. Before t h e p a l a t a l s c , ch, s
final s becomes the palatal sibilant / 7 ; e. g. devas cakrmá (x. 3 7 1 2 J .
b. B e f o r e t h e dental t'\ final s following a always remains; e . g . y d s te
(1. 4 4 ); mcdhiras tésam (1. 1 1 7 ) . After * ü'", it remains as a rule; e. g.
ánvíbhis tana (1. 3 4 ). But s becomes s, which cerebralizes the following t to /:
« . regularly in compounds" in all the Samhitas; e. g. dús-tara- 'insuperable'
for dús-tara- (but rajas-túr- 'traversing the air'); (?. often in external Sandhi
in the R V . This occurs chiefly, and in the independent passages of the other
Samhitas 12 only, before pronouns; e. g. agnís te-, krátus tám-, otherwise it
occurs occasionally only in the R V . ; thus nis-tataksúr ( x . 3 1 7 ) ; gobhis tarema
(x. 4 2 1 0 ) ; nákis taniisu (vm. 2 0 l 2 ) '•>.
c. B e f o r e k kh p ph, final s as a rule becomes Visaijaniya (its pause

1 When final s becomes r before r, it is a voc. in -tar (from a stem in - t f \ which

treated like an original r, being dropped would become -la before r.
after lengthening the preceding vowel. b The starting point of this Sandhi w a s
2 This 2 would be the voiced cerebral ! probably the treatment of az before voiced
corresponding to the voiceless s which appears dentals, where the sibilant was dropped and
before voiceless consonants (e. g. in dufkha-). the preceding vowel lengthened to e or 0.
3 This z would account for the Sandhi of The latter finally carried the day, e surviving
some Vedic compounds formed with dus- only in sure duhild (I. 3 4 5 ) ; cp. BAHTHOLO-
'iir : Jit-dàbha-t diì-dàs-, dil-d/u-, dù-nàsa-, du- MAE, B B . 1 5 , i f . ; WACKERNAGEL I, p . 3 3 8 .
nósa-, beside dur-niyàntu-. It may possibly 7 S J cit does not stand for sah cil, but
also account for the forms svadhitiva (v. 8"), for sa u cit.
for svàd/iitiz va (Pp. svàdhitir-ivà), and uri' 8 If initial cerebral mutes had existed in
iva (IX. 96»5), where the metre requires urh f a the SamhitSs, final s would doubtless have
(Pp. tmi-iva)\ the cerebral being dropped become the cerebral sibilant s before them.
1
after lengthening the preceding vowel. 9 No example of initial th occurs in the
4 In the MS. unaccented -a for -as is j Samhitas; but the internal Sandhi of stha-
lengthened before an accented vowel; e. g. 'stand', in ti-sthati (for ti-stha-ti) shows that
lóti indrah. In TS. II. 4. 7 1 ar for a in jinvàr I initial th would have been treated in the
à v f t is merely a bad reading (MS. 11. 4/ same way as t.
jinva rival)-, cp. above p. 33, note ' J . 10 Final rs never occurs; f s , occurring only

5 In the compound ànar-vis• (I. 121') once in the RV., remains unchanged in
"having a wain as his abode', ar instead of m i t f s trin (I. 1 6 4 ' ° ) .
o (cp. ànas-vant- 'possessed of a wain)' is " The only exception in the RV. is
perhaps due to the influence of vanar-, calus-lrimsat 'thirty-four', doubtless due to
beside vanas- and vana-. On a still more the avoidance of the combination sir. .
anomalous compound of the same word, « The TS. also has nis tap- 'heat'. On the
ana4-vah- 'drawer of a cart', 'bull', cp. usage of the SV., see BENFEY, SV. p. XLIU;
WACKERNAGEL I, p. 3 3 9 , top. The vowel | on that of the AV., see WHITNEY, APr. 11. 84.
à appears instead of 0 in pracetà | riian >3 Owing to the far more numerous
(I. 24M) 'O wise king' ( p r a c e t o ràjan in the occurrences of as before t, combined with
same verse, TS. I. 5. 113), probably owing the disinclination to change the^ following
to the voc. pracetah, as it would have been initial, the retention of s after » u gradually
pronounced at the end of a Pada in the gained ground and finally prevailed in the
original text, having been misunderstood as post-Vedic language, even in compounds.
 7i

form), or Jihvamullya (h) before the gutturals and Upadhmanlya (h) before
the labials; e. g. indrah paiica (i. 79). But as remains and is us fs become
is us fs': o. regularly in compounds in all the Samhitas; e.g. paras-pa-
'far-protecting'; havis-pii- 'drinking the offering'; dus-krt- 'evil-doing'; dus-pdd-
'evil-footed'. The general rule, however, applies in the following compounds:
purah-prasravana- 'streaming forth'; chdnda/i-paksa- (AV.) 'borne on the wings
of desire'; srfyah-keta- (AV.) 'striving after superiority'; sadyah-kri- (AV.)
'bought on the same day'; bahih-paridhi (TS.) 'outside the enclosure'; itah-
pradiina- (TS.) 'offering from hence ( = this world)'.
The repeated (or Hmreiita) compounds also follow the general rule,
doubtless from a desire to change the repeated word as little as possible;
thus parvah-purvo 'each first'; pardh-parah 'always without' (AV.); parusah-
parusas (VS.) 'from every knot'; purusah-puruso (TS.) 'every man'; pdru/i-
paru/i (TS.) 'joint by joint', but parus-parur also in RV. AV. TS.
(?. Often in external Sandhi in the RV.*; e. g. divas pari (x. 45")
'from the sky'; patnivatas krdhi (1. 14 7 ) 'make them possessed of wives';
dydus pita (iv. 1 1 0 ) 'Father Heaven'.
d. Before mutes immediately followed b y s or s, final s regularly
becomes Visaijaniya; e. g. satdkratuh tsarat ( V I I I . 1 " ) ; ubhayatah-ksni'ir (TS.)
'two-edged'. Occasionally the sibilant disappears, as in ddha ksdrantlr (vii. 34 2 )-J.
e. 1. Before a simple sibilant final s is either assimilated or becomes
VisarjanTya; e.g. vas sivatamo or vah sivatamo (x.9'); dfals sal or dtvlh sal
(x. 12 85); nas sapatna or nah sapdtnct (x. 128'). Assimilation is undoubtedly
the original Sandhi • and is required by some of the Pratisakhyas5; but the
Mss. usually employ VisarjanTya, and European editions regularly follow this
practice 6 .
a. T h e sibilant disappears in the compounds barhi-sad- 'sitting on the sacrificial
litter'; dyau-samsita- (AV.) 'sky-sharpened'; and, after lengthening the preceding a, ayii-
iaya rajd-saya hara-saya (TS. I. 2. 11 2 = MS. I. 27) for ay as-, rajas-, harai-.
2. Before a sibilant immediately followed by a voiceless mute, a final
sibilant is dropped; e. g. mandibhi stomebhir (1. 9') for mand'bhis; mitha-
spf-dhyH (1. 166 9 ) for mi/Aas-; du-sluti- 'ill praise' for dus-1. The omission is
required by the Pratisakhyas of the RV., VS., TS., and is the practice of all
the Mss. of the MS.
3. Before a- sibilant immediately followed by a nasal or semivowel, a
final sibilant is optionally dropped; thus krta srava/i (vi. 58^), beside which
(though the Pp. reads krta) the MS. reads krtah srdvah8; ni-svardm (VII. 1 7 )
for nis-svardm 'noiseless' (Pp., however, ni-svardm).
79. Euphonic combination of final r. — As h is the pause form of
both r and s, a certain amount of mutual contamination appears in their
Sandhi; r, however, suffers much more in this respect than s. Since both s
and r when preceded by » u have the same natural Sandhi, it is in a few

» This treatment of final s before voice- 4 Cp. WHITNEY on APr. II. 40.
less gutturals and labials, which is parallel 5 Cp. WACKERNAGEL I, p. 342, top.
to that before /, was doubtless the original ; 6 l n parito sincata (x. 1 0 7 ' ) , ito probably
from of sentence Sandhi. j = ita u (Pp. pari itah).
1
ado pi/o (1. 1877) is probably only an [ 7 The omission was doubtless due to the
apparent exception, as ado = ada u, not 1 fact that it made no difference to the pro-
adas (Pp. adah)\ the Paippalilda recension nunciation. Hence probably the wrong
of the AV., however, has ada} pito, for j analysis of ifastut by the Pp. as isah-stut,
adds. I instead of ifa-stut, as in ija-vant- (cp. BRA
3 T h o u g h the Pp. reads adha, the PB. in 1 8 Cp. BOLLENSEN, ZDMG. 4 5 , 2 4 ; P I S C H E L ,
quoting the verse has ddhah; see OLDEN- I Vedische Studien I, 1 3 .
BERG 369, note 1. ,
72 I. ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4 . VEDIC GRAMMAR.

instances uncertain which was the original sound. Thus it is somewhat doubtful
whether the -uh of the abl. gen. sing, of /--stems and of the 3. pi. act. of past
tenses represents original us or ur. In the verbal form, the r in the corre-
sponding middle termination of the perfect, -re, seems to decide in favour
of » r 1 .
1. a. Before v o w e l s and voiced consonants (except r itself) r remains
not only when preceded by t u2, but by a also 3 ; e. g. gir \ isd (1. 1 1 7 ' ) ;
par devatrn (VII. 5 2 1 ) ; pratar agnih (v. 1 8 1 ) ; punar nah (x. 57 s ); svar druho
("• 3S6)4-
b. Before r, r disappears, after lengthening a preceding vowel; e. g.
puna ropani (AV. 1. 24*). In a few instances, however, 0 appears instead of
a («= ar), under the influence of -ah as the pause form of neuters in -as-,
thus ttdho romasam (vm. 3 1 ' ) , for iidha\ and the compound aho-ratra- 'day
and night', for aha-.
2. Before voiceless consonants final r is as a rule treated like s.
a. Before the gutturals k kh and the labials p ph, it becomes h
under the influence of the pause form; e. g. punah kalcf). (x. 39 s ); punah
patnlm (x. 8 5 ^ ) ; punah-punar (1. 92 1 0 ). But that the r originally remained
before these consonants is shown by its survival in the compounds ptir-pati-,
svar-pati-, vHr-karyd-, ahdr-pati- (VS.). But even here the pause form was
gradually introduced; e. g. svah-pati- (SV.); it supplanted the r of antdr
throughout; e. g. antah-p/ya- 'drinking up'; antah-kosd- (AV.) 'inside of a
store-room'; antah-parsavyd- (VS.) 'flesh between the ribs'; antah-patrd- (AV.)
'interior of a vessel'; and because the pause form of r and s was identical,
the Sandhi of s came to be applied here even in the R V . ; thus dntas-patha-
'being on the way' (for dntar-); cdtus-kaparda- 'having four braids', cdtus-pad-
'four-footed' (for catur-).
b. Before the p a l a t a l s c ch, final r invariably (like s) becomes the
palatal sibilant s; e. g. pris ca (1. 189 2 ) for pftr ca. This applies almost always
even in compounds; e. g. cdtus-catvarimsat (VS.) 'forty-four'. There are only
two examples of the r being retained even here: svar-caksas- 'brilliant as light',
svar-canas- 'lovely as light'.
c. Before dental t, final r is without exception treated like s; e. g.
gis tribarhlsi ( 1 . 1 8 1 8 ) for g/'r; cdtus-trimiat 'thirty-four' for cdtur-. The retention
of r before t in dvar tdmah, (1.92 4 ) is only apparently an exception, as this
really stands for avart tdmah 5.
d. Before sibilants, final r appears in its pause form as VisarjanTya
in sentence Sandhi, e. g. punah sdm (11. 38*). In compounds, however, it

I Cp. WACKERNAGEL 1, 284 note (p. 335). as the form would originally have been
* A list of root-stems in -ir and -ur will pronounced at the end of an internal Pada.
be found in GRASSMANN'S Wörterbuch 1 6 9 3 udho for udhar, which appears before a
— 1 6 9 4 , columns 3 — 4. and m, is due to the influence of neuters
3 r is original in dvar- ' d o o r ' ; vir- 'pro- in as, the pause form of which, -ah. would
tector'; var- ' w a t e r ' ; ahar- ' d a y ' ; usar- ' d a w n ' ; be the same as of those in -ar. The form
udhar- 'udder'; vadhar- 'weapon'; vanar- avfl, for avar 'down', which appears be-
•wood'; ivä>- 'light'; anlar 'within'; avar fore d (avo divdh v . 40 6 , etc.; but before
6
' d o w n ' ; punar 'again'; pratar ' e a r l y ' ; the m, avar mahah, I. 133 ). is due to the
v o c . of/"-stems, e. g. bhrätar; the 2. 3. sing, of influence of paro divdh and faro diva (for
past tenses from roots in -/-, e. g. ävar, from paras), cp. RPr. I. 32. avo before a, d, m,
v r - 'cover'. explained by BENFEY (SV. XL and 176) as
4 aha cva (VI. 48') for ahar eva is due tostanding for avar is probably from vas-
1'hah, the pause form of ahar, being treated 'shine' (cp. WACKERNAGEL I, p. 3 3 5 ,
like that of a neuter in -as, ¿has. In aksä top).
itidur (tx. 983) for atsär tndur (Pp. ak}är\ the 5 Cp. above 62, 1 .
editors of the Samhitä misunderstood akfih,
 73

frequently remains; thus vanar-sdd- and vanar-sdd- 'sitting in the wood';

dhbr-sad- 'being on the yoke 1 ; svar-sd- 'winning light'; svar-sati- 'acquisition
of light'; dhQr-sah- (VS.) 'bearing the yoke'. This indicates that it originally
remained before sibilants in sentence Sandhi also.
80. Initial aspiration. — T h e palatal sibilant s and the breathing h,
when initial, may under certain conditions be changed to aspirates.
a. After a final c, initial s may become, and in practice always does
become, ch; e. g. ydc chakndvama (x. 2y) for ydd saknavama. The same
change occasionally takes place after /; thus vipat chutudri (nr. 33'), for
sutudri; turasdt chusmi (v. 404) for susmi.
b. After a final voiced mute, initial h may be and usually is changed
to the aspirate of that mute; e. g. tad dhi (1.126') for tad hi-, sidad dhotii
(x.12') f o r sidad (= sidat) hot a; avad dhavydni (x. 1612) for havydni.
81. Sandhi of c o m p o u n d s ' . — T h e euphonic combination at the junction
of the members of compounds is on the whole subject to the rules prevailing
in external Sandhi or between words in a sentence. Thus the evidence of
metre shows that contracted vowels are often even in compounds to be read
with hiatus, when the initial vowel of the second member is in a heavy
syllable; e. g. yukta-asva- 'having yoked horses', devd-iddha- 'kindled by the
gods', accha-ukli- 'invitation'. Many archaisms of Sandhi are, however, preserved
in compounds which have either disappeared from or are obsolescent in the
sentence.
1. An earlier stage of Sandhi has been preserved by compounds alone
in the following instances:
a. Several old phonetic combinations appear in single words: dvi-barha-
jman- 'having a double course' for dvi-bdrhaj-jmati- (= *dvi-bdrhad- from
barh-as, with -ad for -as before the voiced palatal) 1 ; barhi-sdd- 'sitting on
the sacrificial litter' (from barhis- for barhis-sad-)-, vis-pdti- 'lord of the house'
and vis-patm- 'mistress of the house' (with s retained instead o f / ) 3 , sam-rdj-
'sovereign ruler' (with m preserved before r) 4 .
b . In a group of compounds with dus- 'ill' as first member, the combi-
nations du-d = dm-d a n d du-n — duz-n appear instead of dur-d a n d dur-n :
dtt-dabha- 'hard to deceive', da-dhi- 'malevolent', du-nasa- 'hard to attain', du-
nds'a- 'hard to attain' and 'hard to destroy', da-dds- (AV.) 'not worshipping'.
But dur-, the form which would be required by external Sandhi, is already
commoner in the R V . ; e. g. dur-dj-slka- 'looking bad', dur-dhdr-l-tu- 'hard
to restrain', dur-ndman- 'having a bad name', dur-nasa- (AV.) 'hard to attain'.
c. Final r in the first member is preserved in the R V . before voiceless
sounds 5 ; thus var-kSrya- 'producing water', svar-caksas- 'brilliant as light',
pdr-pati- 'lord of the stronghold', svar-pati- 'lord of heaven', dhur-sdd-6 'being
on the yoke'.
d. Radical stems ending in -ir and -UP mostly lengthen their vowel
before consonants (as within words), e. g. dhur-sdd- 'being on the yoke', dhur-
sah- (VS.) 'bearing the yoke', pdr-pati- 'lord of the stronghold', pur-bhid-
'breaking down forts', pur-bhidya- n. 'destruction of forts', pur-yana-1 'leading
to the fort'.
1 See BENFEY, Gottingische Abhandlungen 6 External Sandhi gradually encroaches
15, 105 FF.; WACKERNAGEL 2 1 , 1 2 5 — 1 3 9 . here in the later Samhitas, as in svah-pati-
2 Cp. above 44 a, 3. (SV.). On pttnak- for futiar- in punah-sara
3 Later vif-pati- (TLI. 11. 5. 74), and even in , aulas- for antar- in antas-patha-, and antah-
the R V . pad-bisa- 'fetter' f r o m pas- 'bind'. in anlah-pcya- see WACKERNAGEL 2 1 , 126y,
4 Otherwise A n u s v i r a , as in sam-rajan/am. note, and above 79, 2 a.
5 W h i l e in external Sandhi it would be- 7 But gir retains the short v o w e l in gir-
come Visarjaniya or a sibilant. vattas- 'fond of praise', gir-vahas- 'praised in
74 I. ALLGEMEINES UND S P R A C H E . 4. VEDIC GRAMMAR.

e. As first member of a compound dyu- 'heaven' appears as div- before

vowels 1 (while yn would in external Sandhi become yv), as dlv-isti- 'striving
for heaven', div-it- 'going to heaven'.
2. Compounds in the Samhitas preserve many euphonic archaisms which,
while still existing in external Sandhi, disappear from the sentence in later
periods of the language though still partially surviving in compounds.
a. A final consonant disappears before the same consonant when the
latter is the initial of a group: upa(s)-stha- 'lap', na(k)-ksatra- 'star',
hr(d)-dyota- (AV.), an internal disease, hr{d)-dydtana (AV.) 'breaking the
heart' 2 .
b. A final sibilant disappears before a mute followed by a sibilant,
as in diva-ksa- 'heavenly' ('ruling over heaven', dtv-as, gen.)-*.
c. A sibilant as initial of the second member is retained; thus s'candra-
'bright' in puru-s'candrd- 'much-shining' and many other compounds, but almost
invariably candrd- as an independent word 4 .
d. A final s in the first member or an initial s in the second is
cerebralized; e. g. dus-tdra- 'invincible', nis-tdkvari- (AV.) 'running away',
dus-svdpnya- 'evil dream'.
e. An original n in the second member is c e r e b r a l i z e d after a r r s
with the necessary phonetic restrictions (47). «•• In derivatives from verbs com-
pounded with prepositions containing r, initial, medial, or final n of the root
is almost invariably cerebralized in the Samhitas; thus nir-nij- 'bright garment',
pari-hnuta- (AV.) 'denied' ( \f hnu:), parl-ndh- 'enclosure', pary-a-naddha- (AV.)
'tied up', pra-ni- and pra-netf- 'leader', prd-mti- 'guidance', prana- 'breath',
prAnana- and pranatha- (VS.) 'respiration' (an- 'breathe'). The cerebralization
appears even in suffixes, as pra-ytina- 'advance' 5 .
In other compounds n greatly predominates when the second member
is a verbal noun; e. g. grama-ni- 'chief of a village', dur-gdni 'dangers'; nr-
pana- 'giving drink to men', pitr-ydna- 'trodden by the fathers', pur-ydna- (AV.)
'leading to the fort', rakso-han- 'demon-slaying', vrtra-han- 'Vjtra-slaying'. The
cerebralization fluctuates in -yavan: thus pratar-ydvan- 'going out early',
vfsa-pra-yavan- 'going with stallions', but puro-ydvan- 'going in front', subhra-
yavan- 'going in a radiant chariot'; also in purlsa-vihana- (VS.) and purTsa-
vahana- (TS. K.) 'removing rubbish'. Cerebralization never takes place
in -ghn-t the weak form of -/tan- 'killing'; nor in aksa-nah- 'tied to the axle',
kravya-vAhana-b 'conveying corpses', carma-mnd- 'tanner', yusmd-mta- 'led
by you'.
f . The cerebralization takes place somewhat less regularly when the
second member is an ordinary (non-verbal) noun; e. g. urU-nasd• 'broad-nosed',
tri-nava- (VS.) 'consisting of three times nine parts', tri-naman- (AV.) 7 'having
three names', dru-ghana- 'mallet', nr-tndnas- 'friendly to men', puru-naman-
'many-named', purvahna- 'forenoon', prd-napat- 'great-grandson'. There is

song'. The long vowel in an-aiir-da- 'not |as go- 'cow' instead of gav- before vowels,
fulfilling expectation', ailr-da- and asir-dayh- \e.g.go-agra- 'headed by cows'; cp. 'WACKEI-
'fulfilment of a benediction' is due to analogy, NAGEL 2 ' , p. 1 2 9 e. Another kind of inno-
as a-sis- is derived from the root Sas-. vation in compounds is due to haplology;
• dyu- remains before consonants: dyu-ksa-, c p . WACKERNAGEL I, 241 a 2«, p . 12S
dyu-ga-t-, dyu-bhakta-. bottom.
1 Also in external Sandhi ta dyftm (AV. 5 There are a few exceptions: pari-pana-
IV. 196) for tad dyim. 'drink', pary-uhyamana- 'being led home'
3 Also in external Sandhi adha k$aran(ir (\'vak-), pra-pina- (VS.) 'distended'.
(vil. 34»), cp. above 78, 2 d. j 6 Like havya vahana• 'conveying oblations'.
4 Divergence from external Sandhi is | 7 The later Samhitas always have n after
sometimes not archaic but due to innovation;! tri-, while the RV. always has « ; as tri-
 II. EUPHONIC COMBINATION. COMPOUNDS. 75

fluctuation when dus- 'ill' assumes the later Sandhi form of dur-, as dur-
tidman- 'having a bad name', dur-hanu- 'having ugly jaws', but dur-niydntu-
'hard to restrain'1; also in vatdhra-nasa- (TS.) 'rhinoceros' and vardhri-nasd-
(VS.) 'having streaks on the nose'; sri-manas- (TS.) and sri-manas- (VS.)
'well-disposed'.
But n often remains in this type of compound: initially in krpa-nlla-
iwhose home is splendour', candra-nirnij- 'having a brilliant garment', varsa-
nirnij- 'clothed with rain', tvesd-nrmna- 'of brilliant power', dlrghd-mtha-, N. of
a man, punar-nava- 'again renewed', babhru-mkasa- (VS.) 'looking brownish',
vfsa-nabhi- 'having a mighty nave'; medially in fsi-manas-2 'inspired', indragni
'Indra and Agni', ksatra-vani- (AV.) 'addicted to military rule', 'brdhma-vani- (VS.)
'well disposed to the priesthood', catur-anika- 'four-faced', try-anika- 'three-
faced', jyotir-anlka- -3 'having a shining face', citra-bhanu- 'having bright lustre',
dhruva-yotti- (VS.) 'having a fixed abode', pra-mdnas- (AV.) 'careful', hari-
manyu-sayaka-4 (RV. x) 'stimulating the mettle of the bays'.
f. The final vowel of the first member is often lengthened. This
frequently occurs before v-; e. g. anna-vrdh- 'prospering by food', pratT-varta-
(AV.) 'returning into itself, pra-vj-s- 5 'rainy season'. It is often due to the
rhythmical tendency (which also prevails in the sentence) to lengthen a
vowel before a single consonant between two short syllables; e.g. ahi-suva-,
N. of a demon (from ahi-), urU-nasd- 'broad-nosed', rta-sah- (VS.) 'maintaining
the sacred law', pavl-nasd- (AV.) 'having a nose like a spearhead', nagha-risd-°
(AV.) N. of a plant', ratha-sdh- 'able to draw the car'. Lengthening of a
vowel between other than two short syllables is less common, being probably
due to imitation of compounds in which the long vowel is produced by the
normal rhythm; e.g. dhanva-sdh- 'skilled in archery' and vibhva-sdh- 'overcoming
the rich' like ratha-sdh--, sahasru-tnagha- 'having a thousand gifts' like s'atd-
tuagha- 'having a hundred gifts'. The interchange of short and long is entirely
regulated by the rhythmic principle in sana- 'of old' and almost entirely in
tuvi- 'much'; e. g. sana-jur- 'long since aged' and sana-sruta- 'famous of old',
tuvi-maghd- 'very rich' and tuvi-badhd- 'killing many'7. The final vowel of
prepositions is particularly often lengthened in the later Samhitas without
reference to rhythm, especially before nouns ending in -a with long radical
vowel, e. g. nl-vid- (AV.) 'liturgical invitation', abhl-moda-mud- (AV.) 'excessively
joyful', ni-nShd- (AV.) 'girth', pratl-bodhd- (AV.) 'vigilance', vi-barha- (AV.)
'scattering'. Sometimes the final vowel is left unlengthened between two
short syllables; e. g. rayi-pdti- 'lord of wealth', ghrta-duh-as (voc. pi.) 'yielding
ghee' 8 .
g. On the other hand, final a and T of the first member are often
shortened before a group of consonants or a long syllable; e. g. amiva-
cdtana- (AV.) 'driving away disease' and amiva-hdn- 'destroying disease' ( d r n l v S - ) ;
iirna-mradas- 'soft as wool' (ftrna-) and *Brna-vabhi- 'spinning wool', 'spider*,
in the patronymic aurnavabha--, kaksya-prA- 'filling out the girth' (kaksya-);

niia- 'third heaven', tri-nabhi- 'having three 7 Cp. also pra-sah- and pra-sah- 'victorious',
naves'. . The long vowel in the former is probably
1
The AV. here always has the cerebral, • historic, = IE. pro.
as dur-nihita- 'badly kept'. ' 8 The vowel is originally long, in as/a-
2
But nr-miiuas- 'friendly to men' and I 'eight', probably also in accha- 'to' and
t/fa-manas- 'manly-spirited'. i visva- 'all', and may be differently ex-
3 But purv-aruka- 'having many faces'. j plained in a-deva- 'hostile to the gods',
4 But vna-manyu- (RV. i) 'vigorous- l i-rupita- (iv. 5 7 ) meaning, and A -sat-; see
minded'. I WACKERNAGEL 2', p. 131, note.
5 C p . W A C K E R N A G E L 1, 4 2 . j
6
Beside itagha-mira- (AV.) N. of a plant. |
76 I. ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4. VEDIC GRAMMAR.

sena-jit- (VS.) 'vanquishing armies' (sena-); gduri-vTti- N. of a seer (from

gauri), prthivi-slhd- 'standing on the earth'; even before a short syllable
in prthivi-sdd- (AV.) and prthivi-sdd- (VS.) 'sitting on the earth' (prthivi-),
sarasvati-krta- (VS.) 'made by Sarasvati' 1 .
82. Extension of external to internal Sandhi. — The rules of sentence
Sandhi as applied between members of a compound are often found to affect
the internal form of words.
a. Nominal (chiefly secondary) suffixes with initial consonants are
frequently treated like the second member of a compound; e. g. beside
duvas-yu- 'worshipping', appears duvo-yu-2. This influence extends even to
radical finals before primary suffixes; e. g. dn-na- 'food' for dd-na-; san-ndrn
for sat-rifim, from sds- 'six'; ttdmo-bhis, from namas- 'obeisance', with 0 for ad
(as in usdd-bhis from usds- 'dawn') 3 ; /\avih-su4 for havis-su, from havis-
'oblation'; jigl-vtims- for jigi-vCitns- 'having conquered', with radical final
lengthened as in sentence Sandhi.
b. In the verb the influence of sentence Sandhi is seen in reduplicated
forms. Thus parallel with the lengthening of final syllables in the sentence,
the final radical vowel is made long before the ending -hi in didih! beside
the more usual dldihi, from di- 'shine'. The rhythmical lengthening in the
reduplicated aorist is probably due to a similar influence.

III. ACCENT.
ROTH, Nirukta LVII—LXXII: Ueber die Elemente des indischen Accentes nach den
Präti^äkhja Sütren. — BENFEY, Vollständige Grammatik p. 9 — 1 3 . — WHITNEY, 'On t h e
nature and designation of the accent in Sanskrit', Transactions of t h e American Philo-
logical Association, 1869—70; Oiiental and Linguistic Studies 2, 3 1 8 tT.; Sanskrit Grammar3,
p. 2 8 — 3 3 ; see also General Index, s. v. 'Accent'. — HAUG, Ueber das W e s e n und d e n
W e r t h des wedischen Accents, München 1873 (cp. WEBER, Indische Streifen 3, 335 ff.;
WHITNEY, JAOS. 10, i x ff., c m f.). —WACKERNAGEL, Altindische Grammatik I, 243 f r . —
Cp. also HIRT, D e r indogermanische Akzent, Strassburg 1895, and Akzentstudien in IF.
VI—IX; BRUGMANN, K u r z e vergleichende Grammatik I (Strassburg 1902), p. 52 —66.
Besides the Prätisäkhyas several other native authorities refer to the accent. Pacini
and his c o m m e n t a t o r s give an account of it; all the Sütras of Pänini relating to accentu-
ation are collected in a chapter of the Siddhänta-kaumudl called vaidika-svara-prakriyä
'section 011 t h e Vedic accent'. T h e accent is further dealt with in the Bhä;ikasQtra, in
the Pratijnäsütra, in the Siksäs, and as regards the position of t h e accent in individual
words, in t h e Unädisütras and especially in the Phitsntras.

83. General character of the Vedic accent. — In Vedic literature

sacred texts only, primarily all the Samhitäs 5 have been handed down in an
accented form. Of all other sacred texts, only those to which a special
importance was attached, have preserved the accent. These are the Taittirlya
Brähmana (together with its Aranyaka) and the Satapatha Brähmana (including
the Brhadäranyaka Upani$ad). There is, however, evidence to show that the
Pancavimsa Brähmana 6 and other Brähmanas were at one time accented 7 .
1
On t h e relation of this shortening to j 4 See 5 7 , 1 .
the l e n g t h e n i n g in t h e s a m e position, and j S T h e Mss. of t h e Käthaka are so
its probable explanation, see WACKERNAGEL defective as regards accentuation that L. V.
2 - , p. 1 3 5 ( 5 6 g>. SCHROEDER found it possible to print parts
» H e n c e t h e PadapStha treats a nominal only of his edition of the text (vol. I, 1900)
stem which t a k e s a suffix with initial consonant with accents.
like t h e first m e m b e r of a compound, 6 WEBER, Indische Studien 10, 4 2 1 ; cp.
separating it from t h e suffix by A v a g r a h a ; MAX MÜLLER, A S L . 348; BURNELL, Ssma-
e. g. duvahiyuk for ditvoyuh-, adriivak for vidhäna Brähmana p. VI. T h e Mantra parts
adrivah, voc., ' a r m e d with a b o l t ' ; utHbhik o f t h e A i t a r e y a Ä r a n y a k a a r e accented(KE!TH's
for iitibhis 'with aids'. ed. p. 10).
3 See above 44 a, 3. 7 T h e Suparnädhyäya, an artificially archaic
 III. A C C E N T . G E N E R A L C H A R A C T E R OF V E D I C A C C E N T . 77

T h e Sutras, though not themselves accented, occasionally accent the Mantras

which they quote.
The Vedic accent, like that of ancient Greece, was of an essentially
musical nature. This is indicated by the fact that the accent exercises no
influence on the rhythm of versification. The phoneticians of the Prati-
sakhyas, in describing it, speak only of its pitch, which is also indicated by
the name of the chief tone, ud-atta 'raised', ' h i g h ' B u t that the Vedic accent
was accompanied by some stress2, is shown by certain phonetic changes which
cannot otherwise be explained-3.
In the Vedic accent three degrees of pitch may be distinguished: the
high, properly represented by the udatta, the middle by the svarita ('sounded'),
and the low by the an-udatta ('not raised'). That the Udatta originally
denoted the highest pitch in the oldest form of the Vedic language, is
shown by the evidence of Comparative Philology, and especially of Greek
which, as far as its peculiar laws of accent will admit, has the acute on the
same syllable as in the Vedic language has the Udatta (e. g. A if 6s : divas;
surd : sapid-, OKTCO : astau). This conclusion is also supported by the method
of marking the Udatta in the Samaveda, the Maitrayaril Samhita, and the
Kathaka. In the Rgveda, however, the Udatta has a middle pitch, lower
than that of the Svarita, as is shown both by the way in which it is marked
and by the account given of it in the Pratisakhyas. This must be an innovation,
though an old one.
The Svarita is a falling accent of a dependent nature, marking
the transition from an accented to a toneless syllable. It regularly follows
an Udatta, to the rise of which its fall corresponds in pitch. It assumes an
independent appearance when the preceding Udatta is lost in consequence of
the vowel that bears the Udatta being changed to a semivowel in Sandhi.
It is described in Pacini 1. 2^* as a combination of Udatta and Anudatta,
which means that it falls from the high pitch of the acute to the low pitch
of unaccented syllables. According to the RV. Pratisakhya and the TS.
Pratisakhya, however, the first part of the Svarita sounds higher than the
Udatta. This means that, instead of falling immediately from the high pitch
of the preceding Udatta, it first rises somewhat before falling to low pitch 5 .
It would thus have something of the nature of a circumflex in the R V . ; only
the rise in pitch above the highest level of the Udatta is but slight (corre-
sponding to the initial rise of the Udatta from Anudattatara to Anudatta
level), while the fall corresponds to the total rise of the Udatta 6 . The low
tone of the syllables preceding an accented syllable (with Udatta or Svarita)
is called an-udatta 'not raised' in the Pratisakhyas 7 . When it follows a
Svarita it is called the pracaya8 (svara), or 'accumulated pitch' (as several
such unaccented syllables often occur in succession) which continues at the
low level reached by the preceding Svarita till the syllable immediately

p o e m c o m p o s e d in the style of the V e d i c | 3 See WACKERNAGEL I, 218 and cp. OST-

hymns, is also accented, but w i t h many HOFF, M o r p h o l o g i s c h e Untersuchungen 4, 73.
m i s t a k e s ; see GRUBE'S edition in Indische j 4 In a g r e e m e n t w i t h V P r . I. 126; A P r . 1.
Studien, vol. XIv. 17; cp. HAUG 73.
1 Cp. HAUG, o p . cit. 19. 5 See OLDENBERG, P r o l e g o m e n a 483 f.
1 T h e V e d i c accent, like the G r e e k , was, j 6 A c c o r d i n g to Pänini's account the Svarita
after the b e g i n n i n g of our era, c h a n g e d to d o e s not rise a b o v e Udatta p i t c h b e f o r e
a stress a c c e n t w h i c h , h o w e v e r , unlike the f a l l i n g ; s e e OLDENBERG, l o c . cit.
modern G r e e k stress accent, did not remain 7 See RPr. ill. 1 ; cp. HAUG 91.
on the original syllable, but is regulated by 8 HAUG 92 f.

the quantity of the last two or three syllables,

much as in L a t i n ; cp. HAUG 99, end.
78 I. ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4. VEDIC GRAMMAR.

preceding the next accent'. The latter syllable, called sanna-tara 'lower' or
anudatta-tara2 'more lowered', sinks somewhat below this monotone.
84. Methods of m a r k i n g the a c c e n t . — T h e accent is marked in the
Vedic texts in four different ways.
1. The system of the Rgveda is followed also by the Atharvaveda J,
the Taittiriya Samhita (along with its Brahmana) and, with only slight devia-
tions in the treatment of the Svarita, by the Vajasaneyi Samhita. This system
is peculiar in not marking the principal accent at all. The explanation is
doubtless to be found in the fact that the pitch of the Udatta is in the R V .
intermediate between that of the other two tones. Hence the preceding
Anudatta, as having low pitch, is marked by a horizontal stroke below the
syllable, while the following Svarita, as rising to a higher pitch, is marked
by a vertical stroke above the syllable 4 ; e. g. Ml H-f-f i agnina — agnina. T h e
presence of successive Udattas at the beginning of a hemistich is recognizable
by the absence of all marks till the Svarita which follows the last of them,
or the Anudatta which follows the last of them and precedes the next accented
syllable; thus rflcIT Old« tav a yatam — t(iv <i yatam; tavet tat satyam — tdve't
tat satydm. On the other hand, all the unaccented syllables at the beginning of a
hemistich are marked; e. g. y>yT*HW = vaihanaram = vaisvanardm. But all the
syllables following a Svarita remain unmarked till the one immediately preceding
the next Udatta or Svarita; e. g. W » JT?f UTpf tHttffH I f r f e imam me gauge
yamune sarasvati sutudri = imam me gangt- yamune sarasvati sutudri5.
a. The hemistich being treated as the unit with regard to accentuation 6 ,
the marking of the Anudatta and of the Svarita is not limited to the word
containing the Udatta which those accents precede and follow respectively 7.
Hence the final syllable of one word may be marked with an Anudatta as
preceding an Udatta of the next initial syllable; or the initial syllable of one
word may be marked with the Svarita following the Udatta at the end of
the preceding word; e.g. tjfy f u l f i l fir* pariebhir rsibhir = parvebhir rsibhir\
OTJJTVBTW yajnam adhvaram — yajftdm adhvaram. But if an initial syllable
after a final Udatta precedes an accented syllable, it loses the enclitic Svarita
and must be marked as Anudatta; e. g. devarn rtvijam = devdm
rtvijam.
b. If an independent Svarita 8 precedes an Udatta, it is marked with the
numeral <1 (1) when its vowel is short, and with 3 (3) when it is long, the
figures receiving both the sign of the Svarita and that of the Anudatta 9 which
precedes an Udatta; e.g. SRtg<i JTTT = aj>sv antdr\ T p f t i a f t : = rayo 'vdni/i.
The phenomenon is described by the phoneticians with the words kampa

1 S e e OLDENBERG, P r o l e g o m e n a 4 8 5 , end. 7 In the Padapaiha, on the other hand,

2 Sanna-tara, APr. I. 43; anudatta-tara each
in word r e c e i v e s its natural accent only,
KaSika vrtti on Panini I. 24°.
3 T h e Mss. of the A V . , h o w e v e r , show
considerable variations; see WHITNEY'S
Translation p. c x x i ff.;
4 In the K a s h m i r Ms. of the R V . the
Udatta and the independent Svarita only
are marked, the former by a vertical stroke
above the accented syllable, the latter by a
hook ( c s ) above the accented syllable; see
ScHEFTELOWiTZ,Die Apokryphen des R g v e d a
4 8 FF.
5 Cp. HAUG, op. c i t 92 f.
From the point of view of the sentence (abhinihitd).
6
so that w h e r e the one text has a Svarita,
the other may h a v e an A n u d a t t a ; e. g. in
I. I3 the Samhita has rayim asnavqt, the
Pada rayim asnavat (the latter word being
' unaccented has the Anudatta marked under
j each syllable).
8 Examples of independent Svarita are
svar for suar; kva for ilia; viryam for vlriam.
'Independent' S v a r i t a in the above rule is
intended to include that which results from
change to a semivowel (ksaipra), f r o m
contraction (prailif/a) and from elision of a

accent the Pada is the unit; thus a v e r b or 9 T h e long v o w e l before the 3 receives
vocative is always accented at its beginning. the Anudatta stroke as well.
 79
'quaver', vikampita, and the verb pra-kamp-. In the TS. it appears only when
the second syllable as well as the first has the Svarita, and the figure 2, as
well as 1 and 3, is here used.
2. In the system of the Maitrayani Samhita* and of the Kathaka 2 ,
the Udatta is marked by a vertical stroke above (which seems to indicate
that this accent was here pronounced with the highest pitch); e. g. ufwpTT
= agnini. The two Samhitas, however, diverge in their method of indicating
the Svarita. The MS. marks the independent Svarita by a curve below the
accented syllable, e. g. qfam viryam; but the dependent Svarita by a horizontal
stroke in the middle or three vertical strokes above the accented syllable.
The Kathaka, on the other hand, marks the independent Svarita by a curve
below (if an unaccented syllable follows), e. g. irKf srtnfk viryam badhnati;
or by a hook below (if an accented syllable follows) e. g. g f a (OMii viryam
vyiicaste-, but the dependent Svarita by a dot below the accented syllable J .
Both these Samhitas mark the Anudattatara in the ordinary way by a stroke
below the syllable. In L. v. S C H R O E D E R ' S editions, however, the Udatta and
the independent Svarita only are marked. When the text of any of the
Samhitas is transliterated in Roman characters, it is the regular practice to omit
any indication of the dependent Svarita and of the Anudatta as unnecessary.
3. In the system of the Samaveda, the figures 1 2 3 are written
above the accented syllables to represent three degrees of pitch. Here
1 always stands for the highest pitch (Udatta), and 3 always for the
lowest
3 1 2
(Anudatta), and 2 generally for the middle pitch (Svarita); e. g.
barhisi = RV. bqrhisi {barhist). But 2 also represents the Udatta when
the latter is not followed by a Svarita (that is when the Udatta syllable is
final in the hemistich or when an Anudattatara preceding another accented
3» , 3 » 3. a 3 2 .
syllable follows); e.g. gird = RV. gira (gird)-, yajhanam hota. vis'vesam
= R V . yajhanam hota visvesSm (yajhanam hota visvesSm). If there are two
successive Udattas, the second is not marked, but 2 r is written over the
31 it
following Svarita; e.g. dviso martyasya = RV. dviso martyasya (dviso martyasya).
If in such case there is no room for 2 r, the first Udatta has 2 u written over
3 2U 3 1 »
it instead; e. g. esa sya pTtaye = RV. esa sya pitaye (esa sya pitaye). The
independent Svarita (as well as the dependent one which follows two successive
Udattas) is marked with 2r; and the Anudatta which precedes it, with 3 k;
]k ir
e. g. tanva. Syllables which follow a Svarita and in which the pitch remains
31 J 3 ' »
unchanged, are left unmarked; e. g. datam vrnimahe hotaram •= RV. dutarn
vrmmahe hotaram (datam vrnimahe hotaram)11.
4. Though the Brahmapas do not come within the scope of this work,
the system of accentuation in the Satapatha Brahmana cannot be passed
over here, as it must be treated in connexion with the other systems of the
Vedic period. It is historically important as forming a transition to the post-
Vedic period, when the accent assumed a different character 5 . The system
of the SB. in various respects differs considerably from the three de-
scribed above.

1 S e e HAUG 2 7 — 3 2 ; L . v . SCHROEDER, j 1 O n s o m e p e c u l i a r i t i e s of t h e V S . in
I n t r o d u c t i o n to his edition I,p.XXIX—XXXIV; m a r k i n g t h e S v a r i t a , s e e HAUG 3 2 — 3 5 .
Z D M G . 33, i 8 6 f f . 4 F o r f u r t h e r d e t a i l s s e e HAUG 3 5 — 4 2 .
2 C p . L . v . SCHROEDER, I n t r o d u c t i o n to his 5 C p . LEUMANN, KZ. 3 1 , jo (mid.).
edition, 2, p. x—XI.
8o I . A L L G E M E I N E S UND S P R A C H E . 4 . V E D I C GRAMMAR.

a. Its chief peculiarity is that it m a r k s only the main accent, the

Udatta. This is done by means of a horizontal stroke below the accented
syllable; e. g. treu: purusah. If there are two or more successive Udattas,
only the last is marked; e. g. agnir hi vai dhur atha = agnir hi vai dhiir
a/ha. When, however, an Udatla is thrown back as the result of Sandhi, an
immediately preceding Udatta is also marked; e. g. so \gnijn evabhlksamlnah
= so 'gnim evabhiksatnanah, where ivabhi- stands for evabhi- = evd abhi-.
Two successive syllables are also sometimes marked when a compound receives
a secondary Udatta; e. g. sprhayad-VQrnah, for sprhayad-varnah.
b. An independent Svarita is thrown back on the preceding syllable
in the form of an Udatta; e. g. manusyesu, that is, manusyesu for manusyesu.
The Svarita resulting from change to a semivowel (ksaipra), from contraction
(praslista), or elision of a (abhinihita), is similarly treated; e. g. katham nv
imam, that is, katham nv imam for katham nv imdm; evaiiad, that is, ¿vaitdd
from evd etdd-, te 'rcantah, that is, it1 'rcantah for te arcantah.
When, however, the prepositions h and prd, and final d in the first
member of a compound, combine with an unaccented vowel, the contracted
syllable retains the Udatta; e. g. ¿hi (-= <7 ihi); prdha (= prd aha); citroti-
(•= citra-ati-) 'bestowing wondrous gifts'.
c. Before a pause an accented syllable m a y lose its Udatta or
receive a reduced accent marked with three dots, if the initial syllable
after the pause has an Udatta or independent Svarita; e. g. sa bhagah \ samsthite,
for sd bhagah\sdmsthite. The penultimate syllable may also be thus reduced;
e . g . J u h o l i \ \ a t / i a , for juhjti\\dtha. This may occur even when the following
initial syllable is unaccented; e. g. nipsu\\apa, for nfipsu \\apa.
d. Reduplicated forms or long compounds accented on the first syllable
or prior member, sometimes receive a secondary accent near the end of
the word; e. g. bglbaliti, that is balbaliti for balbaliti-, eka-catvarimsat, that is,
¿ka-catvarims'dt for ¿ka-catvarimsat. Sometimes, in such case, the primary
accent itself is lost; e. g. eka-saptat!h beside ¿ka-saptatih. Somewhat analogous to
this double accentuation of compounds is the frequent accentuation of both
verbal prefix and verb at the same time; e. g. abhigopayid (cp. 109). Finally,
the accent occasionally appears on a syllable different from that on which it
usually rests. The irregularities mentioned here (d) are much commoner in
Books x—XHI than in the earlier Books; they are commonest of all in x i v 1 .
85. Normal accentuation of words. — As a general rule, every Vedic
word is both accented and has one main accent only. The Udatta is the
only main accent in the original text of the Rgveda. It is generally found
on the syllable which, according to the evidence of Comparative Philology 2 , bore
it in the Indo-European period Sometimes, however, the Udatta is secondary,
being a substitute for the independent Svarita (itself the result of an original
Udatta). Thus there is already a tendency in the R V . to change a final
Svarita into a final Udatta: the vocative dy )us (= dlaus) 'O Heaven', appears
as dyaus (vm. 89 1 2 ); arya- (= aria-) 'kind', occurring only once (1. 1 2 3 ' ) ,
otherwise and very frequently appears as arya-; thus, too, svdn- 'dog', was
probably at one time svan- for s'tan- (Gk. kuxv), which would explain the

» F o r further details, see HAUG, 4 3 — 4 8 ; V e d i c Udatta shifted, in A few instances, to

LEUMANN, D i e accentuation des (Jatapatha- other syllables in the Brahmapas and in
B r à h m a g a , K Z . 3 1 , 2 2 — 5 1 ; cp. also WACKER- Pacini's s y s t e m ; thus sapid, S B . and C.
NAGEL 1, 2 5 2 ; B h a ; i k a v f t t i , ed. by KIEL- sa//a, aslàu, C. àstau; A V . V S ÓB. tilA-
HORN I S . 10, 3 9 7 ff. 'sesamum', C. /¡/a-; stdali 'sit', C. also sìdàti-,
2
C p . BRUGMANN K G . 4 5 , 1. A V . gahvara- ' d e e p ' , C. gahvarà-,
3 U n d e r the influence of analogy the \
 III. ACCENT. NORMAL ACCENTUATION OF WORDS. 8I

abnormal accentuation s'unas etc. instead of the regular accentuation *sunas etc.
prevailing in monosyllabic stems (93). Or the final Svarita is thrown back
as an Udatta on the preceding syllable: thus mitrya- 'friendly', beside mitrya-
In some Vedic words, however, the only accent which is written is the
'independent' Svarita, by the native phoneticians called the 'genuine' (Jatya)2
or also the 'invariable' (nitya). Always following a y or v. it is, however,
just as much due to a preceding Udatta (lost by the change of i and u to
y and v), as the dependent Svarita is; e. g. kva ( = ki'ia) 'where?'; svar
(= suar, T S . s/'tvar) 'light'; rathyam (= rathiam, f r o m rathi- ' c h a r i o t e e r ' ) ;
tanvam (= tanuam f r o m tana- b o d y ' ) ; ok-ya- (= ok-ia-) ' b e l o n g i n g t o h o m e ' ;
vasav-ya- (= vasav-ia-) 'wealthy*. In reading the RV. the original vowel with
its Udatta must be restored except in a very few late passages 3 .
a. D o u b l e a c c e n t . Contrary to the general rule that a word has a
single accent only, a certain class of infinitives and a special type of compounds
have a double accent The infinitives in -tavai, of which more than a dozen
examples occur, accent both the first and the last syllable; e. g. ¿-tavai
'to go', apa-bhartavai 'to take away'. The Udatta on the final syllable is
probably to be explained as a secondary accent like that of the SB. in
intensives and compounds (bdlbaliti, eka-catvarimsdt, cp. 84, 4 d), where an
accent at the beginning of a word is counterbalanced by another at the end.
A good many compounds of a syntactical type, in which both members
are duals in form or in which the first member is nearly always a genitive in
form, accent both members; e. g. mitrA-vdrund 'Mitra and Varuija', brhas-pati-
'Lord of prayer's.
b. L a c k of a c c e n t . Contrary to the general rule that every word is
accented, some words never have an accent, while others lose their accent
under special conditions.
1. The following are i n v a r i a b l y e n c l i t i c :
a. p r o n o u n s : tva- 'another'; sama- 'some'; ena- 'he', 'she' 6 ; me, D. G.,
'of or to me'; ma, A., 'me'; nau, du. A. D. G., 'us two', etc.; nas, A. D. G.,
'us', etc.; te, D. G., 'of or to thee'; tva, A., 'thee'; vam, A. D. G., 'ye two',
etc.; vas, A. D. G., 'you', etc.; Xm, sim 'him', 'her", 'it', 'them', etc.; kis 'some
o n e ' in na-kis, mti-kis ' n o o n e ' ; kim in d-kirn 'from', na-klm, mA-kim 'never'.
p a r t i c l e s : ca 'and'; u 'on the other hand'; va 'or'; iva 'like', 'as it
were'; kam 'indeed' (after nit, su, hi); gha, ha 'just' (emphasizing); cid 'at all';
bhala 'indeed'; sama-ha 'somehow'; sma 'just", 'indeed' (almost invariably with
the present tense); svid 'probably'.
2. The following classes of forms or individual words are subject to l o s s
of a c c e n t according to their position or function in the sentence:
a. v o c a t i v e s , unless beginning the sentence or Pada.
finite v e r b s , in principal clauses, unless beginning the sentence
or Pada.
}'. all oblique cases formed from the demonstrative p r o n o u n a-,
when used merely to replace a preceding substantive, and not occurring at
the beginning of a sentence or Pada; e. g. asya janimani 'his (i. e. Agni's)
births' (but asyA usdsa/i 'of that Dawn').

1 Cp. the accentuation of the SB., 8 4 , 4 b . ' 3 Cp. BENFEY, Gött. Abhandlungen 27,
In Pänini's system of accentuation this 31 fT.
tendency went still further; thus V. vTryä- ; 4 In the Brähmanas also the particle vavd-
(= vlria-), becomes in C. vtrya-; and the j 5 See below, on the accentuation of
gerundive in -lavya -tavia) appears in 1 compounds, 91.
C. as -lävya also. | 6 The A. sing. f. occurs once ( v m . 6'9)
2 RPr. in. 4, VPr. 1. ILL f.; cp. HAUG 75. \ accented at the beginning of a Päda as ettam.
Indo-ansche Philologie. I. 4. g
82 I. ALLGEMEINES UND S P R A C H E 4. VEDIC GRAMMAR.

H. yatha 'as', when used in the sense of iva 'like', 'as it were', at the
end of a Pada; e. g. tayavo yatha (1. 50 2 ) 'like thieves'.
e. na 'not', when followed by hi 'for' 1 , the two particles being treated
as one word; e. g. nahi tva . . . invatah (1. io 8 ) 'for the two do not
restrain thee'; similarly when combined with the particle nu 'now' : na-nu
'certainly not'.

1. Accentuation of Nominal Stems.

86. A . In primary derivation no general law for the accentuation of
nominal suffixes can be stated; but there is a tendency, when -a, -ana, -as,
-an, -man are added, to accent the root in action nouns, and the suffix in
agent nouns; and in nouns formed with -as and -man difference of gender
is to some extent accompanied by difference of accent.
I. Root stems when reduplicated or compounded with prepositions as
a rule retain the accent on the radical syllable; e. g. juha- 'tongue' and
'ladle', yavl-y'tdh- 'eager to fight'; pra-neni- 'guiding constantly'. In stems
formed with intensive reduplication, however, the reduplicative syllable is
sometimes accented; thus jogu- 'singing aloud', vdtiivan- 'desiring', daridra-
("VS.J 'roving'. The prefix is accented in dva-sa- 'deliverance', upa-stu-t- 'in-
vocation', pari-jri- 'running round'2.
2. When the suffix -a is added, the root is accented in action nouns,
but the suffix in agent nouns; e. g. ved-a- 'knowledge', sisnath-a- 'perforation';
but cod-d- 'instigator', cacar-d- 'moveable' 3 . When there is a verbal prefix, the
final syllable is as a rule accented; e. g. sam-gam-a- m. 'coming together'. In
a few of these compounds, however, the root is accented, as ut-pat-a- (AV.)
'portent', a-sres-a- (AV.) 'plague'; and in some others (mostly agent nouns)
the prefix: abhag-a- 'sharing', prati-ves-a- 'neighbour', vy-us-a- (AV.) 'burning',
sam-kas-a- (AV.) 'appearance'.
3. The suffix -ata is always accented on the final syllable; e. g. dars-
ata- 'visible', pac-ata- 'cooked', yaj-ata- 'to be adored'.
4. Of the participial suffixes -at and -ant the former is never accented
when the sense is verbal; e. g. ddd-at- 'giving', diis-at- 'worshipping'. A few
old participles, however, which have become substantives, have shifted the
accent to the. suffix: vah-at- 'stream', vegh-at- (AV. VS.) 'barren cow', vagh-at-
'sacrificer', srav-dt- 'stream', sasc-at- 'pursuer'. The suffix -ant is accented in
the present participle of the second (450) and sixth (429) classes and of
the denominative (562), e. g. ad-ant-, tud-ant-, aghay-dnt--, in the future (537),
e. g. dasy-ani- (AV.); in the root aorist, e. g. bhid-ant- and sometimes in the
a-aorist, e. g. vrdh-ant--, also in the old present participles which have become
adjectives, rh-dnt- 'weak', brh-ant- 'great', and (with lengthened vowel) tnah-
Ant- 'great'.
5. The suffix -an is generally accented; e. g. uks-an- m. 'bull', ud-an- n.
'water'. The radical syllable is, however, not infrequently accented; e. g.
raj-an- m. 'king', adh-an- n. 'udder'.
6. Stems formed with -ana predominantly accent the root; e. g. kdr-ana-
n. 'act', cod-ana- (AV.) 'impelling'. The final syllable is, however, accented
fairly often; e. g. kar-ana- 'active', kros-ana- 'yelling', ksay-ana- (VS.) 'habitable',
tvar-atia- (AV.) 'hastening', roc-ana- 'shining' (AV.), n. 'light', svap-ana- (VS.)
'sleepy'. The penultimate is also accented in several words: the substantives

2
i T h e S B . , however, accents both particles; I Cp. WHITNEY 1 1 4 7 g-
cp. LEUMANN, K Z . 3 1 , 2 2 . | 3 C p . WHITNEY 1 1 4 8 ; LINDNER p . 3 4 .
 83
kir-ana- m. 'dust', krp-ana- n. 'misery' (but krp-ana- 'miserable' AV.), dams-
ana- n. 'great deed', vrj-ana- n. 'enclosure', ves-ana- n. 'service'; and the
adjectives tur-ana- 'hastening', Joh-ana- 'milking', bhand-ana- (VS. TS.)
'rejoicing', man-ana- 'considerate', mand-ana- 'joyful', saks-dna- 'overcoming'.
When the stem is compounded with a verbal prefix, the root is nearly always
accented; e. g. sam-gamana- 'gathering together'; but the final syllable is
accented in vi-caksana- 'conspicuous', upari-sayana- (AV.) 'couch'.
7. The suffix -anS, whether forming the feminine of adjectives in -ana
or f. action nouns, is always accented either on the penultimate or the final
syllable; e. g. tur-ana- 'speeding', spand-ami- (AV.) 'kicking'; arh-dna- 'merit',
jar-ami- 'old age'. The word pjt-ana- 'fight' is irregularly accented on the
radical syllable.
8. The suffix -ani is always accented, either on the final or the pen-
ultimate syllable; e. g. dyot-ani- 'brilliance'; as'-ani- 'missile'.
9. The suffix -am being the feminine form of action and agent nouns
in -ana, is similarly accented; e. g. pei-anX- (AV.) 'beautiful' (pis-ana-). The
accent is, however, sometimes shifted to the final syllable; e. g. taj>-ani- 'heat'
(tap-ana-).
10. Stems formed with the suffix -as accent the root if they are action
nouns, but the suffix if they are agent nouns; e. g. ap-as- n. 'work', but ap-as-
'active'. There are also some masc. substantives with the accent on the suffix;
e. g. raks-as- m. beside raks-as- n. 'demon'.
ir. The suffix -a, forming action nouns from roots and secondary con-
jugation stems, is invariably* accented; e. g. nind-d- (AV.) 'blame'; jigXs-d-
'desire to win'; gamay-d- (AV 1 .) 'causing to go'; asvay-d- 'desire for horses'.
12. The suffix -ana, forming middle participles, is normally accented on
the final syllable; e. g. ad-ana- 'eating'. Reduplicated stems, however, regularly
accent the first syllable; e. g. dad-ana- 'giving', johuv-ana- 'invoking'. A few
others accent the root; e.g. cit-ana- (AV 1 .) 'shining', dyut-ana- (RV 1 .) 'beaming'
(beside the usual dyut-and-)2. There are also a few adjectives and substantives
ending in -Una in which the primary character of the suffix or the derivation
of the word is doubtful. These also accent the first syllable; e. g. vasav-Sna-
'possessing wealth', pars-ana- m. 'abyss' 3 .
13. No general rule can be stated regarding the suffix -i, either the
suffix or the root being accented with about equal frequency; e. g. aj-i- 'race',
grdh-i- 'seizure'. Action nouns used as infinitives, however, regularly accent
the suffix; e. g. drs-dye 'to see'. Reduplicated derivatives tend to accent the
initial syllable; e.g. cakr-i- 'active'; while stems compounded with a preposition
usually accent the final syllable; e. g. pa'ra-dad-i- 'delivering over'.
14. Stems formed with the superlative suffix -istha regularly accent the
root; e. g. ydj-istha- 'sacrificing best'. The only exceptions are jyestha- when
meaning 'eldest' (but jyestha- 'greatest') and kan-isthd- 'youngest' (but kan-
istha- 'smallest', TS. B). When the stem is compounded with a preposition
the latter is accented; e. g. d-gam-istha- 'coming best'.
15. The suffix -is is nearly always accented; e. g. arc-is- 'flame'. The
exceptions are dm-is- 'raw flesh', jyot-is- 'light', and vyath-is- 'course'(?).
16. The few action and agent nouns formed with the suffix -T, are
accented either on the root or the suffix; e. g. deh-i- 'rampart', sac-l-
'power'.

1 If jangha- ' l e g ' i s f o r m e d with this i 3 See below, Nominal stem formation,
suffix, it is t h e o n l y e x c e p t i o n . u n d e r -ana- (130).
a S e e LtNDNER p. 54, t o p .
0*
84 I. A L L G E M E I N E S UND S P R A C H E . 4. VEDIC GRAMMAR.

17. Stems formed with the comparative suffix -lyams invariably accent
the root; e. g. jav-jyims- 'swifter'. When the stem is compounded with
a preposition the latter is accented; e. g. prati-cyav-tyams- 'pressing closer
against'.
18. The suffix -u is usually accented; e. g. ur-u- 'wide', pad-u- m. 'foot'.
The radical syllable is, however, not infrequently accented; e.g. tak-u-'speeding',
as-u- m. 'life'. The suffix is regularly accented in adjectives formed from
desiderative, causative, and denominative stems; e. g. dips-u- 'wishing to harm',
bhclvay-u- 'cherishing', aghay-u- 'malignant'.
19. Substantives formed with the suffix -us regularly accent the root
(excepting jan-us- 'birth'); e. g. dhan-us- 'bow'. But a few adjectives which
are never used as substantives accent the suffix; e. g. jay-us- 'victorious', but
tap-us- both 'hot' and 'heat'.
20. The suffix -u forming independent feminine substantives is regularly
accented; as cam-a- 'dish', vadh-fi- 'bride'.
21. When the suffix -ta forms past passive participles it is invariably
accented; e. g. ja-td- 'born', raks-i-td- 'protected'. But a few ordinary nouns
formed with this suffix accent the radical syllable: c-ta- 'variegated'; m.: gar-ta-
'car-seat', mar-ta- 'mortal', vd-ta- 'wind', hds-ta- 'hand'; n.: ds-ta- 'home',
nak-ta- 'night'.
22. Stems formed with the suffix -tar generally accent the root when
the meaning is participial, but the suffix when it is purely nominal; e. g.
da-tar- 'giving' (with acc.), but da-tar- 'giver'.
23. Stems formed with the suffix -ti accent the root more frequently
than the suffix; e. g. is-ti- 'offering', ksi-ti- (AV.) 'destruction', dha-ti- m. 'shaker',
but is-ti- 'desire', ksi-ti- 'abode', jha-ti- m. 'relative', ra-ti- 'gift'. Reduplicated
derivatives seem to have accented either the first syllable or the suffix; e. g.
didhi-ti- 'devotion' and carkr-ti- 'fame'. When these stems are compounded
with prepositions, the latter are nearly always accented; e. g. ii-hu-ti- 'offering';
the only exceptions are a-sak-ti- 'pursuit', a-su-ti- 'brew' and 'enlivening', and
abhi-s-ti- m. 'helper' beside abhi-s-ti- f. 'help'.
24. Derivatives formed with the suffix -tu, with some half dozen
exceptions, accent the root (invariably when they are used as infinitives); e. g.
tdn-tu- 'thread', but ak-tu- 'ray'.
25. The suffix -tnu is always accented; e. g. ha-tm'i- 'deadly', jigha-tnu-
'harming'.
26. Derivatives formed with the suffix -tra generally accent the root;
e. g. man-tra- 'prayer', but ksa-tra- 'dominion'.
27. Gerundives formed with the suffix -tva regularly accent the root;
e. g. kar-tva- 'to be made', vak-tva- 'to be said', bhavi-tva- 'future'.
28. Derivatives formed with the suffix -tha generally accent the
latter; e. g. uk-tha- n. 'saying'. Sometimes, however, the root is accented;
e. g. ar-tha- 'goal'. When the suffix is added with the connecting vowel -a-,
the latter is generally accented; e. g. uc-d-tha- 11. 'praise'.
29. The suffix -na when forming past passive participles is invariably
accented; e. g. bhin-na- 'split'. When forming ordinary nouns, whether
adjectives or masc. substantives, it is usually accented; e. g. r-nd- 'guilty',
ghr-na- m. 'heat'; but a few masculines accent the root, as kdr-tta- 'ear',
vdr-tia- 'colour', svap-na- 'sleep'. Neuters (except s'u-nd- 'welfare') and feminines
(-«a) accent the root; e. g. dn-na-1 'food', tf-na- 'grass', tf-s-na- 'thirst'.
1
Originally a past participle of ad- 'eat'.
 in. ACCENT. A C C E N T U A T I O N OF N O M I N A L STEMS. 85

3 0 . Derivatives formed with •»/' accent either the root or the suffix;
e. g. yo-ni- m. 'receptacle', but ag-ni- m. 'fire'.
31. T h e s u f f i x -nu is almost invariably accented; e. g. vag-nu- 'sound'.
A n exception is vis-nu-J, N. of god.
32. Derivatives formed with the s u f f i x -ma accent the suffix more than
twice as often as the r o o t ; e. g. tig-md- 'sharp', ghar-ma- 'heat', dha-ma-
'smoke', but li-ma- 'friend', so-tna- 'Soma'.
33. Derivatives formed with -man regularly accent the root in neuter
substantives; e. g. kar-man- 'action', jan-man- 'birth', tiA-man- 'name'. There
are, however, several masculine agent nouns which accent the suffix; e. g.
dar-man- 'breaker'. In several instances the accent varies in the same word
according to the gender and meaning; e. g. brah-man- n. 'prayer', brah-man-
m. 'one who p r a y s ' ; sad-man- n. 'seat', sad-man- m. 'sitter'. T h e s e stems when
c o m p o u n d e d with prepositions nearly always accent the latter; e.g. pra-bharman-
n. 'presentation'.
34. T h e participial s u f f i x -mana is never accented except in the
anomalous perfect participle sasr-mUna- ( R V 1 . ) = sasr-ana- 'speeding'. The
a c c e n t of these derivatives is regularly on the same syllable as in the tense-
stem to which the suffix is a d d e d ; e. g. yaja-mana- 'sacrificing', iccha-mana-
'desiring', idhya-m&na- 'being kindled', yaksyd-mSna- 'about to sacrifice'.
3 5 . Gerundives formed with the s u f f i x -/a invariably accent the root;
e. g. hav-ya- 'to be invoked'.
36. T h e s u f f i x -ra is usually a c c e n t e d ; e . g . ak-rd- m. 'banner', rud-ra-,
m. N. of a god, abh-ra- n. 'cloud'. T h e root is, however, accented in a g o o d
many words; e. g. gf-dh-ra- 'greedy', dj-ra- m. 'field', ind-ra-, N. of a g o d ,
dg-ra- n. 'point'.
37. Derivatives formed with the s u f f i x -/•/ accent the root oftener than
the suffix; e. g. bha-ri- 'abundant', but also sa-ri- m. 'patron'.
38. Derivatives formed with the s u f f i x -va accent the suffix rather
oftener than the root; e. g. rk-vd- 'praising', but also fbh-va- 'skilful'.
39. T h e root is regularly accented in derivatives formed with the s u f f i x
-van; e. g. kr-t-van- 'active', pat-van- 'flying', ydj-van- 'sacrificing'. This is the
case even when the stem is compounded with a preposition; e. g. vi-mfg-van-
( A V . ) 'cleansing'.
40. T h e s u f f i x e s -»ana, -vanu, -vani are always accented, the first
two on the final,1 the last on the initial syllable; e. g. vag-vand- 'talkative',
vag-vanit- m. 'noise', bkur-vdni- 'restless*.
41. Derivatives formed with the s u f f i x -vara chiefly accent the final
syllable when they are masc. nouns, but the root when they are neuter
substantives; e . g . i-t-vard-' going', Is'-vard- ( A V . ) 'able', but kdr-vara- n. 'deed',
gah-vara- ( A V . ) n. 'thicket'. T h e suffix appears with / instead of r in the
adjective vid-vala- 'cunning'.
42. T h e s u f f i x -1rams of the perfect participle is always accented, even
in the reduced form -us appearing in the weak cases; e. g. cakr-vAms- and
cakr-us- 'having made'.
43. Derivatives formed with the s u f f i x -vi from the simple root
accent the radical syllable, but the first syllable of the reduplicated root;
thus ghfs-vi- 'lively', but jjgr-vi- 'watchful'.

1 T h i s w o r d m a y , h o w e v e r , b e differently j altindischen S p r a c h e , A m s t e r d a m 1898; cp.

d e r i v e d ; possibly vi-mu- *der in die W e i t e | BLOOMFIELD, A J P h . 17, 427 f., 'crossing t h e
strebende', a c c o r d i n g to UHLENBECK, K u r i - 1 b a c k (of the world)',
gefasstes e t y m o l o g i s c h e s W o r t e r b u c h der j
86 I. ALLGEMEINES UND S P R A C H E . 4. VEDIC GRAMMAR.

44. Derivatives formed with the suffix -sa sometimes accent the root,
sometimes the suffix; e. g. grt-sa- 'adroit', ut-sa- m. 'fountain', but prk-sa-
'dappled', ghram-sa- m. 'sun's heat*.
45. The suffix -snu is always accented; e. g. ji-snu- 'victorious', vrdh-a-
snu- 'joyful', car-i-sttu- 'wandering', ni-sat-snu- 'sitting down', tapay-i-snu-
'tormenting', abhi-iocay-i-snu- (AV.) 'causing torments'.
B . In secondary derivation five groups of stems may be distinguished
with regard to accentuation: a. those which accent the suffix, being formed with
-ayand, -4yt, -dyya, -in, -iya, -ina, -iya, -mi, -¿nya, -ta, -tav-ya, -ti'd, -tva-ta,
-tvana, -ma, -maya, -mitt, -mna, -yin, -vd, -vat, -raid, -v'm; b. those in which
the suffix is not accented, being formed with -/aya, -tara, -ta, -tat, -tati, -fya,
-vya\ c. those in which only the first syllable is accented, being formed with
•i and -ni) d. those in which either the first or the last syllable is accented,
being formed by means of Vrddhi with the suffixes -eya, -a or -na (the last
two also without Vrddhi); e. those in which the accent is sometimes on the
suffix, and sometimes on one or other syllable of the primitive stem, being
formed with the suffixes -a, -ani, -ima, -I, -ka, -tana or -tna, -tama, -tha,
-bha, -mant, -ya, -ra, -/a, -van, -vant, -vaya, -sa. The following is a detailed
account of the accent in derivatives formed with the above secondary suffixes
in their alphabetical order.
1. S t e m s formed with the s u f f i x -a and Vrddhi of the first syllable
from primitive stems ending in -a are predominantly accented on the final
syllable. This is, however, mostly the case when the primitive is accented
on any syllable other than the last; e. g. amitra- 'hostile' from amltra- 'foe',
narSsamsa- 'belonging to Nara-samsa', saucadrathd-, patronymic from sucdd-ratha-
'having a shining car', pavamand- 'relating to the clear-flowing (pavamana-)
Soma'. In several instances, however, the primitive stem is also oxytone,
e. g. kausikd- 'belonging to Kusika'. On the other hand, stems formed with
Vrddhi sometimes accent the first syllable, when the primitive is otherwise
accented; e.g. madhyamdina- 'belonging to midday' {madhyam-dina-), saubhaga-
n. 'luck* from su-bhaga- 'lucky', viidhryasva- 'descendant of Vadhryasva'. The
derivative ddivodasa- 'belonging to Divodasa' is, however, formed from a stem
similarly accented (dh o-dasa-).
A similar rule prevails in the accentuation of stems derived from other
primitives by means of the s u f f i x -a and Vrddhi of the first syllable; e. g.
Hyas-a- 'made of metal' (dyas-), saumanas-d- 'benevolence' from su-mdnas-
'well-disposed'; also sometimes from stems similarly accented, as paidv-a-
'belonging to Pedu'. On the other hand, the first syllable is accented
in derivatives from primitives mostly accented on the last; e. g. ptirthiva-
'earthly' from prthivi- 'earth', mighona- 'belonging to the bountiful one'
(;maghdvan-); but sometimes also from stems similarly accented, as nahus-a-
'neighbouring' from ndhus- 'neighbour'. The accentuation is similar when the
secondary -a is added without Vrddhi; e. g. parus-a- 'knotty' from pdrus-
'knot', but hdrit-a- 'fallow' from harit-.
1. The s u f f i x -a forming feminines to masculines in -a retains the accent
on the same syllable as in the masculine; e. g. priya- beside priya- 'dear'.
3. S t e m s formed with the somewhat^ rare s u f f i x -am accent one of the
last three syllables; e. g. indrani- 'wife oflndra', mudgalanX- 'wife of Miidgala',
puruki'itsani- 'wife of Purukutsa', usTiidrani- 'queen of the Uslnaras'.
4. The only example of the patronymic s u f f i x -ayana in the RV.
kUnv-ayana- 'descendant of Kanva' is unaccented (occurring in the voc.
only); the final syllable seems to have been accented judging by daks-ayana-
 87

( V S . A V . ) 'son of Dak$a', and the fem. ramayani- ( A V . ) 'daughter of the

B l a c k one'. T h e derivative uksanyAyana-, N. of a man, is unique both in
accentuation and absence o f Vrddhi.
5. T h e suffix -iyT occurs accented o n the first syllable only in agn-Ayi-
'wife of Agni'; vrsakap-ayi- ( R V 1 . ) 'wife of Vrsakapi', occurring in the v o c .
only, is unaccented.
6. T h e suffix -ayya- forming gerundival adjectives is always accented
on its first syllable; e. g. pan-Ayya- 'to be admired'.
7. Derivatives formed with the suffix -/ and Vrddhi, being almost
exclusively patronymics, always accent the first syllable; thus Agnives'-i- 'son
o f Agnivesa', pdurukuts-i- 'descendant o f Purukutsa', prAtardan-i- 'descendant
o f Pratardana', prAhrad-i- ( A V . ) 'son of Prahrada', samvaran-i- 'descendant of
Samvarana'. Similarly formed and accented is sArath-i- 'charioteer' (from
sa-rdtha-m 'on the same chariot'). T w o other words, formed without Vrddhi,
take the secondary -i: tapus-i- 'burning' (tapus- 'heat') and, accented on the
final syllable, sucant-i-, N . of a man.
8. T h e very frequent suffix -in forming possessive adjectives is always
a c c e n t e d ; e. g. asv-in- 'possessing horses', dhan-in- 'wealthy'; manis-in- 'wise';
abhimat-in- 'insidious'. T h e adjective sSk-lrt- 'powerful' occurs once accented
o n the first syllable: sAk-t (1. 5 1 s ) ; the accentuation of this form and of the
two nominatives (each occurring once) ir-i 'violent' and sar-X 'speeding* is
perhaps due to error.
9. T h e accentuation of the suffix -ima, which is attached to three
stems in -tra- and to one in -ra, varies: khanitr-ima- 'made by digging',
krtr-i'ma- 'artificial', putr-ima- ( A V . ) 'purified'; agr-ima- 'foremost'.
10. T h e suffix -iya is regularly accented either on its first or its second
syllable; e. g. abhr-iya- and abhr-iya- 'derived from the clouds' (abhra-),
ksatr-lya- 'having authority' {ksatra-), amitr-iya- 'inimical' (am'ttra- 'foe'); agr-
iyd- 'foremost', indr-iya- 'belonging to Indra'. T h e only exceptions are rtv-iya-
(AV.) 'being in season' (rtu-), beside rtv-iya-, and srotr-iya- ( A V . ) 'learned'
(s'rotra- 'learning').
xi. Derivatives with the feminine suffix -/ commonly accent the same
syllable as the corresponding masculines (except oxytones); e. g. bhavant-l-
'being', m. bhdvant-. But the feminine in -/ from masculines in -a that are
not accented on the final syllable usually accents the -T (and follows the
radical I- declension); e. g. rath-i- 'charioteer' (m. f.) from ratha- 'chariot'. T h e
-1 is also accented when it forms the fem. of masc. oxytones in -u, e. g.
prthv-i- 'broad' {prth-1'1-); in -ant, e . g . usat-i- 'desiring' (us'-dnt-); in -tar, e . g .
avitr-i- 'protectress' (avi-tdr-); in -anc taking Samprasarapa, e. g. pratlc-i-
'facing' (praty-dnc-). T h e fem. in -t from masc. oxytones in -a sometimes
retains the accent on the suffix, e. g. devi- 'goddess' (deva- 'god'), but more
usually throws it back on the first syllable, e. g. drus-T- 'ruddy' (arusd-).
12. T h e suffix -ma is generally accented on its first syllable, rarely on
its last; e. g. apac-ina- 'western', samvatsar-ina- 'annual'; pratlc-Tna- 'turned
towards'. T h e suffix is unaccented only in mak-lna- ( R V 1 . ) 'mine'.
13. T h e suffix -Tya is always accented on its first syllable; e. g. arjlk-
iya- a kind of S o m a vessel, ci/iavan-iya- ( A V . ) 'sacrificial fire', grhamedh-iya-
'relating to the domestic sacrifice', parvat-iya- ( A V . ) 'mountainous'. Similarly
in the ordinals dvit-iya- 'second', trt-iya- 'third', tur-iya- 'fourth'.
14. T h e suffix -ena is accented on the final in its only occurrence in
the feminine form samidh-eni- 'relating to fuel' (samidh-).
15. T h e suffix -enya, nearly always forming gerundives, regularly accents
88

its first syllable; e. g. drs-inya- 'worthy to be seen'. T h e only exception is

vdr-enya- 'desirable'. Similarly accented are the ordinary adjectives vtr-Snya-
'manly' (vira-) and kirt-tnya- 'famous' (kirti- 'fame').
16. Derivatives formed with the s u f f i x -eya and Vrddhi accent the final
syllable when they have a patronymic sense, but otherwise the first; e. g.
Srs-tya- 'descendant of a seer" (fsi-), but paurus-eya- 'relating to man' (purusa-).
The analogy of the gerundive from roots ending in -.7, which is formed with
-eya (e. g. diya- 'to be given'), is followed by didrks-(ya- 'worth seeing"
(didrksti-) and sabh-iya- 'fit for an assembly' (sabhd-).
17. Derivatives formed with -ka are variously accented. Those which
have a diminutive sense regularly accent the suffix; e. g. arbha-ka- 'small',
kanina-ka-1 'youth', kumara-ka- 'little boy'. Otherwise the accent sometimes
remains on the same syllable as in the primitive; e. g. dnta-ka- 'making an
end' {tinta-), yusmd-ka- 'your' (yusmd-); or it shifts to the suffix, e. g. anya-ka-
'other' (anyd-), sana-ka- 'old' (sdtia-); or to the first syllable, e. g. riipa-ka- (AV.)
'having an assumed form' (rupd- 'form').
18. T h e rare suffix -ta is regularly accented: eka-td- (VS.) 'First', dvi-ta-
'Second', tri-ta- 'Third' as Proper Names, ava-td- 'well', muhur-ta- 'moment'.
19. Derivatives formed with the s u f f i x -tana or its syncopated form -tna
are variously accented: mi-tana- and mi-tna- 'present', sana-tdna- (AV.) and
sana-tna- (AV.) 'lasting', pra-tna- 'ancient'.
20. The suffix -tama when forming superlatives is hardly ever accented
the primitive nearly always retaining its original accent; e. g. tavas-tama-3
'very strong'. But when it forms ordinals the final syllable is accented; e. g.
sata-tama- 'hundredth'.
31. A few adjectives formed with -taya from numerals meaning 'consisting
of so many parts', accent the primitive: catus-taya- (AV.) 'fourfold', dasa-taya-
'tenfold'.
22. T h e suffix -tara forming comparatives is hardly ever accented, the
primitive retaining its original accent; e. g. rathi-tara- 'better car-fighter*. An
exception is vrtra-tara- 'a worse Vrtra'.
23. Derivatives formed with -t& regularly accentuate the syllable preceding
the suffix; e. g. a-go-ta- 'want of cows', dtvd-tn- 'divinity', purusa-ta- 'human
nature'. T h e only exception is a-vira-ta- 'want of sons'.
24. Derivatives formed with -tati and -tat have the same accentuation
as those formed with -ta; e. g. a-ristd-tati- 'security', deva-tati- 'divinity', sdm-
tati- 'good fortune'. The accent is exceptional in asta-tati- 'home' and daksa-
tati- (AV.) 'cleverness'.
25. T h e s u f f i x -tya, forming nouns from particles, is never accented:
dpa-tya- n . 'offspring', amd-tya- 'companion', Avis-tya- 'manifest', ni-tya- 'own',
nis-tya- 'foreign', sanu-tya- 'secret'. When attached to the substantive ap-
'water' it is, however, accented: ap-tyd- and ap-tyd- 'watery'.
26. T h e suffix -tva is invariably accented; e. g. amrta-tvd- 'immortality',
pati-tvd- 'matrimony'.
27. T h e very rare s u f f i x -tva-ta is accented on its first syllable: isita-
tvata- 'excitement', purusa-tvata- 'human nature*.
28. The s u f f i x -tvana is always accented on its final syllable; e. g. kavi-
tvana- 'wisdom', pati-tvana- 'matrimony', sakhi-tvana- 'friendship'.

1 Accented kaninaka- in the VS. The fem. tama- 'highest', iasval-tama- 'most frequent'
in the RV. is hanmahi- but in the AV 1 . (with the ordinal accent).
ianiniia-. 3 It is shifted in mrtfayal-tama- 'showing
'' Except purn-tama- 'very many' and ui- \ great compassion' (mj'dayat•). Cp. below 89.
 III. ACCENT. ACCENTUATION OF NOMINAI. STEMS. 89

29. T h e s u f f i x -thaJ forming ordinals from a few numerals and adjectives

o f a cognate sense from pronominal stems, is nearly always a c c e n t e d : thus
catur-tha- (AV.) 'fourth', sas-thd- ( A V . VS.) 'sixth', kati-thi- 'the how-maniest';
but sapta-tha- 'seventh'.
3 0 . T h e rare derivatives formed with the s u f f i x - n a are accented either
o n the first or the last syllable: strai-na- 'feminine' (stri- 'woman'), visu-na-
'various'; but pura-na-' 'ancient', sama-nd- like'.
31. With the s u f f i x -bha1 are formed the names of a few animals with
one exception accented on the final syllable: rsa-bha- and vrsa-bha- 'bull',
garda-bha- 'ass', sara-bha- ( A V . VS.) 'fabulous eight-legged animal', rasa-bha-
'ass'. This suffix also occurs once in the adjective sthula-bhd- ( A V . ) 'big*.
32. T h e s u f f i x -ma is regularly accented, whether forming superlatives;
e. g. adha-md- 'lowest', madhya-m.i- 'middle-most', or ordinals; e. g. asta-md-
'eighth'. A n exception is anta-ma-•> 'next'.
33. Derivatives formed with the s u f f i x -mant retain the accent of the
primitive, unless the latter is oxytone, when the accent in the great majority
of instances (about three-fourths) is thrown forward on the suffix; e. g. osadhi-
mant- ( A V . ) 'rich in herbs', asani-mant- 'bearing the thunderbolt'; but agni-
mant- 'having fire' (agni-).
34. T h e s u f f i x -maya is always accented on the first syllable; e. g. ayas-
mdya- 'made of metal', go-maya- 'consisting of cows', saka-mdya- 'arising from
excrement'.
35. T h e s u f f i x -min is accented (like -in) in the only two derivatives
formed with it: is-min- 'impetuous', and rg-min- 'jubilant with praise* (fc-).
36. T h e rare s u f f i x -mna is always accented: dyu-mnd- 'brightness', nr-mnd-
'manliness', ni-mna- 'depth', su-mna- 'welfare'.
3 7 . Derivatives formed with the s u f f i x -ya a n d V r d d h i accent the
initial or the final syllable with the same shift as appears in those formed
with -a: the initial, when the primitive is accented on the final (or some-
times a medial) syllable, but the final, when the primitive is accented on the
initial (or sometimes a medial syllable); e. g. ddiv-ya- 'divine' (deva- 'god'),
Artvij-ya- 'office of priest' (rtvij-), gdrhapat-ya- 'position of a householder'
(grha-pati-); but adit-ya- 'son of Aditi', prajdpat-ya- ( A V . ) 'relating to Prajapati'.
In a very few instances the accent remains unchanged, as ndhipat-ya- 'lord-
ship' (ddhi-pati- 'lord'), paums-ya- 'manliness' (pums- 'man'), vaii-ya- 'man of
the third caste' (vis- 'settler'), sraisth-ya- ( A V . ) 'superiority' (sristha- 'best');
while in several instances it shifts from the final syllable to the suffix (instead
of to the initial syllable); e. g. knv-ya- 'descendant of K a v i ' (but kav-ya-
'endowed with the qualities of a sage', kavi-).
a . In derivatives formed w i t h o u t V r d d h i the accentuation is to some
extent similar; thus a final accent shifts to the first syllable; e. g. in
pitr-ya- 'belonging to the fathers' (pitf'•-), prdtijan-ya- 'adverse' {prati-jand-
'adversary' A V . ) ; or from the first to the last; e. g. grJm-y.l- 'belonging to
the village' (grama-); or it remains on the first syllable; e. g. av-ya- 'belonging
to sheep' (dvi-), gav-ya- 'derived from cows' (gJ-); or it shifts from the final
syllable to the suffix (instead of the first syllable); e. g. kav-ya- 'wise' (kavi-).
But here the accent may also remain on or be shifted to a medial syllable;
e. g. svaraj-ya- 'autocracy' (svarjj- 'sovereign'), visvadev-ya- 'belonging to all
gods' (visvd-dcva-); hiranya-ya- 'golden' (hiranya- 'gold'), avya-ya- 'derived from
sheep' (beside avya-ya-), gavyd-ya- 'derived from cows' (beside gavya-).

1 Cp. BB. 28, 318, bottom. * Cp. PRELLWITZ, BB. 22, 74—114, on animal names in -bha.
3 But antamlbhik (I. 165").
9°

B u t a peculiarity of the derivatives formed without Vrddhi is that the

majority of them h a v e the Svarita accent on the suffix; e. g. rajan-ya-
'belonging to the royal class' (rdjan-); dosan-ya- 'relating to the arm' (dosan-);
vayav-ya- 'belonging to Wind' (vayu-); -dundubh-yii- (VS.) 'relating to a
drum' (dundubhibudhn-ya- 'belonging to the bottom' (budhna-). T h e suffix
thus a c c e n t e d also appears in the gerundive in -tav-ya- (twice found in the
A V . ) f o r m e d from an infinitive stem in -tu ( 5 8 5 , 4 ) .
3 8 . T h e rare s u f f i x -yin is (like -in) always a c c e n t e d : atata-yln- ( V S . )
'having one's b o w drawn', dhanva-yln- ( V S . ) 'bearing a bow', mara-yln-, N. of
a man, srka-yln- (VS.) 'having a spear', siadha-yin- (VS.) 'owning the S v a d h a ' .
3 9 . Derivatives f o r m e d with -ra having a comparative sense (chiefly f r o m
prepositions) accent the initial syllable: ddha-ra- 'lower', apa-ra- 'later 1 , ava-ra-
'lower", upa-ra- 'lower', dnta-ra-1 'near' ( dnta - 'end'). Other nouns f o r m e d
with the suffix are chiefly a c c e n t e d on the final syllable; e. g. a-srl-ra- 'ugly',
dhum-ra- ( V S . ) 'dusky' (dhurrta- 'smoke'), pSmsu-rd- 'dusty, rath-i-rd- 'riding
in a chariot'; but sometimes otherwise; thus iignidh-ra- 'belonging to the fire-
kindler' ( agnidh-), medh-i-ra- 'wise', karmii-ra- 'smith'.
4 0 . Derivatives formed with -la nearly always accent the suffix; e. g.
a-sll-la- (AV.) 'ugly', jiva-la- (AV.) 'lively', bahu-ld- 'abundant', madhu-ld-
'sweet'; but tllvi-la- 'fertile', seva-la- ( A V . ) 'slimy', s'is/i-Ja- 'little child'.
4r. T h e s u f f i x -va is regularly a c c e n t e d : arna-vd- 'billowy', kesa-ia-
( A V . ) 'hairy', anji-vd- ( A V . ) 'slippery', santi-va- (AV.) 'friendly', sraddhi-va-
'credible'.
42. T h e fern, substantives formed from adverbs or prepositions with the
s u f f i x -vat always accent the final syllable: arva-vat- 'proximity', a-vat- ( A V . )
'proximity', ud-vat- 'height', ni-vat- 'depth', para-vat- 'distance', pra-vat- 'height',
sam-vat- 'region'.
4 3 . Derivatives f o r m e d with the s u f f i x -1tan may have the accent on
any syllable; e. g. athar-van, 'fire-priest', indhan-van- 'possessed of fuel', fgha-
van- 'violent'; rtd-van- 'regular", magha-van- 'bountiful'; aratx-van- 'hostile',
srusti-van- 'obedient'.
4 4 . Derivatives f o r m e d with -1rant generally retain the original accent
except in o x y t o n e stems (if not ending in a or a), which as a rule throw it
on the s u f f i x ; e. g. kesa-vant- 'hairy', putra-vant- (VS.) 'having a son', praja-
vant- 'having offspring', dydvaprthivi-vant- 'connected with heaven and earth';
but agni-vdnt- 'having fire' (agn!-), asan-vant ( A V . ) 'having a mouth'. The
accent is anomalously shifted in krsana-vant- 'decorated with pearls' (kfs'aua-)
and visa-vdnl- 'central' (visu-) 'in both directions'.
4 5 . T h e very rare derivatives f o r m e d with the suffix -vaya accent
either the suffix or the primitive: dru-vdya- ( A V . ) 'wooden dish' a n d catur-
vaya- 'fourfold'.
46. Derivatives formed with the rare s u f f i x -vala accent their final syllable:
krsj-vala- 'peasant', nad-vala- ( V S . ) 'reed bed'.
4 7 . T h e s u f f i x -vin is always a c c e n t e d ; e. g. namas-vin- 'reverential',
yasas-vin- ( A V . ) 'beautiful', medha-vin- ( A V . ) 'wise', dhrsad-vin- 'bold'.
4 8 . T h e very rare names of relationship formed with the s u f f i x -vya
accent the first syllable: bhrAtr-iya- ( A V . ) 'nephew'.
49. A f e w adjectives and substantives formed with the s u f f i x -sa
accent either the final or, less often, the first or s e c o n d syllable: arva-sa- or

1
This word may, however, be derived from attiar- 'within', with B R . and WHITNEY
1209 i.
 9*

árva-sa- 'hasting', eía-sá- o r éta-sa- ' v a r i e g a t e d ' , babhlu-sá- ( V S . MS.) 'brownish',

roma-sá- 'hairy', yuva-sá- 'youthful', añku-sá- ' h o o k ' , turvá-sa-, N. of a man.
Perhaps also kásma-sa- ( A V . ) 'stupefaction'(?), and kalá-sa- 'jar'.

2. Accentuation of Compounds.
AUFRECHT, De accentu compositorum Sanscriticorum, Bonn 1847. — GARBE, K Z .
23, 470f. — REUTER, Die altindischen nominalcomposita, ihrer betonung nach unter-
sucht, KZ. 31, 157—232; 485—612. — WACKERNAGEL, Allindische Grammatik 2»,
p. 40—43, etc.

87. T h e rule as to the accentuation of compounds, stated in the most

general way, is that iteratives, possessives, and governing compounds place
the accent on the first member; determinatives and regularly formed copula-
tives (with one accent) on the last member and to a large extent on its final
syllable. Speaking generally the accent of a c o m p o u n d is that of one of its
members. But some words always change their accent when c o m p o u n d e d ;
thus visva- 'all' regularly b e c o m e s visvá-, and in the later Samhitás sárva-
'all' sometimes becomes sarvd-. Other words when c o m p o u n d e d change their
accent in certain combinations only; thus some paroxytones b e c o m e oxytone,
as parva- 'prior' in pürvá-citti- 'foreboding', pürvá-pxti- 'precedence in drinking',
pürvá-hüti- 'first invocation'; n¿ma- 'one' in nemá-dhiti- 'separation'; m¿dha-
'sacrifice' in medhá-pati- 'lord of sacrifice', and medhá-sati- 'receiving the
oblation'; vrsan- in vrsá-kapi-, N. of a m o n k e y ; on the other hand some
oxytones throw b a c k the accent, as khadi- 'bracelet' in khádi-hasta- 'having
hands adorned with bracelets'; grXvá- 'neck' in tuvi-griva- 'powerful-necked';
vtrá- 'hero' in puru-vira- 'possessed of many men' and su-vira- 'heroic'; dhümá-
'smoke' in saka-dháma- ( A V . ) 'smoke of cowdung'.
A n adjective compound may shift the accent from one member to the
other if it becomes a substantive or a Proper N a m e ; thus a-ksdra- 'im-
perishable', d-ksara- 'speech'; sú-krta- 'well done', su-krtá- n. 'good d e e d ' ;
d-rciya- 'niggardly', a-ráyaN. of a demon.
88. In iteratives, which may consist of repeated nouns, pronouns,
adverbs, prepositions, or particles, the first member alone is accented, the
two words being separated by A v a g r a h a in the P a d a text, like the members
of other compounds. Examples a r e : áhar-ahar jayate masi-masi (x. 5 2 J) 'day
after d a y h e is b o r n , m o n t h after m o n t h ' ; yád-yad yámi tád Á bhara (VIII. 6 1 6 )
'bring to m e w h a t e v e r I a s k ' ; yátha-yatha matáyah sánti nrmím ( x . n i 1 ) ' a s
a r e the d e s i r e s o f m e n in e a c h c a s e ' ; adyádya sváh-sva ¡ndra trásva par¿ ca
nah (VIII. 6 1 1 ' ) 'on each to-day, on each to-morrow protect us, Indra, and
in the future'. The prepositions which appear as iteratives are upa, para,
prá, sám; e. g. prá-pra pümás tuvijatásya sasyate mahitvám (1. 1 3 8 1 ) 'forth
and again the greatness of the mighty Pü$an is praised' 1 . T h e only verbal
iterative occurring is piba-piba (11. 1 1 " ) 2 'drink again and again'.
89. Governing compounds always accent the first member when it is
a verbal n o u n ' , as trasá-dasyu- 'terrifying the foe', N. of a man. W h e n the
first member is a present or aorist participle, its final syllable is invariably
accented, whatever the original accentuation may have been, e. g. vidad-vasu-
'winning wealth', tarád-dvesas- 'overcoming (tdrat-) foes'.

1 In a few instances the repeated 1 Otherwise a repeated verbal form is

words are not treated as a compound and not treated as an iterative, e. g. stuhi stuhi
are both accented, as rut nú 'now, now', (vui. 13°).
ihihá (AV.) 'here, here', sám. sám (AV.). 3 Except siifa-nari- 'helping men'.
92 I . ALLGEMEINES UND S P R A C H E . 4. V E D I C GRAMMAR.

a. When the first member is a preposition, the accentuation is much

the same as in possessives: either the first member is accented on its proper
syllable, as abhi-dyu- 'directed to heaven'; or the last member on the final
syllable, but only when it ends in the compositional suffix -a, or when as a
simple word it is not accented on the final syllable; e.g. adhas-pad-a- 'being
under the feet', anu-kamd- 'according to wish' (kfima-). The accentuation of
api-prtina- (£ -r-) 'accompanying the breath' is quite exceptional.
90. A. Possessive compounds (Bahuvrlhis) normally accent the first
member on the same syllable as the simple word, e. g. rdja-putra- 'having
kings as sons' (but raja-putra- 'son of a king'). Other examples are:
dn-abhimlata-varna- 'whose colour is not dimmed', iddhiigni- 'whose fire is
kindled', indra-jyestha- 'having Indra as chief', indra-sakhi- 'having Indra as
a friend', ghrta-prstha- 'butter-backed', ruiad-vatsa- 'having a bright calf',
sahasra-pad- 'thousand-footed". Similarly when the first member is a pre-
position, an ordinary adverb, or saha- and (chiefly in the later Vedas) fa-
in the sense of 'accompanied by'; e.g. nir-hasta- (AV.) 'handless', pra-mahas-
'having pre-eminent might', vi-grlva- 'wrynecked', visvdto-mukha- 'facing in all
directions', sa/id-vatsa- 'accompanied by her calf', sd-kama- ('accompanied by' - )
'fulfilling desires' (VS. 1 , si-eel as- 'intelligent' 2 .
a. The original accent of the first member is sometimes changed. I. T h e adjective
visva• 'all' always, and (owing to its influence) sdiva- 'all' sometimes in the later Sam-
hitas, shift their accent to the final syllable; e. g. viiva-peias- 'having all adornment',
sarva-janman(AV.), sari'a-siiddha-vala- (VS.) 'having a completely white tail', satvayus-
(VS.) 'having all life' 4 . — 2. Present participles in several instances shift the accent to
their final syllable; e. g. krandad-itfi- 'having roaring (krandat-) speed', d/avad-aiva-
'having swift (dravat-p steeds'. Other participles with this shift of accent are area/- and
bhandat- 'shining', rapsat- 'swelling', svanat- 'resounding'. — 3. There are also a few
miscellaneous examples of shift of accent in the first member: abhisti-dyumna- 'abounding
in aid', jyoti-ratha- 'whose car is light' (jyMis-), dadrsand-paii- 'whose felly is visible'
(dadfsana-), avakolba- (AV.) 'surrounded with A v a k a plants' (avaka-); calur-aitga- 'four-
membered' (caiur-\ khadi-hasia- 'having hands adorned with bracelets' (khadi-).
B. About one eighth of the total number of Bahuvrlhis accent the second
member, and in the majority of instances on the final syllable.
a. This accentuation is common when the first member is a dissyllabic
adjective ending in i or u. It is invariable in the R V . after the very frequent
puri'i- 'much' and the less frequent krdhu- 'shortened', bahu- 'much', siti-
'white'; e. g. puru-putrd- 'having many sons', puru-vtira- 'having many
treasures', krdhu-karna- 'having short ears', bahv-annd-6 'having much food'
{anna-), siti-pad- 'white-footed'. Examples of this accentuation after other
adjectives ending in i and u are: asu-he'sas- 'having swift steeds', uru-ksdya-
'having a wide abode', rju-kratu- 'whose works are right', tuvi-dyumnd- 'having
great glory', trsu-cydvas- 'moving greedily', prthu-pdksas- 'broad-flanked', vibhu-
krdtu- 'having great strength', vllu-panl- 'strong-hoofed', hiri-siprd- 'golden-
cheeked' 7 . In the later Samhitas there is an increasing tendency to tollow

1 When another adjective or an adverb sarva- in the A V . , where sarva- as first

precedes the first member, it has the a c c e n t ; , member is common.
e. g. ika-siti-pad- (VS. TS.) 'having one foot 1 4 satva- shows this shift of accent in the
white'; cp. W A C K E R N A G E L 2 1 , p. 2 9 1 . R V . in the adverb sarva-tas 'from all sides'
2 There are, however, a few exceptions ' and in the derivative sarva-hiti• 'totality',
in which the final member is accented, as 5 Here the accent may be affected by
vi-iikha- 'hairless' (but vi-iikha- AV.), puro- that of the adverb draval 'swiftly'.
ratha- 'whose car is foremost', sa-prathas- 'ex- 6 A f t e r bahu- the final syllable is always
tensive', siiiga- (KV.) 'together with the limbs', accented, even in the later Samhitas.
3 This is the only example (occurring beside | 1 Both accentuations occur in pftfm•
zi.wii-janman-) cf this shift of accent in 1 budhtta- and pythit-budhna- 'broad-based'.
 HL ACCENT. ACCENTUATION OF COMPOUNDS. 93

the general rule; e. g. puru-naman- (AV.) 'many-named', Uti-kakud- 'having a

white hump', and siti-bhasad- 'having white buttocks' (TS. v. 6. 14 1 ).
b. Bahuvrihis beginning with dvi- and tri- generally accent the second
member; e. g. dvi-pad- 'two-footed', dvi-dhdra- 'forming two streams', tri-tantu-
'having three webs', tri-nibhi- 'having three naves', tri-vandhura- 'three-seated'
The only exceptions to this rule in the R V . are dvi-savas- 'having twofold
might", try-ambaka- 'having three mothers' and try-hsir- 'having three products
of milk'. The later Samhitas accent dvi- and tri- in new Bahuvrihis as often
as n o t In a few possessives beginning with other numerals the second
member is accented on the last syllable, e. g. catur-aksa- 'four-eyed".
c. Possessives beginning with the negative prefix a- or an- almost
invariably accent the final syllable irrespectively of the original accent of the
second member (doubtless in order to distinguish them clearly from deter-
minatives); e. g. a-dant- 'toothless', a-phala- 'unfruitful' {phala-), a-bala- 'not
possessing strength' (bala-). A very few accent the penultimate; a-bhrntr-3
(AV.) 'brotherless', a-vira- 'childless', a-s'/sas- 'without offspring'. On the other
hand a good many (though only a small proportion of the whole) accent the
prefix (like determinatives), especially when the second member is a noun
formed with the suffix -//; e. g. 4 a-gu- 'kineless', a-jhas- 'kinless', a-dyu- 'not
burning*, an-api- Tdnless', a-prajas- (AV.) 'childless', a-mrtyu- 'deathless', a-hri-
'bold', a-ksiti- 'imperishable'».
d. Possessives beginning with dus-6 'ill' or su- 'well' regularly accent the
second member, usually on the original syllable; e. g. dur-manman- 'ill disposed',
su-bhaga- 'well endowed'. There is, however, a tendency to throw the accent
forward on the final syllable; e.g. sv-anguri- 'fair-fingered' (anguri-), su-phala-
(AV.) 'fruitful', su-bandhu- (AV.) 7 'closely related' 8 . On the other hand, the
accent is in a few instances shifted from the final to the penultimate syllable,
as su-vira- 'rich in heroes' (vlra-), and su-gandhi- 'sweet-smelling' beside su-
gandhi- (from gandha- 'smell') 9.
91. D e t e r m i n a t i v e s as a rule a c c e n t t h e last m e m b e r , and pre-
vailingly on the final syllable.
A . 1. In the descriptive type, that is, those in which a substantive is
described by an adjective or an appositional substantive (Karmadharaya) and
those in which a verbal noun is described by an adverbial word, the accent
is on the final syllable; e. g. krsna-sakuna- (AV.) 'black bird', maha-dhand-
'great spoil', ajMta-yaksma- 'unknown disease', yavayat-sakha- 'a protecting
friend', rija-yaksma- ('king' — ) 'royal disease' 10 , sUrya-svit- 'sun-bright'; pura-etj--
'going before', prathama-ja- 'first-born', prStar-yu;-*1 'early yoked', svayam-bha-
'self-existent', dus-kft- 'acting wickedly', su-pra-tar-12 'victorious', a-gharin-
(AV.) 'not anointing', a-cit- 'senseless', a-jarayu'not aging', a-ji'tr- 'unaging'.

1 But as/a-vandhura• 'having eight car- J 8 F o r other examples see WACKERNAGEL

seats'. 2 ' , p. 294, bottom.
2 C p . WHITNEY 1300 c. 9 Op. c i t . 2', p . 2 9 5 7, note.
3 But in the R V . with the usual accen- ' 1 0 Exceptions, w h e n the first member is

tuation a-bhratr-. . a noun, are all compounds formed with

4 For many other examples see W A C K E R - ' viiva- 'all', as visvd-manusa- 'every man',
N A G E L 2', 1 1 4 note (p. 293). also madhyam-dtna- 'midday', vf;a-tapi- ' m a l e
5 T h e only possessive of this kind in j ape', in all of w h i c h the original accent of
which the second member ends in -ti and the first member is shifted.
accents the final syllable seems to be 11 adhri-gu- 'irresistible' and sadha-stha-
a-gavyuti- 'pastureless'. 'standing together', are exceptions.
6 T h e only exception in the case of dus- 11 sv-a-vrj- 'easy to acquire' is an ex-
is dur-aiir- 'ill-mixed'. ception.
7 T h e R V . retains the original accent, 13 But a-mavisnu- 'immoveable'.
su-phalasu-bandhu-. \
94

a-yoddhf- 'not fighting', a-rajin- 'not shining', a-pra-mrs-ya-'1 'indestructible',

a-budh-ya- 'not to be wakened', an-aty-ud-ya- (AV.) 'unspeakable', art-adhrs-ya-
'unassailable', an-amayi-tnu- 'not making ill'.
a. When, however, the second member ends in -van, -man or -«, or
has the form of a gerundive used as a neuter substantive, the penultimate
(radical) syllable is accented; e. g. raghu-patvan- 'swift-flying', puro-yavan-3
'going in front'; su-tarman- 'crossing well', vllu-pdtman- 'flying mightily', raghu-
ySman- 'going swiftly', su-vahman- 'driving well', dur-grbhi- 'hard to hold',
rju-vani 'striving forward', tuvi-svani- 'roaring mightily', pQrva-pityya- and parva-
p/ya- n. 'precedence in drinking', saha-sSyya- n. 'act of lying together', amutra-
bhfiya-3 (VS.) n. 'state of being in the other world'.
2. The first m e m b e r is, however, a c c e n t e d under certain conditions,
a. It is generally accented if it is an adverbial word and the last member is
a past participle in -ta or -na* or a verbal noun in -it; e. g. damsu-jata-
'speeding wondrously', dur-hita- 'faring ill', sdna-sruta-5 'famed from of old';
puro-hiti- 'priestly ministration', sadha-stuti- 'joint praise'.—b. T h e p r i v a t i v e
particle a- or an- when compounded with a participle 6 , adjective, or substantive
is n e a r l y a l w a y s a c c e n t e d ; e. g. dn-adant-7 'not eating', d-ditsant- 'not
wishing to give', d-manyamana- 'not thinking', a-himsana- 'not injuring',
a-vidvams- 'not knowing', d-krta-8 'not done'; d-kr-a-9 'inactive', a-susv-i- 'not
pressing Soma', d-tandra- 'unwearied', d-kumara-xo 'not a child'; a-citti- 'thought-
lessness'. The particle is regularly accented when it negatives a compound;
e. g. a-dus-krt- 'not doing ill', an-asva-da- 'not giving a horse', d-pascud-daghvan-
'not remaining behind'; a-punar-diyamana(AV.) 'not being given back',
dn-agni-dagdha- 'not burnt with fire', an-abhi-sasta-12 'blameless'.
B . i. D e p e n d e n t d e t e r m i n a t i v e s as a rule a c c e n t t h e second
m e m b e r and that mostly on the last syllable, even if the simple word is
not an oxytone.
a. When the second member is a root'-1, a verbal noun in -a, an ordinary
substantive (without verbal sense), or an adjective ending in -in1*, the final

' T h i s is t h e regular accent of t h e ' tives a-rutidhat-i- (AV.) a name, a n d a-jnrant-l-

gerundive with t h e n e g a t i v e prefix, which (VS.) ' u n a g i n g ' .
is, however, a c c e n t e d in s o m e half dozen in- j * E x c e p t i o n s are a cilia-, a-dfs/a-, a-mfta
stances : d-^ohya-, n-jrsya-, a-dabhya-, a-nedyaa-yitta- n. 'myriad' but (AV.) a-yuta- 'undisturb-
a-yabhya- (AV.) and aghnya- beside a-g/inya-. ed', a-turta- (beside d-liirta-). a bhinna- (AV.)
T w o of these c o m p o u n d s in t h e AV. retain ! beside a-bhinna-.
t h e Svarita of the simple g e r u n d i v e : an- j 9 T h e r e a r e also some verbal derivatives
ativyadhya- and att-adharsya-. \ in -a w h i c h accent the s e c o n d m e m b e r ;
2 satya-madvan- 'truly rejoicing' is an ex- j e. g. a-tsar-a- 'imperishable', a-jar-a 'un-
ception. a g i n g ' , a-dabh-a- 'not-deceiving', a/fp-a-
3 sadha-stutya- n. 'joint praise', is an ex- . 'dissatisfied', a vodk a- 'inviolable', a vydh-a-
ception. 'not f u r t h e r i n g ' , att-avrask-a (AV.) 'not falling
4 H e r e t h e a d v e r b is treated like a pre- o f f ' ; cp. WHITNEY 1283—88.
position c o m p o u n d e d with a past participle. '» T h e r e are also several o r d i n a r y nouns
5 T h e r e are a good many exceptions in w h i c h are a c c e n t e d as second m e m b e r ; e. g.
which t h e original accent of the past parti- a ci/rd- 'colourless', a-mitra- ' e n e m y ' , -a-vira-
ciple r e m a i n s on t h e final syllable; e. g. 'unmanly'.
tirvi-jatd- 'mightily born', dus-krta- 'ill d o n e ' , " But a ttipadyamaua- (AV.) ' n o t going to
su jata- (beside sii jata-). T h i s is t h e regular : r e s t ' where RV. h a s a-nt-padyamatta.
accentuation w h e n t h e first m e m b e r \spuru-; " But att-a-sasia- (KV 1 .) ' n o t praised',
e. g. puru-f/utd- ' m u c h praised'. a-pra-iasfa- beside a pra sasta- ' n o t praised'.
6
Not, however, w h e n t h e s e c o n d m e m b e r "J T h e r e are a few exceptions w h e n deri-
is a gerundive, a root, or a noun with v e r b a l : vation f r o m a r o o t is not clear, as in <fy«-
m e a n i n g e n d i n g in -yu, -tnu, -snu, -in, -tr-\ dhi- ' p l a n t ' ; otherwise -dhi f r o m dha- 'put'
see examples a b o v e (A l). is regularly a c c e n t e d ; e. g. isu-dhi 'quiver*.
7 But a-sascant- beside a-sascant- ' n o t M I'his suffix b e i n g invariably a c c e n t e d in
ceasing', a-codant- (v. 44') and as substan- t h e simple w o r d (86 B. 8).
 III. ACCENT. ACCENTUATION OF COMPOUNDS. 95

syllable is regularly accented; e. g. gotra-bhid- 'opening the cowpens', ghrta-

vfdh- 'delighting in ghee', divi-sprs- 'touching the sky', patam-ga- 'going by
flight', 'flying', varuna-dhru-t- 'deceiving Varuiia'; agnim-indh-d-1 'fire-kindling*,
hasta-grabh-a- 'hand-grasping', puram-dar-a- 'fort-destroying'; uda-meghd- 'shower
o f water', go-saphd- (VS.) 'cow's hoof', jlva-loka- 'world of the living', indra-
sens- 'Indra's missile' (s/n3-), krsnajind- (AV. TS.) 'hide (ajitia-) of the black
antelope', deva-kosa-2 (AV.) 'cask (kosa-) of the gods', deva.-ma.nd-* 'abode
(mdna-) of the gods'; uktha-sams-in- 'uttering praise', bhadra-vad-itt- 'uttering
auspicious cries'.
cu The word pati- 'lord' follows this rule in only a few compounds occurring in
the later Samhitis; thus in the AV.: apsara-pati- 'lord of the Apsarases', vraja-pati- 'lord
of a troop' (vraia-pati-. RV.); in the VS.: amhasas-pati- 'lord of perplexity', upa-pati-
'paramour', edidhifuh-pati- 'husband of a younger sister', nadi-pati- 'lord of rivers'; in the
MS.: ahar-pati- 'lord of day', cit-pati- 'lord of thought', vak-pati- 'lord of speech'. In a
few determinatives pati- retains its own accent as second member, as nr-pari- 'lord of
men', rayi-pati- 'lord of wealth', vis-pati- 'lord of the tribe', also the f. in vasu-patm-
'mistress of wealth', vts-patni-4 'mistress of the tribe'; in the VS. ahar-pati-, cit-pati-,
vak-pati-\ in the AV. rtu-pati- 'lord of proper seasons', pasu-pati- 'lord of animals' (VS.),
pusfi-pati- 'lord of welfare', bhiita-pati- 'lord of beings', stha-paii- 5 'governor'. In compounds
with pati-, however, the first member is usually accented, there being 22 cases in the
RV., besides 10 with paitii--, e. g. grha-pati- 'lord of the house', go-pati• "lord of kine',
pasu-pati- 'lord of creatures', medha-pati-<> 'lord of animal sacrifice' [mldha-"), vasu-pati-
'lord of wealth', vija-pati- 'lord of booty', svar-pati-1 'lord of light'; grhd-patni- 'mistress
of the house', deva-patm- 'wife of a god', vaja-patnT- 'queen of booty'. In the AV., of
15 new masculines ending in -pati- more than half accent the first member as do all the
8 new ones ending in patrit-; e. g. atithi-pati- 'entertainer of a guest'. In the other
Samhitis also occur: ksatra-pati- (VS.) 'lord of dominions', bhuva-pati- (VS.) 'lord of the
atmosphere', bhuvana-pati- (VS. TS.) 'lord of beings', bhu-pati- (TS.) 'lord of the world',
samvcia-pati- (VS.) 'lord of rest', viptu-patni- (VS. TS.) 'Visnu's wife' 8 .
b. Determinatives which have as their second member verbal nouns in
-ana9, adjectives in -i and -van, as well as action nouns in -ya, regularly accent
the radical syllable of the second member; e. g. deva-mad-ana- 'exhilarating
the gods', kcsa-vardh-ana-,0 'causing the hair to grow'; pathi-raks-i- 'protecting
the road'; soma-pi-van- 'somadrinking', talpa-si-van- 'lying on the couch',
prdtar-i-t-van-11 'coming early'; ahi-hat-ya- 'slaughter of the dragon', deva-
ha-ya- 'invocation of the gods', mantra-iru-t-ya- n. 'listening to counsel', vrtra-
tir-ya'conquest of Vftra'.
2 . Dependent determinatives, however, which have as their second
member past passive participles in -ta and -na or action nouns in -ti accent

1
dugha- retains its original accent, as I 7 svti-pati- 'one's own lord' is a Karma-
madhu-dugha- 'yielding mead', kima-dugha- , dhlraya; as a Bahuvrlhi it is accented sva-
(AV. VS.) 'yielding desires'. A fev- others pati- (AV.) 'having an own consort'.
have the original accent of the first member: 8 On doubly accented compounds with
marud-vrdha- 'delighting in the Maruts', -pati- see below (3).
dtvi-cata- (AV.) 'moving in the sky', suti kara- 9 Just as when such nouns are compounded
'active at the Soma offering'. Cp. WHITNEY with prepositions.
1278. 1 0 The very few apparent exceptions to
2 A few accent the penultimate syllable this rule are due to these words losing their

of the final member with shift of the original verbal character; e. g. yamasadana- ;AV.)
accent, as go dhurna- (VS.) 'wheat', saia- 'Yama's realm'.
1ihuma (AV.), yama-rajya-(AV. VS.) 'Yama's ' ' In miitari-svan- and matari bhvan- the
sway' (ni/ya-); cp. WACKERNAGEL 2>, p. 268, suffix is probably -a«; here the original
top, note. 1 accent of the first member (if it is the loc.
J But deva-yana- 'going to the gods'. j matari) has shifted, perhaps owing to the
4 Also the Karmadharaya sa patni- 'cowife' j influence of words like pratar-i-tvan-.
and the Bahuvrlhi su-patm- 'having a good , An exception is sadha-stu-t-ya- 'joint
husband'. 1 praise'. A few feminines in -yd, which are

5 Cp. BLOOMFIELD, SBE. 42, 319. [closely allied to these neuters in -ya, retain
6 In K. medha-pati-. | their accent on the final syllable, as dm a-
96

the first member (like a preposition); e. g. indra-prasuta- 'incited by Indra',

deva-hita- 'ordained by the gods', hasta-yata- 'guided by the hand' 1 ; deva-
hati-2 'invocation of the gods', dhdna-snti-3 'winning of wealth'.
3. Double accentuation. A certain number of determinative compounds,
syntactical in origin, which have a genitive case-form in the first member, and
nearly always -pati- in the second, are doubly accented. Such are bf-has-
pati- and brahmanas-pati-4 'lord of prayer', gnAs-pati- 'husband of a divine
woman' (with the anomalous fem. gnfis-patni- 'divine wife'), jss-pdti-5 'head
of a family'. The compound sddas-pati- 'lord of the seat' ( s a d a s - ) probably
stands by haplology for *sadasas-pati-, but vana-s-pati-6 'lord of the wood'
perhaps, and ratha-s-pati- 'lord of the car' ( r a t h a - ) probably, owe their s to
the analogy of bj-has-pati-7. Though without case-ending in the first member,
sdci-pdti- 'lord of might' follows the analogy of the above compounds. Other
doubly accented compounds with case-form in the first member but not ending
in -pati- are sunah-sepa- 'Dog's tail', N. of a man; ddsyave-vrka- 'Wolf to the
Dasyu', N. of a man; apim-ndpat- 'son of waters', the analogy of which is
followed by tdnU-napat- 'son of himself' (tana-) though it is without case-
ending in the first member; nara-sdmsa-8 'Praise of men' (for *nara>n-sdmia-),
the analogy of which is followed by nr-sdmsa-. The name nabha-nidislha-
seems to contain an old locative in the first member, while the uninflected
stem appears in is-patra- (TS. 11. 5. 9 3 ) 'vessel for the mouth'.
92. 1. The regular class of copulatives, which have only one accent,
places the acute on the final syllable 9 irrespective of the accent of the
uncompounded word. In the plural occur: ajavdyah m. 'goats and sheep',
uktharkA n. 'praises and songs', ahoratrAni 'days and nights'; in the dual:
rk-sUmi n. 'song and chant', satyanrte n. 'truth and untruth', sisananasani n.
'what eats and does not eat'; in the singular: nilalohitam n. 'blue and red' 1 ",
istd-pBrtam1' n. 'what is sacrificed and presented', kesa-smasru- (AV.) n. 'hair
and beard', ahjannbhyahjandm (AV.) n. 'salve and ointment", kasipu-barhanam
(AV.) n. 'mat and pillow', krtakrtam (AV.) n. 'what is done and undone',
cittakutam (AV.) n. 'thought and desire', bhadra-papam (AV.) 'good and evil',
bhota-bhavydm (AV.) n. 'past and future', n. pi. priyapriyAni (AV.) 'things

yaj-yi- 'worship of the gods', beside drva- by s. T h e only other instance in the RV.
yij-ya-, jâta-vid-yi- 'knowledge of things', of a Tatpurusa with case-ending in the first
mujfi-halyd- 'hand to h a n d fight'. m e m b e r and yet singly accented is divo-
1
T h e r e are, however, a good many ex- däsa-, N". of a king. Elsewhere occur apsu-
ceptions in which the final syllable is accented yogi- (AV.) 'connecting power in water',
(as in prepositional determinatives), e. g. amhasas-paii- (VS.), perhaps matur-bhratra-
agni-tapta- 'glowing with fire', agni-dagdhâ- (MS. 1. 6") 'mother's brother' (the Mss. read
'burnt by fire'. m:itur-bhratra-).
3 0
T h e original accent of the first member In vanaspati- the first m e m b e r may be
is shifted in nemâ-dhiti- 'putting opposite' the gen. sing, of van- 'wood' (gen. pi. van-
'fight', vanâ-dhiti- 'layer of wood', medha- Urn); but in rätha-s-päli the s must be in-
siti- 'receiving of the oblation'. o r g a n i c ; cp. GARBE, K Z . 2.3,490; RICHTER,
3 W h e n the verbal sense is lost in the j IK. 19, 1 7 ; BARTHOLOMAE, BB. 1 5 , 15 n o t e 1 ;
second member, the general rule of final | WACKERNAGEL 2', p. 247.
accentuation applies; e. g. deva-suma/i- 'favour 7 T h e only new instance of double accen-
of the gods', deva-heti- ( A V . ) 'weapon of the tuation of a compound with -pati- after
gods'. T h i s analogy is followed by sarva- the R V . seems to be nfms-pati- (MS.); cp.
jyani- (AV.) 'loss of one's all'. ! W A C K E R N A G E L 2 ' , p. 2 4 8 d.
4 Though brahmanas-pati- is not treated 1 8 C p . FOY, J A O S . 16, CLXXH-1V.
as a compound in the P a d a text, it is so treated 9 T h e two or three exceptions which occur
i n t h e D v a n d v a indra-brahmanaspati (11. 24'*). \ in t h e A V . a n d V S . are doubtless due to
5 Thus accented in Book vil, but jas-pati, j wrong readings.
10
in Book L T h e latter is the only Tatpurusa T h e adjectives being used as substan-
in the R V . in which double accentuation tives.
d o e s not take place when -pati- is preceded i ' In the VS. used in the dual also.
 97

agreeable and disagreeable'; and as adjectives tamra-dhBmrd- (AV.) 'tawny

and dark', daksina-savya- (AV.) 'right and left', saptamlstama- (AV.) 'seventh
and eighth'.
a. The very few adverbial copulatives which occur accent the first
member: ahar-divi 'day by day', saydm-pratar (AV.) 'at even and at mom'.
2. The class of D 3vata-dvandvas, each member of which is dual in
form, and which in the RV. is about thrice as frequent as the regular class,
retains the accent of simple words in each member of the compound 1 :
thus agni-w'snQ (AV.), agni-soma, indra-pBsdna, indri-brhaspatV, indra-varuni,
indra-visnB, indra-sjmS, usisa-nakta 'Dawn and Night', dy ivd-ksftma 'heaven
and earth', dyAvS-prthivi, dy:iva-bh '¡ml, naktosdsa, parjanya-vata, prthivi-dyiva,
mitri-vdruna, sarya-miisa. A few others are formed in the same way from
substantives which are not the names of deities: kratB-daksau (VS.) 'under-
standing and will', turvdsa-ydda (iv. 30'') 'Turvasa and Yadu', dhunT-cumurl
'Dhuni and Cumuri', mltdrl-pitdra (iv. 6 7 ) 'mother and father'.
a. A certain number of these compounds have been assimilated to the
regular class of copulatives by giving up the accent of the first member:
ittdrSgni, ittdrl-pBsana, soma-pUsana, vata-parjanyft, sBrya-candramas3, bhava-
rudrdu (AV.), bhavJ-.tarvau (AV.) J; one has been completely assimilated by
giving up also the dual form in the first member: indra-vayti.
a. T h e r e occurs once a secondary adjective copulative accented on both m e m b e r s ,
b e i n g formed from an adverbial D v a n d v a : dhnr-dtva- (VS.) 'daily* {ahar-divi ' d a y by day').

3. Accent in Declension.
93. The vocative, when accented at all (85, 2) invariably has the acute
on the first syllable; e. g. pitar, N. pit a 'father'; diva, N. devd-s 'god'. The
regularly accented vocative of dyu- \dydv-) 'heaven' is dyau-s4, that is diaus,
but the nominative form dydus is also used in its stead.
a. Otherwise, in the «-declension (f. -a) the accent always remains on
the same syllable; e. g. N. devd-s, G. devd-sya, pi. deva-nam. This rule is
also followed by monosyllabic pronominal stems in -a; e. g. from ma-\
I. may-a 'by me', D. md-hyam, L. mdy-i\ from id- 'that', G. sing, td-sya, pi. G.
tc-slm, I. td-bhisf.
a. An exception to this rule is f o r m e d by the plural cardinal stems ending in -a.
T h e y regularly accent that vowel b e f o r e endings with initial c o n s o n a n t , and throw t h e
acute on t h e ending of the genitive; e. g. pahca 'five': I. pahca-bhis, G. panc5nam\ af/a
'eight', however,' shifts the accent t o t h e endings generally, thus I. asta-bhis, D . asti-
hhyas (TS.).
94. When the final syllable of the stem is accented, the acute (except
in the ¿-declension) is liable to shift to the endings in the weak cases.
1. This is the rule in monosyllabic stems; e. g. ndu- 'ship': A. miv-am,
but I. nav-d, pi. I. nau-bhis, L. nau-su; ddnt-xa. 'tooth': I. dat-a, pi. A. dat-ds6,
I. dad-bhls.

' T h e double accent is retained even in
the derivatives mitri-varuna-vanl• 'accom-
panied by Mitra and Varuna', and dy&va-
pythivi-vant• (AV.) 'accompanied by h e a v e n
and earth'.
' Retaining the double accent of the
second m e m b e r .
3 In the AV. the number of DevatS-
dvandvas is only about half that in the RV.
(though the total number of D r a n d v a s is
more than double 1 !; about one-half of these,
Indo-arische Philologie. I. 4.
again, have only one accent, which as in
the regular class is on the final syllable.
4 Retaining the n c m . instead of *diau
(Gk. Zn).
5 An exception is the pronoun a- 'this',
which is treated like a monosyllabic s t e m ,
e. g. G. a-syd, pi. m. e-fim, f. a-sdm; a f e w
times, however, t h e accentuation a-smai,
d-sya, a-bhis occurs; cp. WHITNEY 502 b.
i T h e accusative plural is treated as a
weak case and accented on t h e ending in
7
98

a. Exceptions to this rule are the rare monosyllabic stems in -J, which retain the
accent on the stem; e . g . gna- 'woman': pi. I. gna-bhis, L. gna-su. Individual exceptions
are go- 'cow', dyo- 'iky'; e. g. I. gav-a, pi. G. gav-am, I. go-bhis; L. dyaru-i, pi. I. dyu-
bhis. Similarly 'man': D. nar-e, pi. I. nf-bhis, L. but G. nar-am and nr-tiim\
ksdm- 'earth'; L. ksdm-i\ tan- 'succession: I. tan-a (and lan-a), D. tan-c, ran- 'joy': ran-e,
pi. L. rdm-su; van- 'wood': pi. L. vam-su (but G. van-am); vip-'rod': G.vip-as; s/f'-- 'star':
pi. I. stf--bhis\ svar- 'light': G. sur-as (but D. sur-e); also the infinitives badh-e 'to press',
vAh-e 'to convey*. In some words the irregular accentuation is due to their having
originally been dissyllables; such are dru- "wood', snt't- 'summit', svan- 'dog', yun- weak
stem of yttvan- 'young'; e . g . I. dru-na\ pi. L. snu-fu\ I. iun-a, pi. ivd-bhis; I. yun-a
2. W h e n the accented vowel of the final syllable in polysyllabic stems
disappears either b y syncope or b y changing to a semivowel, the acute is
thrown on endings with initial vowel in the weak cases; thus from mahiman-
'greatness', L mahimn-a; from mUrdhan- 'head', D . mardhn-t-, from agni- 'fire',
G. du. agny-os; from dhenu- 'cow*, I. sing, dhenv-a-, from vadhii- 'bride',
D. vadhv-ai ( A V . ) ; from pitf- 'father', I. pitr-n.
a . Polysyllabic stems in -/, -//, -/, a n d in the R V . usually those in -/,
throw the acute on the ending of the G. pi. also, even though the vowel
retains its syllabic character in this c a s e ; e . g . agni-nam, dhenu-ndm, datf-tnitrr,
bahvl-nSm2.
3. Present participles in -at and -ant throw the acute on the endings
with initial vowel in the weak cases; e. g. from tud-ant- 'striking': I. sing.
tud-at-n (but tud-ad-bhis). This rule is also followed by the old participles
mah-dt- 'great' and brh-at 'large', e. g. mahat-n (but mahad-bhis)
4. In the R V . derivatives formed with accented -aiic throw the acute
on endings with initial vowel in the weak cases when contraction to I and ft
appears in the final syllable; thus from praty-anc- 'turned towards', I. sing.
prattc-A (but L . pi. pratydk-su); from anv-anc- 'following'; G. anuc-as (but
from praiic- L . sing, prdc-i). T h e other Samhitas, however, generally retain
the accent on the stem«.

4. V e r b a l A c c e n t .

95. A s regards personal endings, those of the singular active in all

tenses and moods are always unaccented except the 2. imperative -dhi or -A!.
Others may b e accented; if dissyllabic, they have the acute on the first syllable,
as -anti, -mahi.
W h e n the tense stem ends in -a in the present, in the future, in the
unaugmented imperfect and aorist, and throughout the subjunctive, the accent
is never on the ending, as it remains on the same syllable o f the stem
throughout.
96. A l l tenses formed with the a u g m e n t invariably accent the latter,
if the verb is accented at all (85, 2/5); e . g . impf. a-bhara-t, plupf. a-jagan,
aor. a-bhQ-t, conditional a-bharisya-t. If the augment is dropped, the accen-
tuation is as follows. In the imperfect the acute is on the same syllable
as in the present; e. g. bhara-t, pres. bhara-ti. T h e pluperfect, if regularly

hardly more than one third of the stems : the plural cardinals in -a: as pdfica 'five',
occurring; see W H I T N E Y 3 9 0 a; cp. L A N M A N paiicà-num, dâsa 'ten', dasâ-nim.
494i 499, 504 top, 505. 3 The accent is, however, not shifted in
' When a monosyllable becomes the final the old participle vâghit- m. 'worshipper';
member of a compound, it loses its mono- nor in the two forms a-codât-c 'not urging'
syllabic accent ; e. g. stt dhi- 'wise', G. pi. (from cod ant-) and rathiràyât-âm 'speeding' ;
su-dAmâm. On the other hand prés- 'pressing | cp. L A N M A N p. 5 0 5 — 6 (top),
on' though a compound (pra-if-) is accented j 4 Thus the f. stem pralfc-t- (AV.), but RV.
like monosyllables in the I. sing, prâs-i. • pratïc-i- (once in the A. praticim).
* This regularly takes place in the G. of
 99
formed, accents the root, as 3. sing, cikan (Ykart-), 3. sing. rSran (Y ran-),
1. sing, ciketam (y/V»/-); when formed with thematic -a, it accents that vowel,
as 3. pi. cakrpa-nta. The aorist if formed with -sa, accents that syllable,
e. g. 3. pL dhuk-sa-n, dhuk-sa-nta (from duh- 'milk'); if formed with -s, it
accents the root, as may be inferred from 1. sing, vam-s-i (from van- 'win'),
the only accented example occurring; if formed with -is-, it accents the root,
e. g. 1. sing. sams-is-aml. If formed from the root, it accents the radical
vowel in the singular active, but the endings elsewhere, as 3. sing, vark ( Yvrj-),
but 2. sing. mid. nut-thds (Ynud-). If fornftd from the root with thematic -a,
it usually follows the analogy of the present «-class, e. g. ruha-m, bhuja-t,
vida-t, budha-nta; in several instances, however, it accents the root, as ara-nta
(r- 'go'); sara-t (sr• 'flow'); sada-tam (sad- 'sit'); sana-t (san- 'gain') but o p t
samfma-, voca-t (vac- 'speak') but o p t vocSyam. T h e reduplicated aorist usually
accents the reduplicative syllable, as 2. sing, didharas, ninasas, 3. sing, piparat,
sisvap, jijanat, pi. jijanan; but sometimes the root, as 2. sing, sisrathas, 3. sing.
plparat, sisnathat. Passive aorists accent the root, e. g. dhft-y-i} srftv-i, vdd-tr
jan-i, pdd-i, sdd-i.
97. P r e s e n t s y s t e m . — 1. Throughout the present system of the
«-conjugation the accent remains on the same syllable of the stem in all
moods; on the radical syllable in verbs of the first and fourth classes; e. g.
bhava-ti from bhu- 'be', nah-ya-ti from nah- 'bind'; on the thematic -a in the
sixth class; e. g. tuda-ti from tud- 'strike*.
2. In the second or graded conjugation, the singular indicative active,
the whole of the subjunctive, and the 3. sing, imperative active* accent the stem,
while all other forms accent the endings 3 . In the strong forms the radical
syllable is accented in the second class; generally the reduplicative syllable,
but sometimes the root, in the third class; the suffix in the fifth, eighth,
seventh, and ninth; e. g. 3. sing. ind. as-ti, subj. as-a-t, impv. as-tu, from as-
'be', 2 ND cl.; 3. sing. ind. bi-bhar-ti from Mr-'bear', 3 r d cL; 3. sing. ind. kr-ni-ti,
subj. kr-ndv-a-t, 2. pi. impv. kr-tio-ta, and kr-no-tana from kr- 'make', 5 t h c l ;
3.sing. subj. man-av-a-te from man- 'think', 8 t h cl.; 1. sing. ind.yu-nd-j-mi, 3.sing.
subj. yu-nd-j-a-t from yuj- 'join', 7 t h cl.; 3. sing. ind. grbh-na-ti, 2. sing. subj.
grbh-nA-s from grabh- 'seize', 9 t h cl.; but 2. sing. impv. ad-dhi, 3. pi. o p t ad-yur
from ad- 'eat', 2 ND c l ; 1. pi. ind. bi-bhr-masi\ 1. sing. ind. mid.kr-nv-t, 2. sing,
impv. kr-nu-hi\ 1. pi. o p t van-u-yama, 3. pi. impv. van-v-dntv from van- 'win',
cl.; 3. sing, mid.yuiik-tt, 2. sing. impv. mid. yunk-svd\ 1. pi. ind. gr-nT-mdsi,
2. sing. impv. gr-nT-hi from gr- 'praise', 911» cl.
a. Irregularities. In the second or root class, several verbs accent the radical
syllable throughout 4 : it- 'lie' does so besides taking Gupa; e . g . I. sing, iay-e, 2. sing.
U-se etc.S Occasional accentuation of the root in weak forms appears in 2. sing. impv.
jan-i-fva 6 (\'jan-\ mai-svatymad-),yak-fva (]/ya/-), sak-fva and sik-fva (\/saA-), fdh-a-t, sabj.
(rdh- 'thrive'), 3. pi. impv. svap-antu (AV.) and ivas-antu (AV.)7. A few roots of the third
class accent the root instead of the reduplicative syllable in the strong forms. These
are a- 'note', mad- 'exhilarate', yu- 'separate', hu- 'sacrifice'; e. g. 2. sing, ci-ki-fi (AV.);
3. sing. subj. ma-mad-a-t, 3. sing. impv. ma-mat-tu\ 3. sing, subj. yu-yav-a-t, 2. pi. impv.yu-yif-
tana\ 3. sing, ju-hi-ti. Occasional forms thus accented are 2. sing, iy-ar-fi (RV1.) from

1 Of the .«'/-aorist no accented forms occur. 4 These are äs- 'sit', Id- 'praise', ir- 'set
2
The 2. pi. impv. active often accents in motion', ti- 'rule', cakf- 'see', tabs- 'fashion',
the stem, which is then strong, as i-ta, trä- "protect', nims- 'kiss', vas- 'clothe', sit-
i-tana from i- 'go'; this is sometimes also 'bring forth*.
the case with the 2. du. in -lam. 5 S e e WHITNEY 6 2 8 a n d 629.
3 The final syllable of the ending of the 6 Op. cit. 6 3 1 a.
3. pi. middle is regularly accented in several 7 Op. cit. 6 3 0 .
verbs, as ri-hati, duh-ati; see WHITNEY 6 1 3 ,
685, 699; DELBRÜCK, V e r b u m 73.
lOO I. ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4. YEDIC GKAMMAR.

/*• 'go', 2. sing. mid. dhat-sc from dha- 'put', and bi-bhar-ti (RV 1 . AV 2 .) beside the usual
bi-bhar-ti. Both types, when the ending begins with a vowel, throw the accent back on
the reduplicative syllable; e.g. 3. pi. juhv-ati and bibhr-ati, bul 2. pi. jnhu-tha and bibhr-
tha. T h e subjunctive here, as usual, follows the accentuation of the strong indicative;
its stem from the same two roots would be juhav-a- and bibhar-a-. In the optative middle
the accent is thrown back on the reduplicative syllable because the modal affix begins
with a vowel; e. g. 1. sing, dadhiya etc. beside 1. sing. act. dadh-yum e t c . 1 T h e KV.,
however, once has dadhi-ta beside dadhl-ta (3 times). In the imperative, endings with
initial consonant are accented in the weak forms, otherwise the reduplicative syllabic;
e. g. 2. sing. dc-Ai, 2. du. dat-tam, but 3. mid. pi. JiAatdm. The strong 3. sing. impv. act.
follows the strong ind., e. g. dadhatu, piparlu; the 2. pi. is often strong; e. g. juhbta,
dadhata. The participle regularly accents the reduplicative syllable; e. g. ji'ihv al, juki-
ana, except only pipana- (pa- 'drink'). — In the s e v e n t h c l a s s the root /tints- 'injure'
(originally perhaps a desiderative of han- 'strike') accents the radical syllable in weak
forms, as 3. sing, hims-te, pi. hims-anti, part. Aims-ana-. — In the fifth and eighth classes
the R V . has several instances of irregular accentuation of the final syllable in the 3. pi.
mid.: kr-nv-att, vr-nv-ate, spr->n-atr\ tan-v-ate, man-v-atc.— In the ninth class the irregular
accentuation of the 3 pi. mid. occurs in pu-n-a-tf and ii-u-atc (ri- 'flow'). T h e ending
-ana, which is here added in the 2. sing. impv. act. to a few roots with final consonant,
is accented on the last syllable: grh-ana, badh-ana (AV.), stabh-ana (AV.).
98. T h e perfect. — T h e singular indicative active and the whole sub-
junctive 2 accent the radical syllable; all other forms of the indicative, as
well as the whole imperative and optative accent the endings; e. g. ind. 3. sing.
cakdr-a, pi. cakr-t'ir, 1. pi. mid. cakr-mdhe-, subj. sing. 2. paprdth-a-s, pi pray-a-s)
3. jabhdr-a-t, piprdy-a-t, mumoc-a-t\ dadhdrs-a-ti, vavdrt-a-ti\ pi. 1. csian-ama,
susdv-ama, 3. paprdth-a-n) opt. sing. 1. vavrt-yAm, 2. susrU-y/is, 3. tutuj-ydt,
du. 2. susrU-yCitam\ pi. 3. vavrj-yur-, mid. sing. 2. vavrdh-l-thds, 3. s'isrT-ta (sri-
'resort'J; impv. sing. 2. piprl-ht, mumug-dhi (Ymuc-), du. 1. jajas-tdm\ mid.sing. 2.
dadhi-svd3. T h e participle, both active and middle, accents the suffix; e. g.
cakr-vims-; cakr-ana-.
99. T h e a o r i s t . — T h e accentuation of the unaugmented forms of the
indicative has already been stated (96). With regard to that of the moods,
the following notes may be added.
1. T h e root aorist accents the radical syllable in the subjunctive; e. g.
sing. 2. kdr-a-s, 3. kdr-a-tdu. 3. srdv-a-tas, pi. 3. gam-a-nti, mid. sing. 3. bhoj-
a-tr, in the injunctive, the radical syllable in the singular, but the ending
elsewhere; e. g. sing. 1. ndm-s-i, pi. 3. dabh-ur, mid. sing. 2. mr-thas-, in the
optative, the endings throughout; e. g. act. sing. 1. as-yhm, 2. bhn-yds, mid.
pi. 1. as-imdhi; in the imperative, the root in the 3. sing, act., but the ending
elsewhere; e. g. sing. 3. sro-tu, but 2. kr-dht, du. 2. ga-tdm, pi. 2. bhu-tamid.
sing. 2. kr-sva-, in the participle, the suffix is accented in the active, e. g.
bhid-dnt-, and generally in the middle, e. g. budh-fittd-, but in several instances
the root; e. g. dyut-ana-.
2. In the a-aorist the accentuation follows that of the unaugmented
indicative; thus the subjunctive sing. 3. vidat\ the injunctive sing. 1. ddrsa-m
rukd-m, 3. ruha-t, vida-t, sdna-t, pi. 3. vidd-n/a; optative, sing. 1. vidfyam,
saniyam, pi. 1. sakima, sanema and sdnctna; the imperative, sing. 2. sdna,
sara, du. 2. ruha-tam, sdda-tam, pi. 2. khyd-ta. T h e participle usually accents
the thematic -a, but sometimes the root; e. g. trpa-nt-, but sdda-nt-; guhd-
mana-, but ddsa-mana-.

> Cp. WHITNEY 645 a, 668 a, 669. 3 A few forms accent and strengthen the
2 When the primary endings are added, radical syllable, du. 2. mumoc-a-tam, pi. 2. mii-

the reduplicative syllable is almost always mbc-a-ta, mid. sing. 2. pipray-a-sva.

accented; e. g. jtijosasi\ some others, which i 4 But the root is strong and accented in
take secondary endings, but do not strengthen several forms, kar-ta etc., of the 2. pi. im-
the root, also accent the reduplicative perative.
syllable, as dad/irfan/a; see below 490.
 IOI

3. In the reduplicated aorist the only accented form in the subjunctive

seems to be vocati-, in the injunctive, either the reduplicative syllable or the
root is accented; e. g. sing. 2. ninas'-as, sisraihas, 3. piparat and pjpdrat-, in
the optative, the thematic vowel or the ending; e. g. pi. 1. vocema, cucyw-l-
mdhi; in the imperative, the thematic vowel or the ending; e. g. du. 2 . j i g r - t d m ,
pi.jigr-ta, susuda-ta (AV.).
4. T h e s - a o r i s t accents the root in the subjunctive; e. g. dar-s-a-t (dr-
'split'), yak-s-a-t (yaj'- 'sacrifice'), du. 2. par-s-a-thas {pr- 'take across'); the
root in the injunctive as far as can be judged from the extremely few accented
forms, as mid. sing. 1. vam-s-i {van- 'win'); the ending 1 in the optative, as
mid. sing. 1. bhak-s-T-ya ( ybhaj-), pi. dhuk-s-l-mahi (duh- 'milk'); in the imperative
no accented forms occur; the participle accents the root in the active, as
dak s-ant- (dah- 'burn'), but in the irregularly formed middle 2 nearly always the
suffix, as arc-a-s-ana-, but oh-a-s-ana- (527).
5. T h e /s-aorist accents the root in the subjunctive; e. g. sing. 3. bodh-
is-a-t; the root in the injunctive, e. g. sing. 2. math-Ts, but once the ending in
pi. 3. tar-is-ur ( A V . ) ; the ending in the optative; e. g. sing. 1. edh-is-iya ( A V . ) ;
the ending in the imperative; e. g. sing. 2. av-id-dhi, du. 2. av-is-tam.
6. In the «/«-aorist no accented forms occur except one in the imperative,
where the ending has the acute, du. 2. ya-sis-tam.
7. T h e sa-aorist accents that syllable in the injunctive, as pi. 3. dhuk-sa-nta
(but once sing. 3. dhuk-sa-ta), and in the imperative, as sing. 2. dhuk-sa-sva
( Yduh-). No subjunctive or optative forms occur.
100. T h e future.—The accent in all forms of this tense remains on the
suffix -syd- or -i-syd-, e . g . sing. 3. c-sya-ti ( A V . ) 'he will go' (V'-)> sing. 1.
stav-i-sytimi 'I shall praise' ( ^ stu-), 3. kar-i-syati 'he will do' ( |f kr-)-, participle
kar-i-sydnt- 'about to do'.
ior. Secondary conjugations. — A l l these, except the active form of
the intensive, accent the same syllable of the stem throughout T h e y are
the causative, the denominative, the passive, the secondary form of the
intensive, and the desiderative, the stem of all of which ends in -a. The
causative accents the penultimate syllable of the stem; e. g. krodh-dya-
' e n r a g e ' . — T h e passive, the secondary form of the intensive, and the
denominative, accent the suffix -yd; e. g. pan-ya-te 'is admired'; rerih-ya te
'licks repeatedly'; gopa-ydnti 'they protect'. A certain number of unmistakable
denominatives, however, have the causative accent; e. g. mantra-ya-te 'takes
c o u n s e l ' . — T h e desiderative accents the reduplicative syllable; e. g. pipri-
sa-ti. — T h e primary form of the intensive agrees in accentuation with the
third or reduplicating class of verbs, that is, it accents the reduplicative
syllable in the strong forms, but the endings with initial consonant in the
weak forms of the indicative active; e g. sing. 3. johav-i-ti, du. 3 jar-bhr-tas,
pi. 3. var-vrt-ati. In the middle indicative, however, the reduplicative syllable
is more often accented than not; e. g. ¡¿-tik-te and ncnik-tJ. In the subjunctive
the reduplicative syllable is regularly accented; e. g. sing. 3. jdnghan-a-t, but
once the root in sing. 1. javghdn-Sni) mid. pi. 3. jang/ian-anta, but once the
ending in du. 3. iantas-aite. No accented form of the optative occurs. In
the imperative the ending is accented; e. g. sing. 2. jagr-hi, car-kr-tst. In the
participle, both active and middle, the reduplicative syllable is regularly
accented; e . g . ce'kit-at-, cikit ana-\ there are, however, two exceptions in the
middle: badbadh-ana- and marmrj-and- (548 a).
1 O n c e the root is accented in the irregular participles irregularly f o r m e d with -mana.
form du. 2. tra-s-T-tham. ha-s-a-mana• and dhi-s-a-matta-.
' T h e root is a c c e n t e d in t w o middle
102 I. ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. VEDIC GRAMMAR.

5. Accent of nominal verb forms.

102. The accentuation of participles formed from tense and conjugation
stems has already been stated. When these are compounded with pre-
positions, they retain their accents; thus the present and perfect participles of
apa-gdm- 'go away* would be apa-gdcchant-, apa-gdcchamana--, apa-jaganvAms-,
apa-jagmand-. The preposition is, however, not infrequendy found separated
from the participle by another word or is placed after it, when it is treated
as independent and accented, e. g. prd smasru dodhuvat (x. 23') 'shaking his
beard'; dpa drlhAni ddrdrat (vi. 17 5 ) 'bursting strongholds asunder'; A ca para
ca path!bhis cdrantam (1. 164 3 1 ) 'wandering hither and thither on (his) paths',
mddhu bibhrata upa (1. 166 1 ) 'bringing sweetness near'; tanvdnta A rdja/i
(iv. 45 J ) 'extending through the air'. The preposition is occasionally found
independently accented immediately before the participle, as ab/ii ddksat (11. 4?)
'burning around'; vi vidvAn (1. 189 7 ) 'distinguishing' (probably in distinction
from vividvAn, perfect participle of vid- 'find').
a. When there are two prepositions, either both are compounded and
unaccented, as vi-pra-ydntah (ix. 22 s ) 'advancing', pary-a-vivrtsan (vn. 63*)
'turning round'; or one is compounded and the other independent and
accented, as abhi a-cdrantih (vm. 96' 5 ) 'approaching'; ava-srjdnn upa tmdna
(1. 1 4 2 " ) 'bestowing indeed'; prd vayAm uj-jihanah (v. i 1 ) 'flying up to a
branch'.
b. Participles in -tar generally accent the root, as kdr-tar 'making',
but when compounded the suffix. But nl-cetar- 'observing' occurs beside
ni-cetar- 'observer'.
103. The past passive participle regularly accents the suffix; e. g.
ga-td- 'gone', pat-i-td- (AV.) 'fallen', chin-nd- 'cut off' (/chid-). But when
this participle is compounded with prepositions, the latter are as a rule
accented. In several instances, however, the accent of the simple participle
is retained, as apa-kri-td- (AV.) 'bought', ni-ci-td- 'seen', nis-kr-td- 'prepared',
ni-sat-td- 'seated', ni-vil-td- (AV.) 'uninjured', pra-jah-i-td- 'given up' (from jah-,
a secondary form of ha- 'leave'), pra-sas-td- 'celebrated', sam-skr-td- 'prepared'
(beside sdm-skr-ta-), sam-hi-td- (VS.) ' v a r i e g a t e d ' T h e preposition may be
separated from the participle by another word, as pari soma siktdh (ix. 97 , s )
'poured, O Soma, around'. When there are two prepositions, the first
remains unaccented, as apA-vrktah (vm. 808) 'removed' (apa-Asam-A-kr-tam
(x. 84?) 'accumulated'; or it may be separated and independently accented,
as prd ydt samudrd A-hitah (ix. 64 ,9 J 'when despatched forth to the ocean';
tdri gobhir A-vrtam (ix. 86*7) 'encompassed round by streams of milk'.
104. Of the gerundives, those in -ya (or -t-ya) and -tva accent the
root; e. g. cdks-ya- 'to be seen', sru-t-ya- 'to be heard', car-kr-t-ya- 'to be
praised', vdk-tva- 'to be said'; those in -ayya, -etiya, -amya (AV.) accent the
penultimate; e. g. pan-Ayya- 'to be admired', Jks-cnya- 'worthy to be seen',
while those in -tavya accent the final syllable, as jan-i-tavya- (AV.) 'to be
born' 1 . When compounded with prepositions3, gerundives nearly always
leave the accent unchanged; e. g. pari-caks-ya• 'to be despised'; with Svarita
on the final syllable in the RV. only a-kay-ya- 'desirable' and upa-vak-yh-

1
Such compounds are also thus accent- only begin to appear in the AV., where
ed when turned into substantives, as nif- two examples of each occur (581 a, b).
kr-ta- n. 'rendezvous', upa-stuia-, N. of a 3 T h e preposition is here always inse-
man. parable.
2
The gerundives in -antya and -iavya
 III. ACCENT. A C C E N T OF NOMINAL V E R B FORMS. 103

'to be addressed'; abhy-a-yatns-inya- 'allowing oneself to be drawn near';

a-mantr-aniya- (AV.) 'to be addressed'.
105. Infinitives are as a rule accented like ordinary nominal cases
formed from the same stems.
a. The dative infinitive from root stems accents the ending; e. g. drs-i
'to see', but when compounded, the root; e. g. satn-idh-e 'to kindle', abhi-pra-
cdks-e (1. 1 1 3 6 ) 'to see'. Those formed from stems in -as generally accent
that suffix, but sometimes the radical syllable; e. g. car-as-e 'to fare', but
cdks-as-e 'to see'. Those formed from stems in -i and -// accent the suffix;
e. g. dri-dy-e 'to see', pz-tdy-e 'to drink'. Those from stems in -tu accent
the root, as bhir-tav-e-, also those from stems in -iava, but with a secondary
accent on the final syllable, as gan-tavai. When these two forms are com-
pounded with prepositions, the latter are accented; e. g. pra-vantave1 'to
win', dpa-bhartavdi 'to be taken away', the latter retaining its final accent as
well. When there are two prepositions, the first may be independent and
accented as well; e. g. viprd-sartave (VIII. 6 7 " ) 'to spread'. Infinitives formed
with -dhyai generally accent the preceding a of the verbal stem, but sometimes
the root; e. g. iyi-dhyai 'to go', but gdtna-dhyai 'to go*. Those formed from
stems in -man accent the root; e. g. di-man-e 'to give', except vid-man-e 'to
know'; from stems in -van there are ds-van-e 'to give', tur-van-e 'to excel',
but dhttr-van-e 'to injure' (Y~dAvr-)'.
b. The accusative infinitive if formed from a radical stem accents the
root even when compounded with a preposition; e. g. subh-am 'to shine',
a-sdd-am 'to sit down'; if formed from a stem in -tu, it accents the root in
a simple stem, but the preposition in a compounded stem; e. g. d.i-tum 'to give',
prd-bhar-tum 'to present', dtiu pra-volhum 'to advance' 3 .
c. The ablative-genitive infinitive, if formed from radical stems, which
here occur only in combination with prepositions, accents the root; e. g. ava-
p.id-as '(from) falling down'; if formed from a stem in -tu, the root in a
simple stem, but the preposition in a compound stem; e. g. gdn-tos 'going',
ni-dha-tos 'putting down'.
d. The locative infinitive if formed from radical stems accents the
ending in the simple form, but the root in the compounded form; e. g. budh-i
'at the waking', but sam-drs-i 'on seeing'. The one locative infinitive formed
from a stem in -tar, and those from stems in -san accent the suffix; e. g.
dhar-tdr-i 'to bestow', ue-sdn-i 'to lead'.
106. Uncompounded gerunds formed with -tvl, -tva, tvaya accent the
suffix, while the compounded gerunds' formed with -ya or -tyd accent the
root; e. g. ga-tvi 'having gone', bhu-tva 'having become', ga-tvdya 'having gone';
sam-grbh-ya 'gathering', upa-sru-tya (AV.) 'having overheard'.
107. Case-forms used as adverbs frequently show a shift of accent.
This appears oftenest in the accusative neuter. Thus drav-dt 'quickly', but
drdv-ant- 'running', probably also drak-ydt i 'stoutly'; aparam 'later', but
dparatn as neuter adjective; a-vyus-dm (AV.) 'till dawn' 6 ; and the adverbs
in -vat, as angiras-vat 'like Angiras', manus-vdt 'as Manus did', purSna-vat,
1
The infinitive from stems in -tu in all first is independent and therefore also
its cases accents the preposition; e. g. sani- accented.
tarium 'to collect', afi-dhalave 'to cover up', 4 The preposition is here always in-
ava-gantos 'of descending'. separable.
A preposition is occasionally uncom- 5 Which seems to be formed from an
pounded with or separated from the infinitive, | irregular 6
present participle of drh- 'be firm',
when both are accented, as pra davane, The ordinary A. of vy-us- 'dawn' would
(IV. 3 2 ; V . 6 S 3 ) ; pra aaJu/e daiave (IV. 2 0 " ) . 1 be vyus-am.
S

3 When there are two prepositions, the |

IO4 I. ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4. VKDIC GRAMMAR.

pürz'a-vdt, pratna-vat 'as of old', w h i c h are a c c u s a t i v e neuters o f the a d j e c t i v e

suf&c -vant1 ( u n a c c e n t e d ) ; a n d s o m e a d v e r b s f r o m the c o m p a r a t i v e in -tara,
ut-tardm ( A V . ) 'higher', but vt-tara- as a d j e c t i v e ; similarly ava-tardm, paras-
tarâm a n d parä-tardm 'farther a w a y ' , vi-tardm ' m o r e w i d e l y ' 2 sam-tardm (AV.)
'still farther'. Similarly the instrumental diva ' b y d a y ' , but divA ' t h r o u g h
h e a v e n ' ; a n d the d a t i v e aparAya 'for the future', but dparüya 'to t h e l a t e r ' ;
and the ablatives apâkAt ' f r o m afar' (dpaka- 'far'), amCit ' f r o m n e a r ' (lima- A V .
'this'), sanAt ' f r o m o f o l d ' (stina- 'old')-».

6. A c c e n t in S a n d h i .

108. X. W h e n t w o v o w e l s c o m b i n e so as to f o r m a l o n g v o w e l or
d i p h t h o n g , the latter h a s the U d â t t a if either or b o t h o f the original v o w e l s
h a d i t 4 ; e. g. nudasvätha for nudasva dtha-, tdvJt for tciva it-, kiu't for kvli !t">;
Agät for A agat; pitéva for pit A iva, sato for s'atA u ; nAntaras (vi. 6 3 ' ) for
nd dntaras.
T h e c o n t r a c t i o n o f / + i is, h o w e v e r , a c c e n t e d 1,u the ( d e p e n d e n t ) Svarita
h a v i n g h e r e (in / / ) ousted the p r e c e d i n g U d â t t a 7 ; e. g. divjva ( R V . A V . ) for
divi "iva. T h i s is the praslista, ' c o n t r a c t e d ' , Svarita o f the P r ä t i s ä k h y a s 8 .
2. W h e n » a n d ü with U d â t t a a r e c h a n g e n d to y a n d <•, a f o l l o w i n g
u n a c c e n t e d v o w e l r e c e i v e s the S v a r i t a ; e. g. vy hnat for vi â/.at.
T h e u n c o n t r a c t e d f o r m with U d â t t a must, h o w e v e r , a l m o s t i n v a r i a b l y
b e r e a d in t h e R V . T h i s is the ksaipra'* Svarita of the P r ä t i s ä k h y a s 6 . H e r e
the enclitic S v a r i t a a s s u m e s the a p p e a r a n c e of an i n d e p e n d e n t a c c e n t .
3. W h e n d is e l i d e d , it t h r o w s b a c k its U d â t t a on u n a c c e n t e d e or 0;
e. g. sütiAvc 'gne for sündve dgne\ vo 'vasah for vo dvasali. B u t w h e n un-
a c c e n t e d a is elided, it c h a n g e s a p r e c e d i n g U d â t t a t o S v a r i t a ; e. g. so 'dhamdh
for so adhamdh. T h i s is the abhinihita Svarita o f the P r ä t i s ä k h y a s 8 . Here
a l s o t h e enclitic Svarita (in ô à) h a s o u s t e d the p r e c e d i n g U d â t t a (as in diviva)1".

7. T h e Sentence Accent.
HASKELL, Vocative-Accent in the Veda, JAOS. 11, 57. — BÖHTI.INGK, ein
erster Versuch über den Accent im Sanskrit (Mémoires de l'Académie imp. de St. Péters-
bourg 1 8 4 3 ) P- 3 8 ff- — W H I T N E Y , J A O S . 5 , 1 9 3 fr., 3 8 7 fr. — AUREL MAYR, B e i t r ä g e aus
dem Rigveda zur Accentuirung des verbum fimtum (Sitzungsberichte der phil.-hist. Classe
der kaiserlichen Akademie der Wissenschaften, Wien 1871, p. 219 IT.).— WEBER, IS. 13,
7OFF. — B Ö H T L I N G K , S a n s k r i t - C h r e s t o m a t h i e ' p . 3 5 6 . — W H I T N E Y , S a n s k r i t G r a m m a r 5 9 1 ff. —
DELBRÜCK, Altindische Syntax (Halle 1888) 21—29. — OLDENBERC;, Die Verbalenklisis
im Rgveda, Z D M G . 6 o , 707 — 740.

109. T h e v o c a t i v e . — a. T h e v o c a t i v e , w h i c h w h e t h e r it consist o f a
single w o r d o r a c o m p o u n d e x p r e s s i o n , is invariably a c c e n t e d o n the first
s y l l a b l e , retains its a c c e n t o n l y at the b e g i n n i n g o f a s e n t e n c e o r P ä d a " ;

1 Cp. WHITNEY 1107 a. 9 So called because 'uttered with a

2 See op. cit. 1119. quick' (ifipra-) pronunciation, the semivowel
3 Cp. op. cit. 1114 a. replacing the vowel.
4 C p . BENFEY, V o l l s t ä n d i g e G r a m m a t i k 64. Cp. WACKERNAGEI. I, 2 5 1 , B A ; BRUO
5 But when a Svarita is followed by an MANN, K G . 45, 2.
unaccented syllable, it of course remains; 1 1 This applies to the second as well as

e. g. kviyatha for kva iyatha (VLLL. 17).
b Except in the Taittiriya texts which
follow the general rule (divrva). _
7 This also takes place in siidgäti (TS.)
for sü-udgäti 'a good Udgätf' (TS. vu. I.
8>: B.l
8 Cp. HAUG 75.
the first l'ada of a hemistich (as some of the
above examples show), thus indicating the
independent character of these Padas, which
i is obscured by the way in which the re-
'dactors of the SamhiUs apply the rules of
Sandhi and mark the dependent Svarita.
|
 i°5

that is to say, when, having the full force of the case, it occupies the most
emphatic position; e. g. agne sUpayan.i bhava (i. i 9 b ) 'O Agni, be easy of
access'; firjo napat sa.hasa.van (x. 1 1 5 i a ) 'O mighty son of strength'; hotar
yavistha sukrato (iv. 4 , l d ) 'O most youthful, skilful priest'. This rule also applies
to doubly accented dual compounds, as mitravaruna (i. i s 6 b ) 'O Mitra and
Varuna' (N. mitrA-varuna).
a. Two or more vocatives at the beginning of a P i d a are all accented; e. g. adite,
mitra, varuna (II. 27'4 a ); urjo napid, bhadraioce (vm. 713 4 'O son of strength, O propitiously
bright one'«.
b. The vocative, when it does not begin the sentence, loses its accent,
being unemphatic as referring only incidentally to a person already invoked;
e. g. rttfna mitravarunav rtivrdhav rtasprsH (1. 2*) 'through Law, O Mitra and
Varurta, lovers and cherishers of Law'; t'tpa tvajigne dive-dive, dosa-vastar
dhiyti vayam | . . . ¿masi (1. 1 r ) 'to thee, O Agni, day by day, O illuminer
of darkness, with prayer we come'; a rajana' maha rtasya gopa (vii. 64')
'hither (come), O ye two sovereign guardians of great order'; ydd, indra
brahmanas-pate, abhidrohdm cdramasi (x. 1 6 4 4 ) 3 'if, O Indra, O Brahmanas-
pati, we commit an offence' 4 .
« . T h e vocative, whether at the beginning of or within a sentence, not being
regarded as part of it, does not interfere with the normal accentuation of the sentence.
Hence a verb at the beginning of a sentence, following a vocative, is accented as the
first word of the s e n t e n c e ; while a verb within a sentence, following a vocative, remains
unaccented; e. g. deva, jivata ( A V . X I X . 7 0 1 ) 'O gods, live'; asmc u fit, vrsana, madayetham
(1. 184 2 ) 'beside us, ye two heroes, enjoy yourselves'.
n o . T h e v e r b . — A . The finite verb in a principal sentence is
unaccented except when it is the first word; e . g . agn'im tie purohitam (1. i 1 )
'I praise Agni, the domestic priest'; but ile agnim vipascitam (111. 27*) 'I praise
Agni the wise'. This rule and its exception must, however, be understood
with the following restrictions:
1. A sentence is regarded as capable of having only one verb. Hence
all other verbs syntactically connected with the subject of the first, are
accented as beginning new sentences (a subject or object coming between
two such verbs being generally counted to the first); e. g. tesSm paJii, srudhi
hdvam(\. 2") 'drink of them, hear our call'; asmdbhyam jesi yjtsi ca(i. 132«)
'conquer and fight for us'; tardnir ijjayati, &s/ti, pusyati (vii. 3 2 ' ) 'the energetic
man conquers, rules, thrives'; jahi prajiim ndyasva ca (AV. 1. 8 3 ) 'slay the
progeny and bring (it) hither'.
2. The verb, though not beginning a sentence, receives the accent if
it coincides with the beginning of a Pada (which is treated as the beginning
of a new sentence); e. g. dtha te antamandin | vidyAma sumatindm (1. 4J).
3. Since a vocative (or vocatives) at the beginning of a sentence is
treated as extraneous to it, the verb which immediately follows it becomes
the first word of the sentence and is accordingly accented; e.g. dgtie, jusdsva

1
Here bhadraioce is treated as an in- vocatives. T h e preceding example may
dependent vocative; it would lose its accent contain two also, as the accent of two as
if intended to form a compound expression well as of one vocative would be lost within
with urjo napat = 'O propitously bright sona Pada; but if ràjâu7i stood at the beginning
of strength', as is the case in hotaryavifthaof a Pida, the accentuation would be ràjanti
sukrato. |j maha rtasya gopâ, supposing two vocatives
1
When the first word of a compound were intended.
vocative is an adjective (not a genitive), it 4 The very rare exceptions to the rules
retains its accent within a P i d a ; thus v'uve given above (a, b) are doubtless due to
devasah 'O All-gods', would appear within a errors on the part of the editors or of tra-
Pida as well as at the beginning. dition.
3 This is an example of two distinct;i
io6 I. ALLGEMEINES TOD S P R A C H E . 4. VEDIC GRAMMAR.

no havih (111. 28') 'O Agni, enjoy our sacrifice*. Thus the following sentence
of six words contains three accented verbs as well as three accented vocatives:
indra, jiva, stirya, jiva, deva, jivata (AV. xix. 70*) 'O Indra, live; O Surya,
live; O gods, live'.
4. There are some instances in the RV. of the verb when emphatic,
even though not placed at the beginning of the sentence, being accented
before the particle id, and even before carta1-, e. g. ad ha smd no maghavah
carkrtAd id (1. 1045) 'then be mindful of us, bounteous one'; nd, deva,
bhasathas cana (vi. 59«) '(him) O gods, ye two never consume' 2 .
B. The accent always rests on the verb of a subordinate clause
(which is almost invariably introduced by the relative ya- and its derivatives,
or contains the particles ca and ccd ' i f , tied 'lest', hi 'for', kuvid 'whether');
e. g. yam yajham paribh'ir asi (1. i 4 ) 'what offering thou protectest'; grhAn
gaccha grhapdtni ydthajisah (x. 85Ji>) 'go to the house, that thou be lady
of the house'; indras ca mrldyati no, nd na/i pascad aghdm nasal {11. 41")
'if Indra be gracious to us, no hurt will thereafter reach us'; vi ccd ucchdnty,
asvina, ustisah, prd vam brahmani kardvo bharante (vn. 72*) 'when the dawns
shine forth, O Asvins, the singers offer their prayers to you'; ma cirdm
tanutha dpa/t, net tva . . tdpati sflro arcisa (v. 79') 'do not long delay thy
work, lest the sun burn thee with his beam'; tvdm hi balada dsi (HI. 53 18 )
'for thou art a giver of strength'; tdm, indra, madam a gahi, kuvin3 nv asya
trpnavah (HI. 42") 'come to this gladdening drink, O Indra, (to see) whether
thou mayst enjoy it'.
1. When the first of two clauses, though in form a principal one, is
virtually subordinate in sense (being equivalent to one introduced by 'if'
or 'when'), its verb is occassionally accented; e. g. sdm dsvaparnas cdranti
no ndro, 'smdkam, indra, rathino jayantu (vi. 47 3 ') 'when our men winged
with steeds come together, may the car-fighters of our side, O Indra, win
the victory'.
2. Similarly, but much more frequently, the verb of the first of two
clauses which are antithetical in sense, is accented*. The occurrence of
correlative words like anyd-anyd, ¿ka-<!ka, vd-va, ca-ca, often makes the
antithesis obvious; e. g. prd-prajinyc yanti, pdry any a asate (111. 9') '(while)
some go on and on, others sit about'; sdm cajdhasvajtgne,prd ca bodhayajmam
(VS. xxvii. 2) 'both be kindled, O Agni, and waken this man's knowledge': ud
va siheddhvam upa va prnadhvam (vn. 16") 'either pour out or fill up'. If
the verb of both clauses is the same, it usually appears (as is natural in the
circumstances) in the first only; e. g. dviptic ca sdrvam no rdksa, cdtuspad
ydc ca nah svam (AV. vi. 107') 'protect both every biped of ours and whatever
quadruped is our own'.
3. The second clause, on the other hand, accents the verb if it contains
an imperative (with a final sense), and follows a clause with an imperative
of gam- or ya- 'go'; e. g. eta, dhiyam krnavima (v. 45 6 ) 'come, let us
( = that we may) make prayer'; tiiyam a gahi, kattvesu sdea piba (VIII. 4 ' )
'come quickly, beside the Kanvas drink thy fill'.
HI. Verbal prepositions.—A. The preposition, which generally precedes,
but sometimes follows the verb, being often separated from it by other words,

1
C p . DELBRÜCK 23, 3, 4 ; 2 6 , 2 ; WHITNEY the v e r b ; cp. GRASSMANN, sub v e r b o ; DEL-
598 a. In the &B. hdnia regularly accents BRÜCK 550, e n d .
t h e verb. 4 T h i s accentuation is m o r e strictly applied
2
C p . GRASSMANN, W b . u n d e r id a n d cana. in B. than in V., a n d a m o n g t h e Samhitas
3 T h e r e are only two passages in the RV. least strictly in the R V . ; cp. WHITNEY 597 a.
(v. 3«o, 36^) in which kuvid does not accent
 107

is r e g u l a r l y a c c e n t e d in p r i n c i p a l s e n t e n c e s ; e. g. <i gamat (i. i 5 ) ' m a y h e

come'; jáyema sám yudhi sprdhah (i. 8 J ) ' m a y w e c o n q u e r our foes in fight';
gdyätn apa vrajám vrdhi (i. i o 7 ) ' u n c l o s e t h e s t a b l e o f the k i n e ' ; gámad
váiebhir ä sd nah (i. 5 3) ' m a y h e c o m e to u s with b o o t y ' .
a. W h e n there a r e t w o prepositions, b o t h are a c c e n t e d in the R.V.,
being t r e a t e d as s e p a r a t e w o r d s ; e. g. tipa prä yähi (1. 8 2 s ) ' c o m e forth'; pari
spáso ni sedire (1. 2 5 ^ ) 'the spies h a v e sat d o w n a r o u n d ' ; upa práyobhir <?
gatarn (1. 2 4 ) ' c o m e hither with r e f r e s h m e n t s ' ; águe, vi pasya brhatäjibhl rly<i
( h i . 23*) ' O A g n i , l o o k forth t o w a r d s (us) with a m p l e wealth*.
a . When ä immediately follows another preposition (unless it ends in i), it alone
is accented, both being compounded with the verb; e. g. uphgahi* (L 91 'come hither';
samíirnofi jtváse (x. 256) 'thou fittest (them) for living'. The general rule, however, is
followed if the preposition preceding ä ends in e. g. práíy a lamtfva (iv. 44) 'draw
(thy bow) against (them)' 2 . In the only passage in which it has been noted in com-
bination with another preposition preceding it, áva is treated like ä: upavasrja (x. IIO 1 0 )
•pour out'3.
B . T h e p r e p o s i t i o n in s u b o r d i n a t e c l a u s e s is g e n e r a l l y c o m p o u n d e d
w i t h t h e v e r b , w h e n it is regularly u n a c c e n t e d ; e. g . ydd . . nisidathah4
( v i a . 9") ' w h e n y e t w o sit down*. It is, h o w e v e r , o f t e n s e p a r a t e d f r o m t h e
v e r b , a n d is then a c c e n t e d as well as t h e v e r b . I n this c a s e it is c o m m o n l y t h e
first w o r d of a P ä d a , but o c c a s i o n a l l y c o m e s after the v e r b ; e. g. viyó mamé
rdjast(i. 1 6 0 4 ) ' w h o m e a s u r e d out t h e t w o r e g i o n s ' ; yds tastdmbha sdhasä vi
jmó antän ( i v . 5 0 ' ) ' w h o with m i g h t p r o p p e d earth's e n d s asunder'. O c c a s i o n a l l y
t h e p r e p o s i t i o n is s e p a r a t e a n d a c c e n t e d e v e n w h e n i m m e d i a t e l y p r e c e d i n g
t h e v e r b ; e. g . yd áhutim pari vidi ndmobki/i (vi. i ' ) ' w h o fully k n o w s t h e
o f f e r i n g with d e v o t i o n ' .
a. W h e n there are t w o prepositions, either b o t h are u n a c c e n t e d a n d
c o m p o u n d e d with the v e r b , o r the first o n l y is s e p a r a t e a n d a c c e n t e d ; e. g.
yaydm hi, devir, rtayngbhir asvaih pariprayäthd (iv. 5 1 s) 'for y e , O g o d d e s s e s ,
p r o c e e d a r o u n d with steeds y o k e d b y e t e r n a l o r d e r ' ; sám yám äydnti dhenávah
(v. 6 2 ) 'to w h o m the c o w s c o m e t o g e t h e r ' , ydtrajtbhi samndvämahe (vm. 69s)
' w h e r e w e t o (him) t o g e t h e r shout'. A v e r y r a r e e x a m p l e o f two i n d e p e n d e n t
p r e p o s i t i o n s in a d e p e n d e n t s e n t e n c e is prd ydt stotA . . . upa girbhir itfe
(hi. 5 2 ' ) ' w h e n the praiser p o u r s forth l a u d a t i o n t o (him) with songs'.

IV. NOMINAL STEM FORMATION.

GRASSMANN, Wörterbuch ium Kig-veda 1687—1738 (list of nominal stems according
to alphabetical order of the final letter). — LINDNER, Altindische Nominalbildung. Nach
den Samhitäs dargestellt. Jena 1878. — WHITNEY, Sanskrit Grammar 1136 —1245; Roots,
Verb-forms, and Primary Derivatives, 1885.
1 1 2 . T h e b a r e root, b o t h v e r b a l a n d p r o n o m i n a l , is often used as
a d e c l i n a b l e stem. But m u c h m o r e g e n e r a l l y the stem in d e c l e n s i o n
is f o r m e d b y m e a n s o f s u f f i x e s . T h e s e a r e o f t w o k i n d s : p r i m a r y , o r

1 There seems to be an exception in ; goes much further, apparently making accen-

âtaicid, indra, na ùpayähi (VIII.92 10 ) 'thence,
O Indra, come to us', but ùpa here coming
at the end of a Päda, is used adnominally
with nah.
z The treatment of two prepositions is
on the whole the same in the A V . (cp.
WHITNEY, APr. 185 ff.) and the TS. (cp.
WEBER, IS. 13, 62ff.); but the TS. treats
some other prepositions like ä, and the MS.
tuation of the second preposition the rule;
: cp. DELBRÜCK p. 48.
I 3 Cp. DELBRÜCK p. 47, end.
4 It is not clear why the Pada text
analyses forms like tiy àsîdat (1. 143'), ny
àstah (VIL 18"), vy dslhäi (11.47) as ni àsldat,
ni istah, vi àsthât. There are about thirty
instances of this; cp. WHITNEY 1084 a.
io8 I. AT.I.GF.MEINES U N D S P R A C H E . 4. VEDIC GRAMMAR.

those that are a d d e d directly to roots; secondary, or those that are a d d e d

t o stems already derivative (pronominal stems being also accounted as such).
T h e distinction between these two kinds is, however, not absolute. Suffixes
containing a secondary element sometimes h a v e the appearance and appli-
cation of primary suffixes (as -ariiya = -an-lya). Less frequently primary
suffixes c o m e to be used as secondary ones; thus the participial suffixes are
added not only to the root, but also to primary and secondary conjugation
stems as well as to tense stems. T h e s e nominal suffixes are sometimes a d d e d
by means of what looks like and may conveniently b e called a connecting
vowel, though it may not b e so in origin. Primary suffixes are also a d d e d
to roots compounded with verbal prefixes 1 .

I. P r i m a r y Nominal Derivation.

113. A s regards f o r m , the root when used without suffix usually remains
unchanged in respect to its v o w e l 2 ; it is then, however, liable to modification
in two ways: always adding the determinative -t if it ends in -i, u, or -r,
and occasionally appearing in a reduplicated form. But before primary suffixes
the root usually appears in a strong form: either with Guna o f medial or
final vowels, as ved-a- 'knowledge' from V~id-, sdr-ana- 'running' from V s ! '
or with Vrddhi of final -i, -11, -r and lengthening o f medial a, as kar-d- 'making'
from V'/iy-, grabh-d- 'seizer', from Ygrab/i-.
a. A s regards meaning, there are two classes of p r i m a r y d e r i v a t i v e s :
the one expressing abstract action nouns (with an infinitival character), the
other concrete agent nouns (with a participial character) used as adjectives
or substantives. Other senses are only modifications o f these two; as that
o f the passive participle, which expresses an agent w h o b e c o m e s the recipient
o f an action. T h e primary suffixes forming action nouns c a n also nearly all
b e used to form agent nouns; and many of those properly forming agent
nouns may also form action nouns. T h o s e which properly form action
nouns are: -a, -an, -ana, -ana, -ani, -aril, -as, -a, -i, -is, -l, -Tka, -us, -tas,
•ti, -tu, -tna, -tha, •thu, -nas, -ni, -nv, -pa, -ma, -man, -mi, -yu, -van, -sas.
T h o s e which properly form agent nouns are: -aka, -at or -ant, -ata, -anlya,
-ast, -aku, -ana, -in, •istha, -lyams, -u, -uka, -a, -aka, -ka, •ta, -tar, -tnu, -tra,
-tri, -tva, -thi, -na, -mana, -win, -ya, -ra, -ri, -ru, -la, -li, -lu, -va, -vana, -vani,
-vanu, -vara, -vas, -vams, -vi, -sa, -sani, -saru, -sna, -snu.

Root stems.
114. T h e s e stems are used both as action nouns (often in the function
o f infinitives) and as agent nouns, either substantives or adjectives.
1. Examples of the simple root form are: dyi'tt- f. 'splendour', »//- ( A V . ) f.
'gesticulation', budh- f. 'awaking'; da- 'giver', Mid- f. 'destroyer', yuj- m.
'companion', spas- m. 'spy'; mah- 'great', vrdh- ' s t r e n g t h e n i n g ' . — 2 . With root
determinative -/: mi-t- f. 'pillar', stu-t- f. 'praise'. — 3. With reduplicated root:
cikit- 'wise' {fit- 'observe'), juhn- f. 'sacrificial s p o o n ' {hu- 'offer'), juha- 'tongue'
{ha- 'call'), dadfh'hearty' (drh- 'be firm'), didyu- m. 'missile', didyu-t- f.
'missile', lightning', sasydd- f. 'running stream' (syand- 'run') 4 and with intensive

« T h o s e chiefly thus used are approxima- 2 T h a t is, the root appears in the w e a k
tely in the order of their f r e q u e n c y : -a, form, in w h i c h it is usually stated.
-ana, -ti, -tar and -tra, -in, -ya, -van and 3 In dadhfk adv. ' h e a r t i l y ' .
•man, -i, -u, -as\ cp. W H I T N E Y 1 1 4 1 c. t Perhaps also gang a- f . ' G a n g e s ' if
 IV. N O M I N A L STEM FORMATION. PRIMARY NOMINAL DERIVATION. I 09

reduplication: jogu- 'singing aloud' (gu- 'sound'), pra-titni- 'guiding constantly 1

(tit- 'lead'), yaviyudh- 'warlike' ( y u d h - 'fight'), vanlvan- 'desiring', a-susit- ( A V . )
'barren' ('not bringing forth'), ddridra- (VS.) 'roving' (dra- 'run') is a transfer
to the radical a-stems

-a : action and agent.

115. A vast number of derivatives is formed with this suffix, before which
the root is generally strengthened, but sometimes remains unchanged or is
reduplicated. T h o s e formed with Guna are more than twice as numerous as
all the rest taken together. Medial a generally remains unchanged.
1. Examples of derivatives with Guna are the following action nouns:
ay-a- m. 'course' (i- 'go') hdv-a- m. 'invocation' (ha- 'call'), tar-a- m. 'crossing'
(//-- 'cross'); vcd-a- 'knowledge' (yid- 'know'), jos-a- 'enjoyment' (jus- 'enjoy'),
sdrg-a- 'emission' (srj- 'send forth'); a g e n t nouns: plav-a- m. 'boat' (plu- 'float'),
megh-d- m. 'cloud' (miA- 'discharge water'), cod-a- 'instigator' (cud- 'incite'). With
medial a-, grdbh-a- m. 'seizure' (grabh- 'seize'), s'rdm-a- m. 'weariness' ( s r a m -
'be weary').
a. In several words thus formed the meaning varies according as the root is
accented or the suffix, the word in the former case being nearly always an abstract
substantive, in the latter regularly an adjective or an agent noun; thus ardh- a- m. 'side',
ardh-d- ' h a l f ; if-a- m. 'speed', es-a- 'speeding'; cod-a- m. 'goad', cod- a- m. 'instigator'; var-a-
m. 'choice', var-d- m. ('chooser') 'suitor', sds-a- m. 'command', sas-d- m. 'commander',
iok-a- m. 'glow', sok-d- (AV.) 'glowing'.
2. Vrddhi o f final vowels and lengthening of a 2 : action nouns are
dav-d- ( A V . ) 'fire' (du- 'burn'), tar-d- (VS.) 'crossing' (//- 'cross'), bhag-d-
'share' (bhaj- 'divide'); agent nouns are nay-d- 'leader' (nl- 'lead'), jar-d- 'lover',
grabh-d- 'seizer'.
3. Several derivatives are formed from the w e a k form of the root, the
suffix being accented3; thus priy-d- 'dear' (prl- 'please'), sruv-d- m. 'spoon'
(sru- 'flow'), vr-d-4 m. 'troop' (vr- 'surround'), tur-d- 'rapid' {if- 'cross'); yug-d- n.
'yoke', suc-d- 'bright', krs'-d- 'lean' 5 .
a. Several derivatives of this type, which occur almost exclusively at the end of
compounds, are made from various tense stems; e. g. -a-saj-a• 'stopping', -lud-a- (AV.)
'impelling', -fai-ya- 'seeing', -inv-d 'urging', -pr-nd- 'bestowing', -indh-d- 'kindling', -brw-d-
(AV.) 'saying', -pib-d- (AV.) 'drinking', -ej-ayd- 'exciting' 6 ; jc-f-a- m. 'attainment' (aor. stem
of ji- 'conquer'), nefd- m. 'guidance' (aor. stem of «;- 'lead').
4. A consideiable number of derivates are formed from the reduplicated
root; thus cacar-d- 'movable', dadhrs-d- 'bold', vavr-a- m. 'hiding' (vr- 'cover),
sisay-d- 'strengthening' (si- 'sharpen'), sisndth-a- 'perforation' (snath- 'pierce'),
sasr-d- 'flowing' ( \ r s r - ) . T h e y are more usually formed directly from the
intensive stem or from stems analogously reduplicated; e. g. cakstn-d- 'gracious'
(ham- 'forbear'), rerih-d- ( A V . ) 'continually licking' (rih- 'lick), -rorud-d- ( A V . )
'shedding tears' (rud- 'weep'), vcvij-d 'quick' (vij- 'dart'); carS-car-d 'far-
extending', cala-cal-d- 'unsteady', pani-spad-a- ( A V . ) 'palpitating' (\rspand-),
mari-mrs-d- ( A V . ) 'groping' (mrs- 'feel'), mali-mluc-d- ( A V . ) 'moving about in

from xd- 'go'; Hsu- m. 'child', if from sit- on the root as differentiated from ¿am-a- 'des-
'groiv'. iring'; similarly sak-a- 'help' and sak-d- 'help-
1
jdgat- 'going', 'living', is an old parti- 1 ful'.
ciplc present of the reduplicated stem of 3 See LINDNEK p. 33.
gd- 'go'; WHITNEY, however, thinks (1147 e) 4 According to GRASSMANN, f. i / a - .
that it is made from the reduplicated form s Some of the derivatives of this type are
iaga- {= ja-gam-) with the root determina-' transitions from the root stems to the a-de-
tive I clension, especially at the end of compounds.
1
In these words the suffix is almost in-! 6 See below, Determinative Compounds,
variably accented; idm-a- 'desire' is accented j 272.
no I. ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4. VEDIC GRAMMAR.

the dark', a kind of demon {mluc- 'set', of the sun), vari-vrt-d- ( A V . ) 'rolling'
(vrt- 'turn'), sani-syad-a- ( A V . ) 'running* ( \r syand-), sani-sras-d- ( A V . ) 'decrepit'
(srams- 'fall'), sari-srp-d- 'crawling' ( Ysrp-).
a. The suffix -a is by far the most frequent one used in forming derivatives from
the root with a verbal prefix, being nearly always accented whether the noun ex-
presses an action or an agent; e. g. anu-kar-a- (AV.) 'assistance', abhi-droh-a• 'enmity',
ud-an-a- (VS.) m. 'breathing upwards', m-mei-d- (VS.) 'wink', praty-a-srav-a• 'response',
sam-gam-a- 'assembly'; ati-yaj-d- 'sacrificing excessively', 'over-pioos'. adhi-cahkram-a (AV.)
'climbing over", a-dardir-d- 'crushing', ut-tud-d- (AV.) 'rousing', pari-car-a• (AV. VS.) 'wan-
dering', vi-bodh-d- 'wakeful', sam-gir-d- (AV.) 'swallowing', sam-jay-a- 'victorious'
b. There are many words which have the appearance of ending in this suffix,
though the root cannot be found elsewhere. They include several nouns of plants and
animals. Examples are ukha-» (AV.) 'caldron', kroda- (VS. AV.) 'breast', khila- (AV.)
'waste land', nakhd- 'nail', pakfa- 'wing', vamia- 'reed'3.

-a-ka : agent.
116. T h i s suffix, which consists of the primary -a with the secondary -kct
added, is in a few words used as a primary suffix forming agent nouns o n l y :
abhi-kros-aka- (VS.) 'reviler', piy-aka- ( A V . ) 'abuser', a class of demon, vddh-
aka- ( A V . ) , a kind of reed ('destructive'), sfiy-aka- n. 'missile' (Ysi-); also
pav-akd- 'purifying', 'bright', which though always written thus is invariably
to be pronounced pavSka-4.
-ata : agent.
117. In a few adjectives the primary suffix -a with -td a d d e d is attached
to the strong form of the root, chiefly with the sense of the gerundive: dars-
atd- 'visible', pac-atd- 'cooked', bhar-atd- 'to be tended', yaj-atd- 'to be adored',
raj-ata-5 'silvery', hary-ata-b 'desirable'.

-at and -ant: agent.

118. T h e suffixes -at and -ant are almost restricted to the formation of
active participles. T h e former appears chiefly in the formation of present
participles of the reduplicating class, as ddd-at- 'giving'; also in dds'-at- 'wor-
shipping', sfts-at- 'instructing', and the aorist participle ddks-at- and dhdks-at-
from dah- 'bum'. T h e r e are besides a few substantives originally participles,
which have shifted their accent, formed with -at: vah-at- f. 'stream', vegh-dt-
( A V . V S . ) f. 'barren cow', vagh-dt- m. 'sacrificer', srav-dt- f. 'stream', sasc-dt- m.
'pursuer* 7 . T h e suffix -ant is used to form the active participle of present
stems (excepting those of the reduplicating class), of future stems, and aorist
stems. Some of these have b e c o m e independent adjectives: rh-dnt- 'weak',
prs-ant- 'spotted', brh-dnt- 'great', mah-dnt-8 'great', rits-ant- 'brilliant'; also
the substantive d-ant- m. 'tooth' 9 , dvay-ant- in d-dvay-ant- ( R V 1 . ) 'not double-
tongued' has the appearance of a participle of a denominative stem from
dvi- 'two'. With the same suffix are formed the two pronominal stems i-y-ant-
'so great' ('making this', /-) and ki-y-ant- 'how great?' ('making what?' k!-).

an- : action and agent.

119. F e w words are formed with this suffix, and in some of them the
root is doubtful.
6 Formed from the denominative stem
' Cp. LINDNER p. 35.
2 Also in ukha-a/iid- (RV'.) 'fragile as a of hari- 'bright'.
pot', f. ukha-. 7 See below, Participial stems in at,
3 Cp. LINDNER p. 33, bottom. 311 A.
8 With lengthened vowel in the strong
4 -aha- also appears in the Proper Name
nabh-aka cases.
5 Probably from the root raj- 'colour'. 9 See below, Participles in -ant, 313.
 IV. N O M I N A L STEM FORMATION. PRIMARY NOMINAL DERIVATION. H I

The only action nouns are the following neuters: mah-an-1 'greatness',
rsj-an- (RV X .) 'guidance', gambh-an- (VS l .) 'depth'. The infinitives in -s-an-i
(588c) are, however, probably locatives of action nouns formed with -an
from aorist stems.
Agent nouns are: uks-an- m. 'ox', caks-an- (AV.) n. 'eye', taks-an- m.
'carpenter', pBs-an- m., N. of a god, pllh-an- (VS. A V . ) m. 'spleen', majj-an- m.
'marrow', mOrdh-an- m. 'head', rdj-an- m. 'king', ifs-an- adj. 'virile', m. 'bull',
sdgh-an- (TS. 111. 2. i 1 ) 'vulture*.
a. There are also several words formed with -an the root and original meaning of
which are mostly doubtful: 1. yu-v-an- m. 'youth', yds-an- f. 'maiden', iv-an- m. 'dog';
2. defective neuter nouns; aif-dtt- 'eye', as-art- 'blood', asih-att- 'bone', dh-att- 'day', as-an-
'face', ud-dn-» 'water*, udh-an- udder', dadh-an- 'sour milk', dof-dn- (AV.) 'arm', yak-art-
'liver', iak-art- (AV. VS.) 'dung', sakth-dn- 'thigh'; 3. stems occurring at the end ot
compounds only: -gm-an- and -jm-drt- (also used independently) 'course', -drv-an-1 'playing';
-bhv-an- • 'being', -hearts 'growing' (?)6.
-ana : action and agent.
120. With the suffix -ana are formed a large number of derivatives with
both types of meaning. The root generally shows Gu^a, sometimes Vyddhi,
occasionally no change, rarely a weakened voweL These derivatives very
often appear with a preposition, such verbal compounds coming next in
frequency to those formed with the suffix -a.
r. With Guna are formed neuter action nouns; e. g. kar-ana- 'deed',
cay-ana- ( A V . ) 'piling', dfa-ana- 'play', bhoj-ana- 'enjoyment', vardh-ana- 'increase',
vtd-ana- 'possession', hav-ana- 'invocation', adhi-vi-kdrt-ana- 'cutting off'; also
agent nouns; e. g. the adjectives kar-ana- 'active', eft-ana- 'visible', cod-ana-
(AV.) 7 'impelling', vi-moc-ana- 'releasing'; from a duplicated (intensive) stem:
ielgar-ana- (VS.) 'waking* ( Ygr-).
2. With Vrddhi 8 or lengthened medial a are formed neuter action
nouns, sometimes with a concrete sense; e. g. ut-par-ana- (AV.) 'transporting",
upa-vis-ana- ( A V ' c l o t h i n g ' , 'dress\pra-vac-ana- 'proclamation', sad-ana-1 seat';
also agent nouns; e. g. sam-srSv-ana- (AV.) 'flowing together'; -cit-ana- 'driving
away', mad-ana- 'gladdening', -vAh-ana- 'conveying', - s p a s - a n a ( A V . ) 'spying';
svid-ana- m. 'sweetener'.
3. With unchanged vowel (final -a and medial a) are formed neuter
action nouns; e. g. ddna- 'giving", ud-ydna- (AV.) 'going out', ni-dhdtta-
'receptacle', rdks-ana- 'protection', sad-ana- 'seat', ava-pra-bhrams-ana-10 (AV.
xix. 398) 'slipping d o w n p r d n - a n a - 'breathing' ( \fari-), anomalously formed
directly from a preposition, sdm-ana- 'meeting'; also agent nouns; e. g .(dp-
ana- 'burning', a-kram-ana- (VS.) 'stepping upon', sam-gdm-ana- 'assembling'.
4. With weak vowel are formed very few derivatives: either neuter
action nouns partly with concrete meaning: krp-dna- 'misery', prs-ana-
'tenderness', bhi'w-ana- 'being', vrj-dna- and (once) vfj-ana- 'enclosure', -st'tv-
ana-{KV.) 'procreation'; or agent nouns: krp-and- (AV.) 'miserable', tur-dna-

1
Used in the instrumental only. 7 In the RV. only as final member of
1
From ud- 'be wet'. compounds, rsi-codana- etc.
i From dtv- 'play' in pralt-div-an- 'adver- 8 In this type the only vowel appearing
sary at play'. in the radical syllable is a.
4 From bhu- 'be' in vi-bhzatt- and vi-bhvan-9 In prati-spasana- (AV. Vlll. 5»).
'far-reaching'. See WHITNEY'S n o t e o n navaprabhram-
5 In the Proper Names matari-h-an- and sarta- in his translation of A V . XIX.39 s and
rji-hi-ati-, cp. WACKERNAGEL 2', p. 125, WEBER'S e r r o n e o u s interpretation of this a s
bottom, and above, p. 95, n. «». ' d e s c e n t of the ship'.
6 -taman- in m-kantan- 'desirous' is a
transition form for the a-stem m-kama-. 1
II2 I. ALI.GF.MEINES UND SPRACHK. 4. VEDIC GRAMMAR.

' s p e e d i n g ' ; m. ur-ana- 'ram' (7>r- ' c o v e r ' ) , kir-dna- m. 'dust' ('scattering'),
vfs-ana- ( V S . ) 'testicle'.

-ana : a c t i o n and agent.

121. W i t h this suffix ( a c c e n t e d o n the first o r the last s y l l a b l e ) are f o r m e d
s o m e f e m i n i n e a c t i o n n o u n s (like t h e neuters in -ana) w h i c h s o m e t i m e s h a v e
a c o n c r e t e m e a n i n g : as-a/iA- 'missile', jar-ana- ' o l d a g e ' , dyot-anA- 'brilliance',
man-ami- ' d e v o t i o n ' , rodh-anA- ('obstruction') ' d a m ' , svet-anA- ' d a y b r e a k ' , has-anA-
'laughter'. kap-ami- 'caterpillar' a n d ras-anA- 'rein* h a v e the a p p e a r a n c e o f
b e i n g f o r m e d with this suffix, t h o u g h the r a d i c a l parts are n o t f o u n d in
i n d e p e n d e n t use. A c c e n t e d on the p e n u l t i m a t e s y l l a b l e : arh-dnS- 'merit',
jar-ana- 'dry \vood'(?), barh-dna- 'might', bhand-dna- 'brilliance', mamh-ana-
' r e a d i n e s s ' , meh-dna- ' a b u n d a n c e ' , vaks-dna- ' b e l l y ' , vadh-dna- 'slaughter', van-
ana.- 'desire*. T h e f o r m a t i o n o f yos-dtil- ( R V 1 . ) , usually yh-auii-, ' w o m a n ' is
o b s c u r e \ W i t h the suffix -and- is also f o r m e d ( t h o u g h irregularly a c c e n t e d on
the radical s y l l a b l e ) pft-ana-1 'fight' f r o m a r o o t n o t f o u n d in i n d e p e n d e n t u s e 3 .
T h e suffix -anti also forms feminine a g e n t n o u n s ( a d j e c t i v e s ) c o r r e s p o n d i n g
t o m a s c u l i n e s in a c c e n t e d -ana--, thus tur-dnS'speeding', tvar-anA- (AV.)
'hasting', spattd-ana- ( A V . ) 'kicking'.
a. Derivatives in -ana with verbal prefixes, if compounded with other words, form
their f. in -ana-; thus an-a/a-var-ana-(AV.) 'not to be ordered away', sufa-vafic-ana- and
siifa-s.il/i-aiia- 5 (AV.) 'easy of approach', sad-vi-dhaita- 'forming an order h i-d/iana-) of six'.

-ani : action and agent.

122. T h i s suffix, a c c e n t e d either o n the first or the last syllable, is a d d e d
to either the s t r o n g or the w e a k f o r m o f the r o o t .
1. It f o r m s feminine action nouns, s o m e t i m e s with c o n c r e t e s e n s e ; thus
as-ani- 'missile', is-dni- 'impulse', Jksip-anl- ' b l o w ' , dyot-an!- 'brilliance', dham-dni-
'piping', vart-ani- 'track', sar-dni- 'injury'; also jar ani- 'noise' (?) in the c o m p o u n d
jarani-prA- ' m o v i n g with noise'(?).
2. It f o r m s a g e n t n o u n s , b o t h m. f. substantives a n d a d j e c t i v e s ; thus
ar-ani- f. 'fire-stick', caks-dni- m . 'enlightener', car-dni- ' m o v a b l e ' , 'active',
tar-dni- 'swift', dhvas-dni- 'sprinkling', vaks-dtii- m. 'strengthener'; also in the
c o m p o u n d s dn-ars-ani-, N. o f a d e m o n , d/-ani- ( A V . ) f. 'stick for driving'
(a-aj-) a n d ndani-mdt- ' a b o u n d i n g in w a v e s ' (ud-ani- 'undulating' f r o m ud-
' b e wet').
a. F r o m the r e d u p l i c a t e d r o o t : papi-ani- (pat- 'fly') in su-paptani- f.
'swift flight'. F r o m aorist s t e m s : ears-an'i- ' a c t i v e ' (car- ' m o v e ' ) , f. pi. 'men',
pars-dni-'crossing' (pr-'cross'), saks-dni- ' o v e r c o m i n g ' ( \ r s a h - ) . F r o m d e s i d e r a t i v e
s t e m s : ruruks-dni- 'willing t o destroy' (ruj- ' b r e a k ' ) , sisas-dm- ' e a g e r to win'
(Ysa-), a-s'usuis-dni- ' g l e a m i n g forth' (sue- 'shine').

-am : action and agent.

123. T h i s suffix is the feminine form c o r r e s p o n d i n g to the a c t i o n a n d
a g e n t n o u n s f o r m e d with -ana from the s t r e n g t h e n e d or u n r e d u c e d r o o t 6 ,
with or without verbal p r e f i x ; thus -cod-am-' 'urging' (cod-ana-), pJs-anT- ( A V . )
' w e l l - f o r m e d ' (pli-ana-), proks-anl- ( V S . A V . ) f. 'sprinkling water', pra-jnftni-

1 Other stems with the same meaning 4 This is the only example of such
are: yof-att-, vAs-a-,y<tj-if-. The root is probably accentuation.
ytt- 'unite'. 5 That is, sit-upa-vahc'ana- and su-ttpa-
2 The suffix -ana never otherwise occurs sarp-ona-.

•when the root is accented. 6 See -ana, 120, I—3.

3 Only as a nominal stem - 'fight'. 7 In brahma-codani- 'stimulating devotion'.

 I V . N O M I N A L S T E M FORMATION. P R I M A R Y NOMINAL D E R I V A T I O N . 113

(AV.) 'easily known', spdr-aní- (AV.) 'preserving"; abhi-sdv-anl- (AV.) 'pressing

implement', vi-dhár-anl- (AV.) 'preserving*.
a. In some (partly obscure) words the accent here shifts from the radical vowel
t o the final o f the suffix: arrant- (AV.) 'piercing pain', cet-ani- (AV.) 'visible' (cit-ana-),
tap-aru- 'heat' (táp-ana- 'burning'), ted-am- (AV. VS.) 'blood', pfi-ani- 'tender' (pfi-ana-
'tenderness'), vjj-arn- ' e n d o s a r e ' (vfj-ána- and vfj-ana-).

-an-lya : gerundive.
124. This is a new compositive suffix beginning to be attached directly
to the root in the formation of the gerundive. It is based on the primary
suffix -ana of neuter action nouns extended with the secondary adjective
suffix -tya. There are two examples in the AV.: upa-jlv-aniya- 'to be
subsisted on', and a-mantr-aniya- 'to be addressed'.

-ar : agent.
125. This suffix is found in a very few words: us-dr- f. 'dawn', dev-ár- m.
'husband's brother", nd-n3nd-ar- f. 'husband's sister'1.
-as : action and agent.
126. This suffix forms a large class of neuter action nouns (which some-
times acquire a concrete sense) accented on the root, and a small class of
agent nouns (mostly adjectives) accented on the suffix. Some words belong
to one class or the other according to the accent The root generally takes
Guna, and medial a is sometimes lengthened, while the vowel is reduced in
a few instances.
1. Examples of action nouns are: with Guna, práy-as- 'pleasure' (VprT-),
srdv-as- 'fame'(/JV»-), kdr-as- 'deed' ( / k r - ) , c/i-as- 'brilliance' (yV/*-), t¿j-as-
'splendour' (lftij-), dóh-as- 'milking' (Yduh-) 2 . W i t h medial a unchanged:
áv-as- 'aid', tap as- 'heat', prdth-as- 'breadth', vdc-as- 'speech'; and with partially
or wholly concrete meaning, cdks-as- 'lustre', 'eye', mán-as- 'thought', 'mind',
sdr-as- 'lake'. W i t h lengthened a: -vac-asvás-as- 'covering', 'garment',
váh-as- 'offering', -svüd-as- 'flavour' in pri-svadas- 'agreeable'; and from roots
not in independent use: páj-as- 'brilliance' andpAth-as-4 'path'. W i t h reduced
vowel: nr-as- 'breast', jiiv-as- 'speed' (beside jdv-as-), mfdh-as- 'contempt',
sir-as- 'head'; also vip-as- 'inspiration' in the compounds vipai-cit- 'inspired'
and vipo-dhn- 'bestowing inspiration'; iras- 'anger' in the denominative iras-yd-
'be angry'; hur-as- 'deceit' in huras-cit- 'plotting mischief'. Perhaps also the
adverbs (with shift of accent) tir-ds 'across' and mith-ds 'mutually'.
a. T o roots ending in -a the suffix is added direct in bhát-s n. l i g h t ' {bha- 'shine')
and -das-i ' g i v i n g ' 6 iydá-'J. /ñas- 'kinsman' and mas- 'moon' are probably also formed
with the suffix -as, but being masculines were most likely agent nonns in origin: má-ós-
- 'measurer' (ma- 'measure'). T h e suffix seems to be added with an intervening y in
-hay-as 'agility'7 if it is derived from ha- ' l e a v e ' 8 , while in dhay-as- n. 'enjoyment' and
-gay-as- 'song'9 the y probably belongs to the root»".

1 svasar- 'sister' in probably an old com- , 5 Often to be read as dissyllables, bhaas-

pound in which -sar represents a root; cp. and daas-.
HRI OMANN, Grundriss 2 , 8, note. ; 6 In -das- 'giving' and •dhas• 'placing' an
2 The word hes-as- 'missile' is perhaps I -as has been formed probably by a mis-
formed from the aorist stem of hi- 'impel', i understanding o f the N. sing, -da-s and -dha-s.
3 In vi-vacas- (AV.) 'speaking variously' j 7 In vt-hayas- 'vigorous' and sarva-hdyas-
and sd vacas- (AV.) 'speaking similarly'. j (AV.) 'having all strength'.
4 According to OLDENBERG.ZDMG. 5 4 , 6 0 7 I 8 But it may be a derivative of hi-
this word means 'home' and is perhaps formed j 'impel'.
with a suffix -/has from fa- 'protect'; accord- j 9 From dhe- 'suck' and gai- 'sing'; cp.
ing to SIEG, Gurupujlkaumudl 97, it means above 27 a.
'food', and is derived from pa- 'drink'. | In pt-v-as- n. 'fat' (pi- 'swell') the f i n ay
Indo-arische Philolo^ie. I. 4. g
II4 I - A L L G E M E I N E S TOD S P R A C H E . 4. VEDIC GRAMMAR.

2. Agent nouns in -as, mostly adjectives, correspond in several instances

to action nouns accented on the root These are ap-ds- 'active' {tip-as- 'work'),
tar as- (VS1.) 'quick' {tdr-as- 'quickness'), tyaj-as- m. 'descendant' (tydj-as-
'abandonment'), duv-ds- 'stirring' {duv-as- 'worship'), mah-ds- 'great' {mdh-as-
'greatness'). The derivative tav-as- occurs both as an adjective 'strong' and
without change of accent 1 as a m. substantive 'strength'. A few others have
no corresponding action noun: tos-as- 'bestowing', dkvar-as- 'deceiving', yaj-ds-
'offering', vedh-ds- 'worshipper', res'-as- (AV.) 'neighbour'; and from a denomi-
native stem mrgay-ds- (AV1.) 'wild animal' 2 .
a. There are a few substantives accented on the suffix and seemingly
never neuter, which are allied to the neuter action nouns in meaning, some
being abstract, others concrete in sense. The change of accent may be due
to change of gender 3 . Thus raks-ds- m. occurs beside raks-as- n. both
meaning 'demon'. There also occur jar-ds- m. 'old age', bhiy-ds- m. 'fear',
tves-as-4 'impulse', hat-ds- 'invocation'; us-ds- f. 'dawn' may have been an
agent noun originally; dos-ds- (AV1.) f. (?) beside dos-a- 'night' may be due
to parallelism with us-ds-. The stem upas- 'lap' (the gender of which is
uncertain, as it occurs only in the locative singular) may have been formed
under the influence of upd-stha- 5 m. 'lap'.
a. A few Proper N a m e s are f o r m e d with t h e suffix -as; thus nodh-as-\ a>cattanas-
is a compound of anas- 'wain', possibly also bhalanas-. ap-saras- 6 f. ' n y m p h ' is perhaps
a compound ('moving in t h e waters'), angiras-, a n a m e of Agni, has the appearance of
being f o r m e d with this suffix, but the -s is p e r h a p s secondary 7.

-asl : action and agent.

127. This suffix, which is an extension of -as with -»', forms a couple
of action nouns with concrete sense, and a few agent nouns: dhasi- m.
'drink' {dhe- 'suck') and dhasi- f. 'abode'; at-asi- m. 'beggar', dharn-asi- 'strong',
san-asi- 'victorious'.
-a : action.
128. By far the greatest proportion of words in -a consists of secondary
feminine adjectives corresponding to masculines and neuters in -a.
There is, however, also a considerable number of feminine action nouns
of an independent character, formed by adding -A sometimes to the root, but
usually to secondary conjugation stems (desiderative, causative, denominative).
Thus is-n- (AV.) 'dominion', ntnd-fi- (AV.) 'blame'; jigis-d- 'desire to win',
bhiks-a- (AV.) 'begging', virts-a-8 'desire to frustrate'; gamay-a(AV1.) 'causing
to go'; asvay-a- 'desire for horses', apasy-a- 'activity', urusy-d- 'readiness to
help', jivanasy-a- (TS. n. 3. 1 o2- 3) 'desire of life', sukratuy-d- 'skill'.
a. T h i s suffix has t h e appearance of being a d d e d to a reduplicated stem in jangh-i• i"
•leg' and jikv-a- ' t o n g u e ' ; it may also be contained in the very obscure word siisa(AV'.).

h a v e been inserted owing to t h e influence but owing to the accent it is probably

of pi-van- adj. 'fat'. , masc.
' WHITNEY 1 1 5 2 , 2 e, erroneously, távas- 5 According to GRASSMANN, however,
1
'strength'. upástha- probably = ítpás-slha-; cp. 81, 2 a.
6
» T h e suffix is probably contained in ¡ See MACDONELL, Vedic Mythology 47,
á-han-ás- 'wanton', but t h e derivation is I note 3; but cp. PISCHEI., VS. 3, 197.
o b s c u r e , C p . FRÓHDE, B B . 21, 3 2 1 — 3 3 0 . 7 C p . BRUGMANN, G r u n d r i s s 2 , p . 188.
3 T h e dative infinitives from steins in -as 8 F r o m vi-Trtsa• desiderative of rdh-
are sometimes accented on t h e root, but i 'prosper'.
usually on the suffix (105 a). This may indicate a ' 9 T h e causative stem used in the forma-
difference of g e n d e r , t h e former b e i n g neuter, tion of the periphrastic perfect.
10
the latter masculine. Cp. BRUGMANN, Grundriss 2, p. 106,
4 As tvef-ás- and hav-ás- occur in t h e top.
I. sing, only, t h e g e n d e r is u n c e r t a i n , , •« See WHITNEY'S note on AV. 1, IL 3 .
 IV. NOMINAL STEM FORMATION. PRIMARY NOMINAL DERIVATION. I I 5

-aku : agent.
129. This very rare suffix seems to have been limited to the formation
of agent nouns. It appears in mrday-aku- 'gracious' (formed from a causative
stem), pfd-aku- (AV. VS.) 1 'adder', ¡ksv-aku-, N. of a man.

-ana : agent.
130. This suffix forms a middle participle2 from the present (455, 461,
467, 473, 479). the perfect (493) and (in the form of -s-ana) from the
aorist tense stem3 (527). It also appears in the formation of a few
adjectives and substantives, a preceding u always taking Guna. Such adjectives
are: tdkav-ana- 'speeding' (beside tak-u- and tak-va-), bhfgav-ana- 'beaming'
(beside bhf-gu- m.), vasav-ana- 'possessing wealth' (vasu-), ttrdhva-s-3na- 'being
erect' (formed like an aorist participle from Urdhvd- 'upright').
There are also the Proper Names dpnav-ana-, cyav-ana-, prthav-ana-;
also cyavat-ana- which looks as if formed by adding -Una to the active
present participle stem of cyu- 'fall'. Of doubtful derivation are the substantives
pars-ana- m. 'abyss' and rujdna-4 f. 'river' (1. 32 s ).

-/ : action and agent.

131. With this suffix are formed numerous feminine action nouns, agent
nouns (adjectives and masculine substantives), and a few neuters of obscure
etymology 5 .
The root appears in various forms: sometimes with Guna, Vfddhi or
lengthened a, generally with unchanged or weak vowel, often reduplicated.
Before the suffix a final radical palatal regularly appears (not the original
guttural). In many of these derivatives the root is not traceable elsewhere.
The accent is so fluctuating that no general rule can be stated. The meaning
is often greatly specialised.
1. Examples of action nouns are: with Guna, rop-i (AV.) 'pain',
ioc-i (AV.) 'heat'; with lengthened a: aj-i- m. f. 'race', grfth-i- 'seizure',
dhrdj-i- 'course'; with unchanged vowel: san-i- 'gain'; with weak vowel:
tvh-i- 'brilliance', krs-i- 'tillage', ruc-i- (AV.) 'brightness*.
2. Examples of agent nouns are: with Guna, ar-i- 'devout', arc-i- m.
'beam'; with Vrddhi, kdrs-i (VS.) 'drawing'; with lengthened vowel
-jani-b f. 'wife*, s'dr-i- f. 'arrow' (RV 1 .), a kind of bird (VS. TS.), dis-i- (AV.)
'poisonous matter'; also in a few words of obscure etymology, drap-i- m.
'mantle', ndbh-i- f. 'navel', pan-!- m. 'hand', rSs-l- m. 'heap'; with unchanged
vowel: krid-l- 'playing', granth-l- m. 'knot', mah-i- 'great'; with weak vowel:
si'ic-i- 'bright', grbh-i- (AV.) 'container', bhf-m-i- 'lively' (beside bhrm-i- f. 'lively
motion'). From the reduplicated root, which nearly always has a weak
or reduced radical vowel, are formed with ordinary reduplicative vowel:
cikit-i-1 (SV.) 'understanding', cdkr-i- 'active', jdghr-i- 'sprinkling about' (ghr-),
pdpr-i- 'bestowing abundantly', babhr-i- 'carrying', vavr-i- m. 'covering', sdsr-i-
'speeding', si'/sv-i- 'pressing'; yuyudh-i- 'warlike', vivic-i- 'appropriating' ( Yvyac-);

1
It o c c u r s in t h e RV. only as t h e 4 F o r this w o r d o c c u r r i n g in the f o r m of
first m e m b e r of a c o m p o u n d in pfdäku- I rujhnäs see p . 59, n o t e
sänu- ' h a v i n g a surface like t h a t of a 5 See G R A S S M A N N , W ö r t e r b u c h 1718f.;
snake'. | LINDNER p. 55 — 58.
' See LINDNER p . 53—55. 6 At t h e e n d of c o m p o u n d s b e s i d e t h e
3 äpnatta- s e e m s to b e an irregular p r e s e n t j i n d e p e n d e n t jatii-.
p a r t i c i p l e of äf- ' o b t a i n ' f o r m e d f r o m t h e s t e m 7 Various r e a d i n g for t h e cikit-it- of t h e
äp-nä- i n s t e a d of äp-nu-, | RV.
8*
116 I. ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4. VEDIC GRAMMAR.

jagm i- 'hastening' (gam- 'go'), jdghn-i- 'striking' ( y/ian-), s<isn-i- 'winning';/<7f7/r-z-

'conducting' (Vgf-), tdtur-i- 'victorious' ( \rtjr-), pdpur-i- and piipur-i- (SV.)
'bestowing abundantly' (Vpr-) beside pdpr-i; with lengthened or strong
reduplicative v o w e l : tatrp-i- 'gladdening', dndhrs-i- 'bold', vnvah-i- 'driving
swiftly', sisah-i- 'victorious'; tiituj-i- 'speeding', taiuj-i- m. 'stimulator', ynyuv-i-
'driving away', ynyudh-i- 'warlike'; jarbhdr-i- 'nourishing' ( y b h r - ) T h e w e a k
reduplicated present stem appears in dad-!- 'giving' and dadh-i- 'bestowing';
from similar stems (appearing in the perfect) are formed pap-i 'drinking' (Ypa-)
and yay-i 'speeding' (Vy3-).
a . T h e r e are only about half a dozen n e u t e r s formed with the suffix -/',
nearly all being obscure in origin. T h e y are dks-i- 'eye', dsth-i- ( A V . V S . )
'bone', dadh-i- 'sour milk', sam-i- 'toil' (Jam- 'work'); and with Vrddhi hfird-i-
'heart'.
b . T h e root is sometimes c o m p o u n d e d with v e r b a l prefixes in these
derivatives, the suffix being then usually a c c e n t e d ; thus a-jAn-i- f. 'birth',
vi-vavr-i- m. 'opening', sam-tan-i- f. 'harmony', 'music', a-yaj-i- 'bringing near
b y offerings', a-mur-i- m. 'destroyer', ni-jaghn-l- 'striking down', para-dad-1-
'delivering over', vi-sasah-l- 'victorious', vy-anas'-i-2 'pervading'.
c . From dha- 'put' is derived the s t e m -dhi- which is used in forming
many m. compounds; e. g. antar-dhi- ( A V . ) 'concealment', ud-dhi- ( A V . ) , part
of a car, ni-dhi- 'treasure', pari-dhl- 'fence'. From stha- 'stand' is similarly
formed -sthi- in prati-sthl- f. 'resistance'. T h e r e is here some doubt as to
whether we have a reduced form of the root (as in dhi-ta-) or displacement
of the radical vowel by the very frequent suffix -i. T h e latter alternative is
perhaps the more probable owing to the almost invariable accentuation of
the i and the occurrence of a stem like prati-sthi- 'resistance' beside prati-
sthi- 'standpoint'.

-in : agent.
132. T h e very frequent secondary suffix -in seems sometimes to have
the value of a primary suffix, exclusively, however, at the end of compounds;
thus -Sd-in- 'eating', -es-in- ( A V . ) 'seeking', -tod-in- 'piercing', d-nam-in- 'unbending*,
-vyadh-in- ( A V . ) 'piercing'; from a present stem -as-nttv-in- (VS.) 'reaching';
from an aorist stem -saks-lrt-3 overpowering (Ysah-)-, from a reduplicated
stem -yay-in- 'going' 4 .

-istha : agent.
133. With this suffix attached to the root is formed the superlative
with an adjectival sense. T h e root is regularly a c c e n t e d 5 , t and u taking
Gui}a, while a remains unchanged, though in two or three instances it is
strengthened with a nasal. R o o t s in -3 combine that vowel with the initial -i
of the suffix to e, which, however, is usually to b e read as two syllables.
A b o u t fifty superlatives formed with this suffix occur in the Saiphitas. Examples
are: nay-istha- 'leading in the best manner' (nl- 'lead'), jav-istha- 'quickest'
(Ja- 'speed'), vid-istha- 'procuring most' (vid- 'find'), soc-isfha- 'most brilliant'
(sue- 'shine'); yaj-istha- 'sacrificing best'; bamh-istha- 'most abundant' (batp/t-

1 T h e words bdmhhar-i-(yS.) m., a s o m a - 1 4 In m-vay-in- 'passing over'. Cp. I.INDNKR

guarding genius, karkar-i- f. 'lute', dundubh-i-1 p. 59; WHITNEY 1183 a.
m. 'drum' may b e onomatopoetic in origin. 1 5 E x c e p t two or three times jyttfha- and
1 From the perfect stem an-as- of as- kan-istha- (see above p. 83, 14); and when
'attain'. the superlative is compounded with a prefix,
3 In pra-swtf-i/i- 'victorious'. which then has the accent.
 IV. NOMINAL STEM FORMATION. PRIMARY NOMINAL DERIVATION. 117

' m a k e firm'), mdrph-istha- 'most liberal' {mah- 'be great'); jyhtha- 'greatest'
and jyesthd- 'eldest* {jya- 'overpower'), dhestha 'bestowing the most* (Vdha-),
yhtha- 'going fastest* (Yya-).
a . In many instances these superlatives attach themselves in meaning
to derivative adjectives, being formed from the root which the latter
contain; thus os-istha(TS. 1. 6. 12-i) beside osa-m 'quickly', bdrh-istha-
'greatest' beside brh-dnt- 'great', var-isfha- 'choicest' (vr- 'choose') beside vdr-a-
'choice', sadh-istha- 'straightest' beside sadh-u- 'straight'. In a few cases
the suffix is a d d e d to the derivative form o f the root which appears in the
adjective; thus ds-istha- ( A V ' . ) 'swiftest' beside as'-u- (from as- 'reach'); a n d
in nav-istha- 'newest' the suffix is attached to the radical element in ndv-a-2
'new* (and not directly to the root from which that word m a y b e derived).
b . In some cases the root is compounded with a v e r b a l p r e f i x or
other indeclinable; thus a-gam-istha- 'coming best', a-sram-istha- 'never tiring',
iam-bhav-istha-3 'most beneficial'.
a. There are some irregularities in the formation of this superlative. Thus Ma-
retains its vowel unchanged, adding the suffix with an intervening -y\ bhu-y-istha- 4
•greatest'; the roots prT- and sri- are treated as if they ended in -a: priffha- 'dearest',
irisfha• 'most glorious'; par-s-is/ha- 'taking across best' is made from an aorist stem of
pf- 'cross'. The abnormal accentuation of jyestha- 'eldest' is doubtless intended to
differentiate its meaning from jyh/ha- 'greatest'. The use of kan-isthd- 'youngest' is
parallel to that of the formers.
-is : a c t i o n .
134. T h i s suffix forms a dozen neuter action nouns, mostly used in a
concrete sense. T h o u g h the root takes Guna, the suffix is accented except
in three instances. T h e words thus formed are: arc-is- 'flame', am-is-b 'raw
flesh', krav-is- 'raw flesh', chad-is- 'cover', chard-is- 'protection', jyot-is- 'light',
barh-is- 'straw', roc-is- 'light', iart-is- 'track', vyath-is- 'course' (?), soc-is- 'flame',
sarp-is- 'melted butter*, hav-is- 'oblation'.
a . Besides these av-is- appears for at-as- 'aid' and tnah-is- for mah-as-
'greatness' in a few derivatives: avis-ydni- 'helping readily', avis-ya- 'desire',
avis-yu- 'desirous'; mahis-vant- 'great'; and with inorganic -s tuvi-s- 'might',
suci-s- 'flame', su-rabhi-s- 'fragrant' for iuii-, s'uci-, surabhi- in a few derivatives:
tuvis-mant- 'mighty', sucis-mant- (only voc.) 'brilliant', surabhis-fama- 'very
fragrant*.

-1: action and agent.

135. T h i s suffix, besides its secondary use in the formation o f feminines,
chiefly adjectives, from m. and n. stems in -a, -i, -u, -r, as well as various
consonant stems (201), seems to be primary in forming a few independent
f e m i n i n e action and agent n o u n s . Such are deh-i- 'rampart', nad-i- 'stream*,
nind-i- 'joy*, pes-i- (RV'.J 'swaddling clothes'(?), ies'-i- 'needle*, sac-T- 'power',
s'dm-t- and s't'm-T- 'work*; seemingly from an aorist stem (Yvah-) vaks-i- ( R V 1 . )
'flame*. T h e r e are also about a dozen m a s c u l i n e s : ah-i- 'serpent*, upav-i-
(VS.) 'encouraging', daks-X- ( R V 1 . ) 7 'flaming*, prSv-i- 'attentive', dus-pmv-i-

1 In the compound oiisfha-davan• 'giving ! 5 kan-iitha- 'smallest' appears in books v

immediately'. I and vi of the TS.
2 Probably from a demonstrative root tut- 6 This word, which occurs in the L. sing,
which appears in nu 'now', mi tana- *present'. form amis-i only, is given as m. in BR., pw.,
3 This superlative is formed under the and GRASSMANN, but why it should not be
influence of the positive iam bhu- as the in- : like all the rest a neuter, is not clear,
dependent superlative of Mu- is bhii-y-tftha-. 7 Only voc. daifi, Pada dhaifi-, L 141 s .
4 The regular form bhav-iftha- occurs in Cp. p. 119, note 5.
combination with sam-. 1
118 I. A L L G E M E I N E S UND S P R A C H E . 4. V E D I C GRAMMAR.

'unfriendly', su-prav-i- 'very attentive', rath-i- 'charioteer', a-rath-i- 'not a

charioteer'; and the Proper Names ndm-t- and pfth-T-1.

-Ika : action and agent.

136. This suffix forms a few neuter substantives and some adjectives:
thus dn-ika- n. 'face', drs'-Ika- n. 'aspect', mrd-tka- n. 'grace', ti-sar-ika- ( A V . ) n.
'rheumatic pains'; -rj-ika-2 'beaming', dfbh-ika- m., N. of a demon, vrdh-
ikd- m. 'increaser', vi-iar-tka- ( A V . ) m., a kind of disease; from a reduplicated
stem: par-phar-ika- m. 'filler'.
-Tyams : agent.
137. This suffix is used in forming comparatives, being added to the
root in the same way as the superlative suffix -istha (133). A t least 40 o f
these derivatives^ occur in the Samhitas. Examples are: jdv-tyams- 'quicker',
mdmh-lyanis- 'more liberal', ydj-Xyams- 'sacrificing better', tr'f-Tyams- 'sharper',
vcd-lyams- 'procuring more', yodh-tyums- 'fighting better', priyams-4 'dearer'
(Vpri-), s'nyiims-5 ( Ysri-) 'more splendid', -stheyams- 'lasting' (Ystha-). Connected
in sense with the corresponding positive are dn-lyams- ( A V . ) 'smaller',
beside dnu- 'minute', s'ds-lyams- 'more frequent', beside sds-vant- 'constant';
and from a derivative form of the root tiksn-Tyams- ( A V . ) 5 'sharper', beside
tiksi/d- 'sharp' (tij- 'be sharp').
a. Beside the usual form in -Tyjms- there appear some half dozen
comparatives made with a s h o r t e r f o r m of the suffix -yams: tav-yams- beside
iav-tyams- 'stronger', ndv-yiims- beside ndv-iyums- 'new', pan-yams- beside pdn-
tyUms- 'more wonderful', bha-yams-b '(becoming) more', 'greater', beside bhav-
TyUiiis- 'more plentiful', rdbh-yams- beside rdbh-iyams- (VS.) 'more violent',
sdh-yams- beside sdh-Tyilms- 'stronger'; jyA-yHms- 'greater', 'older', and san-yams-
'older' (sdna- 'old') appear without an alternative form beside them.
b . With v e r b a l p r e f i x e s o r p a r t i c l e s : vi-kled-Tyams- ( A V . ) 'moistening
more', pdri-svaj-iyams- ( A V . ) 'clasping more firmly', prati-cyav-iyams- 'pressing
closer against'; d-stheyams- 'not enduring'.

-u : agent.
138. This suffix forms a considerable number of agent nouns, both
adjectives and substantives. T h e latter are chiefly masculines, but there are
also several feminines and neuters. T h e suffix is usually accented. T h e root
is generally weak, but sometimes shows Vj-ddhi, least often G u n a ; it also
occasionally appears in a reduplicated form. Medial a usually remains
unchanged, but is sometimes lengthened; occasionally it is nasalized or appears
as e. Final -a adds an intervening y, but is occasionally dropped. Gutturals
only (not palatals) appear before this suffix.
1. Examples of adjectives are: nr-u- 'wide', rj-u- 'straight', prth-u-
'broad', mrd-1'1- (VS.) 'soft', vidh-u- 'solitary'; jdy-ii- 'conquering' (]/)'')>
diir-u- 'splitting' (Ydr-); say-u- 'lying' cikit-u- 'shining' (Ycit-),
jigv-u- 'victorious', sisn-u- 'ready to give' (]/\w«-) 7 ; tak-u- 'swift', tan-u- 'thin',
1 See below 375 B ; LINDNER p . 8 0 ; ii f r o m t h e a d j e c t i v e s t e m pupa-, t h e r a d i c a l
WHITNEY 355 b. e l e m e n t o f w h i c h is u n c e r t a i n .
1 A s final m e m b e r o f a f e w c o m p o u n d s , 6 W i t h the r a d i c a l vowel u n c h a n g e d as
a s bha-rjTka- ' l i g h t s h e d d i n g ' . in t h e s u p e r l a t i v e .
3 S e e LINDNER p . 1 5 5 ; W H I T N K V 4 6 6 — 7 Some other words have the appearance
47o. of being reduplicaled: habhr-u- 'brown',
a-rar-n- 'hostile' (ra- 'give'); malimhi- (VS.)
4 T h e r o o t s pri- a n d sri- b e i n g t r e a t e d a s
ending in -a: pra-iyams- and sra-tyams- sas
e e m s t o b e a m u t i l a t e d f o r m o f malimlnca-
in t h e s u p e r l a t i v e . (AV.) 'robber'.
5 I n t h e T S . pap-Jyams- is f o r m e d d i r e c t l y |I
 I V . NOMINAL STEM FORMATION. PRIMARY NOMINAL DERIVATION. 119

tdp-u- 'hot', as'-il- 'swift' (as- 'reach'); amh-u- 'narrow'; cer-u- 'active' (car-
'move'); dha-y-u-1 'thirsty', pa-y-u- 'protecting'; y-u- 'going' ( V y 3 - ) 2 ; reku-
'empty' ( /ric-).
i. Examples of s u b s t a n t i v e s are: m . grh-1'1- 'beggar', rip-u- 'cheat';
plpr-u-, N. of a demon; as-u- 'life', man-u- 'man', pad-ii- 'foot', bsh-u- 'arm',
ams-u- 'filament', va-y-u- 'wind'.; f. t's-u- (also m.) 'arrow', sindh-u- (also m.)
'river', dhart-u- 'sandbank', pars-u- 'rib', han-u- 'jaw'; n. <iy-u 'life', jan-u-
'knee', tdl-u- (VS.) 'palate', trdp-u- (AV. VS.) 'tin', dir-u- (also m.) 'wood',
sdn-u (also m.) 'summit'; with syncope, ks-u- 'food' (ghas- 'eat'); with redu-
plication, ti-ta-u- 'sieve'.
a. In a few of these derivatives the root appears with a p r e f i x : upa-y-u-
(TS. 1. 1. i ' ) 'approaching', ni-cer-u- 'gliding', pra-may-u- (AV.) 'liable to
destruction', pari-tatn-i'i- (AV.) 'surrounding', sdm-vas-u- 'dwelling together';
abhis-u-J m. 'rein', vi-kllnd-u- (AV.) m. a kind of disease.
139. There is besides a large class of a g e n t n o u n s formed w i t h -u
not directly from the root but from tense or secondary conjugation stems.
1. From p r e s e n t s t e m s are formed: tany-1'1- 'thundering' (tanya-ti 'roars'),
bhind-u- m. 'destroyer' (bhind-anti 'they split'), - v i n d - u ' f i n d i n g ' (vinda-ti 'finds');
from an aorist stem ddks-u-5 and dhaks-u- 'burning'.
2. From d e s i d e r a t i v e s t e m s are formed i-yaks-u- 'desirous of sacrificing'
(Vyaj-), cikits- u- (AV.) 'cunning' (Veil-), jigTs-u 'desirous of winning' (Vji-),
jighats-i'i- (AV.) 'greedy' (ghas- 'eat'), titiks-ii- (AV.) 'patient', dits-u- 'ready to
give' (yda-), didrks-u-6 (VII. 86^) 'eager to see' (j/drs'-), didhis-i't- 'wishing
to obtain' ( d i p s - u - 'wishing to harm' ( | f dabh-), ninits-u- 'wishing to
revile', bibhats-u- 'feeling disgust' (]/badh-), mimiks-u- 'mingling' ( ] f m i s - ) ,
mumuks-u- 'desiring release' ( m u c - ) , ririks-u- 'wishing to damage' ( Y r i s - ) ,
vivaks-u- (AV.) 'calling aloud' (Yvac-), sisas-u- (AV.) 'eager to win' ( V-M-).
3. From c a u s a t i v e s t e m s are formed: dharay-u- 'streaming', bhajay-u-
'liberal', bhavay-u- 'cherishing', matnhay-u- 'liberal', manday-ii- 'joyous', sramay-u-
'exhausting oneself'; from a causative denominative mrgay-u- (AV.VS.) m. 'hunter'.
4. By far the commonest are the derivatives from regular d e n o m i n a t i v e s ,
of which nearly 80 occur in the RV., and at least half a dozen additional
cases in the A V . About 35 of these words are formed from denominative
stems in actual use 7 ; thus aghay-u- 'malignant', aratly-u- (AV.) 'hostile', vas&y-u-
'desiring wealth', carany-u- 'mobile', manasy-u- 'desirous'. A few are formed
from pronouns, as ahamy-u- 'selfish', asmay-t't- 'favouring us', kimy-u- 'desiring
what?', tvSy-u- 'loving thee', yuvay-u- and yuvay-u- 'desiring you two', svay-u-
'left to oneself'. In the absence of an accompanying denominative, there is
the appearance of a secondary suffix -yu (with the sense of 'desiring' or some
more general adjectival meaning) attached directly to nouns. Thus there are
derivatives in the R V . in which the -as of noun stems is changed to -o, as
if the suffix were actually -yu: amho-yu- 'threatening', duvo-yu- 'honouring'
beside duvas-yu-, and a-skrdho-yu- 'not niggardly'.

-uka : a g e n t .
140. This suffix probably consists of the primary -u extended with the
secondary -ka. It is very rare in the Samhitas. There is no certain example

1 Here the y really belongs to the root
dhe- 'suck'.
' Also in the reduplicated form yay-u-
(VS.) ' s w i f t ' ; the final-ä seems also to be
dropped in ä-th-ü- 'mole' (tha- 'dig') and in
su-flh-u '(standing) well' (stki- 'stand').
3 Probably from aMi+is- 'rule'.
4 In go-vindu• 'searching for milk'.
5 The Pada text has dhak;-u-. Cp. p. 117,
note 7.
6
With irregular accent.
7 See the list in L I N D N E R p. 6 3 .
120

in the R V . , but sStt-uka- ( R V \ ) 'desirous of prey' (Ysari-) and the Proper

Name per-ukd- (RV 1 .) may be instances. In the A V . occur ghfit-uka- 'killing',
vi-kas-uka- 'bursting', sdm-kas-uka- 'crumbling up', d-pra-may-uka- 'not dying
suddenly'. In the T S . occurs vas-uka-, but the meaning and derivation are
doubtful.
-us : action and agent.
141. This suffix forms neuter action nouns which have mostly a concrete
sense, and masculine agent nouns, altogether less than 20 in number.
A l l the substantives except one are accented on the root, which generally
takes Guna, but in one instance Vrddhi. T h o s e adjectives which also appear
as substantives have the same accentuation; but those stems which are used
solely as adjectives accent the suffix.
r. T h e neuter substantives are: dr-us- ( A V . ) 'wound', tiy-us-'life', cdks-us-
'light', tap-us- 'heat', tar-us- 'battle', dhan-us- 'bow', pdr-us- 'knot', ydj-us-
'worship', vap-us- 'marvel', sfis-us- 'command'; with accent on the suffix: jan-i'ts-
'birth' (also m.).
2. T h e masculine substantives are: nah-us- 'neighbour', mdn-us- 'man';
a d j e c t i v e s identical in form with neuter substantives are: cdks-us- 'seeing',
tap-us- 'glowing', vap-us- 'wondrous'; adjectives without corresponding sub-
stantives are: jay-us- 'victorious', van-us- 'eager', vid-us-1 'heedful'; also daks-us-
'flaming' from the aorist stem.

-u : feminine substantives.
142. This rare suffix chiefly forms feminines corresponding to masculines
and neuters in -u'. Independent feminine substantives are: cam-a- 'dish',
tan-a- 'body", vadh-u- 'bride'; perhaps pan-a-3 'admiration'. T h e r e are also
the compounds pums-cal-fi- (VS.) 'courtesan', pra-jan-n- ( A V . ) 'organ of
generation'.
-uka : intensive adjectives.
143. This suffix is merely the lengthened form of -uka used in forming
a few derivatives from the reduplicated intensive stem. It appears in jsgar-
tika- 'wakeful', dandas-nka- (VS.) 'mordacious', salal-iika- ( R V 1 . ) 'wandering
aimlessly'.
-ka : agent.
144. This is a very common secondary suffix, but very rarely appears
in a primary character. It is thus used in at-ka- m. 'garment', su-me-ka-
'firmly fixed' (mi- 'fix'), sus-ka- 'dry', slo-ka- m. 'call' (sru- 'hear'), sto-kd- m.
'drop'. In vf-sc-i-ka- m. 'scorpion' the suffix is added with connecting -/-.
T h e feminine form of the suffix appears in stu-ka- 'flake', ra-ka-, N. of ;i
goddess.
-ta : agent.
145. This suffix is employed almost exclusively to form past participles 4 ,
chiefly with passive, sometimes with intransitive meaning. Its more general
and original sense is, however, preserved in some words used as adjectives
or as substantives with concrete meaning; thus trs-ta- 'rough', drdha- 'firm',
s'l-td- 'cold', vSvn-ta-5 'dear'; m . da-td- 'messenger', sB-ta- ( A V . V S . ) 'charioteer',

' With weak r o o t ; the only instance of I form occurring is the I. sing, pamut.
medial vowel other than a in the r a d i c a l ' 4 See below, Past passive participles, 572,
syllable. . and the lists in LINDNER p. 70 f.
2 See below, derivative -u steins, 384. s From a reduplicated f o r m of va- 'win',
3 T h e stem may be pan-u-, as the o n l y ; and with unusual accent.
 IV. NOMINAL STEM FORMATION. PRIMARY NOMINAL DERIVATION. 121

kista-1 'singer', bastd-x Tie-goat'; n. r-ta- 'right', ghr-td- 'ghee', ja-td- 'kind',
dyu-ta- (AV.) 'gambling', nrt-td- (AV.) 'dance', pur-td- 'reward', vra-td-2
'ordinance'; with accented and strong radical syllable: ¿-ta- 'variegated';
m . gar-ta- 'car-seat', mdr-ta- 'mortal', vS-ta- 'wind', hds-ta- 'hand'; n. ds-ta-
'home', ndk-ta- 'night'.
a. In many past participles the suffix is added with connecting -/'-,
as raks-i-ta- 'protected'. Some of these are used as n. substantives; thus
jlv-i-ta- 'life', cat •i-ta- 'behaviour'. Several words thus formed appear as
adjectives only; thus tig-i-td-3 'sharp', pal-i-td- 'grey'; also some other names
of colours with strong and accented radical syllable: ds-i-ta- 'black', roh-i-ta-
'red', loh-i-ta- (AV.) 'red', hdr-i-ta- 'yellow'; sye-ta- 'white' is perhaps anomalously
formed with -ita- from /yd-4 'freeze' 5 .

-tar : agent.
146. The agent nouns formed with this very frequent suffix 6 are often
used participially, governing an accusative. The root is generally accented
when they have this verbal force, but the suffix, when they are purely nominal
(86 A 22). The root regularly has Guna, a and a remaining unchanged; thus
nd-tar- 'leader' (]/nl-), ho-tar- 'priest' ( V h u - ) , kar-tdr- 'doer' ( Vkr-), bhet-tdr-
'breaker' ( Vb/iid-), yok-tdr- 'yoker' ( \ryuj-)\ yas-tdr- 'sacrificer' ( Vyaj-), da-tdr-
' giver' 7 . With weak root: us-tar- m. 'ploughing bull'".
a. Less commonly the suffix is added to the root with connecting -/'-:
regularly when the root ends in more than one consonant 9 , as vand-i-tdr-
'praiser', but also often when it ends in a single consonant and sometimes
when it ends in a vowel, as cod-i-tdr- 'instigator', sav-i-tar- 'stimulator* (j/ sa-).
b. The suffix is combined with -T- instead of -i- in grdbh-l-tar- (AV.)
'seizer', prati-grah-l-tar- (AV.) 'receiver', sam-grah-i-tar- (VS.) 'charioteer', pra-
tar-i-tdr- 'prolonger', a-mar-i-tar- 'destroyer'; with -u- in tar-u-tar- 'winning'
and tar-u-tdr- 'conqueror', dhdn-u-tar- 'running swiftly', sdn-u-tar- 'winning';
with -u- in var-u-tdr- 'protector'; with -0- in man-0-tar-10 and man-o-idr-
' inventor'.
c. These derivatives are very frequently compounded with prepositions";
e. g. pura-e-tdr- 'leader', apa-bhar-tar- 'taking away', prav-i-tdr- 'protector'
(av- 'favour'), pra-sav-t-idr- 'vivifier'.
d. They are very rarely formed from secondary conjugation or from
tense stems, as coday-i-tdr- 'stimulator' 12 , bodhay-i-tdr- 'awakener', nc-s-tar-Xi,
a kind of priest. From the reduplicated root is formed vavd-iar- 'ad-
herent'.
e. Several names of relationship appear to be formed with this suffix.
Being all very old words, the radical syllable is obscure in meaning or irregular-
in form. They are ja-mU-tar- 'son-in-law', duh-i-tdr- 'daughter', ndp-tar-
'grandson', pi-tar- 'father', bhrd-tar- 'brother', ma-tar- 'mother'.

1 T h e s e t w o w o r d s are of d o u b t f u l o r i g i n . 7 -lur a p p e a r , i n s t e a d o f -tar in yan-tur-

2 If d e r i v e d f r o m vf- ' c h o o s e ' w i t h ano- b e s i d e yan-tar- ' g u i d e ' a n d in slha-iur- b e s i d e
malous f o r m o f r a d i c a l s y l l a b l e ; b u t a c c o r d - stha-tar- 'stationary'.
i n g to WHITNEY ( 1 1 7 6 b) it is to b e ex- 8 The f. o f these w o r d s is f o r m e d w i t h
plained as vrat-a- f o r m e d f r o m v}-t- ' t u r n ' -» f r o m t h e w e a k s t e m , i. e. in -in.
like vraj-d- f r o m \vrj-. 9 E x c e p t dams-jar- ( A V . ) 'biter'.
3 W i t h a n o m a l o u s guttural b e f o r e -/'-. j 1 0 C o n n e c t e d with the p r e s e n t stem manu-(<-

4 O r i g i n a l l y p e r h a p s ' r i m y ' , cp. iT-la- ' c o l d ' . > etc. o f man- ' t h i n k ' .
5 T h e f. o f t h e s e a d j e c t i v e s o f c o l o u r is [ 1 1 S e e LINDNER p. 73 f.

f o r m e d f r o m other s t e m s : ¿hi-, asitm-, 1 2 In t h e f. roday-i-tr-i-.

palikm-, rohini-, IShinT- ( A V . ) , SytttT-, harinl-. I *J F r o m the aorist s t e m o f nX- ' l e a d ' .
6 S e e the lists in LINDNER p. 72—75.
I22 I. ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4 . VF.DIC G R A M M A R .

-tas : action.
147. This suffix is identical in meaning with -as, being used to form
neuter action nouns which have acquired a concrete meaning. It is very
rare, occurring only in rctas- 'semen' (ri- 'flow') and sro-tas- 'stream', 'current'
(sru- 'flow').

-ti : action and agent.

148. This suffix is used to form a large number of feminine action
nouns; it also appears in a few agent nouns employed either as adjectives
or masculine substantives'. The root generally has the same weak form as
appears before the -ta of the past passive participle 2 ; it is, however, more
often accented than the suffix. In a few words the suffix is added with the
connecting vowels -a-, -i- or -I-.
1. Action nouns. With accent on the suffix are formed e. g. is-ti-
'desire' (is- 'seek'), ¡¡-ti- 'aid' ( Yar')> kïr-ti- 'praise' (kr- 'commemorate'),
dhau-ti- 'stream' (dhav- 'flow'), pi-ti- 'draught' (pa- 'drink'), pur-ti- 'reward'
(pr- 'fill'), bhak-ti- 'distribution' (bhaj- 'divide'), ma-t'i- 'thought' (man- 'think'),
ra-ti- 'gift' (rj- 'give'), rît;- 'flow' (ri- 'flow'), vis-ti- 'work' (vis- 'be active'),
stu-t!- 'praise'; from the reduplicated root: carkr-ti- 'praise' (kr- 'comme-
morate'); with connecting -a- 3 : amh-a-ti- 'distress', drs'-a-ti- 'appearance',
mith-a-tl- 'conflict', vas-a-tl- 'abode'. With accent on the root are formed
e. g. is-ti- 'offering' ( Yy<V~)> g'i-ti- 'motion' ( Yg<un-), dl-ti- 'liberality' (da-
'give'), vrd-dhi- 'increase' ( V vrdh-), sun-ti- ( A V . VS.) 'repose' ( Y SUM-) ; from
the reduplicated root didhi-ti- 'devotion' (d/n- 'think') 4 ; with connecting
-a-: Am-a-ti-5 'indigence' (am- 'be afflicted').
a . T h e d e r i v a t i v e di-ti- ' g i v i n g ' w h e n u s e d a s t h e final m e m b e r of a c o m p o u n d is
r e d u c e d to - tti- : bhâga-tti-, maghâ-tti-, vâstt-tti--, a b o v e 26 a 2.
2. A g e n t nouns. These are rare, amounting to hardly 20 in number.
Accented on the suffix: jiia-ti- m. 'relative', pat-ti- m. ( A V . VS.) 'pedestrian',
ra-ti- 'willing to give'; with connecting -a-: ar-a-ti- m. 'servant', khal-a-ti- (VS.)
'bald', and with accent on the connecting vowel vrk-â-ti- m. 'murderer'.
Accented on the root: m. dhn-ti- 'shaker', pa-ti- 'master', mûs-ti- 'fist',
sap-ti- 'steed'; adjectives: dhrs-ti- (VS.) 'bold', pn-ti- (AV.) 'putrid', vâs-ti-
'eager'; and from the reduplicated root jigar-ti- m. 'swallower'; with connecting
vowels: Am-a-ti- 'poor', rAm-a-ti- (AV. TS.) 'liking to stay', rj-T-ti- 'glowing',
turv-i-ti-, N. of a man (turn- = tur-, tr- 'overcome'), dabh-i-ti-b, N. of a
man'", snch-a-ti- 'carnage' and snïh-i-ti- (SV.).
a. T h e s e d e r i v a t i v e s a r e o f t e n c o m p o u n d e d w i t h p r e p o s i t i o n s 8 , w h i c h a r e a l m o s t
a l w a y s a c c e n t e d ; t h u s ànu-ma-ti- ' a s s e n t ' , abhilt- ' a t t a c k ' (aMt-i/i-), a-hn-li• ' o f f e r i n g ' ,
ritr-r-ti- ' d i s s o l u t i o n ' , vy-àp-ti- (AV.) ' a t t a i n m e n t ' , sim-ga-ti- ' c o m i n g t o g e t h e r ' , Mi-ma-li-
' i n s i d i o u s ' (man- 'think')9; w i t h suffix a c c e n t e d , o n l y â-sat-ti- ' p u r s u i t ' , à-su-li- ' b r e w ' (y.r«-)
a n d ' e n l i v e n i n g ' (\'su-); a l s o aihi-s-ti- m . ' h e l p e r ' b e s i d e abhi-s-ti- f. ' h e l p ' .

« S e e t h e list in GRASSMAXX, W ô r t e r b u c h f a t u a t e d ' (also a-drp-ta-'). T h e s e a r e , h o w e v e r ,

1719—21; LINDNER p . 7 6 — 7 9 . the only two e x a m p l e s .
a T h e r o o t s tan- ' s t r e t c h ' , ram- ' r e s t ' , han- 5 But w i t h t h e c o n n e c t i n g -a- a c c e n t e d :
' s t r i k e ' m a y r e t a i n t h e n a s a l : lan-ti- f. ' c o r d ' , am-a-ti- ' l u s t r e ' , ram a-ti- (AV.) ' h a u n t ' , vrat-
ran-ti- ' e n j o y m e n t ' (AV. VS. T S . ) b e s i d e I a-ti- ' c r e e p e r ' .
rà-ti- (VS.), à-han tï- ( V S ' . ) b e s i d e à-ha-ti- I 6 T h i s w o r d m a y b e a c o m p o u n d (*dab/ii-
'uninjured condition'.
3 T h e -a- h e r e o f t e n , if n o t a l w a y s , b e l o n g s
i'"'-)•
to a verbal stem. 7 yayati-, N . of a m a n , is a c c o r d i n g to
4 R o o t s w h i c h h a v e t h e c o n n e c t i n g -i- in B R . a n d GRASSMANN d e r i v e d f r o m yat-
t h e p a s t p a r t i c i p l e , d o n o t t a k e it h e r e : • s t r e t c h ' .
8 See LINDNER p . 7 7 f.
gup-ti- (AV.) ' p r o t e c t i o n ' b e s i d e gvp-i-tà-, pra-
dfp-ti- ' a r r o g a n c e ' b e s i d e à-drp-i-ta- ' n o t in- 9 C o m p o u n d e d w i t h a n o u n : kuma-ka-ti-
' r e q u i r i n g t h e f u l f i l m e n t of a w i s h ' .
 I V . NOMINAL S T E M FORMATION. PRIMARY NOMINAL DERIVATION. 123

b. T h e suffix is a d d e d to a s e c o n d a r y stem in jan-aya-ti- (VS.) f. ' g e n e r a t i o n ' ; it

s e e m s to have a secondary character in yina-ti- f. ' m a i d e n ' , adj. 'young'. It is s e c o n d a r y
i n faksa-ti (VS.) ' r o o t of t h e w i n g ' ; in t h e n u m e r a l s vimia-ii- ' 2 0 ' , sas-ti- '60', a n d o t h e r s ;
i n pant ti- f. 'set of five'; in t h e p r o n o m i n a l w o r d s ka-ti *how m a n y ? ' , ta-ti (AV.) ' s o
m a n y ' , ya-ti 'as m a n y a s ' ; and in addhi-ti- m. ' s a g e ' , f o r m e d f r o m t h e a d v e r b ad-dha ' t r u l y ' .

-tu : action and agent.

149. The great majority of the words derived with this suffix are infinitives
appearing in the form of the dative, ablative-genitive, and accusative cases.
Besides these, there are a few action nouns used independently, and still
fewer agent nouns. The root is usually accented 1 and takes Guna; but
the suffix is accented in some half dozen instances, in two or three of
which the radical syllable is weakened. T h e gender is usually masculine, but
a few feminines and neuters also occur.
1. Accented on the root: m. o-tu- 'weft' (va- 'weave'), kra-tu- 'capacity'
(kr- 'make'), tdn-tu- 'thread', -dha-tu-2 'element', sak-tu- 'groats' ( \f safij-), se-tu-
'bond' (si- 'bind'), so-tu- 'libation* (su- 'press'), dha-tu- adj. 'drinkable' (dhe-
'suck'); m. man-tu- 'adviser'; f. vds-tu- 'morning' ( v a s - 'shine'), sii-tu-i (AV.)
'birth'; n. dti-tu- 'division' (da- 'divide'), vfis-tu-4 'abode' (vas- 'dwell';.
2. Accented on the suffix: m. ak-tu- 'ray' ( a i i j - 'anoint'), ga-tu- 'way'
(ga- 'go') and 'song' (gii- 'sing'), jan-tu- 'creature', he-tu- 'cause' (hi- 'impel');
with weak radical vowel: r-tu- 'season', pi-tu- 'drink' (pi- 'swell') 5 .
a . The suffix is attached in a few instances (as in some infinitives) with
connecting -/-: dur-dhar-T-tu- 'irresistible', su-hdv-i-tu- 'to be successfully
invoked', tur-phdr-T-tn-b.
b. The suffix appears in a few instances to be attached to a present
or a secondary conjugational stem: edha-tu- m. 'welfare' (cdha-te 'thrives'),
tapya-tu- adj. 'glowing' (tapyd-te 'is heated'), vaha-tu- m. 'wedding' (vdha-ti
'conveys'), sisasd-tu-1 'desirous of obtaining'; jlva-tu- f. 'life' (jiva-ti- 'lives').
c . Derivatives f o r m e d with -tu are in several instances c o m p o u n d e d with t h e
p a r t i c l e s dus- and sit-\ dur-dhar-i-tu• and dur-dhar-tu• 'irresistible', dur-var-tu- 'difficult
t o w a r d o f f ' , diis /rii -i-tu- ' u n c o n q u e r a b l e ' , su-yan-tu- ' g u i d i n g well', su-sri tu- ' h e a r i n g
willingly', su-han-tu- 'easy to slay'; also with a pronoun in rsaitu- 'going one's own
(sz'a-) g a i t ' (fluA.

-tna : action and agent.

150. This suffix is very rare, occurring only in cyau-tnd- n. 'concussion',
adj. 'animating' (cyu- 'stir') and in rd-tna- n. 'gift' (m- 'give').

-tnu : agent.
151. This suffix, which is always accented, forms more than a dozen
adjectives and a few substantives. It is added to the root either directly or
more commonly with the connecting vowel -a- (which probably belongs to the
present stem) or -/'- (which is almost exclusively used with causative stems).
1. Attached directly to the root: kr-tnu- 'active', dar-tnu- m. 'breaker',
ha-tnu- 'deadly' ( / h a n - ) ; with reduplication: jiga-tni't- 'hastening' (gam- 'go'),
jigha-tnu- 'harming' (han- 'strike').
2. With connecting -a-: kav-a-tnu-8 ' m i s e r l y ' , p i y - a - t n u - 'reviling' (piya-ti

1 6
T h e infinitives always accent t h e r o o t ( i o s ) . ' T h e derivation of this w o r d is uncertain
2
Only in the compounds tri-dhatu-' three- and its m e a n i n g is obscure. [Cp. M a h i b h S s y a
f o l d ' a n d sapla dh'Uu- ' s e v e n f o l d ' . \ Vol. I, p. 363, 1. 25.]
3 W i t h o u t Guna. 7 F r o m t h e desiderative stem of sa-
4 W i t h lengthened a. 'obtain'.
8
5 krtv-as ' t i m e s ' is p r o b a b l y a n acc. pi. of Cp. WHITNEY, R o o t s , u n d e r kit- ' d e s i g n ' ,
a s t e m kf-tu- ' m a k i n g ' . Cp. BB. 25, 294.
124 I- ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. VEDIC GRAMMAR.

'abuses'), meh-a-tnu-, N. of a river (mcha-ti), a-ruj-a-tnii- 'breaking' (rujd-ti

'breaks').
3. With connecting -/'-: drav-i-tm't- 'running' (dru- 'run'); from causative
stems: tanay-i-tnu- 'thundering', dravay-i-tnu- 'hasting' (dru- 'run'), posay-i-tnu-
'causing to thrive' (Ypus-), jnaday-i-tnu- 'intoxicating' (Ymad-), sUday-i-tnu-
'causing sweetness to flow' ( Y s u d - ) , stanay-i-tni't- m. 'thunder' (\ r sian-);
an-amay-i-tnu- 'not making ill', 'curative' {Yam-).
-tra : agent.
1 5 2 . This suffix was doubtless originally formed by a secondary -a added
to -tr (the weak form of tar-). But having early attained an independent
character, it came to be largely employed as a primary suffix. It is used to
form some half dozen adjectives 1 and about 60 substantives, the latter being
neuters except about a dozen (partly niasc. and partly f e m . ) T h e substantives
generally express the means or instrument by which the action of the verb
is performed, sometimes the place where it is performed The root is generally
accented and has Guna; but it is sometimes unaccented and has a weak
vowel. The suffix is generally added directly to the root, but in about a
dozen instances with a connecting vowel.
1. Attached directly to the root: adjectives: jdi-tra-~* 'victorious',
sva-trd-'< 'invigorating'; with reduplication: joh(i-tra- 'calling aloud' ( Yhii-).
m . a-trd-s 'eater', us-tra-6 'buffalo', ddms-tra- 'tusk' (dams'- 'bite'), mdn-tra-
'prayer'; with weak (etymologically doubtful) root: putra- 'son', mi-tra-" 'friend',
vr-trd-8 'foe'.
f. ds-tra- 'goad' (as- 'reach'), nas-trfi- (AV. VS.) 'destroyer' ( Ynai''), mj-trCi-
'measure', ho-tra- 'sacrifice'.
n. With accent on the root: d-tra-9 'food', kdr-tra- (AV.) 'spell', ksJ-tra-
'field', ksnu-tra- 'whetstone', gfi-tra- 'limb', jiiii-tra- (VS.) 'intellectual faculty',
tdn-tra- 'warp', dd-tra-10 'gift', da-tra- 'knife', dhdr-tra- 'support' (VS. TS.),
pdt-tra- ( V S . ) " 'wing', pa-tra- 'cup', (pa- 'drink'), pes-ira- (AV.) 'bone', mn-tra-
( A V . ) 'urine', midhra- (AV.) 'penis', yok-tra- 'rope', vdr-tra- (AV.) "dam',
vds-tra- 'garment', sro-tra- 'ear', sii-tra- (AV.) 'thread' (siv- 'sew').
With accent on the suffix and often with an abstract meaning: as-trd-
(AV.) 'missile', ksa-tra-" 'dominion', da-trd- 'share', des-trd- 'indication' (l/Vz'/-),
ne-tra- (AV.) 'guidance', ras-trd- 'dominion', sas-trd- (VS.) 'invocation', sas-trd-
'command', sat-trd- 'sacrificial session', sto-trd- 'praise', stha-trd- 'station', ho-trd-
'sacrifice'.
2. With connecting v o w e l -a-: dm-a-tra- 'violentydj-a-tra- 'adorable';
krnt-a-tra- 'shred' } gay-a-tra- 'song',pd/-a-/ra- 'wing', vddh-a-tra- 'deadly weapon',
f. var-a-trii- 'strap'; with -/-: khan-i-tra- 'shovel', car-l-tra- 'foot', jan-l-tra- 'birth-
place', pav-l-tra- 'sieve', bhar-i-tra- 'arm', bhav-i-tra- 'world', san-i-tra- 'gift';
with -u-: tdr-u-tra-'•> 'overcoming'.

8
1 T h e s e h a v e mostly masc. f o r m s , s o m e Occurs a U o as a n. in t h e KY. w h e n
n e u t e r ; t h e only o n e w h i c h has f e m . f o r m s is plural.
yajatra- ' d e s e r v i n g a d o r a t i o n ' . 9 F o r at-ha- f r o m ad- 'eat'.
a Six o r s e v e n m a s c u l i n e s a n d five femi- 10
P r o b a b l y f o r dal-tra- f r o m t h e p r e s e n t -
nines. s t e m of da- ' g i v e ' .
11
3 W i t h e x c e p t i o n a l V^ddhi of t h e r a d i c a l Only at t h e e n d of a c o m p o u n d in the
syllable. RV.
4 F r o m iva- - sii- 'swell'. 12
naksatra- ' a s t e r i s m ' is p e r h a p s a com-
5 F o r at-tra- f r o m ad- ' e a t ' . Cp. p. 125, n o t e p o u n d . Cp. a b o v e 8 1 , 2 a.
6 W i t h weak r o o t t h o u g h a c c e n t e d . »3 Cp. lar-u-tar- 'victor'.
7 O c c u r s in the R V . a s a n. w h e n it
means 'friendship'.
 IV. NOMINAL STEM FORMATION. PRIMARY NOMINAL DERIVATION. 125

-tri: agent.
153. This very rare suffix occurs in only three or four derivatives: a-tri
'devouring', sd-tri- m., N. of a man 2 ; with connecting -a in arc-a-tri- 'roaring';
also in the f. form with t in ra-trl-i 'night'.

-tru : agent.
This suffix is found only in
154. sdtru- 'enemy' for *sdt-tru-, perhaps
from sad- 'prevail'.
-iva : agent.
155. This suffix probably arose by the addition of the secondary suffix -a
to action nouns in -tu, which turned them into adjectives used in a gerundive
sense. It occurs in about a dozen such derivatives which are almost restricted
to the R V . ; e. g. kdr-tva- 'to be made' 4 .

-tha: action.
156. This suffix is almost exclusively used to form action nouns (some
of which have acquired a concrete meaning) in all genders*. T h e root
generally appears in a weak form, as the suffix is mostly accented. The
suffix is attached to the root either directly or more commonly with a
connecting vowel 6 .
1. Attached directly to the root: m. dr-tha- 1 'goal', gs-thd- 'song',
pak-thd-, N; of a man, bhr-tha- 'offering', rd-tha-8 'car', hd-tha-9 'slaughter';
in composition with prepositions: sam-i-tha- 'conflict', nir-r-thd- 'destruction',
sam-ga-thd- 'union' (gam- 'go'), ud-gl-tha-IO (AV.) 'singing of chants'; in com-
position with nouns: putra-kr-tha- 'procreation of sons', dirgha-ya-tha- long
course', go-pT-thd'protection' (/<?- 'protect') and 'draught* ( pa - 'drink') of
m i l k ' . — f . kis-tha- 'course', g<i-tha- 'song', ni-tha- ' t r i c k ' . — n . uk-tha- 'saying'
(}fvac-), ttr-thd- 'ford' (tr- 'cross'), nl-tka- 'song', yu-tkd-" 'herd', rik-tha-
'inheritance' 13 .
2. W i t h connecting vowel -a-: ay-d-tha- n. 'foot', uc-a-tha- n. 'praise'
(Y vac~), car-d-tha- n. 'mobility', tves-d-tha- m. 'fury', proth-a-tha- n. 'snorting',
yaj-d-tha-14 'worship', rav-a-tha- m. 'roar', vaks-a-tha- m. 'growth', vid-d-tha- n.
'assembly', iap-a-tha- m. 'curse', say-d-tha- n. 'lair', svas-d-tha- m. 'snorting',
sac-d-tha- m. 'aid', stan-a-tha- m. 'thunder', stav-a-tka- m. 'praise', srav-a-tha-
m. or n. 'flow'; with prefix: a-vas-a-tha- (AV.) ' a b o d e ' , p r a - v a s - a - t h d - n. 'absence',
priln-d-tha-16 ( V S . ) 'respiration'.
a. W i t h -u: jdr-B-tha-, m. a kind of demon ('wearing out', jr-), var-Q-tha-
n. protection'; with - u : mat-u-tha-m. 'sage'.

1 F o r at-tri- f r o m ad- ' e a t ' . C p . p. 124, n o t e 5. 1 1 T h e r o o t in this w o r d is u n c e r t a i n .

2 F o r sat-tri- f r o m sat- ' c n t in p i e c e s ' . '3 pfsfha- ' b a c k ' p r o b a b l y c o n t a i n s t h e

3 In A V . ra-iri- also. r o o t sthà- ' s t a n d ' , = *pra-sthà- 'prominent*,
•t S e e b e l o w , F u t u r e P a s s i v e P a r t i c i p l e s , '4 T h e g e n d e r is u n c e r t a i n , as t h e w o r d
5S1. o c c u r s in the dat. s i n g . o n l y .
5 T h e f e m . f o r m of the s u f f i x is -tha. 15 P r o b a b l y f r o m vidh- ' w o r s h i p ' : Ol.DEN-
6 This v o w e l f o r the m o s t part b e l o n g s BERG, Z D M G . 54, 6 0 8 — 6 1 1 ; c p . a b o v e p . 23,
in r e a l i t y to a p r e s e n t s t e m . note , 0 .
7 W i t h accented strong root. 1 6 W h e n t h e r e is a p r e f i x the a c c e n t is
R T h e r o o t is uncertain. ; t h r o w n o n t h e s u f f i x ; b u t /ran- (=pra-att-)
? W i t h r o o t a c c e n t e d t h o u g h w e a k e n e d is t r e a t e d l i k e a r o o t .
by loss o f n a s a l ( hart - ' s l a y ' ) . 1 1 P e r h a p s f r o m man• w i t h d o u b l e s u f f i x
>° W i t h ga- ' s i n g ' w e a k e n e d t o gì-. {-tu, -tha).
11 Both pà- ' p r o t e c t ' a n d pà- ' d r i n k ' are :
•weakened to pT-. C p . a b o v e 27.
126

-thi : agent.
157. As far as can be judged from the very few examples occurring,
this suffix was used to form agent nouns. It is attached with or without
a connecting vowel. The derivation of all the words which seem to be
formed with this suffix is doubtful: dt-i-thi- m. 'guest' (if from at- 'wander');
ud-ar-a-thi- adj. 'rising'; me-thi- (AV.) m. 'pillar' (mi- 'fix'). The neuters dsthi-
(AV. VS., beside asth-dn-) 'bone' and sdkthi- (beside sakth-dn-) may be formed
with the suffix -/'.
-thu : action.
158. This very rare suffix, which is not found in the R V . , appears only
with the connecting vowel -a- (which in reality belongs to a present stem),
forming masculine action nouns: ej-a-thu- (AY.) 'trembling', vep-d-thu- 'quivering',
stan-d-thu- (AV.) 'roar'.
-na : action and agent.
159. This suffix is in the first place used, like -ta, to form past passive
participles 1 ; e . g . bhin-nd- from bhid- 'split'; but, unlike -ta, it is never added
to the root with a connecting vowel or to a secondary conjugation stem.
It is further employed to form a number of adjectives and masculine
substantives, mostly accented on the suffix. It also forms a few feminine
(-na) and neuter substantives, all but one of the latter being accented on the
root. The substantives have partly an abstract and partly a concrete meaning.
A medial vowel never takes Guna, but a final vowel nearly always does.
1. The adjectives (f. -a) are: ds-nd- 'voracious', us-nd- 'hot', u-nd-
'deficient', r-na- 'guilty', krs-nd- 'black', kso-nd- 'immovable' (?), nag-nd- 'naked',
bradh-nd- 'pale red', s'J-rra- 'red', sro-nd- and ilo-na- (AV.) 'lame', siaks-nd-
(AV.) 'slippery', svit-na- 'white', syo-nd- 'agreeable'; compounded: an-amr-na-
'inviolable', d-rnks-na- (AV.) 'tender', sadi-pr-nd- 'always munificent'.
a. Substantives are: m. ghr-nd- 'heat', budh-nd- 'bottom', bhm-nd-
'embryo', yaj-iid- 'sacrifice', sye-nd- 'eagle', ste-na- 'thief'; sam-pras-na- 'question';
accented on root: ds'-na- 'stone', kdr-na- 'ear', vdr-na- 'colour', sus-tta-, N. of
a demon, svdp-na- 'sleep'. — n. tr-na- 'grass', dhd-na'booty', par-nd- 'wing',
vas-nd- 'price', sfs-na- 'penis', su-nd- 'welfare', sd-na- 'want', si-na- 'property'.—
f. trs-na- 'thirst', dhc-na- 'milch cow', sd-na- 'missile', sthii-na- 'post'.

-nas : action.
160. This suffix, which has the same meaning as -as and -ttis, is used
in forming a few action nouns which have mostly acquired a concrete sense.
These are dp-nas- n. 'possession', dr-nas- n. 'flood', -bhar-nas-J 'bearing'(?),
rik-nas- n. 'property left by bequest' (ric- 'leave'). With connecting vowel:
drdv-i-nas- n. 'movable property* (dru- 'run'), par-X-nas- m. 'abundance*
(pf- 'fill'). It also appears in the agent noun ddtn-u-nas- adj. 'domestic',
m. 'friend of the house' (dam-).

-ni: action and agent.

161. This not very frequent suffix is employed to form m. and f. action
nouns as well as agent nouns (adjectives and substantives). Either the radical
vowel or the suffix may be accented; and the root in several instances takes
Guija. The feminines have rarely an abstract sense, having generally acquired
a concrete meaning.

1 For a list of these see below 576.

2 Probably from dha- 'place'.
 IV. NOMINAL STEM FORMATION. PRIMARY N O M I N A L DERIVATION. 127

1. The feminines are: jur-ni- 'heat', -jya-ni-1 (AV.) 'injury', me-n'i- 'missile',
srd-ni- 'line', sro-tii- 'hip', sr-ni- and sr-ni- 'sickle'; masculines are: ghf-ni-*
'heat', yo-Jii- 'receptacle'.
2. Agent nouns, adjectives and m. substantives, are: ag-ni- m. 'fire',
jftr-ni- 'singeing', tiir-ni- 'speeding', dhar-ni- m. 'supporter', prs-ni- 'speckled',
pre-ni- 'loving' ( V p r T - ) , bhtir-ni- 'excited', vah-ni- m. 'draught animal', vfs-ni-
and vrs-ni- 'virile', m. 'ram'.
a. The suffix occurs with a connecting -u- in hrad-u-ni- f.(?) 'hail' 3.

-nu : action and agent.

162. With this suffix is formed a small number of action and agent
nouns of all genders, but mostly masculine. The action nouns often have a
concrete meaning. As the suffix is almost invariably accented, the radical
vowel, with one exception, never shows Gima. This suffix, like -/«, is some-
times preceded by -a (which really belongs to present stems).
1. The substantives occurring are: ksep-nu- m. 'jerk' (x. 516), dii-nu-4
m. f. 'demon', f. 'dew', n. 'drop', dhe-nu- f. 'cow', bha-rtu- m. 'light', vag-nu-
m. 'sound', vls-num., N. of a god, su-nu- m. 'son', stha-nii-6 m. 'pillar';
with connecting -a-, krand-a-nu- m. 'roaring', ksip-a-nu- m. 'missile', nad-a-nu-
m. 'roaring*, nabh-a-nu-1 m. 'fountain' 8 .
2. Adjectives are: grdh-tiu- 'hasty', dhrs-nu- 'bold'; with connecting -a-i
the compound vi-bhahj-a-nu- 'breaking to pieces'.

-pa : concrete substantives.

163. A few words are formed with this suffix, but the origin of all of
them is more or less obscure 9 . These are: pus-pa- n. 'flower', stu-pd-IO (VS.)
m. 'tuft', stii-pa- "
1
m. 'top-knot'; perhaps also tdl-pa- m. 'couch', s'ds-pa- (VS.)
n. 'blade of grass', sil-pa (VS.) n. 'ornament', sdr-pa- (AV.) 'winnowing basket';
possibly apu-pd- m. 'cake', ula-pa- m. 'shrub', kuna-pa- (AV.) n. 'corpse' 11 .

-ma : action and agent.

164. This suffix forms a considerable number of action nouns (almost
exclusively masculine) as well as agent nouns, both adjectives and substantives.
Only a single neuter and one or two feminine substantives occur. The suffix
is accented more than twice as often as the root. The vowel r always takes
Guna in the radical syllable; on the other hand, initial or medial i and u
never take Guna; when final they only do so if the root is accented. Several
of these derivatives in -ma appear beside others in -man; some at least are
transfers from the latter; thus dhdr-man- 'ordinance' alone is found in the R.V.,
while dhdr-ma- appears beside it in the later Samhitas.
1. Accented on the suffix: adjectives: e. g. jih-md- 'oblique', tig-ma-
'sharp', das-ma- 'wondrous', b/iT-md- 'terrible', sag-tnd- mighty'; with reduplication,.
1 6
In sarva-jvani- (AV.) ' c o m p l e t e loss of T h e origin of the cerebral n here is
property'. obscure.
a B e s i d e ghr-na- m . a n d ghf-tta- f. 7 A l s o tiabh-attu- f.
8
3 T h i s suffix is in several words p r e c e d e d T h e Proper N a m e kri-dtiu- is perhaps
by -a-, much in t h e same way as -//'; but similarly formed, but with long -a-.
a s -ani has assumed a more independent 9 Cp. LINDNER p. 69.; LIDEN, IF. 18,
c h a r a c t e r i t i s treated above (122) as a s e p a r a t e 496.
10
suffix. Probably f r o m a root sin- ' d r i p ' ; s e e
4 W i t h irregular accent. WHITNEY, Roots.
11
5 Perhaps originally an adjective *vis-tiu-, yupa- m . 'sacrificial post' is probably
with shift of accent on b e c o m i n g a P r o p e r , derived from yup- 'obstruct'.
Name. But cp. p. 85, note
128 I. ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. VEDIC GRAMMAR.

tutu-md- 'powerful'; substantives: m. aj-md- 'course', idh-md- 'fuel', ghar-ma-

'heat', dar-md- 'breaker', dhu-md- 'smoke', nar-md- (VS.) 'jest', ruk-md- 'ornament',
hi-md- 'cold'.
2. Accented on the root: substantives: m. e. g. ti-ma- 'friend' (av-
'favour'), ¿-ma- (VS.) 'course', dhdr-ma- (AV. VS. TS.) 'ordinance', bhd-ma-
'brightness', sdr-ma- 'flow', so-ma- 'Soma' ( Vsu~), sto-ma- 'praise' ( Ystu-), ho-ma-
' offering'; f. hi-ma- 'winter'; n. bil-ma- 'chip'.
a. T h e suffix seems to be added once with connecting a- (which really belongs to
a present stem) in the f. sara-ma- 'the fleet one', N. of a goddess.

-man : action and agent.

165. This suffix forms a large number of derivatives', which are almost
•exclusively action nouns. The great majority of these are neuters accented
on the root, but there are also a good many masculines accented on the
suffix. Besides these occur a few agent nouns, mostly accented on the suffix,
both adjectives and masculine substantives, all of them, except brah-mdn-
'priest', of rare occurrence. The same word in several instances varies in
meaning according to the accent and gender 2 ; e. g. dhdr-man- n. ordinance',
m. dhar-mdn- 'ordainer'. The root in these derivatives usually takes Guija;
in a few instances it has Vrddhi or lengthens a\ sometimes it is weak. The
suffix is often added with the connecting vowels -i- or -T-. The derivatives
are occasionally compounded with prepositions, which are then nearly always
accented.
1. Examples of action nouns are: n. dd-man- 'food', ¿-man- 'course',
Jcdr-man- 'action', bars-man- 'goal', ian-man- 'birth', trd-man- 'protection',
dd-man- 'gift' (da- 'give') and 'bond' (da- 'tie'), nit-man- 'name', pdt-man- 'flight',
•brdh-man- 'devotion', bhdr-man- 'table', bhii-man- 'world', vdk-man- 'invocation',
vdrt-man- 'course', vlt-man- 'dwelling', sdk-man- 'power', sds-man- 'praise',
sdk-man- 'power', ho-man- 'sacrifice' ( Y h u - ) and 'invocation' ( Y h a - ) \ with
connecting -/'-: jdn-i-man- 'birth', vdr-i-man- 'expanse' (beside var-i-man- m.);
with connecting -h: ddr-i-man-'destruction', 'ordinance', pdr-T-man-*
'abundance', bhar-l-man- 'maintenance', vdr-T-man- 'expanse', sdr-T-man- 'course',
sdv-T-man- 'impulse' 4 , hdv-T-man- 'invocation'.— m . us-man- (AV. VS.) 'heat',
o-mdn- 'favour', je-mdn- (VS. TS.) 'superiority', dragh-mdn- (VS.) 'length' (beside
dragh-i-mdn-), pap-mdn- (AV.) 'wickedness', bha-mdn- 'abundance', vid-man-
'knowledge', svad-mdn- 'sweetness', he-man- 'impulse'; with connecting -/'-:
jar-i-mdn- 'old age', prath-i-mdn- 'breath', mah-i-mdn- 'greatness', var-i-mdn-,
vars-i-mdn- (VS.) 'height' (beside vdrs-man- and vars-mdn-), har-i-mdn-
'yellowness'.
2. Agent nouns accented on the suffix are: dar-mdn- 'breaker'
dit-mdn- 'giver', dhar-mdn- 'supporter', brah-mdn- 'one who prays', bhuj-mdn-
'fertile', - ad-man- 'speaker', sad-mdn- 'sitter', so-mdn- 'Somapresser'; accented
on the root: ds-man- 'stone', o-man- 'friend', /¿-man- 'superior', bhds-man-
'chewing'3.
a. T h e following words are according to difference of accent neuter action nouns
or masculine agent nouns dti-man- 'gift' and da-man- ' g i v e r ' ; dhar man• 'ordinance' and
dhar-man- 'ordainer'; brah-man- 'worship' and hrah-matt- 'priest'; sad-man• 'seat' and
sad-man- 'sitter'.

1
For lists of these see GRASSMANN, Wörter- 4 Also star-l-man• 'spreading' used in the
buch 1730F.; LINDNER p. 91—93. loc. as an infinitive.
2
Somewhat in the same way as the 5 In a compound also svadit-ksad-man-
-derivatives in -as (126). 'having sweet food'.
3 Also with anomalous -?-:pdr-i-man- (S V'.).
 IV. NOMINAL STEM FORMATION. PRIMARY NOMINAL DERIVATION.

b. In a few words difference of gender and accent is not accompanied by difference

of meaning: vars-man- n. and vars-man- m. both mean 'height'; sv&dman- n. and road-
man- m. 'sweetness'; var-i-man- n. and var i man- m. 'expanse'.
c. In a few instances difference of accent is accompanied by a reversal of the
usual distinction of meaning: ji-man- 'victorious', je-man- (VS. TS.) 'superiority'; 6-man-
m. 'friend', o-man• m. 'favour*.
d. A few derivatives in -man both action and agent nouns are compoanded with
prepositions: vt-ga-man- n. 'step', pra-bhar-man- n. 'presentation', prdya-man- n. 'de-
parture', vi-dhar-man- m. 'maintainer*, vi-pat-man-1 'flying through", anu-vart-man- (AV.)
'following after', visar-man-i m. 'flowing asunder 1 .
-mana : agent.
166. This suffix is used to form the present^, future, and aorist middle
participle and the present passive participle 4 . It is always preceded b y
a except in the anomalous perfect participle sasr-m3na- (= sasr-Sna-)
'speeding*.
-mi and -mJ: action and agent.
1 6 7 . T h e suffix -mi is used to form a few adjectives and masculine
substantives; it also forms (generally in the form of -ml) a few feminine
substantives with a concrete meaning: Ur-mi- m. 'wave* ( V ^ ' ) , -kur-mi-
'action' in tuvi-kUr-mi- 'working mightily', ji-mi- 'related', 'kinsman'; bhn-mi-
and bhii-mT- f. 'earth', laks-mi- f. 'sign', sGr-mi- f. 'tube'; probably also ras-mi-
m. 'ray' and the adj. krudh-mi-5 ( R V 1 . ) 'irascible'.
-min : agent.
168. A few adjectives have the appearance of being formed with a suffix
-min. T h e y are is-min- 'impetuous', bhs-min- 'shining', sus-min- 'roaring'. T h e y
may, however, b e explained as secondary derivatives made with the suffix -in,
like dhQm-in- from dhQma- 'smoke'.
-ya : gerundive.
169. This suffix is used to form a large number of future participles
passive 6 . It probably has a primary character in other derivatives besides
these; but it is so difficult to distinguish them from those which are secondary,
that it is preferable to treat all but gerundives under secondary -ya (228).
-yu : action and agent.
1 7 0 . T h i s suffix forms a few action and agent nouns. T h e root remains
unchanged, while the accent varies. A c t i o n nouns are: man-yu- m. 'anger',
mrt-yu- m. 'death'. A g e n t nouns are: das-yu- m. 'enemy', druh-yu-, N. of a
man ('hostile'), sim-yu- 'enemy'; bhuj-yi'i- both adj. 'wealthy' and m. as N. o f
a man. Adjectives only are: ydj-yu- 'pious', sundh-yi'i- 'pure', sah-yu- 'strong'.
-ra : agent.
171. A large number of derivatives are formed with this suffix 7 , which
is usually accented, the root consequently almost always appearing with a
weak vowel. T h e s e words are mostly adjectives, but a few substantives
occur in all genders. T h e suffix is frequently added with the connecting
vowels -a-, -i-, -T-, -u-.

1
Or as a Bahuvrlhi 'having the flight of 5 The only form occurring irudhmi, N.
a bird' (w-). pi. n. might, however, come from krudh-
2
With unusual accent on the suffix in- mitt-.
6
stead of on the preposition. See below, Future participles passive,
J In the a-conjugation. 5 7 8 ; c p . DELBRÜCK, V e r b u m 230; LINDNER
4 See below under those tenses, 427,435,1 76, p. 96—99.
442, 447; 512, 538; and c p . DELBRÜCK, 7 S e e LINDNER78,p. 1 0 0 — 1 0 2 ; WHITNEY
Verbum 226; LINDNER 72. | 1188.
Indo-arische Philologie. L 4. 9
13°
1. Of derivatives accented on the suffix there are more than 60
adjectives; e. g. ak-ra- 'swift', ug-rd- 'mighty', cit-ra- 'bright', tu-rd- 'strong',
mU-ra- 'stupid', sak-rd- 'mighty', suk-ra- 'bright', hims-ra- 'injurious', Sub-
stantives are: m. us-rd- 'bull', ksu-ra- 'razor', mrdh-ra- 'foe', rud-ra-, N. of
a god, vam-ra- 'ant', vi-rd-'mzri, sad-ra- 'man of the fourth caste'; n. abh-ra-
'cloud', krcch-ra- 'distress', kru-ra- (AV. VS.) 'wound', ksl-ra- 'milk', khid-rd-
'weight', rip-ra- 'defilement', sT-rd- 'plough'; f. hi-ra- (AV. VS.) 'vein'.
a. With connecting vowel -a-: drav-a-ra- 'running', pat-a-rd- 'flying',
ny-oc-a-ra- (AV.) 'suiting' *; n. gambh-a-ra- 'depth', tas-a-ra- 'shuttle'2; with /':
aj-i-ra- 'swift', is-i-ra- 'lively', dhvas-i-ra- 'stirring up', badh-i-ra- 'deaf', mad-
i-ra- 'pleasing', rudh-i-ra- (AV.) 'red', sphi-ra- 'fat'; m . khad-i-ra-, a kind of
tree; n. sar-i-rd- (VS.) 'wave'; with /": gabh-t-ra- and gambh-T-ra- 'deep';
with u: amh-u-ra- 'narrow', vith-u-rd- 'tottering'.
2. Of stems a c c e n t e d on t h e root the only a d j e c t i v e s are: gfdh-ra-
'greedy', tum-ra- 'stout', dhi-ra- 'wise', vip-ra- 'inspired'; s u b s t a n t i v e s are:
m. aj-ra- 'field', tnd-ra-, N. of a god, vaj-ra- 'thunderbolt', vdrdh-ra- (AV.)
'girth', su-ra- 'hero'; n. dg-ra- 'point', rdndh-ra- 'hollow', svabh-ra- 'pit';
f. dhi-ra- 'stream', Sip-ra- 'jaw', su-ra- 'intoxicating liquor'.
a. With connecting v o w e l -/'-: sthav-i-ra- 'firm'; m . ang-i-ra-y N. of
a seer, as-i-ra- 'missile'; w i t h -J-: sdv-i-ra- 'mighty'; n. sar-l-ra- 'body';
w i t h -u-: m . as-u-ra- 'spirit', bak-u-ra- 'trumpet'.
a . A few of these derivatives are compounded with prepositions: ni-ci-ra- 'attentive',
ni-mfg-ra- 'attached'; m. a-khara• 'lair', sam-udra- 'sea'.

-ri: agent.
172. This suffix forms adjectives as well as m. and f. substantives. It is
sometimes added with connecting -u-. The root is more frequently accented
than the suffix.
1. Adjectives are: bhu-ri- 'abundant', vadh-ri- 'emasculated', subh-ri-
'beautiful'; with connecting -u—. jas-u-ri- 'exhausted', dds'-u-ri- 'pious', sah-u-ri-
'mighty'.
2. Substantives are: m. angh-ri- (VS.) 'foot', jx-ri- 'flowing water',
sU-ri- 'patron'; f. abh-ri- (AV. VS.) 'hoe', di-ri- 'edge', us-ri- 'dawn', vahk-ri-
'rib'; with connecting -u-\ afig-u-ri- 'finger'; -ri occurs in tand-ri- (AV.)
'weariness'.
-ru : agent.
173. This rare suffix forms adjectives and a very few neuter substantives.
It is added either directly to the root or with a preceding -a-, -5-, or -e-.
Either the root or the suffix may be accented.
1. Adjectives are: ca-ru- 'dear', dha-n't- (AV.) 'sucking', pi-ru- 'causing
to swell' (pi-), bhi-ru- 'timid'; ar-a-ru- 'hostile', pat-a-ru- 'flying'; jab-a-ru-i
(RV 1 .) 'speeding', piy-a-ru- 'reviling', vand-a-ru- 'praising', sar-A-ru- 'injurious';
mad-e-ru- 'intoxicating', san-i-ru-4 'obtaining'.
2. Substantives are: n. ai-ru- 'tear', smds-ru- 'beard'.

-la : agent.
174. This rare suffix, a later form of -ra, is equivalent in sense and use
to the latter, sometimes also interchanging with it. It forms adjectives and a

» bhàrvarâ- (of doubtful meaning) is * Also -fifara- 'thorn' m . in an-fk;ara-

probably a secondary formation, and vâsarâ- •thornless'.
'matutinal' seems to be derived from vasar- 3 Perhaps for *jav-a-ru- from Ju- 'speed'.
'morning'. 4 T h e suffix is secondary in mitri-ru- 'ally'.
 I V . NOMINAL STEM FORMATION. PRIMARY NOMINAL DERIVATION. 131

few masculine and neuter substantives. T h e radical syllable is accented in

two or three substantives only. The suffix is added either directly to the
root or with the connecting vowels -a-, -/'-, -u-.
Derivatives thus formed are: -pa-Id- (VS.) m. 'guardian' in aja-pald- (VS.)
'goat-herd', iuk-ld- (AV.) n. 'white colour' (beside suk-ra- 'white'), stha-la-
(AV.) 'thick' (beside stAa-ra-); w i t h c o n n e c t i n g - a - : trp-a-la- 'joyous', bhrm-
a-la- ( A V . ) 'torpid', mus-a-la- (AV.) m. 'pestle', sab-a-la- 'mottled', sam-a-la-
(AV.) n. 'defilement'; w i t h -/-: an-i-la- m. 'wind', trd-i-la- 'porous', sal-i-la-
'surging' (beside sar-i-ra- V S . 'flood'); w i t h - « - : tand-u-la- ( A V . ) m. 'grain',
sak-u-ld- ( A V . VS.) m., a kind of fish.

-// a n d -lu : a g e n t .
175. T h e suffix -li occurs only once as the equivalent of -ri in ang-u-li-
(VS'.) f. 'finger' (beside ang-u-ri-). Similarly -lu occurs only once as the
equivalent of -ru in patays-lu- (AV 1 .) 'flying', formed from the conjugation
stem pataya- (from pat- 'fly').

-vet : a g e n t .
176. This suffix forms about 20 adjectives and seven or eight substantives,
mostly masculines with a concrete meaning. With one or two exceptions it
is added directly to the root. The accent is rather oftener on the suffix
than on the radical syllable. T h e root hardly ever appears in a strengthened
form.
1. A c c e n t e d o n t h e s u f f i x are the a d j e c t i v e s : ardh-va- 'upright', rk-va-
'praising', rs-va- 'lofty', tak-va- 'swift', dhru-va- 'fixed', pak-va- 'ripe', mal-va-
(AV.) 'foolish', yah-va- 'swift', ran-va- 'joyful', vts'-va-1 'all', sik-vd- (AV.) 'deft',
s'ya-vd- 'dark brown', hras-va- (VS.) 'short'; the s u b s t a n t i v e s : m . Ur-va-
'stall', sar-va- ( A V . VS.), N. of a god, sru-va- 'ladle'; f. prus-vd• (AV.) 'rime';
vidh-a-va.-1 'widow'.
2. A c c e n t e d o n t h e r o o t are: fbh-va- 'skilful', i-va- 'quick', m. 'course',
pi-va- 'fat', pdr-va- 'preceding', vak-va- 'twisting', vis-va- 'all', sar-va- 'all';
m . ds-va- 'horse', khal-va- ( A V . VS.), a kind of grain, srak-va- 'corner of
the mouth'; f. am-T-v3- 'disease' 3 .
a. A f e w such derivatives occur only compounded with p r e f i x e s : a-khar-va- 'not
shortened', ati-kuha- (VS.) 'too bald', vi-bha-va- 'brilliant'.

-ran : a g e n t .
177. This suffix is used almost exclusively to form agent nouns 4 , both
adjectives and substantives, which are mostly masculine, but sometimes neuter.
Though the root is regularly accented», it almost invariably appears in its
unstrengthened form. If it ends in a short vowel -/- is added before the
suffix. T h e feminine of these words is regularly formed with -varl ( 1 7 9 a).
Examples of a d j e c t i v e s are: fk-vart- 'praising', kj--t-van- 'active', driih-van-
'injurious', pat-van- 'flying', pi-van- 'fat', yaj-van- 'sacrificing', rd-van- (VS.)

1 Cp. BRUGMANN, Grundriss 2, p. 126. 5 T h e only exceptions are two words

A Cp. ROTH, KZ. 19, 223; BRUGMANN, formed with the connecting v o w e l -<-, mu;-
Grundriss 2, p. 126. i-van- 'robber', san-i-t-van- 'bestower', and
3 Also n. ulba• 'caul' if this stands for two others from the reduplicated root,
*uhia- from v f - 'cover'. rara-vati- 'liberal', cikit-van- 'wise'.
4 T h e only action nouns are the few
which in the active are employed as infini-
tives; cp. WHITNEY 1169 e.
132 L A L L G E M E I N E S UND S P R A C H E . 4. VEDIC GRAMMAR.

'bestowing', sak-van- (VS.) 'able', su-t-van- 'pressing Soma'; substantives:

m. adh-van- 'road', ar-van- 'steed', gra-van- 'stone'; n. tug-van- 'ford', dhan-
van- 'bow' and 'desert', par^van- 'joint', sna-van-1 (AV. VS.) 'sinew'.
a. Several derivatives with -van are compounded with prepositions; thus atiskaJ-
van- (VS.) 'transgressing', upa-has-van- •mocking', vi-vas-van- 'shining forth', vi-mf-g-van-
(AV.) 'cleansing', sam-bhf-t-van- (AV.) 'accumulating'

-vana, -rani, -vanu : agent.

178. These rare suffixes are doubtless secondary forms of -van. They
are all three accented: -vana and -vanu on the final, -vani on the first
syllable. With -vana are formed: vag-vatta- 'talkative', sat-vana-, m. 'warrior'
(beside sat-van-), and from the reduplicated root fusuk-vana- 'shining' ( Vsue-).
The suffix -vani seems to be preferred for derivatives from the reduplicated
root; thus besides tur-vani- 'overcoming', bhur-vani- 'restless', occur jujur-
vani- 'praising', tutur-vani- 'desiring to gain', dadhrs-vani- 'daring', susuk-vani-
'shining' ( Y sue-); the obscure word arhartsvani- 'exultant' seems to be derived
with this suffix from an irregularly reduplicated form of hrs- 'be excited'.
With -vanu is formed only vag-vanu- m. 'noise'.

-vara, -vala : action and agent.

179. This suffix makes a few masculine nouns (f. -f) chiefly accented
on the final syllable of the suffix, and a very few neuter substantives accented
on the root. The masculines are: i-t-vara- 'going', is-vard- (AV.) 'able',
phar-vara- 'sower', vyadh-vara- (AV.) 'piercing'3 (Yvyadh-). Neuter sub-
stantives are: kdr-vara- 'deed', gdh-vara- (AV.) 'thicket'. There are also
two feminines which have the appearance of being derived with this suffix,
ur-vara- 'field' and ur-vart- (AV.) 'filament', but their origin is uncertain.
This suffix appears with / instead of r in vid-vala- 'cunning'.
a. The f. of this suffix, -van, is used as the f. of adjectives in -ran, with which
it corresponds in accent and treatment of the radical syllable. There are about 25 of
these feminines in the RV.; e. g. yaj-vart- 'pious', sf-t-varl- 'speeding' 4.

-vas : action and agent.

180. This very rare suffix forms only the neuter subtantive vdr-i-vas-
'wide space' (beside vdr-i-man-) and the adjectives rbh-vas- 'skilful' (beside
f-bh-va- and fbh-van-) and Sik-vas- 'skilful' (beside s'ik-van-). The vocative
khid-vas (vi. 2 2 4 ) 'oppressing' is probably from a perfect participle khid-
vSms- 5 formed without reduplication, not from a stem khid-vas-.

-vams : agent.
181. This suffix is used to form a large number of perfect participles
active, being added with or without the connecting vowel -<-; e. g. cakr-vams-
'having done', ty-i-vdms- 'having gone'; sometimes without reduplication; e. g.
vid-vams- 'knowing'6. This suffix, which is always accented, is in the weak
cases reduced to -us-, before vowels'.

1
On two or three doubtful derivatives nines occurring in the AV. see his Index
with this suffix see WHITNEY 1169 b. Verborum 375.
2
Several others are compounded with 5 Cp. pw.; in BR. the stem is given as
n o u n s ; s e e LINDNER p . 1 0 7 . khid-van-. According to WHITNEY 1 1 7 3 b,
3 According to the Pada text vi- it is derived from \khad-.
adhvara-. 6
For the forms occurring see below 492.
4 See WHITNEY 1171 b; for such femi- 7 See Declension, -vams stems, 347.
 I V . NOMINAL STEM FORMATION. PRIMARY NOMINAL DERIVATION. 133

-vi: agent.
182. This rare suffix is used to form some half dozen adjectives and
one f. substantive, partly from the simple root (which is accented), partly
from the reduplicated root (of which the reduplicative syllable is accented).
The adjectives are: ghrs-vi- 'lively', jir-vi-1 (AY.) 'aged', dhru-vi- 'firm';
jdgr-vi- 'watchful', dA-dhr-vi- 'sustaining', di-di-vi- 'shining' 2 ; f. dar-vi-3 'ladle'.

-rit: agent.
183. This suffix, which is perhaps an extension of -vi with -/, occurs in
the single form cikit-vit (RV 1 .) 'deliberately'.

-sa : agent.
184. This suffix is used to form about two dozen adjectives and substan-
tives of all genders. It is added to the root with or without the connecting
vowels -1- or -»-. The accent is sometimes on the suffix, sometimes on the
root, which is usually unstrengthened. Many of these derivatives are of
obscure origin.
The suffix is added direct in: gft-sa- 'adroit', -dfk-sa- 4 (VS.), prk-sa-
'dappled' (VpT e -)> ti/sa- m. 'fountain', kut-sa-, N. of a man, ghrain-sd- m.
'sun's heat', drap-sd- m. 'drop', ruk-sa- m. 'tree'; bhl-sd-s f. 'fear\
a. The suffix is added with a connecting vowel (-1-, -«-) in: tav-t-sa-6
'strong', bhar-i-sa- 'rapacious', mah-i-sa- 'mighty' 7 ; rj-l-sa- 'rushing', rbi-sa-8 n.
'chasm', pilr-T-sa- n. 'rubbish'; man-l-sA- f. 'devotion'; ar-u-sa-9 'red', as-us-a-
'voracious', tar-u-sa~ m. 'overcomer', pur-u-sa- m. 'man', man-u-sa- 'man';
Sng-U-sa- m. 'hymn', piy-d-sa- n. 'biestings'.

-sani: agent.
185. This suffix is found only in the derivatives car-sani- 'active', f. pi.
'people', and par-sani- 'carrying across' (pr- 'cross').

-sara : agent.
186. This suffix appears only in mat-sard- 'intoxicating' ( Y m a d - ) and
perhaps in sap-sard- (1. 1 6 8 ' ' ) 'inspiring awe'(?) if derived from sap- 'do
homage'.
•sas : action.
187. This suffix seems to be contained in vdp-sas- (RV 1 .) 'beauty'(?)IO,
and possibly in tar-B-sas- (RV.) 'superior' ( V ^ - ) -

-sna : agent.
188. This suffix (perhaps syncopated for -sana) forms some half dozen
adjectives and m. or n. substantives: tTk-sna- 'sharp' (Ytij), de-snd-11 n. 'gift'

1
From jr-' a g e ' ; see W H I T N E Y ' S note on 7 T h e f. is rnahifJ-.
AV. xiv. I " . T h e RV. has jiv-ri-. 8 T h e absence of cerebralization in the s,
1 1
T h e derivation of pra-pharvt- (RV .) is together with t h e b, m a k e s the origin of
uncertain. ' this word quite u n c e r t a i n ; it is most probably
3 In VS. darvT- in the vocative darvi. \ borrowed.
4 In T-dfk-sa- (VS.) 'looking like this' 9 T h e f. is arufi-.
'such' (from dyi- 'see'). This is Sayana's interpretation of t h e
5 Only in the I. s. bhlfa which is a con- word.
traction for bhiyasa. n Generally to be read trisyllabically as
6
The f. is tavisi-. da-ifnd-.
134
(da- 'give'), slak-sna- (AV.) 'smooth'; with connecting -a-: kar-d-sna- m.'fore-
arm', mat-a-sna-, n. 'lung', vadh-a-sna- n. 'deadly weapon'.

-snu : agent.
189. This suffix, which is always accented, forms adjectives, being added
with or without a connecting vowel to the simple root, or more usually with
connecting -«- to the causative stem.
1. From the simple root: ji-snu- 'victorious', dank-snu- (VS.) 'biting'
(yVa»»/-), ni-sat-snu-'sitting down'; vadh-a-snu- 'murderous', vrdh-a-snu- 'joyous';
car-i-snu- 'wandering', a-mavisnu-1 (x. 9 4 " ) 'immovable (YmU- = mil/-).
2. From the causative stem: tapay-i-snu- 'tormenting', namay-imi'i-
'bending', patay-i-snu- 'flying', paray-i-snu- 'saving', posay-i-snu- (AV.) 'causing
to thrive', maday-i-snu- 'intoxicating', abhi-socay-i-snu- (AV.) 'causing torments'.

II. Secondary Nominal Derivation.

LINDNER, Altindische Nominalbildung p. 114—52. — WHITNEY, Sanskrit Grammar
p. 454—80.
190. Secondary nominal stems are those derived from stems already
ending in a suffix. They, however, include derivatives from pronominal roots,
as i-tara- 'other', and exceptionally from indeclinable words or case-forms, as
antar-vant- 'pregnant' (antar 'within'), mdma-ka- 'belonging to me' (mama
'of me)'. The stem to which secondary suffixes are added is subject to certain
changes. Thus final -a and -i vowels are regularly dropped before suffixes
beginning with a vowel or y, while final -u generally takes Guna; thus asv-in-
'possessing horses' (diva-), khad-in- 'adorned with rings' (khadi-), vciyav-ya-
'relating to the wind' (vayu-). Again, the n or the a of stems ending in
-an is occasionally lost, e. g. vrsa-tva- 'manly power1, vfsn-ya- 'manly' (but
vfsan-vant- 'drawn by stallions'); while stems in -ant regularly appear in the
weak form of -at, e. g. vaivasvat-a- 'son of Vivdsvant'. The commonest
change is, however, the strengthening of the initial syllable with Vrddhi*,
e. g. amitra- 'hostile' (a-mitra- 'enemy'), pirthiv-a- 'relating to the earth'
(prthivi-), maitrSvaruna- 'derived from Mitra-viruna', saubhaga- 'luck' (su-
bhaga- 'lucky').
As regards meaning, the great majority of secondary suffixes form
adjectives with the general sense of 'relating to' or 'connected with'. In
several, however, the meaning has become specific. Thus the suffixes -ayana,
-i, -eya, form patronymics or metronymics; -in, -mant, -vant express possession;
-tama and -tara imply degrees of comparison; -ta and -tva form abstract
substantives. The masculines and feminines of adjectives are frequently used
as appellatives, while the neuter is commonly employed as a substantive
expressing the attributive sense of the adjective as an abstraction.
a. The secondary suffixes are in their alphabetical order the following:
-a, -a, -Srii, ayana, ayl, ayya, -i, -in, -ima, -iya, -/, -ina, -Tya, -eril, -enya, -eya,
-eyya, -ka, -ta, -tana a n d -tna, -tama, -taya, -tara, -tavya, -ta, -tat, -tati, -tya,
-tva, •tvata, -tvatia, -tha, -na, -nl, -bha, -ma, -mant, -maya, -min, -mna, -ya,
•yin, -ra, -la, -va, -vat, -van, -vant, -vaya, -vala, -vin, -vya, -sa.

1 Thus derived in pw.; in BR. emended hand, extremely rare in secondary derivation,
to d-marifnu- 'immortal'; in GRASSMANN ex- 1 as dtrva-'divine'(i/re»- 'heaven'), drina-'wooden
plained as amaoi;nu- 'mit Ungestüm an- vessel' (dn't- 'wood'), bhesaj-a- 'medicine'
dringend'. (bhisAj- 'healing'); cp. 191 a a.
* Strengthening with Guna is, on the other I
 I V . NOMINAL STEM FORMATION. SECONDARY NOMINAL DERIVATION. 135

191. With the suffix -a is formed a very large number of derivatives

which are primarily adjectives expressing the sense of relation to or connexion
with the primitive word; in the m. and f. they are, however, often used as
appellatives, and in the neuter as abstracts. T h e first syllable of the primitive
word, whether it is simple or compound is in the great majority of instances
strengthened with Vrddhi; e. g. márut-a- 'relating to the Maruts' (marút-),
mághon-a- n. 'bountifulness' (maghávan- 'bountiful') dasarajñ-á- 'battle of the
ten kings' (dasa-rajan-)'; jaitr-a- 'victorious' (jé-tr- 'conqueror"), tvastr-á-
'belonging to Tvastr'; manav-á- 'belonging to man' (mdnu-), tánv-a-i 'belonging
to the body' (tanú-)\ sarasvaí-á- 'coming from the Sarasvati', aindragn-á-
( A V . VS. TS.) 'belonging to Indra and Agni' (indragni)-, yamun-á- (AV.)
'coming from the Yamuná'; vádhryasv-a'descended from Vadhryasvá',
vaisvadev-á- CAV. VS.) 'sacred to all the gods' (visvd-deva-).
a . A comparatively small number of derivatives add the suffix without
taking Vrddhi. These are probably to a considerable extent due to transfers
from other declensions to the a-declension. Such are íamas-á- (AV.) 'dark-
coloured', parus-d- 'knotty' (párus- 'knot'), hemant-á- 'winter'; ápak-a- 'distant'
{apañe- 'behind'); hotr-d- 'office of priest' (Aótr-); sakhy-á- 'friendship' (sákhi-
'friend').
a . With Guna are formed tray-á- 'threefold' (tri- 'three'), dvay-á- 'twofold' (dvi-
'two'), náv-a- 'new' {nú- 'now'); dev-á- 'divine' (diz/- 'heaven'), bhtsaj-¿- 'medicine' (bhifáj-
'healer').
192. The suffix -a is used in a very large number of stems to form
the feminine of adjectives which in the masculine and neuter end in -a.
T h u s náv-a- f., nava- m . n. ' n e w ' ; priy-á- f., priyd- m . n. ' d e a r ' ; gat-á- £,
gata- m. n. 'gone'.
193. The s u f f i x - a n f i is used to form the feminine from stems in -a,
designating the wife of the corresponding male being, or expressing a feminine
personification: arany-Sni- 'Forest Nymph' (áranya- 'forest'), indr-ani- 'wife of
Indra', uhndr-anX- 'Queen of the Uslnaras', ürj-ánt- 'Strength' (personified),
purukúts-ani- 'wife of Purukutsa', mudgal-sni- 'wife of Mudgala', varun-ani-
'Varupa's wife'.
194. The suffix -ayana- forms a few patronymics with Vrddhi in the
first syllable: anty-üyaná- (VS. TS.) 'descendant of Ántya', amusy-ayaná- (AV.)
'descendant o f so and s o ' (amúsya- g e n . o f adds), kanv-ayana- ' d e s c e n d a n t
of Kai>va', dáks-ayaná- (VS. AV.) 'descendant of Dak?a'; also the f. ram-
ayani- (AV.) 'daughter of the Black One' (rama-). The derivative uksan-
Áyana-, N. of a man, being formed without Vrddhi is perhaps not meant for
a patronymic.
195. The s u f f i x -ayi occurs perhaps only twice, forming the feminine from
two masculine stems in -i and designating the wife of the corresponding male:
agn-ayX- 'wife of Agni' and vrsakap-ayl- (only voc.) 'wife of Vrjakapi'.
196. The s u f f i x -ayya forms gerundives 6 ; e. g. srav-dyya- 'glorious'
(s'ru- 'hear'). There are also a few other derivatives similarly formed, which
are used as ordinary adjectives or as neuter abstracts; thus nr-páyya- 'guarding

1 Formed from the weakest stem maghdn-. \ -a is added to stems in -a as to others (the
2 With syncope of the vowel of the suffix. I final vowel of the primitive disappearing before
3 Without Guna of the u; similar ex- J it) and not that derivation by Vj-ddhi alone
ceptions in pariv-a- 'side' (parsu• 'rib'), takes place here; cp. WHITNEY 1208 i.
paidv-a- 'belonging to Pedu', madhv-a• 'full, 5 Cp. LEUMANN, KZ. 32, 294 ff.
of sweetness' (madhu•), yadv-a- 'belonging I 6 These are probably formed from dative
to Yadu'. infinitives in -at + -ya\ cp.BRUGMANN, Grund-
4 It is natural to suppose that the suffix I riss 2, p. 1422; cp. also IF. 12, 2.
 L ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4. VEDIC GRAMMAR.

men', bahu-payya- 'protecting many'; p U r v a - p A y y a - 'first drink', mahay-iyya-

' e n j o y m e n t ' , kunda-payya- a n d p u r u - m i y y a - as P r o p e r N a m e s ; also f o r m e d
f r o m nouns, ras-Ayya- 'tasteful' ( r a s a - 'sap') a n d uttam-Ayya- n. 'summit' ( u t t a m d -
'highest")«.
197. T h e s u f f i x -/ f o r m s a f e w p a t r o n y m i c s f r o m nouns in - a w i t h
V r d d h i in the initial s y l l a b l e : Sgnives-i- 'descendant of Agnivesa', pdurukuts-i-
' s o n of Purukutsa', pr&tardan-i- 'descendant of Pratardana', p r i h r a d - i - ( A V . )
'son of Prahrada, s d m v a r a n - i - 'descendant of Samvarapa'. Similarly f o r m e d ,
but with the sense o f a n o r d i n a r y substantive, is s d r a t h - i - ' c h a r i o t e e r ' (from
sa-ratha-m ' o n the s a m e chariot'). T w o other w o r d s a d d a s e c o n d a r y -i
without V j d d h i or p a t r o n y m i c s e n s e : t d p u s - i - 'burning 1 a n d sucant-i-, N. o f a
m a n (seemingly a n e x t e n s i o n o f the participle suc-ant- 'shining")
198. H u n d r e d s o f a d j e c t i v e s are f o r m e d with the s u f f i x -in f r o m stems
in -a, but v e r y rarely f r o m s t e m s with a n y other final; e. g. ark-in- 'praising'
( a r k a - 'praise'), manU-iti- ' w i s e ' (manT-sii- ' w i s d o m ' ) , arc-in- 'radiant' ( a r c i -
' b e a m ' ) , i a t a g v - i n - 'consisting o f h u n d r e d s ' (*sata-gva-), varm-in- ' c l a d in
armour' (varman-), svan-in- ( V S . ) ' k e e p i n g d o g s ' (svan-). With loss of final
-as: ret-in- ' a b o u n d i n g in s e e d ' ( r e t a s - ) a n d p e r h a p s in the P r o p e r N a m e
varc-in- ( y arc-as- ' p o w e r ' ) ; with loss of - y a : hiran-in- ' a d o r n e d with g o l d '
(hiran-ya-).
i g g . T h e s u f f i x - i m a is v e r y rare, b e i n g e m p l o y e d to f o r m a d j e c t i v e s
from the stems in -tra a n d f r o m o n e in - r a : krtr-i'ma- 'artificial', khanitr-ima-
' m a d e b y d i g g i n g ' , p u t r - i m a - ( A V . ) 'purified'; agr-imd- 'foremost' (dg-ra-
'front').
200. T h e s u f f i x -¡ya is e m p l o y e d to form s o m e 20 a d j e c t i v e s ( f r o m
stems in - a ) . It is o n l y a m o d i f i e d f o r m o f - y a w h i c h is a d d e d for facility
o f p r o n u n c i a t i o n after t w o o r m o r e consonants, the last o f w h i c h is g e n e r a l l y
r , rarely n , m or v \ e. g. a b h r - i y a - ' d e r i v e d f r o m the c l o u d s ' (abhra-), samudr-
i y a - ' b e l o n g i n g to t h e s e a ' (samudra)-, i n d r - i y d - ' b e l o n g i n g t o I n d r a ' ;
k r s n - i y d - , N . o f a m a n (krsna- ' b l a c k ' ) ; r g m - i y a ' p r a i s e w o r t h y ' ; a s v - i y a - ' c o n -
sisting o f horses', 'troop'.
201. T h e s u f f i x -T is e m p l o y e d in a v e r y l a r g e n u m b e r o f derivatives
t o form the feminine o f m a s c u l i n e stems; often f r o m stems in - a 2 ; e. g.
arus-T- ' r u d d y ' (arusa-), dev-i- ' g o d d e s s ' ( d e v a - ) ; or in -u; e. g . p r t h v - i - ' b r o a d '
( p r t h - t ' i - ) ; or f r o m stems f o r m e d with suffixes e n d i n g in c o n s o n a n t s , as parti-
ciples in -at or -ant, e. g. piprat-T- ,'protecting" ( p r - ' t a k e across'), ad-at-i-
'eating' ( a d - a n t - ) , mad-ant i ' r e j o i c i n g ' or in - v f t m s - , e. g. jagm-us-i- 'having
g o n e ' ; c o m p a r a t i v e s in -¡yams-, e. g . n d v - l y a s - t - ' n e w ' ; stems in - t a r , e. g.
avitr-i- ' p r o t e c t r e s s ' ; in -mant, e. g. dhenu-mat-l- ' a b o u n d i n g in nourishment';
in -vant, e. g. ama-vat-X- ' i m p e t u o u s ' ; in -an, e. g. soma-rajn-T- 'having Soma
as k i n g ' ; in -in, e. g . arkin-X- ' r a d i a n t ' ; in -anc, e. g. arvdc-X- 'hitherward';
in c o m p o u n d s of -han 'slaying*, e. g. a-pati-ghn-x- ' n o t killing a h u s b a n d ' , o f
-drs- 'look', as su-drs-X- ' w e l l - l o o k i n g ' , a n d of -pad 'foot', as a-pad-x- 'footless'.
202. T h e s u f f i x -Tna f o r m s m o r e than a d o z e n a d j e c t i v e s f r o m the w e a k
stems o f derivatives in -anc-, e x p r e s s i n g direction w i t h o u t c h a n g e o f m e a n i n g ;
e. g. arvdc-ina- a n d arvac-Xna- 'turned towards' (arvnhc• 'hitherward'). It also
forms six or s e v e n a d j e c t i v e s from o t h e r words, e x p r e s s i n g t h e g e n e r a l sense
o f relation; e. g. a h j a s - i n a - 'straightforward' (aiijasa- 'straight'), v i s v a j a n - i n a -
( A V . ) 'containing all k i n d s o f p e o p l e ' .

1 See WHITNEY 1218 a. f o r m e d with V r d d h i in t h e initial s y l l a b l e ;

1 T h i s is regularly the case in stems e. g . manu;-a- ' h u m a n ' , f . manuf-i-.
 I V . NOMINAL STEM FORMATION. SECONDARY NOMINAL DERIVATION. 137

203. The suffix -iya forms fewer than a dozen general adjectives, of
which only two occur in the RV.; e. g. arjik-iya-, designation of a Soma
vessel, grha-medh-iya- 'relating to the domestic sacrifice'; ahav-an-iya- (AV.)
'sacrificial fire', parvat-iya- (AV.) 'mountainous'. This suffix also appears in
the three ordinals dvit-iya- 'second', trt-iya- 'third', tur-iya- 'fourth'.
204. The suffix -ena with Vj-ddhi of the initial syllable, occurs only
once, forming a general adjective, in its feminine form samidh-eni- 'relating
to fuel' (samidh-).
205. T h e suffix -enya was doubtless originally formed by the addition
of -ya to derivatives made with -na, but it nearly always has a primary
value as forming gerundives; e.g. drs-enya- 'worthy to be seen'. It appears,
however, also in the two ordinary adjectives ktrt-enya- 'famous' (klrt'i- 'fame')
and vtr-inya- 'manly' (vlra- 'hero').
206. The suffix -eya, with Vfddhi of the initial syllable, is employed
to form fewer than a dozen adjectives of a patronymic or metronymic value
and some half dozen adjectives of a general character, the latter occasionally
appearing in the neuter as abstract substantives; e. g. ars-eya- 'descended
from a seer' (fst-), adit-eyd- 'son of Aditi'; pdurus-eya- 'relating to man*
(pt'trusa-), maun-eya- 'position of a sage' (muni-). Two words with this suffix
are formed without initial Vyddhi, following the analogy of gerundives from
roots ending in 3 like deya- 'to be given' (da- 'give'): didrks-iya- 'worth
seeing* (as from didrk-sa- 'desire to see') and sabh-tya- 'fit for an assembly'
(sabha-).
207. The very rare suffix -eyya forms adjectives with a gerundive sense
in stus-tfyya-1 'praise-worthy', and sapath-eyya- (AV.) 'worthy of cursing'. It
also forms an ordinary adjective used as a neuter substantive, sahas-fyya-
n. 'lying together' (si- 'lie)'.
208. The suffix -ka was probably used originally to form adjectives
expressive of connexion, but it has become so attenuated in meaning as often
to be a d d e d to substantives or adjectives without changing the sense; while
on the other hand it has become specialized as a suffix forming diminutives.
1. Examples of its significant use a r e : anta-ka- 'making an end' (anta-),
nipa-ka- (AV.) 'having an assumed form' (ropa- 'form'); asma-ka- 'our'
(asma- 'us'), mama-ka- 'my' (mama 'of me'); anti-ka- 'near' (anti 'before').
2. T h e suffix appears without changing the meaning in e. g. dara-ka-
'distant' (dura- 'far'), vamra-kd- 'ant' (vamra- 'ant'), sarva-ka- (AV.) 'all'
(sdrva-), and in the fem. form of -ka in: avi-kd- 'ewe' (avi- 'sheep'), isu-ka-
(AV.) 'arrow' (isu-), dhinu-ka- (AV.) 'cow* (dhenu-). 3. The diminutive
sense appears in e. g. arbha-ka- 'small', kumfira-ka- 'little boy', pada-ka-
'little foot', putra-kd- 'little son' 2 . Sometimes a contemptuous meaning is
conveyed at the same time, as in anya-ka- 'other' (anya-), dla-ka-m 'in vain'
(ii/a-m 'enough')-5.
a. With Vrddhi in the first syllable is formed mama-ka-* 'belonging
to me' (mama)-, and with connecting -«-: vArs-i-ka- (AV. VS.) 'belonging
to the rains' (varsd-), vasant-i-ka- 'belonging to the spring' (vasanta-), and
in the fem. kairat-ika- (AV.) 'relating to the Kiratas'.
209. The rare secondary s u f f i x -ta has an ordinal sense in eka-td- (VS.)

1 This gerundive is probably based on small', kumar ika- (AV.) 'little girl', khan-
the infinitive stufe 'to praise'; cp. B R I (;MAN.N, ika- (AV.) 'mutilated', sakmit ika• 'little bird',
Grundriss 2, p. 1422 (5). sit-ikil- 'cool' (AV. si/a- 'cold'}.
2
T h e feminine of some of these diminu- i Cp. WHITNEY 521.
tives is formed with ika : iyatt-ika- 'so ; 4 Beside the more normal mama-ka-.
 I. ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4. VEDIC GRAMMAR.

'First', dvi-ta- 'Second', tri-td- 'Third' as Proper Names. It also appears in

ava-ta- 'well' and muhor-ta- 'moment'.
210. With the suffix -tana and its syncopated form -tna are made,
from adverbs or prepositions, a very few adjectives with a temporal sense:
na-tana- and nd-tna- 'present' (nu 'now'), sana-tana- (AV.) and sana-tna- (AV.)
'eternal' (sana 'from of old'), pra-tna- 'ancient' (prd 'before').
211. The suffix -tama has two uses. It is employed to form superlatives
from nominal stems and from the preposition ud; e. g. puru-tdma- 'very many',
madhumat-tama- 'very sweet', ratki-tama-1 'best charioteer'; ut-tamd-2 'highest'.
It is also used to form ordinals; e. g. sata-tamd- 'hundredth'.
212. With the suffix -ta/a are formed only two adjectives from numerals
in the sense of 'consisting of so many parts': cdtus-taya- (AV.) 'fourfold' and
ddsa-taya- 'tenfold'.
213. The suffix -tara is regularly used to form comparatives from
adjectives, substantives, or the preposition ud-, e. g. tavas-tara- 'stronger',
rathi-tara- 'better charioteer', vrtra-tara- 'worse Vrtra'; ut-tara- 'higher'. It
also forms the ordinary adjective diva-tara- (RV1.) 'diurnal' (diva 'by day'),
and a few substantives in which the meaning of the suffix is somewhat
obscure: aiva-tara-3 (AV.) 'mule' (f. -/), vatsa-tard-1» 'weaned calf's (f. -/).
214. The suffix -tav-ya, probably originating from the predicative use of
dative infinitives in -tav-e and beginning to be used in a gerundive sense,
appears only twice in the AV.: ja.n-i-ta.v-ya- 'to be born' and hims-i-tav-ya-
'to be injured'.
215. The suffix -ta forms, from adjectives and substantives, some two
dozen abstract nouns expressing the sense conveyed by the English suffixes
-ness and -ship; e. g. bandhu-ta- 'relationship', vasu-ta- 'wealthiness'; ago-ta-
'lack of cattle', deva-ta- 'divinity', purusa-td- 'human nature'; jana-ta- (AV.)
has acquired the concrete sense of 'mankind' 6 . Exceptional formation appears
in mamd-ta- 'selfishness' and tri-ta-1 (VS. TS.) 'triad'. This suffix is probably
contained in sa-nr-ta-8 'gladness' also.
a. The suffixes -tati and -tit are related to -ta and have the same
sense. With the former are made about a dozen abstract substantives; e. g.
a-rista-tati- 'security', grbhltd-tati- 'the being seized', jyestha-tati- 'superiority',
deva tati- 'divinity', vasu-tliti- 'wealth', sarvd-tati- 'completeness'. The two
substantives s'dm-tati- 'good fortune' and satya-tati• 'truth' also appear as
adjectives meaning respectively 'beneficent' and 'truthful'. The suffix -tat,
which seems to be an abbreviation of -tati and occurs only in the RV., is
employed to form four or five abstract substantives: upara-tat- 'proximity',
devd-tat- 'divine service', vrka-tat- 'wolfishness', sarva-tat- 'completeness'.
216. The suffix -tya forms some half dozen adjectives and sub-
stantives from prepositions and adverbs. These are dpa-tya- n. 'offspring',
ama-tya- 'companion' (am& 'at home'), Avis-tya- 'manifest' (avis 'openly'),
nis-tya- 'foreign' (n!s 'out'), sdnu-tya- 'secret' 9 . This suffix is also added to

1
Also in the Proper N a m e gS-tama-. i the verbal -tara 'speeding' (If- 'cross').
2
T h e superlatives tiivi f fama- 'strongest' I tarotara• 'filter' and kaulitaradesignation
and surabhi s fama- 'most f r a g r a n t ' insert a of ¿ambara, are probably f o r m e d with • a
sibilant before the suffix. and Vfddhi.
6
3 Perhaps 'more (like a) horse' (than an Like 'humanity' in English.
ass\ I 7 Also in tret-in-i- (RV.) ' t h e threefold
4 Probably 'more than a c a l f . flame of three fires'.
5 In ratham-tara-, designation of a kind 8
T h o u g h it appears also as a neuter su-
of Saman, in which the case ending of the j ny-ta- 'gladness' a n d as an adjective 'joyful*,
acc. remains, the second p a r t is doubtless | 9 Cp. sanu-tar 'aside'.
 I V . NOMINAL STEM FORMATION. SECONDARY NOMINAL DERIVATION. 139

the substantive Hp- 'water' to form the two adjectives ap-tya- and ap-tyd-
'watery'.
217. With the suffix -tva are formed more than thirty abstract substan-
tives with the same sense as those in -ta; e. g. amrta-tva- 'immortality',
aham-uttara-tva- (AV.) 'assertion of superiority', bhratr-tva- 'brotherhood',
maghavat-tva- liberality', raksas-tvd- 'sorcery'. The final syllable of the
primitive is lengthened in an-3gSs-tvd- 'sinlessness'; while it is shortened in
sadhani-tva-1 'companionship'. Owing to the influence of the nominative, s is
inserted before the suffix in su-praja-s-tva- 'possession of many children' and
with initial Vrddhi in sauprajd-s-tva-* (AV 1 .) 'possession of good offspring'.
a. The two suffixes -ta and -tva, identical in meaning, are pleonastically
combined in the form of -tva-ta- in the two derivatives isita-tvats- 'excite-
ment', and purusa-tvata- 'human nature'.
218. The suffix -tvana, an extension of -tva with -na, appears in the
formation of some eight neuter abstracts occurring almost exclusively in the
R V . These are kavi-tvana- 'wisdom', jani-tvana- 'state of a wife'; pati-tvana-
'matrimony', martya-tvand- 'the ways of man', mahi-tvana- 'greatness', vasu-
tvand- 'wealth', vrsa-tvand- 'manliness', sakhi-tvand- 'friendship'. All of these
except martya-tvand- have beside them the corresponding abstracts formed
with -tva K
219. The suffix -tha forms a few ordinals from cardinals, and adjectives
from pronominal stems with a general numerical sense. Thus catur-tha (AV.)
'fourth', sas-tha• (AV. VS.) 'sixth', sapta-tha- 'seventh'; kati-tha- 'the how
manieth?'.
220. The rare secondary suffix -na appears in one adjective derived
with initial Vrddhi from a substantive, strai-na- 'feminine' (stri- 'woman), and
in three adjectives derived from adverbs without any internal change: pura-na-
'ancient {purd 'before'), visu-na- 'various' (visu- 'apart'), sama-nd- 'like' (sarnd-
'equal').
221. The suffix -/»/ is used to form the feminine of pdti- 'lord' and
parus-a- 'knotty', as well as of several adjectives in -ta denoting colours.
Thus pat-til- 'mistress', parus-tu-, as N. of a river. T h e suffix is substituted
for -ta in ¿-til- 'variegated' (J-ta-), rohi-nl- 'red cow' (rohi-ta- 'red'), Jy/-nl-
'white cow' (sye-ta- 'white'), hari-m- 'fallow' {hari-ta-). In a few such words
-til is substituted for the final a, while k takes the place of the asik-nl-
'black' (asi-ta-), palik-ril- 'grey' (pali-td-), harik-nl- in the diminutive form
hdrikn-ika- (AV.) 'yellowish' {hdri-ta- 'fallow').
222. The suffix -bha forms half a dozen derivatives, all names of
animals except one adjective 5 : rsa-bha- and vrsa-bhd- 'bull', garda-bhd- and
rAsa-bha-6 'ass', sara-bha- ( A V . VS.) 'fabulous eightlegged animal'. The one
adjective is sthola-bha- (AV 1 .) beside sthald- 'big*.
223. The suffix -ma forms some eight superlatives, partly from prepo-
sitions, and the ordinals from the cardinals for 'five' and 'seven', 'eight', 'nine',
'ten'. The former are: adha-ma- 'lowest', apa-md- 'farthest', ava-tnd- 'lowest',

1 From sadha-nî- ("one who leads with I 4 See B R U G M A N N , Morphologische Unter-

him') 'companion', which is, however, ana- j suchungen 2, p. 198, and Grundriss 2,
lysed in the Pada text as sa dhant-. 1 p. 315.
' saubhaga-tvâ- 'happiness' is formed from ; 5 See B R U G M A N N , Grundriss 2, p. 203 ;
sàubhaça.- 'welfare' = "condition of welfare', cp. p. 89, note 3 .
not from su-bhâga• 'lucky', from which is ' 6 Formed, with Vrddhi and accented on
formed subhaça-tvà- 'welfare'. 1 the initial syllable, from ras- 'roar', 'bray' etc.
3 Cp. LINDNER 26 and 28. |
140 I. ALLGEMEINES TOD SPRACHE. 4. VEDIC GRAMMAR.

upa-md- 'highest', anta-ma-1 'nearest', cara-ma- 'last', para-ma- 'remotest',

madhya-ma- 'middlemost'. T h e ordinals are: pahca-ma- ( A V . V S . ) 'fifth',
sapta-md- (VS.) 'seventh', asta-md- 'eighth', nava-md- 'ninth', dasa-ma- 'tenth'.
224. T h e suffix -mant forms in the Samhitas between 80 and 90
possessive adjectives, like the parallel suffix - v a n t w i t h which it is to some
extent interchangeable. Unlike -vant, however, it never forms derivatives from
stems ending in -a except kanva-mant- ( R V 1 . ) 'prepared b y the K a n v a s ' and
yava-mant- 'rich in barley'. Examples are: asani-mant- 'possessing the thunder-
bolt', osadhi-mant- ( A V . ) 'rich in herbs', kratu-mant- 'having power', vadha-mant-
'drawn by mares'(?), hotr-mant- 'provided with a sacrificer', gd-mant- 'rich in kine',
viruk-mant- 'gleaming', garut-mant- 'winged'(?), kakud-mant-3 'provided with a
hump', caksus-mant- 'possessed of eyes', vidyun-mant'containing lightning'.
a. A final -i is sometimes lengthened: tvifi-mant- 'vehement' (tvifi- 'vehemence'),
dhrajT-mant• 'gliding' (dhraji- = dhraji- 'gliding motion'), hirl-mant- 'tawny-horsed' (hiri-
= hari- 'bay steed'); -i- is inserted in jy6li;-t-mani- (AV.)5 'full of light' (beside jyitis-
mant-\ and s in hui-s-manl-6 'shining'. In the derivative susv-mdnt- (RV1.) 'very stimu-
lating' the suffix seems to have primary value 7. The adverb asu-mat (AV1), formed
from the neuter of this suffix, seems to follow the analogy of adverbs in -vat from
derivatives in -want.
225. T h e suffix -maya (f. -I) forms fewer than a dozen adjectives with
the sense of 'consisting of', 'derived from', 'abounding in'. T h e suffix -as
remains unchanged before the m, but d is assimilated as in external Sandhi.
Derivatives thus formed are: ayas-maya- 'made of metal', asman-maya- 'made
o ' stone', kim-maya- 'consisting of what?', go-maya- 'consisting of cattle',
nabhas-maya- 'vaporous', manas-mdya- 'spiritual', mrn-maya- 'made of clay'
(mrd-), saka-maya- 'arising from dung', sS-maya-s 'well-fashioned'.
226. T h e suffix -min was most probably due to the derivatives in -in
from nouns in -ma, like dhBm-'m- 'smoking' {dhDma- 'smoke') which are fairly
common. It has an independent character, however, in is-min- 'impetuous'
and rg-min-') 'jubilant with praise' (rc-).
227. T h e rare suffix -/»/iff forms a few neuter abstracts from nouns or par-
ticles. It seems to be an extension with -a of -man syncopated like -tna for -tana.
T h e derivatives formed with it are: dyu-mna- 'brightness' (dyu- 'sky'), nr-mnd-
'manliness' (nf- 'man'), ni-mnd- 'depth' (ni 'down'), su-mnd- 'welfare' (su- 'well').
228. T h e very c o m m o n suffix -jra10 forms a large number of adjectives
of relation, including a g o o d many patronymics, and abstract substantives.
It is pronounced -ia nearly four times as often as -ya. T h e feminine is usually
-ya, both in adjectives and abstract substantives; but in the former it is some-
times -t, as Sr-T- and dr-ya- 'Aryan', daiv-T-11 and daiv-ya- 'divine'.
a. All the patronymics besides a g o o d many general adjectives, and
most of the abstract substantives are formed with initial Vrddhi; e. g.
Udit-yd- 'Son of Aditi', sihadev-ya- 'descendant of Sahadeva'; grdiv-ya- ( A V . )
'relating to the neck' (grivi-), daiv-ya- 'divine' (deva- god'), prajapat-yd- ( A V . )

1
Once (I. 1655) anta-ma-; cp. p. 89, 7 The word is analysed in the Pada text
note 3. as susu-man.
2 8
Which is, however, about three times This derivative seems to preserve the
as common. ; originally nominal character of this suffix.
3 The VS. has kaknn-mant- as in external j v In this derivative the original guttural
Sandhi. appears, though it has become sonant as in
4 With assimilated t as in external Sandhi. external Sandhi.
5 Following the analogy of tavifi-mant- \ See WHITNEY 1210—1213 (p. 459—466)
'strong',
6 Occurring only once
sucif-mas.
 I V . NOMINAL STEM FORMATION. SECONDARY NOMINAL DERIVATION. 141

'relating to Prajapati'; Adhipat-ya- 'lordship' ( d d h i - p a t i - 'lord'), jnnaraj-ya-

(VS.) 'kingship' (Jana-rAjan- 'king of the people'), vaimanas-yd- (AV.) 'de-
jection' ( v i - m a n a s - ) , sAmgramajit-ya- (AV.) 'victory in battle' ( s a t n g r a m a - j t i -
AV.) 'conquering in battle'), sauvasv-ya-1 'wealth in horses' ( s v - d s v a - ) .
b. Derivatives formed without Vrddhi are mosdy ordinary adjectives,
being about four times as numerous as those formed with Vrddhi. They are
made from stems with all kinds of finals. The following are examples: asv-ya-
'relating to horses' ( d i v a - ) ; urvar-yh- (VS.) 'belonging to cultivated land'
(urvara-); dv-ya- 'belonging to sheep' (aw-); vayav-ya-1 'belonging to wind'
(vSyu-); nar-ya- 'manly' («/- 'man'); pitr-ya- 'belonging to the fathers' ( p i i r - ) ;
gdv-ya- 'derived from cows' (go-); nHv-ya• (AV.) 'navigable' (ndu- 'boat"),
svarAj-ya- 'autocracy' ( s v a - r A j - 'sovereign'); karman-ya- 'skilful in work' (kartnan-),
vrsn-ya-1 'virile' (vfsart- 'male'); sat-ya-4 'true' ( s a t t i - ) , prac-ya- (AV.) 'eastern'
(prAnc-); Syus-ya- (VS. A V . ) 'length of life' ( A y u s - ) .
a. T h e final -a is retained before the suffix in hiranya-ya- 'made of g o l d ' ( h i r a n y a - ) ,
while -an is dropped before it in aryam-ya- 'intimate' ( a r y a - m a n - 'companion'). T h e suffix
is a d d e d p l e o n a s t i c a l l y i n avya-ya- a n d avya-ya- ' b e l o n g i n g t o s h e e p ' ( b e s i d e av-ya-) and
gavyd-ya- 'derived from cows' (beside gav-ya-); also in forming a few possessive com-
pounds, as su-hast-ya- 'skilful-handed' (beside su-Aasta-) 5. It is also used in forming a
f e w g o v e r n i n g c o m p o u n d s , a s adhi-gart-ya- 'being on the d r i v e r ' s s e a t ' (garla-), abhi-
nabh-ya-m, adv. 'near the clouds' (nathas-)6.
p. In some adjectives and substantives, the suffix has a primary appearance; e. g.
ptis-ya- 'flower', yuj-ya- 'related', madh-ya- 'middle', mar-ya- 'young man', sur-ya- 'sun',
f. sur-ya- 7 (mar- 'light').
f . T h o u g h as a gerundive suffix -ya must be regarded as primary, it is manifestly
secondary in certain adjectives which have a gerundive s e n s e ; thus a-vi-mok-ya- (AV.)
'not to b e loosened', pari-varg-ya- 8 (AV.) 'to be avoided'.
9. A k i n to the gerundives are a few abstract feminines in -ya; e. g. kr-l-ya- 'action',
'enchantment', vid-yi-9 (AV.) ' k n o w l e d g e ' , deva-yaj-yd- 'worship o f the gods'.
22g. The rare s u f f i x -yin, like -in, forms a few possessive adjec-
tives, all of which except one occur in the VS. They are atats-ytn- (VS.)
'having one's bow drawn' ( S - t a t a - ) , dhanvH-yin- (VS.) 'bearing a bow' ( < i h a n v a n - ) ,
mara-yln-10 (RV 1 .), N. of a man, srka-yin- (VS.) 'having a spear* ( s r k a - ) ,
svadha-yin-'1 (VS.) 'owning the Svadha'.
230. The suffix -ra forms four superlatives from prepositions and about
a dozen ordinary nouns, most of which are adjectives. The superlatives
are adha-ra- 'lower', apa-ra- 'later*, ava-ra- 'lower', upa-ra-12 lower'. The
ordinary adjectives formed with the suffix have the sense of 'belonging to'
or 'connected with'. It is usually added direct; e. g. dham-ra- 'grey' ( d h a m d -
'smoke'), asri-ra- 'ugly', pamsu-ra- 'dusty' ( p a m s u • 'dust', AV.), and with
initial Vrddhi dgnidh ra- 'belonging to the fire-kindler' ( a g n i d h - ) . It is added
with connecting i in medh-i-ni- 'wise' ( m ' d h A - 'wisdom') and rath-i-rd- 'riding
in a car'. It also occurs in a few substantives, some of which are of

1 As if from suvasva-; like vaiyasv-a- 6 Cp. WHITNEY 1212 m.

'descendant of VyaSva'; cp. WHITNEY 7 Cp. WHITNEY 1213 e ; and Roots, under
1204 b, c. mar- 'sound'.
1 W i t h Guna of final -u as usual before 8 Here the guttural shows that these
secondary suffixes (190); praSav-ya- 'to be words are derived from nominal stems
partaken o f ' (pra-as-) a n d urjav-ya- "rich in -moia• and -varga-.
nourishment' (urj-) are formed without any
9 In the R V . only in the compound j a t d -
p r i m i t i v e s prasu- and iirju-. vidyä- ' k n o w l e d g e of creatures'.
3 W i t h syncope in the suffix of the pri- 1 0 Perhaps m e a n i n g 'brilliant' or, according

mitive; cp. 190. to Säyana, 'destroying' enemies.

4 F r o m the w e a k stem of the primitive; " T h e T S . IV. 4 . I N h a s svadhä-vin..
cp. 190. 12 F o r anta-ra c p . a b o v e p. 90, 3 9 a n d
5 Cp. WHITNEY 1212 c. note «.
142 I . ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4 . VEDIC GRAMMAR.

doubtful etymology: karmi-ra-1 'smith', muska-rd- (AV.), a kind of small

animal 1 , sdmbara-N. of a demon, sahkurd- (AV.) 'penis', sahas-ra- 'thousand'.
231. The suffix -la forms about a dozen adjectives with the same
meaning as those formed with -ra, with which it sometimes interchanges and
of which it is generally a later form. Examples are: asli-ld- (AV.) 'ugly',
kapi-ld- 'brown', jiva-ld- (AV.) 'lively', tilvi-la- 'fertile', bahu-la- 'abundant',
madhu-ld- 'sweet', seva-la- (AV.) 'shiny'. This suffix also forms two or three
diminutives: vrsa-ld- 'little man', sisa-la- 'little child', and the fem. salika-ld-
(AV.) 'small splint'.
2 3 2 . The suffix -va forms a few adjectives: arna-va- 'billowy', kesa-vd-
(AV.) 'hairy', anji-vd- (AV.) 'slippery', santi-vd- (AV.) 'friendly', sraddhi-vd-
'credible'.
2 3 3 . The suffix -1rat forms seven feminine abstract substantives, with
a local sense, from adverbs or prepositions: arvu-vat-4 'proximity', a-vdt-
(AV.) 'proximity', ud-vdt- 'height', ni-vat- 'depth', para-vdt- 'distance', pra-vdt-
'height', sam-vdt- 'region'.
234. With the suffix -vant before which -a and -i may be lengthened,
are formed some twenty derivatives, nearly all adjectives with the sense of
'possessing' or 'connected with'. The adjectives are: amati-vdn- 'indigent',
aratl-vdn- 'hostile', fgha-van• 'impetuous', rnd-van- 'indebted', dhita-van-5 'rich
in gifts', dhi-van- (AV.) 'clever', maghd-van- 'bountiful', srusti-vdn- 'obedient',
satya-van-6 (AV.) 'truthful', samad-van- 'warlike', svadhd-van-, f. -vari-i 'faith-
ful', hSrd-van- (VS.) 'hearty'; also the feminines sumna-vdrt- 'bringing favour',
sUnfta-varT- 'joyous'. Somewhat anomalously formed are indhan-van- 'possessed
of fuel' (indhana-), sahd-van-8 and sdho-van-" (AV.) 'mighty'. There are also
the substantives dthar-vati- m. 'fire-priest', must-vdn- m. 'robber', and sani-t-
van-JO 'reward'.
235. The suffix -vant forms, from nominal stems of every kind, possessive
adjectives numbering at least 250 in the Saiphitas. A final vowel is often
lengthened before the suffix, most frequently -a, but very rarely -u. Examples
are: kisa-vant- 'hairy', asvs-vant- 'possessed of horses' (beside asva-van/-);
praja-vant- 'having progeny'; sakhi-vant- 'having friends', saktl-vant- 'mighty'
(sakti- 'might'); dyavd-prthivi-vant-11 (AV.) 'connected with heaven and earth';
visnu-vant- 'accompanied by Vijnu', visU-vant- 'dividing' (visu- 'apart'); hdrit-
vant- 'gold-coloured'; asan-vatit- (AV.) 'having a mouth', roman vant- and
loma-vant- (AV.) 'hairy', slrsan-vant- (AV.) 'having a head'; kakubh-vant- (MS.
1. n 1 ) 'having a peak'; svar-vant- 'splendid'; payas-vant- 'containing milk',
nas-vant-{AV.) 'having a nose'. With external Sandhi: prsad-vant-' variegated' I2 .
a. Some of these derivatives, especially if formed from pronominal stems,
have the meaning of 'resembling' instead of 'possessing'; thus mn-vant- 'like
me', i-vant- 'so great', ki-vant- 'how far?', indras-vant-13 'like Indra', nila-vant-

1 sh>ara- 'treasury' probably stands by | 9 T h e only instance of external Sandhi

haplology for itva-vara-. with this suffix.
' T h e word occurs in T S . V. (B) as an 1 0 With -I interposed, as after short radical

adjective meaning 'having testicles'. vowel preceding primary -van; e. g. kf-t-

3 Probably a foreign word. van-.
4 From arva- 'hither' contained in arvahc- 1 1 Retaining the double accent of the pri-

'hitherward' and some other derivatives. mitive.

5 T h e Pada text has dhitd-van-.
6 T h e Pada text has satya-van-.
7 T h e fem. of the secondary -van being
formed like that of the primary -van ; see
177 and cp. 179 a.
8 T h e Pada text has saka-van-.
« In a few derivatives -vant has the
appearance of a primary suffix: vivas-vant-
or vi-vasvant- 'shining', ar-vant- 'swift', yah-
vant- 'speeding'.
13 With the s of the nominative.
 V . COMPOUNDS. FORM OF COMPOUNDS. 143

'blackish', nr-vdnt- 'manly'. From this sense is derived the use of the neuter
acc. as an adverb of comparison, e.g. manus-vdt 'like Mantis', 'as Manus did'.
236. The very rare suffix -1ra/a, probably a noun in origin, seems to
be found only in one numeral adjective, cdtur-vaya- 'fourfold', and one sub-
stantive, dru-vdya- (AV.) 'wooden dish'.
237. The suffix -vcJa (cp. 179) seems to be used in the formation of
secondary derivatives only in krsi-vald- 'peasant' (krsi- 'tillage') and in the
fem. nad-vahi- (VS.) 'reed-bed'.
238. The suffix -win is used in forming nearly twenty possessive adjectives
from stems ending in -a (which is lengthened), -a1, -as; thus ubhaya-vin-
'partaking of both' (ubhdya-), asträ-vin- 'obedient to the goad', yasas-vin-
(AV.) 'beautiful'. T o the analogy of the derivatives from stems in -as is due
the insertion of s in sata-s-vtn- 'possessing a hundred'. The only derivatives
from stems ending in any consonant other than s are dhrsad-vin- 'bold'
(1ihrsdt-) and väg-vin- (AV.) 'eloquent' (vie- 'speech'), both formed as in
external Sandhi.
239. The only derivative of the suffix -vya forming names of relation-
ship which occur in the Sarphitäs seems to be bhrätr-vya- (father's)
'brother's son''.
240. The suffix -¿a forms eight or nine adjectives or substantives -without
in most instances changing the original meaning. The adjectives are ¿ta-sa-
'variegated', babhlu-sd- (VS.) 'brownish', yuva-sd- 'youthful', and with possessive
sense roma-sd- 'hairy'. The substantives are anku-sa- m. 'hook', kdsma-sa-
(AV.) m. or n. 'stupefaction'(?), kald-sa- m. 'jar', turvd-sa-, N. of a man,
lopä-sd-3 m. 'jackal'.

V. COMPOUNDS.
BENFEY, Vollständige Grammatik p. 245—282. — WHITNEY, Sanskrit Grammar
1246—1316. — REUTER, D i e altindischen nominalcomposita, ihrer betonung nach unter-
sucht, K Z . 31, 157 — 232; 4 8 5 — 6 1 2 . — WACKERNAGEL, Altindische Grammatik, 2«,
Nominalkomposition, 1905: cp. BARTHOLOMAE, I F . 20, 1 6 2 — 1 7 2 (Anzeiger).

241. Form of compounds. — The Vedic language has inherited from

the Indo-European speech the power of combining words into a compound
treated like a simple word as regards accent, inflexion, and construction.
Both in the frequency and the length of compounds the Vedic language
resembles that of Homer. In the R V . and the A V . no compounds of more
than three independent members occur; and those which consist of three
members are rare, such as ddabdha-vrata-pramati- 'superior-minded owing to
unbroken observances', pürva-käma-kftvan- 'fulfilling former wishes', mitho-
avadya-pa- 'mutually warding off want', hdri-manyu-säyaka- 'stimulating the
mettle of the bays'.
The two characteristic features of a compound are unity of accent
and use of the uninflected stem in the first member (or members). There
are, however, exceptions to both these rules. The Sandhi between the two
numbers is occasionally different from that between words in a sentence.
Occasionally also tmesis of a compound occurs 4 . Generally speaking a

1 The doubtful word vy-ainicv-in- (VS 1 .) 4 Frequently in dual compounds, as dyava

seems to add -in to the present stem with ha ifama 'heaven and earth'; occasionally
interposed euphonic -v-. in others also, as sunas cic chfpam for iunah-
1 piif-vya- 'father's brother', 'uncle', occurs sepam; nara va iamsam for nara-samsam;

in the later language. sapta me sap/a for sapta-sapia me.

3 Cp. GUSTAV MEYER, IF. 1, 328.
144

compound assumes a modified and single meaning as compared with the

same words used in juxtaposition in a sentence; e. g. krsna-sakuni- (AV.)
'raven', while krsna/i sakùnih would mean 'black bird'. Compounding must
take place when a derivative has to be formed from the two words; as
ksditrapat-ya- 'property' beside ksitrasya pâti- 'lord of the field'. Sometimes,
however, the case-ending remains while the compound accent is used, as
rayas-posa-dâ- 'bestowing abundance of wealth', beside rayas posa- 'abundance
of wealth'. There is a tendency to compounding when the first of two
syntactical words is indeclinable. Thus beside sdrn yôs 'happiness and wel-
fare' also appears sam-yos (i. 34 s ); and analogously the indeclinable form or
stem of a word takes the place of the case 1 . Sometimes compounds are
formed by the coalescence of inflected words occurring side by side in a
sentence. Thus visvàhâ (TS.) 'all days' beside âhà visvâ (RV.) has become
visvàha 'daily' with a single accent. Occasionally, when two compounds
have the same final member, the latter is used only once, as mitrôtd1
médhyâtithim (1. 36') for mitrâtithim utd médhyâtithim; pataydn matidaydt-
sakham (1. 4?) for pataydt-sakham mandaydt-sakham. Sometimes one of the
members of a compound governs a case 3 outside the compound, as awato
mâmsa-bhiksàm (1. 162") 'begging for the flesh of the steed'; in some instances
pleonastically, as gartànâm gand-patim (11.23') 'troop-leader of troops'. A case-
form may agree with the first member of a compound when that member
has the form or even only the sense of that case, as ràyds-kâmo visvdpsnyasya
(vu. 426) 'desirous of wealth of all forms'; or a case-form may agree with
the second member, while coordinated in sense with the first, as mahâ-dhané
. . drbhe (1. 7S) 'in great booty (and) in small'.
a. The gender of compounds is, in Copulatives (Dvandvas) and
Determinatives (Tatpuruças) ending in substantives, that of the last member 4 ;
but collective compounds are regularly neuter5. Compounds ending in adjec-
tives, possessives, and governing compounds have the gender of the substan-
tives with which they agree or which they represent. The number in Deter-
minatives is that of the last member. In Copulatives of the older types it is
dual or plural according to the total number meant by the combination,
while it is singular (and neuter) in the later type. Collective compounds
(whether copulatives or possessives) are singular. Compounds ending in
adjectives, possessives, and governing compounds, have the number of the
substantive with which they agree or which they represent

A. The First Member of Compounds.

242. Its form.— The first member of nominal compounds may consist
of nouns (including numerals and pronouns) or indéclinables suitable for quali-
fying nouns. Exceptionally an inflected form appears in this position qualifying
the second member in dependent determinatives and possessives. This is
mainly due to words frequently in juxtaposition becoming permanently joined;
thus beside the two independent words jis pdtih (vn. 38") 'lord of the family'

1 Thus for visnoh krdma- (AV. TS.) 'step first member prevails (265, notes 1 and 2);
of Vi$nu' there appears in a B. passage of and a few Determinatives change the gender
the TS. (V. 2.1») the compound visnu-krama-. of the final member, as patni-sala- (VS.) n.
2 T h e Pada text reads miirA uta. (sälä-) 'shed for the wives (of sacrifice«)'
3 This seems to be almost restricted to and agra-jikva- (VS.) n. 'tip of the tongue'
the genitive in the Samhitas, but many (jihvä-).
examples of other cases (acc., inst., d a t , 5 Both Dvandvas (266) and Bahuvrfhis
abl.) occur in the later language. (290).
4 In a few Dvandvas the gender of the
 V . COMPOUNDS. T H E FIRST MEMBER OF COMPOUNDS. US
s 1
we find the compound jás-patim (i. 185 ) . But it partly also arises from a
desire to express the syntactical relation of the words in the compound even
without antecedent juxtaposition; as in the verbal determinatives dhanam-jayd-
'winning booty', apsu-sdd- 'dwelling in waters'; or in possessives like r&yds-
kama- 'desirous of wealth'. Such case-endings show a tendency to encroach
beyond their legitimate sphere; thus the frequency of the ending -as before
-pati-y e. g. vüc-ás-páti- 'lord of speech', led to its becoming the general
genitive sign before that word, as in rátha-s-páti- 'lord of the car* (rátha-).
Similarly, according to apsu-ksi-t- 'dwelling in the waters' was formed apsu-ji-t-
beside ab-ji-t- 'winning waters', where the locative is not appropriate. Ordinarily
the first member appears only in its stem form. As the stem cannot express
number it may mean either the singular or the plural. That it often indicates
the plural is shown by expressions like narárn or jánanñm nr-patf- 'man-
guardian of men' or 'people'. The plural sense is also evident in compounds
like devd-kria- 'made by the gods', vird-jata• 'produced by men', nr-pdti-
'lord of men'. In personal pronouns and cardinals the number is of course
inherent in the stem itself.
a. The gender is expressed in the first member only in as far as
feminine words retain their f. stem when coordinated in copulatives or depen-
dent on the final member in the sense of a case in determinatives; e. g.
patnT-sála- (VS.) 'shed for wives'. The f. suffix -5 is, however, often shortened
to a2, as in amTva-hdn- 'destroying suffering', amTva-s'Óiana- 'dispelling suffering"
(dmtva-). But when a feminine adjective as first member agrees attributively
with a feminine in the last member, it appears in the masculine stem-form^;
e. g. prdyata-daksina- 'one by whom a sacrificial fee (ddksinS-) has been
presented' 4 .
243. If the stem is liable to gradation, that form is used which occurs
in the weak cases. Thus in the vowel stems -», -u, -r, appear; e. g. pdti-
justa- 'dear to a husband', vasu-vid- 'finding wealth', pitr-yajnd- 'sacrifice to
the manes'. Similarly dyu- (diu-) 'heaven' appears before consonants, as dyu-ksd-
'dwelling in heaven', dyú-bhakta- 'presented by heaven', but div- before vowels,
as div-lt- 'going to heaven', dlv-isti- 'prayer'. The two stems dáru- 'wood'
and Áp- 'water' are reduced to dru- and ap-\ dru-padd• 'wooden pillar', dru-
sdd- 'sitting on the tree'; ap-túr- 'overcoming the waters', ab-já- 'derived from
waters'. The stem púmams- 'man' appears in the weak form pums- in pums-
cali- (VS. AV.) and pums-calá- (VS.) 'courtezan' ('running after men').
a. S t e m s in -an have -a not only before consonants 5 , but also before
vowels6 and y, v~; e. g. rsja-putrd- 'king's son', uksánna- 'devouring bulls'
(uksdn-), dsmasya- 'whose mouth is a rock' (asman-), brdhmeddha- 'kindled
with devotion' (brahman-), brahmaudand- (AV.) 'boiled rice (odand-) for
Bráhmans' (brahmán-). Exceptions, however, are nemann-ls- 'following the lead',
vrsan-asvd- 'drawn by stallions', vfsan-vasu- 'having great wealth' 8 .
b . S t e m s in -in seem to follow the same analogy, dropping the -n before
consonants; thus sari-gu- (only voc.) 'having strong cattle' and sSci-püjana-
(only voc.) 'worshipping the strong''.
« T h e compounding of such forms probably as metre' and jagac-chandas- (AV. VS.) 'having
often started from vocatives like sahasas putra JagatI as metre', the first members doubtless
treated as a unit in regard to accent. represent neuter names of the metres.
2
This, however, seems to b e due to 5 As in raja-bhis etc.
metrical influence. 6 Unlike raj-fi-e etc.
3 An exception in ui-vy-iiti- 'giving wide 7 Not -an as in rajan-ya-, udan-vant-.
8
aid', where t h e f. stem urvi- appears instead In asann-ifu- 'having arrows in his
1
of the m. «/-«-. mouth t h e first member is a locative.
4 In hfhac-chandas- (AV.) 'having BrhatI 9 Cp. WACKERNAGEL 2», p. 54 ¡3, note.
Indo-arische Philologie. I. 4. 10
146 I. ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4. VEDIC GRAMMAR.

c. Occasionally the weak grade stem used as first member does

not occur as an independent word; thus ksa-pavant- and ksa-pavant- 'earth-
protector' from ksam- 'earth'; jnu-badh- 'bending the knee' from jsnu- 'knee':
man-dhatf- 'devout man' from man-as- 'mind' (through *manz-), sdt-pati- 'lord
of the abode', probably from sad-as- 'abode' (through *sats-).
204. When in the inflexion of a word two or more collateral stems
(not differing in gradation only) are used, the one which appears in weak
cases is mostly employed as first member in compounds. 1. Even though
the stem as-ya- 'mouth' is inflected throughout, the alternative stems of weak
cases as- and asan- are preferred: a-daghna- 'reaching to the mouth', asan/i-
isu-1 'having arrows in his mouth'. 2. udan-2 'water' is preferred to uda-ka
uda-grabha- m. 'holding water', uda-pii- (AV.) 'purified by water', uda-meghd-
'water-shower"; uda-ka- appears only in udakatman(AV.) 'having water for
its chief substance'. 3. Of the three stems panthan-, path!-, path-, only the
middle one, which appears before consonant endings, is used: pathi-krt-1,path-
making', pathi-raksi- 'protecting roads'. 4. sakan- s is preferred to sdkrt-
'dung' : saka-dhiima- (AV.) 'dung-smoke', saka-pindd- (VS.) 'lump of dung.
s'dka-pata- ('purified by dung'), N. of a seer. 5. iirsan- is preferred to siras-
' h e a d ' : strsa-kapald- ( A V . ) 'skull', hrsa-bhidya- (AV.) n . 'head-splitting', slrsa-
mayd- (AV.) m. 'disease (amaya-) of the head'. 6. There is fluctuation
b e t w e e n pad- a n d pada- ' f o o t ' , mams-6 a n d mamsa- 'flesh', hj-d- a n d hfdaya-
1
'heart' : pad-ghosa- (AV.) 'sound of footsteps', but pada-gfhya, ger. 'seizing
by the foot'; mams-pacaua- 'used for cooking flesh', but mamsa-bhiksd-
'begging for flesh', hrd-roga- 'heart-disease', but hrdaya-vidh- 'wounding the
heart' 8 .
245. Alternative adjective stems sometimes appear in the first member
of compounds. Thus in the RV. maki- interchanges with ma hit-' 'great' in
Karmadharayas and Bahuvrthis, as mahi-ksatra 'owning great sway', but maha-
dhand- 'great booty', mahs-manas- 'great-minded' , 0 . A few stems in -i appear
instead of or interchanging with others in -ra: rji- in rji-pya- and the
Proper Names rji-svan-11 beside rjra-'quick' in rjrasva- ('having quick horses'),
N. of a m a n ; *dabhi- in dabhiti- (for *dabhi-iti-) 'injurer', beside dabhra-
'small' in dabhra-cetas- 'of little wit'; iviti- in svity-ahc-12 'bright', beside svitra-
(AV.) 'white'; sad- in saci-vid- 'belonging together', beside A-sk-ra-1* 'united';
perhaps also -kravi- for *kruvi- in a-kravi-hasta- 'not having bloody hands',
beside krU-rd-'« (AV.) 'bloody'.
a. A few adjective stems in -i used as first member neither occur as uncompounded
adjectives nor have corresponding adjective stems in -ra-. tuvi-jaia- 'mightily born',
tuvi-grrva- 'strong-necked', hcvy-ojas• 'very strong'; gabhi-fak (AV.) 'deep down'.

1 8
See above p. 145, note 8 . On the other hand, of the alternative
2
Inst. sing, uda, pi. uda-bhis. stems asfj- and asan- 'blood', only the nom.
3 Nom. n acc. udakam. acc. form is used; e. g. asfk-p&van- (AV.)
• With irregular accent; cp. WACKER- 'drinking blood', asfn-mtikha- (AV.) 'bloody-
NAGEL 2«, p . 56, n o t e . faced'.
5 Inst, saka-bhis (TS.), nom. acc. sakft. 9 maha- being the m., ma/ii- the n. nom.
6 Beside vatta• 'wood' (which is fully in- acc. stem, beside the weak dat. mah-i etc.
flected and appears in vana-dhiti• 'layer of The AV. has the stem mahat- in the
wood'), the stem van- (gen. van-am, loc. KarmadhSraya mahal-kanda-, 'great section'.
vam-s it) is perhaps used in vim-saga- 'bull', 1 Perhaps also in fj'tl~ ( = rj>-'!'•)> cp.
1

van-dhura- 'car-seat', and van-ad- 'devouring W A C K E R N A G E L ^ » , p . 5 9 .

wood' (?). « Cp. siti-pad• 'white-footed', siti-pfs(ha-
7 Perhaps in pad-gj-bhi-, N. of a man or 'white-backed'.
d e m o n , if fad- = pad-, cp. WACKERNAGEL *3 From sac- 'be attached' with syncope.
1, 148 a. M C p . WACKERNAGEL 2«, p . 59.
 V . COMPOUNDS. THE FIRST MEMBER OF COMPOUNDS. 147

246. Extension of the stem sometimes takes place in the first member.
T h e commonest addition is -a owing to the frequency of that ending: dur-
a-dabhná- ( A V . ) 'eluding doors', asvln-a-krta- (VS.) 'done by the Asvins';
visaujas(VS.) 'ruling the people'; sad-a-rcd-2 ( A V . ) 'collection of six verses'.
A n a-stem becomes one in -as in yaksmo-dhn- ( A V . ) 'seat of a disease' (jdksma-).
A n extension with -d appears in satdd-vasu-1 'having a hundred (said-)
treasures', and in án-atid-bhuta'unsurpassed'.
a. Shortening of the stem sometimes takes place by the dropping
of a final t ox s (preceded by a) or of the vowel -a; thus prsodard- ( T S .
v. 6. 1 4 ' ) 'having a spotted (prsat-) belly' (udára-); apna-ráj- 'ruling over
riches' {dpnas-); bhar-isd-5 (iv. 40 2 ) 'desiring booty' (bhdra-); til-piñja- ( A V . )
'barren sesamum' (ti/a-); sas-piñjara- (TS. iv. 5.2 1 ) 'reddish like grass' (sasa-),
may also b e an example, but it is more probably a modification of s'as-
píñjara- (VS. x v i . 1 7 ) b y haplology for *saspa-piñjara-.
247. A d v e r b s often occur as first member o f compounds. In several
instances a nominal stem in -a represents an adverbial case (acc., inst., abl.,
loc.) formed from that stem; thus nltya-vatsa- 'having a calf continually*
(nityam); satya-ydj- 'sacrificing truly' (satydm), samantd-siti-ba.hu- (VS.) 'whose
forefeet are white all round' (samantdm); satta-já- 'born of old' ( = sand or
sanát); upakd-caksas- 'visible from near at hand' (upaké 'near'). Occasionally
a nominal stem which has no separate existence is abstracted from the adverb;
thus ara-manas- 'ready-minded' (from dram 'ready'), ard-mati- 'suitable prayer',
abhyardha-ydjvan- 'offering apart' (abhyardhds). A cardinal is sometimes
thus used instead of its adverb: try-arusa- 'reddish in three places' (tri-s),
dvi-jd- ( A V . ) ' b o m twice' (dvi-s).
248. T h e case-ending is also preserved in several instances; thus
aram-kft- 'preparing', sakam-uks- 'sprinkling together', sakam-yúj- 'joined
together' (sakdm), sayam-bhavd- ( A V . ) 'becoming evening'; pasci-dosd- (VS.)
'late evening'. Adverbs that are neither case-forms nor look like them
regularly remain unchanged; thus aksnayS-drúk-6 'injuring wrongly'; itthá-dhi-
'truly devout'; ida-vatsard- (VS. A V . ) 'the present year', a particular kind of
year; púnar-nava- 'renewing i t s e l f , punar-bhá- 'arising again'; visvdto-dhT-
'observing in all directions', visu-rüpa- 'coloured variously' (visu-), visü-vft- 'rolling
in various directions'. A nasal is a d d e d in maksu-m-gamd- 'approaching quickly'
(maksá).
249. Prepositions frequently occur as the first m e m b e r of a compound.
1. Owing to their originally adverbial character they may qualify ordinary
adjectives or substantives like adverbs; thus dti-krsna- (VS.) 'excessively
dark', vi-mahi- 'very great'; prd-napat- 'great grandson', vt-vac- 'opposing shout';
and in BahuvrThis: prá-srngd- (VS.) 'having prominent horns', vy-amsa- 'having
shoulders wide apart'.
2. Owing to their constant connexion with verbs they are very c o m m o n
before verbal nouns; e . g . úpa-stu-t- and úpa-stuti- 'invocation'; puró-hita-
'domestic priest'.
3. Owing to their frequent connexion with cases, they also appear in a
governing sense; e. g. ddhi-gart-ya- 'being on the car-seat', anu-pathd-
'following the path'.
1 For vüa-ojas• like (AV. VS.) saíyáujas- 5 According to the analogy of gav-ifá-
(= satya-ojas-) instead of vid-ojas-. 'desiring cows'.
2 Like pañcarcá- = fañca-fca. 6 akma-yaian- 'going across' stands by

3 Influenced by the analogy of paitcaiid- haplology for *aksnaya-yavan-. Cp. WACKBR-

•50' etc., and vidád-vasii-, etc. NAGEL 2', p. 128 d.
4 Due to a confusion of *ati-bhuta- — ati-
bhiita- 'surpassed' and ádbhuta- 'marvellous'.
10*
148 I. ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4 . V E D I C GRAMMAR.

a. Prepositions as first member sometimes appear in a shortened f o r m ; thus bhi- =

aihi1 in bht-sij-2: 'healer'; 0- -— ava in o-gana- ('away from the crowd') 'isolated', 'wretched',
and in o-paid- 'top-knot' ('that which is tied down', from pas- 'fasten'). On the other
hand, ánu several times appears l e n g t h e n e d to dmt-: thus an-anu-kftyá- 'inimitable',
an-anu-dá- 'not giving way', án-atiu-dif/a• 'unsolicited', an-ánu-bhüti- 'disobedient', anu-sák
'in constant succession'.
250. Sam and sa-. — The preposition sám is of very common occur-
rence as first member. This is its form invariably before vowels, and
when accented originally always before consonants. Its unaccented form
sa- (= sm-) should phonetically always appear before consonants. But the
proper use of sám- and ra- before consonants has begun to be confused.
a. In determinatives (i) when the final member is a verbal noun sam-
always appears before a vowel, as sam-añká- (AV.) 'hook' (from añc- 'bend'),
sam-idh- 'fuel'; and sám- if accented predominates 3 before consonants, being
phonetic; e. g. sám-gati- f. 'coming together', sám-dhatr- 'one who puts
together', sám-prkta- 'mixed', sá-, however, also occurs in sá-gdhi- (VS. MS.)
f. 'eating together', sá-cyuti- (MS. n. 7") 'falling together', sá-pTti- (VS. MS.)
f. 'drinking together', sá-hüti- f. 'joint invocation'.
(2.) sa- is preserved b e f o r e a c c e n t e d v e r b a l n o u n s formed from the
simple root with or without -/, or with the suffixes -a, -ana, -van, -in-, thus
sa-cit- 'thinking', sa-badh- (TS. in. 2. 124) 'oppressed', sa-yúj- 'united', sa-vrdh-
'increasing together', sa-stúbh- (TS. rv. 3. 12 2 ), a kind of metre, sa-syád-
'streaming together' 4 ; sa-ksi-t• 'dwelling together', sa-srú-t- 'streaming' 5 ; sa-gtn-á-
(VS.) 'coming to terms', sa-jósa- 'unanimous', sa-mádana- 'conflict' 6 ; sa-yá-van-
'going along with', sa-yúg-van- 'united with', sa-sthá-van- 'standing together',
sa-ji-t-van- 'victorious'; sa-vas-in- (AV.) 'dwelling together' 7 .
(3.) Before ordinary adjectives sam- appears in sám-vasu- 'fellow-dweller',
sám-miila- 'commingling', sám-priya- (VS.) 'loving one another', and even
when unaccented before ordinary substantives in sam-vaísará- 'year', sam-
grama- (AV.) 'assembly', but sa-pátni- 'co-wife'.
b. In Bahuvrihis when the meaning is (1.) 'together' (as in the verbal
use of the preposition) sam- appears, as sám-hanu• (AV.) 'striking the jaws
together', sam-gavá- m. '(time when the) cows (are driven) together', and (as
usual before vowels) sam-udrá- m. 'sea'. But when the meaning is (2) 'united
with', 'accompanied by' what is expressed by the final member, sa- is almost
exclusively used (and nearly always even accented) 8 , as sá-cetas- 'accompanied
by intelligence', 'rational'; j a w - o c c u r s here only in sám-sahasra- 'accompanied
by a thousand', and in sám-patnX- (AV.) 'accompanied by her husband' 9 . In
this sense sam- still appears before vowels in sám-agra- and sam-agrá- (AV.)
('including the top'), 'complete', sám-anga- (AV.) 'accompanied by all limbs' IO ,
'complete', sám-asir- 'accompanied by mixture', 'mixed'; but even here sa-
once in the RV. takes the place of sam- in the compound sSsana• (x. 904)

1
The initial a- of some other prepositions ! 6 But also sam-gama- 'coming together',
is lost in the later language: pi- = ¿/¿(¿B.);' sam-carana- 'suitable for walking on'.
dhi- — adhi and va- — ava are post-Vedic. 1 7 With verbal nouns otherwise formed,
» See WACKERNAGEL 2 1 , p. 7 2 », and cp. | as with -tra or •na only sam• occurs, as
BRUGMANN, K Z . 2 5 , 2 1 4 , note. j sam-hotrd- 'joint sacrifice', sam-praina- 'inter-
3 Jam- occurs more than three times as rogation'.
often as sa- before consonants, doubtless I 8 With the usual Bahuvrihi accent on the
owing to the parallel use of sam- with I first member.
verbs. 9 In order to distinguish this sense from
4 But also sam-gir- 'assenting', sam-yat- that of sa-patm- 'co-wife'.
'contiguous'. 10 Cp. also the adv. sam-anta-m (AV.) 'in-
5 But also sam-ji-t- 'conqueror', sam-ka-t- eluding the ends', 'completely',
'layer'.
 V. COMPOUNDS. T H E FIRST MEMBER OF COMPOUNDS. 149

'provided with food' (dsana-), 'eating', and becomes common in the later
Samhitas; e. g. sd/iga- (AV.) 'accompanied by the limbs' (aiiga-), sdntardesa-
(AV.) 'accompanied by the intermediate quarters' (antar-desa-). — When the
meaning is (3.) 'in common', 'same', 'identical' 1 sa-3 is very common before
consonants, as sa-kcta- 'having the same intention', sa-laksman- 'having the
same characteristics'; while sam- appears only in sam-sisvarT- 'having a calf
in common', sam-manas- (AV.) 'being of the same mind', unanimous', sdm-
matr- 'having the same mother'. In this sense sam- alone appears (as usual)
before vowels: sam-anta- 'contiguous' ('having the same boundary'), sam-okas-
'having a common abode', 'living together'.
251. Particles, which for the most part have no independent existence,
frequently appear as first member of compounds.
1. The negative particle, the form of which in the sentence is na,
almost invariably appears in composition as before consonants, and in-
variably as an- before vowels. It completely reverses the meaning of the
final member; thus mitra- 'friend', a-mitra- 'enemy', sasti- 'praise', a-Sasti-
'curse' 4 . As participles, infinitives, and gerunds are nominal forms,
they may be compounded with the privative particle: thus a-bibhyat- 'not
fearing', a-budhya-mana- 'not waking', a-dasyant- (AV.) 'not about to give',
d-vidvittts- 'not knowing' 5. The syntactical form of the particle is very rare:
na-mura- (AV1.) 'non-dying'(?) 6 . Perhaps also in nd-pat- 'grandson', if it
originally meant 'un-protected' 7 .
2. Su- 'well', 'very', except in the RV. very seldom used independently 8 ,
and dus- 'ill', 'hardly', which occurs as a prefix only, appear as first member
in determinatives and possessives; e. g. su-kara- 'easy to be done', su-krta-
Svell-done', su-dd- 'giving willingly', su-vasand- 'fair raiment', su-varna- 'fair-
coloured', sv-dsva- 'having excellent horses'; da-das- (AV.) 'not-worshipping',
'irreligious', dus-cyavana- 'difficult to be felled', dur-vAsas- 'having bad clothing',
'ill-clad'; dur-aha (AV1.) 'wail!' is formed as an antithesis to sv-ahii 'hail!'.
3. There are a few prefixes beginning with k- which seem to be etymo-
logically connected with the interrogative, and express depreciation, bad-
ness, or difficulty: ku-9 in ku-cara- 'wandering about", ku-nakhiti- (AV.) 'having
diseased nails', ku-namnamd- 'hard to bend', ku-yava- (VS.) 'bringing bad
harvest' 10 ; kad- in kat-payd- 'swelling horribly'; kirn- in kim-'ild- (VS. TS. MS.)
(land) 'having small stones', ktm-purusd-, a kind of mythical being ('some-
what like a man'); a collateral form kava- perhaps in kavSri- 'stingy', kav3-
sakhd- 'selfish'".
4. The particles -id and -cid make their way into the first member of
compounds in the company of pronominal words to which they may he

' samäna- is also used in this s e n s e : as 6 na-pumsa ka- 'neuter' also occurs in MS.
samsnäbandhu- 'having the same relatives'. and SB.
2
sa- h a s the sense of 'one' in sä Atta- (AV.) 7 See LEUMANN, Festgruss an Bohtlingk,
'lasting one day', sa-kft 'once', sa-divas and p. 77 f. For a few other doubtful compounds
sa-dyas 'on one and the same day'. with na- see WACKERNAGEL 2», p. 78, note.
8
3 This is the low-grade form ( = «-) of su occurs as an independent particle
na-. about 250 times (but never at the beginning
4 It frequently reverses the pregnant sense | of a sentence) in the RV. ( rarely in the
of the final member, as vi-iastf• "(good) later Samhitas: only 14 times in AV.
dissector", a-visastf- 'bad dissector'. 9 Often in adverbs such as ku-tas 'whence',
5 See KNAUER, Ueber die betonung der kii-tra 'where'.
10
composita mit a privativem im Sanskrit, K Z . On a few doubtful compounds with ku
27, I — 6 8 ; examples from the later Sam- s e e WACKERNAGEL 2», p . 8 3 , n o t e .
11
hitäs in DELBRÜCK, Altindische Syntax Also in kava-tiryanc- (TS.) 'directed
p. 540 f., Syntaktische Forschungen 2, p. 530 f. somewhat across'.
 I. ALLGEMEINES U N D SPRACHE. 4 . V E D I C GRAMMAR.

appended; thus tad-id-artha- 'directed to that particular object'; ka-cit-kard-

'effecting all manner of things'; kti-cid-arthin- "striving to get anywhere', kuha-
cid-vid- 'wherever being'.
5. A few interjectional or onomatopoetic words are compounded
with kara- and -krti- 'making' = 'sound', 'utterance', or -kartr- 'maker', to
express the actual phonetic sound of those words: thus vasat-kard- (AV. VS.)
'the interjection vasat, svadha-kard- 'pronouncing (the benediction) sva-dhá
sváha-krti- 'consecration with the call sviha\ hin-kartf- (TS.) 'one who
utters the sound hiñ', hih-kard- (VS.) 'the sound hiii. In has-kartf- 'enli-
vener', has-kard- 'laughter', hds-krti- 'loud merriment', the first member
represents either an interjection connected with the verb has- 'laugh', or a
reduced form of *kasas- laughter' (like sát-pati- for sádas-pati- through
*sáts-pati-).

B . T h e Last Member of Compounds.

252. I t s f o r m . — Practically all nouns may appear in this position. But
many verbal nouns," especially participles, if used in their primary sense, are
found exclusively after indeclinables which are capable of being combined
with the corresponding verbs. Some stems also occur as final members
though not used independently; such are verbal nouns formed from the
simple root with or without an added determinative -/; also derivatives like
-jariina- (AV.) 'belonging to the people (jdna-) of —'.
a. Change of ending. — When the gender of the final member is
changed, the -a of feminine words, even though radical, becomes -a in
masculine or neuter compounds; thus priyosriyá- 'fond of cows' (usriya-);
an-avasá- 'restless' (from ava-sá- 'rest'), a-sraddhd- 'unbelieving' (from srad-dhá-
'belief'), rtd-jya- 'well-strung' (from jyn- 'bowstring'). Even -i in a few instances
becomes -a; thus ati-ratrd- 'performed overnight' and aho-ratrd- 'day and
night' (rátrí-); api-sarvaré 'early in the morning' and ati-sarvaré or ati-
sarvarésu (AV.) 'late at night' (sárvarl-).
On the other hand m. and n. stems in -a regularly end in -a in the
feminine, as cittd-garbha- 'having evident offspring' (gdrbha- m.); and páti-
'husband' in f. possessives substitutes -paint-; thus ¿ka-patní- (AV.) 'having a
single husband', dasd-patrii- 'having demons as lords', sa-pdtnX- 'having one
husband in common', sám-patnX- (AV.) and sahd-patnl- (AV.) 'having her
husband with her', su-pdtnl- 'having a good husband'; also in the deter-
minative vird-patril- 'wife of a hero'.
253. Alternative stems.—When in the inflexion of a word alternative
stems are used, only one of these, and as a rule the older one, appears as
final member of possessive compounds: thus dánt- 'tooth' (not ddnta-) in
satá-dant- (AV.) 'hundred-toothed', si'ui-dant- 'bright-toothed'; pdd- 'foot' (not
poda-): a-ptid- 'footless', uttand-pad- 'whose feet are extended', ¿ka-pad-1 'one-
footed'; nds- 'nose' (not ndsS-) in f-jü-nas-2 'straight-nosed', N. of a man J;
ftdhan- 'udder' (not Údhar-) in an-üdhán-4 'udderless', rapsád-üdhan- 'having
a distended udder', f. d-cchidrodhn-T- Tiaving an intact udder'; dhdnvan- 'bow'
(not dhdnus-) in abald-dhanvart- (AV.) 'having a weak bow', ávatata-dhanvan-
(VS.) 'having an unstrung bow', ksiprd-dhanvan- 'having a swift bow', satd-

1
T h e AV., however, h a s t h e n o m . sing. 3AccordingtoWACKERN.\GEL2',p.92(top),
ika-fada-h. a-nasikd• occurs in TS. (VII. 5. 121.
' According to BLOOMFIELD also in 4 C p . WACKERNAGEL 2 1 , p . 9 3 , n o t e .
rujanas, for rujana-nas 'broken-nosed'; see !
p. 59, note i.
 V . COMPOUNDS. T H E LAST MEMBER OF COMPOUNDS.

dhativan- (VS.) 'having a hundred bows' 1 ; sirsan- 'head' (not slras-) in a-strsan-
'headless', tri-sXrsan- 'three-headed' C rtiru-sXrm-T- 'having the head of a Ruru
antelope'j; hfd- 'heart' (not hj-daya-) in its long-grade form -hard- in dur-
hard- (AY.) 'ill-disposed' and su-hird- 'good-hearted'.
a. Sometimes an alternative stem is used which has not been preserved
as an independent word; thus -jiiu- 'knee' (weak form of janu-) in asitd-jiiu-
(AV.) 'dark-kneed', mita-jnu- 'firm-kneed* *; an old stem -medhas- in su-medhas-
'wise' and puru-midhas- (SV.) 'wise' beside the regular compounds in -medha-
(from medha- 'wisdom') such as puru-midha- 'having much wisdom'; -fracas-*
'skin' in sarya-tvacas- (AV. VS.) 'having a skin bright as the sun' and hirartya-
tvacas- (AV.) 'having a golden skin', beside tvac- in sarya-tvac- and hiranya-tvac-.
254. Transfer stems. — Some four stems appear in certain forms
changed to stems in -as from a misunderstanding of the nom. -s in -3-s (as
in su-praja-s); thus from praja- 'offspring', d-prajas- (AV.) 'having no off-
spring', and su-prajas-6 'having good offspring', ida-prajas- 1 (MS. 1. 53)
'descendant of Ida'; from ksa- 'dwell', diva-ksas- 'living in heaven'; from
da- 'give', dravino das- 'bestowing wealth'; from dhs- 'put', vayo-dhas- (AV.
VS.) 'bestowing strength' and varco-dhas- (AV.) 'bestowing vigour*. On the
other hand, by the loss of final -s or -t a few consonant stems are trans-
formed to a-stems; thus beside an-agas- 'guiltless' appears an-aga-, and beside
puru-ddmsas- 'abounding in wondrous deeds', puru-damsa-; Brv-asthxva- (VS.)8,
n. du. 'thigh and knee', beside asthi-vant- m. du. 'knees ('bony'); ubhayA-da- 9
(AV.) 'having teeth in both (jaws)', beside ubhaya-dat-.
255. Vowel gradation in final member. — a. 1. The low grade
vowel of the roots da- 'give* and da- 'cut' disappears when the past parti-
ciples *dita- ' g i v e n ' a n d dita- 'cut' and the action noun *diti- 'giving' become
unaccented final members in a compound: thus ava-tta- (VS.) 'cut off', deva-tta-
'given by the gods', vy-A-tta- (AV. VS.) 'opened \ parX-tta- (VS.) 'given up' 11 ,
a-prati-tta- (AV.) 'not given back'; bhaga-tti- 'gift of fortune', magha-tti-
'giving of presents', vdsu-tti- 'granting of w e a l t h ' U n r e d u c e d forms, how-
ever, occur in tvA-data- and tva-datta- 'given by thee' and in havya-dati-
'sacrificial gift" 3 .
2. The vowels f and u in the radical syllable of the final member is
in a few instances reduced to i and u; thus try-udhan- 'having three udders'
(adhan-), dhl-ju- 'inspiring the mind' (j'a- 'impel'), su-sird- 'having a good
channel', 'hollow' (slrfi- 'stream'), su-suii- 'easy birth' (su-ti- TB.), a-huti- 'in-
vocation' (otherwise sd-hnti- 'joint invocation', etc.). Derivative -X is reduced
to -i in d-ni-bhrsta-tavisi- 'having unabated power' ( tavis-l-).
1
The determinative indra-dhanus- 'Indra's 8 Formed by dropping the -/ of the weak
bow', occurs in the AV. stem a;thi-vat-.
' The AV. however has pfthu-Hras• 'broad- ! 9 Formed by dropping the •/ of the weak
headed'. Stem -da/-.
3 From aslhan- (beside as/At'-, AV.) occur J° This phonetic form has otherwise been
both an-asthan- and an-astha- 'boneless'. ousted by the anomalous participle dat-ta-
4 Other reduced stems are sa-gdhi- (VS.) made from the weak present stem dad-.
'joint meal' (y^Aai-), mdd- 'nest' (ni-\-\/sad-) n The participle pra-tta- 'given up' also
upa-bd-i- 'noise' (upa-{-\pad-) a-sk-ra- 'united' ! occurs in TS. II. 2. 84 (B).
12
(I 'sac-); perhaps pari-mid- 'best part o f ' ; pra-tti- 'gift' also occurs in TS. V. 4.7*
(amia- 'part'). J (B) and tiir-ava-lti 'distribution of shares'
5 Also in the derivative tvacas-ya• (AV.) ¡in K.
'being in the skin'. I *3 The a of siman- 'chant' is perhaps
6 Under the influence of this new stem reduced to a in fk-sama- (VS.), fk-sama- (TS.),
is formed su-prajas-tva- 'possession of good . and fci-sama--, cp. WACKERNAGEL 2 l , 43 f.,
offspring' (for *su-praja-tva-). 1 note.
7 In K. ida-prajas- (IS. 3, 463) with the a j
of idi- unshortened. i
152

3- The o of go- 'cow' is reduced to -u in pusti-gu- 'rearing cows', N. of

a man, and su-gt't- 'having fine cows'. The -ai of rat- 'wealth', is reduced to
-i in brhad-ri-1 'having abundant wealth'; perhaps also in rdhad-ri-1, N. of
a man.
4. Final -/' and -u of the first member combine with the low grade
form of 3 of tip- 'water' in the last member to t and fi, in dvlp-a-3
'island' (dvi-ap-), pratlp-d-m 'against' (prati-) 'the stream', anup-d- 'pond'
(attu-ap-).
b. On the other hand, radical a in several instances appears lengthened
to a*. This occurs in several possessive compounds of jatti- 'wife': bhadra-
jani- 'having a beautiful wife' (only voc.), yi'iva-jani- 'having a young wife',
vitta-jani- "having found a wife', 'married', and with shifted accent dvi-jdni-
'having two wives' and a-jini- (AV.) 'having no wife'. A similar lengthening
appears in prthu-jaghana- (only voc. f.) 'broad-hipped'; saha-janvsa- 'with
offspring' (Janus-)-, ni-pada- 'low ground' (padd-); tvdt-pitaras (TS. 1. 5. io 2 ),
N. pi. 'having thee as father'; su-vdcas- 'having good speech', 'very eloquent',
sa-vacas- 5 (AV.) 'employing similar speech', vi-vacas- (AV.) 'speaking in various
ways' {vacas-), visva-iarada- (AV.) 'occurring every autumn' (sarad-) 'annual',
satd-sarada- 'lasting a hundred autumns' 6 .
256. Adjectival suffixes. — Adjective compounds not infrequently add
certain suffixes to mark their adjectival character more clearly. These suffixes
are -ka, -i, -ya, -a, -in.
1. The suffix -ka1 is thus used in only two somewhat obscure compounds
in the RV. tri-kadru-ka- (only pi.), a designation of certain soma vessels
(iadrii-) and try-amba-ka- 'having three mothers' (amba voc.); in the AV.
occur vi-manyu-ka- 'free from anger' and saha-kanthi-ka- f. 'with the throat'
(kanthd-, B.)8.
2. In the final member of a few Bahuvrihis, the suffix -/' sometimes
takes the place of -a; thus prdty-ardhi- 'to whom the half (ardha-) belongs';
dtijana-gandh-i- 'having a smell (gandha-) of ointment', dhQmd-gandhi- 'smelling
of smoke', su-gandhi- or su-gandhi 'sweet-smelling'; krsta-rddhi- (AV.) 'attaining
success (;radha-) in agriculture'.
3. The suffix - / a is frequently added in Bahuvrihis; thus anyodar-ya-
'born from another womb' (udara-), ddsa-mas-ya-9 'ten months old', dirgha-
jihv-ya- 'long-tongued' IO , tnadhu-hast-ya- 'honey-handed', may dra-s'ep-ya-'pea.cock-
t a i l e d ' v i s v a - j a n - y a - 'belonging to all men', visva-dev-ya- 'relating to all gods',
visvahg-ya- (AV.) 'being in all limbs', sa-garbh-ya- (VS.) 'born from the same

1
In the dative Ir^hadraye; cp. BB. 25, \ adjectives, as anta-ka• 'ending' from anta-
250. 'end'.
8
* In the anomalous gen. sing, fdhad- In the YV. several examples occur;
rayas. 1 WACKERNAGEL 2 ' , p. 102, quotes from the
3 Also riip-a- "low-lying* (ni-ap- 'into which TS. a-karna-ka• 'earless', a-danta-ka- 'tooth-
the water flows down') in K. j less', a-padd-ka- 'footless', an-akfi-ka- 'eye-
4 For a phonetic explanation of this phe- less', an-astht-ka- 'boneless', a-tvak-ka- 'skin-
n o m e n o n s e e WACKERNAGEL 2', 4 3 (p. i c o ) ; less', sdsTr-ia- 'accompanied by a blessing',
and cp. I, 68. an-aiir-ka• 'lacking a blessing'; from the MS.
5 There is a various reading su-vacasas a-cchandas-ka- 'metreless', an-astha-ka- 'bone-
in AV. VII. 12«, on which see WHITNEY'S less'.
note. 9 Also fan-masya- 'six months old', and
6 On vi-hayas- 'of extensive power', sarva- sapta-masya- 'seven months old' in K.
10
kayos- (AV.) 'having all vigour", su-rama- Also in TS. some compounds formed
'delighting', sii-yama- 'guiding well', see with -deva-tyti- 'having — for a deity' (devata-)-,
WACKERNAGEL 2<, p. 1 0 1 (middle). natta-vii-ya- (MS.) 'consisting of various
7 This suffix, which is never accented, is villages'.
probably identical with that which forms " Also vi-Hin-ya- (K.) 'tailless'.
 V. COMPOUNDS. T H E L A S T M E M B E R OF COMPOUNDS. i53

womb', sa-dhan-ya- 'accompanied by gifts', sdytttk-ya- (VS.) 'belonging to the

same herd', su-Mst-ya- 'fair-handed' (beside su-Aasta-), hiranya-kes-ya- 'golden-
maned' (beside hiranya-kesa-y.
The suffix -ya is also common in governing compounds with pre-
positions as first member; thus adhi-gart-ya- 'being on the car-seat', antah-
pariav-yd- (VS.) and antah-parsv-ya- (VS.) 'being between the ribs', atrv-
antr-ya- (AV.) 'being in the entrails', api-kaks-ya- 'situated near the arm-pit',
upa-trn-ya- (AV.) 'being in the grass', upa-mas-ya- (AV.) 'occurring every
month', pdri-rath-ya- (AV.) 2 'being around the car', n. part of the car. It
also appears in the adverbially used governing compounds abhi-nabh-ya-m
'near the clouds' and ud-ap-ya-m (AV.) 'upstream'.
4. The final member of Bahuvrihis is very frequently extended by
the suffix -a. In the RV. there are at least fifteen such stems; thus aks- 'eye'
in an-aks-d-'eyeless', ddhy-aks-a- 'eye-witness', catur-aks-a- 'four-eyed', bhnry-aks-a-
'many-eyed', sahasraks-a- 'thousand-eyed', hiranyaks-d- 'golden-eyed', Aktaks-a-
(AV.) 'whose eyes are anointed', an-aktaks-a-* (AV.) 'whose eyes are not
anointed', dhumaksa- (AV.) 'smoke-eyed', paryastaks-a- (AV.) 'with eyes cast
about', sanisrasaks-a- (AV.) 'having constantly falling eyes', hary-aks-a- (VS.)
'yellow-eyed'; "asth-4 'bone' in an-asth-d- 'boneless' beside an-asthan--, *udar-
'water* in an-udr-a- 'waterless'; go- 'cow' in su-gav-a- 'having fine cows', sam-
gav-d- 'time when cows come together', and in atithi-gv-a-, a name, ¿ta-gv-a-
'variegated', dasa-gva-, N. of a mythical group, nava-gv-a-5, N. of a mythical
group; Janus- in saM-janus-a- 'with offspring'; div- 'heaven' in brhad-div-a-
and brhad-div-a-, N. of a seer, su-div-a- (AV.) 'bright day'; dur- 'door' in
iatd-dur-a- 'having a hundred doors'; dhur- 'yoke' in su-dhur-a- 'going
well under the yoke' (beside su-dAur-), sa-dhur-a- (AV.) 'harnessed to the
same yoke'; nas- 'nose' in urB-nas-a- 'broad-nosed', pavX-nas-a- (AV.) 'having
a nose like a spear-head', vSrdhri-nas-d- (VS.) 'rhinoceros'; mfdh- in vi-
mrd/i-d-6 (AV.) 'warding off foes' (beside vi-mfdh-, VS.); rai- 'wealth' in
d-ray-a- 'not liberal'; vdstu- 'dwelling' in nava-vastv-a- 'having nine abodes';
sardd- 'autumn' in satd-s'arad-a- 'lasting a hundred autumns'; ap- 'water' in
dvTp-a- 'island'7.
In the later Samhitas several other final members extended with -a occur:
dhan- 'day' in sahti-a- (AV.) 'lasting a d a / ; rc- 'verse' in eka-rc-d- (AV.)
'consisting of one verse'; ksam- 'earth' in su-ksm-a- (VS.) 'consisting of good
earth'; netf- 'leader* in agni-netr-a- (VS. TS.) 8 'having Agni as leader': path-
'road', in vi-path-a- (AV.), a kind of chariot ('fit for untrodden paths'); pdd-
'foot' in a-bd-a- (VS.) 'year'; *vatas- 'year' in tri-vats-a- (VS.) 'three years
old'; sam-dfs- 'aspect' in madhu-samdrs-a- (AV.) 'sweet-looking'.
a. The final member is also sometimes extended with -a after a
governing preposition; thus dnu-path-a- 'going along the road', dntas-path-a-
'being on the road', anop-a- 'tank' ('lying along the water"), upanas-a- 'being
on the car* (-anas-), paro-ks-a- (AV.) 'away from the eye' {akf), puro-gav-d-
'leader1 ('preceding the cows').

1 aiva-budh-ya- 'based on horses' is 4 S e e WACKERNAGEL 2', p . 108 ( b o t t o m ) .

probably for *asva-budhn-ya- (from budhna-5 S e e BLOOMFIELD, A J P h . 1 7 , 4 2 2 ff.
'bottom') beside dsva-budhtta- ' b o m e b y 6 A l s o the f. vi-mrdh-a- ( T S . II. 4. 2 ' B).
horses'. 7 O n a f e w doubtful instances see W A C K E R -
1
» T h e accent of these w o r d s in -ya is NAGEL 2 , p. 1 0 9 (bottom).
usually the same as it would be without the 8 In T S . I. 8. 7« = V S . IX. 3 5 , 3 6 several
suffix; for a f e w exceptions, see WACICER- other names of deities compounded with
NAGEL 2\ 4 7 d ( p . 108). -netr-a- occur.
3 T h e Mss. ( A V . XX. 1286) r e a d anaklaksa-.
I54 I- ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4 . V E D I C GRAMMAR.

b. A similar extension with -a occurs in collectives which are allied

to BahuvrThis: thus try-dyus-a- (VS.) 'threefold lifetime', dvi-raj-d- (AV.) 'battle
of two kings', sad-rc-a- 'aggregate of six stanzas', sam-udr-d- 'collection of
waters' (*udar-), 'sea', sa-vidyui-a- (AV.) 'thunderstorm' ('accompanied by
lightning'). Akin to these are compounds in which the first member expresses
a part of the last (with change of gender); thus ardha-rc-a- (AV. VS.) m.
'half-stanza', aparahn-a- (AV.) m. 'afternoon', ny-ahn-a- (AV.) 'decline of day',
pUrvShn-a- 'forenoon', prd-pad-a- 'tip of the foot'. There are further some
neuter determinatives which probably had originally a collective sense; thus,
with change of gender, tri-div-d- 'third heaven', su-div-a- (AV.) 'fine day';
a-path-a- (AV.) 'pathlessness', su-path-a- 'good path'. From neuter stems in
-as, devainas-a- (AV.) 'curse of the gods', manusyainas-d- (AV.) 'sin (enas-)
of men'; brahma-varcas-a- (AV. VS.) 'divine power', hasti-varcas-a- (AV.)
'vigour of an elephant', brahmana-varcas-a- (AV.) 'dignity of a Brahman'.
c. The ending -a frequently takes the place of -an1 in the final
member of BahuvrThis, collectives, and Karmadharayas; thus deva-karmd-
'doing divine work', visva-karma- 'performing all work', vtra-karma- 'per-
forming manly work', priya-dhama- 'occupying desirable places', chando-tiima-
(VS.) 'named metre', 'metrical', vi-parva- 'jointless', dvi-vrsd(AV.) 'having
two bulls', aiiji-sakthd- (VS.) 'having coloured thighs', ut-saktha- (VS.) 'lifting
up the thighs', lomasd-saktha- (VS.) 'having hairy thighs'3, rk-sama- 'the Rc
verses and the Samans', sad-aha- (AV.) m. 'period of six days'; bhadraha-
(AV.) n. 'auspicious day', eka-vrsa- (AV.) 'only bull', maha-vrsa- (AV.) 'great bull'.
d. The suffix -a takes the place of -/' in kava-sakha- 'having a niggard
for a friend' (sakhi-), in mandayat-sakha- 'gladdening his friend', and in
dasangula- 'length of ten fingers' (angi'tli-).
5. In Bahuvrihis the suffix -in is sometimes pleonastically added; thus
ku-nak/i-ln- (AV.) 'having bad nails', mahi-hast-in- 'having large hands', yaso-
bhag-in- (VS.) 'rich in glory', sa-rath-in- (VS.) 'riding on the same chariot'.
257. Classification of Compounds.—The Indian grammarians divided
compounds into three main classes according to their syntactical relations:
1) copulatives, or those in which the members are coordinated, called
dvandva-4 ('couple'); 2) determinatives, or those in which the first member
determines the second, called tat-purusa- ('his man') 5 ; 3) those which are
dependent on another word, called bahu-vrThi-6. The latter are usually
regarded as compounds of the determinative class transmuted to adjectives, which
would thus have a secondary character. They are often called 'possessives'
since their meaning can usually be rendered by 'possessing', as bahv-anna-
'possessing much food'. To these may be added three other groups in order
to treat Vedic compounds exhaustively: 4) governing compounds, or
those in which the first member governs the last in sense; e. g. ksaydd-vTra-
'ruling men'; 5) a certain remnant of irregular combinations which are
best dealt with together; 6) iteratives, or repeated words which are treated
as compounds in the Sarphitas inasmuch as they have only one accent and a
special meaning when thus combined; in these the second member is called
amredita- 'repeated' by the Indian grammarians.

1 T h i s -a probably started in stems ending 4 T h e word first occurs in a B. passage

in -matt, representing *-mn-a-\ see WACKER- of the TS. (1. 6. 91) in the form oidvandvani
NAGEL 21, p . 1 1 8 C. 'couples', and in the A B .
2
-vffa-
for -vf$an- occurs in the A V . after 5 A n example used as the name of the
other numerals also. class.
3 For some doubtful examples see WACKER- 6 'Having much rice', an example used
NAGEL 2', p. 116. as the name of the class.
 V. COMPOUNDS. ITERATIVES. COPULATIVES. iSS

i. Iteratives.
COLLITZ, Transactions of the Oriental Congress of Berlin 2 2 , 287 ff. — DELBRÜCK,
Vergleichende Syntax, Dritter Theil (1900), p. 141 —153: Iterativcomposita. — W A C K E R -
NAGEL 2«, p. 142—148.

258. The repetition of an inflected form with loss of accent in the second
word is very frequent in the R V . Such repetitions are treated in the Pada
texts as compounds the members being separated by the Avagraha. The word
thus repeated is generally a substantive and iteration is expressed chiefly
in regard to time or distribution in regard to space; e. g. dhar-ahar, divd-
dive, dyavi-dyavi 'every day'; grht-grhe, dime-dame, vise-vise 'in every house';
diso-disah (AV.) 'from every quarter'. Substantives are also thus repeated to
express frequency or constant succession in other matters: satroh-satroh 'of
every foe'; dnnam-annam. (AV.) 'food in perpetuity'; agnim-agnim vah samidhü
duvasyata (vi. 15 6 ) 'worship Agni again and again with your fuel', yajndsya-
yajiiasya 'of every sacrifice' (x. i 5 ), dngäd-angat 'from every limb' (x. 163 6 ),
pdrvani-parvani 'in every joint' (x. 163 6 ). Adjectives repeated in this way
are less common; e. g. pdnyam-panyam . . ä dhävata . . sSmam (vm. 2 15 )
'cleanse Soma who is again and again to be praised'; prdcim-pracTm pradisam
(AV. xii. 3 7 ) 'each forward (eastern) direction'; uttaräm-uttaräm sdmäm (AV.
xii. 133) 'each following year', 'year after year".
a. The repeated word was originally used in the singular only. But the plural
meaning of this repetition led to the beginnings of plural forms, as ikam-ekä said daduh
(v. S2'7) 'they have given a hundred each' (lit. 'hundreds, each one'). But a word thus
iterated seems never to be in the plural except in agreement with a plural.
b. The frequency of -e as locative of a-stems led to the occasional use of the
dative in consonant stems; div-l-div-e (for *div-i-divt) and vis-i-vis-e (for *vis-i-vis-i).
c. T h e transition from iteratives to regular compounds, which appears in B., began
with numerals. Thus the ika-ekah of the R V . (in. 29^) appears in the ¿ B . as ¿kaika-;
and from the dvi-dvä of the R V . ( v m . 68*4) we come to the adverbial dvatt-dvam 'in
pairs' in the MS., and finally to dvandva- 'pair' in the TS. (B).
d. Adjective compounds in which a word is repeated for emphasis are unconnected
with iteratives, differing from them both in sense and accent; thus mahä-tnahä-
•mightily great'; esaifi- f. of *esaisa- (= e/a-tfti-) 'very speedy'3. Whether carä-carä- and
calä-calä- 'moveable' belong to this group is somewhat uncertain.

2. Copulative Compounds.
R E U T E R , Die altindischen nominalcomposita, K Z . 31, 172—87: I. Copulative compo-
sita. — DELBRÜCK; Altindische Syntax 3 1 . — RICHTER, Die unechten Nominalkomposita
des Altindischen und Altiranischen: I F . 9,23ff.— W H I T N E Y , Sanskrit Grammar 1252—61. —
WACKERNAGEL 2', 62—74 (p. 149—173).

259. Classification of D v a n d v a s . — This class consists of compounds

consisting of two substantives, far less commonly adjectives, the syntactical
relation of which in the sentence is the same and which may be regarded
as connected in sense by 'and'. The successive stages in the development
of this class can be closely traced from the beginning in the Samhitäs.
1. First we have in the R V . the most numerous group (about three-fourths

1 A vocative repeated to express em- 3 According to GELDNER, V S . 2, 15 the

phasis is not treated in the same w a y : form efaifya (RV 1 .) is the inst. sing, of
in áranyany áranyatti (x. 1461) both voca- esaift- f. of *tfaifá-\ but according to BR.
tives are accented, the second being as and GRASSMANN it is neut. pi. of efaifyá-
emphatic as the first. ( = tsa-tfya-) 'to be striven for with desire',
2 T h e only repetition of a verbal form in . 'desirable',

this way is piba-piba (11. I I " ) 'drink again

and again'; cp. above 88.
156 I. ALLGEMEINES UND S P R A C H E . 4. VEDIC GRAMMAR.

of all the Dvandvas) in which the compound consists of two co-ordinated

nouns in the dual, each with its own accent 2. The first member assumes an
unchangeable form. 3. Only one accent remains and is restricted to the last
syllable of the final member. 4. The first member assumes (but quite rarely
in the R V . ) the form of the stem. 5. The formation, becoming more general,
can assume plural endings (but the R V . has only a few examples in the last
book). 6. In the later Samhitas this type becomes quite general, forming a
single category with the dual Dvandvas. 7. The final stage (of which the
examples are few) is that of Dvandvas which are neuter singulars of a
collective character.
260. In the commonest and earliest type of the old Dvandvas e a c h
m e m b e r i s d u a l in form and has a separate accent This type seems to have
originated from two grammatical practices frequent in the Vedas: (a) the juxta-
position of two coordinate words without ca; e. g. bhimano divas pari
(ix. 73 s ) 'away from earth and heaven', krdtum ddksam (vni. 42J) 'under-
standing and will'; (b) the use of the elliptic dual 1 which puts one of a
pair in the dual to express both, as dydva 'heaven and earth'. This origin
is probable because the dual Dvandvas are found alternating with one or both
of these usages; thus mitrd-varuna 'Mitra and Varuna' appears beside both
mitrd alone and mitrS varuna/i (or mitro varunas ca and mitras ca varunas
ca); matdra-pitara 'mother and father' beside mstard or pitdra and pitri
mitre and other cases, the VS. (ix. 19) having pleonastically even pitdra-
matdra ca meaning 'father and mother'. The transition from the syntactical
collocation divas .. prthivyds (vi. 30') to a dual compound is seen in divas-
prthivyos 'of heaven and earth' (occurring four times in the RV.) where the
second word is put in the dual to show clearly that an associated couple
is meant. In the R V . the two duals of the compound are often separated;
e. g. dydva ha ksdma (x. 12 1 ) 'heaven and earth'; dydva yajndih prthivi
(vn. 53 1 ); indra no dtra varuna (iv. 4 i ' ) 2 ; d nakta barhih sadatSm usdsa
(vn. 425) 'let Night and Dawn seat themselves upon the litter'; indra nu
pas ana (vi. 57") 'Indra and Pu$an'; indra nv agni (vi. 593) 'Indra and Agni',
indra yo agni (vi. 6o") 3 ; cdksur mdhi mitrdyor am ¿ti priyam va run ayoh
(vi. 5 1 ' ) 'the great, dear eye of Mitra and Varuna comes'. In two or three
examples of tmesis the dual ending appears in the first member only, while
the singular remains in the second; thus mitrd... varunah (vm.25 2 ) and indra
yo varn varuna4 (vi.68 5 ) 'O Indra and Varuna'. Generally, however, the two
duals are in immediate juxtaposition, as indra-bf-haspati 'Indra and Brhaspati';
dydva-prthivi 'Heaven and Earth'; agni-soma 'Agni and Soma'; gen. mitrdyor-
vdrunayoh,5 'of Mitra and Vanuja'.
The characteristic final vowel of the first member is -a 6 , as usdsa-nakta
(or naktosdsa); hence it even ousts -1 as in dgna-visnU (AV.) 'O Agni and
Vi§nu'. Beside this -a there sometimes appears a in the vocative, both in
tmesis, as in mitra rajana varuna (v. 62-*) 'O kings Mitra and Varuna' (voc. of
rajana mitrd-varuna, m. 56'; x. 64$); and when the members are joined, as

1 C p . WACKERNAGEL, 4 The Pada text here reads varuna; cp.

K Z . 2 3 , 3 0 2 ff.,
indra tS vam varuna (IV. 41 1 ).
REUTER, K Z . 3 1 , 1 7 6 fr., DELBRÜCK, A l t -
indische Syntax 58 (p. 98), Vergleichende 5 Double duals in -bhyam do not appear
Syntax, Erster Theil 41 (p. 137 f.). to occur.
2 In each of the first 6 stanzas of IV. 41 6 The ending •ait or -av never occurs in

indra and varuna are separated by one or the first member.

two words of two or three syllables.
3 Also vifttü agan varuna rVi§nu and Va-
runa1 in a Mantra in T B . II. 8. 4S.
 V . COMPOUNDS. COPULATIVES. 157

6
in parjanya-vdta (vi.49 ), voc. o f p a r j a n y a - v d t a . (vi. 5 0 " ) , and always in tndra-
vaya1 'O Indra and Vayu'. The ending -t appears in the first member in
agni-somau 'Agni and Soma'; and -a in krdta-ddksau (VS.) 2 .
261. These coordinate duals having early come to be regarded as a unit,
the commonest ending of the first member, that of the nom. acc., came to
be retained unaltered in other cases and in derivatives3. Thus arose the
forms mitni-vdrunabhyam; mitri-varunayos beside mitrayor-varunayos, indrH-
varunayos; in the AV. dyiva-prthivibhyam and dyiva-prthivyos (instead of the
divds-prthivyds of the RV.).
262. In a minority of instances, but comparatively oftener in the later
Samhitas than in the RV., the first member loses its accent and only
the last syllable of the final member (irrespectively of its original accent) has
the acute 4 ; thus indra-pasnos (beside indra-pBsana)-, soma-pUsabhyam; bhava-
rudrau (AV.) 'Bhava and Rudra', bhava-sarvau (AV.) 'Bhava and Sarva'5;
vatn-parjanyi 'Vata and Paijanya' (J>arjanya-); sarya-candramasa 'sun and
moon* ( c a n d r a - m a s - ) .
a. In the later Samhitas there are a few examples in which the nom. sing, o f stems
in -lr has, doubtless owing to identity in form o f the final vowel with the V e d i c dual
e n d i n g -a, b e c o m e fixed in the first m e m b e r : pila-putrdu (AV.) ' f a t h e r a n d s o n ' ; nesfa-
fctfbhyam ( T S . I. 8. 1 8 ' ) 'to the Ne$tr and the P o t f 6. T h e y doubtless started from syn-
t a c t i c a l l y c o o r d i n a t e d nominatives (like divas-pfthivyis b e s i d e divas pfthivyas, VL 4727)7.

263. Dvandvas with a single accent having established themselves, the

stem form began to encroach in the first member. The only two
examples from R V . 1.—ix, are indra-vayi (the transition being facilitated by
the more frequent occurrence of the vocative indra-vHya) and satylnrti8 (vn.
49 3 ) 'truth and untruth'. Two additional neuters occurs in book x : sasananasane
'what eats ( sa-asana -) and does not eat' (an-as'ana-); and rk-sam&bhyam 'with
hymns and chant'. In the later Samhitas this becomes the prevailing type
regularly followed in new formations; prastotr-pratihartrbhyam (TS. 1.8. 18 1 )
'to the Prastotr and Pratihartr'; kratu-daksau (VS.); daksa-krata (TS.), sBdrarydu
(VS.) 'a Sudra and an Arya' 9 .
264. The stem form having established itself in the first member, the
compounding of Dvandvas became freer, and not only neuters but feminines
began to be admitted, as dxksa-tapas-os (VS.) 'consecration and austerity'.
Here, too, the final syllable of the compound has the acute; the svarita of
the original word is, however, retained in brahma-rajanyau (VS. xxvi. 2; AV.
xi. 32 s ) 'a Brahman and a warrior'.
265. Dvandvas with plural ending are on the whole later than those
with dual ending. They would first have been used to express the plural
sense of the pair in question, thus sal ahur dytiva-prthivih (via. 9 1 6 )
'they speak of six heaven-and-earths'; aho-ratrdni = 'pairs of day-and-night'.
1 This Dvandva always has a even in the are examples which may contain the stem
nom. indra-vayii. form in the first m e m b e r (263).
2 T h e dual notion is sometimes empha- 5 WACKERNAGEL 2«, p. 1 5 3 , also quotes
sized by the addition of ubhatt 'both', as soma-rudrayos (TS.), ufniha-kakubhau (MS.).
ubhh mitra-varuna\ surya-candramas&v ubha 6 O n tvasf i-variitrt s e e WACKERNAGEL 2 1 ,
(AV.). 64 (p. 154).
3 L i k e jeder-manns f o r jedes-manns in 7 T h e three divisions of Dvandvas treated
German. BARTHOLOMAE,IF.20, i 6 8 ( A n z e i g e r ) above include masculines and feminines only.
regards these Dvandvas as abbreviations by Neuters of similar type first appear in the
dropping the common ending in the first Sfltras, as idhma-barhisi 'fuel and litter'.
member. 8 T h i s is the earliest example of a neuter

4 T h i s accentuation is probably due to Dvandva.

the influence of collective compounds which 9 WACKERNAGEL 2 1 , p. 1 5 5 , g i v e s s o m e
a r e nearly allied to D v a n d v a s . Indragni, further examples from B. portions of the
indragmbhyam, indragnyis and agnmdrabhyam later Samhitas.
158 I. ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4 . VEDIC GRAMMAR.

A transition to the use of plural Dvandvas, that is, of pairs of groups, is

made by indrd-marutas ' 0 Indra and Maruts', where the dual notion is made
up of a singular on the one hand and a group on the other. The older
type of such plural Dvandvas (which express two coordinated plurals, the
first member retaining its accent and the archaic ending -a, like the -a of
dual Dvandvas) is represented by atiga-pdrumsi 'limbs and joints' occurring in
a B. passage of the TS. (11. 5. 6'J. Examples of the later type with one
accent are uktha-sastrftni (VS. xix. 28) 'recitations and praises', uktha-maddni
(AV.) 'recitations and rejoicings', and probably uktharka (vi. 34 1 ) 'reci-
tations and hymns' 1 . The latest type of these plural Dvandvas (like that of
the duals) has the stem form in the first as well as the acute on the last
syllable of the final member. The only examples of this type in the RV.
occur in book x : aho-ratriini2 'days and nights', ajavayas 'goats and
sheep', dhana-bhakshu 'in riches and enjoyments'. In the later Samhitas this
type becomes quite general, forming a single category with the duals; e. g.
deva-manusy&s (AV. vm. 1 o'>), bhadra-papas (AV.) 'the good and the bad',
priyapriyiini (AV.) 'pleasant and unpleasant things'3.
a. T h e expression amrta martyanam (I, 269) appears to b e an abridgment for
amftanim martyanam ' o f immortals (and) mortals', amounting almost to a plural Dvandva
(= amrta-martyanam)4.
266. A few Dvandvas appear in the Samhitas with a singular ending,
these being neuter only. The older type in which a dual or plural has been
turned into a singular at the end, only in order to express a collective
meaning, is represented in the RV. by ista-purtam5 'what has been offered
or given', originally a pi. n. in both members (*istft-pUrtA) which has become
a singular to emphasize its collective character 6 . Both owing to the lack of
an early type of neuter Dvandvas and because of the desire to express a
collective sense, nearly all the neuter Dvandvas of the later kind are singular.
In most instances both members are neuter; e. g. krtakrta-m (AV.) 'what has
been done and not done', cittzkatd-m (AV.) 'thought and intention' (tikata-),
bhuta-bhavya-m (AV.) 'the past and the future', samista-yajus (VS.) 'sacrifice and
sacrificial formula'; bhadra-papdsya (AV.) 'of good and evil', ahjanabhyaiijana-m
(AV.) 'unction and inunction' {abhyanjana-), kasipupabarhana-m (AV.) 'mat
and pillow'.
a. In a few instances the first member is a masculine or feminine: keia-
s'mas'ru (AV.) 'hair and beard', isv-ayudht (loc. sing.) 'arrows and weapons' (AV.).
267. Adjectives also occur as Dvandvas, but they are of rare occur-
rence. Three types may be distinguished.
1. Adjectives of colour expressing a mixture: e. g. riila-lohita- 'dark-blue
and red' = 'dark red'; tclmra-dhumrd- (AV.) 'red and black' = 'dark red';
arund-babhru- (VS.) 'ruddy and yellow', dhamrd-rohita- (VS.) 'grey and red' 7 .

1 Probably = ukth&-ark&, not uktha-arka, 4 Cp. WACKERNAGEL 2 1 , p. 157.

the gender of the first m e m b e r having pre-: S S e e WINDISCH in Festgruss an Bohtlingk,
vailed over that of the last. . p. i i j f T .
2 The gender of the first member here 6 WACKERNAGEL (2 1 , 68) quotes idhma.-
prevails over that of the second. barhis from the MS., 'fuel and litter', which
3 S o m e other examples from B. passages with its double accent as well as dual ending
of the Samhitfis in WACKERNAGEL 2 ' , p. 157. ! in the first m e m b e r represents a still earlier
T h e oldest example of a Dvandva consisting type.
of three members is pranapanoddnhu (TS. 7 E x c e p t in these colour adjectives in the
vii. 3. 31) 'in the outward, the downward V S . , the accentuation of the adjective
and the upward airs', where the plural results ! Dvandvas is the same as that of neuter sub-
from the addition of three individual things I stantive Dvandvas, that is, the last syllable
(not three groups). ! o f the final member has the acute.
 V . COMPOUNDS. DETERMINATIVES. 159

2. Adjectives expressing a contrast; e. g. utkUla-nikald (VS.) 'going uphill

and downhill'.
3. Adjectives used with dual or plural substantives to express that each is
an attribute of one unit of the kind; e. g. padbhyAtn daksina-savyAbhyam (AV.
XII. I j 8 ) 'with the right foot and the left'; or with the substantive to be
supplied, saptamastamAbhyam svaha (AV.) 'hail to the seventh and the eighth
(Angirasa)'; aghasamsa-duhsamsAbhyam (AV.) 'by those plotting evil and those
plotting ill'; sahnatiratrau (AV.) 'terminating with a day (sa-a/ina-) and ex-
ceeding a day' {ati-ratrd-).
268. As regards the order of the members in a Dvandva, the rule
seems to be that the more important or the shorter word comes first; thus
dyiva-ksAma, dyAva-bhamf, dyava-prthivi1 'heaven and earth'; sArya-mAsa and
sBryS-candramdsa 'sun and moon'; indra-varuna 'Indra andVaruija'; ulUkkala-
musaU (AV.) 'mortar and pestle'. Indra- regularly comes first in the RV.
and the later Samhitas in some dozen Dvandvas 2 ; e. g. indragni; otherwise
agnT- always precedes; soma- comes after indra- and agnl-, but beforepUsan-
and rudra-. The longer word comes first, perhaps, as the more important,
in parjanya-vita3 'Paijanya and Vata' and in turvdsa-yadU 'Turvasa and Yadu'.
This can hardly be the reason in sambadha-tandryas (AV.) 'oppressions and
weariness'. The shorter word comes first in mitra-varuna, though Varuna is
the more important of the two 4 ; in rk-samAbhyam. the shorter word is at the
same time the more important.

3. Determinative Compounds.
269. Classification.—The large class of determinative compounds in
which the first member determines or limits the sense of the last, is best
divided into two main groups. In the one, the final member is a verbal
noun which governs the first member in meaning, and often even in form,
as a verb governs its case. In the other, the final member is an ordinary
noun (either adjective or substantive), the relation of which to the first member
is a purely nominal one.

a. Verbal Noun as final member.

270. The final member is often a verbal noun either not occurring
as a simple word or at least not belonging to a type used as simple words:
either the bare roots or a verbal derivative formed with the suffixes
-a, -ana, -/', -in, -man, -van. These nouns limited to use as final members
are agent nouns; e. g. havir-ad- 'eating the oblation', sam-idh- 'flaming',
jyotis-kr-t- 'producing light', abhi-hrit-t- 'causing injury', go-ghn-a- 'cow-slaying',
a-kar-d- 'scattering'; amitra-dambh-ana- 'injuring enemies', tuvi-gr-l- 'devouring
much', uru-cdkr-i- 'doing large work'; bhadra-vad-in- 'uttering an auspicious
cry'; asu-hd-man- 'swiftly speeding', bhuri-dA-van-b 'giving much'.— Occasionally
agent-nouns limited to use as final members are formed with other suffixes:
prati-div-an- 'adversary at play', vi-bhv-an- 'far-reaching* and vi-bhv-dn- 'skil-
ful'; pra-py-asd- (AV.) 'swelling', sva-bhy-asd- (AV.) 'spontaneously frightened';

1 This form occurs 79 times in t h e R V . | 5 Appearing in its weakest form or, if

and pi'ihiv'-dyavä only once.
2 Otherwise only agnìndràbkyäm (VS.)
'Agni and Indra'. Cp. the list of dual divi-
nities in Vedic Mythology, Grundriss III, 1 A,
p. 126.
3 Once also vätä-farjanya.
4 C p . W A C K E R N A G E L 2«, p. 168 (middle).
ending in a short vowel, with determina-
tive -t.
6 -maul and -vani occasionally appear as
variations for -man and -van, as vi-ruk-
mani- 'shining'; fràna-dà-vant• (AV.) 'life-
giving' (cp. WHITNEY on A V . IV. 355); s e e
REUTER, K Z . 3 1 , 560 f.
i6o I. ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4. VEDIC GRAMMAR.

duh-sAs-u- 'malignant', vi-bhind-u- 'splitting', pra-yly-u- 'used for driving', go-

vind-u- 'seeking cows', pari-tatn-u- ( A V . ) 'encompassing', pums-cal-a- (VS.)
'prostitute'; piva-spka-kd-1 ( A V 1 . ) 'abounding in fat', ni-hA-kfi- 'whirlwind'; vt-
bhanj-anit- 'shattering 1 ; pra-cet-iina- 'affording a wide prospect"; div-l-tmant-
'going to heaven'; tuvi-karm-!{n)- 'stirring mightily'; vdsah-palpul-i- (VS.)
'washing clothes'.
a. The meaning of these agent-nouns restricted in use as final members is chiefly
active. But in those of them which consist of the bare root (with or without the determi-
native •/) it is often intransitive; e. g. namo-vfdh- 'growing by adoration'; it is not in-
frequently passive, as mano-yuj• 'yoked at will', su-yuj- 'well-yoked'; yama-hu- 'called by
entreaties', indra-pa-tama- 'most eagerly drunk by Indra', fivra-su-t- 'pressed from the
fermenting mass', hrdaya-vidh- "pierced to the heart' ' (AV.). The passive meaning also
appears in one derivative formed with -a: pari-mar-a- (TS.) 'died around' = 'around
whom people die'. Final members formed with -a, -ana, (iytu when compounded with
su- or dus- also have a passive (gerundive) meaning expressive of the ease or difficulty
with which the verbal action is performed; e. g. su-kar-a- 'easy to be done', su-man-iu-
•easily recognisable', su-ved-ana- 'easily acquired'; dur-apana- 'hard to attain'; dur-tii-
ydn-tu- 'hard to restrain', dur-dhar-i-tu- 'irresistible', Ju-dabha- 'hard to deceive'; also
an isolated derivative with -/, dur-gfbh-i- 'hard to catch', and one with -na, sii-sru-na-
'easily heard' (beside sit-irii-t- 'hearing easily').
271. A certain number of v e r b a l n o u n s restricted to employment as final
members which are formed f r o m t h e s i m p l e r o o t (with or without deter-
minative -t) or w i t h the suffixes -a, -ana, -tha are nouns of action; e.g.
srad-dhA- 'belief', aslr-dA- (VS. T S . ) 'fulfilment of wishes', upa-stu-t- 'invocation',
pari-pdd- 'snare', sam-ndm- ( A V . ) 'affection'; ksudha-mar-d- ( A V . ) 'death by
hunger', papa-vad-d- ( A V . ) 'evil cry"; deva-hid-ana- 'offence against the gods',
baddhaka-moc-ana- ( A V . ) 'release of a prisoner'; go-pi-tha- 'drink of milk',
putra-kr-tha- 'procreation of sons', sam-i-tha- 'conflict', kama-pr-a- is both a
noun of action, 'fulfilment of desires' ( A V . ) and an agent-noun, 'fulfilling
desires' ( R V . ) 3.
a . A class of secondary nouns of action is here formed b y adding the
s u f f i x e s -ya a n d -yd to agent nouns formed from the simple root (with or
without -t). T h e s e are abstracts (neuter and feminine respectively); e. g.
havir-ad-ya- 'enjoyment of the oblation',; pnrva-pay-ya- and purva-pJ-ya- 'preced-
ence in drinking' (parva-pi- 'drinking first'), nr-p&yya- 'protection of men',
bahu-pdy-ya- 'protection of many', 'large hali', deva-ydj-ya- n. and -yaj-yi- f.
'adoration of the gods' (deva-ydj- 'adoring the gods', VS.), nr-sih-ya- 'over-
coming of men' (nr-sAh- 'overcoming men'), raja-sO-ya- ( A V . ) 'royal con-
secration' (raja-sa- 'creating a king', V S . ) , madhyama-sihfy-ya- 'standing in the
middle' (madhyama-sthA- adj., V S . ) ; su-krt-yA- 'righteousness' (su-kr-t- 'righteous').
272. T h e c l o s e v e r b a l c o n n e x i o n of these final members w i t h t h e
r o o t s from which they are derived, shows itself formally. T h u s they retain
the palatal of the verb where the guttural would otherwise a p p e a r 4 . Again,
agent nouns of this kind are formed from almost every kind of present stem.
T h e following are examples of such nouns f r o m p r e s e n t s t e m s of: 1. the
first class: cakram-a-saja- 'stopping 5 the wheel'; 2. the sixth class: ut-tuda-
( A V . ) 'instigator' (tudd-ti), sam-gird- ( A V . ) 'swallowing' (sam gircimi). 3. stems
with -cha: go-vyaccha- (VS.) 'cow-tormentor' (from a lost present stem *vyaccha-)

1
Forplvas-sphâkà. ; the Mss. readpibasphàkâ-m 4 See WACKERNAGEL 2 1 , 76. Exceptions
(Pada plbah-phàkâm)-. see WHITNEY on AV.to this would be iiwi-kûrm'i-{n)- and diva-
I V . 73. karâ- (AV.) 'sun', if these words are derived
» But 'heart-piercing' (RV.). from car- 'fare'.
3 Isolated examples of nouns of action 5 From a sajimi 'I attach'.
formed with other suffixes are su-papt-ani-
•good flight', sam-sref-ina- (AV.) 'conflict^?).
 V. COMPOUNDS. DETERMINATIVES. 161

4. the fourth class or passive with -ya: akrsta-pacya-1 (AV. VS. TS.)
'ripening in unploughed ground', a-pasya- 'not seeing', ugram-pasya- (AV.)
'fierce-looking', mSm-pasya- (AV.) 'looking at me', adhi-pasya- (AV. Paipp.)
'superintendent', punar-manya- 'remembering' (manya-te 'thinks'), a-risanya-
'not failing' (risanya-ti), bala-vi-jnSya- 'recognized by his strength', a-vi-dasya-
'not ceasing' (vi dasyanti 'they cease'), a-vi-driyd- 'not bursting' (dr- 'split').
5. stems with -a/a: vScam-JAkhaya- 'stirring the voice', samudram-lnkhaya-
(only voc.) 'stirring the vat' (inkhdya-nti 'they shake'), visvam-ejaya- (only voc.)
'exciting all' (ejaya-ti 'sets in motion)', ati-psrayd- 'putting across*. 6. the
f i f t h (-nu) a n d ninth (-no) c l a s s e s : visvam-invd- 'all-urging' (ino-ti, inv-a-ti
'urges'), dhiyam-jinva- 'stirring devotion' and visva-jima (voc. du.) 'all-
quickening' (jinv-a-ti 'stirs'), a-daghna- 'reaching to the mouth' 3 (dagh-nu-yat
'may reach', K.), dura-dabhna- (AV.) 'eluding doors' = 'not to be kept by
bars and bolts' {dabhnuv-anti 'they deceive'), danu-pinva- 'swelling with drops'
(pinv-and- 'swelling'), sada-prna- 'always giving' {prnA-ti 'fills', 'bestows'),
a-mitia-s (beside a-minant-) 'undiminishing' (mini-ti 'diminishes'), pra-mrna-
'destroying' (pra-mrnant- 'crushing', pra mrna 'destroy'), a-sinva(beside
a-sinvant-) 'insatiable', a-sunv-a- 'not pressing Soma' (beside a-sunv-ant-).
7. the s i x t h a n d s e v e n t h c l a s s e s : agnim-indha- 'fire-kindling' {indh-dte 'they
kindle'), pra-krnta- (TS.iv. 5.3 1 ) and vi-krnta- (VS.) 'cutting to pieces' (krnta-ti
'cuts'), bhUmi-drmha- (AV.) 'firmly fixed on the ground' (df-mha-ta 'make firm'),
ni-limpd- (AV.) a kind of supernatural being (HI limpami 'I besmear', AV.).
8. the r o o t c l a s s : vratya-bruvd- (AV.) 'calling himself a Vratya' (bruv-anti
'they say'). 9. the r e d u p l i c a t i n g c l a s s : anu-jighra- (AV.) 'snuffing at'
(jighranti 'smelling'), sam-piba- (AV.) 'swallowing down' (sam pibami, AV.) 5.
a. I n a f e w i n s t a n c e s v e r b a l n o u n s w h i c h a r e final m e m b e r s o f c o m p o u n d s in t h e
R V . or t h e l a t e r S a m h i t a s s u b s e q u e n t l y a p p e a r as i n d e p e n d e n t w o r d s . T h u s jata-vidya-
' k n o w l e d g e o f t h i n g s ' , vidya- ( A V . T S . ) ' k n o w l e d g e ' 6 . O n t h e o t h e r h a n d , v e r b a l n o u n s
d e r i v e d f r o m r o o t s w i t h o u t s u f f i x , w h i c h in t h e R V . a p p e a r b o t h as i n d e p e n d e n t w o r d s
a n d as final m e m b e r s o f c o m p o u n d s , o f t e n s u r v i v e in t h e l a t e r S a m h i t a s in t h e i r c o m -
p o u n d f o r m o n l y ; s u c h a r e inr- ' r a c i n g ' , da- ' g i v e r ' , sit- m . ' b e g e t t e r ' , f. ' m o t h e r ' , stha-
'standing'. A s a rule v e r b a l n o u n s w h i c h o c c u r i n d e p e n d e n t l y h a v e t h e s a m e g e n e r a l
m e a n i n g as w h e n t h e y f o r m t h e final m e m b e r o f a c o m p o u n d . B u t t h o s e f o r m e d w i t h o u t
a n y suffix g e n e r a l l y , a n d t h o s e f o r m e d w i t h - a o c c a s i o n a l l y , h a v e t h e s e n s e o f a g e n t
n o u n s at t h e e n d of c o m p o u n d s , b u t o f a c t i o n n o u n s o r o f d e s i g n a t i o n s o f t h i n g s con-
c e i v e d as f e m i n i n e , w h e n t h e y are u s e d i n d e p e n d e n t l y . T h u s gfbh- f. ' a c t o f s e i z i n g ' ,
jiva-gfbh- a d j . ' s e i z i n g a l i v e ' ; vid-a ' w i t h k n o w l e d g e ' , hotra-vid- adj. ' k n o w i n g t h e obla-
t i o n ' , yudh- f. ' f i g h t ' , pra-yudh• a d j . ' a s s a i l i n g ' ; bhar-a- ( A V . ) ' a c t o f c a r r y i n g ' , pus/im-
bhara- ' b r i n g i n g p r o s p e r i t y ' . S o m e t i m e s t h e s i m p l e w o r d h a s t h e m e a n i n g of an a g e n t
n o u n as w e l l a s o f an a c t i o n n o u n ; e. g . dfs• a d j . ' s e e i n g ' a n d f. ' a c t o f s e e i n g ' ; bhuj-
a d j . ' e n j o y i n g ' a n d f. ' e n j o y m e n t ' ; stubh- a d j . ' s h o u t i n g * a n d f. ' s h o u t ' ; b u t at t h e e n d o f
a c o m p o u n d these three words express the agent only. S i m i l a r l y grabh-a- m . ' s e i z e r '
( A V . ) a n d ' g r a s p ' , b u t grava-grabh-d• ' h a n d l i n g t h e S o m a s t o n e s ' 7 .

273. I n d e p e n d e n t v e r b a l n o u n s . — Several kinds of verbal nouns which

are also capable of independent use occur as final member of compounds.
Among these the only ones of frequent occurrence are those in -ta which
are adjectives (often used as substantives) and the corresponding abstract

1 WACKERNAGEL 2», p. 1 7 9 (bottom), r e f u t e s a c c . f . ' l i f e - g i v i n g ' ( b e s i d e ayur-da-, A V . V S .

t h e v i e w t h a t this -ya i s i d e n t i c a l w i t h t h a t T S . ) : dad-ali ' t h e y g i v e ' .
of the gerundive. ! 6 For e x a m p l e s o f v e r b a l nouns w h i c h
2
-daghna- f o r m s t h e l a s t m e m b e r o f | a s s u m e an i n d e p e n d e n t c h a r a c t e r in t h e
s e v e r a l o t h e r c o m p o u n d s in t h e l a t e r S a m - l a t e r l a n g u a g e , s e e WACKERNAGEL 2 1 , 77 a.
hitas. S e e WACKERNAGEL 2 1 , p . 1 8 1 . I 7 O n the origin of these verbal compounds
3 C p . WACKERNAGEL 2', p . 1 8 1 , n o t e . | a n d t h e r e l a t i o n o f t h e final m e m b e r to t h e
4 F r o m a l o s t r o o t *si-no-ti ' s a t i s f i e s ' . i n d e p e n d e n t w o r d , s e e WACKERNAGEL 2 1 ,
5 T h e r e i s a l s o a transition f o r m ( l e a d i n g j 7 8 b a n d n o t e (p. 1 8 6 f.).
to the l a t e r -dada-) in ayur-ddd-am ( A V . ) j
Indo-arische Philologie. I. 4. 11
162 L ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4. VEDIC GRAMMAR.

substantives in -ti; e. g. puro-hita- adj. 'placed in front', m. 'domestic priest';

purd-hiti- f. 'domestic priesthood'.
1. Agent nouns. Those which are formed with -aka and -snu are
compounded with prepositions only: abhi-kros-aka- (VS.) 'one who cries out',
vi-lay-aka- (VS.) 'melter1; abhi-socayi-snu- (AV.) 'causing heat', ni-sat-sm'i- 'sitting
firmly'. Agent nouns in -tr may be compounded with adverbs, as pura-etr-
'going before', purah-sthatf'•- 'standing at the head', and rarely with substan-
tives, as nr-patr- 'protecting men', man-dhatf--1 'applying (his) mind', 'thoughtful
man'. Agent nouns formed with -u from secondary present stems are in a
few instances compounded with substantives: gir-vanasy-u- 'fond of hymns',
deva-piy-u- (AV. VS.) 'hating the gods', rastra-dips-u- (AV.) 'wishing to injure
the country'.
2. Action nouns. A few action nouns formed with -a from adjectives
in -u derived from secondary verbal stems, begin in late passages of the
R V . to appear in composition with a substantive: mamsa-bhiis-d- (1. 1 6 2 " )
'request for flesh', sraddha-manasy-A- 'faithful intent' (x. 113 9 ); sajata-vanasy-d-
(TS. 11. 6. 67) 'desire to rule over relatives'. Much more common are the
abstracts in -ti (corresponding to adjectives in -ta), which may be compounded
with indeclinables or nouns (adjective or substantive)2; e. g. an-uti- 'no help',
a-sasti- 'curse', nir-rti- 'dissolution', sa-huti- 'joint invocation', su-uti- 'good aid';
soma-pTti- 'drinking of Soma', soma-suti- 'pressing of Soma'. Some of these
are becoming or have become agent nouns; thus jarad-asti- 'attaining great
age' as well as 'attainment of old age'; vdsu-dhiti- 'bestowing wealth' as well
as 'bestowal of wealth'; but vasu-niti- (AV.) only 'bringing wealth'. Others,
even in the RV., approximate to the type of the non-verbal determinatives,
as asu-mti- 'world of spirits', rju-nlti- 'right guidance', deva-hiti- 'divine ordi-
nance', namo-vrkti- 'cleansing for adoration', pBrva-citti- 'foreboding': these can,
however, be understood as abstracts to corresponding compounds in -taK
3. Gerundives. The gerundives formed with -/a are ordinarily compounded
with adverbial prepositions, as puro-nuvakya- (sc. rc- AV.) '(verse) to be
repeated beforehand*. In the later Samhitas a noun here sometimes appears
as first member: nlvi-bharya- (AV.) 'to be worn in a skirt", prathama-vasya-
(AV.) 'worn formerly'. The Proper Names kunda-phyya-, puru-mayya, vrsti-
havya-, if they are formed with the gerundive suffix -ya, would be examples
from the RV.*. — Gerundives formed with -arilya and -enyas are compounded
with prepositions and a{n)- only: ii-mantraniya- (AV.) 'to be asked'; sam-
cardnya- 'suitable for walking on', a-dvisenya- 'not malevolent". — Gerundives in
-tva are not compounded at all except with a(n)-.
4. Participles. Besides prepositions and a(n)-, only indeclinable words
occurring in connexion with verbs are found compounded with participles
(exclusive of the past passive participle): thus alala-bhavant- 'murmuring'
(waters) and jahjana-bhavant- 'crackling' (flame), astam-yant- (AV.) 'setting'
and astam-esyant- (AV.) 'about to set', a-punar-diyamana- (AV.) 'not being
given back', Svis-krnvana- 'making visible', dur-vidvdms- 'ill-disposed, su-
vidvams- 'knowing well'.
' From matias• through *manz-dhatf-. (AV.) 'uttering a single sound', a kind of
2
T h e verbal force is strongest when the spectre, and vâr-kàrya- (l. 88 4 ) are obscure
preceding substantive has the sense of an in their formation.
object. 5 A few gerundives in -tavya begin to b e
3 As deva-hiti- 'act of ordaining by thecompounded with prepositions or particles
gods' beside deva-hiia- 'ordained by the in the B. portion of the TS. and MS.: pra-
gods'. vastavyàm (TS.) ' o n e should go on a jour-
4 The compounds ama-vasya- (AV.) sc.ney'; a-bhartavya• (MS.) 'not to be borne',
ratri- 'night of the new moon', eka-vadya-
m-ètavyam (TS.) 'easy to go'.
 V . COMPOUNDS. DETERMINATIVES. 163

a. By far the commonest verbal nouns occurring as final member are

the p a s t participles i n -ta, which are c o m p o u n d e d with nouns as well as
prepositions and other indeclinables. T h e meaning is mostly passive. It is,
however, sometimes active, but in the R V . almost exclusively when a pre-
position precedes, as ud-ita- 'risen'; when a noun precedes, only in sarga-
takta- 'speeding with a rush' and sargtt-pratakta- 'darting forth with a rush'.
In the A V . a noun appears also in uda-pluta- 'swimming in the water'; occa-
sionally even transitively governing the first m e m b e r in sense: krta-dvista-
( A V . ) 'hating what has been done' (by another) 1 .
b. T h e past participle in -na is less frequent and occurs in the RV.
only compounded with prepositions, a{n)- and su-; e. g. pari-cchinna- 'lopped
a r o u n d ' ; a-bhinna- 'not split'; su-pUrna- 'quite full'. But it is found a few
times in the later Samhitas with a preceding substantive: agni-nunna- (SV.)
'driven away b y fire', resma-cchinna- ( A V . ) 'rent b y a storm'; and with active
(transitive) sense gara-gtrna- ( A V . ) 'having swallowed poison'.
5. T h e r e are besides some verbal a d j e c t i v e s in -ra or (after a vowel)
-tra, -la and -ma, the first of which occurs c o m p o u n d e d with nouns as well
as prepositions: H-sk-ra- "united'ni-mrg-ra- 'attached to', tana-subh-ra- 'shining
in b o d y ' , hdri-scand-ra- 'shining yellow'; vi-bhr-tra- 'to be b o m e about in
various directions'; A-mis-la-, ni-mis-la-, sam-mis-la- 'commingling'; dva-ksa-tna-
( A V . ) 'emaciated', uc-chus-ma- (TS. 1. 6. 2') 'hissing upwards', ni-sus-ma- (TS.
1. 6. 2') 'hissing downwards'.
6. Comparatives and superlatives in -Ty&ms and -istha having
originally been verbal adjectives are found in composition with prepositions
and sdm- when they still retain their verbal meaning: ud-yamiyams- 'raising
excessively', pari-svajiyams- ( A V . ) 'clasping more firmly', prati-cyaviyams-
'pressing closer against', vi-kledlyams- ( A V . ) 'moistening m o r e ' ; a-gamistha-
'coming quickly', sam-bhavistha- 'most beneficial'.

First member in verbal determinatives.

274. a. Prepositions. A t the beginning of determinatives prepositions

are employed in accordance with their use in verbal forms; e. g. pra-ni- and
pra-nUi- 'furtherance', pra-netf- 'leader', pra-nlta- 'furthered 1 , pra-neni- 'guiding
constantly'. Even in the many instances in which the corresponding verbal com-
bination has not been preserved, it may be assumed to have existed; e. g.
in abhi-pra-mur- 'crushing' and abhi-pra-bhangin- 'breaking'. Occasionally, how-
ever, the preposition has a meaning which otherwise occurs only before non-
verbal nouns; e. g. ati-ysja- 'sacrificing excessively^. A preposition belonging
to the second member is once prefixed to the first in sam-dhanft-ji-t ( A V . )
'accumulating ( = sam-ji-t-) 'wealth'.
b. Adverbs. Various kinds of adverbs occur in this position, as fruro-
yiivan- 'going before', aksnaya-druh- 'injuring wrongly'; amutra-bhaya- ( A V . VS.)
'state of being there' (i. e. in the other world). T h e privative a(n)- though
belonging in sense to the final member always precedes the first; e. g. an-
agni-dagdha- 'not burnt by fire'; d-pascad-daghvan- 'not remaining behind';
d-dara-sr-t (AV.) 'not falling into a crack'.
c. Nouns. T h e first member, when a noun, expresses various relations
to the l a s t

1 Cp. WACKERNAGEL 2 1 , p. 19j; but also
WHITNEY on AV. VII. 113'.
2
From sac- 'be associated'.
3 In TS. 11. 5. 44 (B.) ali-yaj- means 'to
pass over in sacrificing'.
11*
164

It expresses: 1. the object, which is the prevailing meaning when the final
member is an agent noun or an action noun; e. g. ab-ji-t- 'winning waters', asva-
hayd- 'urging on steeds', nr-patr- 'protecting men', vdja-sati- 'act of winning
booty', vrtra-haiya- n. 'act of slaying V r t r a ' W h e n the final member is a verbal
noun formed from kr- 'make', the first member does not necessarily express
the product, but may mean the material with which the activity is concerned;
thus hiranya-kara- (VS.) is not 'gold-maker' but 'worker in gold', 'goldsmith'.
2. the agent when the last member has a passive sense; e. g. indra-pa-
tama- 'most drunk by Indra', sSma-sita- 'excited by Soma'; occasionally also
when the final member is an action noun, as dei'd-Aiti- 'ordinance of the
gods', parna-sadi- ( A V . VS.) 'fall of leaves', mitra-tiirya- (AV.) 'victory of
friends'.
3. the instrument, the source, or the locality when the final member
is an agent noun or a past passive participle; e. g. adri-dugdha-2 'milked
with stones', aritra-parana- 'crossing with oars'; go-jata- 'produced from kine',
tivra-su-t- 'pressed from the fermenting mass'; uda-pluta- (AV.) 'swimming in
the water', ahar-jata- (AV.) 'born in the day', puru-bh ¿- 'being in many
places', bandhu-ksi-t- 'dwelling among relatives', pfsni-tii-presita-J 'sent down
to earth'.
4. in an appositionally nominative sense, that as or like which the
action of the final member is performed; e. g. Tsana-kf-t- 'acting as a ruler',
parva-pA- 'drinking first', vamd-jata- 'born as one dear' = 'dear by nature';
dhara-vakd- 'sounding like streams', sycnd-juta- 'speeding like an eagle'.
5. in the sense of a predicative nominative before a past participle,
or a predicative accusative before an agent noun expressive of 'saying'; e. g.
bhaksam-krta- (TS.) 'enjoyed', stoma-tasta- 'fashioned as a hymn of praise';
vratya-bruva- (AV.) 'calling oneself a Vratya'.
6. adverbially the manner in which an action is done, sometimes by
means of a substantive, more often by means of an adjective; e. g. rtv-ij-
'sacrificing at the proper time', that is, 'regularly', sarga-takta- 'speeding with
a rush'; asu-patvan- 'flying swiftly', dhruva-ksi-t- (VS.) 'dwelling securely', satya-
yaj- 'sacrificing truly'; with a numeral in dvi-ja- (AV.) 'twice-born'.
275. Before a verbal noun a nominal first member very often appears
with a case-ending 4 , generally with that which the corresponding verb
would govern in a sentence. The accusative is here the commonest case,
the locative coming next, while the other cases are rarer. A singular case-
ending (the acc. or inst.) may here indicate a plural sense; e. g. dsvam-isti-
'seeking horses', puram-dara- 'destroyer of forts', sunesita- 'driven by dogs'
(s'lina-). Plural (acc.) endings sometimes occur, but dual endings are never
found in these compounds.
The accusative case-ending is very common, generally expressing the
object of a transitive verb, as dhanam-jaya- 'winning booty'. But it also ex-
presses other senses, as that of the cognate accusative; e. g. subham-yii-{vari)-
'moving in brilliance'; or of an adverbial accusative, e. g. ugram-pasya- 5

1 WACKERNAGEL 2«, p. 198, quotes bka- the body it expresses the sense of 'with
jit-am svargam (AV. JV. 34S) as showing thatreference to', as bahu-juta- 'quick with the
the first member was felt to have an accu- \arms'.
sative sense = 'winning the heavenly world' j 3 The local sense here is that of the
{tvargam lokam); but the Paipp. Ms. has the accusative of the goal.
reading svvgyam, which WHITNEY regards 4 Cp. LINDNER, N o m i n a l b i l d u n g p . 28.
as better, translating 'world-conquering, 5 Occasionally the -m is inorganic, as in
heaven-going'. makptm-gama- and ahtm-ga• (AV.) 'going
» When the first member is a part of swiftly'. In patam-ga- 'bird', patam- probably
 V . COMPOUNDS. DETERMINATIVES.

(AV.) 'looking fiercely'; or of a predicative accusative, e. g. ayaksmam-karana-

(AV.) 'producing health', srtam-kartf- (TS. in. i. 44) 'making cooked' 1 . The
acc. pi. occurs in ka-cit-kara- 'doing all manner of things', pasva-isli-2 'desiring
kine', vipas-dt- 'understanding eloquence', vipo-dha- 'granting eloquence', huras-
cii-J 'intending evil' 4 .
a. The accusative form is commonest before agent nouns ending in -a
or -/' which begin with a single consonant and the first syllable "of which is
short; that is, the -m here appears in a syllable in which rhythmic lengthening
would be allowed'. This accusative form is the regular rule in the RV.
when the stem of the first member ends in -a, being found before -kara-
'making', -caya- 'collecting', -jaya- 'conquering', -tara- 'overcoming', -dara-
'cleaving', -bhara- 'bearing', -ruja- 'breaking', -sani- 'winning', -saha- 'over-
whelming'; e. g. abhayam-kara- 'procuring security'. The only exceptions to
this rule in the RV. are asva-hayd- 'urging on steeds', sukra-dugha- 'emitting
clear fluid'. In the RV. the ending -¡m also occurs in pustim-bhard- 'bringing
prosperity' and harim-bhard-b 'bearing the yellow-coloured (bolt)'; and -urn
inorganically in maksum-gamd- 'going quickly'. In the later Samhitas also occur
iram-mada- (VS.) 'rejoicing in the draught', duram-gama- (VS.) 'going far',
devam-gama- (TS.) 'going to the gods', yudhim-gama- (AV.) 'going to battle',
visvam-bhara- (AV.) 'all-sustaining', sakam-bhard-J (AV.) 'bearing ordure'8.
b. The accusative form in -am is not uncommon before a final member
with initial vowel (coalescence of the two vowels being thus avoided); e. g.
cakram-asaja- 'obstructing the wheel', visvam-invd- 'all-moving', dsvam-isti-
'desiring horses', vacam-Titkhaya- 'word-moving', samudram-ifikhaya- (only voc.)
'stirring the vat', visvam-ejayd- 'all-exciting'; in -im\ agnim-indhd- 'fire-kindler';
in -am\ tvdm-ahuti- (TS.) 'offering oblations to thee'.
c. The accusative form is common when the final member is formed
from a present stem, owing to the close connexion of such verbal nouns
with the verb; e. g. dhiyam-jinvd- 'exciting meditation', ugram-pasyd- (AV.)
'looking fiercely', mam-pasyd- (AV.) 'looking at me'.
d. Apart from the conditions stated above (a, b, c) the accusative case-
ending rarely occurs in the first member of verbal determinatives; e. g.
vanam-kdrana-, a particular part of the body; dhiyam-dhA- 'devout', subham-
yd-(van)- 'moving in brilliance'9.
« . I n t h e great majority of instances t h e first m e m b e r , if it has t h e accusative
case-form, ends in -am, mostly from stems in -a, but also f r o m monosyllabic consonant
stems [pur-ant- e t c . ) a n d f r o m one stem in -i (d/iiy-am-). Otherwise t h e r e are three or

represents IE. pelttwhile in puram-dhi-j nation of fnam-caya- and fna-cit- 'paying a

'fertile w o m a n ' a n d vfsan-dhi- 'bold', t h e j debt', khajam-kard- and khaja-kf-t- 'causing
origin of t h e nasal is d o u b t f u l ; cp. WACKER- I the din of battle', dhanam-jaya- and dhana-
NAGEL 2', p. 202. \ji-t- 'winning booiy',janam-saha- 'overcoming
1 In B. this predicative accusative some- beings' and vrala-sahd- 'conquering crowds'.
times c o m e s to have the value of a predi- 6 Beside iavi-vfdha- 'prospering the wise'.
cative nominative when compounded with a 7 H e r e the acc. of an o-stem is substituted
gerundive or a derivative of bhù-, as sftam- for sakan-.
kftya- (TS.) 'to be made cooked', nagttam- 8 The compound ttaram dhisa- (VS.) is of
bhavuka- (TS.) 'becoming naked'. doubtful meaning and irregular accent.
2 pasvas acc. pi. 9 For several other examples occurring in
3 H e r e Auras- might be a genitive as \cil- BrShmaga passages of the later Samhitas
g o v e m s that case as well as the acc. s e e WACKERNAGEL 2 ' , p . 207 d , e.
4 puro-ha 'destroying forts' may contain 10 Jn hfd-am-sani- 'winning the heart' the
an acc. ; also isa-stul- 'praise of prosperity', neuter hfd- is t r e a t e d as if it w e r e a masc.
which the P a d a analyses as isah-sini•• I or fem.
5 H o w m u c h t h e use of t h e s e forms is
dependent on rhythm is seen in the alter-
i66 I. ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE 4. VEDIC GRAMMAR.

four in -im (agnim- etc.), one in -urn (maksum•), and two pronominal accusatives in
-am ( m S m t u a m - ) . Polysyllabic consonant stems never have the accusative case-ending
in the first member
276. T h e locative case-ending is in the R V . almost limited to em-
ployment before agent-nouns formed from the simple root with or without
determinative -/: agre-ga- 'going before', agre-gn- (VS.) 'moving forwards',
agre-ni- (VS.) 'leader', agre-pA- 'drinking first', agre-pa- (VS.) 'drinking first',
aiige-sthii-2 (AV.) 'situated in a member of the body', rte-jA-3 'produced at
the sacrifice', krcchre-sri-t- 'running into danger", gahvare-stha- (VS.) 'being at
the bottom', divi-ksi-t- 'dwelling in heaven', divi-yaj- 'worshipping in heaven',
divi-sri-t- ( A V . ) 'sojourning in heaven', divi-sad- ( A V . ) 'sitting in heaven',
dure-drs- 'visible afar', dosani-srts- ( A V . ) 'leaning on the arm', rathe-subh-
'flying along in a car', rathe-sthA- 'standing in a car', vane-raj- 'shining in a
wood', vane-sah- 'prevailing in woods', sute-grbh- 'taking hold of the Soma',
hrdi-spf-s- 'touching the heart' 4 .
2. T h e R V . has only two examples of a locative before an agent noun
formed with the suffix -a: divi-ksayd- 'dwelling in heaven', vahye-sayd- 'resting
in a litter' 5 . There are several others in the later Samhitas: agre-vadhd- (VS.)
'killing what is in front', talpe-sayd- ( A V . ) 'resting on a couch', divi-cara- (AV.)
'faring in heaven', divi-stambha- ( A V . ) 'supported on the sky', dure-vadhd-
(VS.) 'far-striking', hara-sayd-b (MS. 1. 2?) 'resting in gold'. In the A V . also
occurs an example of the locative before an agent noun f o r m e d with -in:
parame-sth-in- 'standing in the highest (place)'.
3. T h e locative plural is much rarer than the singular in the first member:
apsu-ksi-t- 'dwelling in the waters', apsu-jA- 'born in the waters', apsu-jl-t- 'van-
quishing in the waters', apsu-sad- 'dwelling in the waters', apsu-vAh- (SV.)
'driving in water', apsu-samsita- ( A V . ) 'excited in the waters', gosu-yudh-
'fighting in ( = for) kine', prtsu-tur- 'conquering in battles', bharesu-jA- 'pro-
duced in fights', hrtsv-as- 'piercing to the heart'.
a. In these locative compounds the second member is most commonly -stha- or
-stha- in the RV., while the first member is most usually agre-, dure- or vane-. The
locative in -e is the predominant one, even displacing -< in pathe-sfha- 'standing on the
road' beside pathi-s/ha- (AV.).
2 7 7 . T h e instrumental case-ending occurs several times in the first
member of verbal determinatives: ksama-cara- (VS.) 'being in the ground',
gira-vfdh- 'rejoicing in song', dhiya-jur- 'aging in devotion', yuvA-datta- 'given
b y you two', yuvi-mta- 'led by you two', yusmA-datta- 'given b y you', yusma-
nita- 'led by you', sunesita- 'driven by dogs' (Jinn). When the stem of the
first member ends in -a there is some doubt whether -a here represents the
instrumental ending or lengthening of the v o w e l 7 ; thus saphi-ruj- may mean
'breaking with the h o o f or 'hoof-breaker'; and in yuva-yuj- ' y o k e d by y o u
two' the vowel may be simply lengthened. In diva-kara- ( A V . ) 'sun' the first
member is an old instrumental used adverbially 8 .
a. The examples of the ablative case-ending are rare: daksinit-sad-
1 1
iakan• substitutes the acc. of an a-stem ; S In sutè-kara- 'active in (offering) Soma',
above p. 165, note 7, the accent shows that the final member has
2
There are several other locatives com- an adjectival, not a verbal sense. In the
pounded with -stha-. name mäiari-svan- the first member is inter-
3 There are several other locatives com- preted in RV. 111. 2911 as a locative; cp.
pounded with RICHTER, I F . 9, 247, n o t e ; MACDONELL,
4 In nare-f/hi- ( R V 1 . ) , an "epithet of the Grundriss ni. 1 A, p. 72 (middle).
6
car, the first member may be a locative In VS. v. 8 hari-iayd-\ harä- here is the
(Sayaija), but it may also be a dative of « / - locative of hari-.
(BR., GRASSMANN), 'serving for a man to '1 Cp. WACKERNAGEL 2 1 , 56.
stand on'. 8 See WACKERNAGEL 2', 213 a, note.
 V . COMPOUNDS. DETERMINATIVES. 167

(MS. 11. 6 3 ) 'sitting in the south'; divo-já- 'produced from heaven', divo-dih-
(SV.) 'milking from the sky', divo-rúe- 'shining from the sky'.
b. The ending of the genitive would naturally appear only before deri-
vatives from verbs governing the genitive. There seem to be no certain
examples: divd-ksas- 'ruling over the sky* {divas) however seems probable 1 .

b. 1. Ordinary Adjective as final member.

278. Ordinary adjectives which are not of a verbal character may appear
as final member of determinatives much in the same way as past participles
in -ta and -na (273, 4). But adjectives ending in -u are almost exclusively
compounded with the privative a(n)- and prepositions; e.g. an-as'ú- 'not swift*,
dn-rju- 'dishonest', d-dasu- 'impious', d-bhlru- 'not terrible'; praiú- 'very (prd)
swift* (3//Í-). The only final members otherwise compounded are -vasu- 'rich'
in vibhá-vasu- 'radiant' and other compounds, and -raghu- 'swift', in made-
raghu- 'quick in exhilaration'.
a. The first member may be a substantive in the relation of a case
to the last; e. g. taná-subhra- 'shining in body', yajñd-dhtra- 'versed in
sacrifice', vakmarája-satya- 'faithful to the ordainers of hymns', visvd-sambAo-
'salutary for all'. The relation is sometimes expressed by the case-ending: the
locative in gdvi-sthira- (AV.) 'strong in kine (gdvi)' as a name, mddt-raghu-
'quick in exhilaration', suté-kara- 'active in (offering) Soma', sumnd-api- 'united
in affection (svmné)'; instrumental* in dhiyi-vasu- 'rich in devotion',
vidmanápas- 'working (apds-) with wisdom (vidmdn&y. The first member may
also appositionally express a comparison as representing a type: suka-babhru-
(VS.) 'reddish like a parrot'-J.
b. The first member may be an adjective qualifying the final member
in an adverbial sense; thus aprami-satya (voc.) 'eternally true', ürdhvd-prstti
(VS.) 'spotted above', try-arusa- 'reddish in three (parts of the body)', mahS-
nagni-s (AV.) 'courtezan' ('very naked'), mahs-mahi-vrata-1 ruling very mightily',
mahá-vatürin- 'very broad', visvd-scandra- 'all-glittering'6.
c. Adverbs and particles often appear as first member; e. g. an-Ssú-
'not swift', anydta-enT- (VS.) 'variegated on one side (anydtas)', evara- 'quite (evd)
ready (</>«-)', duh-siva- 'unfavourable', pi'inar-nava- 'renewing itself', sató-mahünt-
'equally (sa-tds) great', satj-brhatx- (VS.) 'the equally great' (a metre), satydm-
ugra- 'truly mighty', sú-priya- (AV.) 'very dear'.
d. Several prepositions appear as first member, mostly with their original
adverbial meaning; e. g. dti-krsna-1 (VS.) 'very dark'; á-miila-tama- 'mixing
very readily' 8 ; upottamá- (AV.) 'penultimate'; ni-dhruvi- ('fixed down') 'per-
severing', nis-kevalya- (VS.) 'belonging exclusively'; prasu- 'very swift', pra-

1
But it has also been otherwise explained;
cp. WACKERNAGEL 2', p. 213 c, n o t e ; who
also quotes a-kasya-vid- 'knowing nothing'
from the MS.
1
T h e word jatu-sfhira- probably contains
an old instrumental = 'naturally solid'; in
nabha-nediitha- 'nearest in kin' as a name,
the first m e m b e r though looking like a loca-
tive, probably represents an Ilr. stem ttabha-;
cp. RICHTER, IF. 9, 209. T h e compounds
fci-sama-, an epithet of Indra, and ghasi-
ajra- (VS.) are Bahuvrthis.
3 A transition to this compound use appears
in matto javif/ham (RV. vi. 9s) 'very swift as i
thought'.
4 H e r e the adjectival stem is used for the
adv. irdhvam.
j S From this is formed the m. maha-nagna-
; (AV.) 'paramour'.
6 T h e m e a n i n g of sadhv-arya- 'truly faith-
ful'(?), which occurs only once, is doubtful;
cp. WACKERNAGEL 2 1 , p. 237 (top),
7 ati in t h e sense of 'very' does not occur
J in the RV., but in the later Samhitis it is
the commonest of the prepositions com-
\ pounded with adjectives.
| 8 'Very slightly mixed', GELDNER, VS. 3,
1 8 1 . —a-tura- 'suffering' is obscure in origin,
168 I. ALLGEMEINES U N D S P R A C H E . 4 . V E D I C GRAMMAR.

sardha- (voc.) 'bold'; vi-mahi- 'very great', vi-sama- (VS.) 'uneven', vi-sadrsa-
'dissimilar', vy-eni- 'variously tinted' (dawn); sdm-vasu- 'dwelling together',
sdm-priya- (VS.) 'mutually dear'.

b. 2. Ordinary Substantive as final member.

279. Determinatives with ordinary non-verbal substantives as their final
member * are not common in the earliest period of the language. In the first
nine books of the RV., except the frequent compounds in -pati- and -patnl
there are not many more than three dozen examples 2 ; the tenth book has
quite two dozen more, and the AV. seven dozen more.
The first member is frequently a substantive also. Its relation to
the final member seems to be limited to the genitive sense in the Samhitas.
This genitive sense appears when the final member is a word expressive of
relationship, or -pati- 'husband' or 'lord'; e. g. raja-putrd- 'king's son', mrtyu-
bdndhu- 'companion of death', vis-pati- 'lord of the tribe'. It sometimes ex-
presses the material, as dru-pada- 'post of wood', hiranya-ratha- 'car of gold'
or 'car full of gold'. In dtva-kilbisa- 'offence against the gods' we have an
example of an objective genitive. There seems to be no instance in the RV.
of a Proper Name appearing as the first member of a determinative in the
genitive sense 3 except in indra-send- (x. 1023') 'Indra's missile' 4 , which compound
is itself perhaps a Proper Name 5 . In camasddhvaryu- (AV.) 'the priest of
the cups', the first member expresses quite a general genitive sense of
relation = 'the priest who is concerned with the cups'.
280. As in determinatives with verbal noun as final member, the case-
ending may appear in the first member. But it is less common here, and
owing to the purely nominal character of the final member, is almost restricted
to the genitive. The ending of this case is very common before -pati-
*lord' or 'husband': ainhas-as-pati- (VS.) 'lord ot distress', N. of an intercalary
month, gnd-s-pdti-6 Tiusband of a divine woman', ji-s-pati- 'lord of the family',
bj-h-as-pati-1 and brahman-as-pati-'lord of devotion', manas-as-pati- l o r d of mental
power1, van-as-paii-8 'lord of the wood', 'tree', vac-as-pati- 'lord of speech',
vistos-pati- 'lord of the dwelling', subh-as-pati- 'lord of splendour', sddas-as-
pdti-9 'lord of the sacrificial seat'. According to the analogy of these com-
pounds which end in -s-pati-, were also formed from a-stems rta-s-pati- (only
voc.) 'lord of pious works' and ratha-s-pati- 'lord of the car'. The word
dam-pati- may stand for *dam-s-pati-'° 'lord of the house' (dam-, the gen. pi.
of which, dam-Am, occurs).

1
Bahuvrlhis with ordinary substantives f r o m this word after the e t y m o l o g y had
a s final m e m b e r w e r e c o m m o n f r o m t h e b e e n f o r g o t t e n , a s c o n v e r s e l y t h e m . sapdtna-
b e g i n n i n g ; h e n c e c o m b i n a t i o n s w h i c h a p p e a r ' r i v a l ' w a s f o r m e d f r o m sa-patm- ' c o - w i f e ' ,
a s B a h u v r l h i s in t h e o l d e r p e r i o d , a r e o f t e n 7 *bfh.- h e r e i s s y n o n y m o u s w i t h brahman
o n l y f o u n d l a t e r a s T a t p u r u s a s , t h e l a t t e r brahmanaspati- b e i n g a p a r a l l e l a n d e x p l a n a -
being t h u s o c c a s i o n a l l y a f f e c t e d b y t h e t o r y f o r m a t i o n . O n bfhas-pati- a n d c o g n a t e
f o r m a l p e c u l i a r i t i e s of B a h u v r l h i s . c o m p o u n d s s e e O T T O STRAUSS, B j h a s p a t i i m
» S e e WACKERNAGEL 2>, p . 2 4 1 ( 9 7 n o t e ) . ! V e d a ( L e i p z i g 1 9 0 5 ) , p . 1 4 — 1 7 .
3 I f t h i s c o m p o u n d i s a P r o p e r N a m e , i t i s ! 8 van- ' w o o d ' a p p e a r s a l s o i n t h e p i . G .
t h e o n l y i n s t a n c e w i t h t h e s t e m - f o r m i n t h e van-am, L . vam-su.
first m e m b e r ; b u t t h e g e n i t i v e c a s e - e n d i n g ] 9 It is u n n e c e s s a r y t o a s s u m e t h e e x i s t e n c e
a p p e a r s i n t h e first m e m b e r o f a f e w d e t e r - o f a s t e m sad- t o e x p l a i n sadas-pali- a n d
m i n a t i v e P r o p e r N a m e s ; s e e b e l o w , 2 8 0 a. sat-pati- s i n c e t h e s t e m sadas- o c c u r s ; n o r
4 ' I n d r a ' s m i s s i l e ' ( B R . ) , ' I n d r a ' s a r m y ' ! i s rädh- n e c e s s a r y t o e x p l a i n rädhas-pati-
(GRASSMANN). , ( o n l y v o c . ) a s radhas- i s f r e q u e n t .
5 T h i s i s t h e o p i n i o n o f GELDNER, V S . i PISCHEL, V S . 2 , 9 3 FF., 3 0 7 ff., r e j e c t s a n y
2, I , a n d o f DELBRÜCK, V e r g l . S y n t a x 3, p . 2 0 2 . c o n n e x i o n b e t w e e n ddmpati• a n d dam- ' h o u s e ' .
4
A n a n o m a l o u s f . gnas-paini- w a s f o r m e d I C p . WACKERNAGEL 2 1 , p . 2 4 9 e , n o t e .
 V . COMPOUNDS. DETERMINATIVES. 169

a. These c o m p o u n d s in -pdti- are treated by t h e Pada text in t h r e e different w a y s :

I. gnispati-, bfhaspativanaspati-, viipati- (and vispd/m-) appear as simple words; 2. gnah-
pdmi-, jah-pad-, san-pati-, fta-pale (voc.), radhas-patc (voc.), and those with a single accent
(except vispdti-) as compounds separated by the Avagraha s i g n ; 3. all other doubly
accented compounds (e. g. brakmanas-paii-) as two separate w o r d s ; even rdihas-patis is
written rdthah | pdtih | as if rdthah were a nom. sing. 1
a. Otherwise the genitive ending appears only two or three times in
the RV. in Proper Names: divo-dasa- 'Servant of heaven'(?), si'ma/i-sfya- *
'Dog's tail', and (with gen. pi.) ndra-samsa- (for *naram-s'dmsa-)i 'Praise of
men', an epithet of Agni. The VS. has also rayas-posa- 'increase of wealth'
in rayas-posa-dh- 'bestowing increase of wealth' and rayas-posa-vani- 'procuring
increase of wealth'.
b. Other case-endings are very rare in such determinatives. T h e locative
appears in svapne-dusvapnyei- (AV.) 'evil dreaming in sleep' 4 ; the instrumental
in vacd-stena- 'thief by speech', 'one who makes mischief by Ms words'; the
dative in dasyave-vrka- (voc.) 'Wolf to the Dasyu', N. of a man; and possibly
ddsyave sahah (1. 36 1 4 ) may be meant as a name with double accent.
281. In a few instances the first member is a substantive used appo-
sitionally to express sex or composite nature: purusa-mrga- (VS.) 'male
antelope'; ulaka-yatu- 'owl demon' ( = demon in form of an owl), susulaka-
yStu- 'owlet demon'; purusa-vyaghrd- 'man-tiger', a kind of demon, vrsd-
kapi- 'man-ape'.
282. An adjective may appear as first member determining the sense
of the following substantive. This type, which is called Karmadharaya by
the Indian grammarians, is uncommon in the Samhitas. Among the oldest
are candra-mas-s '(bright) moon' 6 and parrtd-mSs-a- (TS. nr. 4.4 1 ) 'full moon'.
Besides these occur eka-vira- 'unique hero', krsna-sakuni- (AV.) 'raven' 7,
nava-jvdra- 'new pain', maha-gramd- 'great host', maha-dhand- 'great booty',
maha-vTrd- 'great hero' 8 , sapta-rsayas 'the Seven Seers', N. of a group of
ancient sages (beside the separate words sapid fsayah and fsaya/t sapid in
Books 1—ix), sapta-grdhrdh (AV1.) 'the seven vultures' 9 .
a . A variety of Karmadharaya is that in which the first member expresses
a part of the last: adhara-kantha- (VS.) 'lower part of the neck', ardha-devd-10
'demi-god', ardha-masa- (AV. VS.) 'half-month', madhyam-dina- 'midday'; also
with change of gender: agra-jihvd- (VS.) n. 'tip of the tongue (Jihvd-)'; with
the suffix -a: ardha-rc-d- (AV. VS.) 'hemistich', pUrvUhn-a- 'forenoon'".
283. P r e p o s i t i o n s frequently occur a s first m e m b e r , all except pra
in their ordinary adverbial senses. Those which are thus used in the RV.
1
See WACKERNAGEL A«, p. 241 (97 a a, mean ' m o o n ' as an abbreviation of candra-
note). mas
* This name occurs once with tmesis, 7 With change of meaning from 'black
simas cic chipam (v. 27). bird'.
3 Cp. naram nd sdmsa- (1. 173' etc.) and 8 In K. appears the dative visva-devaya,
sámso naram (vi. 2 4 ' ) ; see W A C K E R N A G E L 2',the expression viive devtih having bccome a
p. 248 d, note. Karmadharaya.
4 hradi-cakfus 'mirrored in the lake' is 9 T r a n s l a t e d b y WHITNEY ( A V . v n i . 918)
r e g a r d e d by GELDNER (VS. 1, 173) a s a T a t - as a Bahuvrlhi, 'seven-vultured'.
10
puru$a = 'eye in the lake'. For one or two ardhd- 'half is here used in a figurative
doubtful examples of locative pi. see WACKER- sense.
NAGEL 2 ' , p . 2 4 9 (bottom). *> pita-mahd- (AV. TS. VS.) and tata-maha-
5 That this is a very old combination is (AV.) 'grandfather' and pra-pitdmaha- (VS.
shown by the fact that mis- 'moon' occurs TS.) and pra-tatamaha- (AV 1 .) 'great grand-
almost exclusively in compounds [surya-m&sd f a t h e r ' (only voc.) are probably n o t K a r m a -
andpürnd-mas, SB.), only two or three times dharayas, but formed in imitation of maha-
alone (though often in the sense of 'month'), maha- which appeared to b e a gradation of
and is therefore obsolescent in the RV. viahanl--, cp. W A C K E R N A G E L 2 ' , p. 255, note.
6
In the later Samhitás candrd- comes to
170 I . ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4. VEDIC GRAMMAR.

are ddhi 'over', ni 'down', pari 'around', pra ' f o r w a r d ' ' f r o n t part of' 2 , 'extreme'
(of high degree), 'great' (in names of relationship), prdti 'against', zV'asunder'
sam 'together' (also sa- in the same sense); and in the later Samhitas, antdr
'between', dpa 'away', A 'at hand', id 'up', ipa 'beside', upari 'above'. The
following are examples in the alphabetical order of the prepositions: adhi-pati{ AV.
VS.) 'over-lord', adhi-patm- (AV.VS.) 'sovereign lady', ddhi-bhojana- 'additional
gift', adhi-raja- 'supreme king'; antar-desa- (AV.) 'intermediate region', antah-
paira- (AV.) 'inner ( = interior of the) vessel'; apa-rUpa- (AV.) 4 'absence
of form', 'deformity'; a-pati- (VS. MS. 1. 21) 'the lord here'; *ut-surya-
'sunrise' in otsuryam (AV.) 'till sunrise' ( a - u t s a r y a m ) ; upa-pati- (VS.) 'paramour'
(lit. 'sub-husband'); upari-sayana- (AV.) 'elevated couch'; ni-dhana- (AV.)
'conclusion', ni-paksati- (VS.) 'second rib', rti-padd- 'low ground', ny-ahna- 5 (AV.)
'close of day'; pari-pati- 'lord (of all) around', pari-vatsara- 'full year'; pra-
gatha- (VS.) 'fore-song', a kind of stanza, pra-dis- 'region' and (AV.) 'inter-
mediate quarter', pra-dhdna- 'prize of battle', pradhvana- ('forward course',
ddhvan-) ' b e d of a r i v e r ' , prArtha- (AV.) 'preparation', ' i m p l e m e n t ' ; pra-pada-6
7
'tip of the foot', prd-uga- 'forepart of the shafts (of a chariot)' ; pra-napat-
'great-grandson', pra-tatamaha- (AV1.) and pra-pitamaha- (VS. TS.) 'great-
grandfather'; pra-div- (AV.) 'third (or fifth) heaven', pra-patha- 'distant path',
4
prd-maganda- 'arch-usurer', prd-vTra- 'great hero', prAyus- (MS. 1. 5 ) 'long
life' (Ayus); prati-jana- (AV.) 'adversary', prati-divan- 'adversary at play';
vi-dls- (VS.) 'intermediate region', vi-madhya- 'middle', vi-manyu- 'longing' 8 ,
9
vi-vac- 'opposing shout', 'contest', vy-ddana-(RV'.) 'different food' ; sa-patnl-
'co-wife', sam-grama- (AV.) 'assembly', 'encounter', satn-amkd- 'battle-array' IO ,
sam-bdndhu- 'akin', sam-vatsard-11 'full year'.
284. Other indeclinables sometimes occur as first member, but very
rarely in the RV. They include a few adverbs and the particles <*(«)-, dus-,
su-, kim-, ku-\ pasca-dosa- (VS.) 'late evening', puro-agni- (VS.) 'fire in front';
a-mitra- 'enemy', a-hotr- (AV.) 'incompetent Hotr'; duc-chimS- 'calamity'";
su-brahmana- (AV.) 'good Brahman', sii-bhesaja- (AV. TS.) 'good remedy',
su-vasana- 'fair garment'; kim-purusa- (VS.) a kind of mythical being, ku-
sara- (RV 1 .), a kind of reed.

4. Bahuvrihi Compounds.
285. The term Bahuvrihi, employed by the Indian grammarians to
designate this type, is perhaps the most convenient name for these secon-
dary adjective compounds, as it represents their general character both
in form and meaning. For the final member is practically always a sub-
stantive, and the relation of the first member to the last is mostly attributive

»Without perceptibly changing the meaning
of the final m e m b e r .
2 8
T h i s and t h e following meanings do not
occur in t h e combination of pra with verbs.
3 E x p r e s s i n g separation, extension, deri-
vation.
4 In apa-kama- 'aversion' t h e final m e m b e r
is a verbal noun. T h e r e seem to be no cer-
tain instances of this kind of compound with
api-. cp. WACKERNAGEL 2 ' , p. 259 note.
5 I n ny-artha- 'destruction' the second
m e m b e r is a verbal noun. On the relation
of ny-arbuda- (AV. VS.) and ny-arbudi- (AV.)
to arbuda- and arbudi-, see WACKERNAGEL
2 T , p. 260 (top).
6
Once pra-pad- in AV.
7 Probably for pra-yuga-.
F r o m manyu- 'zeal'.
9 This is Siyaija's explanation (vividhe
'nne) of the word in VIII. 5 2 ' .
10 F r o m anika- ' f r o n t ' .
| " sam in this compound expresses com-
pleteness.
« Cp. sunam 'with success'. On the Sandhi
see p. 3 1 , note 4.
13 T h o u g h vasatta- has a concrete sense
here, t h e compound may h a v e arisen w h e n
the word had a verbal meaning.
 V. COMPOUNDS. BAHUVRTHIS. 171

(Karmadharaya), less commonly dependent (Tatpuru?a), and very rarely

coordinative (Dvandva). T h e best name otherwise is ' p o s s e s s i v e ' a s this
is their meaning in the vast majority of instances. In a few examples, how-
ever, the more general sense of 'connected with' (which may usually be ex-
pressed more specifically) is required to explain the relation between the
substantive and the Bahuvrfhi which agrees with it; thus asva-prstha- 'borne
on horse-back', devd-psaras- 'affording enjoyment for the gods', parjanya-retas-
'sprung from the seed of Parjanya', visva-krsti- 'dwelling with all peoples',
vis'vd-nara-2 'belonging to or existing among all men', vird-pastya- 'belonging
to the abode of a hero', sata-sa.rada- 'lasting a hundred autumns', sara-vira-
(AV.) 'characterized by heroic men' = 'making men heroic' (amulet).
286. Attributive Bahuvrihis. — T h e commonest form of Bahuvrlhi is
that in which an attributive noun is the first member. It is most fre-
quently an adjective, as ugra-bahu- 'powerful-armed', urvy-uti-3 'giving wide
aid', jlvd-putra- 'having living sons', sukra-varna- 'bright-coloured' 4 . T h e first
member is also often a past passive participle in -ta or -na, the action
expressed by which is usually performed by the person denoted by the sub-
stantive with which the Bahuvrlhi agrees; e. g. prayata-daksina- Tie by whom
the sacrificial fee has been presented', rata-havis- 'who offers an oblation' 5 .
T h e action is, however, not infrequently supposed to be performed by
others, always in the case of hata- 'slain'; e. g. hata-vrsn-r- 'whose hus-
band has been slain', hata-matr- 'whose mother has been slain'. Both senses
appear in ratd-havya- 'he by whom' and 'to whom offerings have been made'.
A n outside agent is sometimes expressed by an additional member at the
beginning of the compound, as jiva-pxta-sarga- 'whose streams have been
drunk by the living' 6 . A present participle occasionally occurs as first
member; e. g. a-yad-vasu- (AV.) and sam-ydd-vasu- (AV.) 'to whom wealth
comes', bhr&jad-rsti- 'having glittering spears', rusad-vatsa- 'having a shining
calf', sucad-ratha- 'having a brilliant c a r ' 7 ; also a perfect-participle in dadrs-
and-pavi- 'whose felly is visible', yuyujana-sapti- 'whose steeds are yoked'.
a. The first member is further often a substantive used predicatively;
e. g. asva-parna- 'horse-winged' = 'whose wings are horses' (car); indra-satru-
,whose foe is Indra'; tad-id-artka-8 'having just that as an aim', dronahava-
,whose pail ( a h a v d - ) is a trough', sisnd-deva- 'whose god is a phallus',
surodaka- (AV.) 'whose water is spirit' (sura-). T h e final member is here
sometimes a comparative or superlative (including para-) used substan-
tively: avaras-para-9 (VS.) 'in which the lower is higher' = 'topsy-turvy' 10 ,
dsthi-bhuyims- (AV.) 'having bone as its chief part' = 'chiefly bone', indra-
jyestha- 'having Indra as chief', 'of whom Indra is c h i e f , yama-srestha- (AV.)
'of whom Yama is best', soma-srestha- (AV.) 'of which Soma is best'.

1 For other names see WACKERNAGEL 2', 6 Cp. WHITNEY 1 2 9 9 a.

p. 273 (107 a, note). 7 Cp. WHITNEY 1299 b.
' For several other examples formed with 8 Here a pronoun appears instead of a
vik'd- see WHITNEY 1294 b. substantive in the first member.
3 Cp. p. 145, note 3. 9 Here the first m e m b e r retains the -s of
4 Cp. WHITNEY 1298. the nom. surviving from the use of the two
5 T h e sense is thus identical with verbal words in syntactical juxtaposition; the first
determinatives or verbally governing com-1 member also is used substantively in this
pounds such as väjam-bhard- and hhardd- \ compound.
väja- 'bearing booty'. In viti-hotra- 'having i On eka-pard- (said of dice) see n o w
an invitation sacrifice' = 'inviting to sacri-; LÜDERS, D a s Würfelspiel im alten Indien
fice', a stem in -ti is used almost like a (Abh. d. K . G e s . der W i s s . zu Göttingen
past participle in -ta; cp. vTid-havya- as a 9, 2) p. 64.
name.
172 I. ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4. VEDIC GRAMMAR.

A comparison is sometimes implied between the first substantive and the

second: varsAjya ( A V . ) 'whose rain is like butter', vrksd-kesa- 'tree-haired'
= 'whose trees are like hair' = ' w o o d e d ' (mountain).
T h e first member further sometimes expresses the material of which the
second consists; e. g. rajata-nabhi- (VS.) 'whose naval is (made o f ) silver';
hiranya-nemi- 'whose fellies are (made o f ) gold'; or something closely
connected with and characteristic of it, as niyud-ratha- 'whose car is (drawn
by) a team'.
287. Dependent Bahuvrihis. — T h e first member is dependent on the
last in the sense of a case-relation, the case-ending being sometimes retained.
a. It has often a g e n i t i v e sense 1 , as pati-kama- ( A V . ) 'having desire for a
husband'; with genitive ending, rayas-kama- 'having a desire of wealth'. Here
the first member often implies a comparison (when it never has the case-
ending) : agni-tejas- ( A V . ) 'having the brightness of fire', 'fire-bright', fksa-griva-
( A V . ) 'having the neck of a bear* (demons), go-vaprus- 'having the form of a
cow', jhati-mukha- (AV.) 'having the face of ( = like) relatives', mano-javas-
'having the swiftness of thought' = 'swift as thought', may&ra-roman- 'having
the plumes of peacocks' (Indra's steeds).
b. In a few instances it has the sense of, and then always the ending of,
the i n s t r u m e n t a l : a-giraukas- 'not to be kept at rest (okas-) by a song
(gird)', kratva-magha- 'constituting a reward (gained) by intelligence', bhiisa-
ketu- 'recognisable by light' 2 . -
c. T h e locative sense is more frequent, being often accompanied by
the case-ending: asdnn-isu- 'having arrows in his mouth', divi-yoni- 'having
origin in heaven'; also several formed with dure- 'in the distance', as dUre-
anta- 'ending in the distance', dur^-gavyuti- ( A V . ) 'whose sphere is far away' \
There are further examples in which the last member has the locative
sense when it is a part of the b o d y and what is expressed by the first
member appears in or on it: asru-mukhi- ( A V . ) 'having tears on her face',
'tear-faced', kiltilodhn-l- ( A V . ) 'having sweet drink in her udder', ghrtd-prstha-
'butter-backed', patra-hasta- (AV.) 'having a hand in which is a vessel', mani-
grtva- 'having pearls on the neck', madhu-jihva- 'having a tongue on which
is honey', vdjra-bahu- 'having an arm on which is a bolt'.
288. Coordinate Bahuvrihis. — N o example is found in the R V . and
hardly any in the other Samhitas of the first and last members of Bahuvrihis
being coordinated in sense. T h e V S . has stoma-prstha- 'containing Stomas
and Prsthas'; also dhar-divd- ( x x x v m . 12) 'daily', which is a kind of D v a n d v a
Bahuvrlhi, being formed from the adverb dhar-dizi 'day by day'. T h e form
somendra- 'belonging to Soma and Indra', occurs only in B. passages of later
Samhitas (TS. MS. K.).
289. Indeclinables as first member. — In a number of Bahuvrihis
the first member is not a noun, but an indeclinable word, either a preposition
or an adverb.
a. Prepositions are c o m m o n as first member of Bahuvrihis, expressing
the local position of the final member in relation to the substantive with
which the Bahuvrlhi agrees. Some sixteen prepositions are thus used, the most
frequent being vi which occurs as often in the R V . as all the rest put
together. T h e y are ati 'beyond', ddhi 'on', antar 'within', apa 'away', abhi

1 A n accusative in sense and form appears not a Bahuvrlhi with apas- 'work'; cp. 278 a

in tv&m-kama• 'having a desire for thee*. and 91 B.

» The compound vidmatt&pas- 'working 3 O n a f e w doubtful instances of such
with skill' [vidmànà) is probably a determi-; l o c a t i v e c o m p o u n d s see WACKERNAGEL 2 ' ,
native formed with the adj. a/as- ' w o r k i n g ' , I p. 278 (bottom).
 V. COMPOUNDS. BAHUVRIHIS. 173

'around' and 'toward', ava 'down', 'away', A 'near', ud 'upward', upa 'near',
nl 'down', nls 'away', pari 'around', prd 'in front', 'very', prdti 'against', vi
'apart', sarn 'together'. O f these upa is used thus in the R V . only, while
antar, dva, ni a p p e a r in the later Samhitas only. T h e following are examples
of compounds thus formed in the alphabetical order of the prepositions:
aty-armi- 'overflowing', ati-cchandas- (VS.) 'having redundant metres' (verse);
adhi-nirtiij- 'having a garment on', adhy-aksa- 'having an eye on', 'overseer';
antar-dlva- ( A V . ) 'having fire within'; apodaka- 'waterless', apa-rtu- ( A V . ) 'un-
seasonable'; abhi-vira- and abhi-satvan- 'having heroes around', abhi-rupa-
( A V . ) 'beautiful', abhi-sena- 'directing arrows'; ava-kesd- ( A V . ) 'having hair
hanging down', ava-toka- ( A V . VS.) 'miscarrying'; A-deva- 'having the gods
near', 'devoted to the gods', A-manas- ( A V . T S . ) 'kindly disposed'; ut-saktha-
(VS.) 'having the thighs raised', ud-ojas- 'highly powerful'; upa-manyu- 'having
zeal at hand', 'zealous', upa-vasu- 'bringing riches near'; ni-manyu- ( A V . )
'whose anger has subsided', ni-vaksas- (TS. v. 6. 23 1 ) 'having a sunken breast',
ni-kald- (VS.) 'going down hill', ni-kilbisa- 'deliverance from sin' ('that in
which sin has subsided'); nir-jarayu- ( A V . ) 'having cast its skin', nir-mSya-
'powerless', nir-hasta- ( A V . ) 'handless'; pari-mara- ( T S . v . 6 . 2 1 * ) 'having death
around' = 'round whom people h a v e died', pari-many't- 'very angry'; pm-srngd-
( V S . T S . ) 'having prominent horns', pra-tvaksas- 'very energetic'; pra-manas-
( A V . ) 'very thoughtful'; prati-rRpa- 'having a corresponding form', 'like', prati-
vartmdn- ( A V . ) 'having an opposite course', prdti-veia- 'neighbour' ('living
opposite'); K/ = ' a p a r t ' : vi-karna- ( A V . ) 'having ears far apart', vi-sakha-
( A V . ) 'branched', vy-amsa- Tiaving the shoulders apart', 'broad-shouldered';
«= ' e x t e n s i v e ' : vi-manas- 'wide-minded', 'sagacious', vi-hayas- 'of extensive
power'; = ' d i v i d e d ' : vy-adhva- ( A V . ) 'having a divided course' = 'being
midway between zenith and earth'; - = ' v a r i o u s ' : vy-ailaba- ( A V . ) 'making
all kinds of noises'; = ' d i v e r g e n t ' : vi-pathi- 'following wrong paths', vi-
vrata- 'refractory'; — ' d i s t o r t e d ' : vi-grtva- 'having a twisted neck', vy-afiga-
( A V . ) 'having distorted limbs'; =• ' d i f f e r e n t ' : vi-rUpa- 'having a different
form', v!-vacas- ( A V . ) 'speaking differently'; = ' d e v o i d o f ' , ' l e s s ' : vi-miya-
'devoid of magic', vy-enas- 'guiltless'; sam-hanu- ( A V . ) 'striking the jaws
together'.

b . A d v e r b s w i t h a l o c a l m e a n i n g , which are akin to prepositions,

also frequently appear as first m e m b e r of BahuvrIhis, being generally speaking
equivalent in sense to predicative adjectives. Examples of such BahuvrIhis in
the alphabetical order of the adverbs are the following: adhas ' b e l o w ' : adho-
varcas- ( A V . ) 'powerful below'; anti 'near' : anti-mitra- (VS.) 'having friends
at hand', anti-sumna- ( A V . ) 'having benevolence at hand', anty-Qti- 'having
aid at hand'; avds 'down' : avo-deva- 'attracting the gods down'; art! 'afar' :
arJ-aghci- 'having evil far-removed', arc-satru- ( A V . ) 'whose foes are far away';
itas 'hence' : itd-uti- 'helping from hence'; ihd 'here' : iWha-mStr- 'whose
mothers are, the one here, the other there'; ihd-kratu- ( A V . ) 'whose will is
hitherward', tha-citta- (AV.) 'whose thought is hitherward'; fdhak ' a p a r t ' :
fdhan-mantra- ( A V 1 . ) 'having a special sacred t e x t ' ' ; kuhaya 'where?': kuhayH-
krti- (only voc.) 'where active?'; daksina-tas 'on the right' : daksinatas-kaparda-
'having a coil of hair on the right'; nftA 'downward' : mcA-vayas- 'whose
strength is low'; puras 'in f r o n t ' : puro-ratha- 'whose car is in front', puro-
vasu- (TS. HI. 2. s 1 ) 'preceded b y wealth' (only voc.); pracii 'forward' :pricA-
fihva- 'moving the tongue forward', praca-manyu- (only voc.) 'striving forward'.

1 According to WHITNEY on A V . v . BR., pw. 'lacking speech'; LUDWIG 'of

distinguished meditations'.
 174
a . Bahuvrihis are also f o r m e d with a f e w a d v e r b s of a n o t h e r k i n d as first m e m b e r :
itthd-dhT- ' h a v i n g such t h o u g h t ' , ' d e v o u t ' , natta-siirya- 'illuminated by various suns', pitnar-
magha- (AV. TS.) ' r e p e a t e d l y offering o b l a t i o n s ' , purudha-prat'ika- ' h a v i n g various a s p e c t s ' ,
sadya-uh- ' h e l p i n g at o n c e ' 1 . T h e r e a r e a l s o several f o r m e d with saha-, sumdd-, smad-*
' t o g e t h e r with', as saha-gopa- ' h a v i n g t h e c o w h e r d s with t h e m ' , saha-purusa- (AV.) ' a c c o m -
p a n i e d b y the m e n ' , sum aj-jam- ' a c c o m p a n i e d by his wife', sumad-gu- (AV.) ' a c c o m p a n i e d
b y t h e cows', smad-abhliu- ' p r o v i d e d with reins', smad-ista- ' h a v i n g a n errand', smod-
udhan- ' p r o v i d e d with an u d d e r ' .
c. Certain particles frequently appear as the first member of Bahu-
vrihis. These are the privative a- or an-, ku-i expressing depreciation, dus-
'ill', su- 'well'; e. g. a-pad- 'footless', a-sapatnd- 'having no rivals', an-udakd-
'having no water', 'waterless'; ku-yava- 'causing a bad harvest', dus-pad-
'ill-footed'; su-parna- 'having beautiful wings'.
290. Bahuvrihis are very frequently used as m. (sometimes f.) sub-
stantives in the sense of Proper Names, in many instances without the
adjectival sense occurring at all; thus brhdd-uktha- m., as the N. of a seer
and adj. 'having great praise'; brhad-diva- m., N. of a seer (brhad-diva- f.,
N. of a goddess) and adj. 'dwelling in high heaven'; but priya-medha- m.
('to whom sacrifice is dear') and vamd-deva- m. ('to whom the gods are dear')
only as the names of seers.
a. Bahuvrihis are further not infrequently used as n e u t e r s u b s t a n t i v e s
with an abstract and a collective sense, especially when the first member
is the privative particle a- or an- and sdrva- 'all'; e. g. a-satru- 'free from
foes', n. (AV.) 'freedom from foes', a-sapatnd- 'having no rivals', n. (AV.)
'peace', a-sambadha- (AV.) n. 'non-confinement', a-skambhatid- (AV.) n. 'lack
of support', an-apatya- 'childless' (AV.), n. 'childlessness', an-amitrd- (AV.)
'foeless', n. (AV. VS.) 'freedom from foes'; sarva-ratha- 'the whole line of
chariots', sarva-vedasa- (AV. TS.) 'whole property'; ni-kilbisa- n. 'deliverance
from sin', pitr-bandhi't- (AV.) 'paternal kinship', matr-bandhi'i- (AV.) 'maternal
kinship', rikta-kumbha(AV1.) 'empty-handedness', su-mrga- (AV.) 'good
hunting' 5 .
b. A special category of Bahuvrihis used as substantives are those in
which the first member is a numeral from dvi- 'two' upwards 6 . They ex-
press a collection or aggregate and are singular neuter' except those formed
with -aha- 'day', which are singular masc.; e. g. tri-yuga- n. 'period of three
lives', tri-yojand- (AV.) n. 'distance of three Yojanas', try-udayd- n. 'threefold
approach to the altar', dasafigula- n. 'length of ten fingers', dasantarusya- n.
'distance of ten stations', dvi-raja- (AV.) n. 'battle of two kings', paiica-
yojana- (AV.) n. 'distance of five Yojanas', sad-aha-(AV. TS.) m. 'series of
six days'. These numeral collectives always end in accented -a 8 .
291. Origin of Bahuvrihis. — Considering that Bahuvrihis, which are
adjectives, are far commoner than the corresponding determinatives, which
are substantives, it cannot be assumed that the former always passed through

1 :
T h e B a h u v r l h i c o m p o u n d avir-fj'tka- is
ol u n c e r t a i n m e a n i n g ; see WACKERNAGEL
2', p. 287 (middle).
» Compounds formed with these three
w o r d s m i g h t also b e e x p l a i n e d as b e l o n g i n g
to t h e ' g o v e r n i n g ' class.
i Also t h e c o g n a t e kim- in kim-sila- (VS.
TS.) (land) ' h a v i n g small s t o n e s ' .
4 See WHITNEY'S n o t e o n AV. x i x . 8 4 .
5 A c c e n t u a t i o n of t h e final syllable (as in
t h e c o g n a t e singular D v a n d v a s ) prevails in
t h e s e n. B a h u v r i h i s ; e x c e p t i o n s a r e a-bhaya-,
n. 'safety' (adj. ' f r e e from danger'), and vi-
hfdaya- (AV.) 'lack of courage'.
6
T h e s e a r e called D v i g u b y t h e Hindu
g r a m m a r i a n s , a n d are classed b y t h e m as a
subdivision of T a t p u r u s a s .
7 A f e w n u m e r a l collectives are determi-
1 natives used in the pi. and t h e original
! g e n d e r : saptarfayas 'the seven seers', sapta-
grdhras 'seven vultures' (AV.); Iri-kaJiu-ka-
pi. ' t h r e e soma-vessels' (from kadrfi- f.).
8
W i t h t h e suffix -ya is f o r m e d sahasrahn-yn-
n. (AV.) 'a t h o u s a n d days' j o u r n e y ' .
 V . COMPOUNDS. GOVERNING COMPOUNDS. i75

the process of transmutation from the latter. T h e y must in the vast majority
of instances have been formed directly and independently in conformity with
the type of these secondary adjectives which had c o m e down from the Ilr.
p e r i o d 1 . WACKERNAGEL (2 ' , 1 1 2 ) adopts the view that the origin of Bahu-
vrihis is not to be explained by transmutation from determinatives, but from
the predicative or appositional use of groups of words characterizing a sub-
stantive 1 . This use he exemplifies by the following quotations from the R V . :
urt'th kakso na gangydh (vi. 45 J1) 'like the broad shoulder dwelling on the
Ganges', that is, for *uru-kaksah 'Broad-shoulder* as a Proper N a m e ; sa
iayase saho mahdt (v. 1 1 6 ) 'thou art born a great power* ( — *mahA-sahah 'one
having great power'); tvacam krsmim arandhayat (1. 130 8 ) 'he delivered over
the black skin' (that is, 'those having a black skin', 'the black-skins'); droghaya
cid vacasa Anavaya (vi. 62«) 'to A n a v a , deceitful speech', that is, 'who utters
deceitful speech'J; and nardm .. samsa/i (11. 34 s ) 'praise of men' as repre-
senting an earlier stage than narS-samsa- 'receiving the praises of men' as a
Bahuvrihi. Appositional Bahuvrihis, he thinks, similarly arose from explanatory
clauses, as indra-jyestha dcvah 'the gods having Indra as their mightiest' from
devAh indro jyisthah 'the gods — Indra their mightiest'. T h e first step here
would have been assimilation in case and number to the main substantive,
involving change to a compound (with stem-form and single accent), followed
by assimilation in gender. T h e change to the Bahuvrihi had already b e c o m e
the rule in the pre-Vedic period.

5. Governing Compounds.
292. In a considerable number of compounds the first member governs
the last in sense, being either a preposition (prepositional adverb) or a verbal
noun. These compounds being adjectives are allied to Bahuvrihis.
1. In the prepositional group the first member is a preposition or adverb
capable of governing a case. T h e r e are about twenty examples in the R V .
In some instances they seem to have arisen from the corresponding syntactical
combination, as adhi-ratha- n. 'wagon-load* from ddhi rathe (x. 64") 'on the
wagon'. In other instances they seem to have originated from the corresponding
a d v e r b ; thus the adjective in pra-dlv-a ketitna (v. 60 8 ) 'with long-existing light'
has been changed from the adverb pta-divas 'from of old' to agree with a
substantive in the instrumental. T h e ending of the second member has been
preserved for the most part only when it was - a ; otherwise the suffix -a or
-ya is generally a d d e d L i k e Bahuvrihis, compounds of this type m a y
b e c o m e neuter substantives; thus upanas-d- 'being on the wagon', n. ( A V . )
'space in a wagon'.
a . All prepositions which govern cases (except ava) as well as prd
(though it never governs a case), besides several adverbs c a p a b l e of being
used with a case, are e m p l o y e d as first member in these compounds 4 . T h e
following are examples of prepositional governing compounds: ati-matra-
( A V . ) 'beyond measure', ati-rstrd- 'lasting overnight', dty-amhas- (VS.) 'beyond
the reach of distress', aty-avi- 'running over the wool'; adhi-gart-ya- 'being
on the car-seat', adhi-gav-a- ( A V . ) 'derived from cows'; adhas-pad-a- 'being

1
Cp. BRUGMANN, Grundriss 2, p. 88; IF. similar in form to the prepositional Bahu-
18, 63 FF. vrihis; the meaning, however, is quite
2 On substantives used instead of adjec- different, as in the latter the preposition
tives cp. BRUGMANN, Grundriss 2, p. 89. does not govern the following member, but
3 Cp. drogha-vac- 'uttering deceitful speech'. refers adverbially to the substantive with
4 This type of governing compound is which the Bahuvrihi agrees.
176 I . ALLGEMEINES UND S P R A C H E . 4 . V E D I C GRAMMAR.

under the feet', adho-aksa- 'remaining below the axle'; anu-path-a- and anu-
vartman- (AV. VS.) 'along the road', anu-kama- 'according to wish', anu-
vrata- 'obedient'; dntas-path-a- 'being within the path'; api-prdna- 'being on
( = accompanying) the breath', api-iarvard- 'bordering on night' ( i a r v a r i - ) ;
abhi-dyu- 'directed to heaven', abhi-mstra- 'overcoming dominion'; a-jaras-d-»
'reaching to old age', a-pathi- and a-pathi- 'being on the way', a-bhaga- 'taking
part in', 'participator'; upa-kaksd- 'reaching to the shoulder', upanas-d- 'being
on a wagon', iipa-trn-ya- (AV.) 'lurking in the grass', upa-mis-ya- (AV.)
'occurring every month'; upari-budhna- 'raised above the ground', upari-martya-
'being above men'; Zrdhva-nabhas- (VS.) 'being above the clouds', urdhva-barhis-
(VS.) 'being above the litter'; tiro-ahn-ya- ('being beyond a day' = ) 'belonging
to the day before yesterday'; pari-panth-in-2 ('lying around the path') 'adver-
sary', pari-hasta- (AV.) ('put round the hand') 'hand-amulet'; paro-matra-
('being beyond measure') 'excessive', parJ-ks-a- (AV.) ('lying beyond the eye')
'invisible'; puro-gav-a- ('going before the cows') 'leader'; prati-kamya- (AV.)
'being in accordance with desire'; sam-gay a- 'blessing the household'.
2. In verbal governing compounds the first member is either an
•agent noun or an action noun governing the last member as an object.
The abnormal position of the verbal form before the object in this class is
probably to be explained by the first member having originally been an
imperative, which usually has this position. These compounds are an old
formation, two types going back to the Indo-European period, and one to
the Indo-Iranian. They are adjectives, but the final member never adds a
compositional suffix except in siksa-nar-a- 'helping men'. Three types are to
be distinguished.
a. The first member consists of a present, stem or the root, which
probably represents an imperative3; of this type there are few examples:
trasa-dasyu- m., N. of a man ('terrify the foe'), rads-vasu-4 (only voc.)
'dispensing wealth', siksa-nard-4 'helping men', sthd-rasman-5 'loosening
bridles' 6 .
b. Examples of the second type are more numerous. Here the first
member ends in -at, but the participle, being formed from present stems
in -a, -d or -aya, which appears in these compounds, in a few instances
does not occur in independent use. This type, which is almost entirely
restricted to the RV., is also Iranian. It seems to have taken the place of
the older one (a), which owing to its form was apt to be confused with
Bahuvrihis though differing from them in meaning. The form which they
assumed was probably aided by the analogy of Bahuvrihis with a present
participle as their first member, like sucad-ratha- 'having a brilliant car',
which are formed from intransitive verbs, while those in the governing com-
pounds are of course transitive. Examples of this type are the following:
rdhad-ray-7 ('increasing wealth') m., N. of a man, and rdhdd-vara-7 'increasing
goods', ksaydd-vira8 'ruling men', codaydn-mati-9 'stimulating devotion', jaindd-™

1
O c c u r s o n l y in t h e d a t i v e as a n a d v e r b
m e a n i n g ' u p t o old a g e ' .
J
F o r m e d w i t h t h e suffix -in w h i c h is n o t
p r o p e r l y a t t a c h e d t o c o m p o u n d s ; cp.WACKER-
NAGEL 2 ' , 53 (p. 121 b o t t o m ) .
3 S e e BRUGMANN, I F . 18, 7 6 : DELBRÜCK,
V e r g l e i c h e n d e S y n t a x 3, 1 7 4 ; JACOBI, C o m -
p o s i t u m u n d N e b e n s a t z (1897), 46—82;
WACKERNAGEL 2', p. 315.
4 R h y t h m i c a l l y l e n g t h e n e d f o r rada-, siifa-.
5 T h e F a d a h a s sthah-rasman-. T h e meaning
is d o u b t f u l ; it m a y be a s i m p l e B a h u v r l h i ,
' h a v i n g firm b r i d l e s ' (GRASSMANN).
6 krpa-n~da- w o u l d b e a n o t h e r e x a m p l e if
it m e a n s ' a r r a n g i n g his a b o d e ' , b u t t h e
m e a n i n g of t h e first m e m b e r is d o u b t f u l .
7 rdhdt• is a n a o r i s t p a r t i c i p l e of fdh-
'increase'.
8
F r o m ksayati ' r u l e s ' .
9 F r o m codayali ' u r g e s ' .
jamdt- a p a l a t a l i z e d f o r m f r o m gam-
•go'.
 V. COMPOUNDS. SYNTACTICAL COMPOUNDS. 177

agni- ('going to Agni'), N. of man, tarad-dvesas-11 overcoming foes', dravayat-

sakha'speeding the comrade', dhzrayat-kavi- 'supporting the wise' and
dharayat-ksiti-* 'supporting men', bharad-vaja- ('carrying off the prize') m.,
N. of a man, and a-bharad-vasu'bringing wealth', mamhayad-rayi- 5 'lavishing
wealth', mandad-vlra-6 'gladdening men', *viddd-asva-1 'possessing steeds',
vidad-vasu-8 'winning wealth', srJvayat-pati- 'making his lord famous', and
sravaydt-sakhi-9 'making his friend famous', sanad-rayi- 'bestowing possessions'
and sanad-vaja-IO 'bestowing booty', sadad-yoni'sitting in one's place', sprhayad-
varna-12 'striving after lustre'. Two such governing compounds are once com-
bined in such a way that the final member common to both is dropped in
the first: patayan mandayat-sakham (1. 4') 'causing his friend to fly (pataya-)
and to be glad' (manddya-)
c. In the third type, which goes back to the Indo-European period*4, the first
member is a noun of action variously accented. There are some half-dozen
examples in the RV.: dati-vara- 'giving treasures', pusti-gu- ('rearing kine') m.,
N. of a man, rTty-hp- ' s 'causing waters to flow', vTtt-radhas- 'enjoying the oblation',
vtti-hotra- 'enjoying the sacrifice', vrsti-dylv- 'causing the sky to rain" 6 .

6. Syntactical Compounds.
293. There are some irregular formations in which words not in coordi-
nate, attributive, dependent or governing relation are compounded owing to
constant juxtaposition in the sentence.
1. The relative word /at (abL) 'in so far as' is compounded with a
superlative in RV. HI. 5 3 " : atibhih ... ydc-chresthabhih17 'with the best possible
aids', lit. 'with aids in so far as (they are) the best'. The adverb yad-radhyam
(11. 38s) 'as quickly as possible', lit. 'in so far as possible', is analogous.
2. The initial words of a text begin to be compounded in the later
Samhitas as a designation of «that text; thus ye-yajamaha- (VS.) in the nom.
pi. m. means the text beginning with the words yi ydjamahel8.
3. Phrases, almost always consisting of two words, used in connexion
with certain actions are compounded; thus aham-uttara(AV.) 'dispute for
precedence', from the phrase used by each disputant aham tittarah 'I (am)
higher'; mama-satyisu 'in disputes as to ownership', in which every one says
mama satydm '(it is) certainly mine'; mam-pasyd- (AV.) as the name of a
plant used by a woman to secure the love of a man with the words mim
pasya 'look at me'30. Similarly in connexion with persons, as kuvit-sa- 'some
1 From tara-ti 'overcomes'. M See WACKERNAGEL a 1 , p. 320 (bottom).
2 From dravdya- causative of dru- 'run'. '5 This is the only example recognized
3 From dhardya- causative of dhf• 'sup- by BR. as belonging to this type; GRASS-
port'. MANN explains them all as Bahuvrlhis.
4 From bhdra-ti 'bears'. BRUGMANN, IF. 18, 70 f., explains these
5 From mamhaya- causative of mamh- 'be compounds as having originated in impera-
great'. tives, while JACOBI, Compositum und Neben-
6 From manda-ti 'gladdens'. The SV. has satz p. 64 f., thinks the first member re-

the wrong variant vandad-vTra-. presents an original 3. pers. sing.

7 T o be inferred from the patronymic '7 In AV. VIL 311 yävac-ehreuhabhis is a
vaidadasvi-. corrupt variant. Compounds formed with
8 From vida-ti 'finds'. yävat• do not otherwise occur till the Sfltras.
9 From sravaya• causative of iru- 'hear'. 18 In the TS. also occurs iddm-madhu- m.
1 0 From Jdna-ti or sana-ti 'wins'.
as a designation of the text iddm eva
1 1 Lengthened for sadad- from sada-ti 'sits'.
säragham mädhu. This kind of compound
" From spfhaya-ti 'desires'. becomes common in the ancillary literature
13 On the doubtful examples arcdd-dhuma-, when particular hymns are referred to.
kftad-vasu, pratad-vasu, bhuvad vasnh (VIIL »9 Used in the locative only.
1937), vffad-anji- (voc.) see W A C K E R N A G E L 20 One or two doubtful examples are dis-
21, p. 319 note. cussed by WACKERNAGEL 21, p. 327 (top).
Indo-arische Philologie. I, 4. 12
I78

one' from the phrase kuvtt sd 'is it he?'. This type is more commonly based
on phrases used by people about themselves; thus dham-sana1 (voc.) 'rapa-
cious', that is, one who says aham saneyam (dhdnäni) 'may I obtain (wealth)';
aham-pürvä- 'eager to be first', that is, one who says aham pftrvah (syJm)
'I (should be) first'; kim-tvd- (VS.) 'asking garrulously* that is, one who con-
tinually says 'what (are) you (doing)?*.

VI. DECLENSION.
BENFEY, Vollständige Grammatik 707—780. — WHITNEY, Grammar 261—526.

294. General character.— Declension means the inflexion of nominal

stems by means of endings which express the various relations represented
by what are called cases. The stems belonging to the sphere of declension
are most conveniently divided, owing to difference of meaning, form, and
use, into nouns, pronouns, and numerals. Pronouns have to be treated
separately because they have certain peculiarities of inflexion, besides to some
extent lacking the distinction of gender. Numerals again show other pecu-
liarities of form as well as partial lack of gender. Nouns are divided into
substantives as names of things and adjectives as names of attributes. But
as no definite line of demarcation can be drawn between substantive and
adjective in any of the classes of declension in the Vedic language, these two
categories are nowhere treated separately in the present work.

I. Nouns.
LANMAN, Noun-inflection in the Veda, JAOS. vol. x (1880), p. 325—600.

295. Owing to considerable divergencies of inflexion, nominal stems are

best grouped in the t w o main divisions of consonant and vowel de-
clension. Stems ending in semivowels form a transition from the former to
the latter. The stems contained in the two main classes have further to b e
sub-divided, owing to difference of derivation and, in part, consequent variety
of inflexion, into radical and derivative stems.
a. Like other Aryan tongues, the Vedic language distinguishes in declen-
sion the three genders, masculine, feminine, and neuter. It also distinguishes
three numbers, the singular, dual, and plural, the dual being in full and
regular use 2 .
b . There are e i g h t c a s e s : nominative, vocative, accusative, instrumental,
dative, ablative, genitive, locative, all in regular and unrestricted use. The same
ending, however, is to a limited extent employed to express the sense of two and
sometimes of three cases. Thus the eight cases of the dual have among
them only three endings; in the plural the single ending -bhyas does duty
for both dative and ablative; while in the singular the same ending -as appears
for both ablative and genitive in all but the a-declension.
c. The normal endings of cases are the following:
S i n g u l a r : nom. m. f. -s, n. none; voc. of all genders, none; acc. m. f.
-am, n. none; inst, -ä, dat. -e, abl. gen. -as, loc. -i.
Dual: nom. voc.acc. m. f. -3, -au, n. -I, inst, d a t abl. -bhyäm, gen. loc. -os.
Plural: nom. voc. acc. m. f. -as, neut. -»; insL -bhis, d a t abl. -bhyas,
gen. -am, loc. -su.
1 RV. vin. 61 9 ; cp. ahâm sânâ v. 75». the 'hieratic' parts of the R V . ; see BLOOM-
» But while the employment o f the dual FIELD, Johns Hopkins University Circular for
is generally strict, the plural is often used 1905, p. 18 f., OLIPHANT, ibid. p. 22—31.
instead of the dual of natural pairs in
 179

d. A distinction is often made in the stem between strong (or full)

and weak (or reduced) case-forms. It appears in its full development
only in derivative consonant stems, affecting the suffixes -arte1; -an, -man,
-van-, -ant, -mant, -vant; -tar-, -yams; -varns. T h e strong form of the stem
appears in the masculine nom. voc. 2 acc. singular and dual, and in the nom.
voc. plural; and in the neuter nom. voc. acc. plural only. The weak form
of the stem appears in the remaining cases. But in the first four and in
the last of the above suffixes the weak stem which appears before endings
with initial consonant is further weakened before endings with initial vowel.
e. T h e way in which the normal endings are attached to the strong
and the weak stem with accompanying shift of accent, may be illustrated by
the inflexion of the stem ad-ant- 'eating' in the masc.:
Singular: N. ad-an. V. ad-an. A. ad-antam. I. ad-at-a. D. ad-at-i.
Ab. G. ad-at-as. L. ad-at-i.
Dual: N. A. ad-ant-a, -au. V. dd-ant-a, -au. I. D. Ab. ad-ad-bkySm.
G. L. ad-at-os.
Plural: N. ad-ant-as. V. ad-ant-as. A. ad-at-as. I. ad-ad-bhis. D. Ab. ad-
dd-bhyas. G. ad-at-im. L. ad-at-su.
The neuter differs only in the N. A. V. of all numbers: Sing.: N. A. ad-at;
V. dd-at. Du.: N. A. ad-at-i. PI.: N. A. ad-dnt-i.

A. Consonant Stems.
296. Among these stems there are none ending in gutturals 3 and only
two ending in the cerebral d. Those which end in the labials p, bh, m are
fairly numerous. T h e majority end in dentals, the only class of consonants
in which every sound contained in the group (/, th, d, dh, n) is represented.
Of the semivowels, y is represented by one stem, v by three stems, and r
by a large number of stems. There are many stems ending in the sibilants
s, s, s, and several in the breathing h as representative of both a new and
an old palatal.
1. Palatal Stems.
297. 1. Radical stems in -c. — All uncompounded stems (being
of course monosyllabic) are, with very few isolated exceptions, feminine
substantives. T h e exceptions are: tvac- 'skin', otherwise f., occurs twice in
the L. sing, tvad as a m.; arc-, in its only occurrence, I. sing, arc-ii, is a
m. adj. in the sense of 'shining'; and krunc-, 'curlew' (VS.) is a m. sub-
stantive.
Compounds, as being adjectives, are often m.; but excepting those
formed with arte- the only n. is a-prk (from pre- 'mix'), used adverbially.
Compounds ending in -arte4 regularly distinguish strong and weak forms.
This distinction elsewhere appears to a limited extent only in compounds
ending in the three roots vyac- 'extend', vac- 'speak', sac- 'accompany': the
first by nasalization in uru-vydncam5 'far-extending', the other two by
lengthening the radical vowel in several compounds.

1
T h o u g h in origin a r a d i c a l element,
•anc is practically a s u f f i x ; cp. 29S.
' T h e voc. sing., h o w e v e r , generally
a s s u m e s a s o m e w h a t s h o r t e n e d f o r m owing
to t h e accent invariably s h i f t i n g to the
initial syllable in this case.
J T h e gutturals as finals of n o m i n a l stems
h a v i n g b e c o m e t h e new p a l a t a l s c,j't and h*
1 (as distinguished f r o m the old palatals / '
j and A1}.
4 T h e s e c o m p o u n d s f o r m e d with t h e r o o t
anc- will, owing to the peculiar c h a n g e s
\ w h i c h the s t e m u n d e r g o e s , be treated apart
f r o m o t h e r w o r d s e n d i n g in radical c.
' 5 T h r o u g h t h e influence of c o m p o u n d s
f o r m e d with -anc, like praly-aiicam.
12*
180 I. ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4 . VEDIC GRAMMAR.

Inflexion.
T h e forms actually occurring, if made from vdc- f. 'speech', would be
the following:
Sing. : N. V . vdk. A . vacant. I. vàcd. D . vacc. Ab. G. vàcds. L. vari. —
Dual: N. A. V . vdca and vàcau. L vagbhyàm ( V S . ) . — Plur.: N. V. vàc as.
A. vâcas and vacds. L vâgbhis. D. vàgbhyis (VS). A b . vagbhyâs (AV.).
G. vàcâm.
a . T h e forms actually occurring are:
Sing. N. f. fk (AV.) 'stanza', tvdk 'skin', vdk 'speech', s'ik ( A V . VS.)
'flame', sruk 'ladle'; ni-mrûk (AV.) 'sunset', purusa-vdk (VS. xxiv. 33) 'human-
voiced', puro-rûk (TS.vu. 3 . 1 3 ' ) 'forward light", sam-vdk (VS. ix. 12) 'argument'.
— m . krûn (VS. xix. 43) 'curlew'; anrta-vàk (AV.) 'speaking untruth', upa-prk
'adhering to', tri-siik (VS. x x x v m . 22) 'having triple light', yatd-sruk 'extending
the ladle', sàrya-tvak (AV.) 'having a covering (bright) as the sun', hiranya-
tvak 'coated with gold'.
A . f. fcam, tvdeam, rùcatn (VS. TS.) 'lustre', vdcam, sûcam (AV.),
sîcam 'hem', srûcam (AV.); â-slcatn 'oblation', vi-mûcam 'unyoking', sârya-
tvacam. — m . amho-mûcam 'delivering from distress', ddrogha-vàcam 'free
from treacherous speech", kuya-vàcam 'speaking ill', tana-riicam 'brilliant in
person', dhdnarcam 'shining {ream) with booty', puro-ritcam 'shining in front',
madhu-pfcam 'dispensing sweetness', mrdhra-vacam 'speaking injuriously', su-
ri'icam 'shining brightly*, su-vdeam 'very eloquent', sârya-tvacam (Kh. iv. 6-J).
With strengthened stem: uru-vydncam; satya-vâcam 'truth-speaking'; apatya-
sâcam 'accompanied with offspring', abhi-sficam 'accompanying', drona-sâcam.
'clinging to the trough', dhuma-sicam "keeping his place', rati-sacam 'bestowing
gifts'. — n. (adv.) a-pfk 'in a mixed manner'.
I. f. red, tvaci, mrcà 'injury', rued, vaed, sued, sied, srueà ; puro-rùeâ
(VS. x x . 36) 'forward light', su-rùca.—m. ared 'shining'; uru-vydeà, sàrya-tvacâ.
D . f . r i / ( V S . x i i i . 39), tucé 'offspring', tvacé (AV.), rueé, vacé (VS.xxri. 23),
sucé (VS. x x x i x . 1 2 ) ; uru-vyàce (AV.). — m. amho-mùee (TS. 1. 6. 12 3), ûdyata-
sruce 'extending the ladle', yatâ-sruce, visva-suce 'all-enlightening'.
A b . f. tvaeâs, srueds (AV. VS.); ni-mrûcas.
G. f. reds, tvaeds, vaeds-, vi-mucas (napat, V.). — m. puru-rucas 'shining
brightly", su-rûcas.
L . f. tvaeî, vâci, sruc!; â-tùci 'evening', ud-fci 'end', ni-mrùci, vi-vâci
'crying aloud'. — m. tvaci 'skin' (ix. 6 9 I O I ' 6 ) .
V . m. dkrtta-ruk 'possessing unimpaired lustre' (x. 84 4 ).
Du. N. À . V . f. vdeau, sicau; ghrta-pfca 'sprinkling fatness', tanBnïcS.
— With strengthened stem: satya-vdea. — m. krùhcau (VS. x x x . 6);
tanU-ri'tca, yatd-sruca, su-vdca\ sam-pfcau ( V S . ix. 4) 'united'.
I. m. ati-rùgbhyam (VS. x x v . 3) 'fetlocks'.
Pl. N. f. fcas, pfcas 'food', rûcas, vdcas, sicas (AV.), snicas '; a-prcas
'filling' (viii. 409)', divo-ri'uas 'shining from heaven', ni-mrûcas ( A V . VS.),
vi-mûcas (AV.), V . bhadra-vacas 'speaking auspiciously'. — m. dudhrd-vacas
'speaking confusedly", yatd-srucas, vasu-rucas 'bright as the Vasus', vi-pf-cas
(VS. x i x . 1 1 ) 'parted', vi-vacas, sam-sicas ( A V . ) 'shedding together', sam-prcas
(VS. x i x . 11), su-rûcas, su-vdeas, sakid-vàcas 'uttering good speech', V . sBrya-
tvacas. — With strengthened stem: abhi-sdeas, dyajtia-sacas 'not performing
sacrifice', drogha-vdeas 'speaking maliciously', V . nr-sacas 'befriending men',

1 A V . once (xix. 42») with wrong accent I ' According to BR., infinitive of a-prc-
srucas. \ 'satiate oneself.
 I8I

ranya-vAcas ' s p e a k i n g a g r e e a b l y ' , rayi-sAcas 'possessing wealth', ritt-sAcas,

satya-vAcas, smdd-rati-sacas ' a t t e n d e d by l i b e r a l men', kari-sAcas 'occupied
with the t a w n y ( S o m a ) ' .
A . f. rucas, vicas a n d ( o n c e ) vacas, sucas ( A V . ) , slcas (AV.), srucas
a n d ( o n c e ) srucas ( A V . ) ; dur-vAcas ( A V . ) ' h a v i n g a b a d voice', mrdhra-vllcas.
su-rucas. — m . art-rcas 'hymnless', a-rucas 'lustreless', mrdhra-vacas, vadhri-
vacas ' t a l k i n g idly', vi-vacas.
I. f. rgbhis. — D . f. srugbhyds ( V S . n. i). — A b . f. rgbhyds ( A V . ) —
G . f. rcAm, tvacAm ( A V . ) ; madhu-pj-cam ( A V . ) .
298. S t e m s in -ahc. A c o n s i d e r a b l e n u m b e r of c o m p o u n d s is f o r m e d
b y a d d i n g a s final m e m b e r the root aiic- ' b e n d ' , which almost a s s u m e s the
c h a r a c t e r of a s u f f i x 1 expressing t h e m e a n i n g of ' - w a r d ' ; e. g. prAhc- (=pra-ahc-)
'for-ward'. S t r o n g and w e a k forms a r e r e g u l a r l y distinguished, the n a s a l
w h i c h a p p e a r s in the former b e i n g a l w a y s lost in the latter. If -aiic is
p r e c e d e d by a w o r d e n d i n g in i or u, the s y l l a b l e s ya a n d va thus p r o d u c e d
a r e further w e a k e n e d to t a n d a b e f o r e v o w e l e n d i n g s , a n d if bearing the a c c e n t ,
shift it to those e n d i n g s 2 ; e. g . Sing. A . m. pratyancam, N. n. pratyak, G. prattcds.
In these compounds -anc is added to words ending in 1. a, with which it coalesces :
adharaiic- 'tending downward' ( d d h a r a - ) i , dpanc- 'backward' (apa), arvanc- 'hitherward'
[arva-X avdtic- 'downward' (ava), asmatraiic- 'turned toward us', gJtftaiie-4 'filled with
ghee' {ghrta-), devahc- 'directed toward the gods' (drua-), piratic- 'turned away' (para),
praitc- 'forward' (pro), visvanc- 'universal' (vihia-) 5, satrahc- 'going together' (sa/ra)
2. : akudhryahc- 7 'going nowhere' (aku-dhri-), asmadryahc- 'turned towards us' (asmad-ri-j 7,
udahc-8 'turned upward' (ud), kadryanc- 7 (turned towards what' (tad-), (iryaiic- 'going
across' (//«-) 9, dadkyaru- 'sprinkling curds' (dadhi-), devadryatic- 7 'turned towards the gods'
(drua-), nyaitc- 'turned down' («»), pratyaiic- 'turned towards' (Jrrati), madryaiic-7 'turned
towards me' (mad-ri-), vifvadryahc• 'going everywhere' (vifu-a-dri-), svityaiic• 'whitish'
(ivil-i-\ sadhryaSic-1 'coming together' (sa-dhrt- 'the same goal'), samyaiic- 'going together'
(sam-i-). 3. -«: anvdhc- 'going after' (artu), fjvaiic- 'moving straight forward' (rju-), vifvatic-
•going in all directions' (vifu-), svdnc- 'going well' (su). The two feminines puruc-i-
'abundant' and uruc-t- 'far-reaching' presuppose similar stems (*puru-ahc• and *uru-dhc-).

Inflexion.
2gg. T h e s e stems a r e inflected in the m. a n d n. only, a s they f o r m a
f. in -l from the w e a k or c o n t r a c t e d stem, e. g. praiic-, f. prAc-X-; pratyaiic-,
f. pratic-i-. T h e o n l y c a s e s occurring in the pi. a r e the N. A . a n d in the
du. the N. A. a n d L .
T h e forms a c t u a l l y found, if m a d e from pratyaiic-, w o u l d b e a s f o l l o w s :
S i n g . N. m. pratyati, n. pratyak. A . m . pratyancam. I. praticA. D. pratTce.
Ab. G. pratlcds. L . pratlci. — D u . N. A . m . pratyancS, pratyahcau (AV.),
n. pratlci. L. m. pratlcos. — PI. N. m. pratydhcas. A . m. prattcds a n d
praticas (AV.).
a. T h e forms a c t u a l l y o c c u r r i n g a r e the following:
Sing. N. m . adharAh ( A V . ) , apart, arvAn, avail ( T S . m . 2 . 5 3 ) , udait ( A V . ) ,

« Cp. W H I T N E Y 4 0 7 ; LINDNER, Nominal-] 6 The f. narde-i- (AV.), X . of a plant, is

bildung, Addenda p. 167, prefers to treat j doubtless based on a similar stem formed
• aiic as a suffix. I from tiara- 'man', with shift of accent.
> The accent is similarly shifted to the 7 The suffix -ri- in these compounds
suffix -I with which the f. of these stems is \ perhaps spread from sadhri-anc- (the dh also
formed (cp. 86 B II, p. 87)). This rule of lo akudhrydftc-), while the d of dcva-dryanc•
accentuation applies to the RV. only, not to and visvadryahc- may be due to the pro-
the later SamhitSs; cp. A. pi. below (p. 182). nominal forms mad- and asmdd-.
3 With shifted accent. j 8 The weak stem udic- being formed as
4 In this and some other of these com-1 if from *ud-i-aiic-.
pounds only the weak unnasalized form of 9 tiri- appearing instead of tiras- 'across'
the stem occurs. from which the weak stem tirdsc- (= tirds-ac-)
5 With shift of accent. is formed.
182 I. ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4 . VEDIC GRAMMAR.

tiryan (AV.), dadhyannyan, pdrUn (AV.), pratydhprim, visvafl, sadhryhn

(AV.), su-prdn. — n . Nearly all the following forms are used adverbially:
akudhryak, adhardk (AV.), dpak, arvak and arvdk (AV.), asmadryak, udak,
tiryak (AV.), rtyak, pdrak (AV.), pratydk, prtik, madryak, visvak, visvadryak,
sadhryak, samydk3.
A. m . adhardhcam (AV.), anvdiicam (AV.), apahcam (AV.), arvdncam,
udahcam, tirydiicam (VS. x. 8), nyancam, pdrahcam (AV.), pratydncam,
prdncam, madryancatn, visvancam, satnydiicam, svdncam.
I. m. arvdca. — n. dtvadrica, satrdca; used adverbially with shifted
accent: tirascd, «fir«', pracd4.
D. m. dadhlcc, svitice. — Ab. m. pratTcas. — G. m. dadhuas, visvdcas5.
— L. m. prdci.
Du. N. A. m. apaiicau (AV.), arvdnca and arvdhcau (AV.), visvaiicau
(AV.), sadhryanca, samydnca and samyahcau (AV. VS.). — n . pratici, satnlci
(VS. 1. 31, TS. iv. 1. 3 s). — L. m. visucos.
PI. N. m . adhanincas (AV.), dpaiicas (AV.), arvdncasb, asmatrdncas,
asmadryaricas, udancas, rjudncas, tirydficas (AV.), pdraficas, pratydhcas,
praiicas, vtsvancas, svitydhcas7, sadhryaficas, samydncas, svdhcas.
A. m. adhardcas, anucds and arnicas (AV.), dpacas, arvdcas, dvacas,
udicas, (AV.), paracas, pratTcas and praiicas (AV.), prdcas, visBcas,
satrdcas.
300. Radical stem in -cA. — Only one stem ending in ch, which occurs
in a single form as a noun, has been found. This is made from the root
prcch- 'ask', in the compound N. du. m. bandhu-pfcch-a 'asking after kinsmen'.
The D. and A. of the same stem also appear as infinitives in the forms
prcchc 'to ask', sam-pfccfu 'to greet'; vi-pfccham and sam-pfccham 'to ask'.
301. Stems in radical -y. — These stems are inflected in all three
genders alike. The neuter would of course differ in N. A. V. dual and plural,
but these forms do not occur. When uncompounded these stems are
f. substantives except yi'ij- and rdj-, which appear as m. also; bhrdj-, which
occurs as a m. adj. as well as a f. substantive; dj-, which is found once
(AV.) 8 , and vij- twice as a m. only. Neuter cases occur from bhij-, yuj-,
raj- and vrj- as final members of adj. compounds, but no distinctively
neuter forms (N. A.V. du. pi.) are met with even here.
The only stem showing traces of the distinction of strong and weak
cases is yuj-, which has the nasalized form yi'mj- beside the unaltered stem
in the N. A. sing, and du.
In the N. sing, the /, when derived from a guttural, appears as k, but
when it represents an old palatal, it becomes the cerebral t except in rtv-ij1
'priest'; but before the -su of the L. pi. both alike 10 become k.

1
On the d o u b l i n g of t h e n b e f o r e vowels, 6 The weak f o r m arvara,s s e e m s to b e
s e e LANMAN 456. used for arvaiicas in VII. 48*.
1
» pratyank- before s- in TS. I. 8. 21 . 7 A transition f o r m , N . m. svificayas (x.46" 1
3 The forms tvadrik, madrik axi&madryadrik, = ivityahcas, is m a d e f r o m an »- stem
yuvadrii, ' t o w a r d s thee, — m e , -— y o u ' , are svitld- based on the regular f. hiil'id-.
8
d o u b t l e s s s h o r t e n e d f o r m s of -dryak, w h i c h In A V . x i x . 50 5 , w h e r e t h e r e a d i n g
p r o n u n c i a t i o n is f a v o u r e d by t h e m e t r e in a.jam is s o m e w h a t d o u b t f u l ; s e e W H I T N E Y ' S
s o m e i n s t a n c e s : LANMAN 456 ( b o t t o m ) . note.
4 prica is p r o b a b l y u s e d a d v e r b i a l l y in 9 W h i c h is d e r i v e d f r o m yaj- 'sacrifice' :
III. 3 1 5 also. A s an adj. t h e f o r m , b e i n g a j-tu-ij- ' s a c r i f i c i n g in due s e a s o n ' .
c o m p o u n d , w o u l d be a c c e n t e d prdca. See a b o v e 34, 1.
5 N . of a d e m o n , f o r m e d w i t h -a/V, f r o m
vtfva-, an extension oivifu-, as in visva-dryatic-.
 I83

Inflexion.
302. Sing. N. 1. with -k: m. yun1 (VS. x. 25) 'associate'; a-bhuk 'not
having enjoyed', ardha-bhdk (AV.) 'sharer', rta-yuk 'duly harnessed', rtv-ik
'priest', ghrtd-nirnik 'having a garment of fat', candrd-nirnik 'having a brilliant
garment', para-vfk 'outcast', bhi-sdk2 'healing', sata-bhisak (AV.) 'requiring
a hundred physicians', sam-vfk 'overpowering', sa-vuk 'companion', hiranya-
srak (AV.) 'having a golden garland'.— f. firk (VS. iv. 10) 'vigour', nir-nik3
'bright garment', hiranya-nirnik. — n. N. A . sv-d-vrk 'easily acquired', su-yuk
'well-joined' (adv.).
2. with -t: m. bArdt* 'shining*, rdt 'king'; eka-rdt 'monarch', jana-rdt
(VS. v. 24) 'lord of men', vane-rat 'shining in a wood', vi-bhrdt 'resplendent',
vi-rdt 'ruling far and wide', visva-bhrdt 'all-illuminating' ; satra-rdt (VS. v. 2/
'king of a Soma sacrifice', sam-rdt 'universal ruler', sarva-rdt (VS. v. 24)
'ruler of all', sva-rdt 'self-ruler'. — With anomalous loss of the final of the
root and retention of the N. -s: dva-yiss (1. 1625), a priest who offers the
share of the oblation (ava-ydj'-).— f. rdt 'mistress'; vi-rdt.— With anomalous
loss of the final of the root (yaj-) and retention of the N. -s: ava-yds6
'share of the sacrificial oblation' (1. 173'*).
A. m. djarn (AV.) 'driver', yuhjam7, yujam; rtv-ljam, jyestha-rdjam
'sovereign', tri-bhujam (AV.) 'threefold', deva-yajam (VS. 1. 17) 'sacrificing to
the gods', parS-tfjam, puskara-srajam (VS. 11. 33) 'wearing a lotus wreath',
parva-bhdjam 'first sharer', prtandjam 'rushing {-ajatn) to battle', praihama-
bhdjam 'receiving the first share', prstar-yujam 'yoking early', bhi-sajam (VS.
X X V I I I . 9), yuva-yujam 'yoked by both of you', ratha-yi'ijam 'yoking to a chariot',
vi-rdjam, saphi-rujam 'destroying with hoofs', satya-yajam 'worshipping truly',
sam-rdjam, sa-yujam, su-tydjam 'easily letting loose', su-ydjam 'worshipping
well', su-yujam 'well-yoked', su-srajam (AV.) 'wearing a beautiful garland',
sva-rdjam, sva-vfjam 'appropriating to oneself. — f. nrjam, tujarn 'offspring',
bhujam 'enjoyment, bhrdjam (VS.rv. 17) 'splendour', srdjam 'garland'; upa-
spijam8 (x. 88 l8 ) 'emulation', nir-nijam, pari-ijjam 'avoiding', pra-yujam
(VS. xi. 66) 'impulse', mano-yujam 'yoked by thought', vi-rdjam, sahasra-
nirtiijam 'having a thousand adornments', sva-rdjam (AV.J.
I. m . yujd\ bhi-saja (VS. AV.), mano-yuja, vaco-yuja 'yoked by a mere
word', sa-yuja (AV.), sahasra-nirnija, su-ydja (VS. TS.) 'good sacrifice',
su-yuja. — f. Urjd, tujd, bhrajd 'lustre'; nir-nija, mano-yuja (AV.), vi-rdja. —
n. sratra-bhdja 'strengthening'.
D . m . yuje (AV.); mrtd-bhraje'' (AV.) 'whose virility is dead', rakso-yuje
'associated with demons', vi-rdje (VS. AV.), sam-rdje, sva-rdjel°. — f. Urji,\
tujt!1bhuji; nir-nije. — A b . m. yujds; vi-rdjas. — f. nir-nijas.
G. m. sam-rdjas, sva-rdjas. — f. Drjds, bhrajas 12 (AV.) 'virility', yujds;
pra-yujas 'team', ratna-bkdjas 'dispensing gifts', vi-rdjas (AV.) — n. sva-rdjas.

1 F o r y u n k \ c p . V P r . i v . 104. | 7 S t r o n g f o r m (301).
' P r o b a b l y ' o n e w h o c o n j u r e s ' , c p . in t h e 8 A c c o r d i n g to S s y a n a , used adverbially
later l a n g u a g e , abhi-sajali ' u t t e r s a n i m p r e - in t h e s e n s e o f ' e m u l o u s l y ' .
c a t i o n ' ; c p . BRUGMANN, G r u n d r i s s 2, p . 8, 9 bhraj- i s p r o b a b l y a r e d u c e d f o r m o f
b o t t o m ; UHLENBECK, E t y m o l o g i s c h e s W o r - bhraj-: cp. t h e later m e a n i n g o f tejas-
t e r b u c h , r e j e c t s this e t y m o l o g y in f a v o u r 'lustre'.
o f a d e r i v a t i o n c o n n e c t e d w i t h A v . -bis \ 1 0 T h e r e is a l s o t h e t r a n s f e r f o r m bhrajaya
'healing'. ( V S . VIII. 40) ' f o r t h e b r i g h t o n e ' .
3 F r o m nir-ntj- ' w a s h out'. i ' T h e r e is a l s o t h e t r a n s f e r f o r m tujayt
4 There is also the t r a n s i t i o n f o r m (v. 4Ö7) from luj-i-.
bhrajas (lX. 1703). " P r o b a b l y a r e d u c e d form o f bhr';-
5 S e e LANMAN 463. 'lustre'. C p . W H I T N E Y o n A V . VIL 9 0 ' .
6 S e e a b o v e 6 6 c ^ (p. 61).
 I. ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. VEDIC GRAMMAR.

L . m . asva-nirniji 'adorned with horses'. — f. sam-sfji 'collision'.

V. m. ghjta-nirnik, sam-rat.
Du. N. A. V. m. yuiijayuja \ rtv-ijs, tanU-tyaja 'risking one's life',
puru-bhuja (V.) 'enjoying much', puskara-sraja, prStar-yuji, brahma-yuja
'harnessed by prayer", bhi-sdja, mano-yuja (VS. AV.), vaco-yuja, sam-rdja,
sa-yuja, sakam-yufa 'joined together", su-yuja; anU-vjjau (AV.) a part of the
body near the ribs, ajma-rijau 'ruling over wealth' {apna- = apnas), bhi-sajau
(V.), sam-rijau, sa-yujau (AV.), su-yt'ijau (AV.). — f. asva-yujau (AV.)
'harnessing horses'.
D. m. bhi-sagbhyam (AV.). — G. m. sam-rdjos.
PI. N. m. yujas\ a-yujas (AV.) 'joining on', rtv-ljas, V. rtv-ijas (AV.),
krta-dhvajas 'furnished with banners', giri-bhrajas1 'glittering on the mountains',
ghrta-nirnijas, tanu-tyajas, divi-yajas 'worshipping in heaven', dur-yujas
'difficult to be yoked', nih-sfjas 'pouring out', pitu-bhdjas 'enjoying food',
pUrva-bhdjas, prtanijas {-ajas), pra-yujas (AV.), brahma-yujas, bhi-sdjas, mano-
yi'/jas, mitra-yujas 'joined in friendship', ratha-yujas, varsa-nirnijas 'clothed
with rain', vama-bhAjas 'partaking of goods', viha-sfjas (AV.) 'all-creating 1 ,
sam-rdjas, V. sam-rajas, su-yujas, sva-yujas 'allies', sva-rfijas, harita-srajas (AV.)
'wearing yellow garlands'. — f. lirjas, tujas, bhujas\ abhi-yujas 'assailants',
go-bhfijas 'bestowing cows', rtir-nijas, prksa-prayajas 'in which oblations begin
to be offered', pra-yujas, vi-rdjas (VS. XVII. 3), stana-bhujas J 'enjoying the
udder', sv-S-yujas 'easy to yoke'.
A . m. vijas 'stakes' (at play); adhi-nirnijas 'covered over', asva-yujas,
catur-yujas 'yoked as (a team of) four', sapha-rujas, sa-y'/jas, su-yujas. —
f. tujas, bhujas, srajas; abhi-yujas.
I. m . aruna-yugbhis 'furnished with ruddy (rays)', rta-yugbhis, vi-yugbhis4
(AV.), su-yi'tgbhis, sva-yugbhis.
D. f. pra-yugbhyas (VS.xxx.8) 'impulses'. — Ab. m. bhi-sagbhyas (AV.) —
G. m. rtv-ijam, bhi-sajam. — f. ftrj&m, bhujAm; nir-majam5. — L. f. sraksu;
pra-yaksu (AV.) 'offerings'6.
303. Stems in derivative -j. — There are seven m. and f. adjectives
or substantives formed with the suffixes -aj and -ij\ a-svapnaj- 'sleepless',
trsnaj- 'thirsty', dhrsdj- 'bold', sanaj- 'old'; us'-ij 'desiring', bhur-ij- f. 'arm',
van-ij- m. 'trader'. There is also the n. asrj-? 'blood', which is of obscure
etymology, but the -j of which is probably a reduced suffix The forms
occurring are the following:
Sing. N. m. usik, vanik. — n. asrk. — A. m. usijam, trsndjam, rantjam
(AV.) — I. usija (VS. xv. 6) 'ghee'. — D. m. trsnaje, vanije. — G. m. us'i/as.
Du. N. f. sanaja. — G. f. bhurijos. — L. f. bhurtjos.
PI. N. m. usijas, trsnajas, d-trsnajas, dhrsajas, d-svapnajas. — f. usljas. —
A. m. usljas. — I. m. usigbhis. — D. m. usigbhyas. — G. usijam.
2. Cerebral Stems.
304. There is only one doubtful derivative stem in -t, raghat-, which
occurs in the single form raghdtas ( A V . VIII. possibly a mistake for
raghavas8 'swift'.
1 Strong form (301). 6 T h e corresponding form is pra-ydisu in

* Occurring once (x. 68 1 ), bhraj- being a T S . iv. 1. 8 ' and V S . x x v u . 14.

reduced form of bhraj--, c p . D . m . mfta-bhraje, 7 Cp. BRUGMANN, Grundriss 2, p. 559,
G. f. bhrajas (AV.); cp. p. 183, notes 9 and 560.
3 T h e Pada text reads stana-bhujas. 8 S e e LANMAN 4 6 6 , a n d WHITNEY, n o t e
4 See WHITNEY'S note on A V . vii. 4«. on A V . v i u . 7*4.
5 A word of doubtful derivation and
meaning, occurring only once (VIII. 4 20 ).
 VL DECLENSION. NOUNS. CONSONANT STEMS.

There are besides only two radical stems ending in -d, id-1 'praise',
and id-* 'refreshment'. Of the former occurs only the sing. I. Tdfl; of the
latter only the sing. I. ida and the G. idas \

3. Dental Stems.
305. Stems ending in all the dental mutes as well as the nasal are of
frequent occurrence except those in -th. There are radical stems ending in
each of the dentals, but no derivative stems in -th or -dh. The distinction
of strong and weak appears with slight exceptions only in the derivative
stems in -ant and -an.
306. Stems in radical -t. — The only four monosyllabic stems occurring
are feminine substantives: dyut- 'splendour", nft- 'dancing', ///- 'battle', vft-*
'hostile array'. There are also two reduplicated stems, which are primarily
adjectives: cikit- 'knowing' (Ycit-) and didyi'tt- 'shining*. The rest are com-
pounds, used mostly in the masculine or feminine. Neuter cases occur from
only four of them: aksi-pat- 'falling into the eye', an-apd-vrt- 'not turning
away', tri-vft- 'three-fold', sam-yat-5 'continuous'.
Inflexion.
The forms occurring would, if made from tri-vft-, be as follows:
Sing. N. m. f. tri-vft (also n.). — A. m. f. tri-vftam. — I. m. f. tri-vfta
(also n.). — D. m. f. tri-vfte. — Ab. G. m. f. tri-vftas. — L . n. tri-vfti (AV.).
Du. N. A . m. f. tri-vfta, tri-vftau. — L . f. tri-vftos.
PI. N. A . m. f. tri-vftas. — I. n. tri-vfdbhis (AV.). — G. m. f. tri-vftam.
— L . f. tri-vftsu. — V . m. f. tri-vrtas.
The forms actually ocurring are the following:
Sing. N. m. ana^vft 'not returning', abandhu-krtb (AV.) 'not cutting off
kin', eka-rft (AV.) 'one-fold', 'simple', cikit 'knowing', tri-vft (VS. x. 10) 'triple',
pra-vft (VS. xv. 9), manas-cit 'thinking in the mind', mala-kft (AV.) 'cutting
roots', vipai-cit 'inspired', vi-vft (VS.xv.9), visO-vft 'rolling in various directions',
sa-vft (VS. xv. 9), su-vft 'turning well'. — f. cit (VS.1v.19) 'thought'; apa-cit
(AV.) a noxious insect, didyut 'shining', vi-dyut 'flashing*. — n. eka-vft (AV.),
tri-vft-. as adv. aksi-pat 'a little' and anapn-vrt 'unremittingly'.
A . m. a-citam 'unthinking', eka-vftam (AV.), ghrta-scutam 'sprinkling
ghee', tri-vftam, dui-citam (AV.) 'thinking evil', madhu-scutam 'distilling
sweetness', vipas-citam, visu-vftam, su-vftam, huras-citam 'plotting deceit*. —
f. dyi'Uam, vftam-, i-vftam 'turning home', ghrta-scutam, vi-cftam 'loosening',
vi-dyutam, vipas-citam, sam-yatam, sam-vftam (AV.) 'approach', sam-cftam
'union'.
I. m. tri-vfta, vipas'-cita (VS. iv. 32), su-vfta. — f. dyuti, vrtd; a-cita
'attention', ghrta-scutu, tri-vfta, pra-cata 'with concealment' (adv.), vi-dyuta.—
n. sam-ydta, tri-vfta (AV.).
D . m. a-cite, tri-vfte (VS. xv. 9), pra-vfte (VS. xv. 9), vipas-cite, vi-vfte
(VS. xv. 9), sa-vfte (VS. xv. 9), su-dyute. — f. vi-dyute.
Ab. m. tri-vftas (VS. xin. 54), vi-dyutasi. — f. didyutas.
1
Cp. above 17, 5. | 5 From yat- 'unite'.
' Derived from is- 'refreshment' which 6 From kf-i- 'cut'; but it may be 'not
is of very frequent occurrence; cp. above relative-making' {kf-i); see WHITNEY'S note
p. 35, note ! on A V . iv. 19".
3 This form is regarded by GRASSMANN in 7 The Ab. didyot (TS. I. 8. 1 4 1 ) and vidyit
one passage (VH. 47') as an A . pi.: cp. (VS. XX. 2) are probably irregular formations
LA.NMAN 4 6 6 . d u e t o p a r a l l e l i s m ; c p . LANMAN 468.
4 vft- occurs once in the dual as a fem. ad-
jective.
i86 I. ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4 . VEDIC GRAMMAR.

G . m . tri-iftas, vipas-cltas, sa-citas 'wise', su-dyiitas 'shining beautifully'. —

f. vi-dyutas. — L . n. tri-vrti (AV.).
D u . N . A . V . m . vipas-cita (V.), isu-kfta1 (1.184 3 ). — f. vrtau\ a-zfts,
madhu-scuta, vi-crtau (AV.). — L . f. vi-crtos (AV.).
PI. N . m . S-vrtas, rsti-vidyutas 'glittering with spears', eka-vftas (AV.),
ghrta-scutas, dus-citas (AV.), vi-dyutas, vipas-citas, sam-ydtas, sBrya-svitas
'bright as the sun', svd-vidyutas 'self-lightning', hrSdum-vrtas 'bringing hail'. —
V . rsti-vidyutas, vi-dyutas. — N . f. apa-citas (AV.), a-vftas (AV.), upa-vrtas
(VS. AV.) 'return', ghrta-scutas, ghrta-scyutas (VS. xvn. 3), madhu-scutas,
madhu-scyi'Uas (VS. xvn. 3), vi-dyutas, sam-ydtas. — V . dpa-citas (AV.).
A . m . a-citas, a-dyutas 'lacking brightness', ghrta-scutas, vipas-cltas, huras-
citas. — f. nf-tas (AV.), vj-tas\ tri-vftas (AV.), daksina-vrtas, didyutas, puru-
vftas (AV.) 'moving in various ways', madhu-scutas, vi-dyutas, visU-vftas (AV).,
sam-yatas, sam-vrtas (AV.).
I. n. tri-vf-dbhis (AV.). — G . m . vipas-citam. — f. apa-citam (AV.), vi-
dyutam (AV.). — L . f. prtsi'i1.
307. S t e m s in d e t e r m i n a t i v e -t. — Derivative nominal stems are
formed from nearly thirty roots ending in the short vowels i, u and r by
means of the suffix - A T h e roots adding it are i- 'go', kr- 'make', ksi- 'dwell',
gu- 'sound', ci- 'pile', 'note', cyu- 'move', ji- 'conquer', dhr- 'hold', dhvr- 'injure',
pi- 'swell', pru• 'flow', bhr- 'bear', mi- 'fix', yu- 'join' and 'separate', ri- 'flow',
vr- 'cover', s'ri- 'resort', s'ru- 'hear', su- 'press', sr- 'flow', stu- 'praise', spr- 'win',
sru- 'flow', hu• 'sacrifice', hr- 'take', hvr- or hru- 'be crooked'. T w o other
roots, gam- 'go', and han- 'strike', are modified so as to end in short a
(representing the sonant nasal) before adding the suffix: -ga-t and ha-t.
These stems are mostly m. and f. Neuter cases are very rare, occurring
from five or six stems only. The inflexion is exactly the same as that of
the stems in radical -t.
Inflexion.
308. S i n g . N . m . w i t h -krf: anukama-kj-t 'acting according to desire',
abhisti-kft 'giving help', aji-kft 'instituting a contest', Tsina-kft 'acting as
a lord', rsi-krt 'making into a seer', khaja-kj-t 'causing the din of battle',
jyotis-kft 'causing light', tanu-krt 'preserving life', pathi-kft 'path-making',
puru-kf-t 'doing much', pUrva-kf-t (VS. x x . 36) 'active from of old', bhadra-
kft 'bestowing blessings', uloka-kft 'procuring free space', vayas-kf-t 'creating
youthful vigour', varivo-kf-t 'bestowing freedom', vijesa-kft 'procuring victory',
su-kft 'acting well', steya-kft 'committing theft', syona-kj-t 'causing comfort',
svista-kf-t (VS. 11. 9) 'offering right sacrifice'; w i t h -jit', apsu-jit 'con-
quering in the waters', ab-jit 'winning waters', abhimati-jit (VS. x x v u . 3)
'conquering foes', asva-jit 'winning horses', rta-jit (VS. xvn. 83) 'winner of
right', go-jlt 'winning kine', dhana-jit 'winning booty', ranya-jit 'winning in
battle', ratha-jit 'winning chariots', visva-jit 'all-conquering', samsrsta-jlt 'con-
quering combatants', satya-jit (VS. xvn. 83) "winner of truth', satra-jit 'wholly
victorious', samarya-jit 'winning battles', sahasra-jit 'conquering a thousand',
sena-jit (VS. xv. 19) 'conquering armies', svar-jlt 'winning heaven', hiranya-jit
'winning gold'; w i t h o t h e r r o o t s : acyuta-ksit (VS. v. 13) 'dwelling immovably';
acyuta-cyut 'shaking what is firm'; d-dara-srt (AV.) 'not falling into a crack';
a-ksit 'dwelling'; rna-cit 'avenging guilt', rta-cit 'observing sacred order';
1
isu-kfteva here may, however, be a 3 This suffix -t partakes of the character
D. sing, for ifukfte va\ see L A N M A N 468. of a root determinative, as roots in -i-u -f
2 With doable ending once (1. 1294) are hardly ever used without it as nominal
*fisu-fii. I stems.
 V I . DECLENSION. NOUNS. C O N S O N A N T STEMS. 187

kilbisa-sprt 'removing sin'; ksatra-bhf-t (VS. x x v u . 7) 'holder of sway"; carsanT-

dhft 'preserving men'; dirgha-srut 'heard afar', deva-sn'tt (VS. XXXVII. 18)
'heard by the gods'; dhana-spft 'winning booty'; dhruva-ksit (VS. v. 13)
'dwelling firmly'; pari-hrut 'overthrowing'; pata-bhrt (VS. xvm. 21) a kind
of soma vessel; bhira-bhj-t 'bearing a load'; mada-cyut 'reeling with excite-
ment'; madhu-sùt 'emitting sweetness'; yaksa-bhrt 'supporting pursuers' (?),
vajra-bhrt 'wielding a thunderbolt'; vaja-srt 'running for a prize'; sapatna-ksit
(VS. 1. 29) 'destroying rivals'; suparna-cit (VS. x x v u . 45) 'heaped up like the
bird Suparna'; soma-siti 'pressing Soma'; sva-srt 'going one's own way'; havana-
srut 'hearing invocations'. — f. upa-bhrt (VS. 11. 6) 'sacrificial ladle'; upa-mit
'prop'; rta-cft; pari-srùt (VS. xix. 15) 'fermented liquor'; pra'asta-krt 'bestowing
praise'. — N . A . n. visva-jit\ dirgha-srut, nava-gat (AV. TS.) 'first-bearing',
puritàt1 (VS. x x x i x . 9) 'pericardium'; as adverbs: upa-stut 'invoked', dyu-gdt
'going to heaven, sa-kft ('one-making') 'once'.
A . m . adhi-ksitam 'ruler*, adhvara-krtam (VS. 1. 24) 'performing sacrifice',
anio-vrtam 'enclosing the waters', uktha-bhf-tam 'offering verses', uda-pri'ttam
'swimming in water', rna-cyi'itam 'inciting to (fulfil) obligations', carsanl-dhf-tam,
tXvra-sutam 'pressing pungent (juice)', trsu-cyùtam 'moving greedily', dlrgha-
sn'itam, dus-kf-tam 'acting wickedly', dveso-yutam 'removing hostility*, dhana-
jitam (VS. xi. 8), dhana-sprtam, nadi-vrtam 'stream-obstructing', pari-srittam
'flowing around', prstar-jitam 'conquering early', mada-cy'itam, mithu-kj-tam
'fallen into trouble', vayas-kf-tam (VS. 111.18), vaja-jltam (VS. n. 7) 'winning spoil',
sravo-jitam 'winning renown', sam-jltam 'conqueror', satya-dhvftam 'perverting
truth', satra-jltam (VS. xi. 8), sahas-krtam (VS. ill. 18) 'bestowing strength',
sàma-bhrtam 'bringing chants', su-krtam, svar-jltam, svista-kftam (VS. xxi. 47),
havana-srutam, havis-kf-tam 'preparing the oblation'. — f. aram-kf-tam 'making
ready*, upa-prutam 'flowing near*, deva-srutam, ni-yùtam 'team', pari-srutam.
I. m . abhi-jita ( V S . x v . 7) 'victorious', upari-prùtà (VS. vii. 3) 'falling from
above', carsant-dhrta, brahma-krt'J 'offering prayers', soma-sutj. — f. ni-yùt3,
pari-sriita (VS. xix. 83), pari-hvrtd1 (vm. 47 s ) 'deceiving'.
D . m . aram-kfte, dus-kfte, dharma-krte 'establishing order', brahma-kj-te,
su-krte-, ab-jlte, asva-jite, urvam-jitc 'winning fertile fields', go-jite, dhana-jite,
nr-jlte 'conquering men', visva-jlte, satrH-jite, svar-jite\ giri-ksite 'dwelling in
mountains', parvata-cyute 'shaking mountains', soma-bhj-te (VS. v. 1) 'bringing
Soma*.
A b . m . pari-sriitas (VS. xix. 75) 'foaming', brahma-kf-tas, sarva-hùtas
'offered completely'. — f. abhi-hri'ttas 'injurious'.
G . m. carsani-dhftas, vàja-jìtas (VS. ix. 13), vlrya-kftas (VS. x. 25) 'doing
mighty deeds', sam-Jltas, su-kf-tas, havis-kftas. — f. isa-stutas*, deva-sti'ttas
'praising the gods', pari-srutas (AV.).
L. m. mada-cyuti, go-jiti, vasu-jiti (AV.) 'winning goods', sam-dhana-jiti•
(AV.) 'winning booty together*.
V . m . acyuta-cyut, uru-krt 'making wide', rta-cit, khaja-krt, puru-krt,
rana-krt 'causing joy', vandana-irut 'listening to praise', vsja-jit (VS. 11. 7),
sahasra-jit, hàvis-krt (VS 1. 15). — f. upa-bhrt (AV.), ràstra-bhrt (AV.)
"bearing sway'.

• T h e second part of the word may b e 3 isa- = is- 'refreshment', B R . ; but the
derived from tan- 'stretch' like -ga-l- from Pada text reads isah-stutas, and GRASSMANN
gam- 'go'. regards isa = isak (before st-) as G . of is-.
» W i t h anomalous accent; but the form may 4 Instead of *dhana-sam-jiti.
be L. of fari-kvj-ti-, the normal accent of w h i c h
would bepari-hvj-li- ; seeLANMAN 502 (bottom).
i88

D u . N . A . V . m. go-jitn, divi-ksita 'dwelling in the sky", pari-ksita 'dwelling

around', mada-cyi'/ta, su-sri'/ta 'hearing well', havana-sruta, V. pathi-krta (AV.j;
a-dus-krtau, krsna-prutau 'moving in darkness', sa-krtau (AV.J 'acting at once',
sa-ksitau 'dwelling together', su-lftau (AV.), bhadra-kf-tau (AV.), su-srutau
(AV.). — f. ugra-jitau (AV.) 'fierce-conquering' (name of an Apsaras). —
G. f. su-kftos, pari-ksitos.
PI. N . V . m. citas (VS. I. 18) 'heaping up', hrutas 'stumbling-blocks';
with -krt: aram-kf-tas, isana-kftas, karma-kftas (VS. hi. 47) 'skilful in work',
dudhra-kftas 'boisterous', dus-krtas, dhanyH-kj-tas1 'preparing grain', brahma-
kftas, yajna-nis-kj-tas 'preparing the sacrifice', vayas-kj-tas, su-krtas, havis-krtas\
with -cyiit: dhanra-cyutas 'shaking the ground', dhruva-cyutas 'shaking the
immovable', parvata-cyutas, mada-cyutas\ with -its/t: apsu-ksitas 'dwelling in
the waters', upa-ksltas 'dwelling near', vraja-ksitas (VS. x . 4) 'resting in their
station', sa-ksitas-, with other roots: adhva-gatas (AV.) 'travellers', arthetas2
(VS. x. 3) 'swift', uda-prutas, urdhva-cltas (VS. I. 18) 'piling up', krcchre-sr'itas
'undergoing danger', grama-jltas 'conquering troops', carsani-dhrtas, jana-
bhj-tas (VS. x. 4) 'supporting people', divi-sritas (AV.) 'going to heaven', deva-
srutas (VS.vi. 30), dreso-yi'ttas, ni-gutas 'enemies', pari-cltas (VS. xii.46) 'piling
up around', pitu-bhrtas 'bringing food', panm-c'iias (VS. xxvn. 4) 'piling up
first", mano-dhftas 'intelligent', V. vaja-jitas (VS. ix. 9), vi-citas (VS. iv. 24)
'sifting', visva-bhftas (VS. x. 4) 'all-nourishing', satya-srutas 'hearing the truth',
satra-jlias, su-kj-tas (VS. x x x m . 16), su-sruias, soma-sutas, sva-sftas, havana-
srutas. — f. mitas 'posts', stutas 'praises'; uda-prutas, ni-yutas, pari-srutas,
pitu-bhftas, sam-hatas 'layers', sa-srutas 'streaming'. — N . A . n. dirgha-srut 'far-
renowned' appears to be used as a n. pi. in agreement with vrata (via. 2 5' 7 )3.
A . m. hrutas and hrutas4 (AV.); a-pitas 'not swelling', go-jitas, jyotis-
kj-tas, dus-kftas, ni-gutas, mada-eyutas, su-kftas. — f. ritas 'flowing'; upa-stutas
'invocations', dtrgha-srutas, ni-yutas, bali-hftas 'paying tribute', varuna-dhrutas
'deceiving Vamna', vi-sftas 'flowing asunder', sa-srutas.
I . m . soma-sudbhis. — f. antariksa-prudbhis 'floating over the atmosphere',
ni-yudbhis.
D. m. isu-kfdbhyas (VS. xvi. 46) 'arrow-makers', dhanus-kfdbhyas (VS.
xvi. 46) 'bow-makers', pathi-kf-dbhyas, bandhu-ksidbhyas 'dwelling among
kinsmen'. — A b . n. tanB-kf-dbhyas.
G . m . agni-hotra-hutam (AV.) 'offering the oblation to Agni', isu-bhftim
(AV.) 'archers', mantra-kftam 'composers of hymns', su-kftam. — f. abhi-hrutim,
upa-citam (VS. XII. 97) a kind of disease, upa-mitam (AV.), ni-yutam, pari-
mitarn (AV.) 'rafters', prati-mitam (AV.) 'props', ratha-jitam (AV.).
L . m. su-kftsu.

Derivative S t e m s in -vat, -tat, -it, -ut and secondary -t.

309. The following stems are formed with the suffix (1) -vat arva-vat-
f. 'proximity', a-vat- (AV.) f. 'proximity', udvat- f. 'height', ni-vdt- f. 'depth',
para-vat- f. 'distance', pra-vdt- f. 'height', sam-vat- f. 'region'; (2) -tat6:
upara-tat- f. 'vicinity', deva-tat- f. 'divine service', vrka-tdt- f. 'wolfishness',
satyd-tat- f.'reality', san>a-tat- f. 'totality'; (3) -it: tad-it- f. 'contiguous', diz-it-1

1
dhattya-kflas in the Pada text. 5 See above, secondary nominal derivation,
* T h a t is, 'going (i-t) to the goal' 233-
(artha-). 6 Cp. above 2 1 5 a.
3 S e e LANMAN 503 (bottom), and 474 on 7 In this word the suffix -it probably con-
the N. A . pL n. sists of the root i- 'go' with the primary
4 With irregular accent. (determinative) -t (307).
 VL DECLENSION. NOUNS. CONSONANT STEMS. 189

'going to the sky", yos-it- f. 'young woman', roh-it- f. 'red mare', sar-it- f. 'stream',
har-it- f. 'fallow'; (4) -lit: mar-ut- m. 'storm-god'; (5) with secondary -t:
the two neuters yakr-t-1 (AN.) 'liver1, s'akr-t-2 'excrement', and perhaps the
etymologically obscure m. napat3 'descendant', all three of which are supple-
mented in the weak cases by the stems yakan-, sakan- and naptr- respectively.
The inflexion of this group of -t stems is the same as that of the radical
-t stems.
Inflexion.
310. Sing. N. m. taiit, tanU-napat 'son of himself, napat, prd-naput
'great-grandson'. — f. paravat, pravdt, rohit, sarit (VS. xxxrv. 11). — n. ydkrt
(VS. AV.), sdkrt.
A. m. tanU-napatam, ndpatam. — f. arvavatam, parSvatam, pravatam,
yositam, rohitam (AV.), samvatam (AV.).
I. m. divita. — f. udvdta, devdtata4, nivdta, pravdta, satydtata
sarvdtata4, harita.
D. f. devatate. There is also the transfer form avirat-e (from a-vira-ta-
'lack of sons').
Ab. f. arvavatas, udvdtas*, nivatass, paravatas, pravdtas, samvatas. —
G. f. pravdtas.
L. f. arvavati, upardtati, devatati, paravdti, vrkatati.
V. m. tanu-napat, napat6.
Du. N. A. V. m. ndpata. — f. harita. — G. f. haritos.
PI. N. m. napatas, marutas, haritas. — f. avatas (AV.), udvdtas, taditas,
paravatas (AV.), pravdtas, yositas (AV.), sarltas, haritas.
A. m. marutas. — f. udvdtas, nivitas, paravatas, pravdtas, yositas (AV.),
rohitas, samvatas, saritas, haritas.
I. m. marudbhis. — f. pravddbhis. — D. m. marudbhyas.
Ab. m. marudbhyas. — G. m. marutam. — f. pravatam.
Li. m. marutsu. — f. udvatsu, nivdtsu, pravatsu.
V . m. indra-marutas 'O Indra and the Maruts', napatas, marutas.

Participial Stems in -at and -ant

311. Participles in -at are almost limited to the present active form
of stems made with reduplication, viz. those of the third class (457) and ot
intensives (545). The old reduplicated participle (from ga- 'go') jagat- 'going',
'living', is used chiefly as a n. substantive meaning 'the animate world'. The
analogy of these participles is followed by a few others formed from un-
reduplicated stems: dis-at- 'worshipping', s'ds-at- 'instructing*7; also daksat• and
dhaksat-, the aor. participle of dah- 'bum'. A few others, again, originally
participles, having come to be used as substantives, have shifted the accent
to the suffix: vah-at-8 'stream', veh-dt-^ (AV. VS.) f. 'barren cow', vagh-at-10
m. 'sacrificer', srav-at-11 f. 'stream'; like the regular participle sdsc-at- (from
sac- 'accompany'), which as a substantive becomes sasc-at- m. 'pursuer'. In

1 Cp. Lat jecur. 6 Perhaps marut in evaya-marut.

' Cp. BRUGMANN, Grundriss 2, p. 559. 7 L A N M A N 505, would place dasat• 'in-
3 T h e suffix may here have been a pri- juring' here, but there is no evidence, as
mary -/ added to the root pa-: cp. LEU- only a weak case, dasatas G. sing., occurs.
MANN'S etymology (:888), Festgruss an Boht- 8 But vah-ant- 'carrying'.
lingk 77 f.; BRUGMANN 2, p. 366. 9 T h e derivation of this word is obscure.
4 T h e s e forms might be locatives of JO In one or two passages vaghat- still
devatatisalyatati-, sarvdtati-. retains its participial sense.
5 These forms might be A . pi. 1 1 But srav-ant• 'flowing'.
190

this class masculines are frequent, but only about half a dozen neuter forms
occur, and the feminines are limited to three substantives 1 and the adjective
a-sascat 'unequalled' 2 . The inflexion is like that of the radical -t stems, the
accent never shifting to the endings.

Inflexion.
312. Sing. N. m. r. reduplicating class j : cikyat, jdhat, juhvat, dddat,
dddhat, bdpsat (Ybhas-), bibhyat, blbhrat. — 2 . intensives: kdnikradat and
kdnikrat, karikrat (kr- 'do') and (a-)carikrat (AV.), ghanighnat and jdiighanat
( Y Aa/t-), caniicadat ( Yscand-), carkrsat, cAkasat ( \fkas-), cekitat ( \rcit-),
idrbhurat, jiigrat, tdvitvat, dardrat, dedisat, didyat, davidyutat, dodhuvat,
davidhvat, nanadat, nannamat, pamphanat, bhdribhrat, marmrjat, mdrmrsat,
me'myat, rirajat, rerihat, roruvat, vdrlvrjat, v&vadat, vevidat, vevisat, sosucat,
sanisyadat (Ysyand-), s/sidhat. — 3. non-reduplicating verbs: vaghdt,
s'dsat; aor. ddksat and dhdksat. — N. A . n. 1. jdgat, davidyutat, prpis'at,
yoyuvat (AV.). — N . f. vehdt ( A V . VS.).
A . m . 1. a-saicatam (1. 1 1 2 9 ) , dddatam, bibhratam. — 2. kdrikratam (AV.),
ganigmatam, didyatam, ninadatam, panipnatam, roruvatam (AV.). — f. a-sascdtam
(11. 32 3 ); rehdtam (AV.).
I. m . dddats, sosucata. — f. a-sascdta. — n. jdgata (AV.).
D . m. 1. jujosate, juhvate, dddhate, bibhrate, sdscate. — 2. ghanighnate. —
3. vaghate. — n. 1. jagate (AV.).
A b . m. 2. kanikradatas.
G. m. 1. jigatas, dddatas, dadhatas, bapsatas.— 2. jdnghnatas, tdritratas,
dodhatas, vevisatas. — 3. vaghatas, s'risatas, dhdksatas (aor.). — n. i.jdgatas. —
2. a-varvrtatas (AV.), vdvadatas. — L. n. jdgati.
Du. N. A . V . m. a-sascdta, bdpsatS, bibhrata-, tdritrata\ s'asata; dddhatau,
bibhratau. — f. asascata. — G. m. pipratos.
PI. N. m. 1. juhvatas, titratas, dddatas, dadhatas, pipratas, bapsatas,
bibhratas, sisratas4. — 2. kdrikratas, jjgratas, johuvatas, davidhvatas, didhyatas,
dodhatas, nonuvatas, marmrjatas, sosucatas.— 3. dAiatas, vaghatas. — f.a-sascatas,
vahdtas, sravatas.
A . m.i. jdksatas (\rghas:).— 2.jAgratas (AV.), dodhatas (AV.), s'Asvasatas,
sosucatas (AV.). — f. sascatas-, sravatas.
I. m. 2. minadadbhis, popruthadbhis, vavadadbhis, sds'vasadbhis. —
3. vSghadbhis. — G . m . jdgatam, blbhyatam (AV.); vaghdtSm. — f. sravdtam.
V . m. jagatas, vaghatas.
313. Participles in -ant are formed from all present stems (except
those of the reduplicating class and of intensives and the few others that
follow their analogy), from all future stems, and from aorist stems. Their
analogy is followed by rhant- 'weak', pfsant- 'spotted', brhdnt- 'great', rusant-
'brilliant', which have lost their participial function; also by dant-5 m. 'tooth'.
T h e adjective mahdnt- 'great', having lost its original participial meaning
deviates from the participial declension in lengthening the vowel of the suffix
in the strong forms. In the inflexion of this group the distinction between

1 T h e f. of the regular participles is j 5 T h i s w o r d is probably an old pres.

f o r m e d b y the suffix -f. | participle of ad- 'eat', with prehistoric loss
2 But a-saicant-t from siscat-. of the initial a l i k e s-ant- 'being' from as-
3 S e e b e l o w , V e r b , 461. ' b e ' (25, I). T h e K V . has one transfer f o r m ,
4 T h e r e occurs once an anomalous N. pi. N . danta-s (starting from t h e A . dant amy,
with -ant f r o m a reduplicated s t e m : vavydh- the A V . has others, dantas and dantais.

antas. S e e b e l o w , Perfect, 492, note on

vavfdhvams-.
 I9i

s t r o n g and w e a k f o r m s is regularly m a d e , -ant a p p e a r i n g in the f o r m e r

o n l y a n d being r e d u c e d to -at in the latter, which shift the a c c e n t , if resting
on the suffix, to the ending. T h e s e participles are declined in the m.
a n d n. only, as they form a special f. stem in -V. T h e m. a n d n. f o r m s
are the same, e x c e p t o f course in the N. A . ; the former are very f r e q u e n t ,
t h e latter rare.
Inflexion.
3 1 4 . T h e forms occurring, if m a d e f r o m bhavat- 'being', w o u l d b e as
follows:
S i n g . N . m . bhdvati— n. bhavat. — A . m . bhavantam. — I. m . n. bhavata.
— D . bhavate. — A b . m . n. bhdvatas. — G . m . n. bhavatas. — L . bhdvati.
D u . N . A . V . m . bhavanta a n d bhavantau. — n. bhdvati. — D . bhavad-
bhyam. — G . m . n. bhavatos.
PI. N . m . bhavantas. — n. bhavanti. — A . m . bhdvatas. — I. bhdvadbhis.
— D . m. bhavadbhyas. — A b . m . bhavadbhyas. — G . m. n. bhavatam. —
L . m . n. bhavatsu.
F o r m s actually o c c u r r i n g are the following. It is unnecessary to e n u m e r a t e
all the m. N. a n d A . forms, as in the R V . a l o n e 228 forms o f the N. sing.,
1 2 1 o f the A . sing., and 1 6 6 o f the N. pi.-' occur.
S i n g . N . m . E x a m p l e s a r e : arcan, sidan; ghndn, ydn, san-, pdsyan;
icchan; krnvan, sunvan; bhanjan\ j'anan; janayan-, yiiyutsan; karisydn. A l s o
dan, ' t o o t h ' 4 ; mah&n5. — n. anat, dsat6, isnat, ¿jat, /saf, kulayayat, carat,
citayat, trpat, dhrsat, patat, patayat, minat, yat, raghuyat, vardhat, samsat,
siksat, svdyat, sat, sunvat; adj. brhat, mahdt, rusat-, aor. saksat (Ysa^') i
fut. bhavisydt ( A V . ) . A s a d v . with shift of a c c e n t : dravdt 'swiftly' {dru- 'run'),
drahyat 'firmly' (irregular formation from drh- ' b e firm').
A . m . E x a m p l e s a r e : carantam; ydntam, us'antam, s ant am; yudhyantam;
vidhantam-, krnvantam-, prhcantam\ grnantam-, ditsantam-, dantam-, brhantam,
mahtintam.
1. m . a-ghnata, avata, a-sunvata, carats, janata, tujati, pusyatS, bhindatd,
vanusyatd\ data, syava-datd ( A V . ) 'dark-toothed', brhatd, mahati, rusata. —
n. d-drpyata, d-sredhata, a-hedata, isata8, us'ata, gavyatd, tvayatd, dhrsat ft
(adv.), s'ucatd, sravasyata, samaryata, sumnayata-, brhata, mahatd, rusata.
D . m. 1. from s t e m s a c c e n t e d on t h e s u f f i x : avasyati, asvayati,
isayat/, isudhyatS, isUyat/, us'atS, rj'Byate, rtSyat¿t krnvati, gavyati, grnatt,
jurati, janatf, tvayatd, dei'ayate, dvisati, dhiyayate, dhanvatiprnatiprcchate,
brahmanyati\ mahayaU, manavasyat^ yajnayatJ, yat/, vanvatd, vidhate, srnvatd,
sravasyat¿, sakhlyate, sat/, sincat/, sunvat/, stuvat/-, rhat/, brhate, mahat/\
fut. avisyat/. — n. sucat/, sanayat/.
2. from s t e m s a c c e n t e d on t h e radical or t h e penultimate s y l l a b l e :
a-ghnate, a-coddtea-minatc, arcate, arhate, iyaksate, carate, cctate, tarate,

1 On the difference in the form of this f. regarded by BENFEY as N. sing. m. (Göttinger

stem see 201, 377, 455, 461, etc. Nachrichten 1878, p. 190).
1 On the Sandhi of such nominatives see 6 For d-sat ( v n . 1 0 4 " ) ; the Pada reads
LANMAN 506. ¿sat.
3 Lists of the participle stems will be 7 T h e Pada reads ä-ifai (x. 89M).
found below under each of the conjugational 8 Once (iv. 514) with lengthened initial for
classes, under the secondary conjugations, d-sal-5 'not being', also once isa/as(yn. 104 8 );
and under the future. : the Pp. has asatä and asalah. See GRASS-
4 Occurring also in several compounds ] MANN, Wörterbuch, under d-sat.
a-dan 'toothless', e t c . ; ubhayh-dam (KV. v . 19») 9 W r o n g accentuation (in V. 44') f o r
must be emended to -dann. ( a-codaii; see LANMAN 508 (top).
5 mahim in II. 2 4 " , IV. 23', IX. IO97 is ;
192 I. ALLGEMEINES UND S P R A C H E . V E D I C GRAMMAR.

tfsyate, ddsate, pdcate, piplsate, púsyate, yájate, yúdhyate, rájate, risate, vádate,
sámsatc, sdrdhate, sisasatt, háryatc, a-drte1 'toothless'.
Ab. i. m. krnvatás, prnatás, 7<anusyatás; brhatás. — n. brhatás, mahatás.
— 2. m. á-bhuñjatas, á-vadatas, jighämsatas, risatas. — n. d-saías.
G. m. 1. aratlyatás, undatás, us'atás, rghäyatds, rtlyatás, krnvatás,
ksiyatás, grnatás, tujatás, turatás, turanyatás, tväyatds, durhan lyatds, dvisat is,
dhrsatás, pitüyatás, prnatás, brahmanyatás, minatás, misatás, yatds, rudhatás,
vapusyatds, vidhatás, sucatás, satas, saparyatás, sunvatás, stuvatás, huvatás;
brhatás, mahatás; fut. karisyatás.
2. á-ghnatas, d-jüryatas, á-bhuñjatas, árcatas, á-sunvatas, inaksatas,
carotas, cétatas, jáyatas, járatas, jighärpsatas, jijyäsatas, jivatas, tárvatas,
tfsyatas, dldäsatas, drávatas, dhdmatas, dhrdjatas, piyatas, bhásatas, yúdhyatas,
ririksatas, rébhatas, vdyatas, várdhatas, vénatas, sárdhatas, ¿¿catas, sis3satas,
sidatas, hdrsatas; rús'atas.
n. 1. krpayatás, pranatás 2, misatás, yStás, satás; brhatás, mahatás. —
1. Ssatascáratas, bhávatas, vénatas, sisäsatas; rús'atas.
L . m. 1. yatí, sunvati-, mahati. — 2. iráyati, ubhayA-dati (AV.). —
n. 1. mahati. — 2. á-sati.
Du. N. A . V . a) forms in -ä. 1. accented on the suffix: asnánta,
irajydnti, us'dnta, gmántagavydnta, dasasyánta, disdnta, duhánta, pan til,
pundntä, prñcánta, bhujánta, minántü, misánta, yanta, y Anta, vanvántl, vasnay-
antä, väjaydntä, vy-ánta, vrdhánta, srnvánt.l, santa, saparyántü, sumnayantä;
brhdntä, brhantü (V.), mahántil. — 2. accented on the penultimate or ante-
penultimate: d-mardhantä, d-yatantä, árhanta, isdyanta, ksáyantd, cáranta,
codáyanta, jandyantä, járanta, drávanta, dhámanta, paráyantH, pipantä,
mddantä, rddantä, vádants, vápantü, vdhantä, väjdyanta, vénantá, sádanta,
sápantü, sáhantn, sádhantl, háyantü.
b) forms in -au. 1. asnántau, tirántau, yántau, vrdhántau, sántau\
mahántau. — 2. isáyantau, kridantau, ksáyantau, mádantau (AV.), yájantau,
räjantau.
N. A . n. yatí-, brhati. — D. m. mrdayádbhyam-, mahádbhyam. —
G . m. járatos. — n. sam-yatos (AV.) 'going together'.
PI. N. m . From the very numerous forms occurring the following may
be quoted: mádantas; ghnántas, yántas, sántas; pásyantas; icchántas-, bhindantas-,
krnvdntas; grndntas; devayantas, vajayantas; dlpsantasaor. krántas 6,
bhidántas 7; pfsatas (VS. xxiv. 11), mahintas8. — V . usantas; mahantas.—
N . A . n. sánti 9; brhánti (AV. viii. 91), mahánti.
A . M. I. us'atás, rg hayatás, grnatás, tarusyatás, tvüyatás, prnatás,
prtanyatís, bhandanäyatds, manäyatds, yatás, rudatás, vanusyatás, vajayatás,
vidhatás, srnvatás, sravasyatás, srudhlyatás, sakhíyatás, satás, sasatás, stuvatás;
brhatás, mahatás-, datás.
2. á-prnatas, á-prayucchatas, árcatas, ksáyatas, dhävatas, dhrdjatas,
patatas, ráyatas, risatas, rúruksatas (Y ruh-}, vádatas, vrSdhatas, sárdhatas,
sisrpsatas; syüvá-datas (AV.).

« On the accent see 90 B c. The dative I 6 gmántas should perhaps be read for
of ad-int- 'eating', would be ad-aí-é. \ gmánta in I. 122".
J That is, pra-anatás. 7 On the anomalous N. pi. perf. participle,
3 For ásalas according to the Pada text, vavfd,'tantas, see above p. 190, note 4.
4 Aor. participle of gam- 'go'. In one 8 ubhayh-datas in x. 901° is perhaps a

passage (L 122") the Pada reads gmànta-, metrical shortening for •dantas; cp. L A N M A N
the sense seems to require the pi. gmàntas. 509 (bottom). The AV. has the transfer form
S e e LANMAN 5 0 9 . dantas; cp. p. 190, note 5.
5 Desiderative of dabh- 'injure'; cp. LAN- 9 The Pada text reads santi-, see RPr.
KAN 508 (gen. masc.). IX. 2 5 .
 V I . DECLENSION. NOUNS. CONSONANT STEMS. 193

I. m. d-nimisadbhis, a-prayucchadbhis, a-sredhadbhis, usadbhis, citayad-

bhis, tujdyadbhis, devayddbhis, dhAvadbhis, patayadbhis, rJbhadbhis, vddadbhis,
vSjayddbhis, vrdjadbhis, sucddbhis, sucdyadbhis, subhayadbhis, socadbhis;
brhddbhis, mahddbhis, rusadbhis; dadbhis1. — n. sucdyadbhis, stanayadbhis;
brhddbhis, mahddbhis, rusadbhis.
D. m. usddbhyas, ksudhyadbhyas, grnadbhyas, tvayddbhyas, pasyadbhyas,
prayddbhyas, vadadbhyas, vdhadbhyas, sunvddbhyas; brhadbhyas, mahddbhyas\
dadbiy is (AV.). — Ab. m. para-yadbhyas.
G. m. 1. adhvarlyatAm, usatAm, rjUyatAm, grnatAm, ghnatam, jurat Am,
devayatAm, dvisatam, yatAm, yatAm, vanusyatdm, vajayat&m, satruyatim,
srnvatAm, sravasyatAm, sakhTyatam, satim, sasatAm, sunvatAm, stuvatAm,
2
sthatAm , brhatam, mahat Am; datam (AV.). — 2. d-sunvatSm, caratHm,
jay at3m, nrtyatim, pdtatam, vivdsatdm, sardhatam. — n. rathiraydtam 3.
L. m. grndtsu, devaydtsu, patdyatsu, mahatsu. — n. jaryatsu.

Stems in -mant and -vant.

315. As these two suffixes have the same sense, that of 'possessing', and
are inflected exactly alike, the stems formed with them are best treated
together in declension. These stems are used in the m. and n. only*, as
they form a separate f. by adding -T to the weak stem. They are inflected
like the participles in -ant except that they lengthen the vowel of the
suffix in the N. sing. m. and never shift the accent from the suffix to
the ending in the weak cases. Strong and weak forms are as strictly
distinguished as in the -ant stems'. The regular vocative of these stems
ends in -mas and -1ras in the RV., but the AV. has neither 6 in any in-
dependent passage, and the VS. has only bhagavas and patmvas. The RV.
has also three vocatives in -van, and the AV. adds five others; but no voc.
in -man occurs.
Three stems in -vant and one in -mant have case-forms supplementing
the inflexion of stems in -an and forming transitions from the latter declension
to the former. Thus from maghavant- 'bountiful' alone are formed the pi. I.:
maghdvadbhis, D. maghavadbhyas, L. maghdvatsu-, also the N. sing. maghavSn
beside the usual maghdvS from maghdvan-; from sahclvant- the N. sahUvBn
beside sahivS; from yuvant- 'young', the A. n. yuvat beside the N. m. yuva;
from varimant- the I. m. sing, varimati beside forms from variman- 'width' 7 .

Inflexion.
316. Sing. N.m. 1. from stems in -vant: aksanvAn 8, agnivAn, ahgirasvam
annavan, a-pavJravSn, amavan, arvan, asirvan, idavan, isavan, fghavSn,
etAva», kaksivan, ksapAvan and ksdpavan, ghfnTvan, jdnivan, tdpasvan,
tarsyAvan, tdvasvan, tavislvan, tAvan, tuvTravan9, tvdvan, damsdnavan, ddksina-

» T h e AV. (xi. 3i7) has the transfer form
dantais.
2
From the aor. stem sthat- 'standing'.
3 With irregular accent on the suffix in-
stead of the ending, from rathira-yat-.
4 In two or three instances the m. form
seems to b e used for the f., as havismata
(I. 128^) and ralhavate (1. I 2 2 " ) ; see LAN-
MAN 515 (bottom).
5 T h e r e seem, however, to be two or
three instances of a weak form used instead
of a s t r o n g : ksumati (IV. 2' 8 ), A. pi. n.,
Indo-arische Philologie. I. 4.
kratumala (x. 59 1 ), N. du. m., indravatas (IV.
274), N. pi.; see LANMAN 516.
6
In AV. xix. 34 8 the Mss. read bhagavas
which is emended to samabhavas in the
printed text.
7 On the other hand, arvant- 'steed', h a s
two forms representing a transition to the
•an declension: N. arva, A. arvanam.
8
On the Sandhi of these forms, see LAN-
MAN 517.
9 Probably for *tuvi-rava-van.
13
194 I . ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4 . VEDIC GRAMMAR.

van1, datravHn, ddnavan, dAsvan, durhanavan, devavan, devdvan, dyumnav&n,

namasvan, niyutvan, nilavan, payasv3n, pavltravan, pdviravSn, pastyavan,
puramdhivan, pUsanvdn, prajdvSn, prayasvan, pravatvan, prahivan, bhdgavan,
maghavlln, matavan, matsaravan, manasvan, marutvan, mahasvan, maydvSn,
mtihinavan, mehanavan, yasasvan, yitumdvan, rabhasvSn, rasavan, revin,
vajavSn, vajimvan, vivakvdn, vivasvin, vfsanvan, vfsnyavart, sacivan, saradvan,
s'asvan, slpravan, siprintvan, simTvan, sakhivan, sabhivan, sarasvan, sahasvUn,
sahdvan and sahavan, sutdvSn, sUnrtdvan, stavdnsvadhdvati, svddhitlvan,
svarvan, harivan, hitSvan, hemydvan.
2. From stems in -mani: abdimdn, aviman, asdniman, isuman, udanimdn,
rbhumdn, kakudman, krdtuman, garutmSn, goman, tuvisman, tvastrman,
tvisTman, dyumdn, dhrajiman, nadanumdn, parasumdn, pasumdn, pitumdn,
barhisman, madhuman, vasuman, virukman, vrstimdn, saruman, socismati,
susumdn, havisman, hirtman.
N . A . n. I. apasthdvat, amavat, arcivat, dsvavat, dsvavat, atmanvat,
avftvat, iravat, rghavat, ctdvat, ksaitavat, gopdvat, grdbhanavat, ghrtdvat,
candravat, tdvat, tokdvat, tviivat, daksinavat, dyumnavat, dhanavat, dhvas-
manvdt, namasvat, nilavat, nrvat, padvat, pdyasvat, pastykvat, prsadvat,
prajdvat, barhanavat, ydvat, yiivatrdthavat, rasavat, revat, vayunavat,
vayunavat, vdjavat, vipj-kvat, vivasvat, visavat, vlrdvat, satdvat, iaphdvat,
sasvat4, saMsravat, sahasvat, sinavat, svarvat, hiranyavat.
2. abhistimat, rbhumdt, ketumat, kratumat, ksumat, gomat, jyotipnat,
tvisimat, dasrnat, ddnumat, dyumdt, nidhimdt, pasumdt, pitumat, pustimat,
mddhumat, manyumat, yavamat, rayimat, vdsumai, svastimdt.
A . m . X. apidhdnavantam, apBpavantam, arvantam, asvavantam, asthan-
vantam, atmanvantam, indrasvantam5, tirjasvantam, iirnavantam, etdvantam.
enasvantam, djasvantam, omanvantam, omydvantam, kaksivantam, ghrtdvantam,
ddsvantam, devavantatn, dhandvantam, dhivantam, tirvantam, padvantam,
parasvantam, prajdvantam, bhdsvantam, marutvantam, mahisvantam, rdtna-
vantam, revantam, vapdvantam, vaydvantam, vdjavantam, vdravantam, vivas-
vantam, vTrdvantam, vfsanvantam, satavantam, sasvantam, sacandvantam,
sarasvantam, harivantam, hastavantam, hiranyavantam.
2. rbhumantam, kanvamantam, ketumdntam, ksumantam, gomantam,
jyotismantam, tdvislmantam, dyumantam, nidhimantam, pitumantam, bandhu-
maniam, bhanumantam, mddhumantam, vasumantam, vdstmantam, vrstimdntam,
srustimantam, havismantam, hotrmantam.
1. 1. m. drvata, asvavata, udanvata, fkvata, kaksivata, niyiitvata, nnata,
marutnata, yasasvata, revata, visvadevySvata, visUvata, subhrdvata, sdhasvata. —
n. etdvata, candravata, prajdvata, barhanavata, vivasvata, sBnrtdvata, harit-
vata, sdsvata.
2. m. gomata, jyotismatS, divitmata, dyumata, bhrstimdta, varimata6,
vasumata, virukmata, havismata. — n. divitmata, virukmata, havismata-, as
adv. sasvata1.
D . 1. m . drvate, asvavate, kaksivatc, daksinavate 'adroit' and 'bestowing gifts',
datvdte, ddsvate, niyutvate8, pttsanvate, marutvate, mdvate, yuvdvate, rathavate9,
' Representing two words : I. 'dexterous' 6 Transfer form from the -an stem
{daifina- 'right hand'); 2. 'possessing sacri- variman-.
ficai gifts' (dàkfinà-). , 7 See L A N M A N 5 1 8 (bottom).
8
* To be read stävan 'thundering', from Erronously unaccented (1. 1 3 5 1 ) .
\stan--, see GEASSMANN, s. V. I 9 The f. rathavalyai should perhaps be read
J Transfer form from the -a« stem yùvan-. for rathavate in I. 112", as the latter form
4 Also the Amrecjita compound iaivac- agrees with a f. substantive, and the former
chaivat. is favoured by the metre; cp. L A N M A N 5 1 9 .
5 With the N. -s anomalously retained.
 V I . DECLENSION. NOUNS. CONSONANT STEMS. 195

vivásvatc and vhasvate, sácívate, sásvate, sáhasvate, sünrtAvate, svarvate,

hárivate. — n. padváte, reváte, sásvate.
2. m. gómate, cáksusmate, tvíslmate, divitmate, dyumáte, barhismate,
havismate.
A b . 1. m. tvAvatas, vivásvatas, vfsnyBvatas.
G. 1. tn. árvatas, ásvavatas, kaksivatas, jávatas, tvávatas, dadhanvátas1,
dAsvatas, devávatas, dhivatas2, niyútvatas, nrvátas, prajivatas, marútvatas,
mA vatas, mehánavatas, yásasvatas, revátas, váyasvatas, vAjavatas, vivásvatas
and vívasvatas, virávatas, sácívatas, sásvatas, sárasvatas, sáhasvatas, sutAvatas,
súravatas, svadhávatas, hrsivatas. — n. ctAvatas, yAvatas, visüvátas, sásvatas.
2. m. ksumátas, gómalas, dyumátas, havísmatas. — n. gómatas.
L». 1. m . árvati, dáksinavati 'bestowing gifts', nrváti, pastyhvati, yás'as-
vati, vánanvati, vivásvati and vívasvati, saryanAvati. — n. ásvSvatt, símtvati,
svarvati. — 2. m. górnati.
V . m . 1. The normal form in -vas^ occurs in sixteen examples: rstvas,
gnavas4, tavisivas, niyutvas, patrilvas (VS.), bhagavas (VS. TS.), marutvas,
rayivas, vajrivas, viravas, saktlvas, s'acTvas, sarasvas, sahasvas, svadhiivas,
harivas. — Of the later V. ending in -van, the R V . has three examples:
arvan, satavan5, savasavan. In the A V . the following five additional forms
occur: marutvan6, vajinlvan, vrsnyHvan, svadhUvan, harivan6. The MS. has
patnivan 1. — 2. There are six examples of the form in -mas: tuvismas, dyumas,
bhanumas, manturn as, sucismas, havismas. — No vocative form in -man occurs.
Du. N. A. V . m. 1. with -a: áñgirasvanta, ánasvants, árvantü, indra-
vanta, kásivanta, késavanta, dhármavanti, námasvantS, niyútvants, pavítra-
vanta, marútvanta, mitrávárunavantü, vájavanta, vísnuvantü, vyácasvanta,
sáhantil8, sáptlvantü; with -au: asthlvántau, yávantau (AV.), rómanvantau,
sáhasvantau (AV.), V. svádhavantau (AV.). — 2. arcimánta, rbhumánta,
krátumanta9, vadhnmanta.
Ab. 1. m. asthivádbhyüm. — G. 1. m. vajinlvatos, símTvatos, sárasvativatos.
Plur. N. V . m. 1. aksanvántas, ánasvantas, ámavantas, árvantas, ásva-
vantas, asirvantas, ídSvantas, índravantas, índravantas (TS. iv. 7. 14 1 ) árjas-
vantas, enasvantas, kaksivantas, kárnavantas, ghrtávantas, ca.uílavantas,
dáksinavantas 'bestowing gifts', dámanvantas, dúvasvantas (VS. xvi. 63), drávinas-
vantas, dhivantas, námasvantas, niyútvantas, nrvántas, pátnivantas, padvántas,
páyasvantas (VS.xxi. 42), pavitravantas, pijasvanias, pustávantas, püsanvántas,
prajávantas, práyasvantas, pravátvantas, bhágavantas, marútvantas, máhasvantas
(VS.xx1.42), yajñávantas, vacanávantas, váyasvantas (VS.ni. 18), vármanvantas,
vírávantas, vrcivantas, sáktlvantas, sásvantas, simlvantas, sápttvantas, sutá-
vantas, srkávantas (TS. iv. 5. 11 2 ), svadhavantas (V.), svarvantas, himávantas,
hj-sWantas.
2. añjimántas, Ayusmantas (TS.), ísumantas, rstimántas, ksumántas, jyótis-
mantas, tvástrmantas (VS.xxvii.20), tvísTmantas, dyumántas, mádhumantas,
1
' c o n t a i n i n g c u r d s ' ; c p . LANMAN 513. 5 T h e P a d a t e x t r e a d s sala-van; cp. R P r .
A Also t h e A m r e d i t a c o m p o u n d dhfvato- IX. 10.
dhivatas. 6 T h e s e t w o f o r m s o c c u r r i n g in p a s s a g e s

3 E l s e w h e r e t e n v o c a t i v e s in -vas a n d -mas taken from the RV. are substituted for

o c c u r : five f r o m p e r f e c t p a r t i c i p l e s t e m s in marutvas a n d harivas of t h e R V .
•varus: íhia'vas, cikitvas, titirvas, didivas, 7 T h a t is, patnlvam.
8
mujhvas; f o u r f r o m s t e m s e n d i n g in -van-. T h e m y s t e r i o u s f o r m satapanta (x. I06 5 )
flavas, ívayavas, prataritvas, matarisvas; a n d s h o u l d p e r h a p s b e c o r r e c t e d t o satavanta =
pumas f r o m púmáms-. There are also two sata-vantá ?
in -yas f r o m c o m p a r a t i v e s t e m s in -yams: 9 T h e w e a k f o r m krátumala s e e m s t o b e
ojtyas a n d jyayas. u s e d f o r krátumanta in X. 59«.
4 In II. l 5 gnavas s h o u l d p r o b a b l y b e r e a d 10
T h e w e a k f o r m índrávatas s e e m s t o b e
gnavas as a v o c a t i v e . , u s e d f o r índravantas in IV. 27'*.
13*
196 I. ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4. VEDIC GRAMMAR.

mJdhusmantas, ydvamantas, rayimdntas, vadhAmantas, vaslmatitas, s'isumantas,

sthivimdntas, harsumdntas, havismatitas.
N . A . n . 1 .ghrtavSnti. — 2 . pasumAnti. T h e P a d a p a t h a r e a d s -anti1 in t h e s e
forms, and the lengthening o f the v o w e l seems to b e m e t r i c a l 2 . — T h e weak
f o r m ksvmdti ( u s e d w i t h yuthA) seems to be used f o r ksumanti in i v . 2 1 8 .
A. m. 1 . arvatas, ¡ndravatas, rtviyavatas, krsanAvatas, jdnivatas, tdpas-
vatas, trsyAvatas, tvAvatas, nrvdtas, patnivatas, parasvatas ( V S . x x i v . 28) 'wild
asses', pastyhvatas, posyAvatas, prajAvatas, bhangurAvatas, ydsasvatas, yHtumA-
vatas, rdbhasvatas, rayivdtas, revatas, vananvatas, vrcivatas, saryanAvatas,
sasvatas, s'imTvatas, sutAvatas, sUnrtAvatas, htranyavalas, hhasvatas. —
2. rtumatas (VS. xix. 61), gimatas, jyotismatas, dyumatas3, prastimatas,
madhumatas, vadhfimatas, viriikmatas, sunumdtas, svastimatas.
I . 1. m . arvadbhis, dak sin ivadbhis, pdtnlvadbhis, maghdvadbhis4, rdbhas-
vadbhis, revddbhis, vAjavadbhis, sasvadbhis, simivadbhis, sutasomavadbhis. —
n . ghrtdvadbhis. — 2. m . rstimddbhis, kridumadbhis, gomadbhis, barh'is-
madbhis, bhanumadbhis, ? idyunmadbhis, havismadbhis. — n. madhumadbhis.
D . 1. m . duvasvadbhyas ( V S . i x . 3 5 ) , bhagavadbhyas(AV.), maghavadbhyas
mtijavadbhyas ( A V . ) , somavadbhyas (AV.). — 2. m . asimddbhyas (VS.xvi.21),
isumadbhyas ( V S . x v i . 2 2 ) , matrmddbhyas ( A V . ) , yltumidbhyas. — n. vibhu-
madbhyas.
G. m. 1. drvatam, ddksinavatHm, datvatHm ( A V . ) , bhaiigurAvatam, yatumA-
vatHm, sdsvatam, simTvatam, sutAvatam, himdvatam (AV.). — 2 . g¿mat3m ¡AV.).
L. m. 1. dmaratsu, drvatsu, maghavatsu4, yusmAvatsu. — 2. dyumdtsu.

Stems in radical -ih.

317. There a r e o n l y t h r e e s t e m s i n -th\ kdprth-5 n. ' p e n i s ' , path-b m.

p a t h ' , w i t h its c o m p o u n d su-path- 'fair path', and abhi-sndth- adj. 'piercing'.
Among them these three furnish examples o f all the c a s e s in the singular,
but there are no dual forms, and in t h e p l u r a l o n l y t h e A . and G. occur.
Sing. N . kdprt\ A. kdprt'\ I. pathA*, supdthi-, D . pathe (VS.); Ab.
pat has, abhi-sndthas; G. pathdsL. pathi — PI. A . pathdsIO; G. pathAm

Stems in radical -d.

318. About a hundred stems ending in d are made in the form of

compounds ( o n l y s e v e n b e i n g s i m p l e s t e m s ) f r o m t h e t w e n t y r o o t s ad- ' e a t ' , ksad-
'divide', chad- ' c o v e r ' a n d ' p l e a s e ' , pad- 'go', mad- 'be exhilarated', sad- 'sit',
syad- 'move on'; chid- 'cut o f f , nid- 'revile', bhid- 'cleave', vid- 'know', vid-
'find'; ud- 'wet', nud- 'push', mud- 'rejoice', rud- 'weep', sud- 'enjoy', sud-

1 As a l s o i n t h e o n l y N. p i . r . of t h e \ b u t it i s s u f f i x a l if t h e w o r d i s c o n n e c t e d
p r e s e n t p a r t , i n -ant, santi ( 3 1 4 ) . T h e S V . w i t h L a t . caper (cp. U H L E N B E C K , E t y m o -
also has the short ä. l o g i s c h e s W ö r t e r b u c h , s. v . ) . W i t h this
2 Cp. LANMAN 5 2 1 . possible exception there are no derivative
3 In v i . 17M t h e P a d a p i t h a r e a d s dyumata s t e m s in -Ih.
indra a s dvumätah\ G R A S S M A N N e x p l a i n s it 6 T h i s s t e m s u p p l e m e n t s pänlhä- and
a s a D . dyumate a g r e e i n g w i t h räyf. On paihi-.
t h e o t h e r h a n d dyumanta\h\ i n A V . x v i l l . 7 kapftha-m o c c u r s o n c e a s a t r a n s f e r f o r m .
I ;s should probably be emended to 8 O n c e (1. 1299) n a s a l i z e d b e f o r e a v o w e l

dyumatak-, c p . W H I T N E Y ' S n o t e , a n d L A N M A N ,patham a-.

521 4 . 9 O n c e (11. 24) w i t h t h e r a d i c a l v o w e l
4 F o r m s t r a n s f e r r e d f r o m t h e -van d e - , l e n g t h e n e d , pithas.
clension. 10 Accented as a w e a k form.
5 T h e d e r i v a t i o n of t h i s w o r d i s u n c e r t a i n : 1 1 T h e t r a n s f e r f o r m pathm&m a l s o o c c u r s

t h e ' t h i s r a d i c a l if t h e w o r d i s d e r i v e d j i n T S . i v . 2. 55.
f r o m prath- ' e x t e n d ' ( s e e G R A S S M A N N , S. v . ) ; I
 197

'put in order'; trd- 'pierce', mrd- ' c r u s h ' O f these roots only seven occur as
monosyllabic substantives: n!d- 'contempt', bhid- 'destroyer', vid- 'knowledge',
úd- 'wave', múd- 'joy', mrd- 'clay', being f., and pad- 'foot', m. There is also
the monosyllabic n. hj-d- 'heart' 2 .
Strong and weak forms are not distinguished except in pad--, and
the inflexion is the same in all genders except, of course, the N. A. n.
du. and pi.
a . T h e f o l l o w i n g pecularities o r irregularities of this declension are to be noted,
i . T h e w e a k reduplicated present stem dad- of da- ' g i v e ' , is once treated as a root in
the f o r m ayur-dád-am (AV.) 'giving l o n g life*. — 2. T h e vowel of mád- is lengthened
in sadha-mád- 'drinking companion', and soma-m&i- 'intoxicated with S o m a ' , of both of
w h i c h , h o w e v e r , only strong cases occur. T h e vowel of pad- is lengthened not only
in the strong cases, but occasionally in others a l s o : dvipat, N . sing, n., beside dvipát,
D . dviphde.1, L . p l . dvipálsu, while the N . p l . m. is once dvipádas (AV.). — 3 . T h e euphonic
combination is irregular in the I. pi. of pad- which is padbhia4 beside the A b . du. pad-
bhyam. — 4 . T h e stem hrd- is found in w e a k cases o n l y ® . Its place is taken in the
N. A . sing. pi. b y hfd-aya-, which is also used in other cases ( h f d a y a t , hfdayt, hfdayept),
though in the R V . almost entirely in late p a s s a g e s . — 5. T h e r e are a f e w transitions to
the o - d e c l e n s i o n in the inflexion of these stems. Starting from the strong A . pad-am
are f o r m e d the N. sing, p&da-s and the N . p l . /adas, both in late p a s s a g e s of the R V . 6 .
Similarly, starting f r o m the A . sadha-mád-am are formed the locatives sadha-made and
sadha-mhdeju. B e s i d e ttid-ds, the ordinary A b . of nid-, the form rt'niayas occurs once.

Inflexion.
319. The inflexion of these stems is identical with that of the radical
-t stems. The forms actually occurring, if made from pad- 'foot', and -vid-
m. f. n. 'finding', would be as follows:
Sing. N. p i t , -vit. — A . pádam, -vt'dam. — n. -vit. — I. padá, -vida. —
D . padé, -vide. — A b . padás, -vidas. — G . padás, -vidas. — L . padi, -vidi. —
V . (sdrva)-vtt.
Du. N. A. V. pida, m. í -vida. — I . padbhyim. — A b . padbhyim. —
G . pados. — L. pados.
PI. N. pidas, m. f. -vidas. — A . padás, m. f. -vidas. — I. padbhis (AV.),
-vidbhis. — D. -vidbhyas. — G . padám, -vidam. — L . patsu, -vitsu.
a. The forms actually occurring are the following:
Sing. N. m. 1. with lengthened vowel: pad- with its compounds and
sadha-mád-: pit (AV.); a-pát, ¿ka-pat, éka-siti-pat (VS. xxix. 58) 'having one
white foot', cátus-pat, t r i - p i t , dvi-pit and dví-pat (AV.), visvótas-pat, siti-pát
(AV.), sárva-pat (AV.), sahásra-pat; sadha-mit (iv. 2 1 1 ) and the abnormal
sadha-mis 7 (vil. 187).
2. with unchanged vowel, being compounds ending in various roots:
from ad- : agdhit (TS. ill. 3, 8'), karambhit, kravyit, visvit, /¡avyit; from
chad- : prathama-cchát8; from pad- : anu-pát (VS.xv.S) 'coming to pass'; from
chid- : ukha-cchit-, from bhid- : adri-bhit, ud-bhit, gotra-bhit, pür-bhít\ from
lid-: á-ksctra-vit, asva-vit, kratu-vit, ksetra-vit, giltu-vit, go-vit, dravino-vit,

» C o m p o u n d s formed with -vid and -sad 5 Its high grade form -hard occurs in the
are the commonest. N. sing. m.
6
> T h e strong form of this word, hard-, Probably also the A . sing. m. panca-
appears in composition with dus- and su-. padam; s e e LANMAN 4 7 1
A n o t h e r w o r d f o r 'heart', sriid- (Lat. cord-) 7 See above 55.
n. occurs only in the A. sing, with the v e r b s 8 'appearing first', ' t y p i c a l ' ( x . 8 1 1 ) ; accord-
try- and dha-. ing to S i y a n a from chad- ' c o v e r ' = 'covering
3 T h e lengthening here is, h o w e v e r , first'.
metrical.
4 Owing to the confusing influence of the
I. pi. padbhis from pâS- 'look'.
 198 I. ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4. VEDIC GRAMMAR.

nabho-vit, natha-vit (AV.), pasu-vit ( A V . ) , purana-vlt (AV.), praja-vit ( A V . ) ,

rayi-v'it, vaco-v'it, vayuna-vit, varivo-vit, vasu-vit, visva-vit, vlra-vit ( A V . ) ,
sruta-vit, sarva-vlt ( A V . ) , svar-vit, hiranya-vit-, f r o m sad-: adma-sdt, antariksa-
sat, upastha-sat, rta-sat, turanya-sdt, daksina-sat ( V S . XXXVIII. 10), durona-sat,
duvanya-sat, pragharma-sdt, vara-sdt, vyoma-sdt, su-sam-sat; camB-sat, dru-sdt,
nr-sat, vedi-sat, s'uci-sat. A l s o su-hdrt1 ( A V . 11. 7 5 j 'friendly'.
f. 1. a-pat. — 2. a-cchat ( V S . x v . 5), pra-cchat ( V S . x v . 5) 'covering';
sU-yavasfit (-ad); sam-vit; sarn-sat, su-a-sat ( A V . ) 1 .
N. A . n. 1. -pad- appears with both unaltered and lengthened vowel:
dvi-pdt, catus-pat a n d tri-pdt, dvi-p&t, catus-pat.
2. hf-t (TS. iv. 4. 7 2 ); prakala-vit 'knowing very little'; raghu-syat 'moving
quickly' ( Y syad-).
A . m . 1. phdanr, a-piidam, tri-ptidam3, dvi-pAdam ( V S . XIII. 4 7 ) , s'iti-
pftdam ( A V . ) , sahasra-padanr, sadha-mfidam; dur-htirdam ( A V . ) . — 2. f r o m
ad- : kravyAdam, visvAdam\ from pad- : dvi-padam (VS. xxvm. 32) a metre;
from chid: pra-cchidam (VS. xxx. 16) 'cutting to pieces'; from ¿Aid-: ud-bhidam,
gotra-bhidam, pur-bhldam; f r o m w'</- : ahar-vidam, kratu-vidam, ksetra-vidam,
gatu-v'idam, go-vidam, varivo-vidam, vasu-vldam, visva-vidam, saci-vidam, j7'<7r-
7•¡dam, hotra-vldam-, from sad-: garta-sadam, su-sam-sddam; apsu-sddam, dru-
sddam, dhur-sddam, barhi-sadam4, vanar-sadanr, f r o m -syad-: raghu-syddam,
havana-syadam. — f. 2. ttidam5, mf-dam ( V S . x i . 5 5 ; T S . iv. 1. 5 J ) ; ayur-dddam
( A V . ) 6 , upa-sadam, go-vldam ( A V . ) , ni-vidam, pari-pddam 'snare', pari-sadam
( A V . ) , pitr-sadam, barhi-sadam4, vaco-vidam, vifva-vidam, sam-vidam, sam-
sadam, sa-mddam 'battle' ('raging together').
I . m . padti ^; apa-dus-pada, catus-padd, dvi-pada; ksetra-vidd, varivo-vida,
svar-vidi, su-sdda ( A V . ) . — f. mudd, vidii; upa-v'idd, ni-v'tda, tii-sads,
pra-miids ( V S . x x x i x . 9), pra-vida, sam-sdda, svar-vida. — n . hrdd\ cdtus-
pada (AV.), dus-pada, dvi-pada. With adverbial shift of accent: sarva-hrdA.
D . m . a-pdde, kuhacid-vide, kravy&de, catus-pade, tad-vide ( A V . ) ,
.¿¿¿1?, sadanS-sdde, sarva-vide ( A V . ) , svar-vide. — f. nidi!, mude; pitf-sdde,
pra-mdde ( V S . x x x . 8), pra-mude ( V S . x x x . 1 0 ) , sam-pade ( V S . x v . 8). —
n . hrd<!-, catus-pade, dvi-pdde*.
A b . m . padas ( A V . ) ; dvi-padas.— f . nidas9; utt&nd-padas, sam-v'idas
(AV.). — n. htdds; sdt-padas (AV.).
G . m . ¿ka-padas ( A V . ) , dur-hardas ( A V . ) , nr-sadas, yavAdas (-adas),
raghu-syadas ( A V . ) , sitar-vldas. — f . pra-mudas, sam-sddas ( A V . ) . — n . hrdds;
catus-padas, dvi-padas.
L. m. /«<//; svar-vidi. — f . tii-sadi, sam-sadi. — n. hrdi™.
V . m . visva-vit, saraa-vit ( A V . ) .
D u . N . A . V . m . r. pAdd-, padau. — 2. V . ahar-vida, kavi-cchada 'delight-

1 This seems to be the preferable reading 6 From a secondary root dad• formed
(suhirt Una)-, the Pada has su-h&h. Other- from the present stem of da- 'give'.
wise the X. appears as su-htr in MS. IV. 2 5 7 BR. take sada in AV. iv. 4? as I. of
(p. 26, 1. 19) in suhar yah; see LANMAN's sad- 'position', but owing to the accent it
note in WHITNEY'S AV. Translation on xix. must be taken as an adv. 'always', see
4 5 a n d Grammar 150 b. WHITNEY'S note on the passage.
' Perhaps also nisat in A V . XX. 132s- 7, 8 Beside dvi-pade occurring eleven times,

where the edition has vanifad. dvi-pide occurs once (I. 12I J ), when the
3 panca-pada-m (l. 1 6 4 " ) is probably lengthening
a is metrical.
transfer to the o-declension; see LANMAN 9 The transfer form nidayas occurs once.
471*. >° On the possibility of hfdi representing
4 For barhis-fadam; see above 62. an A. sing. n. in two or three passages, see
5 In the Amredita compound nidam- LANMAN 4 7 3 4 .
nidam.
 199

ing in sages', kratu-vida, vasu-vida, visva-vida, svar-vidi*; atma-sddau. —

f. ud-bhida, barhi-sada*; sranta-sadau (AV.).
I . m . padbhydm (AV.). — A b . m . padbhydm. — G . m . pados ( A V . ) \ —
L . m . pados. — f. pra-pados (AV.).
P I . N . V . m . i . a-pddas, cdtus-padas, dvi-padas4, s'iti-pddas$; sadha-
mddas, soma-mddas; su-hdrdas ( A V . ) . — 2 . ftrjadas, puru-sddas, madhv-ddas,
yavasddas, somddas, havir-adas; a-trdas6, V. pra-trdas\ deva-nidas) ud-bhidas;
abhlmoda-mudas (AV.), svSdu-sam-mudas ( A V . ) ; anna-v'tdas (AV.), ahar-vidas,
V . gatu-vidas (AV.), ni-vidas (AV.), ni-vidas (AV.), nithi-vidas, brahma-vidas
( A V . ) , yajur-vidas (AV.), vaco-vidas, varivo-vidas, vasu-vidas, visi>a-vidas
( A V . ) , svar-vidas, hotra-vidas; adma-sadas, antariksa-sadas (AV.), apsu-sadas
( T S . I. 4. i o 1 ) , upa-sddas (AV.), pascat-sadas (VS. IX. 3 6 ) , purah-sddas, sarma-
sddas, sabha-sadas (AV.), svadu-sam-sddas; camB-sadas, divi-sadas (AV.),
dhur-sadas, barhi-sadas, V . barhi-sadas, vanar-sadas, vedi-sadas (VS. II. 2 9 ) ;
raghu-syadas. — f. I. dur-hdrdas ( A V . ) ; nidas, mudas; agha-rudas (AV.),
amddas (-adas), upa-sddas (AV.), nis-pddas, pra-mudas, visva-su-vidas, sam-
sddas, suhutddas (-adas), svar-vidas.
A . m . 7 padas; dur-hdrdas ( A V . ) , su-hdrdas ( A V . ) ; apsu-sadas (AV.),
kravyddas, cdtus-padas (AV.), tva-nidas, deva-tiidas, dvi-padas (AV.), / a r t -
sddas, pastya-sadas, bahu-ksadas, sattra-sadas ( A V . ) . — f. nidas, bhidas;
ni-vidas, pra-mudas, vasu-vidas, vi-nudas, sa-madas, sa-syadas, havya-sttdas.
I . m . padbhis (AV. T S . VS.), patfbhis in R V . and V S . 8 ; gharma-sddbhis,
sata-padbhis. — n. hrdbhis.
D . m . antariksa-sadbhyas (AV.), daksina-sadbhyas (VS. ix. 3 5 ) , divi-
sddbhyas ( A V . TS.), pascat-sadbhyas (VS. ix. 35), pfthivi-sadbhyas (AV.).
G . m . su-hdrdam ( A V . ) ; adma-sddam, catuspadam (VS. T S . AV.),
pddatn, barhi-sadam (VS. x x i v . 1 8 ) , Sva-padam (AV.), su-saddm (AV.). —
f. upa-sadam (VS. x i x . 1 4 ) a kind of ceremony, pari-padam, sranta-sadctm (AV.),
sa-madam.
L . m . patsu. — f. sa-matsu. — n. hftsu.

Stems i n d e r i v a t i v e -(/.

3 2 0 . T h e r e are some six steins formed with suffixal -a', seemingly all
feminines', which with one exception ( s a r d d - ) are of rare occurrence. T h e y
are drsad- and dhrsad- ( R V 1 . ) 'nether millstone', bhasad- 'hind quarters', with
its c o m p o u n d su-bhasad- 'having beautiful buttocks', vanad-IO ( R V 1 . ) 'longing',
sardd- 'autumn'; kakud-11 'summit', with its c o m p o u n d tri-kakud- (AV.) 'three-
peaked', kakud- 'palate'. T h e inflexion is like that o f radical -t stems. T h e
forms occurring are the following:
S i n g . N . f. kakut, kakut, dhrsdt, bhasdt, s'ardt. — m . tri-kakut (VS. AV.).

» In AV. xvill. 2M occurs the ungramma-

[ (xxiii. 13) owing to confusion with padbhis,
tical form fathi-^adi an imitation of pathi-
J I. pi. of pas- look'.
raksl of RV. x. 1 4 " . 9 Except the adj. tri-kakud- (AV.), titi-
2 The form rapsuda, kakud- (TS.) 'white-humped' and possibly
occurring once, is of
uncertain meaning and origin. vartad-.
1 0 This stem occurs only once (II. 4 5 ) in
3 This form is used with an ablative
sense in AV. I. 182. the form vanddas, N. pi. m. 'Verlangen' (from
4 AV. X. 26 has dvi-padas. van• 'desire') according to B R . ; G. sing. m.
of van-ad- 'wood-consuming' according to
5 The transfer form padas occurs once in
t h e R V . (I. 1 6 3 ' ) . 1 Grassmann.

6 Used as ablative infinitive. " The origin of this -d is obscure. On

7 There are no N. A. V. forms in the the relation of this word to kakubh• see
n. pi. Cp. Laxman 474. LANMAN 47 I 4 .
8 Four times in RV. and once in VS.
200 I. ALLGEMEINES UND S P R A C H E . 4. V E D I C GRAMMAR.

A . f. kakudam, drsadant, bhasadam ( A V . ) , sarddam. — m . tri-kakudam CAV.).

I. f. drsada, sardda ( T S . iv. 4. 123). — D . f. sardde. — A b . f. kakudas.
— L . f. kakitdi (AV.), sarddi. — P I . N . f. randdas, sarddas. — A . f. sarddas.
— I. f. saradbhis. — G . f. sarddam ( A V . ) . — L . f. saratsu ( A V . ) .

Stems in radical -dh.

3 2 1 . Stems ending in -dh are all radical, simple or compound. There
are some fifty derived, with only two or three exceptions, from the following
sixteen roots: badh- 'oppress', sadh- 'succeed'; ¡dh- Tcindle', vidh- 'pierce'
(= vyadh-), sidh- 'succeed', sridh- 'blunder' (?); ksudh- t e hungry', budh-
'waken', yudh- 'fight', rudh- 'grow' and 'obstruct'; rdh- 'thrive', mrdh- 'neglect',
vrdh- 'grow', sprdh- 'contend'.
In this declension there occurs no stem distinguishing strong and w e a k
cases. Masculines and feminines are inflected exactly alike. N o distinctively
neuter forms (N. A . du. pi.) occur, and only four case-forms ( G . L . sing.) are
found as neuters. T h e r e are two monosyllabic m. nouns: vrdh- 'strengthening'
and (perhaps) badh-'1-, besides seven f. substantives: tiadh-2 ' b o n d ' ; sridh- ' f o e ' ;
ksi'tdh- 'hunger', yudh- 'fight'; mf-dh- 'conflict', vrdh- 'prosperity', sprdh- 'battle'.
Neuter cases occur in the sing. (I. G . ) of compounds of -vidh, -yudh, and -vrdh.
a. Three or four stems are of doubtful origin: agnidh- is probably to be explained
as a^ni-dh- 'priest who prepares (Ma- 'put') the fire', rather than as a shortened form of
agnidh- 'fire-kindler' (from idh- 'kindle') which does not occur in the R V . i s i d / i -
'offering' (RV'.) is perhaps a shortened form of nif-sidh- 'offering' 4 ; prkfudh- (RVi.) is
obscure in meaning and origin; iurttdh- f. 'invigorating draught' is perhaps derived from
ifdh• 'be defiant' with Svarabhakti
Inflexion.
3 2 2 . S i n g . N . m . <ignit, anu-rut (VS.) and ana-rut 'loving'; usar-bhut
'waking (budh-) at morn', yaviy'it6 'eager to fight', sva-vit ( A V . V S . ) 'porcupine'
('dog-piercer', Yvidh-), sam-it 'flaming'. — f. ksut ( A V . ) ; pra-vft 'growth',
vi-rut 'plant' (AV.), sam-lP 'fuel'.
A . m . vfdham, and its compounds: anna-vfdham 'prospering by food',
ahutT-nfdham 'delighting in sacrifices', gira-vfdham 'delighting in praise', tugrya-
vfdham 'favouring the T u g r y a s ' , namo-vfdham 'honoured by adoration', payo-
vfdham 'full of sap', parvata-ifdham 'delighting in pressing stones', madhu-
vj-dham 'abounding in sweetness', yajiia-vrdham ( A V . ) 'abounding in sacrifice',
vayo-vfdham 'increasing strength', sadyo-vrdham 'rejoicing every day', saho-
vfdham 'increasing strength', su-vf-dham 'joyous'; agnidham, anu-rudham (VS.
x x x . 9), a-sridham 'not failing', usar-budham, gosu-yudham* 'fighting for kine',
marma-vidham ( A V . ) 'piercing the vitals', yajna-sadham 'performing sacrifice',
hfday3-v'idham (AV.) 'wounding the heart'. — f. ksudham, yudham, srldham\
a-sridham, usar-budham, nis-s'tdham, virudham, sam-rudham ( A V . ) 'check' (in
gambling) 9 , sam-idham.
I. m . su-vfdhs. — f. ksudhn (AV.), yudhfi, vrdhh-, sam-idha, su-budha
( A V . ) ' g o o d awakening', su-vfdha (AV.), su-sam-idha 'good fuel'. — n . payo-
vfdhs, yavtyudha, sskam-vrdhs 'growing together'.

» In bidhas A. pi. in v i . l i » (GRASSMANN); j 3 See above p. 18, note 6 .

BR. do not acknowledge a m. use of b&dh-, 4 Cp. is-kfti- for ni$-kyti-.
and in v m . 45'°, IX. 109 6 they would join I 5 Cp. above 21.
6
the word with the preceding pari. 1 From the intensive stem oiyitdh- 'fight'.
3
In nddbhyas (x. 606) if derived from 7 In the Amredita samil samit.
8
nadh• — nah- 'bind' (BR. s. v. nah-)\ but it , With the L. pi. gofu instead of the
is more probably = *nabd-bhyas from napt-, stem go-.
weak stem of ndpat-, as also indicated by I 9 Cp. W H I T N E Y ' S note on AV. vn. 505.
the accent.
 201

D . m . usar-budhe, rti-vj-dhe 'fostering truth', puru-nissidhe 'repelling many

(foes)', mahi-vj-dhe 'greatly rejoicing', vi-mrdhe (VS. via. 44) 'dispeller of foes',
sam-rdhe ( A V . ) 'welfare', sa-vfdhe ( V S . xvi. 30) 'growing'. — f . k<udh<!, yudhi
( A V . ) \ vrdhe, sam-idhe.
A b . f . ksudhas, yudhas, sridhas.
G . m. gosu-yudhas, vi-mrdhds1 'foe', sumati-vf-dhas ( V S . x x n . 1 2 )
'delighting in prayer'. — f. ksudhas. — n. hfdaya-vid/ias.
L . f. mrdhi, yudhi, sprdhi) pra-budhi 'awaking'.
D u . N . A . V . m . a-sridha, fta-vrdhd, V . rta-vrdha, namo-vfdha, puro-
yudha 'fighting in front'; fti-vfdhau. —• f. rdu-vfdha 'increasing sweetness',
ghrta-vfdhs 'rejoicing in fatness', payovfdhn, vayo-vfdha, sakam-ifdha;
sam-idhau (AV.).
P I . N . V . m . ftS-vfdhas, V . rtJ-vfdhas, tugryii-vfdhas, payo-ifdhas, parvatz-
vfdhas, vayo-ifdhas, suge-vfdhas 'rejoicing in g o o d progress', su-vfdhas\ a-sridhas,
ayur-yudhas ( V S . x v i . 60) 'struggling for life', usar-budhas, gosu-yudhas, jnu-
bddhas 'bending the knees', pra-yudhas 'assailing', vrsa-yudhas 'combating
men', surudhas, soma-pari-btidhas 'despising Soma'. — f. ksudhas (AV.),
tnfdhas, spfdhas, sridhas (VS. x x v n . 6) 'foes'; amitra-ytidhas 'fighting with
enemies', a-sridhas, isidhas, rtJ-vfdhas, nis-sidhas, pari-bddhas 'oppressors',
pari-spfdhas 'rivals', vl-rudhas, V . vT-rudhas, surudhas, sam-idhas.
A . m . bddhas; rta-ifdhas, tamo-vfdhas 'rejoicing in darkness', rayi-vfdhas
'enjoying wealth', usar-budhas, surudhas. — f. mfdhas, yudhas, spfdhas,
sridhas3; vT-rudhas, surudhas, sam-idhas, sam-fdhas, sa-vfdhas 'increasing
together' 4 .
I. f. sam-idbhis, vl-rudbhis (AV.). — D. f. nad-bhyasi. — Ab. f. vi-
rudbhyas (AV.).
G . m . vrdh<im\ fta-ifdham, pra-budham 'watchful'. — f. yudkam6 ( A V . ) ,
spfdhdm; tris-sidhUm, vi-rudham, vT-rudhSm1 ( A V . ) .
L . f. yutsu, vl-rutsu.

Stems in radical -n.

323. The radical stems ending in -n are formed from half a dozen roots:
from tan- 'stretch', ran- 'rejoice', van- 'be pleasant', are formed monosyllabic
substantives meaning 'succession', 'joy', 'wood', respectively; from svan- 'sound'
is formed the adj. svan-* 'sounding' and the compound tuvi-svan- 'roaring
aloud'; from san- 'gain', the compound go-sdn- 'winning cows'. From these
six nouns very few case-forms occur. But from han- 'strike' no fewer than
35 compounds are made in the R.V., and all the singular cases as well as
several of the du. and pi. cases are formed. All the stems formed from these
six roots 9 are m. except tan-, which is f . a n d only a single n. case-form
occurs from a compound of han- (dasyu-ghnA). The distinction between strong
and weak forms is made in -han- only. Here in the weak cases a as

1 The infinitive yudhaye is a transition 1 6 In the V. yudham pate.

to t h e i - d e c l e n s i o n , there b e i n g n o stem i 7 In t h e V . vtrudham fate,
yudhi-. 8 The a c c e n t of the monosyllabic stems
* W i t h i r r e g u l a r a c c e n t ;cp.LANMAN477(top). is i r r e g u l a r in r e m a i n i n g on the r a d i c a l
3 F i f t e e n t i m e s a c c e n t e d sridhas, o n c e s y l l a b l e e x c e p t tanh ( b e s i d e tana) a n d van&m-.
( I X . 718) sridhas. cp. LANMAN 4794 a n d a b o v e 94, I a.
4 In VIII. 454°, IX. 105 6 pari-bhdhas s h o u l d 9 O t h e r r o o t s in -n used as n o m i n a l s t e m s
p e r h a p s b e r e a d instead of pari b&dhas. h a v e g o n e o v e r t o t h e a- or ¿ - d e c l e n s i o n ;
5 If f r o m ndk-, a c c o r d i n g to B K . (cp. akpi- thus jan- b e c o m e s -ja- or -ja-.
nahas ( A . p. f . ) ; a c c o r d i n g to WEBER, IS. i I O han- f o r m s a s e p a r a t e fem. s t e m in -T
13, 109, f r o m nap-. It is p r o b a b l y f r o m f r o m its w e a k f o r m : -ghn-t-.
napt- - napat. See above 321, note on nadh-. 1
 202

representing the sonant nasal appears for an before consonants, while before
vowels the root, by syncopation of its vowel, assumes the form of -ghn-.
The N. sing. n. of -han is -ha-m, a transition to the a-declension 1 (for -ha,
which does not occur).
Inflexion.
324. All forms are represented in this declension except Ab. sing., the weak
cases of the du., and the D. Ab. pi. The forms made from -han- are: Sing. N.
-ha', A. -hdnam, I. -ghnd, D. -ghn/, G. -ghnas, L. -ghni, V. -han. — Du. N. A.
-hdna, -hdnau (VS.TS.), V. -hana. — PI. N. -hdnas, A. -ghnas, I. -hdbhis. The G.
would be -ghtidm and the L. -hasu according to the analogy of other stems in
this declension. The forms of radical «-stems which occur are the following:
Sing. N. m. aghasamsa-hd 'slaying the wicked', adrsta-hd 'slaying
unseen (vermin)', abhimati-hd 'destroying adversaries', amitra-ha 'killing
enemies', amlva-hd 'destroying pains', arusa-hd 'striking the dark (cloud)',
d-vlra-ha 'not slaying men', asasti-hd 'averting curses', asura-hd 'demon-slaying',
ahi-hd 'killing the serpent', krsiihd 'subduing nations', go-hd 'killing cattle',
dasyu-hd 'destroying the Dasyus', durnama-hd (AV.) 'destroying the ill-named',
nr-hd 'killing men', puro-hd 'destroying strongholds'3, prsni-hd (AV.) 'slaying
the speckled (snake)', mano-hd (AV.) 'mind-destroying', musli-hd 'striking
with the fist', yatu-hd (AV.) 'destroying witchcraft', rakso-hd 'destroying demons',
vasar-hd 'destroying at dawn', vrtra-hd 'Vj-tra-slaying', sarya-hd 'killing with
arrows', satra-hd 'destroying entirely', sapatna-hd 'slaying rivals', sapta-hd
'slaying seven'. — n. Only two transition forms occur: vrtra-hd-m and
satra-hd-m*.
A . m. d-pra-hanam5 'not hurting', abhimati-hanam, ahi-hdnam, tamo-
hdnam 'dispelling darkness', dasyu-hanam, rakso-hanam5, valaga-hanam
'destroying secret spells' (VS. v. 23), mano-hanam (AV.), vira-hdnam5 (VS.
x x x . 5) 'homicide', vrtra-hdnam5, satra-hdnam5, sapatna-hanam (AV.).
I. m. vrtra-ghnd6. — n. dasyu-ghnd. — f. tand (once) and tana7
( 1 9 times).
D. m. rane7; abhimati-ghni (VS. vi. 32), asura-ghne'6, ahi-ghnJ, nf-ghnib,
tnakha-ghni (TS. 111. 2. 4. '), 'slayer of Makha', vrtra-ghnJ6. — f. tane 7.
G. m. go-sanas (in the V. gosano napat); asura-ghnds6, Vftra-ghnas6.
L . m. svani% (ix. 669), tuvi-svani; bhrBna-ghni (AV.) 'killer of an embryo'.
Without an ending: ran9.
V . m. amitra-han, ahi-han, vrtra-han.
Du. N. A . V . tamo-hana, raiso-hattS5, vrtra-hana, V. vftra-hani5. With
-au : rakso-hdnau (VS. v. 25), valaga-hdnau (VS. v. 25; TS. 1. 3. 2 2 ).
PI. N. V . m. V. tuvi-svanas; a-6hog-ghdnas'° 'striking the niggardly
one', punar-hartass 'destroying in return', yajna-hanas (TS.) 'destroying
sacrifice', satru-hanas5 'slaying enemies'.
A . m. sSta-ghnas (AV.) 'gain-destroying'. With strong form: rakso-hdnas5
and valaga-hanas (VS. v. 25; TS. 1. 3. 2 a ).
I. m. vrtra-hdbhis. — G. m. vandm. — L . m. ramsu1, vamsu
1
T h e forms made from •ghna-, viz. -ghnas, 5 See above 47, A b 2 (p. 39).
•ghnam, -ghnaya, -gndsya, -ghne, are probably6 See above p. 38, note 4.
to be explained as transition forms starting 7 Against the rule of accentuation in
from the weak stem -ghn-. monosyllabic stems (94).
8
* Formed like the N. of derivative -an This form may, however, be the 3. sing,
items (327). passive aor. See below 501, note on shdi.
3 T h a t is, puras, A. pi. of pur-, the case 9 With loss of the loc. ending as in the
termination being retained. -an10 declension (325).
4 T h e normal forms would be *vf!ra-ha -ghanas for -hdnas, see above 80, 81.
and *satra-hd.
 203

Derivative stems in .an, -man, -van.

325. This declension embraces a large number of words, the stems
in -van being by far the commonest, those in -an the least frequent It is
almost limited to masculines and neuters; but some forms of adjective stems
serve as feminines, and there is one specifically f. stem, yJs-an- 'woman' 1 .
The distinction of strong and weak forms is regularly made. In the
strong cases the a of the suffix is usually lengthened, e. g. adhv3n-am\ bnt
in half a dozen -an and -man stems it remains unchanged; e. g. arya-mdn-am.
In the weak cases the a is often syncopated before vowel endings, though
never when -man and -van are preceded by a consonant2, e. g. I. sing, grti-
vn-ai from gni-van-, 'pressing stone'4, while before consonant endings the
final n disappears', e. g. rftja-bhis. In the RV. the syncopation never takes
place in the N. A. du. n., nor with oi\e exception (sata-ddvn-i) in the L. sing.
As in all other stems ending in -«, the nasal is dropped in the N. sing.;
e. g. m. ddhva, n. karma. But there are two peculiarities of inflexion which,
being common to these three groups, do not appear elsewhere in the consonant
declension. Both the L. sing, and the N. A. pi. n. are formed in two ways. The
ending of the L. sing, is in the RV. dropped more often than not, e. g.
murdhdn-i and mUrdhdti, the choice often depending on the metre6. The
N. A. pi. n. is formed with -ant from 18 stems and with -a from 19 stems7
in the R V . ; seven of the latter appear with -a in the Samhita text, but with -a
like the rest in the Pada text. The evidence of the Avesta indicates that there
were in the Indo-Iranian period two forms, naman and nSmHni, the former
losing its -n as usual when final after a long vowel. On this ground the -<?
form of the Samhita, though the less frequent, would appear to be the older 8 .
There are here many supplementary stems and numerous transitions to
the a-declension.
i. Stems in -an.
326. These stems, which are both m. and n., are not numerous. They
include some which at first sight have the appearance of belonging to one
of the other two groups:,yit-v-an-9 'youth', sv-dn- 'dog', rj'i-sv-anxo N. of a
man, mutari-sv-an-10 N. of a demi-god, vi-bhv-an-11 'far-reaching"; pari-jm-an-11
'going round'. The n. iirs-dn- is an extended stem from iiras- 'head' =
sir(a)s-dn-.
a. Besides the N. pi. yi;an-as 'women', six or seven forms of this declension appear
to be f e m i n i n e as agreeing with f. substantives: vrfa 'raining' (idJa, vak\ vrjanam
(tvacam), v/fana (dyava-pfthivi), pari-jmanas 'going round' (vidyiitas), rapiad-udhaihis 'having
distended udders' (dhenubhis)^i, vaja-karmabhis (SV. TS.) and vaja-bharmaihis (vm. 19JOJ
'bringing rewards' (utiihit).

1 6
The stems in -van regularly form their 48 locatives (occurring 127 times) have
f. in -vari, e. g. pi-van, pi-vari-, those in -an
the ji, 45 (occurring 203 times) drop it. See
and -man by adding -/ to the syncopated LANMAN 5 3 5 .
stem at the end of compounds; e. g. sòma• 7 But those in -atti occur nearly twice as
ràjìi-ì-, pànca-nìmn-ì- (AV.). often.
2
This exception does not apply when -an is 8 C p . BRUGMANN, K G . 4 8 3 a n d LANMAN
preceded by two consonants, e. g. sakth-na. 538.
3 But also G. sing, vfaan-as (AV.). The synco- 9 Cp. the comparative yavtyati and the
pation nearly always takes place in -an stems Avestan yvan.
and in nearly half of the -man and -van 10 .¡van in both these compounds is probably
stems. derived from su- 'grow'.
4 When the accent is on the suffix it is " From bhu- 'be'.
thrown on the ending in these syncopated " From gam- 'go'.
forms, e. g. mahni from mah-an-. The f. of -an stems at the end oi
5 That is, a here represents an original compounds is formed with -T in acchidra-
sonant nasal, see p. 17, note udhn-i- 'having a faultless udder', sam-rajn-7-
204 I. ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4. VEDIC GRAMMAR.

b. In the s t r o n g f o r m s the stems fbhu-ksan• 'chief of t h e Rbhus', ptisan-, and the

f. yisan-, retain the short a, while uksan- 'ox' and z r;an- 'bull' fluctuate between a and d.
T h e words ¡van- and yuvan- form their weak stems before vowels with Samprasarana,
sun-, yun-; the latter is once used in the N. du. m. form yiina instead of yuzand. In
t h e weak cases syncopation always takes p l a c e 1 except in the forms ukjdnas and zfsanas.
c. A number of an stems have s u p p l e m e n t a r y f c r m s from other stems: aksan-
from aksi-; aslhdn- from as/hi-; ahan- from a has- and ahar-\ asan- from dsya-, as-, and ash-;
udan- from lid- and nda-ka-; udhan- from ndhas- and udhar-; dadhdn- from dddhi-; dosan-
f r o m d's-; yakdn- from ydkrt-; yosan- from yosattd- and yosa-; sdkan- from sakrt-\ sakthdn-
from sakthi-. As no stem in -an has been found in the N. A. sing, n., such forms appear
to have been avoided and to have been purposely replaced by forms from supplementary
stems. These forms are the X. A. n. aksi, dsthi (AV.), dhar, asyam, udakam, udhar, ydkrt
(AV.), sakrt, sakthi-, also yuvat instead of *yuva, as well as siras and ssrsa-m (AV.) in-
stead of * sirs a 3.
d. T h e r e are here several transitions to t h e a - d e c l e n s i o n . T h e A. sing, pusan-am
is the starting point for the N . piisatt-a-s and the G. pusand-sya-The X. A. pi. n. is
the starting point in other instances: the two pi. forms s'rsa and sirsarn give rise to the
L. sing, strse (AV.) beside strsani, as well as to the du. X. A. sirse and the X. A. sing.
slrsd-m (AV.); similarly the two plurals aha and ahani led to the G. pi. ahanam beside
dhnam-, and yiisdni, the pi. of yiisan-, which has the appearance of a pi. of a stem
yiisd-, led to the formation of an I. sing, yvsina (TS.) beside the regular yiisna VS.).
Again, the weak forms din-as, ahn-ds etc., gave rise to the transition stems dsna- and
dhna-, from which are formed the I. pi. dinais and the L. sing, purvdhne.
Transition a-stems often take the place of -an stems at the end of compounds.
T h u s •aisa- appears in several compounds for -ak;an-, and -vj'sd- (AV.) for -v/-san--, an-
aslhdn- once forms the X. sing. m. an-asthd-s ivld. 134); beside the N. sing m. bfhaduksd
appears the D. brhdd-uksaya (VS.); beside tajanam is found the A. m. adhi-rajd-m
(X. 1289) 'over-lord'; and beside sap/dbhis 'seven', the compound iri-saptais4.

Inflexion.
327. The normal forms, if made from rfijan- 'king' in the m., and from
ahan- 'day' in the n., would be as follows:
1. m. Sing. N. riija. A. rhjanam. I. nijha. D. rAjiie. Ab. rajnas.
G. rAjhas. L. rajani and rdjan. V. rajan.
Du. N. A. riijana and rfijanau. I. rdjabhydm. D. rfijabhyam. G. nijnos.
PI. N. V. raj anas. A. rajnas. I. rajabhis. D. rajabhyas. Ab. rijabhyas
(AV.). G. rdjMm. L. rdjasu.
2. n. Sing. N. A.—5. I. dhna. D. dhne. Ab. G. dhnas. L. dhani and
dhan. — Du. N. A. dhanT. G. dhnos (AV.). — PI. N. A. ahani. I. ahabhis.
D. Ab. ahabhyas. G. dhnam. L. dhasu.
The forms actually occurring are the following:
Sing. N. m. an-asthd 'boneless', ayah-sTrsa 'iron-headed', a-strsd 'head-
less', uksd 'bull', rj'i-svil N. of a man, tdksa 'carpenter', tapur-mUrdha 'burning-
headed', try-udhAb 'three-uddered', dvi-bdrha-jma7 'having a double course',
pdri-jma 'surrounding', pUsd 'Pu§an', pit ha (VS.) 'spleen', brhdd-uksi 'having
great oxen', majja (VS. AV.) 'marrow', matari-svi 'Matarisvan', murdha 'head',
yt'tva 'youth', raja 'king', vl-bhvS 'far-reaching', vi-rdja (TS. v. 7. 4*) 'sovereign',
vfsS 'bull', ha 'dog', sahdsra-sTrsS 'thousand-headed'.

'queen', sima-rdjn-t- 'having Soma as king', 3 With shifted accent.

hald-vrsn-i- 'whose lord has been slain', ruru- 4 On the other hand there are two trans-
SJrsn-i- 'deer-headed', saptd-sirsn-i- 'seven- itions from the a-declension to the an-de-
headed', eka-murdhn-i- (AV.) 'having the clension in ni-kamabhis beside n't-iamais and
head turned in one direction', sindhu-rajh-i- nakta-bhis for ndktam, but these forms are
(AV.) 'having Sindhu as queen'. due to somewhat artificial conditions; see
1
T h e restoration of the a seems to be | below, I. pi. p. 206, notes 3 and 4.
metrically required in a few instances: see} 5 Only supplementary forms occur: see
LANMAN 525. , LANMAN 530 (bottom).
6
» T h e N. sing. n. of the adj. rf^an- is T h e metre seems to require Iry-udh'a
avoided in several w a y s : see LANMAN 530 (111, S63).
(bottom). | 7 H e r e bdrha• = bar has-.
 VI. DECLENSION. NOUNS. CONSONANT STEMS. 205

A. m. uksdnam, tdksiinam (VS. xxx. 6), tri-murdhinam 'three-headed',

tri-sirsdnam 'three-headed', panthinam (VS. AV.) 'path', pari-jmlnam,
pfthu-gmdnam1 ' b r o a d - p a t h e d ' , plihinam ( A V . ) , majjdnam, matarl-svUnam,
mUrdhdnam, yuvanam, rdjinam2, vfsanam, svdnam, sapti-sirs&nam ' s e v e n -
h e a d e d ' . — W i t h short a: uksdnam, rbhu-ksanam3 ' c h i e f of t h e R b h u s ' ,
pUsanam, vfsanam 4.
I. m. 1. rj"i-svan3, matari-svana, vi-btvanS. — 2. W i t h s y n c o p e : a/nJs,
pBsnd, pllhnd ( V S . ) , maj/nd ( A V . ) , mUrdhni ( V S . x x v . 2), rdjn3, vfsnft. —
3. W i t h S a m p r a s a r a n a : s'un3b ( A V . ) . — n . asni ( V S . x x v . 9) ' b l o o d ' ,
ahna ' d a y ' , asnd ' m o u t h ' , udni ' w a t e r ' , dadhnd ' c u r d s ' , ma find ' g r e a t n e s s ' ,
yaknd ( V S . x x x i x . 8 ) ' l i v e r ' , yusnd ( V S . x x v . 9 ) ' b r o t h ' , vi-slrsnd ( K h . 1. n 4 )
' h e a d l e s s ' , saknd ( V S . ) ' e x c r e m e n t ' , sirsnd ' h e a d ' , sakthni ( V S . ) 'thigh'.
D. m. 1. j-ji-svane, pdri-jmane, matari-svane, vi-bhvane, vfsane (TS. III.
2 7
2. 5 ) . — 2. pBsne, prati-divne ' a d v e r s a r y a t p l a y ' , murdhni ( V S . XXII. 3 2 ) ,
rdjne, vfsne*. — 3 . ydne. — n . 1 . dhiirv-ane ' h u r t i n g ' . — 2. ahne, asnJ, slrsnf.
Ab. m. 2. pllhnas ( A V . ) , murdhnds, vfsnas9. — n. 2. aksnds ' e y e ' ,
ahnas, asnasIO, udnds1ndhnas, yaknds ' l i v e r ' , vfsnas ' s h e d d i n g r a i n ' , sirsnas.
G. m. 1. durgfbhi-svanas ' c o n t i n u a l l y s w e l l i n g ' , pari-jmanas, mitari-
svanas ( V S . 1 . 2 ) , vfsanas" ( A V . ) . — 2. asnas'•J, uksnds, pBsnas, yusnds
(or n.), rdjhas, vfsnas. — 3. yTinas, s'unas. —n. aksnds (VS. iv. 3 2 ; TS.),
asnas1* ( A V . ) ' b l o o d ' , asthnas ( A V . ) ' b o n e ' , ahnas, udnds, dadhnas, vf-snas,
saknds (AV.), j*trsnas'5.
L. m. 1. rji-svani, matari-svani, mBrdhani, rdjani. — i.jman ' w a y ' , pari-
jman, matari-svan ( A V . ) , mBrdkan. — n. r. dhani, asani, uddni, tidhani
' u d d e r ' , ksdmani ' e a r t h ' , rajani, slrsani-, ahni ( A V . ) . — 2. ahan, Us an, udan,
fidhan, ksdman'6, gdmbhan ( V S . x m . 3 0 ) ' d e p t h ' , slrsan1''.
V. m. r. uru-jman ( A V . ) ' e x t e n s i o n ' , pari-jman, prthu-jman ( A V . ) , pBsan,
mardhan ( V S . x v m . 5 5 ) , yuvan, raj an, vrsan, sata-murdhan ( V S . X V i l . 7 1 ; T S . )
' h u n d r e d - h e a d e d ' , satya-rajan ( V S . x x . 4) 'true king'. — 2. matari-svasl8.
Du. N. A. V. m. 1 . pdri-jmanl, V . mitra-rajana ' y e k i n g s M i t r a ( a n d
V a r u p a ) ' , yuvana, V. yuvana, rdjani, svdn3. W i t h short vowel: indra-pUsana,
pBsdna, vfsana, V. vfsanl, soma-pBsana. W i t h weak stem: ydn3 (ix. 68 s )
lot y'a>3n3 ( p r o b a b l y t h r o u g h yuvana). — 2. W i t h au: rdjanau, vfsanau ( A V . ) ,
svdnaw, V. vrsanau, soma-pBsanau.
N. A. n . dhanX, cdksanT ( A V . ) ' e y e s ' , dosdtn ( A V . ) ' f o r e - a r m s '
I. m. vfsabhy3m. — D. m. soma-pBsdbhy3m. — G. m. pari-jmanos, indri-
pBsnos. — n . dhnos ( A V . ) . — L . n. aksnds ( K h . 1. n 8 ) .

1 -¿matt- = -jman- 'path'. 11

Also the supplementary form udakAt.
2
There is also the transfer form adhi- " For vfsa-nama (ix. 9 7 5 4 ) GRASSMANN
raja-m (X. 128®). would read vf}ano nd\ cp. WACKERNAGEL 2',
3 Perhaps from tsa- = ksi- 'possess'. 68 a, note (p. 160).
4 In the R Y . vfsanam occurs 53 times, •J This form (occurring once) may be
vfsanam only twice. shortened for dsmanas (occurring four times).
5 This form (occurring thrice) may possibly H With supplementary stem asf-j-.
be shortened for dsmani (which occurs •5 T h e G.füfanasya, occurring once, seems
twice) from aiman- 'stone'. to be a transfer form starting from the A .
6
For *su-an-a\ hence no shift of accent püfdnam (326 dj.
16
as in monosyllabic stems. There are also the transition forms
7 Also uian-e(vi. 2 0 " ) according to BF.NFEY, strse, pitrv7ihnc \ see LANMAN 536.
Orient und Occident 2, 242. '7 T h e compound nemann-i;- 'following
* There is also the transition form bfhad- guidance' probably contains a loc.
ukfaya (VS. VIU. 8). is Following the analogy of some stems in
9 B E N F E Y , GOTT. Abh. 19, 2 6 1 , regards •van.
vibhvanTi (x. 765) as = Ab. vibhvanas. 19 Also the transition form strse.
>0 Also the supplementary forms asyat, as as.
2O6 I. ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4. VEDIC GRAMMAR.

PI. N. V . m. uksanas (VS. xxiv. 13), tigmd-mQrdhSnas 'sharp-edged',

pantha/: as (AV.), mOrdhànas, yuvanas, nijanas, svànas. — W i t h s h o r t
v o w e l : uksanas, rbhu-ksdnas, vfsatias.
N . A . n. 1. aksàni, asthàni (TS. I v. 7. i 2 ) 1 , dhatii, sirs Ani, sakthAni. —
2. aha, sJrsii2.
A . m. 1. mStari-svanas, uksanas, vf-sanas. — 2. uksnds, jana-ràjhas 'king
of men', majjnas (AV.), mUrdhnas, yamd-rajhas 'subject to Yama', rajiias,
vfsrtas. — 3. yttnas, sunas.
I. m. uksdbhis3, yùvabhis, ràjabhis, vrsabhis, h'db his (Kh. v. 15 7 ) 4 . —
n. aksdbhis, asthdbhis, dhabhis, asabhis, uddbhis, fidhabhis, mahabhis, vj-sabhis,
s'akabhis (TS. v. 7. 23 1 ), su -kfta-karm abhis (Kh. 111. 12 J) 'doing good deeds' 5 .
D . m. tdksabhyas (VS.), majjabhyas (TS. VS. x x x i x . 10), yuvabhyas,
rijabhyas, svdbhyas (AV. VS.). — n. asthdbhyas (VS. x x x i x . 1 0 ; TS. v. 2. 122),
dhabhyas. — A b . m. majjabhyas (AV.). — n. dhabhyas.
G . m. vrsniim, ràjhAm (VS. AV.), sunam (AV.). — n. d/tnam6.
L . m. majjdsu (AV.), yamd-rajasu (AV.), ràjasu. — n. dhasu, sirsdsu.

2. S t e m s in -man.
328. These stems are about equally divided between the masculine and
the neuter gender, the former being agent nouns, the latter verbal abstracts.
These stems seem to have been used normally for the f. as well as the m.;
for though no simple stem in -man occurs as a f., about a dozen of them
are used as f. at the end of compounds, while no certain example appears
in the RV. of a f. being formed by adding -1 to -manT. A peculiarity of
the inflexion of the stems in -man, as compared with those in -an and -van,
is that in the syncopated forms of the I. sing, several words drop the m,
while two drop the n of the suffix; e. g. mahinà8 for mahimmi, and rasmà
for rasmnà.
a. The f. forms which occur at the end of compounds are: Sing. N. furù-sarmà (VS.
X. 9) 'giving wide shelter' (àditi-), sà-laifmà (x. lo») 'similar'; A. dyutad-yaminam (v. 8o')
'having a shining course' (usàsam)\ su-tàrmànam (Vili. 42^) 'easily conveying across'
(navam), su-tri man am (X. 63'°) 'protecting well' (pfthivim), su-iàrmànam (X. 6310)'granting
secure refuge' (óditim); V. arista-bharman (vili. 184) 'yielding security' (ndite\ pflhu-yamati
(VI. 64*) 'having a broad path' \duhitar)\ Du. N. su-janmanfi (1.160 1 ) 'producing fair things'
(dhisàne); PI. A. sùci-janmattas (vi. 393) 'of radiant birth' (usasas); I. vaja-hharmabhis
(VIIL I9i°) 'winning rewards' (utibhis\ su-làrmabhis (IX. 704J 'skilful' (fingers); G. sukra-
sadmanam (vi. 47®) 'having a bright dwelling-place' (tisàsam)io. From naman• 'name' the
AV. forms with - / t h e f. stem -namm- at the end of five compounds: dur-namm- 'ill-
named', pànca-namm- 'having five names', maha-nàninl- 'gTeat-named', vièvà-niimm- 'having
all names', sahasra-nàmnl'• 'thousand-named'. The f. dur adman-i- (VS. II. 20) 'noxious food'
is perhaps similarly formed •>.

i In the corresponding passage of VS. 7 The AV. has five stems thus formed at
(xvui. 3) asthini. the end of compounds.
' Both these might be formed from the 8 Cp. BLOOMFIELD, B B . 23, 105 ff., AJPh.
transition a-stems àha-, Ursa-. This is per-; ) 6 , 409—434; B A R T H O L O M A E IF. 8, An-
1
haps the reason why these are the only two ¡.eiger 17.
plurals of this declension which retain the I 9 With the ending of the neuter; see
<I in the Pada text; àha appears in I. 92 3 . • LANMAN 433 (top).
3 The form ni-iimaihis "eager" for ni- I >° Possibly also su-sumà (ll. 3 2 ' ) 'bearing
¿•¿mais is due to the parallelism of evayàvabhis | well' ; but it is derived from *sii-ma- according
in x . 9 2 9 . to B R . a n d GRASSMANN.
4 There is also a transition form às/iais " The f. bràhmì- (ix. 335) formed from
'stones', beside the stem àsan-, brahman• is quite exceptional, being due to
5 The unique form naktàbhis (as if from a a play on words (see L A N M A N 5 2 8 ) .
1
The
stem naktàn-) is doubtless used for metrical form tmànyi — tmànà in sense, occurring
reasons instead of nàktam in V I I . IO4' .
8
twice in the R V . , may be an L sing. f. of
6
There is also the transition form \tmàn-ì-\ cp. G R A S S M A N N and B R .
àhanam. I
 V I . DECLENSION. NOUNS. CONSONANT STEMS. 207

b . I n t h e s t r o n g f o r m s aryaman- ' A r y a m a n ' , Imán- ' s e l f ' , a n d jiman- ' v i c t o r i o u s '

r e t a i n t h e s h o r t v o w e l of t h e suffix. I n t h e w e a k f o r m s , e v e n w h e n t h e suffix is p r e c e d e d
b y a v o w e l , a b o u t a d o z e n f o r m s d o n o t s y n c o p a t e t h e a1: I . omina, pravidyamana,
bhümána, bhumana, syumana, kemáni; D . tramane, dimane-, A b . G . Humanas; G . mahi-
manas, dómanos, yamanas, vybmanas. T h e forms which, besides syncopating, drop the
m o r t h e n of t h e suffix a r e : praihini, preña, bhüna, mahina, varina; draghmi, rahna.
c . B e s i d e t h e -man s t e m s t h e r e a r e s e v e r a l t r a n s f e r s t e m s i n -ma, w h i c h a r e ,
h o w e v e r , of r a r e or l a t e o c c u r r e n c e : darmi- ' d e s t r o y e r ' b e s i d e darmán--, dhárma- (AV. etc.)
' l a w ' b e s i d e dhárman--, (ma- (VS.) ' c o u r s e ' b e s i d e /man--, hfma- (VS. AV.) ' o f f e r i n g '
b e s i d e héman- ( R V . ) ; ájma- ' c o u r s e ' b e s i d e ájman-\ y&ma- ' c o u r s e ' b e s i d e y&man--, priyá-
dhima- (I. 140 1 ) ' f o n d of h o m e ' b e s i d e priyá-dhaman- (AV.); a n d o c c a s i o n a l f o r m s of
-karma- a t t h e e n d of c o m p o u n d s b e s i d e t h e r e g u l a r -karman--. vlrá-tarma-m ( x . 6 l * ) ' d o i n g
m a n l y d e e d s ' ; iiivá-ka>mena (X. 1644) ' a l l - c r e a t i n g ' b e s i d e visva-karmana, e t c .

Inflexion.
329. The normal forms actually occurring would, if made from dsman-
'stone' in the m. and from kárman- 'act' in the n., be as follows:
Sing. m. N. asma. A. ds'manam2. I. ds'mana3. D. asmarte*. Ab. ásmanas5.
G. dimanas5. L. dsmani and asman. V. asman. — Du. N. A. V. ds'mana6.
L. ásmanos. — PI. N. V. ásmanos. A. ásmanas. I. dsmabhis. D. dsmabhyas.
G. ásmanSm. L. dsmasu (AV.).
Sing. n. N. A. kárma1. I. kdrmana3. D. kdrmanes. Ab. kdrmanas
G. kárrnanas*. L. kdrmani and kárman. — Du. N. A. kdrmani. G. kdrmanos.
— PI. N. A. kdrmani, kdrma, kármS. I. kdrmabhis. D. kdrmabhyas.
Ab. kdrmabhyas. G. kármanatn8. L. kdrmasu.
Forms which actually occur are the following:
Sing. N. m. a-karmA 'wicked', d-brahma 'lacking devotion', aryamA
'Aryaman', asma, 'stone', a-sremd 'faultless', atmá 'breath', asu-héma 'speeding
swiftly', istd-yimi 'going according to desire', usrd-yüma 'moving towards
brightness', rtd-dháma (VS. iv. 32) 'abiding in truth', krtd-brahma 'having
performed devotion', jarimA 'old age', jatá-bharma 'ever nourishing', jemA
(VS. XVIIL 4 ) 'superiority', trpdla-prabharmii 'offering what is refreshing', darmA
'demolisher', dama 'giver', dur-nAma 'ill-named', dur-mdnma 'evil-minded',
dyutdd-yama 'having a shining path', draghimA (VS. XVIH. 4 ) 'length', dvi-
jdnma 'having a double birth', dharmA 'arranger', dhvasmA 'darkening', pAka-
sthama N. of a man, papmA (VS. vi. 35) 'misfortune', prthú-pragama 'wide-
striding', prathimA (VS. xvui. 4 ) 'width', brahmA 'devout man', bhujmA»
'abounding in valleys', bhümA (TS. vn. 3. 13') 'plenty', bhári-janma 'having
many births', tnahimA 'greatness', yajñd-manma 'ready for sacrifice', raghu-
yAnta 'going quickly', resma (AV.) 'tempest', vadmA 'speaker', varimA 'width',
varsimd (VS. XVIH.4) 'height', visvd-karma 'all-creator', visvd-sama (VS.xvm. 39)
'having the form of all Samans', vj-sa-prabharmi 'to whom the strong (Soma)
is offered', satAtma 'possessing a hundred lives', satyd-dharma 'whose laws
are true', satyd-manma 'whose thoughts are true', saptd-nama 'seven-named',
sahdsra-yama. 'having a thousand courses', sadhú-karma 'acting well', su-kdrma
'working skilfully', su-jánima 'producing fair things', su-irAma 'guarding well',
su-dyótma 'shining bright', su-brdhma 'accompanied by good prayers', su-
mdntu-nama 'bearing a well-known name', su-mdnma 'benevolent', su-vdhma

1
T h e v o w e l h a s also t o b e r e s t o r e d in 5 A l s o with syncope, mahimnas, etc.
s e v e r a l o t h e r f o r m s (see LANMAN 524 f.). 0 A l s o with short vowel aryamanä,jlmanä.
* W i t h s h o r t v o w e l aryamanam, tmanam. 7 S o m e t i m e s tdrmä in t h e S a m h i t ä t e x t .
3 W i t h o u t s y n c o p e a f t e r v o w e l bhumana, 8 A l s o w i t h s y n c o p e , nimnä, e t c .
etc.; with sync o p e , mahini, draghmi, 9 bhu/ma (I. 6 5 s ) s h o u l d p r o b a b l y b e r e a d
etc. bhujmh; s e e B R . , GRASSMANN, LANMAN 5 3 0
4 A l s o w i t h s y n c o p e , mahimni, e t c . (top).
 208 I. ALLGEMEINES UND S P R A C H E . 4. V E D I C GRAMMAR.

'driving well', su-sdrmi (VS. vm. 8) 'good protector', su-sthAma 'having a

firm support', svadu-ksddma 'having sweet food'
N. A . n. djma 'track', ddma 'food', ¿ma 'course', karma 'deed', kArsma
'goal', ksddma 'carving knife', cdrma 'skin', jdnima 'birth', jdrttna 'birth',
tjkma 'young blade of corn', dAma 'cord', dhdrma 'ordinance', dhAma 'abode',
ndma 'name', patma 'flight', brdhma 'prayer', bhdsma (TS. VS. XII. 35) 'ashes',
bh&ma 'earth', mdnma 'thought', marma 'vital part', yAma 'course', lima
(TS. VS. xix. 92) 'hair', vdrtma 'path' (Kh. v. 2'), vdrma 'mail', vdsma
'garment', vt!ma (VS. xix. 83) 'loom', vJsma 'house', vyuma 'sky', sdkma 'power',
sdrma 'refuge', sdd/na 'seat', siima 'chant', sAma 'wealth', sthAma 'station',
syUma 'strong', svAdma 'sweetness', homa 'oblation'. — With final vowel
lengthened in the Samhita text: kdrm't, jdnimi, dhAma (AV.), bhiml,
vybma, su-startma2 (TS. v. 1. 1 i 2 ) 'forming an excellent couch', si<Adma">.
A . m. asmSnam, a-sremdtiam, atmdnam, Usmdnam (AV.) 'heat', ojmAnam
'power', omAnam 'favour', klomanam (VS. xix. 85) 'right lung', Jarimanam, tuvi-
brahmdnam 'praying much', darmAnam, d it/hi nam 'gift', dur-manmanam, dyutdd-
yamanam, dvi-jdnmanam, dliarmanam, pAka-slhamdnam, pdpmAnam ( V S . X I I . 99;
TS. 1. 4. 4 1 p u r u - t m d n a m 'existing variously', purii-namanam (AV.) 'having
many names', brahmAnam, bhumanam, mahimAnam, resmAnam ( V S . X X V . 2),
varimAnam, varsmAnam 'height', viivd-karmanam, vi-sarmunam 'dispersion',
satAtmanam, satya-dharmanam, sadmAnam 'sitter', sahd-samanam 'accompanied
by songs', su-tdrmanam (TS. 1. 2. 21) 'crossing well', su-dyjtmlnam, su-brdh-
manam, su-sdrmatiam, somAnam 'preparer of Soma', stamAnam (AV. v. 13 5 )
'track' (?), svadmAnam 'sweetness', harimAnam 'jaundice'. — With short a :
aryamanam, tmanam 'breath'.
I. m. dsmanH, atmdna (VS. X X X I I . 1 1 ) , usmdna (VS. xxv. 9), tmdna,
papmand (VS. xix. 1 1 ) , bhasmana 'chewing', majmand 'greatness', varsmdnd,
visva-karmand. — 1. omanl, pravad-yJmand 'having a precipitous course',
bhumand 'abundance', satd-yamana (AV. SV.) 'having a hundred paths'. —
2. aryamnd (AV.), pamnd (AV.) 'scab', bhumnA (VS. in. 5), mahimnA, varimnA•
(VS. AV.), sata-ydmnd. — 3. prathinA5, prenAb 'love', bhanAmahinAi,
varinA (TS.) 9 ; draghmA, ras'mA— n. kdrmana, jdnmana, dhdrmana
'ordinance', patmana, brahmana, bhasmana (VS. vi. 21) 'ashes', manmand,
varmatia, vidmana 'wisdom', vl-dharmand 'extension', sakmana, sdrmana,
sAkmana 'might', sva-janmana 'self-begotten', hdnmana 'stroke'. — 1. bhtimand
'earth', sydmana, hemand 'zeal'. — 2. damnd (AV.) 'tie', dhAmna, nAmna,
Ijmna (AV.) 'hair', sAmnd, suirAnina (VS. xx. 35) 'protecting well'.
D. m. 1. atmdne (VS. vn. 28), takmdne (AV.) a kind of disease, tmdne,
papmane (AV. VS.), brahmatie, bhiiri-karmane 'doing much', visvd-karmane
(TS. VS. vm. 45). — 2. aryamnt', jarimne, bhamtie (VS. x x x . 13) 'plenty',
mahimmdti-usra-yamne 'not going out during daylight', usrd-yamne,
su-trAmne (VS. x. 31), su-sAmne N. of a man ('having beautiful songs';,
suhdvltu-namne 'whose name is to be invoked successfully'. — n. kar-

1 su-dharma (VS. X X X V I I I . 1 4 ) 'well support- 8 mahina occurs 3 5 times, mahimna only

ing' seems to be meant for a V. (wrong; 3 times.
accent), but perhaps su-dhärmä should be
read.
1
sustarlma in the Pada text.
3 S e e LANMAN 531
4 Once also the transfer form varimali,
according to the declension in -mant.
5 For pralkimntl from prathimän-.
6
For premnh from pretnati-.
7 For bhümni. beside bhiimani.
9 Beside varimnt (AV.). T h e TS. twice has
varini, which in the corresponding passages of
the VS. is replaced by vartmni; cp. LANMAN
533-
In these two forms t h e m b e i n g preceded
by a consonant remains, the n b e i n g dropped:
= drighmni 'breadth', and rasmna 'rein'.
Probably also dana for dimna 'gift', and
possibly dsna = asman I.
 209

mane, jánmane, dhármani, bráhmane, bhármane 'support', vidmáne, vi-dharmane,

sármane. — i. trámane 'protection', dámane. — 2. dhAmne, sámne 'acquisition'.
Ab. m. dimanas, atmanas, üsmánas (VS.vi. 18), satyá-dharmanas (AV.). —
2. klomnás (AV.), jarimnás (AV.), varimnás (AV.). — n. cármanas, jánmanas,
dhármanas, mánmanas, vásmanas 'nest', sádmanas. — I. bhámanas. — 2. díimnas,
dhátnnas (VS. vi. 22) lómnas.
G. m. a-mármanas 'having no vital spot', brahmánas, ví-patmanas 'speeding
away', vípra-manmanas 'having an inspired mind', súci-janmanas 'of radiant birth',
su-sármanas, visvá-karmanas (VS. xxxi. 17). —> 1. mahimánas. — 2. aryamnds,
jarimnás (AV.), mahimnás, sthirá-dhamnas (AV.) 'belonging to a strong race'.
— n. kdrmanas, jánmanas, dhármanas, bráhmanas, mánmanas, vármanas. —
1. dÁmanas, bh imanas, yAmanas, vyomanas. — 2. dhAmnas, sAmnas.
L>. m. 1. dsmani, atmáni, tmáni, brakmáni, mahmdni (AV.) 'greatness', su-
sAmani. — 2. ásman, imán, atmán (VS. AV.). — n. 1. ájmani (AV.), kármani,
cármani (AV.), jánmani, dimani, dírghá-prasadmani 'affording an extensive
abode', dhárimani 'established usage', dhármani, dhAmani, párlmani 'abund-
ance', prá-bharmani 'presenting', prá-yamani 'setting out', bráhmani, mánmani,
mármani, yámani, láksmani (TS. vil. 4. 19 2 ) 'mark', vákmani 'invocation', ví-
dharmani, vésmani (AV.), vybmani, sármani, sárimani 'current of air', sávímani
'impulsion', su-sJmáni, stárXmani 'strewing', hivímani1 invocation', hómani 'offer-
ing' and 'invocation'.—With syncope: lómni (AV.), vijámni (AV.) 'knuckle'(?),
sthámni (AV.). — 2. ájman, á-yltnan 'no expedition', ¿man (VS.TS.), ódman
(TS. VS.) 'flooding', kárman, kársman, cárman, jániman, jánman, dárlman
'destruction', dhárman, dháman, pátman, bráhman, bhásman (VS. TS.) 'con-
suming', bhárman 'table', mánman, márman, yáman, váriman, várTman 'width,
vársman, vi-jáman 'related to each other', vi-dharman, vyoman, sárman, sásman
'song of praise', sákman 'attendance', sádman, sáman, svádman, háviman.
V . m . aryaman, ásman (TS.iv. 6. i 1 ), ásu-heman (TS.i. 7. j2),taiman (AV.),
tri-naman (TS. AV.) 'three-named', pjpman (AV.), puru-naman, puru-hanman
N. of a seer, brahman, vi-dharman, visva-karman, visva-siman N. of a seer,
vfsa-karman 'doing manly deeds', satya-karman 'whose actions are true',
sahasra-dhaman (AV.) 'having thousandfold splendour', su-daman 'giving good
gifts', su-yüman (AV.), sva-dharman 'abiding in one's own customs'.
Du. N. A. V . m. brahmána, satya-dharmana, sa-namSna 'of the same
kind', su-sármSna-, aryamána, jémana 'victorious', sdmñtmana (Kh. in. 22 s ;
cp. TB. 11 8. 9 1 ) 'endowed with chants', su-kármana (VS. xx. 75).
N. A. n. sármanT, jánmani, sádmani.— i. dhAmanl, samanl (VS. x. 14).
— 2. námní (AV.). — G. n. sádmanos. — L. m. ásmanos.
PI. N. V . a-damánas 'unbound' and 'not giving gifts', a-dhvasminas
'undarkened', ánu-vartm&nas (VS. xvn. 86) 'followers', á-brahmanas, a-rasmánas
'having no reins', óha-brahmanas 'conveying sacred knowledge', jarimánas,
brahmánas (VS. xxvii 2), bhrájaj-janmünas 'having a brilliant birthplace',
mahimánas, suci-janmütias, sátya-dharmanas, sá-laksmanas (TS.1.3.1o 1 ) 'having
the same marks', su-kármanas, su-jánimtlnas, su-rámanas (VS. xxi. 42) 'very
delightful', su sármanas, sthá-rasmanas 'having firm reins', svadmánas. — With
short a\ aryamánas, mahatmánas (Kh. in. 122) 'high-minded'.
N. A. n. 1. rk-simáni (VS. xvni. 43), kármani, cármani, jánimani, jánmani,
dámani (AV.), dhármani, dhámani, miman i, páksmani (VS. xix. 89) 'eyelashes',
bráhmani, mánmani, mármani, rómani 'hair', ¿jmani (AV.), vártmani, vármani
(AV.), sármani, sádmani, sámani. —• 2. kárma2, jánima, jánma, dhárma,
' B R . a n d EGGEI.ING s u g g e s t t h a t this is I s h o r t final a in the Pada as well as the
a c o r r u p t i o n f o r damtias ' b o n d ' . Samhita text.
2 T h i s and t h e f o l l o w i n g f o r m s h a v e |
Indo-arische Philologie. I. 4. 14
2 IO I . ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4. VEDIC GRAMMAR.

dhàma, nàma, bràhma, bhàma, màttma, róma sàrma, sddma. — 3. jdnimà

dhdrmà, nàma, brdhmà, bhfima, róma, sadma
A . m. ds'manas, takmanas (AV.), brahmdnas. — 2. dur-nàmnas (AV.).
I. m. d-khidra-yàmabhis 'unwearied in course', a-dhvasmabhis, asmabhis,
asma-hanmabhis 'strokes of the thunderbolt', asu-hémabhis, ómabhis, klómabhis
(VS. xxv. 8), brahmabhis, mayàra-romabhis 'peacock-haired', vilu-pdtmabhis
'flying strongly', su-kdrmabhis, su-manmabhis, su-sarmabhis. — n. ajmabhis,
¿mabhis, karmabhis, ijkmab/iis (VS. xix. 81), tràmabhis, dharmabhis, dhàmabhis,
nàmabhis, patmabhis, brdhmabhis, bharlmabhis 'nourishment', mdnmabkis,
yàmabhis, vartmabhis, v&ja-karmabhis4 (SV. TS. ill. 2. I I 1 ) 'active in war',
vàja-bharmabhis (vili. 19 30 ) 'bringing reward', vi-gamabhis 'strides', sakmabhis,
sàmabhis, havimabhis.
D. m. brahmabhyas. — n. dhàmabhyas. — Ab. n. lòmabhyas.
G. m. brahmanàm. — 2. dur-nAmnàm (AV.). — n. dharmanàm, brdhmanam,
manmanam, marmanam (Kh.i.5 s ).— 2. ahi-nàmnàms 'animals named snake',
sàmnam (AV.).
L . m. asmasu (AV.). — n. karmasu, jdnmasu, dhàmasu, varmasu,
sadmasu.
3. Stems in -van.
330. The -van stems are by far the most numerous of the three groups.
They are chiefly verbal adjectives and are almost exclusively declined in the
masculine. Hardly a dozen of them make neuter forms, and only five or
six forms are used as feminines.
a. T h e few f e m i n i n e f o r m s are cases of adjectives agreeing with f. substantives.
They are: sing.N .sa-yi'igva (x. 130*) 'companion* (gaya/rt), ati-arva (».40') 'irresistible (àditi s,;
A. an-arvdnam (x. 92M) 'irresistible' {àditim); du. N. sam-sthavini (VIU. 37«) 'standing
together' (ródasi)-, pi. I. indhan-valhisb (11. 34s) 'flaming' (dhenùbhis); G. sahasra d'àvnim
11. 17 s ) 'giving a thousand gifts' (sumatlnam). T h e f. of these stems is otherwise formed
with -I, which is however never added to -van, but regularly to a collateral suffix -vara".
Twenty-five such stems in -vari are found in the RV. and several additional ones in the
later Samhitis. It is perhaps most convenient to enumerate them here : agritvari-% (AV.)
'going in front', abhi-kftvari- 'bewitching' (AV.), abhi-bhuvarl• 'superior', abhitvarl- 9 (TS.
VS.) 'attacking', uttàna-sìvari- (AV.) 'lying extended', ftavari- 'regular', eva-yavari- 'going
quickly', kftvari- (AV.) 'bewitcher', laipa-sivari• 'lying on a couch', ttif-sidhvari• 'bestowing',
fmari- 'fat', pùrva-javarì- 'born before', pra-stmarl- 'furnished with flowers', bahu-suvarT-
'bearing many children', bhttri-davari- 'munificent', matari-bhvari-1,J 'being with her mother',
matari-svari-11 (AV.) 'mother-growing', yujvari- 'worshipping', vakvari- 'rolling', vahya-sivarl-
(AV.) 'reclining on a couch', vi-bhivarl- 'brilliant', vi-mfgvari- (AV.) 'cleansing', sdivari•
('powerful') a kind of metre, sdrvarl-«» '(star-spangled) night', sruftìzdrì- 'obedient', svela-
yavarl- 'white-flowing', sam-sisvarl- '3 'having a calf in common', sa-jitvari- 'victorious',
sa-yavari- 'accompanying', sumnavàrì- 'gracious', sunftàvarì- «4 'glorious', sjrivari- 'stream-
ing', svadh&vari- 'constant'.
1
Perhaps singular. | 7 The f. atharvi-, formed from dtharvan-
* T h e Pada text has always a in this and 'fire-priest', is quite exceptional,
the following forms. 8 That is, agra-i-t-vari-.
Ì This lengthening is found in neither 9 That is, abhi-i-t-vari-.
10
•van stems nor -an stems, except aha and From what only seems to be a -van
strfd, which may be formed from transfer stem which is really = -bhu-an-.
11
stems and in which the Pada as well as the This seems to be a corruption in AV.
Samhita text has the long vowel. v. 2 9 of màtaribhvarl- in the corresponding
4 vaja-karmabhis is a v. 1. of vdja-bharmabhis, passage of the RV.
and both adjectives as agreeing with ùtibhis 12 T h e f. of sarvara- 'variegated' occurring
have the value of feminines. in afi-sarvard- n. 'early m o r n i n g ' ; a stem
5 The G. chando-nàménam (VS. IV. 24) sdr-van- does not occur.
'named metre' seems to be a transfer to T h e f. of what only seems to be a stem
the <J-declension. \ in -van but is really = iisu-an-.
6 Formed from indiana- 'fuel', with loss I M Alio siinftavati-.
of the final vowel.
 V I . DECLENSION. NOUNS. CONSONANT STEMS. 211

b. In the strong c a s e s there is one instance in which the a remains short: an-
arvartam i ( X . 9 2 M ) , and two others in which the weakest stem is used: A. sing, maghinam
(VS. X X V I I I . 9 ) instead of maghdvanam, N. pi. maghinas (VI. 4 4 ' 1 ) instead of maghavanas
In t h e weak c a s e s when the suffix is preceded by a vowel, the a is a l w a y s s y n c o p a t e d
in the Samhita text except in the forms davane, vasuvdne (VS.), and rtavani, but it may
have to be restored in one or two instances
c . T h e three words fk-van- 'singing", magha-van- 'bountiful', saha-van- 'powerful'
make a few forms from supplementary s t e m s in -vant-. I. sing, fkvata; pi. I. mag ha-
vadbhis, D. maghavadbhyas, L . maghavatsu; N. sing, sahavan and sahavan. Beside dadhi-
kravan-, N. of a mythical horse, also occurs the stem dadht-hri-.
d. Eight or nine words in -van show transitions to the a-declension by extending
the stem with -a or, more commonly, by dropping the n. Thus satvand-m and satvanais
occur beside the numerous regular forms from satvan- 'brave'. T h e N. sing, m. anarvdn-a s
(v. 5 1 « , V I I L 3 1 " ) may have started from the A. anaman-am (x. 9 2 ' 4 ) , while the n.
anarva-m (1.164 2 ) may have been due to the f. (aditir) anarua which appears like the f.
of the a- declension. Other transitional forms are fkvd-s beside rkvatt-; fbhva-m
'dexterous' beside fb/rvan--, takvd-s 'swift' beside /divan-; vdirvSs, N. pi., 'rolling' beside
vakvan-; vibhava-m 'brilliant' beside vibhavan-; sikvd-s (AV.) 'skilful' beside sikvan-.

Inflexion.
3 3 1 . The normal forms occurring, if made from grAvan- 'pressing stone'
in the m. and from dhanvan- 'bow' in the n., would be:
Sing. m. N. grdva. A. grAvanam. I. grAvna. D. grsvne. Ab. grAvnas.
G. grdvnas. L. grdvani and grAvati. V. grtivan. — Du. N. A. V. grdvSnS
and grAvSnau. I. grAvabhyam (AV.). G. grdvttos. — PL N. V. grdvSnas.
A. grAvnas. I. qrAvabhis. D. grAvabhyas. G. grAvnSm. L. grAvasu.
Sing. n. N. A. dhanva and dhdnva. I. dhanvana. D. dhdnvane. Ab. G.
dhanvanas. L. dhanvani and dhanvan. — Pl. N. A. 1ihanvSni, dhdnva,
dhanvi (AV.). I. dhanvabhis. D. dhanvabhyas (VS.). Ab. dhanvabhyas (AV.).
G. dhanvanam (AV.). L. dhanvasu.
Forms actually occurring are the following:
Sing. N. m . agra-yAva 'going in front', atharva 'fire-priest', adma-sadva
'companion at a meal', adhva 'road', an-arvA4 'irresistible', abhi-yugvS (VS.
xvn. 86) 'attacking', abhisasti-pAva 'protecting from curses', abhi-satva 'sur-
rounded by heroes', abhyardha-yajva 'receiving sacrifices apart', amatlvA
'suffering want', aratlvA 'hostile', d-rava 'not giving', 'hostile', arvi 'steed',
avatata-dhanva (VS. 111. 6 1 ) 'whose bow is unbent', asu-patva 'flying swiftly',
ugra-dhanva 'having a mighty bow', rkva 'praising', fghavi 'impetuous', fna-
yAv3 'pursuing guilt', ftiavA 'guilty', j-tAvi 'pious', fbhva 'dexterous', krsnA-
dhva 'having a black track' (adhva), kratu-prAvii 'granting power', ksipra-
dhanva 'having an elastic bow', gravA 'pressing stone', takva 'bird of prey',
dadhi-krAva N. of a divine horse, deva-yAvS 'going to the gods', dru-sddva.
'sitting on the wood', nr-sadva 'sitting among men', patharva N. of a man,
patvd 'flying', puru-kftva 'doing much', purva-gatva 'leader', pUrva-yAva 'leader',
pra-takva (VS. v. 32) 'steep', pra-rikva 'extending beyond', prana-dAva5 (AV.)
'breath-giving', pratar-itva 'coming in the morning', budha-sftva 'striding
mightily', brhad-grava (VS. 1. 15) 'like a great stone', bhUri-ddva. 'giving much',
maghdvab 'bountiful', madva 'exhilarating', mraksa-kftoa 'rubbing to pieces',
ydjva 'sacrificer', yAva 'aggressor 1 , yuktdgrava 'having yoked the pressing
stones', yudhva 'warlike', raghu-patva 'flying swiftly', rdrava 'giving abun-
dantly', rAvit (VS. vi. 30) 'giving', vdkva 'rolling', vasu-dAva 'giving goods',

1 This seems to be a metrical shortening; I 4 an-arudn-a-s is a transition to the a-

according to GRASSUANN it is an A. of a declension.
transfer stem an-arvdna-. 5 Emendation for prana-davan in AV.
2 The form kftvanas in AV. XIX. 35S as lv. 35S.
N. pl. m. is a conjecture; cp. p. 213, n o t e 2 . 6 Also once magha-van, transition form
3 See LANMAN 5 2 4 (bottom). from a stem in -vant.
U*
 2I2 I . A L L G E M E I N E S UND S P R A C H E . 4 . VEDIC GRAMMAR.

vaja-dAva 'granting wealth', vi-jAva 'bodily', 'own', vi-bhAva 'brilliant', vi-

bhrtoa 'bearing hither and thither', vfsa-parva 'strong-jointed', vyoma (VS.
iv. 23) 'heaven' 1 , subham-yAv3 'flying swiftly', subhva 'bright', syena-patva
'borne by eagles', srutarva N. of a man, srustivA 'obedient', satlna-satva
'truly brave', satyd-madva 'really exhilarated', satva 'brave', samadva 'eager
for battle', sahAva2 'mighty', siUva 'Soma-pressing', su-dhanva 'wielding a
good bow', i f t v a 'speeding', soma-pAvi 'drinking Soma', soma-s'ttva 'pressing
Soma', stubhva 'praising', hltva 'speedy'.
N . A . n. dhdnva3 'bow' and 'desert', parva (AV.) 'joint', vi-vasva 'bright
flame', snAva (AV.) 'sinew'.
A . m. adhvinam, an-arvAnam, d-yajvanam 'not sacrificing', arvanam,
fjisvanam N . o f a m a n , rnavAnam, rtAvlnam, grAvanam, dadhi-krAuanam, dhitA-
vSrtatn 'bountiful', pivanam 'fat', puru-nissidhvanam 'bestowing many gifts', puro-
yAvanam 'going in front', pratar-yAvZnam 'coming in the morning', maghdvanam,
musfvAnam 'thief, sata-yavanam (Kh.i. 3') 'having a hundred ways', srustivAnam,
sa-jitvanam 'victorious', sdtvanam, sa-yAvclnam 'accompanying', sahAvanam,
srkvanam 'corner of the mouth', hArdvanam (VS. XXXVIII. 1 2 ) 'strengthening hearts'.
I. m. 1. dtharvana, abhi-yugvana, cikitvdna 'wise', satd-parvana 'having a
hundred joints', sikvana (TS.n. 5 . 1 2 2 ) 'skilful'. — 2 . grAvna. — n. 1. dhanvana,
parvana. — 2 . snAvtia (AV.).
D. m. 1. ddhvane, 'not staying behind', krtvane
a-pascad-daghvane 'active',
jasvane 'needy', driihvane 'hostile', prstha-ydjvane 'sacrificing on the ridge',
madvane, yajvane, vasuvdne (VS. xxi. 48) 'winning of wealth', sdkvane (VS.
v. 5) 'skilful', sata-dhanvane (VS. xvi. 29) 'having a hundred bows', srutdrvane,
sdtvane, su-krtvane 'pious', su-dhdnvane (VS. xvi. 3 6 ) , sthira-dhanvane 'having a
strong bow'.— 2 . a-ravne, f tAvne, osistha-dAvne (TS.I. 6 . 1 2 3) 'giving immedia-
tely', vfsa-prayavne 'going with stallions', suta-pAvne 'Soma-drinker', su-dAvne
'giving abundantly', soma-pAvne, sva-dhAvne 'independent'. — n. 1. turvane
'victory', davdne 'giving', dhanvane (VS. xvi. 14).
A b . m. 1. adhvanas (VS. xxvi. 1 ; TS.), paka-sutvanas 'offering Soma with
sincerity'. — 2 . a-rSvnas, puru-rAvnas (VS. 111.48) 'loud-roaring'.—n. 1. dhanvanas
(AV.), parvanas.
G. m. X. atharuanas, adhvanas, a-yajvanas, a-strta-yajvanas 'sacrificing
indefatigably', yajvanas, vy-adhvanas 'striding through'. — 2 . a-rSvnas, dadhi-
krAvnas, bhUri-dAvnas, yukta-gravnas, suta-pAvnas, soma-pAvnas; maghmas4. —
n . 1 . dhanvanas 'bow'.
L. m . 1 . atharvani, ddhvani, ftAvani, srutdrvani, su-krtvani. — 2. saia-
dAvni5. — 3. Without ending: adhvan. — n. 1. iugvani 'ford', pamani. —
3. an-arvan, a-parvan, dhanvan, parvan (AV.).
V . m. 1. atharvan (AV.), 'giving horses', divan ( A A . v . 2 . 2 ' ^ ) ,
asva-davan
maghavan, vasu-davan, (SV. 1 . 5 . 2 . 1 ' ) 'giving everywhere',
visvato-divan visva-
davan (AV.) 'giving everything', satya-satvan 'truly strong', satra-davan 'giving
everything', sahasavan 'strong', suta-pSvan, soma-pavan, sva-davan 'having good
taste', sva-dhsvan, sva-yavan 'going one's own way'. — 2 . W i t h -ifas: ftavas,
eva-yavas 'going quickly', pratar-itvas, vibhlvas6.

1
A s a masculine. h o w e v e r the a must be metrically restored;
1
A l s o sakavan and sahavati from a s t e m there are no examples in the -an or -man
in -vant. s t e m s , but the AV. has o n e in the former
3 O n c e with final v o w e l l e n g t h e n e d in the a n d three in the latter.
6
Samhita text, dhanvi. khid-vas (vi. 22<) is perhaps best taken
4 S o m e t i m e s to b e read as magha-vartas; as V. o f a stem khid vams--, BR. and LAXMAN
s e e LANMAN 534. explain it as from khid-van-. T h e V. matarisvas
5 T h e only e x a m p l e o f s y n c o p a t i o n in t h e is f o r m e d as if from mataris-van- instead of
L. of this d e c l e n s i o n in the R V . (v. 27=), w h e r e matari-iv-an-; cp. p. 2 1 0 , n o t e s 1 0 and '3.
 «3

D u . N. A . V . m . agradvana 'eating (advan-) first', a-druhvantl 'not hostile',

rtdvSnS, grdvina, pratar-ydvanS, maghdvana, ratha-ydvana 'driving in a car',
subhra-y&vSnn 'driving stately', srustivdna, sa-jitvSna. — W i t h -au: rtdvSnau,
grdvSnau (AV.). — I. m . grdvabhyam (AV.). — G . m . maghjnos.
P L N . V . m . aksna-ydvanas 'going across', aiharvSnas, an-arvdnas,
a-yajvSnas, upa-hasvanas 'mocking', ardhva-gravUnas 'lifting the pressing stone',
fkvSnas, ftdvUnas,grdvanas,ghfta-pavanas(VS.vi. 19) 'drinking ghee', druhvanas,
ni-kftvanas 'deceitful', pari-sadvanas 'besetting', pfaanas (TS. m. 2. 85), prd-
sthavanas 'swift', pratar-ydvanas, maghavanas, raghu-patvanas, vamvanas1
'demanding', vasa-pavanas (VS. vi. 19) 'drinkers of fat', subham-ydvanas,
s'rusfivdnas, satvanas, su-dhanvanas, sv-sukvanas 'shining brightly'. -— W e a k
f o r m f o r s t r o n g : maghunas (vi. 44")*.
N . A . n. 1. dhanvani, parvani, sndvani (AV.). — 2. dhanva, prima3;
with long final vowel only parva (AV. xn. s 4 i ).
A . m . 1. ddhvanas, a-yajvanas, druhvanas (AV.). — 2. d-ravnas, eva-
ydvnas, grdvnas, prStar-ydvnas; maghonas.
I. m . adhvabhis, a-prayutvabhis 'attentive', fkvabhis, eva-ydvabhis, grdvabhis,
pratar-ydvabhis1, yajvabhis, ranvabhis 'agreeable', sikvabhis, satvabhis, sanitvabhis
'bestowers', sa-ydvabhis, su-pra-ydvabhis 'speeding well', sva-yugvabhis 'allies'. —
n. patvabhis, parvabhis, vivasvabhis, soma-parvabhis 'times of Soma offerings'.
D . m . atharvabhyas, grdvabkyas, gharma-pdvabhyas (VS. XXXVIII. 15) 'drink-
ing hot (milk)' 5. — n . sndvabhyas (VS. xxxix. 10). — A b . n. sndvabhyas (AV.).
G . m . 1. ddhvanani (VS. v. 33), an-arvanSm, d-yajvanam, sdtvanHm. —
2. grdvnim, raravnam, vSja-ddvnam6, soma-pdvnam\ mag/unilm. — n. I.
dhdnvanam (AV.).
L . m . ddhvasu, kftvasu, gravasu (Kh. 1.12^)?, yajvasu8. — n . dhdttvasu,
pdrvasu.

S t e m s in -in, -min, -vin.

332. The suffixes -in, -min, -vin, which have the sense of 'possessing',
are used to form secondary adjectives. The stems in -in are very common,
those in -vin are fairly frequent, numbering nearly twenty, but there is only
one in -min: fg-min- 'praising*. They are declined in the m. and n. o n l y ' ;
but the neuter forms are very rare, amounting to fewer than a dozen altogether.
The inflexion presents hardly any irregularities. The vowel of the suffix
remains accented throughout 10 , and is not liable either to syncope or to
lengthening in the G. pi. It is lengthened in the N. sing. m. o n l y " . As in
all derivative stems ending in -«, the nasal disappears in the N. sing. m. n.
and before terminations beginning with consonants.
a. There are a few transition f o r m s to the a-declension starting from the
A. sing. m. in -in-am understood as -ina-m. S u c h are paramesth-ina-m ( A V . XIX. 9») 'most
exalted', N. sing. n.; the V . mahin-a and the G . mahitta-sya from ntah-in- 'mighty', and
1
From the intensive of \van-. 9 T h e y form a special f. stem by adding
' The form kftvano in AV. XIX. 355 is a e. g. from aiv-iti- 'possessing horses'
conjecture for the kfsvavo of the Mss. aivhi-I-.
3 In Pad a as w e l l as Samhitä. 10
E x c e p t irin-, iakitt-, sarin-, and the
4 Also the supplementary form maghàvad- compounds kärü-latin-, maha-vaftirin-, indra-
bhis. medin , f r o m each of which a single f o r m
5 Also the supplementary form maghâvad- o c c u r s ; also the compounds formed with
bhyas. the negative a-; e. g. a-nämin .
6
The form sahasra-davnäm is read as a 11
It would doubtless be lengthened in the
5
f. in I. 1 7 . N. A. n. pi. also if that form occurred.
7 Accented grâvâsu in the edition.
8
T h e r e is also the transfer form magha-
vatsu.
2I4 I- ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4. VEDIC GRAMMAR.

the n. pi. vanina-ni (x. 66 9 , 1 from van-in- m. 'forest-tree'. The isolated form man<ii-m
(I. 9 1 ) is a transition to the i-declension, starting probably from the I. sing, manahi-a
'exhilarating' understood as mandi-na.

Inflexion.
333. All the case-forms are represented in the m., but in the n. the
three singular case-forms, N. A., I., and G. only. A s only eight or nine n.
forms occur, they may most conveniently be enumerated separately:
Sing. n. N. a-nami 'unbending', ubhaya-hasti 'filling both hands', tsar!
( A V . ) 'hidden', patatri 'winged', vaji 'vigorous' ( K h . iv. 6 2 ), sakalyesi ( A V . )
'seeking shavings' 2 . I. klrina 'praising', su-gandhitia* 'fragrant'. G. pra-
hosinas 'offering oblations' 4 .
T h e m . forms actually occurring, if made from hast-in- 'having hands',
would be as follows:
Sing. N. hasti. A. hastinam. I. hastina. D . hastine. A b . hastlnas.
G. hastlnas. L. hastlni. V . hastin. — D u . N. A . hastina and hastinau.
I. D . hastibhyim. G. L. hastinos. — PI. N. hastlnas. A . hastinas. I. hastibhis.
D. hastibhyas (VS. A V . ) . G. hastinam. L . hastisu.
a. T h e forms actually occurring a r e :
Sing. N. 1. Stems in -in: anki 'possessing a hook', ati-vyadhi (VS.
x x n . 22) 'wounding', abhya-varti 'coming near', arthi 'active', asvi 'possessed
of horses', irl5 'powerful', uj-jesi (VS. XVII. 85) N. of one of the Maruts, udri
'abounding in water', rjipi 'moving upwards', rjisi 'receiving the residue of
Soma', ekaki (VS. TS.) 'solitary', kapardi 'wearing braided hair', karu-lati6
'having decayed teeth', kami 'desirous', kuliyi (TS. iv. 1 . 9 6 ) 'forming a nest',
kcvaladi 'eating by oneself alone', kes'i 'having long hair', kruii (VS. XVII. 85)
'sporting', grha-medhi (VS. XVII. 8 5) 'performing the domestic sacrifices', candri(YS.
x x . 37) 'golden', tsari 'hidden', dyumni'majestic', nis-sapi 'lustful', pakthi'cooking
the oblation',/a/a/r/(TS. 1.7. 7 2 ) 'winged',parame-sthi(VS.vm. 54) 'most exalted',
pari-panthi 'waylayer', prsty-Hmayi 'suffering from a pain in the side', pra-ghasi
(VS.XVII. 85) 'voracious', pra-bhafigi 'destroying', pra-vepani 'causing to tremble',
bahu-sardhi 'relying on his arms', brahma-cari 'practising devotion', brahma-
varcasi (VS. XXII. 22) 'eminent in sacred knowledge', bhadra-vadi 'uttering
auspicious cries', tnanlsi 'thoughtful', manthi (VS. vn. 18) 'stirred S o m a juice',
tnandi 'exhilarating', marayl 'destructive' (?), maha-hasti 'having large hands',
mayi 'crafty', med'i 'ally', rathi 'possessing a car', rambhi 'carrying a crutch',
rukmi 'adorned with gold', vajri 'armed with a bolt', varmi 'mailed', vasi
'having power', vaji 'vigorous', vi-rapsi 'copious', sata-svi 'having a hundred
possessions', saki7 'strong', sipri 'full-cheeked', susmi 'roaring', 'sounding',
svaghni 'gambler', sodasi (VS. TS.) 'having sixteen parts', sarls 'hastening',
sahasri 'thousandfold', sic'i 'companion', sorni 'offering Soma', svabdi
'bellowing', hasti 'having hands'. — 2. stem in -mitt: rgmi 'praising'. —
3. stems in -vin: a-dvayavT 'free from duplicity', a-yudhvi% 'not fighting',
astrSvi 'obeying the goad', tarasvi (VS. x i x . 88) 'bold'.
A . 1. atrinam 'devourer', adhi-kalpinam (VS. x x x . 18) 'gamble-manager',
1
Instead of vanin-as, probably due to the 5 With abnormal accent.
metre. 6 Accented like a Bahuvrihi.
» The Pada text reads sakalya-cf'r,but the 7 Thus accented VS. xvii. 85, but Saki
Paippalsda recension has the better reading RV. I. 51 8 : the latter is probably an error
iakatyesu' among the shavings': see WHITNEY'Sas the suffix is accented in the three other
note on AV. 1. 25». forms iakinam, iaiine, Salinas.
J But this form might be from su-gandhi-. 8 BOHTLINGK (pw.) regards this as a gerund:
4 The isolated form l-rudhmi (vii. 568) a-yud-dhvi 'without fighting'.
agreeing with mananui is a N. pi. n. of a stem
krudh-mirather than of krudh-min- 'angry'.
 VI. Declension. Noras. Consonant Stems. 2 1 5

abhi-prasninam (VS. x x x . 10) 'inquisitive', abhi-mStinam 'insidious', arkinam

'praising', ava-krakslnam 'rushing down', a-vajinam 'a bad horse', asvinam,
adSrinam 'breaking open', Jyinam (TS. 11. 4. 7') 'hurrying up', isminam
'speeding', uktha-samsinam 'uttering verses', ukthinam 'praising', udrinam,
rjisinam', kapardlnam, karambhinam 'possessing gruel', kalpinam (VS. xxx. 18)
'designing', kalmalikinam 'flaming', kaminam, kSrlnam 'singing", kulayinam,
kucid-arthinam 'striving to get anywhere', catinam 'lurking', jana-vadinam
(VS. x x x . 17) 'prattler1, tri-sthinam (VS. xxx. 14) 'having a threefold footing',
dyumninam, dhaninam 'wealthy', ni-yayinam2 'passing over', paksinam
'winged', patatrinam (VS.xix. 10), pari-panthinam, pitha-sarpinam (VS. xxx. 21)
'cripple', putrinam 'possessing sons', purTsinam 'possessing land', pra-v3dinam
(VS. x x x . 13) 'speaking pleasantly', prasninam (VS. xxx. 10) 'questioner',
bahu-vUd'tnam (VS. xxx. 19) 'talkative', manTsinam, manthinam, mandinam•>,
manyu-savinam 'pressing Soma with zeal', tnayinam, medlnam (TS. rv. 7. io ( ),
rathinam, vamsa-nartinam (VS. xxx. 21) 'pole-dancer', vajrinam, vanlnam
'bountiful', vanlnam 'forest tree', vaylk'nam 'ramifying', varcinam N. of
a demon, vajinam, vi-rapsinam, vi-stlminam (VS. xxiii. 29) 'wetting', s'ata-
gvlnam 'hundredfold', satinam 'hundredfold', sakinam, susminam, sritglnan:
'horned', svanlnam (VS. xxx. 7) 'keeping dogs', sahasra-posinam 'thriving a
thousandfold', sahasrlnam. — 3. d-dvayilvinam, ubhaycivinam 'partaking of
both', tarasvlnam, namasvinam 'reverential', mayavinam 'employing deceit',
medhivmam (VS. x x x i i . 14) 'possessed of wisdom', raksasvinam 'demoniacal'.
I. r. arcinU 'shining', asvina, kimtdina 'evil spirit', klrina 'praising'*, ballna
(TS. hi. 3. 8") 'strong', mandinZ, mahA-vatHrina5 'very wide', vatUrlna 'wide',
Viijina. — 3. raksasvina.
D . 1. abhya-vart'tnt, a-mitr!ne 'hostile', ava-bhedin<r (VS.xvi. 34) 'splitting',
3-tatayine (VS. xvi. 18) 'having one's bow drawn', a-yitdhlne (VS. xvi. 36)
'warrior', upa-vitine (VS. xvi. 17) 'wearing the sacred cord', usnTslrte (VS.xvi. 22)
'wearing a turban', kapardine, kavac'tne (VS. xvi. 35) 'mailed', karine, kimidine,
tantrayine (VS. xxxvm. 12) 'drawing out rays', ni-vyadhine (VS. xvi. 20)
'piercing', ni-saftgine (VS.xvi. 20) 'sword-bearer', pra-sakslne 'victorious', bilmine
(VS. xvi. 35) 'having a helmet', bhamlne 'angry', manisine, mantrine (VS.
xvi. 19) 'wise', mandine, mahine 'mighty', rathine, vajrine, varOthine (VS.
xvi. 35) 'wearing armour', varmine (VS.), vi-namsine (VS. ix. 20) 'vanishing',
vi-rapsine, vy-asnuv-'me6 (VS. xii. 32) a genius of food, vycldhine (VS. xvi. 18)
'piercer', sakine, siprlne, susmine, sodasine (VS. v i i i . 33), sv-iyudhine (VS.
xvi. 36) 'having good weapons'. — 3. raksasv'tne.
Ab. r. abhi-prabhanginas 'breaking completely', patatrinas, manthinas (TS.
VS. x i i i . 5 7 ) , sominas.
G . 1. arthinas, rjisinas, kapardlnas (TS.VS.xvi. 10), dhan'mas, patatrinas
(TS. iv. 7. 13"), parninas 'winged', pragardhinas 'pressing onwards', bhari-
posinas 'much-nourishing', manthinas (VS. vii. 18), mandinas, mSyinas, ratninas
'possessing gifts', rasinas 'juicy', retinas7 'abounding in seed', vajrinas, vaninas
'bountiful', vaninas 'forest tree', varcinas, vitjinas, vi-rapsinas, vUu-hars'tnas

» rjifam in l. 32'' is possibly a metrically 4 G r a s s m a n n in 1. l o o 9 proposes to read

shortened form {01 rjlfinam: cp. I . A N M A N 5 4 3 ' . ¿Trine.
> As this compound occurs only once 5 Accented like BahuvrThi; but cp.
beside the simple adj. yayi-, which occurs P- IS4 5 -
6
several times, the former is perhaps a trans- Formed from the present stem of J/ai-:
fer from the /-declension. vi-as-nuvin-.
J mandi-m (1. 9>) is probably a transition 7 From rrta- for rttas- 'seed'.
f o r m ; but BR. regard it as a contraction in
pronunciation of mandinam.
216 I. ALLGEMEINES UND S P R A C H E . 4. V E D I C GRAMMAR.

'refractory', vrandinas 'becoming soft', satinas, s'usminas, sr11gin as, sahasr'inas,

sominas. — 3. a-dvayavinas, dvayavinas 'double-dealing', namasvinas.
L. 1. dvTpini (AV.) 'leopard', parame-sthini (AV.), brahma-carini (AV.),
mayini, vajini, somini.
V . 1. ana-bhayin' fearless', abhya-vartin ( V S . x i l . 7), amatrin 'having a large
drinking vessel', rjlpin, rjisin, tuvi-kurmin 'working powerfully', pra-pathin
'roaming on distant paths', yaksin 'living', vajrin, vajin, virapsin, iavasin
'mighty', iiprin, susmin, sahasin 'mighty'. — 3. ubhaylvin.
Du. N. A. V. 1. asvina, V. asvina and aivina, kumarina 'having children',
ieiina, V. pajra-hosina 'having rich oblations', parninJ, putrina, purTsina, pra-
saksina, manthina, V. mayina, vajrina, vajinS, V. vajina, vi-ghanlna 'slaying',
susminS, sarat/iina (VS. xxix. 7; TS.) 'driving in the same car', satna-car'nia (Kh.
in. 2 2s) 'faring with chants'. — 3. mayavina. — Forms w i t h •au l : aivinau,
V. asvinau and aivinau, patatrinau (VS. xvm. 52), vaj'mau.
I. asvlbhyam, indra-medibhyam (AV.) 'whose ally is Indra'. — D . aivi-
bhyHm. — G. aivinos. — L. aivinos.
PI. N. V. 1. aiikuiinas 'having a hook', atrlnas, ark'inas, arcinas,
arth'mas, avarok'tnas (VS. xxiv. 6) 'brilliant', isminas, ukthinas, upa-mantrinas
'persuading', rjls'tnas, kapardinas, kabandhinas 'bearing casks', kaminas,
kar'nias, kirinas, kfianinas 'adorned with pearls', kesinas, khadinas 'adorned
with rings', ganinas (TS. 1. 4. 1 1 ' ) 'having attendants', gathinas 'singers',
gayatrinas 'singers of hymns', gharminas 'preparing the Gharma offering',
daiagvinas 'tenfold', drapsinas 'falling in drops', dhuminas 'smoking', ni-kar'inas
(TS. VS. XXVII. 4 ) 'injurers', ni-iodinas 'piercing', ni-rHminas 'lurking', ni-sanghias,
paksinas, patatrinas, pari-panthinas, pari-parinas (VS. iv. 34) 'adversaries',
parninas, pasinas 'laying snares', purisinas, pra-kruiinas 'sporting', pra-sak-
sinas, balinas, tnanTsinas, mandlnas, mah'mas, mayitias, tned'mas, rathinas,
vaninas 'bountiful', vaninas 'forest trees', varm'inas, vaj'mas, vi-rapilnas, vi-
rokinas 'brilliant', vhsninas 'holding horns' (a people), vrata-car'inas 'performing
vows', iatagvlnas, satinas, iakinas, susminas, sahasr'inas, sominas, svaninas
'resounding', hastinas, hiraninas 'golden'. — 2. rgminas. — 3. tarasvinas,
dvayavinas, dhfsadvinas 'bold', namasvinas, maylivinas.
A. I. atrlnas, a-raj'tnas 'lacking splendour', arthinas, aivinas,uktha-'ams'mas,
kaminas, Marinas, grathinas 'false', dyumninas, paksinas, pra-ghasinas (VS.
ill. 44), bhaminas, mandlnas, mayinas, mitrinas 'befriended', rathinas, vaninas
'bountiful', vaninas 'forest trees', vajinas, vrandinas, sahasr'inas, sominas,
hastinas (VS. xxiv. 29), hiraninas. — 3. raksasvinas.
I. 1. asvibhis, keiibhis, ni-saflgibhis, patatribhis, manisibhis, mandibhi's,
rukmibhis, vajibhis, iusmibhis, hastibhis. — 2. fgmibhis.
D . 1. fta-vadibhyas (VS. v. 7)'speaking the truth', kridibhyas (VS. xxiv. 16),
gfha-medhibhyas (VS. xxiv. 16), dhanvayibhyas (VS. xvi. 22) 'carrying a bow',
rathibhyas (VS. xvi. 26), iikhibhyas (AV.) 'peaked', ivanibhyas (VS. xvi. 27),
sfkayibhyas ( V S . x v 1 . 2 1 ) 'having a spear', svadhayibhyas (VS. xix. 36) 'owning
the Svadha'.
G. 1. karinam, mayinam, vaiinam (AV.), vnjinam, irnginam. — 3. stuka-
vinctm 'shaggy'. — L. 1. khadisu, dvarisu 'obstructing', hastisu (AV.).

4. Labial S t e m s ,
a. Stems in (radical) -p.
334. These stems are inflected alike in the masculine and feminine,
there being no neuters. All the monosyllables are feminine substantives.

1 A c c o r d i n g to LANMAN 544 the -a f o r m s o c c u r 369 t i m e s , the -au forms 32 times.

 VL DECLENSION. NOUNS. CONSONANT STEMS. 217

They are: dp- 'water', krp- 'beauty', ksdp- 'night', ksip- 'finger', rip- 'deceit',
rup- 'earth', vip-1 'rod'. Feminine are also the compounds a-tap- 'heating',
pati-rip- 'deceiving a husband', ri-stap- 'summit', rta-sap- 'performing worship'.
All other compound stems are masculine. They are: agni-tdp- 'enjoying the
warmth of fire', abhl-iapa-lap-2 (A V.) 'excessively whimpering', asu-trp-^ 'delighting
in lives', keta-sap- 'obeying the will (of another)', pari-rap- 'crying around',
paiu-trp-3 'delighting in herds', pra-sup'slumbering', rlty-ap- 'having streaming
(rlti-) water'.
a. The distinction of strong and weak forms appears in dp- and its compound
rlty-ap-, as well as in the two compounds of sap- 'serve', fta-sap- and keta-sap-. T h e
strong form apas is used a few times in the A. pi., but the long vowel in pari-rapas as
A. pi. is due to the metre; on the other hand, the weak form ap-as appears twice in the
AV. as N. pi.
b. The A. pi. apas is nearly always accented on the ending as a weak case;
isapas similarly appears tuo or three times, and vipas once.
c. No N. sing. m. or f. occurs, but a n. transition form once appears in this case:
vistapa-m (ix. H 3 I O \ a form which doubtless started from the A. sing. f. vistdp-am. T h e
n. pi. of the same transition stem occurs once as vistapa (vm. 8o5). Two other transition
forms are i;apabhis and isiptibhis.

Inflexion.
335. The forms actually occurring are the following:
Sing. A. m. pasu-tfpam. — f. vi-stapam. — I. m. vipti 'priest'. — f. apd,
k f p a , ksapd, vipd. — A b . f . apas-, a-tapas, vi-stapas. — G . m . vipass. — f. apas,
isapas, ripas, rupas. — L . f. vi-stapi.
D u . N . m . rity-hpa; asu-tj-pau6.
P I . N . m . rta-sdpas, keta-sdpas, V . r'tti-apas; vipas-, agni-tapas, abhl-lapa-
lapas ( A V . ) , asu-tfpas, pra-supas. — f. apas, V. Spas, j-ta-sdpas\ ksipas,
vipas, ripas; pati-ripas. T h e A . form apas occurs twice in the A V . for the N . 7 .
A . m . asu-trpas, pari-rapas*. — f. apas and spas9, isapas and isapas10,
vipas and vipas'1, ripas.
I. f. adbhis,2. — D . f . adbhyds12 ( V S . v i . 9 ) . — A b . f. adbhyds— G. m .
vipdm. — f. apdm ksapdm, vipdm. — L . f. apsu,4.

b. S t e m s in (radical) -bh.
336. Both masculines and feminines occur in this declension, but there
are no neuters. The stems comprise five monosyllables formed from roots,
together with compounds of three of the latter \grabh-, subh-, stubh-), and
kakttbh-. T h e stems are: ksubh- f. 'push', gi'bh- f. 'seizing', nabh- f. 'destroyer',
iubh- f. 'splendour', stubh- adj. 'praising', f. 'praise'; jivagf-bh- m. 'capturing
alive', 'bailiff', sute-gfbh- 'taking hold of the Soma', syBma-gf-bh- 'seizing the

1 vip- as an adjective is used as a m. times in books I and x of the RV., and 16

also. times in the AV.; it also occurs in Kh. III. 9.
' An irregular intensive formation. "> isapas 6 or 8 times in RV., isapas 2 or
3 Cp. KLUGE, K Z . 2 5 , 3 i : f . 3 times.
4 From svap- 'sleep'. it vipas thrice, vipas once in RV.
5 With irregular accent. « By dissimilation for *ab-bAis, *ab-bhyas\
6 Cp. I.ANMAN 482 (middle). c p . JOHANSSON, I F . 4, 1 3 4 — 1 4 6 . S e e LAN-
7 There is also the transition form in the MAN 483. There are also the two transfer
n. vi-f/dpa. forms i;apabhis and isipabhis, each occurring
8
Metrical for pari-rapas, which is the once.
reading of the Pada text in II. 233- M; see »3 On the metrical value of apam see LAN-
RPr. IX. 26. MAN 484 (top).
9 apas is the regular form occurring 152 '4 BR. regard apdsu in vm. 414 as = apsu
times in the RV. and 26 times in the AV. with inserted -a-. See LANMAN 484.
The strong form apas is used half a dozen
2 18 I . ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4 . VEDIC GRAMMAR.

reins'; rathe-Jubh- 'flying along in a car'; anu-slubh- f. 'after-praise', a metre,

j-ta-stubh- 'praising duly', tri-stubh- 'triple praise', a metre, pari-stubh- 'exulting
on every side', sam-stubh- (VS.) 'shout of joy', a metre, gharma-stubh-
'shouting in the heat', ehandah-stubh- 'praising in hymns', vrsa-stiibh- 'calling
aloud', su-stubh• 'uttering a shrill cry'; kakubh- f. 'peak', tri-kakubh- 'three-
pointed'.
a . T h e distinction of strong and weak forms does not appear except in
the N. and A . pi. of nabh-. T h e inflexion of these stems is incompletely
represented, there being no dual forms, and no plural forms the endings of
which begin with, a consonant

Inflexion.
337. T h e forms occurring are:
Sing. N. m. stup; tri-kaki'tp. — f. anu-stup (VS. AV.), anu-stnk (TS. v.
2. ii 1 ), tri-stup-, kakup (VS. AV.).
A. m. rathe-subham, sute-grbham. — f. grbham, Jubham\ rta-stubham,
anu-stubham, tri-stubham\ kakubham.
I. m. stubhii; su-stubhl. — f. kstibha, grbha, Jubhii; anu-stubhU, tri-sti'tbha
(VS. xvii. 34; TS. 11. 2. 48); kakitbha (VS. xxvm. 44).
D. m. gharma-stub/ie, syama-grbhe. — f. subhe (AV. VS. xxx. 7); anu-
stubhe (VS. xxiv. 12), tri-stubhe (VS. xxiv. 12); kakubhe (VS. xxiv. 13).
Ab. m. jlva-gfbhas. — f. grbhds (VS. xxi. 43); anu-stubhas (VS. xm. 54),
tri-sltMas (AV.).
G. m. su-stub/ias. — f. subhds1 (in subhas pati, du. N. A. and subhas
pan, V.).
L. f. tri-stubhi (VS. xxxvm. 18); kakubhi (TS. m. 3. 91; VS. xv. 4).
PI. N. m. chandah-stubhas, vrsa-stubhas, pari-stubhas, su-stubhas. —
f. nfibAas', subhas, stubhas.
A. f. nabhas, stubhas; tri-stubhas, pari-stubhas-, kakubhas.
G. f. kakubhSm.
c. Stems in -m.
338. There are only about half a dozen stems in -m which among them
muster a few more than a dozen forms. A l l are monosyllables except a
compound of nam- 'bend'. Neuters are Jam- 'happiness' and perhaps dam-
'house'. A possible m. is him- 'cold'; and there are four feminines: ksam-,
gam-, and jam-, all meaning 'earth', and satn-ndm- (AV.) 'favour'. Strong
and weak forms are distinguished in ksam-, which lengthens the vowel in the
strong cases, and syncopates it in one of the two weak cases occurring;
gam- and jam- are found in weak cases only, where they syncopate the vowel.
T h e forms occurring are the following:
Sing. N. A. n. Jam. — L f. ksamd, jmi\ m. him-a -J. — Ab. f. ksmas,
gmas, jmas. — G. f. gmas, jmas*; n. dan5. — L. f. ksami6. — Du. N. f.
ksima, dyivS-ksami 'heaven and earth'. — PI. N. f. ksdmas; sam-namas (AV.).
— G. n. dam Am.

1 T h e form dabhas in v . 19' is regarded 4 Cp. BRUGMANN, Grundriss 2, 580.

b y BR. and GRASSMANN as N. sing. m. 5 For *dam-s (like d-gari for *a-gtm-s)
'destroyer'. I.ANMAN 485 thinks it may be occurring only in the expressions patir dan
a G. sing. f. with wrong accent. and pati dan and equivalent to dam-patih and
' Strong form. dam-pali at the end of a tri;tubh line. Cp.
3 T h i s is the only form, occurring twice, BRUGMAKN, Grundriss 2, 453.
from a possible stem him-, beside himina, 6 With irregular accent; cp. above 94 a.
from hima-. It might, however, be an I.
from the latter stem. Cp. 372. j
 219

5. Stems in Sibilants.
i. a. Stems in radical s and a.
33$. In radical stems ending in s and s, the sibilants are identical in
origin, both being alike etymologically based on the dental s, which remains
after a, but is cerebralized after other vowels and after k. In the RV. there
are of radical ¿-stems some 40 derived from about 15 roots; of radical
i-stems, some 50 derived from about 15 roots; in both groups taken together
there are nearly 20 monosyllabic stems, the rest being compounds. Masculine
and feminine stems are about equally numerous; but there are altogether
only 7 or 8 neuters.
a. The distinction between strong and weak farms appears in three words:
pttmSms and punts- 'male'; nis- and nas- 'nose'; uktha-sas- and uktha-sds- 'uttering verses'.
The A. pi. has the accentuation of weak stems in the masculines jnas-as, pums-as, mas-as
and in the feminines if-as, uf-as, dvif as.
b. The stem is- 'face' is supplemented in its inflexion by the an- stem as-an-;
the stem is- is supplemented before consonant endings by ida- •;
7
and dos- 'fore-arm' is
supplemented by dos-dn- in the dual form dosdnt (AV. IX. 7 )-
c. Transitions to the a- or 6-declension appear in forms made from as- 'face',
is- 'refreshment', ias- 'cough', nas- 'nose', mas- 'month', a-sas- 'hope', ni-mif- 'winking'.
1. From as-, beside and probably through the influence of the I. sing, ds-i, is formed the
adv. asaya 'before the face o f ' (as from a stem asa-, and with adverbial shift of accent
instead of *asayd). — 2. Forms like G. is-as gave rise to i$a-m; and the supplementary
stem ifa- probably started from the I. sing, id-i, which itself was probably due to id-
the form assumed by if- before bh- endings; the stem is- further shows a transition to
the i- declension in the D. isdye. — 3. From ias- 'cough' there is the transition V. kast
(AV.). — 4. The strong dual form nas-i furnished a transition to an a- stem, from which
is formed the dual nAse (AV.). — 5. As pid-am gave rise to a new N. pida-s, so from
mis-am arose the new stem masa-, from which are formed the N. sing, masa-s and the
A. pi. masan. — 6. In the RV. the stem s-ias- alone is used; but in the AV. appears the
A. asam (perhaps a contraction for a-sasam) which, understood as asa-m, was probably
the starting point of the asa-, the only stem in the later language. — 7. From ni-mis-
winking' there appear, beside the regular compound forms A. d-nimis-am, I. a-nimis-a f.
'non-winking', the transition forms N. a-nimisd-s, A. a-nimifd-m, I. a-nimifina, N.pi. a-nimifas,
adj. 'unwinking', with the regular Bahuvrlhi accent (90 B c).

Inflexion.
340. In the N. sing, the sibilant is of course dropped if preceded by
a consonant, as an-dk 'eyeless', pumHn 'man'. Otherwise s remains, while s
becomes f2. Before bh- endings, s becomes d in two forms which occur
(,m3d-bhis, mad-bhyas)3 and r in the only other one (dor-bhydm); while s
becomes d in the only example occurring (vi-prud-bhis).
The forms actually occurring, if made from m a s m . 'month' as an
s- stem, and from dvis- f. 'hatred' as a ¡r-stem, would be as follows:
Sing. N.5 mAs; dv!t. A. mdsam; dvis am. I. masa\ dvis A. D. mHsi\
dvis/. Ab. mSsas) dvisas. G. mSsas; dvisas. L. mJsi', dvisi. — Du. N. A. mdsS;
dvisa. G. masos. L. masos (AV.TS.). — Pl. N. miisas; dvisas. A. mUsas; dvisas
and dvisas. I. tnadbhis; dvidbhis. D. madbhyas (AV.). Ab. midbhyas (AV.).
G. mJs/im; dvisAm. L. msssu (AV.).
The forms actually occurring are:
1
As k;ap- and kfip- by kfapa- and ¿ i r -3 C p . J . SCHMIDT, K Z . 26, 3 4 0 .
respectively. 4 In this word (derived from mi- 'mea-
* It becomes A only in the n. form dadhfk sure') the s is really secondary, probably
'boldly', used as an adv. from dadhff-, if the representing the suffix -as (mas- - mi-as-)\
word is derived from dhff-'be bold'; but the cp. BRUGMANN, Grundriss 2, p. 398.
word is perhaps more probably derived from 5 The only V. occurring is pumas.
dfk- 'be firm', see BR. s. v. dadhfk, and cp.
BARTHOLOMAE, IF. 12, Anzeiger p. 28.
2 2O I. ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4. V E D I C GRAMMAR.

S i n g . N . 1. m . pumàttx 'male'; candra-mas 'moon', dBré-bhas2 'shining to

a d i s t a n c e ' , su-dàsJ 'worshipping well'. — f . d-jnas ' h a v i n g n o k i n d r e d ' , a-s'is*
'prayer'. — n . bhds ' l i g h t ' , m<is ' f l e s h ' ; dos ' a r m ' , yds ' w e l f a r e ' , sam-yòs 'luck
and welfare'. — 2 . m . an-dk5 'blind', tdhamana-dvit6 'hating the insolent'. —
f . vi-prùt (AV.) 'drop'.
A . 1. m . misam ' m o n t h ' , pumàmsam-, a-yàsam 'dexterous', uktha-sdsam''
'uttering verses', suddsam, su-bhàsam 'shining beautifully', sv-as'isam* 'well-
p r a i s i n g ' , sv-àsam 'fair-mouthed'. — f. ktisam8 (AV.) 'cough'; a-sisam4, pra-
s'lsam4 ' p r e c e p t ' 9 . — 2 . m . ghrta-pn'tsam ' s p r i n k l i n g g h e e ' , jara-dvisam 'hating
d e c r e p i t u d e ' , brahma-dvisam ' h a t i n g s a c r e d k n o w l e d g e ' , viba-pusam 'all-nourish-
ing'. — f . is am ' r e f r e s h m e n t ' , dvisam ' h a t r e d ' , prksatrt 'satiation'; d-nimisam
' n o n - w i n k i n g ' , dosani-srisam ( A V . ) 'leaning on the arm', hrdaya-srisam (AV.)
'clinging to the heart'. Also t h e a d v e r b i a l A . a-vy-usam ( A V . ) 'till t h e d a w n ' . - —
n . dadhfk 'boldly' as adv.
1 . 1 . m . mas fi. — f . kasà ( A V . ) , nasà ( A V . ) ' n o s e ' , sasà ' r u l e r ' 1 0 ; abhi-sasa11
'blame', ava-sdsa ( A V . ) ' w r o n g desire', a-sdsa ' h o p e ' , à-sisa, ni/i-sdsa 'blame',
para-sdsà (AV.) 'calumny', pra-sisa ( A V . VS.). — n . asà 'mouth', bhasd. —
2. m . visva-pi'tsaI2. — f . isti, tvisA ' e x c i t e m e n t ' ; d-nimisa, pra-trsa (AV. TS.)
'rainy s e a s o n ' , presi'1 •> ' p r e s s u r e ' . — n. ghrta-prusa.
D . 1. m . pumsJ ( A V . ) ; su-dàse. — n . bhdsé(VS. xni. 39). — 2. m . d-pra-
yuse1* 'not careless'; a-vi-dvise (AV.) 'for non-enmity', rsi-dvise 'hating the
seers', brahma-dvise-, gav-ise 'wishing for cows', pasv-ise 'wishing for cattle' ;
s3kam-t'tkstis 'sprinkling together'. — f . ise'lb, hisi,\ prksé, risé ' i n j u r y ' , prése
( V S . v. 7).
Ab. i . m . pumsds. — f. kasas (AV.) — n. asds. — 2. f. isds, tvisas,
dvisas, risas; abhi-irisas 'ligature', m-mtsas 'winking'.
G . 1 . m . pumsds; a-sasas ' n o t b l e s s i n g ' , su-dàsas, sv-àsas. — f . a-si'sas ( T S .
i v . 6 . 6 3 ) . — 2 . m . srhga-vfsas11 a man's name. — f . isds, usas 'dawn', dvisas,
pfksds; abhra-prusas 'sprinkling of the clouds', ni-misas.
L . 1. m . pumsi, masi. — f . upasi 'in the lap', nasi (VS.); a-s'isi (AV.),
pra-sisi (AV.). — 2 . f . ni-misi, pra-rfsi, vy-usi 'dawn'.
V . m. pumasl8.
D u . N . A . 1. m . uktha-iàsaI9, sàrya-màsa20 'sun a n d m o o n ' . — f. nàsa
— I . 1 . n . dorbhyàm ( V S . x x v . 3 ) . — G . 1 . f . nasJs. — L . 1. f . nasós ( A V . T S . ) .
PI. N. 1. m . a-yàsas, V. aySsas, uktha-sàsas,9, su-samsasas" (AV.)
'well-directing'. — f . a-s'dsas; a-s'/sas, pra-sisas, vi-sisas (AV.) 'explanations',

• On the Sandhi of this N . see LANMAN 1 '3 A c c e n t e d thus as a monosyllabic stem

4951. ] instead of présa (= pra-is-à).
' See LANMAN 4 9 5 ' . ! '4 From pra-\-yu- 'separate' with s as root
5 T h e r e are also the transition forms determinative.
masa-s and a-nimifà-s. ' 'S Perhaps also ¿ram-ise (vili. 4Ó'7) 'hasten-
4 T h e root in à-sis- and pra-siy, b e i n g a ! ing near', Pada ¿ram ise\ cp. LANMAN 496'.
reduced form of sas- 'order', is here treated 1 " 6 A l s o the transfer to the /-decleniion
as b e l o n g i n g to the i-class. ¿save.
5 From ait-ais- 'eyeless'. "7 In a compound vocative with napàt.
6 T h e N. of is- would be *>'/: its place is 1 8 In the f. are found the transfers to the

supplied by the extended form idi. ¿ - d e c l e n s i o n ide and kise (AV.).

7 Strong stem from sas- = sants- 'pro- '9 Strong f o r m s ; Pp. uktha-sàsà, •sdsas.
claim'. 1 0 T h i s might be from the transition stem

8 A c c e n t e d iasam ( A V . v . 22 -masa-.
9 A l s o the transition forms a-nimifóm and « There is also the transition form
àsim (Av.). "àse (AV.).
» Cp. LANMAN 495 (bottom). « T h e r e are also the transition forms
u From sas• = sanis- 'proclaim'. ! màsas, a-rtimifàs.
11 T h e r e is also the transition form |
OrnimisÌJia. I
 221

sam-sisas (AV.) 'directions'; vi-srdsas1 ( A V . ) 'falling apart', su-srdsas (AV.)

'falling off easily', svayam-srasas (AV.) 'dropping spontaneously'. — 2. m .
maksas 'flies', mdsas 'mice'; anrta-dvisas 'persecuting untruth', V. a-saca-dvisas
'hating non-worshippers', gav-isas, ghrta-pr/'isas, pari-priisas 'sprinkling',
brhad-uksas 'shedding copiously', brahma-dvisas, yajha-musas (TS. IIL 5. 4')
'sacrifice stealer', vAta-tvisas 'having the impetuosity of the wind'. — f. isas,
tvisas, prksas\ an-3-dhrsas (AV.) 'not checking', ghrta-prusas, ni-misas (AV.),
nemantt-isas1 'following guidance', pati-duisas 'hating her husband', vy-i'tsas
(AV.), sam-isas 'darts', sakam-uksas, su-pfksas 'abounding with food'.
A . 1. m. jfiasas 'relatives', pumsas, mis as3; an-Asas 'faceless', an-Brdhva-
bhisas 'whose splendour does not rise', a-yAsas, a-sdsas, hrtsv-asas 'throwing
into the heart'. — f. a-sdsas; 3-s'isas, pra-sisas. — 2. m . brahma-dvisas. — f. isas
and isas*, usas, dvisas and dvisas5, pfisas; camrisasvi-prusas (AV.).
1.1. m. madbhis. — 2. f. vi-prudbhis^ (VS.). — D. 1. m. madbhyas (AV.).
— A b . 1. m. madbhyas (AV.). — G. 1. m. pu/nsAm (AV.), masdm, vasAm8
'abodes'; a-yisam. — 2. f. isAm, dvisAm. — L . 1. m . pumsi'c9 (AV.).

1. b. Stems in derivative -s.

<*• Stems i n -is and -us.

341. T h e stems formed with the suffixes -is and -us may best be treated
together, as their inflexion is identical. The -is stems, numbering about a
dozen, consist primarily of neuters only 1 0 ; these when they are final members
of compounds are secondarily inflected as masculines also, but only in a
single form (N. sing, sva-socis 'self-radiant') as feminine. The -us stems,
numbering sixteen (exclusive of compounds) in the RV., include primary
masculines (two also as f.) as well as neuters; three of the latter as final
members of compounds are also inflected as feminine. Eleven of the -us
stems are neuter substantives, all but one accented on the radical syllable;
four of these are also used as m. adjectives" accented in the same way (arus-,
caksus-, tapus-, vdpus-). Three of those -us stems which are exclusively m.
are adjectives accented on the suffix, while two are substantives accented
on the root (nah-us-, man-us-)".
a. T h e N . A. pi. n. are distinguished as s t r o n g f o r m s by lengthening and nasa-
lizing the vowel of the suffix (as in the -as stems), e. g. Jyotimfi and cakfumfi.
b. A m o n g these stems appear a number of transitions to, and a few from, other
declensions. 1. The N*. sing, n., as in sac-is and caif-us, having in some passages the
appearance of a N. sing. m. sons and caksu-s, led to formations according to the /- and
o - d e c l e n s i o n . Such are N. pL socayas (AV.) 'flames', V. sing. pSvaka-soce 'shining brightly',
bhadra-iocc 'shining beautifully', sukra-ioce 'shining brilliantly'; N. pi. arcayas 'beams',
I. pi. arci-bhis. The form of krav-is- 'raw flesh' in the compound a-kravi-hasta- 'not having
bloody hands' is probably due to the same cause. From caks-us- 'eye' is o n c e formed
the Ab. cakfo-s and the V. sahasra-cakso (AV.) 'thousand-eyed'. From tdp-us- 'hot' is once

1
T h e Mss. read vi-srasas; see W H I T N E Y ' |S 8 This word, occurring in this form only,
note on AV. x i x . 343. might be a f.
2 neman- is here probably a locative. j 9 miss11- occurs Fane. Br. iv. 4. 1 and
3 There is also the transition form masu (like ptimsu for pums-su) TS. VII. 5-2».
masan. , T h e f. transition form idasu occurs as the
4 isas occurs 63 times, isas 7 times in the i L. pi. of if-.
RV. •o There s e e m s no reason why dm-is-
5 dvisas occurs 39 times, dvisas 4 times' occurring in L. s. only, should exceptionally
in the RV. b e r e g a r d e d a s m . (BR., L A N M A N , GKASS-
6
T h e meaning of this word is perhaps MANN).
'libations in ladles'. i" One of these, tapus- 'hot', has a single
7 There is also the transition form idabhis f. form, A. du. tdpitja.
as an I. pi. of if-. " See above p. 84, 19.
222 L ALLGEMEINES UND S P R A C H E . 4 . V E D I C GRAMMAR.

formed the G . tafo-s; from van-its- 'desiring', as if vanu-s in N., the A . sing.vanu-m and
pi. ran;/«; from ay-us- 'life' occurs not only the I., sing. &yu-n-i, but several c o m p o u n d
forms, V . dirghayo 'long-lived', adabdhayo (VS.) ' h a v i n g unimpaired vigour'. A . z-rddhayu-m
•full of vigour', n. vihiyu 'all-quickening', A . m. viivayu-m, D . viiv&yarcc, G . vih'iyo-s—
2. T h e r e are also some t r a n s i t i o n forms from three masculines in -us, by extension of
the stem, to the a- d e c l e n s i o n : from nah-us• 'neighbour', starting perhaps f r o m the G.
nahuf -as taken as a N. sing, nahusa-s, are m a d e the G . nahufa-sya and the L . nahitse;
from man-us- 'man', starting from the N. pi. manus-as taken as a N. sing, manukas, c o m e
the D . manusaya and the G . manusa-sya; from vdp-us- 'beauty', once D . vdpusaya b e s i d e the
frequent vapus-e. •— 3. O n the other hand, there are a f e w transitions f r o m the
declension of #- a n d u- s t e m s to that of stems in -is and -us. Beside su-rabhi- 'fragrant',
the superlative form su raMif-/amam' occurs o n c e ; and b e s i d e numerous compounds
formed with tuvi- a f p e a r the stems tuvif-mant- 'powerful' and tuvis-fama- ' s t r o n g e s t ' 3 .
Beside the G. dhaho-s and dakso-s\ 'burning', there appears once the form datsus-as5,
w h i c h is doubtless due to the false analogy o f forms like tasthusas. T h o u g h mdn-tis-
*man' may be an independent formation b e s i d e man-u-, the probability is rather in favour
o f regarding it as secondary (starting from a N. manu-s), because manu- shows e i g h t
case-forms, but minus- only three 6 . T h e stem a-prayus-, occurring only once beside the
less rare a-prayu-, probably represents a transition from the latter stem.

Inflexion.
342. T h e final s becomes s before vowel endings, and r before -bh.
T h e inflexion of the n. is the same as that of the m. except in the A. sing.,
N. A . du. and pi. T h e only f. forms occurring are in the N. or A . They
are the following: N. sing, svd-socis 'self-radiant'; cdksus 'seeing', d-ghora-caksus
'not having an evil eye', hrade-caksus 'reflected in a lake'; citrayus 'possessed
of wonderful vitality'; A . du. tapusa 'hot'; A . pi. gj-vapusas 'having the form
of cows'.
T h e actual forms occurring, if m a d e from socis- 'glow' in the n., and
from -socis- in the m. (when it differs from the n.), and from cdksus- 'eye' as n.
and 'seeing' as m., would be as follows:
1. Sing. N. socis. A . socis; m. -socisam. I. socisa. D. socise. A b . socisas.
G . socisas. L. socisi. V . iocis. — F l . N. A . socimsi; m. -socisas. I. socirbhis.
D. in. -socirbhyas. G. socisam. L. socissu.
2. Sing. N. cdksus. A . cdksus; m. cdksusam. I. cdksusa. D. cdksuse.
A b . G. cdksusas. L. cdksusi. — D u . N. A . cdksusl; m. cdksusa. D. cdksurbhyam
(VS.). — P I . N. A. caksHmsi; m. cdksusas. I. caksurbhis. D. caksurbhyas (VS.).
G . cdksusam.
T h e forms which actually occur are the following:
S i n g . N . m . 1. d-havis 'not offering oblations', kfsna-vyathis 'whose path
is black'; citrd-jyotis (VS. xvii.8O) 'shining brilliantly', sukrd-jyotis (VS.XII. 15)
'brightly shining', satya-jyotis (VS. xvii. 80) 'truly brilliant', su-jyotis (VS.
x x x v i i . 21) 'shining well'; citrd-socis 'shining brilliantly', duroka-socis 'glowing
unpleasantly', sukrd-socis 'bright-rayed'; jlvd-barhis ( A V . ) 'having a fresh litter',
su-barhis (VS. xxi. 15) 'having a g o o d l y litter', slirnd-barhis 'who has strewn the
litter'; sva-rocis 'self-shining'; sv-arcis1 'flashing beautifully'. — 2. cdksus 'seeing',
vapus8 'beautyfuP, vidus ' a t t e n t i v e ' ' ; d-dabdha-caksus (AV.) 'having undamaged
sight', ksitAyus 'whose life goes to an end', dlrghtiyus 'long-lived', duh-sdsus
'malignant', vi-parus ( A V . ) 'jointless', visvdtas-caksus 'having eyes on all sides',
sarva-parus ( A V . ) 'having all joints', sahasrayus ( A V . ) 'living a thousand years'.

1 T h e r e is probably insufficient reason to 4 Desiderative adj. from dah- 'burn',

assume a primary independently formed stem 5 T h e P a d a text has dhaifusas.
-ay-u- beside ¿y-us-; cp.LANMAN569(bottom). 1 6 Cp. LANMAN 570 (bottom).

» Retaining the s of the N. like indras-
vani-.
3 tuv-is- as an independent formation would
be irregular, since the radical vowel otherwise
shows G u g a before the suffix -is (134).
i T h e r e are also the transition forms
arci-s and son s, the neuters becoming mas-
culines of the <- declension,
8 A l s o the transition forms cdifu-s, tapu-s.
9 T h i s may be an « - s t e m : vidu-s.
 VI. DECLENSION. NOUNS. CONSONANT STEMS. 2 2 3

N . A . n . 1. arc'ts 'flame', kravis ( A V . ) 'raw flesh', cfiadis 'cover', chardis

'fence', jyotis 'light', barh'ts 'litter', vartis 'circuit', vyathis 'course', sccis 'lustre',
sarpis 'clarified butter', havis 'oblation'; vaisvanara-jyotis (VS. x x . 23) 'light
of Vais'vanara', sukra-jyotis (TS. iv. 1. 9J), svar-jyotis (VS. v. 32) 'light o f
heaven'. — 2. drus (AV.) 'wound', Ayus 'life', cakms 'eye', tapus 'glow',
dhanus 'bow', parus 'joint', yd jus 'worship', vapus 'beauty', sdsus 'command';
indra-dhatius (AV.) 'Indra's bow', sv-ayus1 (VS. iv. 28) 'full vigour'.
A . m . 1. a-gfbhlta-socisam 'having unsubdued splendour', ajira-socisam
'having a quick light', Brdkva-socisam 'flaming upwards', citra-socisam, dlrghayu-
socisam 'shining through a long life', pSvaka-socisam 'shining brightly', slra-
socisam 'sharp-rayed', sukra-socisam, srestha-socisam 'most brilliant'; citrd-
barhisam 'having a brilliant bed', vrktabarhisam 'having the litter spread',
su-barkisam, stirna-barhisam (VS. xiv. 49); daksina-jyotisam (AV.) 'brilliant b y
the sacrificed gift', hiranya-jyotisam (AV.) 'having golden splendour'. —
2. janusam 'birth', dirghiyusam, parv-ayusam 'bestowing much vitality',
satayusam2 'attaining the age of a hundred'.
I. 1. n. arcisa, kravlsH, chardis a (VS. xni. 19), jydtisa, barhisa (VS.
xviii. 63; TS.), rocisH 'brightness', soeisS, sarpisa, havisa.— m. manthi-socisa
(VS. vii. 18) 'shining like mixed Soma', sukra-jyotisa (VS.). — 2. n. dyusa,
caksusa, janustl, tapusa, dhanusa (Kh. ill. 9), parusa, ydjusa, satdyusa,
samista-yaji'tsa (VS. xix. 29) 'sacrifice and formula', sv-3yiisa (VS. iv. 28)
'full vigour of life'. — m . tapusa, nahusa 'neighbour', mdnusa 'man', vanusa
'eager*.
D . 1. n. arcise (TS. VS. XVII. 11), jyjtise (VS. AV.), barhise (VS. 11. 1),
socise, havise. — m. tigmd-soase 'sharp-rayed', pavaka-socise, sukrd-socise,
7'rktd-barhisc, stlrna-barhise, rdta-havise 'liberal offerer', su-havise 'offering fair
oblations'. — 2. n. ayuse (VS. AV.), cdksuse, jartuse, tapuse (AV.), yajuse (VS.
1. 3 0 ) , vdpuse. — m . cdksuse, manuse, vanuse

A b . 1. n. jy'jtisas (AV.), bar/iisas, havisas. — 2. n. ayusas (TS. iv. 1. 4 5 ),

cdksusas (TS. v. 7. 7 l ) , janusas, parusas (TS. iv. 2. 9"), vapusas. — m . nahusas,
manusas, vapusas.

G . 1. n . kravisas, chardisas, jyotisas, barhisas, socisas, sarpiscu, havisas. —

m.pavakd-socisas, vfddha-socisas 'blazing mightily', 'shining brightly',
vasu-rocisas
vrkta-barhisas4. — 2. n . Ayusas, cdksusas, tapusas, tdrusas 'superiority', parusas,
vapusas. m . cdksusas,
— nahusas, manusas, vanusas5; ista-yajusas (VS.vm.12)
'having offered the sacrificial verses'.
L . 1. n. arcisi, dmisi6 'raw flesh', jyotisi, barhisi, sadhisi (VS. xm. 53)
'resting-place', havisi-, tri-barhisi 'with threefold litter'. — 2. n. Ayusi1, tarusi,
parusi, vdpusi.

V . 1. n. barhis%\ deva-havis 'oblation to the gods' (VS. vi. 8). — 2. m .

Iiayus9 'first of living beings'.
D u . N . A . 2. n. caksusT (AV., K h . iv. n 1 1 ) , janusT. — m . caksusa,
jayusa 'victorious'. — D . 2. n. caksurbhyam (VS. VII. 27).

< A l s o t h e t r a n s i t i o n f o r m visvayu 'all- 6 Accounted a m . by BR., GRASSMANN,

quickening'. LANMAN.
2
A l s o t h e t r a n s i t i o n f o r m s vanü-m, 7 A l s o t h e t r a n s i t i o n f o r m ayuni; a n d m.
vfddh&yu m, viivayu-m. ndhusc.
8
i T r a n s i t i o n f o r m s : viiväyavc, mdnufäya, Also the transition f o r m s pivaka-soce,
vapufäya-, a-prjyufe 'not careless'. bhadra-soce, suira-ioce.
4 Also p e r h a p s a t r a n s i t i o n f o r m ioci-s\ c p . 9 A l s o t h e t r a n s i t i o n f o r m s aäabdhäyo (VS.),
LANMAN 568. dirghäyo, sahasra-cakfo (AV.).
5 A l s o t h e t r a n s i t i o n f o r m s tapos, visväyos-,
ndhujasya; manu}asya\ d/ta&fujas(341b, p.222).
224

PI. N . m . i . ágrbfñta-socisas, ajirá-socisas, vÁta-dhrajisas (Kh. i. 31)

'having the impulse of wind', vrktá-barhisas, V. irkta-barhisas, sádma-barhisas
'preparing the litter', V. su-barhisas, su-jyitisas and su-jyotlsas, svá-rocisas—
2. náhusas, mánusas, V. mantisas, vanúsas, vápusas.
N . A . n. 1. arcimsi, jyótimsi, barhímsi (VS. x x v m . 21), socimsi, havímsi.
— 2. áyürnsi, cáksümsi, janámsi, tápümsi, párümn (TS. VS. AV.), yájümsi
(VS. AV.),' vápümsi. "
A . m . 1. su-jyótisas. — 2. náhusas, mánusas, vanúsas *.
I . 1. n . havirbhis3. — 2. n. dhánurbhis (AV.), yájurbhis (VS.lv.i), vápur-
bhis. — D . 1. m . ürdhvá-barhirbhyas (VS. x x x v n i . 1 5 ) 'being above the litter'.
— 2. n. yájurbhyas (VS. x x x v m . 1 1 ) .
G . 1. n. jyotisam, havísam (AV.). — 2. n. cáksusim (AV.), janusam,
yájusam (AV.), vápusam.— m . vatrísam, visvá-manusam 'belonging to all men'.
L . 1. n. havissu.
ft. Stems in -as.
3 4 3 . Primarily this declension consists almost entirely of neuters, which
are accented on the root, as mán-as- 'mind'; but these as final members of
adjective compounds may be inflected in all three genders, as N. m. f.
su-mánas, n. su-mánas 'well-disposed'. There are besides a few primary
masculines, which are accented on the suffix, being either substantives, as
raks-as- 'demon', or adjectives, some of which occur in the f. also (as well
as n.), as ap-as- 'active'; and one feminine, us-As- 'dawn' 4 .
a. S t r o n g c a s e s a r e r e g u l a r l y d i s t i n g u i s h e d o n l y i n t h e N . A . p i . n . , w h e r e t h e
v o w e l o f t h e s u f f i x i s l e n g t h e n e d a n d n a s a l i z e d 5 ( a s i n t h e -is a n d us s t e m s ) , a s
ámhamsi ' t r o u b l e s ' . O t h e r w i s e t h e s t e m usas- s h o w s in t h e A . s i n g . , N . A . d u . , N . V . p i . ,
s t r o n g f o r m s w i t h l e n g t h e n e d v o w e l in t h e suffix, w h i c h o c c u r b e s i d e t h e u n l e n g t h e n e d
6
f o r m s , t h e l a t t e r b e i n g n e a r l y t h r e e t i m e s as f r e q u e n t in t h e R V . T h e l o n g v o w e l is
h e r e r e q u i r e d b y t h e m e t r e i n 2 0 o u t o f 28 o c c u r r e n c e s , a n d i s f a v o u r e d b y t h e m e t r e i n
1
the r e s t ; so that the lengthening m a y be due to metrical exigencies. T h e strong form
usSsas8 o c c u r s o n c e ( x . 3 9 1 ) f o r t h e w e a k ufásas a s t h e G . s i n g , o r A . p i . T h e r e i s f u r t h e r
t h e s i n g l e s t r o n g f o r m N . d u . m . tosisi9 ' b e s t o w i n g a b u n d a n t l y ' io.
b . S u p p l e m e n t a r y s t e m s e n d i n g i n - as b e s i d e -an a r e fihvas- ' s k i l f u l ' (as well as
fbhva-) beside fbhvan-, and sikvas- 'strong' (as well as siirva-) beside sitvan-.
c . T h e r e i s h e r e a l a r g e n u m b e r of t r a n s i t i o n f o r m s b o t h t o a n d f r o m t h e a-
declension. M a n y p a i r s o f s t e m s i n -a a n d -as a r e c o m m o n i n b o t h f o r m s a n d s e e m
t h e r e f o r e t o b e of i n d e p e n d e n t d e r i v a t i o n . B u t t h e r e a r e a l s o a g o o d m a n y s u c h d o u b l e t s
of w h i c h t h e o n e is t h e n o r m a l s t e m , while t h e o t h e r h a s c o m e into b e i n g t h r o u g h
m i s t a k e n a n a l o g y o r m e t r i c a l e x i g e n c y . 1. I n t h e t r a n s i t i o n s t o t b e a - d e c l e n s i o n s e v e r a l
m a y b e e x p l a i n e d as s t a r t i n g f r o m t h e m i s l e a d i n g a n a l o g y of c o n t r a c t e d f o r m s . T o t h i s
g r o u p b e l o n g t h e f o l l o w i n g : f r o m ángiras-, a n a m e of A g n i , L . s i n g , áiigire b e s i d e N . p i .
ángirás-, from án-agas• 'sinless', A. pi. án-agan beside A. sing, án-ágam and N. pi. án-agas-,
f r o m ap sarás• ' w a t e r - n y m p h ' , apsarabhyas ( A V . ) , apsarasu (AV.), apsara-patés (AV.) b e s i d e
apsarám ( A V . ) ; f r o m Ufás- ' d a w n ' , N . d u . ufé (VS.), u^ábhyam (VS.), b e s i d e A . s i n g . Ufam
a n d p i . Ufas-, f r o m jarás- m . ' o l d a g e ' , f. s i n g . N . / a r a ( A V . V S . ) , D . jarayai (AV.), b e s i d e

1
Also the transition forms arcayas, 7 S e e ARNOLD, V e d i c M e t r e , p. 130,11 (a);
socayas. c p . LANMAN 5 4 6 .
8
' Also the transition form vanutt. ; T h e Pada text has usafah.
3 Also the transition form arci-bhis. 9 H e r e t h e l o n g v o w e l a p p e a r s in t h e
4 T h e d e r i v a t i o n of a f e w s t e m s e n d i n g P a d a text also. T h i s is t h e o n l y f o r m m a d e
i n -as i s o b s c u r e ; a s upas- ' l a p ' ( o n l y L . s i n g . ) , f r o m t h e s t e m to ¡as- ( f r o m tits- ' d r i p ' ) .
a n d riiddas• 'destroying enemies'. T h e f o r m sa-psarAsas 'enjoying in com-
5 O n t h e o r i g i n of this f o r m as a c o m - m o n ) ? ) ' , o c c u r r i n g o n c e , m u s t b e t h e pi.
b i n a t i o n o f -an-i a n d -as-i s e e JOHANSSON, of sa-psara- ( B R . , GRASSMANN), n o t of *sa-
B B . 18, 3 a n d c p . G G A . 1890, p . 762. psaras- (I.ANMAN 546, G E L D N E R , V S . 3 , 197),
6
T h e l e n g t h e n e d v o w e l n e v e r o c c u r s in b e c a u s e -as is n e v e r a c c e n t e d i n B a h u v r l h i
t h e P a d a t e x t i n t h e s e f o r m s ( e x c e p t i n g of c o m p o u n d s ; s e e WACKERNAGEL 2«, p . 3 0 1 d,
course the N. usas\ n o t e , su-mcdhds- ' v e r y w i s e ' i s n o t a B a h u v r l h i .
 225

A. jaram«; from sa-Ji^as- 'united', N. du. sa-Jofau b e s i d e pi. sa-jofas. T h e r e is a further

g r o u p of transitions to the a- declension starting not from contracted forms, but from the
N. sing. n. understood a s m . J . F r o m avas- 'favour' is thus formed I. avena; from krandas-
'battle-cry', D. krandayal (AV.), and the compound suci-kranda-m 'crying a l o u d ' ; from
iardhas- n. 'troop' the m. forms sardha-m, sardhena, sdrdhiya, sdrdha-sya, sardhan4; from
hedas- n., once (I. 9 4 I J ) hcla-s N. m., hence A. heda-m (AV.), L . he It; also the compound
f o r m s N . f. du. a-dvese 'not ill-disposed', beside dvesas- ' h a t e ' ; dur-oka-m (VII. 43) 'un-
wonted' beside okas- ' a b o d e ' ; vi-dradhe (iv. 3223) 'unclothed'(?) b e s i d e drddhasT ( T S . )
• g a r m e n t s ' ; pflhu-jrdya-m (iv. 441) 'far-extending' b e s i d e jrdyas 'expanse' ; puru-pesasu
'multiform' b e s i d e pesos ' f o r m ' 5 .
2. T h e second c l a s s , comprising transitions to the -as declension, consists of the
two groups of transfers f r o m the radical -n stems and the derivative - a s t e m s . The
former group embraces f o r m s of compounds m a d e from ¿si- ' a b o d e ' , pra-ja- 'offspring',
-da- 'giving', -dha- 'bestowing', b e s i d e s ma-s 'moon', starting from t h e N. in a-s which is
identical in form with that of stems in -as. T h e forms of this type are the f o l l o w i n g :
N . p l . diva-kfas-as beside N . s i n g . divdifa-s 'having an a b o d e in h e a v e n ' ; A . s i n g , d-prajas-am
(AV. V S . ) 'childless', A. pi. f. ida-prajas-as ( T S . MS.), A. sing, su-prajas-am (AV.), N. pi. m.
su-prajas-as (AV. T S . ) 'having a good son' b e s i d e N. sing. m. su-praja-s\ V. dravino-das 6
b e s i d e N. sing, drcevino-da-s, A. dravino-da-m 'wealth-giving'; varco-das-au (VS.) 'granting
vigour'; reto-dhas-as (VS.) 'impregnating' b e s i d e N. sing. m. rtio-dhd-s; A. vayo-dhas-am (VS.),
I. vayo-dhds-a (VS.), vayo-dhds-e (VS.), V. vayo-dhas, N. pi. vayo-dhds-as (AV.) b e s i d e N. sing.
vayodha-s 'bestowing v i g o u r ' ; D . sing, varco-dhas-e (AV.) b e s i d e N. sing, varco-dha-s (AV.)
and A. sing. f. varco-dha-m ( V S . ) ; of candra-mis- 7 'moon' all the forms occurring, except
the N . s i n g , which is their starting-point, are transfer f o r m s : A. candrd-masam (VS. x x m . 5 9 1 ,
I. candrd-masi (AV.), D . candrd-mase (VS.), G . candra-masas, L . candra-masi (AV.), V. candra-
mas (AV.), N . du. candrd-masa, surya-candra-mdsa and surya-candra-masau.
3. T h e r e are further several sporadic transition forms from -as s t e m s occurring
b e s i d e the ordinary corresponding -a stem. T h e s e m a y s o m e t i m e s have started from
an ambiguous N. sing., but they seem usually to b e due to metrical exigencies. Such
forms are the following: ddifas-t, daif as-as, puta-daifas-a and puta-dakfos-as b e s i d e very
frequent forms of ddksa- 'skill'; do;as-as & (AV.) once b e s i d e forms of do/a- ' e v e n i n g ' ;
{visvaytiyposas-am beside the common po$a-; N. sing, sa-bharas, A. visvd-bharas-am beside
the frequent bhara- 'supporting'; vcias-as') (AV.) b e s i d e vesa- 'neighbour'; Upas a s A. sing,
in AV. (XIV. for the sepam of the RV., from sipa- m. 'tail', N . s i n g . sipa-s\ N . s i n g . m .
su-sevas occurs in the A V . as a variant for su-stva-s 'very d e a r ' of the R V . ; sahdsra-sokas
occurs once as N. sing. m. b e s i d e the common iota- ' f l a m e ' ; A. sing, tuvi-piands-am and
N. pi. Uwi-fvands-as, beside svand- ' s o u n d ' ; A. pi. f. gharma-svaras-as b e s i d e svard- ' r o a r i n g ' ;
also the D. dhruvds-e ( v u . 70") for dhruvaya to which it is p r e f e r r e d owing to the metre
and the influence of infinitives in -ase, and similarly vfdhas-e (v. 64 s ) parallel to vrdhdya
(vili. 836).
4. T h e r e are besides a few quite a b n o r m a l t r a n s i t i o n f o r m s . T h e occurrence of
the very frequent N. pi. m. of vi- 'bird' with a singular verb (1. 1 4 1 8 ) and once as an
A. pi. (1. 104 1 ) may have produced the impression of a n. collective vdyas- and thus
led to the n. pi. vdyamsi (AV.), helped perhaps by the existence of the very frequent n.
stem vdyas- 'food'. T h e isolated form N. sing. m. sv-ancas is p r o b a b l y lengthened for
sv-diica-s (like su-sevas for su-s/vas) which started from the A. sing. m. sv-anc-am. The
G. du. rodas os occurs once (IX. 22 s ), evidently on account o f the metre instead of the
ordinary rodasi-os*°.

1
I.ANMAN 552 thinks that medhd- 'wis-' 7 F r o m mas- (A. mas-am, etc.), where the
d o m ' in N. medhi, I. medhaya, N . p l . medhas, s b e l o n g s to the stem. It is f o r m e d probably
I. medhibhis started from medham as con-I with -as from ma- ' m e a s u r e ' ( ma-as ), being
tracted A. of medhas- found in su-medhas-. \ thus in origin a contracted -as stem, in which,
This seems doubtful to m e . | however, the N. mas giving rise to the
1 In VI. 6 6 6 rikas might b e taken as transition f o r m s w a s understood as the
N. sing. m. (as GRASSMANN t a k e s it) beside lengthened form of *mas.
raids, m. 8 In usaso dofdsas ca (AV. XVI. 46) ob-
3 Cp. also the D . rarayai (vu. 771) b e s i d e viously due to parallelism with usasas.
cardse (I. 92*, v. 47 ), and tardya (ll. 1 3 " )
4 9 Clearly owing to the metre instead of
beside tdrase (ill. 18-'). vesasas.
4 Cp. LANMAN 3 5 3 and 554, 8. 10 Similarly ats-os occurs in AV. v. II">
5 T h e r e is also an -as stem extended (but contrary to the metre) for akfi-Ss. On
with -a in the D . a-jarasdya (x. 8 5 ^ ) 'till the transition f o r m s of the -as declension
old age', based on the adv. c o m p o u n d j cp. LANMAN 546—558.
d-jaras dm (B.) J
6 C p . BRUGMANN, G r u n d r i s s 2 , p . 3 9 8 . j
Indo-arischc Philologic. I. 4. 15
226

Inflexion.
344. The N. sing. m . f. lengthens the vowel of the suffix; e. g. m.
dftgiras\ f. usAs. In about a dozen compounds the long vowel appears
(owing to the influence of the m.) in the n. also; e. g. firna-mradas 'soft as
wool'. Before endings with initial bh the suffix as becomes -o2. The forms
actually occurring, if made from apas- n. 'work' and apas- m. f. 'active', would
be as follows:
Sing. N. apas] apis. A. apas; apasam. I. dpasa; apdsH. D. dpase;
apdse. Ab. dpasas", apdsas. G. dpasas; apdsas. L. apasi; apasi. V. apas;
apas. — Du. N. A. V. apasi; apasi and apasau*. D. apibhyam (VS.).
G. apasos (VS.)- — PI. N. apamsi; apdsas. A. dpltnsi; apdsas. I. apobhis;
apobhis. D. apobhyas; apjbhyas. Ab. apobhyas. G. apasam; apasam.
L. dpassu; apassu4.
The forms actually occurring are as follows:
Sing. N. m. ahgiras5 an epithet of Agni, ddmQnas 'domestic', uodhAs
name of a seer, yaiAs 'glorious', raksAs 'demon', vedhAs 'ordainer'; com-
pounds: a-cetAs 'senseless', dty-amhas (VS. XVII. 80) 'beyond distress', ddri-
barhas 'fast as a rock', a-dvayas 'free from duplicity', att-agas6 'sinless',
an-udh/is 'udderless', dnuna-varcas 'having full splendour', art-ends 'guiltless',
d-pracetas 'foolish', abhibhuty-ojas 'having superior power', dmitaujas 'almighty',
a-rapas 'unhurt', dvaySia-helas 'whose anger is appeased', asamaty-ojas 'of
unequalled strength', i-hanAs 'exuberant', uru-caksas 'far-seeing', uru-vyacas
'widely extending', fsi-manas 'of far-seeing mind', rsvdujas 'having sublime
(rsva-) power', karu-dhayas 'favouring the singer', kftti-vasas (VS. ill. 61)
'wearing a skin',- kita-vedis 'knowing the intention', khAdo-arnSs 'having a
devouring flood', gabhird-vepas 'deeply moved', gBrta-manas 'having a grateful
mind', gUrta-iravas 'the praise of whom is welcome', go-nyoghas 'streaming
among milk', ghj-ta-praySs 'relishing ghee', jata-vedls 'knowing created beings',
tad-ap3s 'accustomed to that work', tad-okas 'rejoicing in that', tdd-ojas 'endowed
with such strength', tarad-dvesHs 'overcoming foes', tigma-icj&s (VS. 1. 24) 'keen-
edged', tri-vayas 'having threefold food', dabhrd-cetas 'little-minded', dasmd-
varcas 'of wonderful appearance', dlrgha-tamSs N. of a seer, dirghApsas
'having a long fore-part', dur-osas 'hard to excite', deva-psarSs 'serving the
gods as a feast', deva-sravas 'having divine renown', dvi-barhas 'doubly
strong', nd-vedas 'cognisant', nr-caksas 'watching men', ttr-mdnas 'mindful of
men', ny-okas 'domestic', pavakd-varcSs 'brightly resplendent', pura-ravas (VS.
v. 2) N., prthu-jrdyas 'widely extended', pffthu-pAjis 'far-shining', prd-cetds 'atten-
tive', prd-vayas 'vigorous', bahv-ojas 'strong in the arm', brhdc-chravas 'loud-
sounding', brhdd-ravds (VS. v. 22) 'loud-sounding', bfhdd-vayis (TS. I. 5. io J )
,grown strong', bodhin-manas 'watchful-minded', bhiiri-retas (VS. x x . 44)
'abounding in seed', bhnry-ojas 'having great power', midhu-vacas 'sweet-
voiced', mano-javas 'swift as thought', maha-yasAs (Kh. iv. 8 s ) 'very glorious',
mitra-mahas 'rich in friends', raghu-patma-jamhas 'having a light-falling foot',

1 The stems sva-lavas- and sv-avas- form 5 T h e s of the N. sing, is perhaps lost in
the irregular N. sva-tavan and sv-avan, VS.usana; but this form may be a transition,
sv.ava. starting from the A. uidttim (= usanasam)
* Except in f. ufadbhis and m. sva- after the analogy of the f . ; another instance
tavadbhyas (VS.); cp. BRUGMANN, Grnndriss 2,is perhaps an-eha (x. 61").
p. 7 1 3 (bottom). 6 The form an-avayas (AV. vn. 90'),
3 T h e ending -au is here very rare and meaning perhaps 'not producing concep-
occurs chiefly in the later Samhitas. tion', may b e l o n g to this declension. S e e
4 Represented in f. by apsarassu (Kh.) andWHITNEY'S note. LANMAN 443, places it
m. apatu if for apassu. under radical -a stems.
 227

rdthaujas (VS. xv. 15) 'having the strength of a chariot', risddas 'destroying
enemies', vdsu-s'ravas 'famous for wealth', vdta-ramhas 'fleet as wind', vi-cetas
'clearly seen', vl-manis 'very wise', visvd-caksas 'all-seeing', visva-dhayas 'all-
sustaining', visva-bharas1 (VS. xi. 32)' all-supporting", visva-bhojSs 'all-nourishing',
visva-manas 'perceiving everything', visvaoedas 'omniscient', visva-vyacas (VS.
XIII. 56) 'embracing all things', visvdujas 'all-powerful', vi-hayas 'mighty', vilu-
dvesas 'hating strongly', vilu-haras 'holding fast', vrddha-mahas 'of great might',
vrddha-vaySs 'of great power', vrddhd-sravas 'possessed of great swiftness',
sata-tejas (VS. 1. 24) 'having a hundredfold vital power', sata-payas (TS. VS.)
'having a hundred draughts', sukra-varcas 'having bright lustre', sraddhd-manas
'true-hearted', sri-manas (VS.) 'well-disposed', sd-canas 'being in harmony with',
sd-cetas 'unanimous', sa-josas 'united', satya-radhas 'truly beneficent', satydujas
(AV. VS. TS.) 'truly mighty', sa-prathas 'extensive', sam-okas 'dwelling together',
sahdsra-caksas 'thousand-eyed', sahasra-cetas 'having a thousand aspects',
sahdsra-pathas 'appearing in a thousand places', sahasra-retas
1
'having a
thousandfold seed', sahasra-sokas 'emitting a thousand flames', sahasrapsas
'thousand-shaped', su-damsas 'performing splendid actions', su-mdnas 'well-
disposed', su-medhas1 'having a good understanding', su-rddhas 'bountiful',
su-riknSs 'having fair possessions', su-ritas 'having much seed', su-varcas
'splendid', su-vasas 'having beautiful garments', soma-caksas (TS. 11. 2. 12*)
'looking like Soma', stoma-vahas 'receiving praise', sparha-radhas 'bestowing
1
enviable wealth', sv-ancas 'going well', sv-apas 'skilful', svdbhaty-ojas 'having
energy from inherent power', sva-yaias 'glorious through one's own acts',
svar-caksas 'brilliant as light', svar-canas 'lovely as light', sv-ojas 'very strong'.
f. usds 'dawn'; ati-cchandas (TS., VS. xxi. 22) a metre, d-dvayas, ap-saras
'water-nymph', a-rcpas 'spotless', a-hands, uru-vyacas, ftrna-mradas 'soft as wool',
dvi-bdrhas, nud-vayas 'whose strength is low', nf-manas, pra-cetas, mddhu-vacas,
yavayad-dvesas 'driving away enemies', vi-cchandas (TS. v. 2. n 1 ) 'containing
various metres', vi-hayas, vfsa-manas 'manly-spirited', sukra-vasas 'bright-robed',
sd-cetas, sa-cchandas 1 (TS. v. 2. n 1 ) 'consisting of the same metres', sa-josas,
sa-prathas, sd-bharas 'furnished with gifts' (?), saha-yasas (TS. iv. 4. 121)
'glorious', su-damsas, su-p/s'as 'well-adorned', su-mdnas, su-medhas2, su-vdsas.
N . A . n. dmhas 'distress', an/as 'ointment', a-dvesas 'without malevolence',
anas 'cart', an-ehas 'without a rival', dndhas 'darkness' and 'plant', apas
'work', apas 'active', apnas 'property', dpsas 'hidden part of the body', ambhas
'water', dyas 'metal', a-raksds 'harmless', a-rapas, arnas 'flood', dvas 'favour',
dgas 'sin', dpas 'religious ceremony', uras 'breast', ddhas 'udder', ¿nas 'sin',
okas 'abode', ujas 'strength', ksodas 'rushing water', canas 'delight', cJtas
(VS. xxxiv. 3) 'intellect', chdndas 'metrical hymn', jdmhas 'course', ji'ivas
'quickness', jrayas 'expanse', tad-apas, tdpas 'heat', tamas 'darkness', taras
'velocity', tijas 'sharp edge', tyajas 'abandonment', ddmsas 'marvellous power',
duvas 'worship', drdvinas 'property', dvdsas 'hostility', nabhas 'vapour', ndmas
'obeisance', pdksas 'side', payas 'milk', pasas (VS. x x . 9) 'penis', pdjas 'vigour',
pdthas 'place', pivas 'fat', puru-bhojas 'greatly nourishing', ptfs'as 'ornament',
prathas 'width', prayas 'enjoyment', psdras 'feast', bhargas 'radiance', bhdsas
'light', manas 'mind', mayas 'joy', mdhas 'greatness', mahas 'great', mfdhas
'disdain', nUdas 'fat', yds'as 'fame', rdksas 'damage', rajas 'region of clouds',
rdpas 'infirmity', rdbhas 'violence', rddhas 'bounty', re'knas 'wealth', ritas 'flow',
ripas 'stain', rodhas 'bank', vdksas 'breast', vacas 'speech', vdyas 'bird' and

1 Probably a transition form (p. 2 2 5 , 3,4). •as stem occurs only in su-medhasam (once)
2
Perhaps a transfer form from medha-, and su-medhasas (four times in a refrain).
since the latter stem is common, while the
15*
228 I. ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4 . V E D I C GRAMMAR.

'food', várivas 'space', vareas 'vigour', vdrpas 'figure', vag-jjas f V S . x x x v i . 1 )

'speech-energy', vásas 'garment', vdhas 'offering', vedas 'wealth', vépas 'quivering',
vyácas 'expanse', vráyas 'superior power', s'drdhas 'troop', sávas 'power', siras
'head', shas 'offspring', srdvas 'renown', sa-j'>sas, sddas 'seat', sanas1 (Kh.
HI. I S ' 5 ) 'gain', sa-práthas, sa-bádhas 'harassed', sdras 'lake', sdhas 'force',
saháujas (VS. x x x v i . 1 ) 'endowed with strength', su-r/ias, srótas 'stream',
svd-tavas 'inherently strong', /¡aras 'flame', hilas 'passion', hváras 'crookedness'.
— Ending in -as' (like m.): asri-vdyas3 (VS. xiv. 18), uru-prdthas (VS.
xx
- 39) 'far-spread', árna-mradas, gürtd-vacas 'speaking agreeably', devd-
vyacas 'affording space for the gods', dvi-bdrhas, visvá-vyacas (AV.), ví-
spardhas (VS. x v . 5) 'emulating', vird-pesas 'forming the ornament of heroes',
vílú-haras, sa-práthas (AV. VS. TS.), sumdnas (TS. iv. 5. I A ) 4 .
A . m . jardsam 'old age', tavdsam 'strong', 'strength', tyajdsam 'offshoot',
ddmunasam, pdrinasam (160)'abundance', bhiydsam 'fear', yas'dsam, raksdsam,
vedhdsanr, a-cetdsam, dnasta-vedasam 'having one's property unimpaired', dn-
agasam, dnu-gayasam 'followed by shouts', an-endsam (TS.1.8.5^), an-ehdsam,
apdsam, d-pratidhrsta-savasam 'of irresistible power', abhibhuty-jjasam, ard-
manasam 'obedient', a-radhdsam 'not liberal', a-repdsam, arcanánasam 'having
a rattling carriage' (N. of a man), a-handsam, úccais-sravasam (Kh. v. 145)
'neighing aloud' (N. of Indra's horse), upak i-caksasam 'seen close at hand',
uru-edksasam, uru-jrdyasam 'extending over a wide space', uru-vyicasam,
árna-mradasam (VS. 11. 2), ardhvd-nabhasam (VS. vi. 16) 'being above the
clouds', ksetra-sádhasam 'who divides the fields', gathd-sravasam 'famous
through songs', gayatrd-cchandasam (VS.vm. 47) 'to whom the Gayatri metre
belongs', gayatrd-vepasam 'inspired by songs', gir-vanasam 'delighting in
invocations', gir vahasam 'praised in song', gürtd-sravasam, gj-arnasam
'abounding in cattle', gj-dhayasam 'supporting cows', cikitvin-manasam 'atten-
tive', citrd-mahasam 'possessing excellent bounty', citrd-rndhasam 'granting
excellent gifts', jdgac-chandasam (VS. VIII. 47) 'to whom the JagatT metre
belongs', jStd-vedasam, tuvi-rádhasam 'granting many gifts', tuvi-svandsam5
'loud-sounding', tuvy-'tjasam 'very powerful', tristúp-chandasam (VS. VIII. 47),
dandukasam 'delighting (okas-) in a sacrificial meal', dyuksd-vacasam 'uttering
heavenly words', dvi-bdrhasam, dvl-savasam 'having twofold strength', dhrsnv-
ojasam 'endowed with resistless might', ndryüpasam 'doing manly (ndrya-)
deeds', nr-edksasam, pahkti-radhasam 'containing fivefold gifts', puru-pésasam
'multiform', puru-bhijasam, puru-vdrpasam 'having many forms', puru-vepasam
'much-exciting', prá-cetasam, prd-tvaksasam 'energetic', brdhma-vahasam 'to
whom prayers are offered', bhári-caksasam 'much-seeing', bhári-dh lyasam
'nourishing many', mdno-javasam (TS. 11. 4. 7'), yajñd-vanasam 'loving sacri-
fice', yajñd-váhasatn 'offering worship', ris'ddasa/n6, vája-sravasam 'famous for
wealth', vi-cetasam, vi-josasam 'forsaken', vi-dvesasam 'resisting enmity', visvd-
dhayasam, visvá-bharasam1, visvd-vedasam, visvd-vyacasam, visváyu-posasam1
'causing prosperity to all men', visváyu-vepasam 'exciting all men', vi-hsyasam,
viti-radhasam 'granting enjoyment', sa-cetasam, sa-jósasam, satyd-girvahasam
'getting true praise', satyd-radhasam ( V S . X X I I . 1 1 ) , satyd-savasam 'truly vigorous',

Though sdnas does not otherwise occur

1
4 Cp. L A N M A N 560; see also the neuters
(sana- m. is found as last member of a in äs, L A N M A N 4 4 5 (mid),
T
compound), the context in K h i l a ill. IS S 5 For this form, TS. ill. 3. 1 I J has errone-
seems to require an A.: aham gandhaina-1 ously tuvif-manasam.
rüpena sana ä vartayänii te. ' 0 Also the transition form vayo-dhasam
' Cp. LANMAN 560. (VS.) 'bestowing strength'.
3 Of doubtful meaning; the form may 7 Probably to be explained as a transition
possibly be N. pi. of asrivi-. Cp. B R . form (p. 225, 3).
 229

sddma-makhasam 'performing sacrifice in a sacred precinct', sa-prathasam

(VS. xxi. 3), samudra-vasasam 'concealed in the waters', samudra-vyacasam
'extensive as the sea', sdrva-vedasam (VS. xv. 55; TS. iv. 7. 13*) 'having
complete property', sahdsra-caksasam, sahdsra-bharnasam 'a thousandfold',
sahdsra-varcasam 'having a thousandfold power', su-cetasam 'very wise', su-
ddmsasam, su-pesasam, su-praydsam 'well regaled', su-bhojasam 'bountiful',
su-medhasamsu-rAdhasam, su-rAasam, su-varcasam (TS. nr. 2. 8 s ), su-sravasam
'famous', srpra-bhojasam 'having abundant food', sva-yasasam, sv-avasam
'affording good protection', hari-dhayasam 'giving yellow streams', hari-
varpasam 'having a yellow appearance'. — C o n t r a c t e d f o r m s : usanam
N. of a seer, mahdm, vedhdm.
f. usdsam and usdsam 2, dhvarasam 'deceiving'; dn-dgasam, an-ehdsam,
a-raksdsam, a-repasam, asva-pesasam 'decorated with horses', ud-ojasam
'exceedingly powerful', uru-vyacasam, cikitvin-manasam, puru-bhojasam, ysvaydd-
dvesasam, vdja-pesasam 'adorned with precious gifts', visva-dohasam 'yield-
ing all things', visva-dhSyasam, visva-pesasam 'containing all adornment',
visva-bhojasam, satarcasam 'having a hundred supports' ( reds-), suci-pesasam
'brightly adorned', sahdsra-bharnasam, sva-yasasam, hdri-varpasam. —
C o n t r a c t e d f o r m s : usam, jar dm, medhdm 'wisdom', vayiim 'vigour'; an-agam,
ap-sardm (AV.) 3 .
I. m . jardsa, tdrttsasa 'giving victory', tavdsa, tvesdsa 'impulse', pdrXnasa,
bhiydsayasasa, sdhasd 'mighty', havasa 'invocation'; an-ehasa, a-raksdsa,
go-parinasa 'having abundance of cows', prthu-pdjasa, mano-javasa, visva-
pesasH, su-pA'asa, su-sravasS, sv-apasa (VS. xxv. 3).
f. us dsn, yajdsa 'worshipping'; ati-cchandasa (VS. I. 27), a-repasa, uru-
cdksasa (VS. iv. 23).
n. dnjasa, anasa, andhasa, apasa, apasa, a-raksdsH, drriasa, dvasa, urasa
(VS.TS.), ¿nasa, ojasa, ohasH 'prospect', ksodasa, go-arnasa, cdksasH 'brightness',
cctasa, chdndasa (VS. TS.), jdvasd and (once) javasa 5 'with speed', tdnasa
'offspring', tdpasa, tamasa, tarasa, ttjasa, tyajasa, tvdksusa 'energy', ddmsasa,
dohasa 'milking', dhdyasa 'nourishing', dhrajasa 'gliding power', nabhasa,
ndmasa, pdyasa, pdjasa, pivasa, pesasa (VS. xx. 41), prayasa, buhvojasa,
bhrdjasa 'lustre', manasS, mdhasa, medasa, yas'dsa 6 'glorious', rdksasa,
rdjasa, rdpasa, rddhasa, reknasa, re'lasa, vacasa, vdnasa 'enjoyment',
vdyasH 7, vdrcasa, vdrpasa, v/isasS, vdhasa, v^dasa, vcpasa, savasa, sirasa
(Kh. 1. 9'), sVsasa, sravasa, sdhasS, su-ddmsasa, su-r/tasa, srotasa, hdrasa,
hdsasa 'vigour'8.
D . m . tavdse, duvdse 'worshipper', yasdse, raksdse, vedhdse, sikvase 'adroit',
sdhase 'mighty'; abhisti-savase 'granting powerful aid', uktha-vahase 'offering
verses', uru-vydcase, ftd-pesase 'having a glorious form', gayatra-vepase, gir-vanase,
g'ir-vahase, ghord-caksase 'of frightful appearance' 9, jata-vedase, tad-apase, tdd-
okase, dirgha-yasase 'renowned far and wide', dirghd-sravase 'famous far

1
Perhaps to be explained as a transition | 7 A l s o the transition form vayo-dhasä (VS.
form starting from N. su-medha-s. ' x v . 7).
' In Pada text usdsam. 8 A f e w forms in -as appear to have the
3 Cp. J . SCHMIDT, Heteroklitische nomina- value of i n s t r u m e n t a l as agreeing with a
tive singularis auf -äs in den arischen spra- word in that c a s e : väcas (I. 2Ö2 etc.), yajiia-
chen, K Z . 26, 4 0 1 — 4 0 9 ; 2 7 , 2 8 4 ; COLLITZ, vacds ( A V . X I . -519), savas (I. 8 1 4 ) ; idkas ( A V .
BB. 7, 1 8 0 ; PRELLWITZ, B B . 22, 83. xii. 3»); cp. BLOOMFIELD, SBE. 42, 645;
* A l s o contracted to bhifa with adverbial see LANMAN 562, and cp. CALAND, K Z . 3 1 ,
shift of accent occurring 3 times ( b h i y d s i 1 1 . 261.
times). 9 A l s o the transition form camira-mase
1
5 In IV. 2 7 . X X X . 21).
6 C p . G R A S S M A N N , S. v . yaias-. |
230
and wide', dyumná-sravase 'producing a clear sound', vr-cáksase, ny-bkase,
purü-rávase, prthu-jráyase, prthu-pájase, prá-cetase, prá-tavase 'very strong',
bráhma-vahase, mrktá-vahase 'carrying off what is injured', N. of a seer, yajñá-
'áhase', i'isvá-caksase, ví-hayase, satyá-radhase, sahásra-caksase, svá-tavase.
svá-yasase.
f. usase, vrdháse 'furtherance'; áti-cchandase (VS. xxiv. 13), dur-vásase
'ill-clothed', parjánya-retase 'sprung from the seed of Parjanya'.
n. apáse, a-pesase 'formless', ávase, ó'jase, cáksase, javáse, tápase, tómase,
tárase, téjase (VS. xv. 8), dáksase 'ability', dháyase, dhruváse 'stopping', nábhasc
(VS. vil. 30), ñámase, pájase, práyase, psárase, mánase, máhase (VS. xix. 8),
y ásase (VS. xx. 3), yddase (VS. xxx. 20) 'voluptuousness', ráksase, rádhase.
rétase, vácase, várcase, sárase (VS. xxxvin. 15) 'skin of boiled milk', s ávase,
srávase, sáhase, svá-yasase, A árase.
Ab. m. a-radhásas, jarásas, tavásas, pártnasas, raksásas', sáhasas. —
f.usásas.— n. ái/t/iasas3, ánasas, ándhasas, ápasas, árnasas, <igasas (TS. iv. 7.
152), énasas, ókasas, ójasas, ksodasas, jráyasas, tápasas, támasas, drávinasas,
páyasas, piíjasas, práthasas, bhámsasas 'intestine', mi nasas*, rájasas, rádhasas,
védasas, sádasas, sarasas, sáhasas.
G. m. árigirasas, apásas, ápnasas, tavásas, párlnasas, raksásas, vedhásas \
án-agasas, ápaka-caksasas 'shining from afar', abhí-vayasas 'refreshing', a-raksásas,
upamá-sravasas 'most highly famed', kfs>iá-;amhasas 'having a black track',
jatá-vedasas, danápnasas 'having abundance of gifts', dírghá-sravasas, dvi-
bárhasas, nr-cáksasas, pári-dvesasas 'enemy', puru-bhójasas, prthu-srávasas 'far-
famed', prá-cetasas, prá-mahasas 'very glorious', prayásas (TS. iv. 1. 82), bhá-
tvaksasas 'having the power of light', ví-cetasas, vidmanápasas 'working with
wisdom', visvá-manasas, vfka-dvarasas5, satyá-radhasas (TS. in. 3 . 1 1 ' ) , satyá-
savasas (VS. iv. 18) 'having true impulsion', sa-bádhasas, su-prayásas (VS.
xxvii. 15), svá-yasasas. — f. usásas6.
n. ámhasas, ánasas, ándhasas, ápasas, ávasas, árnasas, ársasas (VS. xir. 97)
'piles', ávasas, énasas (VS. viii. 13), ókasas, ¿jasas, gj-arnasas, tápasas (VS.
rv.26; Kh.iv.n 1 - 3 ), támasas, tyájasas, dáksasas1, drávinasas, nábhasas, námasas,
páyasas, pájasas (Kh. 1. y2), práyasas, mánasas, médasas, rájasas, rápasas,
rádhasas, rétasas, vácasas, vápsasas 'fair form', váyasas, várpasas, vásasas,
sávasass, srávasas, sádasas, sárapasas5, sáhasas, hárasas— Contracted
form: nr-mánas (x. 92
L . m. áiigirasi10 (VS. iv. 10), gó-arnasi, jatá-vedasi, dámünasi, prthu-srávasi,
yajñá-vahasi (VS.ix. 37), satyá-sravasi 'truly famous', N. of a man. — f. usási. —
n. ámhasi, áñjasi, apási, ávasi, ágasi, ókasi, krándasi 'battle-cry', cáksasi,
támasi, námasi, páyasi, páthasi (VS. xiii. 53), mánasi, rájasi, rádhasi, rétasi,
srávasi, sádasi, sárasi, hédasi (TS. m. 3. 11 4 ).
V . m. ángiras, nodhas, vedhas-, uktha-vahas, upama-sravas, káru-dhayas,

1
Also the transition form vayo-d/iase (VS. 6
Once the strong form ufasas (x. 39') for
XXVIII. 46). the weak.
2
Also the transition form reto-dhäsas (VS. 7 This, as well as the D. n. datfase, is a
viii. 10). ! transition form (p. 225, 3).
8
3 In vi. 3» amhas is probably the stem The stem savas in vin. 3 6 may be used
used instead of the very frequent Ab. ämh- for the G. Perhaps also sadas-fati- stands
as-as, rather than the Ab. of amh-, as this for sädasas-pati-. Cp. Lanman S63 4 .
would be the only form from such a stem, j 9 Transition forms are sardhasya, ttir-
and the accent would be irregular. avdsya; candrä-masas, reto-dhäsas (VS.);
4 Also the adv., in the sense of the Ab., däisasas, dofdsas (AV.).
medas-tds (VS. x x i . 60). 10
Also the transfer forms diigirc, hile-,
5 Of uncertain meaning. candrd-masi (AV.).
 VL DECLENSION. NOUNS. CONSONANT STEMS. 231

gir-vanas, gir-vabas'1, jata-vedas, deva-sravas, dhrsan-manas 'bold-minded',

nr-caksas, nr-manas, purU-ravas, pra-cetas2, brahma-vahas, mitra-mahas,
vaja-prawahas 'superior in strength', visva-caksas, viwa-dhiyas, visva-manas,
vrsa-manas, satya-rSdhas, su-dravinas 'having fine property', su-mahas 'very
great', sva-tavas, sv-ojas*. — f. usas; a-hanas, tigma-tejas ( A V . V S . ) . —
n. dravinas, sardkas.
Du. N. A. V . m. apasa, tavasa, tosdsa* 'showering', yas dsn, vedhasa;
a-repdsa, asu-hesasa 'having neighing horses', Tya-caksasa 'of far-reaching
sight', uktha-vuhasil, uru-caksasa, krsty-ojasa 'overpowering men', gambhlra-
cetasd 'of profound mind', gi-parinasS, jSta-vedasa, tdd-okasa, na-vedasa,
rtf-caksasa, nr-vahasa 'conveying men', puru-ddmsasa 'abounding in wonder-
5
ful deeds', puru-bhojasa, putd-daksasa 'pure-minded', prthupdksasa 'broad-
flanked', pra-cetasa, prd-mahasa, bodhin-manasa, mata-vacasa 'heeding prayers',
manojavasa, yajna-vahasa, risddasa, vatsa-pracetasa 'mindful o f V a t s a ' , vi-
cetasa, vi-paksasa 'going on both sides', vipra-vahasa 'receiving the offerings
of the wise', vihja-bhojasa, visva-vedasa, vy-enasa 'guiltless', srestha-varcasa
'having most excellent energy', sa-josasa, V . sdtyaujasa ( T S . iv. 7. 1 5 2 ) ,
sa-manasa 'unanimous', samand-varcasa 'having equal vigour', sdm-okasa,
sa-vayasa 'having equal vigour', sd-vedasa 'having equal wealth', sindhu-vahasa
'passing through the sea'(?J, su-ddmsasa, su-prayasa, su-radhasa, su-ritasa,
su-vdcasa 'very eloquent', sv-dvasa, hitd-prayasa 'who has offered an oblation
o f food', hlranya-peiasa 'having golden lustre' 6 . — With au\ a-repasau,
V. jata-vedasau (TS. 1. 3. 7'), nr-caksasau, pra-cetasau (VS. xxvnt. 7), visvd-
sardhasau 'forming a complete troop', sa-cetasav ( V S . v. 3 ; K h . m. i 5 u ) , sa-
josasau (VS. XII. 74), sd-manasau (TS. 1. 3. 7"), sam-okasau (TS. 1. 3. 7 J ) 7 . —
8
f. usdsa and usdsa , ndktosdsa 'night and morning', an-ehasa, uru-vydcasa,
itf-cdksasa (AV.), bhilri-retasa, bhnri-varpasa 'multiform', visvd-pesasa, sd-
cetasa, sa-manasa, su-ddmsasa9, su-p/s'asa. — With -au: ap-sarasau ( A V . ) ,
a-repasau, usthau ( V S . x x i . 50), yasdsau; nr-cdksasau, visvd-sardhasau, vy-
hiasau ( A V . ) 1 0 . — n . dndhasX, krandasT, jdnasl, drddhasi ( T S . ill. 2. 2 ' ) 'gar-
ments', ndbhasT ( A V . ) , midhasT 'refuges', pdksasl(W.), pfijasT, rdjasT, vdcasi,
viisasl (TS. 1. 5. io').
D. m. sa-jjsobhyam (VS. VII. 8).
11
G . n . dlisa-tapdsos ( V S . iv. 2) 'consecration and penance'.
PL N. V. m. ahgirasas, apdsas, tavasas, damtinasas, duvdsas 'rest-
less', mfgayasas 'wild animals', yasdsas, raksdsas, vedhasas, sikvasas;
d-giraukasas 'not to be kept b a c k by hymns' (gird), a-cetdsas, a-codasas
'unurged', ddbhutainasas 'in whom no fault {/has) is visible', an-avabhrd-
radhasas 'giving undiminished wealth', dn-agasas, an-ehasa s, a-repasas,
d-vicetasas 'unwise', a-s'/sasas 'without descendants', asva-radhasas 'equipping
horses', d-sami-savasas 'having complete strength', a-hanasas, ukthd-vahasas,
tid-ojasas, uru-vydcasas (VS. xxvir. 16), ksetra-s&dhasas, gambhTra-vepasas,

1 In vi. 246 GRASSMANN would read 7 Also the transition forms surya-candra-
girvavahas, as N . ; cp. LANMAN 5 6 4 1 . masau, varco-dasau (VS. VII. 2 7 ) , sa-j6;au.
2 TS. 1 . 5 . 1 1 3 has praceto rajatt-, the original 8 In the Pada text usasa.
passage, RV. 1.24> 4 , has pracela rajatt (Pada, 9 In v u . 731 furu-damsa is perhaps a con-
pracetak)\ see LANMAN S64 . 3
tracted form.
J Transition forms are sa-pralha (TB.), 10 Also the transition forms Ufi (VS.),
cattdra-mas (AV.), vayo-dhas, dravino-das. a-dvc;l, vi-dradhl.
4 With lengthened vowel. 1 1 There are also in the f. the transition
5 Probably to be explained as a transition forms Uf&bhyam I. and rodaios G.
form (p. 225, 3).
6 Also the transition forms candramasa, I
surya-candramasa.
232 I. ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4. VEDIC GRAMMAR.

ghrsvi-radhasas 'granting with joy', ghora-varpasas 'of terrible appear-

ance', citra-radhasas, tdd-okasas, tuvi-svandsas*, dvi-bdrhasas, dhrsnv-bjasas,
tid-vedasas, nr-cdksasas, pathi-rdksasas (VS. xvi. 60) 'protecting roads', putd-
daksasasprthu-pajasas, pra-cetasas, prati-jbti-varpasas 'assuming any form
according to impulse', prd-tavasas, pra-tvaksasas, prd-sravasas 'farfamed', bahv-
bjasas, bhalanasas N. of a people, madhu-psarasas 'fond of sweetness', mddhye-
cchavdasas (TS.iv. 3.11-J) 'sun' or 'middle of the year' (Comm.), yajna-va/iasas,
yuta-dvesasas 'delivered from enemies', risadasas, rukma-vaksasas 'wearing gold
ornaments on the breast', vdruna-sesasas 'resembling sons of Varuna', vfita-
ramhasas, vita-svanasas 'roaring like the wind', vi-cetasas, vidmanapasas,
vidyun-mahasas 'rejoicing in lightning', vlpra-vacasas 'whose words are in-
spired', vi-mahasas 'very glorious', vis'vd-dhayasas, visva-mahasas 'having all
splendour', visvd-vedasas, vi-:pardhasas 'vying', vi-hayasas, vrddhd-i'avasas
'of great strength', sristha-varcasas, sd-cetasas, sa-josasas, satya-savasas, sa-
bharasassd-manasas, sdm-oka<as, sd-vayasas, sd-srotasas (VS. x x x i v . 11)
'flowing', saha-cchandasas 'accompanied by metre', sahasra-pajasas 'having
a thousandfold lustre', sahdujasas (VS. x. 4), su-cdksasas 'seeing well',
su-cetasas, su-ddmsasas, su-pivasas 'very fat', su-pesasas, su-prdcetasas 'very
wise', su-prajdsas2 (TS.1.6. 21; AV.) 'having a good son', su-mdtiasas, su-mahasas,
su-medhasassu-radhasas, sitra-caksasas 'radiant as the sun', surya-ti'acasas
(VS. x. 4) 'having a covering bright as the sun', siirya-varcasas (VS. x. 4)
'resplendent as the sun', stoma-vahasas 'giving praise', sva-tavasas, sv-dpasas,
sv-apnasas 'wealthy', sva-yasasas, sv-dvasas, hitd-prayasas. — Contracted
forms: aiigiras, dn-agas4, navedas, sajosas. — f. apdsas, usdsas and usifsas*,
yas'dsas; agni-bhrajasas 'fire-bright', an-ehasas, ap-sardsas, uru-vyacasas (TS-
iv. 1. 8 J ), tfsu-cydvasas 'moving greedily', dhanv-arnasas 'overflowing the dry
land', nr-pesasas 'adorned by men', pra-cetasas, prd-svadasas 'pleasant', mddhv-
arnasas 'having a sweet flood', vi-cetasas, su-p/s'asas, siida-dohatas 'milking
sweetness', sv-dpasas, sva-yasasas. — Contracted forms: medJuis; d-josas
'insatiable', na-vedas, su-rddhas.
N. A . n. dmhSmsi, ankamsi 'bends', andhamsi, dpamsi, drnamsi, dvavjsi,
agamsi, ¿namsi, okSmsi, ujamsi, karSmsi 'deeds', chdndamsi, javamsi, jrdyamsi,
tamamsi, tvaksamri, damsamsi, duvamsi, dvesamsi, payamsi, pajamsi, pdthainsi
(VS. xxi. 46), pesamsi, praySinsi, bhdsamsi, manamsi, mahamsi, rdksamsi,
rajamsi, rdpSmsi, rfidhamsi, retamsi, rodhatnsi, rohamsi 'heights', vaksamsi,
vacSmsi, vdyamsi, varamsi 'expanses', varivSmsi, vdrcamsi (VS. ix. 22),
vdrpamsi, vAsSmsi, sdrdhamsi, savimsi, srdvamsi, sddamsi, saramsi, sdhimsi,
skdndhamsi 'branches', httamsi, hvaramsi.
A . m. afigirasas6, dhvarasas, yas'dsas, raksasas, vedhasas; an-agasas,
an-ehasas, d-pracetasas, a-radhasas, uru-caksasas, tuvi-rddhasas, puta-daksasas1,
prd-cetasas, brhdc-chravasas, yajnd-vanasas, risddasas, vi-mahasas, vt-spardhasas,
sa-josasas (VS. 111. 44), sd-manasas (VS. vn. 25), su-pt'sasas, su-radhasas, sv-
apnasas8. — Contracted forms: dn-agas, su-medhas9. — f. apdsas, usdsas1",
yas'dsas; a-javasas 'not swift', an-apnasas 'destitute of wealth', an-ehasas, ap-
sardsas, ari-dhayasas 'willingly yielding milk', gharmd-svarasas ? 'sounding like
(the contents of) a boiler', tdd-apasas, bhdri-varpasas, vaja-dravittasas 'richly

1 Probably a transition form (p. 225, 3). 7 Probably a transition form (p. 225, 3).
2 Probably a transition form (p. 225, 2). 8 Also the transition forms sardhäti, an-

3 Probably a transfer form; see p. 227, note ». ägän.

4 Perhaps also an-ehas (x. 61"); see LAN- 9 It is somewhat doubtful whether this is
M A N 551'. a contracted A. pi. (vn. 91 3 ).
s In the Pada text ufàsas. 10 Once also usasas. In III. 67_ and vm.
6In 1. 1 1 2 ' 8 L A N M A N would take angiras 4 1 3 LANMAN (566) would take u;as as A. pi.
sa A . pi. m. without ending. without ending.
 V I . DECLENSION. NOUNS. CONSONANT STEMS. 233

rewarded', vaja-sravasas, visvd-dohasas, visva-dhayasas, su-p/s'asas— Con-

t r a c t e d f o r m : usds (ix. 4 1 s ) .
I . m . angirobhis-, agni-tapobhis 'having the heat of fire', sva-yaiobhis. —
f . svd-yasobhts-, w i t h -ad- for -0-: usddbhis (44 a, 3).
n . d-yavobhis (VS. x n . 7 4 ) 'dark halves of the month', drnobhis, avobhis,
ojobhis, chandobhis ( K h . v. 3*), tapobhis, tamobhis, tdrobhis, damsobhis, dvesobhis,
dhftyobhis, nabhobhis, namobhis, paksobhis ( V S . x x i x . 5 ; T S . v. 1 . 1 i 2 ) , payobhis,
prayobhis, mahobhis, rdjobhis, radhobhis, vdcobhis, vayobhis, vdrobhis, sdvobhis,
srdvobhis, sahobhis.
D . m . dngirobhyas; w i t h -ad- for -0-: sva-tavadbhyas ( V S . x x r v . 16). —
n . medobhyas ( V S . x x x i x . 1 0 ) , raksobhyas, vdyobhyas ( A V . ) , sdrobhyas (VS.
x x x . 1 6 ) . — A b . n. dve'sobhyas.
G . m . angirasam, apdsam, tavasim, yasasam, vedhasam-, ddbhutainasam,
dasma-varcasam, mahi-manasSm 'high-minded', stjma-vahasam. — f. apdsam,
usdsam; ap-sarasclm, ndksatra-iavasHm 'equalling the stars in number'. —
n . chandasam, tarasam ( A V . ) , me'dasatn ( V S . x x r . 40), raksasam ( V S . 11. 2 3 ) ,
rAdhasam, ve'dasfim2.
Li. f. ap-sarassu ( K h . iv. 8 3 ). — n . dmhassu* (AV.), tidhassu, rajassu,
vaksassu, vdyassu (AV.), srdvassu, sddassu*.

f . S t e m s in -yams.
3 4 5 . T h e primary suffix -yams ( 1 3 7 ) 5 is used to form comparative stems.
It is a d d e d either directly or with connecting -X- to the root, which is always
accented. T h e r e are seven duplicate stems f o r m e d in both w a y s : tdv-yams- a n d
tav-Tyams- 'stronger'; nav-yams- a n d nav-iyims- 'new'; pdn-ySms- and pan-
Tyams- 'more wonderful'; bhnyams- and bhdvXyams- 'more'; rdbhyams- and
rabhiyams- (VS.) 'more violent'; vasyams- and vasxyams- 'better'; sah-yams- a n d
sdhx-yams- 'mightier'. S t r o n g a n d w e a k f o r m s a r e regularly d i s t i n g u i s h e d .
In the latter the suffix is r e d u c e d b y loss of the nasal and shortening of the
vowel to -yas. T h e s e stems are declined in the m. and n. only, as they
form their f. by adding -x to the w e a k stem; e. g . p r e y a s - l - 'dearer'. N o f o r m s
of the dual occur, and in the plural only the N . A . G. are found.

Inflexion.
3 4 6 . T h e V . sing. m. ends in -as6. T h e forms actually occurring, if
m a d e from kanXySms- 'younger', w o u l d be as follows:
S i n g . N. m. kanXyati, n. kanXyas. A . m. kdnXyamsam, n. kdnxyas.
I. m. n. kanxyasa. D. m. n. kdrtXyase. A b . m. n. kanXyasas. G. m. n. kanXyasas.
L . m. kdnXyasi. V . m. kanXyas. — P I . N. m. kanxyamsas. A . m. kanXyasas.
N. A. n. kanXyamsi. G . m. kanXyasam.
T h e forms which occur are the following:
S i n g . N . m . d-tavyan1 'not stronger', ojlyan 'stronger', kdnXyatt, javXyan
'swifter', jyayan 'mightier', tarXyan8 'easily passing through', tdvlyan 'stronger',
tdvyan 'stronger', dhdvxyan 'running fast', ndvXyan 'new', mdmhxyan 'more
bountiful', yajxyan 'worshipping more', yodhXyan 'more warlike', vanxyan
'imparting more', varXyan 'better', vdrsxyan ( V S . x x m . 48) 'higher', vdsyatt

' Also the transition forms ida-prajasas for M. apassu; cp. WACKERNAGEL I, p. ILL,
(TS. I. 5. 6'; MS. I. S 3 , p. 70). note.
» The form vay&m is perhaps contracted 3 C p . J . SCHMIDT K Z . 2 6 , 3 7 7 — 4 0 0 ; H I R T ,
for vayasam (r. l65'5 etc.); see LANMAN IF. 12, 201 f.
6
5S*3 As in the -man/, -vant and •vams stems.
3 All the Mss. read amhasif, see W H I T N E Y ' S 7 On the Sandhi of these nominatives see
note on AV. vi. 35». LANMAN 5 1 4 (middle).
8
4 The form apdsu (vm. 41«) is perhaps, Cp. KEICHELT, BB. 27, 104 f.
 234 I- A L L G E M E I N E S UND S P R A C H E . 4. VEDIC GRAMMAR.

'better', vtdiyan 'knowing better', srfyan 'better', sanTyan (TS. nr. 5. 5-') 'winning
much', sahlyan 'mightier', skabhiyan 'supporting more firmly'.
N. A . n. ffiyas 'straighter', ojiyas, kariiyas', jydyas, tdviyas, ddvTyas
'farther', draghlyas 'longer', ndviyas, ndvyas, nediyas 'quite near', preyas
'dearer', bhtiyas* 'more', vdrTyas, vdrstyas, vdslyas (TS. VS.), vasyas, sre'yas
(TS. VS.), svadlyas 'sweeter'.
A . m. jyayamsam, tdvyamsam, drtighlyamsatn, navyamsam, pdnyamsam
'more wonderful', varsiyamsam (AV.), saslyamsam -5 'more frequent', sreySmsam,
sahiyamsam (AV.).
I. m. jdvlyasa, navyasa, bhdyasa, sa/ityasiz (Kh. I. i 1 ). — n. tejtyasa
'keener', tvdksiyasa 'very strong', navlyasa, navyasa, panyasa, bhaviyasa
'more abundant', bhdyasa, vdsyasa, sahiyasa.
D.m. tavyase, ndvTyase, pantyase, pdnyase, bd/tyase(AV.) 'mightier', vdrsTyase
(VS. xvi. 30), sreyase (VS. xxxi. 11), sdnyase 'older', sdhlyase*, sd/iyase, hatiiyase
(VS. xvi. 40) 'more destructive'. — n. ndvTyase, ttdvyase, sdnyase.
Ab. m. tdvlyasas, rdbhyasas 'more violent', sahTyasas, sd/iyasas. —
n. bhdyasas.
G. m. kdnlyasas, jydyasas, tavyasas, navTyasas, ndvyasas, bhityasas. —
n. ndvyasas.
L . m. vdrsiyasi (VS. vi. 11), sdhiyasi. — V . m. ojiyas, jydyas.
PI. N. m. tiksmyamsas (AV.) 'sharper', bhfiyamsas (TS. VS. AV.),
sreyatnsas. — n. navyamsi.
A . m. kdnlyasas, n/tdlyasas, bhnyasas, rdbhiyasas (VS. xxi. 46), vdrstyasas
(AV.), vasyasas, vd/uyasas 'driving better', sriyasas (VS. TS.).
G. m. a-stheyasam 'not firm' (137). The f. form ndvyasinam is twice used
owing to metrical exigencies instead of navyasatn in agreement with marutam5.

8. Stems in -warns.
347. The suffix -varns6 is used to form the stem of the perfect parti-
ciple active. Strong and weak stem 7 are regularly distinguished; but
the latter assumes two different forms according as it is followed by a vowel
or a consonant. The suffix is reduced before vowels, by loss of the nasal
and Samprasarana, to -us which becomes -us; before a consonant (i. e. b/i),
it is reduced, by loss of the nasal and shortening of the vowel, to -vas,
which becomes -vat9. The latter form of the stem occurs only three times
in the RV. There are thus three stems employed in the inflexion of these
participles: -vams, -vat, -us. The weakest form of the stem (-us) appears
instead of the strong twice in the A. sing. m. and once in the N. pi. m.
The accent rests on the suffix in all its forms except in compounds formed
with the negative a- or with su- 'well' and dus- 'ill', where it shifts to these
particles. This declension is restricted to the m. and n., as the f. is formed
by adding -T to the weakest stem, as jagmus-i- 'having gone'. There are
altogether (including compounds) about 75 stems in -vams in the RV.
Inflexion.
348. No specifically n. forms occur except two in the A. sing. No L.
has been met with in any number; all the other weak cases are wanting in
1
T h e f o r m jâvîyas occurs in V S . XL. 4 (Iää : 6 On this suffix cp. J . SCHMIDT, K Z . 26,
Up.). 3*9-377-
» O n c e to b e r e a d bhaviyas-. LANMAN 5 1 4 . 7 On the formation of this p e r f e c t stem,
3 C o m p a r a t i v e of the root from which 1 see above 1 8 1 and b e l o w 4 9 1 .
iai-vat- 'constant' is derived. 4 8
This form was t r a n s f e r r e d to the N . A .
4 To be read sähyase in 1. 71 . sing. n. in which no consonant (-M or -s)
5 S e e LANMAN 5 1 5 . f o l l o w e d ; cp. 44 a, 3.
 VL DECLENSION. Noras. CONSONANT STEMS. 235

t h e d u a l a s w e l l a s t h e D . A b . in t h e plural. T h e V . sing. m . is r e g u l a r l y
f o r m e d with -fas'. T h e f o r m s a c t u a l l y o c c u r r i n g , i f m a d e f r o m cakrvAms-
' h a v i n g done', w o u l d b e the following:
S i n g . N. m. cakfvAn. A . m . caknxhnsam, n. cakrvat. L cakrtisa.
D . m . cakruse. A b . cakrusas. G . cakrusas. V . m . cakrvas. — D u . N . A . m .
cakrvAmsa. — P L N . m. cakrvAmsas. A . m. cakrusas. I. m . cakrvadbhis.
G . m . cakrusam.
T h e f o r m s a c t u a l l y o c c u r r i n g are t h e f o l l o w i n g :
S i n g . N . m . d'dkitvSn'' 'not knowing', a-prosivan ' n o t g o n e a w a y ' 3 ,
a-rarivan ' n o t liberal', a-vidvan4 ' n o t k n o w i n g ' , cakrvAn ' h a v i n g d o n e ' , cikitvAn
' h a v i n g n o t i c e d ' , jaganvAn ' h a v i n g g o n e ' , jaghanvAn ' h a v i n g slain', jajhivAn5
' h a v i n g r e c o g n i z e d ' , jiglvAn6 ' h a v i n g c o n q u e r e d ' , jujurvAn 'having g r o w n old',
jujusvAn ' h a v i n g e n j o y e d ' , jujuvAn ' h a v i n g s p e d ' , tatanvAn ' h a v i n g s t r e t c h e d ' ,
tasthivAn ' h a v i n g s t o o d ' , dadasvAn ' ' h a v i n g bitten', dadasvAn ' b e c o m e e x -
h a u s t e d ' , dadrsvAn ' h a v i n g s e e n ' , dadvAn ' h a v i n g g i v e n ' , dadhanvAn8 'having
s t r e a m e d ' , dadhrsvAn ' h a v i n g b e c o m e b o l d ' , dasvAn4 ' w o r s h i p p i n g ' , didivAn
' h a v i n g s h o n e ' , nir-jagmivAn ( T S . i v . 2. i 4 ) ' h a v i n g g o n e o u t ' , papivAn ' h a v i n g
d r u n k ' 9 , pupusvAn ' h a v i n g m a d e a b u n d a n t ' , babhuvAn ' h a v i n g b e c o m e ' , bibhlvAn
' h a v i n g f e a r e d ' , mamrvAn ' h a v i n g d i e d ' , mldhvAn4 ' b o u n t i f u l ' , yayivAn ' h a v i n g
g o n e ' , rarivAn ' h a v i n g g i v e n ' , rurukvAn ' h a v i n g s h o n e ' , vavanvAn 'having
a c c e p t e d ' , vidvAti4 k n o w i n g ' , vivikvAn10 'having divided', vividvAn ' h a v i n g
f o u n d ' , vividhvAn11 ' h a v i n g w o u n d e d ' , susukvAn12 ' h a v i n g s h o n e ' , susruvAn,
' h a v i n g h e a r d ' , sasavAn ' h a v i n g w o n ' , sasahvAn ' h a v i n g c o n q u e r e d ' , sdkvAn4
'having overcome'.
A . m . tyivAmsam ' h a v i n g g o n e ' , cakfvAmsam, cakhvAmsam14 ' s t r e t c h i n g
out', cikitvAmsam, jagfvAmsam ' w a k i n g ' , jujuvAmsam, tastabhvAmsam ' h a v i n g
h e l d fast', tasthivAmsam, dasvAmsam4', dldivAmsam, dur-vidvamsam 'ill-disposed',
papivAmsam '5, paptivAmsam "having flown', plpivAmsam 'having swelled',
mamrvAmsam, ririhvAmsam ' h a v i n g l i c k e d ' , vavrvAmsam ' h a v i n g e n c l o s e d ' ,
vavrdhvAmsam ' h a v i n g g r o w n strong', vidvAmsam4, (j>ra-)vivisivAtnsam ( T S . i v .
7 . 1 5 * ) , sUsuvAmsam ' h a v i n g i n c r e a s e d ' , sasavAmsam, sasrvAmsam 'having
s p e d ' , sasahvAmsam, su-vidvamsam4 ' k n o w i n g w e l l ' , susupvAmsam 'having
slept', susuvAmsam ' h a v i n g p r e s s e d ( S o m a ) ' . — W e a k forms for strong:
cakrusam ( x . 1 3 7 ' ) f o r cakrvAmsam-, emusdm ( v m . 6 6 ' ° ) 1 6 ' d a n g e r o u s ' .
A . n . tatanvat ' e x t e n d i n g far', sam-vavrtvat 'enveloping'.
I . m . a-bibhyusS 'fearless', cikitusi 'wise', vtdustf4. — n. a-bibhyusS,
bib/iyusS.
D . m . d-raruse, ttcuse17 ' p l e a s e d ' , cakruse, cikituse, jagmuse ' h a v i n g g o n e ' ,
jigyuse, dadisuse ' w o r s h i p p i n g ' , dasuselS, bibhyitse, mllhisel8, viduse,s, seduse19
' h a v i n g sat d o w n ' .
Ab. m. d-rarusas, jujurusas. — n. tasthusas10.

1 Cp. the •mant and -vant stems (316) 1 1 From vyadh- 'pierce'.

and the -yams stems (346). 1 2 From sue- 'shine'.

2 On the Sandhi of these nominatives s e e
LANMAN 512.
3 From pra and vas- 'dwell'.
4 Without reduplication,
s F r o m jha- 'know'.
6 F r o m ji- 'conquer'.
7 From dams- 'bite'.
8 F r o m dhanv- 'run'.
«3 From i- 'go'.
'4 From a root kha-.
'5 LAUMAN a d d s paprivamsam(T:).
16 F r o m am- 'be injurious', with weak
stem, together with anomalous accent, for
*em-i-vamsam\ cp. LANMAN 512 3 .
'7 From uc- 'find pleasure'.
1 8 Unreduplicated form.

9 LANMAN a d d s paprivan(t). «9 From sad- 'sit down'.

1 0 From vie- 'separate'. This m a y b e A. pi. m.
236 I. ALLGEMEINES UND S P R A C H E . 4. VEDIC GRAMMAP..

G. m. d-däsusas 'not worshipping', d-rarusas, tyüsas, cikitüsas, jagmüsas,

jaghnüsas, jäntisas1 'knowing', jigyüsas, tatarüsas 'having crossed', tasthüsas,
dadüsas, däsüsas5, dTdlyüsas, papüsas, bibhyüsas, mamrüsas (AV.), mt/hüsas5,
vividüsas 'having found', sedüsas, susuvüsas. — n. vavavrüsas* 'enveloping'.
V . m. cikitvas 'seeing', titirvas 'having crossed', dldivas 'shining', midhvas5.
— W i t h -van: cikitvan-> ( A V . ) .
Du. N. A . m. okivdmsa4 'accustomed to', jaganvämsä, jjgrvämsS, tasthi-
vämsä, dldivämsä, paßivfimsä, ravanvümsä, vidvämsä 5, süsuvämsä, susruvämsä.
— W i t h au: vidviimsau5.
PI. N. m. d-vidvämsas, cakrvämsas, cikitvämsas, jaksivamsas (TS. 1.4.44 s )
'having eaten', jaganvämsas, jägrvämsas, jiglvämsas, tasthivämsas, titirrihnsas,
tustuvämsas 'having praised', dadrvätnsas 'having burst', däsvämsas5, papivämsas
(TS. 1. 4. 44 2 ), paptivtimsas, mTdhvämsas5, ririkvämsas6 'having abandoned',
vidvämsas5, susukvämsas, süiuvämsas, sasaväinsas, sasrvämsas, säsahvämsas,
säkviimsasS, sü-vidvämsas (TS. iv. 6. 5"), susupviimsas. — W e a k form for
strong: d-bibhyvsas1 (1. 115). The AV. has the hybrid form bhakti-
vätnsas8.
A . m. cikitusas, jagmusas, jigyusas, tasthüsas, däsusas5, mi/hüsas5,
'•idüsas5, sedüsas.
I. m. jägrvddb/iis. — G. m. d-däsusäm 5, jigyüsäm, dadüsäm, milhüsäms,
vidüsäm 5.

2. Radical Stems in -s.

349. This declension comprises only radical stems, both monosyllabic
and compound, formed from some dozen roots, numbering altogether about
sixty. Some forty of these occur in the m., nearly thirty in the £, and half a
dozen in the n. Nine monosyllabic stems are f., viz. das- 'worship', dis-
'direction', dfs- 'look', tids- 'night', pas- 'sight', pis- 'ornament', prds-9 'dispute',
vis'- 'settlement', vris- 'finger'; but only two m., viz. is- 'lord' and spas'- 'spy';
all the rest are compounds, about 20 of which are formed from dfs-. The
inflexion is the same in all genders: the only n. forms which would differ
from the m. and f. (N. A. du. and pi.) do not occur.
a. The only trace of the distinction of strong and weak forms appears in the
nasalization of the stem in the N. sing. m. of some half dozen compounds of -dps-
'look' »0.
b. As the s represents an old palatal (40), it normally becomes the cerebral d
before terminations beginning with bh, as vid-bhis-, but in dis- and -drs- it becomes a
guttural, owing doubtless to the influence of the i in the N. sing, and L. pi. It regularly
becomes k before the -su of the L. pi., where it is phonetic (43 b 2); it usually also
becomes i in the N. sing, (which originally ended in -s\ But in four stems it is represented
by the cerebral f , e. g. vit, owing to the influence of forms in which the cerebral is
phonetic. In furo-das 'sacrificial cake', the palatal is displaced by the -s of the N . " .

« Unreduplicated form from j n a - 'know'. j 9 From pros- 'question'. LANMAN would

' With anomalous additional reduplicative ! correct the reading of AV. IL 27? to prasi,
syllable. ! explaining the word as a compound (pra-as•),
3 AV. vil. 971 for cikitvas of the corre- where the accent prasi would be regular.
sponding verse of the RV. (ill. 29»6), as if That is, -dfn, which in its three occur-
from a -vattl stem. rences in the RV. appears before vowels
4 From uc- 'be wont'. and doubles the »: -dfnn.
5 Without reduplication. i 1 It cannot, however, have been directly
6 From tie• 'leave'. ousted by the N. -s (the former existence of
7 S e e LANMAN 5 1 3 3 . j which in consonant stems must have been
8 In A V . vi. 793 for the reading of the {long forgotten), but was doubtless due to

edition bhaktivamsah syama the Paipp. has the influence of a- stems, such as dravino-
bhaifimahi. da-s.
 V I . DECLENSION. NOUNS. CONSONANT STEMS. 237

c. There are two transition forms to the a declension from puro-das- : puroiaiena
(VS. x i x . 85) and purodiid-vatsâ ( A V . XII. 4 3 5 ) 'having a sacrificial cake as a calf'. The
D. infinitive drsâye is a transition to the i-declension, for dfi-i

Inflexion.

350. T h e normal forms actually occurring, if m a d e f r o m vis- f. 'settle-

ment', would b e as follows:
S i n g . N . V . vit. A . visam. I. visâ. D . visé. A b . visas. G . visas.
L . vis". — D u . N . A . vis's and visau. — P l . N . visas. A . visas. I. vidbhis.
D . A b . vidbhyds. G . visam. L . viksu.
F o r m s w h i c h a c t u a l l y o c c u r are t h e f o l l o w i n g :
S i n g . N . m . 1. with n a s a l i z e d s t e m : kl-drn1 ' o f w h a t k i n d ? ' , sa-dfn*
' r e s e m b l i n g ' ; in V S . XVII. 8 1 : anyà-dfn ' o f a n o t h e r kind', l-drii ' s u c h ' , prâti-
sadrtl ' s i m i l a r ' 4 . — 2. e n d i n g i n -k: ï-dfk ( A V . ) , etî-drk 'such', tâ-drk ' s u c h ' ,
divi-sprk ' t o u c h i n g h e a v e n ' , ni-sprk5 ' c a r e s s i n g ' , ya-drk ' o f w h a t k i n d ' , ranva-
samdrk ' a p p e a r i n g beautiful', svar-dfk ' s e e i n g light', hiranya-samdrk ' r e s e m b l i n g
g o l d ' , hrdi-sprk ' t o u c h i n g t h e heart'. — 3. e n d i n g in -t: spât-, vi-spât'spy'.—
4. e n d i n g in - s : puro-dAs ' s a c r i f i c i a l c a k e ' ( o c c u r s t w i c e ; .
f . 2. e n d i n g i n - k : dlk ( V S . A V . ) , ndk\ dn-apa-sprk ( A V . ) ' n o t refusing',
upa-drk ' a s p e c t ' , ranvd-samdrk, sam-drk ' a p p e a r a n c e ' , su-df-sTka-samdfk 'having
a b e a u t i f u l a p p e a r a n c e ' . — 3. e n d i n g i n - f : vit\ vi-pât ('fetterless') N . o f a river.
N . A . n. «tâ-drk6, su-samdfk ' h a n d s o m e ' ; ta-dfk m a y b e a n e u t e r in v . 44 6 .
A . m . spâsam-, puro-disam-, upari-spfsam ' r e a c h i n g a b o v e ' , divi-spf-sam,
hrdi-sprsam-, tvesd-samdfsam ' o f brilliant a p p e a r a n c e ' , pisdhga-samdrsam 'of
r e d d i s h a p p e a r a n c e ' , ranvâ-samdrsam, su-samdrsam-, dure-dfsam 'visible f a r
a n d w i d e ' , su-drsam ' w e l l - l o o k i n g ' , svar-drsam-, dBra-adisam1 ' a n n o u n c i n g f a r
a n d w i d e ' . — f . disam, prAsam ( A V . ) , visam-, a-disam 'intention', fta-spf-sam
' c o n n e c t e d w i t h p i o u s w o r k s ' , pisànga-samdfsam ( A V . ) , pra-disam 'direction',
v'i-pasam, sukra-pisam ' r a d i a n t l y a d o r n e d ' , sam-dfsam.
I. m . visva-piia ' a l l - a d o r n e d ' , su-samdrss8. — f. dâsà9, disa, pisà, visâ-,
pra-disS. — n . divi-sprsâ, dare-dfsâ.
D . m . dnar-vise ' s e a t e d o n t h e car', T-dfse, divi-spfse, dii-dAse ( A V . )
'irreligious', dûre-df-s'e. — f . dis'/ ( A V . V S . ) , visé-, sam-drse,0.
A b . m . svar-drsas. — f. disâs ( A V . ) , vis'as-, sam-dj-sas, sam-spf-sas ( V S .
XXXVIII. 1 1 ) .
G . m . upa-sprsas (AV.) ' t o u c h i n g ' , divi-sprsas, prdti-prllsas11 ( A V . ) ' c o u n t e r -
disputant', su-dfias, svar-drsas, hiranya-samdrsas, hfdi-sprsas. — f. disds ( A V . ) ,
visas. — n . sàdana-sprsas ' c o m i n g into o n e ' s h o u s e ' .
L . m . divi-spfsi. — f. dis'i ( A V . ) , drs'i, prSsi ( A V . ) , vis"; pra-disi, vi-pâs'i,
sam-df~si. — V . m . tvesa-samdrk.
Du. N. A . V . m. fta-sprsâ, divi-sprsâ a n d divi-sprsâ, ?nithu-dfsâ
' a p p e a r i n g a l t e r n a t e l y ' , svar-df-sà. — f. mitha-drsâ. — W i t h -au', visau.
P l . N . m . spdsas-, upari-sprsas ( A V . ) , rta-sprsas, divi-spfsas, mandi-ni-
sprs'as ' f o n d o f S o m a ' , ratha-sprsas ' t o u c h i n g t h e chariot', Ardi-sprs'as; dUrc-

1 Cp. LANMAN 490 1 . I 6 T h e form mananai (x. 61 6 ), perhaps the

2 kidfhn i- (x. 1083). same as manak 'a little*, is explained by
3 sadfith always before a- in RV. In TS. GRASSMANN as manh-nas 'dispelling wrath'.
11. 2. 8 (B) the final k is preserved before
6 7 For diirc-a-disam.
sadfnk samanais. 8 In the IS5 Upani§ad (VS. XL. 1) also
4 Also sadfit-. all four before ca. Cp. occurs isa.
I.ANMAN 4 5 6 ' a n d 4 6 3 ' . 9 Cp. LANMAN 490 (bottom).
5 F r o m ni-sprs-, B R . , GRASSMANN, L A N M A N ; 1 0 There is also the transition form driaye.

from tti-spfh- 'desirous o f ' (loc.), BOHTLINGK " Cp. WHITNEY'S note on A V . n. 27'. T h e
(pw.). accent should be prati-praias.
238 I. ALLGEMEINES U N D SPRACHE. 4. VEDIC GRAMMAR.

dfsas, yaksa-df-s'as 'having the appearance of a Yaksa', su-drsas, svar-dfsas;

tvesa-samdrsas, su-samdfs'as; visva-pisas, su-pis'as 'well adorned'; su-sadrsas
'handsome'. — f. disas, visas; a-dis'as, ud-disas (VS. vi. 19) 'upper quarters',
upa-spfsas, pra-disas, vi-disas (VS. vi. 1 9 ) 'intermediate quarters', sam-dfsas.
A . m . spasas; ahar-dfsas 'beholding the day', bhima-samdrsas 'of terrible
appearance', svar-dfsas, hiranya-samdrsas. — f. disas. visas, vrisas\ a-dis'as,
pra-disas, sam-drsas.
I . m . su-saindfgbhis. — f. padbhis1 (IV. 2 1 2 ) 'with looks', vidbhis. —
D . f. digbhyas (VS. vi. 19). — A b . f. digbhyas, vidbhyas. — G . f. dis'ftm,
vis Am; a-disam, - L. f. diksu (AV. VS.), viksu.

6. Radical stems in -A.

351. This declension comprises some 80 stems formed from about a
dozen roots. All three genders appear in its inflexion; but the neuter is rare,
being found in only two stems and never in the plural. Of monosyllabic
stems six or seven are f., one m., and one n. All the remaining stems are
compounds, about three-fourths of which are formed from the three roots
druh-, vah- and sah- (over 30 from the last). The origin of the two stems
usnih- (AV.) a metre, and sarah-2 'bee' is obscure.
a. The distinction of strong a n d weak appears in compounds of vah- and sah-J.
the vowel being lengthened in the N. A. sing, and N. pi. m.; also in the N. A. du. m.
forms indra-vaha, indra-vahau, anad-vahait; and in the f. sing. N. daksina-vat and A.
havya-vdham. The strODg stem -vah- twice appears in weak cases, while it is metrically
shortened 18 times in strong cases 4 . The word attad-vah• 'ox' (lit. 'cart-drawer')
distinguishes three stems, the strong one being anad-vah-, and the weak anad-uh- before
vowels and anatf-ut- 5 before consonants.
b. As h represents both the old guttural aspirate gh and the old palatal jh, it
should phonetically become g and d respectively before bh. But the cerebral appears
for both in the only two case-forms that occur with a -bh ending: saradbhyas from
sarah-, and anad-udbhyas (AV.) from anatf vah-, where the dental d takes the place of
the cerebral by dissimilation. Before the su of the L. pi., k would be phonetic; but
here again, in the only form occurring, the cerebral appears: anadutsu6. On the other
hand the phonetic k appears in the N. sing, in the six forms -dhak, -dhuk, -dhruk', -ruk,
•sprk, ufttik (AV.) 8; while the unphonetic / appears in the two forms -va( a n d - ; « / 9 . The
word ana$-vah- forms, instead of *anad-vaf, the anomalous anadvati as if from a stem
in -vant.
c. The stem mahd- is perhaps a transfer to the a-declension from the far more
frequent but defective mah- 'great'. Several cases are formed from it: sing. N. maha-s,
G. mahasya, L. mahi\ pi. N. maha and mahani, n., G. mahanam. The D. sing, mahaye,
used as an infinitive, is a transfer to the /'-declension from mah-.

Inflexion.
352. The forms actually occurring, if made from sah- 'victorious', would
be as follows:
1
BLOOMFIELD is of opinion that here, as | 7 Occurring respectively in usd-dhak 'burn-
well as in the j other passages in which 1 ing with eagerness', in three compounds of
1
this form occurs in the RV., it means 'with duh- 'milk', and in five compounds of druh-
feet'; Johns Hopkins University Circular, 1906, 'injure'. These three forms, together with
p. 15—19. | ufar-bhut, are the only examples of the resto-
2
That the h here represents an original ration of initial aspiration in the declension
guttural is shown by the N. pi. sardghas \ of the RV.
(SB.) and the derivatives saragha- and ' 8 The derivation of this word (AV. VS.),
saragha- (TB.). ! is uncertain; it occurs in the RV. only in
3 The Pada text has always vah- on the the extended form of ufttiha-.
one hand, but sah- on the other. 9 When the final h becomes / , the initial
4 Cp. LANMAN 498 (middle). s is cerebralized.
5 For anad-ud- by dissimilation.
6
The dental again by dissimilation for
the cerebral /.
 3
39
Sing. N. .uit. V . m f. sat. A. m. f. sdham. I. sahd. D. sahi. Ab. sahds.
G. sahds. L. sahi. — Du. N. A. V. m. f. sahi and sdhau. N. A. n. sahi. —
PI. N. V. m. f. sAhas. A. m. sahas and sahds, f. sdhas. D. m. f. sad-bhydsl.
G. m. sahdm. L. m. satsu
The forms actually occurring are the following:
Sing. N. m. I. with -k: usa-dhak 'burning with eagerness'; go-dhuk
'milkman', prati-dh'tk2 (AV. TS.) 'fresh milk'; aksnaya-dhruk 'injuring wrongly',
a-dhruk 'free from malice', antaka-dhruk 'demon of death', abhi-dhruk
'inimical', asma-dhruk 'inimical to us'.
2. with -f: sat; abhx-sdt 'overpowering', rsi-sdt 'overcoming the seer',
jana-sdt 'overcoming men', tura-sdt 'overpowering quickly', nis-sdt 'over-
powering', nl-sdp (AV.) 'overcoming', pura-sdt 'victorious from of old', prtana-
sdt 'conquering hostile armies', prdsu-sdt 'finishing swiftly', bhuri-sdt4 'bearing
much', rayi-sdt 'ruling over wealth', vane-sdt 'prevailing in woods', virH-sits
'ruling men', visva-sdt6 (AV.) 'all-conquering', vfthi-sdt 'conquering easily',
satru-sdt1 (AV.) 'overcoming foes', satra-sdt 'always conquering'; turya-vdt
(TS. iv. 3. 3 a ) 'four-year-old ox', ditya-vdt8 (VS. xiv. xo; TS. iv. 7. i o 1 ) 'two-
year-old ox', pastha-vdt (VS. xiv. 9) 'four-year-old ox' 9 , madhyama-vdt 'driving
at middling speed', havir-vdt 'conveying the oblation', havya-vdt 'conveying
the offering'. — Irregular form: anad-vdn (AV. TS. VS.) 'ox"°.
f. 1. usnik (VS. AV.) a metre, garta-rukxi 'ascending the car-seat', sabar-
dhik 'yielding nectar'. — 2. daksina-vdt 'borne to the r i g h t ' — n. 1. puru-
spfk 'much desired'.
A. m. 1. Strong forms with -vdham and -saham (after a) or -sdham
(after 1 or r): anad-vdham, turya-vdham (VS. X X V I I I . 28), ditya-vdham (VS.
xxvm. 25), pastha-vdham (VS. X X V I I I . 29), vTra-vdham 'conveying men', svasti-
vdham 'bringing welfare', havya-vdham (also f.); pra-sdham 'victorious', yajha-
sdham13 'mighty in sacrifice', visvS-sdham, satrS-sdham; abhimati-sdham 'con-
quering adversaries', rti-sdham 'subduingassailants', tir-sdham 'overcoming men',
prtana-sdham 'V — With metrical shortening of -sdh- or -sdh- : rti-sdham,
prtana-saham14; carsanT-saham15 'ruling over men', pra-sdham, vibhvd-saham
'overcoming the rich', sada-saham 'always holding- out'. — 2. a-druham, puru-
sprham. — f. guham 'hiding-place', druham 'fiend', miham 'mist'; usniham
(VS. X X V I I I . 25); parT-naham 'enclosure'.
I. m. dhanva-saha 'skilled in archery', puru-spfha, visu-druha 'injuring
in various parts'. — f. guhd,6, druhd, mahd 'great'; usniha (VS. xxi. 13); pra-
sdha17 'might', vi-sruha 'plant'. — n. mahd.
D. m. druh<!li, mah<!-, a-druhe, abhi-druhe, abhimati-sdhe(TS. v. 2. 7 3 ),
carsaru-sdhe1*, satra-sdhe 2a. — f. mahe\ usnihe(VS.xxiv. 12),ga-duhe' 1 . — n. mahS.
12
J T o be inferred from anadudbhyas and The N. of sarah- 'bee', occurs as sard/
anadutsu. in TS. v. 3. 12' (B) and in ¿B. Xlll. 3. I 4 .
» There is no evidence to show the gender • J For yajna-saham.
of this word. 1* With unphonetic cerebral after a owing
3 For rti-fdf. to the influence of the N. pfiand-;at.
4 For bhuri-}af. • 5 T h e s is here not cerebralized after t.
5 For vTra-;af. 16 giiha which occurs 53 times (beside
6 For viiva-saf. guha, once) is used adverbially, 'in secret',
7 For sairu-jaf. with retracted accent.
8
Here ditya- seems to be = dvitiya-. •7 From pra-sah, beside pra-sah-.
18
9 Probably from pastha- = pjrffha- 'back'. This form is perhaps f.
The TS. (iv. 3. 32 etc.) has paffha-vit with '9 Strong form for weak.
JO
dental 1 for cerebral /. Strong form for weak (11. 21'), but t h e
10
There is also the transfer form maha-s, Pada text has satra-saAe.
supplying the place of a N. of mah-. There is also a transfer to the ¿"de-
11 For garta-ruk. clension : mahaye (as an infinitive).
2 40 I . ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4 . V E D I C GRAMMAR.

Ab. m. druhas, mahas; rti-sdhas. — f. druhas \ — n. mahas.

G. m. druhas, mahas1', a-druhas, anaduhas (AV.), pr/ana-sdhas; with
strong form: abhimati-sAhas5. — f. druhas, mihas; pra-sahas. — n. mahas-,
puru-sprhas.
L . m . anaduhi (AV.) 4 . — f. upa-rtahi (AV.) 'shoe', part-ndhi (AV.).
V . 1. m. tura-sat (VS. x. 22), prtana-sat (AV.), havya-vat. — 2. m . go-
dhuk (AV.). — f. a-dhruk 5.
Du. N. A . V . 1. m. anad-vAhau, indra-vAha and indra-vAhau 'conveying
Indra', dhftr-sahau (VS.iv. 33) 'bearing the yoke'; shortened: carsanT-sahs,
rathi-sahi 'drawing the chariot'. — 2. m . a-druha, an-abhidruha 'not inimical',
puru-sprha. — f. a-druha, a-druhS. — n. mahi.
PI. N. V . 1. m. anad-vAhas (AV.), indra-vAhas, turya-vAhas (VS. xxiv. 12),
ditya-vAhas (VS.), pastha-vAhas (VS.), prsti-vAhas (AV.) 'carrying on the
sides', vajra-vAhas 'wielding a thunderbolt', vira-vAhas, saha-vAhas 'drawing
together', susthu-vAhas 'carrying well', havya-vAhas\ abhimati-sAhas, satrH-sAhas;
shortened: V. carsanl-sahas. — 2. m. druhas, mahas6; a-druhas, V. a-druhas,
go-duhas, puru-sprhas, V. puru-sprhas.
f. 7 mihas, ruhas'sprouts'; a-druhas, a-richas(AV.) 'shoots',ghrta-duhas'giving
ghee', puru-druhas 'injuring greatly', puru-sprhas, pra-ruhas (AV.) 'shoots',
mano-muhas (AV.) 'bewildering the mind', vi-sruhas.
A . m. druhas'1', mahas6, a-druhas, anaduhas (AV.), puru-sprhas. —
f. druhas, nihas9 (AV. VS.) 'destroyers', mihas, ruhas (AV.); aksi-nahas
'tied to the axle', a-druhas, upa-rithas 'shoots', pra-ruhas (AV.), sam-dihas
'mounds'.
D. m. anadudbhyas (AV.) — f. sarddbhyas 'bees'. — G. m. mahAmI0,
tarsani-saham (VS. xxvin. 1). — L . m . anadutsu.

7. Stems in semivowels: r, /, v.
353. This group forms a transition from the consonant to the vowel
declension inasmuch as the stem often assumes a vocalic form before endings
with initial consonant, and in some cases takes endings which otherwise appear
in the vowel declension only. The -r stems are nearest the consonant
declension as their radical division conforms almost without exception to that
type; their derivative division, however, has several points in common with
the inflexion of vowel stems.

1. Stems ending in -r.

354. A . Radical stems. Here the stems ending in radical r must be
distinguished from those in which the r belongs to a suffix. The radical
stems numbering over 50 are formed from some sixteen roots, the vowel of
which is nearly always i or u. Only three of these stems contain a and
only two 3. Nearly a dozen are monosyllabic, but the rest (numbering
over 40) are compounds, almost a dozen of which are formed with -tur.

1 amhas (vi. 3 1 ) is probably not an A b . of 6

With irregular accent.
<imh- 'distress' (which does not occur else- 7 T h e r e are no neuters except the trans-
where), but by haplology for amhas-as, which . ition forms maha and mahani.
is very frequent. I 8 With irregular accent as if weak forms.
' T h e r e is also the transition form Cp. above 94, note 6 and LANMAN 5 0 1 (middle).
mahasya. 9 T h e derivation of this word is uncertain:
3 T h e P a d a text has -sa/ias. it is explained by Mahidhara as = nihantf-.
4 T h e r e is also the transition form make \ W H I T N E Y (AV. 1 1 . 6 5 ) would emend to nidas.
(m. n.). : 1 0 There is also the transition form
5 See W H I T N E Y ' S note on A V . VJI. 736. j mahanam.
 VI. DECLENSION. NOUNS. CONSONANT STEMS. 241

The inflexion is the same in all genders except the N. A. neuter. A pecu-
liarity is the lengthening of the radical i and u when a consonant ending
follows or originally followed'.
a. T h e distinction of s t r o n g a n d w e a k appears in dvar- f. 'door', w h i c h is reduced
to dur- in weak cases; in tar- and star- 'star', from which are made taras and stfbhis;
and in the n. svar 'light' t w o w e a k cases, the D . and G. sing., are formed from the con-
tracted s t e m sur-.
b. T h e r e are here a f e w t r a n s i t i o n s to t h e a - d e c l e n s i o n : satd-durasya and iata-
duresu 'having a hundred doors', w h i c h started from w e a k cases like duras-, su-dhura-s,
N. sing. m. 'well-yoked', due to the A. stt-d/iur-am\ perhaps also the A. sing. f. an-apa-
sphura-m 'not pushing away', w h i c h occurs b e s i d e the N. pi. an-apa-sphur-asOn the
other hand the N . pi. m. vandhitr-as 'car-seats' s e e m s to be a transition from the
a-declension, as vandhiha- is probably the older stem.
c. T h e form yan-tur-am 'guide', w h i c h occurs twice for yan-tar-am has b e e n formed
as if from -tur o w i n g to the parallelism with ap titram w h i c h o n c e appears beside it 3.

Inflexion.
355* The forms actually occurring, if made from pur- f. 'stronghold',
would be as follows:
Sing. N. p a r . A. puram. I. p u r t i . D. p u r i . Ab. purds. G. purds.
L. p u r i . — D u . N. A. p u r i and purau. — PI. N. V. pi'tras. A. puras.
I . pQrbhis. D . pBrbhyas (VS.). G . purAm. L. pursu.
The forms actually occurring are as follows:
Sing. N. m. g i r 'praising', vdr* 'protector'; muhur-gir 'swallowing
suddenly'; d i t r - d s l r 'badly mixed'; rajas-tar 'traversing the air', ratha-ttir
'drawing a chariot', visva-tiir 'all-surpassing', su-pra-tiir 'very victorious'®. —
f. g i r 'praise', dvAr (AV.) 'door', d f a i r 'burden', p f i r \ amU-jnr 'aging at home',
a - s i r 6 (AV. TS.) 'mixture'.
N. A . n. vAr 'water', suar 1 'light'8, suvar (TS. II. 2. 12 1 ).
A . m. tur am 'promoter'; ap-turam 9
'active', aji-turam 'victorious in
battles', rajas-turam, rat/ia-turam, vftra-turam 'conquering enemies'; a-juram
'unaging', apa-sphuram 'bounding forth', f t a j u r a m 'grown old in (observing)
the law', gavasiram 'mixed with milk', ydvUsiram 'mixed with corn', sahdsra-
dvararn 'having a thousand doors', su-dhuram 'well yoked' 10 . — f. gir am,
dvAram (AV.), dhuram, puram\ a-siram, upa-stiram 'cover', sam-giram 'assent'.
11
I. m. bdndhura (AV.) 'binder'(?). — L g i r A , dhurA, purA\ abhi-pra-mura
'crushing', abhi-svara 'invocation', a-sira. — n. visva-turS.
D . m . gire; nis-ture 'overthrowing*. — f. upa-stire. — n. s t i r / .
Ab. f. dAuras; ni-juras 'consuming by fire'.
G. m. gavasiras, y a v a s i r a s , radhra-turas 'encouraging the obedient'. —
f. ama-juras. — n. siiras rdsasiras 'mixed with juice'.

1
That is, the •s of the N. sing. m. and f. 7 T h i s is the only declensional form of
This rule also applies in var (L 132 s ) if this word occurring in the AV.
8
GRASSMANN is right in explaining this form Neuter compounds ending in -r are
as a N. sing. m. m e a n i n g 'protector', from a v o i d e d ; thus the AV. has the transition
vat-- {vr- 'cover'); but BR., s. v. var-, regard form nava-dvara-m, N. n.
this form as a corruption. 9 For ap-(a)-s-luram 'getting over work'.
2 10
In the later language dvar- f. and pur- f. T h e r e is also the anomalous form
went over to the a- declension as dvara- n. and yanturam for yantaram.
pnra- n., w h i l e var- n. went over to the i- 11 Probably a transfer from the a-declen-
declension as vari-. sion.
J See LANMAN 486 (bottom). i ' W i t h the accentuation of a dissyllabic
4 If this form is not a corruption. s t e m (suar). In VIII. 6 l ' 7 for sura a the
5 There is also the transition form sti- Pada text has sure a, but it is probably the G.
dhura-s. siiras. In I. 66'", 6 9 1 0 the uninflected form
6 From if- 'mix'. suar s e e m s to be used in a G. sense.
Iudo-arische Philologie. I. 4. IS
 242

L . f. dhuri, puri. — n . suar1.

D u . N . A . m . vrtra-tura, sana-jura 'long grown old', su-dhura. —
f. dv&r&\ mithas-tura 'alternating'; w i t h au: dviirau, dhurau.
P I . N . V . m . giras, giras, muras 'destroyers'; ap-turas, a-muras
'destroyers'; gdvas'iras, try-is'iras 'mixed with three (products of milk)', dadhy-
asiras 'mixed with curds'; dur-dhuras 'badly yoked', dhiya-juras 'grown old
in devotion', tiis-turas, bandhuras (AV.), vandhuras 'seat of the chariot',
Vftra-turas ( V S . v i . 3 4 ) . — f. giras, giras (AY.), tdras 'stars' 2 , dvSras3, dvaras,
puras; an-apasphuras 'not struggling', ama-juras, mithas-turas.
A . m . giras-, a-tnuras, gdvas'iras, mithas-turas, ydvasiras, sam-giras,
su-dhuras. — f. giras, duras4, dhuras, puras, psuras5 'victuals'; ni-puras6
b
( V S . A V . ) , para-puras ( V S . A V . ) , vi-stiras 'expansion', sam-stiras 'con-
traction'.
I . m . ratha-tiirbhis. — f. girbhis, purbh'ts1, strbhis8 'stars'. — D . n.
varbhyds (VS.). — G . m . sam-asiram 'mixed'. — f. giram, purSm. — L. m.
tUrsu. — f. gXrsu, dhursu, pursu. — n. prtsu-tilrsu 9 'victorious in battle'.
356. B . Derivative stems. — Derivative stems ending in r consist
of two groups, the one formed with the suffix -ar, the other with -tar. The
former is a small group containing only eight stems, the latter is a very
large one with more than 1 5 0 stems. Both groups agree in regularly
distinguishing strong and weak cases. The strong stem ends in -ar or
-ar, which in the weak forms is reduced to r before vowels and f before
consonants. Both groups further agree in dropping the final of the stem in
the N. sing. m. f., which case always ends in -a io . They resemble the vowel
declension in adding the ending -n in the A. pi. m., and -s in the A. pi. f.
and in inserting n before the -am of the G. pi. They have the peculiar,
ending -ur in the G. sing.

a. Stems in -ar.
357. There are only five simple m. and f. stems in -ar, viz. us-ar- t.
'dawn', dev-ar- m. 'husband's brother', nanand-ar- f. 'husband's sister', mir-1' m.
'man', svasar-li f. 'sister'; and the two compounds svar-nar- m. 'lord of heaven'
and sapta-svasar- 'having seven sisters'. Of these, usar- shows only case-
forms according to the consonant declension, while ndr- and svasar- have
some according to the vowel declension also. Of vanandar- only the G. and
L. sing, and of deuar- only the A. sing, and the N. and L. pi. occur. Nearly
all case-forms are represented by these five stems taken together. There are
also the three neuters ah-ar- 'day', adh-ar- 'udder', and vdd/i-ar- 'weapon',
which occur in the N. A. sing. only. The first two supplement the -an stems
ah-an- and itdh-an- in those cases.

1
This form is used 5 times as a L. sing, j 7 From fur- 'stronghold' and pur- *abun-
dropping the -i like the -an stems, as ahan ' dance'.
beside ahani. I 8 Weak form, accented like a dissyllabic
1
Strong form of tar• = star- 'star'. The ' stem. In Kh. I. 116 normally accented, but
gender is uncertain. ! spelt with re as stribhii.
3 Once the weak form duras. | 9 With L. pi. ending kept in the first
4 The strong form dvaras is once used. { member.
The accentuation of a weak case, duras, j 1 0 In this they resemble the N. m. of nouns
occurs once. of the -an declension.
5 Occurring only in X. 26 s ; it is a n. sing. 11
Except nar-as and usr-as.
according to BR. I 1 2 This word is probably derived with the
6
The meaning and derivation of these two ; suffix -ar; cp. BRUGMANN, Grundriss 2,p. 359.
1
words is uncertain; see WHITNEY'S note on ' Here -sar is probably a root; cp.
AV. xvni. 2*8. BRUGMANN, op. cit., 2, p. 8, footnote.
 V I . DECLENSION. NOUNS. CONSONANT STEMS. 243

Inflexion.
358. Sing. N . m. hata-svasa (AV.) 'whose sisters have been slain'. —
f. svdsa; sapta-svasd 'having seven sisters'. — n. a/tar, adhar, vadhar.
A. m. devdram, ndram. — f. svdsSram. — I. f. svasra. — D. m. ndre;
svar-nare. — f. svdsre. — Ab. f. svasur1. — G. m. ndras. — f. usras,
ndnandur (AV.), svasur. — L . m. ndri. — f. usri' and usrdm3, nanandari4.
— V. f. usar.
Du. N. A. m. nartl, V. nara and narau. — f. svasara and svasSrau. —
L. f. svdsros.
PI. N. m. devaras, ndras, V. naras, suar-naras. — f. svdsaras. —
A. m. nfn 5. — f. usras, svdsrs. — I. m. njbhis. — f. svasrbhis. —
D. m. njbhyas. — Ab. m. njbhyas. — G. m. nardm6 and nrndm7. —
f. svdsram6 and svasfnam. — L. devfsu, nfsu.

b. S t e m s in -tar.
359. This group includes two subdivisions, the one forming its strong
stem in -tar, the other in -tar. T h e former consists of a small class of
five names o f relationship: three masculines, pi-tar- 'father', bhrd-tar- 'brother',
nap-tar-8 'grandson', and two feminines, duhi-tdr-'daughter', a n d m a - t d r - 'mother';
and the m. and f. compounds formed from them. T h e second class consists
of more than 1 5 0 stems (including compounds), which are either agent nouns
accented chiefly on the suffix, or participles accented chiefly on the r o o t
T h e s e are never used in the f., which is formed with -l from the weak stem
of the m., e. g. jdnitr-T- 'mother' (377).
a. This declension is almost restricted to the m. and f. gender. The only n. stems
are dhar-tar- 'prop', dhma-tar• 'smithy', stha tar-'stationary', vi-dhar-tar- 'meting out'; and
from these only about half a dozen forms occur. The only oblique cases met with are
the G. slhalur and the L. dhmalarl (Pada -tdri). T h e N. A. sing, which might be expected
to appear as -tar, seems to have attained to no fixity of form, as it was of extremely
rare occurrence. It seems to be represented by the following variations: stkatar (vi. 496),
sthatfn (1. 726), sthatur (I. 58 s , 68», 707), dhartari (IX. 86 4 *; II. 23"7), vi-dhartari (VIII. 59»;
ix. 474)9.
Inflexion.
360. T h e inflexion is exactly the same in the m. and f. except that the
A . pi. m. ends in -tfn, but the f. in -tfs.
T h e forms actually occurring, if made from matdr- f. 'mother', as re-
presenting a name of relationship, and from janitar- m. 'begetter', as re-
presenting an agent noun, would be as follows:
Sing. N. matd; janita. A . matdram-, janitdram. I. matrd\ janitrd.
D. matre; janitri. Ab. mstur; janitur. G. matiir-, janitur. L. mStdri-,
janitdri. V. mdtar; janitar.
Du. N. A. matdra and mStdrau; janitdra and janitdrau. I. janitfbhyam
(VS.). D. janitfbhyam. G. matros; janitros. L . matros; janitros.

1 The ending -ur in this declension 6

The only two forms in the derivative -{t)ar
appears to represent original -fz through declension in which -am is added direct to
•r> -, c p . LANMAN 426, BRUGMANN, K G . p . 381 the stem.
(middle). 7 Often to be read as nfnam-, see LAN-
2
The metre requires usari. As to the sr MAN 43-
8
cp. 57. 1 In the RV. this stem occurs in weak
J The ending -am is a transfer from the forms only, being supplemented in the strong
I- declension. The metre requires ujaram inby napat. The TS. (1 3. 4 1 ) however has
which -am is added direct to the stem. the strong form naptaram with long vowel,
4 The metre requires nattandri (x. 8j4 6 ). like svasaram.
5 On nfn as a metrically shortened form 9 S e e LANMAN 4 2 2 f.
for other cases see PISCHEI., VS. I, p. 42 f.
Hi*
244 I- ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4. VEDIC GRAMMAR.

P I . N. matarás; janitAras. A. miitrs\ janitrn. I. matrbhis; janitrbhis.

D. matfbhyas; janitrbhyas. A b . matrbhyas; janitrbhyas. G. m'itrnAm-, jani-
trnAm. L. matrsw, janitrsu. V . 111 Ataras) jimitaras.
Forms actually occurring are the following:
S i n g . N . 1. m . pitá, bAnita; dáksa-pita (TS. iv. 3. 41; V S . xiv. 3) 'having
Dak$a as father', tri-matA 'having three mothers', dvi-matA 'having two mothers',
hatá-bhrata (AV.) 'whose brothers have been slain', hatá-mata (AV.) 'whose
mother has been slain'. — f. duhitA, matA; a-bhratA 'brotherless', síndhu-
matA1 'having a stream as mother'.
2 2 . m . anv-a-gantA ( V S . x v m . 59)3, avitA 'protector', upa-sattA ( T S . V S . A V . )
'attendant', krostA 'jackal' ('yeller'), janitA, jaritA 'praiser', trata 'protector',
tvásta 'fashioner', d'itá 'giver', d/iartá 'supporter', neta 'leader', prati-grahXtA
(VS. vii. 48) 'receiver', prati dhartA (VS. x v . 10) 'one who keeps back', pra-
vaktá ( K h . iv. 8") Speaker', vocfhA and v'niha 'driving'; etc.
A . 1. m . pitáram, bhrAtaram; ádri-mataram 'having a rock for a mother',
já-mataram 'son-in-law', slndhu-matatam. — f. duhitáram, matáram, saptá-
mataram 'having seven mothers'.
2. m . adhi-vaktáram 'advocate', anu-ksattáram (VS. x x x . 1 1 ) 'doorkeeper's
mate', abhi-sektáram(VS.xxx. 12) 'consecrator', abhi-sartáram(VS.) 'assistant', ava-
satáram 'liberator', avitáram, ástaram 'shooter', a-yantáram 'restrainer', is-kartá-
ram 'arranging', upa-manthitáram (VS. x x x . 12) 'churner', upa-sektáram ( V S . x x x .
12) 'pourer-out', kártaram 'agent', ksattdram (VS. x x x . 13) 'door-keeper', gántaram
'going', goptáram (Kh.v. 33)'protector', céttiram 'attentive', janitáram (VS.xm.
51), jaritáramjétaram'victorious', jostáram ( V S . x x v i u . : o)'cherishing', tarutáram
'victor', tratiram, tvástaram, datáram 'giver', dátaram 'giving', dhartáram, tii-
datáram 'one who ties up', nis-kartñram (TS. iv. 2.7 3 ) 4 , nettiram 'leader', panitaram
'praising', pari-vestAram (VS. x x x . 12) 'waiter', pavitáram 'purifier', pura-etfiram
(VS. xxxHi. 60) 'leader', pesitáram(VS. x x x . 12) 'carver', pra-karitáram (VS. x x x .
12) 'sprinkler', pra-netiram 'leader', pra-datáram (VS.vn. 4 6 ; TS.) 'giver', pra-
hetáram 'impeller', bodhayitáram 'awakener', bhettáram (TS.i.5.6*) 'breaker',
maiidhatáram 'pious man', marditáram 'comforter', yantáram 'ruler', yántaram
'restraining', yatárám 'pursuer', yoktAram (VS. x x x . 14) 'exciter', raksitAram
'protector', vanditAram 'praiser', vi-bhaktAram 'distributor', vi-moktAram ( V S . x x x .
14) 'unyoker', samitAram (VS. XXVIII. 10) 'slaughterer', sftam-kartAram (TS.
hi. 1. 4«) 'cooking thoroughly', srotAram 'hearer', sanitAram 'bestower', sam-
cddhAram5 'kindler', savitáram 'stimulator', stotAram 'praiser', hantAram 'slayer',
has-kartAram 'inciter', hétaram 'driver', hótaram 'invoker'.
I. I. m . náptra, pitrA, bhrAtra (AV.). — f. duhitrA, matrA (VS. A V . ) . —
2. m . Astra, tvástra (AV.), dhatrA 'establisher', pra-savitrA ( V S . x . 3 0 ) 'impeller',
savitrA.
D . i . m . náptre, pitré. — f. duhitré,\ matré. — 2. m . ástre (AV.), kartré (AV.),
krostré (AV.), jaritré, jóstre (VS.XVII. 56), ti'ástre (VS. xxit. 20), datr¿, dhartri
( V S ' x v i i . 56; T S . iv. 6. 3 J ), dhstri ( A V . ) , prati-grahltré (VS. vil. 47), rakñtr¿
( A V . ) , vi-dhatr¿ ( A V . ) 'disposer', iamitré (TS. iv. 6. 3 3 ), savitré, stotré, hantré
(VS. xvi. 40), hótre.
A b . 1. m . pitúr, bhrAtur, vi-jamatur 'son-in-law'. — f. duhitúr, matúr. —
2. m . ástur, tvástur (AV.), dhatúr, savitúr, hotur.

1 O n the Sandhi of these n o m i n a t i v e s in cipient use as a periphrastic future: = 'will

-à seeI ANMAN 4 2 3 — 5. follow".
' T h e nominatives of the m. agent nouns 4 RV. x. 1405 and VS. Xll. 110 have
are s o numerous (140 in the R V . alone) that if-iartaram in the same passage.
e x a m p l e s only can be g i v e n here. 5 For *ed/i-taram, from idh- 'kindle'.
3 Used with the A., an example o f in-
 245
G . i. m. ndptur, pitur, bhrAtur. — f . duhitur, ndnandur (AV.), matur. —
2 . m . abhi-ksattur 'carver', avitur, astur, utthatur ( A V . ) ' r e s o l v i n g ' , kartur (Kh.
i v . 5 6 - ">), cettur ( A V . ) , jarntur, jaritur, tratur, tvdstur, datur, dhatur (VS. TS.
AV.), ni-dhah'ir 'one w h o lays down', ttctur, ndstur leader', mandhat'tr, yantur
(VS. ix. 30), vanditur, vavAtur 'adherent', rodJtur1 'draught-horse', samitur,
sartit'tr, savit'tr, sotur 'presser of Soma', stotur, h'>tur.
L. 1. m . pitdri. — f . duhitdri, matdri. — 2. m. netiri, vaktari (AV.)
'speaker', sotdri. — W i t h metrically p r o t r a c t e d -/: eldrX2, kartdrl, vaktdrlK
V. 1. m. jamatar, pilar, bhratar. — f . duhitar, ma tar. — 2. m . ava-
spartar 'preserver', avitar, janitar, jaritar, tratar, tvastar, dartar 'breaker',
dosa-vastar 'illuminer of the dark', dhartar, d/iatar, netar, nestar, pra-netar,
pra-yantar 'bringer', yajna-hotar 'offerer at a sacrifice', vi-dhartar 'ruler',
vi-dhatar, vi-sastar ( A V . ) ' s l a u g h t e r e r ' , sanitar, savitar, su-sanitar 'liberal giver',
solar, stotar (VS.xxm.7; TS.vn.4.20), sthatar 'guider', hotar.
Du. N. A.V. 4 1 . m . pilar J, bhratara-, i/Ma-mStara ' w h o s e m o t h e r is h e r e
and there', ddksa-pitarH, matdrii-pitdra 5 ' f a t h e r a n d m o t h e r ' , sindhu-matara. —
f . duhitdra, matdra, sam-m3ldr& 'twins'. — W i t h -au: m. pitdrau, sam-
matdrau (AV.). — f . duhitarau ( A V . K h . in. 1 5 1 3 ) , mstdrau. — 2. m. avitara,
a-snatArd 'not (fond of) bathing', usttira 'ploughing bulls', gdntSra, codiltira
'instigators', janitar a, dhartdrU, ni-cetara. ' o b s e r v e r s ' , pretArH 'lovers', yatitAra
'guides', raisitiira, s'amitArS, sthAtara, hjtarH. — W i t h shortened vowel:
manotarn 'disposers'. — W i t h -au: anu-sthstArau (AV.) 'undertakers',
ksattArau (AV.) 'carvers', goptArau (AV.), datArau, raksitArau, hotarau (VS.
x x . 42), hotarau ( T S . iv. 1 . 8 Z ) . — W i t h shortened vowel: dhdnutarau6
'running s w i f t l y ' , savatdrau ( V S . x x v m . 6) 'having the same calf'7.
I . 2 . m . hotrbhyam ( V S . x x i . 53). — D . 1 . m . pitfbhyUm 8 . — G.i.m.pitros. —
f . matros. — 2 . m . pra-sastros (VS.) 'directors'. — L . 1 . m . pitros. — f. mains'*.
PI. N . 1 . m . pitdras, V . pi tar as, bhrAtaras; ddksa-pitaras, daksa-pitaras'10
( T S . 1. 2. 3*), go-mataras 'having a cow for mother', prs'ni-mataras 'having
Pj-sni f o r a m o t h e r ' , sindhu-mataras, su-mataras 'having a beautiful mother'. —
f . duhitdras, mataras, V . mAtaras; a-bhrataras and a-bhrAtaras (AV.). •—
2. m. agni-hotaras 'having Agni for a priest', abhi-ksattAras, abhi-svartAras
'invokers', astaras, upa-ksetAras 'dwelling n e a r ' , gdntaras, cetAras 'avengers',
jaritAras, joslAras, tratAras, daditAras ( V S . v n . 1 4 ) ' k e e p e r s ' , datAras, dhartAras,
d/iAtaras, ni-celAras 'observing' and 'observers', ninditAras 'scorners', nr-patAras
'protectors of men', ns'taras and netAras, panitAras, pari-vestAras ( V S . vi. 13),
pavltAras ' p u r i f i e r s ' , pura-etAras (VS. xvii. 1 4 ; T S . i v . 6 . i 4 ) , pra-jnatAras 'con-
ductors', pra-netAras, pravitAras 'promoters', prctAras, yatitAras, raksitAras,
vantAras 'enjoyers', vi-dhatAras, vi-yotAras 'separators', s'ami/Aras, srotaras,
sanitAras, sotAras, sto/Aras, st/nltAras, svdritaras 'roaring', hitaras, AJ/aras".

' F o r *vah-tur, f r o m vah- ' d r a w ' . I 8 N o f o r m in - b h y a m w i t h t h e A b . s e n s e

2 GRASSMANN t a k e s this f o r m (v. 4 1 1 0 ; | occurs.
v i . 12 4 ) as a N. f. o f ctar- ' o n e w h o a p p r o a c h e s 9 T h e s e G . L . f o r m s as w e l l as svtisros
or asks'. m u s t b e p r o n o u n c e d t r i s y l l a b i c a l l y in the R V .
3 T h e P a d a t e x t h a s i in all t h e s e f o r m s , e x c e p t matris in VIL 3 9 . S e e I ANMAN 428.
C p . NEISSER B B . 20, 44. With long grade vowel.
4 I n t h e R V . t h e e n d i n g -a o c c u r s 1 7 6 «» T h e f o r m vasu-dhataras ( A V . v. 27') m a y
t i m e s , -au o n l y 10 t i m e s : LANMAN 4 2 7 (mid.), b e N . pi. w i t h s h o r t e n e d v o w e l , b u t W H I T -
5 A D v a n d v a compound in w h i c h both NEY r e g a r d s it as a c o m p a r a t i v e N . s i n g ,
m e m b e r s are i n f l e c t e d . ' g r e a t e r b e s t o w e r of w e a l t h ' . S e e his n o t e
6 T h e s h o r t e n i n g is p r o b a b l y m e t r i c a l . on A V . v . 2 7 s .
7 T h i s is t h e i n t e r p r e t a t i o n o f t h e c o m -
m e n t a t o r ; but t h e d e r i v a t i o n of t h e w o r d is
obscure.
246 I. ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4. VED;C GRAMMAR.

2
A . I. m. p i t f n d à k s a - p i t r n , prsni-mâtrn. — f. m i t t s . — 2. m . àstrn,
a-snâtrn, (AV.; Kh. iv. 5J"), g o p t / n ( A V . ) ,
k a r t ï n j a r i t f n , t r â t f n , d â t f n , p a t i n
(AV.) 'drinkers', p r a - v o d h f n 'carrying off', s t o t f n , s t h ï t f n , h ô t f n .
I. 1. m . n'tptrbhis, pitrbhis, bhrâtrbhis ; saptâ-mâtrbhis. — f. mâtrbhis. —
2. m . âstrbhis, kartrbhis, dhâtrbhis, p a r t r b h i s 'with aids', setrbhis 'bindings',
sotrbhis and sotrbhis, hetrbhis, hôtrbhis.
D. 1. m. pitrbhyas. — f. mâtrbhyas. — 2. m. ksattrbhyas (YS.xvr. 26) 'cha-
rioteers', raksitrbhyas (AV.), stotrbhyas, sam-grahttrbhyas (VS. x v i . 26) 'drivers'.
A b . 1. m . pitrbhyas. — f. mâtrbhyas.
G. m. 1. pitrnâm3. — 2.
(VS. vi. 2) kind of Soma priests,
unnctrnâm
(AV.), d h l t r n A m , stotrnâm,
f n r i t r n â m , d â t f n à m 4 hotrnâm. — W i t h f : 1. pitrnâm
(TS. I. 3. 6* etc.); 2. dhâtrnàm (TS. iv. 7. 14^), netrnàm (TS. I. 3. 6»)S.
L. 1. m. p i t r s u (AV.). — f. mâtrsu. — 2. m. A J t f s u .

2. Stems in y and y.
361. These stems, of which there are only five, form a transition to the
vowel declension because, while taking the normal endings like the ordinary
consonant declension, they add -s in the N. sing. m. f. and show a vowel
before the endings with initial consonant. There are no neuter forms 6 .

a. Stem in - â y (-ai).

362. This type is represented by only one word, usually stated in the
form of rtii-, which never appears in any case. This word, which is both
m. and (rarely) f., means 'wealth', being in origin doubtless connected with
the root rà- 'give'. The stem appears as rity- before vowels and râ- before
consonants. The forms occurring are: Sing. A. r / i m . I. r â y à . D. rayé.
A b . rayas. G. riyâs">. — Pl. N. râyas. A. râyds*. G. ràyâm.

a. T h e inflexion of ray• is s u p p l e m e n t e d b y rayi-, m . f., f r o m w h i c h occur t h e addi-

tional cases sing. N. rayis, A. rayim, I. rayya a n d rayinà ; pl. I. rayibhis, G. rayïuàm.
b. T h e r e a r e t h r e e f o r m s w h i c h s e e m to b e i r r e g u l a r c o m p o u n d s of ray- : sing. G.
fdhid-rayas ('increasing wealth') N. of a m a n , D . hfhad-raye ' h a v i n g m u c h w e a l t h ' , and
d u . N. iatà-râ ' h a v i n g a h u n d r e d g o o d s ' . In t h e first t w o f o r m s the v o w e l of t h e stem
h a s p r o b a b l y b e e n s h o r t e n e d m e t r i c a l l y 9 ; in t h e t h i r d f o r m , t h e stem as it a p p e a r s b e f o r e
c o n s o n a n t s h a s b e e n used.

b. Stems in -av (-0) and - a r ( - o u ) .

363. There are two stems in -av, viz. gàv- m. 'bull', f. 'cow', and
dyâv- m. f. 'heaven', 'day'. Both distinguish strong forms, in which the vowel
is lengthened; both take -s in the N. sing, before which the end of the stem
assumes the form of -au. Both show various irregularities in their inflexion.

1
O n the S a n d h i of t h e s e accusatives see I 7 T h e G. a f e w times has the irregular
LANMAN 4 2 9 . accent rayas.
2 2 8
O n c e with m. e n d i n g m a t f n (x. 3 J ) . A c c e n t e d t h u s 2 2 t i m e s as a w e a k case
3 W i t h n b e f o r e t h e e n d i n g -am as in t h e in t h e RV., a n d four t i m e s rayas as a s t r o n g
vowel d e c l e n s i o n , a n d a c c e n t s h i f t e d to t h e ! case (also VS. II. 24). T h e SV. 1.4.1.4 1 h a s
e n d i n g as in t h e <- a n d u- declension w h e n ! t h e A. pi. ras in t h e v a r i a n t adhad rah for
t h o s e vowels are a c c e n t e d . adhatta of RV. v i u . 9 6 ' ^ .
4 See WHITNEY'S n o t e o n AV. v. 24 3 . 9 A c c o r d i n g to B R . a n d GRASSMANN, they
5 Also udgatj-nam ( T S . I I I . 2 . 9 ' ) a n d bhra- a r e f o r m e d f r o m t h e s t e m s bfhad-ri- and
trnam ( T S . II. 6. 6 ' ) . See B E N F E Y , V e d i c a , 1 fdhad-rt-. Cp. I . A N M A N 4 3 1 .
p. 1 — 3 8 ; IS. 13, 1 0 1 ; LANMAN 430.
6
E x c e p t t h e isolated dyavT occurring once
a s V . d u . o f dyccv- 'heaven'.
 V I . DECLENSION. NOUNS. STEMS IN SEMIVOWELS. 247

The i n f l e x i o n of gat/-, w h i c h is a l m o s t c o m p l e t e (the o n l y f o r m s not

r e p r e s e n t e d b e i n g the w e a k c a s e s o f the dual) is as f o l l o w s :
Sing. N. gaus. A. g<im. I. gdvJ. D . gave. A b . gJs. G . gos.
L . gam. — D u . N . A . givi a n d gtivau. — PI. N . gdvas. A . gas. I. gobhis.
D . gSbhyas. G . gdvUm a n d ginam. L . gJsu. V . gavas.
a. Three of these forms, gam, gas, gos must, in the RV., be read as dissyllables
in a few instances, though this is doubtful in the case of gas«.
b. The normal G. pi. gavarn, which is by far the commoner, occurring 55 times in
the RV., is found only 3 times at the end of a Pada (which in two of these instances
ends iambically); the irregular G. ginamoccurring 20 times in the RV., is found at
the end of a Pada only. The use of the latter form thus seems to have arisen from
metrical exigencies.
c. It is to be noted that from the point of view of accentuation the stem is not
treated as a monosyllable, since the Udatta never shifts to the ending in weak cases.
d. There are three compounds formed from this stem: a-gos3 G. sing. m. 'having
no cows'; pfsni-travas4 N. pi. m. 'having dappled cows'; rusad-gavi L. sing. f. 'having
bright cows'.
364. T h e s t r o n g f o r m o f dydv- (in w h i c h the y has often to be
r e a d as i) is dydv-, w h i c h a p p e a r s as dydu- b e f o r e the -s o f the N., a n d
with loss o f the final u, in the A . sing, dyims. T h e n o r m a l stem dydv- a p p e a r s
in w e a k cases only, in the c o n t r a c t e d A b . G . dyJs6 a n d the L . dyavi; it is
o t h e r w i s e entirely d i s p l a c e d b y t h e S a m p r a s a r a i j a form div- ( f r o m w h i c h the
a c c e n t shifts t o the e n d i n g in w e a k c a s e s ) b e f o r e v o w e l s a n d dyi't- b e f o r e
consonants.
T h e w e a k g r a d e s t e m div- h a s n o t only entirely ousted dydv- f r o m
the I. D . sing., a n d l a r g e l y f r o m the A b . G . L . sing., but has e v e n e n c r o a c h e d
o n the strong f o r m s : dtvam o c c u r r i n g ( 2 1 times) b e s i d e dydrn ( 7 9 times),
a n d divas ( o n c e ) b e s i d e dyAvas (22 times) in the N. pi. Similarly dyu-7 h a s
d i s p l a c e d dydv- in the w e a k plural f o r m s : A . dyfin (for *dydvas) a n d I. dyubhis
(for *dyo-bhis).
T h e i n f l e x i o n of dyav- is less c o m p l e t e than that o f gov-, the D . A b .
G . L . pi. b e i n g wanting as w e l l as all the w e a k c a s e s o f the dual. T h e f o r m s
o c c u r r i n g are the f o l l o w i n g :
S i n g . N. dyaus. A . dy&m; divam. L diva. D . dive, A b . dyos\ divas*.
G . dyJs; divas'). L . dyavi-, divi'0. V . dyaus a n d dyaus". — D u . N. A . V .
dyiiva12; dyavi13. — PI. N. V . dydvas; divas1* ( o n c e ) . A . m. dy/in; f. divas15
(twice). I. m . dyubhis16.
a. The A. dyam seems to require dissyllabic pronunciation in a few instances.
The form dyaus occurs once (1. 71 8 ) as an Ab. instead of dyos. The form dfram
doubtless made its way into the A. sing, owing to the influence of the very fre-
quent weak cases divas etc., which taken together occur more than 350 times in
the RV.

• See L A N M A N 431 (bottom). The form 9 In the RV. dyos occurs 4 times as G.,
¡ravas is actually used for the A. in K h .divas 180 times.
11. 6'5. m dyavi occurs 12 times, divi 118 times
1 Formed on the analogy of the vowel in the RV.
declension. 11 dyaus, that is, diaus occurs only once
3 This might be formed from the reduced and is to be read as a dissyllable.
stem a-gtt-. i» In the G. du. of the Dvandva divas-
4 There is also from the reduced stem pfthivySs, the G. sing, takes the place of
-git- the A. sing. m. pfsni-gum, as the N. of the G. du., which would be divos.
a man. i j The neuter form used once for the m.
5 For *dya[u\m like gam for *ga[u]m. '4 Also twice in AV.
6 Like gis for "gavas. 15 Also 3 or 4 times in A V .
7 Based on diu-. 16 dyun and dyubhis occur only in the RV.
8 In the RV. dyos occurs only twice as or in verses borrowed from the RV.
Ab ., divas 50 times.
248 I. ALI.GEMEINES UND SPRACHF.. 4. VEDIC GRAMMAR.

b. Starting from div-as etc. a transition stem din a- according to the a- declension
came into being. From this occur the forms dha-m 'heaven' and divi-dive 'every day',
and in compounds tri-diza-m (AV.) 'third heaven', tri-dhe, su-dha-m (AV.) 'bright day'.
c. It is to be noted that the accentuation of forms from div- follows the rule of
monosyllables, while that of forms from dyav- and dyu-, as may be inferred from dyavi
and dyubhis, does not, being the same as that of goo-.
d. The following case-forms of compounds of dyav- occur: sing. N. pra-dyaus (AV.)
'highest heaven', I. pra-diva, Ab. pra-divas, L. pra-d\vi\ ahar-divi 'day by day'; du. N. A.
prthivi-dyavi 'earth and heaven', dyava-ksama, dyava-pfthivi, dyava bhunii 'heaven and
earth', vrfti-dyavi 'having a raining sky'; pi. N. vrsli-dyavas, sti-divas.
365. T h e r e are two stems in -av, viz. nav- (ndu-) f. 'ship', and gldv- (g/du-)
m. or f. 'lump'. T h e inflexion is very incomplete, as no dual and only two
plural forms are found; but as far as can be judged from the forms occurring
it is quite regular, the accentuation being that of monosyllabic stems. The
forms of nav- are:
S i n g . N. ndus. A . ndvam, sii-tu\vam 'good ship' (VS. x x i . 7). I. nav A1.
G. tiavas. L. navi. — P I . N. uiivas. I. naubhls.
F r o m glav- occur only the two forms N. sing, glaus ( A V . ) and I. pi.
glaubhis (VS. x x v . 8) 2 .

B . V o w e l stems.
366. The vowel declension comprises stems ending in a, i, both long
and short. T h e s e differ considerably in their inflexion according as they are
radical or derivative. T h e radical stems, which virtually all end in the long
vowels a, t, are allied to the consonant declension in taking the normal
endings; but they a d d -s in the N. sing. m. f. T h e derivative stems, which
end in both long and short vowels, modify the normal endings considerably;
though they for the most part add -s in the N. sing. m. f., those in -a and -I
regularly drop it.
1. a. S t e m s in radical -a.
3 6 7 . R a d i c a l <7- stems are frequent in the R V . , but b e c o m e less common
in the later Samhitas where they often shorten the final v o w e l to a and are
then inflected like derivative «-stems. T h e great majority of the forms
occurring are nominatives or accusatives, other cases being rare and some
not occurring at all. In the R V . the N. sing, forms with a occur ten times
oftener than those with the shortened vowel a, and five times oftener than
the forms with a in the A V . On the other hand, the A V . has only slightly
more forms with a than with <i, and no m. forms at all from a- stems in the
oblique cases*. This tendency to give up the ii forms in the later Samhitas
may be illustrated by the fact that the forms of the R V . N . sing, carsani-
pra-s 'blessing men', nama-dha-s 'name-giver', prat/iama-jd-s 'first-born', V . sorna-
pi-s 'soma-drinker', are replaced in the A V . by carsani-pra-s, nima-dhd-s,
prathama-jd-s 5, V . soma-pa respectively.
This declension includes stems formed from about thirty roots. O f these,
four appear as monosyllables in the m.: ja- 'child', irfi- 'protector', da- 'giver',
st/id- 'standing'; and seven in the f.: i.ui-6 'abode', -kha- 'well', gnA-1 'divine

« There is also the transition form accord-
ing to the a- declension L sing, navaya, the
accentuation of which indicates that it
started from nava.
2
The N. pL glavas also occurs in the
AB.
3 These, however, by being shortened
often appear secondarily as a, t, u, when
they are inflected like derivative stems.
Radical I u and r stems have joined the
| consonant declension by almost always
! adding the root determinative -t.
i 4 See LANMAN 435'.
5 The form prathama-ja-s, however, also
occurs in the AV.
6 From ifa- = k;i- 'dwell1, 'rule'.
7 Perhaps formed with suffixal a from a
root *gan- and sometimes to be pronounced
as a dissyllable (gana-), but inflected as if
a radical stem.
 V I . DECLENSION. NOUNS. VOWEL STEMS. 249

woman', jd- 'child', jyd- 'bowstring', md- 'measure', vrd-1 'troop'; the rest appear
only at the end of compounds: -krd-1 'doing', -/¡rd-i 'scattering', -ksd- 'ruling',
•khd- 'digging', -¿/¡yd- 'seeing', -gd- 'going', -gd- 'singing', -jd- 'bora', -jnd- 'knowing',
-jyd- 'power', -ta- 'stretching*, -da- 'giving', -drd- 'sleeping', -dhd- 'putting', -d/id-
'sucking', -pd- 'guarding', -pd- 'drinking', -prd- 'filling'4, -¿/id- 'appearing', -md-
'measuring', -yd- 'going', -vd- 'blowing', -sd- 'winning's, -sthd- 'standing', -snd-
'bathing', -hd- 'starting'.
These stems are inflected in the m. and f. only. There are no distinctively
n. forms6, as the stem shortens the radical vowel to a in that gender and is
consequently inflected according to the derivative a-declension.
a. Three anomalously formed m. derivative stems in -a follow the analogy of the
radical ¿-stems, i. From the adverb ta-tha 'thus' is formed the N. sing, a-tatha-s 'not
saying "yes"'. 2. iisana-, N. of a seer, forms its A. usanam and D. uiatte7; the N. sing,
being irregularly formed without -s, has the appearance of a N. sing. f. from a derivative
¿ s t e m 8 . 3. The strong stem of pathi- 'path' is in the RV. pantha- only: N. sing.
pantha-s (+ AV.), A. pantha-m (+ AV.), N. pi. panthas. The AV. also uses the stem
panthan-, from which it forms N. sing, pantha (once), A. panthanam (once), and N. pi.
panthanas. Though the stem panthan- never occurs in the RV., the evidence of the
Avesta points to its having been in use beside pantha- in the Indo-Iranian period 9. The
A. panthamas a contraction of panthanam, may have been the starting point of the
N. sing, pantha-s.
Inflexion.
368. The forms occurring in the oblique cases are so rare that some
endings, such as those of the L. sing., G. L. du. and G. pi. are not represented
at all. The m. always takes -s in the N. sing., but the f. often drops it, doubt-
less owing to the influence of the f. of derivative ¿/-stems. Excepting the few
forms occurring in the D. and G. sing. M, the N. sing, with -s is the only case
in which the inflexion of the radical stems can be distinguished in the f. 1 2
from that of the derivative 3-stems in form The forms actually occurring
would, if made from jd- 'offspring', be the following:
Sing. N. m. f. jd-s, f. also jd. A. m. f. jd-tn. I. f. j-d. D. m. f. j-e.
G. m. j-as. V. m. jd-s.
Du. N. A. V. m. jd, jdu. I. jd-bhyam '4.
PI. N. m. f. jds. A. f. jds. I. m. f. jd-bhis. D. f. jd-b/iyas. Ab. m.
jd-b/iyas. L. f. jd-su.
The forms actually occurring are the following:
Sing. N. m.jd-s's 'child', dd-s16 'giver', sthd-s 'standing'. — dadhi-krd-s'7,
1
From an extended form of the root vr- ition forms L. sing, apaydyam, N. of a river,
'surround'. and puro-dhayam (AV.).
2
An extension with -ä of k f - 'do'. " The N. sing, with -s is about as common
3 An extension with -5 of k f - 'scatter'. as that without it in the RV., the latter
4 The root mid- 'soften' occurs in the occurring in late hymns; in the AV. the
modified form of -mini- in carma-mna- former are less common.
'tanner'. '2 But on etymological grounds other cases
5 Four of these roots, khä-, gd-, ja-, sd-, may commonly be distinguished as belonging
are collateral forms of others ending in a to either one group or the other; thus
nasal, khan-, gam-, Jan-, sau-; cp. D E L B R Ü C K , A. f. a-gopam 'having no herdsman' must be
Verbum, p. 9 2 f., LANMAN 4 4 2 . regarded as a radical ¿-form, because the
6 Five N. sing. m. forms with -s are found m. is almost without exception go-pä-m, and
in agreement with n. substantives. j not as a derivative f. from go-pa-.
7 There is also a L. sing, usäne, which is ; '4 Contrary to the rule generally applicable
formed as if from an <z-stem. to monosyllable stems, the accent remains
8 The starting-point of this may have ' on the radical syllable throughout.
been uhinäm as a contracted A . for usinasam. ' 5 LANMAN 4 4 3 thinks gas in X . 1 2 7 8 is a
9 See LANMAN 4 4 1 . j N.sing. 'singer* [ga- 'sing'), but it is probably
10
The analogy of pathi- is followed by the A. pi. of ffo- 'cow'.
mathi- 'churning-stick', which once has the Also dhä-s in TS. II. 6. 44.
A. form mänthä-m. I 17 These compounds are arranged accord-
" There are otherwise only the f. trans- \ ing to the alphabetical order of the roots.
250 I . A I J GEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4. V E D I C G R A M M A R .

N. of a divine horse. — fbku-kshs 'lord of the Rbhus'. — bisa-khds 'digging

up lotus fibres'. — agre-gds (VS. XXVII. 3 1 ; Kh. v. 6') 'going before', an-a-gds
'not coming', puro-gds 'leader', samana-gds 'going to the assembly'. — siima-
gii-s 'singing chants'. — adri-jds 'produced from stones', apsu-jds 'born in
the waters', abjds 'born in water', abhra-jds (AV.) 'born from clouds', rta-jds
'truly born', rte-jds 'produced at the rite', go-jd-s 'born from the cow', tapo-jds
(VS. XXXVII. 16) 'born from heat', divi-jds 'born in the sky', deva-jd-s 'god-
born', dvi-jds 'twice-born', naksatra-jds (AV.) 'star-born', nabho-jds 'produced
from vapour', nava-jd-s 'newly born', pura-jds 'primeval', purva-jd-s 'born
before', prathama-jds 'first-bom', bahu-pra-jd-s 'having numerous progeny',
manusya-jds 'bom of men', vane-jd-s 'born in woods', vata-jds (AV.) 'arisen
from wind', sana-jds 'born long ago', saha-jd-s 'bom together', saho-jd-s 'pro-
duced by strength', su-pra-jds 'having good offspring', hiranya-jds (AV.)
'sprung from gold'. — rta-jiids 'knowing the sacred law'. — parama-jyd-s
'holding supreme power'. — apana-dd-s (TS. VS.) 'giving the downward air',
atma-dds 'granting breath', ayur-dd-s (TS. V S ) 'granting long life', astr-dds
(VS.xvm. 56) 'fulfilling a wish', ojo-dd-s 'granting power', go-dd-s 'giving kine',
caksur-dds (TS.iv.6.1 5 ) 'giving sight', dravino-dds 'giving wealth', dhana-dd-s
'giving booty', pratia-dds (VS. TS.) 'life-giving', bala-dd-s 'giving power', bhQri-
dd-s 'giving much', rastra-dd-s (VS.x. 2) 'giving dominion', varivo-dds (VS. TS.)
'giving space', varco-dds (VS. TS.) 'giving vigour', vasu-dds (AV.) 'giving
wealth', vyana-dds (VS. TS.) 'giving breath', sahasra-dd-s 'giving a thousand',
saho-dd-s 'giving strength', svasti-dd-s 'giving happiness', havir-dd-s (AV.)
'giving oblations', hiranya-dd-s 'yielding gold'. — abhi-dhds (VS. XXII. 3)
'surrounding', kiye-dhd-s 'containing much', cano-dhd-s (VS. vm. 7) 'gracious',
dhSma-dhds 'founder of dwellings', dhiyam-dhds 'devout', nama-dhds 'name-
giving', bhaga-dhd-s (TS. rv. 6. 3') 'paying what is due', ratna-dhd-s 'pro-
curing wealth', reto-dhd-s 'impregnating', vayo-dhd-s 'bestowing strength',
varco-dhd-s (AV.) 'granting vigour', visvd-d/ia-s (VS. 1 . 2 ) 'all-preserving', sarva-
dhd-s 'all-refreshing'. — adhi-pd-s 'ruler', apana-pd-s (VS. x x . 34) 'protecting
the downward breath', abhisasti-pd-s 'defending from imprecations', abhisti-
pd-s1 'protecting with assistance', SprTta-pd-s (VS. vm. 57) 'guarding when
gladdened', ayus-pd-s (VS. XXII. 1) 'life-protector', rta-pd-s 'guarding divine
order'; go-pd-s 'herdsman', d-gopa-s 'lacking a cowherd', deva-gopa-s 'having
the gods for guardians', su-gopd-s 'good protector', sima-gopa-s 'keeper of
Soma'; caksus-pd-s2 (VS. 11. 6) 'protecting the eyesight', tauU-pd-s 'protecting
the person', nidhi-pa-s (AV. VS.) 'guardian of treasure', paras-pd-s2 'protecting
afar', pasu-pd-s 'keeper of herds', prana-pd-s (VS. xx. 34) 'guardian of breath',
vrata-pd-s 'observing ordinances', sevadhi-pd-s 'guarding treasure', sti-pd-s
'protecting dependents', ma-pas* (AV.) 'protector of his own'. — an-j-tu-
pa-s 'not drinking in time', j-tu-pds 'drinking at the right season', pUrva-pds
'drinking first', suta-pds 'drinking the Soma-juice', soma-pds 'drinking Soma',
hari-pds 'drinking the yellow (Soma)'. — antariksa-prds 'traversing the air',
kratu-prds 'granting power', carsani-prds 'satisfying men', rodasi-prds•
'filling heaven and earth'. — rna-yds 'exacting obligations', eva-yds
'going quickly', tura-yds 'going swiftly', deva-yds 'going to the gods'. —
apsds 'giving water', asvasds 'giving horses', dhanasds "winning wealth',
vajas&s 'winning booty', satasds 'gaining a hundred', sahasrasds 'gaining
a thousand'; gosds 'acquiring cattle', nr-sds 'procuring men', su-sds 'gaining

' In abhiftipasi (11. 202), where the Pada 3 The Pada text of A V . ill. 3 1 divides
text reads abhif/i-pd aii. See I.ANMAN 443 \ sva-pah; but the correct division may be
(bottom). sit apah-, see WHITNEY'S note.
^ On the Sandhi in this compound cp. 78 c. 4~For rodasX-pra-s.
 VI. DECLENSION. NOUNS. VOWEL STEMS. 251

easily', svar-sA-s 'winning light'. — ddhara-stha-s1 (Kh. ir. 8 2 ) 'subordinate',

rta-sthA-s (AV.) 'standing right', rocana-sthA-s 'abiding in light', sapa-sthA-s1
(VS. xxi. 60; TS. 1. 2. 2') 'forming a good lap'; aiige-sthii-s (AV.) 'situated in
a member of the body', adhvare-sthA-s 'standing at the sacrifice', giri-sthA-s
'mountain-dwelling', ni-sthA-s 'excelling', puru-ni-sthA-s 'excelling among many',
bhuvane-sthA-s3 (AV.) 'being in the world', mamhane-sthA-s 'liberal', madhyatne-
st/iA-s (AV. VS. TS.) 'standing in the middle', rathe-sthA-s 'standing on a car',
vandane-sthA-s 'mindful of praises', vandhure-sthA-s 'standing on the car-seat',
savya-sthA-s« (AV.), hari-sthA-s 'borne by bay horses'. — gkrta-snA-s 'sprinkling
ghee'. — Also the abnormal forms a-tatha-s 'not saying "yes"', pantha-s 'path'.
f. ksA-s 'abode', gnA-s 'divine woman', vrA-s5 (1. 124 8 ) 'troop'. — rta-pA-s,
rte-jA-s, kula-ps-s (AV.) 'chief of a family', go-dhA-sb 'sinew', go-pA-s (AV.)
'female guardian', go-sA-s, divi-ja-s, divo-jA-s 'born from heaven', vane-jA-s,
vayo-dhA-s (AV.), vasu-dA-s (AV.), sata-sA-s, samana-gA-s, sahasra-sA-s —
Without -s in the Pada but with hiatus in the Samhita 8 : jyA 'bowstring';
tii-drA 'sleep', pra-pA 'place for watering', srad-dhA 'faith', sva-dhA9 'self-
power'; un-mA (TS.) 'measure of height', prati-mA (TS.) 'counter-measure',
pra-mA (TS.) 'fore-measure', vi-mA (TS.) 'through-measure'10. — Without -s
as in the derivative a- declension: j'A (AV.), mA (TS. iv. 3. 7 1 ) 'measure'. —
dpa-ga11 (AV.) 'going away', abhi-bhA 'apparition', d-samjna (AV.) 'discord',
upa-jA (AV.) 'distant posterity', go-dhAdur-gA (AV.) 'hard to go upon', devd-
gopa, dyu-ksA 'heavenly', pra-jA 'offspring', prati-mA 'image', pra-pA (AV.111.306),
pra-mA 'measure', madhu-dhA 'dispensing sweetness', srad-dhA (AV.), sana-jA,
sva-gopa 'guarding oneself', sva-dhA.
n. W i t h -S and agreeing with n. substantives: sthA-s 'stationary'; indra-
j'A-s (AV.) 'descended from Indra', sata-sA-s, su-pra-yA-s 'pleasant to tread on',
soma-jA-sM (AV.) 'Soma-born'.
A . m.jAm, trAm 'protector', sthAm. — dadhi-krAm, rudhi-krAm N. of a demon.
— tamo-gAm 'roaming in the darkness', tava-gAm 'moving mightily', svasti-gAm
'leading to prosperity'. — sSma-gAm. — agra-jAm 'first-born', ab-jAm, nabho-
jAm, purH-jAm, prathama-jAm, bharesu-jAm 'existing in battles'. — dn-asi>a-dam
'not giving horses', dn-asTr-dam 'not giving a blessing', a-bhiksa-dAm'S 'giving
without being asked', upa-dAm (VS. x x x . 9) 'giving a present', jatii-dAm 'giving
a wife', dravino-dAm, dhana-dAm, rabho-dAm 'bestowing strength1, vasu-dAm,
saho-dAm, havir-dAm (AV.). — ratna-dhAm (AV., VS. rv. 25), reto-dhAm (VS.
viii. 10), vayo-dhAm, varivo-dhAm 'granting space', varco-dhdm (VS.iv. 1 1 ) , vipo-
dhAm 'inspiring'. — abhisasti-pAm, go-pAm, tanii-pAm, ni-sikta-pAm 'protecting the
infused (semen)', vrata-pAm. — anjas-pAm 'drinking instantly', sfta-pAm 'drinking
boiled milk', soma-pAm. — antariksa-prAm, kaksya-prAm 'filling out the girth',

T h e Ms. reads adhira-stha nmasat.
2
That is, sH-upa-sthd-s.
3 While K h . ill. 2 2 ' has in the same verse
bhumane-fthah (sic).
4 The Pada reads savya-sthah\ see APr. II.
95, and cp. WHITNEY'S note on A V . VIII. 8 J J .
5 N. sing. GRASSMANN and LANMAN, N . pi.
ROTH and SAY ANA.
6
T h e derivation is uncertain.
7 T h e a b o v e are the only N. sing. f.
forms written with -s in the Pada text.
8
It may therefore b e assumed that the
N. was f o r m e d with -s.
9 Cp. R P r . u . 29. With regard to sva-dha,
the Samhita text is inconsistent, writing i t ;
contracted with a following vowel in svadhasil,
I ( 1 . 165®) and svadhamiia (v. 34'), where it must
be pronounced with hiatus.
10
A l l these four compounds of ma- 'measure'
occur in T S . I V . 4 . 1 1 3 ; see T P r . x . 1 3 , IS. 1 3 ,
1 0 4 , note ' .
' B R . would accentuate apa-ga\ cp. WHIT-
NF.Y'S note on A V . 1 . 3 4 s .
12
Probably go-dhas in x . 2 8 " ' ; cp. I.ANMAN
445.
'3 Also maryadi 'limit' if marya-da, but
the derivation is doubtful.
H T h e s e f o r m s must be regarded as m.
used as n. Cp. the -as forms of -as stems used
\ as n. (344).
' 5 A c c o r d i n g to the P a d a text abhi-tsa-dam
('destroying').
252 I. A L L G E M E I N E S UND SPRACHE. 4. Y E D I C GRAMMAR.

carsani-prAm, ratha-prAm 'filling a car', rodasi-prAm — ap-sAm, urrara-sAm

'granting fertile land', ksctra-sAm 'procuring land", dhana-sAm, sada-sAm 'always
gaining', sahasra-sAm\ go-s&m, svar-sAm. — rocana-sthAm, sv-asa-sthAm (VS. 11.2)
'offering a good seat'; giri-sthAm, narc-sthAm 'serving for a man 2 to stand
on', ni-stham, karma-nisthAm 'diligent in religious acts', pathi-sjhAm (AV.) 'being
on the way', pathc-.ythAm3 'standing in the way', pari-sthAm 'surrounding',
parvatc-sthAm 'dwelling on the heights', barhi-sthAm 4 'standing on the sacrificial
grass', rathe sthAm, rayi-sthAm (AV.) 'possessed of wealth', hari-sthAm. — Also
the abnormal derivative forms pdntkim, mdntham 'churning-stick'.
f. ksA/n, k/iAm 'well', gnAm, jAm, jyAm, vrAm. — d-gopam, antariksa-
prAm, ava-sAm 'liberation', dha-sAm, upa-vAm (AV.) 'act of blowing upon',
uru-sAm 'granting much', rta-jhAm, tiro-dhAm (AV.) 'concealment', dur-dhAm
'disarrangement', dhana-sAm, pra-jAm, prati-dhAm (AV.) 'draught', prati-
sthAm 'standpoint', pra-vAm (AV.) 'blowing forth', pra-hAm 'advantage', yaksmo-
dhAtn 5 (AV.) 'maker of disease', vaja-sAm, srad-d/iAm, sabfiAm6 'assembly',
su-prajAm, sva-jAm 'self-born', sva-dhAm, svar-sAm.
I. f. apa-dhA 'concealment', abhi-khyA 'splendour', a-sthA 'without standing' 1 ,
as'ir-dA (VS.) 'fulfilment of a wish', prali-d/iA, prati-cthA8, sva-dhA.
D . m . d,:\ kllala-pe 'drinking (the beverage called) kilala\ dhiyam-dh,'
'devout', pas'u-st! 'bestowing cattle', ruyas-posa-dc (VS. v. 1) 'granting increase
of wealth', suci-pc 'drinking the clear (Soma)', sub/iam-yj 'flying swiftly along',
havir-dc.
f. ks/; srad-dkt19. — Also the infinitives pra-khyai 'to see', vi-khydi 'to
look about'; para-ddi 'to give up'; rayo-dhdi 'to strengthen'; prati-mdi10 'to
imitate'; ava-yai 'to go away', a-ydi 'to approach', upa-ydi 'to come near',
pra-ydi 'to go forward; aya-sat" 'to rest' 12 .
G. m . krsti-pras 'pervading the human race', pasu-sds'•J.
V . m . fta-pa-s (TS.ill.2.8*), rtu-pa-s, puroga-s (TS.v. 1.11<), bhftri-da-s,
s'ukra-puta-pS-s 'drinking bright and purified (Soma)', s'ua-pii-s, srotra-pa-s (VS.
xx. 34) 'protecting the ear', suta-pa-s, soma-pa-s'4.
Du. N. A. V . m. kaksya-prA, go-pA, gharmye-sthA 'being in a house',
chardis-pA 'protecting a house', jagat-pA 'protecting the living', tanU-pA, tapus-pA
'drinking warm beverage', dravino-dAparas pA, pura-jA, puru-tra 'protecting
much', vSja-da 'bestowing vigour', s'uci-pa, su-gopA, soma-pA, sti-pA. — W i t h
-au-. d-krau16 'inactive', a-doma-dhau (AV.) 'not causing inconvenience', adhva-
gdu 'travelling', go-pau, go-pau, madhu-pau 'drinking Soma', rayi-ddu 'bestowing
wealth', suta-pau17.
1
F o r rodasT-pram. " S e e b e l o w , t h e D a t i v e Infinitive, 584.
2
T h e D . c a s e - f o r m of n f - ' m a n ' b e i n g ' «3 T h e f o r m jtis- i n jas-fati-(l. 1858)'lord
r e t a i n e d in t h e c o m p o u n d . i o f t h e f a m i l y * is p r o b a b l y a f. G . of ja-;
3 T h e 1« o f t h e s t e m patha- = path't- b e i n g a n d gnas p r o b a b l y G . of ¿'"a- i n g»as-pati-
retained in t h e c o m p o u n d . ' h u s b a n d of a d i v i n e w o m a n ' . T h e r e are
4 barhi- f o r barhi}-\ s e e 62. a l s o t h e t r a n s i t i o n f o r m s jydyas a n d pra-
5 W i t h t h e N . c a s e - f o r m r e t a i n e d i n t h e jay as.
g
c o m p o u n d ; s e e WHITNEY'S n o t e o n A V . i x . 8 . >4 T h e r e a r e a l s o i n t h e f. t h e t r a n s i t i o n
6
T h e d e r i v a t i o n o f t h i s w o r d i s u n c e r t a i n . f o r m s gangt, srad-dhe, t'uo-dhc ( A V . ) ' c o n c e a l -
7 U s e d adverbially = 'at once'. ment*.
8 C p . LANMAN 4 4 7 « . T h e r e are also the •5 T h e P a d a t e x t r e a d s dravino-dau.
t r a n s i t i o n f o r m s jyaya, prajaya. ' 6 S o m e o f t h e s e d u a l s i n -au m a y b e
9 Also the transition form prajayai. formed from radical stems with shortened
><> T h e i n f i n i t i v e prali-me i s p r o b a b l y a -a; c p . L A N M A N 4 5 0 1 .
locative. *7 T h e r e a r e a l s o t h e f. t r a n s i t i o n f o r m s
T h e s e d a t i v e i n f i n i t i v e s a r e f o r m e d b y fdit-pr ' d r i n k i n g w h a t is s w e e t ' , pfma-jc
combining the full root with t h e e n d i n g b o r n b e f o r e ' , sv-asa-stht 'sitting on a g o o d
while in t h e o r d i n a r y d a t i v e s t h e r a d i c a l a seat'.
is d r o p p e d b e f o r e t h e e n d i n g .
 VI. DECLENSION. NOUNS. VOWEL STEMS. 253

I. Only four compounds of -pit in TS. lit. 2. 1 0 ' : kratu-pdbhyim 'watching

one's intentions', caksus-pdb/iyam, vak-pAb/iyam 'protecting speech', srotra-
pAbhyam
PI. N. V . m. rbhu-ksas. — agni-jds (AV.) 'fire-born1, a-pra-jas 'childless',
apsu-jAs (AV.), osadhi-jAs (AV.) 'bom among herbs', khala-jds (AV.) 'produced
on a threshing-floor', deva-jAs, pura-jAs, prathama-jAs, pravate-jAs 'grown in an
airy place', raghu-jAs 'produced from a racer', saka-dhUma-jAs (AV.) 'produced
from cow-dung', su-pra-jAs, sva-jAs. — rta-jnAs, rta-jiias, pada-jhAs 'knowing
the track'. — asva-dAs 'giving horses', iislr-dAs (VS. vm. 5), go-dAs, dravino-dAs,
dhana-dAs, vara-dAs (AV.) 'granting boons', vastra-dAs and vaso-dAs 'giving
garments', hiranya-das. —jani-dhAs2 (x. 29 s ), dhiyam-dhAs, ratna-dhAs, reto-
d/iAs, vayo-dhAs. — payo-d/iAs 'sucking milk'. — kula-pAs 'heads of the fa-
mily'; go-pAs, indra-gopas 'protected by Indra', devd-gopas, vSyu-gopas 'pro-
tected by Wind', su-gopAs; tanU-pAs, pasu-pAs, vrata-fAs. — agre-pds 'drinking
first', ahjas-pas, payas-pas 'drinking milk', manthi-pas3 (VS. VII. 1 7 ) 'drinking
the stirred Soma', soma-pas, sJma-pas (AV.), havis-pds 'drinking offerings'. —
carma-mnds* 'tanners'. — jma-yds 'going on the earth'. — dhana-sas, sada-sds,
sahasra-sas. — prthivi-sthas5 'standing on the earth', rathe-sthds6, harmye-
st/ias6 'dwelling in the house'. — ghfta-snds 'sprinkling ghee*. — Also the
abnormal derivative panthas1.
f. gnas, vras. — a-gopas, ava-sthAs 'female organs', dhi-gopas 'guarded by
the dragon', a-tas 'frames', fta-jnAs (AV.), giri-jds 'mountain-born', jarani-prasJ,
devd-gopas, deva-yas, pada-jitas (AV.), pra-jas, prathama-jas, pra-yas 'advance',
manusya-jas (AV.), vaksane-sthds 'being in Agni'(?), vaja-das, susma-dds
'bestowing strength', su-gopds, soma-pas, svayam-jds8 'self-born'.
A . m . There is no certain example: vane-jas (x. 79') is possibly one 9 ,
f. ksds, gnds, jds. — dn-agni-tras 'not maintaining the sacred fire', anu-
sthas 'following in succession', asva-das, deva-yas, pari-jas (AV.) 'places of
origin', pari-sthas 'impediments', pra-jas, manusya-jds, vi-sthas 'positions', sahd-
gop.is 'accompanied by herdsmen', su-gas 'easy to traverse', sva-dhds.
I. m. agre-pabhis. — f. gnab/iis; ftu-pabhis, ratna-dhdbhis, prajabhis,
srad-dhabhis, sva-d/tabhis.
D. f. pra-jdbhyas. — A b . m. bhfiri-ddbhyas
L . f. ksdsu, gndsu, jasu; d-tclsu1pra-jdsu, sabhdsu.

i b . Stems in Radical -a.

369. These consist almost entirely of stems in radical a which has been
shortened to ¿t. With the exception of kka- xl 'aperture' they occur at the end of
compounds only. They are: -ksa- 'dwelling', kha-, -ga- 'going', -gd- 'singing',
-ja- 'born', -jya- 'bowstring', -ta- 'stretching', -tra-IJ 'protecting', -da- 'giving'
-da- 'binding', -dhd- 'putting', -pa- 'guarding', -pa- 'drinking', -pra- 'filling', -mnd-
1
In the L. du. there also occur the f. I 8 There is also the f. transition form
transition forms jaitghayos (AV.) and sva- \ nava-gvas.
dhayos. 9 Cp. LANMAN 45
2 10
Of doubtful meaning. In the G. occur the f. transition forms
3 The stem is manthi-pa• acccrding to BR.pra-jiianam (AV.) 'fore-knowing', vi-bkanam
4 From \mla-: 'softening hides'. 'radiant'.
11
5 Pflhivi- = pfthivi-. 12
Probably from ta- = tan• 'stretch'.
6
With the L. ending retained in the first The nominatives dra-s and vras in AV.
m%mber of lhe compound. XI. 73 (also nyd-s, 74) a r e of unknown m e a n i n g
7 The form panthasas also occurs once. (see WHITNEY'S note).
It is doubtful whether the plurals dyu-kfasas ' J C p . GARBE in K Z . 2 3 , 4 7 6 , 480.
and priya-sasas are to be regarded as formed •4 Perhaps also •d/a• 'running' in tff'. , a '
from a- stems. Such plurals are probably j dra-m (AV.).
made from a- stems. 1
254 I . ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4. V E D I C GRAMMAR.

'thinking', - m l a ' s o f t e n i n g ' , -sd- 'winning', • sthd- 'standing'; also -grd-2 'swallow-
ing', -gva-3 'going', -/id-* 'slaying'.
These stems are inflected in the m. and n. only. This is the form
assumed in the n. by all radical «-stems (367).

Inflexion.
370. The inflexion of the radical «-stems is identical with that of the
derivative a-stems (371). The forms which occur are the following:
Sing. N. m. dyu-ksd-s 'dwelling in heaven'. — su-khd-s 'having a good
(axle) hole'. — agre-gd-s 'going in front', asum-gd-s (AV.) 'swift-going', rju-gd-s
(AV.) 'going straight on', patam-gd-s* 'going by flight', vala-gd-s (AV.) 'hidden
in a cave' 6 , sitim-ga-s ( A V . x i . 5 " ) 'white-goer', su-ga-s 'easy to traverse'. — dds'a-
gva-s ^ 'going in tens', nava-gva-s1 'going in nines' 8 . — a-jd-s 'unborn', adhri-ja-s
'irresistible', eka-jd-s (AV.) 'produced alone', jarayu-jd-s (AV.) 'viviparous',
ni-ja-s (AV.) 'familiar'9, prathama-ja-s (AV.) 'first-born', samudra-ja-s (AV.)
'sea-born', stamba-jd-s (AV.) 'shaggy' (?). — an-anu-da-s 'not giving way', danu-
dd-s 'dripping', daya-dd-s (AV.) 'receiving (a-da-) inheritance (daya-)', prana-dd-s
'life-giving'. — nama-dhd-s (AV.) 'name-giver'. — akuti-pra-s (AV.) 'fulfilling
wishes', kama-prd-s (AV.) 'fulfilling desire', carsani-prd-s (AV.) 'satisfying men',
prthivi-prd-s (AV.) 'earth-filling',n. — apnah-sthd-s 'possessor', go-sthd-s (AV.)
'cow-pen', puru-nisthd-s 'excelling among many'. — satru-hd-s (AV.) 'slaying
enemies', sahasra-hd-s (AV.) 'slaying a thousand'.
N . A . n. khdm 'aperture'. — a-doma-dam (AV.) 'not causing inconvenience',
antari-ksam 'air', krsna-dram (AV.) 'black runner'(P) 11 , tuvi-ksdm 'destroying
many', dur-gdm 'impassable', dyu-ksdm, prathama-jdm (AV. VS.), vsta-gopam
(AV.) 'guarded by the wind', vrtrahdm 'slaying foes', satra-ham 'always
destroying', sadha-stham 'abode', su-gdm , su-mndm 'benevolent'.
A . m . atithi-gvam ('to whom guests go') N. of a man, an-anu-dam,
arati-hdm (AV.) 'destroying adversity', asva-pam (VS. xxx. 1 1 ) 'groom', d-sva-
gam (AV.) 'homeless', eka-jam, garbha-dham (VS. TS.) 'impregnator', grha-
pam (VS. x x x . 1 1 ) 'guardian of a house', go-parn 'herdsman', carma-mnam (VS.)
'tanner', tri-stham 'having three seats', ddia-gvam, dsva-pam (VS. x x x . 19)
'forest-fire guard', dyu-ksdm, patam-gdm, prathama-jdm (VS. xxxiv. 51), madhu-
pdm 'honey-drinker', vana-pam (VS. x x x . 19) 'wood-ranger', vala-gdm (AV.),
vitta-dhdm (VS. x x x . 1 1 ) 'possessing wealth', su-ttham, su-gdm (AN.), hasti-pdm
(VS. x x x . 1 1 ) 'elephant-keeper'.
I. m. rathe-sthSna 'standing on a car'. — n. antdri-ksena, rta-jyena
'whose bowstring is truth', kama-prena, su-gaia (AV.), su-mnena.
D. m. atithi-gvfiya, dyu-ksAya, patam-gdya, rathe-sthitya". — n. paras-
paya (VS.) 'protecting from afar', su-mtidya. — A b . m . rsya-ddt (x. 39 S ) 'pit
for antelopes'. — n. antdri-ksat'•>, dur-g(it, sadha-sthst.
1
In the form o{-mna-vacarma-mnd-'tznntr\ BLOOMFIELD, A J P h . 1 7 , 4 2 2 — 2 7 ; cp. above
» A n extension of gr~ 'swallow'; cp. -kri- p. 1 5 3 Imid.).
and vra- among the radical a• stems. 8
T h e compound puro-gavd-s 'leader' pos-
3 In its original form perhaps -¿va-; a sibly = *puro-£Va-s\ but it is probably a
reduced form -¡>u- appears in vanar-gii- 'forest- governing c o m p o u n d ; cp. above, p. 1 7 6 ' .
roaming'. 9 See WHITNEY'S note on A V . 111. J*.
4 A reduced form of han- 'slay'. 10
Also fain-fas (v. 4 1 >) if it is N. sing.
5 See BARTHOLOMAE, B B . 1 5 , 34 and cp. and not a G . of pasu-fa-.
11
B B . 18, 1 2 . Cp. WHITNEY'S note on A V . ix. 7 4 .
6 T h e etymology and meaning are some- 12
svajaya (AV.) is analyzed by the Com-
what d o u b t f u l ; cp. IS. 4, 304. mentator as iva-jaya 'self-bom', but is ex-
7 T h e s e two compounds as well as atiihi- plained by WHITNEY (AV. v i . 56?) as 'con-
gva- and ita-gr a-, are with more probability s t r i d o r ' (from svaj- 'embrace').
d e r i v e d from a reduced form of go- ' c o w ' by 1 '3 See LANMAN 337.
 V I . DECLENSION. NOUNS. VOWEL STEMS. 2
55

G. m. a-jdsya, atithi-gvdsya— n. aniari-ksasya, asthi-jdsya (AV.) 'pro-

duced in the bones', tanü-jdsya (AV.) 'produced from the body', su-mndsya.
L . m . dds'a-gve, ndva-gve, ratha-samgi 'encounter of war-cars', sam-sthi
'presence', sam-ge 'conflict', su-khe, svar-ge 'going to heaven'. — n. antdri-kse,
khe. — karanja-/u! 'pernicious to the Karanja tree', dur-ge, bhayd-sthe 'perilous
situation', sadhd-sthe, su-mne. — V . m . eka-ja, dyu-ksa, patam-ga (AV.), soma-pa
(AV.) 'drinking Soma'.
D u . N . A. m . 2 tia-gvä 'going swiftly'. — A . n . sadhd-sthe.
PI. N . V . m . äjya-päs (VS. xxi. 4 0 ) 'drinking clarified butter', i,ta-gväs,
tanü-jds (AV.), tapo-jas (AV.) 'produced by austerity', ddsa-gväs, ndva-gväs,
patam-gds, vala-gäs (AV.), su-gds. — Also four forms with äsas: dds'a-gväsas,
dyu-ksäsas, ndva-gväsas, priya-sdsas'granting desired objects'.
N. A . n . 1. dmsa-trä 'armour protecting the shoulder', antdriksä, dur-gd,
prathama-ji4 (AV.), sadhd-sthä, su-gd, su-mnd. — 2 . khdni. — antäri-ksäni,
ararin-dänis, dur-gäni, sadhd-sthäni, su-gdni, su-mnAni.
A. m . go-pdn, tapo-j&n, dur-gän (AV.), patatii-gärt, pürva-jän (TS.) 'born
before', s'rta-pän 'drinking boiled milk', saha-jin (TS.) 'born at the same
time', su-gän, soma-pin (AV.).
I. m . 1. tuvi-grebhis 'swallowing much', mitho-avadya-pebhis 'mutually
averting calamities', ratna-dhibhis 'preserving wealth', säma-gibhis (AV.) 'reciting
chants', su-gebhis. — 2. d-tais6 'frames', ddsa-gvais, nava-gvais, dhana-sdis
'winning wealth', nava-gvais, patam-gdis, su-khdis. — n . 1. madhu-pibhis,
su-g/bhis, su-tnrUbhis. — 2. su-mndis.
D . m . parva-jebhyas. — G . m . dvi-jätiäm (AV.) 'twice-born', säkam-
j'änäm 'being born together'. — L . m . dravino-disu 'giving wealth', su-khtsu. —
n. dur-ghu, sadhd-sthesu, su-gcsu, su-mn/su.

2 a. Derivative stems in -a.

BENFEY, V o l l s t ä n d i g e G r a m m a t i k p. 2 9 3 — 3 1 7 . — WHITNEY, Grammar 326—334
,p. 1 1 2 — 1 1 6 ) . — LANMAN, N o u n - I n f l e c t i o n 3 2 9 — 3 5 4 .
371. This is the most important of the declensions as it embraces more
than one-half of all nominal stems. It is also the most irregular inasmuch
as its ending diverge from the normal ones more than is elsewhere the case.
This is the only declension in which the N. A. n. has an ending in the singular.
Here the I. D. Ab. G. sing, are peculiar; and in the plural, the A., the G.,
one of the forms of the I. and of the N. A. n. do not take the normal
endings. The final vowel of the stem is also modified before the endings
with initial consonant in the du. and pi. Three of the peculiar case-endings
of the sing. (I. Ab. G.) are borrowed from the pronominal declension, while
in the pi. two of the case-endings (G. and N. A. n.) are due to the influence
of the stems in -«. This is the only declension in which the Ab. sing., as a
result of taking the pronominal ending, is distinguished from the G. As else-
where in the vowel declension, the N. sing. ni. here adds the ending -s throughout;
but the V. sing, shows the bare stem unmodified. This declension includes

' svajasya in A V . x. 4'°- ' 5 is a c c o r d i n g to panthasas, o c c u r r i n g o n c e b e s i d e t h e o r d i n a r y

WHITNEY ' c o n s t r i c t o r ' , n o t sra-Jaya 'self- panthas f o r m e d f r o m t h e a n o m a l o u s deri-
b o r n ' ; cp. p. 2 5 4 , n o t e v a t i v e a - s t e m pantha-, p r o v e s n o t h i n g r e g a r d -
' S o m e of t h e m . d u a l s g i v e n u n d e r t h e i n g r a d i c a l a• s t e m s ,
r a d i c a l ¿ - d e c l e n s i o n o u g h t p o s s i b l y to b e 4 T h i s is t h e r e a d i n g of t h e P a d a t e x t ,
placed here. t h e S a m h i t a h a v i n g -ji f- ( 7 0 a).
3 T h e r e is n o r e a s o n to s u p p o s e t h a t a n y 5 A w o r d of u n c e r t a i n m e a n i n g ,
6
of t h e s e a r e p l u r a l s of a- s t e m s , s i n c e t h e T w o o t h e r f o r m s , a/as a n d atasu a r e
first t h r e e a p p e a r as a- s t e m s o n l y a n d f o r m e d f r o m t h e f. s t e m of t h i s w o r d , a-ta-,
priya-sa- d o c s n o t o t h e r w i s e o c c u r . T h e pi. w h i c h is p r o b a b l y a r a d i c a l a- s t e m .
256 I. ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4. VKDIC GRAMMAR.

m. and n. stems only, as the corresponding f. follows the derivative «-declension.

There is here no irregularity in the accent, which remains on the same
syllable in every case except the V., where it of course shifts to the first.

Inflexion.
372. The inflexion of the n. differs from that of the m. in the N. sing,
and the N. A. du. and pi. only. In the G. L. du. y is inserted between the
final -a of the stem and the ending -os. The forms actually occurring, if
made from priyd- 'dear', would be the following:
S i n g . N. m. priyd-s, n. priyd-m. A. priyd-m. I. priyJna and priyd.
D. priydya. Ab. priydt. G. priydsya. L. priyL V. priya.
Du. N. A. m. priyd and priydu, n. priye. V. m. priya and priyau.
I. D. Ab. priydbhyatn. G. L. priydyos.
PI. N. m. priyds and priydsas, n. priyd and priyani. A. m. priydn,
n. priyd and priydni. I. priydis and priy3his. D. Ab. priyJbhyas. G. pri-
ydnatn, L. priyesu. V. priyas and prlyasas.
Owing to the enormous number of words belonging to this declension,
only forms of commonest occurrence will be given below as examples under
each case.
S i n g . N. m . This case is formed in the RV. by 1845 a-stems and
occurs more than 10000 times. The most frequent substantive is Indras N.
of a god, found more than 500 times; next in order come somas (220) N. of
a plant, devds (203) 'god', mitrds (132) N. of a god, vdrunas (94) N. of a god.
A. m. After the N. sing, m., the A. sing. m. is the commonest declensional
form in the RV., being made from 1357 stems 1 and occurring nearly 7000
times. The nouns most frequently found in this case are indram (335), somam,
(212), yajiidm (183) 'sacrifice', vajam (123) 'vigour', sttryam (90) 'sun',
hdvam (88) 'invocation', vrtrdm (82) N. of a demon, stomarn (77) 'praise''.
N. A. n. This is the only declension in which these cases take an
ending. They here add -m, being thus identical in form with the A. sing. m A
They are very frequently used, being formed from about 950 stems and
occurring, taken together, more than 4000 times. Examples are: rtdm (70)
'sacred order', ghrtdm (47) 'clarified butter', paddm (46) 'step', rdtnam (44)
'wealth', sakhydm (43) 'friendship', drdvinam (41) 'wealth', satydm (40) 'truth'«.
I. m. n. 1. The usual form of this case ending in -ena is very frequent,
being formed from more than 300 stems nearly equally divided between m.
and n. The commonest forms are: m. siryena (37), indrena (34), vdjrena
(33) 'thunderbolt', yajiiena (13). — n. ghrtena (31)5.
a. The filial vowel appears lengthened in about twenty-five forms:
amj-teni (AV.) 'ambrosia', d-sivettil 'malevolent', djyena 'melted butter', rtbia.,
kdvyenl 'wisdom', kiilisena 'axe', pitvena 'ram', tavis/nS 'strong', daksinena
'right', daivyenS 'divine', bakurena 'bagpipe', bhadrinn (AV.) 'excellent', martyena
'mortal', mdrutena 'consisting of storm-gods', ravdthena 'roar', varuuena,
vithurenii 'staggering', vi-ravdna 'roar', vTrycna 'heroic power', vrjanena 'might',
vrsabhinU 'bull', sa/iasyltta 'mighty', sdyakeml 'missile', siiryenH, skambhanenil

1 The pronominal forms tam and yam mining whether a word is m- or n.; cp.
occur 509 and 259 times respectively in L A N M A N 331 (middle).
the R V . * On occasional elision of the final -m
3 On the occasional elision of the -m be- and subsequent contraction, see L A N M A N 331.
fore iva and subsequent contraction, see 5 T h e final vowel is twice nasalized:
LANMAN 331. ghaninam Has (l. 334) and 1Ijanenam itam
3 For this reason there is in some in- (1. n o 5 ) ,
stances not sufficient evidence for deter-
 VI. DECLENSION. NOUNS. VOWEL STEMS. »57

' s u p p o r t ' T h e s e forms regularly occur where the metre at the end of a Pada
favours a long vowel; e . g . skdmbhanenH janitrl (HI. 3 1 b u t kdmbhanena
skibhlyan (x. 1 1 1 5 ) ; on the other hand, the long vowel appears to be used
arbitrarily at the beginning of a Pada, though the short vowel here is much
more frequent. Hence the a seems to be a survival and not to be due to
metrical exigencies.
2. There are also more than a dozen forms made with the nominal
e n d i n g -a. In the 111. there are no quite certain examples beyond yajnd;
possibly also krand 'acting', ghana 'club', dind 'gift' 2 , camasd3 'cup'. The
n. forms are kavitvd and kavitvand 'by wisdom', taranitva 'by energy',
mahitvd and mahitvami 'by greatness', ratna-dheyi 'by distribution of wealth',
rdthyH 'belonging to a car', vlryh 'with heroism', sak/iyd 'with friendship',
sarva-rathd 'with the whole line of chariots', su-havi 'with good invoca-
tion'«. — This ending is also preserved in a few instrumental a d v e r b s :
and 'hereby', uccd 'above', pakd 'behind', satta 'from of old' 5 .
D . m. n. This case, which has the abnormal ending -Sya, is of very
frequent occurrence, being formed in the R V . from over 300 stems in the
m. and from nearly 1 5 0 in the n. The commonest forms are: m. tndrilya
(188), mddlya (76) 'exhilaration', deviya (26), martyHya (25), mttrAya (23),
luirutiiya (23), ydjam&naya 'sacrificing', snryliya ( 1 1 ) ; n. suvitAya (34) 'wel-
fare', sakhydya (29), tokdya ( 2 1 ) 'offspring', tatiayaya ( 1 8 ) 'line of de-
scendants' 6 .
a. T h e normal form would have been for example *yajuai — yajiia-e^. This would
in Sandhi have become *yajnay, which was ultimately extended with -a, owing to the
frequent combination with a following a in Sandhi (e. g. yajtiay-a pi for yajiiay aptJ, or
with the shortened form of the preposition a 8 .
A b . m . n. These are the only nominal stems in which the Ab. is
formally distinguished from the G. Instead of the normal ending -as, they
take the -d which appears in the pronominal declension (e. g. md-d 'from
me'), lengthening the -a of the stem before it 9 . This Ab. in -ad is formed in
the RV. from over 200 stems, nearly equally divided between m. and n.
Some of the n. forms are used as adverbs. Forms of common occurrence
are: m . samudrat ( 1 5 ) 'sea', updsthat (9) 'lap', indrat (8); n. antdri-ksaO0
( 1 5 ) 'air'; dorat ( 1 9 ) 'from a distance', pas cat (26).
G . m . n . These are the only nominal stems in which the G. sing, does
not end in -s'1. Instead of the normal ending -as, they add -sya 1 2 which is

' In all these forms the Pada text has the I fore v o w e l s : /ad-vaiayam ffd (tL 142) and
short final vowel « ; see KPr. v m . 2 1 and cp. | savayarii eva (l. 1 1 3 " ) .
Al'r. III. 16. T h e pronominal forms tenet, 7 T h e normal ending -e is actually used
yini, svfuti also appear, and always with the J in the pronominal declension, e. g. tasmai
short vowel in the Pada t e x t ; on the other j = tiisma-e.
hand, rmi is always emi in the Pada, while 8 See JOHANSSON, B B . 20, 96 IT. and BAR-
tlie unaccented am, beside ena, has the THOLOMAE, Arische Forschungen 2 , 6 9 ; 3 , 6 ).
short v o w e l in the Pada. See LANMAN 3 3 2 9 C p . JOHANSSON, B B . 1 6 , 1 3 6 and BRUG-
(bottom). MANN, Grundriss 2, 588.
10
' See I.ANMAN 334 (middle). This is really a radical a- stem; see
3 Nasalized in camasatit wa (x. 254), Pada above, 370.
camasin. On these forms see I . A N M A N 3 3 5 . '» In the G . sing, of stems in •ar and -tar,
4 This form of the instrumental also appears the final r seems to represent original - i ;
a few times in the pronoun tva beside the i see above 358, note on svasur.
usual/Wya; it also occurs in a few compounds, i " T h e y is never to be read as /; possibly
as tva-Ja/la- and tva-diita- 'given by thee*; ' however about five times in the pronominal
cp. I.ANMAN 3 3 4 (middle). asya. T h e final -a in two or three instances
5 Perhaps also nlra 'below', cp. maiis; but undergoes protraction of a purely metrical
1
it m a y b e t h e I. o f nyiiii,-. character: see LANMAN 3383.
6
Such D. forms are twice nasalized be- |
Indo->riiche Philologi*. I. 4.
 258 I. A L L G E M E I N E S UND S P R A C H E . 4 VEDIC GRAMMAR.

otherwise found in the pronominal declension only. This case is very common,
being formed in the R V . from over 500 stems in the m. and 1 7 5 in the n.,
occurring altogether over 3300 times 1 . Among the frequent forms 2 are:
m . indrasya (123), sAryasya (93), sumasya (88), devasya (60), yajndsya (55),
sutdsya (53) 'pressed'; n. rtdsya (187), bhi'tvanasya (39) 'world', amrtasya (3s) 3 .
L . m . n. This case is formed with the normal ending -/, which combines
with the final -a of the stem to -e. It is formed in the R V . from 373 stems
in the m., and over 300 in the n., occurring altogether about 2500 times.
Among the frequent forms are: m . adhvaré {68) 'sacrifice', sute (53), upa-sthe
(49), made (48), dame (40) 'house', indre (33), yajné (28), jdue (26) 'man',
grhé (23) 'house'; n. viddthe (49) 'assembly', àgre (43) 'front', sadane (35)
'seat', padé (33), durone ( 3 1 ) 'abode', mddhye 'middle' (29).
V . m . n. In this case the bare stem (always accented on the first
syllable) is employed. It is formed in the R V . from about 260 stems, occur-
ring about 2500 times in the m.; but in the n. there is no undoubted
example 4 . The AV. however has four or five n. vocatives. Among the
commonest forms are: m . soma and soma (240), deva ( 1 3 2 ) , sura (94) 'hero',
pavamàna (63) 'bright Soma', puru-huta (49) 'much invoked', varuna (45),
mitra (35), yavistha (29) 'youngest', vrsabha (27) 'bull', ugra (23) 'mighty',
amrta ( 1 2 ) 5; n. antariksa6 (AV. vi. 130»), tràikakuda 'coming from the three-
peaked (mountain)' and dévàhjana (AV. xix. 44 s ) 'divine ointment', talpa (AV.
49
XII. 2 ) 'couch', visa (AV. iv. 6 3 ) ' p o i s o n ' 7 .
Du. N. A . V . m. The ending of these cases in the R V . is ordinarily
-5, much less frequently -a« 8 . The former is taken by over 360 stems
occurring about n 50 times, the latter by fewer than 90 stems occurring about
1 7 0 times. The ending -3 is therefore more than seven times as common
as -au. The rule is that -a appears before consonants 9 , in pausa at the end
of a Pada 1 0 , or within a Pada in coalescence with a following vowel; while
-au " occurs in the older parts of the R V . only before vowels in the Sandhi
form of -av, within a Pada. Examples of this rule are té vàm (1. 1 8 4 1 ) ;
rtivrdhj \ (1. 47Jb); dasrat12 (1. n6 I O C ) for dasra at; mitragnim (1. 14 3 ) for
mitra agn'itn; but tav1* apardm ( 1.184 1 ). Hiatus, when the metre requires two

1
T h e pronominal genitives asya and asya,times a various reading for -a of the R V .
/asya, yasya, viwasya occur over 900 times In the independent Mantra portions of the
in t h e R V . ; c p . L A N M A N 3 3 8 . T S . there are at least seven forms in -a and
2
T h e commonest G . in -sya is the pro- fourteen in -au. In the Khilas -a is nearly
nominal asya which (accented or unaccented) three times ( 3 2 ) as common as -au (12).
occurs nearly 600 times in the R V . 9 -au occurs 2 3 times before a consonant
3 T h e final vowel is once nasalized at within a P a d a ; mostly in passages showing
the end of a Pada in flasyam ckam (viu. 8 9 ' )signs ; of lateness. Cp. LANMAN 5 7 6 .
cp. RPr. II. 3 1 . -an occurs 5 times at the end of an odd
4 Cp. LANMAN 339. Pada before a consonant; and 4 times as
5 T h e r e are two instances of the final -a •av at the end of an odd Pada before a
being nasalized: ugram okas (vii. 254) andvowel. A t the end of an even Pada -au
puru-slutam eko (viu. 153- " ) ; cp. R P r . X l v . 20. occurs 4 times.
T h e r e is a purely metrical lengthening of 11
LANMAN 3 4 3 enumerates the forms in
the final vowel in vrsabha. (viu. 4 5 2 2 . 38),•au which occur in the R V .
sima ( V I I I . 4 1 ) , and hariyo/ana
3
( I . 6 1 1 6;) ; 1 2
A t the end of an odd Pada -a is always
perhaps also marya (1. 6 j; cp. L A N M A N written in the Samhita contracted with a
339- following vowel, but must always be read
6
Properly a radical a- stem. with hiatus.
7 B y a syntactical peculiarity the N . tndras J
3 This is the normal use of -au, which in
cai is some ten times coupled with a vocative 70 per cent of its occurrences is found as
vayo, agne etc. S e e L A N M A N 3 4 0 (topi -av before a vowel within a P a d a ; in the
8
In the A V . -au is more than twice as A V . the percentage is only 26.
common as in the R V . ; it is there some-
 V I . DECLENSION. NOUNS. VOWEL STEMS. 259

syllables, is thus removed 1 by the use of -av, except when u or a follows*. In

the latter case the Samhita text writes -a u-}, e. g. ubha upamsu (x. 83?), though
the Pada always has -au u-.
There are seven or eight passages of the R V . in which -a is written with
hiatus before other vowels (a- i- 0-)4, but those passages are all obscure or
corrupt5.
a. About a dozen forms, occurring altogether some 20 times, shorten the dual -a
to a, mostly owing to the metre, but in a few instances against the metre. In the forms
asura, aditya, deva, dhfta-vrata, mitra, varnna, indra-varuna, milra-varuna*> the Pada text
has -a; but in faura (v. 74*) and vlra (vi. 63'") the short vowel appears in the Pada
also 7 . A similar shortening occurs in the first member of the dual compounds indra-
viyu (I. 24) and mitra-rajana (v. 62
N. A. n. This form takes the normal ending -r, which combines with
the final -a of the stem to -e. It is made in the RV. from about 30 nominal
stems. The vocative does not occur. Only seven of these n. forms are
found more than once, sriige 'two horns' being the commonest (5) 8 .
a. T h e n. nakta- 'night' is irregular in forming its du. N. as a m. in the compound
usasa-naita 'dawn and night', in agreement with which a f. adjective is used, owing
doubtless to the predominance o f ' D a w n ' , in the combination. In 11. 39*, yugeva nabhyeva
'like two yokes, like two naves', though analyzed by the Pada as yuga iva and nabhya
iva, must be explained as regular n. forms yngc and ttabhye-\-va.
I. D. Ab. Before the normal ending -bhyam9 which forms these cases,
the final -a of the stems is lengthened, e. g. nisatyabhyam. In the R V . this
form is made from only about a dozen nominal stems in the m. and three
in the n. The cases can of course only be distinguished exegetically.
I. m. kdrnabhyam (AV.) 'ears', damstrabhyam (TS. AV.) 'teeth', daksina-
savydbhyam (AV.) 'right and left', dasa-sakhabhyatn 'having ten fingers',
mitrd-varunabhyamI0, yuktdbhyam 'yoked', vrihi-yavdbhyam (AV.) 'rice and
barley', subkrdbhyam 'shining', surya-candramdsabhyam (AV.) 1 0 'sun and moon',
hdstabhyam 'hands', haryatabhyim 'desirable'. — n. rk-samabhylm 'hymn and
chant', sfngabhyam (AV.).
D.m. tvesabhyam 'violent', nasatyabhyim 'truthful', nicirdbhyam 'attentive'.
Ab. m . amsabhyam 'shoulders', kdrnabhyxm. — n. parsvdbhyam (AV.)
'sides', prd-padabhyjm 'tips of the feet', mata-snabhyam certain internal organs.
G. L. These cases take the normal ending -os, between which and the
stem y is inserted. In the R V . only eight nominal 11 forms occur with the
genitive sense, and twelve with the locative sense. One form, dhvasrdyos
(ix. 58^), seems to be used as an Ab. There are one or two others which
anomalously drop the final -a of the stem, instead of inserting y, before the
ending -os11.

1
In two instances hiatus is removed by_' 7 T h e shortening of the du. -a at the end
nasalization: upaslham 1 eka (1.3s 6 ) and janam of odd Padas before f , occurring in four
asama (vi. 6 7 « ) . passages (II. 37; vi. 6 8 2 ; v u i . 6 6 " ; x. 6 6 I J )
2 T h e r e are 40 instances of this in the is due to Sandhi j see 70.
R V . ; see L A N M A N 575. 8
These neuter duals are enumerated by
3 T h i s is also t h e practice of the Brah-' L A N M A N 3 4 3 .
m a n a s ; see AUFRECHT, AB. 427; cp. Sarva- 9 T o be read -bhiam in two or three
nukramanl, ed. M A C D O N E L L , p. x. In the forms.
1 10
A V . (as in t h e later language) -av u- is In this compound only the second dual
regularly written (except muska upavadh.it, takes the proper case-ending.
11
XX. 1361). I T h e r e are also the pronominal forms
4 See L A N M A N 3 4 1 4 . ! G . L . m. ayos, ubhayos, tayos, yayos; tayos also
5 Except VII. 704 where deva osadhifit | as G. n.
(Pada dn/au) is written, 0- being treated like 1 1 2 Also the pronominal forms av-os, en-os,
u-, p e r h a p s owing to its labial character. I y-os. Cp. L A N M A N 3 4 4 .
6 See RPr. I V . 3 9 , 4 0 . |
17*
2ÖO I . ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4 . VEDIC GRAMMAR.

T h e forms occurring are:

G . m . indrH-varunayos, isandyos ' r u l i n g ' , devdyos, mitrdyos, mitrd-rdrunayos,
yamdyos ' t w i n s ' , varunayos, vaikarndyos 'descendants of Vikama'. — n. pasy-os
(for *pasyd-y-os) 'pressing stones', puran-y-is1 (for *purana-y-os) 'ancient'.
L. m. amsayos, dsvayos, upikdyos 'closely connected', kdrnayos (AV.),
jambhayos ( T S . iv. 1. 10 3 ) 'jaws', tuvi-jatdyos ' o f p o w e r f u l nature', ddmstrayos
(AV.), naddyos 'roarers', mitrdyos, muskdyos ' t e s t i c l e s ' , varunayos, vdhisthayos
' d r a w i n g best', vi-vratayos 'refractory', sthUrdyos 'strong', hdstayos.
P l . N . V . m . H e r e there are t w o f o r m s . I n the m o r e c o m m o n form
the n o r m a l e n d i n g -as c o a l e s c e s with the final o f the s t e m t o -as, e. g. devas.
T h e less c o m m o n form a p p e a r s to b e m a d e b y a d d i n g the n o r m a l e n d i n g
-as o v e r a g a i n 2 , e. g. devds-as. T h e f o r m in -as is a b o u t t w i c e as f r e q u e n t
in the R V . as that in - a s a s J , the f o r m e r b e i n g m a d e f r o m 808 stems, the
latter f r o m 403. In the original parts o f t h e A V . -as is 2 4 times as f r e q u e n t
as -asas, the f o r m e r o c c u r r i n g 1 3 6 6 times, t h e latter o n l y 57 t i m e s 4 . Both
forms f r e q u e n t l y o c c u r side b y side, the c h o i c e o f the o n e OT the other b e i n g
often n o d o u b t determined simply b y the m e t r e ; e. g. br/ida vadema viddthe
suvirah (11. i ' 6 ) ' a b o u n d i n g in h e r o e s w e w o u l d s p e a k a l o u d in the a s s e m b l y ' ,
but suvirSso viddtham a vadema (i[. 12 '5) ' a b o u n d i n g in h j r o e s we w o u l d
s p e a k t o the assembly'.
Examples o f the m o s t frequent forms m a d e with the t w o e n d i n g s are:
1. devas as ( 8 6 ) , jd't&sas ( 4 1 ) » somasas ( 4 1 ) , sutdsas ( 2 9 ) , tidityasas (24) 'Adityas',
yajniyasas ( 2 1 ) 'holy', amrt3sas( 11).— 2. d / v l s a n d devas (311), somas (42),
adityds ( 3 9 ) , sutas (27), janas (24), am/tas ( 2 2 ) , yajii/yas (10).
N . A . n. 5 Here, as in the N. m. there a r e t w o f o r m s , a shorter a n d
a l o n g e r , the f o r m e r b e i n g the older a n d original, as well as the m o r e fre-
quent one. T h e o l d e r f o r m is m a d e n o t b y a d d i n g the n o r m a l e n d i n g -/',
but b y l e n g t h e n i n g the final -a of the stem, e. g. havya 'oblations'6. The
later f o r m e n d s in -ani a n d is d o u b t l e s s d u e t o transitions from the stems
in -an7 w h i c h form the n. pl. N . A . with b o t h -a a n d -ani, e. g. nama and
fidmSni. T h e f o r m in -a is in the R V . m a d e f r o m 3 9 4 stems, that in -ani
f r o m 280, t h e proportion o f the o c c u r r e n c e s o f the f o r m e r b e i n g r o u g h l y
three to e v e r y two o f the latter. T h e p r o p o r t i o n in the A V . is a l m o s t e x a c t l y
r e v e r s e d , t h e f o r m in -ii b e i n g there m a d e f r o m 1 0 2 stems, that in -ani f r o m
158®. T h e t w o forms are so c o m m o n side b y side that w h e n t w o n. plurals
o c c u r in the s a m e P a d a , the o n e g e n e r a l l y e n d s in -ani a n d the other in -a ;
e. g. yd te bhimdni ayud/ia (ix. 6 1 'thy terrible w e a p o n s ' . T h i s p h e n o m e n o n

1
W i t h y inserted though -a is dropped.
2
See B R U G M A N N , Grundriss 2, p. 661,
where several examples are given of endings
being r e p e a t e d in other languages.
3 T h e form in -asas seems to be an Indo-
Iranian innovation, as there are no certain
traces of it in other Indo-European languages;
cp. BRUGMANN 1. c .
4 I n the original Mantra portions of the
T S . t h e pl. in -as is very numerous, but I
have noted only 11 forms in -asas. In the
Khilas, forms in -as are three times (30) as
numerous as in •asas (10).
5 T h e r e is no example of a V. in the
&V., and only one, cittani (ill. 2 4 ), in the
AV. w h e r e t h e Mss. have cittani.
6
T h i s form in -a is commonly supposed
to h a r e started from a N. sing. f. in -a as •Tmfi, •iimfi;
a collective; tliis would account for the
agreement of the singular verb with this pl.
in G r e e k ; cp. also sarva la . . . astu (RV. i.
1 6 2 8 ) ; see B R U G M A N N , Grundriss 2 , D. 6 8 2 .
7 T h e G. ahanam is an example of t h e
transference of another case from an -an
stem.
8
In the independent M a n t r a portions of
the TS. the forms in -a seem to outnumber
; those in -ani in about t h e s a m e proportion
j as in t h e R V . : t h e r e a r e at least 20 f o r m s
of the former and 14 of the latter. In the
Khilas t h e two forms are almost equally
divided, as 10 examples o f - J and 12 of -ani
occur.
9 Similarly, the form in -a appears beside
n. pi. forms in -ini, -iini or even -amsi,
e . g . bhurini bhadra (L l 6 6 t 0 ) ;
 V I . DECLENSION. NOUNS. VOWEL STEMS. 261

is clearly due to the influence of metre. The -a here seems never to be

shortened to -<r, as is so frequently the case in the N. A. n. pi. of -an stems
Nor does it avoid hiatus (like the -a of the N. A. du. m.), though coalescence
with a following vowel sometimes takes place 2 .
Examples of the commonest forms are: 1 . havyA (44), bhuvana (36), durita
( 3 1 ) 'distresses', savana ( 3 0 ) , ukthA ( 2 5 ) 'praises'. — 2 . bhuvanani (57), vrtr&ni
(36) 'foes', vrahini ( 3 4 ) 'laws', havydni (25), krtani (20) 'done'.
A . m. The ending of this case is not the normal -as, but -«, before
which the final vowel of the stem is lengthened •>, e. g. asvd-n. The form is
frequent, being made from more than 250 stems in the R V . That the ending
was originally -rts is shown by the treatment of -an in Sandhi, where it
becomes -am before vowels and the sibilant itself occasionally survives before
c- and t-4.
I. m. n. In this case there are t w o forms, the one adding the normal
ending -bhis (before which the final vowel of the stem becomes -e), while the
other ends in -ais (which does not appear in any other declension). The
form in -ais is only slightly commoner in the RV., being made from 2 2 1
stems, while that in -bhis is made from 2 1 1 . In the A V . , however, the former
is 5 times as frequent as the latter 5 . The two forms 6 often appear in the
same Pada; e. g. upamMir arkais (r. 3 3 ' ) 'with highest songs'. The choice
is o f t e n d u e to the m e t r e ; e. g. yatdm asvebhir asvina (VIII. 5 ' ) ' c o m e with
your steeds, O Asvins', and aditydir ycitam asvina ( v m . 3 5 1 3 ) 'with the Adityas
come, O Asvins'.
In the R V . the m. forms are roughly twice as numerous as the n.
Examples of the most frequent forms are: 1. arkdis (43), ukl/idis ( 3 5 ) , yajhais
( 3 4 ) , dei'dis (31), dsvais {30), st'mais {25).— 2 . devebhis {52), stjmebhis {26),
vdjebhis (21).
D . m . n. This case is formed with the normal ending -bhyas, before
which the final -a of the stem appears as -e. In the R V . it is made from
over 40 stems in the m., but from only one in the n. In about half the
forms occurring the ending has to be read as a dissyllable -bhias. T h e forms
occurring a r e : ajarebhyas 'unaging', dmavattarebhyas 'mightier', dranebhyas
( f v h . v. 1 2 ) ' f o r e i g n ' , arbhakibhyas 'small', adityibhyas, asinShyas 'aged', asvapas-
tarebhyas 'working more quickly', amebhyas 'helpers', gdrbhebhyas 'infants',
grhebhyas, jdneb/iyas, jiv¿bhyas 'living',jna//bhyas(K.h.ui.i6l) 'known', tavakdbhyas
'thy', dasa-kaksyebhyas 'having ten girths', ddsa-yoktrebhyas 'having ten traces',
ddsa-yojanebhyas ' h a v i n g ten teams', devibhyas, pajribhyas 'strong', parvatebhyas
'mountains', pasprdhandbhyas 'striving', pitu-kfttarebhyas 'procuring more nourish-
ment', pisunebhyas 'treacherous', putr/bhyas 'sons', purusebhyas 'men', parvebhyas
'former', badhitShyas 'oppressed', bharaUbhyas 'descendants of Bharata', martye-

savana puruni(\\L 36 s ); urdhva socimfiprasthitaI S In the independent Mantra portions of

rajamsi (III. 44); rabhasa vapiimsi (111. 18). i the TS. the proportion is about the same
1
There seems no sufficient reason to as in the AV. The following four forms with
assume that in visveti aha (1. 9 2 ^ as com- -i/iis occur: itaiebhis (I. 2. 4»), dtvlbhis (lIL
pared with aha visva (l 130»), aha is formed I . J4 3 ) , rudrebhis ( n . 1 . 1 1 » ) , su-yamtbhis ( I V . 7.
from the transition stem aha- rather than 15 ). In the Khilas 5 forms in -ais to 7 in
from ahan--, cp. L a n m a n p. 348. •ebhis occur. The latter are: amiva-catantbhis
7
* On some probable mistakes made by (1. 11 ), artavlbhis (ur. 166), ukthibhis (v. 6 3 ),
7
the Pada in contracted forms see L a n m a n ffvibhis (ill. I ), karuarebhis (I. 5'), rathebhis
348. (1. U 7 ) , saraghibhis (I. II 7 ). In the later
3 This lengthening is at least Indo-Iranian: language the form in -bhis survives in the
1
B r u g m a n n , Grundriss 2, p. 672 . pronominal ebhis alone.
6
4 See above 77; and cp. L a n m a n 346 on On the origin of the two formi cp.
the Sandhi of -an in general B r u g m a n n , Grundriss 2, p. 7 1 7 .
2Ö2 I. ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4. VEDIC GRAMMAR.

bhyas, manavibhyas 'men', mAnusebhyas 'men', mdrtebhyas 'descendants of Mana',

yajat/bhyas 'adorable', yajniyebhyas, rathebhyas 'chariots', vidustarebhyas 'very
wise', vtprebhyas 'seers', vy-asvebhyas 'horseless', sasamatiebhyas 'toiling', suvida-
triyebhyas 'bountiful', soma-rabhastarebhyas 'intoxicated with Soma', somyShyas
'preparers of Soma', stenShyas 'thieves'. — n . bh'ivanebhyas 'beings'.
A b . m. n. This case is formed like the D. with the normal ending -bhyas
from nearly two dozen stems in the R V . about equally divided between the
m. and n. In more than half of these forms the ending must be pronounced
as a dissyllable. T h e forms occurring are: m . antebhyas 'ends', asurebhyas
'divine spirits', ugrebhyas, grhebhyas, janebhyas, jlvtbhyas 'living beings',
devShyas, pdrvatebhyas, makhebhyas 'vigorous', viprebhyas, sttrebhyas, syeni-
bhyas 'eagles'. — n . anya-kftebhyas 'done by others', antr¿bhyas entrails',
durittbhyas, nakhibhyas 'nails', pade'bhyas, pirthivebhyas 'terrestrial spaces',
bhuvanebhyas, mrdhrebhyas 'contempt', vanebhyas 'forest trees', harmyJbhyas
'houses'.
G . m . n . Instead of the normal ending -am these stems almost invariably
add the ending -nam, before which the final vowel is lengthened as in the
-/, -u and -r stems. This ending (like -arti in the n. pi.) must have been due
to the influence of the -n stems*. T h e case is thus formed in the R V . from
over 100 stems in the in. and over 20 in the n. In nearly half these forms
the final syllable may be metrically read as aamTwo-thirds of these reso-
lutions are, however, not necessary as they occur at the end of octosyllabic
Padas which may be catalectic; but many undoubted resolutions are required
within the P a d a J . A m o n g the forms of most frequent occurrence are m .
devinSm (148), jdninSm (34), yajniyindm (12), aditydnam (11), adhvarsnam
(10). — n. dhananam (13).
a. T h e o r g a n i c form e. g. from dtva- would have been denim ( = deva-am). Not
more than three or four, examples of this survive in the R V . , and only two of these
seem undoubted: yutkyam dh'inam ( v m . 56*) 'of horses belonging to the herd' and
cardtham in garbhai ca sthaiam garbhai cardtham (l. 70') 'offspring of things that are
stationary, offspring of things that m o v e ' 4 . There are further some half dozen forms
written with final -an or -an which seem to stand for the G. pi. in -am: devaii janma
(I. 7 1 3 ; vi. II 3 ) 'the race of the gods' (Pada devan); deza/i janmana (X. 64M) 'with the
race of the gods' (Pada devan)-, visa a ca mar tan (iv. 2-1) 'and hither to the dwellings of
mortals' ( = mar/am); cofkuyate visa ittdro manufyatt (vi. 4716) 'Indra protects the tribes
of men'.
Lt. m . n . This case adds the normal ending -su before which (as before
-bhis and -bhyas) -e takes the place of the final vowel of the stem and cere-
bralizes the following sibilant It is formed from some 123 stems in the m.
and some 92 in the n. s It is almost invariably^ to b e read with hiatus,
even before u-1.
A m o n g the most frequently occurring forms are: m . devest* (99), viijesu
(41), yajiiesu (35), adhvarJsv (27), martyesu (25), sut/su (16). — n . vidathesu
(33)> vatiesu (20), savanesu (14), bhuvanesu (12), ukthesu (10).

1 See LANMAN 352 c; BRUGMANN, Grund- 5 T h e gender is doubtful in some in-

riss 2, p. 691.
> LANMAN (352, bottom) enumerates the
forms in which resolution takes place.
i LANMAN 3524, gives a list of the forms
in which resolution is required; cp. ARNOLD,
Vedic Metre 143 (p. 92).
4 Perhaps also himsanam (x. 142') if G . pi.
of a participle himsanaand iasam if G. of
iasa- 'ruler' ill. 23"). varum (x. 46S) is G. pi. j
of v6»t- rather than vanaCp. LANMAN 353. |
stances.
6 T h e only undoubted exception to this
rule in the R V . occurs in a late hymn (x.
121 S ), where devifv adhi must be read. Cp.
LANMAN 354.
7 On the probable origin of the ending
•su cp. B R U G M A N N , Grundriss 2, p 700.
 V I . DECLENSION. NOUNS. VOWEL STEMS. 263

a b . Derivative Stems in -a.

L A N M A N , N'oun-Inflection 335—365.— W H I T N E Y , Sanskrit G r a m m a r p. 131 — 1 3 7 . —
Cp. C O L L I T Z , die herkunft der A-deklination, B B . 29, p. 81—114.

3 7 3 . The derivative 5-declension corresponds to the derivative «-declen-

sion, for the m. adjectives of which it furnishes the f. stems. It includes more
feminines than any other declension. Like the «-declension it has many
irregularities of inflexion, every case in the singular, except the A., and two
cases in the plural showing some abnormal feature. The N. sing, shares with
the derivative r-declension the peculiarity of not adding the ending -s; the
I. sing, has an alternative form borrowed from the pronominal declension;
the D. Ab. G. L. sing, are formed under the influence of the derivative f-
stems; and the V. sing, ends in -e instead of appearing in the form of the
bare stem. In the plural the N. has to a limited extent the same alternative
form in -3sas as the m. of the «-declension, and the G. is similarly formed
with -nam.
As in the «-declension, the accent remains in the same position throughout
except the V., where it of course shifts to the first syllable.

Inflexion.
374. The forms actually occurring, if made from priyd- 'dear', would be
as follows:
Sing. N. priyd. A. priydm. I. priyd and priyaya. D. priydyai. Ab. G.
friydyas. L . priydynm. V. priye.
Du. N. A. priyt. I. Ab. priyabhynm. G. L. priyayos.
PI. N. priyds and priydsas. V. priyas. A. priyds. I. priyabhis. D. Ab.
priydbhyas. G. priydnam. L. priydsu.
Sing. N . This case never adds the normal ending -sl. It is formed in
the R V . from 424 stems and occurs more than 1000 times. Examples of the
most frequent forms are: yJsil (24) 'maiden', ddksina (24) 'good milch cow',
lis (17) 'refreshment', jayd (17) 'wife', su-bhdga (13) 'beautiful', sBtifta (10)
'joyful', citrd (9) 'brilliant'.
a. A t the end of odd P l d a s the final -a of this N. is regularly written with S a n d h i ,
but must a l w a y s b e read with h i a t u s ; c o a l e s c e n c e with e• and f is, h o w e v e r , twice
avoided b y n a s a l i z a t i o n 1 , while twice 3 the -a i s shortened b e f o r e /••.
b . Within a Pad a the -a is written with Sandhi in 1 6 0 instances in the R V . , but
is pronounced (unlike the^ -a of the N . A . du. m j with hiatus in 2 3 of these i n s t a n c e s ;
while the nominatives ¡fa 'car-pole' and manifa 'devotion' are written as well as pro-
nounced with h i a t u s 4 , the former once, the latter f o u r times.
A . This case, which is formed with the normal ending -m, is in the R V .
made from over 200 nominal stems occurring more than 400 times. Examples
of the most frequent forms are: matilsam (21), jay dm ( n ) , amTvam (9)
'distress', yds3m (7), yosanim (6) 'maiden'.
a. T h i s c a s e is often identical in f o r m with the L . sing. f. of stems in -7; thus
putvyam m a y be the A . of purvya- 'previous' or L . of purvi- 'much'. In one instance at
least elision of the -m, followed by contraction, takes p l a c e 9 : sa/atamavivffih (vu. 1 9 s ) f o r

7
1 T h e stem gna- ' w o m a n ' , though originally manifa iyam ( V . U 5 ; VIL 70 ); manifa asma/(vu.
dissyllabic, c a m e to be regarded as a radical 3 4 " ) ; cp. R P r . 11. 29. LANMAN 3 5 6 suggests that
¿-stem and a c c o r d i n g l y forms its N. sing. the comparative frequency of this hiatus justi-
gna-sjiv. 94)._ 1 fies the restoration of the augment in P&das
' iaiadanam
4
¿fi( L 123 10 ) z.nA yam1 ^nameayishort of a s y l l a b l e ; e.g.prasa [a]va<ri(viL 58 6 ).
(V. 30' ). 5 On some contractions in w h i c h -m h a s
3 priyd' f- (l. IS I4). (v. 4l ,S ). probably been elided but explained wrongly
Cp. 70. by the Pada as containing nominatives in -a,
4 Tfd aifo ( V I I I . 5 » 9 ) ; manifa aiki ( I . I O L 7 ) ;see LANMAN 3 5 6 .
264

satatamam avivesih. In two or three instances t h e m e t r e s e e m s to require -am to b e read

as a am t.
I. There are t w o forms of this case. In the one, the normal ending
-a is added directly to the stem and, by contracting with its final -it, produces
a form identical in appearance with the N., e. g. jihvd (= jihvá-a) 'tongue'.
In the other, y is interposed between the ending -a and the final -a of the
stem, which is shortened, e. g. jihvá-y-a. T h e latter form is due to the in-
fluence of the regular pronominal I. sing, f., e . g . taya2. This form is already
slightly the more common in the RV.J, being made from 1 1 3 stems 4 as
compared with 95 which take the older form with -a. In the later Samhitas
the I. in -a is very rare in original passages, the A V . using only five such
forms independently 5. Both forms are (unlike the N. pi. m. in -asas and -as)
comparatively seldom made from the same stem, as jikuA and jihváya. Two
thirds of the total number of 95 stems which have the older form, end in
the suffixes -til and -ys, as purusá-tü 'after the manner of men', hiranyayA
'golden'. T h e choice of the alternative forms is, as elsewhere, often deter-
mined by the metre 6 .
Examples of the commonest forms are: 1. dosA (13) 'evening', barhána
( 1 3 ) 'might', mantsA (13), mamhdmi ( 1 1 ) 'willingness', sravasyA ( 7 ) 'desire to
praise' 7 . — Also aslrdilyá (TS. 111. 2. 84) 'fulfilment of blessing', visvd-psny,i
(TS. 1. 5. 3 3 ; VS. xii. 10) 'omniform'. — 2. dhAraya (53) 'stream', jihváya (24),
mayáyH (20) 'craft'.
a. T h e r e a r e s o m e instrumentáis sing. f. f o r m e d f r o m d e i i v a t i v e a- s t e m s , w h i c h
are used as a d v e r b s w i t h shift of accent to the e n d i n g . S u c h a r e : a-datraya 'without a
gift* ( a - d a t r a - ) , ubhaya 'in b o t h w a y s ' (ubháya-), ftdya 'in the right way* ifíó-), daksiini
' o n the r i g h t ' (dáksina-), naktaya ' b y n i g h t ' {mitin-), madhya 'in the m i d d l e ' ( m t i d h y a • ) ,
samaná ' t o g e t h e r ' (sámana-), svapnayá ( A V . ) 'in d r e a m ' (svápna-)8.
D . This case is anomalously formed by adding -yai to the stem, e. g.
jarA-yai9. It is not of common occurrence, being made from only 14 nominal 1 "
stems in the R V . T h e forms occurring are: a-gótayai 'lack of cows', a-vira-
tayai 'lack of sons', ukhAyai (TS.iv. 1.9 3 ) 'pot', uttanAyai (TS.iv. 1.4"; K h . v . i6<)
'supine', glúsayai N. of a woman, carAyai 'for going', jarAyai ( A V . ) 'old age',
tvá-yatüyai 'presented by thee', ducchnnayai 'mischievous demon', putrá-kiímayai
(Kh.iv. 1 3 ' ) 'desiring sons', pütá-kratayai N. of a woman, manáyai 'eagerness',
vispálayai N. of a woman, siváyai 'auspicious', svetanáyai 'dawn', sunitayai
'joy', süryáyai 'sun-goddess'.
a. T w o f o r m s h a v e b e e n p r e s e r v e d in w h i c h the D . is m a d e b y a d d i n g the
n o r m a l e n d i n g -e directly to the stem w i t h the -a o f w h i c h it c o a l e s c e s to -ai\ mahlyái
(1. 113®) ' g r e a t n e s s ' , sv-apalyái(l. 5 4 " ) ' a c c o m p a n i e d with fair offspring'. T h e s e are
f o r m e d like the D . infinitives f r o m r a d i c a l ii-stems such as vi-khyai (584).
b. In o n e p a s s a g e (VIL L'9) the f o r m a-vírate, f o r avinUiyai ' l a c k of sons',

' S e e LANMAN 357 (top). | 7 LANMAN 358 e n u m e r a t e s the h o m o p h o -

> C p . BRUGMANN, G r u n d r i s s 2, p. 629, 783. | nous i n s t r u m e n t a l .
3 T h e c o r r e s p o n d i n g later f o r m in the | 8 T h e s e forms m a y h a v e b e e n due to the
A v e s t a is m u c h c o m m o n e r than the o l d e r : [ influence of the pronominal a d v e r b a-y ii
BRUGMANN 2, p. 629. 'in this w a y ' (with adverbial shift of a c c e n ' ,
4 T h i s n u m b e r g i v e n b y LANMAN 357 in- cp. taya e t c . ) ; s e e J. SCHMIDT, I'luralbildung
e l u d e s s o m e p r o n o m i n a l stems. BRUGMANN'S 212 ff., and BRUGMANN, G r u n d r i s s 2, p. 6 2 9 ;
s t a t e m e n t (2, p. 629) that the f o r m in -aya i s o t h e r w i s e BARTHOLOMAE, B B . 15, 20 f.
l e s s c o m m o n than the f o r m in -a in V e d i c , 9 F o r m e d in the Indo-Iranian p e r i o d , pro-
is not a p p l i c a b l e e v e n to the R V . b a b l y u n d e r the i n f l u e n c e o f t h e d e r i v a t i v e
5 T h e f o r m s are dakfina, devata, dofd, stems in -i originally -ya, i. e. -yai for -ya-c.
sumnaya, vitta-kamya-, only the last is p e c u l i a r | 1 0 A l s o svtiyai f r o m the p o s s e s s i v e pronoun
to t h e A V . j sva
6 E u p h o n y a l s o has some i n f l u e n c e ; thus >' BRUGMANN, G r u n d r i s s 2, p. 600, thinks
hiranyayaya d o e s not o c c u r . | this f o r m m a y b e s h o r t e n e d f o r sv-apatyayai.
 265

takes the ending -e direct, but with elision o f the stem v o w e l , as in the radical a-
declension

A b . This case is formed anomalously by adding the ending -yas to the

stem J . It is rare, being made in the R V . from only seven stems, the AV.
having three additional examples. The forms occurring are: UrdhvAyis (AV.)
'upright', kamiyas 'maiden', jiftvAyas, dd&stiiay.is, dur-cvay.is 'ill-disposed',
ilur-h 'viiiyas 'mischief', ddivyayas 'divine', dhruvAy'is (AV.) 'firm', nnLiyiis 'dis-
grace', vy-ad/ivAyas (AV.)-> 'lying half-way'.
G. This case is formed in the same way as the Ab., but is much more
frequent, being made from 26 stems in the R V . T h e forms occurring are:
aghnyayds and aghnyAyas 'cow (not to be killed)', ilayls, ukhAyas, usriyayas
'ruddy cow', Armyayas 'night', karuiyas, kAsthayas 'course', jihvAyds, daksinayas,
dariatAyjs 'conspicuous', ditrvayas 'Durva grass', dhisdnayas 'offering',
d/iisamanayils4 'longing', pajrOyas 'vigorous', pari takmyayas 'wandering',
mAhinayas 'mighty', rasAytis a mythical river, vayAyas 'branch', vispalayds,
sasvatlamayas 'most recent', siphiiyas N. of a river, iucAyas 'pure', sabar-di'tghHyas
'yielding nectar', sehanAyas' 'victorious', surayls 'intoxicating liquor', suryAyas.
L . This case is formed by adding the anomalous ending -yum to the
stem, e. g. bhadrA-yam. It is not common, being formed from only 16 or
17 stems in the R V . The forms, occurring are: a payAyam* N. of a river,
limAyiim 'raw', uttanAyam 'outstretched', usriyayam, (A)-gatlyam 'come', grivAyam
'neck', jarnAyam 'ancient', ndv&yUm 'new', piri-takmyayam, bhadrAyam 'bene-
ficent', yamundyam N. of a river, varatrAyam 'thong', vaiayam (Kh.n. 10 s ) 'cow',
iimidpayam N. of a tree, sirinayam 'night', sabhAyam (TS. 1. 8. 3 1 ) 'assembly',
surayam, su-simayam1 N. of a river, hariyupiyayam N. of a locality.
V . This case has the abnormal ending -e s and is in the R V . formed from
over 50 stems; e. g. aire. The original form must have been the bare stem
with the final vowel shortened; e. g. *dsva, but of this there is no certain
survival. The form amba which occurs in the R V . three times (unaccented)
may originally have been an exclamation, and it can have this sense alone
in one of the three passages of the R V . (x. 97*), where it is used with a
plural. In the two other passages it may very well mean ' 0 mother' (11.41 l6 ;
x. 867). The VS. ( X X I I I . 18) and the TS. ( V I I . 4. 19') have the V . dmbe as
from a stem amba 'mother' 9 .
\ The forms occurring are: dghnyasye10 (Kh. IV. S26- J1) 'cow-faced', ag/inye,
apve N. of a disease, amartye 'immortal', dmbike (TS. VS.) 'mother', ambitame
'most motherly', aire 'mare', ahia-sUnfle 'rich in horses', Aditya-varne11 (Kh.
11. 6 6 ) 'sun-coloured', arjiklye N. of a river, i/e goddess of devotion, istake
(TS. iv. 2. 9 2 ) 'brick', ugra-putre 'having mighty sons', uttare 'mightier',
uttana-parne 'having extended leaves', uru-vraje 'extending afar', rtrmye,
rst'e 'exalted', kadha-priyc 'ever pleased', kaue 'one-eyed', kama-dughe (TS.
iv. 2. 9 6 ) 'cow of plenty', krtye (Kh. iv. 5**) 'magic', ghora-rape (Kh.iv. 5 * )
'of awful form', gauge 'Ganges', ghore 'awful', citre, citra-maghe 'having
brilliant gifts', /aye, darie (TS. iv. 2. 9*), deva-jate 'impelled by the gods'

1 T h i s f o r m s a transition to the consonant 5 Perfect participle middle otsah- 'conquer'.

declension like dcvatitc beside drvatataye\ 6 A transition f o r m f r o m the radical a-
cp. LANMAN 359». declension, see p. 249, note >'.
2 I.ike the I ) . it is due to the influence 7 A l s o the pronominal f o r m svayam.
of the stems in derivative - T , to the fuller 8 T h e origin o f this ending is uncertain;
f o r m of which, -yd-, the normal ending -as cp. BRUGMANN 2, 541.
was added. 9 T h i s is a c o m m o n stem in post-Vedic
3 Also the pronominal svayas 'own'. Sanskrit.
4 Participle, perhaps desiderative, of dhi- \' 10 The ed. has aghnyiisye.
'think'. I| 11 The ed. has aditya-varnc.
266 I . ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4. V E D I C GRAMMAR.

dtvi-tamex 'most divine', dhisane 'goddess of devotion', nadx-tame 'best

of rivers', pathye 'path' (as goddess), pastye 'goddess of the house', putra-
iame, puru-priye 'much beloved', prthu-jaghane 'broad-hipped', prthu-stuke
'having broad braids of hair', priye (TS. vn. 1. 6 8 ), brahma-samsite 'sharpened
by prayer', marud-vrdhe N. of p. river, yamune, rake N. of a goddess,
vapustame (Kh. iv. 7 ' ) 'most beautiful', vara-mpe (Kh. iv. 5'®) 'of excellent
form', vi-kate 'monstrous', vivasvad-vate (TS. iv. 4. 12«) 'desired by Vivasvat',
vihia-rQpe (TS. iv. 2. 5') 'omniform', visva-vare 'possessed of all goods',
saravye 'arrow', sitike 'cool', sufige (Kh. v. 1 5 8 ) N. of a goddess, subhre
'shining', sa-danve 'associated with demons', sarame N. of a goddess, site
'furrow', su-jate 'well-born', su-putre 'having good sons', su-bhage, su-labhike
'easy to win', su-snuse 'having fair daughters-in-law', sa-nrte, surya-varne (Kh.
iv. 77) 'sun-coloured', sUrye, stoma-trayastrimse (TS. iv. 4. 12 4 ), hariklike
(Kh. v. 1 5 " ) 'yellowish', hiranya-parne (Kh. iv. 7?) 'gold-winged', hladike 're-
freshing'.
D u . N . A . V . These cases are identical in form, having final -e which
doubtless contains the same dual ending -X as N. A. V. du. of the a - declen-
sion 2 . They are of frequent occurrence, being made from over 1 3 0 stems
in the R V . The ending -e is Pragrhya, being distinguished by the Pada text
with an appended iti from the e of the V. sing, f.; e. g. V. du. f. subhre iti,
but V. sing. f. subhre.
Examples of the most frequent forms are: ubht (66) 'both', su-mike3 (8)
'well-established', deva-putre (7) 'having gods as sons', vi-rape (7) 'of different
forms', sipre (5) 'cheeks'. The compound sitSsite 'black and white' occurs in
a Khila (p. 1 7 1 5 ) .
I. A b . These cases, made with the ending -bhyStn, are identical in form
with the I. D. Ab. m. n. of the a- declension. They are represented by only
two forms in the R V . : siprabhyam (x.' 1 0 5 5 ) which seems to be I. 4 , and
niisikabhyam (x. 1 6 3 ' ) 'nostrils', Ab. No form with a D. sense occurs.
G . L . Both these cases add, with interposing -y-, the normal ending
-os to the final -a of the stem, which is shortened. They are thus identical
in form with the G. L. du. m. n. of the a- declension. There are only four
nominal forms in the R V . and A V . : in the G. sense janghayos (AV.) 'legs',
yamayos 'twins'; and in the L. sense uttunayos, svadhayos 'homestead' 5 .
PI. N . V . The regular form ends in -as and is very common, being
formed from nearly 260 stems in t h e R V . Examples of the commonest forms
are: bhadrds (19), dhdris (16), manTsds ( i o ) 6 .
There is, however, a second form in -asas which occurs nearly 20
times in the R V . Considering the rarity of this form here, while it is the
commoner as N. pi. m. in the a- declension, the probability is that its intro-
duction was due to those very numerous masculines. T h e forms occurring
are: a-tandrHsas 'indefatigable', a-mftasas (AV.) 'immortal', dur-mitnisas 'un-
friendly', paspfdharulsas 'vying' 7 , parthivftsas* 'terrestrial', pavaktisas 'pure',
bhejanfisas9 'having obtained', vanvSmisas10 (SV.) 'having obtained', vasiisas,
1 6
Superlative of devi-, the final being In two or three passages the Pada text
shortened as in the simple vocative devi. seems to confuse forms in -as with others in
* Cp. BRUGMANN, G r u n d r i s s 2, 286 (p. 64}). - a ; s e e LANMAN 362.
3 Cp. WINDISCH in F e s t g r u s s a n O. v. B6HT- 7 Perfect participle middle of \sprdh-.
LINGK 1 1 4 f. 8 Cp. LANMAN 362.
4 The pronominal form tabhyam (x. 88"') 9 Perfect participle middle olbhaj- 'share*.
has a locative meaning. >° The variant of the SV. for bhejanasas
5 There are also the pronominal forms of the RV.
ayis and yayos. In III. 54' the Pada text
reads ayis probably for aySs.
 VI. DECLENSIONS. NOUNS. VOWEI. STEMS. 267

vasrAsas 'roaring', vidinAsas1 'being found', vrdhAsas 'helping', a-susanAsas1

'stimulating', sUghanAsasJ 'swift', sammitasas (AV.) 'corresponding', smiyamnnasas
'smiling', hdvam3n3sas 'calling' 4 .
A. This case is formed with the normal ending -as which coalesces with
the final of the stem to -as, e. g. sunrtJs. It is very frequent, being made
from more than 160 stems in the RV. Examples of the commonest forms
are: m-lyAs (2 2 \ prtanls ( 1 3 ) 'battles', usrAs ( 1 2 ) ' d a w n s ' , dhAras ( 1 1 ) ,
usriyas (10) s . Two instances occur of forms in -3sas being wrongly used
as A. pi. f.: satnvidlnAsas (x. 3o' 4 ) 'united' and aram-gamAsas (AV. X I I I . 2'->)
'ready to help'.
I. This case is always formed by adding the ending -bhis directly to the
stem, e. g. sunrta-bhis. It is made from over 80 stems in the RV. Examples
of the most frequent forms are: mayAbhis (13), citrAbhis (8), dhArabhis (7),
h'jtrabhis ( 7 ) 'libations', ilabhis (6). The f o r m drAghisthabhis (m. 6 2 , ? ) 'for
longest times' 6 is used adverbially.
D. Ab. These cases are formed with the same ending -bhyas (sometimes
to be read as two syllables) added directly to the stem. In the RV. only
4 datives and 11 ablatives occur from nominal stems7. The forms occurring
are: D . aghnyAbhyas, usr'iyabhyas, ducchunabhyas, devdtabhyas ( T S . iv. 2. g6)
'deities', vftAbhyas 'movements'. — Ab. adharabhyas 'lower', Asabhyas 'regions',
uttarabhyas, usrtihabhyas 'nape of the neck', kikasabhyas 'cartilages of the
breast-bone', gudabhyas 'intestines', grivAbhyas, damsanabhyas 'wondrous
powers', dhisdnabkyas 'Soma bowls', vaksanabhyas 'bellies', syavyhbhyas
'darkness'.
G. This case being made with the abnormal ending -nam is identical
in form with the G. pi. m. of the a- declension. It is formed in the RV. from
22 stems. There is no certain example here of forms with the normal ending
-am which is found in a few genitives of the a- declension (372). There are
only a couple of instances in which the resolution of the final syllable as
-aam seems required by the metre 8 . The G. of katiyi- 'girl' always appears
in the contracted form of kantnam9 (occurring five times) in the R V . 1 0
The forms actually occurring are: dksarattam 'speech', dghnyanam,
a-nivesanAnam 'affording no place of rest', a-bhayanam 'free from danger',
dsma-vrajanam ' w h o s e p e n is a r o c k ' , As'anam ( T S . iv. 4. 1 2 ' ) , urvarSnam
' a r a b l e fields', usrAnam, vsriyanam, kAsthanam, kfiyAnam ( K h . iv. ^"),jihmAnam
'transverse', divyAnam 'heavenly', dughanam 'milch kine', devatanam (Kh.11.4'),
deva-senAnam 'hosts o f t h e g o d s ' , dhisananam, ndvanam, navyhn3m 'navigable
rivers', pastya nam 'abodes', manTsAnam, rAmyanam "nights', samanSm 'years',
sUnftanam 'songs of joy', stiyanam 'still waters'.
L. This case is formed by adding the ending -su directly to the stem.
The final -u though always combined with a following vowel both at the end
of an internal Pada or within a Pada, is invariably to be read with hiatus

1 Participle middle, with passive sense, of Cp. aparibhyas 'for future times'.
6

vid- 'find'. 7 There are also the pronominal forms

' Participle middle of \svas-.
i This word (AV.) is of uncertain deri-
vation.
4 There are besides two or three doubtful
instances which may be M.; see LANMAN 362.
5 In several instances -as is most probably
to be read where the Pada text has -1?, see
I .ANMAN 363. In a few forms the resolution
of -iis as -aas or -ads seems necessary;
LANMAN L C.
abhyas and abhyas, tabhyas, yabhyas.
8 dhinanam in VIII. 5 9 " and pflananam
in vill. 59 1 . In sunftanam (1. 3 " ) the metre
seems to require the shortening of the final
of the stem: sunft&nam\ LANMAN 364.
9 This is a form of some importance as
showing how the suffix -1 arose from -ya-.
It also occurs once in Kh. 1. j 7 .
 268 I . ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4. VEDIC GRAMMAR.

in the R V . ; e . g . STASU urt-arasu (x. 50-*) for svAsUrvdrasu . 1

This case is
formed from over 50 nominal stems in the R V . The forms occurring
are: ag/iAsu 'evil', amrtjsu, dvarasu 'later', a m A s u , Artanasu 'uncultivated',
i/Jsu, i/parasu 'neighbouring', urvdrasu, usrlyasu, ftrmyasu', kanydsu,

kAslhasu, krpjAsu 'black', grfrAsu (TS. iv. 2. 5*), cittd-garbhasu 'visibly

pregnant', citrasu, j a g m d n A i u 2
'having gone', jatAsu 'born', h'/gryasu 'des-
cended from Tugra', duryasu 'abodes', devdtasu (TS. I. 6. 4 3 ), dh'tsnyasu 'fire-
places', d h r u v A s u 'unchangeable', mivasu, pathyasu, p d d y S s u 'footsteps',
pastyasu, pAuca-janyasu 'relating to the five tribes', puru-pcsHsu 'multiform',
p u r v a s u 'earlier', pitanasu, p r a d h a n y h s u 'forming the spoil', priyAsu, m a d y a s u

'fond of exhilaration', madhyaniAsu 'middlemost', manusySsu 'human', m a n d r A s u

(TS . iv. 1.8 2 ), mdrtyasu 'mortal', m a h i n l s u 'mighty\ yajniyasu 'devout', (prd-)-

yatasu 'presented', yosanasu, r A m y a s u , ropanAk&su a kind of bird, vaksanasu

'bellies', vrddhAsu 'great', Trd/iasanAsu 3
'growing', s'ayAsu 'resting-places',
siiskasu 'dry', syavAsu 'nights', srutAsu 'famous', sanayasu 'old', saptd-sivasu

'blessing the seven (worlds;', sirasu 'streams', su-vrjdnasu 'dwelling in fair

regions', h d v y a s u 'to be invoked'.

3. a. S t e m s in radical -T.
LANMAN, Noun-Inflection 365—4CO. — WHITNEY, Sanskrit G r a m m a r 348—359.

375. This declension consists primarily of fewer than 50 m. and f. nouns

derived from 9 roots. Only four of these words appear as monosyllables,
the rest being compounds. The analogy of this primary group (A) is closely
followed both in inflexion and accentuation by a second group of about 80
polysyllabic stems which, though formed with derivative -t, are for the sake
of clearness best treated as a division (B) of this declension. The normal
endings as they appear in the inflexion of consonant stems are taken throughout
this declension. The G. pi., however, with the exception of a single form
occurring only once ( d h i y A m ) , takes the ending - n a m -, and the N. sing, always
adds -.<•. Accentuation on the final syllable of the stem is characteristic of
this declension; and except in monosyllabic stems the acute remains on that
syllable throughout«, liefore vowel endings the -/ is split to -iy in the mono-
syllabic nouns; e. g. d/iiy-am; this is also the case in compounds formed
with these nouns, except -d/u when it is accented, e. g. jana-sriyam, tiAna-

dhiyas, but a-d/i!am; in compounds formed with roots it is split only when
two consonants precede; e. g. yajha-prlyam, but y a j n a - n l a m ; in the secon-
dary group it is split in s a m u d r 'i- and partly in cakri-, e. g. samudriyas and
cakriyau, but cakrias. Otherwise the 1 is always written as y , but is in the
RV. invariably 5 to be pronounced as a vowel; e. g. nadyjtn pronounced
6
n a d i a m .

A. The stems belonging to the primary group are: 1. the monosyllabic

feminines dhi- 'thought', bhi- 'fear', sri- 'glory'; and the m. vi- 'receiver' (which
occurs only once in the N. sing.). — 1. Compounds (mostly Bahuvrlhis)
formed with the first three: a-dhi- f. 'care', itthA-dhi- 'right devout', dlrghadhi-

1
Cp. the L. pi. of the a-declension.
2
Perfect participle middle of gam- 'go'.
3 Participle m i d d l e from vydh- 'grow'.
4 T h e r e are o n e or two exceptions to this
rule in c o m p o u n d words in the A group,
and a few others, in the AV., in the B
group.
5 T h e r e are only t w o e x c e p t i o n s in the
R V . : A. sing, stary&m ( v u . 688) ¡ n a late
verse (cp. L A N M A N 379") and N. pi. nadyas
(vil. 50 4 ). T h e A V . has six such f o r m s :
asvatary&s, nadyas, naplyas, nadyas, fippalyhs,
vfksa-sarpyas.
6
T h e resolved forms are therefore always
g i v e n below, spelt with i in this declension.
This will not lead t o any c o n f u s i o n with the
written forms of the Sarnhita text in w h i c h
the I of the stem always appears as iy ox y.
 2Ó9

'having a far-reaching mind' (J-d/i -), dur-a-dA - 'malevolent', durd-iid/if- ' 'longing
for the distance', sv-idhi- 'attentive', du-dhi- ' 'malevolent', nAna-dhl- 'of various
intent', viivdto-dhl- 'all-attending', su-dhi- 'devout'; avadya-bhi- f. 'fear of blame';
agni-sri- 'fire-bright', adhvara-sri- 'adorning the sacrifice', ksatra-sri- 'blessing
dominion', ghrta-sr'i- 'glittering with ghee', jana-sri- 'blessing men', darsata-sri-
'of beauteous splendour', mdrya-sri- 'adorned like a wooer', yajiia-sri- 'beauti-
fying the sacrifice', su-s'ri- 'glorious', hari-sri- 'of golden glory'. — 3. Com-
pounds' formed with the roots kri- 'buy', nl- 'lead', prl- 'love', ml- 'diminish',
vl- 'move'and'cover', si- 'lie', s'n- 'mix': pra-kri- (AV.) 'purchasable', sadyah-
kri- (AV.) 'bought on the same day'; agre-ni- (VS.) 'leading', rta-nl- 'leading
the rite', grama-ni- 'leading the community', pada-ni- (AV.) 'following the steps
of another', pra-tii- f. 'furtherance', pra-neni-* 'powerfully furthering', mana-ni-
'spirit-leading', yajna-ni- 'leading the sacrifice1, vaia-n m. 'commander', vrata-
ni- 'carrying out the ordinance', sadha-ni- 'accompanying', seni-nl- rn. 'leader
of an army', skambha-ni- (VS.) 'furnishing a prop'; abhi-pri- 'gladdening', kadha-
pri- 'gladdening whom?', pari-pri- 'dear', brahma-pri- 'prayer-loving', yajha-pri-
'sacrifice-loving'; manyu-mi- 'rage-obstructing', viita-pra-nu- 'surpassing the wind';
takva-vi- m. '(swiftly darting) bird', deva-vi- and devii-vi- 'god-refreshing', pada-
vi- m. 'leader', parna-vi- 'moving with wings', pratl-vi'gladly accepting',
hirattya-vi- 'gold-bringing'; pra-vi- (VS.) 'wound round'; jihma-si- 'lying pro-
strate', patsu-tas-si-6 'lying at the feet', madhyama-s'i-'lying in the midst', syona-s'i-
'lying on a soft couch'; abhi-iri-? 'admixture', gana-sri-1 'mixing in troops'.
B . This secondary group comprises upwards of 80 polysyllabic stems,
accented on the final vowel, which are all substantives except about half a
dozen. It includes fewer than a dozen masculines. Of the remainder, which
are feminine, more than half are names of female beings; about 30 are the
f. form of m. stems that are not accented on the final vowel, as purusl-
'woman' beside pùrusa- 'man'. There are also some f. adjectives corresponding
to m. in -ya, as svari- beside svaryà- 'resounding'. This derivative group
closely follows the analogy of the third division of the radical group (compounds
ending in roots with final accented -;); it joined the radical declension doubt-
less owing to the accentuation of the final vowel.
The m. stems are: ahi- 'serpent', upàvÌ-{\S.)8 'encouraging', daksj-' 'flaming';
pravi-"'attentive', dus-pravi- 'unfriendly', su-pravi- 'very attentive';yayi-™'going';
rath'i- 'charioteer', d-rathl- 'not a charioteer'; sahàsra-start- 'having a thousand
barren cows', hiranya-vàsT- 'wielding a golden axe'.
The f. stems are: athari- 'flame', atharvi- 'priestess' (m. àtharvan-),
à-durmangali- 'not unlucky', apari- pi. 'future days'(m. dpara-), apasi- (VS.)
'industrious' (m. apasya-), ambi- 'mother', arayi- 'demoness' (m. aràya-), aruni-
Mawn', asvatari- (AV.) "she-mule', asta-karni- 'cow with notched ear', a-pathi-
'impediment', erti- 'doe' (m. eta-), on'i-'breast', kalyani- 'fair woman' (m. kalyfina-),
kavasi- 'creaking' (m. kavdsa-), kilasi- 'spotted deer' (m. kii/ha-), kumari-
(AV.) 'girl', kadi- (AV.) 'fetter', krpii- 'night', ksoni- 'flood', khari- 'measure',
gandharvi- 'female Gandharva', gauri- 'buffalo cow', cakri- 'wheel', tandri-

1 F o r durf-adh'-. | formed by adding the suffix -las to the

' From dus-dht-. ' i .. pi. of pad- 'foot'.
3 Mostly T a t p u r u s a s , g e n e r a l l y w i t h a c c u - j 7 F o r m e d d i r e c t l y f r o m t h e root srt- =
sative s e n s e ; some K a r m a d h i r a y a s . ! ' m i x ' , a n d not f r o m t h e s u b s t a n t i v e iri-.
4 An intensive formation from nl• " F r o m upa a n d p>a-\-av- ' f a v o u r ' ,
'lead'. <> T o b e a s s u m e d a s t h e s t e m of t h e V.
5 'Coming towards', pra/i, with lengthened daisi, Pada text dhatfi.
final rowel. 10 The final v o w e l is h e r e p e r h a p s r a d i c a l
6 From patsu-tds, an adverb anomalously {in origin.
27°

( A V . ) 'weariness' (m. tándra-), tapani- 'heat' (m. tápana-), tila-piñji-' ( A V . )

N. of a plant (m. tila-piñja-), tiksna-srhgi- ( A V . ) 'sharp-horned' (m. tiksná-
sfñga-), düti- 'messenger', de hi- 'dam', nadi- 'stream', napti- 'daughter' (m. náptr-),
ñadí- 'pipe', nandi- 'joy', nistigri- N . of Indra's mother, palall-1 ( A V . ) 'stalk',
pippali- ( A V . ) , 'berry* (m. pippala-), purusi- 'woman' (m. púrusa-), prapharvi-
'voluptuous girl', mandükí- 'female frog' (m. mandáka-), mayürí- 'peahen' (m.
mayara-), mahi-nadl- 'great stream', mahisi- (TS.) 'buffalo cow', mesf- 'ewe', yami-
' Yam!', yayí-2 'quick', yatudhani- 'sorceress' (m. yatudhána-), raí/ii- 'female chario-
teer' (m. rdtha- 'car'), laksmi- 'mark', lalami- 'speckled mare' (m. lalAma-), vaksi-
'flame', vi-kesi- ( A V . ) 'shaggy hog', vibaíi- N. of a river, vi-lipti- ( A V . ) 'cow',
vi-lldhi- ( A V . ) 'female monster', visva-rüpi- 'brindled cow' (m. visvá-rüpa-),
Vfki- 'she-wolf (m. vfka-), vfksa-sarpí- ( A V . ) 'tree-serpent', veil- 'needle',
vyasta-kesí- ( A V . ) 'shaggy hog', s'akati- 'cart' [sdkata-), s'abali- (TS.) 'cow of
plenty' (m. sabála-), sakthi- 'thigh' (n. sákthi-), sasarparí- 'trumpet', sahasra-
parni- ( A V . ) N. of a plant (m. sahásra-parna-), simhi- 'lioness', su-mañga¿í-i
'lucky woman' (m. su-mañgd/a-), surmi- 'pipe', sfni- 'sickle', start- 'barren
cow', sphigi- 'hip', hastini(AV.) 'female elephant', hiranya-keVi- 'gold-haired'
( A V . ) (m. hiranya-kes'a-).
a. There are further a few f. adjectives in -I from m. stems in -ya: ápJ-
'watery' (m. dpya-), samudri-5 'belonging to the sea' (m. samudrlya-), svari-
'resounding' (m. svarya-).
a. There are a few transition forms from the «'-stems: karkaryasb (AV.) from
karkari- 'lute' (karkari-)-, N. sing, aris 7 (VS. VI. 36) from art- 'faithful' beside the usual art-;
and the stems yayí-, sakthi-, sj-ni- also occur beside yayí-, sakthí-, sfni- respectively. The
only certain transition from the derivative X- declension to the radical i- declension is
represented by stri- 'woman', originally a dissyllable 8, from which occur the forms
A. sing, stnyam, N. A. pi. striyas, I. strlbhis. Other transition forms are probably ff sanias
G. sing. N. pi., yahvias A. pi., suparttias9 N. A. pi.

Inflexion.
376. T h e forms actually occurring if made from dhi- 'thought', yajña-
s'rí- m. f. 'adorning the sacrifice', sena-n'i- m. 'leader o f an army', rat hi- m. f.
'charioteer' respectively, would be the following:
A . 1. sing. N. dhis. A. dhiyam. I. dhiyi. D . dhiyé. G. dhiyds. —
PI. N. dh'iyas. A . dhiyas. I. dhibhis. G. dhTnám10. L. dhlsu.
2. s i n g . N. yajña-sris. A . yajña-sriyam. I. yajña-sriya. D . yajña-sriye.
G. yajña-sríyas. — D u . N. A . yajña-sriya and yajña-srlyau (AV.). — PI.
N. yajña-sríyas. A. yajña-sríyas. I. yajña-sríbhis.
3. sing. N. scnü-nís. A . senS-níam. D . sena-nie. G. sena-nias. — D u .
N. A. sena-nía. G. scni-nios. — Pl. N. senl-nias. A . senS-tt'tas. D. sena-
níbhyas. G. senS-ninim.
B . Sing. N. rat his. A . rathíam. I. rathía. D. rat hie. G. rathias.
V . rathi. — D u . N. A. rathía. I. f. rathibhyim. G . f. rathíos. L. rathios. —
PI. N. rathias. A rathias. I. rathibhis. D. f. rathíbhyas. G . rathinSm.
L . f. rath is u.

> In these words the accent is shifted 5 GRASSMANN regards this as a f. of an

to a vowel ending in weak cases. adjective samudta••
> The final vowel in this word is perhaps 6 S e e W H I T N E Y o n A V . IV. 3 7 s .
radical in origin (from ya• 'go'). 7 S e e LANMAN 3 7 1 3 .
J The V. pl. su-hastias (ix.46*), presupposes 8 In I. 1227 starts seems to be the equi-
a stem su-hasti-, but as the form is a m.,valent of stri. See pw. s. v.
the reading ought perhaps to be emended 9 C p . LANMAN 3 7 2 ' .
to suhastias with BR. 1 0 The form dhtnam occurs 7 times in

\ hastini• (ix. 3'7) means 'having a hand'.the RV., dhiyam only once.
 871

T h e forms a c t u a l l y occurring a r e the f o l l o w i n g :

S i n g . N . A . I. m . vis. — f. dhis, bhis, sris. — 2 . m . itthadlus, ksatra-
sris, ghrta-sris, darsata-sris, durd-adhls, mdrya-s'rls, visvato-dhTs, sv-adhis. —
f. abhi-sris. — 3. m. agre-nis (VS. vi. 2), grima-nis, takva-vis, devaois and
deva-vis, patsu-tas-sis, pada-nis (AV.), pada-vis, pari-vis ( V S . vi. 6), parna-vis,
pra-kris (AV.), pra-nenis, madhyama-sis, manyu-mis, yajna-nis, yajna-pris ( V S .
X X V I I . 31), vasa-nis, sadyah-kris, sena-nis, skambha-nis ( V S . I . 19), syona-sis.—
f. pra-kris (AV.), vrata-nis. — B . m . a-rathts\ privis, su privis, rath'is1
sahasra-staris, hiranya-vSsls. — f. a-dur-mangalls, arunis, kalyHnis, kfsnis,
ksonis*, gandharvis, gauris, jatris• (AV.), tandris ( A V . \ datis, naptis, nadis,
mahisis' ( T S . 1. 2. I2 J ), yamis, yatudhanis (AV.), rathis, laksmis, lalamis,
visva-rUpis ( T S . 1.5.6*), vfkis, sakatis, sabal'is {TS.iv. 3 . 1 iS), sasarparls, simhis
(TS. 1. 2. 121), su-matiga/is6, starisi.
Acc. A. 1. f. dhiyam, bhiyam, sriyam. — 2. m. dur-adhiam, sv-Sdhiam,
adhvara-sriyam, ksatra-sriyam, ghfta-sriyam, jana-sriyam, yajna-sriyam, su-
sriyarn, hari-sriyam8. — f. abhi-sriyam. — 3. m. gathi-niam, grama-niam
(VS. xxx. 20), yajiia-niam; deua-viam, prati-viam; abhi-priyam, ghrta-priyam
( A V . ) , brahma-priyam. — f . dcva-viam— B . m . rathiam, su-praviam. —
f. atharviam, arayiam, kumSriam (AV.), kadiam ( A V . ) , gaurlam, nadiam,
naptiam, nandiam, prapharviam, yamiam, laksm'tam ( A V . ) , lalimlam ( A V . ) ,
vibaliam, viliptiam ( A V . ) , villdhiam ( A V . ) , visva-rapiam, vfklam, simhiam,
sOrmiam, stariam ,0, sphigiam, svariam.
I. A. 1. f. dhiyA, bhiya, Sriyd. — 2. m. du-dhia. — f. avadya-bhiyi 1
a-dhiA12 (AV.). — B . m . rathia. — f. tila-pinjia" (AV.), palllid1* (AV.),
mandukta, vesia, sahasra-parnui1J (AV.), sUrmia, sphig'ta.— T h e form tapani
m a y b e a contraction for tapaniaf'3.
D . A . 1. f. dhiyl, iV/y?. — 2 . m . itt/id-dhiye, dur-adhie, da-dhie. —
f. a-dhie. — 3 . m . gana-sriye ( V S . X X I I . 30), yajna-priye; jihma-sie, senl-nie
(VS. xvi. 17). — B. m. rathie, su-pravie— f. nindle, mesie, vrkie.
G.'5 A. 1. f. dhiyas. — 2. m. du-dhlas, su-dhias. — n. sv-idhias16. —
3. m. gana-sriyas; gatha-nias, manyu-mias^. — B. m. ahias, su-pravias. —
f. atharias, apias,8, nadias, nisti-grias, pf santas, mesias, sfttias.
L . f. gauri (ix. 1 2 - J ) a n d sarasi ( V I I . 103*) m a y b e locatives containing
the n o r m a l e n d i n g -«'.

1 There is also the transition form arts I 9 In agreement with tvacam (ix. 74 s ).
(VS. vi. 36)^ | •o This form is once (vn.68 8 ) pronounced
2 On rathrva occurring once or twice for slaryam, being one of the two only examples
ralhir iva, cp. L A N M A N 375 (bottom). | in the RV. of the i in this declension being
3 The N. sing, once (1. 1805) appears | pronounced as y before a vowel.
without the -s as i;ont. This word has j 11 Accented as if -bhiya were used indepen-
other forms also according to the deri- dently; the form occurs in a late hymn
vative T- declension; cp. L A N M A N 3 7 2 (x. 107J).
(bottom). | 12 Irregular accentuation of the ending.
4 The reading of the Mss. in AV. XX. 48* <3 Otherwise it may be an I. of the deri-
is jatris; the edition has janis. vative «-declension.
s This is a transition from the derivative '4 Cp. L A N M A N 382 3 .
<• declension for the ma hift of the RV. >5 There is no example of an ablative.
6 The AV. has su-mangati three times; 16 This seems to be the only actual n.
cp. L A N M A N 3 7 7 (top). form of this declension in the RV.
7 There are also the transition forms dra/it 17 The form ahi-ghnyas (AV.) is a transition
(VI.2 45), satvaris (TS.9 IV. 4. 4'), devis (AV. VI. form with shift of accent from the deri-
59 ); variants (1. 140 ) is a purely metrical vative «-declension.
lengthening; cp. L A N M A N 3 7 7 S . •8 The form arunis (1. H I 3 ) may be con-
8 This form is also once ^VaL II. 10) used tracted for amnios.
in agreement with a neuter substantive
(gotrdm).
272

V . B . m . daksi— f. arSyi, mahe-nadi', yami, laksmi (AV.).

D u . N . A . A. 2. f. abhi-sriya, ghrta-sriyS.— 3. m . mana-nia, sadha-nia;
senani-gramanyau (VS. xv. 15). — f. abhi-sriyau (AV.). — B . m . rathia. —
f. cakriya, nadia, naptia, yamia, sakthia, Sfnt'a; cakriyau ( S V ) , nldyau (AV.),
sakthiau (AV.) 3.
I. B . f. ksonibhyam. — G . A . 3. m.yajña-nios. — B . f. onios4, cakrios. —
L . B . f. onios, naptios.
P I . N . V . A . 1. f. dhlyas, sriyas5. — 2. m . dlrgluldhiyas, durad/tías,
dud/iías, nána-dhiyas, su-dhiyas, sv-üd/iías; agni-sriyas, adhvara-iriyas, su-
íriyas. — f. adhias, zyiidhias6 (AV.). — 3. m . grima-nías (AV.), dera-vias,
pada-vias, sadha-nias; abht-priyas, kadha-priyas, gana-srtyas, pari-priyis. —
f. abhi-sriyas, a-priyas (AV.), pra-nias, váta-pramiyas. — B . m . ahias. apathias,
rSthias, su-hastias1.— f. apastas (VS. x. 7), arayias (AV.), arunias, enias,
kalyanias, kavasias (VS. x x . 40, 60), ga ¡trias, tíksria-srngias, nadias, tiiidias
(AV.), mayarías, yatu-dhanias (AV.), rathias, ¿akunías (AV.), vaksias, vi-kesias
(AV.), vyasta-kesías (AV.), samudriyas, sahasra-parnias{ AV.), starias. — With
/ p r o n o u n c e d a s / : once nadyas (VII. 504) and 6 forms in the AV.,
asvataryas, nadyas, naptyas, nadyas, pippalyas, vrksa-sarpyas.
A c c . A . 1. f. dhiyas, bhíyas (AV.), bhiyás (TS. iv. 1.7J = VS. xxvu. 7),
sriyas. — 2. m . duradhTas, dodhias, su-sriyas8. — f. adhias (AV.). — 3. m .
sadha-nias.— B . m . ahias, duspravias, rathias. — f. arayias (AV.), asta-karnias,
kildsias, khdrtas, dehias, nadias, naptias, mesias, yamias, yatu-dhanias,
samudriyas, sambadha-tandrias (AV.) 'affliction and exhaustion', starias
I. A . r. f.dhlbhis, sribhis "'. — 2. m . sv-adhibhis. — 3. m . gana-sribhis' \
— B . m . hiranya-vahbhis. — f. kalyaníbhis, ksonibhis, nadibhis, naptibhis.
D . 1 2 A . 3. m . rta-nibhyas", sva-nibhyas11 (VS.xvi.27), sena-nibhyas11 (VS.
xvi. 26). — B . f. aparibhyas, nadibhyas (VS. x x x . 8).
G . A . 1. f. dhinám and dhiyám, srlnám. — 3. f. hiranya-vinam. —
B . m . ahinam, nadinam 'invokers', rathhiam'3. — f. arunínam, krimínam (AV. ),
nadínam, purusínam, svarinam.
L . A . 1. f. dhlsíi. — B . f. aparisit, arwtfsu, nad/suu.

3. b. Stems in derivative -/.

LANMAN, N o u n - I n f l e c t i o n 365—400. — WHITNEY, Sanskrit Grammar 3^2—366.
377. i. This declension embraces a very considerable number of stems
which are formed by means of the suffix -/(originally-^/) and, except seven
masculines, are restricted to the f. gender. It largely supplies the f. form ot
words requiring inflexion in more than one gender. Feminine stems are thus
made from nouns in -a, e.g. devi- (m. dera-)-, from adjectives in -//; e. g.
prthv-i- (m. prt/iH-)-, from present participles in -ant) e. g. mad ant-i-

> Pada JAaifi; cp. RPr. IV. 41. t i v e /-declension deva-srfs{TS. i v . 6. 32 = V S .

* Treated as a compound in t h e F a d a x v i i . 56) ' w o r s h i p p i n g the g o d s ' .
(vill. 74'5) though make is V. 9 A l s o t h e t r a n s i t i o n f o r m s/riyus-, o n
J T h e A V . s h o w s 110 e x a m p l e o f -¡a. It ya/wias and suparnias see 375 a a.
h a s three transition f o r m s a>nfiaii,phalgnnyau, >o A l s o the t r a n s i t i o n form strlbhis ( a c c e n t e d
akfyltu. a s a m o n o s y l l a b i c stem).
•4 C p . A P r . I I I . 61. " M e t r i c a l s h o r t e n i n g ; s e e LANMAN 3723.
5 A l s o t h e transition f o r m striyas. " T h e r e is n o e x a m p l e o f an A b . m. or f.
6 This w o u l d b e vya-dhiyas in t h e R V . 13 The accent of the G. atasinam 'beggars'
w h e r e in c o m p o u n d s e n d i n g in -dhl- t h e F w o u l d s e e m to r e q u i r e a s t e m atasi- a n d
if u n a c c e n t e d is split. not atasi-.
7 S e e a b o v e , 375 B a a , n o t e 3. •4 T h e r e i s a l s o t h e t r a n s i t i o n form strlfu
8 A l s o t h e transition f o r m t o t h e d e r i v a - a c c e n t e d as a m o n o s y l l a b l e .
 »73

(m. madant-), -dnt, e. g. adat-i- (m. adant-), or -at, e . g . p i p r a t - l - ( m . p i p rat-);

from perfect participles in -vams, e. g. jagmiis-l- (m. jaganvtims-); from
comparatives in - y a m s , e. g. navlyas-T- (m. navTyetms-); from words in -tar
(-tr), e. g. avitr-i- (m. avitar-); from adjectives in -mant, e. g. dhenu-mat-l-
(m. dhenu-mant-), and -vant, e. g. ama-vat-T- (m. ama-vant-); from nouns in
-an, e. g. sam-rijh-x- (m. rajan-), -van, e. g. rtd-var-T- (m. rta-van-)\ from
adjectives' in -in, e . g . arkin-T- (m. arkin-); from compounds ending in -anc,
e. g. arvdc-T- (m. arvSnc-), in -drs, e. g. su-dfs-T-, in -pad, e. g. a-pad-l-, and
in -han, e. g. a-pati-ghn-i-.
2 . There is besides a large group of m i s c e l l a n e o u s f. s t e m s of an
independent character, having no corresponding m. 2 , e. g. sdc-t- 'might'.
3 . T h e s e v e n m . s t e m s o f which five are proper names, are: Tirasci-,
Namf-, PrthT-, Matall-, Sobharlrdstrl- 'ruler', siri- 'weaver'.
a. T h e stems of thix declension (in contrast with those of the B group of the
radical declension) do not normally accent t h e suffix. The exceptions to this rule
are of a definite character.
1. When in the first f. group there is a corresponding m. accented on a final syllable
which is liable to be reduced in such a way as to be incapable of bearing the accent,
the acute is thrown forward on the -T; e. g. m. uru-, f. urv-U; m. netar-, f. ne/r-f-;
m. ad-ant-, f. ad-at-i-; m. praty-anc-, f. pratic-i--, m. -han-, f,-ghn-t-. When the m. ends in
-a, the accent also in several stems remains on the corresponding -«; thus m. dtvd-,
f. devt-\ papa- 'evil', f. pdpf-A\ m. puro-gava- 'leader', f. puro-gavt-\ m. rama- 'night',
f. rami-; m. vamra- 'ant', f. vamri-. More usually, however, the accent of such feminines
is thrown back on the first syllable 5 ; thus m. ayasa- 'made of iron', f. ayasT-; m. arufa-
'red', f. aru}T-\ m. gandharva- 'belonging to the Gandharvas', f. gandharvl-; m. /avisa-
'strong', f. laviu- 'strength'; m. parufd- 'reed', f. parujni- 'reedy', N. of a river; m. falita-
'grey', f. paliknT-; m. mahifd-b 'buffalo', f. mahifJ-i m. rohria- 'ruddy', f. rihini- 'ruddy
cow', m. iam-gaya- 'procuring prosperity for the household', f. sam-gayt-; m. syava- 'brown',
f. syavi-; m. lyetd- 'white', f. syini- 'white cow'.
2. Again, the miscellaneous group of feminines hardly ever accents the final -< of the
stem except when it is a proper name, a shift of accent having here probably taken
place to indicate a change of meaning; thus aranyant- 'Forest-goddess', arundhati- ' (AV.)
N. of a plant and a star, tndrani- 'Indra's wife', rodasi- N. of the Aivins' wife, vadhri-
maii- N. of a mythical female, varunant- 'Varuija's wife', iavasi• N. of Indra's mother,
sinrvati- N. of a goddess; and the river names ahjasl•, asikni-8 (but aiikni• 'black' and
'night'), go-mat-i- (but go-mai-I- 'rich in cows'), iutudri-.

Inflexion.
3 7 8 . The inflexion of the derivative r- stems stands in marked contrast
with that of the radical I- stems in three respects: ( 1 ) no - s is added in
t h e N . s i n g , masculine or feminine; ( 2 ) the e n d i n g s d i v e r g e considerably
f r o m t h e n o r m a l ones, the Sing. A. taking -m, the D. -at, the Ab. G. -as,
the L. -Urn, the du. N. A . -7, the pi. N. A . -J; ( 3 ) stems accented on the
final vowel s h i f t t h e a c u t e to the ending in the weak cases of the sing.,
in the G. L. du., and the G. pi.

1
Adjectives ending in -a do not form ! adjectives and all participles ending in -a
their f. in -i unless they are accented on the j form their f. with -a.
final syllable, when the accent almost always 1 S This is the converse of the accentuation
shifts to the first syllable; e. g. arufl- from in the B group of the radical -< declension,
arufi-; but papa- has päpU beside papa-. 1 where the m. in unaccented -a throws the
' A list of these is given by GRASSMANN, | acute on the final -< of the f.
6
Wörterbuch 1722—23. Similarly varütf- 'protector', f. värütr-X-,
3 Cp. ZUBATY, zu den altindischen mann- 7 Originally a present participle *a-rundhat-U
lichen f-stämmen, Sitzungsberichte d. Böhm, 'not hindering'.
Ges. d. Wiss. 1897, XIX (treats also of the , 8 dstkni- also occurs once as the N. of
radical «-stems used in the masc.). I the river.
4 Beside papa-. The great majority of \
Indo-ariscb« Philologie. I. 4. 18
274 L ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4. VEDIC GRAMMAR.

The forms actually occurring, if made from devi- 'goddess', would be

as follows:
Sing. N. devi. A. devim. I, devyd. D. devydi. Ab. devyds. G. devyds.
L. devyam. V. devi.
Du. N. A. devi, V. d<kn. D. Ab. devibhyam. G. L. devyos.
P L N. devis. A. devis. I. devibhis. D. devibhyas. Ab. devibhyas.
G. drulndm. L. devisu. V . devis.
Forms actually occurring are the following:
Sing. N. The m. forms are: naml, prthl, vidtali, rdstrl, sobharT. The
f. forms are very common, being made from nearly 300 stems in the R V .
Among the most frequent are: prthivi 'earth' (57), drvi (48), sarasvati (43)
N. of a goddess, matii 'great' (35), ucchdntl 'shining' (16), yati 'going' (14),
jdnitrl 'mother' (10), brhati 'great' (10), ghrtdci 'filled with ghee* (9),
maghoni 'bountiful' (9), stri1 'woman' (3) 2 .
A. m. ndmlm. — The f. is formed from over 100 stems in the R V .
Among the commonest forms are: prthivim (62), mahim3 (35), devim (18),
tdvisim (13), urvim (9) 'wide', pipyuslm4 (9) 'swelling' 5 .
I. This case is formed with the normal ending -a. The only m . form is
ndmya. But there are about 40 f. forms in the R V . In more than two-thirds
of these the suffix is pronounced as a vowel 6 -is (in oxytones -id), in the rest
as a semivowel -yd (in oxytones -yd). The stem sdml- 'labour' has, beside
sdmyn, the contracted form sdml, which also appears in the compound su-sami
'with great care*. At the end of a Pada and before vowels 7 this I. sdml is
shortened to s'dmiK The forms occurring are: 1. dnvya 'subtile', asvabhidhdnya
(AV.) 'halter', dhavatya 'furnished with horses', asiknya9 (AV.), kundrndcyii
'house lizard', kumbhyft (TS.m. 2.8 4 ) 'jar', gata-mdtya 'spacious', gayatryd (TS.
11.2.48) a metre, ghrtdcya, citdntya 'observing', citayantya 'appearing', jagatyii
(TS. n. 21.4 8 ), a metre, tmanya 'by oneself, ddvidyutatya. 'glittering', devdcya
'directed towards the gods', ddivyH (AV.) 'divine', ndvyasyci 'new', pdtnya 'wife',
mddhu-matya 'accompanied by sweetness', rohinyS, vasvya 'good', vajavatyS
'rich in treasure', vdsya (AV.) 'knife', visva-bhesaj'yS (AV.) 'all-healing', viivCicya
'universal', vlsvyH 'everywhere' (adv.), sacya 'might', sdrnya, sarmayautya 'pro-
tecting', simyi 'work', satrdcyi 'attentive', samicyn (Kh. 111. io*) a goddess,
sdrasvatya (AV.), soma-vatya 'accompanied with Soma', st'tbhantyd 'praising',
hdrinya 'yellow', hiranydyaIO 'golden'. — Oxytones with shift of accent:
atinadyd (AV.) 'proper food', asiknya, devyA, pur anya 'ancient', prthivyd,
ma/iyd, samiinyd 'similar', sadhSranyd11 'common', sDcyd 'needle', sautramanyd
(AV.) a kind of Indra sacrifice. The TS. and VS. also have urvyd as an
a d v e r b 'afar', which in the RV. appears only in the modified form urviyd.
D. The ending looks like -at, e. g. devy-di\ but it is doubtless in
origin the normal ending -e fused with the suffix -ya, i. e. -yai = -ya-e1'. Only
13 forms (all f.) occur in the R V . These are, besides a few others from the later
1 Cp. WIEDEMANN, B B . 2 7 , 2 1 1 , footnote. | 7 T h i s a l s o o c c u r s in t h e c o m p o u n d
' In the A V . t h e r e are a l s o t h e transition ' urvi-u/ii (vi. 24«), if tuvi- - t h e a d v . inslr.
f o r m s a-durmangati, su-mangali, nadt. I n R V . urvya.
r. 1 8 0 ifoni h a s p e r h a p s d r o p p e d its -s o w i n g
5 8 T h e c o m p o u n d su-sami also occurs o n c e
to the f o l l o w i n g s-. in t h e T S . V S . a s w e l l as t h e R V .
3 P e r h a p s to b e read u n c o n t r a c t e d as 9 P r o b a b l y a n error f o r dsiktiyas-, s e e
mahiam in X. 505; vänlm (11. 118) is also toWHITNEY o n A V . v . 138.
be read as väniam. 10 For hiranyäyyä.
4 P e r f e c t p a r t i c i p l e o f pi- ' s w e l l ' . " C p . LANMAN 368 (top).
5 T h e r e is also t h e t r a n s i t i o n f o r m nadtm 1 1 A n i n d i c a t i o n of t h i s o r i g i n is p e r h a p s

(AV.). to b e f o u n d in t h e f a c t t h a t o f the 13 s t e m s
6 T h e vocalic pronunciation seems to b e the I in the R V . taking this dative only one,
c o m m o n e r in the A V . a l s o ; c p . L A N M A N 3 8 1 . | -pcUnyai, h a s t h e v o c a l i c p r o n u n c i a t i o n -iai
 «75
Samhitas: i. arvAcyai (VS. X X I I . 2 4 ) 'hitherward', dvScyai ( V S . X X I I . 2 4 ) 'downward',
d-vyatyai 'not desiring', iyatyai 'so great', udicyai (VS. XXII. 2 4 ) 'northern', jdgatyai
(VS. xxiv. 12), jarydi (TS. in. 2 . 2 ' ) 'mistress', jnryantyai 'aging', jyAyasyai 'elder',
dhenumdtyai 'yielding milk', parjdnya-patnyai' 'having Parjanya for a husband',
paiumatyai 'consisting of cattle', praticyai ( V S . X X I I . 2 4 ) 'western', prAcyai ( V S .
X X I I . 2 4 ) 'eastern', yaso-bhaginyai (VS. 11. 20) 'rich in glory', rAtryai (VS.xxiv. 25)
'night', viijavalyai, vis-pdtnyai, saha-patnyai'1 (AV.) 'united with the husband'.—
2. O x y t o n e s : indranyai ( V S . x x x v m . 3 ) , urvydi ( V S . X X I I . 2 7 ) , kalyanyai* (AV.)
'good', giiyatrydi (VS.xiu. 54). deiyai, prlhivyai, brhatydi, mahyai, rajasandydi
(VS. xix. 16) 'Soma stand', sinlvalydi, striyaH (AV.), hiranya-kesydi!> (AV.)
'gold-haired'.
A b . The ending looks like -as, e. g. prthivy-as\ but it is doubtless
the normal ending -as fused with the suffix -ya, i. e. -yds = •yd-asi. Only
five forms occur in the RV., besides a few others in the later Sarnhitas:
avadyavatyas (AV.) 'disgraceful', urvdsyas N. of a nymph, jagatyas (VS.
xiii. 56), jivantyas* 'living', dur-admanyAs (VS. 11. 20) 'bad food', pdtantyas
'flying', prthivyAs, brhatyAs (AV.), mahyAsb.
G. The ending is the same as in the Ab. and of similar origin,
m. tirascyAs7, pfthyas, sobharyas.—f. The forms occurring in the RV. 8 are:
i
r. ams'u-mdtyas > N. of a river, amhu-bh<!dyas ( V S . X X H I . 28) 'having a narrow slit',
uslndrattyas N. of a people, Urjayantyas 'vigorous', osadhyas (VS. I. 25) 'plant',
tavisyas, dAnumatyas 'rich in drops', mSms-pdcanyas 'flesh-cooking', rAtryas,
vivasvatyas 'shining', samyas, sosucatyas 'shining', sftsyantyas 'about to bear'. —
2. urvyAs 'earth', dei<yAs, prthivyAs, mahatyAs 'great', ya/yAs, yatyf'is 'going',
vadhrimatyAs N. of a woman, striyAsx°.
L . This case seems to be formed with the ending -am, e. g. devy-Am;
but it may be due to the fusion of a particle *-am11 with the suffix -ya. It
is formed from 1 5 stems in the R V . , where the pronunciation -iam is con-
siderably less than half as common 1 2 as -ycim. Forms occurring are:
I. asiknyam, ucchdntyam, udlcyam (TS. 11. 4. 14 1 )) jdgatyam (VS. xxxvm.
18), jahnAvyam 'race of Jahnu', drsddvatyam N. of a river, tiAryam (Kh.
iv. 133) 'woman', parusnyam N. of a river, prAcyam (TS.11.4.14 1 ), yaryAvatyam
'rich in streams', rAtryam, varanAvatyam (AV.) N. of a river, vasAvyam
'treasury', s'dcyam, sdrasvatyam N. of a river, soma-krdyanyjm (VS. VIII. 5 4 )
'serving as the price of Soma'. — 2. aranyanyAm, astryAm 'fire-place', asandyAm
(AV.) 'stool', gavinyAm (Kh.IV. 132) 'groin', gayatryAm (VS. AV.), catvarimsyAm
'fortieth', jyesthaghnyAm (AV.) N. of an asterism, devyAm, naracyAm (AV.) N.
of a river, prthivyAm, striyAm (AV.)
(and here the i is preceded by two con- \ ahiityas, krsyas, deva-hetyas, ralryas, itrsaktyas\
sonants). ¡probably also y-}nyas (vi. ^ l 4 ) , Pada yfnya.
1
To be pronounced -iai. ! 7 Pronounced tirascias. Hut cp. R o t h ,
1
This is an emendation for the reading ZDMG. 48, 1 1 5 (bottom).
kalyanyai of the edition; cp. I . A N M A N 383'. ; 8
This case is formed from more stems
3 With split i as in the radical 1- stems, in the AV. than in the R V . ; cp. LANMAN 355.
4 There are also the transition forms 9 In about 15 per cent of the following
bhiyai, Sriyai (VS. X I X . 9 4 ) , hnyai (VS. X I V . 3;) genitives the ending is pronounced ids.
from the radical I- declension, and from the There are also half a dozen transition
declension ¡icza-hutyai, turyai, niiylyai, forms from the i- declension in the R V . :
pHf/yai, hhujyai, bhftyai, Srutyai. annmatyiis, aratyas, nirftyas, pfsnyas, bhumyas
5 -yas is read -ias 4 times out of 25 in (once -with crasis in bhttmyopari X . 7 5 3 ' ,
yuvatyas-, there are many others in the A V . ;
the R V . : prlhiz uts 3 times and jivantias once,
always for metrical reasons, cp. L a n m a n 384 as jamyas (also Kh. v. 5'9); see L a n m a n 385».
(top). « Cp. B r u g m a n n , Grundriss 2, 265 (p. 619).
0 11
There are also the transition forms from It is much less common than this is
the /-declension, nabhyas, bhumyas, Iu'tyas\inand the A V .
from the AV. a-bhutyas, a-ratyas, a-sastyas, >J There are also two transition forms
18*
276 I . ALLGEMEINES UND S P R A C H E . 4. VEDIC GRAMMAR.

V . This case is formed, by shortening the final, from 38 stems (all f.) in the
RV. Examples are: devi(23), sarasi>ati(16J, prthivi(11), maghoni(9), ribhavan
'radiant' (8), ma hi (6). From the TS.: dmbali (vn.4.19 1 ) 'mother', kdmpTla-
vasini (vii. 4 . 1 9 1 ; VS.) 'living in Kamplla', darvi (1.8.4') 'ladle', patni (iv. 4. 12«),
mdnduki (iv. 6. i 2 ; VS.) 'frog', deva-yajani (VS.) 'whereon gods are adored'.
Du. N. A . V . This form in the R V . ends in -1 exclusively, being made
probably with the ending -i (like the f. du. of the derivative -a stems), which
coalesces with the -t of the stem'. There is only one m. form, the V. madhvi
'fond of sweetness', an epithet of the Asvins. The f. is very frequent, being
made from 76 stems in the R V . and from over 20 in the VS. The commonest
forms in the R V . are: rJdasl(87) 'the two worlds', dyjva-prthivi (65) 'heaven
and earth', mahi (27), urvi (20), prthivi (20), devi (13), samtci {11) 'united',
brhati (10), yahvi (6) 'active', aksi (6) 'eyes', prthv'i (5). From the TS.: N.
chdndasvati 'desiring' and siirya-patm ( i v . 3 . 1 1 1 ) 'having the sun as husband',
V. urvt, rodasi, patnT (iv. 7. 15 6 ).
5 4
a . T h e -» is t w i c e m e t r i c a l l y s h o r t e n e d in prthivi (n. 31 ; III. J4 ) a n d in mahi
(iv. 56*; x. 931).
b. I n t h e A V . t h r e e s t e m s of t h i s d e c l e n s i o n f o r m t r a n s i t i o n d u a l s 2 a c c o r d i n g
t o t h e r a d i c a l I- d e c l e n s i o n : aksyauf amiyau, phalgiinyau^ ; in o t h e r t e x t s : :;<!Vl >11 im iTS- 1IL
1
3. lo ) ' t h e g r o i n s ' , patnyau (VS. XXXI. 22), rebhalyau a n d su-parnyau ( K h . 1. 37).
I. aksibhyam (AV.), kumbhibhyam (VS. xix. 27), jostrlbhyam (VS. x x i . 5 1 )
'cherishing', mSdh&clbhyam (VS.) 'sweetness-loving', mAdhvibhyam (VS.).
D . rodasibhyam. — A b . aksibhySm, dy&vaprthivibhyam (VS. xxxvii. 18).
G. aksyos* (AV.; TS. ill. 2.5 5 ), Srtniyos (TS. iv. 5. 2J) 'ends of the bow',
drtnyos (VS.xvi. 9), divas-prthivyds5, ninyos6 'secret',pari-nftantyos (AV.) 'dancing
round', rodasyos1. — L>. aksyos (AV.), aranyos, drjunyos, dyavaprthivyos (VS.
xx. 10), patantyos, rodasyos, samJcyos.
PI. N. V . The ending seems to be simply s, but it is doubtless the
normal ending -as, which originally coalesced with the suffix -ya to -yas, the
latter then contracting to -is. In the m . the only example is siris. But the
f. is very frequent, being lormed trom 166 stems in the RV., and occurring
in the independent parts of the TS. at least 25 and of the VS. at least 40
times. The commonest forms are: devis (43), pUrvis (36) 'many', osadhis (27),
vdnts (12) 'songs', pdtms ( 1 1 ) , tnahis ( 1 1 ) , bhdtis (8) 'shining', yahvis (7),
devayantls (6) 'serving the gods', vasvls8 (6). In the Khilas occur the 7 forms
a-laksmis (11.66), anis (iv.8 s ), devis (IIL 10*), pavamdnis (in. i o ' ) N. of certain
hymns, bahvis (11. 8« etc.) 'many', svastyayanls (111. io'), hiranydyTs (v. 1 5 " ) .
a . T r a n s i t i o n s f r o m t h i s to t h e r a d i c a l I- d e c l e n s i o n a r e a l m o s t u n k n o w n t o t h e
R V . : striyas is t h e o n l y c e r t a i n e x a m p l e , a n d pfsanyas a n d suparnyas a r e p r o b a b l y s u c h ;
t h e t e n d e n c y to u s e s u c h t r a n s i t i o n f o r m s is o n l y i n c i p i e n t e v e n in t h e A V . 9 , w h e r e
urvyas >°(once) a n d rudaty&s ( o n c e ) o c c u r n . I n t h e K h i l a s also, o c c u r t h e t h r e e formsghrtaeyas

f r o m t h e r a d i c a l i- d e c l e n s i o n : sriyam (AV.) 5 W i t h t h e first m e m b e r of t h e D v a n d v a

a n d dutyam; five f r o m t h e <• d e c l e n s i o n : i n f l e c t e d in t h e s i n g . G .
6
puramdhyam, bhumyam, bhftyam, yuvat- hither the G. of nini- (m. ninya-) or
yam, samgaiyam; b e s i d e s at l e a s t 10 a d d i - s h o r t e n e d for ninyoyos.
t i o n a l o n e s f r o m t h e A V . : avyam, ikulydm, 7 O n c e (vi. 24-)) u s e d in t h e t e n s e of a n
cittyam, deva-hutyam, nabhyam ( + VS. XXIV.A b1 ). ,
pTStyam, bhutyam, yinyam ( + V S . ) , vcdyam, 8 ika-patnis (AV. x . ' h a v i n g o n e hus-
samityam. b a n d ' is N . pi. (., n o t N . s i n g . m .
1 Cp. BRUGMANN, G r u n d r i s s 2, 287 (p. 644). 9 T h e r e seem to be no such transitions
2
T h e r e a r e also t h e t r a n s i t i o n f o r m s f r o m in t h e T S . ; b u t t h e r e a r e at l e a s t 3 t o t h e i-
the radical 7- declension ksoni and once nodi. d e c l e n s i o1 n : ofadhayas (iv. 21.44), revatayas
J T h i s f o r m in -yau b e c o m e s u n i v e r s a l in (IV. 2. II ), patnayas (v. 2. II ).
10
the post-Vedic language. B e s i d e urvts w h i c h o c c u r s 9 t i m e s .
4 T h e Mss. in A V . v . 4»° r e a d a t f i s ; s e e si A n d y e t t h i s f o r m is t h e o n l y o n e in
WHITNEY'S n o t e . the post-Vedic language.
 277
( i l 8 4 ) , bahvyas (ill. II 2 ), pJzamanyds (hi. 10'). The VS. has about IO such forms: devyas
(XXXV11.-4) beside drvh, fatnyas (XXIII. 361 b e s i d e / a / « « (VI. 34), fhalavaiyas (XXII. 22), bakvyas
(XIX. 44) beside bahvis, mahdndmnyas (XXIli. 3 5 m a i t r a v a r u n y d s (XXIV. 2), maitryds (XXIV. 8),
vatsataryds (xxiv. 5), V. vamryas (xxxvil. 4), vaisvadevyas (XXIV. 5), sarasvatyas (xxiv. 4).
b. There are no transitions from the radical J- declension to this one in the RV.,
and in the AV. only ttadis (beside nadyds) and laismis (beside laifmyas). But the transi-
tions from the i- declension are numerous: angiitis (AV.), avanls, djtints, litis, j-sfts (AV.),
dkamauis (AV.), nditXs, nabkls (AV.), nirftis, nifkftls, parpiii (AV.), puramdhis, pfslis (AV.),
bhit mis, vihd-ifffTs, srtnlssdyonts.
A . This case is identical in form with the N., and its origin is doubtless
similar. It is very frequent, being made from more than 100 stems in the
RV. The commonest forms are: parvis (40), osadhis (24), mahis (18),
brhatis (12), dasXs (9) 'demonesses', patnis (7), pfsatis (7) 3 'dappled mares'.
I. This case is fairly frequent, being made from 32 stems in the RV.
The commonest forms are: sdcibhis (36), tavisxbhis (13), samxbhis (8),
osadhxbhis (6), prsatlbhis •> (5). The TS. has also simlbhts (v. 2.12'), sucibhis
(v. 2.1 i ' a ) ; the VS. arunibkis (xn.74), jagatxbhis (1. 21), sthal'ibhis (xix. 27)
'cooking-pots'.
D. This case is rare, being formed from only three stems in the RV.
and a few others in the later Samhitas: avyadhinlbhyas (VS.xvi.24) 'assailing
bands', osadhlbhyas, kesinlbhyas (AV.) 'hairy', gandharvd-painibhyas (VS.
AV.) 'having Gandharvas for spouses', ghosinibhyas (AV.) 'noisy', tdvisibhyas
tlsthantlbhyas (VS. X X I I . 25) 'standing', trmhatibhyas (VS. xvi. 24) 'piercing',
minusibhyas (TS. iv. 1. 43; VS. xi. 45) 'human', vrsanydntlbhyas 'desiring a
male', sasvatibhyas5 (AV.) 'everlasting', srdvantlbhyas (VS.xxu.25) 'flowing',
hradunil'hyas (VS.'xxir. 26) 'hail'.
Ab. Only three forms of this case occur in the RV.: osadhlbhyas,
padvdtibhyas'y possessed'of feet', brhatibhyas.
G. This case, which as is usual in the vowel declension takes the ending
-nam, is found in only one m. form, s.SbAarinam; but it is fairly common
in the f., being formed from 34 stems in the RV. The oxytones which
number only six6, throw the accent (as in the /-declension) on the ending:
bahvindm, bhahjatlnam 'breaking', bh itmiim, bhunjatinam 'gladdening1, mahindm7,
yatindm. This rule does not, however, hold in the SV. and VS., which have
mahinam (VS. 1. 70; iv. 3); nor in the AV. where the forms nUras'amsinam
'eulogies' and rdthajiteyinam 'chariot-conquering' occur. Of the remaining
28 genitives in the RV. 8 the commonest are: sasvatlnam (10), osadhinam»
(9), mdnusinam (8), s'danam (4), lynfinam(3) 'having departed'. From the
VS.: avyad/unTnam (xvi. 21).
L . This case is fairly common, being formed from 30 stems (all £) in the
RV. The most frequent forms are: osadhisu (20), mdnuslsu{8), ndhusTsu1neigh-
bouring', jdgatlsu (2) 'females', tdvinsu (2), yahvisu (2), rohinlsu" (2). The rest
occur only once'each 12 . From Khila 111. 1 5 ' ' : suddha-dantlsu 'white-toothed'.
1
This form should perhaps be read as 8 The G. navyasTnam is_ once used in
irenayas in V. 5 9 7 . agreement with the m. marutdm.
2 Also the transitions from the radical I- 9 kaninam, with contracted -yd-, is the
declension arums and ydludhdnls (AV.). only G. pi. of kanya- in the RV., kanyanam
J The stems forming this case in the RV. ^ occurs once in the AV.; see LANMAN 399
are enumerated by LANMAN 396. j (top).
4 narX- 'woman', by shortening its final Perfect participle of i- 'go'.
vowel, forms its D . according to the i- j There is also the transfer form from
declension: naribhyas. | the «- declension svahdkrtisu, in which the
5 Irregularly accented on the final of the long vowel is perhaps metrical. On the
stem, otherwise, sdsvati-. other hand strifu (accent) is a transfer to
6
Or 7 including stri-: strinam. the radical i-declension.
1
7 On the exceptions mahindm (X. 134 ), 1 1
L A N M A N enumerates the stems, 399
yaitndm (L 158 ), devayatindm ( L 3 6 ' ) , see (bottom).
s

LANMAN 398 (bottom).

 278 I. AI.LGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4. Y E D I C GRAMMAR.

4. a. R a d i c a l s t e m s in -/.

379. N o n o m i n a l /-stems are d e r i v e d from roots originally e n d i n g in -/,

as these ( s o m e six or s e v e n ) h a v e all j o i n e d the c o n s o n a n t d e c l e n s i o n b y
adding a determinative T h e r e are, h o w e v e r , a b o u t a d o z e n stems in
w h i c h i is p r o b a b l y r a d i c a l in a s e c o n d a r y sense, as representing a r e d u c e d
f o r m of r o o t s e n d i n g in -it2. T h e s e are with one or t w o e x c e p t i o n s m. c o m -
p o u n d s f o r m e d with -dhi — dha- ' p u t ' : api-dhi- ' c o v e r i n g ' , a-dh'i- ' p l e d g e ' ,
utsa-dh'i- ' r e c e p t a c l e o f a s p r i n g ' , udadhl- ' r e c e p t a c l e o f w a t e r ' , upa-dh:- 'part
o f t h e w h e e l b e t w e e n n a v e a n d f e l l y ' , garbha-dh'- 'nest', tii-dhl- 'treasury',
pari-dht- ' f e n c e ' , prati-dhi- ' c r o s s - p i e c e o f c a r - p o l e ' , pra-dhl- 'felly', seva-dhi-
'treasure', sá-dhi- ' a b o d e ' ; p e r h a p s a l s o osa-dhi- f. as a s h o r t e n e d form of
osa-dhi- 'plant'. B e s i d e s t h e s e t h e r e is prati-sthi- f. ' r e s i s t a n c e ' , f r o m stha-
'stand', a n d p r o b a b l y the r e d u p l i c a t e d stem y ay!- 'speeding', in w h i c h the -/'
is s e c o n d a r i l y r e d u c e d t h r o u g h the o l d e r f o r m yayí- f r o m the o f the r o o t
y,i- ' g o ' . T h e s e few stems h a v e n o t h i n g distinctive in their inflexion, which
f o l l o w s that o f the d e r i v a t i v e /-stems in e v e r y particular.
T h e f o r m s w h i c h o c c u r f r o m these w o r d s are the f o l l o w i n g :
S i n g . N . il-dh/'-s, i'ra-t//ii-s, nidhi-s, pari-dh!-s, prati-st/r's, yayi'-s, sá-dhi-s.- -
A. utsa-dhi-m, uda-dhl-m, osa-dhi-tn, garbha-dhi-m, ni-d/i'-m, pari-dhi-m, pra-
dhi-m, yayl-m, seva-dh!-m. — I . yay'ma. — Ab. uda-dhJs. — Du. N. upa-
dh', pra-dhi. — PI. N. ósa-dhayas, //i-dháyas, pari-dháyas, prati-dhayas, pra-
d/iáyas. — A. api dhin, uda-dhín, ni-dhín, pari-dhín, pra dhfn. — I. ni-
dhibhis. — G. ni-dhincim. — L. ni-dhi su.

4. b. D e r i v a t i v e s t e m s in -/'.
LANMAN, Noun Inflection 365—400. — WHITNEY, Grammar 335 — 340, 343. — Cp.
REICHF.LT, D i e abgeleiteten i- und //-stámme, B B . 25, 238—252.

380. T h i s d e c l e n s i o n e m b r a c e s a large n u m b e r of m. a n d f. stems.

T h e r e are c o m p a r a t i v e l y few neuter s t e m s ; and, e x c e p t the N. A . sing, a n d
pi., neuter f o r m s are rare, n o t o c c u r r i n g at all in several cases. T h e regular
inflexion is p r a c t i c a l l y the s a m e in all g e n d e r s , e x c e p t that the N . A . sing,
a n d pi. n. differ f r o m the m. a n d f., a n d the A . pi. m . a n d f. differ f r o m e a c h
other. T h e r e a r e s e v e r a l peculiarities here as r e g a r d s the formation o f the
s t e m , t h e endings, a n d a c c e n t u a t i o n . T h e final v o w e l of the stems s h o w s
G u $ a in three o f the w e a k c a s e s o f t h e singular ( D . A b . G.) as well as in
the V . sing, a n d the N. pi. m. f., while it is a b n o r m a l l y strengthened in the
L . sing. T h e n o r m a l e n d i n g -as of the A b . G . sing, is r e d u c e d to -s, while
that o f the L . sing, is lost. O x y t o n e stems, when the v o w e l is c h a n g e d t o
y, t h r o w the a c c e n t o n a f o l l o w i n g v o w e l n o t as Svarita but as U d á t t a ; a n d
e v e n on the -nam o f the G . pi., t h o u g h the stem v o w e l in that c a s e d o e s
n o t l o s e its s y l l a b i c value.
a. T h e only word which distinguishes s t r o n g forms is sákhi- 'friend', which takes
Vfddl.i in its strong stem sákháy-. T h e s e strong forms are frequent: Sing 1 . N. sák/iái,
A. sákháyam. D u . N. A. sákhayñ* and sákhayau. PI. N. sákhayas. This word has two
further irregularities, the simple stem sákhi- adding -e in the D . sákhy-c, and the abnormal
ending -ur in the A b . G . sákhy-ur. T h e other forms occurring are regular: S i n g . 1.
sákhya, V . sákhf. PI. A. sáth'm, I. sákhibhis, D. Ab. sákhibhyas, G . sakfiTnam. Eight com-
pounds in the K V . 5 are inflected in the same way (also sóma-sakha, V S . IV. 20); but of
four others, which have joined the a• declension, there occur the forms A . drivayil-
sakha-m (x. 39 1 0 ), yavayai-sakhá-s (X. 26 5| , A.fa/a vátysak/ia-m) and rnatuiaya/-sai/ia-'n (I. 4').

' See above, stems in derivative -t (307). 4 sakiiyii o c c u r s 6 t i m e s (also VS. XXVIII. 7),
* C p . LINDNER 56 and LANMAN 453. sákhayau only o n c e .
3 S e e J. Schmidt, K Z . 29, 526, note 5 S e e LANMAN 400
 VL DECLENSION. NOUNS. VOWEL STEMS. 279

b. 1. The stem path, when it means 'husband' and is uncompounded, shows

irregular inflexion in the Sing. D. and G. (like sakhi-) and the L . : D. patye, G. patynr1,
L. patyau. When it means 'lord'* or is compounded, it is regular: D. pataye, ¡t'ha'pataye,
G. pates, praja-patcs (TS.), L. go-patau. — 2. The stem jani- 'wife' also takes the abnormal
ending -ur in the G. sing.: j a n y u r T h i s stem has the further irregularity of forming
its N. sing, jam according to the derivative declension. — 3. The stem art- 'devout'
is irregular in forming several cases like the radical <- stems (except in accentuation):
Sing. A. aryam (beside arim), G. aryasK PI. N. A. m. f. aryas. The VS. has also the
N. sing, arts beside the aris of the RV.
c. Twenty-seven stems in the RV. show forms according to the derivative /- declen-
sion in the D. Ab. G. L. sing. f. 4, perhaps from a desire to add a distinctively f. ending
in a declension which does not distinguish genders in these cases. There is a steady
increase of such forms in the later Samhitis; thus while the RV. has only 7 datives in •«/
from «'- stems, the VS. has about 40.
d. In the RV. 4 or 5 stems show the influence of the n- declension in the
incipient use of the ending -nl in the N. A. n. du., and (i)-ni in N. A. n. pi.; and in the
I. sing., stems taking the ending -mi are already 5 times as numerous as those adding
the normal -a.
Inflexion.
381. The N. sing. m. f. always takes s5, the A. simply -m. The D. Ab.
G. V. gunate the suffix, to which the Ab. G. add only -s instead of -as. The
L. sing, has an altogether abnormal form ending in -a or -au. The N. pi. m. f.
gunates the -/, to which the normal ending -as is added. The A. pi. in the
m. adds -n, in the f. -.r, before which the vowel is lengthened. The G. pi.
always takes -nam, lengthening the preceding vowel. The frequent adjective
s'uci- 'bright' may be used to illustrate the forms actually occurring in the
three genders:
Sing. N. m. f. suets, n. h'tci. A. m. f. sucim, n. siici. I. m. sucya, sucina,
f. sucya, sucl, s'uci. D. m. f. n. siicaye. Ab. m. f. suces. G. m. f. n. slices.
L. m. f. n. sued, sucau. V. m. f. suce.
Du. N. A. V. m. f. n. s'l'teT. I. m. f. n. sitcibhySm. D. m. siicibhyam.
Ab. m. f. iuctbhyam. G. m. f. iucyos. L. m. f. n. iucyos.
PI. N. m. f. sucayas. N. A. n. sucT, si'/ei, suclni. A. m. suclrt, f. sucls.
I. m. f. sucibhis. D. m. f. sucibhyas. Ab. m. f. n. sucibhyas. G. m. f. si'icJnam.
L. m. f. n. s'ueisu.
Forms actually occurring are the following:
Sing. N. m. This form is very frequent, being made from nearly 250
stems in the RV. The commonest examples are: agnis (389) 'fire', kavis (90)
'sage', haris (58) 'tawny', brhas-pdtis (52) 'Lord ofPrayer', sucis (38) 'bright',
f s i s (32) 'seer', brahmanas-patis (23) 'Lord of Prayer", dtithis (20) 'guest'6.
a. The stem vi- 'bird', besides the regular N. vis, which occurs 6 times, has the
anomalously gunated form vis1, which occurs 5 times in the RV.
b. The pronominal forms na-kis (50) and ma-iis (13) 'no one' are old nominatives
which have become indeclinable.
N. f. This form is frequent, being made from 136 stems in the RV.
The commonest examples are: aditis (78) 'freedom', su-matis (22) 'bene-
volence', rai/s (22)'gift', nabhis (19) 'navel', matis (18) 'thought', yuvatls (18)
'maiden', bhamis (12) 'earth', pra-matis (11) 'providence'8.
1 This ending is probably due to the 5 Except the irregular m. sdkha and the
analogy of the words of relationship, pitur f. janX(janis in AV. X X . 4 8 ' is an emendation).
etc.; cp. KZ. 25, 289 and 242 f. 6 There is also the transition form from
' The VS., however, has patye visvasya the radical <- declension visa-iris 'beautifully
bkumanas 'lord of the whole world'. adorned' (TS.).
3 Cp. B B . 2 5 , 2 4 2 ; OLDENBERG, Z D M G . 54, 7 Cp. REICHELT, B B . 25, 250.
49-78. 8 Also the transition forms from the
4 Cp. REICHELT, BB. 25, 2 3 4 — 2 3 8 , and 1 declension aranyanis, ofadhts, naptii (AV.),
J. SCHMIDT, K Z . 2 7 , 382. | rains ( A V . , V S . xxxvu. 21).
Î8O I . AI.LGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4 . V E D I C GRAMMAR.

N. A. n. This form has no ending 1 . It is made from 37 stems in the

RV. The commonest examples are: mahi (84) 'great', b/uiri (47) 'much', sv-asti
(35) 'welfare', hirdi (9) 'heart". From other Saxnhitas: dn-abhisasti (VS.v. 5)
'blameless', a-meni (VS.xxxvm. 14) 'not casting', asthi (AV., VS.) 'bone', a-sthar!
(VS. 11. 27) 'not single-horsed', atma-sani (VS. xix. 48) 'life-winning', ¿ka-nemi
(AV.) 'having one felly', krivi(VS.x. 20) 'active'(?), ksatra-vdni (VS.i. 17) 'devoted
to warriors', gayatrd-vartani (TS.m. 1. io 1 ; VS.xi.8) 'moving in Gayatrl measures',
dddhi (AV., VS., Kh.m. 16') 'sour milk', pasu-sdni (VS.x1x.48) 'cattle-winning',
prsni {AV.) 'dappled', brahma-vani (VS.i. 17) 'devoted to Brahmans', loka-sdni
(VS. xix. 48) 'causing space', vddhri (AV.) 'emasculated', vftri -J (VS. xxi. 61)
'choiceworthy', sajata-vani (VS. 1. 17) 'conciliating relations'.
A. m . This form is very frequent, being made from 205 stems in the
RV. and occurring more then 1200 times. The commonest examples are: agnim
(269), rayim (180) 'wealth', yonim (61) 'receptacle', pdtim (49) 'lord' or 'hus-
band', dhim (40) 'serpent', ddrim (30) 'rock', kavim (28), atithim (25),
brhaspdtim (25), Adrim (24), Brmim (23) 'wave', puramdhim (8) 'bountiful',
yaylm (2) '(speeding) cloud', arlm4 (2) 'devout' 5 .
f. This is a frequent form, being made from 156 stems in the RV. and
occurring more than 600 times. It is thus about half as common as the m.
The examples occurring oftenest are: su-matim (41), su-stutim (35) 'excellent
praise', vrstim (26) 'rain', matim (22), ratlm (20), bhamim (19), puramdhim (5),
rayim (4)®.
I. m . This case is formed in two ways. 1. Five stems in the RV. add
the n o r m a l ending a, before which the -i is generally pronounced as y,
but half a dozen times as a vowel: patya 'husband', sdkhya, armyAT, pavyd
'felly', rayyd8. — 2. Owing to the influence of the «-declension 25 stems in the
RV. add -na instead of the normal -a: agnma, diighrina (VS. 11. 8) 'foot',
ddrina, as'ina 'sword', dkinil, arm'ina, kavlnS, kisina 'fist', kiki-divina 'blue jay',
jamadagnina N. of a seer, devapinil N. of a man, dhSsiva 'draught', panina
'niggard', patina 'lord', paprinU 'delivering', paridhina (VS.xvni.63; TS.v.7.7*)
'fence', panina (VS.1.16) 'hand',pfsnina (Kh.1n.157), bfhas-patina, maninS 'gem',
yayina, raylnS, rasmina 'rein', vadhrintl, vavrinU 'vesture', vastina (VS. x x v . 7)
'bladder', vfsa-nsbhina 'having strong naves', vrsnina 'strong', iucina, sasnitid
'bountiful'.
f. This case is formed in two ways. 1. About 30 stems in the RV.
add the n o r m a l e n d i n g -a, before which the -» is pronounced as a vowel
in about three-fourths of the occurrences of this form, and as y in the rest
The forms occurring are (a) o x y t o n e s : as'itya 'eighty', UtyA 'aid', kiriyA'°
(AV.) 'fame', panktyd (VS. xxni. 33) a metre, pttya 'draught', pustyi (AV. TS.)
'prosperity', matya, mithatya 'emulation', vasatys 'abode', vrstyA, sanyd (VS.
v. 7; TS. iv. 2. i J ) 'gain', sv-kTrfyd 'praise', su-matyft, su-stutyft, svastyft (VS.

» The only /'- stem taking -m it the pro-
nominal ki-m, probably owing to the false
analogy of iâ-m.
* LANMAN 377 enumerates the forms.
i The Pada text reads vari. According
to BR. vary a here stands for varyam a.
4 Also aryam formed like a radical >-
stem (though differently accented).
5 There are also the transitions from the F-
declension pfthim and sSbharim.
6 Also the transfers from the <- declension
aranyânSm, onim, Sjadhim, riirim (AV.),
snihUim (SV.).
7 Pronounced urmia, sometimes also palia,
saihia.
8
ghf't*»* (u. 336) possibly stands for
ghfni-iva (Pada -i-iva), ghfni then possibly
being a contracted I. for ghf-nya; cp. L A N M A N
379 (middle).
9 On the other hand -ya is pronounced
5 times as often as -id in the AV.; see
LANMAN 380.
All the Mss. but one read kirtya or
kiriya; see W H I T N E Y ' S note on x. 6*7.
 VI. DECLENSION. NOUNS. V O W E L STEMS. 281

viii. 15; TS. 1. 4. 44*); (b) o t h e r w i s e a c c e n t e d : abhi-sastya (AV.) 'curse',

dratya (AV.) 'malignity', dvartya 'distress', asdnya 'thunderbolt*, Akutya 'purpose',
Abhutyj 'ability', istya 'sacrifice', jdlpyJ 'whispering', ffptya (AV.) 'satisfaction',
tvlsya 'brilliance1, deva-hutya 'invocation of the gods', dhrtijya 'impulse';
mibhya ( V S . x x v . 9), pirsnya 'heel', puramdhya, pustya ( T S . nr. 1 . 5 ' ) , prd-
matyj, bhatya (AV.) 'growth', bhdmya, rdmhya 'speed', r,!/ya 'direction',
riicya (AV.) 'lustre', vicya 'seduction', s'dktyj (VS. xi. 2; TS. iv. 1. s 3 ) 'power',
su-bhatya (AV.) 'welfare', srnyil 'sickle', svddhitya (AV.) Icnife', hdrsya
'excitement'.
2. A contracted f o r m in -/ 1 is made by 35 stems in the R V . and
occurs more than twice as often as the uncontracted -ya. The forms occurring
are: d-cittt 'thoughtlessness', d-prabhati 'little effort', a-vyathi 'sure-footedness',
Ahutl 'oblation', ati, rju-nlti 'right guidance', cittl 'understanding', justi
'favour', didhiti 'devotion', du-stuti and du-stutl 'faulty hymn', dhiti* 'thought',
m-sin 'kindling', pari-vistT 'attendance', puru-jiti 'previous acquisition', pra-
nitx 'guidance', pra-bhatT 'violence', prd-yatl 'offering*, pra-yutl 'absence', mat:,
vartani 'felly', visit 'effort', viti 'enjoyment', vrsti, sakti and sdktt, srusti*
'willingness', sa-hatl 'joint invocation', su-diti 'bright radiance', su-nffi 'good
guidance', su-matf, su-mitt 'being well fixed', su-sas/f (Kh.11.10') 'good recitation',
su-sluti, hasta-cyuti 'quick motion of the hand'. Also su-paptani (1.182s)4
'with swift flight' (in Pada with -i); perhaps also the two forms heti (vi. 18 10 )
'missile' and -isfi (1. 180*) 'desire', which occurring before r- are given by
the Pada as hetih5 and -istt/i.
a. This form is further shortened to - i in about a dozen words 6 in
the RV., occurring altogether some 25 times: isani 'setting in motion', iipa-s'ruti
'giving ear to', upAbhrti 'bringing near', tri-visti 'thrice' ( = adv.), nl-tikti
'haste', prd-yukti 'impulse', vdsat-kfti 'exclamation va?a(', sadhd-stuti 'joint
praise', su-vrkti 'excellent praise', su-sasti 'good praise', sv-asti, havis-krti 'pre-
paration of the oblation'. Perhaps also a-smrti ( A V . V I I . 106') 'through forget-
fulness'.
b. A few forms follow the analogy of the m. in a d d i n g -na: dhasina
'abode', nabhina, prMna (VS. xv. 6) 'advance'.
n. There is no certain instance of a neuter I.: sucina (11.38s) is perhaps
an example, but it may be taken as a masculine.
D. m. The stem regularly takes Guna before adding the normal ending
-e\ e. g. rsay-e. This is a form of frequent occurrence, being made from 44
stems in the RV. The commonest examples are: agnaye (48), atrayei 12) N. of
a seer, sandye (12), ghr.naye (6) 'gladdening', dabhitaye (5) N. of a man 7 .
From the VS.: bnihmaye 'holy', bhuvantdye (xvi. 19) 'earth-extender'(?), vrsti-
vanaye (xxxvm. 6) 'rain-winning', sandhdye (xxx. 9) 'agreement'.
a. T h e only two stems not taking Guna are paii- 'husband' and saihiwhich
m a k e patye and sakhy?8. W h e n compounded paii- 'lord' forms its D. regularly as
•pataye\ e . g. bfhas-patayepraja-pataye (VS. XI. 66) ' L o r d of C r e a t u r e s ' , amkasas-patoye

1 4
T h i s form is, except in two instances, 5 C p . LANMAN 3 8 0 .
6
written with y before a, but is to be read T h e s e occur eight times at t h e end of
with hiatus; it coalesces in the written text a line or stanza, four times at the end of
with 1 or 1, but is not always to be so pro- an internal Pada b e f o r e vowels, two or three
nounced. times within a P a d a before vowels.
J
This is the only contracted form occur- 7 T h e stems which form this dative are
ring in t h e independent parts of the AV. e n u m e r a t e d b y LANMAN 382.
8
3 T h e form sadhri (II. 13«) is probably an T h e s e words are never pronounced as
adverb 'to t h e same goal' from sadhri- patie a n d saihie.
(LINDNER p . 112), o r it m i g h t b e an inst. f. 9 This is t h e only compound in t h e RV.
of sadhri- (LANMAN 3 8 0 3 ) . f o r m e d witl^ the D, of pdti-.
4 See JUT. vu. 15.
282

(VS. Vll. 30) ' L o r d o f d i s t r e s s ' , Hiaanapataye ( V S . 11. 2) ' L o r d o f the w o i l d ' , bhuva-patayc
( V S . 11. 6) 'L ord o f the a t m o s p h e r e ' , zacas-patayc ( V S . VII. 1) ' L o r d o f s p e e c h ' , samvesa-fatnye
V S . 11.20) 'I c,rd o f r e s t ' ; also in the e x p r e s s i o n s kfitrasya pataye ( A V ) ' L o r d o f t h e F i e l d ' and
\bhiitasya pataye ( A V . ) ' L o r d o f the w o r l d ' , w h i c h are virtually c o m p o u n d s ' ; similarly d'tsam
pataye ( V S . XVI. 17) *; but patyc\ visvasya bhumatias (VS. XVII. 78; ' L o r d of all the earth'.

f. This form is made like the m.; e . g . is/ay-e. It is very frequent, being
formed from 50 stems and occurring over 500 times in the R V . 'l'he
commonest examples are: utayc ( 8 8 ) , pitdye ( 6 7 ) , soma-pitaye (49) 'draught of
Soma', vdja-sataye (34) 'winning of booty', satdye (34) 'acquisition', vJtdye (31),
devd-vltaye (22) 'feast for the gods', istdye (20) 'impulse' 4 .
a . T h e f o r m iiti is f r e q u e n t l y used a s a d a t i v e , similarly an-iitTno help* o n c e and
vTti t w i c e , svasti o c c a s i o n a l l y h a s this v a l u e at t h e e n d o f a P a d a a n d w h e n it alter-
nates w i t h svastaye in v . S t 1 2 - '3, but it m a y b e i n t e n d e d for an a d v e r b 5 .
b . In the R V . s e v e n stems in (all b u t 2 of w h i c h o c c u r in M a n d a l a x), f o l l o w
the a n a l o g y of d e r i v a t i v e T- stems and t a k e t h e e n d i n g -ai: turyai ' v i c t o r y ' , deta-
il ulyai ' i n v o c a t i o n o f the g o d s ' , nirrtyai ' d i s s o l u t i o n ' , puftyai, bhujyai ' f a v o u r ' , bhftyai
'support', inityai ' b l e s s i n g ' . T h e A V . f o r m s s u c h d a t i v e s f r o m at least I I s t e m s ; the
T S . h a s a-samartyai (ill. 3. 8 ' ) 'non-injury', ditr-istyai (ill. 2. 8 3 ) 'failure in s a c r i f i c e ' ,
sakly<v (tv. 1. n ) ; the V S . has nearly 4 0 : a-ksityai (VI. 28) ' i m p e r i s h a b l e n e s s ' , adityai
(1. 301 ' A d i t i ' , anu-matyai ( x x i v . 32) 'assent', a-bhittyai ( x i . 64) 'not b u r s t i n g ' , abhi-iastyai
(11. 5 ', a-bhutyai ( x x x . 17) ' w r e t c h e d n e s s ' , a-raddhyai (XXX. 9) ' m i s c h a n c e ' , a-ritfyai (11. 3)
•safely', ava-ftyai ( x x x . 12) 'distress', a-hantyai ( x v i . 18) 'non-killing', akutyai (LV. 7),
Artyai ( x x x . 9 . 17) ' t r o u b l e ' , utkrantyai (XV.9) ' u p s t r i d i n g ' , ftyai (XXVII. 45) ' a r r i v a l ' , kfsyiu
(IX. 22) ' t i l l a g e ' , dur-iftyai (ll. 20), dhrajyai (VI. 18), nabhyai (XXXIX. 2), niskftyai (XXX. 9)
' a t o n e m e n t ' , paiiktyai (xill. 58), prati-fthityai ( x v . to) 'firm f o o t i n g ' , pra-sityaib (H. 20
' a t t a c k ' , prayas-cittyai ( x x x i x . 12) ' e x p i a t i o n ' , pretyai ( x x v n . 45), bhulyai (XII. 65), bhumya
( x x i v . 26), matyai ( x x I V . 39), mahyai ( x x i l . 20), rayyai (IX. 22), viviktyai (XXX. 13) ' s e p a r a -
tion', rfsfyai (XVIII. 28), vtdyai ( x i x . 16) ' a l t a r ' , vyustyai (XXII. 34) ' d a w n ' , vyrddhyai
IXXX. 17) 'failure', santyai (IU. 43) 'quiet', su-kfityai (XXXVII. 10) 'secure d w e l l i n g ' , hetyai
( x v i . 18) ' m i s s i l e ' .

n . T h e only form which seems to occur is sucaye.

A b . m . T h e stem takes Guna, to which -s only, instead of -as, is a d d e d ;
e. g. ddres. It is not common, being formed from only 8 or 9 stems in the
RV.: agne's ( T S . i v . 2. K h . iv. 6 s ) , dhes, udadhh 'water-receptacle', gires
'mountain', ghrnes 'heat', tirasci-rajes ( A V . ) 'striped across', parna-dhes (AV.)
'feather-holder', prajApates (TS. iv. 1. 114), plash (AV.) 'intestine', yones,
vrsa-kapes 'man-ape', satd-m-ates ? 'granting a hundred aids', sam-fies
'conflict'.
f. T h i s form is made in the same way as in the m. from 11 stems in
the RV.: ddites, dpltes 'entering (;'//-) into (apt)', abhi-sastes, abhi-hrutes
'injury', dmates 'indigence', arates, ahutes (AV.), dhase's 'abode', dhurtes 'injury',
nf-tes8 ( A V . ) , pdri-suta 'oppression', bhames (AV.), vasates, sruth 'course'.
a. T h e R V . h a s three f o r m s a c c o r d i n g to the d e r i v a t i v e f- d e c l e n s i o n : nabhyas
(X. 90M), bhumyas (1.80 4 ), hetyas (x.87'9). B e s i d e s t h e s e the A V . h a s : d bhupas, a-ratyas,
d-sastyas ' i m p r e c a t i o n ' , ahutyas, krsyas, deva-hetyas ' d i v i n e w e a p o n ' , ilrfaktyas 'headache';
probably a l s o y^nyas in yonyeva (VI. I 2 1 ) for yonya iva.
4

G . m . T h e regular form of this case is identical with that of the A b . ,

but is much more frequent, being m a d e from 42 stems in the R V . The
c o m m o n e s t e x a m p l e s a r e : agne's (55), vh (14), ddres (10), pan/s(&), bfhas-pates((>),
saris ( 5 ) ' p a t r o n ' , aires ( 4 ) , kaves ( 4 ) , d/iase's ( 4 ) ' d r a u g h t ' , /'hares ( 4 ) ; pates 'lord'

» E q u i v a l e n t t o kfetra-pati• (K.) and bhûia- 6 U s e d in the sense o f t h e a b l a t i v e w i t h

pàti- ( A V . ) . pihi ' p r o t e c t f r o m ' .
1 A n d a n u m b e r of o t h e r epithets in V S . 7 Cp. RICHTE», I F . 9, 5.
XVI. 1 7 — 2 3 . 8 T h i s f o r m nftes is p r o b a b l y an e r r o r
3 pa/ye o t h e r w i s e m e a n s ' h u s b a n d ' . f o r dries ' s k i n ' ; s e e WHITNEY'S n o t e on A V .
4 LANMAN 382 e n u m e r a t e s the s t e m s w h i c h vi. 1 8 3 .
t a k e this d a t i v e .
5 C p . LANMAN 383 (top).
 V I . DECLENSION. NOUNS. VOWEL STEMS. 283

occurs once. Elsewhere are found: jamdd-agnes (VS. 111. 62; Kh. v. 3 s ),
prajfipates (TS. lit. 1. 4 ' ; Kh. ill. 15'j), yayJs1 (Kh. 1. io').
a . T h e t w o s t e m s mi- and avi- ' s h e e p ' do not t a k e G u n a , a n d a d d t h e n o r m a l
e n d i n g -as: aryds* w h i c h o c c u r s n e a r l y 4 0 times, and dvvas w h i c h o c c u r s n e a r l y 2 0 times.
T h e s t e m pd/i-, w h e n m e a n i n g ' h u s b a n d ' , a n d sakhi- do not t a k e G u n a e i t h e r , but a d d
the a n o m a l o u s e n d i n g -ur: patyur, saihyur

f. This case, identical in form with the m., is made from 11 stems in
the RV.: dditts, abhi-sastes, dmates, is/A, krstes 'tillage', deva-vltes, nlrrtes,
pustes, prints, vrstes, vratdtes 'creeper'. This form is also made by at least
8 stems in the AV.
a. S i x s t e m s in the R V . f o r m genitives a c c o r d i n g to t h e d e r i v a t i v e I- d e c l e n s i o n ,
o c c u r r i n g 1 7 t i m e s a l t o g e t h e r : anu-matyas, arityas, nirflyas, ffsnyas, bhumyas, yuvatyas.
In the A V . such forms are made from at least 16 stems and occur over
5 0 t i m e s : jamyas ' a k i n ' e t c . O n e of these, adityis, o c c u r s also in t h e T S . (L 6 . 5 ' ) a n d
V S . (t. 1 1 ) .

n . The only example is bhfircs, which occurs 16 times.

L . This case in all genders ends very anomalously in -a or -au- The
latter ending occurs more than twice as often as the former in the RV.
(272 times to 126), while in the N. A. dual -a is nearly 7 times as frequent
as -au ( 1 1 4 5 times to 171) 4 . The general conditions under which the
parallel L. forms -3 and -au occur 5 are the same as apply to the dual
-H and -au: -a appears before consonants, -au (as -Hv) before vowels, e. g.
vlr yond vasat iv iva (ix. 6 2' 5) 'a bird in the receptacle as in a nest'. But
while the dual -il is the regular form at the end of a Pada, the L. -an is
almost exclusively found in that position 6 . As in the dual N. A. and the
perfect sing. 1 and 3, the <7-form is doubtless the earlier. It is most pro-
bably derived from a locative form with Guna (like the D. Ab. G. V. sing.),
e. g. *agndy-i, which dropped the ending (like some other locatives), *agn iy
then losing its y1 before consonants and lengthening its -a: agmi. The later
form agndu must have been due to the influence of the u- stems, the inflexion
of which is closely parallel to that of the i- stems, through the Sandhi form
-a which is common to both 8 .
m . 1. The -<? form is made from 7 stems and occurs 40 times in
the RV.: agmi, aja 'contest', uruvi, kuksa 'belly', ghf-na, yona, su-rabh/i9
'fragrant'. The AV. TS. VS. have no - J form in independent passages, but Kh.
ill. 1 5 19 has agntf.
2. The form in -au is taken by 27 stems in the RV.: agndu, ddrau,
aratau10 'manager', aratndu 'elbow', iijau, andu 'pin of the axle', Urmau,
gabhastau 'hand', girdu, go-patau 'lord', jlrdu11 'stream', trksau N. of a prince,
dhvasdnau 'sprinkler', ndniucau N. of a demon, nipltithau N. of a man,
pandu, prt-sutdu 'hostile attack', mcdhyatithau N. of a seer, yajhd-patau
'lord of sacrifice', yonau, rdthaintau N. of a man, vdnas-pdtau12 'lord of

» E m e n d a t i o n f o r yayäis. 8
Cp. MERINGEK, B B . I 6 , 2 2 4 .
' O n c e o r t w i c e to b e p r o n o u n c e d arias. 9 LANMAN 3 8 8 » , s u g g e s t s t h e p o s s i b i l i t y
j C p . W A C K E R N A G E L , K Z . 2 5 , 2 8 9 f. of r e s t o r i n g äjnyi in I. I I 2 1 0 a n d ydttayi in
4 C p . I.ANMAN 5 1 4 . x . 4Ö 6 - T h e n. L . a-prala is u s e d a d v e r b i a l l y
5 S e e I.ANMAN 3 8 5 ff.; and c p . for the = 'without recompense' (vui. 3 2 « ) ; cp. BAR-
dual 3 4 0 ff. a n d 5 7 4 — 5 7 6 . THOLOM AE, I F . 9, 2 5 5 f.
6
T h e L . -ä a p p e a r s o n l y 5 t i m e s at the 10
BR. w o u l d r e a d aratniu.
11
e n d o f a P ä d a , and t h e n only in the t w o firi- m a y b e f. a s t h e r e is n o t h i n g t o
f o r m s devatitä a n d särvatätä. s h o w the gender of the word.
7 Cp. the N. sakhä for *siMäy. The old ,J
The f o r m vänaspätau o c c u r s in K h . II.
L . m a y b e p r e s e r v e d in f e m i n i n e s like 1 0 5 also.
a^rtny-T- ' s h e w h o is b e s i d e A g n i ' ; cp. I F .
1 » , 3-
 284 L ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4. VEDIC GRAMMAR.

the forest', salmalâu 'silk-cotton tree', sânitau 'attainment', sAmvaranau 'des-

cendant of Samvarana', syâma-rasmau N. of a man, svâdhitau. The AV.
also forms the L. in -au from at least 16 stems; among them appears
the uncompounded patau ( A V . HI. 1 8 3 ) 'husband' 1 as a variant for jàne
in the corresponding passage of the R V . (x. 14s 4 ). T h e TS. has âhau
(v. 6. i 2 = A V . m. I3 1 ).
f. 1. T h e form in -â is made from 21 stems in the R V . : avanâ 'river-
bed', <7/4, ûditâ 'sunrise', ksêtra-sàta 'acquisition of land', gô-sâtâ 'winning of
cows', tokà-sâtâ 'attainment of offspring', devd-tâtâ 'worship of the gods',
dyumnd-sâtâ 'obtainment of strength', nAbha, nr-sUti 'capture of men', nema-
dhiti 'conflict', pit A, prd-bhrta 'offering', medhâ-sàtà 'receiving the oblation',
yAma-hatii 'invocation by prayer*, iâra-sâtà 'battle', sdm-rtâ, sarvd-tâtà
'perfect prosperity', sâ/A2, srutâ, svar-sâtâ 'attainment of heaven'. T h e A V .
has ntïbhà (vu. 6 2 ' ) ; and the SV. reads sdmtâtâ 'beneficent', as a variant
for sâmtâti of R V . vm. 18 7 . T h e TS. and VS. have no independent L. f. in -J.
2. T h e form in -au is more than twice as frequent, being made from
49 stems in the R V . T h e commonest examples are sâtdu (17), vAja-satau (16),
vyùstau (16) 'flush of dawn', abhistau (10) 'help', su-matâu (14), gdvistau (7)
'fight', istdu (6), ratdu (5), purvd-hatau3 (5) 'first invocation'. The A V . makes
this form from 7 stems in independent passages. T h e T S . has ùditau (1.8.123),
pûrvâ-cittau (iv. 2. i o ' ) 'first thought'; the VS. ratha-nàbhâu (xxxiv. 5) 'chariot
nave', rAtrau (xxni. 4) 'night'; and K h . 1. 1 1 4 inra-sntau.
a. There are 5 locatives f. formed according to the derivative t- declension with
the ending -Om: puramdkyâm, bhùmyâm, bhftyâm, yuvatyàm, sàm-gatyâm 'assembly'.
The AV. has 9 more : âvyàm, àkûtyâm, cittyàm, ifrvd-hûlyâm, prstyam 'rib', bhutyàm,
yfoiyâm, vidyàm ( + V S . X X V I U . 12), sâmityâm 'assembly'. T h e V S . has sanyam
(vm. 54).
b. T h e locative ¥é(tl* occurring twice (vi. i">; it. 34) is the only one formed from
an »- stem with the normal ending -i (= vldi-i). T h e form prânilï may also possibly be
a L. in m. 51 7 .
L . n . T h e only form in -a is a-pratâ (vm. 3 2 l 6 ) 'without recompense'
(used adverbially), and the only one in -au is saptd-rasmau ( A V . ix. 5 1 5 j
'seven-rayed'.
V . This case regularly gunates the final vowel in the m. and f. It is
very frequent in the m., being formed from 72 stems and occurring over
1100 times in the R V . In the f. it is not common, being formed from only
11 stems and occurring only 27 times in thé R V .
m . T h e commonest examples are: âgne* (799), paie (35), brhas-pate^ (32),
kave (26), brahmanas-pate (17), vanas-pate (14), âghrne (13) 'glowing', sal-
pate (13) 'lord of the seat', sakhe ( 1 1 ) ' . In K h . 1. 5 7 the anomalously
formed compound bhuvanas-pate 'lord of the world' occurs; in the V S .
8

ahghâre (iv. 27) a guardian of Soma, dfte (xxxvi. 18) 'bag', drApe (xvi. 47)
'causing to run', bâmbhâre (iv. 27) a guardian deity of Soma, bhuvas-pate (iv.
34) 'lord of the earth', sàtesudhe (xvi. 13) 'hundred-quivered', sapte (xxix.2)
'steed'.
a. T h e V . sobhare is a transfer from the t- declension ; and the compounds
pâvaia-ioce, bhadra-ioce, iukra-ioce are transfers from the -is declension, doubtless meant
to avoid the unusual form -iocis in the V .

1 T h e R V . has only the form patyau 6 Once (IX. 8o l ) with double accent bfhas-

•husband'. pate.
1 For this form in vi. 46» the SV. and 7 In mahe-mate 'O great-souled' (Indra), the

VS. have the variant silau. first member is anomalously gunated as well
3 This form occurs also in A V . v . I 1 . as the second; cp. mahe-nadi 'O great stream'.
• Cp. RPr. 1 28; II. 35. 8 Formed like vanas-pate.

5 Written with Pluti VS. v m . 1 0 : agnati.

 VI. DECLENSION. NOUNS. VOWEL STEMS. 285

f. The forms occurring in the R V . are: adite, anumate, asu-nite 'spirit-world',

is/e, upa-matc1 'granting (of wealth)', rjlte 'radiant', bhume, mate, yuvaie, satyatate1
'truth', sv-aiigure 'fair-fingered'. The A V . has dane1 'spoon'; the VS. svadhite.
a. There is also the transfer ofadhc from the I- declension.
Du. N. A . V . This form ends in -V and can be used in all genders
alike. The m . is very frequent, being made from 72 stems in the R V . The
commonest examples are: indrdgn! (78) 'Indra and Agni', harl (78), pdtl (33),
subhds-pdtx (21) 'lords of light'. Elsewhere also occur: sa-tatl (TS.in. 2.21) 'conti-
nuous'; bhari-rasml (Kh.iv.22 s ) 'many-rayed'; visva-vaparl (Kh.ir.22 s ) 'extend-
ing (?) everywhere'. T h e final vowel is shortened in saksdni (x. 32') 'united'.
f. The forms occurring in the R V . are: ita-uti 'extending from hence',
Uii, rjiti, jami, darvi, dyAva-bhiimX 'heaven and earth', dharayat-kavl 'protecting
the wise', puramdhi, bhuji 'patrons', yuvati, vasu-dhiti 'treasuries', s'ucX, sa-yonX
'of the same origin', su-praturtx 'very victorious', sruti.
n. The only two regular forms are suci4 and tigmd-hetl (AV.) 'having a
keen thrust'; also mahi (with shortened final)5. There are besides one or
two secondary forms with -nX made under the influence of the n- declension:
aksini (AV.) 'eyes' and perhaps harinl (ix. 70?) from Aari6.
I. m . indragnib/iySm, ddmpatibhy3.m (AV.) 'husband and wife', hdribhyam.—
f. vartanibhyam, sronibhyUm (VS.xxv.6) 'hips'. — n . sdkthibhyim 'thighs'.
D . m . itidragnibhyam, indra-bj-haspatibhyam (VS.VII. 23) 'Indra and Bfhas-
pati', hdribhyam1.
Ab. m . kuksibhyam (AV. VS.) panlbhyam (AV.). — f. parsnibhyam,
sronibhyam. — G. m. indrdgnyos, haryos. — f. yuvatyos.
L . m . kuksyos, gdbhastyosharyos. — f. jamyos-, gavlnyos (AV.) 'groins',
parsnyos (AV.). — n. sakthyos (VS. xxiv. 1).
PI. N. V . This form gunates the final vowel of the stem, adding the
normal ending -as in the m. and f.; e. g. agnay-as, Dtay-as. It is of very
frequent occurrence, but is nearly twice as common in the m. as the f.
m . This form is made from 109 stems in the R V . and occurs 523
times. The commonest examples are: kavayas (45), vayas (38), sUrayas (36),
hdrayas (31), agnayas (27), adrayas (26), fsayas (26), sucayas (18), pdtayas
(16), rasmdyas (16), vahnayas (15) 'conveyers'. In the VS. also occur: ajavdyas
'goats and sheep' (111. 43), vrsa-panayas (xxix. 44) 'strong-hoofed', vrlhdyas
(XVIII. 12) 'rice-plants'.
a. The stem art-, being the only >• stem that does not take Guna, forms its
N. pi. like the B group of the radical 1- stems (except the accent): ary-as, which occurs
16 times in the RV.
b. The form d-hrayas 'shameless' is a transfer from the radical i- declension, and
sMi/uirayas 'descendants of Sobharl' from the derivative I- declension.
f. This form is made from 66 stems and occurs 290 times in the R V .
The commonest examples are: utdyas (42), dhitdyas (21), matdyas (20),
dratayas (18), ratayas (18), krstdyas (17), ksitdyas (13) 'races', janayas (12),
vrstayas (12).
a. The stem art- has the same anomalous form as in the m.: ary-as, which occurs
4 times in the RV.

1
Agreeing with agne. 4 Occurring in x.85" and possibly iv. 56s.
* The VS. (II. 49) has darvi from darvi- = 5 Occurring x. 9754 and perhaps also iv. 56s.
darvi-. The VS. (vui. 43) also has vi-sruti 6 BR. and GRASsMANN place this form
which seems to be an irregular V. for vi- under harita-.
iruU; cp. pw. s. v. 7 No n. forms occur in the D. Ab. dual.
3 The derivative -i, -u and -i stems are 0 This word may be f. also.
the only ones which do not take -a or -au
in the dual.
286

b. About IO /- stems in the RY. have also N. pi. forms according to the derivative
/'- declension: avatiis1 'streams', itjanis 'births', ills', naktis 'nights', nirrtis, ¡uskrtls,
puramdhls, bhutnisviivti-krstis1 'dwelling among all men', sa-yonis. The AY. also has:
angiitis, fstis 'spears', dhamattis 'tubes', nab/us, parsms, prf/is.
c. The stems yayi- 'speeding', subhri- 'shining', karkari- 'lute' form their N. pi.
according to the radical T- declension: yayiyas, subhriyas (AY.), karkaryas (AY.).
d. Some »-stems have transfer forms according to the /-declension: ambayas,
arunayas, k:onayas\ 6jadhayas, saLvarayas (TS. v. 4 . 1 2 2 ; VS. X V I I L 2 2 ) . The TS. has also :
garbhtnayas (II. I. 26), patnayas (V. 2. I I 2 etc.), revatayas (V. 2. I I " , 'ariitrayas (IV. I. 6').
N . A . n. 1 . T h e n o r m a l f o r m , in which the ending -i coalesces
with the final of the stem to -1, is m a d e from 4 stems in the J\.V.: a-prati2
'irresistible', krudhmi 'irascible', tri 'three', s/'a. T h e final v o w e l of this
form is further s h o r t e n e d in six stems: aprati, a-sthuri 'not single-horsed',
jami, bhiiri, samii 'work', surabhi. T h e A V . has also ma hi (besides aprati
and bhiiri). T h e forms in -1 and -i (which are of about equal frequency)
taken together occur about 50 times in the R V .
2. T h e r e is a s e c o n d a r y f o r m (following the analogy of the « stems)
in -/>»/, which is taken b y 4 stems having the primary form also: apratitii,
bhiirlni, iuclni, surabhini. T h e s e forms occur about 1 4 times. T h e A V . has
also dksini and dstJu/ii; the latter form occurs in the T S . as well (v. 7. 2 ' ) ;
the V S . has s'ingint ( x x x i x . 8) 'entrails'.
A . m . T h e ending -n here (as in the -a and -u declension) represents
original -ns, which in one half (42) of the total occurrences (84) of these
forms in -in in the R V . is preserved as -//is or (before vowels) -mr. This
A . is made from 3 1 stems in the R V « . T h e commonest examples are
sarin ( 1 4 ) , vdnas-pdtln (11), panin (9), rasmln (6), sdkhin (5), girin (4)'.
T h e T S . also has ddhi-patln (1. 6. 6 4 ) 'lords', dhin (iv. 5. i 2 ; V S . x v i . 5 ) ; the V S .
has tiUirin ( x x i v . 20) 'partridges', Lijinb ( x x u i . 8) 'parched grain', siicinb
( X X I I I . 8) 'groats'.

a. The stem art- is the only one which does not take •», but adds the normal
ending -as instead, the A. aryas (which occurs 7 times in the RV.) being thus identical
with the N. pi. The stem vi- in its only occurrence (1. 104 1 ) in the A. pi. uses the
N. pi. form vayas.
f. This form, which is m a d e by adding simple -s (instead of -as), e. g.
bhamis, occurs from 42 stems in the R V . T h e commonest examples are
dratts( 16), krst'is ( 1 6 ) , k sit is (8), carsanis (7) 'people', puramdhts (7), avdms (6),
dsastls ( s ) 7 . T h e T S . has abhistis (v. 4 . 1 4 2 ) , dmatis ( 1 1 1 . 1 . 4 4 ) , yonis (1. 5. 3 3 ) ,
vyustls (iv. 3. 1 1 4 ) ; and sacls occurs in a K h i l a (p. 1 7 1 , 6) 8 .
a. As in the m., the stem a/7- has aryas (occurring 4 times). Two N. forms,
atrotayas (x. 140^) 'granting wonderful gifts' and sitcayas (AV. v. I-3), appear to be used
for the A.
I . m . 9 This form is m a d e with the regular ending -Mis from 40 stems
in the R V . T h e commonest examples are ddribhis (43), rasmlbhis (36),
pathibhis (28) 'paths', hdribhis (23), sakhibhis ( 1 5 ) , sUrib/iis ( 1 4 ) , agnibhis ( 1 0 ) ,
anjibhis ( 1 0 ) 'ornaments', fsibhis ( 1 0 ) , vibhis10 (9). — F r o m the V S . : plasibhis
(xxv. 8).

1
Beside ccvanayas, ulayas, bhumayas, visva- ' S On the Sandhi of the final -» in this
kf stay as. j form see L A N M A N 394 f.
6
' The Pada text has aprati. Written with pluti in the text as lajim,
1 BR. set up a n. stem sami- beside f. sachn.
sarnJ-. G R A S S M A N N recognizes sami- only, 7 The stems which take this form in the
making sami always the I. sing, with short- R V . a r e e n u m e r a t e d b y L A N M A N 3 9 5 3 .
ened final vowel. Cp. the I. sing, of sami- 8
S e e SCHEFTELOWITZ'note, p. 1 7 1 (bottom).
above (p. 274). 9 No n. form occurs.
4 Lanman 395 enumerates the stems , Not accented as a monosyllabic stem,
which take this accusative. 1
 V I . DECLENSION. NOUNS. VOWEL STEMS. 287

f. This form is made in the same way as the m. from 48 stems in

the R V . The commonest examples are: ütibhis (100), svasiibhis (82), matíbhis
(37)i dhltibhis (27), su-vrktíbhis (18).
a . T h e f o r m Htf is used 9 t i m e s a s an I. pi. in the RV., as is s h o w n b o l h b y t h e
sense a n d by t h e f o r m s a g r e e i n g with i t ; e. g. tvabhir ¿ti (II. 2o 3 ) 'with thine aids'.
b. A t r a n s f e r f r o m the /"-declension is aranibhis 'tinder-sticks'.
D . m . This form is made with -bhyas from 9 stems in the RV.: ds'va-
patibhyas (VS. xvi. 24) 'masters of horses', fsibhyas\ gand-patibhyas (VS. xvi.
25) 'lords of troops', ddsavanibhyas 'having ten courses', pdtibhyas, ydtibhyas
N. of a race, rasmibhyas (VS. xxu. 28), v't-bhyasvrdta-patibhyas (VS. xvi. 25)
'lords of companies', súcibhyas, svd-patibhyas (VS. xiv. 28) 'masters of dogs',
sákhibhyas, sanibhyas, sandhibhyas (VS. xxiv. 25), süríbhyas.
f. ksitibhyas, carsanibhyas, deva-jamibhyas (VS. xxiv. 24) 'sisters of the
gods'. There is also the transfer from the /"-declension náribhyas 'women'.
A b . m . This case, identical in form with ihe D., is made from 12 stems
in the R V . : agníbhyas, dtribhyas, kavaribhyas 'niggardly', giribhyas, panibhyas,
pavibhyas, plasibhyas, yónibhyas (VS. XIII. 34), vdnas-pdtibhyas, vibhyas2,
sákhibhyas, sanibhyas, sthivibhyas 'bushels'. — f. amhatibhyas 'distresses',
arigúlibhyas (AV.), ksitibhyas, carsanibhyas, jdnibhyas, dhamdnibhyas (AV.)
'blasts'. — n. asthibhyasi (AV. 11. 33®).
G. m . This form is made from 28 stems in the RV.: (a) o x y t o n e s
are agnlnám, kavinám, giríttám, carsaníttátn, deva-jamínátn (AV.), nidhinám
'treasures', panínám, pathlnám, maninám (AV.), mathínám4, raylnám, vaplnám*
(AV.), vltiám, saninám6; (b) o t h e r w i s e a c c e n t e d : átrlnam, dvinám, áhitiam,
/•slnam, gandhárínam N. of a people, cardninam 'active', tuvisvánínam 'loud-
roaring', dhünTncim 'roaring', mahi-svánínSm 'very noisy', tnúninam 'seers',
vánas-páiTnam, ví-mahinam 'very great', vyátinam 'steeds', sttcinam, sákhinam,
hártnam, havir-máthmam7 'disturbing sacrifices'. Also grhá-patlnam (VS. ix. 39)
'householders', dhdrma-patinam (VS. ix. 39) 'guardians of law'.
f. This form is made from 18 stems in the RV. 8 : (a) o x y t o n e s : kavimim,
krstínám, ksitínám, carsanlnám, jamíntim, dur-matlnÁm 'hatred', dhautlnám
'wells', pustlnám, matinám, rayiruim, su-ksitlnám, su-matinám, su-stutímim;
(b) o t h e r w i s e a c c e n t e d : aratínam > (Kh. 1. 5'), üpa-stutlnlm 'invocations',
játíinam, nirríínám, mdricTnam 'particles of light', súcXnam.
L. m . This form is made with the ending -su, which becomes -su, from
16 stems in the RV.: d-kavisu 'not wise', agnisu, aitjhu, d-samatisu 'incomparable',
it/t'su, apisu 'kinsmen', fsisu, khadisu 'rings', girisu, nidhisu, path/'su, pavisu,
yóftisu, rasmisu, subhrisu, sürisu.
f. This form is made from 21 stems, all but three of which (a-vyathi
j\lmí-, subhrí-) end in -//'-: ab/ii-matisu 'plots', a-vyathisu, isiisu, fit/su, rs/isu,
krsthu, ksitisu, gdv-istisu, jamisu, dlv-istisu 'devotions', devá-hütisu, pdristisu
'distresses', pustisu, prd-nitisu, prd-turiisu 'speedy motions', prd-yuktisu,
prá-sastisu (TS.i. 7 . 7 1 ; VS. ix.6) 'praises', yáma-hütisu, ratisu, vyustisu, subhrisu,
satisu. The form nárisu10 is a transfer from the 1- declension,
n. The only example that occurs is bhárisu.

' O n c e a c c e n t e d yfibhyas in V ä l a k h i l y a 5 S e e WHITNEY'S n o t e o n A V . x i x . 2 4 6 .

XI. 6, d o u b t l e s s an error. 6 Also the numeral trumm.
* Not a c c e n t e d as a m o n o s y l l a b i c s t e m . 7 I n about a d o z e n out of 128 o c c u r r e n c e s
3 W i t h w r o n g a c c e n t f o r ästhibhyas; cp. resolution of -am to -aam s e e m s n e c e s s a r y .
asthabhyas ( V S . X X I L I . 4 4 ) . 8
Resolution of -am to -aam s e e m s to b e
4 V s l 58; B R . a n d GRASSMANN would r e a d n e c e s s a r y in 4 out of 98 o c c u r r e n c e s .
maftnäm, w h i c h is actually t h e r e a d i n g of 9 Wrong accent for araUnam.
10
t h e K a s h m i r M s . : SCHEFTELOWITZ, D i e A p o - On the other hand svaha-kfiipi is a
k r y p h e n d e s K g v e d a 40. t r a n s f e r f r o m this t o t h e f-declension.
288

5- a . Radical u-stems.
LANMAN, N o u n - I n f l e c t i o n 4 0 0 — 4 1 9 . — WHITNEY, G r a m m a r 348—352.

382. This declension comprises strictly speaking only m. and f. stems;

for the few distinctively n. forms which occur are made only from stems in
which the a is shortened and which therefore in form belong to the u- de-
clension. T h e normal endings, as they appear in the inflexion of consonant
stems, are taken throughout T h e G. pi., however, adds the ending -nam to
compound stems'; and the N. sing, always has -s.
This declension contains seven monosyllabic stems, one of which is m.,
five f., and one m. and f.; two reduplicated f. substantives and one adjective;
and about 60 compounds, almost exclusively adjectives, made with the roots
ju- 'speed', dya- (diu-) 'play', pa- 'purify', bhu- 'be', su- 'swell', sB- 'bring forth',
ha- 'call', and with the modified forms kra-, gu- 'go', dru- 'run', sua- 'drip',
which may be treated as roots. T h e stems occurring a r e : 1. m o n o s y l l a b l e s :
m. jd- 'speeding', 'steed', sU- 'begetter'; f. du- 'gift', bhd- 'earth', bhrd- 'brow',
sh- 'mother', syd- 'thread' (VS.j, srd- 'stream'. 2. r e d u p l i c a t e d s t e m s :
jtihd- 'tongue', juhd- 'sacrificial spoon', joga- 'singing aloud'. 3. c o m p o u n d s
(in the alphabetical order of the roots): apT-jii- 'impelling', kaso-jd- 'hastening
to the water (?)', N. of a man, dhl-ja- 'inspiring the mind', nabho-ju- 'cloud-
impelling', mano-ja- 'swift as thought', yatu-jd- 'incited by 'demons', vayo-jd-
'stimulating strength', vasu-jii- 'procuring goods', visva-ja- 'all-impelling',
sadyo-jd- 'quickly speeding', senS-jd- 'swift as an arrow*. — eka-dyd- m. N. of
a seer, kama-dyd- f. N. of a woman. — ogre-pa-* 'drinking first', uda-pd-
'purified by water', keta-pd- (VS. T S . ) 'purifying the will', ghrta-pd- 'clarifying
ghee', tnadhu-pd- 'purifying itself by sweetness', vata-pd- 'purified by the wind',
visna-pd- m. N. of a man, su-pd- 'clarifying well', sva-pd- 'broom'. — an-
abhu- 'disobedient', abhi-bhd- 'superior', a-bhd- 'present', pari-bhd- 'surround-
ing', punar-bhd- 'being renewed', puro-bhd- 'being in front', pra-bha- 'excelling',
mayo-b/id- 'causing pleasure', vi-bha- 'far-extending', viiva-bha- 'being every-
where', visvd-sambha- 'beneficial to all', sam-bhti- 'beneficent', saca-bha- 'asso-
ciate', su-bha- 'good', svayam-bha- 'self-existing', sv-abha- 'helping well'. —
sura-sa- 'exultant with liquor". — a-sti- 'not bringing forth', a-sosri- ( A V . )
'barren', nava-sa- 'having recently calved', parva-sa- 'bringing forth first', pra-sn-
'bringing forth', yama-sd- 'bringing forth twins', raha-sd- 'bringing forth
secretly', raja-si- 'king-creating', visva-sd- 'all-generating', vira-sd- 'hero-
bearing', sakrt-sd- 'bringing forth once', su-sti- 'bringing forth easily'. — S-hd-
'invoking', u-hd'crying aloud', varsa-hd- (VS.) f., sumna-hd- (TS.) 'invoking
favour', su-hd- (VS.) 'invoking well'. — milra-krd- f. a kind of demon. —
agre-gd-4 'moving forwards'. — raghu-drd- 'running swiftly'5. — ghrta-snd-
1 dripping ghee' 6 .

a. V o c a l i c p r o n u n c i a t i o n . Before vowels the » has regularly a vocalic value in

pronunciation. In monosyllabic stems it is alwaya written as -uv; generally also in
c o m p o u n d s even w h e n p r e c e d e d by a single consonant. In t h e minority of c o m p o u n d s
(some 9 stems in t h e RV.) it is written as v, but p r o n o u n c e d as a vowel. In the latter
instances it is always given as u b e l o w ; e. g. vibhva as vibhua.
b. A c c e n t u a t i o n . Except in t h e monosyllabic stems, which follow t h e general
rule, the accent r e m a i n s t h r o u g h o u t on the same syllable, which is almost always the
radical one.
1
T h e monosyllabic a n d the reduplicated 4 -gu- h e r e = get- 'go'.
stems, on t h e o t h e r h a n d , added -am, as far 5 Cp. L A N M A N 4 0 2 .
6
as can b e inferred f r o m bhuvam and joguvam, About a dozen of the above c o m p o u n d s
t h e only examples which occur. (all but 3 or 4 of them being formed with
« -pu- here —• -pa- 'drink*. biu-) also shorten the final of the s t e m ,
3 Perhaps an o n o m a t o p o e t i c word. which is t h e n inflected like an u- stem.
 VI. DECLENSION. NOUNS. VOWEL STEMS. 289

Inflexion.
3 8 3 . The inflexion is identical in the m. and f. Several of the cases do
not occur at all in the m., viz. Ab. L. V. sing., I. D. A b . G. L. du., D.
Ab. pi. In the monosyllabic stems several cases are wanting in both genders,
viz. A. D. V. sing., and all the cases of the pL except the N. A. G. The
forms actually occurring, if made from bhd- f. 'earth' and the adjectives
a-bhd- 'present' and 7i-bhd- 'far-reaching', would be as follows:
1. S i n g . N . bhds. I. bkuvd. Ab. bhuvds. G. bhuvds. L. bhuvi (VS.).
D u . N. bh'iva. I. bhubhyAm (VS.). L. bhuvJs. P I . N. bhuvas. A. bhuvas.
G. bhuvjm (VS.).
2. S i n g . N. abhds; vibhds. A . abhmam; vibhuam. L abhuva; vibhua.
D. 1ibhuve-, vibhue. Ab. f. vibhitas (AV.). G. m. Sbhuvas.
D u . N. A. Hihuva. P I . N Sbhuvas-, vibhitas. A. m. f. abhiiias\ f. vibhi'.as.
I. m. f. Sbhiibhis. G. m. f. abhdnHm. L. m. f. abhdsu.
The forms actually occurring are:
S i n g . N . m . jds (VS. IV. 17), sds; eka-dyds. — uda-ptis (AV.), keta-piis
(VS. ix. 1 ; TS.iv. 1.1-), madhu-pds (AV.), vata-pds (AV.). — abhi-bhds,pari-bhds,
puro-bhtts, pra-bhf/s (AV.), mayo-bhds, vi-bhds (AV.), visvd-sambhus, sam-bhas (VS.
AV.), saca-bhds, su-bhds (VS. AV.), svayam-bhr.s. — sumna-hds (TS. iv. 6. 34),
su-hds (VS. r. 30) 'invoking well'. — f. bhds, siis, syds (VS. v. 21); juhas (AV.
VS.). — kama-dyis. — abhi-bhtis (AV.), punar-bhas, pra-bhns (VS. AV.), rnayo-
bhfis, sam-bhiis (AV.). —pra-sds (AV.), yama-sds, raha-sds, vtra-sds, su-sds.—
varsa-hds (VS. xxiv. 38) 'frog'.
A . m . 1. kaso-jiaam, mano-juvam, vasu-juvam-, abhi-bhuvam (AV.),
a-bhuvam, maye-bhuvam, visvd-sambhuvam, sambhuvam, sacS-bhi'tvam, sv-
abhuvam\ 2. vi;nl-puam; vi-bhuam, su-bhuam.— i.juhuam 'sacrificial spoon';
1. kama-dyuvam, visva-juvam, saca-bhuvam; 2. a-s/am1, visva-suam (AV.),
sakrt-si'.am.
I . m . 1. mano-juva, sena-juvH, sv-abhuvd] 1. vi-bhuS. — f. bhuvd\ juhui
'tongue' and 'spoon'; 1. punar-bhitva (AV.), mayo-bhuva (TS. 1. 8. 3"; VS.
ill. 47). — n. I. mayo-bhuva-, 2. su-pua (VS. I. 3).
D . m . 1. abhi-bhuve, vi-bhuve (VS. x x u . 30), visva-bhme, saca-bhuve-,
2. visna-pue, vi-bhite, su-bhue.
A b . f. bhuvas-, a-susuas (AV.). — G . m . sam-bhuvas, saca-bhitvas—
f . bhuvds. — L . f. bhuvi (VS.). — V . f. juhu (AV.).
D u . N . A . m . mano-juva-, mayo-bhuva, sam-bhuva, saca-bhuva-, ghrta-
stiuvH\ — f. sruva; apT-juva-, punar-bh'wa, visva-sambhuva, visvd-s'ambhuiau
(VS. x. 9), sambh'iva, saca-bh 'iva. — I . f. bhrabhydm (VS.). — L . f. bhruvos.
P I . N . m . juvas; 1. d-duvas, a-bhuvas, u-huvas, nabho-juvas, pari-bhiivas,
mano-juvas, mayo-bhuvas, raghu druvas, vayo-juvas, sam-bhuvas, V. saca-
bhuvas (VS. ill. 47), sadyo-juvas, su-bh'ivas, sv-abhuvas 2. vi-bhuas, su-bhuas;
sura-suas. — f. duvas, bhuvas-, juhi'tas 'tongues' and 'spoons'; 1. V. agre-guias
(VS.), V. agre-puvas (VS.), dhl-ji'cvas, punar-bhuvas, mayo-bhuvas, mitra-krm as\
V. zis'va-s'ambhuvas (VS. iv. 7); 2. ghrta-p'tas, nava-suas, pra-suas, vi-bhuas,
tu-bhuas.
A . m . an-abhuvas, mayo-bhuvas5. — f. duvas, bhuvas) a-bhuvas, a-huvas,

1 The transition form a-siirn (VS.) under! 3 Cp. LANMAN 4 1 3 (middle),

the influence of the derivative T- stems also 4 There are also the transfers from the
occurs. T h e form ayogum (VS. XXX. 5) is • u- declension ä-präyuvas, madhyäyuvas, miträ-
perhaps of the same kind. ytivas, sramayuvas.
* The A V . has also the transition form S In u. 14^ jus is perhaps contracted for
punar-bküv-äs. jtias.
Indo-arische Philologie. 1, I. 19
390 1. ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4. VEDIC GRAMMAR.

ghrta-snuvas, mayo-bhtcvas, sana-jicvas; pra-suas, raja-suas (VS. x. 1) 'king-

creating', vi-bhuasl.
I . m. a-bhdbhis. — f. juhabhis 'tongues' and 'spoons'; sva-pdbhis.
G. m. j¿guvrim; yatu-jdnam. — f. bhuvim' (VS. XXXVII. 1 8 ; ; p u n a -
sdnavi.
L . m. a-bhosu, puru-bhasu 'appearing to many'. — f. pra-sdsu.

5. b. Derivative u- stems.
LANMAN, Noun-Inflection 400—419. — WHITNEY, Sanskrit Grammar 355—359,
362—364.
384. This declension is almost entirely restricted to f.3 stems, which (like
the derivative or B group of the radical 1- declension) accent the final
vowel and in inflexion are practically identical with the radical stems. The
f. stems which it comprises may be divided into two groups. T h e first
contains about 18 oxytone f. substantives corresponding in several instances
to m. or n. stems in -u accented on the first syllable: a-grd- (m. a-gru-)
'maid', kadrti- (m. kadru- 'brown') 'Soma vessel', kuhii- (AV.) 'new moon',
guggul'i- (n. gi'iggulu-) (AV.) N. of an Apsaras, g u f i g n - N. of a goddess,
camh- 'bowl', j a t d - (n. j a t u - ) ( A V . VS.) 'bat', tanfi- 'body', dhanft- (dhanu•)
'sandbank'(AV.), nabhanft- 'well', nrtd- 'dancer', prdakd- (m. prdaku-) 'serpent'
(AV.), p r a j a n d - (AV.) 'organ of generation', vadhd- 'bride', sras'rd- (m. svasura-)
'mother-in-law', saranyd- N. of a goddess; also kyAmbu-4 (n. kiyAmbu-) an
aquatic plant (AV.). The s e c o n d group comprises oxytone f. adjectives
corresponding to m. oxytones: amhoyd- 'troublesome', aghiyd- 'malicious',
apasyd- 'active', abhi-dipsii- 'wishing to deceive', avasyd- 'desiring favour',
asita-jhd- (AV.) 'black-kneed', ay a- 'active', udanyfi- 'seeking water', caranyd-
'movable', carisnd- 'moving', jighatsa- 'hungry', tana- 'thin', didhisii- 'wishing
to gain', dur-hanayfi- 'meditating harm', duvasyd- 'worshipping', devayfi- (VS.)
'devoted to the gods', dravitnfi- 'speeding', patayala- 'flying', panasyi- 'glorious',
parayismi- 'victorious', prtanayd- 'hostile', prsanaya- 'tender', phalga- 'reddish',
babhrU- 'reddish brown', btbAais.4- 'loathing', makhasyn- 'cheerful', madhii-5
'sweet', mandraya- 'gladdening', mahiyd- 'joyous', mumukso- 'wishing to
free', vacasyd- 'eloquent', vi-panyii- 'admiring', sundhya- 'radiant', sannyii-
'wishing for gain', sQdayitnfi- 'yielding sweetness'; also s u - d r f i - 'having good
wood' (<iru-y.
a. V o c a l i c pronunciation. Before vowels the -ii has almost invariably a vocalic
value in pronunciation. It is written as uv in the substantives agru- and kadru-, and in
adjectives when the is preceded by y , also in blbhatsu-1, Otherwise though always
written as v it is (except four or five times at the most in the RV.) 8 , here also to be
pronounced as a vowel. Hence the forms written in the Samhita with simple v are
given below with u.
b. Accentuation. T h e derivative «-stems not only accent the final syllable 9 but

1 VS. x x i v . 25 has the form sTca-pus a kind 6 Also as a substantive f. 'good beam',
of bird. B R . and pw. however regard su-druam as A.
2 In the V. visvjsam bhuvam pair. of a m. substantive su-dru• 'starkes Holz'.
3 There are only five m. forms: TX.prasus ' 7 This is the regular practice in the T S .
'guest', a70/Vfl-/a«K.r'whosebodyisnotcooked', even when a single consonant precedes the
sarva-lanus (AV.) 'whose body is entire'; -it, e. g. tamcv-am\ cp. IS. 13, 105 f.
A. kfka-daiuam a kind of demon; I. pi. 8 tanvas 3 times, camvbs once, lanvam
maifiihis 'swift'. perhaps o n c e ; cp. L A N M A N 408 (top).
4 This is the only f. stem in this declen- 9 Except the f. kyambii- (AV.) and the
sion not accented on the final v o w e l ; but two m. Bahuvrlhis dtapta-tanu- and sarva-
TA. VI. 4< has the normally accented kyambii-. tanu-.
s T h e corresponding m. in this instance
is not oxytone, mddiu-.
 V I . DECLENSION. NOUNS. VOWEL STEMS.

retain the accent on that syllable throughout their inflexion. In this respect they agree
with the B group of the radical f- declension and differ from tbe ordinary derivative
i- declension.
c. Transition forms. There is an incipient tendency here to be affected by
the analogy of the derivative ¿-stems. The only certain example in the RV. is the L.
ivairuam (x. 854s) for *svasrui; the I. dravitnua is perhaps another instance 1 . But the
AV. has at least 10 such forms: A. kuhurn, tanum, vadhum-, D. agruvai, vad/wai, svasruai;
Ab. punar-bhuvas; G. urvaruas' 'gourd', ffdakuas, svasruas; L. tanuam. T h e VS. has
A. pumscalum, D. tanvai, G. tanvas.

Inflexion.
3 8 5 . In the L . sing, the -/' may be d r o p p e d in the R V . In the later
Sarphitas -m sometimes appears in the A . for -am, and -at, -as, -am are
occasionally taken as the endings of the D . G . L . respectively. T h e ending
•am appears once in the R V . also. T h e forms actually occurring, if m a d e
f r o m tana- f. ' b o d y ' , would b e as follows:
S i n g . N. lands. A. tamtam. I. t a n u i . D . tam'te. A b . tanuas. G. tanuas.
L. tanui and tana. V . tanu.
D u . N. A. t a n u i . D. tanftbhyim. L. tanuos.
PI. N. tanuas. A. tanuas. I. tandbhis. D. tandbhyas. G . tandnim.
L. tandsu.
T h e forms actually occurring a r e :
S i n g . N . m . pris'ds, d-tapt a-tanas, sarva-tanUs ( A V . ) . — f. asita-jnas
( A V . ) , kuhas ( T S . A V . ) , kyimbas* (AV.), guggulas ( A V . ) , guhgds, jatds (VS.),
tanas, dhands ( A V . ) , nrtas, patayilds ( A V . ) , p r d i k d s ( A V . ) , phalgas (VS.
x x i v . 4), rnadhds ( A V . ) , vadhfts, s'undhyds, svasrfls, saranyds.
A . m . krkadis nam — f. carisnuam, jighatsuam (AV.), taniiam5,
prdakuamb ( A V . ) , vadkuam, su-druam7; avasyuvam, dur-haniyuvam, deva-
yuvam ( V S . I. 1 2 ) , makhasyuvam, vacasyuvam, sundhyuvam, su-drtivam (SV.).
— With e n d i n g -m for -am-, kuhnm (TS. AV.), tandm (TS. AV.), pums-
calum (VS. x x x . 5), vadhiim ( A V . ; K h . IV. 5').
I. f. tanua8, vadhua-, duvasyuvS. — D . f. tam'ie9. — With e n d i n g - a i :
agruvai ( A V . ) , tanvai ( V S . x x m . 44), babhrvai ( V S . x x . 28), vadhvdi10 (AV.),
svasruai (AV.). — A b . f. kadrtevas; tanuas.

G . f. agruvas, sundhyuvas-, tanuasj", vadhuas. — With e n d i n g -Sis-, tanvas

( V S . HI. 1 7 ) , prdakuis ( A V . ) , svasruas (AV.).
L . f. camui, t a n u i " . — W i t h o u t e n d i n g : camd"3, tana1*. — With
e n d i n g -am-, svasruim-, tanvhm15 (AV.), tanuvam16 ( T S . i. 7. 122).

V . f. babhru, vddhu.

1
Because the accent is shifted to the times. The TS. has tanuva (1. 1. 10« etc.)
ending as in the derivative T- declension; In RV. x. 24 1 camu is once perhaps a con-
c p . LANMAN 4 0 4 . tracted I.; see LANMAN 409 (top).
* S e e LANMAN 4 1 I ' . 9 The AV. has tanue 6 times, lanvi
3 The TA. has the normal accentuation 7 times. T h e TS. has tanieve.
kyambh-; the corresponding stem in the RV. The AV. has vadhvdi and vadhuai once
i s kiyambu• n. each.
11
4 That the word is m. is probable because The AV. has tanuas to times, tanv&s
sdrvam seems to agree with it (1. 297). The \ 4 times. T h e TS. has tanuvas.
A. m. abhiruam 'fearless' is a transfer from Three or four times tanui, metrically
the «- declension. lengthened (the I'ada has J ) ; cp. LANMAN
5 The AV. has tanvam once, tanuam 16 times. 411 (bottom). The TS. (iv. 3.131) has tanuvi.
The TS. regularly has t.muvam (1.8. io 2 , etc.). '3 camu occurs 6 times, camui once.
6
The Mss. all read prdakvam; see 14 tanu occurs once, tanui 3 times.
17
W H I T N E Y ' S note on AV. x. 4 . •5 This should doubtless be read tanvam;
7 As an adj. in VII. 32»°, 'made of good 1 s e e LANMAN 4 1 2 .
wood'; as a subst. in x. 28 S 'good beam'. | '6 This form in TS. iv. 2. 6 3 is a variant
8 The AV. has tanua 4 times, tanva 5 | for the G. sing, tanvas of RV. x. 971°.
19»
292 I. ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4. VEDIC GRAMMAR.

D u . N . A . f \ caw ltd, tanua. — D . f. hanttbhyam2 (TS. VII. 3. 16 1 ). —

L. cam ¡ws K
PI. N . f. 1. agruvas\ camuas, j atit as (AV.), tanuas», prdakuas (AV.),
prajanuas (AV.). — 2. amho-y'tvas, apasyuvas, avasyuvas, Syitvas, udanyuvas,
carariyuvas{h\T.), didhisuas, panasy'ivas, pdrayisnias, prtaniy tvas, prsaniy'ivas,
bibhatsuvas, makhasyuvas, rnandrayiivas, mahiyuvas, mumuksuas, sanilyiwas.
sQdayitnuas. — yuva-y is (iv. 41 8 ), agreeing with N. f. dhiyas, appears to be
a contracted form for -yiias
A . f. r. agruvas; tanuas6, nabhanuas, vadhuas1. — 2. abhi-dipsuas,
dravitniias\ vi-panyuvas, s'undhyuvas8. — I. m . maksfibhis9. — f. tandbhis. —
D . f. tanttbhyas. — G . f. 1. tananam, vadh&nUm — 2. aghaydnam 10 (AV.),
babhrdnam, bibhatsfindm.
L . f. 1. camtisu, tanasu. — 2. babhrfisu.

6. a. R a d i c a l u- s t e m s .
386. There are not many u- stems derived from roots originally ending
in -u, as several of these (about nine) have joined the consonant declension
by adding the determinative Some eight stems are, however, formed
from roots in -u, all of them but one (dyu-) being compounds. These are:
dyii- 'day', abhi-dyu- 'heavenly 1 ; mitd-dru-12 'firm-legged', raghu-dru- 'running
swiftly'; d-prS-yu- 'assiduous'; ddhri-gu-14 'irresistible', vanar-gu- 'forest-
roaming'; su-stu- 'highly praised'" 5 . There are besides some 12 stems in
which u is radical in a secondary sense as representing the shortened form
of the vowel of three roots ending in -Ul6. These are: dhx-ju- 'inspiring the
mind', from ja- 'impel'; su-pu- 'clarifying well', from pa- 'purify'; and com-
pounds of bhu- 'be': d-pra-bhu- 'powerless', abhi-bhu- 'superior', a-bhu- 'empty',
ud-bhu- 'persevering', pari-bhu- ^surrounding', puru-bhu- 'appearing in many
places', pra-bhu- 'powerful', mayo-bhu- 'delighting', vi-bhu- 'far-extending',
sam-bhu• 'beneficent', su-bhu- 'good'.
387. The inflexion of these words is identical with that of derivative
u- stems. Forms which occur are the following:
S i n g . N . m . adhri-gus, a-pra-bhus, pra-bhi'is, mayo-bhtis, mita-drus,
vanar-gus, vi-bhus, sam-bhusxl. — n . d-pra-bhu, d-prayu, a-bhu, ud-bhu (AV.),
pra-bhu, mayo-bhu, raghu-dru, vi-bhu, sam-bhu, su-bhu.
A. m . ddhri-gum, abhi-dyum, abhi-bhum (AV.), a-bhum,pra-bhum, vi-bhuni,8.
I. m . mayo-bhuni. — n . su-puni (AV.).

1
T h e r e are also two m. transfers f r o m | 9 This is only a metrical lengthening of
the a- declension, madhuyuva and pasva; > the stem vowel (Pada »).
cp. LANMAN 403 and 413 (mid). ! "> Cp. LANMAN 418 3 .
1 11
This is really a transition form f r o m See above, stems in d e r i v a t i v e - / ( 3 0 7 ) .
12
the derivative u• declension. From dru- 'run'. On sadru- see WHIT-
3 camuos occurs 14 times, camvbs possibly NEY's note on AV. XV. 7 ' .
once (IX. 96"). R3 From yu- 'separate', ' k e e p away'.

4 Once tanvas\ see LANMAN 408 (top). '4 'going unrestrained', fromgu- ' g o ' —ga-.
T h e TS. has tanuvas. '5 T h e words sabar-dhu- 'yielding nectar',
5 On ratha-yus (x. 70*) standing possibly and a-smrla-dhru- 'not caring for e n e m i e s ' ,
for -yus =yu-as, see LANKAN 4 1 5 ' . seem to be compounded with -duh [-dhuk)
6 RV. 20 times, A V . 3 times tanuas-, RV. and -druh [•dhruk: see pw.).
twice, A V . once tanvis. T h e T S . has tanuvas. \ >6 T h e y are therefore transfers f r o m the
On WEBER'S conjecture (IS. 1 3 , 58) visvas as : radical >/• declension, all the N . A . neuters
A. pi. of "visit- see LANUAN 416 3 . j of which are thus formed.

7 The Mss. of the AV. once read badhvis n sabar-dhus (VS. v. 26; Kh. IV. 5»°) =
(«• vadAuas). sabat-dhuk.
8
On ratha-yui ( v u . 2 s ) for -yus = yiias, '8 sabar-dhum A. f. = sabar-duham.
see LANMAN 416 3 . T h e VS. (xxi. 25) has jatus.
 293
D . m . adhri-gave, abhi-dyave.
G . m . pra-bhos, su-stos. — L . n . ud-bhau ( V S . x v . i ) , mita drau.
V. m . adhri-go, pra-bho (A A. iv. i = K h . v. 4)'.
Du. N. A . V. m . ddhri-gaabhi-dyU ( K h . 1. 3*), pari-bhi (AV.), puru-
bhii, puru-bhB, vanar-ga, Jam-bAd, sam-bhu.
PI. N . m. adhri-g&vasabhi-dyavas, dhx-javas, mitd-dravas4, vi-bhavas,
V. vi-bkv-as5. — n. mayo-bhu>
A. m. mayo-bhan, dyan, vi-bhan ( V S . x x . 23J.
I. m . dyubhis\ a-pra-yubhis, abhi-dyubhis, vanar-gubhis (AV.), vi-bhiibhis.

6. b. Derivative u- stems.
LANMAN, Noun-Inflection 4 0 0 — 4 1 9 . — WHITNEY, Sanskrit Grammar 3 3 5 — 3 4 6 .

388. This declension embraces a large number of nouns of all genders.

The masculine stems greatly preponderate, being about four times as numerous
as the feminine and neuter stems taken together; while the neuters consider-
ably outnumber the feminines. Thus the N. and A. sing, are formed by
about 430 stems in the m., by 68 in the n., and by 46 in the f. in the R V .
The normal inflexion which is practically the same in all genders, except
the N. A. sing. du. pi. n., is closely parallel to that of the i- stems (380).
The stem takes Gu?a in the same cases; but while in the /'- declension only
one word {art-) ever uses the unmodified stem, 8 or 9 words may do so
here. The endings, too, are closely analogous; but while in the i- declension
the ending of the L. sing, is always dropped, it is here retained in several
words; and while the n- declension has affected only the I. sing, of the i-
declension, it has here affected all the other cases of the singular which
take vowel endings. Finally, the accentuation is exacdy parallel to that of
of the i- stems.
a. A d j e c t i v e s in •» often use this stem for the feminine a l s o ; e . g . earn- ' d e a r ' ;
otherwise they form the f. in-»?, as lam't- m „ tanu- f. 'thin'; or in -T, as uru- m „ urv-i• f.
'broad', pfthu- m „ pfthv-i- f. 'broad', bahu- m „ bahv-i- f. 'much', mfdu- (AV.) m „ mrdv-i-
(VS.) f. 'soft'.
b. T h e 8 stems which are analogous to art- in having forms that attach the
normal endings to the unaltered stem are: pasu-, pitii-; kftu-, train-, madhu-, vasu-, Hsu-,
sahasra'bihu
c . Oxytone stems when the final vowel is changed to v, throw the a c c e n t on a
following vowel not as Svarita but as U d i t t a ; they also shift it to the -nam of the G . p l .
even though the stem vowel does not in that case lose its syllabic value; e. g.pasu-nam.
d. T r a n s i t i o n forms. 1. There are in the R V . only three forms which follow the
analogy of the derivative I- declension: D . ijv-ai, G. ifv as, su-vastv-as, all in late p a s s a g e s ;
the A V . also has rajjv-am — 2. Transitions to the u- declension appear in the A .
a-bhtrvam, from a-bhiru-, and in several words formed with the suffix -yu which m a k e
their N. pi. or du. as -ytivas, -yuva. — 3. Besides some 46 I. forms m. and n. sing., there
are several transitions to the n- declension in ihe remaining cases of the sing., all neuter
forms (except the m. G . earunas1: D . madhunt; A b . madhtmas, sanunas\ G. cthunas,
danunas, driiiias, madhunas, vasunas; L. riyuni, sanuni\ al>o a few other forms from the
later Sairhit&s.

Inflexion.
389. The N. sing. m. f always takes -s, the A. simply -m. The D. Ab.
G. sing, sometimes attach the normal endings to the unmodified stem; but

1 In the f. V . frthu-sto 'broad-tufted', the
u of the stem stu- = stuia- 'tuft' may be radical.
1 d-smfla-d!tru = asmfta-druha.
3 For adhrt'gavas owing to the false ana-
logy of gavas 'cows'.
4 T h e r e are also the forms according to
' the radical ;<- declension a-prayuvas, raghu-
, druvas.
\ 5 See LANMAN 414 1 .
j 6 T h e Mss. in A V . V I . 1 2 1 2 read rajvam.
I the only form of this word which occurs in
the RV. is the N. sing, rajjus.
294 L ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4. VEDIC GRAMMAR.

they generally gunate the stem, which then adds only -s instead of -as in
the A b . G. T h e L. sing, sometimes gunates the stem and adds -/, but
generally takes Vrddhi without an ending. T h e V . always gunates the stem.
T h e N. pi. m. f. nearly always gunates the -u, to which the normal ending
-as is added. T h e A . pi. in the m. adds -», in the f. -s, before which the
vowel is lengthened. T h e G . p i always takes -nam, lengthening the pre-
ceding vowel. T h e N. A . V . du. m. f. have no ending, simply lengthening the
final vowel. T h e adjective mddhu- 'sweet' may be used to illustrate the
forms actually occurring:
S i n g . N . m . f. tnadhus, n . mddhu. A . m . f. madhuni, n. mddhu. I . m . f. n .
madhva, m . n. madhunS. D . m . f. n. mddhave, m . madhve. A b . m . f. n. madhos,
m . n. madhvas, n. madhunas. G . m . f. n. madhos, m . n. madhvas-, n. mddhunas.
L . m . f. n. madhau, m . n. madhavi, n. madhuni. V . m . f. madho, n . mddhu.
Du. N . A . V . m . f. madhu, n. madhvT. I. m . madhubhyam. D . m .
madhubhyam. A b . m . n. madhubhyam. G . m . madhvos, n. madhunos ( A V . ) .
L . m . f. madhvos.
P I . N . V . m . f. madhavas-, madhvas. N . A . n. madhu, madhu\ madhuni.
A . m . madhun; madhvas, f. mddhus\ madhvas. I. m . f. n. mddhubhis. D . m .
f. n . madhubhyas. A b . m . f. mddhubhyas. G . m . f. n. mddhunam. L . m . f. n.
madhusu.
T h e forms actually occurring are the following:
Sing. N. m. This form is very frequent, being made from 250 stems
in the R V . and occurring nearly 900 times. T h e commonest examples are:
Indus (64) 'drop', visnus ( 3 4 ; 'Visnu', su-krdtus (32) 'skilful', vdsus (25) 'good',
ketus (23) 'brightness', rbhus ( 2 1 ) 'deft', vayus (20) 'wind', visvdyus ( 1 8 ) 'kind
t o a l l m e n ' , sunus ( 1 8 ) ' s o n ' , sindhus (17) 'river', cants ( 1 6 ) 'dear', asmayus
( 1 6 ) 'desiring us', devayt'is ( 1 5 ) ' d e v o t e d to the gods', manus ( 1 5 ) 'man'. —
isus 'arrow*, otherwise f., is o n c e (VIII. 66?) m.
a. T h e form yus 'moving' is perhaps a corruption in v m . 18' 3 , where BLOOMFIELD
(JAOS. 1906, p. 72) would read, for ririsif/a yur, ri/islstayi'ir — ririflfia oyur.
b. In VII. 86 3 didfkfupo perhaps stands for didfkfus+upo-, but the I'ada reads
didfk^u, and desiderative adjectives otherwise accent the final syllable; cp. LANMAN 405
(bottom).
f. This form is m a d e from 31 stems and occurs 73 times in the R V .
T h e c o m m o n e s t e x a m p l e s are dheni'is (22) 'cow', sindhus ( 1 1 ) , s'drus (4)
'arrow', vasUyus (3) 'desiring g o o d s ' , isus (2), gat us (2) 'course', ciirus (2),
jxvatvs (2) 'life'
N . A . n. This form, which has no ending, is made from 68 stems and
occurs over 400 times in the R V . T h e commonest examples are mddhu (77)
('sweetness'), vasu ( 7 7 ) 'wealth', uru ( 5 1 ) 'wide', cSru (27), srirtu ( 1 8 ) 'summit',
prthu ( 1 5 ) 'broad', tri-dhatu ( 1 3 ) 'threefold', puru ( 1 3 ) 'much'. The R V .
o n c e has pasu and the V S . ( x x m . 3 0 ) pasu 'animal'. In other Samhitas o c c u r
talu ( V S . ) 'palate', trdpu ( A V . V S . ) 'tin'.
a. T h e final •« is metrically lengthened in puru (12 times), mithu (twice) 'wrongly',
and uru (once)».
b. T h e metre seems to require the forms ayu (ill. 492), jaramfiyu ( A V . XIX. 30'),
/ifttu (AV. III. 19 1 ), parayifnu (AV. VIII. 2»8), bahu (AV. XX. 135"), instead of the corre-
sponding forms with -s, ayus etc., of the Samhita text.
A . m. This form is m a d e from 1 7 9 stems and occurs over 700 times
in the R V . T h e c o m m o n e s t e x a m p l e s a r e : kratum (55) 'ability', keturn (34),
gStum (33) 'course' and ' s o n g ' , indum ( 2 7 ) , ilium ( 2 6 ) 'child', sindhum ( 2 2 ) ,

1 LANMAN 406 enumerates the stems which I 1 T h e Pada text here always has puru,
form this N. | mithu, uru. Cp. RPr. VII. 9, 19, 3 1 ; IX. 3.
 295
asum (20) 'swift1, urum (18), manyum (18) 'wrath', vayum (18), amsiim (17)
'shoot', sunum (17), dasyum (15) 'fiend', pasum (15), bhanum (15) 'lustre',
bhujyum (15) N. of a man, satrum (15) 'enemy'.
f. This form is made from 15 stems and occurs 50 times in the RV.:
a-dhenvm 'yielding no milk', aruna-psum 'of ruddy appearance', isum, krtimum
N. of a river, drum, jasum 'resting-place', jigatnum 'speeding', jiradanum
'sprinkling abundantly', jivAtum, dhdnum 'sandbank', dhenum, bhujyum 'viper',
vasuyum, sarum, sindhum.
I. m . This case is formed in two ways. 1. Four stems in the RV. add
the normal ending -a, before which the -u is almost invariably pronounced
as v. parasv-A 'axe', pasv-A; kratv-astsv-a. — 2. Owing to the influence of
the 71- declension 30 stems in the RV. add -na instead of the normal -a:
amsuni, aktuna 'light', an-asuna 'not swift', a-batulhuna 'kinless', indunH,
isuna (Kh. iv. 73)', uruna, rjuna 'straight', rtuna 'fixed time', ketuna,
krdtuni cetuna 'heed', jisnuna 'victorious', tri-dhAtuna, dhuma-ketuna'smoke-
bannered', dhrsnun3 'bold', pasuna, bhanuna, manuna, manyuna, rip una
'deceiver', vagnuna 'roar', vahatuna 'bridal procession', vayuna, vi-bhind'tna
'splitting', vlsnutij, vf-sa-psuna 'of strong appearance', sadhuna 'straight', su-
cet'ma 'benevolence', ¡¿tuna (TS. 111.2. 2 ') 'bridge', stanayitn'ma 'thunder', snuna5
'summit'.
f. This form is made from 7 stems in the RV. by adding the normal
ending -a, before which the u is pronounced as a vowel in five stems: cikitva
(AV.), panva 'praise'; a-dhenva, tsva (AV.; Kh. iv. 5 3'), mddhva, mehatnvi
N. of a river, rajjva (AV.) 'rope', sarva, su-sartva N. of a river, Adnva 'jaw'.
a. Six oxytone stems and also milhu• form instrumentals with interposed -y-; they
are used adverbially with shift of accent to the e n d i n g : anu-fthuya 'immediately', amuya
'thus', asuya 'quickly', lihfsnuyd boldly', raghuya 'swiftly', sadhuyd ' r i g h t l y ' ; milhuya
'falsely'.
n. This case is made in two ways. 1. The normal ending -a is added
directly to the stem. Of this formation there is only one example: madhva•
'honey'. — 2. Owing to the influence of the «- declension 15 stems in the
RV. add -na: uruna, krdhuna 'defective', ghrta-snuna 'dripping with ghee',
jarAyuna 'after-birth', titauna 'sieve', trsuna 'greedy', tri-dhatuna, danuna
'fluid', dri'tna' 'wood', dhfsnunl, purar:ina 'far and wide', prthuna, mddhuna,
vdsunl, sanuna, svaduna 'sweet'.
D. m. This case is formed in two ways. r. The ending -e is added to
the unmodified s t e m in three words in the RV.: kratve6, sisve, sahasra-bahve1
'having a thousand arms'. — 2. The ending e is added to the gunated final
vowel in over 60 stems in the RV. The commonest examples are: mdnave
(36), vayave (23), vistiarc (13), manydve (12), fiydve (10) 'living', sflnave (10),
ddsyave (9), ripdve (7), mrtyave (6) 'death', pQrave (s)8 'man'.
f. This case is made in the same way as the second form of the m.
from only three stems in the RV.: jlvAtave, dhendre, sarave.
n. This case is formed in three ways. 1. The ending -e is added to the

1 T w i c e out of 59 occurrences pronounced | 5 T h e words snu- and dru- are not accen-
kratua. T h e form kratva occurs VS. x x x u r . tuated as monosyllabic stems b e c a u s e they
72 and twice in the K h i l a s (ill. l 6 J ; v . 6 3 ) ; | are the reduced form of the dissyllables
and in K h . I V . 5 3 6 kartva is perhaps meant sanu- and daru-.
6
for kratva. kratve also occurs VS. Xtv. 8 ; X X X V I I I . 28.
' For the ifva of A V . V . 54. 7 Pronounced -bahtte.
i T h e f o r m kratuna occurs 12 times,! 8 L A N M A S 409 enumerates the stems w h i c h
kratva 59 times, in the R V . take this dative.
4 This form also occurs in V S . XX. 56 etc.,
T S . IV. 1. 81 (twice) and K h . v . 6 4 .
296 I. ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4 . VEDIC GRAMMAR.

unmodified stem in one word: paiv-e'1. — 2. The ending -e is added to

the gunated stem in two words: urate, visvayave.
3. Owing to the influence of the n- declension -ne is added to the stem
in one word in the R V . : mddhune. The AV. also has kaupune 'mat'.
Ab. m. This case is formed in two ways. 1. The normal ending -as is
added to the unmodified stem in one word only: pitv-as 'draught'. —
2. The ending -s is added to the gunated stem in 20 words in the R V . :
amhos 'distress', adhvaryos 'officiating priest', rt'js, krsAnos N. of a divine
archer, ksipanos 'archer', gdntos 'course', tanayitnos 'thundering', tanyatos
'thunder', devayos, ninitsos 'wishing to blame', pBros, babhros (Kh. v. 1 5 " )
'brown', manyos, mrtyos, ririksos 'wishing to injure', 1 anisthos 'intestine', vHyos,
vtsnos, satros, sindhos, s/ios.
f. This case is made in the same way as the second form of the m.
The only two examples are: dhdnos and vastos 'dawn'. There is also one
transition form due to the influence of the r- declension: isv-as.
n. This case is made in three ways. 1. The ending -as is added to
the unmodified stem in one word only: madhvas. — 2. The ending -j- is
added to the gunated stem: uros, drjs2, madhos (Kh. iv. 1 2 ' ; TS. iv. 4. 12'),
sSnos, si'Sdos. — 3. Under the influence of the n- declension -nas is
added to the stem: mddhunas, sSnunas.
G. m. This case is made in two ways. 1. The ending -as is added to
the unmodified stem in six words: pasvas, pitvas; krdtvas, madhvas, vasvas,
sisvas— 2. The prevailing form is made by adding -s to the gunated stem,
and appears in 70 words. The commonest examples a r e ' : ayos (221, visnos
(14), sindhos (13), aktos (11), vayjs (10), ddsyos (8), manos (8), satros (51,
iarSs (4) 'singer'.
a. There is a single transition form according to the n- declension carunas, which
occurs only once ( v m . S'4).
f. This case is formed in one way only, like the second form of the
m., from 5 stems: aktos, dhenos, vastos, sarayos N. of a river, sindhos.
n. This case is made like the Ab. n. 1. madhvas5, vasvas. — 2. The
commonest form, made from 8 stems in the R V . : uros, ksis 'food', guggulos
(AV.) 'bdellium', cAros, madhos( + AV.), vdsos ( + AV.), vfistosi + AV.) 'dwelling',
sddhos, svados. — 3. cilrurtas, dAnunas, drtinas6, mddhunas"*, vdsunas8.
L . m. This case is formed in two ways. 1. The normal ending -i is
added to the gunated final vowel in 7 stems: anavi 'non-Aryan man',
trasadasyavi N. of a king, ddsyavi, druhyavi N. of a man, pavlravi
N. of a man, vhnavi, sunavi. — 2. More usually the ending is
dropped, leaving the final stem vowel with Vrddhi instead of Guija.
This form of the L. is taken by 19 stems in the R V . : aktdu 'at night",
iyau, urdu, krdtau, cardu 'pot', druhyau, pdrs'au N. of a man, paiau,

1
The stem fasu- occurs once in the N. . 6 There is no certain evidence as to the
as a neuter, and pasve must owing to the gender of dru- 'wood', hut, as it is a
accent be taken as the D. of that stem; reduced form of daru- which is n„ it may be
the m. stem is /«/«-, D. paiave. j assumed to be n. There is also the form
2
The form dris also occurs in Kh. iv. 5".! drfis.
3 Possibly 4 other words written with -os, 7 madhvas occurs 67 times, madhos 13 times,
should i be pronounced with -uas: dhffnuas madhunas 9 times in the RV. The VS. has
(x.2i IO),rif>uas{yr.$13}tpi/!ruas(y\.2281\ vifnuas all three forms in independent passages,
(vm. 31 ). vasvas occurs 38 times, vases 8 times,
4 LANMAN 410 gives a list of the stems ,vasunas 11 times in the RV.
taking this form of the genitive.
5 Pronounced madhuas twice out of 67
occurrences.
 297
pusti-gau N. of a man, pntd-kratau N. of a man, pUrau, mdnau and man itt
yddau N. of a man, sri'isti-gau N. of a man, sindhau, sitau 'bond', svdrau'
'sacrificial post'.
f. This case is made in one way only, like the second form of the m. The
only example in the RV. is sindhau-, the AV. has sdrau3 and siUau 'birth'.
n. This case is formed in three ways. i. With the ending -/' added to
the gunated stem only in sdnavi, which occurs 9 times. When the adjective
drya- or avyiya- 'made of sheep's wool' immediately follows, the L. of this
word appears as sdno. The Pada here always has sinau, but as the metre
requires a short syllable it seems likely that the ending has been dropped
to avoid a disagreeable sequence of syllables in sdnavy avye, but without
leaving the lengthened form of the stem (rdnav) because of the metre.
A parallel form appears to be vdsto in the formula vdsta usrds 'at break of
dawn', which occurs 5 times in the RV.«. — 2. As in the m., the usual form
is that in -au formed from 8 stems: a-rajjdu 'not consisting of ropes', itrau,
ghrsau 'lively', prthau, inadhau, vasau, vlldu 'stronghold', sdnau. — 3. Accord-
ing to the n- declension: Ayuni, diruni (AV.), druni (Kh. 1. 5 10 J, sdnuni5.
V . m . This case, which gunates the final vowel, is formed from 58
stems. The commonest examples are: indo (144), vaso (62), sata-krato (47)
'having a hundred powers', vSyo (43), sUno (36), su-krato (22)®.
f. This case which has the same form as the m., is made from 6 stems:
adri-sino 'dwelling on mountain tops', dur-hano 'ugly-jawed', prthu-sfo 'having
a broad tuft of hair', sindho, su-blho 'having strong arms', sva-bha.no 'self-
luminous'.
n. The V. n. seems to have been identical in form with the N. judging
by the only example which occurs: guggulu1 (AV. xix. 38 J ).
Du. N. A . V . m. This form, which is made by lengthening the final
vowel, occurs from 69 stems. The commonest examples are: indra-vayii (22)
'Indra and Vayu', vsjim-vasU ( 2 1 ) 'rich in swift mares', blha (20) 'arms',
vhan-vasQ (18) 'possessing great wealth', indm-visna ( 1 3 ) 'Indra and Vi$nu'.
The TS. has also agtiJ-visnU (1.8.22') 'O Agni and Vi$pu\ There are
besides two forms in which the final vowel is shortened': jigatnu (VII. 6 5 ' )
'speeding' and su-hantu (vii. 19«) 9 'easy to slay'.
f. This form is made in the same way as the m. but is much rarer,
occurring from 5 stems only: jigaina, dheno, sd-bandhu 'akin', samSna-
band ha 'having the same kin', hana.
n. This form adds the regular ending -T. The only example in the R V .
is urv-i. The VS. has according to the n- declension jSnu-n-l (xx. 8) 'knees'.
I. m . amsubhyUm (VS.vn. 1), an-amayitnubhyim 'curative', tif-bnhubhyam
'man's arms', blhubhysm. — f. hanubhyam (VS. xi. 78)'°.
D . m . indra - vnyubhytl m (VS. vii. 8), indra visnubhyam (VS. vii. 23),
bjhubhylm.

1
Accented manau only when followed by 5 sdnavi occurs 9 times, sdno (avye) 8
adhi. times, sanau io times, sanuni once.
6
2
A possible m. I., with n would be rajjuni, The V.vibhavaso in Kh, r.8» is wrongly
an emendation for rajatti of the Mss. (AV. accented.
xx. 1333). For the reading of A V . x x . 1 3 1 " 7 The Mss. read gtiggulu or gugguld. See
:anis!hau the Mss. have vanif 'ha which, WHITNEY'Sif note on the passage.
8
correct, would be a unique example of -.1 In both Samhita and Pada text.
in the L. of the u• declension. 9 T h e RV. three times has the curious
3 Emendation for sarau of the Mss.; see A. m. du. bihava = bahu apparently from
AVHTNEY'S note on AV. v. 25'. a stem
10
bahava-.
4 See KAEGI, Festgruss an Bohtlingk hanubhyam, 2
a transition
1
to the »- stems,
48 f. in TS. iv. I . io ; VII. 3. 16 .
298 I. ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4. V E D I C GRAMMAR.

A b . m . UrubhyUm ' t h i g h s ' , bSht'tbhyam. — n . jinubhySm (AV.).

G . m . urvos1, bahvos'. — n. according to the n- declension: jAnunos (AY. ).
L . m . urvos (AV.), bahvos— f. hdnvos1.
PI. N. V . m. This case is formed in two ways. 1. The ending -as is
added to the unmodified stem. Of this formation the only example is
mddkv-as (occurring 4 times). — 2. The ending -as is added to the gunated
stem, e. g. aktav-as. This form is very frequent, being made from 161
stems and occurring over 700 times in the R V . The commonest examples
are: Indavas (67), rbhavas (57), vdsavas (46), suddnavas (42) 'bounteous',
sindhavas (34), asavas (30), adhvaryavas (27), aydvas (27), kardvas (18),
mitd-jnavas (2) 'firm-kneed'.
f. This case is formed in the same two ways as the m. 1. Of this for-
mation there are only two examples: madhv-as, sata-kratv-as. — 2. The
regular form is made from 15 stems in the R V . : an-asravas 'tearless', a-bhTravas
'fearless', a-renavas 'dustless', isavas, tri-dhitavas, dhenavas, parsavas, vasuydvas,
saravas, sanisydvas 'desirous', sa-manyavas and sa-manyavas 'unanimous',
sindhavas, su-ketdvas, sva-setavas 'forming one's own bridge', hdnavas.
N. A . n. This form is made in two ways. 1. Twelve stems take no
ending, four of them also lengthening the final vowel sometimes. These
forms occur 76 times altogether in the RV., 48 times with short, 28 times
with long vowel. The words occurring are: urii, rji't, cAru, tri-dhatu, puru7.
bahi'i, madhu, vasu, vTlu, sAnu, su-dhAtu 'manifold', su-hantu; urn, purii3,
vdsB4, Vila. The Pada text always has the short vowel. — 2. The more
usual form follows the n- declension, adding -ni, before which the final
vowel is lengthened It is made by 14 stems 5 and occurs 127 times alto-
gether in the R V . : aghayUni (Kh. iv. 53) 'malicious', aniini (AV.) 'minute',
al&brmi (AV.) 6 'gourds', asrUni ( A V . ) 'tears', karkandhatii (VS. xix. 23) 'jujube
berries', carani, tri-dhstani, dartOni 'fluid', dA rani, devayfmi, puriini, prthnni,
bahatti, madhUni, yuvayatti 'longing for you both', vasHtii, vfistani, s'mas'rani,
sdnSni.

A. m. This case is made in two ways. 1. The normal ending -as is

added to the unmodified stem. The only two examples of this formation
are pasv-as and kf-tv-as1 'times'. — 2. The usual form is made from 43 stems
with the ending -n, before which the vowel is lengthened. T h e original
ending -ns still survives as -mr 45 times before vowels and once as -ms
before i« 8 . The commonest examples are satrun (43), dasyUn (27), sindhan
(23), aktan (9), rtan (8), pastin (¡)Q. From the VS.: akhan (xxiv. 26) 'moles',
nyahkon (xxiv. 27) 'antelopes', madgtin (xxiv. 22) 'diver-birds', malimlan
(xi. 78; TS.) 'robbers', rurUn (xxiv. 27) 'antelopes'. From the Khilas: isan
(hi. 16 8 ).
f. This like the m. is formed in two ways. 1. The only example is
madhv-as, which occurs twice. — 2. The ending -s is added, before which
the vowel is lengthened. The only two examples in the RV. (occurring 5

1 T o be pronounced uruSs, bahuis, hanuos 6 T h e Mss. in A V . x x . 134 1 read alabuni.

in the R V . 7 T h e A. of a noun kftu- 'making', used
* fmru seems to b e the only form of this \ adverbially: bhuri kftvas (111. 18') 'many
kind in the AV., where it occurs once (XIX. times', iaivat kftvas (ill. 5 4 ' ) 'innumerable
490- , times', daid kftvas (AV. XL 2 9 ) 'ten times'.
8 On the Sandhi of these accusatives in
3 puru occurs 24 times, puru 12 times (all
but once at the end of a Pada). • un see LANMAN 415 (bottom) and 4 1 6
4 vasu occurs twice, vasu 19 times (12 (top).
times at the end of a Pada), 9 LANMAN 4 1 6 enumerates the stems which
5 Half of these also take the form without | form this A.
n in the RV.
 VI. DECLENSION. PRONOUNS. PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 299

t i m e s ) a r e : isus a n d dhenis. T h e K h i l a a f t e r R V . x . 9 has the f o r m vdrenya-

kratiis 'intelligent', b u t the t e x t o f K h . in. 1 3 ' r e a d s vdrenya-kratus1.
I . m . T h i s f o r m is f r e q u e n t , b e i n g m a d e f r o m 5 0 s t e m s a n d o c c u r r i n g
o v e r 2 0 0 times. T h e c o m m o n e s t e x a m p l e s ' a r e : vasubhis (24), aktitbhis ( 1 7 ; ,
rtübhis (15)1 äsübhis( 1 2 ) , psy;ibhis( 1 2 ) ' p r o t e c t o r s ' , indubhis ( 1 1 ) , bhänübhis{7),
rb hüb/¡is (6), sindhubhis ( 5 ) , snubhis 3 ( 5 ) .
f . T h i s c a s e , f o r m e d in t h e s a m e w a y a s t h e m., is rare, o n l y 3 e x a m p l e s
o c c u r r i n g in t h e R V . : eka-dhenubhis ' e x c e l l e n t c o w s ' , tri-dhätubhis, dhenübhis.
n . a-reni'ibhis 'dustless', dsrubhis ( V S . x x v . 9), karkdndhubhis ( V S . x x i . 3 2 ) ,
jarAyubhis ( A V . ) , bahübhis, mddhubhis ( K h . 1. 1 1 7 ) , vasubhis, smdsrubhis
( V S . x x v . 1 ; S V . ) ' b e a r d s ' , su-mdntubhis ' b e n e v o l e n t ' .
D . m . a-satrubhyas 'foeless', rtübhyas ( V S . x x n . 28), rbhubhyas, guhgi'ibhyas
' d e s c e n d a n t s o f G u n g u ' , trtsubhyas ' t h e T r t s u s ' ( a tribe), ddsäbhlsubhyas,
' h a v i n g ten reins', ddsyubhyas, paii'ibhyas, pürübhyas, bahübhyas, mrgayübhyas
( V S . x v i . 2 7 ) 'hunters', vdsubhyas, sindhubhyas.
f . T h e r e is n o e x a m p l e in t h e R V . T h e A V . h a s t w o : isubhyas, dhenübhyas.
— n . sAnubhyas ( V S . x x x . 6).
A b . m . aktubhyas, jatrübhyas ' c a r t i l a g e s o f the b r e a s t b o n e ' , jighatsübhyas
( A V . ) ' s e e k i n g t o d e v o u r ' , ddsyubhyas, bahübhyas, bhrgubhyas ' B h f g u s ' , mrtyübhyas
( A V . ) , sd-bandhubhyas ( A V . ) . — f . dhanubhyas, sindhubhyas.
G . m . T h i s c a s e is f o r m e d f r o m 23 s t e m s in the R V . , 1 2 b e i n g o x y -
tones and 11 o t h e r w i s e a c c e n t e d : 1. rtünäm, rbhünäm, rsünäm ' f l a m e s ' ,
carünäm, devayanäm, pasünäm ( A V . V S . T S . ) , pitünäm, purünäm, präsünäm
' v e r y swift', babhrünäm, bahonäm, yjtünam ' s p e c t r e s ' , ripünäm, stäyünäm ( V S . )
' t h i e v e s ' . — 2. abhi-kratünäm 'insolent', abhisünäm 'reins', ahy-drsünüm ' g l i d i n g
l i k e a s n a k e ' , krdtünäm, trtsünäm, ddsyünäm ( A V . ) , piyarünäm ( A V . ) ' m i s c h i e -
v o u s ' , bhfgünäm, mdnünäm, vdsüHäm, sdtrünäm, sa-bandhünäm ( A V . ) , sindhünäm,
svdrünSm ' s a c r i f i c i a l posts'. — f . dhenünäm; sindhünäm. — n . mddhünäm,
yäsünjm ' e m b r a c e s ' , vdsünüm.
Li. m . amsüsu ( V S . VIII. 5 7 ) , aktüsu, dnusu, äs'üsu, druhyüsu, pasüsu
( A V . ) , purüsu, bähüsu, yddusu, vi-bandhusu ( A V . ) 'kinless', visvd-bhänusu
'all-illumining', sdtrusu, sindhusu. — f. vdstusu, sindhusu4. — n . urüsu,
västusu, smasrusu, sänusu, smisu s ( V S . T S . ) .

II. Pronouns.
BENFEY, Vollständige Grammatik 773—780 (p. 333—340). — WHITNEY, Sanskrit
Grammar 490—526 (p. 185—199). — PISCHEL, ZDMG. 35, 714—716. — DELBRÜCK,
Syntaktische Forschungen 5, 204—221; cp. BEUGMANN, K G . 494—525, and Die Demon-
strativa der indogermanischen Sprachen, Leipzig 1904.

3 9 0 . T h e p r o n o u n s o c c u p y a s p e c i a l p o s i t i o n in d e c l e n s i o n , as b e i n g
d e r i v e d f r o m a l i m i t e d class o f r o o t s with a d e m o n s t r a t i v e s e n s e , a n d as
exhibiting several m a r k e d peculiarities of inflexion. T h e s e peculiarities a r e
in s o m e d e g r e e e x t e n d e d to a c e r t a i n n u m b e r o f a d j e c t i v e s .

1. P e r s o n a l Pronouns.
391. T h e s e a r e the m o s t p e c u l i a r o f all, as b e i n g f o r e a c h p e r s o n
d e r i v e d f r o m s e v e r a l r o o t s o r c o m b i n a t i o n s of r o o t s , as b e i n g s p e c i a l l y
a n o m a l o u s in i n f l e x i o n , as n o t d i s t i n g u i s h i n g g e n d e r a n d , t o s o m e e x t e n t ,

i The m. A. sindkun occurs once (x. 352) I * äyüfu (1.58 3 ) is perhaps a transfer form
in the sense of a f. for äyufu-, cp. LANMAN 419 1 .
' LANMAN 416 (bottom) enumerates the | 5 With dissyllabic accent as usual,
stems taking this case. ]
3 Accentuated like a dissyllable as elsewhere. |
3OO I . ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4. VEDIC GRAMMAR.

not even number. Some resemble neuters in form; a few have no apparent
case-ending; in two of them the acc. pi. masc. does duty as fem. also.
The forms of the first and second person' which occur are:
1. Sing. N . ahdm2, A . miim, ma. I . mays. D . máhyam, máhya, me\
Ab. mad*. G . mama, me. L. máyi5.
Du. N. vám ( R V ) . 6 . A. nan. D.? ñau. Ab. avád (TS.). G. 8 nau.
P I . N . vayám. A . asmán9, nasi. I. asmábhis. D . astndbhyam, asme'
( R V . ) , ñas. A b . asmad. G . asmftkam,0, asmáka " ( R V 1 . ) , tías. L . asmé, asmásu'2.
2 . S i n g . N . ívám,J. A . tvám, tva. I . tváya, ívá ( R V . ) . D. tubhyam,
túbhya, A? 1 *. A b . tvdd. G . tdva, te. L . tvé^ ( R V . V S . ) , tvdyi ( A V . V S . T S . ) .
D u . N . yuvám. A . yuvám, vain. I. yuvdbhyam, yuvÁbhyam. D. vam.
A b . yuvád ( R V ' . ) . G . yuvós ( R V . a n d K h . i . 1 2 " ) , yuvdyos (TS.111.5.41), vam.
P I . yttydml6. A . yusmAnf. yusmás ( V S 2 . ) , vas,s. D. yusmdbhyam,
vas. A b . yusmád. G . yusmákamIO, yusmáka ( R V 2 . ) , vas. L. yusiné.
a. The usual stems representing these personal pronouns in derivation or as first
member of a compound are ma-, asmatía-, yuva-, yupna--, e . g . ma-vant- 'like me',
asma-drith- 'hating us', ti'á-vant- 'like thee', tvá-yata- 'presented by thee'; yuva-yú- 'desiring
you two', yuvi-Jhita- 'established by you two', yuva datta- 'given by you two'; pisma-
yánt- 'desiring you', yufmáü/a- 'supported by you'; yufma-dafía- 'given by you'"9.
b. The forms mad-, asmad., f-rad- occur a few times as first member of compounds;
thus mát-ifta- 'done by me', mit-sakhi- 'my companion', mat-tás (AV.) 'from m e ' ; asmáí-
sai/n- 'having us as companions', asmád-rata- (VS.) 'given by us'; tvát-pit]'- (TS.) 'having
thee as father'; ivád-yoni- (AV.) 'derived from thee', tvád-v.vacana- (TS.) 'having thee as
umpire'.
c. aham-, mam-, mama-; asme--, tvam- are also sometimes found as first member of
compounds; thus aham-uttará- (AV.) 'struggle for precedencc', aham-pürvá- 'eager to be
first', aham-yú- 'proud'; mám-pasyá- (AV.) 'looking at m e ' ; mama-satyá- 'dispute as to
ownership'; asmc-hiti- 'errand for us'; Wam-kama- 'desiring thee', tvam-ahu!i- (TS.) 'offering
to thee'.

2. Demonstrative Pronouns.
392. Td- 'that', which also serves as the personal pronoun of the third
person, 'he', 'she', 'it', is typical, in its inflexion, of the adjectival pronoun.
It has the special peculiarity of using the stem sa- for the nom. masc. and
fem. sing, and, in the RV., for the loc. sing. masc. and neut. The general
peculiarities of the adjectival pronominal declension, as distinct from

• Cp. GAEDICKE, Akkusativ 1 2 — 14. according to the nominal declension; cp.

2 On the formation of aham cp. J . SCHMIDT,
KZ. 36, 405 ff. — All the nominatives of the
personal pronouns are formed with -am as
also the N. sing, of the demonstrative ay-
am and the reflexive svayam.
3 The unaccented forms of the personal
pronoun (85) may be accompanied by
accented words in agreement with them;
e. g. te jayatah 'of thee when conquering';
v? vrtabhyah 'for you that were confined';
nas tribhyah 'to us three'.
4 mad is two or three times unaccented
in the AV.
5 Cp. BAKTHOLOMAE, Z D M G . 50, 7 2 5 .
6 This seems to be the only nom. form
(vx. 5 s 1 ) occurring in the Samhitas. The
nom. in the SB. is avdm, in the AB. avam;
the acc. in the &B. is avam. The form vam
must be an abbreviation of avam.
7 The AB. has avabhyam.
8 The S B . has avayos.
9 asman and yusman are new formatives
BRUGMANN, K G . 5 1 9 , 2, note.
asmätam and yusmakartt are properly
acc. n. of the possessives asmäka-, p/smaka-;
c p . BRUGMANN, K G . 5 2 4 , 4.
11 Occurs only in 1. 173 IO ,
'2 asmasu is a new formation according to
the inst, asmä-bh s.
\ 'i tvam must often be read as tuam.
• 4 le, originally only loc., is used as
dat. and gen.; similarly me-, the loc. asme
is also used as dat.
; ' 5 C p . BARTHOLOMAE, loc. cit.
! 1 0 Originally *yüi-am where y was substi-
i tuted for the sibilant owing to the influence
I o f vayam; c p . BARTHOLOMAE, o p . c i t . 726,
(note; BRUGMANN, KG. 5 1 3 and note 3, 5 1 8 .
• 7 yusmätt is a new formation according
to the nominal declension (like asmän).
» 8 The inst. was originally in all probability
lyusmä (like tvä), which later becameyusmabhis
j (like asmäbhis).
j 19 This compound may preserve the old inst.
 V I . DECLENSION. PRONOUNS. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 301

the nominal a- declension, are that 1. in the singular they take -d instead of
-m in the nom. and acc. neut; the element -sma- in the dat, abl., loc. masc.
and neut.; the element -sya- in the dat, abl, gen., loc. fem.; the suffix -in in
the loc. masc. and neut.'; 2. in the plural they take -e for -3s in the nom.
masc.; s for n in the gen. before -3m.
1. The inflexion of td- accordingly is as follows:
Sing. N. m. sd-s2, f. sii, n. td-d. A. m. td-m, f. tà-m, n. td-d- I. m.
ténïi*, f. idyl. D. m. n. tâ-smai, f. td-syai. Ab. m. n. td-smJt, f. td-sy3s.
G. m. n. td-sya, f. td-syis. L. td-sminsd-smin (RV.), f. tâ-syàm.
Du. N. A. m. tâ, tau, f. té, n. té. I. m. f. tA-bhyiims. Ab. m. tâ-bhy3m.
G. m. n. tdyos. L. m. tdyos.
Pl. N. m. té, f. tâs, n. td, tâni. A. m. tàn, f. tàs, n. tâ, tini. I. m. n.
té-bhis, tais (AV.; Kh. 11. io<), £ tâ-bhis. D. m. n. té-bhyas, f. tA-bhyas.
G. m. té-s3m, f. tÀ-sâm. L. m. té-su, f. tà-su.
a. T h e s t e m ta- is f r e q u e n t l y u s e d in d e r i v a t i o n , e s p e c i a l l y t h a t of a d v e r b s ; e. g .
td-thi ' t h u s ' , ta-vant- ' s o g r e a t ' , tà-ti (AV.) ' s o m a n y ' , a n d in t h e c o m p o u n d ti-dfi- ' s u c h ' .
b . T h e n e u t e r f o r m tad is o f t e n u s e d a s t h e first m e m b e r of a c o m p o u n d ; t h u s
tad-anna- h a v i n g t h a t f o o d ' ; tad-apas ' a c c u s t o m e d t o that w o r k ' ; lad-id-artha• ' h a v i n g
j u s t t h a t a s a n o b j e c t ' ; tad-okas- ' d e l i g h t i n g in t h a t ' ; tid-ojas- ' p o s s e s s i n g s u c h p o w e r ' ;
tad-vasd- ' h a v i n g a d e s i r e f o r t h a t ' ; tad-vid- (AV.) ' k n o w i n g t h a t ' .
2. Two other demonstrative pronouns are formed from tâ-, a. One of
them, eta-, formed by prefixing the pronominal element e-6, means 'this here'.
It is inflected exactly like td- and is of common occurrence. The forms
which occur are :
m. Sing. m. N. esds or esa2. A. etdm. I. eténa. D. etdsmai (TS.).
A b . etdsmàt ( A V . ) . G . etdsya ( A V . ) . - D u . N . et A, etdu. — P l . N . été. A. et,in.
L etébhis, étais ( A V . ) . D . etébhyas.
f. Sing. N. esâ. A. etdm. I. etâyS. L. etdsyâm. — Du. N. été. — Pl.
N. et,is. A. et,is. I. etâbhis (AV.). L. etâsu (AV.).
n. Sing. N. etdd. - Pl. N. et A ( +VS.), etâni.
a . T h e s t e m u s e d in d e r i v a t i o n a n d c o m p o s i t i o n is eta-\ thus eta-vant- ' s o g r e a t ' ;
ttâ-dfs- ' s u c h ' .
b. The other secondary demonstrative, tyâ-, is derived from tâ- with
the suffix -yai and means 'that'. It is common in the RV., but rare in
the later Samhitâs8. It is used adjectivally, being nearly always accompanied
by its substantive. It is never found at the beginning of a sentence except
when followed by u, cid, tiu, or su9.
The forms occurring are:
m. Sing. N . syd10 ( + VS.). A . tydm. G . tydsya. — Du. N . tyâ. — Pl.
N . tyé. A . tyàn. I. tyébhis.
f. Sing. N. syà. A. tydm. I. ty,i (for tydyâ). G. tydsyâs. — Du. N. tyé.
— Pl. N. ty,is. A. tyàs.
n. Sing. N. tydd ( + TS.). — Pl. tyâ. tyâni.
393. The demonstrative which appears as ayàm in in the nom. sing,
masc. and means 'this here', employs the pronominal roots a- and (in various
modifications) /'- in its inflexion, the latter being used in nearly all the
1
T h i s suffix is o n c e f o u n d in t h e RV., 5 I n IX. 66» t h i s f o r m (f.) s e e m s t o h a v e
in t h e f o r m o f -mitt, a t t a c h e d t o yidfs- ' h a v i n g : a loc. s e n s e ; s e e LANMAN 3434.
what appearance', though the stem ends ] 6 A c c o r d i n g to BRUGMANN, K G . 495, 6 ,
in a c o n s o n a n t . n o t e 3, originally loc. s i n g , of a - .
* O n t h e S a n d h i of sa- a n d efd- s e e 7 Cp. BRUGMANN, K G . 401 a n d 495, 2.
8
78. I t o c c u r s t w o o r t h r e e t i m e s a l s o in B .
L T h e P a d a t e x t a l w a y s r e a d s ttna. 9 Cp. GRASSMANN, S. V. tyâ-.
10
4 sâsmitt o c c u r s n e a r l y half a s o f t e n a s syà- a n d tyâ- a r e o f t e n t o b e r e a d w i t h
tàsmin in t h e R V . ! Vyuha.
302

nom. and acc. forms, the former in the other cases. The acc. sing. masc.
and fem. starts from i-m', the acc. of /-, and is followed by the nom. acc.
du. and pi., all these forms having the appearance of being made from a
stem ima-. T h e nom. sing. fem. is formed from i-', and the nom. acc.
sing. neut. from i-d (the N. A . n. of /-), both with the suffix -am added.
T h e nom. sing. masc. is formed from a- with the suffix -am and interposing
-y-. T h e remaining cases formed from a- 3 are inflected throughout like ta-.
T h e inflexion of this pronoun is accordingly as follows:
Sing. N. m. a-y-am, f. i-y-am, n. i-d-am. A. m . im-am, f. im-dm, n.
i-d-am. I. m . e-nd$, f. ayd*. D. m. a-smdi5, f. a-sydi. Ab. m. a-smdt6,
f. a-syds. G. m. a-sya 7, f. a-syds. L . m . a-smin, f. a-sydm.
Du. N. A . m . imd, imau, f. imi, n. ime. D. m . a-bhydm (RV1.). A b . m.
a-bhydm. G. m. a-y-os (RV.)8. L. m . a-y-os^ (RV.).
PI. N. m . ime, f. imds, n . imd, imdni. A . m . imdn, f. imds, n. imd,
imdni. I. m . e-bhis, f. a-bhis'1". D. m. e-bhyds, f. a-bhyas. G. m. e-sdm,
f. a-sdm. L . m . e-su, f. a-su.
394. T h e corresponding demonstrative employed to express remoteness,
'that there', 'yon', appears in the nom. sing. masc. fem. as asdu. T h e pro-
nominal root employed throughout its inflexion is a-, but always in an
extended form only. The fundamental stem used in every case, excepting
the nom. sing., is a-m, acc. masc. of a-; this is extended by the addition of
the particle u to amu-, which has become the stem in the oblique cases of
the sing, (with long u in the acc. fem.); in the plur. ami- is the fem. and ami-
the masc. stem (except the acc.). T h e nom. sing, forms are quite peculiar.
In the masc. and fem. the pronominal root a- seems to be compounded
with sa- extended by the particle u\ a-sd-u and a-sd-u"; while the neut. has
the pronominal -d extended with the suffix -as: a-d-ds. Only one dual form
has been noted, and several plural case forms are wanting. T h e forms
found in the Samhitas are the following:
m. Sing. N . asdu. A. amum. I. ami'ma (VS.). D . amu-smai. Ab. ami'i-
smat (AV. TS.). G. amu-sya'2. L . amu-smin (AV.). — P I . N . ami'3. A. am an
(AV.). D . amibhyas (AV.). G. ami-sam.
f. S i n g . N . asdu. A . amdm. I. amuydI4. D . amit-syai (VS.). G. ami't-
syas (AV.). — Du. N . amd ( A V . ) . — P I . N . amis. A. amds.
n. Sing. N. adds. — PI. N. amii (AV.).
395. A defective unaccented pronoun of the third person meaning 'he',
'she', and in the A V . 'it', is e-na-'S. It occurs almost exclusively in the

1 Cp. BRUGMANN, K G . 495, 10. 6 T h e abl. according to the nominal de-

' F r o m i- is also f o r m e d the acc. I-m and clension, at, is used as a conjunction,
the neut. i-d, both used as particles. > 7 T h e form imasya also occurs o n c e .
3 T h e P a d a text always reads end (the I 8 T o b e read as aySs.
unaccented ena occurs twice). T h i s and all 9 Seems to b e wrongly read as ayos in
other oblique cases formed from a-, when the Pada text; cp. LANMAN 344 s .
used as nouns m a y lose their a c c e n t ; see •<> abhis occurs ten times in the R V . ; it is
85 JS 3 ; cp. GRASSMANN, S. V. idam. O n ay am thrice accented abhis and thrice u n a c c e n t e d :
see BRUGMANN, K G . 498, 3. cp. note 5 .
4 T h i s inst. is fairly frequent in the R V . ; •« Cp. BRUGMANN, K G . 495, 6 ; 498, 4.
instead of it anaya occurs twice ( i x . 65"-27), >2 This is the only instance of -sya b e i n g
b e i n g probably a later correction t o obviate added to any but an a- stem.
the hiatus. O t h e r w i s e no forms of ana- 13 T h i s form is Pragrhya (70). O n its
(anina, anaya, anayos) occur in the Sam- origin cp. IF. 18, 64, note.
hit&s. But anina (n.) occurs in K h . 111. 16 7 . »4 Used adverbially, with shifted a c c e n t .
5 asmai and asya are accented on the . »5 T h e same e- (loc. of a-) as in ¿-ta-
first syllable, the former four or five times, 'one', e-ia ' t h u s ' ; cp. BRUGMANN, K G . 495, 6.
the latter about ten times, w h e n specially em-
phatic at the b e g i n n i n g of a Pada in the R V .
 V I . DECLENSION. INTERROGATIVE AND RELATIVE PRONOUNS.

acc. (the great majority of occurrences being masc. sing.). Otherwise it is

found only twice in the inst sing, and three or four times in the gen. dual.
The forms occurring are: m . Sing. A. mam. I. enena (AV.). — D u . A. enau
(AV.). G. enos (RV.), enayos (AV.). — PI. A. enan.
f. Sing. A. enlmx. Du. A ene. PL A. en3s. — n. N. enad{AV.; Kh.iv. 6').
396. Another demonstrative found nearly twenty times in the RV., but
otherwise occurring only once in the AV., is the unaccented pronoun tva- 1
meaning 'one', 'many a one', generally repeated, in the sense of 'one —
another'. The forms occurring are: m. Sing. N. tvas. A. ft>am. \.tvena.
D. tvasmai. Pl. N. tve3. — f. Sing. N. tva. D. tvasyai. — n. Sing. N. tvad.
a. The pronoun ara- 4 'this' is found two or three times in the RV.,
and only in the gen. du. form, avis in combination with vim, meaning 'of
you two being such' (used like sa, e. g. sa tvdm 'thou as such').
b. The pronoun ama- s 'this' occurs only once in the AV.: dmo'ham
asrni (xrv. 271), 'this am I'.

3. I n t e r r o g a t i v e P r o n o u n :
397. The interrogative ka-, 'who?', 'which?', 'what?' used both as sub-
stantive and adjective, is quite regular in its declension, excepting the alter-
native neuter form ii-m6, which instead of the pronominal -d has the
nominal -m (never elsewhere attached to a stem in -i). The forms occur-
ring are:
m. Sing. N. ids. A. kam. I. kina. D. kasmai. Ab. k asmat (AV.). G.
kdsya. L. kdsmin. — Du. kdu. — Pl. N. kl I. kShis. L. khu (VS.).
f. Sing. N. ka. A. kam. I. kaya. G. kdsyis (AV. VS.). — Pl. N. kas.
A. kris. L. k/isu.
n. Sing. N. A. kd-d' (RV.) and ki-m. — P l . N. A. ka and kani.
a. In forming derivatives, which are numerous, the stem of the interrogative
employed is not only ka-, but also ki- and hi-; e . g . ka-ti 'how many?'; ki-yant- 'how
great?'; kii-hti 'where?'. The neuter form kim is twice used in this way: kim-yu- 'desiring
what?'; kim-maya- 'consisting of what?'.
b. In the formation of c o m p o u n d s kad occurs twice as first member: in kat-payd-
'greatly swelling', and kad-artha- 'having what purpose?', kim is similarly used a few
times in the later SamhiUs; thus kim sila- (VS. TS.) 'being in stony ground', kim-kara-
(AV.) 'servant'.
4. Relative P r o n o u n .
398. The relative pronoun ya- 'who', 'which', 'what' is perfectly regular
in its declension. The forms occurring are:
m. Sing. N. ydss. — A. yam. I. yAia9 and yJna. D.yasmat. Ab. yasmat'0.
G. yasya. L. yasmin. — Du. N. A. ya, ydu. D. yabhyam. G. ydyos. L. yayos
and yis1' (RV.). — Pl. N. ye. A. yan. I. yibhis, ydis (AV.; Kh. L 9')- D.
yebhyas. G. yharn. L. yhu.
> This form occurs once (vin. 6'9) at the fied form in nd-iis and ma-kis 'no one',
beginning of a sentence and is then accented 'nothing', 'never*.
as enam. 7 The relative frequency of tad to kim in
' The unaccented adverb tvadatum (MS.the RV. is as 2 to 3 .
2 8
iv. 2 ) 'sometimes', is derived from this yas is the commonest declensional form
pronoun, in the RV., occurring more than 1000 times.
3 See WHITNEY'S note on AV. v i a . 9® in 9 yrna is twice as common in the RV. as
his translation. yina; the Pada text, however, always reads
4 This pronoun also occurs in the Avesta; ylna (cp. LAN.MAN 3 3 2 ) .
10
c p . BRUGMANN 4 9 5 , 1 0 . The ablative according to the nominal
5 From this pronoun are derived the inst. declension, ya/, is used as a conjunction.
11
and abl. adverbs JVith shifted accent) ami yds for yayos, like yuvos for yuvayos;
•at home' and a nat 'from near at hand'. cp. BB. 23, 183; ZDMG. 50, 589.
° The nom. masc. is preserved as a petri-
3°4 I. ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4. VEDIC GRAMMAR.

f. S i n g . N . )ä. A. ydm. I. ydya. G . ydsyas. L . ydsyäm. — Du. N. y/

(TS. AV.). G . ydyos. L . ydyos. — P I . N . yds. A . yds. I. ydbhis. D. yäbhyas.
G . yds am. L. ydsu.
n. Sing. N. A . ydd. — D u . ye. — PI. yd, ydni.
a. T h e stem of yd- is used in the formation of many d e r i v a t i v e s ; e. g.yd-thi ' a s ' ;
it also appears as first member of a c o m p o u n d in yä-dfs- 'which like'. T h e neuter form
yad is once used similarly in the R V . : yat-kima- 'desiring what'.
b. T h e relative receives the indefinite m e a n i n g of ' w h o e v e r ' 1 by the addition of
tdi ca, ids rid, or rid a l o n e ; e. g. ydd vo vayam calf ma idc rid agah (II. 27M) 'whatever
sin we have committed against y o u ' ; yil kim ca Juritam mdyi (1. 2 3 " ) 'whatever sin (there
is) in m e ' ; ye cid dhi tvam fiayah purua itdye juhürl (I.48 1 4 ) 'whatever early seers have
called on thee for aid'.
5. Indefinite Pronouns.
399. a. In the R V . there are found the two simple indefinite pro-
nouns sama (unaccented) 'any', 'every' and simd- 'every\ 'all'. T h e six
forms of the forir.er which occur are: m. Sing. A. samam. D. samasmai.
A b . samasm'tt. G . samasya. L . samasmin. — P I . N . same. From simd- are
met with the five forms: Sing. V. si ma. N. simds. D. simdsmai (neut).
Ab. simds mat. — PI. sim'.
b . Compound indefinite pronouns are formed by combining the
particles ca, cand, or cid with the interrogative; thus kas ca 'any', 'any one';
ids' cand 'any one soever', 'every'; kds cid 'any', 'some'; ' a n y o n e ' , ' s o m e o n e ' .

6. Reflexive Pronouns.
4 0 0 . 1. T h e reflexive adjective is svd- 'own', which refers to the first
and second as well as the third person of all numbers; e. g. ydd, indragni,
mddathah sve durotte (1. 108 7 ) 'when, O Indra and Agni, ye rejoice in your
own abode'.
2. T h e substantive reflexive is sva-y-dm ' s e l f , which is derived from
svd- with the suffix -am and interposing y (as a-y-dm from a-). It is properly
used as a nom. referring to all three persons; e. g. svaydm yajasva divi, da a,
devdn (x. 7 6 ) 'do thou thyself, O god, worship the gods in heaven'. Some-
times, however, the nominative nature of the pronoun is forgotten and svaydm
is used agreeing in sense with another case; e. g. vatsdm . . svaydm gätüm
. . icchdmanam (IV. 18 I O ) 'the calf himself seeking a way'.
3. Other cases than the nom. are regularly expressed in the R V . by
tanu- 'body'; e. g. svaydm gätüm tanva icchdmanam (iv. 1 8 1 0 ) 'himself
seeking a way for himself (ianvef; yajasva tanvdm (x. 7 6 ) 'worship t h y s e l f ;
mil hasmahi prajdytf, md tanäbhih (x. 1 2 8 5 ) 'may we suffer no harm with
(regard to our) offspring or ourselves'. T h e reflexive adjective and a
possessive gen. m a y be added; e . g . dgne, yajasva tanvam tdva svdm (vi. 11')
'Agni, worship thine own self' 2 .
T h e r e are one or two instances in the RV. of the incipient use of
ätman- 'soul* in a reflexive sense; thus bdlatn dddhdna atmdni (ix. 1 1 3 ' )
'putting strength into h i m s e l f ; ydksmam sdrvasmäd ätmdnas . . vi vrhSmi
(x. 1 6 3 s ) 'I expel the disease from (thy) whole self'. T h e acc. atmdnam,
though not met with in the R V . as a reflexive, is frequently found so used
in the later S a r p h i t ä s i ; also in K h . HI. i o J .
a. In the formation o f c o m p o u n d s sva- several times appears in the substantive
as well as the adjective sense as first m e m b e r ; e. g. sva-yukta• 'self-yoked'; ma-yugzan-
' o w n companion', svaydm is also thus used in a few compounds; thus svayam-jä- 'self-
b o r n ' ; svayam-bhu• 'self-existent*.

' Cp. DELBRÜCK, Syntaktische Forschungen I 2 Cp. DELBRÜCK op. cit. 135, and GRASS-
SI 5 6 9 — S 7 o . MANN, s. v. svd• and tanu-.
J See DELBRÜCK op. cit. 155.
 VL DECLENSION. PRONOUNS. PRONOMEN ALS.

7. Possessive Pronouns.
401. Possessive pronouns are of rare occurrence because the genitive
of the personal pronoun is generally used to express the sense which they
convey.
a . T h e possessives of the f i r s t p e r s o n are mamaka- ( R V . ) 'my*, mamaka-
'my', (both formed from the genitive of the personal pronoun mama)1, and
asmdka- 'our*. T h e commonest form of the latter is the N. A . n e u t asmdkam,
which is used as the gen. plur. of the personal pronoun 2 . T h e other forms
occurring are asmdkena, asmdkasas, and asmdkebhis. T h e V S . also has the
form asmakds (iv. 24) 'our" from a secondary derivative J.
b. T h e possessives of the second person are tuvaka- (RV.) 'thy',
(from tdva), met with only in the form tUvakt'bhyas; tva-* (RV.) 'thy*,
found only in the inst. pL tvdbhis (11. 20 *); and yusmdka- 'your*, the N. A .
n e u t of which is used as the gen. pL of the personal pronoun of the second
person; it otherwise occurs only in the RV. in the two forms yusmikena and
yusmdkibhis.
c . Besides being used reflexively, s v a - is fairly often e m p l o y e d as a
simple possessive, generally as that of the t h i r d p e r s o n , 'his', Tier', 'their*,
but also of the second, 'thy', 'your', and o f the first, 'my', 'our'. It is,
however, inflected like an ordinary adjective, having only two isolated forms
according to the pronominal declension 5 . T h e forms which occur are:
m . s i n g . N. svds. A . svam. I. svbia and sv/na6. D. sviiya. A b . svit.
G . svasya. L . svd and svdsmin (RV.). — PI. N. svds ( A V . ) . A . svdn (AV.).
I. svt'6/iis and svdis. D. svShyas (Kh. v. i 1 ) . G. svinam ( A V . ; K h . 11. io*).
L. svhu.
f. sing. N. svfi. A . svdm. L svdyS. D . svdyai. A b . svdyas. G . svasyas
( R V . ) . L. svdyctm. — PI. N. svds. A . svds. L svdbhis. L. svdsu.
n. sing. N. A . svam. — P L A . svfi.

8. Pronominal derivatives and compounds.

402. A certain number of derivatives are formed from the roots or
stems of simple pronouns by means of suffixes which modify the pronominal
sense. There are also a few pronominal compounds.
a. With the s u f f i x -ka, conveying a diminutive or contemptuous
meaning, derivatives are formed from the pronouns id-, yd-, sd-, and asau;
thus ta-kd- ( R V . ) 'that little', of which the forms A . sing. m. takd-m and n.
takd-d occur; yd-ka- 'who', 'which', the only forms met with being N. m. yakas,
f. yaka (VS. xxm. 22, 23), and N. pi. m. yake ( R V . ) ; sa-kd- ( R V . A V . ) 'that
little', of which only N. sing. f. said occurs; N. sing. f. asakdu 'that little'
(VS. xxm. 22, 23).
b. With the comparative suffix -iara derivatives are formed from i-,
id-, and yd-; and with the superlative suffix -tama, from the latter two;
thus i-tara- 'other'; ka-tard- 'which of two?'; ya-tard- 'who or which of two';
ka-tamd- 'who or which of many?', ya-tamd- 'who or which of many'.
C. With -ti derivatives with a numerical sense are formed from id-, id-,
and yd-; thus ka-ti 'how many?', ta-ti ( A V . ) 'so m a n y ' ; yd-ti 'as many'. No
inflected forms of these words occur.

1
Cp. BRUGMANN, KG. J24, 2. the influence of svä-; cp. BEUGMANN,
» Op. cit. 524. 4- op. c i t 524, 2.
3 Formed like mämatd- beside mämaka-, S That is, svdsyät and svdsmtM.
6
4 Used as a possessive probably under The Pada text always reads svcna.
Iado-arischc Philologie. I. 4. qq
3<A6 L ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4 . VEDIC GRAMMAR.

d. With -yant, expressing the quantitative meaning of 'much', derivatives

are formed from i- and ki-: i-yant- 'so much' (n. N. sing, iyat, pi. iyanti;
f. D. sing, iyatyai)-, ki-yant- 'how much?' (sing. N. n. adv. kiyat, D. m. kiyate,
L. k'tyati for i'/yati; N. f. kiyatx).
e. With -vant are formed derivatives from personal pronouns with
the sense of 'like', 'attached to', and from others in the quantitative sense
of 'great'; thus tvd-vani- 'like thee', md-vant- 'like me'; yuvd-vant- (RV.)
'devoted to you two' (only D. yuvdrate)\ yusmd-vant- (RV.) 'belonging to
you' (only L. pi. yusmdvatsu)-, etd-vant- and td-vant- 'so great'; yd-vant- 'as
great'; i-vant- 'so great' (sing. N. n. hat, D. m. n. hate, G. hatas\ pi. A. m.
hatas); ki-vant- 'how far?' (G. kivatas).
f. With -dfi, -drsa, -drksa are formed the following pronominal com-
pounds: T-df-ksa- (VS.) and T-drs- (VS. TS.) 'such'; eta-drksa- (VS.) and eta-
dfs- 'such' (N. sing. n. etiidfk)-, ki-drs- 'what like?' (N. sing. m. kxdri{)\
ta-dj-s- 'such' (N. sing. m. ta-drk); yd-drs- 'what like' (sing. m. N. yadrk, L.
yadfsmin).
9. Pronominal Adjectives.
403. Certain adjectives derived from pronominal roots or allied to
pronouns in sense conform in varying degrees to the pronominal declension.
1. The adjectives which strictly adhere to the pronominal type of
inflexion are anyd- 'other', and (as far as can be judged by the few forms
occurring and by the usage of the later language) the derivatives formed
with -tara and -tama from kd- and yd-. The specifically pronominal cases
of the latter which have been met with are: sing. N. n. katardd (AV.),
yatardd; katamad, yatamdd (AV.); D. m. katamdsmai (VS.); G. f. katamasyas
(AV.); L. f. yatamdsyam (AV.); PI. N. m. katami (AV.), yatami (AV.). No
such form of itara- has been found. The forms of anyd- which occur are:
m. sing. N. anyds. A. anydm. I. anyi'na. D. anydsmai (AV.). G.
anydsya. L. anydsmin. — PI. N. any/. A. anydn. I. anyc'b/iis and anydis
D. any/bhyas (AV.). G. any/sam. L. anycsn.
f. sing. N. anyd. A. anydm. I. anydya. D. anydsyai. G. anydsyiis.
L. anydsyam. — Ou. N. any/. — PI. N. anyds. A. anyds. I. anydbhis. G. anydsiim.
L. anyisu.
n. sing. N. anydd. — Du. I. anydbhyam (AV.). — PI. N. anyd.
2. The three adjectives cka- 'one', visva- 'all', sdrva- 'whole' are par-
tially pronominal, following this declension except in the nom. acc. sing,
neut., which takes the nominal -m. Thus sing. G. f. Masyas, L. m. ¿kasmin
pi. N. m. ¿ke, but sing. N. n. ¿karn; sing. U. vlhiasmai2, Ab. visi>asmiit2,
L. visvasmin', pi. N. m. visve, G. m. visvcsam, f. visvasam, but sing. N. n.
viivam; sing. D. m. sarvastnai (AV.), f. sdrvasyai (AV.; A A. ill. 2 5), Ab. m.
sdrvasmat, pi. N. m. same, G. sdrvesam (AV.), f. sarvasam (AV.), but sing.
N. n. sdrvam.
3. More than a dozen other adjectives which have pronominal affinities
in form or sense occasionally show pronominal case-forms (but never -d
in the N. A. sing. n.).
a. A few adjectives formed with the comparative and superlative suffixes
-ra and -ma have such endings; thus dpara• 'lower' has dpare in the N.
pi m. beside aparasas-, uttara- 'higher', 'later', forms the L. sing. f. uttarasyam

' The A V . once has ike as a loc. sing.; * The R V . has the nominal forms D.
see WHtTNEV's note on A V . XIX. 56» in his vih'Sya, Ab. v'twat, I,, v'tsve, once each;
1
translation. visvit (n.) also occurs Kh. 11. 6 ' 8 .
 V I . DECLENSION. NUMERALS. CARDINALS.

(AV.), N. p i m. /'ittare\ Ab. L. sing, úttarasmat and úttarasmin beside

úttarai and úttare-, upara- 'lower' has upare beside uparas and itparasas in
the N. pi. m.; avamá- 'lowest' has L. sing. f. avamdsylm; upamd- 'highest'
has sing. L. f. upamásyam-, parama- 'farthest' has sing. f. G. paramásySs and
L. paramdsyam ( + VS.); madhyamá- 'middlemost' has sing. L.f. madhyamdsyam.
b. A few other adjectives with a comparative or pronominal sense
have occasional pronominal endings. Thus para- 'ulterior' has sing.D.m.párasmai
(AV.), Ab. m. pdrasmüt ( + AV. VS.), G. f. párasyas, G. pi. m. páresam; L. sing. m.
pdrasmin beside pare; and N. pi. m. pare beside párasas. párva- 'prior* has
sing. m. D. piirvasmai, Ab. párvasmSt, G. pi. m. párvesam, f. párvasam; and the
N. pi. m. piirve is very common beside the very rare párvasas. nema- 'other' 1
has m. L. sing, némasmin, N. pi. neme, but N. sing. n. némam and G. pi. m.
nemUnam (unaccented), svá- 'own', otherwise following the nominal declension,
has once sing. G. f. svdsyas and once L. n. svásmin. saminá- 'similar', 'common',
has once Ab. sing. n. samana smat beside samSnit.
c. A few adjectives which are numerical in form or meaning have
occasional pronominal forms; thusprathamd- 'first', has G. sing. f. prathamdsyas
(AV.); trtiya- 'third' has L. sing. £ trtiyasySm* (AV.); úbhaya- 'of both kinds'
has m. pi. G. úbhayesüm, and N. ubhaye beside úbhayasas and t/6/iayas3;
kévala- 'exclusive' has once N. pi. m. kéi>ale.

III. Numerals.
B e n f e y , Vollsiandige Grammatik 7 6 4 — 7 7 1 . — WHITNEY, Sanskrit G r a m m a r 475—488.
— Cp. Bru<;man.\, K G . 4 4 1 — 4 5 1 .

404. The series of the nunjerals is based on the decimal system of

reckoning. The names of the first ten cardinals, which are of an adjectival
character, form the foundation of the rest either by compounding or derivation;
the ordinals and numerical adverbs being further derived from the correspond-
ing cardinals.
A . Cardinals.
405. The names of the first ten cardinals are: cka- 'one'; dvd- 'two';
tri- 'three'; cati'ir- 'four'; pática 'five'; sax- 'six'; sapid 'seven'; asid 'eight';
ndva 'nine'; ddsa 'ten'.
a . The numbers intermediate between 'ten* and 'twenty' are Dvandva
compounds formed by prefixing the accented unit to ddsa 'ten': ékn-dasa4
('one and ten') 'eleven'; dvá-dasa5 'twelve'; /ráyo-dasa 6 (AV. VS. TS.)
'thirteen'; cdtur-daia 1 'fourteen'; pdñca-dasa 'fifteen'; só-das'a8 (VS. TS.)
'sixteen'; saptd-dasa (TS.) 'seventeen'; astá-dasa (TS.) 'eighteen'; ndva-dasa
(VS.) 'nineteen'.
b . The remaining cardinals are substantives. The names of the decades
from 'twenty' to 'ninety' are either old Dvandva compounds or derivatives
formed with the suffix -it. They are vim-satl- 'twenty'; trim-s'dt 'thirty';

1 Cp. N e i s s e r , BB. 3 0 , 3 0 3 . 5 Here t h e N. m. du. form dvd is retained

< T h e pronominal endings are recognized instead of the stem form dva-.
6
as alternative in the later language as regards In this and other numeral compounds
dvit'tya- and trtiya-; the H f h a d d c v a t l ( v m . 95) the N. m. plural form remains in every cose ;
has prathamasyam as well as dvifiyasyam. e. g. tan ... trayas-trimsatam a vaha (1. 45')
3 ubha- 'both' is declined in the dual o n l y : 'bring those thirty-three'.
N. A. m. ubha and uihau, f. ubhi, I. ubhabhyam 7 As first member of a compound catur-
(once in RV.), G. ubhayos (twice in RV.). is regularly accented catur-,
8
4 With tka- for eka- under the influence' For sas-daia, see above 43, b, 3 ; 56, b .
of dvd dasa.
20*
3O8 I . ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4 . VEDIC GRAMMAR.

catvarim-iit 'forty'; panca-sat 'fifty'; sas-ti- 'sixty'; sapta-ti- 'seventy'; aii-ti-

'eighty'; nava-ti- 'ninety'. The last four are abstract fem. nouns derived from
the simple cardinal (except asT-tl-)1 and meaning originally 'hexad etc. (of
tens)'. The others are fem. compounds, the first member of which is 'two',
'three', 'four', or 'five', and the second a remnant of the IE. word for 'ten';
thus trim-sat meant 'three tens', vimsati- was probably in origin an old
dual of this formation which ended in -X but was transformed by the influence
of sasti- etc. to a singular fem. in -ii 2 .
c. The numbers intermediate between these decades are Dvandva
compounds formed by prefixing the accented unit to the decade; thus astd-
vimsati- (VS.) 'twenty-eight'; e'ka-trims'at (VS.) 'thirty-one'; trayas-trimsat 'thirty-
three'; nava-catvarimsat (TS.) 'forty-nine'; nava-sasti- (TS.) 'sixty-nine';
navastti- (TS.) 'eighty-nine'; pdnca-navati- (TS.) 'ninety-five'; sdn-navati- (TS.)
'ninety-six'; asti-navati- (TS.) 'ninety-eight'.
o . In the TS., the number preceding a decade is also expressed by ekan na 'by
one n o t ' = ' m i n u s o n e ' ; thus ekan na vimsati- 'twenty less one' = 'nineteen'; ekan na
catvarimsat'thirty-nine'; ekan na satfi-'fifty nine'; ekan nasi/i- 'seventy-nine'; (kin na satam
'a hundred less one', 'ninety-nine*' 3 .
Intermediate numbers may also be expressed by adding together unit and
decade with or without ca; e. g. nava ca navatim ca 'ninety and nine'; navatim nava
'ninety-nine'.
d. The numbers expressing 'a hundred' and its multiples are said- '100';
sahdsra- '1000'; a-yuta- ( A V . TS.) '10000'; ni-yuta- (TS.; K h . iv. 1 2 8 ) '100000';
pra-yuta- (VS.TS.) '1000000'; arbuda- ( T S . ; K h . i v . 12 8 ) '10000000'; nyarbuda-
( A V . V S . T S . ) ' 1 0 0 0 0 0 000'«.
a . Intermediate numbers are compounded in the same way with iota- as with the
preceding decades; e. g. ika-Satam 'a hundred and o n e ' ; catuh-satam 'a hundred and four';
trimsac-chatam 'a hundred and thirty'.
(}. Multiples may be expressed in t w o w a y s . Either the larger number is put in
the dual or plural multiplied by the smaller one used adjectivally; e. g. dve sate ( v n . i 8 2 2 )
'two hundred'; saftim sahasra (VI. 266) 'sixty thousand'; trini lata tri sahasrani trim sac ca
nava ca (in. 99) 'three thousand three hundred and thirty-nine'. Or the multiplier
may be prefixed to the larger number, forming with it a possessive compound accented
on the final syllable; e. g. trayastrimiat triiatah fa/sahasrah (AV.) 'six thousand three
hundred and thirty-three'. Numbers below a hundred are sometimes used multiplicatively
in these two w a y s ; e. g. navatir nava (1. 84'J) 'nine n i n e t i e s ' = ' e i g h t hundred and ten';
tri-saftd-5 'thrice seven'; tri-nava- (VS.J 'having thrice nine'.

Inflexion.
406. With regard to their inflexion, which in many respects is peculiar,
the cardinals may be divided into three groups.
a. The first group comprises the first four numerals. These are the
only cardinals which, like other adjectives, distinguish the genders. They also
distinguish the numbers as far as the sense admits: ¿ka- 'one', while inflected
chiefly in the singular, forms a plural also in the sense of 'some'; dva-
'two' is of course inflected in the dual only; and tri- 'three' and catur- 'four'
in the plural only.
X. ¿ka- is declined like the second group of pronominal adjectives 6 .
The only form of the abl. sing. 3 met with follows the nominal declension,
1 ail- is radically related to as/au, cp. in succession: we may infer from the first
56, a. few that each successive number is equal to
1 C p . BRUGMANN, K G . 443, 1. ten times the preceding o n e ; cp. WHITNEY
3 In the T S . (B.) are also met with ikasman 475, c. T h e contents of T S . v n . 2. 1 1 — 2 0
na paSuaiat and ikasyai na paneasat (VII. 4. 73) are almost entirely numerals.
'forty-nine': WHITNEY 477, b. 5 Inflected according to the a• declension :
« In T S . v u . 2>° these numerals, followed inst. trisaptais,
by samudra-, madhya-, onto-, parardha-, occur 6 See above 403, 2.
 3°9

viz. ¿kat, used in the compound numerals ¿kan na trimsat 'twenty-nine' etc.
occurring in the T S . A single dual case, from ¿ka- in the sense of ' a
certain', appears in ¿ke yuvati ( A V . x . 7« 1 ) 'a certain pair of maidens'. T h e
forms to be found in the Samhitas a r e : m . sing. N. ¿kas. A . ¿kam. I. ekena.
G . ckasya. L. ¿kas/ni/i; pi. N. ¿ke. D. ¿kebhyas. — f. N. ¿ka. A . ¿kam.
I. ¿kaya. G. ¿kasyas; du. N. ¿ke ( A V . ) ; pi. N. ¿kas (AV.). — n . N. sing, ¿kam -,
pi. ¿ka.
2. dva- 'two', declined in the dual only, is quite regular. T h e forms
occurring are: m . N. dvA, dvdu. I. dvAbhyam. G. dvdyos. L. dvdyos. —-
f. N. dvt\ I. dvAb/iyam. — n . N. dvc. L . dvdyos.
a. The dual form dvd is retained in the first member of the numeral compound
dva-dasa 'twelve'. Otherwise dvi- is used as the stem of dva- in derivation, e. g. dvi-dha
•twofold'; and as the first member of compounds, e. g. dvi-pad- 'biped'.
3. T h e cardinal tri'- 'three' is, in the masc. and neut., inflected like a
regular i- stem. T h e fem. stem is tisr-: the gen. pi. is o n c e (v. 69') written
tisrnAm (though the r is actually long metrically)'. T h e forms occurring
a r e : m . N. trayas. A . tr'in. I. tribhis. D . tribhyas. G. trinAm. L. trisu. —
f. N. tisrds. A . tisrds. I. tisrbhis. D. tisrbhyas. G. tisfnAm2. L . tisrsu. —
n . N. A . t r f , trini.
a. The stem used in derivation and compounding is regularly tri-, e. g. tri-dha 'in
three ways'; iripad- 'three-footed'. But tr- appears in //--/a- (AV.) 'third', as a N., and
in the secondary ordinal tr-t-fya• 'third'; and in numeral compounds trim appears in
trim-sat 'thirty', and trayas in trdyo-daia 'thirteen', and trayas-trimial 'thirty-three'.
4. catur- 'four' has the stem catvdr- in the strong forms of the masc.
and n e u t In the gen. it has the peculiarity of taking « before the ending
am, though the stem ends in a consonant- 3 . T h e fem. stem is cdtasr-, which
is inflected like tisr- and shifts its accent like panca. T h e forms occurring are:
m . N. catvdras. A . caturas. I. caturbhis. D . cati'irbhyas (AV.). G. caturnAm4. —
f. N. cdtasr as. A. cdtasr as. I. catasfbhis5. — n . N. A . catvdri.
a. T h e stem used in derivation and compounding is regularly catur•; e. g. catur-
dha 'in four ways'; caturdasa 'fourteen'; catuf-fiad-b 'four-footed'. But it is once
catva/im- (from the n. pi.) in the numeral compound catvirimsat 'forty'.
b . T h e s e c o n d g r o u p , comprising the cardinals from 'five' to 'nineteen',
though used adjectivally, does not distinguish gender, and takes no ending
in the nom. and acc. These numerals also share the same peculiarities o f
accentuation
5. N. A . pdfica 'five'. I. paticdbhis. D . pahcdbhyas. L. pancdsu.
6. sds- 'six': N. A. sdt. I. sadb/n's. D. sadbhyds8.
7. N. A . sapid 'seven'. I. saptabhis. D . A b . saptdbhyas. G. saptandm.
8. T h a t the cardinal for 'eight' was an old d u a l 9 is indicated by its
forms in the N. A . as/A, astdu and in the only other cases occurring, I. asta-
b/iis, D. asta-bhyds (TS.). A c c o r d i n g to the analysis of the P a d a text in a
late passage of the R V . (x. 2 7 , s ) , astottardttat contains the N. asta, doubt-
less because it is preceded by sapid and followed b y ndva and das'a.
a. T h e stem used in compounding has mostly the dual form afta; thus atfa-pad-
'eight-footed', asta-vandhura- 'eight-seated' 1 0 ; asta-dasa- (TS.) 'eighteen', asfa-vimsd- (AV.)
1
See above 12, 13; cp. Be.nfey, Vedica | 6 On the Sandhi, see above 78.
und Verwandtes 4. 7 That is, of accenting -a before the ter-
' On the accentuation, see 94, 2 a. minations •bhts, -bhyas, -su, and the final
3 It shares this peculiarity with san-ndm, syllable in the gen. See above, 93.
the gen. plur. of sds-, which however does « Cp. note 3.
not seem to occur in any of the Samhitas. 9 Cp. Brugmann, KG. 441, 8.
10
4 With accent on the final syllable like These are the only two occurrences in
the genitives of fahca etc. the RV., for in affa karna- (x. 62') the first
5 G. catasfndm and L. catasffu occur in B. member is doubtless a past participle.
3io

'twenty-eightfold', aftacakra- (AV.) 'eight-wheeled', mla-fakfa- (AV.) 'eight-sided', asia-yoga-

(AV.) 'yoke of eight'. The form a.-ta- begins to appear in the AV. in the derivative asta-Jha
'in eight ways'; and in the compounds usta-kftvas 'eight times', asfa-yoni- 'having eight
wombs', a;fa-zy}a- 'eight times chief.
g . N. A . ttiiva 'nine'. I. navdbhis. D . navdbhyas ( T S . ) . G . tiaviinAm.
IO. N. A . ddsa 'ten'. I. dasdbhis. D . dasdbhyas ( T S . j . G . dasatulm. L . dasasu.
xi. N. A . ¿kadasa 'eleven'. D . ekadasdbhyas (TS.).
12. N . A . dvcidasa 'twelve. D . dvadasabhyas ( T S . ) .
1 3 . N. A . trdyodasa 'thirteen'. I. trayodasdbhis (TS.). D . trayjdasdbhyas (TS.).
14. N. A . cdturdasa 'fourteen'. D . caturdasdbhyas (TS.).
15. N . A . pdticadasa 'fifteen'. D . paiicadasdbhyas (TS.).
1 6 . N . A . sJdasa ( V S . ) 'sixteen'. D . sodaidbhyas (TS.).
1 7 . 18. T h e N. o f the c a r d i n a l s for 'seventeen' a n d ' e i g h t e e n ' d o e s n o t
s e e m t o o c c u r in Mantras. D . saptadasdbhyas ( T S . ) ; astadasabhyus (TS.).
19. N . A . ndvadasa ( V S . ) 'nineteen'. I. navadas'db/iis ( V S . ) . D . ckdn nd
vimsatydi ( T S . ) .
c. T h e third g r o u p o f cardinals, c o m p r i s i n g the numbers f r o m 'twenty'
o n w a r d s , are substantives inflected regularly a c c o r d i n g to the declension of
the stem final; e. g. N. vimsati-s 'twenty', A . rimsati-m, I. vimsaty-ir, N. t/imsdt
'thirty', A . trimsdt am, J. trimsdt-a, L . trimsdt-i. T h e d e c a d e s 'twenty' to
'ninety' a n d their c o m p o u n d s are fem. a n d nearly a l w a y s inflected in the
s i n g . ; but if the sense requires it they m a y b e u s e d in the plural; e. g. ndva
navatih 'nine nineties'; navanSm navatmdm (1. 1 9 1 1 J ) ' o f nine nineties'.
a. salti- 'a hundred' and sahasia- 'a thousand' are neuters, which may be declined in
all numbers; e. g. ave iate 'two hundred'; sap/a satani 'seven hundred'.

S y n t a c t i c a l e m p l o y m e n t of t h e Cardinals.

4 0 7 . a. T h e numerals f r o m 'one' to 'nineteen' are u s e d a d j e c t i v a l l y ;

e. g . trdyo virdh (111.56 s ) 'three h e r o e s ' ; saptdbhih putrdih ( x . 72°) 'with s e v e n
s o n s ' ; janesu pahcdsu (111. 3 7 ' ) ' a m o n g the five races'. T h e b a r e stem (in the
n u m e r a l s o f the s e c o n d g r o u p ) is, h o w e v e r , s o m e t i m e s u s e d in the oblique
c a s e s ; e . g . saptd hotrbhih (in. i o 4 ) 'with s e v e n priests'; dd/ii pdfica krst'isu
(11. 2 , 0 ) ' o v e r the five tribes'.
a. Exceptionally these numerals are, however, to be met with governing a genitive;
e. g. ddsa kalaiHttam (IV. 32'9) 'ten jars'.
b. T h e third g r o u p o f numerals (from 'twenty' upwards), as singular
s u b s t a n t i v e s , is treated in two ways.
1. T h e y m a y g o v e r n a g e n i t i v e ; e . g . paficasdtam asvanam (v. 1 8 5 ) 'fifty
h o r s e s ' ; sastim dsvanam ( v i n . 4 6 2 9 ) 'sixty h o r s e s ' ; satam goniim ( 1 . 1 2 6 ' ) 'a h u n d r e d
kine'. S o also w h e n satd- a n d sahdsra- a r e in the du. or pi.; t.g.gdvam satdui
(vii. 1 0 3 ' ° ) 'hundreds of k i n e ' ; sahdsranigdviim (vin. 5 1 2 ; ' t h o u s a n d s o f kine'.
2. T h e y m a y , r e m a i n i n g singular, a g r e e in c a s e with the f o l l o w i n g plural,
b e i n g t h e n used a d j e c t i v a l l y (not appositionally, b e c a u s e they a l w a y s p r e c e d e
t h e substantive in this u s e ) ; e. g. trimsdd devAh (111. 9 ' ) 'thirty g o d s ' ;
trimidtam yjjanSni (1. 1 2 3 8 ) 'thirty l e a g u e s ' ; trimsdta hdribhih (11.18 5 ) 'with
thirty b a y s ' ; sate'na hdribhi/t (11. 1 8 6 ) 'with a h u n d r e d b a y s ' ; satdrn pur ah
(iv. 2 7 * ) ' a hundred forts'; sahdsram hdrayah (iv.46^) 'a thousand bays'. T h e
f o l l o w i n g w o r d , a g r e e i n g with sahdsramay b e in the singular as a c o l l e c t i v e ;
thus s'linas cic cMpam niditam sahasrad yiipad amuticah (v. 2 7 ) ' S u n a h s e p a ,
w h o was b o u n d , t h o u didst release from a t h o u s a n d posts'.
a. sata- and sahasra- have, in their adjectival use, the peculiarity of sometimes either
being put in the plural themselves or retaining the N. A. neuter sing, form (like pahca.)
when in agreement with an inst pi.; e. g. sata purah (1.53 s ) 'a hundred forts'; sahasrany
 VI. DECLENSION. NUMERALS. ORDINALS. DERIVATIVES. 311

adhiralhini (x. 98®) 'a thousand wagonloads'; satarn purbhih (vi. 48®) 'with a hundred
forts'; sahasram fsibhik (I. 1898) 'with a thousand seers'.
|J. The numeral pronouns kdti 'how many?', tati 'so many', yati 'as many', remain
uninflected in agreement with nominatives and accusatives plural, which are the only
cases found occurring with them in the Samhitis >.

B . Ordinals.
408. T h e ordinals, being all adjectives ending in -a, are declined
throughout in the masc. and n e u t according to the nominal a-declension.
T h e feminine is formed with -r 2 , except in the first four, which take -a, viz.
prathamA-3, dvit'iya-, trtiya- 3, turiya- (TS.). T h e ordinals may best be divided
into four groups according to the formation of their stems.
1. T h e ordinals from 'first' to 'tenth' are formed with various suffixes,
viz. (-t)-iya, -i/ia, -thamd, -md, the first four in a somewhat irregular manner.
a. pra-thamd- 'first' was doubtless formed from pra- with the superlative
suffix - t a m a m e a n i n g 'foremost', the initial of the suffix being probably
changed under the influence of other ordinals formed with -tha (sasthd-, etc.).
b. T h e next three ordinals are formed with the suffix -lya\ dvit-iya-
'second', trt-iya- 'third', secondarily through dvi-td- 'second', and tr-td- 'third',
both used as names; tur-iya- 'fourth' for *ktur-iya- (beside catur-thd-). T h e
latter when used in the fractional sense is accented turiya- ( A V . ) 'quarter's.
c. T h e ordinal for 'sixth', besides the alternative forms for 'fourth' and
'seventh', is formed with -tha-. sas-thd- ( A V . VS.), catur-thd- ( A V . VS.),
saptd-tha- (RV.).
d. T h e ordinals for 'fifth' and 'seventh' to 'tenth' are formed with -ma-,
pahca-md- ( A V . VS.), sapta-md- (VS.) beside saptd-tha-, asta-md-, nava-md-,
dasa-md-.
2. T h e stems of the ordinals for 'seventh' to 'nineteenth' are the
same as those of the cardinals, except that they are accented on the final
syllable. In inflexion they differ from the cardinals in following the ordinary
nominal a- declension; thus from ekadasd- 'eleventh' are formed: sing. m. A .
ckiidasdm; pi. N. ekadalAsah, A . ekadasAn, I. ekadasdis.
3. T h e ordinals for 'twentieth' to 'ninetieth' (including their com-
pounds) seem, judged by some three examples met with in the Samhitas
(and some four others in B.), to have been abbreviated forms of the car-
dinals, ending in -d: cka-vimsa- 'twenty-first' (B.) 'consisting of twenty-one' (VS.),
catvarimsd- ( R V . ) 'fortieth', asta-catvarimsd-iyS.) 'forty-eighth'; catus-trimsd- (B.)
'thirty-fourth', dva-pancasd- (B.) 'fifty-second', eka-sastd- (B.) 'sixty-first'.
4. T h e ordinals for 'hundredth* and 'thousandth' are formed with the
superlative suffix -tama-. s'ata-tamd-; but sahasra-tamd- has been noted in B.
passages only (TS. SB.).

C . N u m e r a l Derivatives.
409. A number of derivatives, chiefly adverbs, are formed from the
cardinals.
a. T h e r e are a few multiplicative adjectives derived with the suffixes
-a, -ya, -taya, -vaya; thus tray-a- 'threefold' (from trl-); dva-yd- 'twofold';
ddsa-taya- 'tenfold'; cdtur-vaya- 'fourfold'.
b. Multiplicative adverbs are formed in three different ways. 'Once'

• C p . DELBRÜCK 50. 4 Cp. the adverbial acc. fra-tamam (B.)

1 Inflected like stems in derivative -7: 377. ' s p e c i a l l y ' . S e e BRUGMANN, K G . 447, 1.
j Both prathama- and tytiya- have one5 Similarly in B. passages caturlha- quarter',
form each according to the pronominal de- tffiya- 'third'.
clension in the AV. (403, 3,_c).
312 I. ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4 . VEDIC GRAMMAR.

is expressed by sa-kft, which originally seems to have meant 'one making'.

The next three are formed with the suffix -s: dvl-s 'twice'; tri-.r 'thrice', cat its
(AV.) 'four times' (for *catur-s, cp. Av. cathru-s)1. Others are expressed by the
cardinal and the form krtvas 'times' (probably = 'makings', acc. pi. of *krtu-),
which, except in asta-kftvas (AV.) 'eight times', is a separate word; thus
ddsa kftvas (AV.) 'ten times', bhäri krtvas (RV.) 'many times' 1 .
c. Numeral adverbs of manner are formed with the suffix -dha\
thus dvi-dhä 'in two ways or parts'; similarly tri-dhri and tre-dhA, catur-dhA,
pahca-dhA (AV.), sorf/iä3, sapta-dha (AV. VS. TS.), asta-dha (AV.), nava-dhA
(AV.), sahasra-dhä.

VII. THE VERB.

BENFEY, Vollständige Grammatik 788—920. — WHITNEY, Sanskrit Grammar 5 2 7 — 1 0 7 3 .
— DELBRÜCK, Das altindische Verbum, Halle 1874. — AVERY, Contributions to the history
of verb-inflection in Sanskrit, J A O S . x . (1876), 2 1 9 — 2 7 6 ; 3 1 1 — 3 2 4 . — JUL. V. NEGELEIN,
Zur Sprachgeschichte des Veda. Das Verbalsystem des Atharva-Veda, Berlin 1898.

410. General characteristics. — The verbal system comprises the

two groups of forms which include, on the one hand, the finite verb and,
on the other, the nominal formations connected with the verb. The former
group represents the forms made with personal endings, viz. indicative, sub-
junctive, injunctive, optative, and imperative. The latter group consists of
infinitives (nouns of action) and participles (agent nouns). These differ from
ordinary nouns inasmuch as they participate in the characteristics of the verb,
governing cases, being connected with particular tenses, being used in different
voices, and being liable to tmesis when compounded with prepositions.
A . The finite verb distinguishes the primary conjugation of the root
and the secondary conjugation of derivative formations, viz. desiderative,
intensive, causative, and denominative. The latter class does not, however,
differ in origin from the former; but doubtless because (in contrast with the
present stems of the primary conjugation) it preserves the distinctive meaning
of the stem, it extends the form of the present stem beyond the present
system to the whole conjugation.
The finite verb further distinguishes voice, tense, mood, number, and
person.
a. There are t w o v o i c e s , active and middle, which are distinguished
throughout the inflexion of the verb (largely also in the participle, though not
in the infinitive). The middle forms may be employed in a passive sense,
except in the present system where there is a special passive stem inflected
with middle terminations. Some verbs are conjugated in both active and
middle; e. g. kfno-ti and kr/iu-tJ 'makes'; others in one voice only, e. g. As-ti
'is'; others partly in one and partly in the other; e. g. pres. vdrta-te 'turns',
but perf. vavdrt-a 'has turned'.
b. There are five tenses in ordinary use, viz. the present, the imper-
fect, the perfect, the aorist, and the future: The terms imperfect, perfect,
and aorist are here used in a purely formal sense, that is, as corresponding
in formation to the Greek tenses bearing those names. No Vedic tense has
an imperfect meaning, while the perfect sense is generally expressed by the
aorist
c. Beside the indicative there are four mocds, the subjunctive, the
injunctive, the optative, and the imperative, all formed from the stem of the

> Cp. BKCGMANN, K G . 450, 1 .

» Cp. WHITNEY 1 IOJ, «.
 VIL VERB. FINITE VERB. PERSONAL ENDINGS. 313

present, the perfect, and the aorist T h e imperfect has no m o o d s ; and the
only modal form occurring in the future is the unique subjunctive karisyis,
from kr- 'make'.
d. T h e finite verb is, as in other languages, used in three persons in
all tenses and moods excepting the imperative, where the first persons are
supplied from the subjunctive. A s in declension, the three numbers, singular,
dual, and plural, are in regular use throughout
B . T h e nominal verb-forms comprise:
a. Participles. T h e tense-stem of the present, future, aorist, and perfect
each forms an active and a middle participle; e. g. gacchantgaccha-mana-
'going'; karisyant- 'going to d o ' , yaksyd-mSna- 'going to sacrifice'; krdnt-, krSna-
'making'; cakrvims-, cakrUnd- 'having done'. Besides these, there are passive
participles, present, perfect, and future. T h e present form is m a d e from the
passive stem in -ya; e. g. stuyd-mJna- 'being praised'. T h e perfect passive
participle, on the other hand, is formed from the root; e. g. kr-td- 'made';
as is also (with few exceptions) the future passive participle or gerundive;
e. g. vand-ya- 'praiseworthy'.
b . G e r u n d s . T h e s e are stereotyped cases (chiefly instrumentals) of verbal
nouns, and have the value o f indeclinable active participles with a prevailingly
past sense; e. g. %atvi and gatvdya 'having gone*.
c. Infinitives. There are about a dozen differently formed types of
infinitives, which are cases of verbal nouns m a d e directly or with a suffix
from the root, and hardly ever connected with a tense stem; e. g. idh-am
'to kindle'; gan-tavai 'to go'.

A . T h e Finite V e r b .
411. All forms of the finite v e r b 1 may b e classed under four groups:
(1) the present s y s t e m , comprising the present tense together with its moods
and participles, and its augmented past tense, the imperfect; (2) the perfect
s y s t e m , comprising the perfect tense together with its moods and participles,
and its augmented past tense, the p l u p e r f e c t ' (494); (3) the aorist system,
comprising the aorist tense together with its m o o d s and participles; (4) the
future s y s t e m , comprising the future tense 3 together with its participles,
and its augmented past form, the conditional«.

Personal Endings.
412. T h e characteristic feature of the finite verb is the addition of
personal endings 5 . T h e s e are divided into active and middle; in each of
which groups, again, primary and secondary forms are to be distinguished.
T h e primary forms appear throughout the present and future indicative, but
in the middle only o f the perfect indicative 6 . T h e secondary forms appear
in augmented indicatives, in injunctives (which are identical in form with un-
augmented past indicatives), in the imperative (several forms of which are
identical with the injunctive) 7 , and in the optative. T h e subjunctive fluctuates
between the primary and the secondary endings, but the latter are about
1 Over 18000 occurrences of verb-forms 4 There is only a single occurrence of
have been noted by AVERY (221) in the this formation in the Samhitâs.
RV. 5 Cp. AVERY 225 (.; BRUGMANN, KG.
1 This term is used in a purely formal 7 7 1 - 7 9 8 .
sense, as this rare tense has not a pluper- 6 The 3. pi. has here the peculiar ending
fect meaning. •re.
3 There is no periphrastic future in the 7 C p . BRUGMANN, K G . 7 2 9 .
Suphitil
314 L A L L G E M E I N E S UND S P R A C H E . 4. VEDIC GRAMMAR.

twice as frequent as the former'. The perfect indicative active has some of
the regular secondary endings (-zta, ma, -ur), but the rest are of a peculiar type.

Active endings.
Primary. Sing. 1. 2
-mi . 2. -si. 3. - t i D u . 1. -vas'1. 2. -thas .
5
3. -tas\
PI. 1 . -masi, -mas6. 2. - t h a , -thana1. 3. -anti*.
Secondary. Sing. 1. -m. 2. -j'. 3. -il°. Du. 1. -va. 2. -/am. 3. -turn.
PI. 1 . -ma. 2. -ia, - t a n a 3 . -an, -ur".

Middle endings.
Primary. Sing. 1. -e. 2.-sel\ 3. Du. 1. -vahcx~-. 2.-¡¡the'6. 3. -a/e'b.
PI. 1 . -ma he'1. 2. -tihre'*. 3. -ante^.
Secondary. Sing. 1. -i2°. 2.-thas21. 3. -ta22. Du. 1. -ici/ii. 1. -aiham2'\
3. -atdm'3. PI. 1. -ma/ii. 2. - d h v a m 3 . -aula2s.
a. Beside the perfect e n d i n g s c o n t a i n i n g r, act. du. 2. -athur, 3. -atur, pi. 3. -ur,
middle -re, some verbs have endings with initial r in the 3. pi. mid. ind. and opt. of
most tenses. T h e s e endings are -re and -rule in the pres. i n d . ; -rire in the perf. ind.;
•ran in the opt. pres. and the ind. imperfect, pluperfect, and aorist; ram in the ind. aor.;
-rau/a in the p l u p e r f e c t ; -rata in tlic opt. In the AV. -ram and -ra/am appear in the
3. pi. impv. m i d . 2 6 .
b . More than twenty roots have forms in which certain endings arc added to the
root with the c o n n e c t i n g v o w e l / or less commonly 7. T h e s e roots are an- 'breathe',
am- 'injure', as- 'be', hi- 'praise', Is- 'rule', cud- 'impel', Jan- ' b e g e t ' , tu- ' b e strong', dhvan-
'sound', bru- 'speak', vam- 'vomit', vas- 'clothe', r r j . 'rain', snath- 'pierce', siu- 'hear',

1
AVF.RY 2 2 7 (middle). In the AV. -sai is the only form of the
2
T h e subjunctive has -ini and instead of s u b j u n c t i v e (WHITNEY 5 6 1 , a).
it (13 times) -«; cp. AVERY 225 (mid.) and • 4 -tai occurs once in the RV. for te in
BRUGMANN, K G . 7 7 2 . the s u b j u n c t i v e ; it is the usual form in the
3 T h e perf. ind. has the peculiar endings AV. In the RV. -e sometimes occurs for
I. -a or -an, 2. -tha, 3 . -a or au in the -te in the ind. pres.; it is the only ending
sing. in the perf. ind.
4 T h i s ending does not occur in the RV.; '5 T h e subjunctive has -vahai.
16
c p . DEI.BRÜCK, V e r b u m p . 2 4 . In the a- conjugation -¡the and -etc;
5 T h e perf. act. du. has the peculiar aithe and -aite appear in the RV. as sub-
endings 2. -athur, 3. -atur. junctives in several forms; -aite occurs once
6 -masi occurs 109 times in the RV., being a s a n i n d i c a t i v e ; c p . WHITNEY 5 4 7 , C a n d
m o r e t h a n 5 times as frequent as -mas (cp. 5 6 1 , a ; DELIIRUCK, V e r b u m 1 0 6 a n d p . 4 5
WHITNEY 5 4 8 ; AVMRY 226), b u t i n t h e A V . (mid.).
•mas h a s become commoner than -masi in '7 -mahai is t h e usual form in the sub-
the proportion of 4 to 3. On these endings junctive in the KV. and AV.
c p . NEISSER, H B . 3 0 , 3 1 1 — 3 1 5 . In the RV. once -dhvai in the sub-
7 In t h e RV. •tha occurs m o r e than 6 junctive.
times as o f t e n as -thana (AVERY 226). T h e >9 In the impv. -antam and -atdm.
20
perf. ind. has the peculiar ending -a. In t h e optative (iy)-a.
8 21
T h e an is replaced by a (for the sonant In the impv. -sva.
22
nasal) in reduplicated verbs and a few others In the impv. -täm.
treated as such; cp. DELBRÜCK, Verbum p. 51 »3 In t h e «-conjugation -ethäm and -etäm.
2
(mid). 1 O n c e •dhva in the RV.
9 T h e impv. act. adds -dhi, -hi, -äna, -tat »5 In t h e impv. -antam-, both this ending
or no ending. and -anta lose their n under the same con-
10
T h e 3. impv. has -tu instead of -/; in ditions as -anti. T h e perf. ind. has -re.
the RV. and T S . also -tit-, see 4 1 8 b. 26
S e e DELBRÜCK, V e r b u m 7 6 — 7 8 ; A V E R Y
11
In t h e RV. -ta occurs more than 4 2 2 6 ; BRI;GMANN, K G . 7 9 7 ; c p . a l s o BOLLEN-
times as often as -tana (560 occurrences to SEN, Z D M G . 22, 599; KUHN, KZ. 18, 400;
1 2 5 : A V E R Y 226). BENFEY, Ueber die E n t s t e h u n g und Verw en-
11 In t h e ind. perf., the ind. ¿-aorist, and d u n g d e r im Sanskrit mit r anlautenden
the optative, -ur always appears, sometimes P e r s o n a l e n d u n g e n . Abh. d. Ges. d. Wiss. zu
also in t h e i m p e r f e c t ; cp. DELBRÜCK, Verbum Göttingen 15, Göttingen 1 8 7 0 ; WINDISCH,
p. 52. T h e impv. has -antu, which loses its n Berichte der sächsischen Gesellschaft d. Wiss.
under t h e same conditions as -anti. 1 8 8 9 , p . 1 f f . ; ZIMMER, K Z . 3 0 , 2 2 4 fr.
 V I I . VERB. F I N I T E VERB. AUGMENT. FORMATION OF THE MOODS. 315

ivas- 'breathe', sidh- 'repel', stan- "thunder", stambh- • 'prop'. T h e r e are also a f e w 3. plurals
in -i-re, viz. fttvire, pinvire, ifuvire, sum/ire and hinvire, in which the connecting vowel i
appears

The Augment
413. The augment3 (originally doubtless an independent temporal particle)
consists of the syllable a-, which is prefixed to the imperfect, pluperfect, aorist,
and conditional, giving to those forms the signification of past time. It in-
variably bears the acute when the verb is accented, like the preposition
immediately preceding a verb in a principal sentence ( m ) . The augment
sometimes appears lengthened before n, y, r or v, the only examples being
d-nat, from nas- 'attain'; d-yunak (beside a-yunak), d-yukta (beside d-yukta),
and d-yuksatam, from yuj- 'join'; d-rinak and d-raik, from ric- 'leave'; d-var,
from vr- 'cover'; a-vrni, from vr- 'choose'; d-vrnak, from vrj- 'turn'; a-vidhyat
(beside a-vidhyat), from vyadh- 'wound'. The only one of these forms written
with a in the Pada text is d-var (but once also a-var). There is also one
passage (11. i 7 - 9 ) in which the metre seems to require that yds tJ 'vidhat
should be read yds ta Avidhat
a. With the initial vowels /', u, f the augment irregularly contracts to
the Vrddhi vowels ai, au, ar; e. g. dicchas, 2. sing, imperf. of is- 'wish';
aunat, 3. sing, imperf. of ud- 'wet*; drta, 3. sing. aor. of r- 'go'. This appears
to be a survival of a prehistoric contraction of a with i, u, r to ai, au, ar,
which is otherwise almost invariably represented by e, 0, ar5.
b. The augment is very often dropped. This optional loss is to be
explained as a survival from the Indo-European period when, being an in-
dependent particle, the augment could be dispensed with if the past sense
was clear from the context In the RV. the number of examples in which
the augment is wanting (about 2000) is considerably more than half that of
forms in which it is prefixed (about 3300), more than one half of these un-
augmented forms being aorists. In the AV. the number of forms which lose
the augment is less than half that of those which retain it, more than four
fifths of these unaugmented forms being aorists. In sense, the forms which
drop the augment are either indicative or injunctive. The indicatives have
for the most part a past, but often also (generally when compounded with
prefixes) a present meaning. In the RV., the indicative and injunctive un-
augmented forms are about equal in number 6 ; the injunctives being used in
nearly one-third of their occurrences with the prohibitive particle md. In the
AV. about nine-tenths of the unaugmented forms are injunctive, some four-
fifths of these being construed with md.

Formation of the Moods.

414. 1. S u b j u n c t i v e T h e subjunctive is a very common mood in the
RV. and the AV., occurring three or four times as often as the optative. It is
formed from the present, the perfect, and the aorist8. The stem is formed
by adding a to the indicative stem. When a strong and weak stem are
distinguished, the a is attached to the former; while it coalesces to a with
the final of the stem in the a- conjugation. Thus the subjunctive stem of
• AVERY 226. | h a v e a historical sense in 488 instances
2 AVERY 2 2 7 (top). ! only.
J Cp. AVERY 2 2 5 ; BRUGMANN K G . 626. I 7 S e e especially W . NEISSER, Zur v e d i s c h e n
4 WHITNEY 585, a. I Verballehre (Inaugural-Dissertat.), Gottingen
5 Cp. above 19 a, 4. 5. I 1882 = BB. 7 (1883), 211—241.
6
WHITNEY 587, a. A c c o r d i n g to AVERY ! S Only a single form of the future sub-
2 2 j , the unaugmented forms of the R V . ; junctive occurs.
3I6 L ALLGEMEINES UND S P R A C H E . 4. VEDIC GRAMMAR.

the root duh- 'milk' is doh-a-; of yuj- 'join* yunaj-a-\ but of bhu- 'be' bhav-a-.
Owing to the analogy of the a- conjugation, other verbs sometimes add a
instead of a, e. g. brav-a-tha from bru- 'speak' 1 . T h e subjunctive is on the
whole inflected like an indicative, but with fluctuations between the primary
and the secondary endings, besides some variations in the endings themselves.
Thus in the active, (1) the ending of the 1. sing, is -ani, of which the ni is
dropped thirteen times in the R V . , e. g. doh-ani, yundj-ctni, bhav-a?ti\ bhdv-a;
(2) the 1. du. and 1. 3. pi. have the secondary endings -va, -ma, -an only;
e . g . doh-ava, dih-ama, doh-an; bhdv-ava, bhdv-ama, bhav-an\ ( 3 ) the 2. 3. sing,
may take the secondary endings as well as the primary; e. g. doh-a-si or
doh-a-s; bhav-a-ti or bhdv-3-t J.
In the middle, (1) the only secondary ending is found in the 3. p i ,
-anta, which occurs beside and more frequently than -ante-, (2) the ending -at,
which is normal in the 1. sing, (being = a + e), has spread from that person
to forms in which e would be normal. T h u s the 1. du. has -avahai only; in
the 1. pi., -amahai is the usual form in the R V . and A V . beside the rarer
-amahc\ in the 2. sing., -sat always appears for -se in the A V . , though it does
not occur in the R V . ; in the 2. pi., -dhvai occurs once for - d h v e 3 in the R V . ;
in the 2. 3. du., -aithe and -aite occur several times in the R V . , being doubtless
intended for subjunctive modifications * of the indicative -ethe and -etc of the
a- conjugation; in the 3. sing., -tai occtirs once in the R V . for -/<?, and is the
usual form in the A V .
a. T h e subjunctive endings in combination with the -a of the stem
are accordingly the following:
Active Middle
sing. du. pL sing. du. pi.
1. 3ni, -a -a-va -a-ma 1. -at -a-vahai -a-mahai, -a-mahe
2. -a-si s, -as 6 -a-thas -a-tha 2. -a-se, -a-sai -aithe -a-dhve, -a-dhvai
3. -a-ti 1, -a-t -a-tas -a-n 3. -a-te, -a-tai -aite -a-rite, -a-nta.
415. Injunctive. T h e unaugmented forms of past tenses used modally,
are sometimes called improper subjunctives 8 , but they are more suitably
termed injunctives, as they appear to have originally expressed an injunction.
This is borne out by the fact that since the IE. period the second and third
persons imperfect (except the 2. sing, act.) had come to be used as regular
imperatives expressing a c o m m a n d ' . But the unaugmented forms of the
imperfect that could be distinguished from the regular imperative (as bharas,
bhdrat, bharan) and especially unaugmented aorists , 0 , are often used in a sense
fluctuating between that of the subjunctive (requisition) and of the optative
( w i s h ) T h u s bharatu 'let him bear', but bhdrat 'may he bear', bhftt 'may
he be'.
416. Optative. This mood, which is comparatively rare in the Sam-
hitas, is formed from the present, the perfect, and the aorist. T h e stem is
formed with -yd or -t, which, when strong and weak stem are distinguished,

1 C p . WHITNEY 560 e ; BRUGMANN, K G . 719.
1 The subjunctive in a is in origin an old
injunctive: BRUGMANN, KG. 716 (end).
3 In the form madayadkvai 'may ye rejoice'.
4 kfnvaite, however, appears once as an
indicative; see DELBKOCK, Verbum p. 45.
5 In the aor. subj., -si occurs only once
in the KV.
6 In the a- conjugation a appears throughout:
•asi, -di, etc.
7 In the aor. subj., -ti occurs only six times
in the RV.
8 WHITNEY 563.
® The 3. sine;, and pi., e. g. bharat-u and
bharant-u, are explained as injunctives and the
p a r t i c l e » : BRUGMANN, K G . 7 2 9 , 1.
« The aorist injunctives were probably
used originally with the prohibitive particle
ma only: BRUGMANN, KG. 716, 2 (end).
« C p . WHITMEY S 7 S .
 3*7

are attached to the latter. In the a- conjugation -t is added (coalescing with

a to e) throughout; in other verbs -I is added in the middle only, and -yd
(often to be read as -is) in the active only".
a. Roots ending in a usually change that vowel to e before -yd: e. g. de-yam
(perhaps to be explained as ddi^dm)2 'I would give'. But a is sometimes retained, as
in yd-ydm 'I would go*.
b. T h e endings are the secondary ones. There are, however, some irregularities
in the I. sing, and the 3. pL 1. T h e 3. pL mid. always takes -ran instead of -an. 2. T h e
3. pL a c t always takes -ur, before which the a of -yd is dropped, while in the a- con-
jugation y is interposed between e i and -ur. 3. T h e I. sing. mid. has the peculiar ending
a with y interposed between it and the modal -1. 4. The I. sing, a c t of the a- con-
jugation attaches -am instead of -m (the termination -em being unknown), interposing y
between it and the e* of the stem.
a. The e n d i n g s o f t h e o p t a t i v e in combination with the modal suffix
are accordingly the following:

i. Graded conjugation.
Active Middle
sing. du. pL sing. du. pL
1. -yä-m -yä-va -yi-ma 1. -l-y-a -T-vdhi -l-mdhi
2. -yds -yä-tam -yi-ta 2. -T-this -l-y-dthUm -X-dhvdm
3. -ya-t •yä-täm -y-tir 3. -i-tä -i-y-ätäm -l-r-dn

2. a - c o n j u g a t i o n .
1. -e-y-am -e-va -e-ma 1. -e-y-a -e-vahi -e-mahi
2. -e-s -e-tam -e-ta 2. -e-thäs -e-y-äthäm -e-dhvam.
3. -e-t -e-täm -e-y-ur 3. -e-ta -e-y-ätäm -e-r-an.
417. P r e c a t i v e . This is a form of the optative which adds an -s after
the modal suffix in several persons, and is made almost exclusively from
aorist stems. In the R V . there occur a few forms of the precative in three
persons (1. 3. sing., 1. pi.) active, and in two persons (2. 3. sing.) middle;
thus a c t i v e : 1. sing, bha-yä-s-am (aor.) 'may I b e ' ; 3. sing, as-yas (for
*as-y2-s-t) 'may he attain' (aor.); babhü-yäs 'may he be' (perf.); i . p l . kri-yä-s-ma
' m a y we d o ' (aor.); m i d d l e : 2. sing, mam-s-l-s-thds (aor.) and 3. sing, mam-s-l-s-ta
(aor.), from man- 'think'.
418. I m p e r a t i v e . This mood has no mood-sign of its own, as all the
first persons are subjunctives and the second and third persons are mostly
old injunctives. The purely injunctive forms are the 2. 3. du. and 2. pi. active
and middle, ending in -tam, -täm, •ta; -äthäm, -ätäm, -dhvam. T h e 3. sing,
pi. a c t in -tu* and -antu5, and the 3. pi. mid. in -antam5 may be modi-
fications of injunctives. The imperative has, however, distinctive forms of its
own in the 2. sing, act.: -dhi, -hi, -ana, -tat-, and in the middle: 2. sing, -sva
and 3. sing, -täm or -am.
a. The 2. s i n g . act. in the «-conjugation has no ending, employing the
bare stem (like the vocative singular of the a- declension); e. g. bhara
'support'; nesa 'lead' (aor. of Vni~)- In the graded conjugation, when a
strong and weak stem are distinguished, the ending is attached to the latter:
-dhi is added after both consonants and vowels, -hi (the later form of -dhi)
after vowels o n l y ; thus ad-dhi 'eat'; sru-dhi and s'fnu-dhl 'hear*; i-hi 'go',
jägf-hi 'awake', pipr-hi 'save', sj-nu-hi 'hear'. In the nä- class, -hi is a d d e d

1 On the accentuation cp. above 9 and 24a. 4 Cp. BRUGMANN, KG. 729, I; IF. 18, 7 1 ;
' Cp. BRUGMANN, KG. 555 (bottom). DELBRÜCK, Vergl. Syntax 2, p. 357.
3 The e (for a) is here probably due to 5 T h e ending -antu and an täm lose their
the influence of the other forms -es, -el, etc.: n under the same conditions as -and (p. 314,
BRUGMANN, KG. 728. note ").
318 I. A L L G E M E I N E S TOD S P R A C H E . 4. VEDIC GRAMMAR.

only when the root ends in a vowel, but -ana1 when it ends in a consonant;
thus pu-nih'i 'purify', but as-ana 'eat'.
b. The ending -tat occurs some twenty times in the R V . When strong
and weak stem are distinguished, it is added to the latter; e. g. vit-tat 'thou
shalt regard', dhat-tat 'thou shalt place', krnu-tat 'thou shalt make', pwu-tat
'thou shalt purify', etc. 2 Its use is almost restricted to the 2. sing. It is,
however, once 3 found in the R V . and once in the TS. in the sense of the
3. sing., once as 2. du. in the RV., once as 2. pi. in the TS., and once as
1. sing, in A V A It appears to have the value of a future imperative, ex-
pressing an injunction to be carried out at a time subsequent to the present.
It may originally have been identical with the abl. tad 'after that', 'then';
krnu-tat would thus have meant 'do (it) then's.

I. T h e Present System.
4ig. This group consists of a present indicative together with a sub-
junctive, an injunctive, an optative, an imperative, and participles, besides a
past augmented tense called the imperfect because formed analogously to
the Greek tense. This is the most important system, as its forms are about
three times as common as those of the three other systems taken together 6 .
Hence roots are generally classified according to the manner in which their
stems are formed in the present system. Here two distinct conjugations
may be conveniently distinguished.
The first or a- conjugation, all the stems in which end in -a, retains
the stem unaltered (like the a- declension) in every tense, mood, and parti-
ciple, accenting the same syllable throughout the present indicative, its moods
and participles, as well as the unaugmented imperfect 7 . The secondary con-
jugations in -a (desideratives, intensives, causatives, denominatives) as well as
the future 8 , follow this conjugation in their inflexion.
The second or graded conjugation is characterized by shift of accent
between stem and ending, accompanied by vowel gradation. Minor differences
consist in the loss of n in the 3. pi. middle, in the addition of another suffix
{-ana instead of -mana) in the middle participle, in the employment of an
ending in the 2. sing, imp v. act., and in vowel gradation, with shift of accent,
in the modal suffix of the optative.

a. T h e first or a- conjugation.
420. The special characteristics of this conjugation are:
1. The -a of the stem is lengthened before the endings of the 1. du. and
pi. which begin with v and m; e. g. jayamasi 'we conquer'; while the initial
a of the endings of the 3. pi. -anti, -ante, -an, -anta, is dropped; e. g. bhara-nti
'they bear'.
2. The optative sign is throughout -1, which combines with the -a of the
present stem to e; e. g. bhaves.
3. The 2. sing. impv. act. has no ending except the comparatively few
instances (about sixteen) in which -tat is added.

1 O n t h e o r i g i n of this p e c u l i a r i m p e r a t i v e 5 BRUGMANN, K G . 732.

f o r m cp. BRUGMANN, K G . 839, 5. 6 WLLITNKY 600, a.
' S e e DELBRÜCK, V e r b u m 38. 7 B u t w h e n the a u g m e n t w a s a d d e d , it
3 O p . c i t . 7 7 ; WHITNEY 5 7 1 , b . A V E R Y , received the accent just like the verbal pre-
h o w e v e r (225, b o t t o m ) , s t a t e s that it o c c u r s p o s i t i o n in a p r i n c i p a l s e n t e n c e (the v e r b
5 t i m e s in t h e R V . as a 3. sing. itself r e m a i n i n g u n a c c e n t e d ) .
4 WHITNEY, l o c . c i t . 8 A l s o aorist stems e n d i n g in -a.
 V I I . VERB. PRESENT SYSTEM. 319

4. The 2. 3. du. mid. substitute e for the a of the endings -athe, -ate-,
e. g. 2. vahethe 'ye two travel', 3. vardhete 'they two thrive'.
5. The middle participle regularly ends in -mana.
a. Five classes or types may be distinguished in the present stems of
the a- conjugation. These are: 1. Stems in which the radical syllable has a
strong grade accented vowel 1 ; e . g . bhara-ti, from bhr- 'bear'. 2. Stems in
which the radical syllable has a weak grade vowel, the thematic a being
accented'; e. g. ruja-ti, from ruj- 'break'. 3. Stems formed with the suffix
-ya, being either (a) ordinary transitive or intransitive verbs 3 , e. g. ds-ya-ti
'throws'; or (b) passives, e. g. nl-yd-te 'is led'. 4. Stems ending in -aya,
being either (a) causatives (-dya) or (b) denominatives (-aya) 5. Stems
formed with the suffix -sa, added to the reduplicated root, being desideratives;
e. g. pi-pa-sa- 'desire to drink'. The last two classes, which retain the present
stem throughout their inflexion, constitute three of the secondary conjugations
which will be treated separately below (541—570).

1. T h e radically accented a- class (bhava-).

421. This is by far the commonest type of the a- conjugation, about
300 such present stems occurring in the Saiphitas*. The radical vowel takes
Guna, unless it is medial and long by nature or position; thus from ji- 'con-
quer' : jay-a-; ni- 'lead' : nay-a-; bhu- 'be' : bhav-a--, budh- 'awake' : bodh-a-\
sfp- 'creep' : sarpa-; but jinv- 'quicken' : j'tnv-a--, krjd- 'play' : krid-a-. Roots
with medial a remain unchanged, e. g. vad- 'speak' : vdd-a-.
a. T h e r e are, however, several irregularities in the formation of the present s t e m :
1. iih- 'consider' takes G u n a : oha- (but uh- ' r e m o v e ' remains u n c h a n g e d : iiha-)-, guh- 'hide'
lengthens its v o w e l : guha-\ kram• 'stride' lengthens its vowel in the a c t i v e : krama- (but
krama- in the middle); kyp- 'lament' retains its v o w e l u n c h a n g e d : kfpa-. — 2. T h e roots
dami- 'bite' and sail/' 'hang' lose their nasal: ddsa-, saja-. — 3. gam- 'go', yam- 'reach',
yu- 'separate' form their stem with the suffix -cha -. gaccha-, yaccha-, yuccha-. — 4. Four
stems are transfers from the reduplicating c l a s s 6 : fiia- from pi- 'drink', tiftha- from
st/ia- 'stand', stria-1 (for *si-sad-a-) from sad- 'sit', saitra-8 (for *sa-sac-a-) from sac- 'accom-
p a n y ' ; four o t h e r s 9 are transfers from the nu- class, being either used beside or h a v i n g
entirely superseded the simpler original s t e m s : i-nv-a• from i- 'send', b e s i d e i-ni-li\
Jt-nv-a- from ji- 'quicken', beside ji-no-fi; hi-nv-a- from hi- 'impel', beside hi-n6-ti\ pitiv-a-
'fatten' was doubtless originally *pi-nu- from the root pi. io.
422. Present indicative. The forms of this tense which actually occur,
if made from bhava-, would be as follows:
Active. Sing. 1. bhdva-mi, 2. bhdva-si, 3. bhdva-ti. Du. 1. bhdva-vas (TS.),
2. bhdva-thas, 3. bhdva-tas. PL 1. bhdvcl-ntasi and bhdva-mas, 2. bMva-tha1',
3. bhdva-nti.
M i d d l e . Sing. 1. b/idv-e, 2. bhava-se, 3. bMva te12. Du. 1. bhava-vahe,
3. bhdv-ete. PI. 1. bhdva-mahe'3, 2. bhava-dhve, 3. bhdva-nte.
The forms which actually occur are the following:
' The first class of the Indian gramma- 7 S e e ROZWADOWSKI, BB. 21, 147.
rians. 8 A reminiscence of its reduplicative origin

' The sixth class of the Indian g r a m m a - ; is the loss of the nasal (the sonant b e c o m i n g a)
nans. in the ending of the 3. pi.: saicati, sasrafa.
•J The fourth class of the Indian gramma- 9 fnv-a-, beside f-tuS-H from f- 'send', is
rians. a similar transfer to the sixth class.
4 The nominal a preceding the -ya is S e e WHITNEY, Roots, under pin v.
here sometimes dropped or c h a n g e d to a 1 ' vada-thana is the only e x a m p l e of the
or i. See b e l o w 562. Some of these verbs ending -thana in the indicative of the <z-
in -aya, having lost their special stem conjugation.
meaning, are treated as a class (the tenth) " T h e R V . once has sobhe as 3. sing, for
of primary verbs. si'Mafc.
5 See WHITNEY 2 1 4 — 2 1 6 , cp. 744. U DELBRÜCK, Verbum p. 30 (top), AVERY
6 dad-a- occasionally appears for the p . 2 3 5 , W H I T N E Y 7 3 5 , b , a n d G R A S S M A N N ,
regular dada-, from da- 'give'. under man 'think', g i v e manämahi (IX. 41»),
320

Present Indicative.
Active. S i n g . i . acanti, arcami, avanti, uhàmi ( A V . VS.), khdnimi,
gdcchami ( A V . ) , carimi, codami, jdnàmi, jayami, tapimi (AV.J. tisthimi (AV.),
dahimi, dhàvami (AV.), ttayami ( A V . TS.), pacami ( A V . ) , palami, piò.imi1,
bhajami, bharàmi, bhavimi ( A V . ) , mandimi (TS. iv. 2. 6 1 ), yacchimi (AV.),
yajàmi ( A V . ) , y rie imi, rapimi, ràjàmi, rohìmi (AV.), vadami, rapami (AV.),
vàJiami, s'dmsàmi, siksimi, sumbhàmi, sajimi, sapami, sldìmi1 ( A V . ) , ¡vadami,
barami.
1. atasi, arsasi, arhasi, dvasi, invasi libasi, ksayasi, cdrasi, jayasi,
jinvasi2, jàrvasi, tapasi(KS.), tarasi, tislhasi', tirvasi, das'asi, dhanvasi, dhàvasi,
ndyasi, palasi, pinvasi2, p'ibasi bhdvasi, b his a si, madasi (AV.), ydcchasi, ydjasi,
rdksasi, rdjasi, rohasi, vancasi ( A V . ) , vadasi, vapasi, varsasi ( A V . ) , va/tasi,
samsasi, s'Usasi, stirpasi ( A V . ) . sas'easi', sidasi1, barasi (AV.).
3. acati (AV.), 3/0//, anali (AV.), ayati, arcati, ardati (AV.), arsati, arhati,
àvati, invali2, Isaii, ihati (Kh. 11. i o ' ) , ùhati, éjati, osali, krandati, ¿ramali(AV.),
krilati, ksdyati, ksarati, khanati (AV.), khàdati, gdcchati, guhati ( A V . ) , carati,
citati, jayati, jinvati2, jivati, jurvatijrayati, tapati, tarati, tisthati tsarati (AV.),
dadatidahati (AV.), dàsati, dàsati, dhdmati, dhivati 'runs' and 'washes',
ndksati, riandati (AV.), ndyati, navali ( A V . ) 'praises', pacati, palati, pinnatiJ,
pibati1, piyati, bódhati, bhajati, bhdnati, bhdrati, bharvati, bhdvati, bhasati (AV.),
bhàsati, bhedati, mddati, mdrdhati, mehati (AV.), yàcchati, ydjati, ydtati, yabhati
(TS. vii. 4. 192), yamati, yacati ( A V . ) , yùcchati, rdksati, radati, rapati, rùjati,
radhati, réjati, rebhati, ródhati, rosati, ròhati, vancati (AV.), vadati, vàpati,
varjati, vardhati, varsati ( A V . ) , vasati 'dwells', vahati, vàsati, vinati, samsati,
s'dsatiì, siksati, sundhati, sumbhati, sócati ( A V . TS.), sarjati, sdrpati, sadhati,
sidati1, sédhati, skandati, stobhati, sphurjati (AV.), sredhati, barati, himsati4
( K h . i v . 5«').
D u . 1. caravas (TS. 1. 5. i o 1 ) . — 2. acathas, drcat has, arhathas, ava thas,
invathas2, karsathas, ksdyathas, gdcchathas, ghosathas, cetathas, janathas,
jinvathas2, jivathas, jàrvathas, tist/iatas1, dhdmathas, naksathas, nayathas,
pat at has, pinvathas2, bhdrathas, bhdvathas, bhUscUhas, mddathas, yajathas,
ydtathas, raksathas ( A V . TS.), ràjathas, rohathas, vanathas, varathas, vahathas,
s'tksathas, sadathas, sAdhathas, sldathas', svadathas.
3. invatas2, cjatas ( A V . ) , ksayatas, khadatas ( A V . ) , gdcchatas (AV.),
ghosatas, cdratas, tisthatas1 ( A V . ) , dravatas (AV.), dhàvatas 'wash', naksatas,
pacatas (AV.), pinvatas2, pibatasbhdvatas, bhàsatas, manthatas, mardhatas,
yacchatas (AV.), yucchatas, raksatas, ràjatas, vardhatas ( A V . ) , vasatas, vdhatas.
P I . 1. animasi, drhàmasi, khanan.asi (AV.), cdramasi and cdramas(AV.),
janimasi, jayamasi, taramasi, ddyamasi (AV.), dahàmasi (AV.), namamasi
(AV.), ndy&masi and nayamas ( A V . ) , pibàmasx ( A V . ) , bjdhàmasi, bhajimas
( A V . ) , bharàmasi, madimasi and madamas, rncthamasi, ydjamasi and yajamas,
vddamasi and vadimas, vasdmasi ( A V . ) , samsimas ( A V . ) , sajamasi (AV.),
harimasi ( A V . ) and hdrimas (AV.).
2. djatha5, dvatha, <!jatha, krilatha, ksdyatha, khadatha, gdcchatha,
caratha ( A V . ) , cetatha, jinvatha2, tdksatha, tàrvatha, dhivatha (AV.),
ndyatha, nasatha, patatha, pinvatha2 (TS. ill. 1. 1 1 8 ) , bhdratha, bhavatha,
bhàsatha, mddatha, mosatha, raksatha, ràjatha, rejatha, vahatha, sdrpatha.—
W i t h -thana only vddathana.
3. acanti (AV.), ajanti, arcanti, drsanti, dr/tanti, avanti, krandanti,

but this is due to Sandhi (108), manàmahi I J A transfer from the root class {oziasti,
'ti standing for mattàtnahe iti (Pp.). I 1 A transfer from the infixing class.
1 A transfer from the reduplicating class. | 5 The Samhita lengthens the final vowel
2 A transfer from the nu- class. j in at least ten of the following forms.
 VII. VERB. PRESENT SYSTEM. 321

kramanti (AV.), krilanti, krósanti, ksáranti, ¿sodanti, khananti (AV.), khidanti

(AV.), gacchanti, gdmanti, gühanti, cáranti, jáyanti, jaranti, jinvanti jivanti,
táksanti, tápanti, taranti, tísthanti 2, trásanti, tsáranti, dabhanti, dahanti, dasanti
(AV.), dravanti, dhanvanti, dhámanti, dhavanti, dhàrvanti, naksanti, nandanti,
na manti, náyanti, nas'anti 'they attain', niksanti (AV.), nindanti, pacanti, pátanti,
pínrai.tipíbanti 2, piyanti, bhajanti, bhananti, bháranti, bhávanti, bhüsanti,
majjanti, mádanti, mánthanti, maranti, mardhanti, mimanti 2 {ma- 'bellow'),
mehanti, yácchanti, yájanti, yacanti (AV.), yodhanti (AV.), ráksanti, ránanti,
rádanti, rajanti, rebhanti, róhanti, vádanti, vananti, vápanii, várdhanti, vársanti,
valganti (AV.), vásanti, vasanti (AV.), váhanti,v¿nanti, sámsanti, s'Usanti, sócanti,
sestanti, sapanti, sarpanti (AV.), sidanti 2, sedhanti, skandanti, stobhanti, srávanti,
svádanti, svdranti, háranti (AV.), hímsanti 3.

Indicative Middle.
S i n g . 1. aje, ame, arce, íkse, gacche (TS. 1. 1. 10 a), daye (AV. TS.), ñame;
níkse (AV.), b.ldhe (AV.), bháre, bhikse, mande, yáje, rabhe, lábhe (AV.), vade,
vánde, varte, sraye (AV.), sáhe (AV.), stáve, svaje (AV.), háve.
2. arsase (AV.), ohase, garhase, gühase, cáksase, cayase, jar ase, josase (AV.),
tísthase 2, fosase, dohase, naksase, naya se, pava se, pinvasebádhase, bhriljase,
mamhase, mandase, modase, yacchase, yajase, yantase, raksase, ramase (AV.),
ricase, rohase, várdhase, vahase, sùmbhase, sobhase, sácase, stávase, harsase.
3. ajate, ayate, íksate (AV.), ìsate, ísate, gate*, edhate, óhate, kfpate, kalpate
(AV.), kramate, kridate (AV.), gacchate, gufiate, gühate, ghosate, cáyate, cétate,
codate, cyivate (AV.), járate, jfmbhate, tandate, tísthatetejate, tosate, dáksate,
dadate 2 (AV.), dadhate* (TS. 11.2.12«), dóhate5, dyotate (AV.), dhàvate, náksate,
ñámate, navate (AV.), nasate, nasate, pacate (AV.), páyate, párate, piavate 1, píbate 2,
práthate, plávate, bàdhate, bhájate, bhandate, bhayate, bhárate, bhiksate, bhójate,
bhr ájate, bhresate, mámhate, madate(AV.), márate, modate, yájate, yatate, yamate,
yojate, ramhate, raksate, rapsate b, rámate, rombate, réjate, rJcate, rohate, láyate
(AV.), vañcate (AV.), vadate, ranate, vándate, vapate, várate 'covers', vártate,
várdhate, varsate (AV.), vàsate (x. 373), váhate, vépate, vyathate, sapate (AV.),
siksate, sùmbhate, srayate (AV.), sácate, sahate, sàdhate, sécate, sévate, stárate,
s'ayate, stávate, smayate, syándate, svüdate, hársate, hávate, hUsate 1, hvárate. —
W i t h -o for -te : jóse, tosP, mahe, s'áye, seve, stáve.
D u . 1. sáclvahe.
2. jayethe, jarethe, raksethe, varethe, vahethe, srayethe, sacethe.
3. carete, jarete, tárete, ñámete, bldhete (AV.), bhayete, bharete, methete,
yatete, rejete, vádete, varíete, vardhete, vepete, vyathete, sácete, smayete, havete.
PI. I. ksadàmahe (AV.), cáy3mahe'> (AV.),jaramaAe, náksamahe, návámahe,
násamahe, badhümahe, bhájamahe, bháylmahe, bharSmahe, mánSmahe 1", mándá-
mahe, mardmahe, yájSmahe, yacámahe, rabhamahe, vánñmahe, vándSmahe,
sahamahe (AV.), starámahe, stávamahe, svajümahe, hávümahe.
2. cayadhve, dhavadhve, badhadhve, bháradhve, mandadhve, váhadhve,
sayadhve, sácadhve (AV.).
1 T r a n s f e r from the -mi c l a s s . | f o r m of ha- ' l e a v e ' i i x . 275; x . 1 2 7 3 ) ; cp. p. 3 2 2 ,
' A transfer f o r m from the reduplicating note 3. T h i s f o r m is g i v e n b y AVERY 2 5 8 a s
class. subjunctive of the s- aorist of ha-.
3 A t r a n s f e r f r o m the infixing nasal c l a s s . 8 (lv. 38"). With irregular a c c e n t , like t h a t
4 In ópejale in IV. 48», v . Pp. àpa Xjate. of similar f o r m s in the g r a d e d c o n j u g a t i o n .
5 dohàte ( x . 1 3 3 7 1 , DELBRÜCK, V e r b u m 9 7 , 9 Conjecture for cayasmahe, A V . XIX. 4 8 1 :
a n d AVERY 233, is a m i s t a k e for dòhate (a s e e WHITNEY'S note on the p a s s a g e in his
t r a n s f e r f r o m the root class). Translation.
6 Cp. BARTHOLO.MAE, I F . IO, 18. 1 0 S e e note on bhavamahe, a b o v e , p. 3 1 9 ,
7 F r o m his- ' g o emulously', a s e c o n d a r y note '3.
Iodo-Rrische Philologie L 4. 21
322 I. ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4. VEDIC GRAMMAR.

3. áyaníe, lisaníe(AV.TS.), ísante, cdhante, ks'¡dante,gácchante (TS. iv. 2. 6 ¡ ),

cétante, cyávante, jayante, járonte 'sing', tisthante\ didante1 (AV.', dhavante,
naksante, ñamante, novante, pivonte, pitante planante ( AV.), bídhante, bhajante,
bháyante, bhárante, bhrÁjante, mjdante (AV.>, y ájante, y atante, yícante, raksante,
rante1, rapsante (AV.), rabhante, ramante, réjante, rje ante, vadante, varante,
variante, várdhante, vahante, vyathante, sayante, súmbhante, srayante, sacante,
sopante, sáhante, stivante, spárdhante, svajante, svadante, fiáronte, hávante,
basante* (AV.).

Present S u b j u n c t i v e 4 .

423. A c t i v e . Sing. 1. a/ ìni (TS.VIL 4 . 1 9 1 ; VS. xxin. 19), corani, jivani

(AV.), tarani (AV.), náySni, pacìni, bhajlni, ràjàni, vádani (AV.), váhani,
hárani (AV.). — W i t h o u t -ni: arel.
2. a. W i t h -si: ájasi, gácchlsi (AVjaylsi, tislhasi1 (AV.), naya si (AV.),
píbasi1, bhájasi, bhávasi, bhasasi (AV.), y ájasi, vadasi, rahàsi.
b. W i t h -s: ávas, gacchas, jáyls, jívas (AV.), jiírvas*, tis!hasb/iáras,
vadls (AV.), vanas (AV.), várdhls, síksas.
3. a. W i t h -ti: ájati, ejali (AV.), gácchlti, jayati, jívati, táplti, tís/Aati1,
dabfhtti, dahilti, dhanvati, náyati, pacati, patiti, padati, pibltil, bJd/iati, bhájati,
bhárati, bhávSti, mariti, yájati, raksati (AV.), vadati, vahlti (AV.), sámsati,
s'áplti (AV.), sumbhlti (AV.), sráyati (AV.), sídati svádlti, svariti.
b. 'With -i: árcSt, árslt, árhat, ávat, invai6, ejat, gácchlt, ghòslt, janàt
(AV.vi. 81 '), jlvlt, t'isthlt \ drísat(AV.), dásit, d/iavat {AV.), «¿y 7/(AV.), nindlt,
pac at, pátlt, pibat', bhajíit (AV.), bhárlt, bhàslt, yácchlt, yajat, rcslt (AV.),
rjhat AV.), várdhlt, vahlt (AV. T S . ) , sámsat, s'ápát(AV.), sikilt, sarplt (AV.),
skándat ( T S . 1. 6. 2'), smárlt (AV.), hárat (AV.).
D u . I. carava, jáyava, pibüva vánava, sámsava.
2. ávlthas, tarütha > (AV.), tisthlthas náylthas (AV.), piblthas bháváthas
(AV.), vadáthas, smarathas.
3. cárltas1, pibatas1, váhltas, sápatas.
PI. 1. aVr 7»/<z, krámUmo, khánlma (TS. IV. 1.2 3 ), takslma, namüma (TS.
v. 7.4"), patlma (Kh. p. 171.6), bhajlma, bhárama, bhàvàma, madama, rnan-
thama, marama, yajama, radhlma, vadáma, vardhlma, vásama, sresama8,
hárama.
2. ávütha, gacchàtha, jayatha, jlvatha (TS. v. 7. 4 4 ) 9 , yacchltha (AV.),
váhltha.
3. arcan, krílan, gácchan, ghjsan, cáran, jivan (AV.), dásln (AV.),
patín, yacchln (AV.), vádán, várdhñn10, vahln, siksan (AV.), ÍÁ/I» ' (AV.),
>WJ« (AV.).
Middle. Sing. 1. gácchai (AV.), mánai, marai, stávai. — 2. vardhlsc,
nayasai (AV.). — 3. jarate, tisthlte pavàte, bhayate, y ájate, váhste, sráyZtc,
svajate\ caratai (AV.), jayltai {TS. AV.), y aja tai, srayatai (AV.), svajltai (AV.).

1 A transfer form from the reduplicating
class.
« According to ROTH, ZDMG. 20, 71, for
*ran-ante\ WHITNEY, Roots = r-ante, under
f 'go'; also GRASSMANN, under root at.
3 From has- 'go emulously': see WHITNEY'S
note on AV. iv. 36 S .
4 No forms of the 2. 3. pL subj. middle
6 A transfer from the -nu class.
7 DELBRÜCK, Verbum 82, gives tif/h3las,
but I cannot trace it.
8 Perhaps from srif- «= ilis- 'clasp': cp.
WHITNEY, Roots.
9 DELBRÜCK 4 8 gives fibjtha also.
10 vardhin (I. 7 0 * ; VI. 17") as well as ¿man
(iv. 5 5 ; v . 31 ) are given as indicatives b y
2 5

occur in this class. DELBRÜCK, Verbum 91; cp. p. 327, note 3.

5 DELBRÜCK p. 37 (top) gives tdifäs, which
I cannot trace.
 VII. VERB. PRESENT SYSTEM. 323

D u . I. rabhävahai ( T S . i v . 4 . 7 ' ) , sacävahai, sahlvahai. — 3. yátaite.

PI. I. ndsämahai, bhajämahai ( A V . ) , ydjämahai, vdnämahai.

Present Injunctive.
424. Active. S i n g . 1. cydvam, taksam, tlsthambhojam, yojam.
2. dvas, esas ( A V . ) , osas, gühas, caras, tisthas' ( A V . ) , dáhas, ñamas ( A V . ) ,
madas ( A V . ) , yama r, vadas ( V S . x x i n . 25), vanas, vapas, varas, vasas, venas,
socas.
3. arcat, arsat (AV.)3, karsat, krandat, krámat* ( A V . ) , ksarat, cárat, cetat,
codat, janat, jdyat, jósat, taksat, tandrat5, tapat, tamat, tárat, tísthat1, dadaf,
dábhat, dásat, dásat, dásat, drávat, náksaí, nayat, nasat, pácat, pátat,
pinvat2, pibatprithat, bidhat, bhárat, bhavat ( A V . ) , bhisaí, bhramsat
( A V . ) , madat ( A V . ) 6 , minat, yámat1, ranat, rádat, rápat, rädhat, rejat, resat,
rodhat, vádat, várat, vártat, várdhat, vds'at, sakat, sardhat, iíksat, snáthat,
sramat, sadat, sárpat, sascaf, svájat.
P l . 3. arcan, cáran, dabhan, dhävan, náksan, násan Close' and 'reach'),
bharan ( A V . ) , bhavan ( A V . ) , y aman, ránan, vaman, vardhan, s'ásan, sädhan8,
sTdan*.
Middle. S i n g . 2. gühathäs ( A V . ) , bädhathäs, rabhathäs (AV.).
3. isa ta, bharata, rocata, várdhata, sacata, sÁdhata.
Pl. 3. amanta, áyanta, caranta, cyavanta, jananta, tisthantanaksanía,
ñama uta, náyanta, navanta, nasa uta, nasanta, plnvanta2, pravanta, bhájanta,
bhananta, bháranta, bhiksanta, yaks anta, yavanta, rananta, ranta (1. 6 1 " ;
vil. 3 9 3 ) 9 , ramanta, réjanla, ranta,0, váranta ('cover'), vardhanta, vrädhanta,
sócanta, sácanta, sapanta, sádhanta, stávanta, smayanta, hávania.

Present Optative.
4 2 5 . A c t i v e . S i n g . 1. careyam(AV.), bhaveyam ( T S . i v . 7 . 1 2 a ) , vadheyam
( A V . ) , síkseyam. — 2. </'7w, bhaves, made*, vanes. — 3. áuct, gácchet ( A V . ) ,
car« 1 , taret, pátet, bhávet ( A V . ) , yacchet ( A V . ) , lábhet ( A V . ) , vadet (AV.),
vaset'1 ( A V . ) , sraret, haret ( A V . ) . — D u . 3. grdsetäm.
PI. i . krämema, ksayema ( A V . ) , khanema ( T S . rv. 1. 2 4 ), gacchema ( A V .
T S . ) , cayema, carema, jáyema, jivema, tdrema, tisthemadäsema, paterna ( T S .
IV. 7. 1 3 ' ) , bharema ( A V . T S . ) , bhávema, bhásema, mádema, m ahem a, yatema,
rapema, róhema ( A V . ) , vatema, vadema, siksema, sapema, sidema' (AV.),
hdrema ( A V . ) . — 3 . tdreyur, yáceyur ( A V . ) , vaheyur, saheyur ( S A . x n . 3 2 ) .
Middle. S i n g . 1 . saceya.— 3 . ajeta, kalpeta ( S A . X I I . 20), ksameta, jareta,
bhikseta, yajeta, vadeta, sdmseta ( A V . ) , saceta, sahda ( S A . x n . 20), staveta.
D u . 1. sacevahi ( A V . ) .
P l . 1. gähemahi, bhajemahi, bharemahi, yátemahi, rabhemahi, sácemahi. —
3 . W i t h e n d i n g -rata', bharerata.

Present Imperative.
4 2 6 . A c t i v e . S i n g . 2. aca, dja, area, drsa, dva, invaOha ( A V . ) , osa,
karsa, kranda, krama, ksára, khada ( A V . T S . ) , gdccha, gada (AV.), cara,

' T r a n s f e r form from the reduplicating class.
» A transfer from the -nu class.
3 A V . X. 4«, s o m e Mss. risat: see WHIT-
NEY'S note in bis Translation.
4 Emendation for Afämat, A V . vil. 6 3 ' :
see WHITNEY'S Translation.
S 11 JO 7 , perhaps to be emended to tandat.
6 A V . XX. 49» emendation for mada.
7 DELBRÜCK 56 (top) adds rátfat.
8 DELBRÜCK, Verbum 89 (p. 63), takes
háran as an unaugmented imperfect, but it
seems to occur only as a N. sing. m. parti-
| ciple-
9 A c c o r d i n g to DELBRÜCK 113 for •raw-
an/a; WHITNEY, Roots,r-anla. Cp.p-322,note
| 1 0 DELBRÜCK 1. c., for *vati-anta.
j 11 A V . x i l . 4 ! 7 : should probably be vaset.
j Cp. p. 324, nole 3 .
21*
324 I. ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4. V E D I C GRAMMAR.

còda, jáya, j'nival, jlva, jürva, jisa, tápa, tara, tís/ha2, ¡lasa (AV.), daha,
djmha (AV. 1, drava, dhativa, dhama, dháva, ñama, naya, níksa (AV.), pata,
pava, pima piba2, protha, bjdha, bhája, bhára, bháva, bhüsa, rnada, mintha
(AV.), manda, myaksa, turada, yáccha, yája,yábha (AV.),yo;a, ráksa, rana, ràda,
raja (AV.), rjha, vada, vadha (AV.), rapa, várdha, vasa3 (AV.), vasa (AV.),
vaha, vÁñcha• (AV.), sámsa, sárdha, siksa, sumbha, soca, sraya (AV. TS.),
JIÍRTF, sarpa, saha (SA. XII. 31), sádha, sida', sJdha, skanda (AV.), star/a (AV.),
srava, svada, svapa, svara, hara, hinva — W i t h ending -tài: avatìt,
osatat, gacchatat {AN .),jinvatatl (AV.), dahatat, dhavatàt (AV.) 'run', bhavatat,
yacchatìt, yacatat, ráksatat, vahatat, s'rayatàt (TS. VII. 4. 192).
3. ajatu, añcatu (AV.), arcatu, arsatu (AV.), ávatu, invatuTsatu (AV. »,
ejatu, ésatu (AV.), osatu (AV.), krandatu, kràmatu (TS. VIL 3. 11 1 ), krosatu
(AV.), gacchatu, earatu (AV.), jayatu, jinvatu jívatu (AV.), tapatu, tisthatu
dahatu (AV.), drmhatu (AV.), dravatu (AV.), dhavatu, naksatu (AV.), nayatu,
patatu (AV.), pibatubjdhatu, bhavatu, bhüsatu, manthatu (AV.), mándatu,
yacchatu, y ajatu, ráksatu, rajatu (AV.), rohatu, vadatu (AV.), vapatu (TS.
AV.), várdhatu, varsatu (K.h. 11.136), vasatu (AV.), vahatu, siksatu, socatti,
sarpatu, sida tusedhatu, hinvatu\ — With ending -tàt: gacchat it,
s mar a tat (AV.).
Du. 2. ajatam, ávatam, invatam osatam, gácchatam, jáyatam, jaratam,
jinvatam 2, taksatam, tipatam, tisthatam2, tàrvatam, dahatam (AV.), dhiva-
tam, nayat am, patatam, pinvatam, plbatam2, bódhatam, bhajatam, bháratam,
bhávatam, bhüsatam, mamhatam (Kh.i. io2), yacchatam, yátatam, ráksatam,
rohatam (TS. 1. 8. 12 3), vánatam, vardhatam, váhatam, venatam, siksatam,
sldatam2, sédhatam.
3. ayatam (AV.), ávatam, invatamkrosatam (AV.), gacchatam, cetatam,
jáyatam (AV.), jtvatàm (AV.), drávatam, pibatam2 (AV.), bharatam (AV.),
bhavatam, madatam, mehatam (AV.), yacchatam, raksatam, váhatam, vestatam
(AV.), sídatam2.
Pl. 2. arcata, arsata5, avata, gacchata, guhata, carata, codata, janata,
jayata, jinvata jívata, taksata, tapata, tarata, tisthata trasata, daksata,
dfinhata, dhavata, náyata, nindata, pacata, patata (AV.), pinvata píbata
bhájata (AV.), bhárata, bhávata, bhüsata, madata, mánthata, yácchata, yajata,
yacata, ráksata, rohata, vadata, vanata, vapata, vardhata, vahata, vrajata
(AV.), samsata, sundhata (Kh.111.166), sumbhata, sócala (AV.), sacata, sarpata,
sascata', sidata*, sédhata, stobhata, sredhata, karata (AV.). — W i t h ending
-tana', bhajatana.
3. árcantu, ársantu, ávantu, kasantu (AV.), krosantu (AV.), ksarantu,
gacchantu, carantu, jáyantu, jlvantu, taksantu, tapantu (AV. TS.), tisthantu
trasantu (AV.), dahantu, drávantu, dhanvantu (AV.), dhavantu (AV.), dhürvantu,
namantu (AV. TS.), nayantu, pacantu, patantu, píbantubjdha utu, bhajantu
(AV.), bharantu (AV.), bhávantu, mathantu (AV.), madantu, manthantu (AV.),
mándantu, yácchantu, yajantu, yúcchantu, ráksantu, radantu, rohantu, lapantu
(AV.), vádantu, vapantu, vardhantu, vársantu (AV.; Kh. 11.5), vasantu (AV.),
váhantu, vañchantu, sundhantu, svmbhantu (AV.), srosantu, sajantu (AV.),
sarpantu (AV.), sídantu % sedhantu, stobhantu, sravantu, svádantu, svarantu,
harantu (AV.).
Middle. Sing. 2. ácasva (AV.), cdhasva (AV.), kalpasva, kramasva,
gacchasva (AV.), codasva, cyavasva (AV. TS.), járasva, tapasva, dayasva (AV.),

1 Transfer from the -»« class. 4 AVERY 2 4 3 adds vena(l).

2 Transfer from the reduplicating class. 5 The form arsata in AV. vi. 28» is a corrup-
3 AV. III. 4 7 , perhaps to be read vasa. tion: see WHITNEY'S note in his Translation.
 VII. VERB. P R E S E N T SYSTEM. 3*5

naksasva, nabhasva (AV.), namasva, nayasva, pdvasva, pinvasva pibasva

prat ha si'a, ptavasïa* (Kh. II. 16), bâdhasva, bhajasva, bhârasva, mddasra (AV.),
mattdasva4, yajasva, yatasva, raksasva, rabhasva, ramasva, vadasi'a, vdndasva,
vdrtasva, vârdhasva, vâhasva, socasva, irayasva, svancasva, sdcasva, sdhasva,
stdasva1, sevasva (AV.), syandasra, svajasia (AV.), svddasva, hdrsasva.
3. edhatäm (TS.VN.4.19"), kalpatäm (AV.), gacchatäm, jaratäm, tisthatäm2
(AV.), dadatäm', dayatäm(AV.j, dyotatim (AV.), nabhatlm (AV.), pdvatam,p'nva-
täm prathatäm, bädhatäm, bhayatâm (AV.), yajatäm, rabhatäm (AV.), ramatäm
(AV.), rocatäm, vanatam, vartatJm, vardhatäm, srayatlm (AV.), sacatäm, saha-
täm (AV.).
Du. 2. kalpethäm (TS. iv. 2. 5 1 ), gâhetham (AV.), cjdethâm, cyarethäm
(AV.), jardhâm, bädhetham, yajethäm, rabhdhäm (AV.), vartethâm (AV.),
vdrdhethäm, vahethäm, srayethäm, sacethäm (AV.), smardhäm.
3. kalpetam (TS. rv. 4. n ' ) , srayetäm, sacetäm.
PI. 2. ajadhvam, ksdmadhvam, gacchadhvam, cyavadhvam (TS.iv. 7.13*),
tisthadhvam nayadhvam, namadhvam, pavadhvam, pinvadhvam pibadhvam
bâdhadhvam, bhajadhvam (AV.), bharadhvam, modadhram, yacchadhvam,
yajadhvam, rabhadhvam, rdmadhvam, vadadhvam, vartadhvam, srayadhvam,
sacad/nam (AV.), sdhadhvam, syandadhvam (AV.), svajadhvam, harsadhvam
(AV.). — With ending -t/Aya: ydjadhva.
3. ayant Im (AV.), kdlpantäm (TS. iv. 4. 1 1 1 ) , jayantäm, tist/iantilm
namantäm, ptivantäm 5, bädhantam (TS. iv. 2. 64), bharantam (AV.), yajantäm,
yatantäm, radantam (AV.), rabhantäm (AV.), ramantâm (AV.), layantäm,
vartantiim, vardhantäm, s'rayantiim, sacantäm, sädhantäm, syandantäm,
hdrsantäm (AV.).
Present Participle.
427. a. The active form made with the suffix -ant 6 is very common.
Stems of forms which occur are: djatit-, dtant-, drcant-, disant-, drhant-,
avant-, ¡rivant-', uksant-, éjant-, ésant-, vdant-, osant- (AV.), kdlpant-1 (AV.),
kfijant- (AV.), krdndant-, kràmant-, krilant-, krisant-, ksdyant-, ksdrant-,
khdnant- (AV.), khädant- (AV.), gâcchant-, gàhant-, ghjsant-, cdtant-, cdrant-,
cétant-, ch (a nt- (AV.), jdjhjhant-, jdhjant-, j ayant-, jdrant-, jinvant- j'ivant-,
jàrvant-, tdksant-, tapant-, tarant-, tisthant-1, tärvantddsant-, dîhant-, dâsant-,
drdvant-, dhdmant-, dhÀvant-, dhànant-, dhrdjant-, ndksant-, nadant- (AV.),
ndyant-, ndvant-, pdcant-, pdtant-, pinvant- ', pîbant-2, prsant-, pr'thant-, bhdjant-,
bhdrant-, bhdrrant-, bhdvant-, bhàsant-, bhâsant-, bhrâjant-, mddant-, mhant-
(AV.), méhant- (AV.), mrocant-, ydksant-, ydcchant-, ydjant-, ydtant-, yàcant-,
yucchant-, yésant-, rdksant-, rddant-, rdpant- ( T S . V I I . 1 . 1 1 ' ) , ràjant-, rébhant-^,
r'ihant-, lapant- (AV.), vdtant-, vddant-, vdpant-, vârdhant-, vdrsant- (AV.),
vdsant-, vdhant-, vénant-, vésant-, vrdjant-, vrâdhant-, sdmsant-, sapant-,
sârdhant-, sâsant-, siksant-, socant-, svdyant-10, sdnant-, sapant-, sdrjant- (AV.),
sdrpant-, sàdhant-, sâhant- or sdhant-, sidantsédhant-, skdndant- (AV.),
stjbhant-, srdvant-, srédhant-, hdyant-, ¡tarant-, hdrsant-, hésant-.
b. The middle participles almost invariably formed with the suffix -mana are
also numerous: dtamâna-, dmamâna-(AV.), dyamäna-, iksam<liia-(W.), isamäna-,
kalpamäna- (TS.iv. 2. io 2 ), krpamüna-, kra&samlna-, krosamäna-, ksdmamäna-,
' Transfer from the -nu class. ? If kàlpat, AV. XI. 5*6, is with WHITNEY
2
Transfer form from the reduplicating in his Translation e m e n d e d to kàlpan.
8
class. From tùrv• a secondary form of tur-.
3 Accented plavâsva. I 9 Fem. rèthalyau (Kh. I. 37).
4 AVERY 243 adds yacchasva (?). I T h e form svàyat, vu. 50', seems to be
5 AVERY 246 adds pitrvantim (?). j regarded by DELBRÜCK (p. 56, middle) as an
6
On the declension of these stems see 3 1 4 . , injunctive of svi-.
326 I. ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4. VEDIC GRAMMAR.

khdnamäna-, gdhamäna-, gühamäna-, cdyamäna, jdnamäna-, jdramäna-,

'singing' and 'approaching', jdsamärta-, jchamäna-, tühjamäna-, tejamäna-,
tosamäna- (AV.), daksamäna- (AV.), dJsamäna-, dyjtamäna-, dhävamäna-,
ndksamäna-, ndmamäna-, näyamana-, ndvamäna-, nctdhamäna-, pdvamäna-,
pinvamäna-', pibdamäna-, prdthamäna- (AV. TS.), prjthamätia-, bädhamäna-,
bhdndamäna-, bhdyamana-, bhdratnüna-, bhiksamäna-, bhräjamana-, mdmha-
mäna-, mdndamäna-, meghamana-, modamäna-, ydcchamäna-, ydjamäna-, ydta-
mäna-, yiicamäna- (AV.), yüdamäna-, ramhamana-, rdksamäna-, rdbhamäna-,
rdmbamiina-, rasamana- (AV.), rejamäi.a-, röcamäna-, vändamana-, vdrtamäna-,
vdrdhamäria-, vdhamäna-, vepamäna- ' A V . ) , ryäthamcma-, siksamäna-, sumbha-
mätia-, iübhamäna-, irdyamätia-, srtsamäna-, svdhcamäna-, sdcamäna-, sdha-
tnätia-, stdvamatia-, spdrdhamäna-, smayamäna-, sydndamäna-, harsamäna-,
hdvamäna-, häsamäna-,
a. A f e w m i d d l e p a r t i c i p l e s in -äna i n s t e a d of -mäna, s e e m to b e f o r m e d 3 f r o m
p r e s e n t i t e m s of this c l a s s : t h u s cyavina-, pralhatia-, yatHna- a n d yatänasumbhäna- ; but it
is p r o b a b l y b e t t e r to c l a s s thern as s o m e w h a t i r r e g u l a r or i s o l a t e d root aorist p a r t i c i p l e s 4 .

Imperfect Indicative.
428. It is to be noted that the longer ending of the 2. pi. active never
occurs in the imperfect of this or any other class of the a- conjugation.
Unaugmented forms are fairly common; used injunctively they are in the
3. sing, very nearly as frequent ( 4 2 4 ) as the regular subjunctives ( 4 2 3 ) .
Active sing. I. dgaccham (AV.), acaram, ataksam, ataram, anamatn,
anayam, apinvamabharam, abhavam, ab/iedam, arodham, aroham, asidam;
ävam; yamam.
2. dkrandas, aksaras, agacchas, dcaras, dfatias, djayas, dtaras, dtisthas2,
adahas, adhamas, dtiayas, dpinvasapibasdbhajas, dbharas, dbhavas, dmadas,
dya/as, aramhas, dradas, avadas, dvapas, dvahas, asiksas, dsadas, dsarpas
(AV.), asTdas', asedhas, asravas\ äjas, Avas-, tapas (AV.), bhdras.
3. dkrandat, dkramat, dksarat, akhanat (AV.), ägacchat, dgühat, acarat,
acalat (AV.), acetat, djanat, djayat, ajinvatx, dtaksat, atapat, atarat, dtisthat2,
ddadat' (AV.), ddahat, adäsat, ddrmhat (AV.), ddravat, adhamat, anamat,
dnayat, dpacat, dpatat (AV.), dpinvatl, dpibat2, abhajat, abharat, dbhavat,
abhSsat, dmadat, amanthat, dmandat, dmürchat (AV.), dyacchat, draksat,
arapat, arohat, dvapat, avasat, dvasat, dvahat, dvenat, dsayat, ds'äsat6 (Kh.
I. 94), dsocat, asajat, asadat, dsldat2, ased/iat, askandat (AV.), dharat (AV.);
äjat, ärcat, dvat; dirat (\'lr-)7, auhat {ah- 'push'); krdndat, carat (AV.),
taksat, tsdrat, dnnhat, naksat, nayat, pibat2, bhdrat, rcbhat, vdhat.
D u . 2. djinvatam dtaksatam (AV.), dpinvatamaprathatam, dbhavatam,
dmanthatam, aradatam, dsiksatam, dsascatam2, asidatam2; äjatam, ävatam-,
airatam7 (tr- 'set in motion').
3. atisthatäm2 (AV.), dbhavatam (TS. iv. 7. 15s), avardhatam; ävatäm\
auhatam (AV. VS. TS.).
PI. 1. dtaksäma, dbharäma (AV.). — 2. dtaksata, atisthata2, anadata
(TS. v. 6. i 2 ), dnayata, dpinvat aabhavata, avartata (AV.), dvalgata (TS. v.
6. i 2 ), asarpata; ävata; auhata (AV.).
3. dkasan (AV.), akräman8 (AV.), dksarart, akhanan (AV.), agühan,

1 T r a n s f e r f r o m the - « « c l a s s . s S e e WHITNEY 743.

- Transfer form from the reduplicating
class.
3 C p . WHITNEY 741 a,
N o m i n a l b i l d u n g 54 (top).
4 C p . R o o t A o r i s t 506.
6 T r a n s f e r f r o m the r o o t class.
7 T r a n s f e r f r o m t h e r o o t c l a s s , in w h i c h
a n d LINDNER, t h e v e r b Tr- is a l s o m i d d l e .
8 atramus is g i v e n b y A V E R Y 249 as an
i m p f , o f this c l a s s w i t h -us, but it i s d o u b t -
 V I I . VERB. PRESENT SYSTEM. 327

acaran ( A V . ) , acalan ( A V . ) , ajanan, ájayan (AV.), átaisan, ataran, átisthan

atrasan, ádasan, adraran, adhrajan, anaksan, ánaman (AV.), ánayan,
ápinvan', apiban1 (AV.), ábharan, ábhavan, ábhüsan, ámadan, dmandan,
áyacchan ( A V . ) , áyacan ( A V . ) , áraksan, árüjan ( A V . ) , avadan, ávapan (AV.),
ávardhan3, avahan, ai es an ( ]/~?¿s-), ásamsan, asiksan ( A V . ) , airayan (AV.),
dslhlvan4 (AV.), ásredhan, ásraran; ájan, ayan (AV.), tire an ¿vans, áijan
(e¡- 'stir'), atiban6 (AV.); jinvan, táksan, tsáran ( A V . ) , dádati1 (AV.), bharan,
1
bhüsan, srósan, sldan .
Middle. Sing. 1. atisthe1 (AV.). — 2. ágahathas (AV.), ápavathas,
ámandathas, árocathas-, gáhathas (AV.).
3. akalpata* ( A V . ) , ataksata, apinvata2, abadhata, ámamhataimanthata,
ámandata, áramhata, araksata, árocata, dvartata, avardhata, ávalgata (AV.),
ás apata \ ájata, áyata; áiksata10 (AV.), auhata (üh- 'remove'); caksata, janata,
naksata, nimsata, badhata, rejata.
Du. 2. ábadhetham, árabhetham (AV.). — 3. akrpetüm, aprathetam,
ábhyasetümárejetam\ áiksctUm1
Pl. 3. ákalpanta (AV.), akrpanta, ákhanar.ta, ágacchanta, ajananta,
atisthantal, ádadanta *, adhavanta ", anamanta (TS.iv. 6. 2 6 ), ánayanta, ána-
vanta, apacanta, aprathanta, ábhajanta, abhayanta, ábharanta, áyajanta, ara-
manta, árejanta, avadanta, ávartanta, ávardhanta, avepanta (AV.), ávradanta,
diamanta ( T S . i v . 6 . 3 1 ) , ásacanta, ásapanta, ásahanta; diksanta*" (AV. TS.);
Xsanta, kfpanta, jananta, navanta, prathanta, bhájanta ( A V . ) , bhananta, mananta,
vapanta.

2. The sufñxally accented á- class (tuda-)1K

429. Nearly one hundred roots belong to this class. The radical vowel
is almost always medial, being regularly /, « or If the vowel is final,
which is very rare, it is almost invariably short. As the -a is accented, the
radical vowel appears in its weak form; e g. huv-á- (but according to the
radically accented class, hdv-a-) from ha- 'call'.
a . T h e r e a r e , h o w e v e r , s o m e i r r e g u l a r i t i e s in t h e f o r m a t i o n of t h e p r e s e n t s t e m .
I . S e v e r a l r o o t s i n s t e a d c f a p p e a r i n g i n t h e i r w e a k f o r m , a r e n a s a l i z e d : ¿/V- ' c u t ' : ifntá-;
t f p - ' b e p l e a s e d ' : !fmpá-\ fis- ' a d o r n ' : p i m i á ' r e l e a s e ' : muñcá-\ lip- ' s m e a r ' : Umpá-;
lup- ' b r e a k ' : lumpá-; vid- ' f i n d ' : vindá-\ sic- ' s p r i n k l e ' : siñcá-, A f e w o t h e r r o o t s o c c a s i o n a l l y
h a v e n a s a l i z e d f o r m s a c c o r d i n g t o t h i s c l a s s : t h u s túndale, b e s i d e t h e r e g u l a r tudáti e t c . ,
f r o m tud- ' t h r u s t ' ; dfmhélhe, b e s i d e dfmhata, e t c . , f r o m dfh- ' m a k e f i r m ' ; sumbhání.-.

l e s s an a o r i s t : s e e WHITNEV, R o o t s , u n d e r o f vas- ' s h i n e ' w i t h e n d i n g -ran (not ava sran:

\kram. ¡accent!). C p . WHITNEY, R o o t s , u n d e r vas
1
Transfer form from the reduplicating 'shine',
class. 8 DELBRÜCK 1 7 6 a n d AVERY 247 g i v e
1
T r a n s f e r f r o m t h e -tut c l a s s . akj-'ivata a s ( o n c e ) a 3 . s i n g . If t h i s is c o r r e c t ,
3 ärcän (IV. 5 5 1 ; v . 3 1 s ) a n d várdhün are the f o r m would be a transfer for aipfutci.
g i v e n a s i n d i c a t i v e s b y DELBRÜCK 9 1 , 9 ámala is g i v e n b y DELBRÜCK 1 0 1 a n d
f o l l o w e d b y AVERY 249. C p . p . 3 2 2 , n o t e i o . AVERY 247 as belonging to this class
4 F r o m s/hTv- ' s p u e ' , o r i g i n a l l y *j-thev-x c p . ( p r e s u m a b l y f r o m t h e r o o t am-), b u t it i s
v. NEGELEIN 2 4 , n o t e t h e root is t h e r e d o u b t l e s s 3. s i n g . m i d . a o r . of man- ' t h i n k ' ;
w r o n g l y g i v e n a s s/w. s e e WHITNEY, R o o t s , u n d e r \man.
5 as/han ( A V . XIII. I 5 ) is g i v e n b y v. N'EGE- I» F r o m ¡if- ' s e e ' .
LEIN 18, n o t e 1 as i m p e r f e c t of as; b u t s e e F r o m bhyas- ' f e a r ' .
WHITNEY'S n o t e on A V . XIII. i 5 . " v u . l 8 ' 5 : f r o m dhav- ' r u n ' •=• dhanv-.
6 akfpran being formed with the ending »3 C p . E . LEUMANN, D i e H e r k u n f t d e r 6.
-ran :DFLBRÜCK 124) is d o u b t l e s s a n a o r i s t ; P r a e s e n s k l a s s e i m I n d i s c h e n ( A c t e s d u X.
c p . WHITNEY, R o o t s u n d e r \krp-. See C o n g . I n t e r n . O r i e n t . II. I , 39—44; I F . 5,
below, j o o . A n z . 1 0 9 ; K Z . 3 4 , 587 ff.).
7 sran (iv. 2 ' 9 ) a c c o r d i n g t o DELBRÜCK,
V e r b u m 89 ' p . 6 3 , m i d d l e ) , f o l l o w e d b y AVERY
2 4 9 , f o r *asara-n\ b u t avasran is 3. pl. a o r .
328 1. ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4 . V E D I C GRAMMAR.

beside iùmbhate and sôbhatc, from sub h- 'shine'; irnthati ÎTS'.), beside the regular irathnÂs
etc., from sralh• 'loosen'. — 2. Four roots form their stem with the suffix -chà : is- 'wish':
i-cchà-\ f- ' g o ' : f-cchà-\ pràs-1 'ask' : frcchâ-\ vas- 'shine' : u-cchâ-. — 3. T w o stems are
transfers from the nasal class of the second conjugation: prnà-, beside pt-'tJ-, from pr-
•fill'; mfna-, beside raf-nà-, from mr- 'crush'; f"j 'stretch' has b e c o m e the r e g u l ä r s t e m
beside 3. pl. fhjate-, and 2. pi. umbha-ta (AV.), appears beside ubh-nâ-, from ubh- 'confine'. —
4. Beside the normal -ttu stem r-nu, the root f also has the transfer stem rnv-ii-. —
5. W h i l e roots ending in i or u change these vowels into iy or uv before -a (e. g. ksiy-â-,
from ¿si- «dwell', yuv-â- from yu- 'join'), the T S . has ksy-ant- beside R V . ksiyânl 'dwelling'.
b. T h e present stems chyâ- (AV.) 'cut up', dyâ- (AV.) 'divide', syâ- 'sharpen', syà-
'bind', though regarded by the Indian grammarians as belonging to the -ya class, should
most probably be classified here, because the a is accented, i appears beside à in various
forms from these roots, and •ya is here often to be read as -¡a, while this is never the
case in the -ya class.
430. T h e inflexion is exactly the same as that of bhâva-. T h e forms
which actually occur are the following:

Present Indicative.
Active. S i n g . i. icchàmi, uksämi ( A V . ) , kiràmi ( A V . ) , khidami (AV.),
glrami2 ( A V . ) , crtâmi ( A V . ) , tirami, dyâmi ( A V . ) , diiämi (TS. AV.), dhurâmi
(AV.), prcchàmi, muncfimi, rujïimi, limpimi (AV.), vindàmi, visâmi (AV.),
Vfscàmi ( A V . ) , vfhâmi, sincàmi, sulCimi ( T S . v n . 4 . 1 9 4 ) , suvami, sj-jâmi, sprsâmi,
syämi (AV. TS.).
2. icchasi (AV.), vcchasi ( T S . iv. 3 . 1 1 s), tirasi, ksipasi (AV.), trmpâsi,
prcchasi, mrnasi, vindasi, vrscasi, suî'dsi.
3. anâti (AV.), icchati, ucchati, rcchati (AV.), rnvati, krntâti (AV.),
krsati ( T S . i v . 2. 5 6 ), ksiyati ( A V . ) , khidâti, girati ( A V . ) , chyati ( T S . v . 2. 12'),
dyati ( A V . ) , pimsati, prcchati, prndti, misa/i, muhcati ( A V . ) , yuvdti, rujâti,
ruvâti, vinddti, visait (AV.), vrscati, vrhati, siiicati (AV.), suvdti, sfjdli,
sphurdti (AV.), syati.
D u . 2. fnvaihas, bhasàthas, muncathas, visai/tas ( A V . ) , vrhathas, srjdthas.
3. icchatas ( A V . ) , muncaias (AV.), siticatas.
P l . 1. girâmas ( A V . ) , crtàmasi ( A V . ) , tirâmasi, dyâmasi ( A V . ) , nudâmasi
(AV.) a n d nudâmas ( A V . ) , pfcchâmas ( A V . ) , mrsâmasi, vrhämasi (AV.) and
Vfh'imas ( A V . ) , suvâmasi ( A V . ) , sfjâmasi (AV.) a n d sr/âmas ( A V . ) , sprsâmasi.
2 . muncdtha, siîicdtha (TS. AV.).
3. ananti (AV.), icchdnti, uksdnti, ucchânti, rcchdnti, rnjdnlt, fsdnti,
ksiyinti (AV.), khiddnti (AV.), crtdnti, tiranti, tunjdnti, prcchdnti, misanti,
mucdnti, miincartii, vifsdnti, rufdnti, vindanti, visdnti, vj-scdnti, sumbhînti,
sincànti, suvdnii, srjànti, sprsdnti, sphurànti, syanti.
M i d d l e . S i n g . i. tse ' s e n d ' , nude ( A V . ) , prcchê\ munce ( A V . ) , mrje, vitidhe,
visé ( A V . ) , s'use, siiice, huvé.
2. iechase, j-njdse, jusdse ( A V . ) , pre chase, mrs'dse, yuvase, vinddse, sinedse.
3. icchate ( A V . ) , uksdte, ffi/dte, kirate, kfsdte ( A V . ) , tirdte, tundate, turdte
(TS.11.2.124), nudate ( A V . ) , pimsdte, prcchate, pfficdte, muneate, mrsate, yuvdte,
vindâte, vindhdte, visite, vrscate ( A V . ) , srjate. — With ending - e : huvé.
D u . 2. drmhéthe, nudethe ( A V . T S . ) , yuvethe, vindethe ( K h . 1. 1 2 8 ) .
3. tujde.
P l . 1. nudämahe ( A V . ) , yuvâmahe, risàmahe, sicâmahe, huvâmahe.
3. iechante ( A V . ) , uksdnle, tirante, vijdnte ( A V . ) , vindante (AV.), visante,
Vfscante ( A V . ) , srjante (AV.).

1 T h e suffix •cha has in this instance purposespracch- (butprai-na- 'question'); cp.

attached itself throughout the conjugation I prtc or and posco for *porc-sco in Latin,
to the root, which thus becomes for practical 2 F r o m gf- 'swallow'.
 VIL VERB. PRESENT SYSTEM. 329

Present Subjunctive.
431. Active. Sing. 1. srjdni\ mrksd. — 2. kirdsi, muncasi (AV.), ruj'dst;
sificds. — 3. tirati, bhrjjdti, mrlati, mrdhati, vanfiti, vidhati, visati (AV.),
suvdti, Sfjdti (AV.); icchat, ucchdt, rcchat, nudat (SA. xii. 29), pfcchdt, prndt,
muncat (AV.), mrfdt, mfsdt (AV.), vrscdt, siiicat, srjat, sprsat (AV.).
Du. 1. visava (AV.). — 3. mrlatas.
PI. 2. visatha (AV.). — 3. ucchan, prcchdn, sphurdn.
Middle. Sing. 1. prcchai, visai (TS.111.5.6"). — 1. yvvase. — 3. juslte,
tirate. — Du. 2. pj-ndithe. — 3. yuvaite. — PI. 1. sihcamahai.

Present Injunctive.
432. Active. Sing. 2. icchas (AV.), guhas, rujas, if has, vfs'cas,
sicas, srjas.
3. ucchat, krntat, ksipdt, khidat, jusat, mfnat (AV.), rujat, rudhat,
ruvdtvidhat, visat, Vfhat, sincat, sfjat sprsat (AA. v. 21), sphurat, huvat.
PI. 3. trpan, vidhdn, vindan.
Middle. Sing. 3. jusata, tirata. — PI. 3. icchdnta, isanta, jusanta,
tirdnta, nudanta, bhuranta, yuvanta, vidhanta, sfjanta.

Present Optative.
433. Active. Sing. 1. udeyam * ( A V . ) , tireyim ( K h . 1. 9s), vindeyam ( K h .
II.6'). — 3. icchet, ucchet ( A V . ) , khide't (AV.), prcchet, lumpet ( A V . ) , sincet ( A V . ) ,
srjit ( A V . ) . — Du. 1. vrhrua. — 2. tiretam. — PI. I. isema, ksiyema ( A V . ) ,
rujema, ruhema (Kh. 11. 4'), vanema, vidMma, viiema, /iuvtfma. — 2. tireta;
tiretana.
Middle. Sing. 1. huvtya. — 3. iccheta (AV.), jusAa.
PI. I. vanemahi, vidhemahi. — 3. juserata.

Present Imperative.
434. Active. Sing. 2. icchd, ucchd, ubja (AV.), kira, kfnta{AY.), ksipa,
ksiya (AV.), khida (AV.), crta, chya (AV.), tira, tuda, trmpa, nuda (AV.), pimsa
(AV.), pfccha, pffica^ (AY.), prna, prusa, muficd, mrrtd, mrld, mfs'a, yuva,
rikha, ruja, ruva, visa, vinda, vf-s'cd, vfhd, srna (AV.), si/ica, suva4, srja,
sprs'a, sphura, sya. — With ending -tat: mrdatat (AV.), vrhatat, visatat
(TS. vii. 1. 66), suvatat.
3. icchatu, uksatu (AV.), ucchatu, ubjatu (AV.), rcchatu, kirdtu (TS.
III.3.II5), kfsatu (AV. 1, crtatu (AV.), tiratu (Kh.11. 11 2 ), trmpatu, disatu(AV.),
dyatu {AY.), nudatu (AV.), pimsatu, muficatu (AV. TS ), mrlatu, visdtu (AV.
TS.), vindatu (AV.), vrscatu (AV.), siiicatu, suvatu, syatu. — With -/¿f: visatat
(Kh. iv. 6'; 83).
Du. 2. uksatam, ubjdtam, tiratam, trmpatam, nudatam (AV.), brhatam
(AV.), muficdtam, mrlatam, vis'atam (AV.), vrhatam, sincatam, srjdtam,
sphuratam (AV.), syatam.
3. jusatam (Kh. 1. 3 1 ), trmpatam, dyatam (AV.), muhcdtlm, visatam (TS.
VII. 3. 13'), suvatam (AV.), syatam.

' A V E R Y adds srdhat(?): perhaps the aor. 'pfiua is to be inferred from the fem. part,
injunctive sricihat is meant. jprjicat-i- (RV. AV.), though the AV. has also
* With Samprasarana. This verb other- | flrncat-i-,
wise follows the radically accented a- class.! 4 In AV. VII. 14 3 suva appears in the Pp.
3 Transfer from the infixing nasal class I as sva.
(Y'ffc-): that it would have been accented |
33° I . ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4. VEDIC GRAMMAR.

Pl. 2. icchata, uksata, uchata, umbhata (AV.), rfijáta, khuddta, grnáta

(AV.), tirata, tuda ta (AV.), nudata, pims'ata, prcchAta, prnata, muñe Ata, mr! ¡ta,
mrnáta (AV.), visa ta (AV.), vrhata, sundhata, siñcata, si/Ata, sprsAta.
3. uksantu (AV.), ucchAutu, ubjantu, rcchautu, rdantu, krsantu, chyantu
(TS.v. 2 . 1 2 ' ) , tiranty, tudantu (AV. TS.), disantu ¡Kh.m. 10 ), nudantu (AV ),
bhurantu, muñcAntu, mrlantu, visantu, iñcantu, suvantu, srjantu.
Middle. Sing. 2. icchasva, krsasva, gurasva, jusásva, nudAsva, prcchasva
(Kh. 11. 13 1 ), prnásva, mr§Asi<a, yuvAsva, vindAsva (AV.), visásva, vrsasva,
siñcasva, srjasva, sprsasva í AV.), syasva.
3. icchatam (AV.), jusàtâm, nudatâm (AV.; SA.xii.9), prnatâtn, muñcat im
(AV.), visatàm, srjatâm (AV.).
Du. 2. ukséthSm, juséthâm, nude'thlm, prnethâm, vfsethâm, srjethâm (AV.
TS.). — 3. jusétâm.
Pl. 2. kramádhvam (TS. iv. 6. 5 1 ), jusAdhvam, tiradhvam, pfnAdhvam,
visadhvam (AV.), siñcAdhvam, srjAdhvam, syadhvam.
3. jus Anta m, muñcatitam (AV.), risanilm, vijantâm (AV.), vrscantâm (AV.),
spfsantâm (AV.).
Present Participle.
435. Active, icchánt-, uksant- (AV.), ucchant-, ubjAnt-, rsant-, krntánt-,
kfsdnt-, ksipánt-, ksiyant-, khidánt- (AV.), guhdnt-, citánt-, jurant-, tirant-,
tujánt-, tudánt-, trpánt-, disant-, drmhAnt- (AV.), nudánt-, nuvánt-, prcchánt-,
prusánt- (AV.), bhujánt-, mithánt-, misant-, muñcAnt- mrjánt-, mrsdnt-,
risani-, rujánt-, rudhAi.t-, ruvánt-, vidhánt-, visánt-, vrscdnt-, sucAnt-, sumbhánt-,
s'usánt- and svasAnt-, siñcAnt-, suvánt-, s¡jánt-, sphurdnt-, huvAnt-1 (hü- 'cali' .
Middle, icchdmâna-, uksámana-, usdmàna- ( Y vas-), usdmàna- (vas-
'wear'), guhámSna-, jusámana-, dhrsámána-, nrtámana-, prcchámana-, bhurá-
tnana-, muñcAmana- (AV. TS.), yuvámSna-, vijAmana- (AV.), suc amana-.

Imperfect Indicative.
436. Active. Sing. 1. atiram (TS. iv. 1. 10 3 ), Aprccham, árujam.
2. átiras, anudas, apenas, ámuñcas, amj-nas, arujas, avindas, avfhas,
ásrjas, ásphuras, ásyas (AV.); áicc/ias, áucchas-, vindas, vascas, srjas.
3. ákfntat, akhidat, ájusat, átirat, aduhat (TS. iv. 6. s 4 ), ápimsat,
aprnat, ámuñcat, amrnat, amfsat (AV.), arujat, ávidhat, ávindat, Avisât,
áifs'cat, ásiñcat, asurat, ásj-jat, asprsat, asphurat, asyat-, áicchat (AV.),
áuksat, áucchat, aubjat-, tudat, trmhát, ruját, likhat (AV.), vindat, vfscdt, syat,
siñcat, srját.
Du. 2. atiratam, amuñcatam, Amrnatam, avindatam (Kh. 1. 3 1 ), asiñcatam.
3. ámuñcatam, asiñcatam (AV.).
Pl. i. Aicchâma. — 2. Apims ata ( Y pis-), aprcchata, ámuñcata, asfjata. —
3. ápimsan, dpísan2 (AV.iv.6 7 ), ávindan, dvis'an (AV.), dvrs'can(AV.), ásiñcan,
ásfjan, aspfsan (AV.); árdan (\ird-) ; Auksan; uksan, rujan.
Middle. Sing. 1. ájuse (AV.), avije, áhuve. — 2. amuñcathas, avisathàs
(AV.). — 3. ajusata, amuñcata, Asiñcata (AV.), as/y ata; drmhata.
Du. 2. anudethâm, Avindethâm.
Pl. 2. ajusadhvam. — 3. ájusanta, atiranta, atvisanta, dnudanta (AV.),
amuñcanta (AV.), áyuvanta (AV.), avindanta, avilanta, dsrjanta, asprsanta
(AV.), dhuvanta; aisanta (is- 'send'); grnanta, jusanta.

1 2
T h e fem. is regularly formed f r o m t h e Anomalous form for *apim}an, f r o m p i f -
strong stem in •ant; but the weak stem in 'crush'.
1
•at appears in sihcal-U, beside sincdnt-T-.
 VII. VERB. PRESENT SYSTEM. 3 3 1

3. The ya- class 1 .

437. The present stems formed with this suffix fall into two groups.
In the first, consisting of about 70 transitive or intransitive verbs, the suffix
is unaccented; in the second, consisting of rather more than 80 verbs with
a passive meaning, the suffix is accented. In all probability both groups were
identical in origin, with the accent on the suffix. This is indicated by the
fact that the root though accented in the first group appears in its weak
form; and that this group consists largely of intransitive verbs and to some
extent of verbs with a passive sense. The latter are manifestly transfers from
the -yd or passive group with change of accent. Thus jAyate 'is born' is an
altered passive beside the active janati 'begets'. The accent moreover occa-
sionally fluctuates. Thus the passive mucyate 'is released' once or twice occurs (in
the R V . and AV.) accented on the root; and there is no appreciable difference
of meaning between ksiyate and ksiyate 'is destroyed'; j i y a t e and j i y a t e 'is
overcome 1 ; pacyate and pacyate 'is cooked'; miyate and mtydte (AV.) 'is in-
fringed' 2.
A . The radically accented ya- class.
438. The root nearly always appears in a weak form. Thus roots that
otherwise contain a nasal, lose it: drmh- 'make firm' : df-h-ya-. The root
vyadh- 'pierce' takes Samprasarana: vidh-ya-. The root spas- 'see' loses its
initial: pas-ya-. Several roots ending in a shorten the vowel before the suffix:
dha- 'suck' : d/iaya--, ma- 'exchange' : maya-; va- 'weave' : vdya-\ vya- 'enve-
lope' : vyaya-; hva- 'call' : kvdya- J.
a . S e v e r a l o t h e r r o o t s u s u a l l y s t a t e d a s e n d i n g i n S r e m a i n u n c h a n g e d : ga- ' s i n g ' :
gaya-; g/a- ' b e w e a r y ' : glaya- ( A V . ) ; tra- ' s a v e ' : traya-\ pya- ' f i l l u p ' : p y a y a - ; ra- ' b a r k ' :
ray a-; va- ' b l o w ' : vaya-\ s r i - ' b o i l ' : sraya
b . T h e r o o t sram- ' b e w e a r y ' l e n g t h e n s its v o w e l : sramya
c. T h e final o f r o o t s i n -f s o m e t i m e s b e c o m e s b o t h ; > 6 a n d ur; thus j f - 'waste
a w a y ' b e c o m e s jurya- a n d jlrva- ( A V . ) ; tp- ' c r o s s ' : turya- a n d tirya- 1 (AV.). The root
pf- ' f i l l ' b e c a u s e o f i t s i n i t i a l l a b i a l b e c o m e s purya- only.

439. The forms actually occurring in this class are the following:

Present Indicative.
Active. Sing. i. asyami (AV.), isyami, nahyami, pasyami (AV.), vldhyami
(AV.), hvdyiimi.
2. asyasi, i s y a s i , ucyasi (Vuc-), gay a s i , nasyasi, pdsyasi, pusyasi, rdnyast,
rtiyasi, r/syasi, haryasi.
3. dsyati, iyati (RV 1 .), Isyati, krudhyati (AV.), g i y a t i , j l r y a t i (AV.),
jaryati, tanyati, ddsyati, dahyati (AV.), d i y a t i , dlvyati (AV.), dusyati (SA.
xn.23), dhayati, nasyati, nrtyati (AV.), pasyati, p i i s y a t i , ranyati, risyati, vayati
(AV.), vayati, vidhyati, v y a y a t i , simyati (TS. v. 2 . 1 2 ' ) , susyati (Kh. I V . 5^),
s i d / i y a t i , haryati, hrsyati, hvdyati.
Du. 2. diyathas, ranyathas. — 3. asyatas (AV.), nas'yatas, pdsyatas,
p i i s y a i a s , risyatas (AV.), vayatas (AV.), vayatas, srdmyatas (AV.).
1
C p . LORF.NTZ, I F . 8 , 6 8 — 1 2 2 . g r a m m a r i a n s a s e n d i n g i n -ai a n d b e l o n g i n g
J
A l s o in B r a h m a n a p a s s a g e s o f t h e T S . t o t h e a - c l a s s . T h e l a t t e r f o r m is p r e f e r a b l e
ricyatc ' i s l e f t ' b e s i d e ricyate ( V . ) , iupyate ' i s f r o m t h e p o i n t o f v i e w o f g r a d a t i o n . Cp.
l o s t ' b e s i d e lupyate (W.), hiyate ' i s l e f t ' b e s i d e 2 7 , a , I ; B B . 1 9 , 1 6 6 .
hiyatc ( V . ) . 5 I n B. t h i s a n a l o g y is f o l l o w e d b y s e v e r a l
3 T h e s e are r e c k o n e d by the native g r a m - roots in -am.
m a r i a n s as e n d i n g in e a n d b e l o n g i n g to t h e 6 I n t h e a- c l a s s -f b e c o m e s - i r , e . g .
a- c l a s s . T h i s s e e m s p r e f e r a b l e f r o m t h e tf- : lira-.
p o i n t of v i e w of v o w e l g r a d a t i o n : s e e 2 7 , a, 3 . , 7 O n l y i n a n e m e n d a t i o n ava-liryatT (AV.
4 S u c h r o o t s a r e r e c k o n e d b y t h e n a t i v e x i x . 98) f o r avaliryatu, P a d a avalih yalth.
332 I. ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4. VEDIC GRAMMAR.

PI. i. asyamasi, pásyamasi and pasy.lmas (AV. 1 , vidAyamas (AV.),

vyayamasi (AV.TS.), Aaryamasi, hváyamasi.
2. ásyatha, pá'syatha, púsyatAa, risyat/ia, háryatha.
3. ásyanti (AV.), áryantt, gáyanti, jüryanti, dasyanti, dlyanti, dháyanti
(AV.), nasyanti (AV.), náhyanti, nrtyanti (AV.), pásyanti, pusyanti, rányanti,
risyanti, váyanti, vayanti, vidhyanti (AV. TS.,1, sramyanti, háryanti, hváyanti.
Middle. Sing. 1. padye (AV.), gdye, na Aye (TS. 1. 1. 1o1), manye,
nifsye, vyaye (AV.), hvaye.
2. /ytfíí (/- 'go'), jáyase, tráyase, dáyase, pátyase, pyayase, mányase, miyase,
múcyase.
3. isyate, íyate, rj'yate, kfiyate, jáyate, jiyate, trsyate (AV.), dáyate, dlpyate
(AV.), pácyate, pátyate, pádyate, pás'yate, púsyate {AV.), budhyate (AV.J, manyate,
miyate, mrsyate, riyate, Aaryate.
Du. 3. jayete (AV.), Aváyete.
PI. 1. AváyamaAe. — 2. trayadAve. — 3. ¡yante, ksíyante, jayante, írayaníe,
pádyante, manyante (AV.), mayante, mrsyante, yúdAyante, riyante, Aváyante.

Present Subjunctive.
440. Active. Sing. 1. pásyani (AV.). — 2. pásyasi, Aaryasi (AV.);
pasyas (AV.); rísyas, Aáryas.— 3. risyati; pásyat, pí/syJt, rísyat (TS.I.6. 2 1 ).
PI. I. pásyama (AV ). — 3. pásy.m.
Middle. Sing. 1. yúdAyai. — 2. pasyasai (AV.). — 3. manyate, m 'cyatai
(AV.). — Pl. 1. AvayCimaAai (AV.).
Present Injunctive.
Active. Sing. 2. divyas. — 3. giyat, dlyat, pásyat, vidAyat. — PI. 3.pásyan.
Middle. Sing. 2. manyatAas. — 3. jdyata, manyata. — PI. 3. dáyanta.

Present Optative.
Active. Sing. 1. ryayeyam. — 2. pasyes. — 3. dasyet, dAayet (AV.),
risyet. — Du. 3. Avayetdm (TS. ill. 2. 4'). — PI. 1. pásyema, púsyema,
búdAyema (AV.), risyema.
Middle. Sing. 3. pas') eta, manyeta (AV.), miyeta (SA.XII. 20). — PI. 1.
jáyemaAi.
Present Imperative.
441. Active. Sing. 2. asya, gáya, diya, dfAya, nasya, naAya (AV.),
nftya (AV.), pásya, yudAya, raya, vidAya, susya (AV.), sivya (AV.), Aarya,
At¡aya. — With ending -tat: asyatát (AV.).
3. asyatu, ucyatu (AV.), tfpyatu (AV.), nasyatu, nftyatu (AV.), rádAyatu
(AV.), vidAyatu (AV.), susyatu, slvyatu, Aváyatu (AV.).
Du. 2. asyatam, isyatam (AV.), dlyatam, nahyatam (AV.), pusyatam (AV.),
vidAyatam, Aáryatam. — 3. asyatam (AV.TS.), naAyatam (SA.xn.32), vidAyatfim.
Pl. 2. isyata, gayata, jasyata, násyata (AV.), naAyata (AV.), pásyata,
pusyata, muAyata (AV.), vayata, vidAyata, Aaryata. — With ending -tana:
naAyatana.
3. gayantu (AV.), tfpyantu (AV.), nasyantu (AV.), pusyantu, múAyantu,
médyantu, vyayantu(AV.), simyantu (TS.v. 2.11 1 ), Aaryantu (AV.), Aváyantu(AV.).
Middle. Sing. 2. jáyasva, tráyasva, dayasva, drAyasi<a, naAyasva (AV.),
padyasva, paiyasva, pyüyasra, budAyasva (TS. AV.), manyasva (TS. AV.),
vyayasva, Avayasva (AV.).
3. fdAyatam, jáyatam, tráyatam, dípyatam (TS.rv. 7.134), padyatam (AV.),
pyayatam (TS. AV.), manyatam (TS. AV.), medyatam (AV.), ridAyatam (AV.),
iíyatim (AV.) lie', Avayatam (AV.).
 VII. VERB. PRESENT SYSTEM. 333

D u . 2. trayetham, manyethüm, hvayethäm ( A V . ) . — 3. träydäm.

P I . 2. asyadhvam, jsyadhvam ( A V . ) , trÄyadhvam, dayadhvam, nahya-
dhvam 1 A V . ) , budhyadhvam, sTvyadhvam. — 3. jäyantäm, triiyantäm, padyantäm
( A V . ) , pyiyantäm, manyantäm ( A V . TS.), vyayantäm (TS.III. 3 . 1 1 3 ) , hvayantäm
(TS. I I I . 2. 4 ' ) .
Present Participle.
442. A c t i v e , dsyant-, isyant-, rjyant-, (a-)kupyant- ( A V . ) , ksüdyant-,
gäyant-, grdhyant-trsyant-, diyant-, nrtyant-, pdsyant-, piyant-, pusyant-,
ydsyant-, yüdhyant-, räyant-, (d-)lubhyani- ( A V . ) , vdyant-, vidhyant- ( A V . ) , vydyartt-,
simyant- (TS. v. 2. 12'), sivyant-, hdryant--, and the c o m p o u n d dn-ava-gläyani-
( A V . ) 'not relaxing'.
Middle, iyamäna-, kiyamäna-, cäyamäna-, jäyamärta-, träyamäna-,
ddyamina-, mihyamäna-, pdtyamäna-, pädyamäna-, pdsyamäna-, piiryamäna-,
rpyiiyamäna-, büdhyamäna-, mdnyamäna-, yüdhyamana-, ridhyamäna- ( A V . 1 ,
väsyamäna- ( A V . ) , hdryamäna-, hvdyamäna-.

Imperfect Indicative.
443. A c t i v e . S i n g . i . adlyam, dpasyam, avyayam.— 2. apasyas, dyudhyas.—
3. agäyat, adhayat, anftyat (AV.), dpasyat, ayudhyat, avayat ( A V . ) , dvidhyat,
avyayat, dharyat, Ahvayat; Asyat.
D u . 3. dpasyatJm.
P I . 1. dpasyäma. — 3. ajüryanäpaiyan, avayan ( A V . ) , ahvayan ( A V . ) ;
äsyan (AV.).
M i d d l e . S i n g . 2. djäyathäs, aharyathäs-, jäyathäs. — 3. ajayata, apatyata,
amanyata, arajyata ( A V . ) ; jäyata.
D u . 2. dhvaydhäm (AV.). — 3. dhvayetam.
P I . 3. djäyanta, änahyanta ( A V . ) , apadyanta ( A V . ) , dpasyanta, dman-
yanta, ahvayanta; jäyanta, dayanta.

B. T h e suffixally accented yä- class (passive).

DELBRÜCK, Verbum 184 (p. 166 — 169). — AVEKY, Verb-Inflection 274—275. —
WHITNEY, Sanskrit Grammar 768—774; Roots 230—231. — v. NEGELEIN 38—40.
444. A n y root that requires a passive forms its present stem b y adding
accented -yd (which never needs to b e pronounced -ia). T h e root appears in its
weak form, losing a nasal and taking Samprasärana; thus art/- 'anoint': aj-yd-
b e anointed'; vac- 'speak' : uc-yd- 'be spoken'. Final vowels undergo the
changes usual before -ya in verbal forms: final i and u being lengthened,
ä mostly becoming r, r being generally c h a n g e d to ri, and f b e c o m i n g ir-*.
T h u s mi- 'fix' : mTya-; su- 'press' : sByd-; da- 'give' : dl-yd- (but Jfia- 'know' :
jfia-yd-); kf- ' m a k e ' : kri-ydsf- 'crush' : slrya-.
a. The root tan- 'stretch' forms its passive from tä- : lä-yä-. Similarly jan- 'beget'
makes its present item from jd- : jaya-tt, which has, however, been transferred to the
radically accented ya- class, mri-ya-te 'dies' (\fmf-)4 and dhriyaletydhr-)'is steadfast',
though passives in form, are not so in sense 5 .
445. T h e i n f l e x i o n is identical with that of the radically accented ya-
class in the middle, differing from it in accent only. N o forms of the optative
are found in the R V . or A V . T h e forms actually occurring are the following:
1 avatlryalis(AV. XIX. 9') is a corrupt reading: 4 This root has a transitive sense ('crush')
see WHITNEY'S Translation; cp. p. 331, note only in its secondary form mfft-, and in the
* A V E R Y 249 adds adhayan{)). AV. in the imperative forms mj-nVu and
3 No example of ur seems to occur in m^niia.
in the Samhitas, but pur-ya- from pf- 'fill' 5 Cp. above 437.
is found in the -ya class.
334 I- ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4 . VEDIC GRAMMAR.

Present Indicative.
S i n g . i. hiye (//<7- ' l e a v e ' ) . — 2 . acyase (afic- ' b e n d ' , A V . ) , ajydse (Ifaj-
r
a n d Y anj-), idhydse, ucydse (\ vac-), »lyase, puyase, badhydse ( A V . ) , mucydse
( A V . ) , mrjydsc, yujydse, ricyase, rudhyase (rudh- ' h i n d e r ' , sasydse ( J f sams-),
sicydse, stüyase, hüydse {hü- ' c a l l ' ) . •— 3 . ajydte (Y aj~ a n d Yanj-), asvate
r
( A V . ) , idhydte, ucydte (\ vac-), udyate (ud- ' w e t ' a n d vad- ' s p e a k ' ) , upydte
( Yvap-), uhyate (Yvah-), fcyclte {arc- ' p r a i s e ' ) , kriydte, ksiydte 'is d e s t r o y e d ' ,
gamydte ( A V . ) , grhyatc ( A V . ) , ehidyate ( A V . ) , jiydte ( A V . ) 1 , tapyate,
tJyate, tujydte, dabhyate, dlyate 'is g i v e n ' ( A V . ) , diyate 'is d i v i d e d ' ( A V . ) ,
duhyate, drsyate, dhamyate, dhiyate {dhä- ' p u t ' ) , dhriyate, mydte, pacydie, plyate
' i s d r u n k ' ( A V . ) , püyate, prey ate, badhydte ( Y bandh-) \ ma/hydte{AV.), mucydte,
mfjydte, mriydte, yujydte, ricyate, ribhyateJ, ¿upydte ( A V . ) , vacydte (Yvaiic-),
vidydte 'is f o u n d ' , vrjydtesasydte {Ysams-), sisvate, siryate, sruyate, sicydte,
süydte ' i s p r e s s e d ' , ( Y su~srjydte, hatiydte, huydte 'is c a l l e d ' .
D u . 3. ucye/e (Yvac-).
va
P I . 1. tapyämahe ( A V . ) , fanyätnahe. — 3 . upyatite (Y P~)i rcydnte,
fd/iyante ( A V . ) , kriyante, jhayante, trhydnte ( A V . ) , dahyante ( A V . ) , duhydnte
( A V . ) , bhriyante, miya/ite ' a r e fixed' {Y mi-, A V . ) , mriyante ( A V . ) , yujyante,
vacydnte ( ]/vane-, AV.), vlyante {Yvl-, AV.), iasydnte{Y sams-), slryatitei. AV.),
srjyante ( A V . ) , hanydnte, hüyantc.

Present Subjunctive.
4 4 6 . S i n g . 3. uhyätc, bhriyäte, sisyätai5 (AV.).
D u . 2. ühyäthe 6.
Present Injunctive.
S i n g . 3. süyata ( Y su')-

Present Imperative.
S i n g . 2. idhydsva ( A V . T S . ) , dhiyasva ( A V . ) , dhriyasva ( A V . ) , mucyasva
( K h . 11. ii*), mriydsva ( A V . ) , vacyasva ( (/vatic-).
3 . rdhyatäm ( A V . ) , tiyatäm ( A V . ) , dhlyatim ( A V . ) , dhüyatäm ( A V . ) ,
dhriyatäm ( A V . ) , pj-eyatäm, badhyatäm ( A V . ) , mucyatam ( A V . ) , hanydtam ( A V . ) ,
h'iyatäm.
P I . 2 . pfcyadhvam ( A V . T S . ) , yujyadhvam, vicyadhvam ( A V . ) .
3 . tapyantäm ( A V . ) , trhyantam ( A V . ) , preyantäm ( A V . ) , badhyantäm,
bhajyantäm {Ybhanj-, A V . ) , vaeyantäm, zjscyantäm, hanyantäm ( A V . ) .

Present Participle.
447. aeyamäna- (AV), ajydmäna-, idhydmäna-, udydmäna- {Yvad-,
AV.), upydmäna- {Yvap-, AV.), uhydmäna-, reydmäna-, krtydmSna- (AV.),
kriydmäna-, {a-)ksiyamäna-, gtydmätia-, guhydmäna-, tapydmäna-, iäydmäna-,
tujydmäna-, trhyamana-, dadydmäna- 1, dlyamäna- ( A V . ) , duhydmäna- ( A V . ) ,
dhiyamäna-, nahydtnäna- ( A V . ) , nidydmäna-, nlydmäna-,pacydmäna-,pisydmäna-
( A V . ) , püydtnüna-,pj-cydmäna-, badhydmäna-, bhajydmäna-, mathydmäna-, madyd-
rnäna-, miydmätia- {mi- ' f i x ' ) , mrjydmäna-, yamyamäna-, vaeydmäna- { Yvatic-),

> F r o m \jyä- or \jt- ' s c a t h e ' . | 5 E m e n d a t i o n in A V . 11. 31' 3 , f o r uchifätai,

* bhidyate, A V . X X . 1 3 1 1 , is a n e m e n d a t i o n . 1 t h e r e a d i n g of t h e text.
J liyate, A V . XX. 1343 4, is an e m e n d a t i o n . ] 6 A 3. pi. m i d . in -antai o n c e occurs in
4 T h e f o r m s vficate, vfican/e, vfscantam | t h e T S . in t h e {oTmjäyantai: W H I T N E Y 7 6 0 a .
a p p e a r o c c a s i o n a l l y to s t a n d f o r vj-scyate, 7 F r o m t h e w e a k p r e s e n t s t e m dad- of
vrscyante, vfscyantäm in t h e A V . S e e v. N E G E - ! dä- ' g i v e ' .
LEIN 4 0 ; BLOOMFIELD, S B E . 4 2 , 4 1 8 . !
 335
viydmina- (AV.), sasydmana-, sicyamlna-, srjydmSna-, stuyamUna-, hanyamlna-

( A V ), himsydmana-, huydmana- (hu- 'call'); from the causative of Y bhaj-'.bhljyd-.

mana- ( A Y . XH. 4 1 8 ).

Imperfect Indicative.
448. Sing. 3. amy at a, dmucyata, aricyata. — PI. 3. dtapyanta (AV. TS.),
apacyanta, aprcyanta, asicyanta (AV.); acyanta.

b. T h e second or graded conjugation.

449. The chief characteristic of this conjugation is vowel gradation
in the b a s e 1 consequent on shift of accent. The base has a strong grade
vowel in the singular indicative (present and imperfect) active, throughout the
subjunctive, and in the 3. sing, imperative active. Minor peculiarities are:
1. loss of n in the endings of the 3 . pi. mid. (-ate, -ata, -atim) \ 2. formation

of the 2. sing, imperative active with a suffix, generally -dhi\ 3. vowel

gradation in the modal suffix of the optative (act. -yd) mid. -/); 4* formation
of the middle participle with -ana.
a. T h e second conjugation comprises five distinct classes falling into
two main groups in which a) the vowel of the root (simple or reduplicated)
is graded; the vowel of the suffix (nearly always containing a nasal) is
graded.
a. 1. T h e root class.
450. T h e base is formed by the root itself, to which the personal
endings are directly attached (in the subjunctive and optative with the inter-
vening modal suffix). The radical vowel is accented and takes Guija in the
strong forms. More than a hundred roots are comprised in this class 2 .
a . A g o o d m a n y i r r e g u l a r i t i e s a r e m e t w i t h in t h i s c l a s s , w i t h r e g a r d t o b o t h t h e
base and the endings. 1. V r d d h i i s t a k e n in t h e s t r o n g f o r m s b y »;/-/- ' w i p e ' (e. g .
marj-mi), a n d b e f o r e c o n s o n a n t s b y r o o t s e n d i n g i n - « , i. e. b y ksnu- ' w h e t ' , nu- p r a i s e ' ,
yu- ' u n i t e ' ( A V . ) , stu- ' p r a i s e ' ; e . g . stau-mia-slau-tbut d-slavam. — 2. T h e G u n a .
v o w e l , a l o n g w i t h t h e a c c e n t , i s r e t a i n e d in t h e r o o t o f si- ' l i e ' ( m i d d l e ) t h r o u g h o u t t h e
w e a k f o r m s ; e . g . s i n g - I . sdy-e, 2. st-se. In t h e 3. p i t h i s v e r b at t h e s a m e t i m e i n s e r t s
r before the endings: se-rate, se-re ( A V ), se-ratim, d-sc-ra/a, d-se-ran5. — 3. Several roots
form a base with the c o n n e c t i n g v o w e l / or 1 6 before consonant endings. T h e roots
an-7 ' b r e a t h e ' , rud- 8 ' w e e p ' , vam ' v o m i t ' , svas- ' b l o w ' , svaf-9 'sleep' insert i b e f o r e all
t e r m i n a t i o n s b e g i n n i n g w i t h a c o n s o n a n t , e x c e p t in 2 . 3. i m p f . , w h e r e t h e y i n s e r t /: e . g .
ani-ti, am-t\ avamT-t\ hiasi-li. T h e r o o t s Id- ' p r a i s e ' a n d is- ' r u l e ' a d d i i n s o m e f o r m s
of the 2. pers. middle: tJi-fva; isi-se (beside l i fe), isi-d>,ve. T h e 3. pi. lii-re is, owing to
its a c c e n t 1 0 , p r o b a b l y to be a c c o u n t e d a present rather than a p e r f e c t " . Occasional
( i m p e r a t i v e s i n g . ) f o r m s w i t h c o n n e c t i n g / f r o m o t h e r r o o t s a l s o o c c u r : jdni-fva 'be born',
vasi-sva ' c l o t h e ' , inathi-hi ' p i e r c e ' , stani-hi 'thunder'. The r o o t brii- ' s p e a k ' r e g u l a r l y
i n s e r t s 1 in the s t r o n g f o r m s b e f o r e t e r m i n a t i o n s b e g i n n i n g w i t h c o n s o n a n t s ; e. g .
bravi-mi. T h e s a m e i a l s o a p p e a r s i n t h e f o r m taviti f r o m /«- ' b e s t r o n g ' ; i n ami-fi and
i n t h e T S . " ami-ti, ami-sva, ami-t f r o m am- ' i n j u r e ' ; a n d i n sami-fva ( V S . ) , f r o m sam-

1 C p . BRUGMANN, K G . 2 1 1 . b e s i d e s si- r e t a i n t h e a c c e n t o n t h e radical

> S e v e r a l r o o t s o f this class s h o w transfers syllable throughout. S e e 9 7 , 2 a.
t o t h e a- c o n j u g a t i o n : c p . W H I T N E V 6 2 5 a . \ 6 T h i s i i s , h o w e v e r , i n r e a l i t y o r i g i n a l l y
J T h e R V . h a s o n c e 2. s i n g , j/o-st x . 22 4 J, p a r t o f a d i s s y l l a b i c b a s e : c p . BRUGMANN,
a f o r m w h i c h A V E R Y 2 7 5 t a k e s t o b e a K G . 2 1 2 , 2.
3. s i n g . a o r . p a s s , i n j u n c t i v e . 7 T h e AV. has also forms according t o
4 V r d d h i o n t h e o t h e r h a n d o n c e a p p e a r s t h e a- c o n j u g a t i o n : ana-ti, etc.
e v e n i n t h e w e a k f o r m 3. pi. i m p f , anävart. s T h e R V . h a s n o s u c h f o r m s f r o m rud-
O n t h e V f d d h i in t h e s e v e r b s , c p . v . N E G E - a n d svap-.
LEIN 10 a. 9 T h e A V . , h o w e v e r , h a s t h e f o r m svap-tu.
5 T h e r e are s o m e transfer forms according 10 S e e 97, 2 a and 484.

t o t h e a- c o n j u g a t i o n f r o m t h e s t e m say-a-, " T h e 3. s i n g . i m p f . o f t h i s v e r b i s i n t h e
including the isolated active f o r m asayai, j M S . aiia ( l i k e aduha.), c p . W H I T N E Y 630.
w h i c h is c o m m o n . Nearly a dozen roots " WHITNEY 634.
336

•labour'. — 4. A few roots undergo peculiar shortenings in the weak forms: as- 'be'
loses its v o w e l 1 (except where protected by the augment e . g . s-mas 'we are'; //a«-- 5
'slay' in the weak forms loses its n before terminations beginning with consonants (^ex-
cept ni, y or v), but syncopates its a before terminations beginning with vowels, when h
reverts to the original guttural gh-; e. g. ha-tha, but han-yäma\ ghn-anti. part, ghn-ant-\
the root vai- 'be eager', takes Samprasärana; e . g . I. pi. us-masi, part, ui-äna-4, but I. sing.
vai-mi. T h e root vas- 'clothe' similarly takes SamprasSrana once in the participle us-dria-
(beside the usual vasäna-y — 5. With regard to endings, the root s,is- 'order* loses the
n in the 3 pi. active (as well as middle) and in the participle, being treated like roots
of the reduplicating class ( 4 5 7 ) 5 : 3 . pi. impv. sis-atu (TS.), p a r t säs-at-The root duh-
•milk' is very anomalous in its endings: middle impv. 3 . sing, duh-am, 3 . pi. duh-ram and
duh-ratäm\ ind. 3 . pi. mid. duh-re and duh-rale beside the regular duh-ale (with irregular
a c c e n t ) ' ; active imperf. 3 . sing, a-duh-a-tä beside a-dhok, 3 . pi. a-duh-ran beside aduh-an
9
and duh-itr ; and in the 3 . opt. the entirely anomalous sing, duh-I-ydt (RV.) and pi. duh-
tyan (RV.) (for duh-yat and duh-yitr).
Present Indicative.
451. A final or prosodically short medial radical vowel takes Guna in
the singular; elsewhere it remains unchanged, excepting the changes of final
vowels required by internal Sandhi, and the irregular shortenings mentioned
above (450, a 4). The ordinary endings are added directly 10 to the root. But
the 3. sing. mid. ends in -e nearly as often as in -te\ and anomalous endings
appear in the 3. persons of the roots Ts-, duh-, säs-, si-".
The forms actually occurring would, if made from i- 'go' and brü- 'speak',
be as follows:
Active. Sing. i. e'-mi. 2. e-si. 3. t'-ti. — Du. 2. i-thds. 3. i-tds. —
PI. 1. i-mdsi and i-mds. 2. i-thd and i-thdna. 3. y-dnti.
Middle. Sing. 1. bruv-i. 2. brü-s3. bru-te and bruv-L — Du. 2.
bruv-athe. 3. bruv-hte. — PL 1. brB-mdhe. 2. brü-dhve. 3. bruv-dte.
The forms which actually occur are the following:
Active. Sing. 1. ad mi, dsmi, e'mt, ksnaumi, dve'smi (A V.\/am» 'protect',
märjmi, yämi, yaumi (AV.) 'join', vasmi, vämi, säsmi (AV.), staumi (AV. TS.),
hanmi, harmi. — W i t h connecting /"-: brdvlmi.
2. a/si, asi, ¿si, karsi (AV.), caksi (= *caks-si), chantsi ( \ichand-), dar si
(df- 'pierce'), pdrsi (pf- 'pass'), päsi ('protect'), bhäsi, yäsi, vaksi (vas- 'desire'),
vtfsi ( Yv'-)i sassi, sdtsi, stosi,2, Mm si. — W i t h imperative sense 1 j: kse'si
(ksi- 'dwell'), jhi, jusi (= *jos-si : jus- 'enjoy'), ddrsi, dhaksi (dah- 'burn'),
naksi (nas'attain'), nisi, pdrsi, präsi, bhaksi (bhaj- 'divide'), mat si, mäsi,
ydksi (yaj'- 'sacrifice'), ydmsi (yam- 'reach'), yäsi, yotsi (yudh- 'fight'), ratsi
(rad- 'dig'), nisi, vaksi (vah- 'carry'), ve'si (]A'f-), srJsi, saksi {sah- 'prevail'),
sdtsi, host (hu- 'sacrifice'). — W i t h connecting T-: ami si, brdvlsi.
1 It is, however, preserved in an altered 8 Transfer to the a- conjugation,

form in the 2 . sing. impv. act.: e-dhi for 9 The MS. has further anomalous end-
*az-dhi ( 6 2 , 4 , 6 , p. 5 7 ) . This verb has the ings in the imperf. mid.: 3 . sing, a-duh-a
further anomalies of losing its s in the and 3 . pi. a-duh-ra, probably as parallel to
2 . sing. pres. a-si, and in inserting i in the the present duhe and duhrc. WHITNEY 6 3 5 .
2 . 3 . sing. impf. asT-s, asi-t. It has no middle. 1 0 Excepting the few forms of roots which

' Cp. v. NEGELEIN 8-5; VAN W L J K , IF. ' may take connecting i or T ( 4 5 0 , a 3).
18, 59. See above 4 5 0 , a 2 , 3 , 5 ; cp. JOHANSSON,
3 Limited to the active in this conjugation KZ. 3 2 , 5 1 2 ; NEISSER, BB. 2 0 , 7 4 .
in the R V . j See 4 5 0 , a 1 , note
4 T h e only middle form. | '3 Some of these have no corresponding
5 There are also some transfer forms i root present or root aorist; cp. WHITNEY,
according to the a- conjugation: 3 . sing. Sanskrit Grammar 6 2 4 ; BARTHOLOMAE, IF.
iasati. 2 , 2 7 1 ; NEISSER, BB. 7 , 2 3 c ff., 2 0 , 7 0 ff.; BRUG-
ES Similarly from das- 'worship' the part. ; MANN, IF. 1 8 , 7 2 ; DELBRÜCK, Verbum 3 0 ;
dai-at-. Syntaktische Forschungen 5, 209.
7 In the middle participle the h of the
root reverts to the guttural gh\ dugh-ana-.
 VII. VERB. PRESENT SYSTEM. 337

3. dtti, dsti, éti, kseti, takti (tak- 'rush'), dati (da- 'share'), dasti (das-
'worship'), dvésti, pâti, bharti, bhiti, mdrsti (SA. XII. 9), ydti, ràsfi (raj- 'rule'),
rélhi {rib- 'lick'), vasti {vas- 'desire'), vàti, véti, stauti (AV.; Kh. v. 3'),
hdnti. — With connecting -/- or -/"-: dniti, s'vdsiti; amïti (TS. VS.), tavlti
(tu- 'be strong'), bravlti.
D u . 2. it/ids, kfthds, pathâs, bhuthâs, yâthàs, vUhds, sthds (as- 'be'),
hatha s ( Y hart-).
3. attas, etas1 (AV.), ksitds, dvistas (AV.), patas, psàtds (AV.), bhatas,
y&tas, vatas, stas, snatas, hatâs, hnutas.
Pl. I. admasi (AV.), imdsi, usmdsi2 ( ]fvas-), stumasi, smdsi, hanmasi
(AV.); dvismas, brUmds (AV.), mrjmas (AV.), yamas, rudhmas (AV.), vidmas
(Kh. iv. 5^), stumas (AV.), smas, hanmas.
2. itha, kftha, gathd ( R V ' . p , nethd*, pathd 'protect'*, yathd, stha,
hathd\ pâthdna, yâthdna, sthdna.
3. adanti, amdnti, usânti, ksiyanti, ghndnti ( Vhan-), dititi (da- 'cut'),
duhanti, dvisdnti (AV.), panti6, bruvdnti, bhanti, mfjdnti, ydnti, yinti, rihdnti,
ruddnti, vanti, vydnti ( Yvî-), sdnti.
Middle. Sing. 1. iye (i- 'go'), tie, ise, uvéi, duke, bruve, mrje (AV.),
yujé, yuve (yu- 'join'), sure (sB- 'beget') 8 , hnuve.
2. ikse, kfsé, cakse (= *caks-se), dhukse (AV.), brSse, vitsé (vid- 'find'),
s'/fe. — With connecting -/-: is'ise.
3. Aste, itte ( Vl4), Trie, iste ( /i/-), caste ( \fcaÂs-), braté, vdste, sSste,
sinktt(Vsin;-), sate, hate (SA. XII. 27). — With ending -a: isecité (cit-
'perceive'), duhé, bruve, vidé ('finds'), s'dye".
D u . 2. àsathe, issthe, caksâthe, vasathe. — 3. asate, iyate, duhate, bruvate,
s'ayate, suvate.
Pl. i. àsmahe (AV.), imahe, tsmahe (AV.), tnfjmdhe (AV.), yujmahe,
s'asmahe, sémahe (AV.), hitmdhe. — 2. With connecting -/'-: Ts'idhve (AV.).
— 3. âsate, irate, ilate, Uate, ôhate(Vah-), gfhate,2, cdksate, duhaté1*, dvisdte
(AV.), nimsate, bruvdte, rihaté'}, vdsate, s'asate, suvate. — With ending -re:
duhré, sére (AV.); with -rate : duhrate, sérate (AV. TS.).

Present Subjunctive.
452. In the A V . several forms are irregularly made with a, as if following
the a- conjugation. No examples of the 2. du. and pi. mid. are found. The
forms which actually occur, if made from bra- 'speak', would be:
Active. Sing. 1. brdvani, brava. 2. brdvan, bravas. 3. brdvati, brdvat. —
Du. 1. brdvava. 2. brdvathas. 3. brdvatas. — PI. 1. brdvama. 2. bravatha.
3. brdvan.
Middle. Sing. 1. bravé. 2. bravase. 3. brdvate. — Du. 1. bravavahai.
3. brdvaite. — PI. 1. brdvamahai, bravamahe. 3. brdvanta.
The forms which actually occur are the following:
Active. Sing. 1. dsiïni (AV.), brdvani-, ay a, brava, stdva.
i W i t h irregular strong radical vowel. p l a c e d h e r e r a t h e r t h a n in t h e à- c l a s s ; o n
* Once a n o m a l o u s l y smdsi. t h i s f o r m c p . OLDEKBERG, Z D M G . 59, 355 ff.;
3 W i t h l o s s of n a s a l a s in \han-. ' NEISSER, B B . 25, 315 ff.
4 W i t h i r r e g u l a r s t r o n g r a d i c a l v o w e l : ; 9 iihie (AV.).
c p . v . NEGELEIN 33. to AVERY 234 gives t ; t o n l y , a p p a r e n t l y
5 O n c e f r o m pi- ' d r i n k ' , in I. 86 1 ? i n s t e a d of ise. T h e f o r m Jfl w o u l d b e 3. s i n g .
6
T h i r t e e n t i m e s f r o m pi- ' p r o t e c t ' , o n c e m i d . p e r f e c t .
11
(IL n M ) f r o m p i - ' d r i n k ' ( p r o b a b l y subj. aor.). | O n t h e s e f o r m s cp. v . NEGELEIN 10»;
7 T h i s f o r m o c c u r r i n g o n l y o n c e in t h e XEISSER, B B . 20, 74.
1
RV. seems to be formed from a doubtful root « P l a c e d b y WHITNEY, R o o t s , d o u b t f u l l y
u ' p r o c l a i m ' ; c p . WHITNEY, R o o t s , u n d e r u. • u n d e r t h e a o r i s t of \grah-.
» huvi, s i n g . 1. a n d 3., s h o u l d p e r h a p s b e j «J W i t h i i r e g u l a r a c c e n t .
Indo-arùche Philologie. I. 4. 22
33«

2. ayasi (AV.). dsasi, bravasi; dyas (AV.), dsas, ksdyas (ksi- 'dwell'),
ghdsas, danas, parcas, bravas, vidas, sakas, hanas; with -J-: dyäs (AV.).
3. dyati, dsati, vayati ( v i d a t i , hanati-, adat (AV.), ay at, a sat,
trat*, ksayat, ghasat, cayat, dehat, dohat (1. IÖ4 20 ), dvhat (AV.), pat ('pro-
tect'), brdvat, vidat (vid- 'know'), stdvat, hAnat (AV. TS.); with -<z-: ay it
(Kh. HI. i 8 ), a sät (AV-.), rodat (Kh. 2. 11 1 ).
D u . 1. hdnäva. -— 2. dsathas, vedathas. — 3. pdtas 'protect' (iv. S57).
PI. I. ayäma, dsäma, ksdyäma, dvesäma (AV.), brdväma, stdväma, hdnäma.
— 2. dsathastavatha; with -S-: bravätha (AV.), hanätha (AV.). — 3. ay an, dsatt,
bravan, yavan ('join', AV. 111.17*), hdnan (AY.); with -ä-: adän (AV.), ay an ( A V ) .
Middle. Sing. 1. stuse— 2. äsase. — 3. äsate, idhat/•, dohate, dvesate
(TS. iv. 1.10 3 ), vdrjate; w i t h -tai: dyatai (AV.), äsätai (AV.); with secondary-
ending -ta: Tsata. — D u . 1. bravävahai. — 3. Irdvaite. — PI. 1. ilämahai, brdra-
ma/¡ai; ilämahe. — 3. hananta.
P r e s e n t Injunctive.
A c t i v e . Sing. 2. vis. — 3. vet (x. 539), staut-, without ending: ddnY
rät, han. — PI. 3. yan, san.
Middle. Sing. 3. vasta, süta. — PI. 3. Tlata, vasata.
P r e s e n t Optative.
453. A c t i v e . S i n g . 1. iyäm, yaytim, vidyäm, sydtn. — 2. syäs. —
3. adyit (AV.), iylt, brüyät, vidyät, syrit, hanyCit (AV.).
D u . 2. brüyätam (TS. iv. 7. 156), vidyatam, syätam. — 3. syätlm.
PI. 1. iyäma, turyäma, vidyäma, syäma, hanyäma. — 2. syäta; syätana. —
3. adytir, vidyür, syür.
Middle. Sing. 1. islya, sdytya (AV.). — 3. äslta, lllta, islta, du/iita,
bruv'ita, sdylta, stuvltd. — PI. I. bruvimahi, vasitnahi, stuvlmahi.
Present Imperative.
454. The endings are added directly to the root, which appears in its
weak form except in the 3. sing, act., where it is strong and accented 5 . In
the 2. sing, act., -dhi is added to a final consonant, -hi to a vowel; -tat,
which occurs only three times, may be added to either a consonant or
a vowel. In the mid., -äm 3. sing., -ram and -ratäm 3. pi., occasionally appear
for -tarn and -atäm 6 .
A c t i v e . Sing. 2. add hi, edhi (as- 'be'), tälhi (ytaks-), psahi (AV.),
mrddhi (AV.), viddhi ('find' and 'know'), sadhi (\/~s'as-); ihi, jahi1, pähi
'protect', brithi, bhähi, yah'i, vahi, vihi6, vthi, stuhi, snahi (AV.); w i t h
c o n n e c t i n g -/'-: anihi (VS. iv. 25), snathihi, svasihi (AV.), stanihi; with
-tat: brütät (TS.i. 6.41), vittat, mtat. — 3. attu, dstu, etu, dvestu (AV.), patu
'protect', psatu (AV.), märstu (AV. TS.), yätu, vastu (Yvas-), vätu, vtiu, vettu
(AV.), sastu, stautu (AV.), snautu (TS. in. 5. 52), svdptu (AV.), hdntu] w i t h
c o n n e c t i n g - / - : bravitu.

» AVERY 230 here adds fdhat, which I 5 This is also irregularly the case in six
regard as a root aor. subjunctive. or seven forms of the 2. pi., before both -ta
* vidatha, AV. I. 32', seems to be a cor- ! and -(ana: eta, t:e(a, stota; Itana, bravitana,
ruption for vidatha; cp. W H I T N E Y ' » note. j solatia, hantana.
3 For stuf-a-i: cp. AVERY 238; D E L B R Ü C K , 1 6 L N duham, vidim (AV.), say'im (AV.);
Verbum p. 181 ; NEISSER, BB. 2 7 , 2 6 2 — 2 8 0 ; 1 duhrjm (AV.), duhratäm (AV.).
3

OLDENBERG, Z D M G . 55, 39. 7 For *jha-hi, from han- 'slay': see 32, 2 c,
4 With irregular accent and weak root and cp. v. NEGELEIN, Zur Sprachgeschichte 8 s .
(vil. 18) for *indhale, beside inädhaie formed 8 Metrically shortened for z¡¡hi, from \'vT-,
from \idh- according to the infixing nasal
class.
 V I I . VERB. PRESENT SYSTEM. 339

D u . 2. attam (AV.), itam (AV. TS.), patdm 'protect', brutam (AV.),

ystdm, vittam, vUam, statu (as- 'be'), stutam, hatam. — 3. itam, dugdham
(yduh-), patdm 'protect', sastdm, stdm (AV.), hatam (AV.).
P I . 2. atta, ita and ¿ta, paid 'protect', brUta, y3td, s'asta (sas- 'cut'),
sta (VS. AV.), stota, hatd; with -tana: attana, itana and ¿tana, y at ana,
s'astdna, sotana (su- 'press'), hantana-, with connecting -T-: bravXtana.
3. adantu, ghnantu, drSntu, pantu 'protect', bruvantu, yantu, yantu,
vantu (AV.), vyantu ( Y v ' ~ ) and viyantu (TS.), sSsatu (TS.v.2.12 1 ), svdsantu
(AV.), santu, svapantu (AV.).
Middle. Sing. 2. rrjfa, caksva (= *caks-sva), trdsva, dhuksva 1, mrksva
(\imrj-, AV.), stusvd (AV.); with connecting -/*-: ilisva, janisva, vdstsva.
3. astam, yutHm (AV.), vastam, set&m (AV.); w i t h -am: duhdm, vidam
(vid- 'find', AV.), /«yaw (AV.).
D u . 2. Tratham, caksathdm (TS.), duhatham (AV.), vasathim (TS.). —
3. duhatam (AV.). — P L 2. adhvam 2 (Yas-), irdhvam, tridhvam, mfddhvam
(AV.). — 3. iratam, stuvatam (AV.); w i t h -ram: duhram (AV.); w i t h
-ratam: duhratam (AV.).

Present Participle.
455. The active participle is formed by adding -ant* to the weak root;
thus y-ant- from i- 'go'; duh-ant- from duh- 'milk'; s-ant- from as- 'be'. The
strong stems of the participles of das- 'worship' and sas- 'order' lose the «:
dds-atand sds'-at-5. The middle participle is formed by adding the suffix
-ana to the weak form of the root; thus iy-ana- from y7-; us'-ana- from
yvas'-; ghn-and- (AV.) from Yhan-. In a few examples, however, the radical
vowel takes Guna; thus oh-ana- from ah- 'consider'; yodh-ana- from yud/i-
'fight'; say-ana- from si- 'lie'; stav-ana- from stu- 'praise'. The final of
reverts to the original guttural in dugh-ana- beside the regular duhana-. The
root as- 'sit' has the anomalous suffix -Tna in ds-ina- beside the regular
as-ana-. Several of these participles in - ana alternatively accent the radical
vowel instead of the final vowel of the suffix; thus vid-ana- beside vid-and-
'finding'.
Active, adant-, anant-, us ant-, isiyant- 6 'dwelling', ghnant- (Y& an~)>
duhant-, dvisant-, dhfsant-, pant- 'protecting', bruv-ant-, bhdnt-, yant-, ydnt-,
rihant-, rudant-, vdnt- 1 (AV.), vyant- (Y v^')i sant-, sasant-, stuvant-, sndnt-,
svapant--, with loss of n: ddsat-, s'dsat-.
Middle, adana-, as3na- and dslna-, indhana-, iyana- (VS. x. 1 9 ; TS. 1.
8. 14O, ilana-, irana-, Hana- and (once) Js'ana-, usand- 8, usana-v (vas-' wear'),
ohana- and ohand- (Y^h-), ksnwand- IO, ghnana- (AV.), dihana-, dughana- and
duhana- and duhana-, dhrsana- (AV.), nijana-, bruvana-, mfjana-, yuvana- (yu-

1 DELB&UCK 61 and AVERY 242 wrongly 5 As in 3. pi.

give this form as dukfva. 6 kfyàntam T S . lv. 1. 2 s.
* In AV. (IV. 142) and T S . (iv. 6. 5') some 7 apa-vàn A V . x i x . 50 4 is probably N. sing,
Mss. read iddhvam. VS. x v n . 65 has adhvam. of this part.; see WHITNEY'S note and cp.
3 T h e feminine is formed with -« from LANMAN 4842.
the weak s t e m ; thus ghnat-iduhat-i-,yat-U,
8 The RV. has once the transfer form
yati-, bhat-U, rudat-itat-i- (AV.), snat-t-.
usàmana-.
But the AV. has yan/T- (beside yati-) and 9 Once, beside the regular vasina-. The
svapanit--, see WHITNEY, Index Verborum RV. has also once the transfer form
4
374 - usàmàna-.
4 T h e verb das- may have lost its nasal 10 T h e form g r ^ t f à (x. 103 1 2 ), doubtless
in the 3. pi. a c t , bnt there is no evidence 2. sing. impv. of the nd- class, is regarded
of this, as the only form preserved according by GRASSMANN as a participle.
to the root class is 3. sing, daf/i.
22*
34°
' j o i n ' ) , yodhana-, rihana-, vdsana- ' w e a r i n g ' , vidana- a n d vidana-, vyana-(\rvi-),
sayana-, sAsSna- (AV. TS.), suvana- (sa- 'bring forth', AV.), stuvani- and
stavSna-, svana- (su- ' p r e s s ' , SV.)

I m p e r f e c t Indicative.
456. A c t i v e . S i n g . 1. ado ham (Kh. v. i s ' 4 ) , apam ('protect'), abravam,
avedam, ahanam; Sdam ( V S . XII. 1 0 5 ) , Ay am, asam, airam (Y ir-).
a. apas, ayas-, ais (AV.); ves ( y vi-); w i t h c o n n e c t i n g - / - : abravis
( A V . ) ; asts; w i t h o u t e n d i n g : ahan; hart.
3. afat, ayat, avSt ( A V . ) , astaut; ait2; with connecting -T-: abravit,
avamXt; ami, dstt3; without ending: adhok, cruet ( A V . ) , ahan; as ( = *as-t,
from as- 'be'); han*.
D u . 2 . ayatsm, ahatam; astam, aitam; yltam (AV.). — 3. abrutam(AV.);
attSm ( V S . x x i . 4 3 ) , astam, aitam ( A V . VS.).
P I . 1 . ataksma, apama. — 2 . atasta; dita; abravita\ ayatana, asastana-,
aitana; abravitana. — 3 . ddihan ( A V . ) , anavart, abruvan, avyan ( \fvl-); Syan
{i- 'go'), (isan-, asan^ (as- 'throw'), -ghnan (Kh.i. 2 2 ); w i t h e n d i n g -ur: atvisur,
apur (pa- ' p r o t e c t ' ) ; asur (as- ' t h r o w ' , 1. 1 7 9 * ) ; caksur, duhur.
Middle. S i n g . 3. acasta, atakta, dvasta (AV.), asuta; ditta (Yh/-)-,
mrsta (1. 1744), sat a.
P I . 2 . aradhvam. — 3 . aghnata ( A V . ) , acaksata, ajanata, amrjata (AV.),
as'asata; asata, dirata. With ending -ran: aduhran (AV.), aseran.

a. 2. T h e R e d u p l i c a t i n g C l a s s .
457. This class is less than half as frequent as the root class, comprising
fewer than 50 verbs. The endings are here added to the reduplicated root,
which is treated as in the root class, taking Guna in the strong forms. The
stem shows the same peculiarity as the desiderative in reduplicating r ( = ar)
and a with i. Here, however, this rule is not invariable. All the roots with
r except one reduplicate with i. They are r- 'go': i-y-ar-6; ghr- 'drip': jighar--,
tr- 'cross' : tttr-; pf- 'fill' and //-- 'pass' : pipar-\ bhr- 'bear' : bibhar--, sr- 'run' :
sisar-; pre- 'mix' : piprc-\ but vrt- 'turn' : vavart-. While nine roots redupli-
cate a with a, thirteen do so with i. The latter are: ga- 'go' :jig3-; ghra-
'smell' : jighra-; pa- 'drink' : piba-; ma- 'measure' : mima-\ ma- ' b e l l o w ' : mirna--,
sa- 'sharpen': sUa-; stha- 'stand' : tistha--, ha- 'go forth' : jihl-7; vac- 'speak' :
vivac--, vas- ' d e s i r e ' : vivas'-9; vyac- ' e x t e n d ' : vivyac-; sac- ' a c c o m p a n y ' : si sac-9;
han- 'strike*: jighna-. Three of these, however, pa-, stha-, han-, have per-
manently gone over to the a- conjugation, while a fourth, ghra-, is beginning
to do so. Contrary to analogy the accent is not, in the majority of verbs
belonging to this class, on the root in the strong forms, but on the redupli-
cative syllable. The latter is further accented in the 3. pi. act. and mid., as
well as in the 1. du. and pi. mid. Doubtless as a result of this accentuation,
the verbs of this class lose the n of the endings in the 3. pi. act. and mid.;
e . g . bibhr-ati10 and jihate.

1
T o b e p r o n o u n c e d t h u s in t h e R V . , : 5 U n a u g m e n t e d f o r m i v . 31.
6
t h o u g h a l w a y s w r i t t e n suvana-. W i t h -y- i n t e r p o s e d b e t w e e n r e d u p l i -
2
T h e f o r m aitat ( A V . x v i u . 340) s e e m s t o \ c a t i o n a n d r o o t .
b e a c o r r u p t i o n o f « / ; s e e WHITNEY'S n o t e in ; 7 W i t h » f o r a ; i n f l e c t e d in t h e m i d d l e
his Translation. ' only.
3 Cp. v . NEGELEIN 8 « ; REICHELT B B . 27, 8 A l s o vavai-.
89. V S . v i i i . 46 h a s t h e t r a n s f e r f o r m asat. 9 Also sasc-.
10
4 arudat (AV.) is a t r a n s f e r t o t h e a- con-1 T h a t is, a r e p l a c e s t h e s o n a n t n a s a l ,
j u g a t i o n . I n I. 77» v/s, 3. s i n g . , s e e m s t o b e
a n a o r . f o r m — *vi-s-t.
 34i

a. There are a number of irregularities chiefly in the direction of shortening the

root in -weak forms, i. Roots ending in a drop their vowel before terminations beginning
with v o w e l s ' : e . g . \ma: mirn-e, 3. pi. mim-a/t. \'ds- and \dha-, the two commonest verbs
in this class, drop the a in all weak forms. — 2. The root vyac- takes Sanoprasarana;
e. g. 3. du. viviktds; analogously Avar- 'be crooked', makes some forms with Sampraslraija,
when it reduplicates with « ; e. g. juhirthas, 2. sing. mid. injunctive. — 3. The verbs
bhas- 'chew', sac- 'accompany', has- 'laugh', syncopate the radical vowel; thus babhas-at,
3. sing, subj., but baps-ati, 3. pi. ind.; sasc-ati, 3. pi. ind. pres., sasc-ata, 3. pi. inj.; jaif-ai-,
pres. part. — 4. The 0 of sa- 'sharpen', ma- 'measure', ma- 'bellow', ra- 'give', ha- 'go
away' (mid.), and (in AV.) ha- 'leave'(act.)', is usually changed to T before consonants;
e. g. si fmasi, mimile, rarithasjihiite, jahita (AV.); while the roots da- 'give' and dha-
•pui' dr op their vowel even here*; e. g. dad-mafic, dadh-mdsi. — 5. The initial of ci-
'observe' reverts to the original guttural throughout; e. g. die/t (AV.). — 6. When the
aspiration of dadh-, the weak base of dha-, is lost before /, th, s, or dkv, it is thrown
back on the initial; e. g. dhat-sva. — 7. The roots di- 'shine', dhl- 'think', pit- 'swell',
reduplicate with J; e. g. ddidct-, ddidhet; apipct. — 8. There are a number of transfers
from this to other classes. Thus cakf- 'see', originally a syncopated reduplicative base
(= *caias-), has become a root inflected according to the root class; jaif- 'eat', also
originally a reduplicated base (jaghas-), has become a root from which is formed the
past passive participle jag-dhd-, and which in the later language is inflected both in the
root class and the a- class. The weak bases dad- and dadh- show an incipient tendency
to become roots 5 , from which a number of transfer forms according to the a- conjugation
are made, such as 3. sing. mid. dada-te, 3. pi. ind. act. dadhanti, 3. pi. impv. act. dadha-ntu,
3. sing. mid. dadha-le, 2. du. dadhel/u (AV.). The roots pa- 'drink', sthd-, hatt-, form only
transfer stems according to the a- class: piba-, tif/ha-, jightta-; while ghra-, ma- 'bellow',
ra-, bhas-, sac- make occasional forms from transfer stems according to the a- class:
jighra-, mima-, rara-, bdpsa-, sasca•.
Inflexion.
458. The forms actually occurring would, if made from b/tf- 'bear', be
the following:
Active. Sing. i. bibharmi. 2. bibharsi. 3. bibharti. — Du. 2. bibhrthas.
3. bibhrtas. — PI. 1. bibhrmdsi and bibhfmas. 2. bibhfiha. 3. bibhrati.
Middle. Sing. i. bibhri. 2. bibhrse. 3. bibhrti. — Du. 1. bibhfvahe.
2. bibhrithe. 3. bibhrftte. — PI. 1. blbhfmahe. 2. bibhfdhve. 3. bibhrate.
The forms which actually occur are the following:

Present Indicative.
Active. Sing. i. iyarmi, jdhami, jigharmi, juhonti, dadami, dadh&mi,
piparmi ('fill', AV.), bibharmi, vivakmi ( Jf vac-), sisami.
2. iydrsi6, cikhi (AV,),jdhasi (AV.),jlgasi, daddsi, dadhasi, plparsi, bibharsi,
mamatsi, vavaksi (\rvas-), viveksi 7 (vis- 'be active'), sisaksi (Ysac-), sisarsi8.
3. iyarti, jahati, jigati, jigharti, juhoti, dadati9, dadhSti, piparti 'fills' and
•passes', babhasti (AV.), bibharti and (once) bibharti, mimati 'bellows', mimeti
(ma- 'bellow', SV.), yuyoti 'separates', vavarti (= vavart-ti, 11. 38 s ), vivakti,
vivasti (Yvas-), vivesti (vis- 'be active'), sdsasti ( V S . ) and sasasti ( T S . V I I . 4 . 1 9 ' ) ,
sisakti (\isac-), sisarti.
DU.2. dhatthds, ninTthds, piprthas, bibhrthas. — 3. dattds (AV.), dadhatas10
(AV.), bibhxtds (AV.), bibhftas, mimltas, viviktds ( Yvyac-), vivistas.
PI. 1. juhumasi, dadmasi, dadhmasi, bibhrmdsi, s'ts'tmasi; jahimas" (AV.),
juhumas, dadrnas (AV.), dadhmas, bibhrmas (AV.), vivismas. — 2. dhatthd,
1 This of course does not take place in the 6 This is the accentuation in MAX MÜLLER'»
transfer verbs according to the a- conjugation. and AUFRECHT'S editions, both in Samhitl
2 In the RV. ha- 'leave', has only forms and Padapätha.
with a (never P. 7 C p . NEISSER, B B . 3 0 , 3 0 3 .
3 But rarasva (AV.). 8 With imperative sense.

4 The vowel of ha- 'leave' is also dropped 9 Also the transfer form dadati.
in the 3. pi. opt. act. jahyur (AV.). 10 With strong base, for dhattas.
5 From the former is made the past 1 1 With base weakened to jahi- for jahl-.

passive participle dal-ta- 'given'.

342

piprthd, bibhrthà. — 3. jahati, jighrati (AV.), jùhvati, dàdati, dddhati dìdyati2

(AV.), piprati, bapsati ( jAMax-), bibhrati3, sdscati.
Middle. S i n g . 1. juhvé, dadé (AV. TS.), dadhé, mime. — 2. aVz/ii (AV.),
dhatsé. — 3. jihìte, juhuté, datti*, dhatté5, mimlte, /¡s'ite6; w i t h - e : dadhé
(+AV.).
D u . 1. dddvahe. — 2. dadhàthe. — 3. jihäte, dadhäte1, mimate3 (v. 826).
PI. 1. dddmahe, mimlmahe (AV.). — 2. jihidhve (AV.). — 3. jihate,
dadhateq, mimate ('measure'), sisrate.

Present Subjunctive.
459. A c t i v e . Sing. I. dadhäni, bibharäni (TS. 1. 5. io 1 ). — 2. juhuras,
dddas, dadhas, dldhyas (AV.), vivesas. — 3. piprati; dadat, dddhat, didayat,
didäyat10 (AV.), babhasat, bibharat (AV.), yuydvat 'separate'.
D u . 2. dddhathas, bapsathas (Kh. 1. 11 ').
PI. 1. jahiìma, juhaväma, dadhama. — 3. dddan (AV.), dddhan, yuyavan.
Middle. S i n g . " 2. dddhase.— 3. dddhate; with -/ai- dadätai (AV.). —
D u . 1. dadhävahai (TS. 1. 5. io 1 ). — PI. 1. dadämahe. — 3. juhuranta11.

P r e s e n t Injunctive.
A c t i v e . Sing. 2. dadäs (AV.), bibhes (AV.). — 3. jigat, dadat (AV.),
vivyak.
PI. I. yuyoma "3 (AV.).
Middle. Sing. 2. juhürthäs ( yhvr-). 3. jihlta.
PI. 3. sascata.

Present Optative14.
A c t i v e . S i n g . 2. mimlyäs (x. 56*). — 3. jahyat^ (SA. xii. 11); juhuyAt
(AV.), dadyät (AV.), bibhlyät, bibhj-yät, mamanyät, mimlyät (ma- 'measure'). —
D u . 3. yuyuyàtim. — PI. 1. juhuyàma. — 3. jahyurl% (AV.).
Middle. Sing. 3. dddhita and dadhìta. — PI. 1. dadimahi, dadhlmahi.
— 3. dadlran.
P r e s e n t Imperative.
460. A c t i v e . Sing. 1. jdhäni (AV.). — 2. daddhi, piprgdhi ( Vpre),
mamaddhi, mamandhi, yuyodhi, vividdhi (Yvis-), sisadhi.—With-A' : cikihi
{ci- 'note', AV.), didihi and didihi (]/di-), dehi (Yda-), dhehi, pipr hi, bibhrhi
(AV. TS.), mimi/il (ma- 'measure'), rirlhi* (V~r3-), sislhi. — W i t h -tòt: jahxtst
(AV.), dattat, dhattat, pipftat (TS. iv. 4.12 '). — 3. ciketu (TS.111.3.115), jdhatu,
jigatu, juhotu (TS. in. 3. io 1 ), dddätu, dddhatu, pipartu ('fill' and 'pass'), bibhartu
(AV.TS.), mimi tu, yayastu, yuyotu, s'isatu, sisaktu.

' Also the transfer form dddhanli.
2 Regarded by DELBRÜCK, Verbum p. 133),
as an intensive.
3 There is also a transfer form mimanti
•bellow'.
4 Also the transfer form dadate.
5 Also the transfer form dadhate.
6 There is also the transfer form rarate
from \rä~.
7 Also the transfer form dadhete (AV.).
8 By AVERY 2374 given as 3. sing, sub-
unctive middle.
9 T S . I. 5. l o \ ill. I . 8* has the transfer
form dadante.
>° Pp. didayat; see WHITNEY'S note on
11 sasvacài (RV. III. 33'°) is probably sing. 1
perfect subj. (p. 361); but occurring beside the
aorist form namsai, it may be an aorist, to
which tense WHITNEY, Roots, doubtfully
assigns it.
«2 dTdayante (AV. XVIII. 373) is perhaps a
subjunctive.
' '3 With the strong base yuyo- for yuyu-.
*4 AVERY 241 gives here several forms
which it is better to class as optative* per-
fect.
•5 With weak base jah-, for jahi-, which
here loses its final vowel like dada- and
dadha-.
1 6 T h e only form in which \ra- reduplicates

A V . lit. 8 3 . with i.
 VII. VERB. PRESENT SYSTEM. 343

D u . 2. jahUam (AV.), jigätam, dattäm, dhattäm, pipftdm, mimttdm,

yuyutdm and yuyotamsisitdm, sisftam. — 3. cikitam (ci- 'note', AV.), dattäm,
dhattäm, pipytäm, bibhrtäm, mimitam, sisU&m.
P I . 2. iyarta2, jah'ita (AV.), jigäta, juhuta and juhöta3, dattd and dddata4,
dhattd and dddhätaninikta (\rnij-), piprkta, piprtd, bibhlta (AV.), bibhrtä
(TS. rv. 2.3'), yuyota*, sislta, sisakta\ jigatana, juhjtana^, dadätanadha/tana
and dddhätana5, pipartana6, bibhUana, mamattdna, yuy'tanavivaktana. —
3. rtWa/tt (AV.), dadhatu \
Middle. Sing. 2. jihTsva, datsva (AV.), dhatsva, tnimTsva (AV.),
raräsva (AV.). — 3. jihU&m*.
D u . 2. jih'ithum (TS. 1. 1. 12*), didhTthäm (AV.), mimathäm, raräthäm.
PI. 2. juhudhvam (TS. IV. 6. i5), rarldhvam. — 3. jihatäm, dadhatctm,
sisratäm (Kh. I. ß6).
Present Participle.
461. Active. As the suffix -an/ drops its « (like the endings of the
3. pi. a c t ) strong and weak stem are not distinguished. The feminine stem of
course lacks n also; e.g. bibhrat-l-. Stems occurring are: cikyat- («'-'note') 9 ,
jdhat-, jigat-, juhvat-, titrat- (tf- 'cross'), dadat-, dddhat-, didyat-, didhyat-,
bdpsat-, bibhyat-, bibhrat-, sas'cdt- ('pursuer') and sdscat-1" ('helping'), slsrat
Middle, jihäna-, jühväna-, dddänadddhäna-, didyäna-, didhyäna-,
pipäna- (pa- 'drink', AV.) and pipäna-11, pipyäna-1* typT-), m'imäna-, rdräna-I4,
s'is'äna-.
Imperfect Indicative.
462. All the verbs of this class occurring in the 3. pi. act. take the
ending -ur except b/if, which has the normal -an. The verbs da-, dhä-, hä-
show the irregularity (appearing elsewhere also) of using the strong instead of
the weak base in the 2. pi. act.
Active. Sing. 1. adadäm, adadhäm. — 2. ddadäs, ddad has'5, ddldes,
avires ( tfvis-); bibhes (AV.), vivc's ( \fvis-), sisas. — 3. aciket (yd-), djahät,
ajigät, ddadät16, ddadhnt, ddldet, dbibhar, abibhet, dvivyak17, asisat; vives ( \fvis-).
D u . 2. adattam, adhattam. — 3. aviviktäm, dmimätäm (AV.)' 8 .
P I . 2. ddadataddadhata and ddhatta-, djaha tanaddattana. —
3. abibhran; ajahur, djuhavur, adadur, adadhur, dmamadur, avivyacur; jahur,
dadur, dldhyur (AV.), vivyacur.
Middle. Sing. 2. ddhatthas, dmimUhas-, dldithäs (AV.). — 3. djihlta,
adatta, adhatta, dpiprataamimtta\ sisUa. — PI. 3. ajihata, djuhvata2
1 W i t h strong base yuyo- for yuyu-. i " W i t h irregular accent.
* With strong base iyar- for *iyf-; cp. I 'J The anomalous transfer form bibhra-
V. NEGELEIN 6 S 4 f. mäna- takes the place of *bibhräna-,
J W i t h strong base for weak. '4 But perfect rarand-.
4 Strong b a s e dadä- for dad-. | <5 T h e r e is no sufficient reason for regarding
5 Strong base dddhä- for dadh-, \ ädadhäs in X. 739, as a 3 . sing. ( A V E R Y 2 4 8 ;
6 Strong base pipar- for pipr -. DELBRÜCK, Verbum 50, 59).
" A l s o the transfer form dadhan'u. 1 6 T h e r e is also the transfer form dädat.
8 T h e r e is also the 3. sing, transfer form v. NEGELEIN 6 7 2 g i v e s dddAät(RV. A V . ) which
dadatam. seems a misprint for dddhat.
9 cikyat (IV. 38'\ nom. sing, m., is given >7 T h e r e is also the unaugmented transfer
by v. NEGELEIN 772 as cikyat and explained form vivydcat.
as a pluperfect form. '8 WHITNEY, Sanskrit Grammar 665, quotes
1 0 W h e n compounded with the negative ajahitäm from the TS. (mantra?).
particle, sascat- remains unchanged in the '9 W i t h strong base instead of w e a k .
fern, if accented a-saicdt-, but has « if »0 Anomalous form instead of *dpiffta.
accented on the prefix: d-saicant-T-. »« Also the transfer form adadanta. WHITNEY
1 1 For inflected forms of these stems see 658 also mentions the unaugmented 3. pi.
312. jihata.
344

i. The infixing nasal class.

463. This class, which includes fewer than 30 verbs, is characterized by
the accented syllable na preceding the final consonant of the root in the
strong forms. That syllable in the weak forms becomes a simple nasal varying
according to the class to which the following consonant belongs.
1. The infix, appearing in forms outside the limits of the present stem, has become
part of the root in ahj- 'anoint', bhahj• 'break', and Aims- 'injure'. — 2. There are a few
transfers to the a- class, in which some of these verbs come to be inflected in the
later language 1 , and in which several verbs are regularly nasalized in the present stem
(429, a, 1). — 3. Instead of the regular -na-, the root trh- 'crush' infixes -ni- in the
strong forms; thus 3. sing, tfne-dhi. — 4. In the 3. pi. ind. mid. irregular accentuation of
the final syllable occurs exceptionally in each of the forms anjate, indhatl, bhunjaii

Present Indicative.
464. The forms actually occurring, if made from yuj- 'join', would be
the following:
Active. Sing. 1. yunajmi. 2. yunaksi. 3. yunakti. — PL 1. yunjmas.
3. yunjanti.
Middle. Sing. 1. yuiijt. 2. yufikse. 3. yunkte. — Du. 2. yuhjdthe.
3. yuiijste. — PL 2. yuhgdhvi. 3. yuhjdte.
The forms which actually occur are the following:
Active. Sing. 1. anajmi{AV.), chinadmi (AV.), tfnadmi (]/trd-), bhinddmi,
yunajmi, runadhmi {rudh- 'obstruct'). — 2. prnaksi ( Yprc-), bhindtsi, yunaksi,
vrnaksi {vfj- 'twist'). — 3. anakti, unatti (\fud-), fynatti (krt- 'spin'), gfnatti3
( A V . x . 7«), chinatti (AV.), trnatti, pinasti ( Vpi?-), bhanakti{Ybhanj-), bhinatti,
yunakti (AV.), rinakti (Yric-), runaddhi, Vfnakti, hindsti ( \fkirns-, A V . SA.).
PI. 1. ahjmas. — 3. ahjanti, undanti, pimsanti, prncanti, bhindanti,
yunjanti, vincanti {vie- 'sift'), vftijanti.
Middle. Sing. 1. anje, rnje (rj- 'direct'), prhce (AV.), yuiijt, vrnji. —
2. yuhkse (AV.). — 3. anktJ*, indht (= ind-dhi, \ridh-), pfhkte, yunkte'*, rvndhi
(= rund-dhi, AV.), vrhkte, himste6 (AV.). — With ending -a: vrnjt.
Du. 2. anjathe (Kh. v. 6 4 ; VS. xxxm. 33), yuhjithe. — 3. anjate (VS.
x x . 61), tunjiite, vfhjate (AV.).
PI. 2. aftgdhve. — 3. anjate and anjati, indhate and i?idhaU, fhjate,
tuhjate, pj-ncate, bhuhjate and bhuiijatt, yunjatc, rundhate (AV.), vrfijate.

Present Subjunctive.
465. The weak base is once used instead of the strong in the form
auj-a-tas for *anaj-a-tas; and the A V . has once the double modal sign a in
the form trnah-an.
A c t i v e . S i n g . 2. bhinadas. — 3 . j-nadhat, bhinadat, yunajat. — D u . 1.
rinaciva. — 3 . anjatas. — PI. 3 . anajan, yunajan, Vfnajan; tfnahiln (AV.).
M i d d l e . S i n g . 3 . inadhate, yundjate. — PI. 1. bhunajamahai, runadha-
mahai.
Present Injunctive.
Active. Sing. 2. pinak (Vpi?-), bhinat. — 3. pinak, pr'jak, bhindt,
rinak {Yric-).
Middle. PI. 3. yuhjata.

1 Thus ud- 'wet' : unatti is inflected as J ud grnatti 'ties up', is here only a cor-
unda-ti in B. and S.; and yuj- 'join' -.yunakti ruption of the corresponding ut trnatti of
a s y u h j a - t i in U. and E., beside the old forms. R V . x . 130*, seemingly a form oigrath- 'tie'.
1 In the RV. anjate occurs once, anjate 4 A V . anti.
12 times, indhate 4 times, indhate 15 times, 5 A V . yurtie.
while bhuhjate and bhuhjate occur once each. 6 With irregular accent.
 345

Present Optative.
Active. Sing. 3. bhindyat (AV.). — Middle. Sing. 3. pnicitá.

Present Imperative.
466. The only ending of the 2. sing. act. is -dhi, no form with -tät
having been met with. As usual, the strong base sometimes appears in the
2 . p i . a c t . : unátta,yunákta-, anaktatia, pinas tana.
Active. Sing. 2. añdhi 1 (Y añj-), undhi (= unddhi), chindhi (= chind-
dhi), trndhi (= trnddhi), pfhdhi (=prrigdhi), bhahdhi (= bhañgdhi), bhindhí
(= bhittddhí), yuñdhi (= yuñgdhi, AV.), rundhi (= runddhi, AV.), vrñdhi
(= vrñgdhi).— 3 . anáktu, chináttu ( A V . ) , trnéjhu* ( A V . ) , prnáktu, bhanaktu
( A V . ) , bhinattu ( A V . ) , yunáktu ( A V . ) , vinaktu ( nie-, A V . ) , zjnaktu, hinástu
(Kh. IV. 5«S).

D u . 2 . ahtam (= añkiam, A V . ) , chintám (= chinttám, A V . ) , pfhktám. —

3. anktim ( V S . II. 2 2 ) .
P l . 2 . unátta\ bhintta ( T S . i v . 7. 1 3 2 ) , yunákta, vfhkta-, anaktana, pinas-
tana. — 3 . añjantu, undantu ( A V . ) , yuñjántu ( A V . ) , vfñjantu (AV.).
Middle. Sing. 2. ahksva« (AV.), yuñksvá, vfnksva (AV.). — 3. indhäms
(= inddhäm, A V . ) , yuñtüm (= yuñktam, A V . ) , rundhüm (= runddhäm., AV.).
— D u . 2 . yuñjáthUm. — P l . 2 . indhvam (= inddhvam), yuñgdhvám. —
3. indhatam.
Present Participle.
467. Active, añjánt-, undánt- a n d udat-i- ( A V . ) , fñjánt-, j-ndhánt-, kj-ntatí-
( A V . ) , pimsati-, pfñcánt- a n d prñcatl- 6, bhañjánt- a n d bhañjatí-, bhindánt- and
bhindatí- ( A V . ) , bhuñjatí-, yuñjati-, viñeánt(á-)himsant-.
Middle, añjaná-, tndhana-, tuñjaná-, tundaná- 1 (AV.), prñcaná-, bhindaná-t
yunjäna- ( T S . i v . 1 . i " ) , rundhaná-, sumbhlná-himsäna-.

Imperfect Indicative.
468. Active. Sing. 2. átrnat9 (AV.), abhanas 10 (AV.), ábhinat, arinak
9
( J f ric-), avfnak\ unap (Yubh-), rttak (Kh. iv.6 ), pinak, bhinát. -— 3. átrnat,
apfnak ( Y p f c - ) , ábhinat, ayunak and äyunak, avinak (jAwV-, AV.), ávfrtak
(Vvri~)', áunat (yud-); bhinát, rinák, Vfnák. — Du. 2. atfntam (= atrnttam). —
Pl. 3. átrndan, ábhindan, avfñjan\ äiy'an, äyunjan (TS. 1. 7. 7').
Middle. Sing. 3. ainddha (]/idh-, AV.). — Pl. 3. ayuñjata, arundhata
(AV.); unaugmented: añjata.

ß. 2. T h e /»Í/- class.
Verbum p. 154—157. — A V E R Y , Verb-Inflection 232 ff. — W H I T N E Y ,
DELBRÜCK,
Sanskrit Grammar p. 254—260; Roots 213.— v. N E G E L E I N , Zur Sprachgeschichte 57—60;
6 3 - 6 4 ; 94-
469. More than thirty verbs follow this class in the Samhitäs. The stem
is formed by adding to the root, in the strong forms, the accented syllable
-tú, which in the weak forms is reduced to -nu.
1 F o r añg-dhi. T h e final consonant o f ! in the imperatives 3. sing, vid-äm and
the root is regularly dropped before the ¡ düh-äm.
ending -dhi. 6 AV. also pjñcafí-.
* Cp. v. NEGELEIN, Zur Sprachgeschichte 7 \tud- otherwise follows the a- class.
61 8 yiuhh- otherwise follows the a- or á-
3 T h e A V . has the transfer form umbhata class.
( y u i i - ) according to the a- class. 9 From \tfd-. The MSS. have atrinat:
4 AV. XIX.45S: dkfva emended to a-ankfva\ see WHITNEY'S note on AV. x i x . 32*.
s e e WHITNEY'S n o t e on t h e p a s s a g e . 10 5 o r *abhanak-s (\<bhanj-): see WHITNEY,
5 v. NEGELEIN 63, note thinks this form G r a m m a r 5 5 5 , and his note on AV. III. 6^.
m a y be the starting point of the ending -am Cp. above 66, c, /S 2 (p. 61).
346 I. ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4 . V E D I C GRAMMAR.

a . S e v e r a l i r r e g u l a r i t i e s o c c u r w i t h r e g a r d t o r o o t , suffix, a n d e n d i n g , i . T h e r o o t
tru- 'hear* is d i s s i m i l a t e d t o b e f o r e t h e s u f f i x : if-nu-, sp-no-. — 2. T h e r o o t vr-
' c o v e r ' a s s u m e s t h e a n o m a l o u s f o r m of u r - (with i n t e r c h a n g e of v o w e l a n d s e m i v o w e l :
ur-ttu-, b e s i d e t h e r e g u l a r zr-nu-*. — 3 . F o u r r o o t s e n d i n g in -n, Ian- ' s t r e t c h ' , man-
• t h i n k ' , van- ' w i n ' , san- ' g a i n ' , s e e m to f o r m t h e i r s t e m w i t h t h e s u f f i x -«, b e i n g a s s i g n e d
by t h e Indian g r a m m a r i a n s to a separate class, the e i g h t h ; but this a p p e a r a n c e has
p r o b a b l y b e e n b r o u g h t a b o u t b y t h e -an of t h e r o o t h a v i n g o r i g i n a l l y b e e n r e d u c e d t o
t h e n a s a l s o n a n t : ta-nu- f o r *tn-nu- — 4. I n p l a c e of t h e r e g u l a r a n d v e r y f r e q u e n t
ir-nu-, t h e r e a p p e a r s in t h e t e n t h b o o k of t h e R V . t h e a n o m a l o u s s t e m kuru-, once in
t h e f o r m kur-mas (X. 5 1 I . pi. p r e s . ind., a n d t w i c e in t h e f o r m kuru (x. 19», 1452),
2. t i n g . i m p v . a c t . T h e s t r o n g f o r m of t h i s s t e m , iarS-*, w h i c h h a s t h e a d d i t i o n a l a n o m a l y
of G u n a in t h e r o o t , a p p e a r s in t h e AV., w h e r e h o w e v e r t h e f o r m s m a d e f r o m k r n o - ,
kf-nu- a r e still u p w a r d s of six t i m e s as c o m m o n a s t h o s e f r o m karo-, kuru-s. T h e i s o l a t e d
f o r m taru-te ' a t t a i n s ' , w h i c h o c c u r s o n c e in t h e R V . ( x . 76 1 ), s e e m s t o b e a n a l o g o u s in
f o r m a t i o n t o karo-ti, b u t it m a y b e c o n n e c t e d w i t h t h e s o m e w h a t f r e q u e n t n o m i n a l i t e m
taru-6. — 5. T h e u of t h e s u f f i x i s d r o p p e d , in all t h e f e w f o r m s w h i c h o c c u r in t h e
1. pi. i n d . a c t . a n d mid., b e f o r e t e r m i n a t i o n s b e g i n n i n g w i t h m: kur-mas, kpn-masi (AV. 1 ,
tan-masi (TS.), hin-mas (AV.), hin-masi ( A V . ) ; krn-tnaht, man-mahe7. W h e n t h e -nu is
p r e c e d e d b y a c o n s o n a n t , t h e « b e c o m e s uv b e f o r e v o w e l e n d i n g s ; e. g . asnuv-anti (but
sunv-anti). — 6. In t h e 3. pi. m i d . , six v e r b s of t h i s c l a s s t a k e t h e e n d i n g - r e S w i t h
c o n n e c t i n g v o w e l - » • : inv-ire, rnv-ire, pinv-iresrnv-iri, sunv-iri, hinv-ire. T h e c o n n e c t i n g
v o w e l -i- is a l s o t a k e n b y sru- in t h e 2. s i n g . m i d . srnv-i-sl (for *ifnu-fe) u s e d in a
p a s s i v e s e n s e . — 7. F i v e s t e m s of this c l a s s , i-nu-, /•-««-, ji-nu-, pi-nu-, hi-nu-, h a v e c o m e
to b e u s e d f r e q u e n t l y e v e n in t h e R V . a s s e c o n d a r y r o o t s f o l l o w i n g t h e a- c o n j u g a t i o n .
O f t h e s e finv-a- o c c u r s a l m o s t e x c l u s i v e l y in t h e R V . a s w e l l as t h e A V . ; inv-a- a l o n e
is m e t w i t h in t h e A V . ; a n d jhtv-a- a n d hittv-a- a r e c o m m o n e r in t h e R V . t h a n ji-nu-
and hi-nu-.
Present Indicative.
470. The forms actually occurring, if made from kp- 'make', would be
as follows:
Active. Sing. i. kpnomi. 2. kpnosi. 3. kpnoti. — Du. 2. kpnuthas.
3. kpnutds. — PI. 1. kpnmdsi and kpnmas. 2. kpnutha. 3. krnvanti.
Middle. Sing. i. kftivJ. 2. krnust. 3. krnuti and kj-nvi.— Du. 2. kj-nvathe.
— PI. 1. kfnmahe. 3. krnvate1
The forms which actually occur are the following:
Active. Sing. 1. arnomi (AV.), ftiomi, kfnotni, ksinomi (AV. TS.), tnittomi
{mi- 'fix', AV.), vfnomi ('choose', Kh. IT. 6 s ), saknomi (AV.), if no mi, hinomi. —
W i t h -u-: karomi (AV.TS.), tanomi.
2. Hpnosi (AV.), inosi, k/-nosi, jinosi, stfnosi, /lirtJsi; tanosi, vatiosi.
3. asnoti {as- 'attain'), apnoti (VS. AV.), incii, unoti (RV 1 .), Urnoti, rnoti,
fdhnoti, krnoti, cinoti 'gathers', dasnoti, dunoti (AV.), dhanoti, minoti (AV.),
Vfnoti, saknoti (AV.), s'fnoti, sunJii, skunoti (AV.), hiniti\ karoti (AV. TS. VS.),
tanoti, vanoti, sanoti.
Du. 2. asnuthas (Kh. 1. 9®), Rrnuthas, krnvthas, vanuthas. — 3. asnutas,
Urnutas, kfnutas, sunutds\ tanutas (Kh. 111. 2 26).
PI. I. kftimasi (AV.), hinmas (AV.), hinmasi (AV.); kurmas, tanmasi
(TS. iv. 5. XI'). — 2. asnutha, kpiutha, dhUnuthd, sunutha. — 3. asnuvanti,

« C p . DELBRÜCK, V e r b u m p . 1541. J ( D E L B R Ü C K 1 7 4 , BRUGMANX, K G . 6 7 3 ) o f this

2
Cp. BRUGMANN, K G . 674. phenomenon. T h e r e is n o e x a m p l e in t h e
J C p . BRUGMANN, K Z . 2 4 , 2 5 9 ; D E L B R Ü C K S a m h i t a s of t h e 1. d u . in vas a n d -vahe\ b u t
p . 156. *k/-n-vas, *kfn vaAe m u s t b e p r e s u p p o s e d t o
4 P e r h a p s s t a r t i n g f r o m t h e a o r i s t a-iar a c c o u n t f o r t h e loss of t h e -u b e f o r e -mas
a n d f o l l o w i n g t h e a n a l o g y of kf-nö-; c p . a n d -mahe: B R U G M A N N , K G . 6 7 3 .
BRUGMANN, K G . 6 5 6 , 3 . I 8 L i k e duh-re in t h e r o o t c l a s s .
5 WHITNEY 7 1 5 . 9 T h i s is t h e o n l y f o r m ( b e s i d e s t h e
6 O c c u r r i n g in taru- 'swift'(?), taru-tf- ' c o n - participlepittv-äna- a n d pinv ant-, pinv-at-im in
•queror', taru-tra- ' v i c t o r i o u s ' , taru-ja- ' v i c t o r ' , I A V . ) i n w h i c h t h e s t e m pinu- a p p e a r s . All o t h e r s
a n d t h e v e r b a l s t e m tarufya-'cioss', ' o v e r c o m e ' . i a r e m a d e f r o m t h e t r a n s f e r s t e m pinva-.
7 T h u s kfn-mahe is n o t t h e o n l y e x a m p l e j 10
S o m e t i m e s a c c e n t e d kftrvati.
 V I I . VERB. PRESENT SYSTEM. 347

fnvdnti, krnvdnticinvanii (TS. 1.1. 7 2 ), dabhnuvanti, dunvanii (A V.), prusnuvanti,

saknuvdnti ( A V . ) , srnvanti, sunvdnti, hinvdnti; kurv anti ( A V . ) , tanvdnti.
M i d d l e . S i n g . 1. as'nuve, krnve, AinvJ\ kurve ( A V . ) , manvi ( A V . ) , vanve.
2 . as'nuse, ürnuse, fynusi, cinusJ, dhünusJ-, tanuse ( A V . ) . — With
connecting vowel -/'-: srnv-i-si.
3. ainuti\ Brnutt, krnuti, dhUnute, prusnute, sfnute\ kurute (AV.), tanute,
tarute, vanute. — W i t h e n d i n g - 0 : s'rnvtf, sunve, hinve.
D u . 2. tanvüthe. — PI. 1. krntnahe, manmahe. — 3. asnuvate, kfnvdte,
vfnvdte a n d vrnvatJ, sprnvat<!, hinvdte\ kurvdte ( A V . ) , tanvati a n d tanvdte
( A V . ) . — W i t h e n d i n g -re: inv-i-re, rnv-i-re, pinv-i-re, srnv-i-rd, sunv-i-re,
hinv-i-ri.
Present Subjunctive.
471. Active. krnavä, hinavs-, sandväni ( A V . ) . — 2 . rndvas,
S i n g . 1.
krndvas, trpndvas, srndvas\ karavas ( A V . ) . — 3 . asnavatkrndvat, cinavat,
dhünavat, prusndvat, srndvat, sundvat; vandvat. — W i t h d o u b l e m o d a l
sign a: karavfit ( A V . ) , krnavät (AV. x x . 1325). — With ending -tai:
asnavätai3 (AV.). — D u . 1. asnavava, krnavava.
P I . I. asndväma, krndväma, minaväma, saknavätna, sunaväma, sprnaväma.
— 2 . sandvatha; w i t h d o u b l e m o d a l s i g n : krnavätha (VS.). — 3. asnavan,
kfndvan, sfndvan.
Middle. Sing. 1. asnavai (VS. xix. 37), kfndvai, sundvai-, mandvai. —
2. kfnavase-, vanavase. — 3. krndvatc, manavate.
D u . 1. kfnavävahai-, tanavävahai. — 2. aindvaithe. — 3. krnvaite*.
P L 1. asndvämahai (x. 97'7)5> krndvämahat, strnavämahai (AV.). —
3. asnavanta, kfndvanta.
Present Injunctive.
Active. S i n g . 6 2. rnos. — 3. ürnot. — PI. 3. rnvan, minvdn, hinvdn-,
vanvan.
Middle. Sing. 2. tanuthäs. — 3. fnutd. — PI. 3. kpivata-, manvata.

Present Optative.
Active. S i n g . 1. sanuyäm. — 3 . j'jnuyät ( A V . ) . — P I . 1. cinuyäma,
sfnuyäma; vanuyäma, sanuyäma.
M i d d l e . S i n g . 3 . krnvita 7; manvTta ( A V . ) .

Present Imperative.
472. Active. S i n g . 2. srnudhi. — W i t h e n d i n g - A / ' 8 : aksnuhi (ak?-
' m u t i l a t e ' , A V . ) , arnuhi, äpnuhi ( A V . ) , inuhi, ttrnuhi, krnu/ii, cinuhi, trpnuhi,
dabhnuhi ( A V . ) , dhünuhi, dhrsnuhi, srnuhi, sprnuhi, hinuhi\ tanuhi, sanuhi. —
W i t h e n d i n g -tat: krnutät, hinutät. — W i t h o u t e n d i n g : ittu, ürnu, krnu,
dhünu ( A V . ) , s'rnu, suriü, hinu) kuru, tanu. — 3 . asnotu, äpnotu ( A V . ) , ürnotu
( A V . ) , krnütu, cinotu, minotu, s'pwtu, sunotu\ karotu ( T S . V S . ) , tanotu ( A V . ) ,
sanotu.
D u . 2. asrtutam, krnutäm, trpmitam, srnutdm, hinötam9. — 3. asnutäm
( A V . T S . ) , krnutäm (AV.).

1 skrm/anti afterpari -.pariskrnvänti (IX.14»), 6 T h e injunctive form ainavam, AV. XIX.

pari skrnvanli (ix. 642J). SS 6 , is a conjecture; see WHITNEY'S note
3 The form arnaval, AV. v . 28 (]/>--), is a on the passage,
corruption of auf not in R V . 7 urnvltd occurs in TS. vi. 1.3 and ürnu-
3 The T S . has once asnavatai (WHITNEY vita in K . (WHITNEY 713).
8
701). j Cp. WHITNEY 704.
4 Irregular for kfnavaiie. \ 9 With strong stem.
5 Omitted b y AVERY 238. j
348 I. ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4. VEDIC GRAMMAR.

PI. 2. ürnuta, krnutd and krnötatrpnuta, dhünuta, srttutd and srnota

sunutd and sunöta *, hinuta (AV.) and hinota'; tanota1 (AV. TS.). —
With ending -tana: kr notanas'rnotatia2, sunotana2, hinotana1 (x. 30"). —
3. asnuvantu, Ornuvantu, krnvdntu, cinvantu (TS.v. 2.11 2 ), srnvdntu, himantw,
vanvdntu, sanvantu.
Middle. Sing. 1. Ornusva, krnusvd, cinusva (AY.), dhünusva (AV.),
sfnupjd; tanusva, vanusva. — 3. asnutäm (AV.), krnutäm; tanutäm (TS. 1.
6. 3 3 ), manutäm, vanutäm (AV.).
D u . 2. krnväthäm (AV.). — P I . 2. krnudhvdm, sunudhvam; tanudhvam,
vanudhvam (AV.). — 3. rnvatäm (AV.); kurvatäm (AV.), tanvdtSm (AV.),
vanvatäm (AV.).
Present Participle.
473. Active, ürnuvdnt- and ürnvdnt-, {.-vati-, rnvdnt-, krnvdnt-*, i.-vati-,
cinvdntf. -vati-, dunvdnt- (AV.), dhünvdnt-, pinvdrtt- (AV.), minvdnt-, vfnvant-,
srnvdnt-, f. -vati-, sunvdnt-, hinvant-, f. -vati-; kurvdnt- (AV.), f. -vati- (AV.),
tanvdnt-, f. -vati- (AV.), vanvant-.
Middle, ürnvänd-, kfnvänd-, cinvänd- (TS.iv. 2. io 1 ), dhünvänd-, pittvänd-,
sunvänd-, hinvänd-; kurvänd- (AV.), tanvänd-, manvänd-, vanvänd-.

Imperfect Indicative.
474. Active. Sing. 1. asj-navam; krnavam. — 2. dfynos, dvrnos, dsrnos,
dsaghnos, aitios, durnos; akaros (AV.), dvanos, dsanos. — 3. dkftiot, ddhünot,
avrnot, apnot (AV. TS.), ärdhnot (AV.), <7«w/, durnot; akarot (VS. AV.),
atanot, asanot. — Du. 2. akfnutam, adhunutam.
PI. 2. akfiiuta and akrnota; akrnotana. — 3. dkj-nvan, acinvan (AV.),
asaknuvan, asfnvan (AV.); fnvan, minvati; akun an (AV.), avanvan, dsativatt.
Middle. Sing. 2. adhünuthäs; kuruthäs (AV.).— 3. akrnuta, ddhünuta;
kfnuta; akuruta (AV.), atanuta (AV.), dmanuta.
PI. 2. akrnudhvam. — 3. dk^nvataavj-nvata; akurvata (AV.; Kh.n 135),
dtanvata, amanvata, avanvata (AV.).

3. The nä- class.

DELBRÜCK, V e r b u m p . 151 — 1 5 3 . — A V E R Y , V e r b - I n f l e c t i o n 2 3 2 fr. — WHITNEY,
Sanskrit Grammar p. 2 6 0 — 2 6 3 ; Roots 214. — v. NEGELEIN, Zur Sprachgeschichte 49—
5 7 . — C p . J . SCHMIDT, Fesigruss an R o t h 1 7 9 fr.; BARTHOLOMAE, I F . 7, 5 0 — 8 1 ; BRUG-
MANN, I F . i 6 , 5 0 9 fT.

475. Nearly forty verbs belong to this class in the Samhitäs. The stem
is formed by adding to the root, in the strong forms, the accented syllable
-«(i5, which in the weak forms is reduced to -til before consonants and -n
before vowels.
a. There are some irregularities with regard to the root, the suffix,
and the endings. 1. The root shows a tendency to be reduced in various
ways. The roots jl- 'overpower', ;B- 'hasten', pa- 'purify', are shortened; e.g.
jinämi, junäsi, pundit. The root grabh- 'seize' and its later form grah- take

1
W i t h strong stem instead of w e a k . Thus 3 skfnvant- in fari-jkfnran (ix. 39').
in four out of seven verbs there is an alter- 4 In x. 134 atf-nvata has the appearance
native strong f o r m ; and in one other (tanota) of b e i n g used for the 3. sing. ( = akryuta).
the strong is the only form occurring. s T h e suffix m a y originally have b e e n
' Thus all t h e forms occurring with -tana •nai of which -tit would be t h e weak g r a d e
have a strong stem. WHITNEV 704 also (27); but BRUGMANN, Grundriss 2, 597, n o t e ,
mentions karota besides t h e 2. du. kynotam, disagrees with this view. H e t h i n k s - » ' h a s
but I do not know w h e t h e r these forms displaced earlier -ni, K G . p. 5 1 2 .
occur in mantra passages.
 349

Samprasarana; e. g. grbhnami and grhndmi (AV.). Four roots which, in forms

outside the present system appear with a nasal 1 , drop the nasal here; thus
bandh- 'bind' : badhnami (AV.); manth- 'shake' : mathnami (AV.); skambh-
'make firm' : skabhndti; stambh- 'prop' : stabhndti (AV.). The root jna- 'know',
also loses its nasal; e. g. Ja-na-mi2. — 2. The strong form of the suffix,
-nil, appears in certain 2. persons impv. act., which should have the weak
form -nl) e. g. 2. pi. pund-ta for punT-td. On the other hand -nl appears
once instead of -na in 3. sing. injv. miritt* (AV.). — 3. A few roots ending
in consonants take the peculiar ending -ana in the 2. sing. impv. act; e. g.
gfh-ana*. — 4. T r a n s f e r s to the a- conjugation are made from five roots.
These are rare in the case of gf- 'sing' : gj-na-ta 2. pLind., gfna-nta 3. pi. impf.;
mi- 'damage': mina-t 3. sing, injv., amina-nta 3. pi. impf.; i f - 'crush' only ifna
(AV.) 2. sing. impv. But pr- 'fill' and mf- 'crush' form the regular a- stems
prtia- and mrna- (beside prnd- and mrna-), ten forms being m a d e from the
former, and five from the latter in the RV. S

Present Indicative.
476. The forms actually occurring, if made iromgrabh- 'seize', would be
the following:
A c t i v e . Sing. 1 . grbhnami. 2 . gfbhndsi. 3. gfbhndti.— Du. 2. gfbhnlthas.
3. gfbhnUas. — PI. 1 . grbhnlmdsi andgrbhnTmas. 2. gfbhnUha a n d gfbhnlthdna.
3. gfbhnanti.
M i d d l e . Sing. 1 . gfbhni. 2. grbhnis/. 3. grbhnite. — PI. 1 . gfbhnimahe.
3. gfbhnate.
The forms which actually occur are the following:
A c t i v e . S i n g . 1 . asndmi ('eat', A V . V S . ) , isnsmi ( A V . ) , ksindmi (AV.),
grnUmi {gr- 'sing'), grtuimi ( A V . vi. 7 1 3 , g/-- 'swallow'), grbhndmi, grhnami
( A V . T S . ) , janfrmi, jin&mi, punilmi, pfnhmi ( A V . ) , badhnami6 (bandh- 'bind',
A V . T S . ) , mathnSmi ( A V . ) , minami, rinftmi ( A V . ) , s'rndmi ( A V . ) , sinimi ( A V . ) ,
stabhnami, stj-nSmi (AV.). — 2. asndsi ( A V . ) , isnSsi, jun3si, pfndsi, rindsi,
ifn&si. — 3 . asndti, krlnati, ksinati (ksi- 'destroy'), grndti, gfbhndti, gfhndti
( A V . ) , jandti, jindti, junati, pundti, pfndti, mindti, musnati ( A V . ) , rindti,
Sfndti, sinati, skabhndti, stabhndti ( A V . ) , hrunati.
D u . 2. riniihas. — 3. gfriltds, prnTtas.
P I . 1. gi-nTmasi, junlmasi, mirumasi, sj-nlmasi ( A V . ) ; jammas.— 2,jinltha\
stf tilth ana ( A V . ) . — 3 . asnanti (AV.), ksinanti, grnanti, gfbhndnti, gfhnanti
( A V . T S . ) , jananti, jinanti, junanti, punanti, pfnanti, prlnanti, badhnanti ( A V . ) ,
bhrindnti1, minanti, rinanti, s'rTudnti, stfnanti.
M i d d l e . S i n g . 1 . grnt, grbhtie, grhni (AV.), vrni. — 2. grnTsfl, vrnTsi
( A V . ) , srTnTse, hrnJse. — 3 . krJnite ( A V . ) , ksinlte ( A V . ) , grnTtJ, punUe, prlnUt,
rintte, vj-ntti, srathmtf, strnlte, hrnlte. — W i t h -e for -te\ grne.
P I . 1 . grhmmahc ( T S . v. 7. 9"), punimahe ( K h . m. 10*), vfnTmahe». —

1
Cp. BRUGMANN, Grundriss 2, 627.
' Originally *jana- with nasal lonant, *Jn-
na-; see BRUGMANN, KG. 666 (p. 511). ° » The form grnJfe also occurs in the RV.
3 On this form see v. NEGELEIN 56, note
4 On the origin of this ending see BRUG-
MANN, Grundriss 2, p. 975.
5 Beside seven present stems of this class
there appear denominative stems in -aya
from the same roots. Cp. v. NEGELEIN 50—52.
6
Given, along with a number of cognate
forms, as from the root badh-, by v. NEGE-
LEIN 5 7 .
[ 7 The only form occurring of the root
bhrl- 'consume'.
as a 1. sing, ind., 'I praise', being formed
from an anomalous aorist stem gfni-f-.
9 According to WHITNEY 719, once
ifnTmahi, with reference doubtless to RV.
J
v. 20 , where, however, vfnimahe 'gne is
> only the Sandhi accentuation for vrntmahe
agne (see above 108 and p. 319, note *3).
35° L ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4. VEDIC GRAMMAR.

3. asnategrbhnate, grhnate ( A V . ) , jinate, punate ( A V . ) a n d punatf, bad/indie,

rinati, vrndte.
Present Subjunctive.
477. In the 2. 3. sing., subjunctive forms are indistinguishable from the
indicative present, if formed with primary endings, and from the injunctive, if
formed with secondary endings, as the modal sign a is merged in the strong
stem; thus grbhndti may be 3. sing, indicative or subjunctive; grbhnds may be
2. sing, injunctive or subjunctive. In such forms therefore the sense or con-
struction of the sentence can alone decide their value. T h e s e as well as un-
mistakable subjunctives are rare in this class.
A c t i v e . S i n g . 2. grbhtids, junds.— 3. prnati ( x . 2 4 , c p . 2$), prnat (AV.). —
P I . 1. junima, mitidma.
Middle Du. I. krinavahai (TS. I. 8. 4 1 ). — PI. 1. jattamahai (AV.).

Present Injunctive.
Active. S i n g . 1. ksinam. — 2. rinas (AV. x x . 135lI). — 3. jandt2,
miriit3 ( A V . vi. n o 3 ) . — P I . 3 . mittan, rinan (vm. 7s3), scamnan.
Middle. S i n g . 2. hj-nUhas. — 3. gr'iita, gfbhiiita, vrnita. — P I . 1.
strnundhH.

Present Optative.
In the middle some forms of the optative cannot be distinguished from
unaugmented forms of the imperfect, as the modal sign -1 is merged in the
suffix -m. The forms actually occurring are very few, being found in the
2. 3. sing. only.
A c t i v e . 3. asnlyat ( A V . ) , grhniy&t ( A V . ) , jinlydt (AV.), prniydt.
M i d d l e , i.jariithas ( K h . iv. 5 — 3 . Tj-nxta ( T S . 1 . 1 . 2 1 - = vurita, V S . iv. 8).

Present Imperative.
478. The regular ending of the 2. sing, a c t is -hi, while -dhi never
occurs. Three verbs take -tat as well. One of these, grah-, and three others
ending in a consonant, as-, battdh-, stambh-, take the peculiar ending -Una.
A c t i v e . S i n g . 2. grnahi5 ( T S . iv. 4. 125), grnt/ii, grbhnlhi (AV.), gfhnahi^
(AV.), janlhi, puna/iib (SV.), punlhi, prnThi (AV.), mrnihi, srnahib (SV.),
srmh'P, stymhi* (AV.). — With -tat: grhnitat (AV.), janttatv (TS. AV.),
punltat. — With -ana: asanaIO, gfhana(x. 103"), badhana (AV.),
stabhana (AV.) — 3 . grnatu, grhnatu, jdnatu ( A V . ) , punatu, pfnatu (AV.),
badhnatu ( A V . ) , s'rndtu ( A V . ) , sinatu (AV.).
D u . 2 . as'nttdm, gfmtam ( T S . i v . 1 . 8 2 ) , gfhnitam ( A V . ) , prnltam, sfnitdm,
strnltdm. — 3 . gnut dm, punttam (AV.).

1 grnale ( A V . iv. 21 2 ), given by v . NEGE- 5 W i t h strong base instead of gyirihi,

LEIN as a finite form grnate (unaccented),
is the dat. sing, of the participle.
2 T h i s form is a c c e n t e d J anal in t h e K h i l a
(IIL 21) after R V . x . 103 (AUFRECHT'S R i g v e d a » ,
682), but it is correct in the c o r r e s p o n d i n g
passage o f the A V . (ILL. 26).
3 F o r minät.
4 T h e r e s e e m s to b e no certain e x a m p l e
0 f a 3 . p l . AVERY 240 givesgrbhnata, but this
f o r m (ix. 14 7 ) appears to have an imperf.
s e n s e ; he adds vfnata with a query, but I
cannot trace the form.
gyhmhi.
6 W i t h strong b a s e and irregular accent.
7 A l s o the transfer form sj-rta (AV.XIX.45 1 ).
8 WHITNEY 723 quotes sifnahi from the
T S . [vi. 3. 1 4
9 v. NEGELEIN 57, line 6, s e e m s to r e g a r d
jnatat (AV. XIX. 15 s ), g i v e n as jnatat (un-
accented), as an anomalous i m p e r a t i v e ; but
it is the ablative of the past participle.
10 B o t h f o r m s are omitted by AVERY 2 4 3 ;
the latter is r e g a r d e d b y GRASSMANN as a
participle.
 35»

P I . 2. grnìta1, grbhnUa, jinita, puniti and punitaprnlta, mathnUa

(AV.), mrnita (A V.), strutta (AV.). — W i t h -tana: punTtana, pr nitan a,
srinUana. — 3. asnantu (AV.), grnantu (AV. TS.), grhnantu (AV.). janantu
(AV.), pundntu, mathnantu (AV.), badhnantu (AV.), s'rnantu, srTnantu ( A V . ) ,
sinantu (AV.).
Middle. Sing. 2. grbhnisva (Kh. iv. 5 * ) , prnXsva (Kh.11. 8'), vr'urvd. —
3. strnttsm, hrnltJm.
PI. 2. jrinidhvam (AV.), vrnidhvam. — 3. janatàm J, vrnatam (AV.).

Present Participle.
479. Active, asndnt-, f. -ati- (AV.), isnànt-, usnant-, gj-ndnt-, gfhnant-
jìndnt-, f. -a//-, jindnt- (AV.), pundnt-, f. -ati-, prnant-4, prXnant-, mathnant-,
minant-, f. -ati-, musnant-, mrndnt-, rinant-, srlnant-, skabhnànt-, strndnt-,
f. -ati- (AV.).
Middle. Apnìna-, isnand-, grnànd-, grhnUnd- (AV.), j'Snlna-, drUnatid-,
puntina-, prtnSnd-, minana-, rinand-, vrnàni-, sj-nànd-, irathnana- (AV.),.
srTnàna-, strnana-, hrtiàna-.

Imperfect Indicative.
480. Active. Sing. 1. ajanam, asn3m. — 2. dksinas, agrbhnàs, apfnàs,
dmin is, amusnSs, aramnas, arinàs, astabhn3s\ ubhnàs, rinSs, srathnàs. —
3. agrbhmt, agfhnàt (AV.), aj'anst (AV.), aprnSt, aprìnàt, àbadhnZt, amathnat,
amimt, amusnSt, dramnat, drinSt, asrnat, dstabhnat, dstrnit\ Hsnat (AV.),,
aubhnàt-, janat, badhnìit (AV.).
Du. 2. dmusnìtam, arinTtam, avfnltam. — PI. 2. arinTta. — 3. akrlnan
(AV.), agrbhnan, agfhnan ( A V . TS.), a/anani, apunan, abadknan. asrathnan,
dstr/ian; àsnan6 (AV.); àsnan (x. 176 1 ), rindn (x. 138')-
Middle. Sing. 1. dvrni. — 3. abadhmta (TS.i. 1. io 2 ), àvrnXta, asrlnlta.—
PI. I. avfnìmahi. — 3. agrbhnata djanata (TS. 11. 1. 113); grbhnata.

II. T h e Perfect System.

BENFEY, Vollständige Grammatik p. 372—38t. — DELBRÜCK, Verbum 112—134. —
AVERY, Verb-Inflection 249—253. — WHITNEY, Sanskrit Grammar p. 279—296; Roots 219 —
221. — v. NEGELEIN, Zur Sprachgeschichte 70—78.
481. Like the present system, the perfect has, besides an indicative, the
subjunctive, optative and imperative moods, as well as participles and an
augmented tense, the pluperfect. It is of very frequent occurrence, being taken,
by nearly 300 verbs in the Samhitäs. It is formed in essentially the same
way from all roots, its characteristic feature being reduplication.

1. T h e Reduplicative Syllable 8 .
482. The reduplicative vowel is as a rule short. It is, however, long i a
more than thirty verbs. These are kati- 'be pleased' : cä-kan-, kip- 'be adapted'
: ca-klp-; gr- 'wake' : ja-gr-\ grdh- 'be greedy' : jä-gfdh--, typ- 'be pleased' :
ta-tcp--, trs- 'be thirsty' : tj-trs-; dhr- 'hold' : dä-dkf-; nam- 'bend' : nl-nam-;

1 Also the transfer form according to the (the participle nom. sing. m. janan is
a- class, gytiala (AV. v. 279). common).
* With strong instead of weak base. 0 In prainan (AV. XI. 33») the Pada text

3 In Khila II. 10 s wrongly janitam. reads pra-asnan.

4 With fem. pfnattd-, a transfer to the 7 Also the transfer forms aminanta and
a- class. grnanta (vm. 37).
5 v. NEGELEIN57 also gives the unaugmented 8 On the reduplicative syllable see v. NEGE-.

form janan (RV. AV.), which I cannot trace LEIN 7 0 ; c p . BRUGMANN, G r u n d r i s s 2 , 8 4 6 .

352 I- ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4. VEDIC GRAMMAR.

mah- 'be liberal' : ma-rnahmfj- 'wipe' : ma-mrj-; mrs- 'touch' : ma-rnrs-;

radh- 'be subject' : ra-radh-; ran- 'rejoice' : ra-ran-; rabh- 'grasp' : ra-rabh-;
vatic- 'be crooked' : va-vak-; van- 'win' : vS-van-; vas- 'desire' : va-val-; vas-
'clothe' : va-vas-; vas- 'roar' : va-vas-; vrj- 'twist' : va-vrj-; vrt- 'turn' : va-vrt-;
vrdh- 'grow' : va-vrdh-; vfs- 'rain' : va-vrs-; sad- 'prevail' : sa-sadsah- 'prevail'
: sa-sah-; skambh- 'prop' : ca-skambh-; dl- 'shine' : di-dt-; dhi- 'think' : dl-dhl-;
pi- 'swell' : pT-pl-; Aid- 'be hostile' : ji-hid- ( A V 1 . ) ; ja- 'be swift' : ju-ju-; tu-
'be s t r o n g ' : tU-tu-; su- 'swell' '• s'a-s'u-1.
a . T h e reduplication of r ( = a r ) and I ( = al) is always a'-, e. g. kr-
'make' : cakr-; grdh- 'be greedy' : ja-gfdh-; kip- 'be adapted* : ca-klp-.
b . T h e reduplication of a, i, u is made with a, t, it respectively; e. g.
Jihad- 'chew' : ca-khad-; bhl- 'fear' : bib hi--, budh- 'know' : bu-budh-.
T h e r e are, however, certain exceptions to this rule.
1. R o o t s c o n t a i n i n g ya or va a n d liable to Sampras&rana in other f o r m s (such as
t h e past passive participle), r e d u p l i c a t e w i t h /' a n d u respectively K T h o s e with ya a r e :
tyaj- 'forsake' : ti-tyaj-; yaj- 'sacrifice' : i-yaj-\ vyac- ' e x t e n d ' : vi-vyac-; syand- 'move on' :
si-syand- (AV.). Similarly cyu- 'stir' : ci-cyu-* (beside cu-cyu-), a n d dyttt- 'shine' : didyut-4.
T h o s e with va- a r e : vac• 'speak' : u-vac-\ vad- 'speak' : u-vad-; vap- 'strew' : u-vap-\ vah-
'carry' : u-vah-; svap- 'sleep' : su-svap-. T h e three roots yam- ' r e a c h ' , van- 'win', vas-
'wear', however, have the full r e d u p l i c a t i o n : ya-yam-, va-van-, va-vas-\ and var- ' s p e a k '
h a s it optionally: vavac- beside n-vac-S. — a. T h e roots bhu- 'be', su- ' g e n e r a t e ' , and
iT- 'lie', reduplicate w i t h a: ba-i/ui-; sa-sii- (beside su-sii-, AV ) ; Ja-si- (in t h e participle
ia-say-ana•)
C. In roots beginning with vowels, the reduplication coalesces with the
initial of the root to a long v o w e l ; e. g. an- 'breathe' : an--, av- 'favour' : ¿iv-;
as'- 'eat' : as'-; as- 'be' : as-; ah- 'say' : ah-; f- 'go' : ar- ( = a-ar-); ap- 'obtain'
: ap-; X4- 'praise' : Td-; tr- 'set in m o t i o n ' : tr-; ah- 'consider' : Bh-. But if the
root begins with i or u, the reduplicative syllable is separated, in the sing,
act., from the strong radical syllable by its own semivowel: i- ' g o ' : 3. pi.
Ty-ur, but 2. sing, i-y-e-tha; uc- ' b e pleased': 2. sing. mid. uc-i-st!, but 3 . sing,
act. u-v-oc-a7.
a. Five roots b a g i n n i n g with prosodically long a, reduplicate not with a, but with
t h e syllable an-. Only two of these, b o t h containing a nasal, viz. ami• 'attain' and atij-
•anoint', m a k e several f o r m s ; the f o r m e r , 3. sing, dn-umi-a a n d an as a, pi. I . an-ai-ma,
2. an-ai-a, 3. an-ai ur; mid. sing. 1.3. an-as-i; subj. pi. I. an-as-a-mahai\ opt. sing. I . an-ai-
yam*\ the latter, an-anja (VS. v m . 2 9 ; TS. HI.3. I0>); mid. sing. I. an-aj-t, pi. 3. an-aj-re\
subj. sing. I. an aj-a\ opt. 3. sing, an-aj-yat. T h e root fdh- (reduced from ardh-) ' t h r i v e ' ,
which has a nasalized present stem 9, makes the forms an-fdh-ur (AV.) a n d an-jdh-e.
T h r o u g h the influence of these nasalized verbs, their method of reduplication spread to
two others which show no trace of a nasal anywhere. Thus from arc- 'praise' occur t h e
f o r m s an-fc-ur and an-fc-i-, a n d f r o m arh- 'deserve', an-^h-ur (TS 1 .) beside arh-iri
•(RV 1 .). T h e r e are besides two isolated forms of doubtful meaning, probably f o r m e d f r o m

1
T h e quantitative form of t h e s t e m is | 4 D u e to the vocalic pronunciation of t h e
governed by t h e law that it may not contain y: ciu- and din/-.
(except in the I. sing, act.) two prosodically 5 T h i s root thus shows t h e transition
short vowels; t h e only exceptions in t h e f r o m t h e full to the Sampras&rana redupli-
weak stem being the two irregular f o r m s cation.
tatane, I. sing, mid., and jajanur, 3. pi. act. 6 Cp. BRUGMANN, Grundriss 2, 846.
T h u s sah- reduplicates sasah- and once sasaA- 7 T h e s e are the only two e x a m p l e s to be
(weak). Cp. BENFEY'S articles ' D i e Quanti- m e t with in t h e Sarnhitas of this form of
tatsverschiebungen in den Samhita- und Pada- 1 reduplication.
T e x t e n ' , GGA. 19 ff. 8 Beside aiattir, asathc, etc., f r o m as-, the
1
In most of t h e forms f r o m a• and f - ' unnasalized form of t h e same root. Cp.
roots, the Pada text has a. BRUGMANN, Grundriss 2, p. 12 t i 4 .
3 T h e s e v e r b s originally had the full redu- 9 T h u s fnadhai,j-ndhyam,j-ndhant-, accord-
plication ya- and va- as is shown by t h e ing to t h e infixing nasal class,
evidence of the Avesta, which has this o n l y ;
c p . BARTHOLOMAE, I F . 3 , 3 8 (S 59).
 VIL VERB. PERFECT SYSTEM. 353
nasalized roots: an-rj-ur ( A V 1 . ) , from rj- 'attain' (withpresent stem f>ij-)and an-ah-a
2. pi. act., perhaps from amh- 'compress' 3 .
T h i s form of reduplication evidently arose from a radical nasal having originally
b e e n repeated along with the initial vowel, w h i c h is lengthened as in many other stems
(ri-katt , e t c ) , while the root itself is shortened by dropping the nasal 4 . In the modal
forms anaj-3, anaj-yat, an-ai-amahai the reduplicative vowel seems to have been shortened
b e c a u s e an- came to be regarded as containing an augment (like anaf, aorist of nai-
'attain')5.
d . A few irregularities in regard to consonants also appear in the
formation of the reduplicative stem. i . T h e root bhr- 'bear' reduplicates
with j (as if from Vhf-), making the stem ja-bhfforms from which occur
nearly thirty times in the R V . , beside only two forms from the regular stem
ba-bhr-. — 2. In forming their stem, the five roots ci- 'gather*, ci- 'observe',
cit- 'perceive', ji- 'conquer', hart- 'smite', revert to the original guttural (as in
other reduplicated forms) in the radical syllable: ci-ki-, ci-kit-, ji-gi-, ja-ghan-.
e. T h e root vid- 'know* loses its reduplication along with the perfect
sense 6 . Thus vM-a '1 know'; vid-vAms- 'knowing'. Some half dozen other
roots show isolated finite forms without reduplication; and four or five more
have unreduplicated participial forms. T h u s taks- 'fashion' makes taks-athur
and taks-ur-, yam- 'guide' :yam-atur; skambh- ' p r o p ' : skambh-dthur, skambh-ur1;
nind- ' b l a m e ' : nitid-ima7; arh- "be worthy' : arh-ire-, cit- 'perceive' : cet-atur
( A V . V S . S V . ) 8 . T h r e e unreduplicated participles are common: das'-vAms-
and dSs-i-vAms- (SV.) 'worshipping', beside the rare dadHs-vAms--, mldh-vAms-
'bountiful'; sah-vAms- 'conquering', beside sasah-vAms-. There also occurs once
the unreduplicated jdni-vAms- (in the form vi-janus-ah) beside jajnivAms-
'knowing' (from Yjha-); and the isolated vocative khid-vas may be the equi-
valent of *cikhid-vas, from khid- 'oppress' 9 .

2. T h e Root.
483. Like the present and imperfect, the perfect is strong in the
sing. act. Here the root, as a rule, is strengthened, while it remains un-
c h a n g e d in the weak forms. But if it contains a medial a or a final a, it
remains unchanged in the strong forms (except that a is lengthened in the
3. sing.), while it is reduced in the weak.
In the strong stem, the radical vowel takes Guna, but in the 3. sing, a
final vowel takes Vrddhi instead o f Guija 1 0 . T h u s vis- 'enter' makes vivas'-;
druh- 'be hostile', dudrSh-; kft- 'cut', cakdrt--, but bhl- 'fear', 2. bib hi-,
3. bibhdi-; sru- 'hear', 1. 2.s'us'ro-, 3. susrau-; kf- 'make', 1. 2.cakdr-, 3. cakAr
In the weak stem, on the other hand, the root remains unchanged; thus
vivis-, dudruhcakrt-, bibhl-, susru-, cakf-.
a. Some irregularities occur in the treatment of the radical vowel. 1. T h e verb

1 According to both the infixing nasal root beside caskabh ana- (AV.), and ninid-ur.
class, 3. pi. ynjalf, and the a- class, 3. sing. 8 W i t h strong radical syllable.
f-njati. 9 DELBRÜCK, Verbum 148, adds dabhur,
» Probably for *änaha; cp. the weak stem but this is rather aorist (beside perf. dfihur).
sasäh- beside säsah-. so On the origin of this distinction between
3 Cp. DELBRÜCK, Verbum 145, and WHITNEY, the 1. sing, and the 3. sing. cp. J. SCHMIDT,
Roots, under ahh 'be narrow or distressing'. K Z . 25,8fT. and STREITBERO, IF. 3, 383—386.
4 E x c e p t in the form än-amia (cp. ijyeyK- n T h i s distinction is invariable in the R V . ,
rat) beside än-äia («= -T)»OIM). and the rule seems to be the same in the
5 Cp. the Greek aor. inf. iy-ryK-ein and theA V . WHITNEY 793 d mentions caiära as an
p e r f e c t ¿r-ijivyK-roa. exception, but this form is 3. sing, in all
6 Cp. BEZZENBERGER, G G A . 1879, p. 8 1 8 ; the passages given in his A V . I n d e x ; and
J. SCHMIDT, K Z . 2 5 , 3 ; BRUGMANN, Grundriss j a g r a h a ( A V . I I I . l 8 J ) is evidently a corruption;
2, 848. see WHITNEY'S note and cp. p. 356, note 9.
7 W i t h the strong (nasalized) form of the
Indo-ariiche Philologie. I. 4. 23
354 I . ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4. V E D I C G R A M M A R .

mrj- 'wipe' takes Vfddhi instead of Guna throughout the strong stem: mamarj-i. —
2. Two instances of the strong stem being used in weak forms occur in the KY.:
pi. 1. yuyofima and 3. vivesur * beside the regular vivisur. — 3. The radical vowel of
bhu- remains unchanged in the strong as well as the weak forms, interposing v before
vowels; thus sing. 2. babhu-tha, pi. 3. babku-v-ur. —4. The weak stem of tf- 'cross' appears
in the RV. as titir- and tutur-\ thus sing. 3. tatar-a, but pi. 3. lilir-ur, part, litir-vams-, opt.
sing. 3. tuiur-yat
a. Roots containing medial a leave the radical syllable unchanged in
sing. 1. 2., lengthening the vowel in sing. 3.; they reduce it in the weak stem
by contraction, syncopation, or loss of nasal.
1. The roots with initial /a- and va-, which reduplicate with the vowels
i and » 4 respectively, take Samprasarana, the result being contraction to
r and a. Thus from yaj- 'sacrifice': strong stem i-ydj-, weak tj- (= »-//-) 5;
vac- 'speak' : u-vac- and He- ( = u-uc-)\ vad- 'speak' : u-vad- and ud-\ vap-
'strew' : u-vap- and Bp-', vas- 'dwell' : u-vas- and us-', vah- 'carry' : u-vah- and
ah-. The root va- 'weave' is similarly treated in the form pi. 3. a-v-ur
(= u-u-v-ur). Samprasarana of the root also appears in the weak stem of
svap- 'sleep' and of grabh- and grah- 'seize' : su-svap- and su-sup-; ja-grdbh-,
ja-grah- and ja-grbh-, ja-grh-. The roots yam- 6, van-, vas- 'wear' have the full
reduplication throughout; yam- taking Samprasarana and contracting in the
weak stem, van- syncopating its a, and vas- retaining it throughout: ya-yam-
and yem- {—ya-im); va-van- and va-vn-; va-vas- (both strong and weak).
2. More than a dozen roots containing a between single consonants and
reduplicating their initial without change, contract the reduplication and root
to a single syllable with medial a. The type followed by these verbs was
doubtless furnished by sad- 'sit', which forms the weak stem sed- (=• *sa:d-),
beside the strong sa-sad-, and supported by yam-, with its weak stem yem-
(— ya-im) beside the strong yayam-The other stems showing this contraction
are formed from tap- 'heat', dabh- 'harm', nam- 'bend', pac- 'cook', pat- 'fall',
yat- 'stretch', yam- 'guide', rabh- 'seize', labh- 'take', sak- 'be able', sap- 'curse',
sap- 'serve'. The roots tan- 'stretch' and sac- 'follow' also belong to this class
in the A V . , but not in the R V . The root bhaj- 'divide' though not redupli-
cating with an identical consonant in its strong stem ba-bhaj-, follows the
analogy of this group in forming the weak stem bhej-.
3. Four roots of this form, however, simply syncopate the radical a
without contracting. These are jan- 'beget' \jajn-, strong jajan-\ pan- 'admire'
: papn-, strong papan- \, man- 'think' : mamn- 8; van- 'win' : vavn-, strong vavan-.
Three others have this syncopated as well as the contracted form: tan- 'stretch'
: tatn- and ten- (AV.); pat- 'fall' : papt- and pet-\ sac- 'follow' : sas'c- and sec-
(AV.). Syncopation of medial a also takes place in four roots with initial
guttural: khan 'dig' : cakhn- (AV.), strong cakhan--, gam- 'go' : jagm-, strong
jagam-; ghas- 'eat' : jaks-, strong jaghas-\ han- 'smite' : jaghn-, strong jaghdn-.
4. In a few roots with medial a and a penultimate nasal, the latter
is lost in the weak stem*. Thus krand- 'cry out' : cakrad--, tarns- 'shake' :
tatas--, skambh- 'prop' : caskabh- (AV.), strong cSskambh--, stambh- 'prop' :

» The same irregularity appears in the 6 The analogy of yam- is followed by

present stem. yaj- in the one form yeje (beside ije); cp.
a Cp. B&UGMANN, Grundriss a, p. 1223'. note 5.
3 C p . v . NEGELEIN 74«. 7 See BARTHOLOMAE, D i e ai. i - F o r m e n im
4 But they had the full reduplication in 1 schwachen Perfect, KZ. 27, 337—366; BJLUG-
the Ilr. period; cp. BRUGMANN, Grundriss 2,' MANN, Grundriss 2, p. 1222; cp. v. NEGELEIN
p. 12203. 713.
5 In the one form yejl (beside ije), yaj- j 8 f he strong stem does not occur,
follows the analogy of yam-, preserving a j 9 Cp. BRUGMANN, Grundriss 2, p. 12174.
trace of the old reduplication ya-. j
 V I I . VERB. P E R F E C T SYSTEM. 355

tastabh-, strong tastdmbh-. Similarly, from dambh-, the nasalized form of

dabh-1 'harm', is formed dadabh-, strong dadambh- (AV.); and from rambh-, the
nasalized form oi rabh-2 'seize', rarabh-. From dams- 'bite', only the participle
dadasvims- occurs. The root bandh- 'bind', both loses its nasal and contracts,
forming the weak stem bedh- (AV.) beside the strong babandh- (AV.).
b. R o o t s with final a retain that vowel in the strong stem, but in the
weak reduce it to i i before consonants and drop it before vowels. Thus dha-
'put' employs dadhti- in the strong forms, dadhi- and dadh- in the weak.

3. Endings.
484. The endings in the indicative active are all peculiar (excepting
the secondary -va * and -ma), while in the middle they are identical (excepting
the 3. sing, -e and 3. pi. -re)s with the primary middle endings of the present
They are the following:
Active Middle
sing. du. pi sing. du. pi.
I. -a [-va] -ma i. [-vdhi\ -mähe
2. -tha -âtAur6 -li 2. -sé -àthe -dhvé
3- -a -titur6 -tir7
3- -(ite -ré
Roots ending in -3 take the anomalous ending -au8 in the 1. and 3. sing,
a c t ; e. g. dha- 'put' : da-dhau. The only exception is the root pra- 'fill',
which once forms the 3. sing, pa-prd (1. 69') beside the usual pa-prau.
a. Consonant endings. These are, as a rule, added directly to the
stem. No forms with -va or -vdhe occur in the Samhitas; -mahe is always added
direct, as is also -dkve in the only form in which it occurs, dadhi-dhvt'. The
remaining consonant endings, -t/ia, -ma, -se, -re, are nearly always added direct
to stems ending in vowels, but frequently with the connecting vowel -<- to
stems ending in consonants.
x. Roots with final a always add the endings directly to the stem,
which reduces the radical vowel to i9 in the weak forms; e. g. dadi-tha;
dadhi-ma, dadhi-sJ, dadhi-rP°.
2. Roots with final 7 and u also always add these endings direct to
the stem; e . g . / / - 'conquer': jige-tha\ ttl- 'lead' : ninltha; su- 'press' : susu-ma;
cyu- 'move' : cicyu-st; hu- 'sacrifice' : juhu-ri-, ha- 'call' : juha-rd. The only
exception is bhu-, which (doubtless owing to the fondness of this verb for
-&v-) forms babhnv-i-tha twice in the RV. beside the usual babha-tha, and
babhav-i-ma once in the AV.
1
From which is formed the weak stem shown by the evidence of the Avesta; cp.
debh: BRUGMANN, K G . 797 (p. 597).
2
From which is formed the weak stem 8 This has not been satisfactorily explained;
reih-. cp. BRUGMANN, G r u n d r i s s 2, p. 1 2 2 3 - 1 .
i See DELBRÜCK, Verbum 147 (p. 120); 9 This < as the reduced form of a (cp.
BRUGMANN, G r u n d r i s s 2, 844 (p. 1 2 0 6 — 8 ) ; hi td- etc., from dha-), occurring in such very
c p . v. BRADKE, I F . 8, 1 2 3 — 1 3 7 ; 1 5 6 — 1 6 0 ; common verbs as da.- 'give' and dha- "put*,
REICHELT, B B . 2 7 , 94. was probably the starting point for the use
4 No perfect form with -va is, however, of i as a connecting vowel in other verbs;
found in the Samhitas. b u t cp. BRUGMANN, G r u n d r i s s 2, p . 1 2 0 8 ' ;
5 Both of these, however, occasionally c p . a l s o I F . 8, 1 2 3 — 1 6 0 .
10
appear in the present ind. mid. The vowel is dropped before -ri in
6
The a is here probably not connecting dadh-re, which occurs once beside the very
vowel but identical with the a of the 2. pi.; common dadhi-rl. Similarly the stem of da-
a-tur getting its r from the 3. pi. -ur, and 'give', is shortened before the ending -rire
a-thur being then formed like -thas beside in dad-rire, which occurs once (with passive
•tas: cp. BRUGMANN, K G . p. 597. sense).
7 That r (and not J) is here original is
23»
356 I. ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4. VEDIC GRAMMAR.

3. Roots w i t h final -r add the endings -tha, -ma, and -se direct (ex-
cepting two or three forms), but -re always with connecting -/-; thus kr- 'do'
: cakar-tha, cakr-ma, cakr-si, but cakr-i-ri. Connecting -i- before the other
endings appears in ar-i-tha, Sr-i-ma (r- 'go'); and in jabhr-i-se (bhr- 'bear').
4. R o o t s w i t h final consonant add -tha, -ma-, se, -re direct if the
last syllable of the stem is prosodically short, but with the connecting vowel
-i- if that syllable is l o n g 1 . Thus tatan-tha; jagan-ma, jagrbh-ma, yuyuj-ma\
dadrk-si,, vivit-se; ciklp-ri, tatas-ri, duduh-re, pasprdh-ri, yuyuj-rc, vivid-re and
others; but Ss-i-tha, uvk-i-tha, vivid-i-tha; uc-i-ma, papt-i-ma, sed-i-ma;
tatn-i-se; tj-i-ri, jagm-i-re, tataks-i-rJ*, yet-i-rd. T h e only exception is vit-tha,
which as an old form inherited from the IE. period (Greek OI<J-%OL) without
reduplication, remained unaffected b y the influence of reduplicated forms.
a. Six roots ending in consonants add -rirt3 instead of -re: cikit-rire (beside the
more usual cikil-re), jagrbh-rire (once beside the usual jagfbh-re), bubhuj-rirc (once), z-ivid-
rire (once beside vivid-re), sasfj-rire (once), and duduh-rire (once in the SV. for the
common duauh-re of the RV.) 4 .
b . V o w e l endings. Before terminations beginning with vowels final
radical vowels are variously treated. 1. t, if preceded by one consonant,
b e c o m e s y, if p r e c e d e d by more than one, iy\ e. g. from bhi- 'fear', bibhy-
atur, bib/iy-ur; but from sri- 'resort', sis'riy-e. — 2. Final u ordinarily becomes
uv; e. g. yu- 'join* : yuyuv-t; sru- 'hear' : susruv-e; sa- 'swell' : s'us'uve. But
S b e c o m e s v in hu- 'call', e. g. ju-hv-i\ and Uv in bhu- 'be' and sU- 'bring
forth', even in strong forms5; e. g. 3. sing, ba-bhuv-a, sasUv-a6. — 3. Final -r
b e c o m e s r; e. g. from kr- 'make', cakr-d, cakr-e. But -r becomes ir in titir-ur
from //- 'cross', and in 3. sing, tistir-e, part, tistir-ana-, from stf- 'strew' (the
only root with a r vowel preceded by two consonants that occurs in the
perfect).
Perfect Indicative.
485. T h e forms actually occurring, if made from kr- 'make', would be
the following:
A c t i v e . Sing. 1. cakara 2. cakartha. 3. cakdra. — Du. 2. cakrathur.
3. cakrdtur. — PI. 1. cakrma. 2. cakra. 3. cakrur.
Middle. Sing. 1. cakri. 2. cakfst. 3. cakrt. — Du. 2. caknithe.
3. cakrdte. — PL 1. cakrma/ie. 2. cakrdhvi. 3. cakrirJ6.
T h e forms which actually occur are the following:
A c t i v e . Sing. 1. 3sa, uvapa (TS. 1. 5. 3*), cakara, ciketa (cit- 'observe'),
jagama, jagrabha, jagraha (AV.)9, jaghasa ( A V . vi. 1 1 7 2 ) 1 0 , ji/tl/a1', tatdpa,
dudriha, papana, babhava, bibhaya, mimaya (ml- 'diminish'), rarana, rirebha,
vivesa, vida s'is'raya, susrava. T h e T S . (111.5.5') has the Vrddhi form vavara
{vf- 'cover').

1 This is in accordance with the rhythmic 5 Instead of the normal av.

rule that the stem may not have two proso- 6 This is the only perfect form of \'su-
dically short vowels in successive syllables. occurring.
2 The strength of this rhythmic rule is 7 The I. and 3. of dha- *put' would both
well illustrated by the same root vac• having be dadhau\ of vid- 'find', both vivida.
the two collateral forms vavai-fi and uc-i-fc; 8 The 3. pi. of vid- 'find' would be vividre.
cp. also the unique lengthening, in a weak 9 AV. ill. 183 reads jagraha, but this must
form, of the radical a in sa-sah-i-ft (besidebe emended to jagraha-, see W H I T N E Y ' S
the usual sasah•) and the Gupa in yuyop-i-md. note.
3 The additional r may have come into 10 jaghasa here is a misprint for jaghas a:
use under the influence of forms from roots see WHITNEY'S note on the passage.
in ft like dadhr-ire from \dhf-. 11 Also in AV. iv. 32®, but written jihufa
4 The ending -rire is once also added to in the Samhita text, but ji- in Pada. See
a root ending in a vowel: dad-rire, fromWHITNEY'S n o t e .
\da-. 1* Unreduplicated form.
 VII. VERB. P E R F E C T SYSTEM. 357
1
2. iyatha and iyetha, cakdrtha, jagdntha {gam-'go'), jaghdntha, jabhartha,
jigetha (ft- 'conquer'), tatantha, dadatha, dadhdrtha (dhr- 'hold'), dadhAtha,
nine'tha, papstha (pa- 'drink'), paprAtha1, babhätha, yayantha (yam- 'guide'),
yayAtha, vävdntha, vavdrtha (vf- 'cover'), vivydktha (vyac- 'extend'), vitthaIO,
sasdttha (sad- 'sit'). — With connecting -/'-: Apitha (AV.), Aritha ( f 'go'),
Avitha (av- 'favour'), Asitha (as- 'be'), uvocitha (uc- 'be pleased'), cakartitha
(krt- 'cut'), tatdrditha (trd- 'split'), dudohitha, dudrohitha (AV.), babhävitha,
ruröjitha, rurodhitha, rurohitha (AV.), vavdksitha, vividitha (vid- 'find'), vivesitha.
3. äna, ändmsa and änäsa (ams'- 'attain'); Apa, ära ( f - 'go'), ava, Asa
(as- 'eat'), Asa (as- 'be' and as- 'throw'), Aha (ah- 'say'), iyAya (i- 'go'), uvAca
(vac- 'speak'), uvAsa (vas- 'shine'), uvaha, uvoca (uc- 'be pleased'), cakarta
(krt- 'cut"), cakdrsa (Ars- 'be lean', AV.), cakAra, cakräma, cakhAda, cakhAna
(VS.v.23), cacdksa, cdcarta (eft- 'bind', AV.), cacAra (AV.), cacchanda, caskdnda,
cilskdmbha, cikAya (ci- 'gather'), cikaya (ci- 'observe'), cike'ta3 (cit- 'perceive'),
fagAma, jagrAha, jaghAna, jaghAsa, jajAtia, jajAra (AV.), jabhAra4, figAya
(ji- 'conquer'), jujosa, juhAva (ha- 'call'), tatdksa, tatarda, tatarha (AV.),
tatAna, tatApa, tatära, tatsära (tsar- 'approach stealthily'), tastambha, tätäna
(RV 1 .), tityAja, tutAva (tu- 'be strong'), tutöda, daddmbha (dambh- 'harm',
AV.), daddrs'a, dadAbha (dabh- 'harm'), dadAra (dr- 'split'), dadAsa (d3s-
'worship'), dadharsa, dädhAra, didha (div- 'play', AV.), didisa (AV.), did-
yöta (AV.), dXdAya (VS. X I I . 34), nannia (nas- 'be lost'), nanAhaS ( A V . ) ,
nänäma, nitiAya, papAca (AV.), papäta (AV.), papäda, paprA6, pipesa, pipesa,
pjpaya, puposa, babdndha (VS. AV.), babarha (bfh- 'make strong', AV.),
babhdtija1 (bhanj- 'break'), babhAja, babhüva, bibhäya, bibhdda, mamanda (mattd-
'exhilarate'), mamdrsa, mamAtha (math- 'shake', AV.), mam Ada (mad- 'exhilarate'),
mamAra (mr- 'die'), mamArja (mrj- 'wipe', AV.), 1. mimaya (ma- 'bellow'),
2. mimAya (mi- 'fix'), 3. mimaya (ml- 'damage'), mlmAya (mi- 'damage', AV.),
mimetha (mith- 'alternate'), mimydksa, mumoda, yayama, yuyoja (AV.), yuyodha,
yuydpa, rardksa, rarAda, rarAdha, ririca, ruroca, ruroja, ruroha (AV.), vavaksa,
vavanda, vavdrta, vavdrdha, vavarha, vavdca8 (vac- 'speak'), vavara {vf- 'cover'),
vavrAja, vavdrta, vävAna, vivAya (vl- 'be eager'), vivida, viv&'a, vivdsa, vivyaca,
vMala, sasaka (AV.), sasApa (AV.), sisraya (s'ri- 'resort'), susoca, susrava,
sasarja, sasAda, sasAna, sasAra, sasuva, sasAha, sisedha, sisaya, susAva (su-
'press'). — With the ending -au: tasthdu, dadau, dadhdu, papdu (pa-
'drink'), paprdu, yaydu.
Du. 2. ärathur, ävdthur, asathur, lyathur, tsathur, Opdthur (YvaP~)>
ahdthur ( Yvah-), cakrdthur, cakhyathur (khya- 'see'), jagfbhathur, jagmathur,
figyathur (ji- 'conquer'), jijinvdthur9, tahsathur'", tasthdthur, daddthur,
dadhathur, ninyathur, papdthur (pa- 'drink'), paprathur, pipinvdthur1 *, pipyathur
(pT- 'swell'), petathur (\fpat-), babhovdthur, mimiksdthur, yayathur, yemdthur
( Yyam-), riricdthur, viddthurI0, vividdthur, vivyathur (vya- or vl- 'envelope'),
seddthur ( Ysad-), skambhdthurxa.
' The iiregularity of this form which | 5 Overlooked by WHITNEY, Roots, under
occurs once in the KV. and once in the AV. \nah-: AV. vi. 133*.
beside the regular iyitha is hard to explain. 1 6 The only occurrence of ä for au unless
* In VI. 177 this form stands for the 2. sing, jaha is a verbal form,
of prath- 'extend'; see NEISSER, B B . 3 0 , 3 0 2 . , 7 Omitted by A V E R Y 2 5 0 .
3 Occurs twice in the RV. also with the ' 8 RV 1 . beside the ordinary uvaca.
irregular accent ciketa. 9 From jirtv- 'quicken', a secondary root
4 It is very doubtful whether jaha vm. 4537 starting from the present stem ji-nu- of ji-
is 3. sing, perfect of ha- 'leave' (cp. DELBRÜCK, 'quicken'; see 469, a, 7.
10
Verbum p. 1 2 4 ) , like papra. PISCHEL, Vedische Unreduplicated form.
Studien I, 163 f., thinks this word with the | " From pitrv- 'fatten', which started from
following kd should be xe&Ajäkäko 'abandon- ; a present stem of the -nu class; see 469,
ing'. ROTH thinks (pw,]/aha is an interjection. ; a, 7.
35«

Du. 3. apatur, avatur, asatur (ai- 'attain'), asatur, Tydtur, uhdtur ( \rvah-),
cakratur, cikyatur (ci- 'observe'), cetaturjagmatur, jajnatur (jan- 'beget';,
jahatur (ha- 'leave'), tataksatur, tasthatur, dadatur, paprdtur {pra- 'fill'J, petdtur,
babhavdtur, mamatur (ma- 'measure'), mimiksatur {miks- 'mix'), yamdtur',
yematur {\fyam-), vavaksatur, v&vrdhatur, sasratur* {Vsr-, AV.), sisicatur,
sedatur (Ysad-).
PI. r. anasma {ami- 'attain'); cakrma, jaganma, jagrbhma, tasthi-md
( Ysthi-), dadhi-ma, yuyujma, rarabhma, rari-ma (ra- 'give'), vavanma, vidma
iuiruma (AV.), susuma. — With connecting -/'-: arima, asima {as- 'be',
AV.), Ucimd (Yvac-), udima {Yvad-), Bsimd (vas- 'dwell', AV.), cerima ( Ycar-,
AV.), jaghnima (yhan-, AV.), jihimsima (AV. TS.), dadaiima, nindima5,
nlnima6 (TS.111. 2.S3), paptima, babhUvima (AV.),yuyopima 7,yemimd, vavandima,
vidmdi, iekima (Yiak-, AV.), saicima, susUdima {Ysad-), sedima5 ( Ysad-).
1. anjha5 (RV1.), anaia {ami- 'attain'); Rsd {vas- 'shine'), cakra, jagmi10
(AV. TS.VS.), dadd, babhuva, yayd, vidai, iasasd, seka ( Ysak-), sedd {Vsad-).
3. anaiur {ams- 'attain'), anrc 'ir (Yarc-), anrdhur (AV.), anrh'tr (TS.
ill. 2.8'); apur, arur, as'ur {ai- 'attain'), asur (as- 'be'), ahur, tyir, tsur (1is-
'send'), ucur, udur {und- 'wet', AV.), uvur (va- 'weave'), asur (vas- 'shine'),
bhur ( Yvah-), cakramur, cakri'/r, cakhunr (khan-, AV.), caklpur (AV.), cikitur,
cikyur (ci- 'perceive'), cerur (Ycar-, AV.), jagrbhur, jagfhur (AV.), jagmur,
jaghnur (Y han-, AV.), jajam'ir11 and jajn'ir (jan- 'beget'), jabhrur (Y bhr-),
jahur (ha- 'leave'), jaharur'11 (Y hr-, AV.), jagrdhur, jigyur (ji- 'conquer'),
jugupur1*,jujusur, jujuvur (Yju-), taksurtataksur, tastabhur, tasth'ir, tatrpur
(AV.), tatrsur, titirur(Ytr-), tustuviir, dadaiur, dadur, dadhur, dadhrsur (AV.),
didyutur (TS. n. 2. 126), duduhur, dudruvur (AV.), debhur (dabh- 'harm'),
nanaksur, ninidur, paptir (pa- 'drink'), papt'ir (pat- 'fall'), paprur (pra- 'fill'),
pipiiur, pipyur ( Ypl-), babhuvnr, bibhidur, bibhyur (bhi- 'fear'), bedhur (bandh-,
AV.), mamur (mi- 'measure'), mamrur (mf- 'die'), mamrjur, mamfiur, mimiksur
(Ymyaks-), mimyur (mi- 'fix'), yamurz\ yayur, yuyudhur, yemur, raradhur
(YrSdh-), riripur, ruruc'ir, ruruhur, vavaksur, vavrjur, vavrur (vr- 'cover'),
vavaiur (vai- 'desire'), vUvrt'jr, vavfdhur, vidiir8, vividur, viviiur and (once)
vivesur '5, vivisur, saiasur, sairamur, iaiadur, iaiuvur, sekur ( Ys'ai-), saicur,
sasriir, sisyadur ( Ysyand-, AV.), sisicur, susupur ( Ysvap-), susuvur (VS. xx. 63),
susruvur (AV.), sedur (Ysad-), sepur, skambhur'4.
Middle. Sing. 1. ije, idhe (idh- 'kindle'), TsJ (is- 'move'), uh<! (ah- 'con-
sider'), caki(ka- = kan- 'be pleased'), cakre, jigye (ji- 'conquer'), tataneIO, tasthe,
tit vise, dade, tname (m3- 'measure'), mamahe, rari (Y ra-), iepi (Y sap-), sascc.

1 AV. in. »1»; SV. I. 2. 2. 1'°, explained by j 9 This form (vi. 48 s ) may b e 2. pi. from
BENFEY, SV. Glossary, as 3. du. perf. without. a root amh- for *anaha.
reduplication. W H I T N E Y , note on A V . 1 1 1 . 2 1 * , Cp. WHITNEY'S n o t e o n AV. vi. 974.
11
thinks it is a corruption for cetalu, but quotes This form without syncope occurs once
WEBER as taking it for 3. du. perf. from cat- in the RV., jajtiur twice.
'frighten into submission'. " WHITNEY on AV. in. 9 6 would emend
' Unreduplicated form with present meaning this irregular form, the reading of all the
(VI. 67 1 ). Mss., to jahur.
3 sisratur (RV».) is an anomalous 3. du. pres. 1 13 This is the only finite form of this
ind. of sf-, according to the reduplicating secondary root, and it occurs in a late hymn
class with perfect ending instead of *sisftas. (vii. 1039); the past participle gupita• also
4 T h e form vivifma which A V E R Y gives occurs twice in the tenth book. This \gup-
with a query is probably an error for was doubtless evolved from the denomina-
vivismas I. pi. pres. (VI. 23S- 4). tive gopa-ya- 'act as a cowherd'.
5 C p . I F . 3, 9 f . ; ZDMG. 48, 5 1 9 . Unreduplicated form occuring once.
6
T h e metre requires ninhna (see BR. '5 With irregular strong vowel.
under m- 'lead'). With unsyncopated vowel occurring
7 With strong radical syllable. o n c e ; 3. sing, taine.
8
Unreduplicated form.
 VII. VERB. PERFECT SYSTEM. 359

2. cakrsi, cicyuse, tasthi-se (AV.), dadrksi (drs- 'see'), dadhi-s¿\ papfsr

yuyuksi ( yuj-, AV.), rari-se, ririksi ( Yr¡c~), vavaksi ( Y vac-), vavfsi (vf-
' choose'), vivitse (vid- 'find'). — W i t h connecting -/'- : ücisi ( Yuc- and Y v a c )>
apise ( Yvat>-)i ühisc ( Yvah-), jajñisi ( Y jan-), jabhrise, tatnise, bed Aise (AV.),
sepisi ( Y¿op-, AV.), sasühise '.
3. anaji ( Y a 'V~), Snasi ( Y a '. n '-)> ¡Inrce, ílnrdhe; Use (as- 'throw'), i j i
( Yy<*j-), M ( Y i'/-), 1dh¿ ( Y idh-), TsJ (Ts- 'move'), Oce (uc- 'be pleased'), ape
( Yvap-), uhi 2 (ah- 'consider'), caki ( Y kà-), cakradi ( Ykrand-), cakrami,
cakré, caksadi (Arad- 'divide'), cükfpé (AV.), cikité ( V'«'/-), cuksubhi (ksubh-
'quake', AV.), cucyuve, jagrhe jagmi (Ygam-)¡ jojñi (Yjan-), jabhre( \fbhr-),
jigye (\fj>-), jihile (YAid-), jujusi, juhv¿ (ha- 'cali'), tataksé, tate (Yt3-
'stretch' = / t a n - ) , tatne ( ]/ tan-), tatre (tra- 'protect'), tasthe (Ystha-), titvisé,
itstire' (str- 'strew'), dádrs'e, dadi, dadhanvé*, dadhi.\ dadhri (dhr- 'hold'),
dadhvase (dhvams- 'scatter'), duduhe, dudhuve ( Y<iha-, AV.), nanaksé-, nunudi,
neme (Ynam-), paprksi", pape 2 (pi- 'drink'), páprathe (RV 1 .) and paprathi
(R.V*. AV 1 .), paprci ( /pra-, AV.), paspasi (spas- 'see'), pipisi, pipise, pipile,
pipye(pt-'sweW'), pece (Ypac-), babüdhí, babhre ( Y bhr-), bedh¿( Ybandh-, AV.),
bheji (bhaj- 'divide'), mamé (ma- 'measure'), mSmake, mSmfji, mimiksi 8,
yuyuji, yuyuvi (yu- 'join'), ye/i 9 ( Y y aJ')i yeme (Yyam-), rarapsi, rürabhe
( Y rambh-), riricé, runici, rebhi ( Yrabh-, AV.), vavaksi ( Y^aks-), vavartde,
vavné ( Y van')> vavri (vf- 'cover'), vavase (vas- 'desire'), vavase (vili. 4®, vas-
'clothe')10, vàvrje, vàvrti, vavfdhi, vide (vid- 'know'), vividi (vid- 'find'), vivyi
(vya- 'envelope'), vivye (vT- 'be eager'), salami (VS.xxxin. 87), sasrathe, sasri
(ir- 'crush'), sisriyi (sri- 'resort'), susruve, sBs'uve (sa- 'swell'), sepi ( Ys aP~,
AV.), sasàhé 11 and sasahe 1*, sasfji, sasri (sr- 'flow'), sasvaji, sisice, sisyade
(Ysyand-, AV.), susuvi (sa- 'bring forth').
Du. 2. dsnthe ( Y as- 'attain'), ijsthe (AV.), akyáthe*-i(rv.s66), cakramüthe,
cakráthe, cikithe 14 (ci- 'note'), dadáthe, dadhàthe, mamnÁthe ( Y man-), raràthe
(rà- 'give'), riricÁthe, sasràthe ( Ysf')-
3. tí sute* 5, cabrate, dadhàte, pasprdhüte, bhcjáte (bhaj- 'divide'), mamóte
(ma- 'measure'), mammlte (man- 'think'), yuyudhñte, yemáte ( Yy am~)i rebhàte
( Y rabh-, AV.), viìvrdhste xb, sasvajiite.
PI. 1. bubhujmáhe, mumucmáhe, vavj-máhe (vf- 'choose'), sisadmahe (s'ad-
'prevail'), sasrjmd/ie. — 2. dadhidhvi.
3. anajre ( Y añj-) ; cctkjpri, cikitri ( ]/V//-), jagrbhrijahi-re ( Y ha-, AV.),
juhuri, juhari, tatasri ( Y tons-) < tasthi-re, dádfsre, dadhi-ri, dadhre, dtiduhri,
nunudri, pasprdhri, pipisre, mami-ri (ma- 'measure'), mumucri, yuyujri, riricri,

1 With strong radical vowel: cp. p. 356, 9 yeje occurs three times in the RV. (only
note with a- and pra-), tji occurs twice as 3. sing.,
' With passive sense. once as I. sing.
I O m i t t e d by AVERY 250. WHITNEY, Roots, under vas- 'clothe'.
4 From dhanv- a transfer root from dhan- This form is placed by BR. and GRASSMANN
'run'. Cp. WHITNEY, Roots 8r. under a root vas- 'aim'.
5 From nai;- 'attain', a secondary form x . 1 0 4 ( A V E R Y sasahe), P a d a t e x t sasahe.
of nas• 'attain'; cp. WHITNEY, Roots 87. i " VIII. 9 6 ' 5 , sasahe), P a d a t e x t sasahe
6 IV. 437. This form (which is perhaps cp. RPr. 580, 582, 587, 589.
rather to be taken as I. sing.) may be formed '3 This seems to be an anomalous form
from pratf-, a secondary form of prach- f o r uhathe (i/h- ' c o n s i d e r ' ; c p . GRASSMANN).
' a s k ' ; c p . B E N F E Y , O . U. O . 3, 2 5 6 ; D E L - j '4 Irregular form (RV'.) for *ciiy-athe.
BRÙCKP. 1 2 6 4 ; WHITNEY, R o o t s , a n d B R . s . v. 15 Thus irregularly accented v. 66 2 . This
prach-. | form, aiate, also occurs five times unaccented.
7 fapri, given by AVERY 250 with a query, »6 T h e AV. has also the transfer form
does not seem to occur in the RV. vavrdhete.
8 From miks-, a desiderative formation »7 S e e n o t e s o n A V . XVIII. 34« in WHITNEY'S
from mis- ; çp. WHITNEY, Roots. Translation.
360

rurudhre, vivakre (vatic- 'move crookedly') 1 , vavasre2 (vas- 'bellow'), vivijre,

vidre\ vividré\ vivipre, vivisre, sisadré. — W i t h connecting -/'-: arhire
ásire (Kh. i. n 1 ) , ljir¿ (VO'tf/-)» ídkiré ( \fidh-), íriré4, ísiréi (is- 'send',
AV.), üciré (Vvac-, AV.), ühiré ( Yvah-), cakriré, cacaksiré (VS.XL. 10 : Up.),
jagmire, jajñiri ( Yjan-\ jabhriré ( bhr-), jihifiré ( Y hui-), íataksiré, tatniré
( V tan-), tastriréb ( YstrAV.), teñiré ( \rtan-, Vs! TS. AV.), dadhanvirf, dadhire
3
(Kh. i. 4 ), dadhrire ( Y dhr-), papire (pa- 'drink'), bedhire(Y ba/tdA-,AV.), bhejiré
( Ybhaj ), mimiksire ( Ymiks- 'mix', and Y myaks-),yetir¿ ( Yya^)iyem'rí ( Vyam'),
1
rurucire (Kh.l X2 ), rebhiré (Yrabh-), lebhiré (Y labh-), vavaksire, vavandiré,
vavasire, sasciré ( Y sac-), secirc ( Ysac-, AV.), sedire (Y sad-)- — W i t h ending
-rire: cikitrire ( Yjagrbhriré, dadrire ( Yds-), bubhujriré, vividrire, sasrjrire.

Moods of the Perfect.

486. Modal forms of the perfect are of rare occurrence in the Samhitas
except the R V . They are made from the perfect stem in the same way as
from the present stem. It is, however, not always possible to distinguish
modal forms of the perfect from those of other reduplicated stems (present
reduplicating class, reduplicated aorist, and intensive) either in form (because
the reduplication is in many instances the same) or in meaning (because the
perfect is often used in a present sense).

Perfect Subjunctive.
487. The normal method of forming the stem is to add -a 8 to the
strong perfect stem, accented on the radical syllable. In the active the
secondary endings are more usual; e. g. tustáv-a-t. If the primary endings
are added in the active, the reduplicative syllable is in several forms»
accented, as jújos-a-si10. In about a dozen forms, nearly all with secondary
endings, the weak stem " is employed, but whether the reduplicative syllable
was then accented is uncertain, because the examples that occur are un-
accented. Middle forms, numbering not many more than a dozen, occur only
in the 3. sing., with the ending -te, and in the 3. pi. with the ending -anta.
Active. Sing. 1. anaja— 2 . ji'tjosasi, dldáyasi, papi-cUsi'J; cakradas,
c¿lianas, cikitas ( Y cit-), ; ¿josas, tatanas, dadfls'as, djdáyas, papráthas, piprayas,
bubodhas, mamadas, mSmáhas, mumucas14, rUránas, sasáhas, siisüdas.
3. ciketati (Ycit-), jújosati, dádUsati, dadhársati, dlde'sati15, dídáyati,
búbodhati, mumocati, vavártati-, cikánat, caklpat (AV.), ciketat (J/a'/-),
jaghánat, jabhárat, jugurat (gur- = gf- 'greet'), jüjosat, jojuvat,4, tatánat,
tustávat, dádSsat, dadhánat, dadhársat, papráthaí, paspársat, pipráyat,
mamádat (AV.), mamandat, dldáyat, mumucat '4, mumurat (mur- = mf-'crush'),
mumkat, raránat, vavártat and vavrtatM, vavanat (TS. 11. 4. 5'), vividatM,
susravat, süsuvatsüsáhat, susüdat.
1
With reversion to the original guttural. 9 Cp. the accentuation of the reduplicating
2
With shortening of the radical vowel. class.
10
3 Without reduplication. Except the forms didäyasi, didayati,
4 In RV. regularly erire, Pp. a-Trire (but dadharsati and vavärtati.
in L 6 4 for erirl the accentuation should be >i The two roots muc- and dhff- make sub-
irire = a irire). The AV. has once sam-thirl junctive forms from both the strong and
(XIV. I4i> weak stem.
5 iiire with irregular accent is probably " RV. v. 54': this form (Pp. anajd] is
to be regarded as a present (450, 2). regarded by Delbrück I26b and Avery
6 IF. 8, Anzeiger 13. 251 as a 2. pi. ind.
7 From the secondary root dhatw• = dhan- '3 With double modal sign -3-.
'ron*. >4 With weak radical syllable.
4
Two subjunctive forms with double >5 Always ä-didesa/i in relative clauses.
modal sign •a- occur: papfcasi and vavfdhati.
 V I I . VERB. PERFECT SYSTEM. 361

Du. 2. ciketathas, jujosathas', ninUhas' (1. 181 1 ).

Pl. I. cakanama, tatanama, susavilma. — 2. jujosatha, bubodhatha. —
3. jujusan2, jujosan, tatdnan, paprathan, mamddan.
Middle. Sing. 1. sasvacdi* ( \fsvanc-). — $.jujosate\ tatdpate, dadhrsate%
yuyojate, vsvfdhate1, sasamate (Jam- 'labour'). — PI. 1. anasdmahai.

Perfect Injunctive.
4 8 8 . T h e r e are a few singular active and 3 . pl. middle forms which must
b e classed as injunctives, being identical in form with the corresponding un-
augmented persons of the pluperfect. These are: Sing. 2. sains (= *sasas-s). —
3. dudhot \dhu- 'shake'), sisets (si- 'bind'); sasvdr (= *sasvar-t, from svar-
'sound'); with connecting dadharsit.
Pl. 3. cakramanta, cakdnanta, tatdnanta, dadabhanta, paprathanta,
mSmahanta, rurucanta2, vavrdhitita2, vivyacanta.

Perfect Optative.
4 8 9 . This m o o d is formed by adding the accented optative modal suffix
combined with the endings ( 4 1 6 a) to the weak perfect stem. T h e active forms
are the commonest, occurring more than twice as often as those of the middle.
a. T h e r e are a few irregularities in the formation of this mood. I. T h e radical
vowels of pa- 'drink', sru- 'hear', and i f 'make', being treated as before the -ya of the
passive (444), the stems of these roots appear before the optative suffix as papl-, Hiiru
and cairi-. — 2. T h e vowel of the reduplicative syllable an- is shortened (as if
it contained the augment) in anajyat (J/anj-). — 3. A connecting -1- is interposed in
jaif-i-yai, while the radical i is combined with the ending in sisri/a. — 4. A transfer
according to the analogy of the a• conjugation is ririfts; possibly also si fit6.
Active. Sing. 1. &nasyam\ jagamy am, paprcyim, riricysm, vavftyim.
2. cakriyasT, juguryas (gur- = gf- 'greet'),pupusyas, pupUryJs (pur- —pr-,
'fill'), babhUyfts, turucySs, vavrtyas, vivisy3s, sttsrUyAs8.
3. anajyat-, cacchadyat, jakslyaO (ghas- 'eat'), jagamyat, jagSyat (gd- 'go'),
jagrbhyat, jugurydt, tutujyat, tuturyftt (Ytur- = tf-), nin'iyatpapatyat (AV.),
papiyat11 (pa- 'drink'), paprcyat, babhuyat, mamadyat, riricySt, vavftyat, sasadySt
(AV.), sasfjyat, sdsahylt.
Du. 2. jagamyat am, sus'rDydtam.
Pl. I. tuturyama, vavftyama, s'Xs'uydma, sasahydma.
3. jagamyur, tatanyur, dadhatiyvr, mamrdyur, vavrjyur, vavftyur.
Middle. Sing. 1. vavj-tlya. — 2. caksamithis, vavrdhlthds. — 3.jagraslta,
dudkttvUa, mamrjUa, varjtita, s'is'rTta (s'ri- 'resort'), susucita.
Pl. 1. vavrtimahi.
T h e r e also occurs in the middle one precative form: Sing. 2.
s3sak-T-s-thAs.
Perfect Imperative.
4 9 0 . T h e regular perfect imperative is formed like the present impera-
tive of the reduplicating class, the 3. sing, active being strong. Hardly more

1
Abnormal form without modal sign or of the root si-) according to the reduplicating
strong radical vowel; cp. HIRT, IF. 12, 220. class; or a reduplicated aorist injunctive
* W i t h weak radical syllable. | (GRASSMANN a n d W H I T N E Y 8 6 8 a).
6
3 This form occurs only once (in. 33*°) See note 5 on this form.
beside the j-aor. namsai, and may therefore j 7 C p . v . NEGELEIN 66.
8
b e an irregular redupl. aorist, to which it W i t h lengthened radical vowel.
is doubtfully assigned by WHITNEY 863 a. 9 W i t h interposed -«-.
4 SV. ßtjifaie. 10 C p . H I R T , I F . 1 2 , 2 2 0 .
11
5 This form, however, might be a transfer W i t h change of the final radical vowel
present optative from sä- (the collateral form : ä to f.
3Ö2

than twenty regular forms occur, nearly all of them being active. There are
also some irregular imperatives, being transfer forms which follow the analogy
of the a- conjugation, made from either the strong or the weak perfect stem.
A c t i v e . Sing. 2. cäkandhi, cikiddhi (Jfrit-), dididd/ii' (Y dis-), piprihi,
mumugdhi ( \fmuc-), sasadhi ( Ysäs- 'order'), susugdhi ( }f sue-).
3. cakantu, didestubabhütumamdttu, mumoktu, rärantu.
D u . 2. jajastdm.3 (Jas- 'be exhausted'), mumuktam, vavrktam.
PI. 1. jujustana, didistana ( \/ dis-), vavrttaria\
Middle. Sing. 2. dadhisvd, mimiksvd5, vavrtsva6.
PI. 2. dadhidhvam, vavrddhvam7 (vm. 20'";. — 3. With the unique
ending -ram-, dadj-sräm ( A V 1 . ) 8 'let be seen'.
a. T h e transfer forms are:
A c t i v e . D u . 2. jujosatam, mumöcatam. — PI. 2. mumkata9, rarandtl10
(1. 171«).
Middle. Sing. 2. piprdyasva, mamahasva, vavrdhasva, vavrsasva. —
PI. 3. mämahantäm.
P e r f e c t Participle.
WHITNEY, Sanskrit G r a m m a r 802—807. — DELBRÜCK, V e r b u m 229. — LINDNER
84 a n d 216.

491. There is an active and a middle participle, and both occur fre-
quently. Both are formed from the weak stem of the perfect, being accented
on the suffix. T h e strong form is made by adding the suffix -vAms to the
unstrengthened perfect stem; e. g. cakr-vAms-, jaghan-vAms-. If the stem is
reduced to a monosyllable, the suffix is nearly always a d d e d with the
connecting vowel -i-1as popt-i-väms- from pat- 'fall'. Unreduplicated stems,
however, do not take the connecting v o w e l " , as vidvdms-. T h e weak stem
of the active participle is identical in form with the 3. pi. ind. act. if written with
-us instead of -ur; e. g. cakrus-. T h e middle participle is formed by adding
the suffix -.7nd to the weak perfect stem; thus from cakr- is made cakr-änd-.

Active.
492. cakfvämscakhvAms-I(, cikitvAms- (f. cikitisi-), jaganv&ms- (f. jag-
mitsl-), jagrbhväms-, jagmiviims- (TS. iv. 2. I 4 for R V . x. i 1 jaganväms-),
jaghanvAms- (f. d-jaghnusl-), janivAms-'1*, jignuims- (ji- ' c o n q u e r j u j u r v A m s -

1 WHITNEY, Roots 73, doubtfully assigns I 10

Owing to the strong radical vowel this
this and the cognate forms didesati, didista should perhaps be regarded rather as a
to the reduplicating present class. : 2. pi. subjunctive. (The final vowel is long
* With ü unchanged, as elsewhere in : in the Pada text also.) The accent of these
strong forms. I transfer forms was perhaps, except when
3 Beside ind. jajäsa (AV.I. WHITNEY, ! the radical syllable was strong, normally on
Roots 53, assigns this form to the redupli- the thematic -a-. Cp. WHITNEY, Sanskrit
cated aor. beside 3. sing, ajijasata (¿B.). Grammar 815.
11
4 Given by AVERY 268 as a reduplicated Not, however, in dadväms-, nor in the
aorist in the form of vavftana (sic). problematic form cakhvamsam (u. 144), which
5 For *mimiif-fva. WHITNEY, Roots 120, seems to be formed from a root khä-,
assigns this form to the reduplicating present | >2 Except visivams- (AV.).
class. | '3 With the weak stem in the acc. sing.
6 WHITNEY, Roots 164, assigns this form cairufam (x. 1371).
to the reduplicating present class. '4 Without connecting vowel.
7 Written vavfdhvam. '5 Only the weak stem of this participle
8 Cp. WHITNEY'S note on AV. XII. 333. j occurs in the form vi-jänüs-ah; cp. above
9 Perhaps also sufiidata (AV. I. 264) placed 482 e.
by WHITNEY, Roots 188, under the perfect,
but, Sanskrit Grammar 871, doubtfully under
the reduplicated aorist
 3^3

(fur- = jr- 'waste away'), jujusvAms-, jujuvAms-, tatanvAms-, tastabhvAms

tasthi-vams- (f. tasth isl-), titirvAmstustuvAms- ( jAr/«-), dadasvAms- {dams-
'bite'), dadasvAms-, dadavAms-2 ( A V . ) , dadlsus-, dadivtims• (AV.), dadrvAms-
(f. dadrusl- -J, A V . , dr- 'pierce'), dadrsvAms- (f. dadrs'tsi-), dadvAms- {dl- 'give'),
dadhanvAms-, dadhrsvAmsdidivAtns-, papivAms- {p3- 'drink'), paprvAms-
{{. paprusl-- pr- 'fill'), plpivAms- (f. pipyusT-\pi- 'swell'), pupusvAms-, babhUvAms-
(f. babhUv'isl-), bibh.lvAms- (f. bibkyusl-), mamandislmamrvAms- (f. mamrusl-;
mf- 'die'); yayi-vA/ns- {Yy3-^, rari-vAms- (f. raritsl-, A V . ) , ririkvclms-* (\ rzc-),
ririhvAms-, rurukvAms-« (J/V^-), vavanvAms-, vavarjusl-s, vavrvAms-6 (v/-
' c o v e r ' ) , vavj-tvA/ns-, vavrdhvAms-invikvAms-* {vic-'s\ft), vividvAms-, vividhvAms-
{tfvyadh-), susukvAms-* (\fsuc-), s'usruvAms-, sUsuvAms-, sasavAms-*, sasfvAms-
(£ sasrusi-), sasahvAms-, susupvAms- {Ysvap-), susuviins-, sedus- {sad- 'sit').
a. W i t h c o n n e c t i n g arivAms- presupposed by f. an'isi- (jr- 'go'),
lyivAms- (f. lyusi-), UsivAms- (vas- 'dwell'), Ususl- ( T S . iv. 3. I I ' : 7/as- 'shine'),
okivAms(weak stem ac-us-, \fuc-), jaksivAms- {ghas- 'eat', V S . A V . T S . ) ,
jajnivAms-10 (Yjha-), paptivAms-, vivisivAms- ( T S . i v . 7 . 1 5 " ) . A l s o the negative
c o m p o u n d a-sascivams- presupposed by the feminine a-sascusl-.
b . W i t h o u t r e d u p l i c a t i o n : dasvAms-, vidvAms- (f. vidi/sl-\ sahvAms--,
perhaps also khidvams- in the voc. khidvas. Similarly formed is mldhvAms-
(£ mllhusi-) 'bountiful', though the root is not found in independent use.
With irregular connecting -»-: disivAms- ( S V . ) , visivAms- ( A V . ) , and the negative
c o m p o u n d a-varjivams- presupposed b y the f. a-varjusi- (AV.).

Middle.
4 9 3 . aks ana-(Yaks-}, anajana- {Yanj-), anasand- { Y am!-, A V . ) , arana-,
apana-, Ijana- {YyaJ~)> Kcand- (Yvac')t cakamana-11 (AV.), 'cakSna- (Yka-),
cakramana-, cakratia-, caksadaua-, caskabhana- ( A V . ) , cikitana- ( ]Ar;V-), jagras-
Sna-, jagmUnd-, jajiiana- (Yjan-), jafif-sand-, jihllandjujusZnajuhurana-11
(Yhvf-), j'Sjuvana-, tatrdand-, tastabhana-, tasthana-, tatrpana-, tatrsand-,
titvisina-, tistirana- (Ysir-), tustuvana-, tutujana-1tepana- ( YtaP'), dadana-,
dadfsana-, dadrana- (dra- ' r u n ' ) , dadrhana-, didyutSna-, duduhand-, papana-
{pa- 'drink'), paprathana-, paspasana-, paspj-dhana-, pipriyana-, pTpydna-,
babrhandbabhrana-, bubudhana-, bhejana-, mdmah&nd-, mumucand- (AV.),
yuyujandycmcind- ( Yya,n~)i rarand-, raraksdna-, rlrahSnd- {ratnh- 'hasten'),
rtricand-, rurucand-, reb/itind- (AV.), lebhand- (y/7<zM-), 1. vavasand- {vas-
'desire'), 2. vavasaua- {vas- 'bellow'), 1 . vavasand- {vas- 'wear'), 2. vavasana-
{vas- 'dwell'), 3 . vavasand- (vas- 'aim';, vSvrd/iana-, vavrsand-, vivyana-{Yvya-),
s'as'amilnd-1', sasayand{si- 'lie'), sasand- {s'a- 'sharpen', A V . ) , sasramana

' T h e r e also o c c u r s t h e w e a k stem latarus-, to b e r e a d sasanvams- (cp. the f. sasanufT-

from \ ' l f - .
* W i t h strong stem i n s t e a d of w e a k .
3 Given u n d e r dra- 'run' in the A V . I n d e x
V e r b o r u m , but t r a n s l a t e d b y WHITNEV, A V .
v . 138, a s from d f ' p i e r c e ' .
4 W i t h reversion to the o r i g i n a l g u t t u r a l ,
5 W i t h strong r a d i c a l vowel.
6 T h e a n o m a l o u s g e n . s i n g , with an addi-
tional r e d u p l i c a t i v e s y l l a b l e , va-vavriif-as
a p p e a r s once (1. 1 7 3 s ) ; cp. ZDMG. 22, 605.
7 T h e r e occurs o n c e (iv. 2'7) the a n o m a l o u s
p a r t i c i p l e with p r e s . suffix vavrdhantas
(GRASSMANN, Aorist).
8 F r o m satt- ' g a i n ' . T h e m e t r e s e e m s
almost i n v a r i a b l y to r e q u i r e this p a r t i c i p l e
in B.); s e e ARNOLD, V e d i c m e t r e p. 144 2 .
9 W i t h strong r a d i c a l v o w e l and r e v e r s i o n
to t h e o r i g i n a l guttural.
>° T h e i m a y h e r e p e r h a p s more c o r r e c t l y
be r e g a r d e d as a r e d u c e d form of the b a s i c
v o w e l , a s in dadi-, tasthi- etc.
1 1 T h e a is not syncopated in iam- or
Jam-.
" D o u b t f u l l y a s s i g n e d b y WHITNEY, R o o t s ,
to t h e r e d u p l i c a t i n g class.
13 M o r e frequently w i t h the intensive a c c e n t
tutujana-.
'4 W i t h t h e double irregularity of s t r o n g
r a d i c a l s y l l a b l e and reduplication with a.
j
3^4

s'äsadäna-' (sad- 'prevail'), sisriyäna- (sri- 'resort'), susucänd-, säsujäna

Lis'uväna-i, sasrjänd-, sasränd-4, sasvajänd-, säsahand-1, sismiyjnd-, sisvidänd-,
susupänd- ( Ysvap-), susvänd- (su- ' p r e s s ' ) , sehänd- ( Ysah-) s.

Pluperfect.
BENFEY, V o l l s t ä n d i g e G r a m m a t i k p. 5 5 3 . — Abhandlungen der königl. Gesellschaft
der Wissenschaften zu G ö t t i n g e n 1 5 , p. 1 5 1 — 1 5 4 . — DELBRÜCK, V e r b u m 4 1 9 . — AVERY,
Verb-Inflection 2 5 3 . — WHITNEY, Sanskrit G r a m m a r 8 1 7 — 8 2 0 .
494. This tense, which is a pluperfect in form but not in meaning, is
an augmented preterite made from the perfect stem. As in the perfect, the
strong stem is used in the singular active, the weak elsewhere. The endings
are the secondary ones; in the 3. pi. -ur always appears in the active and
-trait in the middle. There is some difficulty in distinguishing this tense from
the imperfect of the reduplicating class and from the reduplicating aorist 6 .
Though its sense is the same as that of the imperfect, its forms may usually
be distinguished (when the reduplication would be identical in both tenses) by
the fact that the verb in question is not otherwise conjugated according to the
reduplicating present class. On the other hand, the sense helps to distinguish
the pluperfect from the aorist, when the reduplication would be identical in
both tenses. With the aid of these criteria some sixty forms may be classed
as belonging to the pluperfect. The augment is, as in other past tenses,
dropped in several instances. The -s and -t of the 2. 3. sing, are in some
forms preserved by an interposed -T- (as in the aorist). Several transfer forms
according to the a- conjugation are met with in this tense.
495. Active. S i n g . 1 . acacaksam, ajagrabhatn, aiustavam; dpiprayaml
(TS. v. 1 . 1 1 3 ; V S . x x i x . 7 ) ; cakaram, ciketam (/«'/-), jagrabham (AV.).
2. djagani; aiyes9 (v. 2 8 ) ; cakdn, nana mas. — With -/-: dbubhojxs,
¿viveiTs, avivesis\ jihimsist0 (AV.).
3 . djagan11, aciket (]/«/-); rSrdn12. — W i t h -/-: acucyavXt^, ajagrabhtt,
4
arireclt, dvävaclt, avävarit' . — With thematic -a-: acakrat, acikitat and
acikdat (Ycit-), adadhävat15 'ran', asusravat16 (MS.), dsasvajat; cakradat,
jagrabhat (VS. xxxn. 2), tastdmbhat (1. 12i-J).
D u . 2 . dtatamsatam17, amumuktam\ mumuktam. — 3. avävasUäm {vas'-
'desire').
P I . 2 . djaganta-, djagantana, ajabhartanaxi.—With-7-: acucyavltana'J.
3. dcucyarur, dsis'rayur, aiusravurlr>, db'ibhayur ( K h . 1. 7 s ) .
Middle. S i n g . 1 . dsufravi. — 3 . didista (YdiS-).
11
D u . 2 . dpasprdhethäm .

1
With the intensive accent. p e r f e c t of /'- ' g o ' ( = a-iy-e-s), WHITNEY, R o o t s ,
1
With the intensive accent and r e g a r d e d as pluperfect of Jf- or tf- ' m o v e ' ( = a-iy-ei),
b y WHITNEY, R o o t s 1 7 4 , and by LINDNER, ROTH and GRASSMANN as aorist of y/jr-.
Nominalbildung p. 54, as an intensive. With irregular accent.
3 With the intensive accent and assigned 11 F o r *a-jagam-t.
b y LINDNER, 1. c., to the intensive, but b y « F r o m ran- 'rejoice' (1. 122« 2 ).
WHITNEY, Roots 1 7 5 , to the perfect. ' J Cp. WHITNEY 8 6 8 a.
4 Once also anomalously with -mana : »4 F r o m vf- ' c o v e r ' ; cp. DELBRÜCK, V e r b u m
sasftnana p. 1 2 2 4
1
5 säsahäna- once in R V . , schätia- thrice, 5 WHITNEY regards this form as an aorist,
f r o m \sah-. \ but the reduplicative v o w e l is that of the
6 On such doubtful f o r m s see specially pluperfect, while the sense (IX. 877) does
DELBRÜCK, Verbum 1 5 8 (p. 1 3 5 f.). [not s e e m d e c i s i v e .
7 WHITNEY 8 6 6 also quotes apiprayatt \ »6 WHITNEY 866.
from the T S . j '7 T r a n s f e r form.
8 F o r *a-jagam-s. \ «8 With strong radical vowel.
9 BENFEY (p. 1 5 2 ) and DELBRÜCK, V e r b u m , »9 T h e s e three are, h o w e v e r , classed b y
p . 1 2 3 and 1 2 8 , r e g a r d this form as a plu- { WHITNEY 8 6 1 , and R o o t s , as aorists.
 V I I . VERB. AORIST SYSTEM. 365

PI. 3. acakriran, ajagmiran, apeciran( | / / I W - , A V . ) ; avai<rtran\ asasrgram

— Transfer forms according to the a- conjugation: atitvisanta, ddadrhanta,
ddadrmhanta (TS. iv. 6. 2*), dvavasanta {v3s- 'bellow'); cakfpanta, dadhfsanta
(AV.), vavasanta (vas- 'bellow'). — With ending -ranta: avavfiranta.

Periphrastic Perfect.
496. This formation made with the reduplicated perfect of IT- 'make'
which governs the acc. of a fem. substantive in -a derived from a secondary
(causative) verbal stem, is found only once in the Mantra portion of the
Vedas: gamaybn cakara (AV. xviu. 2J?) 'he caused to go' (lit. 'he made a
causing to go'). In the Brahmapa portions of the Saiphitas (TS. MS. K.),
such periphrastic forms (made even with an aorist) are occasionally met with. 1

III. The Aorist System.

497. The aorist is of frequent occurrence in the Vedas, being made from
about 450 roots. An augmented tense taking the secondary endings and
forming moods and participles, it is distinguished from the imperfect by lack
of a corresponding present! (e. g. 3. sing. aor. a-kar, 3. sing. imp. d-krn6t,
3. sing. pres. krnoti) and by difference of meaning (dkar 'he has done', akrnot,
'he did').
There are three distinct types of aorist.
1. The simple aorist adds the endings to the root either directly or
with the connecting vowel -a-. It thus resembles the imperfect of the root-
class or of the accented a- class. This type of aorist is formed by nearly
170 roots. Some nine or ten roots have, beside the regular forms of the
simple aorist, a certain number of other forms which have the appearance
of indicatives present. They seem to represent a transition to the formation
of a new present stem. The most striking example is the aorist stem voca-
from which the 3. sing, vocati occurs several times.
2. The reduplicated aorist resembles the imperfect of the reduplicating
present class. It is, however, distinguishable from the latter not only in
meaning, but by a certain peculiarity of reduplication and by being nearly
always formed with a connecting -a-. This type of aorist is taken by about
85 roots.
3. The s i g m a t i c aorist inserts -s-, with or without an added -a, between
the root and the endings. It is taken by rather more than 200 roots.
Thus each of the three types has one form following the analogy of the
graded conjugation, and another following that of the a- conjugation. The
sigmatic aorist has, however, further subdivisions.
Upwards of 50 roots take more than one form of the aorist One verb,
budh- 'wake', has even forms from five varieties of the aorist; from two of
the first type, e. g. a-bodh-i and budha-nta\ from one of the second, e. g.
a-bubudk-a-t-, and from two of the third, e. g. a-bhut-s-i and bodh-i-s-a-t.

1 With reversion to the original gut- 3 T h e r e are, however, sometimes sporadic

tural. forms from the same stem as the aorist
» See WHITNEY, Sanskrit Grammar 1073 a, b ; beside the normal ones; thus the 2. du. pres.
J A C O B I . K Z . 3 5 , 5 7 8 — 5 8 7 ; B Ö H T L I N G K , Z D M G . kf-thas occurs besides the numerous regular
52, article 11 ; DELBRÜCK, Altindische Syntax forms of the ttu- class.
4 2 6 * f. ; L U D W I G , S i t z u n g s b e r . d . k g l . B ö h m .
G e » . d . W . , p h i l . - h i s t . K l . N r . XIIL
366

i. Simple Aorist.
A . Root Aorist.
BENFF.Y, Vollständige Grammatik 840. — AVERY, Verb-Inflection 253— 256. —
WHITNEY, Sanskrit Grammar, 299—304; Roots 222 f.; AV. Index Verborum 380.
498. T h i s f o r m o f the simple aorist is t a k e n b y a b o u t 1 0 0 r o o t s (and
b y m o r e than 80 o f these in the R V . ) , the c o m m o n e s t b e i n g t h o s e with
m e d i a l a (nearly 30 in number). It is i n f l e c t e d in b o t h t h e active a n d the
middle voice. T h e r o o t is strong in the indicative a c t i v e singular, b u t w e a k
e l s e w h e r e . R o o t s e n d i n g in v o w e l s , h o w e v e r , show a t e n d e n c y to retain the
s t r o n g v o w e l t h r o u g h o u t the indicative a c t i v e e x c e p t the 3. plural.
a. R o o t s e n d i n g in a, o f w h i c h there are s o m e eight, retain the a t h r o u g h o u t
t h e indicative a c t i v e e x c e p t the 3. pi., w h e r e t h e y d r o p it b e f o r e the e n d i n g
w h i c h in these v e r b s is invariably -ur. I n the m i d d l e indicative, t h e r a d i c a l
v o w e l is w e a k e n e d to i1.
T h e f o r m s w h i c h o c c u r from these roots, if m a d e f r o m sthä- 'stand',
w o u l d b e the f o l l o w i n g :
A c t i v e . Sing. 1. astham. 2. dsthas. 3. dsthät.— Du. 2. dsthätam. 3. dsthä-
tam. — PI. 1. dsthäma. 2. dsthäta. 3. ästhur.
M i d d l e . Sing. 2. dsthithäs. 3. dsthita. — PI. 1. dsthimahi. 3. dsthiran.
b. R o o t s e n d i n g in r, of which there are s o m e ten, t a k e G u n a t h r o u g h o u t
t h e indicative active e x c e p t the 3. pi. R o o t s e n d i n g in t a n d ü ( o f w h i c h ,
h o w e v e r , few dual a n d plural f o r m s o c c u r ) show the s a m e t e n d e n c y . The
r o o t bha- ' b e ' retains its a throughout (as in t h e perfect), interposing v b e t w e e n
it a n d a f o l l o w i n g a. T h e f o r m s m e t with f r o m kr- ' m a k e ' are the f o l l o w i n g :
Active. Sing. 1. akaram. 2. akar. 3. akar. — D u . 2. kartam (AV.).
3. dkartäm. — PI. 1. dkarma. 2. dkarta. 3. dkran.
Middle. Sing. 1. akri. 2. dkrthas. 3. dkrta. — PI. 3. dkrata.
T h e f o r m s w h i c h actually o c c u r are the f o l l o w i n g :

Indicative Active.
499. S i n g . 1. akaram, dgamam2, agäm (gd- 'go'), dgrabham, adhfim, dpam*
(pä- 'drink'), abhuvam4, abhedam, arodham (rudh- 'hinder'), dsravam, astham
( A V . ) ; karam, garnam, gam ( A V . ) , damS, dham ( A V . ) , z •amb (vr- ' c o v e r ' ) .
2 . agäs, a das', dpäs, apras, dbhüs, aires, asthas; gas, diis, dhAs, bhas,
sthas.— W i t h l o s s of e n d i n g : akar, dkran (\krand-), dgans, dghas, avar
(vr- 'cover"), aspar\ Anatävar (?/•- ' c o v e r ' ) ; kar, kranl° (\rkram-), bhet
(Ybhid-), var, vdrk'1.
3. dgdt, acct" (ci- 'collect'), ddät", ddhat (dha- 'put'), adhat
(dhä- 'suck', A V . ) , dpat, aprät ( A V . ) , dbhüt, dsret (Ysri-), dirot, dsthat,

* As in the perfect before consonant (I. 126'), which though not analyzed in
endings and in the past passive participle, the Pada text, appears to stand for a-adam
e. g. ta-sthi-jc (AV.), and sthi-td• from sthä- as indicated by both sense and accent,
'stand'. & For varam formed by false analogy as
* This might also be the sing. I. of the a first person to 2. sing, vah (for *var-s)
thematic aorist dgama-l etc. | appearing as if formed with the -s of 2. sing.
J No forms of pä- 'protect' are made j 7 There is also the transfer form ädas
according to this aorist, while pä- 'drink'; (1. 121 8 ), which though not analyzed in the
(present stem pita-) has no forms from the Pada text, is shown by both sense and accent
root in the present system except /¿»//(RV 1 . J to stand for d-adas.
and pathos (AV*.), but perhaps even these 8 For *a-gam-s.

are rather to be taken as meant for aorist 9 For *a-nai-s from nas- 'attain', where
forms; cp. p. 369, note ' and p. 368, note >°. *anak would have been phonetic (54, 6).
4 With the usual absence of Gupa in this 10 For '/trams.
root; later aihuvam. 11 For *varj-s from \vrj-.
5 There is also the transfer form adam >3 There is also the transfer form adat
 367
asrat 1 (VS. VIII. 28); gat, dát, dhát 2, bhüt, siAlt. — With loss of ending:
dkar, akran J ( ykram-), dirán (Yirand-), agan, aghas, dcet (cit- 'observe'),
atan, adar ( dr- 'pierce'), abhet, dbhrat ( Ybhràj-), amok {Ymuí-, AV.), ámyak
(Ymyaks-), ávartavrk* (AV.), dstar; finat, ávar; kar, gan, nal ( Ynas-
'attain', AV.), bhét, vár, vark, skan ( Yskand-).
D u . 2. agdtam (AV.), ábhütam, amuktam (Kh. 1. 12 6 ); kartam (AV.),
gStam (AV.), dàtam, dhatam, spartani.
3. diartam, agatam (AV.), ddhatam (VS. x x . 57), ánastüm ('reach'),
ápatam (VS. xxxviii. 13), abhutàm ; gàtàm (AV.), dàtam.
P I . 1. ákarma, dganma, àgama, ádarsma (TS. ill. 2. 5*), adama 6, dpama,
ábhüma 1, asthama (AV\), áhema (YAi-)-, dhama, bhüma (AV.).
2. diaria, agata (AV.), ábhüta; abhütana, áhetana-, karta (AV.) and
irta* (AV.), gata (AV.), ¿/¿a/a (AV.).
3. ákran (Y¿. r~)i disan 9 (Yghas-), ágman, dbhOvan, avrjan, avftan x°
(AV.), avran, ds'riyan (Ys'ri-), airaran (AV.), ahitan, ahyan {YAt-), asthan 11
(AV.); kran (AV.), Arar« (Yghas-), gman, vran. — With ending -ur:
ákramur, dgur, ádur, ádhur, apur (1. 164 7 ), dyamur, dsthur-, gur, dabhúr,
dür, dhur, nrtur 12, mandur, sthur.

Indicative Middle.
500. S i n g . i. akri, ajani, ayuji, avri (vf 'choose'), ahvi ( Y hü-, AV.).
2. ákrthls, agathas (VS. IH. 19), adhithas, dyuithls, dsthithas.
3. a irta, ágata (AV.), ddista, adhita, aprkta (Ypr¿-), amata (Y man-),
amrta(AV.), áyuita, ávfkta () vrj-), avrta ('choose' and 'cover'), ásrsta, asifta
(x. 1 2 7 3 ) , ásthita, áspasta (Yspas-), ás'lta (si- 'sharpen'); áyuita-, arta (f- 'go'),
asta (as- 'attain'); arta (r- 'go'), irta, gürta (gur- 'greet'), gdha 1 \ mfta (AV.).
D u . 1. gánvahi. — 3. ad/ñtam 14 (Ydha-).
P l . 1. áganmahi, adimahi (TS. 1. 8. 6 a ) and adímahi'« (VS. ni. 58) ' 5 ,
adhlmahi 14 (Ydha-), apadmahi (VS. iv. 29), ámanmahi, ayujmahi, áhümahi;
dhXmahi 14 (/<«<»-)•
2. ácidhvam (ci- 'note'), ámugdhvam ( 1/ w - ) , ayugdhvam.
3. airata 16, ágmata, atnata-, arata, ás'ata (as- 'attain'); yujata. — W i t h
t h e e n d i n g -ran : akrpran 11, agrbhran, ajusran, ddrsran, apadran, abudhran,
dyujran, avasran' s (ras- 'shine'), dvisran, avftran, dsfgran 19, dsthiran, asprdhran.
— W i t h e n d i n g -rami ddfsram, ábudhram, digram ' 9 .

(1. 127 6 , 11. 124, v. 32 s ) which, though not 9 For ägh(ä)san.

analyzed in the Pada text, appears to stand 1 0 Misprinted as aiylatt in the text o f A V .

for a-adat. ill. 3 1 1 : see W H I T N E Y ' S note.

' For *asras-t: see Sandhi p. 6 l 3 . 1 1 Transfer form probably for ast/.ur from

» A l s o the transfer form (prati) dhat sthä- 'stand'; see A JP. 12, 439; IF. 5, 388;
(iv. 27'). KZ. 22, 435; WHITNEY, Sanskrit Grammar
3 For * akram-t. 847, and his note on AV. xui. I s .
4 For *avart-t from vft- 'turn'. 1 2 This form might be regarded as an un-

5 Seemingly with anomalously weak root augmented perfect.

for *avfi-t. But the form really stands by «3 For g/i(a\s-ia, from \ghas-; cp. p. 56, 3.
haplology for the 3. sing. mid. avfkta: apairfk 14 With i for »; cp. BRUGMANN, Grundriss
tamah (AV. X U I . 29) 'he has wasted away 2, p.896; V . N E G E L E I N 6 ' ; O L D E N B E R G . Z D M G .
the darkness': see WACKEBNAGEL, KZ. 40, 63, 297.
544—547. '5 From dä- 'share'.
6 That is, in adäma (v. 30' 5 ), which though 1 6 There ii also the transfer form kranta

not analyzed in the Pada text, must stand (1. 141 3 J.

for a-adima. 17 Cp. BLOOMFIELD, Johns Hopkins Uni-

7 arudhma is quoted in W H I T N E Y ' S Roots versity Circular, Dec. 1906, p. 10.

as occurring in the MS. [I. 6 5 : 94, 6]. j i " Cp. p. 327, note 7.
8 Emendation for kftam (AV. XIX. 44 1 ). | "9 With reversion to the original guttural.
368

P a s s i v e Indicative of the Root Aorist.

DELBRÜCK, V e r b u m I 8 I \ — AVERY, V e r b - I n f l e c t i o n 275. —WHITNEY, S a n s k r i t G r a m m a r
8 4 2 — 8 4 5 ; R o o t s 2 4 0 . — v . NEGELELN, Z u r S p r a c h g e s c h i c h t e 4 . — C p . OSTHOFF, I F . 3,
3 9 0 ; HIRT, I F . 1 7 , 64 f.

5 0 1 . T h e r e is a peculiar middle form, m a d e from a b o u t 45 roots in the

Samhitäs (40 of them occurring in the RV.), which is used with a predomi-
nantly passive m e a n i n g 1 . W h e n it is formed from verbs with a neuter signi-
fication, like gam- 'go', the sense remains unaltered (as in the past passive
participle). It is a 3. sing, indicative, in which the augmented root takes the
ending -/. This -i, otherwise the ending of the 1. sing, middle, a p p e a r s to b e
used in the regular 3. sing, perfect middle (e. g. dadhe, 1. a n d 3. sing.), and
sometimes in the 3. sing, present middle (e. g. sdye, 1. a n d 3. sing.). T h e
characteristic feature of this passive form is the strengthening of the
root as c o m p a r e d with other middle forms, e. g. dkari beside akri (1. sing,
mid.)'.
a. A prosodically short medial i, u or /- takes Guna, while a is normally
lengthened; a final /, u or r takes Vrddhi, while final a interposes 2. y before
the ending. T h e accent in unaugmented forms is always on the root. T h e
forms actually occurring a r e : S i n g . 3. dkari, agämi, dceti, acc/tedi, djaniJ,
djiiäyi, dtäpi, ddars'i, ddhäyi, apädi (AV.), dpäyi ('drink'), apräyi (AV. VS.),
abodhi, dbhräji, amäyi ('measure'), dmodi, dmyaksi, dyämi, dyJz/H (VS. x x v m . 15 j,
dyoji, dradhi, aroci, avahi ( K h . v. 15J), avSci, dväri ('cover'), avedi ('find'),
dsoci, air ayi ( Y sri-), dsarji, dsädi, dsävi (\fsu-), dstäri, ast3vi, dhävi; ceti,
jani, jani, täri, dars'i, dayi ('give'), d/iyi ('bind'), dhAyi, pädi, v/di ('find'), sädi5. —
U s e d injunctively: ghosi, ceti, chedi, täri, dhäyi, bhäri, bhedi (VS. xi. 64),
moci (AV.), yoji, reci, roci, vandi, varhi, väci, samsi, säri, sesi (sis- 'leave', AV.),
srävi, sarji, sädi, h'iyi {ha- 'leave', AV.); also the unique form järayäyi 'let
him b e embraced', from the s e c o n d a r y stem jara-ya- 'play the lover'.

Root A o r i s t Subjunctive.
502. A c t i v e . Sing. 1. kdrani, gamani, gatii, bhuvani. — a. kdrasi; kdras,
gamas, gäs6, tdrdas, das, dhäs, pdrcas, päs (iv. 20 4 'drink'), präs, bhüvas1,
yamas, vdras ('choose'), säsas, sthäs.
3. karati, /'osati, darsati (AV.), däti, dhäti, padati8, bhidati, radhati,
varjati, sthiiti; karat, gdmat, garat ( g r - 'swallow', AV.), gät, josat, dtit, dhat,
padat8 (AV.), mdthaf (AV. v n . 50S), yamat, yodhat, rädhat, vdrat ('choose'),
vartat, srdvat, sdg/iat, sat, sthät, spdrat. — W i t h o u t G u n a : fdhat, bhuvat,
sriwat (RV'.).
D u . 2. karathas, gamathas, darsathas, pathds10 (AV. VII. 29 1 ), bhüthds
sravathas. — 3. karatas, gamatas, bhutassrdvatas, sthät as.

1
In one or two passages this form seems | from roots ending in a cannot be distinguished
to have a transitive meaning; cp. W H I T N E Y , from injunctives.
Sanskrit Grammar 845 (end). 7 Formed without Gupa as in the ind.
2
Cp. BRUGMANN, Grundriss 2, IOJ4, 3. aor. and perfect.
8
3 This augmented form always occurs in With double modal sign -a-.
the RV. with short radical vowel, beside 9 This form has a subjunctive sense ('might
the unaugmented jani as well as jani. shake'); it might otherwise be an injunctive
4 From yu- 'separate'. of the a- aorist
5 The form svani (vi. 46M) may be the Assigned by WHITNEY, Roots, to the
3. sing, passive aorist (BR. and doubtfully present of the root class.
WHITNEY, R o o t s 2 0 1 ) , b u t GRASSMANN, s . v . 11 Both bhuthas (vi.675) and bhutas (x. 277)
svani, regards it as a neat, substantive in -<• seem to be meant for subjunctives formed
C p . NEISSER, B B . 3 0 , 3 0 $ FF. anomalously without mood sign, instead of
6
The 2. 3. sing, with secondary endings *bhuvathas and *bhuvatas.
 369

PI. i. karäma, gamäma, gärna, dhama, rädhama. — 3. karanti, gamanti,

panit1 (11. 111*); kdran, gäman, garan, dar/an, bhüvan, yaman.
Middle. Sing. 2. kdrase, josase (AV.). — 3. idhati' (RV 1 .), karate,
bhojate, yojate, vdrjate, stärate. — Du. 2. dhähe*, dhaithe. — PI. 1. kdramahe,
gdmSmahai, dhämahe, manamahe (VS. IV. 11), starämahe. — 3. yavanta (yu-
'separate').
Root Aorist Injunctive.
503. Active. Sing. 1. karam (AV.), gam, dhäm (VS. 1. 20), bhuvam,
bhojam, yojarn, stham.
1. jes, bhüs, bhis (VbhT-, VS.L23 etc.; TS.iv. 5. io 1 ). — W i t h loss of
ending: kar (TS. 1. 3. 7 1 ), dhak (dagh- 'reach'), bhd (\f bhid-), rok ( Yruj-,
VS.), var ('cover'), vark (\fvrj-), star, spar.
3. bhüt, s'ret, ut-thit (Ystha-, K h . 1 1 . 1 1 — W i t h loss of ending: gan
(VS. xxvii. 3 1 ; TS. v. 6. i 4 ), dhak (Ydagh-), nak and nat (nas'- 'attain'), var,
vark, skdn ( \fskattd-), start*.
PI. 1. gäma, chedma5, daghma, bhUma, bhemas, homa5 {ha- 'call'). —
3. bhüvan, vrdtt. — W i t h ending -up: kramur, gur, dabhür, dur, dhür, sthur.
Middle. Sing. 1. ndmsi (nams- — nas'- 'attain'). — 2. dhfthas (AV.),
nut this, bhitthas (VS. xi. 68), mrthas (mr- 'die'), mrs/has (Y mr*-), rikthas
( \fric-), vikthas ( \fvij-, VS. I. 23). — 3. arta (]//--), asta (as- 'attain'), vukta
{TS. iv. 3.11«), vikta (Vvij-), ifta (77- 'choose'). — PI. 1. dhimahi6 (Ydha-). —
3. as'ata (SA. xn. 19).
Root Aorist Optative.
504. Active. Sing. 1. asydm (as'- 'attain'), rdhyam (AV.), deyam 1, dheyam 1,
vfjyam, sakyam. — 2. avyas, asyas, fdhyas, gamyas, jfi<yas, bhayis, mfdhyas,
sahyas. — 3. bhayat8 (AV.).
Du. 1. yujyava. — 3. yujyätam.
PI. 1. asyäma, rdhyäma, iriyama, bhüyäma, vfjyäma, sahyämastheyama
— 3. asyur (as- 'attain'), dheyur, sahyur.
Middle. Sing. 1. a slya, muriya (mr- 'die', AV.). — 3. arita (Yf')
uhlta-10 (Yvah-), vurita (zj- 'choose'). — Du. 2. rdhathe.
PI. 1. asimdhi, idhlmahi, rdhimdhi, naslmahi ('reach'), naslmahi,
prcTmaht, mudlmaht, yamlmahi, stmahi11 (sa- 'bind').
a. Precative forms of the root aorist are common in the active, being
made from about twenty roots in the Sainhitäs.
Active. Sing. 1. apyasam" (AA. v. 3.2 J) rdhyäsam (VS.vm.9), jlvyisam
{AV. VS.), priyisatn(AV.), bhUydsam, bhrajylsam (AV.), bhriyasam (VS.n.8),
radhyäsam (VS. xxxvn.3), vadhyasam (VS. AV.), srüyasam (AV.). — 3. avyas,
asyas ('reach'), rdhyas, gamyäs, daghyäs, peyas ('drink'), bhayis, yamyas, yUyas1*
yu- 'separate'), vrj'yas, srüyas, sahyas.
1
Assigned by WHITNEY, Roots, to the 7 For da-iyam, dAa-iyim, stha-iyama.
8
present of the root class. T h e RV. has no forms of the 3. sing,
2
With weak and unaccented root. in -yat, but only the somewhat numerous
1 A transfer form for *dhathe. precatives in -yds = *-yas-t.
4 This form may, however, perhaps pre- 9 With irregular strong radical vowel,
ferably be classed as an imperfect injunctive Padapa(ha sahyama; cp. RPr. IX. 30.
along with stanihi as pres. impv., as in 10 Aor. opt. in WHITNEY, Sanskrit Grammar
WHITNEY'S Roots. These are the only forms 837 b, but pres. o p t in 'Roots' 157.
11
of the simple verb beside the aor. asiamt (AV.). With loss of a before the modal -!-.
5 With strong radical vowel. " Accented afvasam in the ed. (B. I.).
6
Probably to be explained as the in- U WHITNEY, in AV. IU. 54, would emend
junctive corresponding to the augmented this form to bhriyasam: see his note on
indicative adhlmahi (see 500, note M); it that passage.
might, however, be the I. pi. opt. mid. with <4 According to AVERY 241, 3. sing. pres.
Joss of a before the modal -i-. opt
Indo-arischc Philologie. I. 4. 24
37© I. ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4. VEDIC GRAMMAR.

D u . 2. bhuyastam ( V S . 11.7). — P I . 1. rdhyásma(AV.), ÁtriySsma, bhüyasma

( A V . V S . ) , radhyasma ( A V . ) . — 2. bhüyasta • ( T S . in. 2. 5«),
M i d d l e . S i n g . 3. padistá, mucTsta'.

Root Aorist Imperative.

5 0 5 . T h e a c t i v e f o r m s o f this m o o d a r e fairly n u m e r o u s , o c c u r r i n g in
all the 2. a n d 3. p e r s o n s ; but m i d d l e f o r m s o c c u r in the 2. pers. o n l y , t e n in
the sing, a n d t w o in the pi. I n the 2. p e r s o n s a c t i v e of all n u m b e r s , s e v e r a l
f o r m s irregularly strengthen t h e r o o t , w h i c h is t h e n n e a r l y a l w a y s a c c e n t e d .
A c t i v e . S i n g . 2. krdhi, gadhi, bod hiyandhl (Y yam-), yódhi4, randhi
(= rand-dhi; \frandh-), vid4hi (Yvis-, A V . ) , vrdhi ' c o v e r ' , sagdhi (Y sak-),
srudhi, spfdhi. — W i t h e n d i n g -hi: gahi, pahi ( A V . ) , mihi ' m e a s u r e ' ,
s a hi 'bind'.
3. gantu, datu, dhatu, patu ( A V . ) , bhitu, s'rJtu, sJtu (su- 'press').
D u . 2. kartam5 ( A V . ) a n d krtám, gatám a n d gantám 5, jitam, datam,
dhaktam (Ydagh-), dhatam, patam ( A V . ) , bhütám, bhftam ( V S . x i . 30), yantám 5,
riktam (Yr>c~), varktam5 (Yvn~)¡ vartams (vr- ' c o v e r ' ) , volhámsaktam,
sruíám, sitam (si- 'bind'), sutdm, sthatam, sprtam.
3 . gantám* ( V S . IX. 1 9 ) , ghástam ( V S . x x i . 43), datam, patám, volhám6.
P I . 2. harta* a n d kf-ta, gata a n d garita 1, gata, data, dháta8, pata ( A V . ) ,
bhütá, yanta5, varía9 ( Yvj-t ), s'asta ( Ysa>?*s~)> ¿ruta a n d srótaI0, sota5 ( Ysu)>
sthata, heta5 (Yhi-). — W i t h e n d i n g -tana: kártana5, gántana5, gatana,
dhatana, dhetana1patana ( A V . ) , bhütana, yantana*, sotana ( Ysu~)-
3. gámantu, dantu (da- 'cut', A V . XII. 3 3 ), dhatitu, pantu (AV.),
sruvantu.
M i d d l e . S i n g . 2. kfsvá, dhisvá (Ydha-), yuksvá; a c c e n t e d on t h e
root: mátsva, yáksva, rásva, vámsva (van- 'win'), sáhsva12 (1. 4 2 Y s a c ~ ) >
u n a c c e n t e d dlsva (da- ' g i v e ' , V S . x x x v m . 3 ) , tndsva 'measure'.
P I . 2. krdhvam, vodhvamIJ (VS.).

Root Aorist Participle.

506. O f the a c t i v e f o r m o f the p a r t i c i p l e o f the r o o t aorist f e w e x a m p l e s
occur. B u t the m i d d l e form is c o m m o n , nearly forty e x a m p l e s b e i n g m e t
with in the R V . T h e a c c e n t h e r e g e n e r a l l y rests o n the final s y l l a b l e o f t h e
suffix -ana, b u t in s e v e r a l e x a m p l e s it is o n the r a d i c a l s y l l a b l e .
Active, rdhánt-, kránt-, gmánt-, citánt-, pánt-, bhidánt-, sthánt-; a l s o
dyutáni1,4 as first m e m b e r o f a c o m p o u n d .
M i d d l e , araná-, idhaná-, uraná- ' c h o o s i n g ' , úhana- (Yvah-), hraná-'S,
cítSna-, cyávüna-, jusitii-, tisana-, dfsaná- a n d df-sSna-, dyutiná- a n d dyútatia-,
dhuvüná- ( T S . iv. 4 . 1 2 5 ) , nidaná-, pisUná-, pj-caná-, prathand-, budhüná-, bhiySná-,
manSná-, mandaná-, (vi-)mána- ( T S . rv. 6. 3 3 ) , yatsnd- a n d y atina-, yujani-,

1 A V . XVUI. 486 has the corrupt reading 7 Once (vi. 4 9 " ) accented ganta.
bhuyastha-, see WHITNEY'S note on that 8 With the accent of strong forms,

passage. j 9 For vart-ta (like varti for varl-li).

2 The form graiAif/a is a 2. pi. injv. beside 1 0 Always iruta or irota; also sola (cp.

the 1. pi. ind. agrabhifma according to the RPr. vu. 14 f.).

if- aorist j 1 1 With e for a.
3 From both bhu- 'be' for *bhu-dhi and | « satfva (III. 377) is from \sah-, being an
budh- 'awake' for *bid-dhi instead of *bud- s- aor. form, for *sah-s-iva beside I . sing.
dhi. ' mid. asakfi and saifi.
4 For *yid-dhi instead of *yuddhi. j '3 For vah-dkvam through *vath-dkvam.
5 With strong r o o t H In dyutad-yaman- 'having a shining
6 For vak-tam, vah-tam through *vath-tam, ; track'.
*vazh-tdm. ' '5 Cp. BB. 20, 89.
 V I I . VERB. AORIST SYSTEM.

rucaná-, rufiana-, vásana- 'dwelling', vipaná-, vrSná- 'covering", subhaná-

a n d súmbhana-, svitaná-, saciña-, suvSná-1 a n d sváná- ( S V . ) (su- 'press'),
srjaná-, sprdhaná-, hiyaná-'. A s m e m b e r s o f c o m p o u n d s only, -cetina- a n d
-./¡rayana-J o c c u r .

B . a- Aorist.
Verb-Inflection 256 f. — W H I T N E Y , Sanskrit Grammar p. 305—308; Roots 224;
AVEKY,
AV. Index Verborum 380. — v. NEGELEIN, Zur Sprachgeschichte 32—34.

5 0 7 . T h i s f o r m o f the simple aorist is t a k e n b y nearly 60 roots, chiefly

b y s u c h as contain a m e d i a l v o w e l . In the R V . less than half as m a n y v e r b s
form the a- aorist a s form the root-aorist; a n d it is m o r e frequent in the A V .
than in the R V . T h e r o o t generally a p p e a r s in the w e a k form, the s t e m
b e i n g m a d e with a n a d d e d -a, w h i c h in u n a u g m e n t e d forms is n o r m a l l y
accented. T h i s f o r m of the aorist therefore r e s e m b l e s an imperfect o f the
a- class. M i d d l e f o r m s are o f rare o c c u r r e n c e in this aorist.
a. A certain number of irreg u larities occur in the formation of the stem. 1. T h e
radical vowel of sis- ' o r d e r ' is r e d u c e d t o / 4 , e. g. sifat5 (iv. 2 7 ).— 2. Some half dozen
roots containing a medial a followed by a nasal, d r o p t h e n a s a l ; these are krand- 'cry
out', tarns- 'shake', dhvams- 'scatter', bhrams- 'fall', randh- 'make subject', trams- f a l l ' . —
3. On the other hand f 'go' and sf- 'flow' take G u n a and accent the radical syllable,
as áranta (unaugmented 3. pi.) and sárat. — 4. Several roots form t r a n s f e r s t e m s f r o m
the root aorist. Some half dozen do this by reducing a final radical a to a. T h i s
is regularly the case in khya- 'see', vya- 'envelope', kvi- 'call'; e. g. ákhyat, ávyal,
áhvat; but from da- 'give', dha- 'put', and stha- 'stand', only occasional transfer forms
occur; thus adat; adhat (SV.) and dhat\ asthat (AV'.). On the other hand, occasional
transfer forms are m a d e from kr- 'make', and gam- 'go', in which the radical syllable
remains s t r o n g ; e. g. ákarat (AV.) and ¿gamaí.

Indicative.
508. T h e f o r m s o f the indicative actually occurring, if m a d e f r o m vid-
'find', w o u l d b e as f o l l o w s :
A c t i v e . Sing. 1. dvidam. 2. ávidas. 3. ávidat. — PI. 1. dvidama. 2. ávidata.
3. ávidan.
M i d d l e . Sing. 1. ávide. 3. ávidata. — PL 1. vidimahi. 3. ávidanta.
T h e f o r m s w h i c h actually o c c u r are the f o l l o w i n g :
A c t i v e . S i n g . 1. ákhyam, agrbham ( K h . hi. 15 s), átrpam ( A V . T S . ) ,
atrham ( A V . ) , anijam ( A V . ) , ámucarn ( A V . ) , áruham ( T S . V S . A V . ) , ávidam,
ávrdham ( K h . iv. 8 s ), as'akam ( V S . 11. 28), ásanam, ásaram, ahyamb (Y hi-,
A V . ) , ahvam ( A V . ) ; ápam ( A V . ) ; aram, vidam.
2. ákaras ( A V . ) , ákftas (kj-t- 'cut'), ákhyas ( T S . A V . ) , áruhas, ávidas, asadas
( T S . V S . A V . ) , ásaras; ápas-, káras, guhas, druhas, bhúvas7, mucas ( A V . ) , vidas.
3. ákarat8 ( A V . ) , akramat ( A V . ) , ákhyat, ágamat8 ( A V . ) , ágrdhat, acchidat
( A V . ) , atanat, átasat ( V S . A V . ) , adrpaf> (AV.), adhat™ (Vdha-, S V . ) , ámucat,

1
Always written thus in the RV., but to be j follow the root-aorist (ähema, ahyan, etc.),
pronounced svatta-. this is probably to be regarded as a transfer
* Hardly any of these participles occur form, since the regular form according to
in any of the other Samhitas: rucana- the root aorist ought to b e *ahayam.
(VS. X1L I), ruhana- (TS. IV. I. 2 4 ), svand- 7 A transfer form, bhtrva-s, following
(SV.). bhuv-am as if from a stem bhuva-.
3 In a-cetana- 'thoughtless', and a hrayana-^ T r a n s f e r s from the root aorist, following
•bold'. the 1. sing, akar-am, ¿gam-am.
4 As in t h e weak forms of the present 9 E m e n d a t i o n in AV. XX. 1365.
10
stem. T r a n s f e r from the root aorist for
5 At the same time accenting the radical a-dhät.
syllable.
0
T h o u g h the other forms from \hi-
24*
37«

ârudat ( A V . ) , arudhat, âruhat, àvidat, avrtat ( A V . ) , avrdhat, avyat 1 ( Ytya-),

âsakat ( A V . ) , asucat, âsramat ( A V . ) , àsadat, dsanat, âsarat, dsicat ( T S . m. 2.8«),
âsrpat ( A V . ) , dhvat'-, âdat* ( Vda-), Àpat, arai, SstAati ( A V 1 . ) ; trsat ( A V . ) ,
dhaf 1 ( dhâ-), bhûvat', vidât, sadat ( A V . ) , sdnat, sarai.
P L I. aruhàma ( V S . v m . 52), dvidSma, dsanâma, dhvâma-, vrdhâma 5
( A V . v. i9). — 2. dvyata ' ; âra/a.
3. akhyan, akraman ( A V . ) , agaman ( A V . ) , acchidan ( A V . ) , âdrian (TS.
rv. 5. iJ), arudhan ( A V . ) , âruhan, dvidan, avrjan, avfdhan (VS. x x x m . 60),
asakan ( A V . ) , dsadan, asanan, asaran, asican-, apart, ¿Iran, Ssthan 0 ( A V . x m . i ' j ;
khyân, dhvasân 7, vidin, sadan.
Middle. S i n g . 1. dAve; hve ( A V . ) . — 3. akhyata, dvyata 1 ; arata-, vyata *. —
P L x. j 'isHmahi (Ysas-). — 3. avidanta ( A V . ) , ahvanta-, dranta, krdnta*.

a- Aorist S u b j u n c t i v e .
509. T h e forms o f this m o o d are rare and almost restricted to
the active.
A c t i v e . Sing. 2. vidâsi; vidas. — 3. mucSti; vidât.
D u . i . ruhàva. — 2. vidàthas. — 3. gamâtas ( A V . x. 7«*).
P L 1. arama; radhsma, risa ma, sadâma. — 2. gamâtha (AV.), risâtha,
vidâtha ; risSthana.
Middle. Sing. 3. mue àte, Jîsatai8 (/¿r- 'leave', A V . 11. 31
P L 1. sisàmahei ( A V . SV.).

a- Aorist I n j u n c t i v e .
510. A c t i v e . S i n g . 1. aram, khyam, dâriam, radham, risam, ruhâm,
vidam, sanam.
2. kradas, krudhas ( A V . ) , ihyds, guhas, grdhas ( A V . V S . ) , druhas (AV.),
mueds, vidas, risas ( V S . x i . 6 8 ; T S . r v . 1 . 9 ' ) , Usas ('leave'), sadas, srpas ( A V . ) .
3. ksudhat ( A V . ) , ¿¿ya/, grdhat ( A V . ) , /a/70/, /a««/, /^\ra/ ( A V . ) , dasat,
dhrsdt ( K h . i v . 1), bhraiat, mucat, risai, rudhat, rùhatvidât, Usai 11, sramat,
srisai, ìrûvatsadat, sanai 10, sfpat ( A V . ) , sridhat.
P l . 3. aran, kkyan, gdman ( V S . x v 1 1 . 7 8 ) , trpân, trsan ( V S . v i . 31), drsan,
druhan, risati, vidan, iakan (AV.).
Middle. Sing. 3. vidata ( A V . x m . 2*').
P L x. aràmahi ( A V . ) ; gfhUmahi. — 3. aranta, budhânta, mfsanta,
viddnta.
a- Aorist O p t a t i v e .
511. T h i s m o o d is rare and confined to the active in the R V . , though
three or four middle forms occur in the later Samhitâs.
A c t i v e . S i n g . 1. apeyam13 ( A V . ) , gameyam, drieyam, bhideyam (AV.),

1 Transfer form. IO With accent on the radical syllable.

* A transfer form: s e e p . 366, note IJ .
J See p. 327, note 5 .
4 prati dhat (rv. 27s).
s Whitney, note on AV. v. I 9 , would in-
stead of avim vfdhama read (with Paipp.)
avivfdhama.
6 A transfer form from \stha--, cp. Whit-
NEY's note on AV. XIIL I s .
7 With loss of medial nasal, from \dkvams-.
• This form is probably a corrupt reading
for the passive Hfyalai: see Whitney's note
on AV. 11. 31 3 .
9 For iifimahi of RV. v i i l 241.
" From si}- 'order', with accent on the
root
" It is hard to decide whether this form,
which occurs only once (l 1273) beside the
regular sravat, should be classed here as an
, injunctive of the a• aorist, or as an irregular
subjunctive of the root-class following the
analogy of bhuvat (cp. 502).
'J In prapeyam (AV. III. 209), analyzed in
the Pada text as pro apeyam-, cp. Whitney's
note on the passage.
 373
v i d e y a m 1 (AV.), sdkeyam (K.h.iv.8 4 ), satUyam. — 2. g a m e s (VS.). — 3. r^het
(AV.), g a r n e t , y a m e t 2 (AV.), v i d e t , s a n d , s e t s (VS. ix. 5, 6).
P I . 1. asema ('attain'), rdherna (AV.), gam/ma, d f s ' e m a (AV.), pusema,
b h u j e m a , rukema, videma (AV.), sake'ma, sadema, sane'ma and sdnema, srasema*.
M i d d l e . S i n g . 1. v i d e y a (VS. iv. 23). — P I . 1. g a m e m a h i . There is also
one p r e c a t i v e form: 3. sing, v i d e s t a (AV.) 'may she find'.

a- A o r i s t Imperative.
512. This mood is also of rare occurrence and is restricted to the active,
excepting two middle plural forms.
A c t i v e . S i n g . 2. kara* (RV 1 .), b h u j a (TS. iv. 5. 1«), muea, r u h a (AV.),
sada, sdna'', sdra. — 3. sadatu.
D u . 2. aratam, karatam7 (RV 1 .), khyatam, ruhdtam, vidatam, sddatam.
3. aratam, karatam 8 , sadatäm.
P I . 2. khydta, sadata; sada tana. — 3. sadantu.
M i d d l e . P I . 2. mucadhvam. — 3. sadantam (AV.).

a- Aorist Participle.
a . There are hardly more than a dozen certain examples of the parti-
ciple of this aorist.
A c t i v e , t r p d n t - , d h f s a n t - , r i s a n t - or r i s a n t v r d h d n t - , sisdnt- {Jas- 'order'),
s u c d n t - , s d d a n t - I O , sanant-1"-, and as first member of compounds: krtdnt
guhdnt-, viddnt-1'.
Middle, g u h d m ä n a - , d h f s a m ä n a - , t i f t d m ä n a - , sucdmäna--, possibly also
ddsamänaProbably three participles in -Una are to be regarded as belonging
to this aorist: dhrsand- (AV.), v f d h a n d - , s r i d h ä n d - .

2. Reduplicated Aorist.

Verbum 143 f. — A V E R Y , Verb-Inflection 266—268. — WHITNEY, Sanskrit

DELBRÜCK,
Grammar 856—873; Roots 224; Atharvaveda, Index Verborum 380. — v. NEGELEIN,
Zur Sprachgeschichte 68 f.
513. This type of aorist is formed from nearly 90 verbs in the Saiphitäs.
Though it has come to be associated with the secondary conjugation in - d y a
(causative), it is not in form (with a few slight exceptions) connected with
that stem, being made directly from the root. It is, however, in s e n s e
c o n n e c t e d w i t h t h e c a u s a t i v e , inasmuch as it has a causative meaning
when the corresponding verb in -aya has that meaning. As an augmented
reduplicated form, it has affinities with the imperfect of the reduplicating
present class and with the pluperfect. It may, however, be distinguished from
the imperfect by the long reduplicative vowel, by the thematic -a- which
nearly always appears in the stem, and often by the meaning; and from the

• Emendation in AV. xix. 4» for vide yam; \ 7 A transfer form from the root aorist
see WHITNEY'S n o t e . ] (otherwise krtam).
1 probable conjecture for yame
A in AV. | 8 a transfer form from the root aorist.
xviii. 23. 9 Once with the short, six times with the
i From sa- 'gain', as if sa- (sa-it). Cp.' long vowel in the Samhitl text (Pp. always f ) :
v . NEGELEIN 3 4 . see APr. 583, 584, 588.
4 With loss of the radical nasal, from | 10 With accent on the root as also risant-
\warns-. Iand r i f a n t - .
5 A transfer from the root aorist (other*! 1 1 In kftad-vasu- 'disclosing wealth', guhad-
wise k f d h i ) . A V E R Y
243 adds gamaQ). \ avadya• 'concealing faults', vidad-vasu• 'win-
6 With accent on the root instead of the ning wealth'.
second syllable; always sana: cp. RPr. VII. ; " As occurring beside the a- aorist in-
14, 19, 33. junctive form dasat (510).
374 I- ALLGEMEINES UND S P R A C H E . 4 . V E D I C GRAMMAR.

pluperfect by difference of reduplication when the root contains a or r, and

often by meaning.
a. T h e characteristic feature of this aorist is the almost invariable
quantitative s e q u e n c e of a l o n g reduplicative a n d a short radical vowel
(_w). The vowels a, r , / ', as well as t, are reduplicated with i 1 , which (unless
it becomes long by position) is lengthened if the radical vowel is (or is made)
prosodically short; e g. a-jijan-a-t from jan- 'beget'; d-vtvrdk-a-t from vrdh-
'grow', but cikstp-a-s from ksip- 'throw'.
In order to bring about this trochaic rhythm, the radical vowel has to be
shortened or the nasal dropped in the roots vas- 'bellow', sadh- 'succeed',
hid- 'be hostile', krand- 'cry out', jambh- 'crush', randh- 'subject', syand- 'flow',
srams- 'fall'; e. g. avlvasat, acikradat. In jlhvaratam (TS.) the reduplicative
vowel, being already long by position, is unnecessarily lengthened. „
1. In a f e w f o r m s t h e r e d u p l i c a t i v e v o w e l is, c o n t r a r y to t h e p r e v a i l i n g r h y t h m i c
r u l e , l e f t s h o r t : jigrtam and jigrta (beside djigar); didhrlam a n d ririsas (beside ririfas).
3
O n t h e o t h e r h a n d , in t h e isolated injunctive f o r m didtpas , t h e radical vowel r e m a i n s
l o n g , a n d in amlmet b o t h t h e r e d u p l i c a t i v e and t h e r a d i c a l syllable a r e l o n g ( b e s i d e
mlmayat with t h e r e g u l a r rhythm).
2. T h e p of t h e c a u s a t i v e s t e m s jha-paya-, slha-paya•, hi-paya, ar-paya- (/•- ' g o ' ) , is
r e t a i n e d in t h e aorist, t h e r a d i c a l vowel b e i n j ; at t h e s a m e t i m e r e d u c e d to i in t h e first
three: ajijnipat(TS.), atisthipat, jthipas; the s of the causative stem bhlsaya- is also retained:
blbhisas (TS.).
3. T h e r o o t dyul- ' s h i n e ' , r e d u p l i c a t e s with / : adidyutatIn the aorist f o r m e d
f r o m t h e c a u s a t i v e s t e m arpaya-, the r e d u p l i c a t i v e i a p p e a r s a f t e r , instead of b e f o r e , t h e
r a d i c a l vowel, d o u b t l e s s o w i n g to t h e difficulty c a u s e d by t h e initial a and t h e a u g m e n t :
arp-i-p-am (AV.). T h e initial a also l e d t o t h e a n o m a l y of r e d u p l i c a t i n g t h e w h o l e of
t h e r o o t am ' i n j u r e ' , a n d t h e n p r e f i x i n g t h e a u g m e n t : am-am-at.
4. T h e r e a r e t h r e e a n o m a l o u s a o r i s t s f o r m e d f r o m nas- ' b e lost', pat- 'fall', a n d
vac- ' s p e a k ' , in w h i c h b e s i d e s a n i r r e g u l a r r e d u p l i c a t i v e vowel, t h e radical a is s y n c o p a t e d
(a-pap-t-at, a-ne-s-an) o r c o n t r a c t e d (a-voc-at). As b e s i d e t h e f o r m e r two the r e g u l a r r e d u p l i -
c a t e d a o r i s t s apipatat a n d ahinasat occur, a n d a s all t h r e e h a v e t h e regular r e d u p l i c a t i v e
v o w e l a of t h e p e r f e c t 5 , t h e y a p p e a r to h a v e b e e n originally p l u p e r f e c t s w h i c h b e f o r e b e i n g
7
s h o r t e n e d h a d t h e f o r m of *a-papa/-a/6, *dnanas-at, *a-vavac-at . But t h e y all c a m e to
b e r e g a r d e d as aorists. T h i s is u n d o u b t e d in t h e c a s e of avocat owing to its n u m e r o u s
m o o d f o r m s ; apapt.U, m o r e o v e r , h a s a n i m p e r a t i v e f o r m b e s i d e i t ; a n d anesan ( T S VS.)
h a s a distinctly a o r i s t i c m e a n i n g .
b. The reduplicated aorist in the great majority of forms makes its
stems w i t h a t h e m a t i c -a-. Before this, a final r regularly, and t and u
in two or three forms, take Guna; e. g. adldhar-a-t ( Vd/if-), bibhay-a-t ( ]/bhi-),
cucyav-a-t (Ycyu-), dudrav-a-t (ydru-). The inflexion of this aorist stem is
like that of an imperfect of the a- conjugation.
c. About a d o z e n roots, however, have occasional forms from stems
made w i t h o u t t h e m a t i c -a-, the inflexion then being like that of an imper-
fect of the reduplicating class. These roots are ma- 'bellow'; sri- 'resort';
tu- 'be strong', dru- 'run', dha- 'shake', nu- 'praise', pa- 'cleanse', yu- 'separate',
1
I n \klp-, t h e only r o o t in w h i c h it 5 T h a t is, ties- f o r nanas-, on t h e a n a l o g y
occurs. of sed- f o r *sazd- in the p e r f e c t : this f o r m
2
I n t h e r e d u p l i c a t i n g p r e s e n t class f is \ of c o n t r a c t i o n would b e unique in an o r i g i n a l
a l m o s t i n v a r i a b l y , a n d a p r e d o m i n a n t l y , re- j aorist.
d u p l i c a t e d with i (457). t
L i k e a-sasvaj-a!; b e c o m i n g a-papt-at l i k e
3 I n f o r m t h i s m i g h t b e a p l u p e r f e c t . A a-cakr-at b e s i d e cakar-am.
similar r e v e r s a l of t h e o r d i n a r y r h y t h m a p p e a r s j 7 T h e c a u s e of t h e a n o m a l o u s c o n t r a c t i o n
in t h e t h r e e f o r m s atalamsatam (1. 120 7 ), ] m a y b e d u e to t h e a w k w a r d n e s s of c o m -
adadhavat (ix. 877), vavaksat (SV. 1. 1 , 2, 2, 3 j b i n i n g t h e a u g m e n t w i t h the r e d u c e d redupli-
var. lect. f o r vavaksa of R V . X. U S ' ) e a c h 1 cative syllable u- of the p e r f e c t i*a-uvac-at).
o c c u r r i n g o n c e , b u t o w i n g to t h e r e d u p l i c a - 1 T h e a c c e n t u a t i o n of t h e a u g m e n t w o u l d also
tive v o w e l t h e y should r a t h e r b e a c c o u n t e d f a v o u r t h e s e c o n d syllable t a k i n g S a m p r a -
p l u p e r f e c t s . Cp. p. 364, note "5. I sarapa: a-va-uc-at.
4 See 514, note I
 375
so- 'generate', sru- 'flow'; gr- 'waken', dhr- 'hold'; svap- 'sleep'; e. g. asis'ret
(TS.), ddudro-t, djigar, slsvap. Beside forms made thus, occur others made
from several of these roots with the thematic -a--, and those made from the
roots ending in u (the majority), cannot be distinguished in form from plu-
perfects. The number of forms of this type which can with certainty be
classed as aorists is therefore very small.
d. Besides the indicative all the moods are represented in this aorist,
but no participial form has been found.

Reduplicated Aorist Indicative.

514. The forms actually occurring would, if made from jan• 'beget'
with thematic -a-, be the following:
Active. Sing. 1. ajijanam. 2. djijanas. 3. ajijanat. — D u . 2. ajljanatam.—
PI. 1. djljanama. 2. djijanata. 3. ajljanan.
Middle. Sing. 3. djijanata. — PL 2. djljanadhvam. 3. djijananta.
The forms actually occurring (including those made without thematic-a-) are:
Active. Sing. 1. acikrsam, ajtgamam (TS. VS. AV.), ajljabham (AV.),
atisthipam (AV.), adudusam (AV.), anlnasam, apiparam (pr~ 'pass', AV.),
dmlmadam (AV.), avocam, dslsamam (Jam- 'be quiet', AV.); arpipam (AV.),
2. acikradas, djijanas, atisthipas, atltaras (AV.), atltfpas (AV.), anlnasas
('be l o s t ' , AV.), apiparas (AV.), abubhuvas (AV.), amXmadas (AV.), arUrupas
(AV.), dvlvrdhas (AV.), aslsamas (AV.): jihvaras (AV.), dtdyutas', rUrupas
(AV.), s'aiucas (TS. iv. 1. 43), sisvapas. — Without thematic -a-: tatos',
susros; ajlgari {gr- ' s w a l l o w ' ) , djigar (gr- ' w a k e n ' ) ; dldhar, stsvap.
3. acikradat, aclklpat (AV.), aclcarat (AV.), dcukrudhat, acucyavat* (K.),
ajijhipat (TS. 11.1.11^), ajijanat, djlhidat (AV.), dtisthipat, adidyutatadldharat,
adudusat, dnlnasat, apaptat and apipatat, abubudhat, amumuhat (AV.), arTramat,
drUrucat, avivasat ('has bellowed', Yv&s~)> avtvipat, avivftat, avTvj-dhat, avocat,
asisriyats (AV.), asisvitat, aslsamat (AV.), asisyadat (Ysyand-); Smamat
( Yam-); jtjanat, didyutat (VS. X X X V I I I . 2 2 ) , dldhar at, dudravat, nesatb, blbhayat,
vavrtat, vocal, sisndthat. — Without thematic -a-: adudrot, dnUnot, dpupot,
dmXmet1 (ma- 'bellow'), dsisrets, asusot (VsQ-, MS ), asusrot (VS. xvm. 58; TS.
v. 7. 7 1 ); tatot, dadhot (dhU- 'shake'); djigar (gr- 'waken'), asisnat (V snath-);
dldhar. — Du. 2. drurujatam (Kh. I. 5 10 ).
PI. 1 . atitrpsma ( V S . V I I . 29), atlt/-s3ma, apaptHma (Kh.ni. 1 9 ) , aplpadama
(AV.), dvtvrtiima (AV.), avocJma.
2. djljapata9 (VS. ix. 1 2 ) , arQrucata (VS. X X X V I I . 1 5 ) .
3. actkradan, aj'tjanan, atitrasan (AV.), adldharan (AV.), anlnasan (AV.),
anesan (VS. xvi. 1 0 ; TS. IV. 5. 1 4 ) , ) , apaptan, apTparan (pr- ' c r o s s ' ) , dmimfnan
(AV.), dvlvatan, avlvaran (AV.), avlvasan (vas- 'bellow'), avTvipatt, avlvfdhan,
avocan, aslsaman (AV.), dsusubhan, asisrasan (Ysrams-, AV.), aslsadan ( Ysad-,
VS. XII. 54; TS. iv. 2. 44); jijanan, paptan.

1
Reduplicated with i owing to the vocalic ( = SV.) and for siiriye in TS. I. 5. 3«. See
pronunciation of the y (diut-) as in the per- WHITNEY'S n o t e o n A V . VI. 3 1 3 .
6
f e c t : see 482 a 1. This form occurs once in the R V . ( v i . I'7)
' Classed by WHITNEY, Sanskrit G r a m m a r as a past tense (along with three other un-
868 a, as an aorist, but Roots 63, as plu- augmented forms: rocata, aria, tiffhat) and
perfect; similarly tutot below. twice as an injunctive. BARTHOLOMAE, KZ.
3 Occurring only in RV. I. 163" = VS. 27, 360, note regards it as a pluperfect.
XXIX. 18 = TS. iv. 6. 7 3 . 7 WHITNEY 868 a ; v. N E G E L E I N 691.
4 WHITNEY 8 6 6 ( M a n t r a ? ) . 8 Occurs TS. 1. 8. 10» with other aorists.
5 This form occurs only once (AV.vi. 31 3 ), 9 From the causative stem japaya- of
as a variant for dhiyatc in RV. X. 1893 ji• 'conquer'.
376 I. ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4 . VEDIC GRAMMAR.

Middle. Sing. 3. dvlvarata (ij- 'cover', A V . ; TS. v. 6. iJ). — With

ending -/' for -fa: atltape.
PI. 2. avivfdhadhvam. — 3. atltrpanta (VS. xix. 36), dblbhayanta,
amlmadanta, avlvasanta ( Yvis-\ dvivfdhanfa, avocanta, dsisyadanta ( Ysyand-),
dsUsudanta (TS. 1. 8. i o a ) ; jjjananta.

Reduplicated Aorist Subjunctive.

515. This mood is of rare occurrence, only about a dozen forms having
been noted. The active is represented in all the persons of the sing, and
the 1. pi. only; the middle by a single dual form.
Active. Sing. I. raradha, voca.— i.titapasi{AV.), vocSsi (VS.xxm. 51).
— 3. clklpSfi, pisprsati*, vocati2, vocati, slsadhati3 (Ysiidh-).
PI. 1. cukrudhama, rtramama, vocama, sisadhama (Ysadh-).
Middle. Du. 1. vocavahai.

Reduplicated Aorist Injunctive.

516. Forms of this mood are of common occurrence in the active, in
which voice more than fifty have been found; but in the middle only five
have been noted.
Active. Sing. 1. cukrudham, jijanam, dldharam, vocam.
2. cikradas, ciksipas, jihvaras, jlhipas (caus. Aa-paya-), tltrsas (TS. hi. 2. 5 j),
didlpas, didyutas, d'idharas, rtlnamas, ninasas, paptas, pispfs'as, pTparas (pr-
'cross'), bibhisas (TS. 111. 2. 5*), mlmrsas, rJradhas, rlrisas, vlvijas, vocas,
sisnathas, sisrdthas, sOsucas (AV.), sTsadhas (Ys<>dh~)-
3. cucyavat, tisthipat, dldharat, dudravat, dadusat, nesat, paptat (AV.),
piparat (pr- 'cross', R V ' . ) and plparat (pr- 'cross', R V 1 . = TS. 1. 6. 123),
pTparat (pr- 'fill*), mTmayat4, riradhat ( Yrandh-), rlrisat, vocat, siirathat,
sisvadat ( Y^ad-). — Without thematic -a-: nunot (nu- 'praise'), yUyot (yu•
'separate'), susrot.
Du. 2. jihvaratam* (VS.v.17) and jihvaratam5 (TS.1.2.13 2 ), rlradhatam5.
PI. 2. riradhatas, rlrtsaia 5 (1. 89« = VS. xxv. 22).
3. ciksipan (AV.), paptan, riraman, vocan, sUsucan (VS. x x x v . 8).
Middle. Sing. 1. voce. — 2. bibhisathas*'.
PI. 3. jljananta, vocanta, sTsapanta {sap- 'serve').

Reduplicated Aorist Optative.

517. The forms of this mood are rare, numbering altogether (including
a precative) not more than a dozen. The majority of these come from vac-
'speak', and the rest from two other roots, cyu- 'stir' and ris- 'hurt'.
Active. Sing. 1. vocfyam. — 2. rinses, voce's. — 3. vocct (AV.).
Du. 2. vocetam. — PI. 1. vocima1. — 3. vociyur.
Middle. Sing. 1. voceya. — Pl.r. cucyuvTmahi8, vocemahi. — 3. cucyavTrata 8,
There is also the precative sing. 3. riris-T-s-ta 9 (vi. 51') or riris-i-s-ta (vin. 18 IJ ).

1 A s if from an indicative 3. sing. *apispyk. 6 Formed from the causative stem bhifaya-

' Like an indicative present in form. of bhu 'fear'.

3 These forms refute the statement of
HIRT, IF. 12, 214 (., that the reduplicated,
as well ai the root and a- aorist, ha« no sub-
junctive, but only injunctive forms. Cp.502,509.
4 This form seems to have an injunctive
sense in R V . X. 2 7 " , its only occurrence.
7 This form occurs six times in the R V . ,
three times unaccented and three times
accented vocima. AVERY 268 wrongly states
vocfma to occur five times and vicema (sic)
once.
8 Without thematic -a-.

5 Reckoned here an injunctive form (not 9 In the Pada text ririftf/a.

imperative) because accompanied by m a :
cp. DELBKOCK, Altindische Syntax p. 361'.
 VII. VERB. A O R I S T SYSTEM. 377

Reduplicated Aorist Imperative.

518. Forms of this mood are rare, numbering hardly more than a dozen.
T h e y occur in the active only.
Active. Sing. 2. vocatat. — 3. vocatu. — Du. 2. jigrtdm (gr- 'waken'),
didhrtam, vocatam. — PI. 2. jigfta, didhftd, paptata' (L 88'), vocata,
susüddta (AV. 1. 2Ö4)2. — 3. püpurantu (pr- 'fill'), sisrathantu.

3. Slgmatic Aorist
519. The general tense sign of this aorist is an s added to the r o o t
This s in the vast majority of verbs (more than 200) comes immediately
before the endings. When such is the case, the stem may be formed in
three different ways: the s being added 1. direct to the root, e. g. a-jai-s-am
( j i - 'conquer'); 2. with a connecting -<-, e. g. a-kram-i-s-am (¿ram- 'stride');
3. with an additional s- prefixed to the connecting -»-, e. g. a-yä-s-i-s-am (yä-
'go'). The inflexion of these three varieties (A) follows that of the graded
conjugation. In a small number of verbs the stem is formed by adding -s
extended with a thematic a; e. g. d-ruk-sa-t (ruh- 'mount'). The inflexion of
this fourth form (B) of the sigmatic aorist is like that of an imperfect of the
a- conjugation.
Of the four varieties of the sigmatic aorist, the first two, the i- aorist and
the is- aorist, are very common, each being formed by nearly 100 roots.
The other two are rare, the sis- aorist being made from only six, and the
sa- aorist from only nine roots.

A . 1. T h e s- aorist.
DELBRÜCK, V e r b u m 1 7 7 — 1 7 9 . — AVERY. V e r b - I n f l e c t i o n 2 5 7 — 2 5 9 . — WHITNEY,
S a n s k r i t G r a m m a r 8 7 8 — 8 9 7 ; R o o t s 2 2 5 — 2 2 6 ; A t h a r v a v e d a , I n d e x V e r b o r u m 380. —
v . NEGELEIN, Z u r S p r a c h g e s c h i c h t e 8 3 — 8 4 .
520. In this form of the sigmatic aorist, the radical vowel as a rule
takes Vrddhi (a being lengthened) in the active. In the middle, on the
other hand, excepting final i and u (which take Guija), the radical vowel
remains unchanged. Thus in the active there occur the forms 1. sing.
a-jai-sam(YJi-), a-bhär-sam ( ybhf-), 3. sing, ä-raik ( Yric-), 3. pi. d-cchänt-sur
(Ychattd-); while in the middle we find 1. sing, a-vit-si (\fvid-), a-bhut-si
(Ybudh-), a-sj-k-si ( Y s r j - ) , a-nü-si {nB- 'praise'), beside forms with Guija from
roots ending in » o r u such as 3. pi. a-he-s-ata (a-ne-s-ata (YnI)>
1. sing, a-sto-si (j/V/K-).
a. T h e r e arc, h o w e v e r , s o m e i r r e g u l a r i t i e s . 1. In a f e w a c t i v e i n j u n c t i v e f o r m s
G u n a a p p e a r s i n s t e a d o f V r d d h i , e. g . sing. 2. jt-s {Yji-), pi. I. jl-fma. — 2. In t w o or t h r e e
m i d d l e f o r m s o f sah- ' o v e r c o m e ' , t h e a i s l e n g t h e n e d , e . g . s i n g . 1. säi-fi\ — 3. T h e
r o o t is s h o r t e n e d in a f e w m i d d l e f o r m s ; thus t h e ä o f da- 'cut', is r e d u c e d to i i n
sing. I. opt. di-4-tya, and the n a s a l o f gam- ' g o ' a n d matt- ' t h i n k ' is d r o p p e d in the f o r m s
a-ga-smahi a n d ma-sfya. — 4. A f t e r a c o n s o n a n t o t h e r than n m r, the t e n s e s i g n s i s
d r o p p e d b e f o r e t, th, and dh; thus a-bhak-ta b e s i d e a-bhak-s-i (\/bhaj-); pat-thas ( A V . )
b e s i d e pat-s-i (\'pad-, A V . ) ; a-sto-dhvam4 (ystu-), w h e r e t h e s on b e c o m i n g 2 c e r e b r a l i z e d
t h e f o l l o w i n g dental b e f o r e d i s a p p e a r i n g (*d-slo-:-dAvam).

In addition to the indicative, all the moods of this form of the aorist
occur. There is also a participle, but it is rare.
1 An i m p e r a t i v e f o r m l i k e this justifies j 188), t h o u g h the r e d u p l i c a t i v e v o w e l is
the classification o f afaplat etc. as an a c t u a l | s h o r t . C p . p. 362, n o t e 9.
aorist, apart f r o m its possible origin as a I 3 A l s o in the a c t i v e s u b j u n c t i v e f o r m
pluperfect. ! sakfäma, w h e r e the a w o u l d n o r m a l l y r e m a i n
* P a d a t e x t susudala. It is p e r h a p s b e t t e r \ s h o r t , as t h e radical v o w e l i n this m o o d
to c l a s s this f o r m h e r e (cp. WHITNEY, Sanskrit J t a k e s G u n a o n l y .
G r a m m a r 8 7 1 ) than a s a transfer f o r m of j 4 T h e only e x a m p l e in this aorist o f t h e
t h e p e r f e c t i m p e r a t i v e f r o m \siid- ( R o o t s ¡ e n d i n g -d/tvam.
37«

Indicative.
521. The only point in which the inflexion differs from that of the imper-
fect of the graded conjugation is that the 3. pi. active invariably ends in -ur.
a. T h e following peculiarities and irregularities are moreover to be noted. 1. I n t h e
active: in the R V . 1 the endings -s a n d -t of the 2. 3. sing, disappear, and the tense sign
also, unless the root ends in a vowel; e. g. a-hiir (AV.), 3. sing, f r o m \'hf-, = *a-har-s-t, but
a-ha-s, 3. sing, from ha- 'leave' - *a-h*-s-l. T h e AV. and TS., however, less often than
not, insert a connecting -T- b e f o r e these endings, thus preserving both the latter and the
j of the tense stem; e. g. a-naik-s-Z-t [\hii/-t AV.), a-tam-s-Z-t (\?/an-, TS.). In four forms
in which the -<- is not inserted, the -s and -/, as distinctive of t h e 2. and 3. persons,
abnormally take the place of the -s of t h e stem or the final consonant of the r o o t :
a-srai-t (AV.) for *a-srai-s-t (ysri-); a-hai-t (AV.) for *a-hai-s-t ((//*/'-); a-va-1 (AV. vm. I»I)
for *a-vas-l* (vas- 'shine'); 2. sing, sra-s (AV.) for *srJ/-s-s3 ( W y - ) . T h e RV. also has
a ya-s for *a-yjj-s-s (yaj- 'sacrifice') beside t h e phonetically regular form in the 3. sing.
a-yaf for *a-yaj-s-t. — 2. I n t h e middle nine first and one or two third persons singular
appear in which the stem is m a d e with the addition of -s, but which have both the
ending and the meaning of the p r e s e n t ; and the -s is a d d e d t o a p r e s e n t s t e m and
not to the aorist form of the root. T h u s f o r m e d are from a present stem of 1. the
a• class: arca-s-e 'I praise', yaja-s-e ' I worship' (viu. 25 1 ); 2. t h e a- class, nasalized:
fiija s-e* 'I strive a f t e r ' ; 3. the ya- class: giy-i-se5 'I sing'; 4. the rta- class: grnZ-s-e*>
'I praise'; punl-f-e 'I purify'; 5. t h e root class: kr-s-e 'I m a k e ' , hi-s-e ' I impel', stu-j-c1
'I p r a i s e ' " ; 6. the intensive: carkr-;-c which (like stuse9 in I. 122 7 ) is a 3. sing, with a
passive sense: 'is praised'.
522. The forms of the indicative actually occurring would, if made from
bhr- 'bear' in the active and stu- 'praise' in the middle, be as follows:
Active. Sing. 1. dbharsam. 2. abkar, abharsls (AV.). 3. abhar\ abharsit
(AV.TS.). — Du. 2. dbharstam. 3. abharstim.—PI. 1. abharsma. 2. abharsta.
3. abhUrsur.
Middle. Sing. 1. asto si. 2. astosthas. 3. astasia. — Du. 3. astosatam. —
PL 1. astosmahi. 2. astodhvam. 3. dstosata.
The forms which actually occur are the following:
Active. Sing.i. akarsam (AV.), ajaisam ( Vji-), dpraksam (Yprach-, AV.),
abhirsam, ayamsam ( \fyam-), ayasam, aspirsam (spr- 'win'), aAnrsam ( \fhr-).
2 . akran \ ykrand-), aghas10 ( Yg/ias-, AV. xx. 1 2 9 1 6 ) , ahas (M- 'leave',
AV. 11. io 7 ). — W i t h irregular -s: ayas {Vyaj-), sras ( Y s r j A V . ) . —
W i t h connecting -/"-: a rats is {ridh- 'succeed', AV.), avatsTs11 (vas- 'dwell',
AV.); bhaists (AV.).
3. With loss of the ending -t: ajais12 ( \ f j i - ) , apras (Ypra-), ahis {ha-
leave'). — With loss of both tense sign and ending:tanakran1* ( Ybrand-),
aksSr ( Yksar-), acait ( ]/«'/-), acchan ( y' chand-), atan ( Y ')i atsar ( Ytsar')t
adyaut ( (/dyut-), adhak ( \/dah-), aprak {pre- 'mix', AV.), apr3t {Yprach-),
abhar, ayJt ( VyaJ')i ayan { Yyam-), araut14 ( Yrudh-, AV.), avltt { Yvah-),
avSt'S {vas- 'shine', AV.), asvait ( Y^t-), asyan { Ysyand-), asrak ( YsfJ')i
asvSr (|/izw-), ahar {Yhr-, AV.); draik (]Ar/V-); dyaut, vat {Yvah-). —

' a n d t h e K a t h a k a , WHITNEV 8 8 8 . in one passage (1. 122'), however, it appears

2
In aval t h e t may, however, represent to b e a 3. sing, with a passive s e n s e : 'is
the final s of the root, the form possibly praised'.
standing for *a-vdl-s-t\ see above 44 a 2, 9 On stuse in general, see OLDENBERG,
and WHITNEV, Sanskrit Grammar 167. Z D M G . 5 9 , 3 5 5 f f - . NEISSER, B B . 3 0 , 3 1 5 — 3 2 5 .
10
3 T h e phonetically regular form would be Cp. above 499, aghas sing. 2. 3.
*srak. Cp. p. 61 (middle). • i Cp. v. NEGELEIN 83, note 5; above
4 Also the participle rnjas-ana-. 44. a i-
5 F r o m gaya-, with
6
for -a-. >» For *ajais-t.
F r o m the weak stem. »J
I
For *dirand-s-t.
7 T h e s e three forms seem to r e p r e s e n t 4 For *araudh-s-t.
the transition of aorist stems to employment ' 5 Cp. avat-s-I-s (AV.) from vas- 'dwell*.
as present stems. Cp. note * and p. 36 (top).
8
T h e form stufi is frequent as a I . s i n g . ;
 V I . VERB. AORIST SYSTEM. 379

With irregular-t: air ait ((AW-, AV.), dhait(Yhi-, AV.).—With connecting

-7-: atamsU ( / / a « - , TS. iv. 7. 13S; VS. xv. 53), anaiksU ( Y AV.); rautsU
(/rW-4-, Kh. iv. 75).
Da. 2. asrastam1 ( Ysrj-, AV.). — 3. abhirstam (VS.xxvm. 17), asvarstam
(Ynor-).
P L 1. ajaisma, dbhaisma.— 2. dcchanta1 ( j/iv4a«(/-), anaista (TS.v. 7.2 4 ).—
3. acchantsur, abhaisur, amatsur ( Yma^')i ayasur, avaksur (Y^ah-, AV.)3.
Middle. Sing. 1. adiksi (Ydis-), ddisi* (da- 'give', AV.), anUsi (Ynu-),
abhaksi (Ybhaj-), dbhutsi (Ybudh-), dmasi (ma- 'measure', AV.), amuksi
( Y muc'i A.V.), avitsi (vid- 'find'), asaksi5 (Ysah-), asrksi, astosi; marnsi
( Yman-), irksib (Y^rj; AV.), saksi5.
2. djnasthas (AV.), atapthas'' (AV.ix.5 6 ), apfkthas ( / p r e - , AV.), dmukthSs
(Ymuc-, AV.).
3. aprkta (YPTC'), abhakta (Ybhaj-), amamsta (VS. v. 40), amatta
(y^mad-), ayamsta (Yyam-), ayasta (Yya)~)-> aramsta ( Yram-), arabdha
( Yrabh-), asakta (Ysaj-), asrsta ( YsfJ')> astosta.
Du. 3. anUsatam, amamsatam (VS. X X X V I I I . 13), dyuksHtam (YyuJ~)•
P l . I. agasmahii(Ygam-), aprksmahi ( YPr^', AV.), abhutsmahi ( Ybudh-),
aviksmahi (jA'TI-), asfksmahi ( Y^fj'i TS. 1. 4 . 4 S - 5 ; VS. X X . 22).
2. dstodhvam (for *d-stos-dhvam from stu- 'praise').
3. akramsata (AV.), adfksata (Y dfs-), adhuksata (Yduh-), ddhursata9
(dhvf - 'injure'), adhBsata, anUsata, anesata (YnJ-)< abhutsata ( Y b u d h - ) ,
amamsata ( ]/mart-), amatsata ( Ymad-), ayamsata ( Yym-), ayuksata ( YyuJ')i
aramsata (AV.), arSsata, alipsata, dviksata (Yvis-), avrtsata (Yw*-)> avfsata
(vf- 'choose', AV. 111. 3'), asaksata (sac- 'accompany';, asrksata (Ys?j~)i
dstosata, ahSsata, ahusata (ha- 'call'), ahrsata ( Y hr-), ahesata (Yhi-).

s- Aorist Subjunctive.
523. This mood is quite common in the RV., but decidedly less so
in the other Samhitas. Its forms are, however, frequent only in the active,
in which all persons are represented except the 1. du. The middle is much
less common, about 20 forms occurring altogether; only one of these is
found in the dual, and two in the plural. The root regularly takes Guna
throughout before the tense sign 10 , in the middle as well as the active. The
primary endings are frequent, being used almost exclusively11 in the du. and
the 2. pl.
In the middle 3. sing, and pl. the exceptional ending -tat occurs in two
forms in later Samhitas (AV. TS.).
Active. Sing. 1. stosani. — 2. darsasi (dr- 'split'); jhas (Yji),
vdksas (Yvah-). — 3. nesati (Ynl-(, parsati (pf- 'take across'), pasati
('protect'), matsati (Ymad-), yosati (yu- 'separate'), vaksati (yvah-), sak-
sati (Ysah-, AV.); dksat (as- 'attain', x. 117), ksesat (ksi- 'dwell'),
chantsat ( Ychand-), jesat (Yj'~), darsat (dr- 'split'), dasat (ds- 'give'), drSsat
' E m e n d a t i o n for asras/ram of the Mss., 4 Cp. v. NEGELEIN 834.
AV. iv. 2 8 4 ; see WHITNEY'S note. 5 With anomalous long vowel.
* For *auhanl-s-ta. 6 S e e WHITNEY'S n o t e o n A V . vi. 3 0 2 .
3 AVERY 257 a d d s the form avesan, which 7 For *a-tap-s-thas.
occurs twice in t h e RV., regarding it doubt- 8 W i t h loss of the radical nasal (a taking
less as an s- aorist of \vT-. It would as such the place of the sonant nasal).
h a v e the d o u b l e anomaly of absence of 9 W i t h interchange of t h e radical vowel
V f d d h i and t h e ending -an. It is probably and s e m i v o w e l : see 50, b.
2
3. pl. impf. of \vif- in both passages (1.170 ; T h e a of sa/i is lengthened in t h e f o r m s
X. I I 4 1 ) . GRASSMANN i n x . 1141 r e g a r d s it saksama and satfale.
as aonst of \vJ-. \ » E x c e p t i n g only the 3. du. act. yakfatam.
380 I. ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4. VEDIC GRAMMAR.

{drä- 'run'), naksat (nas- 'reach'), nhat ( Y » i - ) , pdksat (\fpac-), pdrsat ('take
across'), presat ( \ p r l - ) , bhaksat ( Y bhaj-), bharsat ( Ybhf-), mdtsat ( ymad-),
ydmsat (Yyam-), ydksat (Yyaj-\ yäsat, yosat (yu- 'separate'), riisat, vämsat
( Yvan-), vaksat (Yva>4-), valsat (Kh. v. I5' 6 ), vtsat1 ( Vvi-)2, saksat (sac-
'accompany' 3 and sah- 'overcome' 4 ), satsat (Ysad-), sarsat (Ys!~~, AV.),
stosat, sraksat ( \fsrj-, VS. xxi. 46).
Du. 2. däsathas, dhäsathas, pdrsathas (j>r- 'take across'), vdksathas
(j/i'tf^-, AV.), varsathas (vr- 'cover').
3. pasatas ('protect'), yamsatas (Yyam-), yaksatas (Yya/-), yosatas (yu-
'separate', AV.), vaksatas (Yvah-). — W i t h -tarn: yaksatäm (Vyaj-).
PI. 1. je'säma ( Y!'')> vdmsama ( \fvan-), säksäma5 ( Ysah-), stosama.—
2. dhasatha, nesatha, pdrsat ha ('take across'), matsatha. — 3. parsan ('take
across'), yamsan (Yyam-), räsan, vaksan, s/san (si- 'lie').
Middle. Sing. 1. namsai, mdmsai ( Y m a n - ' ) . — 2. drksase4, prksase6
c
(VP? ~)i mamsase ( Y » i a n - ) . — 3. kramsate, träsate, darsate (dr- 'split'),
mdmsate (Yman-), yamsate ( Yyam-), yaksate ( V0'a/")> rasate, vamsate ( Yvan-),
säksate5 ( Ysah-)7- — W i t h ending -tai: misatai (AV.).
Du. 2. träsathe (for *träsaithe). — PI. 3. ndmsante (Ynam-), mämsante
( Y m a n ' ) - — W i t h ending -tai: mamsatai8 (TS. vii. 4. 15').

s- Aorist Injunctive.
524. Injunctive forms are of fairly common occurrence, especially after
»/<?. Judged by the extremely few accented forms occurring, the accent was
on the radical syllable. All the forms occurring in the 1. sing. act. are irregular
in one way or another: nearly all of them take Guija instead of Vrddhi, while
yüsam (AV.) only lengthens the radical vowel (yu- 'separate'). Three first
persons from roots in -5 substitute for that vowel, as yes am from yä- 'go';
the same substitution takes place in the i . p l . gesma (AV.), desma (VS-), and
3. pi. sthesur (AV.).
Active. Sing. 1. jesam(Yfi-1 VS. ix. 13 etc.), yüsam (yu- 'separate',
AV.), s/osam'°; from roots ending in -ä: gesam (gä- 'go', VS. v. 5), yesam
(ya- 'go'), sthesam' (sthä- 'stand', VS. 11. 8).
2. jes™\ bhäk (Ybhaj-), yat ( Y y a J ) > yaus (yu~ 'separate'), hvär(y/ivar-,
VS. 1. 2). — W i t h connecting -/"-: kasis (Kh. iv. 85; AA. 11. 7).
3. dhäk ( ydah-), bhäk (Y bhaj-), bhär(Ybhr-), mauk ( Y muc-, VS. I. 25),
has11 (ha- 'leave'). — W i t h connecting -/-: tapsit (VS. xm. 30), viksU
(Yvah-, AV.), haslt (TS. VII. 3. 13 1 ; AV.), hvärslt (Yhvar-, VS. 1. 2).
Du. 2. täptam (YtaP~i VS. v. 33), yaustam (yu- 'separate'), srastam
(YsrJ-, A V ) .

i As appearing in immediate juxtaposition 6 W e a k radical vowel instead of Gupa.

with pre ¡at (I. 1806), this form appears to be 7 AVERY 258 adds hisate, also W H I T N E Y ,
an aorist subjunctive of vi-, not a present Grammar 893 a ; but this form is doubtless
injunctive of \vtf- (vlfati). a 3. sing. mid. pres. of his- 'hasten', a secon-
* A VERY 258 gives ¡¡¡at, a m o n g these dary form of hä- 'leave' according to the a-
s
forms, as occurring _ once. H e doubtless class; also hisante (AV. iv. 36 ). Cp. p. 321,
means ui-iifat (iv. 2') which occurs beside note 7.
the subjunctives bharät and udfrat. But it 8 S e e WEBER'S e d . o f t h e T S . , p . 3 1 0 , 1 5 ,
cannot be an s• aorist (which would b e note
sikjat). 'WHITNEY, Roots, takes it as an a- 9 Made perhaps from an i• form of roots
aorist of Jif- 'leave', GRASSMANN, Wörter- ending in -ä. Cp. WHITNEY, G r a m m a r 894 c.
buch 1392, as an aorist of sät-, Cp. above 510. 10 Formed perhaps under the influence of
3 In I. 1291» ('accompany'). the subjunctives jifat and sta/at.
4 In v. 306 ('conquer'). Unnecessarily regarded by DELBRÜCK,
5 W i t h lengthened radical vowel. Verbum p. 60 (80) as from h f - 'take'.
 VII. VERB. AORIST SYSTEM.

PL i. yausma (yu- 'separate', VS.iv. 22). — With Guna only: gesmax

(ga- 'go', AV.), je'sma (Y/i-), desma1 (dJ- 'give', VS. 11. 32). — 2. naista
(Y»t-), yausta (Yyu- 'separate', AV.), sSpta1 (TS. m. 3. 9'). — 3. jaisur
( Yji-, AV.), dhasur, yausur {yu- 'separate'), sthesur' (AV. xvi. 47), hisur.
Middle. Sing. 1. gasi (ga- 'sing'), niksi ( \rnij-, AV.), patsi ( f/pad'-, AV.),
bhaksi ( ybhaj-, VII. 41 1 ), mesi (mi- 'diminish', AV.), yamsi {Yyam-), yaksi
( VyaJ-)t vatnsi ( \ivan-), vrksi { Vvrj-).
2 . cyosthas (Y cyu-), chitthas ( Y chid-, A V . ) , patthis (Ypad-, AV.), bhitthis
( T S . i v . 1 . 9 2 ), mamsthas {Yman-, AV.; V S . x u i . 41), mesthls {Yml-, AV.),
rams this {Yram-,AV.), histhas (ha- 'go forth', AV.).
3. ksesta (ksi- 'destroy', AV.), nesta ( YnT-, AV.), pasta {pa- 'drink', AV.),
matfista (]/man-, AV.), mSmsta 6 {Yman-, A V . xi. 28), mesta (mi- 'fail', AV.),
hasta (ha- 'be left', AV.).
D u . 2. srksatham (VsfJ-t VS. xix. 7).
P l . 1. yutsmahi1 (Yyudh-, AV.), hasmahi (ha- 'be deprived of').
3. dhuksata (Yduh-), nBsata, matsata (Ymad'-), muksata (Ymuc~)i
saksata ( Ysac- 'accompany').

3- Aorist Optative.
525. This mood occurs in the middle only in this form of the sigmatic
aorist. The 2. 3. sing, always appears with the precative s excepting
the one form bhaksUa in the SV. (1. 1. 2. 41).
Sing. 1. disTya*(da-'cut'), bhaksTya (Ybhaj-), masTya* (yman-), muksiya,
raslya, saisiya6 (Ysah-, AV.), strnya (Ysir-, AV.)
2. tnamsTsthds (Yman-). — 3. darsTsta (df- 'tear'), bhaksUa (SV.),
mamstsfa (Yman-), mrksista (mrc- 'injure').
D u . 2 . trasitham (for *tras-tySth3m).
PL 1 . dhukumahi (\rduh-, T S . I. 6. 4 3 ), bhaksTmahi (Ybhaj-), mamsimahi
(Yman-), vamsTmahi and vaslmahis (Yvan-, i x . 72s), saksTmahi (Ysac-). —
3. mamsTrata.
s- Aorist Imperative.
526. No certain regular forms of the imperative occur in the active.
Two or three, such asyaustam, naista, might have been classed here, but as
they occur with ma only, they have been placed among the injunctives. There
are, however, the two transfer forms in the 2. sing, nesa (Ynl-, AV.) and
parsa (pr- 'take across')". The only forms of the imperative occurring in
the middle are three made from ra- 'give' and one from iah- 'conquer'.
Middle. Sing. 2. saksva. — 3. rasatam. — Du. 2. rasathnm. — PI. 3.
rasantam.
4- Aorist Participle.
527. Only two or three forms of the active participle are found. These
are daksant- and dhdksant- from dah- 'burn', and sdksant- from sah- 'prevail'.
In the middle there are no regular forms. There is one doubtful example
in which the stem is extended with -a- and accordingly adds the suffix -mana,
as in the a- conjugation: dhi-s-a-mana- (dhl- 'think').
There are, besides, a dozen stems irregularly formed by adding s to the
root with an intermediate -a-, and taking the regular ending -ana. These forms

S e e p . 380, n o t e 9.
1 | s R o o t w e a k e n e d b y l o i s o f n a s a l (a t a k i n g
F o r sap-s-ta.
1 | t h e p l a c e o f t h e s o n a n t nasal).
3 A somewhat doubtful reading : see 6 W i t h irregular lengthening of the radical

WHITNEY'S n o t e o n A V . VII. 5 2 ' . I vowel.

4 W i t h t h e r a d i c a l a w e a k e n e d to i. ! 7 S e e WHITNEY. A V . I n d e x V e r b o r u m 1 8 2 .
382 I. ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4. VEDIC GRAMMAR.

may be accounted as belonging to the s- aorist. AH but two of them occur

in the R V . T h e y are: arsasänd- 'injuring', öhasäna- (Yüh-) 'lying in wait',
jrayasänd- (YJri-) 'far-extending', dhiyasänd- (j dhi-) 'attending', namasand-
(\rnam-) 'rendering homage' (AV.), bhiydsäna- (y'bAi-) 'fearing'(AV.), mandasand-
(Ymand-) 'rejoicing', yamasänd- (j yam-) 'being driven' (with passive sense),
rabhasänd- (\rrabh-) 'agile', vrdhasänd- (\~vrdh-) 'growing', savasänd- (\ sü-)
'strong', sahasänd- (\rsah-) 'mighty'.

A . 2. T h e ¡s- Aorist.
DELBRÜCK, Verbum p. 179—180. — AVERY, Verb-Inflection 259—261. — WHITNEY,
Sanskrit Grammar 898—910: Roots 2 2 6 — 2 2 7 ; A V . Index Verborum 380. — v. NEGELEIN,
Zur Sprachgeschichte 85—86.
528. About 80 roots take this form of the sigmatic aorist in the R V .
and about a dozen others in the A V .
T h e -s is here added to the root with the connecting vowel -/-. T h e
radical vowel as a general rule takes Guna throughout; but in the active
a final vowel takes Vrddhi and a medial -a is sometimes lengthened. No
roots with final -3 and few with final -t take this aorist. T h e terminations are
the same as those of the s- aorist, excepting that the 2. and 3. sing, a c t end
in -Ts ( = is-s) and -Jt (= is-t). Active and middle forms, though frequent,
are rarely both made from the same root, occurring thus in about fifteen
verbs only. This is the only aorist from which a few forms are made in the
secondary conjugation
Besides the indicative, all the moods are represented in this aorist, but
no participial forms have been met with.

Indicative.
529. In the active all persons are represented except du. 1. 2. and pL 2.;
but in the middle only sing. 2. and 3. occur besides a single form of sing. 1
(Kh.), du. 3. and pi. 3. (VS.).
a. A few irregularities occur in the formation of this tense 1 . 1. T h e
forms atärima (beside the normal dtärisma) and ava dir an3 (A V.), are probably
to be regarded as irregular forms with abnormal loss of the aoristic -s. —
2. T h e root grabh- 'seize' takes the connecting v o w e l T3 (as it does in other
verbal forms) instead of as agrabhXsma. — 3. In the sing. 1. act., the
ending -7m appears instead of -isam in the three forms akramlm, vddhim,
and agrabhlm (TS.), doubtless owing to the analogy of the 2. and 3. sing, -is
and -it*. — 4. T h e abnormal ending -ait appears in the 3. sing, in ds'araits
( A V . ) beside asarit ( A V . ) 6 .
T h e normal forms occurring, if made from kram- 'stride', would be as
follows:
A c t i v e . Sing. 1. dkramisam. 2. dkramls. 3. dkramlt. — Du. 3. dkra-
mistäm. — PI. 1. dkramisma. 3. dkramisur.
Middle. Sing. 1. dkramisi (Kh.). 2. dkramisthas. 3. akramista.— Du. 3.
dkramisätäm. — PI. 3. dkramisata (VS.).
T h e forms which actually occur are the following:

* From causatives dhvanaylt, ailayil (\i!-, I 4 Cp. DELBRÜCK, Verbum p. 188.

AV.), from a desiderative irisls (\'rdh-, AV.). 5 This abnormal ending also occurs in
» T h e weak form of the root appears in the secondary conjugation in the denomi-
the injunctive nudis/häs (AV.) and the opta-! native aor. asaparyait(AV.): see below 570.
tive rucistya (AV.) and gmifiya (VS.), which 6 Both these forms also show the irregu-

syncopates the radical vowel as in the root \ larity of taking Guija instead of Vjddhi.
aor. and the perfect of this verb. |
3 Cp. WHITNEY 904 d. |
 V I I . VERB. AORIST SYSTEM. 383

Active. Sing. 1. akanisam, akarisam, akramisam, acayisam (AV.),

acarisam, abharisam (Ybhr-, AV.), avadhisam (AV.), avadisam (AV.), as'atrt-
sisam, asanisam; dsisam (as- 'eat', A V . ) ; ravisam. — W i t h ending -Tm:
akramTm, agrabhim (TS.); vadium.
2. akramis, adrmhls (VS. VI. 2), dvadhls, avarsTs', astarls (|fstr-, A V . ) ;
Ss'ls2 (as- 'eat', AV.), auksls (uks- 'grow'); kramls, vadhTs.
3. akarlt, akramit, agrabhU, agrahit (AV.), atarU, adrmhU (MS. IV. 13®),
anayU* (\ n~i-, AV.), dmandlt, ayasit, ayodhlt, arSvit, avadhlt, dvarslt (Yvrs-,
AV.), as'a/nsit, asarit3 (AV.), asavU, astanit (AV.), asvanU; avtt, asit (as-
'eat', A V . ) ; jiirvTt ijurv- 'consume'), tarit, vadhlt. — W i t h ending -ait:
asarait* (AV.).
Du. 3. dmanthistHm; jdnistam.
P I . I. agrabhisma, atHrisma and atarima5, dvadhisma (VS. IX. 38).
3. ataksisur, atarisur, adhanvisur, dnartisur, anindisur, apllvisur, dman-
disur, amadisur, arajisur, aranisur (ran- 'rejoice'), aravtsur, avadisur, asavisur;
aksisur6 (r. 163'°), arnsur (\fan-, AV., TS.), dvisur (jfav-). — W i t h -ran:
avadiran (AV.).
Middle. Sing. 1. aiksisi (Kh. 1. 1 1 : \riAs-). — 2. ajanisthas (AV.),
asamisthas (s'am- 'labour'), asayisthas, d£ramisthas\ janisthas.
3. akrapista []/krp-), ajanista, adhavista, anavista, aprathista, arocista
(VS. XXXVII. 15), avasista (vas- 'wear'), asamista, asahista; duhista (uh- 'con-
sider') ; kramista, janisti7, prathista, mandista, yamista.
D u . 3. amandisatam. — PI. 3. agrbhisata (VS. XXI. 60).

is- Aorist Subjunctive.

530. Active forms of this mood are fairly common, but are almost
exclusively limited to the 2. and 3. sing. Middle forms are very rare, occurring
only in the pi., where not more than four examples have been noted.
Active. Sing. 1. davisani1. — 2. avisas, kdnisas, tarisas, raksisas,
vddhisas, vtidisas (AV.), v/sisas, samsisas.
3. kdrisat, jambhisat, josisat, tarisat, nindisat (AV.), pdrisat ('take
across'), bodhisat, mardhisat, yacisat, yodhisat, raksisat, vanisat (AV.), vyathisat
(VS. vi. 18), samsisat (TS. v. 6. 86), sanisat, savisat8 (sa- 'vivify').
PI. 3. sartisan9 (AV. v. 3»).
Middle. PI. 1. yacisamahe, sanisSmahe. — 3. vanisantat0 (TS. rv. 7. 141),
sanisanta.
is- Aorist Injunctive.
531. Forms of the injunctive are commoner than those of the subjunctive.
In the active they are found almost exclusively in the 2. 3. sing., 2. du. and
3. 3. pi.; in the middle nearly a dozen forms occur, all but one in the sing.
The forms of this mood have the accent on the root (as in the un-
augmented indicative).
Active. Sing. 1. santsisam, himsisam (VS. 1. 25).

» AVERY 259 adds azarhis as occurring once. | 7 Cp. v. SCHROEDER, WZKM. 13,119—122.
2 See WHITNEY'S note on AV. x i . 3* 6 . | 8 This form occurs also in two passages
3 With Guna instead of Vfddhi of. final | of the A V . ; in a third (AV. I. 18'J savifai
vowel; cp. BARTHOLOMAE, Studien 2, 165. | appears instead of i t Cp. WHITNEY'S note
4 See WHITNEY'S note on AV. VI. 66», on this passage, and his Grammar 1 5 1 a .
where the reading aiarlt is better supported; 9 —T h e corresponding passage of" the R V .
cp. his note on AV. vi. 65'. (x. 128-') has vanusanta, and of the TS.
5 With loss of the aoristic -s. (IV. 7. 14«) vanifanta.
6 From akf- 'attain' (WHITNEY, Roots 1) 1 0 See preceding note.

a secondary form of \/as-; otherwise a stf-

aorist from as- 'attain'.
3«4 I. ALLGEMEINES UND S P R A C H E . 4. VEDIC GRAMMAR.

2. avis, kramis (AV.), jtvJs (AV.), tarts, bar/us, math is, mardhis, mo sis,
yAvls, yodhls, raksis (AV.), rand/us, lekhls (VS.v.43), vddhls, socls (VS.xi. 45),
sdvTs, spharis, himsls (VS. AV.). — W i t h -a/s: s'arais (I rsr-, AV.).
3. as'lt (as'- 'eat'), gärtt (gr- 'swallow'), cärJt, jlvTt (AV.), tärlt, daslt (das-
'waste'), barhit, mdthlt, vadhit (TS.iv. 2. 9'; VS. xm. 16), resit, svänXt, Aimsit.
Du. 2. täristam, mardhistam, himsistam (AV. VS.).
PI. 1. sramisma.— 2. grabhlsta, vadhista, himsista (AV. TS.); mathistana
(AV.), ranistana (\ ran-), vadhistana. — 3. järisur (jr- 'waste away'), jivisur
(AV.), tärisür1 (AV.), vadhisur (AV.), z / S a W (AV.),' himsisur (AV.).
Middle. Sing. 1. radhisi (AV.). — 2. ksanisthis2 (AV.), nudisthäs3
(AV.), marsisthas (Ymrs-), vadhisthäs (Kh. 11. 11 3 ), vyathisthas (AV.). —
3. panista, pavista, bädhista. — PL 1. vyathismahi (AV.).
/i- Aorist Optative.
532. This mood is rare, occurring in the middle only and being formed
from hardly a dozen roots. Though the ending is accented, the root appears
in a weak form in gmisiya4 (VS.) and rucislya (AV.). The 2. and 3. sing,
take the precative -s-.
Middle. Sing. 1. edhisTya (AV.), gmisiya 3 (VS. HI. I 9), jartisiya (AV.) s,
rucislyaJ (AV.). — 2. modisTsthlls (AV.). — 3. janisTsta, vanisls/a.
Du. 1. sahisXvahi (AV.). — PI. 1. edhisimdhi (AV.), tririsimahi, mandisi-
mahi(VS.iv. 14; TS.i.2.3 1 etc.), vandisimdhi, vardhinmdhi(VS. 11.14,xxxvm.21),
sahisimahi (AV.), sähisTmdhi (Pada text sahistmaht).
is- Aorist Imperative.
533. Forms of this mood are rare, occurring in the active only and
being made from six or seven roots at the most. Among these forms, two
only are distinctively imperative, aviddhi and avistu; a few others can be
distinguished by having the accent on the ending; the rest, being unaccented
and used without mA, cannot be distinguished from injunctives.
Sing. 2. aviddhi. — 3. avistu. — Du. 1. avistam, kramistarn, gamistam,
canistdm, cayistam (ci- 'gather'), yodhistam (\ryudh-), vadhistam, snathistam. —
3. avistam. — PL 2. avitd6; avis/ana, snathistana.

A . 3. T h e sis- Aorist.
DELBRÜCK, V e r b u m p . 1 7 9 . — A V E » Y , Vcrb-Inflection 2 6 1 . — WHITNEY, Sanskrit
Grammar 9 1 1 — 9 1 6 ; Roots 227. — v. NEGELEIN, Zur Sprachgeschichte 86.
534. This aorist, which is inflected exactly like the is- aorist, is formed
by only six or seven roots in the Saiphitäs. Middle forms occur in the
optative only.
Indicative.
Sing. 1. aySsisam. — Du. 3. ayäsistam (VS. xxvm. 14). — PL 2. ayä-
sista. — 3. agisisur (gJ- 'sing'), ayäsisur1.
Subjunctive.
Sing. 3. gäsisat (ga• 'sing'), yäsisat.
6
» With accent on the ending instead of This may be regarded as a form irregu-
the root. larly lacking f = avista.
* C p . BRUGMANN, K Z . 2 4 , 3 6 3 f. 7 äififur is formed from as- 'attain', accord-
3 With weak form of root. ing to DELBRÜCK, Verbum p. 179; according
4 C p . ZIMMER, K Z . 3 0 , 2 2 2 . to WHITNEY, Sanskrit Grammar 9 1 3 , and
5 The Kathaka has the forms janifeyam Roots 1 , from the secondary root a i f - ; see
and janifeya made from a secondary -a- stem above p. 383, note 6 .
{WHITNEY 907).
 VII. VERB. A O R I S T SYSTEM. 385

Optative.
Middle. Sing. 1. vamsislya' (van- 'win', AV.). — 2. yäsisTsthäs2. —
PI. 1. pyäsisimahU ( A V . ; VS. ir. 14; MS. iv. 9'° [p. 181, 9]).

Injunctive.
Sing. 1. ramsisam4 (SV. i. 4.1.2'). — Du. 2. häsistam (AV.). — 3. häsistäm
(AV.). — PI. 2. häsista (AV.). — 3. hasisur (AV.).'

Imperative.
D u . 2. yä sistdm. — PI. 2. yäststa5 (1. lös' 5 ).

B . T h e sa- Aorist.
DELBRÜCK, V e r b u m p. 1 7 9 . — A V E R Y , V e r b - I n f l e c t i o n 262. — WHITNEY, S a n s k r i t
G r a m m a r 9 1 6 — 9 2 0 ; R o o t s 227. — v . NEGELEIN, Z u r S p r a c h g e s c h i c h t e 86.

535. In the Samhitäs this form of the sigmatic aorist is taken by only
nine roots, which end in j i s or h and contain the medial vowels i u or r.
T h e thematic a doubtless came to be employed in these few verbs to avoid
a difficult agglomeration of consonants when the endings were added. T h e
inflexion is like that of an imperfect of the a- class of the first conjugation,
the -sa- being accented 6 in unaugmented forms. Besides the indicative, only
forms of the injunctive and imperative occur, altogether fewer than a dozen.
No subjunctive, optative, or participial forms have been noted.

Indicative.
536. Neither forms of any person of the dual nor of the 2. pi. occur in
the indicative of this type of the s- aorist The active forms greatly pre-
dominate, the middle being represented in the 3. sing, and pi. by only three
or four forms altogether.
Active. Sing. 1. avrksam (\ r vrh-). — 2. adhuksas (Jiduh-, VS. 1. 3),
aruksas (\ruh-, A V . ) ; ruksas (y ruh-, AV.). — 3. akruksat {\ krus-), aghuksat
(\'guh-), aduksat1 and ddhuksat (\rduh-), dmrksat ((/ mrs-, AV.) aruksat
(Yruk-), dsprksat tysprs-, A V . ; VS. xxviu. 18). — PI. 1. amrksäma (j/mfj-
'wipe'), aruksitma (\ r ruh-, AV.). — 3. adhuksan (J,'duh-)-, duksan8 and
dhuksdn (\' du/i-).
Middle. Sing. 3. ddhuksataduksata8 and dhuksata. — PI. 3. amrksanta
W'»rJ-)-
Injunctive.
Active. Sing. 2. duksas, mfksas {\rmrs-). — 3. dviksat ([rdvis-, AV.). —
PI. 2. mrksata (Ymrs-).
Middle. Sing. 3. duksata8 and dhuksata (\ duh-), dviksata {y dvis-,
A V . ) . — PI. 3. dhuksdnta (\rduh-).

Imperative.
Active. Du. 2. mrksatam (\r»irj-). — 3. yaksatäm i\ryaj-).
Middle. Sing. 2. dhuksdsva (\rduh-).

1 In the M s s . vamiifiya\ s e e WHITNEY'S 6 T h r e e forms occur accented thus; the

note on A V . ix. I'4. j r o o t is, h o w e v e r , a c c e n t e d in dhuksata.
2 W i t h p r e c a t i v e s. 7 See a b o v e 32 b.
i I n t h e M s s . pyàsisimahi; s e e WHITNEY'S 8 S e e a b o v e 32 b .
note on A V . vit. 815. 9 I n IX. 1 l o 8 t h e f o r m adhuisa/a seems
4 Variant for raslya of the RV. to b e a 3. pi.
5 W i t h « f o r /. A V E R Y 261 g i v e s t h e f o r m
as yâstf/d.
Indo-arÎBche Philologie. L 4. 25
386 I. ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4. VF.DIC GRAMMAR.

IV. The Future System.

DELBRÜCK, Verbum p. 183—184. — AVERY, Verb-Inflection 262. — WHITNEY,
Sanskrit Grammar 931 — 9 4 1 ; Roots 228 f . ; AV. Index Verborum 3S0. — v. NEGF.LEIN.
Zur Sprachgeschichte 86—87.

537. The stem is formed by adding -syd1 or (rather less frequently

with connecting -«-) -isyd1 to the root, which gunates a final or a prosodi-
cally short medial vowel. As the subjunctive frequently has a future sense,
and even the present indicative may have it, the occasion for the use of
actual future forms seldom arises in the R.V., which forms a future stem from
only fifteen roots, while the AV. does so from more than thirty (about eight
of these occurring in the R V . also)'. There is only one subjunctive and
one conditional form, but some twenty participles occur.
a. In the following steins the suffix -sya is added direct: ksi- 'abide' :
kse-syd-*; ji- 'conquer' : jt-sya-\ dah- 'burn' \ dhak-sya-; yaj- 'sacrifice' : yak-
syd-; vac- 'speak' : vai-syd-; sU- 'bring forth : sft-sya-*. In the A V . also occur:
/'- 'go' : e-syd-; kft- 'cut' : kart-sya-\ kram- 'stride' : kram-syd-\ gup- 'protect' :
gop-sya-; da- 'give' : dCi-syd-; til- 'lead' : ne-sya-; mih- 'mingere' : tutk-syd---,
yä- 'go' :yä-syd-; yuj- 'join' : yok-sya-b-, rädh- 'succeed' : rJt-sya-; rah- 'carry'
: vak-syd-; vrt- 'turn' : -vart-syd-i; sad- 'fall' : s'at-sya-; sah- 'prevail' : säk-sya-";
hä- 'leave' : hä-sya-; hu- 'sacrifice': ho-syd-. In the VS. bandh- 'bind' : bhant-syd-.
b. In the following stems the suffix is added with connecting -/'-:
av- 'favour' : av-isya-9; as- 'shoot' : as-isyd-; kr- 'do' : kar-isyd--, jan- 'beget' :
jan-isyabhü- 'be': bhav-isydvian- 'think': mati-isyd-; vä- 'weave': vay-isya-™;
satt- 'acquire' : san-isyd-; sr- 'hasten' : sat-isyd-; stu- 'praise' : stav-isyd-. From
causative stems: ^/-'support' : dhäray-isyd-; vas- 'clothe oneself': väsay-isyd-.
The A V . has the following additional stems: gam- 'go' : gam-isya-; dhf-
'maintain' : dhar-isyd--, nas- 'disappear' : nas-isya-; pat- 'fly' :pat-isyd-; mr- 'die'
: mar-isya-; vad- 'speak* : vad-isya-; vrt- 'turn' -.tart-isya-1'; svap- 'sleep' :svap-
isyd-"; han- 'slay' : han-isya-. From causative stems: dus- 'spoil' : düsay-
isya-; vr- 'cover' : varay-isya- 'shield'.
538. a. Subjunctive. The only subjunctive form occurring is Icar-isyti(-s)
in iv. so2-*.'3
b. Conditional. The only example occurring is formed from bhr- 'bear'
: d-bhar-isya-t 'he was going to bear o f f (11. 30").
c. Participles. A good many participial forms occur. The following
stems are met with:
Active, av-isydntas-isydnte-sydnt-(AV.) '5, kar-isydnt-, kse-sydnt-, khan-
isydnt- (TS.), je-sydnt-16 (AV.), dä-sydnt- (AV.), dhak-sydnt-, pat-isydnt- (AV.),

1 On the origin of this suffix see BRUG- 7 See WHITNEY'S note on AV. x v . 6 7 .
MANN, Grundriss 2, 747 Cp. 1092), w h o con- 8 A n emendation : see note on sikfye.
nects the -isya form with the is- aorist; and 9 Cp. DELBRÜCK, V e r b u m p. 184.
Op. cit. p. 183.
v . NEGELEIN, Z u r S p r a c h g e s c h i c h t e 8 6 . 10
2 According to WHITNEY 937 the future " In the form ànvartifye for anu-vartisye;
is formed from over 60 roots in the T S . but see p. 11, 18.
I am uncertain how many of these occur i 1 2 See WHITNEY'S note on A V . x i x . 479.
in independent Mantra passages. 3 The form kanfya (l. 1659) is probably to
i T h i s is the only stem in which -syd is be explained as the same subjunctive
to be read -sia : kftfiattlas. (= karifyas): cp. BR. sv. karifyn.
4 T h i s stem has the double irregularity »4 C p . DELBRÜCK, V e r b u m p . 1 8 3 .
of accenting the root and not taking G u n a : «5 In praifyatt (AV. v. 22 >4), Pp. pra-efyan,
cp. the perfect sasuva. but WHITNEY = pta-tfyan.
5 The Mss. read meifami in AV. VII. 1 6 In A V . XV. 20' nearly all the Mss. read

1 0 2 ' : cp. WHITNEY'S note. jyesyan (as if from \jyä-) for jesyätt.
6 Doubtful readingsee note^ p.387onyoksyc.
 VII. VERB. FUTURE SYSTEM. 387

bhar-isydnt- (TS.), bhav-isyant- (AV. VS.), yj-sydnt- (AV,), vac- 'speak': vak-syant
vay-isyänt-, san-isydnt-, sar-isydnt-, su-syant-, han-isydnt-.
Middle, kramsyd-mlna- (AV.), janisyd-mäna- (VS.Xvm.5), yaksyd-mäna-,
stavisyd-mäna- (AV.).
Future Indicative.
539. The future is inflected, in both active and middle, like the present
of the a- conjugation. The forms actually met with in the Samhitas would,
if made from kr- 'do', be the following:
Active. Sing. 1. karisyAmi. 2. karisydsi. 3. karisydti. — Du. 2. karisyathas
(TS.). 3. karisyatas (AV.). — PL 1. karisyAmas and karisyAmasi (AV.). 2. kar-
isydtha. 3. karisyanti (AV.).
Middle. Sing. 1. karisyJ. 2. karisyase. 3. karisyate.
The forms actually occurring are the following:
Active. Sing. 1. esyämi ( A V . ) , karisyämi ( A V . ) , karisyämi ( A V . ) , carisyämi
( V S . 1. 5), jesyAmi, bhantsyAmi (\ bandh-, V S . XXII. 4)', meksyAmi1 ( A V . ) ,
r
vaksyAmi (\ vac-), stavisyAmi.
2. karisydsi, jesyasi (VS. xxui. 17), bhavisyasi (AV.), marisjasi(AV.), rS/f-
yasi (\rädhAV.), vaksyasi (V vac-, TS.11.6.12'), sanisyasi, hanisyasi (AV.).
3. karisyati, gamisyati (AV.), nasisyati (AV.), nesyati (AV.), patisyati
(AV.), bhavisyati, ?narisyati (AV.), vadisyati (AV.), sanisyati, sthäsyati (VS.
vi. 2), hanisyati (AV.).
Du. 2. karisyathas (TS. iv. 1. 9'). — 3. marisyatas (AV.), vaksyatas
(\rvah-, AV.).
PI. 1. bharisyämas (VS. xi. 16), vaksyAmas (\rvac-), svapisyAmasi (AV.).
2. karisydtha, bhavisyatha, sarisyatha (AV.).
3. gopsyanti (\rgup-, AV.), satsyanti (\rsadAV.), häsyanti hä-, AV.).
Middle. Sing. 1. d/iarisyj (AV.), matiisye, yoksye3 (AV.), vartisye• (AV.),
säksye5 (^Xtf//-, AV.). — 2. stavisyase. — 3. janisyaU, stavisyate (AV.).
Periphrastic Future.
540. Of this formation, common in the later language, there seems to be an
incipient example in VS.xvm.59 = TS.v.7.7 1 : anvägantA yajndpatir vo dtra 'the
sacrificer is following after you here', a modification of AV. vi. 1 2 3 ' - ' : anvägantA
ydjamsnah svast!, which WHITNEY translates 'the sacrificer follows after well-
being' 6 .
V . Secondary Conjugation.
541. As opposed to the primary conjugation, there are four derivative
formations in which the present stem is used throughout the inflexion of
the verb and is everywhere accompanied by the specific sense connected
with that stem. The forms which occur outside the present system are, how-
ever, rare. The four derivative formations are the desiderative, the intensive,
the causative, and the denominative.
1. T h e Desiderative.
DELBRÜCK, Verbum p. 1 8 4 — 1 8 6 . — AVERY, Verb-Inflection 230,268—270.—WHITNEY,
Sanskrit Grammar 1026 — 1 0 4 0 ; Roots 2 3 3 f . — v. NEGELEIN, Zur Sprachgeschichte 88—90.
542. Though the least frequent of the secondary conjugations, the desi-
derative is perhaps best dealt with first, as being akin in derivation and
' In A V . 111. 95 ROTH and WHITNEY'S 3 All the Mss. in A V . XIX. 13' read yokfe
edition reads bhai tsyami\ but WHITNEY, note (but Paipp. yokfye).
on that p a s s a g e , would emend this to 4 In anvartifye ( A V . Xiv. I5 6 ) given under
bhanlsyami [ybandh-), and SHANKAR PANDIT the root art- by WHITNEY, A V . Index Ver-
reads bhalsyami. ' b o r u m ; see p . 386, note
2
WHITNEY'S emendation for meksami of 5 T h e Mss. in A V . II. 275 read säise.
the M s s . ; see his note on AV. vu. 1 0 2 1 . 6 Cp. WHITNEY, Sanskrit Grammar 946.
25*
388 I . A L L G E M E I N E S UND S P R A C H E . 4. VEDIC GRAMMAR.

meaning to the f u t u r e t h e last of the primary verbal formations treated

above ( 5 3 7 — 5 4 0 ) . T h e desiderative is formed from the root with an accented
reduplicative syllable and the suffix -sa, which expresses the desire for the
action or condition denoted by the root; e. g. pa- 'drink' : pi-pa-sa- 'desire to
drink'. Desiderative stems from fewer than sixty roots are met with in the
Samhitas.
T h e characteristic reduplicative v o w e l is /', which appears in all
stems except those formed from roots containing u (which reduplicate with u);
and the root generally remains unchanged. Thus jfia- 'know' : ji-jna-sa- (AV.);
jya- 'overpower' : ji-jya-sa-; da- ' g i v e ' : di-da-sa-; pa- 'drink' : pi-pa-sa-; t i j - 'be
sharp' : ti-tik-sa-; nid- 'blame' : ni-nit-sa-\ Mid- 'split' : bi-bhit-sa--, mis- 'mix' :
mi-mik-sa--, ris- 'hurt' : ri-rik-sa-\ m- 'lead' : ni-nX-sa-; prX- 'love' : p't-prx-sa-;
guh- 'hide' : ju-guk-sa-2; duh- 'milk' : du-duk-sa-2; muc- 'release' : mi't-muk-sa-]
yudh- 'fight' : yu-yut-sa--, ruh- 'ascend'-. ru-ruk-sa-) bhu- 'be' : bu-bhu-sa-; trd-
'pierce' : ti-trt-sa-; trp- 'delight' : ti-trp-sa--, drs- 'see' : di-dri-sa-; vrt- 'turn' :
vi-vrt-sa--, srp- 'creep' : si-srp-sa-.
a. A few desideratives reduplicate with a long v o w e l : tur- ( = / / - )
'cross' : tu-tur-sa--, bidh- 'oppress' : bx-bhat-sa--, man- 'think' : mX-mam-sa- (AV.)
'investigate'. On the other hand, two desideratives abbreviate the reduplica-
tive syllable by dropping its consonant; thus yaj- 'sacrifice' : i-yak-sa- for
*yi-yak-sa-^; nas- 'attain' : i-nak-sa-, f O T * n i - t i a k - s a - , perhaps through the influence
of iyak-sa-; and the R V . has one desiderative form from dp- 'obtain' in which
the reduplication is dropped altogether: ap-santa.
b. T h e radical v o w e l is lengthened when i, u, or /- is final (the
latter becoming Ir); thus ci- 'see' : ci-kX-sa-\ j i - 'conquer' : ji-gi-sa-; yu- 'unite'
: yu-yB-sa-; s'ru- 'hear' : sit-srU-sa-) kf- 'make' : ci-kir-sa- ( A V . ) ; hr- 'take' :
ji-hir-sa- ( A V . ) ; dhvr- 'injure' : die dhur-sa- with u because vowel and semi-
vowel have interchanged 4 .
«. A f e w roots w i t h medial a followed by « or m lengthen the
vowel; thus man- ' t h i n k ' : mX-matn-sa- ( A V . ) ; /tan- 'smite' \ji-gham-sa-\ gatn-
'go' : ji-gam-sa- ( A V . ) ; two others do so after dropping the nasal, viz. van-
'win' : vi-vH-sa--, and sari- 'gain' : si-sa-sa-5.
c . In nearly a dozen roots, on the other hand, the r a d i c a l v o w e l i s
weakened.
1. In a few roots final a is reduced to T and, in one instance, even
i 6 ; thus gd- 'go' : ji-gX-sa- (SV 1 .); pa- 'drink' : pi-px-sa- (RV.) beside pi-pa-sa--,
ha- 'go forth' : ji-hi-sa-i ( A V . ) ; dha- 'put' : di-dhi-sa- ( R V . ) beside dhit-sa-.
2. Half a dozen roots containing 3 or a shorten the root b y syncopation
resulting in contraction with the reduplicative syllable; da- 'give' : dit-sa-, for
d/-d[3]-sa-, beside di-da-sa--, dha- 'put' : dhi-t-sa-, for d!-dh-\a\-sa-, beside di-
dhi-sa--, dabh- 'harm' : di-p-sa-, for di-d\a\bh-sa--, lab/i- 'take' : li-p-sa- (AV.), for
li-l\a\bh-sa--, s'ak- 'be able' : si-k-sa-, for si-s\a\k-sa-; sah- 'prevail': si-k-sa-, for
s!-s\a~\k-sa-; similarly initial a in ap- 'obtain' : ip-sa-8 ( A V . ) ; and in rdh-
'thrive' : irt-sa- ( A V . ) the initial r is treated as if it were ar-9.
a. In a f e w r o o t s t h e c o n s o n a n t s u n d e r g o e x c e p t i o n a l c h a n g e s ; thus palatals r e v e r t
to t h e o r i g i n a l guttural in ci- ' n o t e ' : ci-tl-;a-; cit- ' p e r c e i v e ' : ci kU-sa--, j i - ' c o n q u e r ' -.ji-gt-sa--.

C p . v . NEGELEIN 8 6 .
1
5 A s in t h e p a s t p a r t i c i p l e 5 7 4 , 2 a.
See above 32 b.
2 6 A s in t h e p a s t participle 5 7 4 , 3.
3 C p . v . NEGELEIN 68, n o t e 2. T h e i b e i n g 7 In AV. xx. 1272 the Mss. read jihhate
the reduplicative vowel, cannot b e explained probably for jihTdate.
in the s a m e w a y as that o f t h e p e r f e c t 8 C p . BRUGMANN 2, 854, 1027.
i-yaj- for *ya-yaj-, where i- has the nature 9 v . NEGELEIN (89, n o t e ») t h i n k s trtsa- can
of Samprasarana. only be explained from i-irdh-sa-.
4 Cp. \dw- : dyu-ta- etc., below 573 a.
 VII. VERB. FUTURE SYSTEM. SECONDARY CONJUGATION. 389

/¡ait- 'slay' : /i-j/iam-sa-. In g/tas- 'eat' the final s becomes t before the s of the suffix:
ji-^hat-sa-' (AV.).
The desiderative suffix -sa is never added in the RV. with the connecting vowel
but there is one example of this formation in the AV., viz. pat- 'fly' : pi-pat-t-ja-*.
Inflexion.
543. T h e desiderative is inflected regularly like verbs of the a- conjuga-
tion in both voices, having the moods and participles of the present tense,
as well as an imperfect. N o forms outside the present system occur in the R V .
with the exception of the perfect from mis-, mi-miks-urJ etc. (in which, how-
ever, the desiderative stem is treated as a root) besides two aorist forms and
one passive participle in the A V . 4 .
T h e forms of the p r e s e n t i n d i c a t i v e , active and middle, which actually
occur, would if made from vi-va-sa- 'desire to win', be as follows:
A c t i v e . S i n g . 1. vivasamt. 2. vivdsasi. 3. vivasati.— D u . 2. vivasathas.
3. vhasatas. — PI. 1 . vivasamas. 3. vivasanti.
Middle. S i n g . 1. vivase. 2. vivasase. 3. vivasate. — P L 1. vivJs&mahc.
vivasante.
544. Forms occurring elsewhere in the present system are the following:
a . Subjunctive. A c t i v e . Sing. 3. jighamsat (TS.), titrpsat, dipsat
(TS. AV.), ninitsat, vivasftt. — P I . 3. iyakrnn, titrtsan, vivasan.
b. Injunctive. Active. Sing. 3. inaksat, cikitsat, vivasat. — Middle.
P I . 3 . apsanta, didhisanta, siksanta.
c. Optative. A c t i v e . Sing. x. dltseyam, vivaseyam. — 3. vivaset. —
PI. 1. didhisema, vivasema. —- Middle. Sing. 1. didhiseya.
d. Imperative. Active. Sing. 2. cikitsa, dipsa ( A V . ) , mimiksa, vivasa.
— 3. cikitsatu (AV.). — Du. 2. tnimiksatam, sisasatam. — 3. tnimiksatam. —
PI. 2. cikitsata (TS.), vivasata. — 3. didhisantu.
e. Participles. Active, inaksant-, iyaksant-, ipsant- (AV.), irtsatit-
(AV.), cikitsant-, jighamsant-, ditsant-, dipsartt-, duduksantpipjsant-, bubhusant-,
yuyutsant-, yuyUsant-, ririksant-{\rrisruruksant- (\rruh-), vivasant-, si'sasant-,
sisrpsant-, siksant-. — Middle, iyaksamana-, irtsamana- (AV.), ji^Tsamana-,
mumuksamana-, Hpsamana- (AV.), s'lksamana- (TS.), s'/'/srSsamatia-; and w i t h
-ana: didhisana-.
f. Imperfect. A c t i v e . Sing. 2. dsisasas. — 3. ajighamsat, asisasat. —
P I . 3 . ayuyutsan, dsisasan; duduksan, bibhitsan.
g. Aorist. Sing. 2. acikitsis (AV.), irtsis (AV.).
h. Passive. No finite form of the passive seems to occur in the Sam-
hitas; of participles, no certain form of the present occurs, munatnsydmana-
( A V . ix. 6 1 4 ) 5 being a conjecture; and of the past only one form has been
noted: tnimamsita- ( A V . ix. 6 2 «) 6 .
i. G e r u n d i v e . T w o regular forms o c c u r : didfks-t'nya- 'worthy to b e
seen* and susrus-enya- (TS.) 'worthy to be heard*. There are also one or
two irregular formations: didyks-tya- 'worthy to be seen' and paprks-dnya- 'to
be asked' (unless from aorist stem) 7 .
k. V e r b a l a d j e c t i v e . A considerable number (more than a dozen in
the R V . ) of verbal adjectives are formed from the desiderative stem with the
1 See above 44 a, 1. s Cp. WHITNEY'S note in his translation;
1
The desiderative of jlv- 'live', jijiv-i-sa-, in his grammar 1039 he quotes ruruisyamana
occurs in VS. XL. (I.-'l Up.). {\'rudh-) from K. 37, 12 (afa-).
3 According to GRASSMANN, perf. des. of «WHITNEY 1037 quotes the gerund mtmam-
mik- 'mingere'; cp. WHITNEY, Roots, s. v. mi is. 1 sitva from K.
4 In all these forms the stems have lost 7 See below, Gerundive 580.
their distinct desiderative meaning: cp. \
WHITNEY 1033.
39O I . A L L G E M E I N E S UND S P R A C H E . 4. VEDIC GRAMMAR.

suffix -u. They have the value of a present participle governing a case;
thus iyaks-ii- 'wishing to sacrifice'; jigls-u- 'wishing to conquer'; didhis-u- 'desiring
to win'; dips-ü- 'wishing to injure'; vivaks-ü- (AV.) from vac- 'speak'; siuls-i't-
'eager to win'
2. Intensives.
DELBRÜCK, V e r b n m p. 1 3 0 — 1 3 4 . — A V E R Y , V e r b - I n f l e c t i o n 2 3 0 , 2 7 0 — 2 7 2 . —
WHITNEY, S a n s k r i t G r a m m a r l o c o — 1 0 2 5 ; R o o t s 2 3 2 f. — v . NEGELEIN, Z u r S p r a c h -
g e s c h i c h t e 7 8 — 8 0 . — LINDNER, A l t i n d i s c h e N o m i n a l b i l d u n g 1 0 (p. 48) a n d 2 1 c ( p a r t i -
ciples). — BURCHARDI, Die Intensiva des Sanskrit und Avesta. Teil I. Halle 1892;
T e i l II. B B . 1 9 , 1 6 9 - 2 2 5 .
545. The intensive or, as it is also often called, the frequentative implies
intensification or repetition of the sense expressed by the root 1 . It is a
common formation, being made from over 90 roots in the Samhitäs. The
stem is derived from the root by means of a reduplicative syllable, the
characteristic feature of which is that it always has a strong form. The
reduplicative syllable may be formed in three different ways: 1. radical t u
are always reduplicated with a Guna vowel, ana a and r (ar) often with <i;
2. roots containing f or a followed by r I n m more usually reduplicate
with a and liquid or nasal; 3. a considerable number of intensives interpose
the vowel f between the reduplicative syllable and the root.
1. a. Roots containing t or u reduplicate with 0 or 0; thus cit- 'per-
ceive' : cdkit-; tij- 'be sharp' : tS-tij-; dis- 'point' : de-dilnij- 'wash' : ni-nij-\
rit- 'lead' : ne-m-\ pis- 'adorn' : pe-pis-\ ml- 'damage' : md-mT--, rih- 'lick' : rc-
rih-\ vij- 'tremble' : ve-vijvid- 'find' : vi-vid--, vis- 'be active' : re-vis-vl-
'enjoy' : ve-vl-; sidh- irepel' : se-sidh-\ gu- 'sound' : jogu-\ dha- 'shake' : do-dhu-,
nu- 'praise' : no-nu-; pruth- 'snort' : po-pruth-\ bha- 'be' : bo-bha--, yu- 'join' :
yd-yu-; yu- 'separate' : yo-yu-; ru• 'cry' : ro-ru-\ ru- 'break' : ro-ru-; sue- 'gleam'
: so-s'uc-; sB- 'generate': so-sß-; sku- 'tear' : co-ska-; ha- 'call': jo-ha-.
b. More than a dozen roots with medial a (ending in mutes or sibilants,
and one in tn), as well as three with final -r, reduplicate with ä: käs'-
'appear' : cä-kas-) gam- 'go' : jä-gam-; nad- 'sound' : tui-nad-; pat- 'fall' : pa-
pat-; biid/i- 'oppress' : ba-badh-; raj- 'colour' : r/i-raj-; randh- 'make subject' :
rärandh-; rap- 'chatter' : rä-rap-; lap- 'prate' : lä-lap-; vac- 'speak' : vä-vac-;
vad- 'speak': vä-vad-; vas- 'be eager' : vä-vas-; väs- 'bellow' : vA-vas-\ s'vas-
'blow' : sä-svas-; gf- 'wake' : jä-gf-; dr- 'split' : da-df-; dhr- 'hold' : dä-dhr-\
also cal- 'stir' : cä-cal- (AV.).
2. All other roots containing r (and dr- and dhf- alternatively) and
several with medial a followed by r /, or a nasal, reduplicate with -ar,
-al or -an, -am. Thus:
a. kf- 'commemorate' : car-kr- and car-kir-; fys- 'drag' : car-krs-; gf-
'swallow' : jar-gur- and jai-gul-; tr- 'cross' : tar-tf- (RV.); df- 'split' : dar-df-
and dar-dirdhr- 'hold* : dar-dhr-\ brh- 'make strong': bdr-brh-\ bhr- 'bear'
: jar-bht">Tj- 'wipe' : mar-mrj-\ m?s- 'touch' : mar- mj-s-\ vrt- 'turn' : var-
vrt-\ s;-- 'flow' : sar-sr-; hrs- 'be excited' : jar-hfs-.
b. car- 'move' : car-car- (AV.); cal- 'stir' : -cal cal- (MS.) beside -cä-cal-
(AV.); phar- 'scatter' (?) : par-phar-, kram- 'stride' : can-hram-; gam- 'go' \jah-
gam-\ jambh- 'chew up' : jah-jabh-\ tains- 'shake': tan-tas-; dams- 'bite' : dan-
das- \ nam- 'bend' : nan-nan;--, yam- 'reach' :yam-yam--, stan- 'thunder' : tam-
stan- (AV.).
1
GRASSMANN, p. 1727, gives a list of the > The specific meaning of the formation
desiderative adjectives in -su occurring in is wanting in the intensives of ¿y- 'wake',
the RV. (about 15); four occur in the AV.:|£Ä- 'perceive', nij- 'wash', vif- 'work'.
eikitsü-, jighatsüdipsü-, blbhatsü-; cp. WHIT- 3 The palatal j in the reduplication is like
NEY 1038. , that of bhr-in the perfect iotmja-bhära (482 d).
 VII. VERB. SFXONDARY CONJUGATION. 391

« . A few intensives show irregularities in the reduplicative syllable; thus f 'go' :

al-ar- (dissimilation); ga/i- 'plunge' : jah-gah- (from a root which otherwise has no nasal
in inflected forms) •; badh- ' o p p r e s s ' : bad-baJh- (only example of a final mute being redu-
plicated); gm- 'greet' and bhur- 'quiver" reduplicate with a: jar-gur- and jar-bhur
In a few roots containing r or r the radical syllable varies; thus gf- 'swallow* :
jar-gur• and jal-g:tl-\ car- 'move' : car-cur- beside car-car-; tf 'cross':tar-Uir- beside tar-tar-.
3. Over twenty roots with final or penultimate nasal, r> or u, inter-
pose an / (or / if the vowel would be long by position) between the redu-
plicative syllable and the root:
a. krand- 'cry out' : kan-i-krand- and kan-i-krad-\ gam- 'go' : gan-T-gam-
(but gan-i-gm-at)-, pan- 'admire' : pan-T-pan-; phan- 'spring' : pan-T-phan-\ scand-
'shine' : can-i-scad-; san- 'gain' : san-l-san-; skand- 'leap' : kan-i-skand- and can-
i-skad-', syand- 'flow' : sdn-i-syad-; svan- 'sound' : san-t-svan-; hart- 'slay' : ghan-
T-g/ian-.
b. kf- 'make' : kar-i-kr- and car-i-kf- (AV.) •>; tf- 'cross' : tar-T-tf-', bhr-
'bear' : bhar-i-bhr-; vr- 'cover' : var-l-vr--, vrj- 'twist' : vdr-l-vfj-; vft- 'turn' :
var-i-vft-.
C. tu- ' b e s t r o n g ' : tdv-i-tu-; dha- ' s h a k e ' : dav-i-dhu--, nit- ' p r a i s e ' : ndv-
t-nu-; dyut- ' s h i n e ' : ddv-i-dyut-.
a. Primary Form. Present Indicative.
546. With the exception of eight or nine verbs, which take a secondary
form (inflected in the middle only and identical in appearance with a passive),
the intensive is inflected like the third conjugational class. The only difference
is that r may be inserted between the root and terminations beginning with
consonants; it is common in the 1. and 3. sing. ind. act., and is also some-
times found to occur in the 2. 3. du. ind. and the 2. 3. sing, imperative and
imperfect active 4 . The forms actually found, if made from the intensive of
tiij- 'wash', would be the following in the indicative:
Active. Sing. 1. nbiej-mi and ncnej-X-mi. 2. n/nek-H. 3. ninek-ti and
nenej-T-ti. — Du. 2. nenej-X-thass. 3. nenik-tds. — PI. 1. nenij-mas and nettij-
rnasi (AV.). 3. nhiij-ati.
Middle. Sing. 1. nenij-J. 3. nenik-t,'. — Du. 3. nenij-ate. — PI. 3. tn'nij-ate.
The forms actually met with are:
Active. Sing. r. carkarmi, vevesmi (AV.); cakasimi, johavimi, dardar-
imi. — 2. alarsi, jagarsi (Kh. 11. 3I, ddrdarsi, dardharsi. — 3. dlarti, kdni-
kranti, ganTganti, janghanti, varivarti and vdrvarti6; -calcaliti (MS. ill. 13');
carcarTti (AV.), cdkasiti, jarbhurlti, jalgultti (TS.), Johavlti, tartarTti, dardarlti,
dodhavlti, ndnnanutinonavUi, papatlti, bobhavUt, yamyamTti, rarajiii (AV.),
rarapTti, roravlti, lalapiti (AV.), vlvadlti, sosaviti.
Du. 2. tartarTthas8. — 3. jarbhrtas.
PI. r. nonumas and notiumasi (AV.). — 3. jdgrati (AV.), davidyutati,
ntlnadati, bharibhrati, varvrtati.
9
Middle. Sing. 1. joguve. — 3. Utikte, dJdiste, ndnna/e , ntnikte,
1
T h o u g h it has in nominal derivatives;
6
For varvart-ti, varevart-ti; cp. GKASSMANN,
s e e W H I T N E Y , R o o t s , s . v . gäh; c p . BUR- s. v. Vft.
CHARDI, B B . 1 9 , 1 7 9 ; v . NEC.ELEIN 79. J See note 9.
* Cp. p. 390, note 3. ' Cp. note 5.
3 In the participle karikr-at and -(ariii-at9 W i t h loss of nasal (a = sonant nasal) for
(AV.). *nannan-te(\. 1406). AUFRECHT, R V " . , and M A X
4 This i never occurs if the reduplication MÖLLER, R V » . , write nimna-te{ also Padap&tha);
contains i: thus no-nav-T-ti and nav-t-no-t, but the participle nannamat (via 43 8 ). A U F -
but never *rtavt-nav-l-ti. Cp. DELBRÜCK, RECHT n&ttn-, MAX MÜLLER nämn-\ t h e 3 . s i n g .
V e r b u m p . 1 3 1 ; v. NEGELEIN 7 9 . nannamUHy. 8 3 * ) AUFRECHT», namnamiti M A X
M Ü L L E R 2 ; similarly ttännamäne (x. 8 2 ' ) A U F -
5 For *nenik-thas\ the only 2 . du. which
occurs is tartar-i-thas for *lartf-thds. RSCHT, namnamäni MAX MÜLLER (also Pp.).
 39* I. ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4 V E D I C GRAMMAR.

sarsrte; with -e for -te: ctkite, jdngahe, joguve, badbadhe1 and babadhe,
yoyuve, sarsr/. — D u . 3 . sarsrate. — PI. 3. dteiiatc.
547. a. S u b j u n c t i v e . Active. S i n g . 1. janghdnani. — 2 . jagara si2
(AV.); janghanas, jalgulas. — 3 . caniskadat, cdrkrsat, cekitat, jaiighanat,
jagarat (AV.), dardirat, davidyutat, parpharat, bdrbrhat, marmrjat, marmrsat,
sanisvanat. — Du. 1.jahghanava. — P I . 1. carkirama, vevidama. — 3. carkiran,
('commemorate'), cAka'san2 ( A V . ) , papatan, sosucan.
Middle. D u . 3 . tantasaite. — P I . 3 . jdhghananta, jarhrsanta, nonuvanta,
marmrjanta, sosucanta.
b. Optative. No certain form occurs in t h e R V . 3, a n d only two or
three in other Samhitas: S i n g . 3 . vnisyat (AV.). — P I . 1 . jagryama (VS.
T S . M S . ) , jagriyama ( T S . I. 7. i o ' ) .
c. I m p e r a t i v e . Examples of forms of all the 2. a n d 3. p e r s o n s are
found excepting the 3. pi., b u t n o m i d d l e f o r m h a s b e e n m e t with.
Active. S i n g . 2. carkrdhi (AV.) 'remember', jagrh't, dardrhi, dadrhi,
tienigdhi {AV.), barbrhi4; jaiighanihi (AV.), cakahhi (VS. TS.), tamstanihi
(AV.). — With -tat: carkrttit, jagrtats. — 3 . dardartu, marmartu, vevestu
(AV.); vSvaditu (AV.), johavitu (AV.). — D u . 2. jagrtam. — 3. jcigrtam
(AV.). — P I . 2. jagrta (AV.), caiikramatab.
548. P a r t i c i p l e . Active, kiinikradatkdrikrat-, g/idnighnat-, -carikrat-
( A V . ) , cakaiat-, cikitat-, jaiighanat-, jarbhurat-,jfigrat-, daridrat- (TS. iv.5. i o ' ) ,
dardrat-, davidyutat-, nannamat-, minadatpdnipnat-, paniphanat-, pipisat-,
bobhuvat- ( A V . ) , marmrjatyoyuvat- ( y u - ' w a r d o f F ) , ririhat-, roruvat-, vAvasat-
(vSs- ' r o a r ' ) , vbisat-, sosucat-, slnd/iat-.
Middle1. cikitana-, jatijabhana- ( A V . ) , jdrbhurHtia-, jdrhrsana-, dandas-
ana-, nannamana-, pepisana- ( A V . TS.), bfibadhana-, mcmyana-, yoyuvatia-
(yu- ' j o i n ' ) , rorucanasosucatia-, sarsrana-.
a. The participles badbadhana- and marmrjand- (beside mdrmfjana-),
though irregularly a c c e n t e d , unmistakably b e l o n g to the intensive, kanikrat
once (IX. 6320) a p p e a r s a s a n a b b r e v i a t e d f o r m o f kanikrad-at. The participle
j.ihghan-at- s y n c o p a t e s t h e r a d i c a l v o w e l in t h e g e n . s i n g . : janghn-at-as-, an-
o t h e r f o r m o f t h e i n t e n s i v e p a r t i c i p l e from t h e s a m e r o o t s y n c o p a t e s t h e r a d i c a l
v o w e l t h r o u g h o u t : ghanighn-at--, a l s o p a n i p n - a t - . T h e o b s c u r e f o r m cakdn (x. 29')
may b e the n o m . o f an intensive participle with a n o m a l o u s a c c e n t for cAkan-at8.
549. I m p e r f e c t . Altogether (including unaugmented forms, some of
which are used injunctively) a b o u t thirty forms o f the i m p e r f e c t o c c u r , among
them only four examples of the middle. In the active all p e r s o n s are re-
presented except the 1. du. a n d the 2. p i . ; b u t in t h e m i d d l e o n l y t h e 3. s i n g ,
a n d pi. are m e t with.
Active. S i n g . 1. acakasam; dedisam. — 2. ajagar, adardar-, dardar. —
3 . adardar, adardhar, avarivar) kaniskan, dardar, davidyot, navinot; ajohavit,
ayoyavTt, aroravit, avavaclt.
D u . 3 . adardftam. — 3 . avSvasltSm. — P I . 1. marmrjma. — 3. acarkfsur
( A V . ) , ajohavur, adardirtir, anonavur.

' W i t h irregular a c c e n t | 7 T h e p a r t i c i p l e s rarah-and-, rarakf-ana-,

* W i t h d o u b l e m o d a l sign. I and jahrs-ana- (beside jarhff-ana-) are pro-
3 Cp. WHITNEY 1009 a. \ bably p e r f e c t participles, a l t h o u g h n o o t h e r
4 F o r barbfh-hi, t h e final h b e i n g d r o p p e d | p e r f e c t f o r m s w i t h a i n t h e r e d u p l i c a t i v e
a f t e r b e i n g c e r e b r a l i z e d b e f o r e -dhi : *barhrz- j s y l l a b l e o c c u r f r o m t h e s e r o o t s (rah-, rats-,
dhi (58, I b , a; 62, 4 e). hf}-); cp. WHITNEY 1013.
5 T h i s f o r m o c c u r s o n c e in t h e A V . as a ' 4 I r e g a r d it as 3. sing. p e r f . inj. =
1. p e r s o n : c p . W H I T N E Y 1 0 1 1 a. "caian-t(488). Cp. B A R T H O L O M A E , I F . 7 , i n ,
6 With a n o m a l o u s c o n n e c t i n g -a- f o r : GRASSMANN, u n d e r the root ka-; WHITNEY,
*caiikran-ta. ¡Sanskrit Grammar 1 0 1 3 B ; Roots 17.
 393

M i d d l e . S i n g . 3. ddedista, dnannata— PI. 3. marmrjata2.

550. a . P e r f e c t . A few perfect forms with intensive reduplication a n d
present sense are met with:
Active. Sing. 1. jiigara. — 3. jjgara, davidhiva (dhu- 'shake'),
nonavaJ (tiu- 'praise').
The only perfect participle occurring is jlgrvAms-.
b. A o r i s t . T h e only trace o f an aorist b e i n g formed from the intensive
is cdrkr-s-e 'thinks of', 3. sing, mid., f o r m e d like hi-s-e and stu-s-e. It o c c u r s
three times in the R V . , always with a present sense.
c . C a u s a t i v e . A causative formed from the intensive is o n c e found in
the participle vanvarj-dyant-T- ( A V . ) 'twisting about* (\vrj-).

b. S e c o n d a r y Form.
551. T h e rare s e c o n d a r y form o f the intensive is identical in m e a n i n g
with the primary. In form it is indistinguishable from a passive, the suffix
-yd b e i n g a d d e d to the primary stem a n d the inflexion being the same as
that o f the passive. A l t o g e t h e r about a d o z e n forms h a v e b e e n m e t with
f r o m nine roots. T h e only persons represented are the 2. and 3. sing, a n d
3. pi. indicative; and there is also a present participle. T h e forms actually
occurring are the following:
P r e s e n t indicative. S i n g . 2. coskuyase. — 3. dedisydte ( A V . V S . ) ,
nemyate (VS.), marmrjydte, rcrihyate, vevijyate, vevTyate. — P L 3. tartUryante
(\ftf-), marmrjyante.
Participle. carcUrydmSna- (\rcar-)t neniyamana-, marmrjydmana-.

3. T h e Causative.
DELBRUCK, V e r b u m p. 2 0 9 — 2 1 6 . — A V E R Y , V e r b - I n f l e c t i o n 262 — 268. — WHITNEY,
S a n s k r i t G r a m m a r p. 3 7 9 — 3 8 6 ; R o o t s 235 f. — v. NEGELEIN 4 4 — 4 8 .

552. T h e causative v e r b expresses that its o b j e c t is caused to perform

the action or to u n d e r g o the state d e n o t e d b y the root; e. g. pdram evd
parSvdiam sap at mm gamayamasi (x. 1 4 5 * ) 'we cause our rival to g o to the
far distance'. It is b y far the c o m m o n e s t o f the s e c o n d a r y conjugations, being
f o r m e d from o v e r 200 roots in the Samhitas; but of about 1 5 0 causative
stems a p p e a r i n g in the R V . at least one-third l a c k the causative meaning.
T h e stem is formed by adding the suffix -aya to the root, which as a rule
is s t r e n g t h e n e d T h o s e v e r b s in which the root, though c a p a b l e o f b e i n g
strengthened, remains unchanged, have not a causative 4 , but an iterative sense,
being akin in formation to denominatives J (which sometimes even have the
causative accent). T h e w h o l e group m a y originally h a v e had this meaning,
from which the causative sense was d e v e l o p e d till it b e c a m e the prevalent
o n e 6 . T h i s may perhaps a c c o u n t for an iterative formation, the reduplicated
aorist, h a v i n g specially attached itself to the causative. Both the iterative
and the causative form are occasionally m a d e from the same r o o t ; e. g.
patdya-ti 'flies about' and patd\a-ti 'causes to fly' beside the simple v e r b
pdta-ti 'flies'.

1 S e e p. 3 9 1 , note 9. I M S . (l. 8 6 ) ; t h e latter f o r m is irregular in

2 ävävasanla (yväs-) is p r o b a b l y a p l u - j a c c e n t . C p . BÖIITLINGK'S L e x i c o n , s. v .
p e r f e c t (p. 365, top). 3. K.
] WHITNEY 1018 q u o t e s also <i,'dräva (dm- 4 C p . WHITNEY 1042 b.
•run') f r o m the T S . , and j-.yäva (yu- 'sepa- 5 C p . v . NEGELEIN 44.
rate'), and lelaya (It- ' b e u n s t e a d y ' ) f r o m the j 6 C p . BRUGMANN, K G . 698.
 394

553- '1 h e root is s t r e n g t h e n e d in different w a y s a c c o r d i n g t o the nature

a n d position o f its v o w e l .
Initial o r m e d i a l i u r / (if not l o n g b y position) t a k e G u n a ; thus
a. cit- ' p e r c e i v e ' : cet-dya- ' t e a c h ' : mih- ' m i n g e r e ' : meh-aya- ' c a u s e to r a i n ' ; ris-
' b e hurt' : rts-dya- ' i n j u r e ' ; vid- ' k n o w ' : vcd-dya- 'cause to k n o w ' ; rip- 'tremble'
: vep-dya- ' s h a k e ' ; vis- 'enter' : ves-dya- ' c a u s e to enter'; vist- ' w r a p ' : vest-dya-
( A V . ) ' i n v o l v e ' ; sni/i- ' b e moist' : sneh-dya- ' d e s t r o y ' ;
b. kup- ' b e a g i t a t e d ' : kop-dya- ' s h a k e ' ; krudh- ' b e a n g r y ' : krodh-dya- 'en-
r a g e ' ; ksud- ' b e a g i t a t e d ' : ksod-aya- ' s h a k e ' ; ghus- 'sound' : ghos-dya- ' p r o c l a i m ' ;
cud- ' i m p e l ' : cod-aya-, id.; jus- ' e n j o y ' : jos-dya- ' c a r e s s ' ; jyut- 'shine' : jyot-dya-
( A V . ) ' e n l i g h t e n ' ; tus- 'drip' : tos-aya- ' b e s t o w a b u n d a n t l y ' ; dyut- 'shine' : dyot-
aya- ' i l l u m i n e ' ; pus- 'thrive' : pos-aya- 'nourish'; budh- ' b e a w a k e ' : bodh-aya-
' w a k e n ' ; muh- ' b e d a z e d ' : moh-dya- ' b e w i l d e r ' ; yudh- 'fight' : y o d h - d y a - ' c a u s e
to fight'; yup- ' e f f a c e ' : yop-nya-, id.; rue- 'shine' : roc-dya- 'illumine'; rud-
V e e p ' : rod-dya- ' c a u s e t o wail'; ruh- 'rise' : roh-dya- 'raise'; lubh- 'desire
e a g e r l y ' : lobh-dya- 'allure'; sue- ' f l a m e ' : soe-dya- 'set on fire'; s'ubh- 'shine' :
sobh-aya- ( A V . ) ' a d o r n ' ; s'us- ' g r o w dry' : ios-dya- ( A V . ) ' m a k e d r y ' ;
c . rd- ' d i s s o l v e ' (intr.): ard-dya- ' d e s t r o y ' ; krs- ' b e l e a n ' : kars-dya- ' e m a c i a t e ' ;
tip- ' b e p l e a s e d ' : tarp-dya- 'delight'; drs- 'see' : dars-dya- ( A V . ) ' s h o w ' ; nrt-
' d a n c e ' : nart-dya- ' c a u s e to d a n c e ' ; brh- or vrh- 'tear' : barh-dya- 'thrust';
mrc- 'injure' : marc-äya-, id.; mrj- 'wipe' : tnarj-dya-, id.; vrj- 'turn' : varj-ava-
( A V . ) ' c a u s e to turn'; vrt- 'roll' : vart-dya- ' c a u s e to r e v o l v e ' ; vrdh- ' g r o w ' :
vard/i-dya- ' a u g m e n t ' ; vrs- 'rain' : vars-dya- ' c a u s e to rain'; srdh- ' b e b o l d ' :
sardh-dya- ' c a u s e t o b e b o l d ' ; hrs- 'be e x c i t e d ' : hars-dya- ' e x c i t e ;
d . kip- ' b e a d a p t e d ' : kalp-dya- 'arrange'.
5 5 4 . T h e f o l l o w i n g v e r b s , mostly l a c k i n g the causative m e a n i n g , l e a v e
the root u n c h a n g e d : il- 'be quiet' : il-dya- ( A V . ) ' c e a s e ' ; cit- ' o b s e r v e ' : cit-
dya- 'stimulate' ( a l s o cet-aya-')-, ris- ' b e injured' : ris-aya- id. ( b e s i d e res-dya-);
Tip- ' q u i v e r ' : vip-dya- 'agitate' (also vep-aya-)-,
tuj- ' b e e a g e r ' : tuj-dya- id.; tur- ' o v e r w h e l m ' : tur-dya• id.; tus- ' b e c o n t e n t '
: tus-dya- i d . ; dyut- 'shine' : dyut-aya- id. ( b e s i d e dyot-aya- ' i l l u m i n e ' ) ; ruc-
'shine' : ruc-aya- id. ( b e s i d e roc-dya- 'illumine'); sue- ' s h i n e ' : suc-aya- id. ( b e s i d e
soe-dya- 'illumine'); s'ubh- 'shine' : subh-dya- id. ( a l s o sobh-aya- ' a d o r n ' A V . ) .
T h e v o w e l is l e n g t h e n e d in dus- 'spoil' : das-dya- id.
krp- ' l a m e n t ' : krp-aya- id.; mfd- ' b e g r a c i o u s ' : mrl-dya-1 i d . ; sprh- ' b e
e a g e r ' : sprh-aya- id. In t h e c a s e oigrabh- ' g r a s p ' , t h e r o o t is e v e n w e a k e n e d :
grbh-aya- id.
a. V o w e l s l o n g b y nature or p o s i t i o n r e m a i n u n c h a n g e d , but the
s t e m , in this c a s e , usually has the c a u s a t i v e s e n s e : trig- ' m o v e ' : ing-aya- 'set
in m o t i o n ' ; tks- ' s e e ' : ihs-dya- ' c a u s e to s e e ' ; inkh- 'swing' : tiikh-dya- ' s h a k e ' ;
Tr- 'set in m o t i o n ' : tr-dya- id.; jlv- 'live' : jlv-dya- ' a n i m a t e ' ; dip- 'shine' : dlp-
dya- ' k i n d l e ' ; pTd- 'press' : p i d - a y a - ( A V . ) 'distress'; vid- ' b e s t r o n g ' (in vll-u-
' s t r o n g ' ) : vtl-dya- ' m a k e s t r o n g ' 2 ;
uks- ' g r o w u p ' : uks-aya- 'strengthen'; had- ( d o e s n o t o c c u r in t h e s i m p l e
f o r m ) : kül-aya- ' s c o r c h ' ; sundh- 'purify' : sundh-aya- id.; sad- ' m a k e p l e a s a n t ' :
sad-dya- id.; sphurj- ' r u m b l e ' : sphürj-dya- id.;
dfmh- ' m a k e firm' : drmh-aya- ( A V . ) ' h o l d fast';
a. Two roots with medial T take Gun*: srTv- 'fail' : srru-aya- beside sriv-aya-i (AV.)
'lead astray'; hl<f- 'be hostile' : helaya- in the participle ä-helayant• 'not angry'; while

« Cp. v. NEGELEIN 46, note ». I 3 In A V . VI. 73» all the Mss. but one have
> DELBRÜCK 189,4 regards vi(aya- as A J r f v - ,
denominative. I
 395

t w o o t h e r s a l r e a d y h a v e it in t h e r o o t : rtj• ' t r e m b l e ' : tej-aya- 'shake'; mcd- ' b e fat':

med-aya- 'fatten'.
555. A n initial or a medial a (if not long by position) is lengthened
in some thirty roots: am- 'be injurious' : Hm-dya- 'be injured'; kam- 'desire' :
k3m-dya- 'love'; cat- 'hide oneself' : cat-dya- 'drive away'; chad- ' c o v e r ' 1 : chdd-
dya- id.; tan- 'stretch' : tan-aya- (AV.) 'make taut'; tap- 'burn' : tap-dya- ( A V . )
'cause to burn'; tras- 'be terrified' : tras-aya- ( A V . ) 'terrify'; tins'- 'be lost' :
nas-dya- 'destroy'; pad- 'go', 'fall' : pad-ay a- 'cause to fall'; phan- 'bound' : phan-
aya- 'cause to bound'; bhaj- 'divide' : bhaj-aya- 'cause to share'; bhras- 'fall'
: bhras'-dya- 'cause to fall'; man- 'think' : man-ava-1 (AV.) 'esteem'; yat- 'stretch':
yat-dya- 'unite'; yam- 'guide' \ yam-ay a- (Pp .yam-) 'present'; lap- 'prate': Llp-aya-
( A V . ) 'cause to cry'; vat- 'apprehend' : vat-dya- 'inspire'; van- 'win' : vSn-aya-
( A V . ) 'conciliate' (Pp. van-); vas- 'dwell, : vas-dya- 'cause to stay'; vas- 'wear'
: vas-dya- 'clothe'; vas- 'shine': vas-aya- 'illumine'; sat-3 'cut in p i e c e s ' : sSt-aya-
( A V . ) i d . 4 ; svas- 'snort': svas-aya- (AV.) 'cause to resound'; spas- 'see' : spas-dya-
'show'; svap- 'sleep': svnp-aya- 'send to sleep'.
a. Five or six other causatives optionally retain the a: gam- ' g o ' :
gam-aya- and gam-aya- ( R V 1 . ) 'bring'; das- 'waste away' : das-aya- and das-aya-
( A V . ) 'exhaust'; dhvan- 'disappear' : dhvan-aya- ( R V . ) and dhvdn-aya- ( R V . )
'cause to disappear'; pat- 'fall' : pat-dya- 'fly about' (in R V . only once, I. 169 7 ,
'cause to fall') and pnt-aya- 'cause to fall'; mad- 'be exhilarated' :mad-dya- ( A V . )
and mad-dya- 'rejoice'; ram- 'rest' : ram-ay a- and ram-aya- 'cause to rest'.
556. Some twenty-five roots with initial or medial a (short by position)
remain unchanged, as the causative meaning is mostly absent: art- 'breathe'
: -an-dya- ( A V . ) 'cause to breathe'; chad- 'seem' : chad-dya- id.; jan- 'beget' :
jan-aya- id.; tvar- 'make haste' : tvar-dya- ( A V . ) 'quicken'; dam- 'control'
: dam-aya- id.; dhan- 'set in motion' : dhan-aya- id.; dhvas- 'disperse' (intr.) :
dhvas-dya- 'scatter' (tr.); nad- 'roar' : nad-dya- 'cause to resound'; nam- 'bend'
(tr. and intr.) : nam-aya• 'cause to bend', 'strike down'; pan- 'admire' : pan-dya-
id.; prath- 'spread out' : prath-dya- id.; mah- 'be great': mah-aya- 'magnify'; raj-
'colour' : raj-ay a- (AV.) id.; ran- 'rejoice' : ran-dya- id. and 'gladden'; vyath-
'waver' : vyath-aya- 'cause to fall'; sam- 'be quiet' : sam-dya- ( A V . ) 'appease':
snath- 'pierce' : snath-aya- id.; srath- 'loosen' : srath-dya- id.; start- 'thunder' :
stan-aya- id.; svad- 'enjoy', 'sweeten' : svad-dya- id.; svan- 'sound' : svan-aya-
id.; svar- 'sound' : svar-aya- ( A V . ) id. 5
a. If long by nature or position medial a remains unchanged, the
causative sense being more often lacking than present: thus arc- 'shine' : arc-
aya- 'cause to shine'; his'- 'appear' : kas-aya- ( A V . ) 'cause to be viewed';
krand- 'roar' : krand-aya- 'cause to roar'; caks- 'see' : caks-aya- 'cause to appear';
chand- 'seem' : c hand-ay a- id.; jambh- 'chew up', 'crush' : jambh-aya- id.; tarns-
'set in motion' : tams-aya- id.; dambh- 'destroy' : dambh-dya- id.; badh- 'oppress'
: badh-aya- ( A V . ) 'force'; bhaks- 'partake of' : bhaks-dya- id.; mamh- 'bestow' :
mamh-dya id.; mand- 'gladden' : mand-dya- 'satisfy'; yac- 'ask' :yac-aya- ( A V . )
'cause to be asked for'; ramh- 'hasten' : ramh-aya- ( A V . ) id.; randh- 'make
subject': randh-dya- id.; raj- 'rule' : raj-ay a- ( A V . TS.) 'be king*; radh- 'succeed'
: radh-aya- ( A V . ) 'make successful'; vaks- 'grow' : vaks-aya- 'cause to grow';

' F i n i t e f o r m s o f t h e simple root chad- d o I 4 N o f o r m o r d e r i v a t i v e o f t h e s i m p l e

n o t o c c u r ; t h e part, channa- is f o u n d in H. root sal- o c c u r s in V . ; s e e WHITNEY, R o o t s ,
* I n A V . XV. 102 the r e a d i n g s h o u l d b e s. v. sal.
matiayet; s e e WHITNEY'S n o t e . 5 O c c u r r i n g o n l y in t h e p a r t i c i p l e svarayant-
3 I n A V . iv. 184 sapaya, w h i c h w o u l d b e , am ( A V . x i u . 2 ' ) , w h i c h W H I T N E Y t r a n s l a t e s
t h e c a u s a t i v e o f sap-, is p r o b a b l y a w r o n g ' 'shining',
r e a d i n g ; c p . WHITNEY'S n o t e . ,
396 I. ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4. VEDIC GRAMMAR.

Jams- 'proclaim': sams-dya- 'cause to proclaim'; svaiic- 'spread': svañc-dya- 'cause

to spread out'; syand- 'flow' : sxand-aya- id.; srams- 'fall' : sramsaya- (AV.)
'cause to fall'.
557. Final /', u, r take Guna or Vrddhi, the latter being commoner.
a. The only example of a causative stem from a root ending in an i-
vowel is that of ksi- 'possess', which takes Guna: ksay-dya- 'cause to dwell
securely'.
b. Final u takes Guna or Vrddhi: cyu- 'waver' : cyav-dya- 'shake'; dru-
'run' : drav-aya- 'flow' and drav-dya- 'cause to flow'; bhu- 'become' : bhciv-dya-
(AV.) 'cause to become'; yu- 'separate' :yav-aya- andyav-dya- id.; s'ru- 'hear'
: srav-dya- and srav-dya- 'cause to hear'; sru-1 'dissolve' : srav-dya- and srav-
aya- (Pp. s'rav-) 'cause to move'; sru- 'flow' : sravaya- (AV.) 'cause to flow'.
C. Final r usually takes Vrddhi; thus ghr- 'drip' : ghar-aya- (AV.) 'cause
to drip'; dhr- 'hold' : dhar-dya- id.; pr- 'pass' :par-aya- id.; pr- 'fill' :pur-dya-
(AV.) 'fulfil'; mr- 'die' : mar-áya- (AV.) 'kill'; vr- 'confine' : var-dya- id. Two
causatives have the Guna as well as the Vrddhi form: jr- 'waste away' : jar-
aya- and jar-aya- (Pp .jar-) 'wear out', 'cause to grow old'; sr- 'flow' : sar-dya-
id. and sar-aya- 'cause to flow'. One root in -r takes Guna only: dr- 'pierce'
: dar-dya- 'shatter'.
558. Roots ending in -¿ form their causative stem by adding -páya;
thus ksa- 'burn' : ksa-paya- (AV.) id.; gla- 'be weary' : gla-paya- (Pp. gldp-)
'exhaust'; da- 'give' : da-paya- (AV.) 'cause to give'; dka- 'put' : dha-pdya-
'cause to put'; dka- 'suck' : dha-pdya- 'suckle'; mid- 'relax' (intr.) : mla-pdya-
(AV.) 'relax' (tr.); va- 'blow' : va-pdya- 'fan'; stha- 'stand' : stha-paya- 'set up';
sna- 'wash' (intr.) : sna-pdya- 'bathe' ( t r . ) I n three roots the a is shortened:
jña- 'know' : jña-paya- (AV.) 'cause to know'; ira- 'boil' : sra-pdya- (AV.
TS.) 'cook'; sna- 'wash' : sna-pdya- (AV.) beside sna-pdya- 'bathe' (tr.).
a. A few roots ending in other vowels take -paya. Two stems are
formed by adding the suffix to the gunated root: ksi- 'possess' : kse-paya-
'cause to dwell' beside ksay dya-; r- 'go' : arpaya• 'cause to go'. In the VS.
two roots in i substitute a for that vowel before -paya: ji- 'conquer' : ja-paya-
'cause to win'; sri- 'resort' : (ud-)sra-paya- (VS 1 .) 'raise'.
a. T w o roots with initial p and ending in -a do not form their causative stem with
•paya, but add the ordinary suffix -aya with interposed^': pi 'drink' \ piy-áya-, 'cause to
drink'; pyá- 'overflow' : (a-Spyáy-áya• (AV.) 'fill up'. This seeming irregularity is doubtless
due to the original form of the root 3 .
Inflexion.
559. The causative is inflected regularly like the verbs of the a- con-
jugation in both voices. It is to be noted, however, that in the i. pi. pres.
the termination -mast occurs in the R V . and AV. ten times as often as -mas-,
that in the 2. pi. no forms in -thana are met with; and that in the 3. sing,
mid. e never appears for -ate.
a. The forms of the present indicative active and middle, which
actually occur, would if made from kalpdya- be the following:
Active. Sing. 1. kalpayami. 2. kalpdyasi. 3. kalpdyati.—Du. 2. kalp-
dyathas. 3. kalpayatas. — PI. 1. kalpayatnasi and kalpdyamas. 2. kalpdyathii.
3. kalpdyanti.
Middle. Sing. 1. kalpdye. 2. kalpdyase. 3. kalpdyate. — Du. 2. kalpd-
yethc. 3. kalpdyete. — PI. 1. kalpaySma/te. 3. kalpdyante.
Forms that occur elsewhere in the present system are the following:
1 This root, of which only three forms

occur in the R V . , seems to be only a varied

spelling for sru• 'flow'.
 397

b . S u b j u n c t i v e . A c t i v e . S i n g . I. cetdyani{TS.m. 2. i o ' ; MS. iv. 5 s ), randha-

yltii. — 2. coddyasi, mrldyasi, randhdyasi (AV.), vartayasi (TS. vn. 4.20 1 ); janay&s
(AV.), yavayas{SS.), yod/iiy.ls. — 3. ardayJ/i (AV.), kalpdyati, tarpaya/i(AV.),
pudayati (AV.), paraydti, purayati (AV.), marayati (AV.), mflayati, rajayati (TS.
11. 4. 14'), sudayati; kalpayat( AV.), coddyat, pardyat, marcaynt, sadayat, saydy.lt
(TS. 1. 8. 6'). — Du. 1. irayava. — 2. dhapayathas (AV.), padayathas (AV.),
visayathas (AV.), sadayathas (AV.).— 3. kulayatas. — PI. 1. Xrayama, dharayama.
— 2. chaddyatha, vardhayatha (AV.). — 3. srapdyan ( T S . i v . 1.5*). — Middle.
Sing. 2. kamdyase, coddyase, josayase, ma day else, yltayase, madayathas (AV.
rv. J56). — 3. codayate, chandayate, dharayate, maddyate, vartayatc, Jhkhdyatai
(AV.), cetayatai (TS. 1. 1. 13*), dharayatai (AV.), rajayatai (AV.), varayatai
(AV.). — Du. 1. Thkhayavahai, kalpayavahai, janayavahai (AV.). — 3. madd-
yaite. — PI. 2. kamdyadhve, maday3dhve\ madayadhiai.
c. Optative. This m o o d is very rare, only four forms occurring in the
RV. and two in theAV. Sing. 2. janayes (Kh. ir. 1 o*), dharayes. — 3. man ayet
(AV.), vadayel (AA. ill. 2.5), ves'ayet (AV.), sprhayet. — PI.I. citdyema, marjayema.
d. I m p e r a t i v e . Forms of this mood are common, nearly 1 2 0 occurring
in the R V . ; of these, however, quite one half are in the 2. sing, a c t No
forms o f the 3. sing, and du. mid. are met with in the R V . N o impv. in -tat
is found in the R V . and only one in the A V . : 2. sing, d/ulrayatat1. The
forms actually occurring, if made from kalpaya-, would be the following:
A c t i v e . Sing. 2. kalpaya and kalpayatat ( A V . ) . 3. kalpayatu. — D u . 2.
kalpdyatam. 3. kalpayatam. — PI. 2. kalpdyata. 3. kalpayantu.
Middle. Sing. 2. kalpayasva. — Du. 2. kalpdyetham. — PI. 2. kalpaya-
dhvam. 3. kalpayantam.
e . P a r t i c i p l e s . T h e a c t i v e participle in -ant, with fern, in -T, is c o m m o n ;
e. g. jan-ayant-, f. Jan-dyant-i- 'producing'. T h e m i d d l e participle, which is
always formed with - m i i n a , is rare. In the R V . are found only ma/idya-
tnlna- 'glorifying', yatdya-mana- 'reaching', vardhaya-mana- 'increasing', and
in the AV. only kiimaya-mana- 'desiring'; in the TS. (iv. 2. 6') cataya-mana-.
f. I m p e r f e c t . Forms of this tense, both augmented and unaugmented,
are frequent. In the R V . some 130 occur in the active, about two-thirds o f
which are in the 2. and 3. sing. Middle forms are rare e x c e p t in the 3. pi.
In the active the 1. and 3. du., and 1. and 2. pi. are wanting; in the middle
all the 1. persons and the 3. du. are unrepresented. S o m e 50 unaugmented
forms are used as injunctives in the R V . 2 . T h e forms actually occurring, if
made from jandya-, would be the following:
Active. Sing. 1. ajanayanr, janayam. 2. ajanayas\ jandyas. 3. djanayat)
janayat. — Du. 2. djanayatam. — PI. 3. djanayan\ janayan.
Middle. Sing. 2. ajanayathas\ jandyathas. 3. ajanayata-, janayata. —
Du. 2. ajanayetham. — PI. 2. ajanayadhvam. 3. ajanayanta; janayanta.
560. O u t s i d e t h e p r e s e n t s y s t e m very few causative forms occur.
These are found in the following formations.
a. F u t u r e . Only four forms occur in the R V . and A V . Active.
Sing. 1. dusayisydmi (AV.). 3. dharayisyati. — M i d d l e . Sing. 2. vasayisyase
'wilt adorn thyself'. 3. varayisyate ( A V . ) 'will shield'.
b . P e r f e c t . T h e only example of a periphrastic perfect occurring in
the Samhitas is made from a causative stem: gamaydm cakara (AV.).
C. A o r i s t . T h e r e d u p l i c a t e d aorist has attached itself to the causa-
tive, probably because the intensive character of the reduplicated form became
1 In K . the forms yamayatit and cyavayatat » See A v e r y 264.
occur; and in pi. 2. the unexampled ending
•dhvat in varayadhvat: Whitney 1043 d.
398
associated with the originally iterative meaning o f the causative. B u t in form
it is u n c o n n e c t e d with the causative stem, being d e r i v e d directly from the
r o o t ; a n d m o r e than one-third o f the v e r b s which form it in the R V . , and
a b o u t one-fifth in the A V . , h a v e n o causative stem in -aya. T h e r e are, h o w -
ever, eight forms w h i c h are actually m a d e f r o m the causative stem: Sing. i .
arp-ip-am ( A V . ) f r o m ar-paya-; 2. jlhip-as from /lä-paya-1 ' c a u s e to d e p a r t ' ;
atisthip-as and 3 . dtisthip-at f r o m sthä-paya- ' f a s t e n ' ; ajijnip-at (TS.) from j/lä-
paya- 'cause t o k n o w ' ; PL 2. djijap-ata ( V S . ) f r o m jäpaya- 'cause t o c o n q u e r '
(\rji-); S i n g . 2 . a c t . blbhis-as ( T S . ) a n d m i d . bibhis-athds f r o m bhl-saya- 'frighten',
a n o m a l o u s causative o f bhi- 'fear'.
a . T h e r e are besides three / s - a o r i s t s f o r m e d f r o m the causative s t e m :
vyathay-ls ( A V . ) f r o m vyathaya- 'disturb'; ailay-it ( A V . ) f r o m Hay a- 'has quieted
d o w n ' ; dhvanay-Tt2 f r o m dhvanaya- 'envelope'.
561. N o m i n a l d e r i v a t i v e s , a . T h e only present p a s s i v e p a r t i c i p l e
appears in the f o r m bhäj-yd-mäna- ( A V . x n . 5"*). T h e r e are also a few past
participles: ghlr-i-ta- ( A V . ) 'smeared'; cod-i-td- ' i m p e l l e d ' ; -ves-ita- (AV.)
' c a u s e d to enter'.
b . A f e w g e r u n d i v e s in -ayya are f o r m e d f r o m causative s t e m s : trayay-
Ayya- 'to b e g u a r d e d ' ; patiay-fiyya- ' a d m i r a b l e ' ; sprhay-ayya- 'desirable'3.
C. T e n i n f i n i t i v e s f o r m e d with -d/iyai from the causative stem are m e t
with in the RV.: isdyad/iyai, Trayadkyai, tamsayddhyai, näsayddhyai, matida-
yddhyai, mCidayddhyai, risayddhyai, vartayadhyai, väjayddhyai, syandayddhyai1.
d. F o u r g e r u n d s f o r m e d with -tvä from causative stems are met with
in t h e A V . : arpay-itvü, kalpay-itvä, säday-i tvö, sramsay-i-tvä.
e . Finally s e v e r a l o r d i n a r y n o u n s are d e r i v e d f r o m the causative stem
with various suffixes; a few v e r b a l nouns in -ana: drp-ana- ( A V . ) ' t h r u s t i n g ' ;
-bhi-s-ana- 'frightening'; o n e or two a g e n t nouns in f. -tr-'l: coday-i-tr-i-
'stimulator'; bodhay-i-tr- ' a w a k e n e r ' ; a few adjectives in -a as s e c o n d m e m b e r s
of c o m p o u n d s : ati-parayd-'putting a c r o s s ' ; ni-dhärayd- 'patting d o w n ' ; väcam-
liikhaya- 'voice-impelling'; visvam-cjaya- 'all-stimulating*; a n a d j e c t i v e in -ä/u:
patay-älii- ( A V . ) 'flying'; five adjectives in -isnü: tapay-isnu- 'tormenting';
namay-isnu- ' b e n d i n g ' ; patay-isn'i- 'flying'; päray-isnü- 'rescuing'; maday-isrni-
'intoxicating'; seven adjectives in -itnu: -ämay-itnu- ' m a k i n g ill'; tanay-itni't-
'thundering'; drävay-itnü- ' s p e e d i n g ' ; posay-itnü- 'nourishing'; miiday-iinu- 'intoxi-
cating'; snday-itnü- 'streaming sweetness'; stanay itnu- m. ' t h u n d e r ' ; a n d three
adjectives in -u: dhäray-u- 'streaming' 5 ; bhävay-i'i- 'animating'; manday-i'i-
'rejoicing'.
4. T h e D e n o m i n a t i v e .
DELBRÜCK, V e r b u m p. 2 0 1 — 2 0 9 , 2 1 6 — 2 1 8 . — A V E R Y , V e r b - I n f l e c t i o n 2 7 2 — 2 7 4 . —
WHITNEY, S a n s k r i t G r a m m a r 1 0 5 3 — 1 0 6 8 . — v. NEGEI.EIN, Z u r S p r a c h g e s c h i c h t e 4 0 — 4 4 . —
C p . BRUGMANN, K G . 6 9 3 — 6 9 6 .

562. T h e denominative is nearly always f o r m e d f r o m a n o m i n a l stem

with the suffix -ya. T h e latter is normally a c c e n t e d ; but a certain n u m b e r
of unmistakable denominatives, such as mantra-ya-te ' t a k e s counsel', h a v e the
causative a c c e n t a n d thus f o r m a c o n n e c t i n g link b e t w e e n the regular denomi-
natives a n d the causatives 0 . T h e formation is a frequent o n e , m o r e than a
h u n d r e d d e n o m i n a t i v e stems occurring in the R V . , a n d in the A V . a b o u t
1 T h e s t e m hi-paya- d o e s n o t itself other- B R . a n d GRASSMANN to b e a n a l y z e d as
w i s e o c c u r in V . ; cp. p. 396 n o t e ». dhära-yü-,
* T h e T S . IV. 6. 9 1 h a s instead dhvanayit. 6 T h e r e c a n b e l i t t l e d o u b t t h a t the <ie-
3 S e e b e l o w 579. n o m i n a t i v e s u f f i x -ya is i d e n t i c a l w i t h t h a t
4 C p . DELBRÜCK, V e r b u m 2 1 1 ; a n d b e l o w ! o f t h e c a u s a t i v e as w e l l as t h a t o f t h e v e r b s
585.7- I o f t h e f o u r t h c l a s s ; c p . WHITNEY 1055 a ;
5 WHITNEY, R o o t s , s. v. dhf, a c c o r d i n g to , v . NEGELEIN 4 4 ; BRUGMANN, K G . 690, 694.
 399

thirty (or about fifty if those which form present participles or derivative
nouns only are included). The general meaning of the denominative is that
the subject expressed by the inflexion stands in some relation to the noun
from which the stem is formed. It may usually be rendered by 'be or act
like'; 'regard or treat as'; 'turn into or use as'; 'wish for'.
Denominatives formed with -ya are best classified according to the final
of the nominal stem to which the suffix is added.
563. S t e m s i n -a, which usually remains unchanged; thus amitra-ya-
'act like an enemy', 'be hostile'; indra-ya- 'behave like Indra'; ksema-ya- 'take
a rest'; jara-ya- 'treat like a lover', 'caress'; deva-ya- 'serve the gods';
yusma-ya- 'seek you'; vasna-yd- 'deal with the price', 'bargain*.
With the causative accent: (pary-)ankhd-ya- 1 'clasp (round)'; artha-ya-
'have as a desire'; fta-ya- 'act according to sacred order"; kulaya-ya- 'build
a nest'; nila-ya- 'bring together"; pald-ya- (AV.) 'act as guardian', 'protect';
mantra-ya- 'take counsel'; tnrgd-ya- 'treat as a wild animal', 'hunt'; vavra-ya;
'put in hiding', 'shrink from'; va/d-ya- 'act like a steed', 'race' (beside vaja-yd-)-
vira-ya- 'play the man'; sa-bhagd-ya- (AV.) 'apportion' 2 .
a. One or two denominatives are from nominal stems extended with -a: if-a-ya-
'have strength' (<V-)3; urj-a-ya- 'have strength' ( u r j - ) * .
a. T h e - a is, however, often l e n g t h e n e d : aghn-ya- 'plan mischief';
ajira-ya- 'be swift'; amitra-ya- (AV.) 'be hostile' (Pp. -aya-); asvU-yd- 'desire
horses'; rta-ya- 'observe sacred order' (beside j-ta-ya-)-, tilvila-yd- 'be fertile';
tuda-ya- ( A V . ) 'thrust'; dhupa-yd-* (MS. A V . ) 'be like smoke', 'fume'; prty3-ya-
'become friends'; mathi-yd- (AV.) 'shake'; musa-ya- 6 (AV.) 'steal'; yajnS-ya-
'sacrifice'; rathira-yd- 'be conveyed in a car'; randhana-ya- 1 'make subject';
vrsS-ya- 'act like a bull' 8 ; sama-ya- 'be active' ( s a m a - ) ; subha-ya- 'be beauti-
ful' 9 ; sratha-ya- 'make loose' (Pp. -dya-) 10; satvana-yd- (AV.) 'act like a
warrior*; sumna-ya- 'show benevolence'; skabha-ya• 'make firm'. In most of
these examples the Pada text has a short a.
a. T h e denominative oja-ya- 'employ force' is formed from oja-, shortened for ojas-
•strength'.
b. T h e -a of the nominal stem is sometimes changed to -7: adhvarT-yd-
'perform the sacrifice' ( a d h v a r a - ) ; • caranT-yd- 'follow a course' ( c a r a n a - ) ,
'pursue'; tavifi-y.i- 'be strong' ( t a v i s a - ) ; putri-ya- 'desire a son' (putrd-)\
rathT-yd- 'drive in a car' ( r a t h a - ) ; sapathi-yd- ( A V . ) 'utter a curse* (sapatha-).
In nearly every instance here the Pada text has t. Even in the Saiphita text
the A V . has pulri-yd- 'desire a son', and the R V . the denominative participle
(with shifted accent) dnni-yatit- 'desiring food' (anna-).
a. F o r the -a of the nominal stem e is substituted ¡11 vare-ya- 'play the wooer*
(vara-), 'woo'.
c. T h e final -a of the nominal stem is sometimes dropped": adhvar-ya-
'perform sacrifice' (beside ad/ivari-yd-)\ krpan-ya- 'be eager'; tavis-ya- 'be

I R e g a r d e d as a causative by GRASSMANN, 6 S e e WHITNEY on A V . iv. 21».

s. v. aitkh. 7 B a s e d on randhana , an assumed deri-
* DELBRÜCK 1 S 9 , I regards the form vative of the root randh-.
hastayatas as a denominative; but the accent 8 Beside vffan-yd-, from vffa-, the form
would be unique: its explanation by B K . which vfian- assumes before terminations
and G R A S S M A N N as a compound, hasta-yaias or before second members of compounds
'wielded by the hand', is doubtless the beginning with consonants,
correct one. J 9 From iubha-, an assumed derivative of
3 Cp. D E L B R Ü C K 1 8 9 , 2 . j iubh- 'shine'.
4 GRASSMANN regards this verb as a 1 >° T h e r e is also a causative form irathäya-,
causati v e : s e e Wörterbuch, s. v. ütjäy. 1 from bath- 'loosen'.
5 See WHITNEY'S note on A V . i v . 196. " Cp. v. NEGELEIN 40.
400
mighty' (beside tavisl-yd-)\ turan-ya- "be speedy'; daman-ya-1 'overpower';
bhuran-ya- 'be active'; vithur-ya- 'stagger'; saran-yd- 'hasten'. There are several
other denominatives which presuppose nouns in -ana: thus dhisan-ya- 'pay
attention'; risan-yd- 'commit faults'; ruvan-ya- 'roar'; huvan-ya- 'call'. The
derivation of isan-yd- beside isana-ya- 'impel' is perhaps similar; but the
nominal stem on which this denominative is based may be isani- 'impulse".
564. S t e m s in -a, which usually remains unchanged: gopa-ya- 'act as
herdsman', 'protect'; jma-ya- 'speed to earth'; ducchuna-yd- 'desire mischief 3;
prtanS-ya- 'fight'; bhandana-yd- 'strive for glory'; mana-ya- 'feel attachment';
rasani-ya- (AV.)< 'put on a girdle'. Similar stems are to be assumed in
rghn-ya- 'tremble', and hrna-yd- 'be wrathful'; and dhiya-yd- 'pay attention'
is based on dhiya-5 = dhi- 'thought'.
a. T h e - a of the nominal stem is once shortened, if krpa-ya- (RV 1 .) 'mourn' 6 is a
denominative and different from, the causative krpaya• (554). The a is diopped in
prtanya- 'fight' beside pftana-ya-.
a. There are more than a dozen denominatives with preceding -yd-,
w i t h o u t any c o r r e s p o n d i n g n o u n in a; thus asa-yd- 'attain' 7 ; tuda-yd- (AV.)
'thrust'; dama-ya- 'tame' 7 ; nasa-ya-8 (x. 40 6 ) 'reach'; pana-ya- 'boast o f ' ;
vasa-ya- 'invest oneself with'; rrsa-ya- 'cause to rain''. Seven such denomi-
natives, however, appear beside present bases according to the ninth class in
•na: grbha-yd- 'seize' (grbh-tui-)-, matlui-yd- 'shake' (mat/i-rni-)-, prusa-yd-'drip'
(prus-ndnt-, VS.); musa-yd- 'steal' (mus-nii-); sratha-ya- 'loosen' (srath-vA-);
skabhi-yd- 'fasten' (skabh-nA-); stabha-yd- 'support' (stab/i-na-).
565. S t e m s in -/', which is nearly always lengthened (though usually
short in the Pada text): ariitl-yd- ( R V . VS.) 'be malevolent', but arati-yd-
(AV. and R V . Pp.); kavt-yd- 'be wise'; jani-yd- 'seek a wife', but jarti-yd-
( A V . ) ; dur-grbhi-ya- 'be hard to grasp'; mahi-yd- 'be delight-d'; rayi-ya-
'desire wealth'; saklu-yd-10 'seek friendship'.
<1. In a few instances the i is either treated as a or takes Guna of which the final
element is dropped(-a-ya —-ayya)-. thus isana-ya- 'set in motion' (isani- 'impulse'); kirtaya-
(AV.) 'make mention of' (ibti-); ahuna-ya- 'resound' (dhimi- 'sounding'); stifva-ya- and
sttfva-ya- 'flow' (sufv-i-'' 'pressing'). Perhaps formed in the same way are irudhJ-ya-
'obey' and hf-nl-yd- 'be angry'«.
fl. patya- 'be a lord', 'rule', probably in origin a denominative of pa/i- 'lord', is
treated like a verb of the fourth class as if from a root pat-.
566. S t e m s in -o, which (except gatu-ya- twice) is a l w a y s long (though
always short in Pp.): asu-yd- 'grumble'; rju-ya- 'be straight'; kratu-ya- 'exert the
intellect'; gata-ya- and gatu-ya- 'set in motion'; pito-ya- 'desire nourishment';
valgB-yd- 'treat kindly'; rasu-yd- 'desire wealth'; satru-yd- 'play the enemy',
'be hostile'; sukrata-ya- 'show oneself wise'. Moreover, isu-ya- 'strive', may
be derived from isu- 'arrow'; and nouns in -u are presupposed by ahku-yd-
'move tortuously', and stabhu-ya- 'stand firm'.
a. In go-, the only stem in -0, the diphthong becomes -av before the
denominative suffix: qav-yd- 'desire cows'.

i From an assumed adjective derivative 8 D E L B R Ü C K , 1. c., regards nasäya- (x. 406)

damana-.
» C p . DELBRÜCK 1 8 9 , 4 .
3 The Pada text wrongly ducchunayi-.
4 Cp. WHITNEY'S note on AV. x t v . 27*.
5 Which perhaps became an independent
noun through the influence of the instru-
mental form in such compounds as dhiya-jur- duhiya- in the forms duhtyit and duhtyän
'growing old in devotion'.
6 C p . GRASSMANN, s. V. i f pay-
7 Cp. DELBRÜCK 199 (p. 217, middle).
as a denominative, B R . as causative of nas-.
9 To be distinguished from vfsäya- 'act
like a bull'.
10
Cp. v. NEGELEIN 41 (middle).
11
From the reduplicated root su• 'press'.
« According to DELBRÜCK 205, p. 57, also
(optatives GRASSMANN, Wörterbuch, and
WHITNEY, Roots, s. v. duh). Cp. 450, a 5.
 40I

567- C o n s o n a n t s t e m s usually remain unchanged before the suffix.

a. The only stem ending in -j is bhisdj- 'physician': bhisaj-yd- 'play the
physician', 'heal'.
b. There is one denominative, isudh-yd- 'implore', which seems to pre-
suppose a stem in -dh, viz. isudh-but is probably a denominative from
isu-dhi- (like pdtya- 'from pdti-) 'put in the arrow', 'aim' 2 .
C. Denominatives formed from stems in •/> are uksan-yd- 'act like a bull';
udan-yd- 'irrigate'; brahman-ya- 'be devout* ('act like a brahman'); vfsan-yd-3
'act like a bull', 'be lustful'.
d. A denominative formed from a stem in -or is vadhar-yd- 'hurl a
bolt* (yadhar-). Stems in -ar are further presupposed in rathar-yd- 'ride in
a car'; srathar-yd- 'become loose'; sapar-yd- 'worship'.
e. The consonant stems most frequently used to form denominatives are
those in -as: apas-ya- 'be active'; avas-yd- 'seek help'; canas-yd- 'be satisfied';
duvas-ya- 'adore'; namas-yd- 'pay homage'; nr-manas-yd- 'be kindly disposed
to men'; mattas-yd- 'bear in mind'; vacas-yd- "be audible'; varivas-ya- 'grant
space'; sravas-yd-4 'hasten'; sa-canas-ya- 'cherish'; su-manas-yd- 'be gracious';
sv-apas-yd- 'act well'. Stems in -as are further presupposed by iras-yd- 'be
angry'; dasas-yd- 'render service to'; panas-yd- 'excite admiration'; sacas-ya-
'receive care'. A few denominatives have further been formed from stems in
-a following the analogy of those in -as; thus makhas-ya- 'be cheerful'
0makhd-) and su-makhas-ya- (TS.) 'be merry'; mänavas-yd- 'act like men*
(:mänavd-). The stem avis-yd-, appearing in the participle avisydnt- "helping
willingly', apparently a denominative (beside avisyä- 'desire', avisyi't- 'desirous'),
seems to be formed from *av-is- — dv-as- 'favour' 5 .
f. A few denominatives are formed from stems in -us: tarus-yd- 'engage
in fight' (tar-us-); vanus-yd- 'plot against' (van-us- 'eager'); vapus-ya- 'wonder'
{yap-us- 'marvellous'). This analogy is followed by uru-s-yd- 'seek wide space'
from a stem in -u (uru- 'wide').
568. There are a few d e n o m i n a t i v e f o r m s made w i t h o u t a suffix direct
from nominal stems, but they nearly always have beside them denominative
stems in -ya; thus bhisak-H (vni. 79") 'heals' 3. sing, from bhisdj- 'act as phy-
sician' (also m. 'physician'); a-bhisnak (x. 131 5 ), 3. sing. impf, of bhisnaj- 'heal'.
Similarly there appear the forms sing. 2. isana-s, 3. isana-t, pL 3. isana-nta
beside isan-yd-; pi. 3. krpdna-nta beside kfpan-yd-; pi. 1. taruse-ma, 3. tdrusa-nte,
tarusa-nta beside tarus-yd-; pi. 3 vanusa-nta beside vanus-yd-. Possibly the form
vdnanvati is a denominative meaning 'is at hand', from a noun *van-anu-, beside
the simple verb van- 'win'6.
Inflexion.
569. The denominative is regularly inflected throughout the present
system according to the a- conjugation in both voices. The commonest form
is the 3. sing, active and middle.
The forms of the p r e s e n t indicative active and middle that actually
occur would, if made from manas-yd- 'bear in mind', be the following:
A c t i v e . Sing. 1. manasyämi (AV.). 2. manasyasi. 3. manasydti. —
Du. 2. manasydthas. 3. manasyatas. — PI. 1. manasyämasi and manasyämas.
2. manasyatha. 3. manasydnti.
M i d d l e . Sing. 1. manasyt. 2. manasydse. 3. manasydte. — Du. 2.
manasyethe. 3. manasydte (AV.). — PI. 1. manasyämahe. 3. manasydnti.
1 Cp. DELBRÜCK 194. ] from iru- = sru- 'flow', but GRASSMANN
* Cp. G R A S S M A N N , S. V. isudhy. from sru- 'hear'.
3 Beside Vffäya-; cp. p. 3 9 9 , note 8. 5 Cp. G R A S S M A N N , S . V . avisy.
4 According to B R . derived from iravas- 6 Cp. D E L B R Ü C K p. 218.
Indo-arische Philologie. I, 4. 26
4° 2 L ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4 . VEDIC GRAMMAR.

Forms that actually occur elsewhere in the present system are the
following:
a. Subjunctive. Active. Sing. 1. namasya. — 2. urusyds, kJrtdySs
(AV.), sravasyds. — 3. apasydt, arafiydt (TS. iv. 1. io^; VS. xi. 8o), aratiydt
(AV.), urusydt, caranySt (AV.), durasydt (AV.), duvasydt, prtanydt, vanusydt,
vareydt, vasBydt, sravasydt, saparydt. — Du. 3. varivasydtas. — PL 3.
prtanyan (AV.), saparydn, saranydn. — Middle. Sing. 2. arthayase, nllaySse. —
3. ankhdyate.
b. Injunctive. Active. Sing. 2. irasyas, risanyas, ruvanyas. — Pl. 3.
turanyan, duvasyan, namasyan, saparyan. — Middle. Sing. 3. panHyata. —
Pl. 3. rghaydnta, rtayanta, krpananta, tarusanta, dhunayaniat, rucayanta,
vanusanta, susvayanta.
C. Optative. Active. Sing. 2. das'asyes. — 3. urusyet, caranyet (TS.
1.8.22 1 ), dasasyet, dievasyit. — Pl. 1. isayema, tarusema, saparytma. —
Middle. Sing. 3. manasyita (AV.).
d. Imperative. Active. Sing. 2. isanya, urusya, gatuya, gUrdhaya,
gopayd (AV. TS.), grbhSya, dasasya, duvasya, namasya, varivasya, vajaya
(TS. 1. 7. 8 1 ), irat haya, saparya. — 3. urusyatu, gopayatu1 (AV.), bhisajyaiu
(TS. v. 2. 122). — Du. 1. urusyatam, gopayatam, cartasyatam, dasasyatam. —
3. urusyatam. — Pl. 2. isanyata, urusyata, grbhayata (AV.), gopayata (AV.),
dasasyata, duvasyata, namasyata, risanyata, saparyata. — 3. urusyaniu,
gopayantu (AV.), varivasyantu. — Middle. Sing. 2. arthayasva, vTrayasva
(AV. TS.), vrsSyasva (AV.). — Pl. 2. tilvilsyadhvam, vXrayadhvam. —
3. dhunayantam.
e. Participle. The present participle active in -ant (with fem. -ant-i)
is very common, while the middle form in -mana, occurs fairly often.
a. Examples of the active are aghiyani-, ahkuydnt-, adkvarlyant-, amitra-
yan/-, arstlyant-, asvSyani-, isanydnt-, isdyant- and isaydnt-, isBydnt-, udati-
ydnt-, Utjdyant-, j-ghiydnt-, ftdyant-, ftaydnt-, gavyant-, gopnyant- (AV.),
tavislyantdas'asyant-, duvasyatU-, devaydntnamasydni-, pilayant- (AV.),
putrjyantpftanHydnt-, pftanydni-, bhandanHydnt-, bhuranyant-, mathayant
musayant-, yajnUyant-, yusmaydntrathirayantrathlyant-, vasttyanivasna-
yatti-, vajayant- and vajayant-, vrsanyant-, s'atrByant-, slknyant- (VS.) 'dripping",
sakhlyantsatvanSydnt- (AV.), saparyant-, sumnayartt-, susvdyanthfnayant-
' angry'.
Examples of the middle are rghayamUna-, rjuyamana-, ojaydmana-,
kandUydmina- (TS.), kavTyamana-, caranTydmanatavisydmanapriyayamana-
(AV.), (d-prati )manyUyamana- (AV.), ras'anayamSna-, vrsaydmana-, samanaya-
mana-, sumakhasyamana- (TS.), sumanasydmana-, stabhBydmana-, svapasya-
mana-, hrnlyamana- 'angry*.
f. Imperfect. Active. Sing. 2. arandhaniyas. — 3. aprtanyat,
dskabhayat (AV.); urusyat, damanyat, dhupdyat (AV.); abhisnak. — Du. 3.
urusyatam. — Pl. 3. anamasyan, asaparyan-, turanyan, vapusyan, saparyan
(TS. 11. 2. 12«). — Middle. Sing. 3. apriyayata. — Du. 2. avlrayetham. —
Pl. 3. isanayanta.
570. Outside the present system no denominative form occurs in
the RV. except GnayTs ( + AV.), 2. sing, is- aorist (used injunctively with ma)

1 The form bkurdjania(YV.^ii) is according declension {go-pa-) occur in the RV. To

to pw. = bhrajanta for bhrajjanta (bhrajj- 'be j the denominative must be due the secon-
roasted'). Cp. note in OLDENBERG'S Rgveda. dary root gup- 'protect' (jugupur once, gupita-
' This denominative is derived from the twice in the RV.). Cp. p. 358, note <3. How
very frequent go-pa- 'cowherd', of which gup- should be a denominative of go- 'cow'
two trantition forms according to the a- (v. NESBLEIN 43, note 5 ) is not clear.
 V I I . VERB. NOMINAL VERB FORMS. PAST PASSIVE PARTICIPLES. 403

from Bnaya- 'leave unfulfilled' (una-). A few other forms occur in the later
Samhitas. Thus the AV. has the peculiar form asaparyait (AV. xiv. a* 0 ) 1 ,
probably 3. sing, aorist, with -ait for -It2. The VS. (n.31) has the 3. pi. aorist
a^a-vrsay-is-ata 'they have accepted'. The TS. has the 2. pi. aor. pSpay-is-fa
lead into evil' (used injunctively with md). The TS. (nr. a. 8 3 ) has also the
future participles kanduyisyant- 'about to scratch', meghayisyant- 'about to be
cloudy', hkayisyant- 'about to drip', with the corresponding perfect participles
passive kanduyita-, mcghitd-, slkitd-.
B . Nominal Verb Forms.
571. A large number of nominal formations partake of the verbal
character inasmuch as they express time (present, past, or future); or the
relations between subject and object, implying transitive or intransitive action,
and active, middle, or passive sense. Such formations are participles (in-
cluding verbal adjectives), infinitives, and gerunds. The participles formed
from tense-stems having already been treated3, only those that are formed
directly from the root remain to be dealt with. These are the verbal
adjectives which have the value either of past passive participles or of future
passive participles (otherwise called gerundives).
a. Past Passive Participles.
572. The past passive participle is formed by adding, in the great
majority of instances, the suffix -ta* (with or without connecting -»-), or far
less commonly the suffix -na (directly) to the root When formed from a
transitive verb, it has a passive as well as a past sense; e. g. as- 'throw':
as-td- 'thrown'; da- 'give' : dat-ta- 'given'. But when formed from an intransi-
tive verb, it has a neuter past sense; e. g. gam- 'go' : ga-td- 'gone'; pat- 'fall'
: pat-i-td- (AV.) 'fallen'.
573. When -td is added direct, the root tends to appear in its weak
form. Very frequently, however, the form in which the root is generally
stated, if ending in vowels, remains unchanged, while those ending in con-
sonants are usually modified only in so far as is required by the rules
of internal Sandhi; thus Ymla-: mla-ta- 'softened'; \rya : ya-ta- 'gone'; yVa-
: ra-ta- 'given'; \'ji- : ji-td- 'conquered'; \rsri- : sri-ta- leaning on'; Yprl-:
pn-ta- 'rejoiced'; / M r - : bhi-td- 'frightened'; Yyu- 1. 'yoke' and 2. 'ward off*
: -yu-ta--, Ysru- : sru-ta- 'heard'; \'stu- : stu-td- 'praised'; Y^hu- : bhu-ta- Tie-
come'; V ha- : ha-td- 'called'; [/¿r- : kr-td- 'made'; / M r - : -bhr-ta- 'borne';
Y w '• W-ti- 'covered' and 'chosen'; \ mrc-: mrk-ta-5 (RV.) 'injured'; Ys*c~ '•
sik-ta- 'poured out'; Y^j' tik-td- 'sharp'; Yyuj-: yuk-td- 'yoked'; YmT3~
S
: rnfs-ta- 'rubbed'; Y H' '• W-tf- 'discharged'; Ycit- : cit-ta- 'perceived'; Yvft-:
vrt-ta- 'turned'; \ mad- 'be exhilarated' : mat-ta- (AV.); : id-dhd- 'kind-
led'; \/krudh- : krud-dhd- 'angry'; \tap- : tap-ta- 'hot'; : rip-td- (RV.)
'besmeared'; \ dis-: dis-ta- 'shown'; : nas-fd- 'lost'; Yju?~ : juH<*- (RV 1 .)
'gladdened' and jus-ta- 'welcome'; J pis-: pis-td- 'crushed'; | r kas-: vi-ias-ta-
'split'; Y&**- ga-'dhd-6 'hidden'; Y(rh- : tr-dhd- 'crushed'; Y • dag-dha-i
'burnt'; y dtA- : dig-dhd- (AV.) 'besmeared'; J/VK^- : dug-dha- 'milked'; Y

1 Cp. v. NEGELEIN 4 1 ; BOHTLINGK, ZDMG. 5 Only in the compounds d-mrkta- and

52, 510 ff. mfita-vahas-.
a As in the AB. form m;rabhaisam beside 6In roots in -h which cerebralize the
agrabhit\ cp. v. NEGELEIN 41, note 2. suffix, the vowel is lengthened as compen-
3 See under declension 311— 313, and in sation for the lots of the cerebral 2: cp.
the account of the various tenses (present, p. 51, note
perfect, aorist, future). 7 In the RV. only in agui-dagdha- 'burnt
4 Cp. REICHELT, BB. 2 7 , 9 5 — 97. with fire'.
26*
4°4

: df-dha- 'firm'; Ydruh-: drug-dha- 'hurtful'; Ynah-: nad-dha- 'bound'; J ~muh-:

mug-dhd- and mQ-dhd- (AV.) 'bewildered'; \ rih-: rX-dhd- (RV.) 'licked'; \ruh-
: rU-dha- (AV.) 'ascended'; \rtah- : sa-dhd- 'overcome'.
a. Occasional irregularities in the form of the root are not due to the ordinary
rules of internal Sandhi. Thus some roots show an interchange of vowel and semi-vowel:
dw- 'play': dyu-ta- (AV.); srv- 'sew' : syu-ta-\ mhr- 'push' : -muta- (VS. AV.) instead of
*myu-ta-1-, hvf- 'make crooked' has hru-td- 'crooked', beside the regular -hvf-ta- (RV.);
sometimes a long vowel appears in the root: svad- 'sweeten' : svat-td-; gur- 'greet':
gur-ta-; if- 'mix': -str ia-, beside srt-id- from iri- 'mix', the usual form of the root; da-
'give', beside the regular form -da-ta- in tva-data- (RV.) 'given by thee', otherwise always
has dai-tdformed from dad-, the weak form of the present base.
574. Roots which contain the syllables ya, ra, va (initial or medial)
are generally weakened by Samprasarana; those which contain a nasal
(medial or final), by dropping it; those which end in 3 or ya, by shortening
the former to X or i, the latter to 1. Thus:
1. yaj- 'sacrifice' : is-td-; vyadh- 'pierce' : vid-dha--, prach- 'ask' : pfs-ta-\
bhras- 'fall' : bhrs-ta- beside bhras-ta- (AV.); vac- 'speak' : uk-ta-; vap- 'strew'
: up-ta--, vas- 'shine' : us-ta-; vah- 'carry' : U-dha--t svap- 'sleep' : sup-ta-
(AV. VS.).
a. A shortening akin to Samprasarana appears in av• 'favour' : -u-ta-; va- 'weave' :
u-ta-\ ira• 'boil' : if-ta- beside sra-ta-.
2. A medial nasal is dropped in anj- 'anoint' : ak-ta-\ umbh- 'confine'
: ub-dhd-; dams- 'bite' : das-ta- (AV.); bamh- 'make firm': -bi-dha-\ sundh-
'purify': sud-dha-. Final n and m are dropped (the radical a representing the
sonant nasal) in ksan- 'wound': -ksa-ta-\ tan-'stretch': ta-ta--, man- 'think*: ma-td-;
han- 'smite': ha-ta--, gam- 'go' \ga-td-\ nam- "bend': na-ta-\ yam- 'reach' \ya-ta-.
a. A few roots in -an have a instead of -an2: khan- 'dig' : kha-ta-; jan- 'be born':
ja-ld--, van- 'win' : -va-ta-; san- 'gain' : sa-ta-; while some roots in -am and one in -an,
retaining the nasal, have an: divan- 'sound': diruanta- (VS. XXXIX. 7); kram- 'stride': iran-la-
(AV.); Jam- 'be quiet'; san-ta- (AV.); bam- 'be weary' : sran-ta-\ dham- 'blow' has the
irregular dhma-ta- and dham-i-td-.
3. Final S is shortened to r in ga- 'sing' \gx-ta--,dha- 'suck': dhx-td-,
pa- 'drink' : pl-td-*; to 1 in da- 'bind' : -di-ia-; dha- 'put' : -dhi-ta- and Ai-td-;
mi- 'measure' : mi-td--, s'a- 'sharpen': si-ta-; sa- 'bind' : si-td-; stha- 'stand':
sthi-td-.
F i n a l yd is s h o r t e n e d to T in /ya- 'overpower' : jx-ta- (AV.); vya-
'envelope' : vX-ta-; sya- 'coagulate' : sX-td-.
a. Internal shortening of a to i appears in ids- 'order' : Hyfa-; and medial a entirely
disappears in ghas- 'eat' : - -dha- (TS.) and in the compounded form of daltd- 'given',
which becomes -t-ta- : deva-ttd- 'given by the gods'; vy-d-t/a- (AV. VS.), n. 'the opened
mouth'; parl-tta- (VS. IX. 9) 'deposited'; -prati-tla- (AV.) 'given back'. The same syncopated
form appears in the compound participle of da- 'divide' : ava-tta- (VS.) 'cut off'.
575. When -td is added, as it is in many verbs, with connecting -/-,
the root is not weakened (excepting four instances of Samprasaraga) 4 . It is
thus added to a number of roots ending in consonants and to all second-
ary verbs.
a. The roots to which it is thus regularly added are those that end:
1. in two consonants: thus uks- 'sprinkle' : uks-i-ta--, ubj- 'force' :
ubj-i-td- (AV.); nind- 'revile' : nind-i-ta-\ raks- 'protect* : rais-i-td-; sumbh-
'beautify' : -sumbh-i-ta- (AV.); hints- 'injure' -.hims-i-ta- (AV.); but taks- 'fashion'
has tas-td-;
1
See above 50 b. 4 In gj-bh-i-ta- Ixomgrabh- 'seize' and gfh-
1
Representing the long sonant nasal. l-ta- (AV.) from graft- id.; ukf-i-ed- from vat}-
3 The more correct way of stating these 'increase'; ud-i-td- from vad- 'speak'; ifih-
roots would be gai-, dhai-, pai-\ cp. 27 a. ¡•id- from sraih- 'slacken*.
 V I I . VERB. PAST PASSIVE PARTICIPLES. 405

a. in voiceless aspirates: likh- 'scratch': likh-i-ta- (AV.); grath- 'tie' :

grath-i-ta-; nath- 'seek aid' : nath-i-ta--, math- 'stir': math-i-td-;
3. in cerebral d: id- 'praise' : Tl-i-ta-; hid- 'be hostile' : hil-i-td-\
4. in semivowels: car- 'move' : car-t-ta-1; jlv- 'live': jlv-i-ta-.
b. The suffix is also added with -»'- to a number of roots ending in
simple consonants, especially sibilants, about which no rule can be stated.
Such are the following participles arranged according to the final of the r o o t :
yac- 'ask' -.yac-i-td- (AV.); pat- 'fall' : pat-i-td- (AV.); rod- 'dig' : rad-i-td- (AV.);
vad- 'speak': ud-i-ta-; vid- 'know' : vid-i-ta- (AV.) 2 ; dudh- 'stir u p ' : diidh-i-ta-
(RV.); nadh- 'seek aid' : nadh-i-ta-\ badh- 'oppress': badh-i-td-; pan- 'admire':
pan-i-ta--, kup- 'be agitated' : -kup-i-ta-; gup-3 protect' : gup-i-td- beside gup-td-
(AV.); yup- 'obstruct' : yup-i-td- ( A V ) ; rup- 'break' : -rup~i-ta-; drp- 'rave' :
drp-i-ta-and -drp-ta--, lap- 'prate' : lap-i-td- (AV.); grabh- 'seize' \grbh-T-ta- and
grah- 'seize':grh-I-ta- (AV.); skabh- 'prop': skabh-i-ta-; stabh- 'prop': stabh-i-td-;
dham- 'blow': dham-i-ta- (beside dhma-ta-);
as- 'eat' : as-i-ta-; pis- 'adorn' : pis-i-td- (AV.) beside pis-id-; is- 'send' :
is-i-ta-; is- 'move' : -is-i-ta-; tvis- 'be stirred': tvis-i-ta-; dhrs- 'dare': dhrs-i-ta-
beside dhfs-ta-; prus- 'sprinkle' : prus-i-td-; mus- 'steal' : mus-i-ta-; hfs- 'be ex-
cited' : hrs-i-td-; gras- 'devour' : gras-i-ta-.
a . T h e verb ha- 'leave' forms its past participle anomalously (like da- 'give') from
the reduplicated present base: jah-i-ta- (cp. the pres. part. jah-at-\
p. In the A V . is once (ix. 638) found a past passive participle extended with the
p o s s e s s i v e suffix -rant, which gives it the sense of a perfect participle active: ai-i-ta-
vant- (Pp. atiia-vant-) 'having eaten'.
c. Secondary verbs, almost exclusively causatives 4 , add -ita after
dropping -aya-\ thus arp-aya- 'cause to go' : arp-itd- and arp-ita--, ihkh-dya-
'cause to quake' : ihkh-ita- -, cod-aya- 'set in motion' : cod-ita- -, vJl-aya- 'make
strong': vTl-ita-; snath-ay a- 'pierce' : snath-ita--, svan-aya- 'resound' : -svan-ita-.
T h e only past passive participle formed from a denominative is bhim-itd-
'enraged', from bhdtna- 'wrath'.
576. The suffix -/iff is always attached directly to the root, which
as a rule remains unweakened. Among roots ending in consonants, it is
taken by those in d, besides two or three in the palatals c and j; among
roots in vowels, it is taken by those ending in the long vowels 3, r, besides
one in a.
a . The final of r o o t s in -d is assimilated to the n of the suffix; thus chid-
'cut off' : chin-na-; tud- 'push': tun-na-; tfd- 'pierce': -tfti-na- (VS. xxxvi. 2); nud-
'push' : -nun-na- (SV.) beside nut-ta-; pad- 'go' :pan-nd- (AV.); bhid- 'split':
bhin-na--, vid- 'find' : vin-na- (AV.) beside vit-td-; sad- 'sit': san-na- (VS. AV.)
beside sat-td-\ skand- 'leap': skatt-na-; syand- 'move on' : syan-na-; svid- 'sweat'
: svin-na-. The original participle of ad- 'eat' survives only (with change of
accent) in the neuter noun an-na- 'food'.
b . The r o o t s i n p a l a t a l s which take -na are: pre- 'mix' : -prg-'ta- (RV 1 .)
beside prk-ta-\ vrasc- 'cut up' : vrk-nd-\ ruj- 'break' : rug-na-.
c . R o o t s in -0. remain unchanged or weaken the final to »: drS- 'sleep'
: -drS-na- (AV.); da- 'divide' : di-na-; ha- 'leave' : hi-nd-; final -ya is shortened
to -I: syi- 'coagulate' : s't-tid- (VS.) beside sl-td-.
d . R o o t s i n -/ a n d -u remain unchanged: ksT- 'destroy' : -ksi-na- (AV.);

1 A l s o âr-i-tà• if derived from a somewhat | 3 See p. 402, note 2 .

doubtful root dr- 'praise'; cp. WHITNEY,! 4 No examples of past participles from
Roots, s. v. är. ; desideratives (except mîmâmsUâ-, A V . ) and
2 mad-i tâ- is probably from the causative intensives seem to occur in the Samhitis.
of mad- 'be exhilarated'.
 L ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4. VEDIC GRAMMAR.

pi- 'swell* : pT-nd- (AV.); bit- 'crush': -bll-na- (AV.); Ii- 'cling' : -lx-na- (AV.);
dü- ' b u m ' : dü-nd- (AV.).
e. Roots in -r change that vowel to -lr or (generally when a labial
precedes) -ttr before -na: gf- 'swallow* : glr-na-; j f - 'waste away' : j'Tr-rtd- (AV.)
and jOr-nd--, tf- 'pass' : tlr-nd-; pf- 'fill* : pBr-nd- beside pür-td-\ mf- 'crush' :
mBr-nd- (AV.); sf- 'crush': s'lr-na- (AV.) beside sBr-td• (RV. 1. 1 7 4 s ) 1 ; stf-
'strew' : stlr-na- beside -stf-ta-.

b. Future Passive Participles (Gerundives).

577. Verbal adjectives formed with certain suffixes have acquired the
value of future participles passive, expressing that the action of the verb is
or ought to be suffered. There are four forms of such gerundives in use
in the R V . : that derived with the primary suffix -ya, which is common, and
those derived with the secondary suffixes -Ay-ya, -¿n-ya, and -tv-a, about a
dozen examples of each of which are met with. In the A V . are also found
two instances each of gerundives in -tavya and -aniya.
578. By far the most frequent form of gerundive is that in -ya, about
40 examples occurring in the R V . and about 60 in the A V . This suffix is
nearly always to be read as -ia, which accounts for the treatment of final
radical vowels before it The root, being accented, appears in a strong form,
excepting a few instances in which there is the short radical vowel i u or r.
1. In the following examples a final s h o r t v o w e l remains unchanged,
a -/-' being interposed: -i-t-ya- 'to be gone'; apa-mi-t-ya- (AV. vi. 117") 'to
be thrown away' (? mi- 'fix'p; sru-t-ya- 'to be heard'; -kf-t-ya- 'to be made';
car-kf-t-ya- 'to be praised' (&r- 'commemorate').
2. Otherwise final /, a, /• regularly take Guga or Vj-ddhi, the final
element of which always appears as y, v, r as before a vowel; thus from
ll- 'cling': a-ldy-ya-*, an epithet of Indra; nu- 'praise' : ndv-ya- 'to be praised';
bha- 'be' : bhdv-ya- and bhav-yd- 'future'; hü- 'call' : hdv-ya- 'to be invoked';
vr- 'choose* : vAr-ya- 'to be chosen'.
3. F i n a l -ä coalesces with the initial of -ia to e, between which and -a
a phonetic y is interposed; thus da- 'give' : di-ya- (= dA-i-y-a-) 'to be given';
khya- ' s e e ' : -khye-ya- (AV.); ma- 'measure' : mi-ya- (AV.). In the RV., how-
ever, the form jnä-ya- once occurs in the compound bala-vi-jhi-yd- (x. 103 5 )
'to be recognized by his might'.
4. A medial vowel either remains unchanged or, if short, may take
Guga, and a is sometimes lengthened; thus id-ya- 'to be praised'; giih-ya- 'to
be hidden'; -dhrs-ya- 'to be assailed'; dvh-ya- (AV.) 'to be hated' () dvis-);
yodh-ya- 'to b e f o u g h t ' (Yyudh-)\ drdh-ya- 'to b e c o m p l e t e d ' (\frdA-); mdrj-ya-
to be purified' (Ymrj-); cdks-ya- 'to be seen'; ddbh-ya- 'to be deceived';
rdmh-ya- 'to be hastened'; rAdh-ya- 'to b e w o n ' ; vand-ya- ' p r a i s e w o r t h y ' ;
sdms-ya- 'to be lauded'; -sdd-ya- from sad- 'sit'; -mAd-ya- from mad- 'be ex-
hilarated'; vAc-ya- 'to be said' (Yvac~)-
579. Hardly a dozen gerundives, almost restricted to the RV., are
formed with -ay-yas (which with one exception is always to be read -Ayia):
daks-Ayya- 'to b e c o n c i l i a t e d ' ; pan-Ayya- 'to b e a d m i r e d ' ; vid-Ayya- 'to be

< The form -iir-ta- is also found in the I 4 Cp. GRASSMANN, S. V.

MS.: WHITNEY, Roots, s. v. y f y - 'crush'. | 5 Cp. LINDNER, Nominalbildung 22; DEL-
' Cp. the -/ added to root» ending in BRÜCK, Verbum 233; WHITNEY 966 c ; BAR-
•i, -u, -r to form nominal stems (308). THOLOUAE, B B . 1 5 , 1 7 9 n. 1 ; B B . 20, 85.
3 T h e meaning is uncertain: WHITNEY
translates the word by 'borrowed*. See his
notes in his Translation.
 VII. VERB. INFINITIVE. 407

found'; srav-ayya- 'glorious'; -hnav-äyya- 'to be denied'. A few are formed

from secondary verbs; from causatives: trayay-ayya- 'to be guarded' (\f tra-)';
panay-äyya- 'admirable' ( y p a n - ) ; spfhay-Ayya- 'desirable' ( J f s p r A - ) - , from a
desiderative: di-dhi-s-ayya- 'to be conciliated (\fdAä-); from an intensive:
vi-tan-tas-äyya- 'to be hastened' (\tams-). Akin to diese gerundives is the
anomalous form stus/yya- 'to be praised', derived direct from the infinitive
2
stusi 'to praise' .
580. More than a dozen gerundives are formed with -en-ya (generally
to be read -enia): iis-Jnya- 'worthy to be seen', U-Mya- 'praiseworthy', -car-
e'nya- 'to be acted', drs-Mya- 'worthy to be seen', -dvis-enya- 'malignant',
3-bhüs-inya- 'to be glorified', yudh-enya- 'to be combatted', vdr-enya- 'desirable'.
From the aorist stem is formed -yams-inya- 'to be guided' (]iyam-); and
perhaps papfks-enya-3 'desirable' {\prach-'). A few are also derived from
secondary verbs; from desideratives: didfks-inya- 'worthy to be seen'
(Ydrs-), susrüs-inya- (TS.) 'deserving to be heard'; from intensives: mar-
mfj-enya- 'to be adorned', vavrdh-enya- 'to be glorified'; from a denomina-
tive: sapary-enya- 'to be adored'.
581. About a dozen gerundives, almost restricted to the RV. 4 , end in
-tv-a (generally to be read as -tu-d), which seems to be the infinitive stem
in -tu turned into an adjective by means of the suffix -a: kdr-tva- 'to be
made', jdn-i-tva- and jdn-tva- 'to be born', ji-tva• 'to be won', ndn-tva- 'to be
bent', bhdv-i-tva- 'future', vak-h'a- 'to be said', sdn-i-tva- 'to be won', sS-tva-
'to be pressed', snä-tva- 'suitable for bathing', hdn-tva- 'to be slain', hi-tva-
'to be driven on' (\rM-).
a. In the AV. there begins to appear a gerundive in -tav-ya. It probably started
from the stem of the predicative infinitive in -tav-e, which was tnrned into an adjective
by means of the suffix -/a 5 . The only examples of this formation are jan-i-tav-ya- t o
be born' (AV. IV. 237) and Aims-i-tav-yä- 'to be injured' (AV. v. 186).
b. There are also two examples in the AV. of a new gerundive in -an-iya, which
is derived from a verbal noun in -ana with the adjective suffix -Tya. These arc
upafiv-aniya- 'serving for subsistence'='to be subsisted on' (AV. via. 1 0 « ) ; ä-mantr-
aniya- 'fit for address' (ä-mantrana•) = 'worthy to be addressed' (AV. VIIL IO7)<\

c. Infinitive.
A. LUDWIG, Der Infinitiv im Veda, Prag 1871. — J. JOLLY, Geschichte des Infinitivs
im Indogermanischen (Manchen 1873), especially p. I I I — 1 3 7 . — DELBRÜCK, Das alt-
indische Verbum (1874), p. 221—228; Altindische Syntax p. 410—425. — AVERY, Verb-
Inflection in Sanskrit, JAOS. 10,275—276 (1876).— BRUNNHOFEN, Über die durch ein-
fache flectirung der wurzel gebildeten infinitive des Veda, KZ. 30 (1890), 504—513. —
BARTHOLOMAE, Zur bildung des dat. sing, der a-stämme, BB. 15. 221—247. — V- NEGELEIN,
Zur Sprachgeschichte des Veda (1898), gl.—FRITZ WOLFF, Die infinitive des Indischen
und Iranischen. Erster teil: Die ablativisch-genetivischen und die accusativischen infini-
tive, Gütersloh 1905.
58a. The infinitive, all the forms of which are old cases of nouns of
action, is very frequently used, occurring in the RV. alone about 700 times.
The case-forms which it exhibits are those of the accusative, dative, ablative-
genitive, and locative. Only the first two are common, but the dative is
by far the commonest, outnumbering the accusative in the proportion of 12
to 1 in the RV. (609 to 49)', and of 3 to 1 in the AV. 8 Infinitives are
» C p . GRASSMANN, s . v . , a n d WHITNEY 1 0 5 i f . 5 C p . BRUGMANN, K G . 809.
1 6
See BRUGMANN, KG. 809. The gerundive meaning in these two
3 See BENFEY, Vollständige Grammatik verbal adjectives is probably only incipient.
904 and 860. The second is expressly connected with the
4 A few of these are also found in B., verbal noun ä-mantrana-.
also an additional one, hd-tva- 'to be sacri- j 7 AVERY 231.
ficed', in t h e M S . (L 93). ! 8 WHITNEY 986.
408 L ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4. V E D I C GRAMMAR.

formed chiefly from radical stems or stems in -tu, only a few dative and
locative forms being made from other stems. It is somewhat remarkable
that the acc. form in -turn which is the only infinitive in the later language,
hardly occurs in the RV., being' found there only five t i m e s w h i l e the
dative infinitive, which is more than seven times as frequent as all the rest
in the RV., has almost disappeared even in the Brahmagas. The formations
which are restricted to the infinitive meaning are the datives in -tavai, -dhyai,
and (the very few) in -se, besides a small number of locatives in -sani. In
other forms it is often difficult to draw a strict line of demarcation between
the infinitive' and ordinary case uses3.
1. Dative Infinitive.
583. This infinitive ends in -e, which when added to the a of a root
or stem combines with it to -at. It has the final meaning of '(in order) to',
'for (the purpose of)' 3 . This dative is commonly used without an object;
hence a dative often appears beside it by attraction instead of an accusa-
tive; e. g. asmabhyam drsaye siryaya putiar dstam dsum (x. 14' 2 ) 'may they
two grant us life again, for the sun, that we may see (it)', i. e. 'that we may
see the sun' ( = dfsaye saryam). When used with kf- 'make' or verbs of
wishing, and when predicative, this infinitive acquires a passive meaning; e. g.
agnim sam-idhe cakartha (1.113') 'thou hast made ( = caused) the fire to be
kindled'; yad im usmdsi kartave (x. 74 s ) 'what we wish to be done';
brahmadvisah . . . hantavd u (x. 182J) 'Brahma-haters (are) to be slain' 4 .
584. From roots are formed some 60 dative infinitives.
a. About a dozen are made from roots ending in long vowels,
chiefly -a, and one in -i. All of these are found only compounded with
prefixes, excepting bhu-, which appears once in the simple form. Two of them
drop a before the -e5. These infinitives are: vi-khyai 'to look abroad'; pard-dai
'to give up'; prati-mai 'to imitate' (ill. 6o*); -yai 'to go'; ava-sai (111.53'°) 'to
rest'; srad-dhi (1.102') 'to trust' (with the dat. particle kdm)\ pra-mi (ix. 70«)
'to form'; pra-hye (x. 109J) 'to send' (y^'-); -miy-e 'to diminish' (\ftni-); bhuv-4
and -bhv-t! 'to be' (ybha-); -tir-e 'to cross' (///-); -stlr-e (Ystf- 'spread').
b. The rest are formed from roots ending in consonants. The un-
compounded forms are: tvis-i 'to arouse', dfs-i 'to see', bhuj-i 'to enjoy',
mah-S 'to be glad', mih-i 'to make water', mud-J 'to rejoice', mus-i 'to rob',
muh-i 'to be bewildered', yuj-i 'to yoke', yudh-i 'to fight', ruc-d 'to shine', i>rdh-e
'to thrive', subh-i 'to shine'.
The compounded forms are much more frequent They are: -aj-e 'to
drive', -idh-e 'to kindle', -kram-e 'to stride', -grabh-e 'to seize', -cdks-e 'to see',
-tir-e 'to cross', -tuj-e<' 'to procure', -dabh-e 'to injure', -dis-e 'to point', dri-e
'to see', -dhfs-e 'to be bold' ( + AV.TS.), -ndm-e 'to bend', -ndi-e ( + VS.) 'to
attain', -niks-e 'to pierce', -nud-e 'to thrust', -pfc-e 'to fill', -pfcch-e 'to ask';
-bddh-e 'to bind' (AV.), -budhe (TS. 1. 2. 3') 'to awake', -mfse 'to forget',
-ydks-e 'to speed', -yuj-e 'to yoke', -rabh-e 'to seize', -ruj-e 'to break', -vdc-e 'to
speak' (Yvac-), -vide 'to find', -vidh-e 'to pierce' (Yvyadh-), -vis-e 'to seize',
-vf-j-e 'to put round', -vft-e 'to turn', -s'ds-e 'to proclaim', -sdd-e 'to sit', -sud-e
'to enjoy', -skad-e 'to leap', -skabh-e 'to prop', -sprs-e 'to touch', -syad-e 'to
flow', -svaj-e 'to embrace' 7 .

1 AVERY 230. 5 That is, srad-dhi and pra-me, which

» WHITNEY 970 1; WOLFF p. 1.
3 Cp. WHITNEY 982. On the uses of the
infinitive, cp. BRUGMANN, K G . 8 0 5 — 8 1 1 .
4 Cp. WHITNEY 982, a — d .
7 Cp. the list in
might, however, be explained as locatives.
<> In viii. 415 the dative, accented tuj-e,
occurring independently, appears to be a
substantive.
LUDWIG p. 56—58.
 V I L VERB. INFINITIVE. 409

a. One infinitive is also formed from a reduplicated root: siindth-e

(UL 31 1 3 ) 'to attack'; but according to GRASSMANN 1 it is the locative of a
substantive meaning 'attack'.
585. The remaining dative infinitives are formed from verbal nouns
derived with nine different suffixes.
1. Some 25 of these are datives of steins in -as2. They are the
following: dyas-e (1. 5 7 3 ) 'to go', arhds-e 'to be worthy of', fcds-e 'to praise',
}-n;ds-e 'to strive after', ksddas-e3 'to partake o f , cdksas-e 'to see', cards-e 'to fare',
jaods-e4 (IIL. 50') 'to speed', jlvds-c 'to live', tujds-e 'to hurl', dohds-e 'to milk',
dhäyas-e 'to cherish', dhruvds-e 'to sit firmly', pusyds-e 'to thrive', bhdras-e3 'to
bear', bhiyds-e 'to fear', bhojds-e 'to enjoy', rcljds-e 'to shine', vfnjas-e 'to tum
aside', vfdhds-e 'to further', sobhds-e 'to shine', sriyds-e 'to be resplendent1,
sdhyas-es 'to conquer', spdras-e 'to help to', spurdhas-e 'to strive after', hards-e
'to seize'.
a . Three roots form an infinitive stem with -a only instead of -as: ji-f-e 'to con-
quer', upa-prai-s-ib (v. 47°) 'to unite', stu-s-l 'to praise'
2. Some half dozen are formed from s t e m s in -/: is-ay-e8 (vi. 5 2'5) 'to
refresh', tuj-ay-e (v. 46?) 'to breed', dfs-ay-c 'to see', mah-dy-e 'to rejoice',
yudh-dy-e 'to fight', sart-dy-e 'to win'; cit-dy-e9 (VS.) 'to understand'.
3. Four or five are formed from stems in -ti: is-tdy-e 'to refresh',
pl-tdy-e 'to drink', vi-tdy-e 'to enjoy', sa-tdy-e 'to win'; perhaps also U-tdy-e
(nfn) 'to help (his men)'.
4. Over 30 dative infinitives are formed from stems in -tu (added to
the guijated root, in some instances with connecting vowel), from which acc.
and abl. gen. infinitives are also formed:
a. at-tav-c 'to eat', ds-tav-e 'to attain', ds-tav-e (VS.; TS. iv. 5. i a ) 'to
shoot', e-tav-e 'to go', o-tav-e 'to weave' {\rvä-), kdr-tav-e 'to make', gdn-tav-e
and gd-tav-e 'to go', dä-tav-e 'to give', prdti-dhä-tav-e 'to place upon', dhä-tav-e
'to suck', pak-tave (AV.) 'to cook', pdi-tav-e 'to fall', pä-tav-e 'to drink', bhdr-
tav-e 'to bear away', mdn-tav-e 'to think', ydn-tav-e 'to present', yds-tav-e 'to
sacrifice', yä-tav-e 'to go', yo-tav-e 'to ward off', vdk-tav-e 'to speak', pra-van-
tav-e 'to win' (\/~van-), vdr-tav-e 'to restrain', vds-tav-e 'to shine', vä-tav-e (AV.)
'to weave', vet-tav-e (AV.) 'to find', vo-lhav-e 'to convey', pdri-sak-tav-e 'to over-
come', sdr-tav-e 'to flow', sä-tav-e 'to bring forth', sd-tav-e (AV.) 'to bind', sa-
tav-e 'to press', sto-tav-e 'to praise', hdn-tave 'to slay'.
p. dv-i-tav-e 'to refresh', car-i-tav-e 'to fare', jlv-a-tav-e (TS. iv. 2. 6 S ; VS.
X V I H . 6 7 ) 'to live', sdvi-tav-e 'to bring forth', stdr-l-tav-e (AV.) 'to lay low',
srav-i-tav-e 'to flow', Mv-i-tav-e 'to call'.
5. Over a dozen infinitives are formed from stems in -iavä (added
like -tu to the gunated root), which are doubly accented.
a. ¿-tavai 'to go' (also d/y-, dnv-, etavdi), o-tavdi 'to weave', gdn-tavdi 'to
go' (also upa-gantavai), dä-tavdi 'to give', pdri-dhä-tavdi (AV.) 'to envelope',
pd-tavdi 'to drink', dpa-bhar-tavdi 'to be taken away', mdn-tavdi 'to think',
mä-tavdi 'to low', sdr-tavdi 'to flow', sii-tavdi (AV.) 'to bring forth'), hdn-
tavdi 'to slay' l u .
1 s. v. iisnatha. 1 -prdkse. Cp. OLDENBERG. Rgveda, note on
> A s > rule the suffix, but in half a dozen V. 47 B .
instances t h e root, is accented. 7 See DELBRÜCK p. 181 (I, 5); cp. above,
3 According to GRASSMANN, 2. sing, middle. 1 p. 378, n o t e ».
8
4 According to GRASSMANN, dat. of t h e Cp. however, DELBRÜCK 207.
substantive javas meaning 'swiftness'. 9 Perhaps m o r e probably a substantive,
5 According to GRASSMANN, dat. of t h e according to B R . : 'for understanding',
comparative sahyas. 10
T h e MS. has kartavai, cp. W H I T N E Y
* DELBRÜCK, V e r b u m , and AVERY a c c e n t 982 d a n d W O L F F 7 ( p . 9).
4IO L ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4. VEDIC GRAMMAR.

jiv-i-tavai (AV.) 'to live' (Pp. -ta vat), yam-i-tavai 'to guide', srav-i-tavai
'to flow".
6. There seems to be only one certain example of a dative infinitive
formed from a stem in -tya: i-tyai 'to g o ' 1 .
7. Some 35 dative infinitives almost limited to the R V . 2 are formed
from stems in -dhya added to verbal bases ending in a (generally accented),
and seem to have the termination -dhyai-. iya-dhyai 'to go' (\ri-), ira-dhyaii
'to seek to win', isa-dhyai and isaya-dhyai 'to refresh', Traya-dhyai 'to set in
motion', ksdra-dhyai 'to pour out', gdma-dhyai 'to go', grna-dhyai f AA. v. 2 . 1 1 0 )
'to praise', cara-dhyai 'to fare', jara-dhyai 'to sing', tamsaya-dhyai 'to attract',
tara-dhyai to overcome', duha-dhyai 'to milk', dhiyd-dhyai 'to deposit' (Ydhs-),
nSsaya-dhyai 'to cause to disappear', p'tba-dhyai 'to drink', prna-dhyai 'to fill',
bhara-dhyai 'to bear', mandd-dhyai 'to delight in', mandaya-dhyai 'to rejoice',
tnSdayd-dhyai 'to delight in', yaja-dhyai4 'to worship', risayd-dhyai 'to injure
oneself', vandd-dhyai 'to praise', vartaya-dhyai 'to cause to turn', vaha-dhyai 'to
guide', vajaya-dhyai 'to hasten', vavrdha-dhyai (from the perfect) 'to strengthen',
vrjd-dhyai 'to turn to', saya-dhyai 'to lie', suca-dhxai 'to shine', sacd-dhyai 'to
partake', saha-dhyai 'to overcome', stavd-dhyai 'to praise', syandaya-dhyai 'to
flow', huva-dhyai 'to call'. The TS. has also one of these infinitives ending
in -e\ gamd-dhye (1. 3. 6 2 ).
8. Five dative infinitives are formed from stems in -man', tra-man-i
'to protect', dd-man-e 'to give', dhar-man-e (x. 88') 'to support', bhdr-man-e
'to preserve', vid-man-es 'to know'.
9. Three dative infinitives are formed from stems in -wan', tur-vdn-e
'to overcome' (J^//-), da-vdn-e 'to give', dhar-van-e 'to injure' (\rdhvr-~).

2. Accusative Infinitive.
586. This infinitive is an accusative in sense as well as in form, being
used only as the object of a verb. It is primarily employed as a supine
with verbs of motion6 to express purpose. It is formed in two w a y s .
a. More than a dozen radical stems in the R V . and several others in
the AV. form an accusative infinitive with the ending -am7.
The root nearly always ends in a consonant and appears in its weak
form. It is not always easy to distinguish these infinitives from substantives,
but the following include all the more certain forms: sam-idham 'to kindle',
vi-cft-am 'to unfasten', pra-tlr-am (] ftf-) 'to prolong', prati-dhtim 'to place upon'
(AV.), (vi-, sam-ypfcch-am 'to ask', pra-miy-am 'to neglect' (\rmt-), yam-am8
'to guide', yudh-am (AV.) 'to fight', ¡X-rabh-am 'to reach', a-ruh-am 'to mount',
a-vis-am 'to enter', subh-am 'to shine', a-sad-am 'to sit down'9.
b. Five accusative infinitives from stems in -iu (of which the dative

1 4
In x. 106 bhujyái, occurring beside 7 The only roots in vowels taking it are
puf/yái, is doubtless a substantive; other dha-, mi-. If-.
8
cases of the word are also met with: see Occurs three times in the R V . , always
GRASSMANN, S. V. bhufi. The MS.I. 6 3 has alsodependent on sakima.
sadhyai (from sah-\-ti)\ róhisyai, which occurs 9 Perhaps also sam-ih-am (strong radical
in the T S . 1 . 3 . 1 0 » is doubtless a substantive; vowel) and upa-spij-am. Cp. the list in
see DELBRÜCK 20 t and WHITNEY 977. WOLFF, p. 87—90. There are several quite
2
This infinitive form occurs once only doubtful examples from the AV., as nih-
in the A V . in a Rigvedic passage. khid-am (conjecture), pra-tahk-am, sam-rudh-
3 An intensive formation from \rädh- (64, i). am. See WHITNEY'S notes in his Translation
J
4 yajidhyai TS. IV. 6. 3 ; VS. xvu. 57. on A V . IV. 1 6 2 ; v. l 8 7 ; VII. 50 5 .
5 WHITNEY 974 also quotes dár-manc.
6
Cp. WOLFF 32, 40.
 VIL VERB. INFINITIVE. 411

form is much commoner) 1 occur in the R V . and about the same number of
others in the A V . : át-tum (AV.) 'to eat', ó-tum 'to weave', kár-tum (AV.) 'to
make', ni-kartum (Kh. rv. 5 15 ) 'to overcome', khdn-i-tum (VS. xi. 10) 'to dig',
da-tum 'to give', drds-tum (AV.) 'to see', prds-tum 'to ask', prd-bhar-tum 'to
present', yác-i-tum (AV.) 'to ask for', dnu prd-volhum 'to advance, spdrdh-i-tum
(AV.) 'to contend with' 2 .

3. Ablative-Genitive Infinitive.
587. This infinitive is f o r m e d in two w a y s , like the accusative in-
finitive, either from a radical stem or from a verbal noun in -tu (from which
a dative and an acc. infinitive are also formed) 3 . The former, therefore, ends in
-as, the latter in -toa. As these endings are both ablative and genitive in
form, the cases can only be distinguished syntactically. The ablative use is
by this criterion shown to preponderate considerably.
a. The -as form has the ablative sense almost exclusively, as is
indicated by its being employed with words governing the ablative, viz. the
adnominal prepositions rt¿ 'without', purs 'before', and the verbs pa- 'protect'
tra- 'rescue', bht- 'fear'. It occurs with the same kind of attraction as appears
with the dative infinitive: thus tridhvam kartád ava-pád-as (11. ag6)* 'save us
from the pit, from falling down (into it)'. There are six such ablatives in the
R V . : a-tfd-as 'being pierced', ava-pád-as 'falling down', sam-prc-as 'coming in
contact', abhi-iris-as 'binding', abhi-svds-as 'blowing', ati-skdd-as 'leaping across'.
a . There seems also to be at least one example (11.2 8 6 ) of the genitive
use, viz. ni-mis-as . . ¿se 'I am able to wink', the construction of l^r/- being
the same as with the genitive infinitive in -tos (b a). Another instance is
perhaps a-pfc-as 'to fill' (vm. 40«).
b . Of the infinitives in -tos occurring in the RV. some six are shown
by the construction to be a b l a t i v e s . They are: ¿-tos 'going', gdn-tos 'going',
jáni-tos 'being born', ni-dha-tos 'putting down', sdr-j-tos 'being shattered', so-tos
'pressing*, hán-tos 'being struck'; perhaps also vás-tos (1. 174 3 ) 5 .
a. Three infinitives in -tos have the genitive sense, viz. kdr-tos
'doing' (with madhyá)6, di-tos 'giving*, and yó-tos 'warding off' (both with Is-
'have power'). In two passages in which ise governs the infinitive attraction
of the object appears as with the dative infinitive: is'e rSyáh suvíryasya datos
(vii. 4 6 ) 'he has power over wealth (and) brave sons, over giving (them)', i. e.
'he has power to give wealth and brave sons'; also yásya . . ¿se .. yótos
(vi. 1 8 " ) 'whom he can ward off' 7 .

4. Locative Infinitive.
588. This form of the infinitive is rare, since thirteen or fourteen examples
at the most occur. Several of these are, however, indistinguishable in meaning
from ordinary locatives of verbal nouns".
a. Five or six of these locatives are formed from r a d i c a l s t e m s : vy-us-i
'at the dawning', sam-cáks-i 'on beholding', dfs-i and sam-djs-i 'on seeing',
budh-i 'at the waking'. As these nearly always govern a genitive, they are
preferably to be explained as simple locatives of verbal nouns.

1 See above 585,4. | it g o v e r n s the a b l a t i v e r a t h e r t h a n t h e

» S e e t h e list in W O L F F p . 6 8 — 7 1 . genitive.
3 A b o v e 5 8 5 , 4 a n d 586. 7 S e e DELBRÜCK, A l t i n d i s c h e S y n t a x p. 4 1 8 ,

4 C p . also VIII. 1 " : pura jatrubhya ä-ifdas and c p . WOLKF 58.

before the cartilages being pierced'. 8 C p . DELBRÜCK 2 1 » (p. 227) a n d WHITNEV
5 See WOLFF I I . 985.
6 O n t h i s w o r d s e e W O L F F 14, w h o t h i n k s 1
4I3 I. ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4. VEDIC GRAMMAR.

b. One locative infinitive is formed from a stem in -tar: dhar-tdr-i 'to

support' and vi-dhar-tar-i 'to bestow'.
c. Eight locatives with a genuine infinitive meaning are formed from
stems in san in the RV. They are: gr-nx-sdn-i1 'to sing', tar-X-sdn-i 'to
cross', ne-san-i 'to l e a d ' , par-sdn-i 'to pass', abhi-bhü-sdn-i 'to aid', sü-sdn-i
'to swell', sak-sdn-i 'to abide' (\sac-)2, upa-str-nX-sdn-i1 'to spread'.
a . The form isdn-i (11. 2 9 ), seems to be derived from is- 'emit' for
is-san-i3.

d. Gerund.
589. A considerable number (upwards of 120) of forms ending in -tvi, -tvA,
-tväya, -tya, -yd occur in the R V . and A V . in the sense of gerunds expressing
an action which accompanies or more often precedes that of the finite verb.
They are doubtless old c a s e s 4 (the first most probably a locative, the rest
instrumentals) of verbal nouns formed with -tu, -ti, -/, all of which are also
employed in the formation of infinitives5. The first three are formed from
the simple root, the last two from the compounded root
590. A . a. Of the gerunds formed from the s i m p l e root, those in -tvi
are the commonest in the RV., there being fifteen altogether in the R V .
They hardly ever occur in any of the other Samhitäs. They appear to be old
locatives 6 of stems in -tu, which as a rule is added directly to the root, but
in two instances with connecting -/-. They are kr-tvi 'having made', khä-tvi
(TS. iv. i. 1 4 ) 'having dug', ga-tvi 'having gone', gü-dhvi 'having concealed',
jani-tvi 'having produced', jus-tvx 'liking1, px-tvi 'having drunk', pB-tvi 'having
cleansed', bha-tvi 'having become', vr-tvi 'enclosing', vfk-tvi 'having over-
thrown' (Yv)y'-), vis-tvi ' w o r k i n g ' ([ivis-), vfs-tvi 'showering', skabhi-tvi 'having
propped', ha-tvt 'having smitten', hi-tvi 'having abandoned tyhä-).
b. The gerund in -ivi, an old instrumental of a verbal noun in -tu, is
formed by nine roots in the R V . and about thirty more in the A V . Those
found in the R V . are: pX-ti>A 'having drunk', bhit-tvA 'having shattered', bhü-
tvA 'having become', mi-tvä 'having formed' (\ftnä-), yuk-tvA 'having yoked',
vr-tvä 'having covered', sru-tvä 'having heard', ha-tvA 'having slain', hi-tva
'having abandoned' (\ f ha-). The forms occurring in the A V . include two
formed from secondary verbal stems and three others formed with the
connecting vowel -«-. They are: is-tvä 'having sacrificed' (Vyaj-), kalpay-i-tvn
"having shaped', kr-tua 'having made', kri-tvä 'trading*, ga-tvä 'having gone ,
grh-l-tvd 'having seized', jag-dhvä 'having devoured' {\rjaks-), ci-tvä 'having
gathered', cäy-i-tvä 'noting', tXr-tvä 'having crossed' (Vtf-), tf-dhvA 'having
shattered' 7 (\ trA-), dat-tvä 'having given', dfs-tvh 'having seen', pak-tvd 'having
cooked', pa-tvä 'having purified', bad-dhvä 'having bound', bhak-tvii 'sharing',
mfs-tvä 'having wiped off', ra-dhvd 'having ascended', lab-dhvä 'taking', vit-tvA
'having found', vrs-tvti 'cutting off' (y/"vras'c-)8, sup-tva 'having slept', stab-
dhvä 'having established', stu-tvä 'having praised', snä-tvä 'having bathed',
sramsay-i-tvd 'letting fall', hims-i-tvA 'having injured'. One gerund in -tvä also
occurs though compounded with a prefix: praty-arpay-i-tvA (AV.) 'having sent

1 Formed from the present base. 6 BARTHOLOMAE, loc. cit.

» From \sac-, BR., DELBRÜCK, Verbum 7 !rs-tvä in A V . xix. 346 is probably to be

213; from yWi-, WHITNEY 978. read iris (vi 'thrice thee'; see WHITNEY'S
3 See BÖHTLINGK, pw. s. v. tsdrii, and cp. Translation.
WHITNEY 9 7 8 , OLDENBERG, n o t e on 11. 29. 8 See n o t e o n A V . v m . 3* in WHITNEY'S
4 Cp. V.NEGELEIN, Zur Sprachgeschichte 91. Translation (RV. has vfk-lva).
5 Cp. BARTHOLOMAE. B B . 15,227, 239;
BRUGMANN, Grundriss 2, 1090.
 V I I . VERB. GERUNDS. 413

in opposition'. From the Khilas: janay-i-tvd (1.4 8 ); from the V S . i-tvd (XXXII.
12), vid-ttvd (xxxi. 18) 'having known', spr-tvd (xxxi. 1) 'pervading'.
c. The rarest gerund in the R V . is that in -tviya, being formed from
only seven roots. It appears to be a late formation, occurring only in the
tenth Mancjala» excepting one example in the eighth (vm. 1008) in a hymn
which is marked by ARNOLD2 as belonging to the latest period of the R V .
Two of these gerunds (gatvdya and hatvdyd) recur in the AV., which, how-
ever, has no additional examples of this type. These forms have the appearance
of being datives of stems in -tva, but the use of the dative in this sense is
in itself unlikely, as that case is otherwise employed to express the final
meaning of the infinitive. Hence BARTHOLOMAEJ explains the forms as a
metrical substitute for a fem. inst. in -tvdya (from the stem -tva), or for a loc.
of -tva with enclitic S added. There seems to be another possible explanation.
Three of the seven forms occurring appear instead of the corresponding
forms in -tva of the older Maijdalas. Owing to this close connexion and
the lateness as well as the rarity of these forms, we may here have a tenta-
tive double formation, under the influence of compound gerunds formed with
-ya which end in -aya, such as a-ddya 'taking'.
The forms occurring are kr-tvdya (VS. xi. 59; TS. iv. 1.5*) 'having made',
ga-tvdya 'having gone', jag-dkvdya 'having devoured', ta-tvdya (VS.xi. 1) 'having
stretched', dat-tvdya 'having given', dfs-tvdya 'having seen', bhak-tvdya 'having
attained', yuk-tvdya 'having yoked', vr-tvdya (TS. iv. 1. 21; VS. xi. 19) 'having
covered', ha-tvdya 'having slain', hi-tvdya 'having abandoned'.
591. B . W h e n t h e v e r b is c o m p o u n d e d , the suffix is regularly either
-ya or -tyi. In at least two-thirds of these forms the vowel is long in
the RV.«
a. Nearly 40 roots in the RV. and about 30 more in the AV., when
compounded with verbal prefixes, take the suffix -ya5. Four roots take it
also when compounded with nouns or adverbs. The forms occurring in the
R V . are in the alphabetical order of the radical initial: a-dc-ya 'bending',
pra-arp-ya 'setting in motion', prati-is-ya 'having sought for', abhi-up-ya 'having
enveloped' (\fvap-), vi-kft-ya 'having cut in pieces', abhi-krdm-ya 'approaching*,
abhi-khyd-ya 'having descried', abhi-gOr-ya 'graciously accepting', sam-gfbh-ya
'gathering', prati-gfh-ya 'accepting', anu-ghus-ya 'proclaiming aloud', abhi-caks-ya
'regarding', prati-caks-ya 'observing' and vi-caks-ya 'seeing clearly', ni-cdy-ya
'fearing*, pari-tdp-ya 'stirring up' (heat), vi-tdr-ya 'driving forth', a-dd-ya 'taking'
and pari-dd-ya 'handing over*, ati-div-ya 'playing higher', anu-dfs-ya 'looking
along', abhi-pad-ya 'acquiring', pra-pruth-ya 'puffing out', vi-bhid-ya 'shattering',
abhi-bho-ya 'overcoming*, vi-md-ya 'disposing' and sam-md-ya 'measuring out',
sam-milya 'closing the eyes', vi-muc-ya 'unyoking', a-mus-ya 'appropriating',
anu-mrs-ya 'grasping', a-yo-ya6 'taking to oneself', a-rabh-ya 'grasping' and
sam-rabh-ya 'surrounding oneself with', ni-rudh-ya 'having restrained', abhi-
vft-ya 'having overcome' and a-vft-ya 'causing to roll towards', abhi-vlag-ya
'pursuing', tii-sad-ya 'having sat down', vi-sah-ya 'having conquered', ava-sd-ya
'having unyoked', sam-hd-ya 'preparing oneself' (ha- 'go'). Compounds formed
with adverbs are: punar-dd-ya 'giving back', mitha-spj-dh-ya 'vying together';
and with nouns, karna-gfh-ya 'seizing by the ear', pada-grh-ya 'grasping by
the foot', hasta-gfh-ya 'grasping by the hand'.

' T h e MS. has also the form sam-lray-i- 5 On the gerund in -ya cp. NEISSEK, BB.
tva-. WHITNEY 990 a. 30, 308—311.
1 Vedic Metre p. 283. 0 -yu-ya is also compounded with m- and

3 B B . 15, p . 239, 12. VI:

4 C p . W H I T N E Y 993 a.
414
T h e additional roots thus compounded i n the A V . are: ud-üh-ya
'having carried up', ä-kräm-ya 'stepping into' and pari-krdm-ya 'striding about',
sam-gir-ya 'swallowing up', sam-gfh-ya1 'having grasped'', vi-cchid-ya 'having
cut asunder", upa-ddd-ya 'putting in' (dä- 'give') J, abhi-dhA-ya 'encircling',
vi-dhn-ya 'shaking off', para-ni-ya 'leading away', ä-pdd-ya 'arriving at' and pra-
pdd-ya 'going forward', sam-pä-ya 'drinking up', vi-bhäj-ya 'having apportioned',
(caus. of Ybhaj-), sam bhä-ya 'combining', ni-mdjj-ya 'having immerged' (\imajj-),
apa-mi-ya 'having measured off' 4 , apa-mrj-ya 'having wiped off', sam-rdbh-ya
'taking hold together', ä-rüh-ya 'ascending*, sam-lup-ya 'having torn up's,
upa-vis-ya 'sitting down', pari-vis-ya 'attending upon', sam-sä-ya 'sharpening',
ä-sdd-ya 'sitting upon' a n d rti-sdd-ya 'sitting down', sam-sic-ya 'having poured
together', apa-sidh-ya 'driving away', sam-siv-ya 'having sewed', nih-sfp-ya
'having crept out', ati-sthi-ya 'excelling', prati-sthi-ya 'standing firm', ut-thä-ya
'arising'. From the V S . : ni-sir-ya (xvi. 13) "having broken ofF, sam-sfj-ya
(XI. 53) 'having mingled', ati-ha-ya ( x x v . 43) 'having missed'.
b . Roots which' end in a short vowel, either originally or after losing a
nasal, add -ty<i (nearly always in R V . ) o r -fya instead of -ya, when com-
pounded. T h e following gerunds are thus formed in the R V . : -i-tyä 'having
gone' with apt-, abhi- and ä-, -i-tya with abhi- and prati--, a-gdtyä 'having
come' {\gam-), a-df-tyä 'regarding', ä-bhf-tyä 'bringing', vi-hd-tyä 'having
driven away' (y Aan-); and with adverbial prefixes aram-kf-tyä 'having made
ready', akhkhali-kf-tya 'shouting'. From the K h i l a s : aty-A-kr-tya (iv. 5*').
T h e A V . has the following gerunds from nine additional roots nir-f-tya
'separating'(?) 6 , abhi-ji-tya 'having conquered', and sam-ji-tya 'having wholly
conquered', fi-td-tya7 'having expanded', apa-mi-tya 'having borrowed' (j/mä-).
ud-yd-tya 'lifting up', pra-&-vr-tya 'having enveloped', upa-iru-tya 'having over-
heard', ud-dhf-tya 'having taken up' (\hf-)\ also in composition with a sub-
stantive: namas-kf-tya• T h e V S . has upa-stu-tya (xxi. 46) 'having invoked'
and pra-stü-tya (xxi. 46) 'having lauded'.

VIII. INDECLINABLES.
1. Prepositions.
GAEDICKE, Der Akkusativ im Veda (Breslau 1880), p. 193—310. — WHITNEY,
Sanskrit Grammar 1077—1089, 1123—1130. — DELBRÜCK, Altindische Syntax p. 440—471. —
Cp. BENFEY, Vollständige Grammatik 241 and 784. — BRUGMANN, KG. p. 457—480. —
J. S. SPEIJER, Vedische und Sanskrit-Syntax, Grundriss 1. 6, 87.
592. T w o classes of prepositions are to b e distinguished. T h e first
class embraces the genuine or adverbial prepositions. T h e s e are words with
a local sense which, being primarily used to modify the meaning of verbs,
came to b e connected independently with the cases governed b y the verbs
thus modified. T h e y show no signs of derivation from inflexional forms or
(except tirds and purds) forms made with adverbial suffixes. T h e s e c o n d
class embraces what may be called adnominal prepositions. T h e s e are words
which are not compounded with verbs, but govern cases only. A s regards
form, they almost invariably end in case terminations or adverbial suffixes.
1 -gfhya also appears compounded with 5 v. NEGELEIN 92 gives -vidh-ya tyvyadh-)
nivi- and prali-. and -sus-ya as occurring in the AV., but
' The gerund a-ghra-ya (AV. xix. 8 s ), they are not to be found in WHITNEY'S
the reading of the text, is not found in the Index verborum.
Mss. and is doubtless wrong; cp. WHITNEY'S 6 See note on AV. x. 2' in WHITNEY'S
Index Verborum. Translation.
3 From the present base of \dä-, cp. ! 7 Conjectural reading in AV. XX. 136^;
WHITNEY 992 a. see WHITNEY'S Index Verborum
4 apa-ma-ya is a conjectural reading. }
 V I I I . INDECLINABLES. ADVERBIAL PREPOSITIONS. 415

A. Adverbial Prepositions.
593. Of the twenty-two included in this class 1 , eight are never used
adnominally, viz. apa2 'away'; ud 'up', 'out'; ni 'down', 'into'; tut 'out*; pari
'away'; pra 'forth'; vi 'asunder' (often «= 'dis-', 'away'); sam3 'together'4.
Three others, for the most part employed adnominally, are restricted in their
adverbial use to combination with particular verbs, viz. accha 'towards', tiras
'across', puras 'before'. The remaining eleven, being employed both adverbially
and adnominally, are: ati 'beyond'; adhi 'upon'; anu 'after'; antar 'within';
dpi 'on'; abhi 'against'; ava 'down'; A 'near'; upa 'up to'; pari 'around';
prati 'towards'.
a. When combined with verbs 5 these prepositions are not compounded
in the principal sentence6. Generally speaking, they immediately precede
the verb; but they are also often separated from it, e. g. d tva visantu (1. 5 7 )
'may they enter thee'. Occasionally the preposition follows the verb, e. g.
indro gd avfnod apa (vm. 63$) 'Indra disclosed the cows'. Two prepositions
are not infrequently combined with the verb 7 ; no certain instances of three
being thus used can be quoted from the RV., though a few such instances
occur in the A V . 8 On the other hand, a preposition sometimes appears quite
alone 9 ; the verb 'to be', or some other verb commonly connected with it,
can then be supplied without difficulty; e. g. A ta na indra (1. 1 0 " ) 'hither,
pray, (come) to us, Indra'. Or the preposition appears without the verb in
one part of the sentence, but with it in another; e. g. pari mdm, pari me
prajdm, pari nah pshi ydd dhanam (AV. 11. 7 4 ) 'protect me, protect my pro-
jeny, protect what wealth (is) ours'. As the verb normally stands at the end
of the sentence, the preposition would naturally come after the object Hence
as a rule it follows the noun governed by the verb (though it is also often
found preceding the noun). Primarily used to define the local direction ex-
pressed by the verb which governs a case, prepositions gradually became
connected with particular cases. In the RV. it is still often uncertain whether
the adverbial or the adnominal sense is intended. Thus disvdmsam upa
gacchatam (1. 47 J ) may mean either 'do ye two go-to the pious man' or 'do
ye two go to-the pious man'. When used adnominally the preposition only

1 O n the relative frequency of these pre- that practically all verbs except denomina-
positions in the R V . and A V . see WHITNEY, tives were capable of combining with pre-
Sanskrit Grammar 1077 a. positions. On the other hand, some verbs
2 On the relation of apa, ¿pi, upa, ni, occur only in combination with prepositions
pari to corresponding Greek prepositions (DELBRÜCK, loe. c i t ) .
s e e J . S C H M I D T , K Z . 2 6 , 2 1 FF. 6 áceha, tiras, puras seem never to be
3 sam seems in a few passages to have compounded with the verb even in depen-
attained an independent prepositional use dent clauses; see DELBRÜCK p. 469 (mid.).
with the instrumental: sam Ufadihih (L 7 W h e n there are two, pdrä always im-
sam patmbhih. (II. 16®), sam fkvabhih ( v m . mediately precedes the v e r b ; a and áva
9 7 " ) , säm JyiUifä jyitih ( V S . II. 9), sam äyujä 1 nearly always; úd, ni, prá usually. On the
(TS. I. 1. I0')T but in all these examples the i other hand, aihi is all but invariably the
case perhaps depends on the compound ' first of the t w o ; adhi and ánu are nearly
sense of the verb. B R . do not recognize always so, úpa and prati usually; cp. DEL-
the prepositional use, cp. DELBRÜCK p. 459; , BRÜCK 2 3 4 .
on the other hand, see GRASSMANN S. V. # Cp. DELBRÜCK 235. T h r e e prepositions
sam and WHITNEY 1127. sam is used with ¡ combined with a verb are common in B.;
the inst. in K h . 1. 47. the last is then almost invariably a or ova.
4 T h e a d v e r b s avis a n d prädür 'in v i e w ' 9 O n the elliptical imperative use of pre-
are used with \as-, \bhü- and \'tr- only. positions cp. PLSCHEL, VS. I. 13, 19Í.; BRUG-
5 T h o u g h a certain number of verbs are MANN, I F . 18, 128; DELBRÜCK, Vergleichende
never actually met with in the R V . and Syntax 3, 122 f.
A V . in combination with prepositions (cp.
DELBRÜCK p. 433), there can be litte doubt
4i6

defines the local meaning of the case. It cannot be said to 'govern' the
case, except perhaps when ä 'up to' or puras 'before' are connected with
the ablative.
594. The fourteen genuine prepositions which are used adnominally
are almost entirely restricted to employment with the accusative, loca-
tive, and ablative. Six are used with the accusative only, viz. accha, dti,
anu, abhi, prdti and tirds; one {apt) with the locative only; one (dva) with
the ablative only (and that very rarely).
The remaining six take the accusative and one or both of the other
two cases: pari takes the ablative also; t'tpa the locative also; adhi, antdr,
ä, puräs take both the locative and the ablative also. The first two 1 of
these six belong primarily to the sphere of the accusative, the last four to
that of the locative. Thus it appears that the genuine prepositions were at
the outset practically associated with these two cases only. The ablative
came to be used secondarily with pari in the sense of 'from (around)'; and
similarly with locative prepositions, adhi = 'from (upon)', antdr = 'from
(within)', ä = 'from (on)'. In all these, the sense of the ablative case com-
bined with the original meaning of the preposition to form a new double
notion. But in purds 'before' and in a, when it means 'up to', which are
both used before the case, the ablative sense has completely disappeared.
The following is a detailed account of the genuine prepositions in their
alphabetical order.
accha 'towards'.
595. In combination with verbs of motion and of speaking', accha*
expresses direction in the sense of '(all the way) to' 4 . Used adnominally
with the same meaning, it takes the accusative, which either precedes or
follows. It is rare except in the RV. 5 Examples of its use are: prdyätana
sdkhlmr accha (i. lös' 3 ) 'proceed hither to your friends'; üpa prägst.. dcchi
pitdram mätdram ca (1. 163 13 ) 'he has come forward hither to his father and
mother'; kam dcchä yunjathe rdtham (v. 74^) 'to (go to) whom do ye two
yoke your car?'; accha ca tvä^enä ndmasä vadämasi (vm. 2i 6 ) 'and to thee
we speak with this devotion'; prtydm agäd dhisina barhir dccha (TS. 1.1.2' =
MS. 1. 12 = K. 1. 2) 'this bowl has come forward hither to the litter'.

dti 'beyond'.
596. Adverbially dti is frequently used in the sense of 'beyond', 'over',
'through', with verbs of motion. Whether it is used adnominally with these
and cognate verbs is somewhat uncertain. There are, however, a few
distinct instances of such use 6 of dti in other connexions with the accu-
sative; e. g. satam dasäm dti srdjah. (vm. 56^) 'a hundred slaves (beyond—»)
in addition to garlands'; purvir dti ksdpah (x. 77 1 ) 'through many nights';
kdd asya^dti vratdm cakrmä (x. 12 s ) 'what have we done (beyond = ) contrary

1
In regard to itpa the sense of 'motion locative in the v. r. sadancpt accha for
to' seems to be the primary one; for it is sadanatti accha (RV. IX. 91').
used twice as often with the acc., and its , 5 It is used with over twenty roots in
position before the loc. is less primitive. ; the RV. and with only two in the AV.
* It is once (vm. 3313) also used with j (WHITNEY 1078). In the TS. it occnrs with «'-
Jru- 'hear* in the sense of 'listen to'. 'go'(IV. 1.8'; 11.2.12J) and with vad- 'speak*
3 The final a is short only at the end of I (IV. 5. 1» = VS. xvi. 4).
a Pada and in L 31 »7 and IX. 106'; other-' 6 The adnominal use survives through
wise always accha. the Brahman as into the Mahgbhirata.
4 In the SV. it is once used with the :
 4>7

to his ordinance?'; yd devo mart yam dti ( A V . x x . 1 2 7 7 ) 'the god who (is)
beyond mortals'.
ddhi ' u p o n ' .
597. The general meaning of ddhi in its adverbial use is 'upon', e. g.
ddhi gam 'come upon', then 'find out', 'learn'.
In a d n o m i n a l u s e the proper sphere of ddhi is the l o c a t i v e , with
which it is almost always connected. Here, however, there is sometimes an
uncertainty whether the preposition belongs to the verb or the noun; e. g.
ndkasya prsthi ddhi tisihati (1. 125') 'he stands upon the ridge of the firma-
ment'. When referring to a person ddhi means 'beside', 'with' (from the
notion of wielding sway over); e. g. yan, nasatya, parav dti yad v3 stho ddhi
turvdie (1. 4 7 ' ) 'when, O Nasatyas, ye are at a distance or with Turvasa'.
a . From the locative the use of ddhi extended to the a b l a t i v e , with
which it is less frequently connected. It then primarily has the compound sense
'from u p o n ' ; e. g. ata/i ... a gahi divd va rocansd ddhi (1.6') 'thence come,
or from the bright realm of heaven'. Often, however, the simple ablative
meaning alone remains; e. g. hfdaylld ddhi (x. 163!) 'from the heart'; pi'irusad
ddhi (VS. X X X I I . 2 ) 'from Puru§a'. A somewhat extended sense is occasionally
found; e. g. yam . . . kativa idhd ftad ddhi (1. 3 6 " ) 'whom Kanva kindled
(proceeding from = ) in accordance with sacred order'; mi panir bhBr at mad
ddhi (1. 33 J ) 'be not niggardly with regard to us'.
b . From the locative the use of ddhi further spread to the a c c u s a t i v e ,
though in a very limited way, to express th& sphere on or over which an
action extends; e . g . pj-thu prdtlkam adhy ¿dhe agnlh ( V I I . 3 6 1 ) 'Agni has been
kindled over the broad surface'. Otherwise, when taking the accusative in
the sense of 'upon' with verbs of motion, ddhi nearly always belongs to
the verb.
a. In the R V . only, adhi is used seven times w i t h the (following) i n s t r u m e n t a l
singular or plural of snu- 'height', to express motion along and over «= a c r o s s ' ; e. g.
cakram . . . adhi fnuna bfhaia vartamanam (iv. 28») 'the w h e e l rolling across the mighty
height'. T h i s is probably to be explained as the instrumental of the space (by = )
through w h i c h motion takes place (e. g. vato anlariksetia yati 'the wind goes through
the air', I. 1 6 m ) , the preposition that regularly means 'upon' being added to define
the action as taking p l a c e 'over' as well as 'along'. T h e V S . has the regular locative of
snu- with adhi :prlhivya adhi snufu ( X V I L 14) 'on the heights of the earth'.

dnu 'after*.
598. In its adverbial use anu primarily means 'after', e. g. anu i- 'go
after', 'follow'; from this fundamental sense are developed various modifications
such as 'along', 'through'.
In its a d n o m i n a l u s e anu takes the a c c u s a t i v e o n l y . When the influence
of the verb is still felt, it means 'after', 'along', 'throughout'; e. g. para me
yanti dhUdyo g&vo nd gdvyutlr anu (1.2 5 l 4 ) 'my prayers go abroad like kine
(seeking) after pastures'; upa prd yanti dhltayah ftasya pathyh anu (111. 12')
'forth g o my prayers along the paths of sacred order'; ydt panca m&nusam
anu nftnnam ( V I I I . 9') 'the might which (exists) throughout the five peoples';
similarly prthivim anu (VS. xui. 6) 'throughout the earth', vanaspdtimr anu
(VS. xui. 7) 'in all trees', pradiso 'nu (VS. X X X I I . 4) 'throughout the regions'.
When used in closer connexion with nouns anu expresses:
a . s e q u e n c e in t i m e : 'after' or (with plurals) 'throughout'; e. g. parvam
dnu prdyatim (1. 126 5 ) 'after the first presentment'; anu dyttn 'throughout the
days' — 'day after day'.
b . c o n f o r m i t y : 'after' = 'in accordance with'; e. g. svam dnu vratdm
(1.128*) 'according to his own ordinance'; amftat> dnu (VS.iv. 28) 'after the
Iado-arUche Fhilolegit. L i . 27
4l8

manner of immortals'; dnu jòsam (TS. i. i. 13* = VS. n. 17) 'for (•= to suit)
thy enjoyment'. This is the commoner independent use.

antár "between'.
599. In its adverbial use, which is not frequent, antár means 'between',
'within', 'into'; e. g. antis car- 'move between or within'; antáhpás- 'look into';
antár gà- 'go between', 'separate'; atitarvidván "knowing (the difference)
between', 'distinguishing'.
The fundamental and by for the most frequent adnominal use of
antár is connected with the locative in the sense of'within', 'among'; e.g.
antáh samudré 'within the ocean'; apsú^antár 'within the waters'; antár devésu
'among the gods'; gárbhe antáh (VS.xxxu.4) 'within the womb'; matftamàsuv
antáh (TS. 1. 8. i a ' = VS. x. 7) 'in the best of mothers'.
a. From the locative its use extends in a few instances to the ablative
in the sense of 'from within'; e. g. antár ásmanah 'from within the rock';
esii yayau paramad antáh ádreh (ix. 87 s ) 'it has come from the highest stone'.
b. From the locative its use further extends, in several instances, to the
accusative, in the sense of 'between' (expressing both motion and rest),
generally in connexion with duals or two classes of objects; e. g. mahàn
sadhásthe dhruvá à nisatto 'ntár dyáva (m. 64) 'the great one who has
sat down in the firm seat between the two worlds'; indra it somapà ékah ..
antár devàn mdrtyami ca (vm.24) 'Indra is the one Soma-drinker (between = )
among gods and mortals'1.
dpi 'upon'.
600. In its adverbial use with verbs of motion dpi generally means 'into',
e. g. dpi gam- 'go into', 'enter'; but this sense assumes various modifications
which may be expressed by 'on', 'over', 'up'; e.g. àpi dha- 'put upon', 'close
up'; àpi nah- 'tie up'; ápi-ripta- 'smeared over' = 'blind'.
In its adnominal use, which is rare, àpi is connected with the loca-
tive only. It then has the sense of 'on'; e. g. aydm, agne, tvé dpi yam
yajñám cakftnà vayám (11.5®) 'this (is), O Agni, the sacrifice which we have
offered on thee".
abhi 'towards'.
601. In its adverbial use abhi means 'towards' with verbs of motion,
e. g. abhi dru- 'run towards'; it further commonly makes verbs of action
transitive, e.g. krand- 'roar' : abhi krand- 'roar at'; it also sometimes, especially
with bha- 'be', comes to have the sense of superiority: abhi bha- 'overcome'.
The adnominal use of abhi is fairly frequent, though in many individual
instances difficult to distinguish from its adverbial use. It is connected with
the accusative only, in the sense of 'to'; e. g. ud irsva narijibhi jlvalokdm
(x. 18 s ) 'Arise, O woman, to the world of the living'. The sense of 'over'
(implying dominion), abstracted from one of its secondary adverbial uses, is
occasionally found; e. g. visvà yás carsanir abhi ( l 86s) 'who (is) over
all men'.

1 In the later language Qtttar is not in* | 1 The adverb apt begins to be employed

frequently used with the genitive (as well
as the locative). An example of this occurs
as early as VS. XI. 5 («= I i l Upanijad5):
tad antar asya sdrvasya, tad u sarvasya ¿asya
bahyatah 'it is within this all and it is with-
out this all'.
secondarily in the RV. (though rarely) as a
conjunctional particle meaning 'also'; cp.
Bkugmann, KG. $88, 5.
|
 419
áva 'down*.
602. In its adverbial use, áva generally means 'down', e. g. áva gam-
'come down'; but is has also the extended sense of 'away', 'ofF, e. g. áva
s f j - 'discharge'.
In its adnominal use, which is very rare and doubtful, it is connected
with the ablative in the sense of 'down from'. In the following two
examples, especially the second, the case seems to be directly dependent on
the preposition: vj-stim áva divá invatam (vn. 64') 'send rain down from
heaven'; y é te pánthano áva diváh (AV. vn. 55') 'which (are) thy paths down
from the sky".
a 'near'.
603. The adverbial use of A with verbs expressing either physical or
mental motion is very common in the sense of 'near*, 'hither', 'towards',
*to', 'upon'; e. g. A a j - 'drive hither'; A krand- 'cry to'; A dhl- 'think upon',
'attend to'. Less commonly, when used with verbs expressing rest or occurrence,
it means 'in' or 'at'; e. g. A ksi- 'dwell in', A j a n - 'be born at' a place.
When used adnominally, A regularly follows the case, excepting only
one sense of the ablative. It is primarily and most commonly connected
with the locative, when it has the sense of'on', 'in', 'at', 'to'; e.g. upástha A
'on the lap'; dadhús tvS b h f g a v o mAnusesuji (1. 58s) 'the Bhfgus brought
thee to men'.
a. From the locative its use extended to the ablative, with which it is
used fairly often. It is generally used after this case, when it primarily has
the compound sense of 'from on' (cp. ádhi); e. g. parvatád A 'from (on) the
mountain'. It also means, secondarily, 'away from'; e. g. y á i cid d h l tvd
bah úbAy a A sutAvSih Hvivdsati (1. 84') 'who entices thee away from many
(others) with his Soma draught'. This secondary meaning is sometimes further
extended to express preference; e. g. yás te sákhibhya A váram (1. 44) 'who
is a boon to thee (in distinction) from friends', L e. 'who is better to thee
than friends'.
a. In about a dozen instances in the RV., A is used before the ablative
to express 'up to'*; e. g. y a t i giribhya A samudrát (vn. 95') 'going from the
mountains up to the sea'; A nimrúcah ( 1 . I 6 I ' ° ) 'till sunset'3. This reversal
of meaning is probably due to the reversal of the natural order of the words:
samudrAd A 'from the sea' thus becoming A samudrát 'to the sea'.
b. The use of A is further extended to the accusative, with which it
is least frequently connected, generally meaning 'to', 'upon', to express the
goal with verbs of motion; e. g. antdr lyase . . yusmáms ca devAn visa A ca
mártan (iv. 2 J) 'thou goest mediating to you, the gods, and to the people,
the mortals'; matárcl sidatim barhir a (1. 142') 'may the two mothers seat
themselves upon the litter'; ¿hy A nah (AV. n. 5«) 'come hither to us';
devAnam vaksi priyám A sadhástham (TS. v. 1. n * = VS. xxix. 1) 'bring (it)
to the dear abode of the gods'. In closer connexion with nouns, A is used
to express purpose in the phrases jósam A 'for enjoyment', and váram A
'for pleasure'.
i/pa 'up to*.
604. In its adverbial use upa is in sense akin to abhi and A, expressing
'near to'; e. g. úpa gam- 'go near to'. The fundamental meaning of close

I C p . D E L B R Ü C K p. 451. with the old sense of 'from' a i well as

' W i t h v e r y few exceptions this is the 'up to'.
only n i e of a to be found in B. ; in C . also 1 It is occasionally found after the abla-
a i t found only before the ablative, but tive in this sense; see G&ASSMANN S. V. A.
27»
420 1. ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4. VEDIC GRAMMAR.

contiguity is often coupled with the idea of subordination or inferiority; e. g.

upa sad- 'sit down close to', 'approach reverentially'; upa as- 'sit under',' adore1.
In its adnominal use upa is most frequently connected with the accu-
sative (which it more often precedes than follows) in the sense of'to'; e.g.
a yahi .. upa brahmani vaghatah (1. 35) 'come to the prayers of the wor-
shipper'.
a. It is also used (about half as frequently in the RV.) before the
locative in the sense of 'beside', 'upon', 'at': yd itpa sdrye (1. 23'?) 'who
(are) beside the sun'; upa dyavi '(upon = ) up to the sky' (from below);
upa jmann upa vetast ava tara (VS. xvn. 6 = MS. 11. i o l ) 'descend upon the
earth, upon the reed'.
a. Quite exceptionally (only three times) upa occurs in the R V . with the (following)
instrumental. In two passages it expresses sequence of time in the phrase upa dyubhis
(v. 53J; viu. 40«) 'day by day'. Once it expresses conformity: ydsmai vifnus trini pada
vicakrama upa mitrasya dhdrmabhih (Val. IV3) 'for whom Vijnu strode forth his three steps
in accordance with the ordinances of Mitra'. These abnormal senses of upa are parallel
to those of arm (598 a, b), and the construction to that of adhi (597 a).

tirds 'across'.
605. Adverbially tirds is used in the sense of 'aside', but only with the
two verbs dha- 'put' and bhu- 'be', in the Sarphitasthus tiro dha- 'put aside',
'conceal'; tiro bhu- 'disappear'; e. g. ajakavam tiro dadhe (VIL 50') 'I put
away the scorpion'; md tiro 'bhat (AV. vm. i?) 'may it not disappear'.
Adnominally tirds is used fairly often in the RV., and a few times in
the AV., in the sense of 'across', 'over', 'through', 'past', with (nearly always
before) the accusative 2 ; e. g. d yd tanvanti rasmibhis tirah samudrdm (1.igA)
'who spread with their rays across the ocean'; nayanti duritd tirah (r. 41 3 )
'they lead him through (so as to escape) dangers'; tiro visvam arcato yahy
arvdh (x. 89 l6 ) 'come hither past (leaving behind) all singers'.
a. Figuratively tirds occasionally means 'contrary to'; e. g. devdnam cit
tiro vdsam (x. 1 7 1 4 ) 'even against the will of the gods'; yo no .. tirds cittdni
jighamsati (VII. 59 s ) 'who desires to slay us contrary to expectations' ( = 'un-
awares'), yo no .. tirah satydni . . jighamsit (TS. iv. 3. 13 3 ) 'who may desire
to slay us contrary to oaths'.
pari 'around*.
606. In its adverbial use pari generally means 'around', e. g. pdri i-
'go around'; figuratively it also means 'completely', e. g. pdri vid- 'know fully'
(cp. nipt oiie).
Its adnominal use starts from the accusative, with which case it
is, however, not very commonly connected. Here, too, it is not always certain
that the preposition does not belong to the verb. It nearly always immedia-
tely precedes the accusative in the sense of 'around', 'about'; e. g. pari dydtn
any ad Tyate (1.30'®) 'the other (wheel) goes around the sky'. The following is
one of the two instances in which pdri comes after the accusative 3 : havSmahe
sraddhdm madhyamdinampari(x. 1 5 1 s ) 'we invoke Sraddha (about«=) at noon'4.
a. Its use then extends to the ablative, with which it is much more
frequently connected. Here it has primarily the compound sense of 'from
around'; e. g. divas pdri (1. 47 6 ) 'from the sky (which is) around'; tamasas
pdri (1. 50 10 ) 'from the surrounding darkness*. The original meaning (as in
1
In the SB. and later tirds is used with sense of 'away from' = 'without the know-
kr- 'do' also. ledge of*.
1
It i i found at least once in the AV. } Cp. GRASSMANN, s. v. pari, 784 (bottom).
(XII. 339) and occasionally in the ¿ B . in the 4 Like the German preposition W ,
 421

ádhi) then disappears, leaving only the ablative sense 'from'; e. g. tvdm
adbhyás tvám ásmanas pari .. j¡lyase (u. i ' ) 'thou art b o r n from the waters,
from the rock'.
purés 'before'.
607. Adverbially puras is combined with kf- 'do', and dhu- 'put' only,
in t h e s e n s e o f 'in front'; e. g . irtdrah krnotu prasavi rathám puráh (1.1029)
'may Indra place (our) car in f r o n t in t h e e n t e r p r i s e ' ; indram visve deviso
dadhire puráh (1. 1 3 1 ' ) 'the all-gods placed Indra in the forefront'.
Adnominally puras occurs about nine times in the RV., in the sense of
'before' and connected w i t h the a c c u s a t i v e , the ablative, and the locative;
e . g . ásadan matáram puráh (x. 189") 'he has sat d o w n b e f o r e his mother';
ná gardabhám puro dsvän tiayanti (m. 53Ij) 'they d o not place the ass b e f o r e
the horse' (asvät); yáh sfñjaye puro . . samidhyáte (iv. 15*) ' w h o is kindled
before Srñjaya'.
práti 'against*.
608. Used adverbially práti means 'towards', 'against', e. g. práti i- 'go
towards or against'; práti ma- 'counterfeit', 'imitate'. From this sense the
notion of equality was developed, as in práti as- 'be a match for'; e. g.
indra, nákis tvä práty asty es3m, visvä jätiny abhy asi táni' ( v i . 2 5 s) ' O I n d r a ,
none of them is equal to thee; thou art superior to all these beings'. The
verb as- often being omitted, práti appears to be used like an adjective; e. g.
tndrant ná mahnä pfthivi caná práti ( 1 . 5 5 ' ) ' n o t e v e n t h e e a r t h (is) e q u a l to
Indra in greatness'. The preposition further comes to express adverbially the
sense of 'back'; e. g. práti ah- 'thrust back'; práti bra- 'reply'.
Adnominally práti is used with the accusative only, altogether about
a dozen times in the RV. With verbs of motion 2 or of calling it means
'towards', 'to' (though here there is sometimes a doubt whether it does not
rather b e l o n g to the v e r b ) ; e. g . práti tyám cärum adhvarám gopítháya prá
hayase (1. 19') 'thou art summoned to the beloved sacrifice to drink the
milk'. With verbs of protecting it means 'against' = 'from'; e. g. ágne ráksa
no ámhasah, práti .una, deva, risatah (vn. 1 5 U ) 'O Agni, protect us from
distress, against injurers, O god'. Sometimes it means 'over against', 'opposite';
e. g . ábodhy agníh . . práti . . ayatim us,ham (v. 1 ' ) 'Agni has a w a k e n e d in
face of the coming Dawn'. It expresses conformity in the phrase práti váram
'according to desire' (cp. ánu b, npa a, a).
o . In the phrase práti vástoh 'at dawn', occurring three timet in the R V . , the pre-
position seems to take the ablative, but vástoh may here be meant for an adverbial
form
B. Adnominal Prepositions.
609. This class of words which is never compounded with verbs, but
only governs oblique cases (with the exception of the dative), cannot be
clearly distinguished from adverbs such as ürdkvám (which from B. onwards
is also used as a preposition with the ablative in the sense of 'above' and
'after'). It is to be noted that several of them govern the genitive and the
instrumental, cases practically never connected with the genuine prepositions
in the Samhitäs. The following is an account of these words arranged in
their alphabetical order 4 .
1 Both abh 't and práti primarily express | with verb* of motion: here it expresses ap-
direction 'towards', but the former tends to ¡proximate position = 'about', 'at', ' o n ' ; it
imply superiority or attack ('at'), the latter also means 'in regard to', 'in equality with',
comparison and equality or repulsion ('back'). 3 Cp. B R . , and DELBRÜCK p. 463.
' In B. práti is regularly used after the 1 4 T h o u g h several of these (avás, iré,
accusative, though apparently never connected paras, sad, sanitúr, sanuíár, samáyo, sumad,
422 I. A l l g e u u n e s und Spila che. 4. Vedic Grammar.

adhas 'below*.
610. With the accusative adhas occurs only once in the RV., in the
sense of 'below': tisrah pfthivir adhó astu (vii. 104") 'may he be below the
three earths'. It is also found once with the ablative (or genitive) in the
same sense: adhah .. padòh (x. 166*) 'below (my) feet'. The latter use also
occurs once in the SV. and once in the AV.: yi te panthà adhó divàh (SV.
1. 2. 2. 38) 'thy paths which are below the sky'; adhàs te asmano manyum
ùpUsyamasi yó guruh (AV. vi. 42*) 'we cast thy fury under a stone that (is)
heavy*.
anturi 'between'.
611. This word occurs five times in the RV. w i t h a following accu-
sative in the sense of 'between', e. g. antarà ddmpati 'between husband and
wife'. It also occurs a few times in the AV. and VS. before duals; e. g.
antarà dyàviprthivi 'between heaven and earth'.

abhiiat 'around'.
612. This adverb is employed in a few passages of the RV. and AV. in
the sense of'around' with the accusative; e. g. sarò ndparndm abhito vddantah
(vii. 1037) 'talking as round a brimful lake'; yé deva rdstrabhfto 'bhito ydnti
sàryam (AV. xin. i 35 ) 'the kingdom-bearing gods who go around the sun'.

ava» 'down from'.

613. In the RV. avis occurs four times with the ablative (cp. ava) in
the sense of'down from'; e.g. avàh sàryasya brhatàh p&risàt (x.27") 'down
from the vast misty region of the sun'. It is further employed four or five
times with the instrumental; e. g. avo diva patdyantam patamgdm (1. 1635)
'a bird flying down from heaven*. The latter use seems to be analogous to
that of ddhi with the instrumental (597 a).

upari 'above'.
614. This adverb occurs three times in the RV. after the accusative
in the sense of 'above', 'beyond'; e. g. tisrah pfthivir upari (1. 34®) 'above
the three earths'. It is also found once with the instrumental in the combi-
nation bhàmyopdri, i. e. bhàrnya upari (x. 753) 'beyond the earth*. It is,
however, more likely that here we have an irregular euphonic combination
for bhàmya[h] upari1 and that the case governed by the preposition is the
genitive. This would account for the frequent use of upari with the genitive
in the later language, while the instrumental would be unique.

rti 'without*.
615. This word' is used fairly often in the RV., and occasionally in the
later Saiphitas, before or after the ablative (sometimes separated from it) in
the sense of 'without'; e. g. nd rti tvat kriyate kirn cani (x. 112«) 'without
thee nothing is done'; yibhyo ni 'rti pdvate dhàma kim cani (TS. iv. 6. i 4 «=
VS. xvii. 14) 'without whom no dwelling is purified'.

smad) disappear in C, there is neTerthele»» 1 See GRASSMANN, S. V. upari-, cp. aboye

in the later language a large increase in p. 65 (top).
their numbers, greatly supplemented by the * In origin an old locative. On some
periphrastic use of nouns and by the pre- other words representing old case-forms,
positional gerunds. Cp. S F Z I J U , Vedische used prepositionally (arvai etc.), cp. W H I T -
und Sanskrit-Syntax 89—93. NEY n a g .
 4»3

paras 'beyond'.
616. In the RV. paras is used with the accusative, instrumental, ablative,
and locative; but in the later Samhitas it seems to be found with the abla-
tive only.
a. It takes the a c c u s a t i v e six or seven times in the sense of "beyond',
not only locally, but also to express superiority or excess; e. g. ati siryam
para A sakund iva paptima (ix.107") 'we have flown away like birds beyond
the sun'; nahi devo nd martyo mahds tava kratum par ah (i. 19*) 'for neither
god nor mortal (goes) beyond the might of thee, the great'.
b. It is employed nearly three times as frequently with the i n s t r u m e n t a l ,
for the most part in the sense of 'beyond'; e. g. paro mdtrayH (vii. 99*)
'beyond measure'. In some passages this sense is somewhat modified Thus
the word twice means 'over* (as opposed to avds); e. g. yds te amsur avds
ca yah pardh srucd (x. 17 'J) 'thy juice which (fell) down from and over the
ladle'. Twice, moreover, it expresses 'without'; e. g. paro mayabhis (v. 44*)
'without wiles'.
c. With the locative it occurs only once in the sense of 'beyond': y S
trimsati tray as paro devdso barhir isadan (viil 28*) 'the gods who, three in
excess of thirty, have seated themselves upon the litter'.
d. It is found in three passages of the RV., as well as a few times in
the A V . and the VS., with the a b l a t i v e in the senses of 'beyond', far 'from',
and 'away from'; e. g. paro divdh (AV. ix. 4 " ) 'beyond the sky'; asmit . .
parah (vin. 27'®) 'far from him'; tvdt pardh (AV. xn. 3-») 'apart from thee';
pari mtijavatj 'tlhi (VS.111.61) 'go away beyond (Mount) Mujavat'. The last
example may probably be an instance of the accusative with paras = 'beyond
(the tribe of) the Mujavants'1.
purdstad 'in front o f ' .
617. This adverb is used two or three times in the Saqihitas with the
g e n i t i v e in the sense of 'before', 'in front of'; e. g. samiddhasya purdstat
(iil 8') 'in front of the kindled one'; vijah purdstad utd madhyati nah (TS.
iv. 7. I2 a = VS. xvih. 34) 'strength be before us and in the midst of us'.

pura 'before' (time).

In the RV. pura is used some twenty times, and in the later Saqihitas
occasionally, before or after the ablative. It has primarily the sense of
'before' (of time); e. g. pura nu jarasah (vm. 6 7 " ) 'before old age'; pura
krUrasya visfpah (TS. 1. 1. 93 = VS. 1. 28) 'before the departure of the cruel
(foe)'. This sense is, however, often modified to express exclusion, sometimes
equivalent to 'without', 'excepf, 'in preference to', e. g. pura sambadhdd abhy a
vavftsva (11. 168) 'turn to us before ( = so as to save us from) distress'; pura
mdt (AV.xu.3* 6 ) 'except me'.
bahirdhd 'outside'.
618. This adverb 2 is once used in the VS. with the a b l a t i v e in the
sense of 'outside', 'from': idam akam taptdm vdr bahirdhd yajhdn nissfjami
(VS. v. n ) 'this heated water I eject from the sacrifice'.
aaca 'with*.
619. The use of saca is almost restricted to the RV., where it is common
before and after the locative, meaning 'in association with', 'beside', 'at',
s The word mujavani- occurs in the plural I simple form bahit 'outside' (used also with
as the name of a tribe in A V . v. 22 s etc. | abl.) is frequent in B. and later.
< It is used fairly often in B. and S. T h e ,
424 I- ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4 . V E D I C GRAMMAR.

'in'; e . g . tndra id dhdryoh sdci (1.7*) 'Indra with his two bays'; madayasva sutc
saca (1.81 8 ) 'rejoice at the pressed libation'; namucav a surd saca ( V S . x x . 6 8 )
'along with the demoniac Namuci' 1 .

sanitur 'apart from'.

620. This adverb is used two or three times 2 in the R V . a f t e r the
a c c u s a t i v e in the sense of 'beside', 'apart from'; e. g. patim sanitur (v. 121)
'without a lord*.
sanutar ' f a r from*.
621. Allied to the preceding word, sanutar appears once in the R V .
with the a b l a t i v e in the sense of 'far away from': ksitrad apasyam sanutas
carantam (v. 2*) 'far from the field I saw him wandering*.

saha 'with'.
622. This adverb is common in the R V . as well as the later Samhitas,
before and after the i n s t r u m e n t a l in the sense of 'with'; e. g. saha fsibhih
(1. 23**) 'together with the seers'; jardyuna saha (VS. vm. 28) 'with the after-
birth'; saha pdtya (TS. 1. 1. i o ' ) 'with (my) husband'; tnanasa saha ( A V . 1.1 2 )
'together with divine mind*.
sakam 'with'.
623. In the same sense as, but less frequently than, saha, the adverb
sakam3 is used before and after the i n s t r u m e n t a l ; e. g. sakam sdryasya
rasmibhih (1. 4 7 7 ) 'together with the rays of the sun'; sakam gan manasi
yajnam (VS. XXVII. 3 1 ) 'may he come with thought to the sacrifice'; snkam
jar Ay una pata ( A V . 1. 1 1 6 ) 'fly with the afterbirth'.

sumad 'with*.
624. This word occurs four times as an adverb« in the R V . with the
sense of 'together*. It is found once governing the i n s t r u m e n t a l in the
sense of 'with': jay a patim vahati vagnuna sumdt (x. 3 2 J) 'the wife weds the
husband with a shout of joy'.

smad 'with*.
625. Besides being used adverbially some half dozen times in the R V .
with the sense o f 'together*, 'at the same time', smads also occurs about as
often with the i n s t r u m e n t a l , meaning 'with'; e. g. smat sttribhih (1. 5 i ' s )
'together with the princes'.

2. A d v e r b s .
GRASSMANN, Worterbuch 1 737—174^' — WHITNEY, Sanskrit Grammar 1097—1117-
626. Adverbs are most conveniently grouped as those which are formed
with adverbial suffixes and those which are formed with case-endings. The
former class may be best described according to the suffixes alphabetically
arranged, the latter according to the ordinary sequence o f the cases.

1 Though not foand in the AV., saca 4 sumad also appears as the first member
survives in the TB. (L 2. 18). of a compound in sumad-amsu-, sumad-gana-,
* C p . B R . a n d G R A S S M A N N , S. V. sumad-ratha-.
3 On other adverbs of similar meaning, 5 smad also appears as the first member
with case-endings (samaya, saratham) used of six or seven compounds.
prepositionally, see W H I T N E Y 1 1 2 7 . I
 V I H . INDECLINABLES. ADVERBIAL SUFFIXES. 4^5

A . A d v e r b i a l suffixes.
627. -as forms adverbs chiefly of a local or t e m p o r a l m e a n i n g ; thus
tir-as 'across', par-as ' b e y o n d ' , pur-as 'before', sa-div-as a n d sa-dy-as 'to-day',
'at once'; s'v-ds 'to-morrow', hy-ds 'yesterday'; also mith-as 'wrongly'.
628. -tas expresses the a b l a t i v e s e n s e of 'from'. It forms adverbs:
a . f r o m p r o n o u n s ; e. g. a-tas 'hence', amu-tas 'from there', ku-tas
'whence?', td-tas 'thence', ya-tas 'whence', and, with accent on the suffix, i-tas
'from hence', mat-tds (AV.) 'from me'.
b . f r o m a d j e c t i v e s a n d s u b s t a n t i v e s ; e. g. any a-tas 'from another
place', daksina-tas 'from the right', sarvd-tas 'from all sides'; agra-tas 'in front',
hrt-tas 'from the heart', etc.; the suffix is added to a locative case-form in
patsu-tas 'at the feet', beside pat-tds 'from the feet'.
C. f r o m prepositions: anti-tas 'from near', abhi-tas 'around', parl-tas
(AV.) 'round about'.
a. These adverbs in -las are sometimes used as equivalents of ablatives; e. g.
ato bhuyas 'more than that'; tatah safthal (AV.) 'from that sixth'. On the other hand, the
ablative sense is sometimes effaced, the locative meaning taking its place; e. g. agra-
tas 'in front'.
629. -tat (an old ablative of ta- 'this')' has an a b l a t i v e or a l o c a -
t i v e m e a n i n g . It is attached to adverbial case-forms and adverbial or ad-
nominal prepositions; thus udak-tat 'from above', prAk-tat 'from the front1;
UrAt-tat 'from afar', uttarAt-tat 'from the north', parakAt-tat 'from a distance';
pascA-tat 'from behind'; adhas-tat 'below', avas-tat 'below', pards-tat 'beyond',
purds-tat 'in or from the front', and with inserted s (probably due to the
influence of the preceding forms) updri-s-tat '(from) above'.
630. -ti in an-ti 'near', i-tt 'thus'; probably also in a-ti 'beyond', pra-ti
'towards'.
631. -tra or -trd has a l o c a l sense, and is mostly attached to pro-
nominal stems or stems allied to pronouns in sense; thus a-tra 'here', amu-
tra (AV.) 'there', ku-tra 'where?', ta-tra 'there', y a-tra 'where'; any a-tra 'else-
where', ubhayd-tra 'in both places', visva-tra 'everywhere'; asma-trA 'among us',
sa-trA 'in one place', 'together"; daksina-trA 'on the right side', puru-trd 'in
many places', bahu-trA 'amongst many'; deva-trA 'among the gods', pska-tra
in simplicity', purusa-trA 'among men', martya-trA 'among mortals', sayu-tra
'on a couch'.
a. These adverbs in -tri are sometimes used as equivalents of locatives; e. g.
yatradhi 'in which', has/a a daifina-tra 'in the right hand'. This locative sense also some-
times expresses the goal; e. g. pathi devatra ..yanan (x. 737) 'roads that go to the gods'.
632. -tha forms adverbs of m a n n e r , especially from pronominal stems;
thus d-tha (more usually with shortened vowel, atha) 'then', i-t-thA 'thus',
ima-tha 'in this manner', ka-thA 'how'; td-tha 'thus', yd-tha 'in which manner';
anva-thn 'otherwise', visva-thi 'in e v e r y w a y ' ; Urdhva-tha 'upwards', pUrvA-tha
'formerly*, pratnd-th3 'as of old'; rtu-thA 'regularly', nUmd-tha (AV.) 'by name';
eva-tha 'just so'.
a. -tham occurs beside -tha in i-t-tham 'thus', and ka-thdm 'how?'.
633. -da forms adverbs of t i m e almost exclusively from pronominal
roots; thus i-da 'now', ka-dA1 'when?', ta-da 'then', ya-da 'at what time';
sa-da 'always'; sarva-dA (AV.) 'always'.
a. -dam occurs beside -da in sd-dam 'always'; and -da-nTm, an extended
form of -da, appears in i-dA-nim 'now', ta-dA-nlm 'then', viha-dA-nJm 'always'.

1 In the RV. tat itself is once used in- | ' In the R V . nearly always accented kadi
dependently in the sense of 'in this way', j when followed by ean4 — 'never'.
436 L ALLGEMKDTES UND SPRACHE. 4. VEDIC GRAMMAR.

b. <//-, which occurs only in yd-di 'if' 1 , is perhaps related to -da.

634. -dha forms adverbs from numerals or words of cognate meaning,
with the sense of '(so many) times', 'in (so many) ways', '-fold'; thus eka-
dha (AV.) 'singly*, dvi-dhi 'in two ways', tridhi and tre-dhA 'triply*, catur-dhA
'fourfold', so-dha 'in six ways', dvadasa-dhA (AV.) 'twelvefold'; kati-dhi 'how
many times?', tati-dhA (AV.) 'in so many parts', puru-dhA' 'variously', bahu-
dhA 'in many ways', visva-dha2 'in every way', sasva-dhA 'again and again';
priya-dhA (TS.) 'kindly', pre-dhA (MS.) 'kindly*, bahir-dhA (VS.) 'outward',
mitra-dhA (AV.) 'in a friendly manner"; a-dhi and (with shortened final) a-dha
'then', a-d-dha ('thus' = ) 'truly*; sdma-dha3 (Kh. 1. n « ) 'in the same way'.
a. sa-dha-, occurring as the first member of several compounds, in the
sense of ('in one way' = ) 'together*, is probably formed with the same suffix,
the final vowel being shortened 4 ; in independent use it appears as saha
'with**. With the same original suffix appear to be formed other adverbs
in -ha; thus i-ha 'here* (Prakrit idhd), ku-ha 'where?*, visva-ha6 and visva-ha i
'always', sama-ha 'in some way or other*.
635. -ita, expressing s i m i l a r i t y of m a n n e r , forms two adverbs: i-va
'like', 'as' 8 ; e-vd, often with lengthened final, e-vA 'thus', •vam appears beside
-va in e-vam 'thus', which occurs once in the R V . (x. 151 3 ) instead of eva, and
a few times in the A V . with vid- 'know*; it is also found in the SV. (1.3.1. i t o ) :
na ki nam yathtl tvam 'there is nothing such as thou*.
636. -vat forms adverbs meaning 'like' from substantives and adjectives;
e. g. angiras-vat 'like Angiras', manu-vdt 'as Manu (did)'; pur&na-vat, pQrva-
vdi, pratna-vat 'as of old'. In origin it is the accusative neuter (with adver-
bial shift of accent) of the suffix -vant, which is used to form adjectives of
a similar meaning (e. g. tvA-vant- 'like thee').
637. -¿as is used to form adverbs of measure or manner with a distri-
b u t i v e sense, often from numerals or words implying number; thus sata-sds
(AV.) 'by hundreds', sahasra-sds 'by thousands'; sreni-sas 'in rows'; similarly
ftu-sas 'season by season', deva-sas 'to each of the gods', parva-ids 'joint by
joint*, manma-sas 'each as he is minded'.
638. -s forms two or three multiplicative adverbs: dvi-s 'twice',
iris 'thrice', and probably catur for *catur-s (cp. Zend cathrus) 'four times'.
The same suffix forms a few other adverbs: adha-s 'below* (cp. adha-ra 'in-
ferior'), avd-s 'downwards* (from ava 'down'), -dyu-s9 (from dyu- 'day') in
anye-dyu-s (AV.) 'next day* and ubhaya-dyu-s (AV.) 'on both days'; perhaps
also in avis 'openly* and bahis 'outside' 10 .
639. -hi forms a few adverbs of t i m e from pronominal roots; thus
kar-hi 'when?*, tar-hi 'then?'". The first part of these words seems already
to contain an adverbial suffix -r 1 2 (thus kd-r = L a t car)
640. There are also some miscellaneous adverbs consisting of isolated

» Cp. B&UGMANN, K G . 585. 8 In the late parts of the R V . and in the

* The final vowel ofpurudha and visvadha AV. iva has often to be read as va; cp.
appears shortened before a double consonant ARNOLD, Vedic Metre 129, but see OLDEN-
in the RV. BERG, ZDMG. 61, 830.
3 Cp. sama-ha. 9 See MKKINGER, IF. 1 8 , 2 5 7 ; cp. RICHTEE.,
4 As in adha, purudha, visvadha. IF. 9, 238; SCHULZE, KZ. 28, 546.
5 See above 58, 2 a (p. 52). Cp. BRUGMANN, K G . 584.
6 Just as viividha beside visvadha; but 11 amur-hi, etar-hi, ydr-hi also occur in B.
cp. BKUGMANN, K G . 582. <> Cp. ava-r, which occurs once beside
7 On the other hand visvaha 'always' is the usual avd-s.
= viba dha 'all days' ('alle Tagt>) with* a •J Cp. BRUGMANN, K G . 583.
single accent, like a compound; see GRASS-
MAMN, S.
 V I I I . INDECLINABLES. A D V E R B I A L CASE-FORMS. 4*7

words or small groups, mostly of obscure origin, formed with other suffixes.
The latter in alphabetical order are:
-a : kv-a (always ku-a) 'where?' and a-dy-a* 'to-day*.
-ar : pun-ar 'again' and sasv-ar 'secretly^.
-a : antar-d 'between', pur-d 'before'; perhaps also in nini 'variously',
which may be = nd-na 'so and so' from the pronominal root «<*-'.
-it: daksin-it 'with the right hand'; and -vit in cikit-vit 'with deliberation'.
-u : jdt-u 'ever', mith-u 'wrongly', rnuh-u 'suddenly'; anu-sth-u 'at once'
('standing after', from lAr/Af-, cp. su-sth-u 'in good state').
-ur : muh-ur 'suddenly'.
-k : jyo-k long'. In several other adverbs -k with more or less probability
represents the final of a root; thus nin'ik 'secretly* (probably from *nini-ac-
adj. 'secret'), madrik 'towards me' (contracted from madriak, neut. adv. of
madriac- adj. 'turned to me'); anu-sak 'in succession' ('following after' : Ysac-);
ayu-sdk 'with the cooperation of men' {sac- 'follow'); uid-dhak 'with eager
consumption' ('eagerly burning' : ]/dah-).
-tar : pra-tar 'early' and sanu-tdr 'away' (6 a i).
-tur : sani-tur 'away' (620).
-nam•.na-ndm 'now* and nSnH-ndm 'variously' (64a d).

B. Adverbial Case-forms.
641. A large number of case-forms of nominal and pronominal stems,
often not otherwise in use, are employed as adverbs. They become such
when no longer felt to be case-forms3. Forms of all the cases appear with
adverbial function.
Nominative. Examples of this case are prathamam 'firstly', dvitiyam
'secondly'; e. g. divas pari prathamam jajne agnir, asmdd dvitiyam pari
jataved&h (x. 45") 'Agni was first born from heaven, secondly he, Jatavedas,
(was born) from us'. Such adverbs are to be explained as originally used
in apposition to the verbal action: 'as the first thing, Agni was born'. A
masculine form has become stereotyped in ki-s as an interrogative adverb;
its negative forms nd-kis and md-kis are often used in the sense of 'never'
or simply 'not'.
642. Accusative. Adverbs of this form are to be explained from
various meanings of the accusative. The following are examples of nominal
forms representing:
a. the cognate accusative: rd kapotam nudata pranidam (x. 165 s )
'by song expel the pigeon as expulsion'; citram bhinty usdsah (vi. 65®) 'the
Dawns shine brightly' ( = 'a bright scil. shining*); marmrjmi te tanvam bhari
kftvah (iil 18«) 'we adorned thy form many times' (originally 'makings');
similarly dhrsnu 'boldly', puru 'much', 'very*, bhiyas 'more'; and the compara-
tive in -taram added to verbal prefixes; e. g. vi-taram vi kramasva (rv.x8")
'stride out more widely'; sam-tardm sam sisad hi (AV. vii. 16') 'quicken still
further'; pra tam naya pra-taram (x. 45') 'lead him forward still further'; ud
enam ut-taram naya (AV.vi. 5') 'lead him up still higher'; so also ava-taram,
paras-taram, para-tardm 'further away', and the fem. accusatives sam-tardm
and paras-tardm (AV.).

i C p . RXICHELT, BB. 25, 244. 3 On the diitinction between case function

» C p . o p . cit. 8 3 9 ; PERSSON, IF. 2, 200 FF., a n d a d v e r b i a l t u e s e e BRUGUANN, K G . 5 7 1 .
'auf diese (oder) jene Weise'; BARTHOLOMAE,
IF. JO, 10—13, originally 'separatim'.
428 L A L L G E M E I N E S UND S P R A C H E . 4. VEDIC GRAMMAR.

b. the appositional accusative; thus osd-m 'quickly' (lit 'burningly'),

hama-m 'according to desire'; nima 'by n a m e r u p d - m 'in form', satya-m 'truly'.
c. the accusative of direction; e. g. agra-m (»-) '(go) to the front of',
'before'; asta-m (gam-) '(go) home'.
d. the accusative of distance and time; e. g. dard-m 'a long way off',
'far'; ndkta-m 'by night', siya-m 'in the evening', cird-m '(for a) long (time/,
nitya-m 'constantly', pirva-m 'formerly*.
a. There are also some adverbs derived from obsolete nominal stems, which
would seem for the most part to have belonged originally to the sphere of the cognate
accusative; thus dra-m 'sufficiently' (from *ara- 'fitting'), ala m(AV.) id.; tusni-m 'in silence',
nanand-m (from nani) 'variously', nund-m (from nu) 'now"; sakd-m 'together' (from *sakd-
'accompaniment': sac- 'follow'>.
j). Finally a number of accusative adverbs are formed from pronominal stems;
thus adds there', 'thither'; id 'just', 'even'; iddm 'here', 'now'; tm 'ever' (e. g. yd Tm
'whoever'); kd-d, an interrogative particle; kd-m, a particle emphasizing a preceding
dative or (unaccented) the particles nu, sit, hi\ kt-m 'why?'; -ki-m 'ever' (in md-klm 'never');
kuv-id 'whether?'; ci-d 'even'; td-d 'then'; yd-d 'if, 'when', 'that'; si-m 'ever' (ydi stm
'whenever'); sumd-d and smd-d 'together'.
643. Instrumental. With the ending of this case (sometimes plural)
are formed adverbs from substantives, adjectives, and pronouns, the latter two
groups being at first probably used with the ellipse of a substantive. Various
senses of the instrumental case are expressed by these adverbs. Usually
they imply manner or accompanying circumstances; e. g. tdras-a 'with
speed'; sahas-a 'forcibly'; tavisj-bhis 'with might'; ndvyas-a 'anew'; end 'in this
(way)', 'thus'. Not infrequently they express extension of space or time; e. g.
agrena 'in front'; aktu-bhis 'by night'; div-3 'by day' (but div-A 'through the
sky'); dosi 'in the evening'.
a. T h e substantive instrumentals are chiefly formed from feminine
stems in -a not otherwise in use, but corresponding mostly to masculines
or neuters in -a\ thus a-datrayd 'without (receiving) a gift' (datra• 'gift');
asayA 'before the face of', 'openly' (*<7sJ- = as- 'face'); ftayA 'in the right
way' (VW- = 7"/a-); naktayA 'by night' {"nakta- = nakta-); sumnayA 'piously'
(*sumnA- = sumnd-)\ svapnayA (AV.) 'in a dream' (*svapn3- = svapna-).
a. Several of these feminines are instrumentals from stems in -ta and identical in
form with the stem; thus tirasca-ta 'through'; devd ta 'among the gods'; bahu-ta 'with 3the
arms'; sasvdr-ta 'in secret'; dvi-ta 'in two ways' may have a similar origin (dvi ta-'two') .
We have perhaps also old instrumentals of feminine stems in -a in taditna 'then' = 'at
that time'; and in vftha 'according to choice', 'at will' {*vf-thd- 'choice', from vf- 'choose').
^ In a few examples the instrumental seems more probably to be that of a radical
stem with adverbial shift of4 accent rather than from a5 stem in -a; thus guh-a *in secret',
rather inst. of guh- 'hiding' , than of a stem "guh-a- ; similarly mff-a 'in vain' (*mff-
'neglect' : inst. mff-a)-, sdc-a 'together" (*sac- 'accompaniment' : inst. sac-a). In a-sthd (RV>.),
perhaps meaning 'at once', we seem to have an instrumental adverb from a radical a-
stem a stha- ("no standing') = 'without delay'.
b. T h e adjective instrumentals end either in -a (plural -ais) or -ya.
T h e former are derived from a- stems and a few consonant stems in -c\ the
latter are anomalous feminines from u- stems and one or two t- stems:
a. apikd 'afar' (apska- 'far'); JrmA 'quickly' (trrnd-); uccd and uccais 'on
high' {uccd-); daksina 'to the right' (ddknna-); paracais 'for away' (*paraca-)\
pascA 'behind' (*paicd-); madhyA 'in the midst' (madhya-); sanais 'slowly'
1
Cp. GRAY, IF. L L , 3 0 7 F F . ; Fov, IF. 12, | 4 The normal inst of which would be
172. guh-a.
' For some other adverbs of obscure 5 Cp. RV. 1. 6j6 gtiha guham gas and in
origin, which were originally accusatives, the next stanza guha bhdvantam.
s e e WHITNEY I I I I f.
3 Cp. BENFEY, S V . Glossary, and GRASS-
MANN, Worterbuch, s. • .
 V I I I . INDECLINABLES. PARTICLES. 4*9
1
(*/ana-) and sdnakais id.; sana 'from of old' (sana-); samartd 'in the same
way* (sdmana-); tirasc-d 'across'; ntc-d 'downwards'; prac-d 'forwards'.
f?. anu-sthu-y-d2 'at once' (anu-sth't 'following', adv. from stha- 'stand');
asu-y-d 'swifdy' (Hs'ii-); dhrsnu-y-d 'boldly' (dhrsnu-)\ mithu-y-d 'falsely' (mlthu,
adv. from mith- 'be hostile'); raghu-y-d 'rapidly' (raghi't-); s3dAu-y-d 'straight*
(ssdhi'i-); also urviy-d (for urvy-d) 'far', from urvi f. of un'i- 'wide'; and
visvy-a 'everywhere', from *visvT-, irregular f. of visva- 'all', beside the regular
inst f. vihayj, which itself seems once (vin. 68J) to be used adverbially.
c. Pronominal i n s t r u m e n t a l are formed from several stems in -a
and one in -v. Some appear in the masculine (or neuter) form of -3 or the
feminine of ->>3; so and 'thus' (and- 'that'); amd 'at home' (dma- 'this'); a-yd
'thus' (a- 'this'); end 'thus' (ma- 'this'); ka-yd 'how?' (kd- 'who?'); ubhayd
'in both ways' (ubhaya- 'both'). From amu- 'that' is formed the adverb amu-y-d
'in that way', with the anomalous interposition of y \ To the influence of
the latter word is probably due the form kuhayd 'where?* (RV1.) beside the
usual kuha 'where?'.
644. a. Dative. The adverbial use of this case is rare. Examples
are: apardya 'for the future' (from dpara- 'later'); varSya 'according to wish'
(vdra- 'choice').
b. Ablative. This case is on the whole used adverbially fairly often.
It is, however, seldom formed from substantives, as Srdt 'from a distance',
asdt 'from near'; or from pronouns, as dt 'then', tdt 'thus', ydt 'as far as'.
It is most commonly formed from adjectives; thus durdt 'from afar'; rilcdt
'from below'; pascdt 'from behind'; silksdt 'visibly'; and with shifted accent:
adhardt 'below' (adhara-)-, apzkdt 'from afar' (dpaka-); amdt 'from near'
(dma-); uttardt 'from the north' (uttara-); sand/* and sanakdt 'from of old'
(sana-).
c. Genitive. The adverbial use of this case is very rare. Examples
are aktos 'by night' and vastos 'in the morning".
d. Locative. Several forms of this case have an adverbial meaning;
thus agre 'in front'; abhi-svare 'behind' (lit. 'within call'); astam-jkJ 'at home';
Ski 'near1; aris 'afar'; rtd 'without"; duri 'afar*; and in the plural aparisu
•in future".

3. Particles.
WHITNEY, Sanskrit Grammar 122, 132—133. — DELBSOCK, Altindische Syntax
p. 240—267. — Cp. BKUGMANN, K G . 817—855.
645. Other adverbial words, the derivation of which is obscure and the
meaning of which is abstract or general, may be classed as particles. They
form three groups, the emphatic, the conjunctional, and the negative, the
first being the most numerous. The emphatic particles, as throwing stress
on a preceding word, are either enclitic or incapable of beginning a sentence;
the conjunctional particles, except utd, are of a similar nature; but the nega-
tives, having a strongly antithetical meaning, generally occupy an emphatic
position in the sentence.
646. The emphatic particles may usually be translated by such words
as 'just', 'indeed', or rendered merely by stress on the word they follow.

< In the last three adverbs the accent perhaps due to the influence of the nnmeroui
does not shift to the final syllable. adverbs in -yd from stems in -a, amu- being
' These anomalous forms are due per- an isolated pronominal «- stem.
haps to the influence of the pronominal 4 sana/ occnrs also AA. v. 2. 2 .
amu-y-a. 5 On ari, arat, fti cp. NxissxK, BB. 19,
3 The anomalous interposition of y is 140.
43° L ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4. VEDIC GRAMMAR.

They are anga; dhax, gha, ha (the last two less emphatic than aha); sma;
svid (generally following an interrogative) = 'pray'; vat, nearly always following
the first word of a sentence. Three particles which emphasize the preceding
word more strongly in the sense of 'certainly', 'in truth', are kila ( + AV.),
khdlu (RV 1 ., not in A V . ) , ¿Ad/a ( R V . A V ' . ) . In the R V . til usually empha-
sises exhortations = 'pray', but sometimes also statements = 'surely'; once
(vi. 29») it seems to mean 'but', which is its sense in its single occurrence in
the A V . The particle nd, when it means 'as it were', 'like', was in origin
probably an emphatic particle •= 'truly' 2 .
647. There are several conjunctional particles, some of which are com-
pounded u i 'now', 'again', is commonly used deictically and anaphorically
after pronouns and verbs. Both u-ta and ca mean 'and*, ca when compounded
with the negative particle as cana originally meant 'not even', but the negative
sense generally disappears and cana turns the interrogative pronoun into an
indefinite, as has cana 'some one' 4 , ca when compounded with id, that is
cid, means 'if', nit 'now' generally follows the first word of the sentence.
The disjunctive particle is vi 'or', hi (generally following the first word of a
sentence) expresses the reason for an assertion = 'for', 'because'; it is also
used with imperatives, when it means 'then'. It occurs once in the R V .
(vi. 48') compounded with the negative nd, but without change of meaning:
hind 'for'.
648. The negative particle which denies assertions is nd 'not'. Its
compound ntd (= nd id) expresses an emphatic 'not'; it is, however, usually
employed in the final sense of 'in order that not', 'lest'. Its compound na-kis
often means 'never*, and nd-ktm, in the only two stanzas in which it occurs
(VIII. 78'-S), has the same sense. The negative also occurs twice (x. 5 4 ' ; 84')
compounded with ml as naml, which expresses a strong negative = 'not at
all', 'never'. When it is compounded with hi as nahi, the latter word retains
the meaning of both particles: 'for not'.
mi 'not* is the prohibitive particle regularly used with the injunctive 5 .
It is compounded with the petrified nom. -kis and acc. -kJm to mi-kis and
mi-klm. T h e former frequently and the latter in its only two occurrences
mean 'never'.

a. Adverbial words occurring in compounds only.

649. A limited number of words of an adverbial character have either
entirely lost or, in a few instances, nearly lost their independent character,
being found in combination with half a dozen particular verbs or as the
first member of nominal compounds. In two or three examples the original
independence of such words can still be traced.
650. A few mostly onomatopoetic reduplicative words appear only
compounded with the roots kr- 'do' and bha- 'be', the prefixed form generally
ending in -a, once in -I: thus akhkhall-kf-tya6 (vn. 103 3 ) 'croaking", alala-

> Another frequent particle of the same ' junctive, nor the imperative, nor the opta-
meaning, id, has already been mentioned tive except in the form bhujema; see
among the pronominal accusative adverbs. DELBRUCK p. 361 (top). In the Khilas it
* Greek rat, L a t nae, cp. Lith. net 'as it occurs two or three times with the 2. impv.;
-were' (cp. BRUGMANN, K G . 839); this sense paiya (ur. 1517), titfha (iv. 5>5), and once at
of na is generally explained as derived from least with thesubj.: vadati (1.9 s ): MS. vadtti.
the negative —= 'not (precisely/: see WHITNEV o This is the only instance of the prefix
1122 h ; cp. BB. 22, 194 AT. ending in -» instead of -a in the RV. In
3 On the Sandhi of u, see above 71, l b . the A V . -T appears before forms of kr- in
4 Cp. DKLBKUCK, op. c i t p. 544. the nominal compounds vaii-ifta- and vait-
5 It is not used with the ordinary sub- hard-, designations of a disease.
 43'

bhávani- (iv. 186) 'sounding merrily'; jañjana-bhávant- (vm. 43 s ) 'sparkling';

ktkiri krnu (vi. S37) 'tear to tatters'; masmasi-karam (AV.v. 23 s ) 'I have crushed',
masmasi kuru (VS. xi. 80) and mfsmrsi kuru (MS. n. 7') 'crush', malmali-
bhivant- (MS. 11.13'»; TS.i.4.34 1 ) 'glittering', bharbhará-bhavat (MS.n. 2«: B.)
'became confounded'; bibiba-bhávaní- (MS. i . 6 5 : B . ) 'crackling'.
651. The adverb avis 'openly', 'in view', is found in combination with
the verbs as-, bhü- and kf- only. With the latter it means 'make visible',
e. g. Svis karta (1. ?>(y>) 'make manifest'. With the two former, which are
sometimes omitted, it means'become visible', 'appear'; e. g. avis sánti (vin. 8'J)
'being manifest'; dvir agnir abhavat (L 1432) 'Agni became manifest'.
pra-dur, lit 'out of doors', begins to appear in the A V . in combination
with ybha-, meaning 'become manifest', 'appear'.
652. The word srád, which originally probably meant 'heart' 1 , is often
found in combination with dhi- 'place', in the sense of 'put faith in', 'credit',
nearly always, however, separated from the verb by other words, e. g. srád
asmai dhatta (11. 12$) 'believe in him'; srád asmai, naro, vacase dadhstana
(VS. vin. 5) 'give credence, O men, to this utterance'. It also appears in the
substantive srad-dhá- 'faith'. The word is once also found with tfkf- in the
sense of'entrust': srád visvi váryi kfdhi (vin. 75 1 ) 'entrust all boons (to us)'.
653. The interjection hiñ is compounded with kf- 'make' in the sense
of 'utter the sound hití, 'murmur'; thus gáur . . hit1« akfnot (1. 1 6 4 " ) 'the
cow lowed'; hin-kftivati (L 164 2 ') 'lowing"; híñkftüya sváhü (VS. X X I L 7)
'hail to the sound hiñ'• tdsmS usA hiñ-kfnoti (AV. ix.6 45 ) 'for him the dawn
utters hiñ'.
654. A few substantives, after assuming an a d v e r b i a l character, are
found compounded with participial forms, ásta-m 'home', which still appears
as a noun in the RV., though commonly used adverbially in the accusative
with verbs of motion, is combined like a verbal prefix with participles of i-
'go' in the AV.: astam-yánt- 'setting', astam-esyánt'about to set", ástam-ita-
(AV.xvii. i ' i ) 2 'set'. The noun námas- 'obeisance' is similarly compounded in
the gerund with kr -'make' in the AV.: namas-kftyaIn the RV. itself names
of parts of the body, with no tendency otherwise to adverbial use, are thus
compounded with the gerund of grah- 'seize': karna-gfhya 'seizing by the ear',
pada-gthya 'seizing by the foot', hasta-gf-hya 'grasping the hand' 4 . The
transition to this use was probably supplied by nouns compounded with past
participles, as sáhas-kfta- 'produced by force'.
655. There are besides a few monosyllabic adverbial particles which
occur as prefixes compounded w i t h nominal f o r m s o n l y . By far the
most frequent of these is the negative prefix, which appears in the form of
an- before vowels and a- before consonants. It is compounded with in-
numerable substantives and adjectives, but rarely with adverbs, as a-kutrH 'to
the wrong place', a-punár ('not again* = ) 'once for all'; án-eva ( A V . )
'not so'.
656. si-, as a prefix expressive of accompaniment, is employed as a
reduced form of the verbal prefix sams, and interchanges with saha-; e. g.
sá-cetas- 'accompanied by wisdom', 'wise', beside sahd-cchandas- 'accompanied
with songs'.
1 See UHLENBECK, Kurzgefasstes Etymo- language, but the independent form nomas
logisches Wörterbuch der altindischen kftva is occasionally f o u n d ; cp. BfhaddevatS,
Sprache, Amsterdam 1 8 8 8 — 8 9 , s. v. iraddha. I. I, critical note in my edition.
2 For some other later nominal compounds 4 Cp. WHITNEY 990 b and above 591 a
of this kind see WHITNEY 1092 c. (p. 413, bottom) and 591 b.
) This is the regular form in the later 3 Cp. mboTe 250.
433 L ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4. VEDIC GRAMMAR. VIII. INDECLINABLES.

657. dus- (appearing also, according to the euphonic combination, as dur-,

dus-, dus-)1, means 'ill', 'hard to'; e. g. dur-ga- '(place) difficult of access',
dur-ynj- 'ill-yoked', dur-mati- 'ill-will'; dus-cyavand- 'hard to shake'; dus-kfta-
'ill-done'; dus-saha- 'irresistible'.
658. su- 'well', 'easy to' is compounded with a much larger number of
words than dus-'-, e. g. su-kara- 'easy to accomplish'; su-kft- 'acting well',
su-gd- 'easy of access', su-mati- 'good-will', su-yuj- 'well-yoked'. It is, however,
still found in a state of transition in the RV., where it occurs independently
more than 200 times-3, being then connected in sense with the verb only 4 ;
e. g. asm/in su jigyusah kftam (1. 17 7 ) 'make us well victorious' 5 .

4. Interjections.
659. A certain number of words having the nature of interjections occur
in the Samhitas. They are of two kinds, being either exclamations or
imitative sounds.
a. The exclamations are bat (RV.) 'truly', baia (RV.) 'alas!', hanta
'come' used exhortatively with the subjunctive, and haye 'come', before voca-
tives, hiruk 'away!', huruk (RV.) 'away!', hai (AV.) 'ho!'. Perhaps uv?
(x. 86 7 ) 6 .
b. Interjections of the onomatopoetic type are: kikira (RV.) used with
kf- 'make the sound kikira' •= 'tear to tatters'; kikkitA (TS.) used in invoca-
tions (TS. hi. 4.2'); ciicA (RV.) 'whiz!' (of an arrow) used with k f 'make a
whizzing sound'; phat (AV. VS.) 'crash!', phdl (AV. xx. 1353) 'splash!'; ba
(TS. — AV.) 'dash!'; bhuk (AV. xx. 135') 'bang!', sal (AV. xx. 13s 1 ) 'clap!

< See GRASSMANN, Worterbuch, columns sv afayati "may he go well away' as a

614—619. compound: su-apayati\ but this is doubt-
» Op. c i t , columns 1526—1560. less an error for su | apa \ ayati. See W H I T -
3 In the AV. it is still used independently, NEY'S note on this passage in his Translation
bnt only 14 times. of the A V .
4 See GRASSMANN, o p . c i t . , s . v . su. 6 See NEISSER, B B . 30, 3 0 3 ; cp. above
5 T h e Pada text of A V . x i x . 49 1 0 treats p. 337, note 7.
 ADDENDA AND CORRIGENDA.
It should be noted, in addition to what is said at the end of $ i (p. a),
that when the abbreviations 'VS.' etc. indicate the occurrence of a form in
a later Veda, they only mean that the form in question is not found in the
RV., while it may occur in parallel passages of one or more of the other
Saiphitäs also. The symbols ' + VS.' etc. are intended to draw attention to
the fact that the form indicated occurs in a later Saiphitä as well as in
the R V . — In the enumeration of words, stems, inflected forms, and suffixes,
initial alphabetical order is the principle followed. But it is occasionally varied
for clearness of grouping. Thus the arrangement, in the case of compounds,
is sometimes according to the final member (e. g. 308, 375 A, 591 a) or, in
the case of roots, according to the medial or final vowel (e. g. 421, 483). The
principle is also departed from when examples only of very frequent forms are
given. Thus the nom. forms of present participles are arranged in the order of
the conjugational classes (314); the nom. and other cases of the a-declension
are given according to frequency of occurrence (372). Adverbs are classed
according to the alphabetical order of the suffixes (626—640) or the sequence
of the cases (641 — 644). — The principle of giving the meanings of words
has been followed throughout the work. But this has been modified in two
ways in the enumeration of inflected forms. In declension the meaning is
given only with the first occurrence of a case-form of any word found in the
same paragraph (e.g. 372). It seemed impossible to follow the same method
in lists of inflected verbal forms. For, owing to the modifications of sense
due to context and compounding with prepositions, the meaning could not
be satisfactorily stated by giving it with the first occurrence of forms from
the same root. The meaning has therefore been stated with the root only
or when forms from different roots might be confused (e. g. 444, 445). But
as the index gives the meaning of every root and enumerates all paragraphs
containing forms from that root, the general sense of all such forms may
easily be ascertained. — As regards references, figures without an added 'p.'
always indicate paragraphs when books are divided into paragraphs; e. g.
'DELBRÜCK, Verbum 184 (p. 166—169)'; otherwise they refer to the page.
When pages have to be referred to they are for the convenience of the reader
often divided into quarters; thus LANMAN 37 2J means the third quarter of
p. 372 i n LANMAN'S N o u n - I n f l e c t i o n .
P. 23, line 19 for orignal read original. — P. 51, note for *gu$dhd read
*gu$dha-. — P. 56, 1. 27, for AV. read Av. and for 'weak read weak. — P. 58, 1. 4
from below, for cak\an\anta read cäk\an\antu. — P. 60, 1. 2, for appears read
appears as. — P. 61, 1. 7 , f o r become read becomes; 1. 34, for (a-yäs read a-yäs\
1. 36, for fall') read 'fall'. — P. 66, S 72, 2 b: cp. OLDENBERG, ZDMG. 63, 298. —
P. 67, 1. 30, for There seems to be no certain instance of this in t h e R V . read
This is of regular and, as far as d is concerned, of very frequent occurrence
in the R V . , e. g. tan (for tad) mitrdsya (1. 115S); L 31, after cakrdn na
Indo-uischc Philologi« 1. 4. 28
434 I- ALLGEMEINES UND S P R A C H E . 4 . V E D I C GRAMMAR.

(x.95"- *3) for however read too. — P. 70,1. 17, insert often also after But s.—
P. 83,1. 27, for Reduplicated stems read Reduplicated present stems; 1. 28,
after 'invoking' add but perfect sisriyand- 'having resorted to'. — P. 99, 1. 2
from below, insert (AV.) after ma-mdd-a-t\ note for ri-hati read rih-ate. —
P. 100, last line: on ddsa-mäna- cp. p. 373 note — P. 109, 1. 3 from
below, for vevij-d read vevij-a- and for carä-car-d read carä-car-d-, — P. 119,
1. 21, for jigts-u read jigis-u-. — P. 141, 1. 2 from below, for medh-i-rä- read
medk-i-rd-. — P. 146, 1. 6, for 204 read 244. — P. 156, 1. 20, for vdrunas
read vdrunas and 1. 22, for pitdrä- read pitdrä. — P. 157, 1. 26, for occurs
read occur.— P. 169, 1. 21, after purusa-vyaghrd- add (VS.). — P. 192, 1. 9
from below, for mahäntas read mahäntas. — P. 197, note 7, for 55 read
66 c ß. — P. 199, note 8 , add Cp. OLDENBERG, Z D M G . 63, 300—302. —
P. 202, L sing.: OLDENBERG, Z D M G . 63, 289, would place the form rani
(ix. 77) here. — P. 209, 1. 25, for 'width read width. — P. 215, note 5, for
Bahuvrihi read a Bahuvrlhi. — P. 238, note add Cp. OLDENBERG, Z D M G .
63, 300—302. — P. 255, 1. 11, for äsas read -äsas\ S 371, 1. 3, for ending
read endings. — P. 257, lines 9 and 12: on kränä, dänä, and sakhyä (as
acc. pi.) cp. OLDENBERG, Z D M G . 63, 287—290. — P. 264, 1. 3 from below:
according to OLDENBERG, Z D M G . 63, 293, also satruhdtyai. — P. 279, 1. 10,
for »-declension read Z-declension. — P. 304, 1. 9 from below, for ätman- read
atmdn-. — P. 315 delete 1 after 414. — P. 317, 1. 20, for -yät read -yät. —
P. 320, sing. 3.: ydmati should perhaps be classed as a root aor. subj., though
this form seems to have a distinctly indicative sense in the two passages
in which it occurs; du. 2. for sadathas read sddathas, which form should per-
haps rather be classed as a root aor. subj.; pi. 1., delete ddy'imasi (AV.). —
P. 321, 1. 2, delete gdmanti: see p. 369 top; 1. 12: the shift of accent is in-
sufficient (cp. hims-te) for the treatment of himsanti as a transfer form (cp.
p. 1 ob, I.13): it should preferably be placed in 464 after vfnjanti. — P. 321,
Indicative Middle: Sing. 1., delete daye (AV. TS.). — Sing. 3., delete bhSjate,
yojate, stdrate (p.369, top); read vdhate before väsate, and s'ayate before siksate. —
Du. 3., add sobhete.— PI. 1 , delete staräma/ie (p. 369, top). — P. 323, S 424,
Sing. 1., delete bhojam, yojam (503).— Sing. 2., deleteyamas, varas (502).—
Sing. 3 .. delete yamat, radhat, sakat (502), tamat, ddsat, sramat, sadat (510),
minat (477), sndthat (452); for vdrat read varat ('cover'): — PI. 3., delete
yaman (502), vaman, sdsan (452), add srSsan.— Middle. PI. 3., deleteyavanta
(502).— P. 324, 1. 4, for yoja read yoja; last line, delete dayasva (AV.). —
P. 325, S 427 a, delete sAsant- (455) and sdnant- (512). — P. 326, 1. 1, for
cdyamäna read cäyamana-; S 428, Sing. 3., delete asadat (508). — P. 328, 1. 3,
: sfna- read Four; L 4 add gf- 'sing' : grnd- (AV.) beside grnd-, and i f - 'crush'
for Two (AV.) beside s'fnä-. — S 430, Sing. 2., read ksipasi (AV.) before
tirasi; Middle. Sing. 1., delete mrje and s'use (451). — P. 329, S 431, Sing. 3.,
delete pfnit', S 43», delete guhas, rudhat, trpdn (510) and add bhujdt (bhuj-
'bend'). — P. 330, 1. 11, add meddtäm; 1. 14, after TS. iv. 6. 51 add •= AV.
VS. MS. — S 435i delete ksiydnt-, mj-jdnt- (455), citant- ( 5 0 6 ) , guhant-, sucdnt-
(512), susant-, svasdnt- (455); insert 'bending' after bhujdnt-; Middle, delete
guhdmana-, dhfsdmananftamäna-, sucdmäna- (512).— S 436, Sing. 2., add
adyas. — P. 332, 1. 1, add dayämasi (AV.); 1. 7, add daye (AV. TS.); S 441,
add rJya. — P. 333, 1. 12, delete cäyamana-, — P. 337, lines 6 and 8, delete
bhüihds and bhatds (502), and (AV.) after psatas; Middle. Sing. 1., for m?je
(AV.) read mrje; add s'use (\fhas- 'blow'). — P. 338, 1. 2., delete parcas,
sdkas (502); L 5, add inathat; 1. 10, add vaman, säsan-, 1. 12, delete vdrjate
(502). — S 454, Act. Sing., add drahi (AV.) and dratu (AV.) and after psahi
delete (AV.); note 4, add Perhaps root aor. subj.; cp. 502 (p. 369). —
 435

P- 339. 6, delete sotan a (su- 'press'): cp. 505. — S 455, Act, delete
dhfsant- (512), add mrjant-, s'usdnt-, s'vasant-; Middle., delete dhfsHna- (AV.),
add tvaksana-. — P. 340, 1. 3, delete svana- (su- 'press', SV.): cp. 506. —
P. 3 4 2 , 1 . 1 1 , delete piprati.— P. 343, 1. 12, for TS. IV. 6. I 5 read T S . nr. 6. I*. —
P. 345, s 467, delete krntati- and sumbh'md-.— P. 350, 1. 11, f o r p f n a t ( K N )
read pr>}At\ 1. 16, add minat (for minlt). — P. 359, 1. 23, delete VS. xxxiii. 8 7 ;
1. 24, after sr- 'crush' add AV.; 1. 26, after 'bring forth' add AW.-, note " , for
sasahe read sasaA/. — P. 361, 1. 10, add cakan before sasvar. — P. 362,1. 6:
cakaniu though sing, in form is pi. in meaning and stands by haplology lor
cakanantu: cp. p. 58, 1. 4 from below. — P. 364, 1. 12, read -ran or -iran
for -iran; 1. 9 from below, delete avavacit (549). — P. 366, 1. 5 from below,
delete akran (Ykrand-)\ see 522 ( j aor.). — P. 367, 1. 2, delete akrlin (ykrand-):
see 522 (j-aor.); 1. 22, delete aprkta (^pre-)\ see 522 (j-aor.). — P. 368,
S 502, L 3, add sakas; 1. 6, for yamat read yamat\ 1. 7, a d d sdkat\ 1. 9, after
pathas add 'drink'. — P. 369, 1. 5 from below: on apyasam (AA. v. 3. 2) see
KEITH, Aitareya Araijyaka, p. 157, note IO, and Index iv, Yap-. — P. 374,
1. 22, add bibhis-athas. — P. 383, 1. 8, delete ayasit. — P. 384, L 4 from
below, add 3. ayasit. — P. 397, 1. 2 and 1. 24, add vildyasi a n d vTldyasva.

28»
 LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS.
AA. - Aitareya-Äragyaka.
AB. — Aitareya-Brähma^a.
AJPh. = American Journal of Philology.
APr. = Atharva-Pritiiäkhyau
ASL. = Ancient Sanskrit Literature.
AV. = Atharva-Veda.
Av. = Avesta.
B. = Brähmaga.
BB. = BEZZENBERGER'S Beiträge.
BL = Bibliotheca Indica.
B R . = BÖHTLINGK and R O T H (St. Petersburg Dictionary).
C. = Classical Sanskrit.
GGA. = Göttingische Gelehrte Anzeigen.
IE. = Indo-European.
IF. = Indogermanische Forschungen.
Ilr. = Indo-Iranian.
IS. = Indische Studien.
JAOS. — Journal of the American Oriental Society.
K. = Käthaka.
KG. = BRUGMANN'S Kurze Vergleichende Grammatik.
Kh. = Khila.
KZ. = KUHN'» Zeitschrift.
MS. -- Maiträyavl Saiphitä.
N. - (Proper) Name.
O. u. O. = Orient und Occident.
Pp. - Pada-patha.
pw. - Petersburger Wörterbuch (BÖHTLINGK'S Smaller Lexicon).
Paipp. - Paippalftda.
RPr. = Rigveda-Prätiilkhya.
RV. = Rigveda.
S. = Sütra.
ÖA. - Sankhayana-Ärapyaka.
ÖB. = Satapatha-Brlhmapa.
SBE. = Sacred Books of the East.
SV. - Slma-Veda.
TB. - Taittirtya-Br&hmaQa.
TPr. = Taittirlya-PrätiSäkhya.
TS. = Taittirlya-SamhiU.
Up. = Upanishad.
V. = Vedic.
VPr. = Vljasaneyi-Pr&tiiakhya.
VS. - (i) Väjasaneyi-Samhitä; (2) Vediiche Studien.
Wb. = Wörterbuch.
WZKM. = Wiener Zeitschrift für die Kunde des Morgenlandes.
YV. = Yajur-Veda.
ZDMG. = Zeitschrift der Deutschen Morgenländischen Gesellschaft
 L SANSKRIT INDEX.
The references in both Indexes are to paragraphs.
a-, an-, negative particle com-
pounded with nouns 251,
655.
yams- 'attain', pr. 470, sj. 471,
impv. 472 ; pf. 482 c a, 4S5,
sj. 487, o p t 489, p t 493;
root aor. 500, inj. 503; opt.
504, prec. 504; a-aor. opt.
$11 j j-aor.sj.523; inf.585,4.
\amh- 'compress', pf. 482c a ;
p. 358, n. 9.
airamTm, I. s. aor. ykram-
66 c ¡1 2.
y a i f - 'mutilate', pr. impv. 472;
pr. p t 473; <>aor. 529.
¿¿fan, root aor. of ghas- 499.
aitkhaya- den., sj. 569 a.
\ a c - 'bend', pr. 422, impv.
426; ps. pr. 445, pt. 447,
impf. 448; gd. 591 a.
accha 'towards 1 , prep, with
»ec. 595-
\aj- 'drive', pr. 422, sj. 423,
opt. 425, impv. 426, pt. 427,
impf. 428; ps. 44S, pt.447;
inf. 584 b.
\aTtj- 'anoint', pr. 464, sj. 465,
impv. 466, pt. 467, impf.
468; pf. 482 c a, 485. «j-
487, o p t 489, pt. 493; ps.
445. Pt- 447; PP- 574,2.
\at -'wander*, pr. 422, pt. 427.
ati "beyond', prep, with acc.
596-
Vad- 'eat', pr. 45«. sj- 45 2 .
°PM53> impv.454, pt. 455.
impf. 456; pp. 576 a; inf.
585,4, 586 b.
adanl- 'eating', inflected 295 c.
adhds 'below', prep, with acc.
abl. 610.
adhi 'upon', prep, with loc.
abl. acc. inst. 597.
\an- t r e a t h e ' , pr. 422, 430,
451, impv. 454, pt. 455,
impf. 456; pf. 482 c, 485 ;
V-aor. 529; cs. 556.
anakf- 'eyeless' 340.
anajvak- 'ox' 351 a.
andiamahai, pf. sj. yams-
482 c a.
««»'after', prep.with acc.598.
antdr 'between', prep, with
loc. abl. acc. 599.
antard 'between', prep, with
acc. 611.
anyd- 'other' 403, I.
dp- 'water' 334.
apad- 'footless' 319 a.
a/as- n. 'work' and apds- 'ac-
tive', inflected 344.
dpi 'upon', prep, with loc. 600.
abhanas, 2. s. impf. \bhanj-
66 c 2 ; p. 345, note I 0 .
abhi 'towards', prep, with acc.
601.
abhitas 'around', prep, with
acc. 612.
yam- 'injure', pr. 422, 451,
inj. 424, pt. 427; red. aor.
S>4; cs. 555.
amba, f. voc. 374 (p. 265).
aydm 'this', inflected 393.
ay as 2. s. aor. \'yaj- 66 c 2, 522.
aratiya- den., sj. 569 a.
ari- devout', inflected 380 b 3.
yare- 'shine', 'praise', pr. 422,
sj. 423, inj. 424, impv. 426,
pt.427, impf. 428; ps. 445,
pt. 447; pf. 482 c a, 485;
cs. 556; inf. 585,1.
arthaya- den., sj. 569 a, impv.
569 d.
yarh- 'deserve', pr. 422, sj.
423, p t 427; pf. 485; inf.
581, 1.
arhire, 3. pi. pf. 482 c a.
yav- 'favour', pr. 422, sj. 423,
inj. 424, opt. 425, impv. 426,
pt. 427, impf. 428; pf. 482 c,
485; root aor. opt., prec.
504; if aor. 529, sj. 530, inj.
531, impv. 533; ft. 537, p t
538 ;pp-5 74>i«; ¡if. 585.4-
ava-'thit', pron., inflected 396.
ava 'down', prep, with abl.602.
avayas, nom. of avayaj- 66
c /J I ; 302.
avds 'down from', prep, with
abl. 613.
avi- 'sheep' p. 283 (top).
yai- 'eat', pr. 476, o p t 477,
impv. 478, pt. 479, impf.
480; pf. 482 c, 485; if-
aor. 529, inj. 5 3 1 ; pp.
, 575 b-
diman- 'stone', inflected 329.
vI. as- 'be', pr. 451, »j. 452,
inj. 452, opt.453, impv.454,
pt. 455, impf. 456; p t 482c,
485.
J/2, at- 'throw', pr. 439, impv.
441, p t 442,impf.443.456»
pf. 485; ft- 537; ps- 445;
pp. 572; inf. 585.4-
asdu 'that', inflected 394.
askfta, root aor. of kf- 'make'
5<x>.
asmaia 'of us' 390, I.
asrat 3. s. aor. \sras- 6 6 c 0 2 ;
499-
\ a h - 'say', pf. 482 c, 485.
ahdm 'I', inflected 391, I.
a 'near', prep, with loc. abl.
acc. 603.
ad 'then', Sandhi of 67.
an- pf. red. syllable 482 c a.
I -ana pf. pt. suffix 491.
: yap- 'obtain', pr. 470, impv.
I 472, impf. 474, p t 479; pf.
1 482 c, 485, p t 493; prec.
504; a-aor. 508, o p t 5 1 1 ;
des. 542, sj. 544.
abhu- 'present', inflected 383.
yar- 'praise'(?), pr. 439.
avayas, nom. of avayaj- 302.
avis 'openly', adv. with yas-,
ythi-, ykr- 651.
yds- 'sit*, pr.451, sj.45», o p t
453. >n>pv- 454. pt. 455.
impf. 456.
yi- 'go', pr. 432, 439, 451,
sj. 452, inj. 424, 452, opt.
453. impv.426,454, pt. 427,
442, 455; i m P f - 428, 456;
pf. 482 c, 485, pt. 492;
plup. 495; ft- 537, 539, pt-
538; gdv. 578,1; inf. 585,
1, 4, 5. 6, 7. 587 b ; gd.
590 b, 591 b.
ying- ' m o r e ' cs. 554 a.
i4- 'refreshment' 304.
yidh- 'kindle', pr. 464, sj. 465,
impv. 466; pf. 485; root
438
aor. sj. 502, opt. 504, pt. ulaka- p. 59, note 490; plup. = pf. inj. 495;
506; ps. 44>, impv. 446, \'uf- 'burn', p. 422, inj. 424, »/-aor. 529, sj. 530.
pt. 447,455, 467, impf.468; impv. 426, pt. 427, 479. ianlyams- 'younger', inflected
pp. 573; inf. 584 b, 586 a. u as- f. ' d a w n ' 44 a 3 ; 344 346-
\ i n v - 'send', pr. 422, 470, sj. (P- 233)- ykam- 'love', pf. pt. 493; cs.
423, impv. 426,472, pt. 427, ,555. *j- 559 b, pt. 559 e.
impf. 474. uli- 'aid', d . s . = inf. 585,3 karman- 'act', inflected 329.
iya/ha, 2. s. pf. \'i- 485. contracted dat. s. p. 282; yiaf- 'scratch', impf. 42S.
V'/-'bequiet', cs.554.a0r.560a. inst. s. = inst. pi. p. 287. y i a s - 'open', pr. impv. 426;
] / l . i f - ' d e s i r e ' , pr.430, sj. 431, unaya- den., aor. 570. PP- 573-
inj. 432, opt. 433, impv.434, yI. uh- 'remove', pr. 422, yia. == ytan- 'enjoy', pf.
pt.435, impf. 436; g d . 5 9 1 a. impv. 426, impf. 428. 485. Pt- 493-
if- 'send', pr. 430, 439, \2. uh- 'consider', pr. 422, ytas- 'appear', intv. 545, I,
476, inj. 432, impf. 436, 45« (3- Pi ). P«- 455; pf- 546, 547, pt- 548, impf.
impv. 441, pt. 442, 479; 482 c, 485; ¿ aor. pt. 5 2 7 ; 549; cs. 556 a.
. 4 8 5 ; pp. 575 b. ¿r-aor. 529. kirtaya- den., sj. 569 a.
ifanaya- den., impf. 569 f.; ykup- ' b e angry', pr. pt. 4 4 2 ;
inf. 585, I a 3 ; 588 c or. yr- 'go', pr- 4 3 ° . 458, 470, cs. 5 5 3 b ; pp. 575 b.
isartya- den., impv. 569 d. sj. 4 3 1 , 4 7 1 , inj. 4 7 1 , impv. yiuj- 'hum', pr. pt. 427.
ifaya- den., opt. 569 c. 434, 460, 472, pt. 473, impf. ykii4- 'burn', cs. 554 a, sj.
474; pf. 482 c, 485, pt. 559 b.
V'~ = V>; P ^ 451- 492, 493; root aor. 500, y 1. kr- ' m a k e ' , pr. 4 5 1 , 470
yrif' 'see', pr. 422, pt. 427, inj. 503, opt. 504, pt. 506; (inflected), s j . 4 7 1 , inj. 4 7 1 ,
impf. 428; aor. 5 2 9 ; es. a-aor. 508, sj. 509, inj. 5 10, opt. 471, 'mpv. 472, pt. 473,
554; gdv. 580 a. impv. 5 1 2 ; r e d . aor. 5 1 4 ; impf. 4 7 4 ; pf- 482 a, 485
iiikh- 'swing', cs. 554 a, sj. intv. 5 4 5 , 2 , 546; cs. 558 a, (inflected), opt. 489, pt. 492,
559 b, pp. 575 c. aor. 560, pp. 575 c, gd. 493; P'up. 495; root aor.
\Td- 'praise', pr. 451, sj. 452. 590 b, 591 a, b. (inflected) 498, 499, 500,
inj. 452, opt. 453, impv. rghaya- den., inj. 569 b. sj. 502, inj. 503, opt. 504,
454, Pt. 455; pf- 482 c, yr/- 'direct', pr. 430, 439, prec. 504, impv. 505, pt.
a
4 8 5 ; PP- 575 3; gd»- 464, impv. 434, pt. 442, 506; a-aor. 508, impv. 5 1 2 ;
578,4, 580. 467, impf. 468. j-aor. 5 2 2 ; ft. 537, 539 (in-
\lr- 'set in motion', pr. 451, y r » v 'go', pr. 430. flected), sj. 538, pt. 538;
sj. 452, impv. 454, impf. rtaya- den., inj. 569 b. des. 542 b ; intv. 545, 3, pt.
428,456, pt. 455; pf. 482 c, r t i 'without', prep, with abl. 548; ps. 445, pt. 447, aor.
4 8 5 ; cs. 554 a, sj. 559 b. 615. 5 0 1 ; pp. 573; gdv. 578, 1,
Y's- 'be master', pr. 422, 451, yrd- 'stir', pr. 422, impv. 434, 5 8 1 ; inf. 585,4,586 b, 587 b ;
inj. 424, opt. 453, pt. 455. impf. 436; cs. 553 c, sj. gd. 590 a, b, c, 591 b.
impf. 428; 'be able to' with 559 b. y z . kr- 'commemorate', v-aor.
inf. 587 a a, b a. y r d h - 'thrive', pr. 470, sj. 464, 5 2 9 ; intv. 545, 2, 546, 547,
V'lf- 'move', pr. 422, inj. 424, impv. 441, pt. 467, impf. aor. 5 5 0 b , gdv. 578, I.
impv.426,pt.427; pp.575b. 474; pf. 485; root aor. sj. y I . tyt- 'cut', pr. 430, inj.
\ih- 'desire', pr. 4 2 2 ; pf. 485. 502, opt. 504, prec. 504, 432, impv. 434, pt. 435,
pt. 506; a-aor. opt. 5 1 1 ; impf. 436; pf. 485; a-aor.
«particle647; Sandhiof7ib. des. 542, pt. 544; ps. 445, 508, pt. 5 1 2 ; ft. 537, 539;
V«- 'proclaim' 451, 470. impv. 446; gdv. 578,4. gd. 591 a.
yuis- 'sprinkle', pr. pt. 4 2 7 ; yr-s- 'injure'(?), s-aor. pt. 527. y 2 . krt- 'spin', pr. 464; ps.
« - a o r . 529; cs. 554 a ; pp. i / 7 - 'rush', pr. 422, 430, sj. pr. pt. 447.
575 • I- 423, inj. 424, impv. 426, y/trp- 'lament', pr. 422, pt.
\uc- 'be pleased', pr. 437, Pt- 427, 435- 427, impf. 428; plup. 495;
impv. 4 4 1 ; pf. 482 c, 485, root aor. 500; if-aor. 5 2 9 ;
pt. 492. ika- ' o n e ' 403, 2, 406 a I. cs. 554.
yud- 'wet', pr. 464, impv. 466, ika-pad- 'one-footed' 3 1 9 a. krpana- den., sj. 569 a.
pt. 427, 467, impf. 468; pf. yej- ' s t i r ' , pr. 422, sj. 423, \ k f i - 'be lean', p r . i m p v . 434;
485; ps. 445- impv. 426, pt. 427, impf. pf. 485; cs. 553 c.
üpa 'up to', prep, with acc. 428. ykrf- 'plough', pr. 422, 430,
loc. i n s t 604. yedh- 'thrive', pr. 422, impv. inj.424, impv.426, p t . 4 3 5 ;
upari 'above', prep, with acc. 426; ;>aor. opt. 532. pf. 485; r e d . aor. 5 1 4 ; intv.
614. ena- 'he, she, it', inflected 395. 545, 2, 547, impf. 549.
yubj- 'force', p r . i m p v . 434, p t ykf-'scatter', pr. 430, sj. 4 3 1 ,
435. impf. 4 3 6 ; pp. 575 »1. okivams• pf. pt. 492 a. impv. 434; if-»or. sj. 530.
yubh- 'confine', pr. impv. 434, yklp- 'be adapted', pr. 422,
impf. 468, 480. id- "who?', pron. 397. opt. 425, impv. 426, pt. 427,
urufyd- den., sj. 569 a, opt kanfoya- den., ft. and pp. 570. impf. 428; pf. 482, 4 8 5 ; sj.
569 e, i m p t . 569 d, impf. yian- 'enjoy, pr. pt. 442; pf. 4 8 7 ; red. aor. 5 1 4 , sj. 515;
569 f ; pp. 574, 2. 482, sj. 487, inj. 488, impv. « 553 d, 559 (inflected), sj.
 439

559b.impT.559 d(inflected); 1 opt. 425, pt. 427, impf. 428, ! 479, impf. 436; inf. 585,7,
g d . 590 b. pf. 485; ft. pt. 538; pp. 588 c.
ykrakf- 'crash', pr. pt. 427. 574,2; i n f . 5 8 6 b ; g d . 5 9 0 a . gr- 'awake', p f . 4 8 2 ; red.
kranla, root aor. ( kr-, p. 367, \ihi- = than-, pf. pt. 492. aor. 512, impv. 5 1 8 ; intv.
n. »6. \th Id- 'chew', pr. 422, impv. , 5 4 5 . 1 b , 546, 547. Pt- 548,
yirand- 'cry out', pr. 422, inj. 426, pt. 427; pf. 482b, 485. impf. 549. pf- 55°-
424, impv. 426. pt. 427, I Hid- 'tear', pr. 420, inj. 432, \gfdh- 'be greedy', pr. pt.
impf. 428; pf. 485, sj. 487; opt. 433. impr. 434, pt. 442; pf. 482, 485; a-aor.
plup. 4 9 5 ; a-aor. inj. 510; 435, impf. 436; pf.pt.482d, I 508, inj. 510.
r e d . a o r . 5 1 4 , inj. 5 1 6 ; x-aor. 492 b. i gfbhäya- den., impv. 569 d.
5 2 2 ; intv. 545,3, 546, pt. yihttd- 'futuere', pr. impv. 434. \'gf- 'swallow', pr. 430, 4 7 9 ;
548; cs. 556 a. \khyä- 'see', pf. 4 8 5 ; a-aor. root aor. sj. 502; red. aor.
ykram- 'stride', pr. 422, sj. 508, inj. 510, impv. 5 1 2 ; 5 1 4 ; <>-aor. inj. 5 3 1 ; intv.
423, inj. 424, opt. 425, gdv. 578,3; inf. 584 a ; gd. 545, l b , 2 a, 5 4 7 ; pp. 5 7 6 ;
impv. 426, 434. pt. 427. 591 a. gd. 591 a.
impf. 4 2 8 ; pf. 485, inj. 488, gi- 'cow', inflected 365.
pt- 4 9 3 ; root aor. 66, 4 a, ygad- 'say', pr. impv. 426. gopiya- den., impv. 569 d ;
499. inj- S ° 3 ; 5 ° 8 ; .\gam- 'go', pr. 422, 4 5 1 , sj. p. 402, n. ».
x-aor. 522, sj. 5 2 3 ; is-aor. 423, opt. 425, impv. 426, gdha, 3. s. root aor. \ghas~,
529 (inflected:, inj. 531, pt. 427, impf. 428; pf. 485, | [5. 367, note »J.
i m p v . 533, ft. 537; intv. opt. 489, pt. 49a, 4 9 3 ; plup gna• 'woman', 367 (bottom);
547 c ; pp. 5 7 4 . 2 ; inf. 584 b ; 495; periphr.pf. 496, 5 6 0 b ; p. 263, note
g d . 591 a. root aor. 499, 500, sj. 502, ygrath- 'tie', pr. 464; pp.
ykrb 'buy', pr. 476, sj. 477, 1 inj. 503, opt. 504, prec. 504, 575 « 2 .
impf. 480; gd. 590 b. ' impv. 505, pt.506; a-aor.508, ygrabh- 'seize', pr. 4 7 6 (in-
ykrVf- 'play', pr. 422, sj. 423, sj 5 o 9 , i n j . 5 i o , o p t . 5 l l ; red. flected), sj. 477. inj. 477,
pt. 427. aor. 5 1 4 ; x-aor. 522, if-aor. impv. 478, impf. 480; pf.
ykrudh- *be angry', pr. 439; opt. 532, impv. 533; ft. 537, 485, opt. 489, pt. 492; plup.
a-aor. inj. 510; red. aor. 539, periph. ft. 540; des. 495; root aor. 499, 500;
512, sj. 515, inj. 516; cs. ' 542; intv. 545, 1 , 3 , 546; a-aor. 508; <>aor. 5 2 9 ; cs.
553 b ; PP- 573- cs. 555 a; ps. 445, aor. 501 ; J 5 5 4 ; PP- 575 b ; inf. 5 8 4 b ;
ykrui- 'cry out', pr. 422, impv. i PP- 572. 5 7 4 , 2 ; inf. 585,4, gd. 591 a
426, pt. 4 2 7 ; xa-aor. 536. 5, 7. 587 b ; gd. 590 b, c.
\'gras- 'devour', pr. opt. 4 2 5 ;
\ ksad- 'divide', pr. 422; pf. J'gar/i- 'chide', pr. 422.
:
pf. opt. 489, pt. 4 9 3 ; PP-
485, pt. 493; inf. 585. I- Vi-.f-i- 'go', pr. 458, inj. 459, 575 b-
y i f a n - 'wound', ij-aor. inj. impv. 460, pt. 461, impf. \'grah- 'seize', pr. 476, opt.
5 3 1 ; PP- 574,2- 462; pf. 489; root aor. 499,
477, impv. 478, pt. 4 7 9 ,
\'ksam- 'endure', pr. opt. 425, sj. 502, inj. 503, impv. 505;
impf 480; pf. 4 8 5 ; /i-aor.
impv. 426, pt. 427; pf.opt. x-aor. inj. 524; des. 542 c ;
inj. 5 1 0 ; y-aor. 5 2 9 ; pp.
489. inf. 585,4
575 b ; gd. 590 b, 591 a.
ykfar- 'flow', pr. 422, inj. 424, gi- 'sing', pr. 439, inj.
grdvan- 'pressing-stone', in-
impv. 426, pt. 427, impf. 440, impv. 441, pt. 4 4 2 ;
flected 331.
428; x-aor. 522; inf. 585, 7. x-aor. inj. 524; sis-aor. 534;
\gli- 'be weary', pr. pt. 442;
yifä- 'burn', cs. 558. l - pt- 447; I P- 574, 3-
,r
cs. 558.
yi. kfi- 'possess', pr. 422, 430, gäluyn- den., impv. 569 d
4 5 ' . sj. 452. opt. 425,433, ! \'gik- 'plunge', pr. 422, opt. yghas- 'eat', pr. sj. 4 5 2 ; pf.
Pt- 427, 435, 455. impv. 425, impv. 426, pt. 427, 485, opt. 489, pt. 4 9 2 ; root
434, x-aor. sj. 523; ft. 537, impf. 428; intv. 545,2 a, 546. aor. 499, impv. 505; x-aor.
Pt- 538; cs. 557 a, 558 a. ygu- 'sound', intv. 5 4 5 , 1 , 546. 522; des. 542 (p. 389, top);
\'2. ifi- 'destroy', pr. 439,47°, \'guf>- 'protect', pf. 485 (cp. PP- 5 7 4 . 3 « -
476, inj. 477. impf. 480; p. 358, note '3); ft. 537, V ^ V ' s o u n d ' , pr. sj. 423,
x-aor. inj. 524; ps. 445, pt. 539; PP- 575 t>- pt. 4 2 7 ; c i . 553 b ; ps. aor.
447- \'gur- 'greet', pr. impv. 434; 5 0 1 ; gd. 591 a.
yi;ip- 'throw', pr. 430, inj. pf. sj. 487, opt. 489; root j yghf 'drip', pr. 4 5 8 ; cs. 5 5 7 c ,
432, impv. 434, pt. 435; aor. 5 CO; intv. 545, 2a; pp.; ps. pt. 561 a.
red. aor. inj. 516. 573 a ; gd- 591 a- yghri- 'smell', p . 458.
yift- = ifi- 'destroy', pp. yguh- 'hide', pr. 422, inj.
576 d. 424, impv. 426, jit. 427, ycaks- 'see', pr. 422, 4 5 1 ,
ykfud- 'be agitated', 'crush', impf. 428; a-aor. 508, inj. impv. 454, impf. 428, 4 5 6 ;
pr. 422, pt. 4 4 2 ; cs. 553 b. 510, pt. 512 a ; xa-aor. pf. 485; plup. 495; cs.
ykfudh- 'be hungry', cs. aor. 536; des. 542; ps. pt. 4 4 7 ; 556 a ; gdv. 578, 4 ; inf.
inj. 510. PP- 573! gdv- 578, 4; gd- 584 b, 5 8 5 , 1 , 588 a ; gd.
ykfuik- 'quake', pf. 485. 590 a. 591 a, b.
ykfnu-"whet', pr. 451, p t 455. gürdhaya- den., impv. 569 d. cakfus- 'eye', inflected 342.
V't- ? r - 'sing', pr- 476. inj. ycat- 'hide', pr. pt. 427; cs.
ykhan- 'dig', pr. 422, sj. 423, 477, impv. 434, 478, pt. 555. P t 559 e-
440 I. ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4 . VEDIC GRAMMAR.

catuspad- 'four-footed'319 a. \jakf 'eat', gd. 590 b, c. sj. 423, opt. 425, impv. 426
yean- 'be pleased', v-aor. \jajh-, pr. pt. 427. (top), pt. 427; inf. 585,7.
impv. 533. \jahj- pr. pt. 427. \jfmbh- 'gape', pr. 422.
canasya- den., impv. 569 d. j,'jan- 'generate', pr. 422, sj. \jf- 'waste away', pr. 422,
ear- 'move', pr. 422, sj. 423, 423, inj. 424, impv. 426, 439, impv. 426, pt. 427,
inj. 424, opt. 425, impv. 454, pt- 427, impf. 428, 435, impf. 44!; pf- 485,
426, pt. 427, impf. 4 2 8 ; 4 5 6 ; pf. 485, pt. 493; root pt. 4 9 2 ; <>aor. inj. 5 3 1 ; cs.
pf. 485; red. aor. 5 1 4 ; if aor. 500; red. aor. 514 (in- 557 c; pp. 576 e.
aor. 529, inj. 5 3 1 ; ft. 539; flected), inj. 516; z;-aor. Jtjeh- 'pant', pr. pt. 427.
intv. 545, 2 b, 546, s s i ; pp. 529, opt. 5 3 2 ; ft. 537.539; \jha- 'know', pr. 476, sj. 477,
575 » 3; ed*- 580; >nf- cs. 556, sj. 559 b, opt. 559 c, opt- 477. impv. 478, pt.
585- *> 4. 7- pt. 559 e, impf. 559 f (in- 479. impf. 480; pf. pt. 492,
canny a- den., sj. 569a, opt. c. flected); pp. 574, 2 ; gdv. 492 a; root aor. opt. 504;
carmamna• 'tanner' p. 38 n. ' ; 580, 581; inf. 587 b; gd. red. aor. 5 1 4 ; .r-aor. 5 2 2 ;
p. 249 note 4. 590 a. des. 542; cs. 558, aor. 560;
\cal- 'stir', impf. 428; intv. jam- 'wife' 380 b 2. gdv. 578,3; ps. 445, aor.
545, 2, 546. janitor- 'begetter' 390. 501.
cakan inj. pf. 488 (cp. p. 392 \jambh- 'chew', red. aor. 514; \jya- 'overpower', pr. 439,
note 8). is-aor. 530; intv. 545, 2, 476, opt. 477, pt. 479; des.
yeJy- 'note', pr. pt. 427; «/- pt. 548; cs. 556 a. 542; ps. 445; pp. 574,2.
aor. 529; gd. 590b, 591 a. J¡jas- 'be exhausted', pr. impv. \'jyul- 'shine', cs. 553 b.
V1. ci- 'gather', pr. 422, 470, 441, pt. 427; pf.impv. 490. \jri- 'go', pr. 422; j-aor. pt.
sj- 452. 471, opt. 425, 471. jaha, 3. s. pf.? p. 357 note 4. 527-
impv. 472, pt. 473, impf. jahi, 2. s. impv. \han- 32 c;
474; pf- 485; root aor. 499; p. 50 note 9. id- 'that', inflected 392, 1 .
if aor. impv. 5 3 3 ; gd. 590b. ja- 'offspring', inflected 368. ytarns- 'shake', pf. 4 8 5 ; plup.
J/2.ii- 'note', pr. 458, impv. \ja- 'be born1, pr. 439, inj. 495; ¿¡-aor. 508; intv. 545,
460, pt. 461, 462; pf. 485; 440, opt. 440, impv. 441, 2 b; sj. 547, gdv. 579; cs.
root aor. 500; des. 542. pt. 442, impf. 443. 556 a; inf. 585,7.
\cit- 'perceive', pr. 422, 4 5 1 , janivams• pf. pt. 482 d. \tak- 'rush', pr. 4 5 1 , impf.
inj. 424, impv.426, pt. 427, jaraya- den., ps. aor. 501. 456.
impf. 428; pf. 485, sj. 487, \ji- 'conquer', pr. 422, 4 5 1 , ytaks- 'fashion', pr. 422, sj.
impv. 490, pt. 492, 4 9 3 ; sj. 423, inj. 424, opt. 425, 423, inj. 424, impv. 426,
plnp. 4 9 J ; root aor. 499, impv. 426, pt. 427, impf. 454, pt- 427, impf. 428,
pt. 506; j-aor. 5 2 2 ; des. 4 2 8 ; pf. 485, pt 492; root 456; pf. 485; «V-aor. 529;
542, sj. 544; intv. 545, 1, aor. inj. 503, impv. 505, pp. 575 a 1.
546, 547. Pt 548; cs. 553, red. aor. 5 1 4 ; s-aor. 522, y/l. tan- 'stretch', pr. 470, sj.
554. sj- 559 b, opt. 559 c; »j- 523. inj- 524; ft- 537. 4 7 1 , inj. 4 7 1 , impv. 472,
ps. aor. 501; pp. 573; inf. 539. pt- 538; des. 542, pt. pt. 473, impf- 474; pf- 485,
585. 2- 544; 558 a; pp. 573; sj. 487, inj. 488, opt. 489,
\/cnd- 'impel', pr. 422, inj. gdv. 581; inf. 585, I a; gd. pt.492; root aor. 499, 500;
424, impv. 426; cs. 553 b, 59' b. a-aor. 508, inj. 5 1 0 ; i-aor.
sj- 559 b, ps.pt. 561 a, pp. \ji- oxjimi- 'quicken', pr. 422,
522; cs. 555; pp. 574, 2;
470, impv. 426, pt. 427, gd. 591 b.
575 c-
impf. 428; pf. 485. Y2. tan- 'roar', pr. 439.
\cft- 'bind', pr. 430, impv.
\jrv- 'live', pr. 422, sj. 423, lanu- 'body', inflected 3 8 5 ;
434; pf. 485; inf. 586 a.
ceiaiur pf. \cit-, p. 358 n. «. opt. 425, impv. 426, pt. = 'self 400, 3.
\ccfl- 'stir', pr. pt. 427. 4 2 7 ; prec. J 0 4 ; v-aor. inj. ytand- 'be weary', pr. 422,
\cyu- 'move', pr. 422, inj. 5 3 1 ; cs. 5 5 4 a ; pp-575a3; inj- (?) 424-
424, impv.426; pf. 482b I , gdv. 581 b; inf. 585,1,4,5. \tap- 'be hot', pr. 422, sj.
485; plup. 495; red. aor. \juf 'enjoy', pr. 422, 430, 423, inj. 424, impv. 426,
514, inj. 516, opt. 5 1 7 ; 451, inj. 424, 432, sj. 431, pt 427, impf. 4 2 8 ; pf.485,
j-aor. inj. 5 2 4 ; cs. 557b. opt- 433. impv. 426, 434, sj. 487, pt. 493; red. aor.
pt- 435. impf. 436; pf.485. 514, sj. 5 1 5 ; j-aor. 522,
\'chad- or chand• 'seem', pr. sj. 487, impv. 490, pt. 492, inj. 524; cs. 555; ps. 445,
451: Pf- 485. opt. 489; 4 9 3 ; root aor. 500, sj. 502, I impv. 446, pt. 447, impf.
•r-aor. 522, sj. 5 2 3 ; cs. 556, pt. 506; ifior. sj. 530; cs. 448; aor. 501; pp. 573;
556 sj. 559 b. 553 b, sj. 559 b; pp. 573; gd. 591 a.
\chad- 'cover', c*. 555. gd. 590 a. ytam- 'faint', a-aor. inj. 510.
\chi- 'cut up', pr. 430, impv. \ju- 'be swift', pr. 422, 476, tarufa- den., inj. 569 b, opt.
434- *j- 477; Pf- 482, 485, sj- 569 c.
\chid- 'cut off', pr. 464, impv. 487, p t 492,493; inf.585,1. tat, abl. adv. 'in this way'
466; root aor. inj. 5 0 3 ; \juru- 'consume', pr. 422, sj. 629.
a-aor. 508; /-aor. inj. 524; 423, impv. 426, pt. 4 2 7 ; tij- 'be sharp', pr. 432, pt.
ps-445, aor.501; pp. 5 7 6 a ; <>aor. 529. 427; des. 542; intv. 545,1,
gd. 591 a. \jr- 'sing', pr. 422 (p. 322), 546; pp. 573-

tiros 'across', prep, with acc.
605.
tilvildya- den., impv. 569 d.
\ t u - 'be strong', pr. 451 ; pf.
482, 485; red. aor. 514;
intv. 545.3-
\tuj- 'urge', pr. 4 3 ° . 4^4.
pt. 427, 435, 467; pf. opt.
489, pt. 493; cs. 554; ps.
445, pt. 447; inf. 584 b,
58S» 1. 2-
\tud- 'thrust', pr. 430, impv.
434, pt- 435» 467. i m P f -
436; pf. 485; pp. 576 a.
\tur- »= i f . 'pass', pr. 430,
opt. 453; des. 542; cs.554;
gd. 591 a.
turanya- den., inj. 569b, impf.
569 f-
\'tus- 'drip', pr. 422, pt. 427;
cs. 553 b.
ytuf- 'be content', cs. 554.
\'turv- 'overcome', pr. 422,
impv. 426, pt. 427.
\trd- 'split', pr. 464, impf.
468; pf. 485, pt. 493; root
aor. sj. 502 ; des. 542, sj.
544; pp. 576 a ; inf. 587 a.
V<rf>- 'be pleased', pr. 430,
sj. 471, impv. 434, 441.
472, pt. 435 ; pf- 482, 485,
pt. 493; a-aor. 508, inj.
510, p t $12; red. aor. 514;
des. 542, sj. 544; cs. 553c,
sj. 559 b.
V'rf 'be thirsty", pr. 439, p t
442; pf- 482, 485, pt. 493;
root aor. pt. 506 ; a-aor. 508,
inj. 510; red. aor. 514, inj.
516.
\ t r h - 'crush', pr. sj. 465, impf.
436; pf. 485; a-aor. 508;
ps. 445, impv. 446, pt. 447 ;
PP- 573; gd- 5 9 o b , c.
ytf- 'pass', pr. 422, 430, 470,
sj- 423. 431. inj. 424, 432.
opt. 425, 433, impv. 426,
434, pt. 427.435. 461. impf.
428,436; pf. 485, opt. 489,
pt. 492; red. aor. 514; is-
aor. 529, sj. 530, inj. 531,
opt. 532; intv. 545,2,3, 546,
551 ; ps.aor. 501 ; pp. 576 e ;
inf. 584 a, 5 8 5 , 7 , 9 , 586 a,
588 c ; gd. 590 a.
\tyaj- 'forsake', pf. 482 b I,
485.
ytras• 'be terrified', pr. 422,
impv. 426, impf. 428; red.
aor. 514; cs. 555.
\tra- 'rescue', pr. 439, impv.
441. 454. Pt- 442; pf- 4 8 5 ;
¿-aor. sj. 523, opt. 525,
cs. gdv. 561 b, 579; inf.
585. 8.
tripod' three-footed' 319 a. |
I. S ANSKRIT INDEX. 441
/«z/rZ-'threefold', inflected3o6. root aor. impv. 505; x-aor.
tva- 'many a one*, inflected inj. 525; ps. 445. Pt- 4 4 7 ;
396- PP- 574, 3 « . 576 c.
yivaif- 'fashion', pr. pt. 455. \ y d a - 'bind', impf. 443; p s .
tvam 'thou', inflected 391,2. aor. 501; pp. 574.3
ytvar- 'make haste', cs. 556. ydas- 'make offering', pr. 422,
ytv:s- 'be stirred', impf. 436, 451. 470, sj. 423, opt. 425,
456; pf.485, p t 4 9 3 ; plup- pt. 455, impf. 428; pf.
495; PP- 575 b ; inf. 584 b. 485, sj.487, pt.492, 492 b.
ytsar- 'approach stealthily', ydis- 'point', pr. 430, opt.
pr. 422, impf. 428; pf. 434. Pt- 4 3 5 ; Pf- 485. sj.
485; i-aor. 522. 487, impv. 490; plup. 495;
root aor. 500; s-aor. 522;
yjams- 'bite', pr. impv. 426, intv. 545,1, 546, impf. 549,
pt. 427; pf. p t 492; intv. 5 5 « ; pp- 573; in/- 584 b.
5452 b, p t 548; pp. 574,2. ydih- 'smear', pr. sj. 452, pt.
|/dakf- 'be able', pr. 422, 455, impf. 456; pp. 573-
impv. 426, p t 427; gdv. y\.di- 'fly', pr. 439, inj. 440,
579- impv. 441, p t 442, impf.
ydagh• 'reach to', root aor. 443-
inj. 503; prec. 504, impv. 1/2. di- 'shine', pr. 458, sj.
,5°5- 459, impv. 460, pt. 461,
dan, g. of dam- 'house', p. 37 impf. 462; pf. 482, 485,
(bottom); 6 6 , 4 a ; 338. sj. 487, pt. 492.
ydan- 'straighten'?, pr. sj. ydip- 'shine', pr. 439, impv.
452, inj. 452. 441; red. aor. inj. 516; cs.
danl- 'tooth' 313. 554 a-
ydabh- or dambh- 'harm', pr. \'dtv- 'play", pr. 439, inj. 440;
422, 470, sj. 423, inj. 424, pf. 485; pp. 573 « ; g d -
impv. 472; pf. 485, inj. 591 a.
488; root aor. 499, inj. 503; yd»- or du- 'burn', pr. 470,
des. 542, sj. 544; cs. 556 a ; Pt- 473; V-aor. sj. 530; pp.
ps- 4 4 5 ; gdv. 5 7 8 , 4 ; inf. 576 d.
584 b. \>dudh- 'stir up', pp. 575 b.
ydam- 'control', cs. 556. durasyd- den., sj. 569 a.
damanya- den., impf. 569 f. duvasyd- den., sj. 569 a, opt.
daiasya- den., opt. 569c, impv. 569 c, impv. 569 d.
569 d. yduf- 'spoil*, pr. 4 3 9 ; r e d -
ydas- or das- 'waste', pr. 422, aor. 514, inj. 516; ft. cs.
537. 5 6 0 ; cs- 554-
439. sj- 423. inj- 424. Pt-
427, opt. 440; pf. pt. 492; dus- 'ill', adverbial particle as
a-aor. inj. 510, pt. 512; first member of compounds
» • a o r . inj. 5 3 1 ; cs. 555. 251, 657.
ydah- 'burn', pr. 422, 439, \'duh- 'milk', pr. 422, 451.
451, sj. 423, inj. 424. impv- sj. 452, o p t 453, impv. 454,
426, pt. 427, impf. 428; pt. 455, impf. 436, 4 5 6 ;
j-aor. 522, inj. 524, p t . 5 2 7 ; pf. 485, pt. 493; i-aor. 522,
ft- 537. pt- 5 3 » ; PP- 573- inj. 524, o p t 525; xa-aor.
y 1. di- 'give', pr. 422, 458, 536; des. 542, pt. 544; ps.
sj. 459, inj. 424, 459, opt. 445. Pt- 4 4 7 ; PP- 573; >nf-
459, impv. 426, 460, pt. 585. 1. 7-
461, impf.428, 462; pf.485, duJabha-, Sandhi of, p. 70
pt. 492; root aor. 499, 500, note 3; 8 1 , 1 b.
sj. 502, inj. 503, opt. 504; yi.dr- 'pierce', pr. 451; pf.
impv. 505; a-aor. 508; 485, pt.492; root aor. 499;
S-IOT. 522, sj. 523, inj. 5 2 4 ; > a o r . sj. 523, o p t 525;
ft- 537. Pt- 538; des- 5 4 2 ; intv. 545,1,2, 546, 547, pt-
cs. 558 ; ps. 445. a<>r- 5 ° ' i 547, impf. 549; cs. 557 c.
PP- 572. 573 «. 5 7 4 . 3 « ; yi. dr- 'heed', gd. 591 b.
gdv. 578, 3; inf. 584 a, ydrp- 'rave', a-aor. 508; pp.
5 8 5 , 4 . 5 . 8 , 9 , 586b, 587b; 575 b.
gd. 590 b, c, 591 a. y d f i- 'see', pf. 485, pt. 492,
y2. di- 'divide', pr. 422,430, 493; root aor. 499, 500, sj.
451, impv. 426, 434, inj. 502, pt. 506; a-aor. 508,
440, impv. 441. pt. 442, inj. 510, opt. 5 1 1 ; i-aor.
impf. 436; pf. pt. 493; 5 M . » j - S 2 3 i des. 542, gdv.
442 I. ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4. V E D I C GRAMMAR.
5 4 4 1 , 5 8 0 ; cs. 5 5 3 c ; p s . 440; root aor. 4 9 9 ; cs.
4 4 5 , aor. 5 0 1 ; g d v . 5 8 0 ; 558; PP- 5 7 4 ; i n f . 5 ^ 5 . 1 , 4 .
inf. 584 b, 5 8 5 , 2 , 586 b, VI dhav- 'run', pr. 4 2 2 , sj.
588 a ; g d . 590 b , c, 591 a. 4 2 3 , inj. 424, i m p v . 4 2 6 ,
\'dfh- ' b e firm', pr. 430, i m p v . p t 4 2 7 ; plup. 4 9 5 .
426, 4 4 1 , pt. 4 3 5 , impf. y2. dhav- ' w a s h ' , pr. 4 2 2 ,
4 2 8 , 4 3 6 ; p f . p t . 4 9 3 ; plup. i m p v . 4 2 6 ; »>-aor. 529.
495". if-»or- 5 2 9 ! cs. 5 5 4 a ; dht- ' t h o u g h t ' , i n f l e c t e d 3 7 6 .
PP- 573- \'dhl- ' t h i n k ' , pr. sj. 4 5 9 , pt.
devi-, i n f l e c t e d 378. 461, i m p f . 4 6 2 ; j f. 4 8 2 ;
dehi, pr. i m p v . yd a- ' g i v e ' .r-aor. pt. 527.
62, 4 b . dhunaya- d e n . , inj. 5 6 9 b ,
dyav- ' h e a v e n ' , i n f l e c t e d 364. i m p v . 569 d.
\dyut- ' s h i n e ' , pr. 422, i m p v . yd/tu- ' s h a k e ' , pr. 430, 470,
4 2 6 , p t 4 2 7 ; pf. 482 b I, sj. 4 4 ' . impv. 446. 472,
485, pt. 4 9 3 ; r o o t aor. pt. pt. 4 7 3 , i m p f . 4 7 4 ; p f . 4 8 5 .
5 0 6 ; r e d . a o r . 5 1 4 , inj. inj. 488, opt. 4 8 9 ; r o o t aor.
5 1 6 ; intv. 5 4 5 . 3 , 546, pt. pt. 5 0 6 ; r e d . a o r . 514;
547, i m p f . 5 4 9 ; cs. 553 b , > a o r . 5 2 2 ; i n t v . 5 4 5 , I, 3,
554- 546, pf. 5 5 0 ; g d . 591 a.
dyaus, a c c e n t u a t i o n o f v o c . dhiipaya- d e n . , i m p f . 569 f.
85. 93. 364 n o t e i i (p. 247). ydhui v-'injure', pr.422, impv.
yi. dra- ' r u n ' , pr. i m p v . 4 5 4 ; 426, pt. 4 2 7 .
pf. pt. 4 9 3 ; j-aor. sj. 5 2 3 ; \'dhr- ' h o l d ' , r e d . a o r . 5 1 4 ,
i n t v . pt. 5 4 7 . inj. 5 1 6 , i m p v . 5 1 8 ; pf.
]/2. dra- ' s l e e p ' , pp. 5 7 6 c. 4 8 2 , 4 8 5 ; r o o t aor. i n j . 5 0 3 ;
ydru- 'run', pr. 422, i m p v . ft- 5 3 7 , 5 3 9 ; intv. 5 4 5 . 2 ,
426, pt. 4 2 7 , i m p f . 4 2 8 ; 546, i m p f . 5 4 9 ; c s . 557 c,
p f . 4 8 5 ; r e d . aor. 5 1 4 , inj. sj. 5 5 9 b , opt. 5 5 9 c, ft.
5 1 6 ; c s . 557 b . 5 3 7 . 5 6 0 ; PS- 4 4 5 , > m p v .
\druh- ' b e h o s t i l e ' , pf. 4 8 5 ; 4 4 6 ; inf. 585, I , 8, 588 b.
a-aor. 508, inj. 5 1 0 ; pp. ydhff• ' d a r e ' , pr. i m p v . 4 7 2 ;
573- pf. 4 8 5 , sj. 4 8 7 , inj. 488,
Ydru- 'hurl'(?), pr. pt. 4 7 9 . p t 4 9 2 ; plup. 4 9 5 ; a - a o r .
dvipad- ' t w o - f o o t e d ' 3 1 9 a. inj. 5 1 0 , pt. 5 1 2 ; pp. 5 7 5 b ;
dvif- ' h a t r e d ' , i n f l e c t e d 340. g d v . 5 7 8 , 4 ; inf. 584 b .
ydvif- ' h a t e ' , pr. 4 5 1 , sj. 452, ydkraj- ' s w e e p ' , pr. p t . 4 2 7 ,
i m p v . 4 5 4 , p t 4 5 5 ; sa-zoi. i m p f . 428.
inj- 5 3 6 ; g d v . 5 7 8 , 4 , 580. ydhvams- 'scatter*, p f . 4 8 5 ;
dvtpa- ' i s l a n d ' 255, 4. a-aor. 5 0 8 ; c s . 5 5 6 .
ydkvan- ' s o u n d ' , c s . 5 5 5 , a o r .
ydhan- 'run', pf. sj. 487, opt. 5 6 0 0 ; pp. 5 7 4 , 2 « .
489; cs. 556. ydhvr- ' i n j u r e ' , .r-aor. 5 2 2 ;
ydhattv- ' r u n ' , pr. 422, s j . 4 2 3 , d e s . 5 4 2 ; inf. 5 8 5 , I.
i m p v . 4 2 6 ; pf. 485, pt. 4 9 2 ;
iV-aor. 529. na ' l i k e ' , S a n d h i o f 6 7 , p. 63
dhanvan• ' b o w ' , i n f l e c t e d 3 3 1 .
n o t e 9.
ydham- or dhma- ' b l o w ' , pr. naiis, i n d e c l . p r o n . , o l d n o m .
4 2 2 , i m p v . 4 2 6 , pt. 4 2 7 , s i n g . 381 b (p. 2 7 9 , b o t t o m ) .
i m p f . 4 2 8 : ps. 4 4 5 ; PP-
nakta- n. ' n i g h t ' , i r r e g . n o m .
5 7 4 . 2. 5 7 5 b- du. 372.
ydhav- ' f l o w ' , i m p f . 428. ynakf- ' a t t a i n ' , pr. 422, inj.
I . dha- ' p u t ' , pr. 422, 458, 4 2 4 , i m p v . 426, pt. 4 2 7 ,
s j . 4 5 9 , opt. 4 5 9 , i m p v . 460,i m p f . 4 2 8 ; pf. 485.
pt. 4 6 1 , i m p f . 4 6 2 ; pf. 485, ynad- ' s o u n d ' , pr. ( t . 4 2 7 ,
i m p v . 4 9 0 ; r o o t a o r . 499, i m p f . 4 2 8 ; intv. 5 4 5 , 1 b,
5 0 0 ; a - a o r . 5 0 8 ; i-aor. sj. 546, pt. 548; c s . 5 5 6 .
523, inj. 5 2 4 ; des. 542, nadbhyas, d a t . oinapal- 6 2 , 3 b ;
»j- 544. g d v . 5 7 9 ; c s . 558, 321 note
sj- 5 5 9 b ; p s . 4 4 5 , i m p v . ynand- ' r e j o i c e ' , pr. 4 2 2 .
4 4 6 , pt. 4 4 7 , aor. 5 0 1 , sj. ynabh• ' b u r s t ' , pr. i m p v . 426.
502, inj. 503, opt. 504, \frtam- *bend', pr. 4 2 2 , sj.
i m p v . 5 0 5 ; pp. 5 7 4 , 3 ; inf. 423, i n j . 424, i m p v . 426,
5 8 4 a, 5 8 5 , 4 , 5 , 7 , 586 a, p t 427, impf. 428; pf. 482,
587 b ; g d . 591 a. 4 8 5 ; p l u p . 4 9 5 ; r e d . aor.
yz. dka- 'soclc', p r . 439, o p t i n j . 5 1 6 ; J aor. sj. 5 2 3 ; p t
5 2 7 ; intv. 545, 2, 546, pt.
548, i m p f . 5 4 9 ; cs. 556;
PP- 5 7 4 , 2 ; g d v . 5 8 1 ; inf.
584 b .
y l . nai- ' b e l o s t ' , pr. 439,
inj. 4 2 4 , i m p v . 4 4 1 ; pf.
4 8 5 ; r e d . aor. 5 1 4 , i " j - 5 ' 6 ;
ft- 5 3 7 , 5 3 9 ; cs. 5 5 5 , inf.
585, 7 ; PP- 573-
y2. nas- ' o b t a i n ' , pr. 4 5 1 , sj.
4 2 3 , inj. 4 2 4 ; r o o t aor. 499,
inj- 503, opt. 504, J-aor. sj.
5 2 3 ; d e s . 542 a, sj. 5 4 4 ; inf.
584 b .
ynas- 'unite', pr. 422, i n j .
4 2 4 ; r o o t aor. o p t 504.
y>tah- ' b i n d ' , pr. 4 3 9 , i m p v .
441, pt. 442, i m p f . 4 4 3 ;
pf. 4 8 5 ; ps. pt. 4 4 7 ; p p .
573-
ynilh- ' s e e k aid', pp. 5 7 5 a 2 .
yttHdh- ' s e e k a i d ' , pr. part.
4 2 7 ; PP- 5 7 5 b .
nav- ' s h i p ' , i n f l e c t e d 365.
yrtims- ' k i s s ' , pr. 4 5 1 , i m p f .
428.
yniks- ' p i e r c e ' , pr. 422, i m p v .
4 2 6 ; inf. 584 b .
X'nij- ' w a s h ' , pr. i m p v . 4 6 0 ,
pt. 4 5 5 ; a - a o r . 5 0 8 ; .r-aor.
522, inj. 5 2 4 ; intv. 545, I,
5 4 6 ( i n f l e c t e d ) , 547-
ynind- ' r e v i l e ' , pr. 422, sj.
423, i m p v . 4 2 6 ; pf. 4 8 5 ;
r o o t a o r . pt. 5 0 6 ; if-aor.
5 2 9 , sj. 5 3 ° ; d e s . 542, sj.
5 4 4 ; ps. p t . 4 4 7 ; PP- 5 7 5 a
y>u- ' l e a d ' , pr. 4 2 2 , 4 5 1 , 4 5 8 ,
sj. 4 2 3 , inj. 424, i m p v . 426,
pt. 4 2 7 , i m p f . 4 2 8 ; p f . 4 8 5 ;
sj. 4 8 7 (cp. p. 3 6 1 n o t e »),
o p t . 4 8 9 ; x-aor. 522, sj.
523, i n j . 524, i m p v . 5 2 6 ;
if-aor. 5 2 9 ; ft. 5 3 7 , 5 3 9 ;
d e s . 5 4 2 ; intv. 5 4 5 , 1 , 5 5 1 ;
ps. 445, p t . 4 4 7 , impf. 448;
i n f . 588 c ; g d . 591 a.
tiilaya- d e n . , sj. 569 a.
y 1. nu- ' p r a i s e ' , pr. 422, inj.
4 2 4 , pt. 4 2 7 , i m p f . 42S,
4 5 6 , p t . 4 3 5 ; r e d . aor. 5 1 4 ,
inj. 5 1 6 ; .r-aor. 522, inj.
524; ij-aor.529; intv.545,1,
546, 547, i m p f . 549. pf-
5 5 0 ; g d v . 578, 2.
y2. nu- ' m o v e ' , pr. 422, impf.
428.
ynud- ' p u s h ' , pr. 430, sj. 4 3 1 ,
i n j . 4 3 2 , i m p v . 434. pt-435,
i m p f . 4 3 6 ; pf. 4 8 5 ; root
a o r . inj. 5 0 3 ; v - a o r . inj.
5 3 ' ; PP- 5 7 6 » ; inf. 584 b.
y n f t - ' d a n c e ' , pr. 439, i m p v .
4 4 1 , pt. 4 4 2 ; r o o t a o r . 4 9 9 ;
a - a o r . pt. 5 1 2 ; <>-aor. 5 2 9 ;
cs. 5 5 3 c.
 443

ypao 'cook', pr. 422, 439, sj. I 424, impv. 426, pt. 427, yprak}- = prack- 'a»k', pf. 485
423, inj. 424, impv. 426, impf. 428; pf. 485. (cp. p. 359 note »); inf. 585,
pt. 427, impf. 428; pf. 485; \pibd- 'stand firm', pr. pt. 1 a.
plup. 495; i-aor. si. 523; 427. yprach- 'ask', pr. 430, sj.431,
ps. 445, pt. 447, impf. 448; \'pis- 'adorn', pr. 430, impv. opt. 433. impv. 434. P»rt-
inf. 5 8 5 , 4 ; g d . 5 9 0 b. j 4 3 4 . impf- 4 3 6 ; pf- 4 8 5 ; 435, impf. 436; j-aor. 522;
padbhts, inst. pi. 42 c, 43 b I, root aor. pt. 506; intv. 545, gdv. 544 i, 580; pp.574, I;
62, 4 b (p. 57) note 350 1 1 a. Pt. 548; ps. pt. 4 4 7 ; inf. 5 8 4 b, 5 8 6 a, b.
(p. 238 note '). ! PP- 575 b - prati 'against', prep, with acc.
\'\.pai- 'fly', pr. 422, sj. 423, ypif- 'crush', pr. 464, inj. 465, 608.
inj. 424, opt. 425, impv. j impv. 466, impf. 436, pt. praJyanc-, inflected 299.
426, pt. 427, impf. 428;
467, impf. 468; pf. 485; yprath- 'spread', pr.422, impv.
pf. 4 8 5 , opt. 4 8 9 , pt. 492; 426, pt. 427, impf. 428; pf.
1 PP- 573-
red. aor. 514, inj. 516, impv. 485 (cp. p. 357 note»), «j.
5 1 8 ; ft. 5 3 7 , 5 3 9 , pt. 5 3 8 ; ypid- 'press', pf. 485; cs. 487, inj. 488, pt. 493; root
des. 542; intv. 545, I, 546, .554 «- aor. pt. 5 0 6 ; if aor. 5 2 9 ;
5 4 7 ! cs. 5 5 5 a; pp. 5 7 2 , pur- 'stronghold', inflected 355. cs. 5 5 6 .
5 7 5 b ; inf. 5 8 5 , 4 . pur as 'before', prep, with ace. ypri- 'fill', pr. 451; pf. 485;
y*.pat- 'rule', pr. 439, pt. i abl. loc. 607. root aor. 499, (j. 502; >aor.
442. 56S ft impf- 443- purasläd 'in front o f , prep. 5 2 2 ; ps. aor. 5 0 1 .
/¿//-'husband', inflected 380b; 1 with gen. 617. pradur- 'out of doors', adv.
in compounds 280; accen- pura 'before', prep, with abL compounded with ybhu- 651.
tuation p. 95 a, p. 96, 3. I 6l 7-. priyi• m., inflected 372.
ypaJ- 'go', pr. 439. «j- 423. purotfäs- 42 c, 66 c fi I (p. 6 l , priya- f., inflected 374.
impv. 441, pt. 442, impf. mid.\ 3 4 9 b, 3 5 0 . priyaya- den., impf. 569 f.
443; pf. 485; root aor. 500, ypits• 'thrive', pr. 439, si.440, yprJ- 'please', pr. 476, pt. 479.
sj. 502, prec. 504; red. aor. opt. 440, impv. 441, pt. impf. 480; pf. sj. 487, impv.
514; x-aor. inj. 524; cs. 4 4 2 ; pf- 4 8 5 , opt. 4 8 9 , pt. 490, pt. 493; plup. 495;
555» sj- 559b; ps. aor. 501; 492; a-aor. opt. 5 1 1 ; cs. root aor. prec. 504; x-aor.
pp. 5 7 6 a; inf. 587 a; gd. 5 5 3 b, inf. 585, I. sj. 5 2 3 ; des. 5 4 2 ; pp. 573-
5 9 1 a. ypii- 'cleanse', pr. 422, 476, ypru- 'flow', pr. inf. 424.
pad- 'foot', inflected 319. sj. 423, impv. 426, 478, pt. ypnith- 'snort', pr. inj. 424,
ypan- 'admire', pf. 485; is- 427, 479, impf. 428, 480; impv. 426, pt.427; pf.485;
aor. inj. 531; intv. 545, 3, red. aor. 514; if-aor. 529, intv. 545, 1; gd. 591 a.
pt.548; cs.556, gdv. 5 6 1 b ; inj. 5 3 1 ; ps. 445. Pt- 447; ypruf- 'sprinkle', pr. 470, sj.
ps. 445! PP- 575 b ; gdv. gd. 590 a, b. 471, impv. 434, pt. 435;
579- ypr- 'pass', pr. 4 5 4 5 8 , impv. PP- 575 b.
panaya- den., inj. 569 b. 4 6 0 ; red. aor. 5 1 4 , inj. 5 1 6 ; yplu- 'float', pr. 422, impv.
pnpra, 3. s. pf. ypra- 484. s-aor. sj. 523, impv. 526; 426.
paras 'beyond', prep, with acc. '/-aor. sj. 530; cs. 557 c, ypsä- 'devour', pr. 451, impv.
inst. loc. abl. 616. ! sj- 559 b; inf. 588 b.
454-
pari 'around', prep, with acc. yprn- 'fill', pr. 430, sj. 43t,
abl. 6 0 6 . 1 impv. 434, impf. 436; inf. yphan- 'spring', intv. 545, 3,
ypai- 'see', pr. 439, sj. 440. | 585.7- pt. 5 4 8 ; cs. 5 5 5 .
inj. 440, opt. 440, impv. yprc- 'mix', pr. 430. 464. inj. yphar- 'scatter', intv. 545, 2,
441, pt. 442, impf. 443. 465, opt. 465, impv. 434, 547 »•
y 1. pit- 'drink', pres. 422, sj. 460, 466, pt. 467, impf.
423, inj. 424, impv. 426, 4 6 8 ; pf. sj. 4 8 7 , opt. 4 8 9 ; ybamk- 'make firm', pp. 574,2.
pt. 427, 461, impf. 428; pf. root aor. sj. 502, opt. ybattdk- 'bind', pr. 476, impv.
4 8 5 , opt. 4 8 9 , pt. 4 9 2 , 4 9 3 ; 504, pt. 506; x-aor. 522, sj. 478, impf. 480; pf. 485;
root aor. 499, sj. 502, prec. 523; ps. 445, impv. 446,
ft- 537. 539; P*-445. >mp».
504, impv. 505, pt. 506; pt. 4 4 7 , im pf. 4 4 8 ; pp. 5 7 6 b;
446, pt. 4 4 7 ; inf. 5 8 4 b,
s-aor. inj. 524; des. 542, inf. 584 b, 587 a.
5 9 0 b.
pt. 5 4 4 ; cs. 5 5 8 a; ps. 4 4 5 , pftanya- den., sj. 569 a, impf. bahirdkä 'outside', prep, with
aor.501; pp. 574,3; inf. 569 f-
abl. 6 1 8 .
585. 3 . 4 . 5 . 7 ; gd. 590 a, b ; \'pr?- 'sprinkle', pr. pt. 427, ybidk- 'oppress', pr. 422, inj.
591 a. = adj. 'spotted' 313.
424, impv. 426, pt. 427,
\'Pf- 'fill', pr. 458, 476, sj.
yz. pa- 'protect', pr. 451, sj. impf. 428; pf. 485; <>-aor.
477, opt. 477, impv. 460,
452, impv. 454, pt. 455, inj. 531; des. 542; intv.
478, pt. 442, 479. impf.
impf. 456; j-aor. sj. 523. 5 4 5 , l b , 2 a, 5 4 6 , pt. 5 4 8 ;
4 6 2 , 4 8 0 ; pf. opt. 4 8 9 , pt.
papaya- den., aor. inj. 570. cs. 5 5 6 a ; pp. 5 7 5 b.
4 9 2 ; red. aor. inj. 516,
ypi- or pi- 'swell', pr. 422, ybudk- 'wake', pr. 422, 439,
impv. 518; cs. 557 c, sj.
4 7 0 , pt. 4 4 2 , 4 6 1 , 4 7 3 ; pf. sj. 4 2 3 , inj. 4 2 4 , opt. 4 4 0 ,
<59 b ; pp. 5 7 6 c.
482, 485, pt. 4 9 2 , 4 9 3 ; impv. 426, 441, pt. 442;
\'pya- 'fill up', pr. 439. impv.
pp. 5 7 6 d. pf. 4 8 2 b, sj. 4 8 7 , pt. 493;
441, pt. 442; sis-ZOT. opt.
ypinv- 'fatten', pr. 422, inj. 5 3 4 ; C i . 5 5 8 a. root aor. 500, pt. $06;
444 I. ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE. 4. VEDIC GRAMMAR.

a-aor. inj. 5 1 0 ; red. aor. 465, pt. 467; p f . 4 8 5 ; root nod- or mand- 'exhilarate',
5 1 4 ; i-aor. ¡ 2 2 ; is-aor. si. aor. sj. 502, inj. 503 ; a-aor. pr. 422, 4 5 ' . 458, sj. 423,
530; ps. aor. 5 0 1 ; inf. opt. 5 1 1 , impv. 5 1 2 ; inf. inj.424, opt.425, impv.426,
584 b, 588 a. 5 8 4 b , 585, I. 460, pt. 427, impf. 428,462;
\6fh- ' m a k e big', pr. impv. \bhur- 'quiver", pr. inj. 432, pf. 485, sj. 487, opt. 489,
4 3 4 ; pf- 485, pt. 493; is- impv. 434, pt. 4 3 5 ; >n' v - impv. 490, pt. 492; root
aor. inj. 531; intv. 545, 2, 545. 2 a, 546, pt. 548. aor.499, impv.505, pt.506;
547 a- \bhu- 'be', pr. 422, sj. 423, r e d . aor. 5 1 4 ; i-aor. 522,
bodhi, impv. of \'bhu- and inj. 424, opt. 425, impv. sj. 523, inj. 524, pt. 5 2 7 ;
\budh- 32 C, 505 note 3. 426, pt. 427, impf. 428; »>-aor. 529, opt. 5 3 2 ; cs.
\bru- 'say', pr. (inflected) 4 5 1 , pf. 482 b I, 485, opt. 489, 555 a, 5 5 6 a , si- 5 5 9 b ; ps.
sj. (inflected) 452, opt. 453, pt. 492; root aor. 499, sj. pt. 447; p p . 5 7 3 ; g ^ 578.
impv. 454, pt. 455» impf.456. 502, inj. 503, opt. 504, prec. 4 ; inf. 5 8 5 , 7 .
\bli- 'crush', pp. 576 d. 504; a-aor. 5 0 8 ; red. aor. madhu-'sweet', inflected 389.
5 ' 4 ; ft. 537, 539, pt. 538; madhya- 'in t h e midst o f '
ybhaif-'partake o f , cs. 556 a. des. 542, pt. 544; intv. 587 b a.
\bhaj- 'divide', pr. 422, 4 5 1 , 545, I, 546, pt. 548; cs. j \man- 'think', pr. 422, 439,
sj. 423, inj. 424, opt. 425, 5 5 7 b ; pp. 5 7 3 ; gdv. 578,2, j 470, sj. 423, 440, 4 7 1 , inj.
impv. 426, pt. 427, impf. 5 8 1 ; inf. 584a, 588c; gd. 440, 4 7 1 , opt. 440, 459,
428; pf. 485, pt. 493; i-aor. 590 a, b, 591 a. 4 7 1 , impv. 441, 472, pt.
522, sj. 523, inj. 524, opt. bhu- 'earth', inflected 383. 442, 473. i m P f - 443. 474;
525; cs. 555, ps. pt. 447, \bhus- 'adorn 1 , pr. 422, sj. pf. 4 8 5 ; root aor. 500, sj.
561, gd. 591 a ; ps. pr. pt. 423, opt. 425, impv. 426, 502, pt. 506; i-aor. 522,
447; gd- 590 b, c. pt. 427, impf. 428; gdv. sj. 523, inj. 524; ft. 537,
\bhahj- 'break', pr. 464. impv. 580. 5 3 9 ; des. 542, ps. 544 h,
466, pt. 467, impf. 468; \bhf- 'bear', pr. 422, 451, PP- 5 4 4 h ; cs.555, o p t . 5 5 9 c ;
pf. 485; ps. impv. 446. 458 (inflected), sj. 423,459, pp. 5 7 4 , 2 ; inf. 5 8 5 . 4 . 5 -
\bhatt- 'speak', pr. 422, inj. inj. 424, opt. 425, 459, manasya- den., pr. (inflected)
424, impf. 428. impv. 426, 460, pt. 427, 569, opt. 569 c.
\bhand- 'be bright', pr. 422, 461, impf. 428, 462; pf. mantraniya- gdv. 581 b.
pt. 427. 482 d, 485, sj. 487, pt. 493; J/l. ma- 'measure', pr. 4 5 1 ,
ybharu- 'devour', pr. 422. plup. 495; root aor. prec. opt. 459, impv. 460, pt. 461,
bhavani- 'being', inflected 3 1 4 . 504, impv. 505; .r-aor. (in- impf. 462; root aor. impv.
\bhas- 'devour, pr. 430, 458, flected) 522, sj. 523, inj. 505, pt. 506; i-aor. 522;
sj- 459. inj. 424. Pt- 461- 524; v - a o r . 5 2 9 ; cond.538, ps. aor. 5 0 1 ; pp. 574. 3 ;
\bha- 'shine', pr. 4 5 1 , impv. f t . p t . 5 3 8 ; intv. 545,2, 546; gdv. 5 7 8 , 3 ; inf. 584 a ;
454. Pt- 455- ps. 445, sj. 446, aor. 5 0 1 ; gd. 590 b, 591 a.
bhamaya• ' b e angry', den., pp. pp.573; inf.585,585,4,5,7,8, \'2. ma- 'exchange', pr. 439;
575 c. 586 b ; gd. 591 b. gd. 591 b.
\bhas- 'shine', pr. 422, sj. 423, \bhrjj- 'roast', pr. sj. 4 3 1 . ma- 'bellow', pr. 4 2 2 , 4 5 8 ;
pt. 4*7- I bhyas- 'fear', impf. 428. pf. 585; red. aor. 514, inj.
\bhikf- 'beg', pr. 422, inj. 424, \bhrami- 'fall', pr. inj. 424; j l 6 ; inf. 5 8 5 , 5 .
opt. 425, pt. 427. a-aor. inj. 5 1 0 ; cs. 555; ma, prohibitive particle used
\bhid- 'split', pr. 422, 464, PP- 574- with injunctive 648.
sj. 465, inj. 465, opt. 465, \bhraj- 'shine', pr. 422, pt. malar- 'mother', inflected 360.
impv. 466, pt. 467, impf. 4 2 7 ; root aor. 499, prec. mas- ' m o n t h ' 4 4 , 3 , 340 (in-
428,468; pf. 4 S 5 ; root aor. 504; ps. aor. 501. flected).
499. sj. 502, inj. 503, pt. \bhri- 'consume', pr. 476. \'mi- 'fix', pr. 4 7 ° . sj. 4 7 1 ,
506; o-aor. opt. 5 1 1 ; i-aor. \bhrtf- 'totter', pr. 422. inj. 4 7 1 , impv. 472, part.
inj. 524; des. 542, impf. 473, impf. 4 7 4 ; pf. 4 8 5 ;
544; p s . a o r . 5 0 i ; p p . 5 7 6 a ; \mamh- or mah• 'be great', ps.445, pt.447; gdv.578,1.
gd. 590 b, 591 a. pr.422, opt. 425, impv. 426, \mikf- 'mix', pf. 485 (cp. p.
bhifaj- 'heal', den., pr. 568. pt. 427, impf. 428; pf. 482, 359 note 8), impv. 490.
bhisajya- den., impv. 569 d. 485, sj. 487, inj. 488, impv. \migh- 'mingere', pr. pt. 427.
bhiftiaj- 'heal', den., impf. 568, 490, p t . 4 9 3 ; cs. 556, 556 a, \mith- 'alternate', pr. 422, pt.
569 f. pt. 559 e ; inf. 584b, 585, 2. 4 3 5 ; pf- 485.
ybhl- 'fear', pr. 422, 458, sj. \majj- 'sink', pr. 422; gd. \mii- 'mix', d e l . 542, impv.544.
423, inj. opt. 459, impv. 591 a. \mis- 'wink', pr. 430, pt. 4 3 5 ;
426, 460, pt. 427, 461, impf. madgu- 38 c, 44 a 3 a (p. 36), inf. 587 a a.
428, 462; pf. 482 b, 485, 6 2 , 4 b note 3 (p. 57). \mih-'mingere', pr. 422, impv.
pt. 492; plup. 495; root \math- or manlh- 'stir', pr. 426, pt. 427; ft. 537, 539;
aor. inj. 503, pt. 506; red. 422, 476, sj.423, impv.426, cs. 553 a ; inf. 584 b.
aor. 514, inj. 5 1 6 ; i-aor. 478, pt. 479, impf. 428,480; \ m t - 'damage', pr. 439, 476,
522, pt. 5 2 7 ; cs. aor. 560; pf. 4 8 5 ; root aor. sj. 502; subj. 477. inj- 477. opt.
inf. 585, I. V-aor. 529, inj. 5 3 1 ; ps. 440, pt. 479, impf. 480;
\bhuj- 'enjoy', pr. 464, sj. 44S. Pt- 447; PP- 575 » 2 . pf. 485; i-aor. inj. 5 2 4 ;

intv. 5 4 5 , 1 , pt. 548; inf.
584 a, 586 a.
mufvdms-, pf. pt. 492 b.
\mii- 'wink', gd. 591 a.
\ n i w - 'push', pr. pt. 4 2 7 ; pp.
573 «•
V«««-- 'release', pr. 430,
439. sj. 4 3 « . 440, impv.
434, pt- 435. impf. « 3 6 ;
pf. 485, sj. 487, pt. 493;
plop. 4 9 5 ; root aor. 499,
500, prec. 504; o-aor. 508,
sj. 509, inj. 510, impv. 5 1 2 ;
¿-aor. 522, inj. 524, opt.
525, des. 542, pt. 544; ps.
aor. 5 0 1 ; gd. 591 a.
\mud- 'be merry', pr. 422,
impv. 426, pt. 4 2 7 ; pf. 485;
root aor. opt. 504; «'/-aor.
opt. 5 3 2 ; ps. aor. 5 0 1 ; inf.
584 b.
\mur- = mf- 'crush', pf. sj.
487.
\muf- 'steal', pr. 422, 476,
pt. 479, impf. 480; if-aor.
inj. 5 3 1 ; pp. 575 b ; inf.
584 b ; gd. 591 a.
\muh- 'be dazed', pr. impv.
441; red.aor.514; cs.553b;
pp. 5 7 3 ; inf. 584 b.
\miirch- 'thicken', impf. 428.
y i . m f - 'die', pr. 422, sj.
4 2 3 ; pf. 485, pt. 4 9 2 ; root
aor. 500, inj. 503, opt. 504;
ft. 537. 539; « . 5 5 7 c ; ps.
445, impv. 446; pp. 576 e.
y2. mf- 'crush', pr. impv.
478, pt. 4 7 9 ; intv. 547 c.
\ m f k f - 'stroke', pr. sj. 431.
\mfc- 'injure', s-aor. opt. 5 2 5 ;
CS. 553!c; sj. 559b; pp.573-
\mfj- 'wipe', pr. 4 5 1 , impv.
454. pt-455. impf-456; pf-
482, 485, opt. 489; ¿a-aor.
536; intv. 5 4 5 , 2 , 547, pt.
548, impf. 549, 5 5 ' . g d v -
5 8 0 ; cs. 553 e, opt. 559 c ;
ps. 445. p t - 4 4 7 ; PP- 573;
gdv. 5 7 8 , 4 ; gd. 590 b.
ymfd- 'be gracious', pr. sj.
4 3 1 , impv. 434; cs. 554,
sj- 559 b.
m f n - 'crush', pr. 430, inj.432,
impv. 434, impf. 436; red.
aor. 514.
\mfd- 'crush', pf. opt. 489.
\mfdh- 'neglect', pr. 422, sj.
4 3 1 ; root aor. opt. 504;
if-aor. sj. 530, inj. 5 3 1 .
\mfi- 'touch', pr. 430, sj.
4 3 1 , impv. 434, pt. 435;
impf. 4 3 6 ; pf- 482, 485;
¿a-aor. 5 3 6 ; intv. 5 4 5 , 2 ,
547 a ; g d . 59« a.
\ mrf- 'not heed', pr. 439;
pf. 4 8 5 ; root aor. inj. 503;
L SANSKRIT INDEX. 445
a-aor. inj. 5 1 0 ; red. aor. inj. y 2 . yu- 'separate', pr. 422,
5 1 6 ; is-aor. inj. 531 ; inf. 4 5 8 ; sj. 459, inj. 459. o p t
584 b. 459. impv. 426, 460, pt.
meghäya- den., ft. and pp. 570. 4 2 7 ; root aor. sj. 502, prec.
\med- 'be fat', pr. impv. 4 4 1 ; 504; red. aor. inj. 5 1 6 ;
cs. 5 5 4 « . ¿-aor. tj. 523, inj. 524; if-
\myaks- 'be situated', pr. impv. aor.inj. 5 3 1 ; intv.545,1, pt.
426; pf. 485; root aor. 499; 548, impf. 549; cs. 557 b,
ps. aor. 501. sj- 5 5 9 b ; ps. aor. 5 0 1 ; pp.
\mruc- 'set', pr. pt. 427. 5 7 3 ; inf. 585,4, 587 b.
\>mlä- 'relax', cs. 558; pp. 573. \yuj- 'join', pr. 4 5 1 , 464 (in-
flected), sj. 465, inj. 465,
yà- 'who', rei. pron. 398. impv. 426, 466, pt. 467,
\yakf- 'press on'(?), pr. inj. impf. 468; pf. 485, sj. 487,
424, pt. 4 2 7 ; inf- 5 8 4 b - pt. 493; root aor. 500, sj.
\yaj- 'sacrifice', pr. 4 5 1 , opt. 502, inj. 503, opt. 504, impv.
425, impv. 426, pt. 427. 505, p t 506; ¿-aor. 5 2 2 ;
impf. 428; pf. 482 b ! , 485, ft- 537. 539; ps. 445. impv.
pt- 4 9 3 ; root aor. impv. 446, aor. 5 0 1 ; pp. 5 7 3 ; inf.
505; ¿-aor. 522, sj. 523, inj. 584 b ; gd. 589 b, c.
524; sa-aor. impv. 5 3 6 ; ft. \yudh- 'fight', pr. 422, 439,
5 3 7 ; des. 542, sj. 544; 4 S I . s j- 4 4 ° . impv-441. p t
pp. 574; inf. 5 8 5 . 4 . 7 ; gd. 442, 455. i m P f - 4 4 3 ; pf-
590 b. 485; root aor. sj. 502, impv.
yajñairi-, inflected 376. 5 0 5 ; ¿-aor. inj. 524; if-aor.
\yat- 'stretch', pr. 422, sj. I 529. sj. 530, inj. 5 3 1 , impv.
423, opt. 425, impv. 426, 5 3 3 ; des. 542, pt. 544; cs.
pt. 427; pf. 485; root aor. 553b, sj. 5 5 9 b ; gdv. 5 7 8 , 4 ,
pt. 506; cs. 555, sj. 559 b, 580; inf. 584b, 585,2, 586a.
pt- 559 e. \yup- 'obstruct', pf. 4 8 5 ; cs.
\yabh-'futuere', pr. 422, impv. 5 5 } b ; pp. 575 b.
426, yufmaka 'of you' 391, 2.
\'yam- 'reach', pr. 422, 4 5 1 , yiiyam 'you', pron. 49 a, 3 9 1 , 2 .
sj. 423, inj. 424, opt. 425, \ytf- 'be heated', pr. pt.
impv. 426, pt. 427, impf. 427.
428; pf. 482 b I, 485, pt.
493; root aor. 499, sj. 502, \ramh- 'hasten', pr. 422, pt.
opt. 504, prec. 504, impv. 427, impf. 428; p f . p t . 4 9 3 ;
505; a-aor. opt. 511 ; ¿-aor. cs. 556 a ; gdv. 578, 4.
522, sj. 523, inj. 524, pt. \'raif- 'protect', pr. 422, sj.
527 ; if-aor. 529 ; intv. 545,2, 423, impv. 426, pt. 427,
546; c s . 5 5 5 ; ps.pt.447, aor. impf. 428; pf. 485, p t . 4 9 3 ;
5 0 1 ; pp. 574, 2 ; aor. gdv. if-aor. 5 3 0 ; pp. 575 a I.
580; inf. 585, 4, 5/3, 586 a ; \raj- or rattj- 'colour', impf.
gd. 591 b. 443; intv. 545,1 b, 546; cs.
\yas- 'be heated', pr. impv. 556.
460, pt. 442. roM«-m.f. 'charioteer', inflect-
\'yä- 'go', pr. 451. opt. 453, ed 376.
impv. 454, pt. 455, impf. \rad- 'dig', pr. 422, 4 5 1 , inj.
456; pf.485. p t - 4 9 2 ; -f-aor. 424, impv. 426, pt. 427,
522, sj. 523, inj. 524; sif- impf. 428; pf. 485; pp.
aor. 534, sj., opt., impv. 575 b.
534; ft. 537. Pt- 5 3 8 ; pp. J /radh- or randh- 'make sub-
5 7 3 ; inf. 584 a, 5 8 5 , 4 . ject', pr. impv. 4 4 1 ; pf-
J yac- 'ask', pr. 422, opt. 425, 482; root aor. impv. 505,
impv. 426, pt. 427, impf. a-aor. sj. 509, inj. 5 1 0 ;
428; if-aor. sj. 530; cs. red. aor. sj. 5 1 5 , inj. 5 1 6 ;
556 a ; pp. 575 b ; inf. 586b. V-aor. inj. 5 3 1 ; intv. 545,1 b ;
\y>d- 'unite'(?), pr. pt. 427. cs. 556 a, sj. 559 b.
\ i.yu- 'unite', pr. 430, 4 5 1 , \ran- 'rejoice', pr. 422, 439,
sj. 4 3 1 , 4 5 2 . inj-432. impv. inj. 424, impv.426; pf.482,
434. 454. pt. 435. 455. 485, sj. 487, impv. 4 9 0 ;
impf. 436; pf. 4 8 5 ; des. plup. 495; if-aor. 529, inj.
542, pt. 544; intv. 545, I, 5 3 1 ; cs. 556.
546, pt. 548; pp. 5 7 3 ; gd. randhanäya- den., impf. 569 t.
591 a. \rap- 'chatter', pr. 422, inj.
446 I. ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE.
424, opt. 4 2 5 , pt. 427, impf.
4 2 8 ; intv. S4S, l b , 546.
\rapi- 'be full', pr. 422; pf.
485.
\rabh- or rambk- 'grasp', pr.
422, sj. 423, inj. 424, opt.
425, impv. 426, pt. 427.
impf. 428; pf. 482, 485,
pt. 493; i-aor. 522, pt.
527; inf. 584 b, 586 a; gd.
591a.
\ram- 'rejoice', pr. 422, inj.
424, impv. 426, impf. 428,
480; red. aor. 514, sj. 515,
inj. 516; ¿-aor. 522, inj.
524; sif-aor. inj. 534; cs.
555 a.
\ramb- 'bang down', pr. 422,
pt. 427.
y i . r a - 'give', pr. 451, impv.
460, pt. 461, impf. 456; pf.
485. impv. 49°. P'- 492.
493; root aor. impv. 505;
j-aor. 522, sj. 523, opt. 525,
impv. 526; pp. 573.
J/2, ra-'bark', pr. 439, pt. 442.
\ras- 'give', pr. pt. 427.
\'raj- 'be kingly', pr. 422,
451, sj. 423, inj. 424, 452,
impv. 426, pt. 427, impf.
428; ;>-aor. 529; cs. 556 a,
sj. 559 b; inf. 585, I.
\radh- 'succeed' pr. 422, sj.
423, impv. 441, pt. 442;
pf. 485; root aor. sj. 502,
prec. 504; J-aor. 522; if-
aor. inj. 531; ft. 537.539;
cs. 556 a; ps. aor. 501; gdv.
578,4; inf. 585,7.
\'ri- or rl- 'flow', pr. 439, 476,
inj. 477, pt. 479; impf.480.
\rikh • 'scratch', pr. impv. 434.
\ric- 'leave', pr. 464, sj. 465,
inj. 465, impf. 468; pf. 485,
opt. 489, pt. 492, 493; plup.
495; root aor. inj.503, impv.
505; ¿-aor. 522; ps. 445,
impf. 448, aor. 501.
\rip- 'smear', pf. 485; pp.
573-
\ribh- 'sing', pr. 422, pt. 427,
impf. 428; ps. 445; pf. 485.
\ris- 'tear', pr. 430, impv.
434. pt- 435-
\rif- 'be hurt', pr. 439, sj.
423» 44°. inj. 424, opt. 440;
o-aor. sj. 509, inj. 510, pt.
512; red. aor. inj. 516, opt.
517, prec. 517; des. 542,
pt. 544; cs. 553, 554; inf.
585, 7-
rifanya- den., inj., impv.
569 b, d.
\rih- 'lick', pr. 451, pt. 455;
pf. pt. 492; intv. 545, I a,
Pt- 548, 551; PP- 573- \vakf-
4. VEDIC GRAMMAR.
YI. ru- 'cry', pr. 430, inj.
432, impv. 434, pt. 435;
»>-aor. 529; intv. 545, 1 a,
pt. 548, impf. 549-
ru- 'break', if-aor. 529;
intv. 545, 1, 546, pt. 548.
\ruc- 'shine', pr. 422, inj.
424, impv. 426, pt. 427, impf.
428; pf. 485, inj. 488, opt.489,
pt. 492, 493; root aor. pt.
506; red. aor. 514; </-aor.
529, opt. 532; intv. pt. 548;
cs. 553 b, 554; inf. 584 b.
rucaya• den., inj. 569 b.
\ruj- 'break', pr. 430, sj. 431,
inj. 432, opt. 433, impv.
434. pt. 435. impf. 436;
pf. 485; root. aor. inj. 503;
red. aor. 514; pp. 576 b ;
inf. 584 b.
\rud- 'weep', pr. 451, sj. 452,
pt. 455; a-aor. 508; cs.
553 b.
| I. rudk- 'grow', pr. 422, inj.
424, pt- 435. i m P f - 428.
J/2. rudh- 'obstruct', pr. 451,
464, sj. 465, impv. 466, pt.
467, impf. 468; pf. 485;
root. aor. 499; <j-aor. 508,
inj. 510; j-aor. 522; ps.
445; gd. 591 a-
\rup- 'break', red-aor. 514;
PP- 575 b.
nwanya- den., inj. 569 b.
\ruf- 'be vexed', pr. 422.
\ruh- 'ascend', pr. 422, sj.
423, opt. 425, impv. 426,
pt. 427, impf. 428; pf.
485; root aor. pt. 506; a-
aor. 508, sj. 509, inj. 510,
opt. 511; ja-aor. 536; des.
542, Pt- 544; cs. 553 b;
pp. 573; inf. 586 a; gd.
590 b, 591 a.
\'rej- 'tremble', pr. 422, inj.
424, pt. 427, impf. 428; cs.
554 «•
\lap- 'prate', pr. impv. 426,
pt. 427 ; intv. 545, 1 b, 546;
cs. 555; pp. 575 b.
|/labh- 'take', pr. 422, opt.
425; pf. 485, pt. 493; des.
542, pt. 544; gd. 590 b.
\liih- 'scratch', impf. 436;
;>-aor. inj. 531; pp. 575 a 2.
\Up- 'smear', pr. 430; j-aor.
522.
y/t- 'cling', pr. 422, impv.
426; pp. 576 d; gdv. 578, 2.
\lup- 'break', pr. opt. 433;
ps. 445; fid. 591 a-
\lubh- 'desire', pr. pt. 442;
ci. 533 b.
'increase', pr. 430,
impv. 434, pt. 435. i m P r -
436; pf. 485; cs. 556 a.
\vac- 'speak', pr. 458, impv.
460; pf. 482 b I, 485, pt.
493; red. aor. 514, sj. 515,
inj. 516, opt. 517, impv.
518; ft. 5 3 7 , 539. Pt- 538;
intv. 545, 1 b, impf. 549; ps.
4 « , aor. 501; pp. 574, I ;
gdv. 578,4, 581; inf. 584b,
585. 4-
\vaiic- 'move crookedly', pr.
422; pf. 482, 485; ps. 445,
impv. 446, pt. 447.
\vat- 'apprehend', pr. opt.
425, pt.427 ; red. aor. 514;
cs. 555.
\vad- 'speak', pr. 422, sj.
423, inj. 424, opt. 425, 433,
impv. 426, pt. 427, impf.
428; pf. 485; «>aor. 529,
sj. 530, inj. 531; ft. 537,
539; intv. 545, ib,546, 547 c,
opt. 559 c; ps. j>t. 447,
pp. 575 b.
\vadh- 'slay', pr. opt. 425,
impv. 426; root aor. prec.
504; if-aor. 529, sj. 530,
inj. 531, impv. 533.
\van- 'win', pr. 422, 470: sj.
423, 43'. 47'. inj. 424,47".
opt. 425, 433, 471, impv.
426, 472, pt. 473, impf.
474; pf- 482, 485, sj. 487,
pt. 492; root aor. impv. 505;
s-aor. sj. 523, inj. 524, opt.
525; *>-aor. sj.530, opt.532;
j;>aor. opt. 534; des. 542,
543 (inflected), sj. 544; cs.
555; PP-574.2«; inf.585,4.
vanufa- den, inj. 569 b.
vanufya- den., sj. 569 a.
\vand- 'greet', pr. 422, impv.
426, pt. 427; pf. 485; if-
aor. opt. 532; ps. aor. 501;
gdv. 578, 4; inf. 585, 7.
y i . vaf- 'strew', pr. 422, inj.
424, impv. 426, pt. 427,
impf. 428; pf. 482 b I, 485;
ps-445.pt-447; l'P-574. ' ;
gd. 591 a.
J/2. vap- 'shear', pr. (2. s.,
3 pi. act.) 422.
vapusya• den., impf. 569 f.
vam, 1. s. aor. of vf- 'cover'
66 c /S 2, 499.
\vam- 'vomit', pr. sj. 452,
impf. 456.
varivasya- den., sj. 569 a, impv.
569 d.
vareya-, den., sj. 569 a.
\val-, 1-aor. sj. 523.
\valg- 'bound', pr. 422, impf.
428.
vavfdhantanom. pf. pt, p.
363 note 7.

\vai- 'desire', pr. 422, 451,
458, sj. 423, inj. 424, opt.
425, impv. 426, 454, pt.
455, impf. 428, pt. 435;
pf. 482, 485; intv. 545, I.
y i . vas- 'shine', pr. 430, sj.
431, inj. 432, opt. 433.
impv. 434, pt. 435, impf.
4 3 6 ; pf. 485, pt. 492,493;
plup. 4 9 5 ; root aor. 500;
i-aor. 522; cs. 555; pp.
574; inf. 585, 4. 388 a.
V'2. vas- 'wear', pr. 451, inj.
452, opt. 453, pt. 435, impv.
4S4» pt. 455. i m P f - 4 5 6 ;
pf. 482, 485, pt. 493; is-
aor. 529; cs. 555, ft. 537,
560.
| vas- 'dwell', pr. 422, inj.
424, impv. 426, pt. 427,
impf. 4 2 8 ; pf. 485, pt. 492,
493; root aor. pt. 506;
s aor. 522; cs. 555, sj.
559 b.
\vah- 'carry', pr. 422, 451,
sj. 423, opt. 425, impv.
426, pt. 427, impf. 428;
pf. 482 b I, 485; root aor.
opt. 504, impv. 505, pt.
506; j-aor. 522, sj. 523,
inj.524; ft.537, 5 3 9 ; P s - 4 4 5 .
sj.446, p t 447; PP- 5 7 4 ; inf.
585. 4 , 7. 586 b ; gd. 591 a.
vi- 'blow', pr. 439, 451,
impv. 454, pt. 455, impf.
4 5 6 ; cs. 558.
\i. vi- 'weave', pr. 439,
impv. 441, pt. 447, impf.
4 4 3 ; Pf- 4 8 5 ; ft- 537. pt.
S 3 » ; pp. 574. l <*i inf. 585,
4, 5, 586 b.
-vims, pf. pt. suffix, l 8 l , 347,
491.
väc-, inflected, p. 180.
vAjaya- den., impv. 569 d ;
inf. 585, 7.
\vihih- 'desire', pr. impv.,
426.
vam 'we two' 391, I.
\vii- 'bellow', pt. 442; pf.
482, 485, pt. 493; plup.
495; red. aor. 514; intv.
545. l b , pt. 548, impf. 549-
\>vds = 3. vas- (?) pr. 422.
vi- 'bird' 381 a.
\vic- 'sift', pr. 464, impv. 466,
pt. 467, impf. 468; pf. pt.
49?; ps. impv. 446.
\vij- 'tremble', pr. 430, impv.
4 3 4 , pt. 435. i m I» f - 4 3 6 ;
pf. 485; root aor. inj. 503;
red. aor. inj. 516; intv.
545. I a, 551-
J ' l . vid- 'know', pr. 451, sj.
452, opt. 453, impv. 454,
impf. 456; pf. 485, pt.
J. SANSKRIT I N D E X .
492 b ; cs. 5 5 3 ; pp. 575 b ;
inf. 585, 8; gd. 590 b.
2. vid- 'find', pr. 430, 451,
inj. 432, opt. 433, impv.
434. 454. Pt. 4 5 5 . impf.
436; pf. 485, sj. 487, pt.
492; <z-aor. (inflected) 508, \vfj-
sj. 509, inj. 510, opt. 5 1 1 ,
prec. 511, impv. 512, pt.
5 1 2 ; j-aor. 522; intv. 547 a ;
ps. 445, aor. 5 0 1 ; pp. 576 a ;
gdv. 579; inf. 584 b, 585,
4 ; gd. 59o b.
vid- 'finding', inflected, 319.
\vidh- 'worship', pr. sj. 431,
inj. 432, opt. 433, pt. 435,
impf. 436.
\vindh- 'lack', pr. 430.
vasuya- d e n . , sj. 5 6 9 a .
\vip- 'tremble', pr. 422, pt.
427, impf. 428; pf. 485;
root aor. pt. 506; red. aor.
514; cs. 553 a, 554.
vibhu-, inflected, 383.
vii-, inflected, 350.
\vii- 'enter', pr. 430, sj. 431,
inj. 432, opt. 433. i m P y -
434. pt- 4 3 5 . it»P f . 4 3 6 ;
pf. 483, 485. opt. 489, pt.
492, 492 b ; plup. 4 9 5 ! r o o t \tfdh-
aor. 500, impv. 505; i-aor.
522; «j-aor. 5 3 1 ; cs. 553 a,
op'- 559 c, pp. 561 a ;
inf. 586 a ; gd. 591 a.
visvataspad- 'having feet on
every side', 3 1 9 a.
\vis- 'be active', pr. 458, sj.
459, impv. 460, pt. 427,
impf. 428, 462; pf. 485;
¿r-aor. sj. 530; intv. 545, i a,
546, 547 b, pt. 548; inf. J/177- 'rain', pr. 422, impv.
584 b.
\vist- or vest- 'wrap', pr. impv.
426; cs. 553.
\vi 'enjoy', pr.451. sj.452, inj. vffiya- den., impv. 569 d,
4 5 2 , i m p v . 4 5 4 , p t . 4 5 5 ; impf.
456; pf. 485; i-aor. sj. 523; \vrh- 'tear', pr. 430, inj 432,
intv. 5 4 5 , 1 a, 5 5 1 ; ps. 445,
pt. 447, inf. 585, 3.
\vid- 'make strong', cs. 554a.
vTrdya- den., impv. 569 d, vldi-, loc. sing. p. 284 (mid.).
impf. 569 f.
ii/iiya-., sj. 559 b, impv.
1
559 d, pp. 575 c.
J,'1. vr- 'cover', pr. 422, 470, JIvyac- 'extend', pr. 458, inj.
inj. 424. 4 7 ' . imp*- 472.
pt. 473, impf. 4 7 4 ; pf.485,
pt. 492; plup. 495; root \vyath- 'waver', pr. 422, pt.
aor. 499, 500, inj. 503,
impv. 505, pt. 506; red.
aor. 514; j-aor. sj. 523; \vyadk-
intv. 545, 3 ; cs. 557 c, sj.
5 5 9 b ; ft. 537, 560; ps. aor.
5 ° < . PP- 5 7 3 : inf- 585. 4 ;
g t 590 a, b, c, 591 b.
\2. vf- 'choose', pr. 470, 476,
447
inj. 477. opt. 477, impv.
4 7 8 , pt. 479. impf- 4 8 o ;
pf. 485; root aor. 500, sj.
502, inj. 503, opt. 504, pt.
506; s-aor. 522; pp. 573;
gdv. 578, 2, 580.
'twist', pr. 422, 464,
sj. 465, impv. 466, impf.
468; pf. 482, 485, opt. 489,
impv. 490, pt. 492, 492 b ;
root aor. 499, 500, sj. 502,
inj. 503, opt. 504, prec.
504, impv. 505; a-aor. 508;
i-aor. 522, inj. 524; intv.
545. 3. cs. 550 c ; cs. 553 c ;
i n t 584 b, 585, I , 7 ; gd.
590 a.
\vft- 'turn', pr. 422, 458, inj.
424, impv. 426, pt. 427,
impf. 428; pf. 482, 485, sj.
487, opt. 489, impv. 490,
pt. 492; plup. 4 9 5 ; root
aor. 499, 500, sj. 502, impv.
505; a-aor. 508; red. aor.
5 1 4 ; x-aor. 522; ft. 537,
539; des. 5 4 2 ; intv. 545,
2,3. 546 ; c s . 553 c, sj. 559 b ;
pp. 573; inf. 584 b , cs.
585. 7 ; gd- 591 a.
'grow', pr. 422, sj.
423, inj. 424, impv. 426,
pt. 427, impf. 428; pf. 482,
485, sj. 487, inj. 488, opt.
489, impv. 490. pt- 492.
493; a-aor. 508, pt. 512 a ;
red. aor. 5 1 4 ; x-aor. pt.
527; y-aor. opt. 5 3 2 ; cs.
553 c, sj. 559 b, pt. 559 e ;
intv. gdv. 580; inf. 584 b,
585. I. 7-
426, 434, pt. 427; pf. 482,
impv. 490, pt. 493; »>-aor.
5 2 9 ; cs. 553 c ; gd. 590 a.
aor. 570.
opt. 433, impv. 434, impf.
436; pf. 4 8 5 ; ja-aor. 536;
cs. 553 c ; P s - aor. 501.
J/vert- 'long', pr. 422, inj.
424, impv. 426, pt. 427,
impf. 428.
459, impf. 462; pf. 482 b i ,
485, inj. 488.
4 2 7 ; »/-aor. sj. 530, inj.
5 3 1 ; cs. 556, aor. 560 a.
'pierce', pr. 439,
inj. 440, impv. 441, pt.
442, impf. 443; pf- pt. 4 9 2 ;
PP- 574. 1; inf. 5 8 4 b.
\vyi- 'envelope', pr. 439,
opt. 440, impv. 441, pt.
44« L ALLGEMEINES UND SPRACHE.
442, impf. 443; pf. 485,
pt. 493; <»-aor. 5 ° ® ; PP-
574, 3-
\vraj- 'proceed', pr. impv.
426, pt. 4 2 7 ; pf. 485.
\ v r a d - 'weaken', impf. 428.
\vraic- 'cut up', pr. 430, sj.
4 3 1 , inj. 432, imp*. 434,
pt. 435, impf. 4 3 6 ; ps.
impv. 446; pp. 576 b ; gd.
5 9 ° b.
\vradh- 'stir np', pr. inj. 424,
p t 427.
\vlag- pursue(?) gd. 591 a.
\vti- 'crush' = \bli-.
yiams- 'praise', 422, sj. 423,
.opt. 425, impv. 426, pt.
427, impf. 428; root aor.
impv. 505; is-aor. 529, sj.
530, inj. 5 3 1 ; cs. 556 a ;
ps. 445, pt. 447, aor. 5 0 1 ;
gdv. 578, 4; inf. 584 b.
\ i a k - ' b e able', pr. 470, sj.
4 7 : , impf. 474; pf. 485;
root aor. sj. 502, opt. 504,
impv. 505; a-aor. 508, inj.
510, opt. 5 1 1 ; des. 5 4 2 , 2 ,
pt. 544; inf. 585, 4.
yiat- 'cut in pieces', cs.
555-
sad- 'prevail', pf. 482,
485, pt. 493-
\2. sad- 'fall', ft. 537, 539.
yiap- 'curse', pr. 422, sj. 423,
pt. 427, impf. 428; pf.
4 S 5 ; x-aor. inj. 524.
y i . iam- 'labour', pr. 439,
impv. 4 4 1 , pt. 442; pf.
485, sj. 487, pt. 493; v-aor.
529.
y i . Jam- ' b e quiet', impf.
428; red. aor. 5 1 4 ; cs. 556;
pp. 574, 2 a.
\sas- 'cut', pr. impv. 454.
\sa- 'sharpen', pr. 458, impv.
460, pt. 461, impf. 436,
462; pf. pt. 493; pp. 574,
3 ; g d - 591 a.
yJds- 'order', pr. 422, 4 5 1 ,
sj. 452, impv. 454, pt. 455,
impf. 428, 456; pt. 485,
inj. 488, impv. 490; root
aor. sj. 502; a-aor. 508, sj.
509, inj. 5 1 0 , pt. 5 1 2 a ; pp.
574. 3 «•
yiikf- = des. of ¡at- "be
able', pr. 422, sj. 423, inj.
424, opt. 425, impv. 426,
p t 427, impf. 428: these
f o r m s strictly speaking
belong to 543, 544.
yHhj- 'twang', pr. 4 5 1 .
iitipad- 'white-footed' 3 1 9 a.
ytim- l a b o u r ' = y i . iam-.
yiif- 'leave', a-aor. sj. 509,
4 . VEDIC GRAMMAR.
inj. 5 1 0 ; ps. 445, sj. 446. | \ i r a m - *be weary', pr. 439;
aor. 501.
y i . H- 'lie', pr. 422, 4 5 1 , opt.
453, impf. 428, 456, impv.
441. 454, Pt. 4 5 5 ; P'- sravasya- den., sj. 569 a.
482 b 1 a, p t . 4 9 3 ; x-aor.sj. \ira-
5 2 3 ; v - a o r . 5 2 9 ; inf. 585, 7.
V2. si- 'sharpen' = \ia-, root
aor. 500.
sikaya- den., ft. and pp. 570.
yiuc- 'gleam', p r . 422, inj.
424, impv. 426, pt. 427,
impf. 428; pf. 485, pt.
492, 493, opt- 489, impv.
490; a-aor. 508, pt. 5 1 2 a ;
red. aor. 514, inj. 5 1 6 ; if- yiris-
aor. inj. 5 3 1 ; intv. 545, 1 a,
547», Pt- 548; cs. 553 b, y'srT- 'mix', pr. 476; pp.
554; ps. aor. 5 0 1 ; inf.
.585. 7-
sua-, inflected, 3 8 1 .
\ s u j - pf.pt. 493 (p.364note»).
\sundh-'purify', pr. 422, impv.
426,434; c s . 5 5 4 a ; pp.574,2.
\subh- or sumbk- 'beautify',
422, 430, sj. 423, impv.
426, pt. 427, 4 3 5 ; root aor.
pt. 506; red. aor. 5 1 4 ;
« . 553 b, 554; pp. 575 a 1;
inf. 584 b, 585, 1, 586 a.
\ h t f - 'dry', pr. 439, impv.
441; cs. 553 b.
\iu- or svi- 'swell', pr. pt.
427; P^ 482, 485, sj- 487.
opt. 489, pt. 492, 493 (p. ysvaiic- 'spread', pr. impv.
364 note 3); s-zoi. pt. 5 2 7 ;
inf. 588 c.
yi/-«- = \sf- 'crush', pr.
impv. 434.
\sfdh- 'be defiant', inj. 424,
impv. 426, pt. 427; cs. yivas- 'blow', 4 5 1 , impv. 454,
553 c-
\ i f - 'crush', 476, impv. 478;
pt. 479, impf. 480; pf. 485; yh/it- ' b e bright', root aor.
« - a o r . 529, inj. 5 3 1 ; ps.
445, aor. 5 0 1 ; pp. 573 a,
576 e ; inf. 587 b ; gd. 5 9 1 a .
iocis-, inflected, 342.
yicand- or cand- intv. 545, 3.
yicam- 'labour'(?), pr. inj. 477.
\icut- 'drip', pr. 422.
\snath- 'pierce', pr. sj. 452,
impv. 454; red. aor. 514,
inj. 5 1 6 ; »V-aor. impv. 5 3 3 ;
cs. 556; cs. pp. 575 c ; inf.
584 b.
\sya- 'coagulate', pp. 574, 3,
576 c.
yiraih- 'slacken', pr. 476, pt.
479. impf. 480; pf. 485;
r e d . aor. inj. 5 1 6 , impv.
5 1 8 ; cs. 556.
irathar-ya- den. 567 d.
iraihaya- den. 564 a, 569 d.
bad- 'heart', used adverbially
with \tr- and \dhi-, 652.
pf. 485, pt. 4 9 3 ; a-aor.
508, inj. 5 1 0 ; if-aor. 529,
inj. 5 3 1 ; pp. 574, 2 0 .
(in-, if-) 'boil', pr.
476, pt. 479, impf. 4 8 0 ; cs.
558. »j- 5 5 9 b ; p p . 5 7 4 , 1
\ i r i - 'resort', pr. 422, sj. 423,
impv. 426, pt. 427, impf.
428; pf. 485, opt. 489, pt.
4 9 3 ; plup. 495; r o o t aor.
499; red. aor. 5 1 4 ; j-aor.
5 2 2 ; p s . a o r . 5 0 i ; cs. 5 5 8 a ;
PP- 573-
'clasp', pr. sj. 4 2 3 ;
a-aor. inj 510; inf. 587 a.
573 a ; inf. 585, 1.
yiru- 'hear', pr. 4 5 1 , 470,
sj. 4 7 1 , opt. 4 7 1 , impv.
472, pt. 473, impf. 4 7 4 ;
pf. 485, sj. 487, opt. 489, pt.
492 ; plup. 495; root. aor.
499, sj-502, prec. 5C4, impv.
505; a-aor. inj. 5 1 0 , des.
542 b, pt. 544, gdv. 544 i,
580; cs. 557 b ; ps. 445,
aor. 5 0 1 ; pp. 5 7 3 ; gdv.
578, I, 579; gd. 590 b,
591 b.
yiruf- 'hear', pr. inj. 424,
impv. 426, pt. 427, impf.
428.
426, pt. 427; pf. sj. 487
(cp. p. 361 note 3); cs.
556 a.
ivan-, accentuation, p. 80
(bottom).
pt. 4 5 5 ; intv. 545, l b ; cs.
5 5 5 ; inf. 587 a.
499. pt- 506; red. aor. 5 1 4 ;
¿-aor. 522.
faf 'six' 43 a 2.
saf 53 a 2.
\ f / h t v - 'spue', impf. 428.
sa-, adv. particle in com-
pounds, 250, 656.
sathi-, inflected, 380 a.
\sagh- 'be equal to', impf.
474; root aor. sj. 502.
\sac- 'accompany', pr. 422,
458, sj. 423, inj. 424, 459,
opt. 425, impv. 426, 460,
pt. 427 b, 461, impf. 428;
pf. 485, pt. 492; root aor.
impv. 505, p t 506; ¿-aor.
522, sj. 523, inj. 524, opt.
525; »nf- 585. 7. 588 c.
saca 'with', prep, with loc.,
619.

\saj- and saftj- 'hang', pr. 422,
impv. 426, impf. 428; i-aor.
522.
\sad- 'sit', pr. 422, 451, sj.
423, inj. 424, opt. 425,
impv. 426, pt. 427, impf.
428; pf. 485; opt. 487,
pt. 492; a-aor. 508, inj.
510, opt. 511, impv. 512,
pt. 512; red. aor. 514;
j-aor. sj. 523; es. sj. 559 b ;
ps. aor. 501; pp. 576 a ;
gdv. 578, 4; inf. 584 b,
586 a ; gd. 591 a.
sadha- 'together', adv. 634 a.
sadhamas, nom. of sadhamad-
66 e f t 319 a.
\san- 'gain', 470, sj.471, opt.
471, impv. 472, impf. 474;
pf. 485, pt. 492; a-aor. 508,
inj. 510, opt. 511, pt. 512;
V-aor. 529, sj. 530; ft. 537,
S39. Pt- 538; des. 542, sj.
544; intv. 545, 3 ; pp. 574,
2; gdv. 581; inf. 585,
2,3-
sanitür 'apart from', prep.
with acc. 620.
sanular 'far from', prep, with
abl. 621.
\sap- 'serve', pr. 422, inj.
424, opt. 425, pt. 427,
impf. 428; pf. 485; red.
aor. inj. 516.
saparya- den., sj. 569 a, opt.
569 c, impv. 569 d, impf.
569 f ; aor. 570; gdv.
580.
sdm 'with', prep. with. inst.
593 note 3; adv. 'together'
as first member of com-
pounds 250.
soma- 'any', pron. 399.
saranyd- den., sj. 569 a.
sarvapdd- 'all-footed' 319 a.
ysas- 'sleep', pr. 458, impv.
454. Pt- 455. i m P f - 45®-
sah-, inflected, 352.
\sah- prevail', pr. 422, 451,
2, sj. 423, opt. 425, impv.
426, pt. 427, impf. 428;
pf. 482, 485, sj. 487, opt.
489, pt. 492, 492 b, 493;
root aor. opt. 504, prec.
504; j-aor. 522, sj. 523,
opt. 525, pt. 527; v-aor.
529, opt. 532; ft. 537, 539;
des. 542, pt. 544; pp. 573;
inf. 585, 1, 7; gd. 591 a.
saha *with' prep, with inst.
622; in compounds 656.
sahasrapad- 'thousand-footed',
319
\sä- 'bind', pr. 430, impv.
434, impf. 436; root aor.
sj. 502, opt. 504, impv.
Indo-arisch« Philologie. I. 4.
I. SANSKRIT INDEX.
505; a-aor. opt. 5 1 1 ; Cf. sj.
SS9 b ; pp. 574, 3 ; inf.
584 a; gd. 591 a.
sakam 'with', prep. with. inst.
623.
\sadh- 'succeed', pr. 422, inj.
424, impv. 426, pt. 427,
red. aor. sj. 515, inj. 516.
yri- 'bind', 476, impv. 478;
pf. 485, sj. 487; root aor.
impv. 505; inf. 585, 4.
\sic- 'pour', pr. 422, 430, sj.
431, inj. 432, opt. 433,
impv. 434, pt. 435, impf.
436; pf. 485; a-aor. 508;
ps- 445> pt- 447. impf.
448; PP. 573: gd. 591
\ 1. sidh- 'repel', pr. 422,
impv. 426, pt. 427, impf.
428; pf. 485; intv. 545, I ,
p t 548; gd. 591 a.
V2. sidh- 'succeed', pr. 439.
sida-, present base of sad- 'sit',
p 57 n o t e 8 .
\sTv- 'sew', pr. impv. 441,
p t 442; pp. 573 <*; gd.
591 a.
su 'well', adv. particle, as
first member of compounds,
251, 658.
\su- 'press', pr. 430, 470,
sj. 471, impv. 472, pt
473; pf- 485, p t 49». 493;
root aor. impv. 505, pt.
506; ps. 445, inj. 446, aor.
501; gdv. 581; inf. 585, 4,
587 b.
sumad 'with', prep. with, i n s t ,
624.
sufvaya- den., inj. 569 b.
ysu- 'generate', pr. 430, 451,
sj. 431, inj. 452, impv. 434,
Pt- 435. 455- i m p £ 436.
456; pf. 482 b I, 485; red.
aor. 514; i>-aor. 529, sj.
530, inj. 5 3 1 ; ft. 537, pt.
538; intv. 545. 1. 546;
inf. 585, 4. 5-
\sud- 'put in order', pf. 485,
sj. 487; red. aor. 514,
impv. 518; cs. 554 a, sj.
559 b.
\ s f - 'flow', pr. 458, impv.
426, 460, pt. 461; pf. 485,
pt. 492, 493; a-aor. 508;
j-aor. sj. 523; ft. 537, 539,
pt. 538; intv. 545, 2, 546,
pt. 548; cs. 557 c ; inf.
585. 4. 5-
\'sry- 'emit', pr. 422, 430, sj.
431. i n J. 432. opt. 433.
impv. 434, pt. 427. 435.
impf. 436; pf. 485, opt.
489, pt. 493; plup. 495;
root aor. 500; ¿-aor, 522,
sj. 523, inj. 524; ps. 445»
449
p t 447. «or. 501; pp. 573;
gd. 591 a.
y j r p - 'creep', pr. 422, *j.
423, inj. 424, impv. 426,
p t 427, impf. 428; a-aor.
508, inj. 510; des. 542,
P t 544; gd. 591 «•
tenant-, inflected, 376.
\tev- 'attend upon', pr. 422,
impv. 426.
\skand- 'leap', pr. 422, sj.
423, impv. 426, pt. 427,
impf. 428; pf. 485; root
aor. 499, inj. 503; intv.
545. 3. 547. impf. 549; PP-
576 a ; inf. 584 b, 587 a.
\skaih- or skambh- 'prop',
pr. 476, pt. 479; pf. 482,
485. P t 493J PP- 575 b ;
inf. 584 b ; gd. 590 a.
tkabhaya- den., impf. 569 f.
\sku- 'tear', pr. 470; intv.
545. 1. 55'-
\ i k r - = k f - 'make', p. 55
note »o.
\ttan- 'thunder', pr. impv.
426, 454; root aor. inj.
503 (or. pr. inj. 452); if-
aor. 529; intv. 545, 2, 547;
cs. 556.
\stabh- or siambh- 'prop', pr.
476, impv. 478, impf. 480;
pf. 485, pt. 492. 493! plup-
495 ; PP- 575 b ; gd. 590 b.
\stu- 'praise', pr. 422, 451,
sj. 423, 452, inj. 424, 452,
opt. 425, 453. >mpv. 454.
pt. 427.455: impf- 456; pf-
4S5, sj. 487. pt- 492. 493;
plup. 495; ¿-aor. 522 (in-
flected), sj. 523, inj. 524;
f t 537. 339; ps- 445. P'-
447. PP- 573; gdv. 579;
inf. 585, 1 0 , 4, 7; gd.
590 b, 591 b.
\stubh- 'praise', pr. 422, impv.
426, pt. 427.
y t i r - 'strew', pr. 470, 476,
sj. 471, inj. 477. imp v -
478, pt. 479, impf. 480; pf.
485, pt. 493; root aor. 499,
sj. 502, inj. 503; j-aor. opt.
525; v-aor. 529; ps. aor.
501; pp. 576 e; inf. 584 a,
585, 4. 588 c.
ystha- 'stand', pr. 422, sj.
423, inj. 424, opt. 425, impv.
426, pt. 427, impf. 428;
pf. 485, pt. 492, 493; root
aor. 498 (inflected), 499,
500, sj. 502, inj. 503, opt.
504, impv. 505, pt. 506;
a-aor. 508; red. aor. 514,
inj. 516; j-aor. inj. 524;
f t 539; cs. 558, aor. 560;
PP- 574. 3; gd- 59« a-
29
45° I - A L L G E M E I N E S UND SPRACHE. 4. VEDIC GRAMMAR. I. S A N S K R I T I N D E X .

\ini- 'bathe', pr. 4 5 1 , i m p r . 5 1 4 , inj. 5 1 6 ; cs. 5 5 7 b ; des. 5 4 2 c i ; cs. aor. 5 6 0 ;

4 5 * . pt- 4 5 5 ; 558; gdv-
581; g d . 5 9 0 b .
\tnik- ' b e moist', c » . 5 5 3 .
\snu- 'distil', pr. i m p * . 4 5 4 . \svaj- 'embrace', pr. 4 2 2 , sj.
Ytfai- 'tee', pf. 4 8 5 , pt. 4 9 3 ;
root aor. 5 0 0 ; cs. 5 5 5 .
\spr- 'win', pr. 4 7 0 , sj. 4 7 1 ,
i m p r . 4 7 2 ; r o o t aor. 4 9 9 , svatavas-, 4 4 , 3 , dat. pi. p. 2 2 6
sj. 5 0 2 , i n j . 5 0 3 , impv. 5 0 5 ;
J aor. 5 2 2 ; inf. 5 8 5 , I ; gd. \svad- and svad- 'sweeten',
5 9 0 b.
\spfdh- 'contend', pr. 4 2 2 ,
pt. 4 2 7 ; pf. 4 8 5 , pt. 4 9 3 ;
plup. 4 9 5 ; root aor. 500, \wan-
pt. 5 0 6 ; inf. 5 8 5 , 1 , 5 8 6 b ;
g d . 5 9 1 a.
\spri- 'touch', pr. 4 3 0 , sj. 4 3 1 , \svap- 'sleep', pr. impv. 4 2 6 ,
inj- 4 3 » . impv. 4 3 4 , impf.
4 3 6 ; pf. sj. 4 8 7 ; red. aor.
sj. 5 1 5 , inj. 5 1 6 ; sa-aor.
5 3 6 ; inf. 5 8 4 b.
\spTh- 'be eager', cs. 5 5 4 , svaydm ' s e l f 4 0 0 , 2 .
opt. 5 5 9 c, g d v . 5 6 1 b, \svar- 'sound', pr. 4 2 2 , sj.
579-
\sphur- 'jerk', pr. 4 3 0 , sj.
4 3 ' » inj. 432. impv. 434,
pt. 435, impf. 4 3 6 .
ysphiirj- 'rumble', pr. 4 2 2 ;
cs. 5 5 4 a.
\sphf- 'jerk', if-aor. inj.
5,3«.
¡mad 'with', prep, with inst.,
625.
\smi- 'smile', pr. 4 2 2 , inj.
4 2 4 . pt- 4 » 7 ; pf- Pt- 493-
\smr- 'remember', pr. sj. 4 3 3 ,
impv. 426.
\syand- ' m o v e on', pr. 4 2 2 ,
impv. 4 2 6 , pt. 4 2 7 ; pf.
4 8 2 b 1, 4 8 5 ; red. aor. 5 1 4 ;
J-aor. 5 2 2 ; intv. 5 4 5 , 3 ;
cs. 5 5 6 a ; pp. 5 7 6 a ; inf.
5 8 4 b, 5 8 5 , 7.
\sras- 'fall', root aor. 66 c 2,
4 9 9 ; a-aor. opt. 5 1 1 ; red.
aor. 5 1 4 ; cs. 5 5 6 a ; g d .
590 b .
sris, 3. s. /-aor. \srj-t 522-
\sridA- 'blunder', pr. 4 2 2 ,
i m p v . 4 2 6 , pt. 4 2 7 , impf.
4 2 8 ; a-aor. inj. 5 1 0 , pt.
512.
\trtv- 'fail', cs. 5 5 4 a a.
\sru- ' f l o w ' , pr. 4 3 2 , opt.
4 2 5 , impv. 4 2 6 , pt. 437.
impf. 4 2 8 ; pf. 4 8 5 ; red. aor.
inf. 5 8 5 , 4 , 5 .
sua- ' o w n ' 4 0 0 , 1 ; 'his' etc.
4 0 1 c.
4 2 3 , inj. 4 2 4 , impv. 4 2 6 ;
pf. 4 8 5 , pt. 4 9 3 ; plup. 4 9 5 ;
inf. 5 8 4 b .
note and p. 2 3 3 .
pr. 4 2 2 , sj. 4 2 3 , impv. 4 2 6 ;
red. aor. inj. 5 1 6 ; cs. 5 5 6 ;
pp. 5 7 3 « -
'sound', if-aor. 529,
i n j . 5 3 i ; i n t v . 545.3. «j-547;
c i . 5 5 6 ; cs. pp. 5 7 5 c.
454, pt- 455: P f - 482 b I,
4 8 5 , pt. 4 9 2 , 4 9 3 ; red. aor.
5 « 4 ; ft. 5 3 7 . 539; cs. 5 5 5 ;
PP- 574; gd- 5 9 ° b .
4 2 3 , impv. 4 2 6 , impf. 4 2 8 ; !
pf. inj. 4 8 8 ; J-aor. 5 2 2 ; cs. I
556. ; 4 8 5 ; root aor. 5 0 0 , i n j . 5 0 3 ;
\svtd- 'sweat', pf. pt. 493;
pp. 5 7 6 a.
\han- 'strike', pr. 4 5 1 , sj. 4 5 2 ,
inj. 4 5 2 , opt. 4 5 3 , impv.
454. Pt- 4 5 5 ! pf- 4 8 5 . «j-
4 8 7 , pt. 4 9 2 ; ft. 5 3 7 , 5 3 9 ,
pt. 5 3 8 ; des. 5 4 2 , sj. 5 4 4 ;
intv. 5 4 5 , 3 , 5 4 6 , 5 4 7 , pt.
5 4 8 , 5 4 8 a ; ps. 4 4 5 , impv.
446, pt. 447. i"»pf- 456;
PP- 5 7 4 . 2 ; g d v . 5 8 1 ; inf.
585. 4. 5 ! g d . 59° b, c,
59« b.
\har~ ' b e gratified', pr. 4 3 9 ,
sj. 4 4 0 , impv. 4 4 1 , pt. 4 4 2 ,
impf. 443.
hastin-, inflected 3 3 3 .
y i . ha- 'leave', pr. 4 5 8 , sj.
459. opt- 459. impv. 4 6 0 ,
pt. 4 6 1 , impf. 4 6 2 ; pf. 4 8 5 ;
s-aor. 5 2 2 , inj. 5 2 4 ; «/-aor.
•nj- 5 3 4 ; ft. 5 3 7 , 5 3 9 ; cs.
p. 3 9 6 note • ; ps. 4 4 5 , impv.
4 4 6 , aor. 5 0 1 ; p p . 5 7 5 b a ,
5 7 6 c ; g d . 5 9 0 a, b, c.
\ 2 . Aa- ' g o forth', pr. 4 5 8 ,
inj. 4 5 9 , impv. 4 6 0 , pt.461,
impf. 4 6 2 ; red. aor. inj.
5 1 6 ; j-aor. 5 2 2 , inj. 5 2 4 ;
g d . 5 9 1 a.
yhas- ' g o emulously', pr. pt.
427-
'impel', pr. 4 7 0 , inj. 4 7 1 ,
impv. 4 7 2 , pt. 4 2 7 , 4 7 3 ;
root aor. 4 9 9 , impv. 5 0 5 ;
pt. 5 0 6 ; a-aor. 5 0 8 ; s-oor.
5 2 2 ; g d v . 5 8 1 ; inf. 5 8 4 a.
\hims- 'injure', pr. 4 2 2 , 4 6 4 ,
i m p v . 4 6 6 , pt. 4 6 7 ; pf. 4 S 5 ;
plup. 4 9 5 ; if-aor. inj. 5 3 1 ;
ps. pt. 4 4 7 ; pp. 5 7 5 a 1;
g d v . 5 8 1 a ; gd. 5 9 0 b.
\hinv- = hi- 'impel', pr. impv.
426.
\hid- 'be hostile', pf. 4 S 2 ,
485, Pt-493; " d . aor. 514;
cs. 5 5 4 a ; pp. 5 7 5 a 3 .
yhu- 'sacrifice', pr. 4 5 1 , 4 5 S ,
sj-459, opt-459. i m p v . 4 6 0 ,
pt. 4 6 1 , impf. 4 6 2 ; ft. 5 3 7 ;
ps. aor. 5 0 1 .
J hu- 'call', pr. 4 2 2 , 4 3 0 , 4 5 1 ,
4 5 8 , inj. 4 2 4 , 4 3 2 , opt. 4 j 3 ,
pt- 427, 4 3 5 , impf. 4 3 6 ; pi".
a-aor. 5 0 8 ; ¿-aor. 5 2 2 ; intv.
545.1. 546.547. impf. 549;
ps. 4 4 5 , pt. 4 4 7 ; pp. 5 7 3 ;
g d v . 5 7 8 , 2 ; inf. 5 8 5 , 4 , 7 .
\l.hf- 'take', 4 2 2 , 4 5 1 , sj.
4 2 3 , opt. 4 2 5 , impv. 4 2 6 ,
pt. 4 2 7 , impf. 4 2 8 ; pf. 4 8 5 ;
/-aor. 5 2 2 ; des. 5 4 2 ; inf.
5 8 5 . « ; gd- 591 b.
V'2. hf- 'be angry', pr. 4 7 6 ,
inj- 477. impv. 4 7 8 , pt.
479-
\ h f f - 'be excited', pr. 4 2 2 ,
4 3 9 . impv. 4 2 6 , pt. 4 2 7 ;
pt. pt. 4 9 3 ; intv. 5 4 5 , 2 ,
547. P<- 548; cs. 5 5 3 c ; pp.
575 b.
\ h t f - 'whinney', pr. pt. 4 2 7 .
\hnu- 'hide', pr. 4 5 1 ; gdv.
579-
\hri- ' b e ashamed', root aor.
pt. 5 0 6 .
\hva- 'call', pr. 439. SJ- 4 4 ° .
opt. 4 4 0 , impv. 4 4 1 , pt.
4 4 2 , impf. 443-
\ k v f - 'be or make crooked',
pr. 4 2 2 , 4 7 6 , sj. 4 5 9 , inj.
4 5 9 ; pf- 4 8 5 . pt- 4 9 3 ;
red. aor. 5 1 4 , inj. 5 1 6 ;
j-aor. inj. 5 2 4 ; pp. 5 7 3 a.
 II. GENERAL INDEX
Ablative: ling. masc. formed the case-ending of the abl. 330 b, 334 «. 336 «. 338,
in two, neater in three , 644 b, of the acc. 642, 339». 3 4 i a , 343 a, 344
;
ways from der. «-stems 389. 642 a, 642 d /}, of the dat. (p. 230 note «), 345, 347,
Accusative: pi. masc. and 644 a, of the gen. 644 c, 349 «. 351«. 354 a, 356,
fem. formed in two ways of the instr. 372 (p. 257), 363, 380 a.
from der. «-stems 389; 374 (p. 264), 374 (f. pi. Causative stem: nominal deri-
appositional 642 b; cognate p. 267), of the loc. 643, vatives in -ana, - i f , -a, «alu,
642 a ; of direction 642 c; 644 d, of the nom. 641. -ifnu, -iinu, -« 561 e; form-
of distance and time 642 d. Alternative nominal stems ed with suffix -paya 558,
Accentuation 83 — i l l ; aorist 253, 318 a 4, 328 c, 332 a. the f> of which «onetime*
505 (root aor.), 507 (a-aor.\ Amredita compounds 257, 6, retained in the reduplicated
2 8
535 (so-aor.); augment 96; 58, 319 (P- i9 note S); aorist 513 a 2.
causative 552; denomina- accentuation of 88; Sandhi Cerebralization: of«, in verbal
tive 562; double 85 a, 91 in 57 b 7, 78, I c. forms after the r of pre-
(p. 96), 105 a; lack of 85b; Anudstta accent 83, 84. positions 47 A a; after r, r,
irregular monosyllabic 94, Anunlsika for final « 77 1 b, f, in the second member of
I a, 368 n. '4 frad. ¿-stems), 77. 2 <1- nominal compounds 47 A b,
362 n. 7 (ray-), 364 c (dyav-, Anusvlra for m 75, 2, 3, for n 81, 2 e; in a following word
dy*-), 376. P- 272 n. «> M 77, 2 a b c; in the intensive 47 A c; of initial t 78, 2 b.
istrt-); normal nominal384l> reduplicative syllable 60b. Cerebrals: their origin 42,
(der. «-stems), 382 b (radical Acristic i : added to present unexplained 43 c, 47 B e ;
»-stems); shift of 22, 29 stem 521 a 2; lost 520 a 4, Prakritie 42 b, 47 B; re-
38 d, 58 d, 107 (case-forms 529 a. presenting old palatals 43;
as adverbs), 299, 319, and Archaic Sandhi in compounds / for final f 66 b 6 /J, / and 4
389 (inst. as adv.), 311 Si. for / 42 d; f for palatal s
(participles as substantives), Aspirates: two in the same 56-
314 (nom. neut. of parti- syllable avoided 32, 40 a. Compounds: characteristic
ciples as adv.), 374 (inst. ad- Assimilation: of s 53, 57, 78; features 241, consisting of
verbs p. 264 mid.), p. 273 n. 1 of final consonants 74; of phrases 293,3, gender 241 a,
(fem. of a-stems), 94, 2—4 final / to / and palatals 76, Sandhi 81, suffixes 256,
(oxytones), 377,3 a and 378 1, 2; of final media to tmesis p. 143 (bottom), 260;
(der. i-stems), 380 (der. ;- following nasal 74 a; final first member consisting of
stems), 388 c (der. «-stems\ m to following mutes 75,2, adverbs 247, 274 b, 278 c,
94, I (monosyllabic stems), to y l v 7S.4- 289 b, nouns with c u e -
334 b (a>), 364 c (Jiv-), Attraction with the dative and endings 242, 248, 275, 277,
93 a a (cardinals); systems ablative infinitive 583, 587. 278 a, 280, 287, 355 (p. 242
of 84. Augment 413; lengthened note '), 368 (p. 252 notes
Adjectives: fem. of 299 (anc- 413; dropped 413 b; irre- 2. 3. 13. p. »S3 note'), par-
stems), 326 a n. 1 .¡(««-stems), gular Sandhi of 413 a. tides 251, 278 c, 284, 289 c,
330a (van-stems), 332 note9 prepositions 249,274 a, 278d,
(>«-stems),345 (^¿mj-stems), Breathing <4: represents sonant 283,298a, 292,1, alternative
347 (»¿»/x-stemsj, 375 a, aspirates, guttural, palatal, stems 244, 245, present
p. 270 (j'o-stems), 377, I cerebral, dental, labial 58; stems 292, 2 a, b; last
(various stems), 3 8 8 ^ («- when final becomes k or t member consisting of alter-
stems). 66 b 6 351 b. native stems 253, or present
Adverbs: two classes 626; stems 272.
formed from nouns 442 a, Case-endings, normal 295 c. Conjugation: irregularities of
643 a, 643 b, from pronouns Case-forms: as adverbs (treat- the o-class 421 a, of the
642 d ft 643 c, from nume- ed in the order of the cases) ¿-class 429 a, of the ya-
rals 634; multiplicative 638; 641—644; strong and weak class 438, of the yd-cl»st
miscellaneous 640; of man- 295 297, 298, 301, 313, (passive) 444 a, of the root
ner 632; of time 639; with 3«5. 323. 325. 326b, 328b, das* 450 a, of the redu-
20*
452 L AIXGKHEINXS UND SPRACHE. 4. V E D I C GRAMMAR.

plicated class 457 a, of the
infixing nasal class 463,1,
of the »«-class 469 a, of
the »¿-class 47 s a.
Consonants lost: 81, 2 a, in
final group 66 c, 521 a ;
mute between nasal and
mute 62, 3 c ; t between
two consonants 62, 3 b ( t
between two motet 355
note 9, 520 a 4, m or n in
theinst. ot-man items 328b.
Contraction: in secondary
Sandhi 70, 3 ; in the per-
fect 483 a 2 ; in declension
344 (p- 229. 230. 232.. 233).
374 (gen. pL of kanya).
Dative: sing. masc. formed
in two, neut. in three ways,
in der. u- stems 389.
Denominative: with causative
accent 563; formed from
stems in -a 563, in -a 564,
in -/ 565, in -u 566, in -o
566 a, in consonants 567;
formed without a suffix
568; inflexion 569; parti-
ciples 569 e.
Dentals: cerebralized 42 a, c,
47 A; replace cerebral and
labial 44 a 3 t cerebra-
lized 57, palatalized 53 a I,
3, 54, changed to / 44 a,
522, unchanged before r
or r 57. 1 2
a a, un-
changed in Amre4>ta com-
pounds 57, 2 b r ; n replaces
m 4 6 6 6 , 4 a ; « before
p 77, 2 a, before I 77, 2 e.
Dissimilation 43 b I, b 2 p. J5
note 351 notes 5 and 6,
469a i , 545, 2 a (p. 391 top).
Dissyllabic pronunciation
363^ a {gim etc.), 364 a
(dyam\ 372 (gen. pi. of Gradation of vowels 51; in
a-stems).
Doubling of final n 77.
Dravidian influence 42.
Dvandvas: accentuation 262, Gu$a 22; in i-itemi 380; in
267 note 7; gender 264,
266; plural 265; singular
266.
Elision: of final a before e
and 0 70, 2 a, after e and
0 72, of a before ending
of gen. loc. du. 372 (p.
260 top); of final m jo, Gutturals: interchange with
3 b, 7s, followed by con-
traction 372 notes * and 4
(p. 256): o f y and v 72, I b,
r
73; °f 79» I b ; of* 78, I b.
Enclitics 85 b 1.
Endings: in declension 295c,
abnormal fern. loc. -in, Hiatus 67, 69 a, b, c (duals),
gen. -at, d a t -at 374, 385;
in conjugation, -ana 2. sing,
impv. 475, 3, -am 3. sing,
impv. mid. 454, -1 for ta
3. sing. red. aor. p. 376
(top), -iron 494, 495, 529, Hybrid form 348 (N. pi. pf.
•ur 3. pi. 456, 494, 499,
503, -au 1. 3. sing. pf.
484, 485, -e 3. sing. mid. Imperative: endings of the 2.
for -te 422, 430, 451, 458,
464, 476, 546, -tana 2. pi. Infinitive: acc. from roots
impv. 426, 441, 454, 472,
47^) 505, -tat impv. 418 b,
436. 434» 44«. 454. 460.
472,478,518.547.559d,
523, -dhi 2. sing. impv. 418 a,
454,58,2d, -diva 2. pi. mid.
426, -rata 3. pi. m i d . 425,
•raiam a n d -ram 3. pi.
impv. 454, 490, -rale 3. pi.
pr. mid. 451, -ran 3. pi.
impf. and plnp. 456, 494,
•ranta 3. pL plup. 495,
-ram 3. pi. plup. 495, root Insertion : of 7 in pr. 450 a 3,
a o r . 500, -rirt 3. pL pf.
mid. 484, 4 a, 485, -re 3.
pi. mid. pr. 451, 469 a 6,
470, pf. 484, 3, 4, -hi 2.
ting. impv. 418 a, 454.
Exclamations 659 a.
Foreign words 42, 45 b ;
47 B e ; 52 b g ; 57, i f t y.
Future participles 538.
Genitive: sing. m. formed in
two, n. in three ways, in Interchange: of vowel and
derivative «-stems 389.
Gerund: in -tvi 590 a ; in -tva
5 9 0 b ; in -tvaya 590 c ; in
-yi and -tyi 591.
Gerundive: in •ya 578; in
-ayya 579; in -enya 5 8 0 ;
in -tva 581, in -tavya 581 a ; JihvamOlTya for final 1 78, 2c.
in -anTya 581 b .
compounds 243, 255; in
dissyllabic bases 27 b ; in
suffixes 27 c.
a-stems 388; in the pr.
stem. 421, 451. 457. 469»
in the pf. 483; in the root
aor. ps. 501; in the a-aor.
507 a ; in the .r-aor. 520,
523, 524; in the it wax.
528; in the cs. 553, 557;
in the gdv. 578.
palatals, labials, and f 34;
with palatals 36 a, 37, 38,
39, 41. b 2, 43 a 4, 43 b 2.
Haplology 64, 499 (p. 367
note 5).
70, l b , c ( a + « or/-), p.251»
(N. sing. f. ¿-stems), 372
(N. A. n. du. and I . pi.
a-stems), 374 a, b (N. sing,
and L. pi. ¿-stems).
pt.).
3. sing. 418.
586 a, from verbal nouns
in -tu 586 b ; dat. 368, in
•dhyai from causatives 561c,
from roots 584, from verbal
nouns in as, •», -ti, -tu,
•lava, -tya, •dhya, -man,
•van 585; abl. gen., from
roots 587 a, from verbal
nouns in -tu 587 b ; loc.,
from roots 588 a, from
stem in -tar 588 b, from
stems in -san 588 c.
451, 456, in plup. 495, in
¿-aor. 521 a I, 522, in intv.
546, in reduplicative syllable
545; of y between vowels
372; of sibilants 77, 2 a b c ;
of I 77, 2 f.
Instrumental: sing. m. n.
formed in two ways in der.
a-stems 372 (also pi.), f. in
der. ¿-stems 374, m. n. in
der. «-stems 389, m. f. in
der. i-stems 381.
consonant 50 b, 81 e, 469
a 2, 542 b, 573 a ; of r a n d
I 52 a.
Interjections 659; hih com-
pounded with ykf- 653.
Labials 45: b often in words
of foreign origin 45 b,
interchanges with v 45 a 3,
in place of m 45 a 5.
Lengthening of vowels 81,
1 d, 81, 2 f, 82 b, 224 a,
255 b. 3 ' 3 . 3«5. 318 a 2,
319 a, 329 (N. A. sing, n.),
344 (N. sing.), 354 (N.sing.),
360 (L. sing.), 372 (I. sing.),
513 a (red. aor.), 520 a 2
(s-aor.), 554 and 555 (csA
563 a, 565 and 566 (den.).
Locative: sing. m. formed in
two ways, f. in four ways,
in der. i-stems 381, m. in
two way*, n. in three ways
in der. »-stems 389; San-
dhi of locatives in •> and
•u 71, 2 b.
Lost of nasal in pf. 483 a 4;

i n a - a o r . 5 0 7 ; in x-aor. P r e p o s i t i o n s :
5 2 0 a 3 ; in p p . 574, 2.
M e t a t h e s i s 50 b, 51 c, 6 3 ; in
q u a n t i t y (asthas, adat etc.)
507 a 4 .
n- declension: influence on
t h e d e r . ¿-declension 3 8 0 d ,
o n t h e d e r . a - d e c l e n s i o n 371.
N a s a l i z a t i o n : of Towels 66, I,
70, 1 b , 7 0 , 2 b, 372 n o t e 5
(p. 256), p. 258 n o t e 3 a n d
n o t e 5; of s e m i v o w e l s 75,
of / 77, 2 e.
N o m i n a l s t e m s , o b s o l e t e , pre-
s e r v e d in a d v e r b s 642 d a.
N o m i n a t i v e : pi. f o r m e d in
t w o w a y s , in d e r . «-de-
c l e n s i o n 372, in d e r . ¿ - d e -
c l e n s i o n , 374, in d e r . »'-de-
c l e n s i o n 381, in d e r . «-de-
c l e n s i o n 389.
O n o m a t o p o e t i c w o r d s 52 f,
6 5 9 b ; in c o m p o u n d s 251, S a m p r a s i r a i j a
5. 6SO.
P a l a t a l s : t w o s e r i e s 3 5 ; n e w S a n d h i 31, 2, 3 8 c, 4 6 d a ,
p a l a t a l s 36, 37, 3 8 ; old
p a l a t a l s 4 0 (ch), 41 ( y ) ;
new palatals revert
g u t t u r a l s , in pf. 4 8 2 d 2,
4 9 2 , 4 9 5 , in r o o t a o r .
500 n o t e '9 (p. 367), i n d e s .
5 4 2 c a ; cbecomesk 66b 2;
j b e c o m e s k or / 6 6 b 2 ;
i r e p l a c e s s 54 a, b e c o m e s S e m i v o w e l s y a n d v p r o n o u n -
k b e f o r e s 54 b, 349 b , be-
c o m e s f b e f o r e t th 42 a,
56 a, b e c o m e s 4 b e f o r e bh
349 b .
Parallelism, form d u e to,
327 ( p . 206 n o t e 3), 3 5 4 c ,
nakta N. A . d u . 3 7 a .
Particles: three groups 645;
a-, sa-, ¡¿us-, su- a s first
members of compounds
655-658.
Participial forms compounded
w i t h s u b s t a n t i v e s u s e d ad-
v e r b i a l l y 654.
Passive: present system 444
— 4 4 8 ; aorist 501; p a s t S h o r t e n i n g of v o w e l s 81, 2 g
p a r t i c i p l e f o r m e d w i t h -ta
5 7 2 — 5 7 5 , w i t h -na 576.
P e r f e c t : i r r e g u l a r i t i e s in t h e
root 483 a ; subjunctive487,
injunctive 488, optative
4 8 9 , i m p e r a t i v e 490.
P r a g t h y a v o w e l s : f , u 69 c,
71, 2; e 72, 2, 3 7 4 (du. f.
of d-stems), 0 72, 3.
P r a k r i t i c w o r d s 4 2 b , 4 7 B.
P r e c a t i v e 417, 489, 504, 511,
S i 7 . 5*5.
II. GENERAL INDEX.
two classes
592; adverbial, not com-
p o u n d e d w i t h v e r b s 593»
adnominal, used with cases,
5 9 4 ; a c c e n t u a t i o n 102, 103,
105, n o (p. 107).
P r o n o m i n a l d e c l e n s i o n : in-
fluence o n n o m i n a l 371.
R e d u c t i o n of final a to >26,
4 8 3 b, 4 8 4 a I, of m e d i a l
a t o i 507 a I, 574, 3, 576 c.
Reduplicated aorist connected
with t h e c a u s a t i v e 513.
R e d u p l i c a t i o n 37 e ; aorist
5 1 3 ; r h y t h m i c r u l e 513 a ;
intensive 60b, 5 4 5 ; p e r f e c t
62, 482, v o w e l l e n g t h e n e d
482, irregular 4 8 2 d , sylla-
b l e an- 482 c a, syllable
lost 482 e, r h y t h m i c rule
484 a 4 note n o t e ».
R h o t a c i s m 5 1 a , 52 a.
22, 23, 24,
326 b, 482 b 1, 4 8 3 a I , (cs.)
5 5 4 ; (pp ) 574- 575-
47 A ; duplicate forms
67 b ; initial » cerebra-
to
lized 47 A c ; 5 4 a (J f o r
•f), 57 (f f o r s), S8 »nd
8 0 b (/< a s p i r a t e d ) , 59 a n d
74 n o t e s ( I f o r d), 62(Sv),
62, I ifinal g r o u p of con-
sonants).
c e d as iy a n d uv 4 8 a,
w i t h a syllabic v a l u e 4 8 b,
lost 6 2 ; y i n s e r t e d b e -
t w e e n v o w e l s 4 9 a, inter-
changes with v 49 c; v
interchanges with b and y
50 a ; final r 6 6 , 5, indi-
c a t e d in t h e Padap&tha
66 b n o t e I 0 , b e c o m e s i o r
s 79, 2 b, c, l o s t 62, 4 ; I
gradually increases at the
cost of r 52 a, in f o r e i g n
w o r d s 52 g, I f o r <i in t h e
l a t e r Sarnhitas 52 d, f o r d
52 e, final / 6 6 b 5 n o t e 9.
(a, «', 70, l b a n d p. 2 5 9
n o t e 7 [a b e f o r e 327 (a
in uw stems), 352 (-sah-\
3 6 0 (du. of •tar stems),
362 b (ray-), 3 6 9 (radical
a), 372 (dual a), 3 7 8 ( d u a l
T), p . 277 n o t e 4 (tart-), 381
( i of n. pi.).
Sibilant l o s t : initial a n d final J
a n d j 62, 2, 78 e 2 , 3 , 8 1 , 2 a
—c; f and s between mutes
6 2 , 3 , 355 n o t e 9; s b e f o r e
4S3
v o i c e d d e n t a l 62, 4 b , ce-
r e b r a l i z e d b e f o r e l o s s 62,
4 c ; p a l a t a l s p i r a n t (*)
b e f o r e d, dh 6 2 , 4 < i
Strong f o r m s : in declension
2 9 5 d ; in c o n j u g a t i o n 449,
4 8 3 . 4 9 4 , 4 9 8 , 5 ° l , 5 2 °> S28.
Subjunctive 414.
Suffixes: primary nominal
113 a (list); s e c o n d a r y n o -
m i n a l 190 (list); a d v e r b i a l
627—640.
S u p p l e m e n t a r y s t e m s in de-
c l e n s i o n 3 1 5 , 3 2 6 c, 3 3 0 c,
3 3 9 b , 3 4 3 b , 357» 3 6 2 a.
Svarita accent 83, 8 4 ; in
S a n d h i 108.
S y n c o p e 2 5 , 1 — 3 , 3 2 4 (-han-),
3»S. 3 2 7 , 3 2 8 b ; 4 8 3 * 3
(pf.), 5 1 3 a 4 (red. aor.),
542 c 2 (des.), 5 4 8 a (intv.).
T r a n s f e r f o r m s : in d e c l e n s i o n
3 1 3 n o t e s , 3 1 5 , 3 1 6 ( p . 196
n o t e 4), 317 n o t e 7, n o t e
3 1 8 a 5, 326 d , 3 3 0 d, 3 3 4 c,
3 1 9 c , 3 4 1 b , 3 4 3 c, 349 c,
351c, 354b, 364b, 375»«.
3 7 8 (p. 275 n o t e s a n d 276
b o t t o m ) , 3 8 0 c, 3 8 1 (f. D .
A b . G . L . sing.), 3 8 4 c,
3 8 8 d, 3 8 9 (G. s i n g , m . ,
I. du.); in conjugation:
4 2 1 a 4, 4 2 9 * 3 , 4 , 4 5 7 » 8 ,
463,2, 4 6 9 a 7 , 4 7 5 * 4 . 4 9 5 .
4 9 9 n o t e " (p. 367), 5 ° 3 , » 4
(a-aor.).
Transfer stems in compounds
254.
U d a t t a accent 83, 84.
Unreduplicated perfect forms
4 8 2 e, 4 9 2 b .
U p l d h m O n l y a f o r final ¿ 7 8 , 1 c
V i s a r j a n l y a f o r final d e n t a l s
6 6 , 6 a , 7 8 , 1 c — e ; f o r final
r 79, 2 a, d .
Vocative: accentuation 93,109;
f o r m e d w i t h -mas a n d -vas
f r o m - m a n t , -mams a n d -vant
s t e m s 315, 3 1 6 , 340, w i t h
-vas f r o m -van a n d -vams
s t e m s 331, 348, w i t h -yas
f r o m -yams stems 346;
final v o w e l g u n a t e d in »-
s t e m s 381, a n d « - s t e m « 389.
V o w e l s : e f o r o r i g i n a l as
15 b 1, 6 2 , 4 b ; l o s t 25,
2 6 a, 5 6 3 c, 564 a .
V f d d h i 22 a , 25 B, 4 8 3 (pf.),
5 0 1 (ps. aor.), 5 2 0 (i-aor.),
5 2 4 . 528, 557 (cs.). 5 7 8 , 2
(gdv-).
W e a k forms for strong 348.
 CONTENTS.
INTRODUCTION . . . . page 1—5 IV. N O M I N A L S T E M F O R M A T I O N
General scope of this work I. — Verbal
Authenticity of t h e Texts 2.
I. P H O N O L O G Y . . . . page 5 - 5 9
Ancient pronunciation 3. — T h e sounds
of the Vedic Language 4. — I. T h e simple
V o w e l s 6—14. — 2. T h e Diphthongs 15 —
16. — L e n g t h e n i n g of Vowels 17. — Loss
of Vowels 18. — Contraction 19. — Hiatus
ao. — Vowel Gradation 22—29. — T h e V. C O M P O U N D S . .
C o n s o n a n t s 30—47: Doubling of Con-
sonants 30. — Modes of Articulation 31. —
Loss of Aspiration 32. — Aspirates in con-
tact with other Mutes 33. — T h e five
Classes of Mutes 34—45: 1. Gutturals 34. —
2. Palatals 35—38. — Irregular Palatalization
39. — Old Palatals 4 0 — 4 1 . — 3. Cerebrals
42—43. — 4. Dentals 44. — 5. Labials
45. — Nasals 46. — Cerebral n 47. —
S e m i v o w e l s 48—52. — Sibilants 53—57. — VI. D E C L E N S I O N . . . p a g e 178—312.
T h e Breathing h 58. — Cerebral I 59. —
AnusvSra and A n u n i s i k a 60. — Voiceless
Spirants 6 t . — Loss of Consonants 62. —
Metathesis 63. — Syllable 64.
II. E U P H O N I C COMBINATION (SANDHI)
page 5 9 - 7 6 - •tit, -it, -ut and s e c o n d a r y - / 309—310. —
Nature of Vedic Sandhi 65. — Finals in
p a u s l 66. — Rules of Sandhi 67. —
L e n g t h e n i n g of Final Vowels 68. — Con-
traction of Similar Vowels 69. — Con-
traction of J with Dissimilar Vowels 70. —
Final f and u before Dissimilar Vowels
71. — Final e and 0 72. — T h e Diphthongs
• at and au 73. — Sandhi of Consonants
74. — Sandhi of Final » » 7 5 ; of Final t
76; of Final n 7 7 ; o f F i n a l i 7 8 ; of Final 339—340, in Derivative -is and -us 341 —
r 79. — Initial Aspiration 80. — Sandhi
of Compounds 81. — Kxtension of Kx'ernal
to Internal Sandhi 82.
III. A C C E N T page 76-107
General Character of the Vedic Accent
83. — Methods of Marking the Accent
84. — Normal Accent, Double Accent,
Lack of Accent 85. — 1. Accentuation of
Nominal Stems 86. — 2. Accentuation of
Compounds 8 7 : of Iteratives 88; of Go-
verning Compounds 8 9 ; of Possessives 9 0 ;
of Determinatives 9 1 ; of Copulatives 92. —
3. Accent in Declension 93—94. — 4. Verbal
Accent 95—101. — 5. Accent of Nominal
Verb f o r m s 102—107. — 6. Accent in Sandhi
to8. — 7. Sentence Accent 109—111.
p a g e 107—143.
Primary and Secondary Suffixes 112. —
1. P r i m a r y Nominal D e r i v a t i o n : Action
Nouns and Agent Nouns 113. — 1. Pri-
mary N o m i n a l Suffixes 114—189. —
2. S e c o n d a r y Nominal Derivation: F o r m
and Meaning 190. — Secondary N o m i n a l
Suffixes 191 — 240.
. page 1 4 3 - 1 7 8
F o r m of C o m p o u n d s 241. — A. First Mem-
b e r of C o m p o u n d s 242—251. — B. L a s t
Member of Compounds 252—256. — Classi-
fication of C o m p o u n d s 2 5 7 : 1. Iteratives
2 j 8 . — 2. Copulatives (Dvandvas) 259—
268. — 3. Determinatives 269—284. —
4. Possessives (Bahuvrlhis) 285—291. —
5. G o v e r n i n g Compounds 292. — 6. Syn-
tactical Compounds 293.
General Character 294. — I. NOUNS 295.
A. Consonant Stems 296—365. — t. Pala-
tal Stems 297—303. — a. Cerebral Stems
304. — 3 . Dental Stems 3 0 s — 3 3 3 : Stems
in -t 306—308. — Derivate Stems in -vat,
Participial S t e m s in -at and -ant 311 —314. —
Stems in -mant and •vant 315—316. —
Stems in R a d i c a l -th 317. — Stems in -d
318—320. — Stems in -dh 321—322. —
Stems in Radical -n 323—324. — Deri-
vative S t e m s in -an, -man, -van 325—331. —
Stems in -in, -min, -vin 332—333. —
4. Labial Stems 334—338. — 5. Stems in
Sibilants 3 3 9 — 3 5 0 : in Radical -s and
342, in Derivative -as 343—344, in -yarns
345—346, in -vims 347—348, in Radical
-s 349—350. — 6. Stems in Radical h
351—352. — 7. Stems in Semivowels
353—365: in R a d i c a l - r 354—-355, in Deri-
vative -ar a n d -tar 356—360, in -y (-ay) and
-v{-av and -äv) 361 — 3 6 5 . — B. Vowel Stems
366—389. — 1 a. Stems in Radical -ä 367—
368. — 1 b. Stems in Radical -a 369—370.—
2 a. S t e m s in Derivative -a 371—372. —
2 b. Stems in Derivative -5 373—374. —
3 a. S t e m s in Radical -» 375—376. —
3 b. S t e m s in Derivative -i 377—378. —
4 a. S t e m s in Radical -1 379. — 4 b. Stems
in Derivative -i 380—381. — 5 a. Radical
-« stems 382—383. — 5 b. Derivative
456 L AIXGEMEINES UND SPRACHE.
- u s t e m s 3 8 4 — 3 8 5 . — 6 a . R a d i c a l -u
s t e i n s 3 8 6 — 3 8 7 . — 6 b . D e r i v a t i v e -u
stems 388—389.
I I . PRONOUNS 3 9 0 — 4 0 3 : 1. P e r s o n a l 3 9 1 . —
a. D e m o n s t r a t i v e 392—396. — 3. Inter-
r o g a t i v e 3 9 7 . — 4. R e l a t i v e 398. — 5. I n -
definite 399. — 6. Reflexive 400. —
7. Possessive 401. — 8. Pronominal Deri-
vatives a n d C o m p o n n d s 402. — 9. Pro-
nominal Adjectives 403.
I I I . NUMERALS 4 0 4 — 4 0 9 . — A . C a r d i n a l s
4 0 5 — 4 0 7 . — B . O r d i n a l s 4 0 8 . — C . Nu-
m e r a l Derivatives 409.
VII. T H E V E R B . . . page 312—414
G e n e r a l C h a r a c t e r i s t i c s 4 1 0 . — A . THE
FINITE VERB 4 1 1 — 5 7 0 . — P e r s o n a l E n d i n g s
4 1 2 . — T h e A u g m e n t 413. — F o r m a t i o n
of t h e M o o d s : S u b j u n c t i v e 4 1 4 , I n j u n c t i v e
415, Optative 416, Precative 417, I m p e r a -
tive 418.
L T H E PRESENT SYSTEM 4 1 9 — 4 8 0 . —
C h a r a c t e r i s t i c s 4 1 9 . — a . F i r s t or « - C o n -
j u g a t i o n 4 2 0 — 4 4 8 : Characteristics 420. —
I . T h e R a d i c a l l y a c c e n t e d a - C l a s s (bhava-)
4 2 1 — 4 2 8 . — a. T h e Suffixally a c c e n t e d
¿ - C l a s s (tuda-) 4 2 9 — 4 3 6 . — 3 . T h e ya-
C l a s s 4 3 7 : A . T h e R a d i c a l l y a c c e n t e d ya-
Class 4 3 8 - 4 4 3 . — B . T h e Suffixally
a c c e n t e d > a - C l a s s (Passive) 4 4 4 — 4 4 8 .
b . T h e S e c o n d or G r a d e d C o n j u g a t i o n
4 4 9 — 4 8 0 . — a 1. T h e R o o t Class 4 5 0 —
4 5 6 . — a a. T h e R e d u p l i c a t i n g Class 4 5 7 —
4 6 2 . — ft 1. T h e I n f i x i n g N a s a l Class 4 6 3 —
4 6 8 . — ft a . T h e » « - C l a s s 4 6 9 — 4 7 4 . —
P 3. T h e n J - C l a s s 4 7 5 — 4 8 0 .
I I . THE PERFECT SYSTEM 4 8 1 — 4 9 6 . —
C h a r a c t e r i s t i c s 4 8 1 . — 1. T h e R e d u p l i c a -
t i v e S y l l a b l e 4 8 2 . — a. T h e R o o t 4 8 3 . —
3. T h e E n d i n g s 484. — Perfect Indicative
4 8 5 . — M o o d s of t h e P e r f e c t 4 8 6 — 4 9 0 . —
Perfect Participle 4 9 1 — 4 9 3 . — Pluperfect
494—495. — Periphrastic Perfect 496.
The printing was commenced in May, 1907, and
afterwards delayed by the death of the editor
Prof. Kielhorn.
4. VEDIC GRAMMAR. CONTENTS.
I I I . THE AORIST SYSTEM 4 9 7 — 5 3 6 - —
C h a r a c t e r i s t i c s 4 9 7 . — 1. S i m p l e A o r i s t :
A. R o o t Aorist 498—506; B. a-Aorist 507—
512. — a. R e d u p l i c a t e d A o r i s t 5 1 3 — 5 1 8 . —
3 . S i g m a t i c A o r i s t 5 1 9 : A . 1. T h e / - A o r i s t
5 2 0 — 5 2 7 . — A . a. T h e »'/-Aorist 5 2 8 —
533. — A . 3. T h e ¿ / - A o r i s t 534. — B . T h e
xa-Aorist 535—536.
I V . THE FUTURE SYSTEM 5 3 7 — 5 4 0 . —
F o r m a t i o n of t h e S t e m 537. — S u b j u n c t i v e ,
C o n d i t i o n a l , P a r t i c i p l e s 538. — I n d i c a t i v e
539. — P e r i p h r a s t i c F u t u r e 540.
V . SECONDARY CONJUGATION 5 4 1 — 5 7 0 . —
1. D e s i d e r a t i v e 5 4 2 — 5 4 4 . — a . I n t e n s i v e
5 4 5 — S S 1 - — 3- C a u s a t i v e 5 5 2 — 5 6 1 . —
4. D e n o m i n a t i v e 5 6 2 — 5 7 0 .
B . NOMINAL VERB FORMS 5 7 1 — 5 9 1 . —
Characteristics 571. — a. Past Passive
Participles 572—576. — b. Future Passive
P a r t i c i p l e s ( G e r u n d i v e s ) 5 7 7 — 5 8 1 . — c . In-
finitive 5 8 2 — 5 8 8 : 1. D a t i v e I n f i n i t i v e
5 8 3 — 5 8 5 . — 2. A c c u s a t i v e I n f i n i t i v e 5 8 6 . —
3. A b l a t i v e - G e n i t i v e I n f i n i t i v e 587. —
4. L o c a t i v e I n f i n i t i v e 588. — d . G e r u n d
589-591.
VIII. INDECLINABLES . page 4 1 4 - 4 3 2 .
1. P r e p o s i t i o n s 5 9 2 — 6 2 5 : A . A d v e r b i a l
P r e p o s i t i o n s 5 9 3 — 6 0 8 . — B. A d n o m i n a l
Prepositions 609—625.
a. A d v e r b s 6 2 6 — 6 4 4 : A . A d v e r b i a l S u f f i x e s
(in a l p h a b e t i c a l o r d e r ) 6 2 7 — 6 4 0 . — B. A d -
v e r b i a l C a s e - f o r m s (in t h e o r d e r of t h e
cases) 641—644.
3. P a r t i c l e s 6 4 5 — 6 5 8 : e m p h a t i c 6 4 6 , c o n -
junctional 647, negative 648. — a. Ad-
verbial W o r d s in Compounds 649—658.
4. I n t e r j e c t i o n s 6 5 9 .
ADDENDA AND CORRIGENDA . . page 433
L I S T OF ABBREVIATIONS 436
SANSKRIT INDEX » 437
G E N E R A L INDEX 451
T A B L E OF CONTENTS 455